Codals, et al.

[codalsetal]

Appendix of Forms

2. Unless otherwise indicated, each pleading, motion or other paper should have the following caption and title:

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES

IN THE COURT OF FIRST INSTANCE OF _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (Name of province)

or

IN THE JUSTICE OF THE PEACE COURT OF _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

(Name of municipality)

A. B., plaintiff versus Case Number _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_ C. D., defendant

or

In the Matter of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

(When the case is a special proceeding)

Case Number _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

3. Each pleading, motion or other paper is to be signed by at least one attorney of record in his individual name, followed by his address. If a party is not represented by an attorney, the signature and address of the party are required in place of those of the attorney.

Form 1. — COMPLAINT FOR EJECTMENT.

Plaintiff alleges that defendant has unlawfully turned him but of possession (or unlawfully withholds from him the possession, as the case may be) of certain lands and building (here describe the premises), situated in the municipality of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Wherefore, he prays that he be restored to the possession of said premises, with damages and costs.

Form 2. — SUMMONS.

To _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, defendant.

You are hereby summoned and required to file and serve your answer to the complaint copy of which is here with served upon you, within fifteen (15) days after service hereof exclusive of the day of service. If you fail to do so, judgment by default will be taken against you for the relief demanded in the complaint.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Clerk,

Court of First Instance of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Form 3. — ANSWER WITH DEFENSES.

FIRST DEFENSE

The complaint fails to state a claim against defendant upon which relief can be granted.

SECOND DEFENSE

If defendant is indebted to plaintiffs for the goods mentioned in the complaint, he is indebted to them jointly with G. H. G. H. is alive; is a resident of the City of Manila, is subject to the jurisdiction of this court, as to both service of process and venue.

THIRD DEFENSE

Defendant admits the allegations contained in paragraphs 1 and 4 of the complaint; alleges that he is without knowledge or information sufficient to form a belief as to the truth of the allegations contained in paragraph 2 of the complaint; and denies the allegation contained, in paragraph 3, the true facts being the following (here set out the facts in support of denial).

Form.4. — ANSWER WITH COUNTERCLAIM AND CROSS-CLAIM.

Defendant admits the allegations contained in paragraphs 1 and 2 of the complaint, and, as

COUNTERCLAIM

(Here set forth any claim as counterclaim in the same manner in which a claim is pleaded in a complaint), and, as

CROSS-CLAIM

(Here set forth any claim constituting the cross-claim against the defendant M. N. in the same manner in which a claim, is pleaded in a complaint.)

Form 5. — ANSWER WITH COUNTERCLAIM FOR INTERPLEADER

DEFENSES

Defendant admits the allegations stated in paragraph 1 of the complaint; and denies the allegations stated in paragraph 2 to the extent set forth in the counterclaim herein.

COUNTERCLAIM FOR INTERPLEADER

Defendant received the sum of ten thousand pesos as a deposit from E. F.

Plaintiff has demanded the payment of such deposit to him by virtue of an assignment of it which he claims to have received from E. F.

E. F. has notified the defendant that he claims such deposit, that the purported assignment is not valid, and that he holds the defendant responsible for the deposit.

Wherefore, defendant demands:

(a) That the court order E. F. to be made a party de­fendant to respond to the complaint and to this counterclaim;

(b) That the court order the plaintiff and E. F. to inter-plead their respective claims;

(c)That the court adjudge whether the plaintiff or E. F. is entitled to the sum of money;

(d)That the court discharge defendant from all liability in the premises except to the person it shall adjudge entitled to the sum of money;

(e)That the court award to the defendant its costs and attorneys fees.

Form 6. — MOTION TO BRING IN THIRD-PARTY DEFENDANT.

Defendant moves for leave to make E. F. a party to this action and that there be served upon him summons and third-party complaint as set forth in Exhibit A hereto attached.

Form 7. — THIRD PARTY COMPLAINT.

Plaintiff A. B. has filed against defendant C. D. a complaint, copy of which is hereto attached as Exhibit C.

(Here state the grounds upon which CD. is entitled to recover from E. F., all or part of what A. B. may recover from C. D., or upon which A. B. is entitled to recover from E. F. and not from C. D. The statement should be framed as in an original complaint).

Wherefore, C. D. demands judgments against third-party defendant E. F. for all sums that may be adjudged against defendant C. D. in favor of plaintiff A. B.

Form 8. — MOTION TO DISMISS

Defendant moves:

To dismiss the action because the complaint fails to state a claim against defendant upon which relief can be granted;

To dismiss the action on the ground that it is barred by a former judgment, copy of which is hereto attached;

To dismiss the action, on the ground of improper venue because the property in litigation is situated in the City of Iloilo.

Form 9. — MOTION TO INTERVENE AS DEFENDANT.

E. F. moves for leave to intervene as a defendant in this action, in order to assert the defenses set forth in his pro­posed answer, of which a copy is hereto attached, on the ground that he is the manufacturer and vendor to the defendant, as well as to others, of the articles alleged in the complaint to be an infringement of plaintiffs patent, and as such has a defense to plaintiffs claim presenting both questions of law and of fact which are common to the main action.

Form 10. — INTERVENORS ANSWER.

Intervenor admits the allegations in paragraphs 1 and 4 of the complaint; denies the allegations in paragraph 3, and denies the allegations in paragraph 2 in so far as they assert the legality of the issuance of the Letters Patent to the plaintiff, the true facts being as follows (here set out the facts in support of denial).

Form 11. — MOTION FOR PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTS.

Plaintiff A. B. moves for an order requiring defendant C. D.:

To produce and permit plaintiff to inspect and to copy each of the following documents:

(Here list the documents and describe each of them.)

To produce and permit plaintiff to inspect and to photograph each of the following objects:

(Here list the objects and describe each of them.)

To permit plaintiff to enter (here describe property to be entered) and to inspect and photograph (here describe the portion of the real property and the objects to be inspected and photographed).

Defendant C D. has the possession, custody, or control of each of the foregoing documents and objects and of the above-mentioned real estate. Each of them constitutes or contains evidence relevant and material to the matter involved in this action.

Form 12. — REQUEST FOR ADMISSION.

Plaintiff A. B. requests defendant C. D. to make the following admissions for the purpose of this action only and subject to all pertinent objections to admissibility which may be interposed at the trial.

That each of the following documents, exhibited with this request, is genuine. (Here list the documents and describe each of them.)

That each of the following statements is true. (Here list the statements.)

Form 13. — OFFER OF COMPROMISE.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, the above-named defendant, hereby offers to allow judgment to be taken against him and in favor of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, the above-named plaintiff, in the above-entitled action which is now pending in this court, for the sum of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.pesos, with interest from_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, together with costs.

Form 14. — SUBPOENA.

To _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​., (address)

You are hereby commanded to appear before the Court of First Instance of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, on the _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, at_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ oclock, then and there to testify in the action of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, against_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (here set out the number of the case).

Witness the Honorable _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, judge of said court, this _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​,

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Clerk

Form 15. — SUBPOENA DUCES TECUM.

You are hereby required to appear before the Court of First Instance of

On the_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19 _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​at_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ o clock, and to bring with you into court the following (describe book, deed, writing, or other documents), it being necessary to use the same as testimony in a cause there pending, wherein _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.is plaintiff and _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​is defendant.

Witness the Honorable _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, judge of said court, this_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Clerk

Form 16. — ORDER OF ATTACHMENT.

To the Sheriff (or his deputy)

Province of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Whereas_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (or _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ as agent or attorney of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ for the plaintiff) has complained on oath to _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Judge of the Court of First Instance of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ that _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​is justly indebted to the said _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (plaintiff), in the amount of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ pesos, and that said_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (defendant) is a nonresident (or is about to abscond from the Philippines, etc.reciting the affidavit), and

Whereas, security has been given by the plaintiff according to these rules;

We, therefore, command you that you attach the estate, real and personal, of the said_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​. (defendant) in your province, to the value of the said demands and costs of suit, and that you safely keep the same according to these rules, unless the defendant gives security to pay such judgment as may be recovered in the said action in the manner provided by the Rules of Court, and that you summon the said _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (defendant), if to be found in your province, to appear before the Court of First Instance of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​on the _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, to answer the complaint, copy of which is hereto annexed, and return this writ with your proceedings endorsed thereon.

Witness my hand this _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Judge

Form 17. — ORDER OF EXECUTION.

To the Sheriff (or his deputy)

Province of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

You are hereby commanded that, of the goods and chattels of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (defendant), you cause to be made the sum of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ pesos for damages, together with interest thereon from the date of this execution until the date of payment, at the: rate of six per centum per annum; and the further sum of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ pesos for costs of suit, together with your lawful fees for the service of this execution, all in the Philippine currency, which_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​(plaintiff) recovered in our Court of First Instance of on the day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, against _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (defendant) for damages, interest, and costs, and that you render the same to the said_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (plaintiff) aside from your own fees on this execution, and do you likewise return this writ into court within _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ days from date, with your proceedings endorsed thereon. But, if sufficient personal property cannot be found whereof to satisfy this execution and lawful fees thereon, then you are commanded that of the lands and buildings of the said defendant you make the said sums of money in the manner required by the Rules of Court, and make return of your proceedings with this writ within _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ days from date.

Witness the Honorable _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Judge of said court, this _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Clerk

Form 18. — OFFICERS RETURN OF SERVICE.

I have this day served a copy of the within complaint and process upon_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​personally (or, state the other manner of service employed).

Dated this _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (Sheriff or his Deputy)

Form 19. — OFFICERS DEED.

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That, whereas, an execution against _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, in the province (or city) of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, in the action of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ in the province (or city) of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, was by me, Sheriff (or Deputy) for the province (or city) of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ on the _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, levied on (here describe the premises), and

Whereas, on the_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ all the estate, right, title, interest, and property of the said _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (defendant) in the premises aforesaid were by me, the said (herein insert the name of the officer), sold at public auction, for the satisfaction of said execution to _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, province (or city) of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​who was the highest bidder, for the sum of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ pesos which the said _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ has since fully paid to me.

Now, by force and virtue of the Rules of Court in such cases made and provided, I, the said _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (the officer), in consideration of the sum of money paid unto me as aforesaid, do, by these presents, sell and assign and set over unto the said purchaser, his heirs, and assigns, forever, all the estate, right, title, interest, property and inheritance of the said_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​. (defendant) in and to the said premises and appurtenances, at the time of the levy thereon (or of the attachment, as the case may be).

To have and to hold the said premises and appurtenances to the said _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (purchaser), his heirs and assigns forever.

In witness whereof, I hereunto set my hand and seal, on this day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

(Acknowledgement)

Form 20. — TRANSMITTAL OF RECORD BY JUSTICE OF THE PEACE OR MUNICIPAL JUDGE.

Copy of the record of the proceedings before _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, justice of the peace of the municipality of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, province of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (or municipal judge as the case may be), in the case herein set forth, to wit: (here copy the entries on the docket), and certify as follows, namely:

Philippines, Province of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​,

I, _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, justice of the peace of said municipality (or municipal judge), certify that the foregoing is a copy of the record and proceedings before me in the case stated therein as appears on my docket.

Given under my hand this _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

Form 21. — PETITION FOR LETTERS ROGATORY.

Petitioner shows:

1. He is the plaintiff (or defendant) in the above-entitled action;

2. The above action is pending and undetermined in the Court of First Instance of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​;

3. A commission issued by this Court on the _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, to take the testimony of (here name the witness or witnesses) in (here name the foreign country in which the testimony is to be taken), before _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (name of officer), was returned unexecuted by _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​on the ground that _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, all of which more fully appears from the certificate of said_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ to said commission and made a part hereof by attaching it hereto (or state other facts to show commission is inadequate ox cannot be executed).

Wherefore, petitioner prays that this court order the issuance by the clerk of this court of letters rogatory directed to _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ and requesting the examination of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ as a witness (or witnesses) on the interrogatories filed herewith and made a part hereof.

Form 22. — LETTERS ROGATORY.

The Court of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ (name of the court) to Judge or Tribunal having jurisdiction of Civil Causes at _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​. (name of foreign country);

Whereas, a certain suit is pending in the Court of First Instance of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, in which_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ is plaintiff and_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ is defendant, and it has been suggested to us that there are witnesses residing within your jurisdiction without whose testimony justice cannot completely be done between said parties.

We, therefore, request you that in furtherance of justice you will by the proper and usual process of your court cause such witness (or witnesses) as shall be named or pointed out to you by the said parties or either of them (if witnesses are named, omit the last clause), to appear before you or some competent person by you for that purpose to be appointed and authorized at a precise time and place by you to be fixed and there to answer on their oaths and affirmations to the several interrogatories hereunto annexed; and that you will cause their depositions to be committed to writing and returned to us under cover duly closed and sealed up together with these presents. And we shall be ready and willing to do the same for you in a similar case when required.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Clerk,

Court of First Instance of_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Form 23. — CRIMINAL COMPLAINT.

THE PEOPLE OF THE PHILIPPINES, plaintiff Versus Criminal Case No. _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ for SEDUCTION A. B., Accused _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​}

The undersigned accuses A. B. of the crime of seduction committed as follows:

(Here set out the time and place when and where the crime is committed, and the facts constituting the offense.)

Contrary to law.

(Complainant)

(Verification)

A preliminary investigation has been conducted in this case under my direction, having examined the witnesses under oath.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

(Justice of the Peace)

(Verification)

Witnesses:

Form 24. — INFORMATION.

THE PEOPLE OF THE PHILIPPINES, plaintiff Versus Criminal Case No. _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ for ESTAFA A. B., Accused _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​}

The undersigned accuses A.B. of the crime of estafa committed as follows:

(Here set out the time and place when and where the crime complained of has been committed, and the facts constituting the offense.)

Contrary to law.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

(Fiscal)

(Verification)

A preliminary investigation has been conducted in this case under my direction, having examined the witnesses under oath.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Fiscal

(Verification)

Witnesses:

BAIL RECOMMENDED P_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Form 25. — PETITION FOR THE ISSUANCE OF A SEARCH WARRANT.

THE PEOPLE OF THE PHILIPPINES, plaintiff Versus Criminal Case No. _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ for (State nature of the offense) A. B., Accused _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​}

APPLICATION FOR SEARCH WARRANT

The undersigned (name of applicant) after having been duly sworn, states:

1. That (name of the person to be searched), who may be found at (describe premises) is in possession or has in in his control (name property subject of the offense; or stolen or embezzled and other proceeds or fruits of the offense; or used or intended to be used as the means of committing an offense) which he is keeping and concealing in premises above described. (Cancel description not applicable.)

2. That a search warrant should be issued to enable any agent of the law to take possession and bring to this court the following described property: (give a complete and detailed description of the property to be seized.)

Wherefore, the undersigned prays this Honorable Court to issue a search warrant authorizing any agent of the law to search the premises above described and to seize and surrender to this Honorable Court the personal property mentioned above to be dealt with as the law directs.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ Philippines, _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ 19 _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Applicant

Form 26. — SEARCH WARRANT.

THE PEOPLE OF THE PHILIPPINES, plaintiff Versus Criminal Case No. _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ for (State nature of the offense) A. B., Accused _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​}

TO ANY PEACE OFFICER:

Greetings:

It appearing to the satisfaction of the undersigned after examining under oath (name of applicant) and his witness (name of witness) that there is probable cause to believe that (describe the act charged) has been committed or is about to be committed and that there are good and sufficient reasons to believe that (name of person or persons to be searched) has in his possession or control in (describe premises) in (name of street), district of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, (name property subject of the offense; or stolen or embezzled and other proceeds or fruits of the offense; or used or intended to be used as the means of committing an offense) which should be seized and brought to the undersigned. (Cancel description not applicable.)

You are hereby commanded to make an immediate search at any time in the day (or night) of the premises above described and forthwith seize and take possession of the following personal property, to wit: (give a complete and detailed description of the property to be seized) and bring said property to the undersigned to be dealt with as the law directs.

Witness my hand this _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ day of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, 19_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​, Judge

Form 27. — ORDER OF ARREST.

(Title)

TO ANY LAWFUL OFFICER:

You are hereby commanded to arrest A. B., who is said to be at (name of place where accused resides) and who stands charged before me of the crime of estafa and to bring him before me as soon as possible to be dealt with as the Rules of Court direct.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Judge, Court of First Instance

of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

The bond for the release of the accused in this case is fixed at P_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ which may furnished by the said accused either by depositing the amount in the office of the local municipal treasurer who should transmit the same to this court or by furnishing a personal bond subscribed by two solvent sureties whose solvency may be shown by their land tax receipts. The constabulary officers making his arrest are hereby authorized to accept either of said bond.

_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Judge, Court of First Instance

of _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​

Form 28. — ATTORNEYS OATH.

I, _​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​_​ do solemnly swear that I will maintain allegiance to the Republic of the Philippines; I will support its Constitution and obey the laws as well as the legal orders of the duly constituted authorities therein; I will do no falsehood, nor consent to the doing of any in court; I will not wittingly or willingly promote or sue any groundless, false or unlawful suit, nor give aid nor consent to the same; I will delay no man for money or malice, and will conduct myself as a lawyer according to the best of my knowledge and discretion with all good fidelity as well to the courts as to my clients; and I impose upon myself this voluntary obligation without any mental reservation or purpose of evasion. So help me God.

[codalsetal]

[Civil Code of the Philippines] Book II Property, Ownership and its Modifications

BOOK II

PROPERTY, OWNERSHIP, AND ITS MODIFICATIONS

TITLE ICLASSIFICATION OF PROPERTYPRELIMINARY PROVISIONS

Article 414. All things which are or may be the object of appropriation are considered either:

(1) Immovable or real property; or

(2) Movable or personal property. (333)

CHAPTER 1Immovable Property

Article 415. The following are immovable property:

(1) Land, buildings, roads and constructions of all kinds adhered to the soil;

(2) Trees, plants, and growing fruits, while they are attached to the land or form an integral part of an immovable;

(3) Everything attached to an immovable in a fixed manner, in such a way that it cannot be separated therefrom without breaking the material or deterioration of the object;

(4) Statues, reliefs, paintings or other objects for use or ornamentation, placed in buildings or on lands by the owner of the immovable in such a manner that it reveals the intention to attach them permanently to the tenements;

(5) Machinery, receptacles, instruments or implements intended by the owner of the tenement for an industry or works which may be carried on in a building or on a piece of land, and which tend directly to meet the needs of the said industry or works;

(6) Animal houses, pigeon-houses, beehives, fish ponds or breeding places of similar nature, in case their owner has placed them or preserves them with the intention to have them permanently attached to the land, and forming a permanent part of it; the animals in these places are included;

(7) Fertilizer actually used on a piece of land;

(8) Mines, quarries, and slag dumps, while the matter thereof forms part of the bed, and waters either running or stagnant;

(9) Docks and structures which, though floating, are intended by their nature and object to remain at a fixed place on a river, lake, or coast;

(10) Contracts for public works, and servitudes and other real rights over immovable property. (334a)

CHAPTER 2Movable Property

Article 416. The following things are deemed to be personal property:

(1) Those movables susceptible of appropriation which are not included in the preceding article;

(2) Real property which by any special provision of law is considered as personalty;

(3) Forces of nature which are brought under control by science; and

(4) In general, all things which can be transported from place to place without impairment of the real property to which they are fixed. (335a)

Article 417. The following are also considered as personal property:

(1) Obligations and actions which have for their object movables or demandable sums; and

(2) Shares of stock of agricultural, commercial and industrial entities, although they may have real estate. (336a)

Article 418. Movable property is either consumable or nonconsumable. To the first class belong those movables which cannot be used in a manner appropriate to their nature without their being consumed; to the second class belong all the others. (337)

CHAPTER 3Property in Relation to the Person to Whom It Belongs

Article 419. Property is either of public dominion or of private ownership. (338)

Article 420. The following things are property of public dominion:

(1) Those intended for public use, such as roads, canals, rivers, torrents, ports and bridges constructed by the State, banks, shores, roadsteads, and others of similar character;

(2) Those which belong to the State, without being for public use, and are intended for some public service or for the development of the national wealth. (339a)

Article 421. All other property of the State, which is not of the character stated in the preceding article, is patrimonial property. (340a)

Article 422. Property of public dominion, when no longer intended for public use or for public service, shall form part of the patrimonial property of the State. (341a)

Article 423. The property of provinces, cities, and municipalities is divided into property for public use and patrimonial property. (343)

Article 424. Property for public use, in the provinces, cities, and municipalities, consist of the provincial roads, city streets, municipal streets, the squares, fountains, public waters, promenades, and public works for public service paid for by said provinces, cities, or municipalities.

All other property possessed by any of them is patrimonial and shall be governed by this Code, without prejudice to the provisions of special laws. (344a)

Article 425. Property of private ownership, besides the patrimonial property of the State, provinces, cities, and municipalities, consists of all property belonging to private persons, either individually or collectively. (345a)

Provisions Common to the Three Preceding Chapters

Article 426. Whenever by provision of the law, or an individual declaration, the expression "immovable things or property," or "movable things or property," is used, it shall be deemed to include, respectively, the things enumerated in Chapter 1 and Chapter 2.

Whenever the word "muebles," or "furniture," is used alone, it shall not be deemed to include money, credits, commercial securities, stocks and bonds, jewelry, scientific or artistic collections, books, medals, arms, clothing, horses or carriages and their accessories, grains, liquids and merchandise, or other things which do not have as their principal object the furnishing or ornamenting of a building, except where from the context of the law, or the individual declaration, the contrary clearly appears. (346a)

TITLE IIOWNERSHIP

CHAPTER 1Ownership in General

Article 427. Ownership may be exercised over things or rights. (n)

Article 428. The owner has the right to enjoy and dispose of a thing, without other limitations than those established by law.

The owner has also a right of action against the holder and possessor of the thing in order to recover it. (348a)

Article 429. The owner or lawful possessor of a thing has the right to exclude any person from the enjoyment and disposal thereof. For this purpose, he may use such force as may be reasonably necessary to repel or prevent an actual or threatened unlawful physical invasion or usurpation of his property. (n)

Article 430. Every owner may enclose or fence his land or tenements by means of walls, ditches, live or dead hedges, or by any other means without detriment to servitudes constituted thereon. (388)

Article 431. The owner of a thing cannot make use thereof in such manner as to injure the rights of a third person. (n)

Article 432. The owner of a thing has no right to prohibit the interference of another with the same, if the interference is necessary to avert an imminent danger and the threatened damage, compared to the damage arising to the owner from the interference, is much greater. The owner may demand from the person benefited indemnity for the damage to him. (n)

Article 433. Actual possession under claim of ownership raises disputable presumption of ownership. The true owner must resort to judicial process for the recovery of the property. (n)

Article 434. In an action to recover, the property must be identified, and the plaintiff must rely on the strength of his title and not on the weakness of the defendant's claim. (n)

Article 435. No person shall be deprived of his property except by competent authority and for public use and always upon payment of just compensation.

Should this requirement be not first complied with, the courts shall protect and, in a proper case, restore the owner in his possession. (349a)

Article 436. When any property is condemned or seized by competent authority in the interest of health, safety or security, the owner thereof shall not be entitled to compensation, unless he can show that such condemnation or seizure is unjustified. (n) ARTICLE 437. The owner of a parcel of land is the owner of its surface and of everything under it, and he can construct thereon any works or make any plantations and excavations which he may deem proper, without detriment to servitudes and subject to special laws and ordinances. He cannot complain of the reasonable requirements of aerial navigation. (350a)

Article 438. Hidden treasure belongs to the owner of the land, building, or other property on which it is found.

Nevertheless, when the discovery is made on the property of another, or of the State or any of its subdivisions, and by chance, one-half thereof shall be allowed to the finder. If the finder is a trespasser, he shall not be entitled to any share of the treasure.

If the things found be of interest to science or the arts, the State may acquire them at their just price, which shall be divided in conformity with the rule stated. (351a)

Article 439. By treasure is understood, for legal purposes, any hidden and unknown deposit of money, jewelry, or other precious objects, the lawful ownership of which does not appear. (352)

CHAPTER 2Right of AccessionGENERAL PROVISIONS

Article 440. The ownership of property gives the right by accession to everything which is produced thereby, or which is incorporated or attached thereto, either naturally or artificially. (353)

SECTION 1Right of Accession with Respect to What is Produced by Property

Article 441. To the owner belongs:

(1) The natural fruits;

(2) The industrial fruits;

(3) The civil fruits. (354)

Article 442. Natural fruits are the spontaneous products of the soil, and the young and other products of animals.

Industrial fruits are those produced by lands of any kind through cultivation or labor.

Civil fruits are the rents of buildings, the price of leases of lands and other property and the amount of perpetual or life annuities or other similar income. (355a)

Article 443. He who receives the fruits has the obligation to pay the expenses made by a third person in their production, gathering, and preservation. (356)

Article 444. Only such as are manifest or born are considered as natural or industrial fruits.

With respect to animals, it is sufficient that they are in the womb of the mother, although unborn. (357)

SECTION 2Right of Accession with Respect to Immovable Property

Article 445. Whatever is built, planted or sown on the land of another and the improvements or repairs made thereon, belong to the owner of the land, subject to the provisions of the following articles. (358)

Article 446. All works, sowing, and planting are presumed made by the owner and at his expense, unless the contrary is proved. (359)

Article 447. The owner of the land who makes thereon, personally or through another, plantings, constructions or works with the materials of another, shall pay their value; and, if he acted in bad faith, he shall also be obliged to the reparation of damages. The owner of the materials shall have the right to remove them only in case he can do so without injury to the work constructed, or without the plantings, constructions or works being destroyed. However, if the landowner acted in bad faith, the owner of the materials may remove them in any event, with a right to be indemnified for damages. (360a)

Article 448. The owner of the land on which anything has been built, sown or planted in good faith, shall have the right to appropriate as his own the works, sowing or planting, after payment of the indemnity provided for in articles 546 and 548, or to oblige the one who built or planted to pay the price of the land, and the one who sowed, the proper rent. However, the builder or planter cannot be obliged to buy the land if its value is considerably more than that of the building or trees. In such case, he shall pay reasonable rent, if the owner of the land does not choose to appropriate the building or trees after proper indemnity. The parties shall agree upon the terms of the lease and in case of disagreement, the court shall fix the terms thereof. (361a)

Article 449. He who builds, plants or sows in bad faith on the land of another, loses what is built, planted or sown without right to indemnity. (362)

Article 450. The owner of the land on which anything has been built, planted or sown in bad faith may demand the demolition of the work, or that the planting or sowing be removed, in order to replace things in their former condition at the expense of the person who built, planted or sowed; or he may compel the builder or planter to pay the price of the land, and the sower the proper rent. (363a)

Article 451. In the cases of the two preceding articles, the landowner is entitled to damages from the builder, planter or sower. (n)

Article 452. The builder, planter or sower in bad faith is entitled to reimbursement for the necessary expenses of preservation of the land. (n)

Article 453. If there was bad faith, not only on the part of the person who built, planted or sowed on the land of another, but also on the part of the owner of such land, the rights of one and the other shall be the same as though both had acted in good faith.

It is understood that there is bad faith on the part of the landowner whenever the act was done with his knowledge and without opposition on his part. (364a)

Article 454. When the landowner acted in bad faith and the builder, planter or sower proceeded in good faith, the provisions of article 447 shall apply. (n)

Article 455. If the materials, plants or seeds belong to a third person who has not acted in bad faith, the owner of the land shall answer subsidiarily for their value and only in the event that the one who made use of them has no property with which to pay.

This provision shall not apply if the owner makes use of the right granted by article 450. If the owner of the materials, plants or seeds has been paid by the builder, planter or sower, the latter may demand from the landowner the value of the materials and labor. (365a)

Article 456. In the cases regulated in the preceding articles, good faith does not necessarily exclude negligence, which gives right to damages under article 2176. (n)

Article 457. To the owners of lands adjoining the banks of rivers belong the accretion which they gradually receive from the effects of the current of the waters. (336)

Article 458. The owners of estates adjoining ponds or lagoons do not acquire the land left dry by the natural decrease of the waters, or lose that inundated by them in extraordinary floods. (367)

Article 459. Whenever the current of a river, creek or torrent segregates from an estate on its bank a known portion of land and transfers it to another estate, the owner of the land to which the segregated portion belonged retains the ownership of it, provided that he removes the same within two years. (368a)

Article 460. Trees uprooted and carried away by the current of the waters belong to the owner of the land upon which they may be cast, if the owners do not claim them within six months. If such owners claim them, they shall pay the expenses incurred in gathering them or putting them in a safe place. (369a)

Article 461. River beds which are abandoned through the natural change in the course of the waters ipso facto belong to the owners whose lands are occupied by the new course in proportion to the area lost. However, the owners of the lands adjoining the old bed shall have the right to acquire the same by paying the value thereof, which value shall not exceed the value of the area occupied by the new bed. (370a)

Article 462. Whenever a river, changing its course by natural causes, opens a new bed through a private estate, this bed shall become of public dominion. (372a)

Article 463. Whenever the current of a river divides itself into branches, leaving a piece of land or part thereof isolated, the owner of the land retains his ownership. He also retains it if a portion of land is separated from the estate by the current. (374)

Article 464. Islands which may be formed on the seas within the jurisdiction of the Philippines, on lakes, and on navigable or floatable rivers belong to the State. (371a)

Article 465. Islands which through successive accumulation of alluvial deposits are formed in non-navigable and non-floatable rivers, belong to the owners of the margins or banks nearest to each of them, or to the owners of both margins if the island is in the middle of the river, in which case it shall be divided longitudinally in halves. If a single island thus formed be more distant from one margin than from the other, the owner of the nearer margin shall be the sole owner thereof. (373a)

SECTION 3Right of Accession with Respect to Movable Property

Article 466. Whenever two movable things belonging to different owners are, without bad faith, united in such a way that they form a single object, the owner of the principal thing acquires the accessory, indemnifying the former owner thereof for its value. (375)

Article 467. The principal thing, as between two things incorporated, is deemed to be that to which the other has been united as an ornament, or for its use or perfection. (376)

Article 468. If it cannot be determined by the rule given in the preceding article which of the two things incorporated is the principal one, the thing of the greater value shall be so considered, and as between two things of equal value, that of the greater volume.

In painting and sculpture, writings, printed matter, engraving and lithographs, the board, metal, stone, canvas, paper or parchment shall be deemed the accessory thing. (377)

Article 469. Whenever the things united can be separated without injury, their respective owners may demand their separation.

Nevertheless, in case the thing united for the use, embellishment or perfection of the other, is much more precious than the principal thing, the owner of the former may demand its separation, even though the thing to which it has been incorporated may suffer some injury. (378)

Article 470. Whenever the owner of the accessory thing has made the incorporation in bad faith, he shall lose the thing incorporated and shall have the obligation to indemnify the owner of the principal thing for the damages he may have suffered.

If the one who has acted in bad faith is the owner of the principal thing, the owner of the accessory thing shall have a right to choose between the former paying him its value or that the thing belonging to him be separated, even though for this purpose it be necessary to destroy the principal thing; and in both cases, furthermore, there shall be indemnity for damages.

If either one of the owners has made the incorporation with the knowledge and without the objection of the other, their respective rights shall be determined as though both acted in good faith. (379a)

Article 471. Whenever the owner of the material employed without his consent has a right to an indemnity, he may demand that this consist in the delivery of a thing equal in kind and value, and in all other respects, to that employed, or else in the price thereof, according to expert appraisal. (380)

Article 472. If by the will of their owners two things of the same or different kinds are mixed, or if the mixture occurs by chance, and in the latter case the things are not separable without injury, each owner shall acquire a right proportional to the part belonging to him, bearing in mind the value of the things mixed or confused. (381)

Article 473. If by the will of only one owner, but in good faith, two things of the same or different kinds are mixed or confused, the rights of the owners shall be determined by the provisions of the preceding article.

If the one who caused the mixture or confusion acted in bad faith, he shall lose the thing belonging to him thus mixed or confused, besides being obliged to pay indemnity for the damages caused to the owner of the other thing with which his own was mixed. (382)

Article 474. One who in good faith employs the material of another in whole or in part in order to make a thing of a different kind, shall appropriate the thing thus transformed as his own, indemnifying the owner of the material for its value.

If the material is more precious than the transformed thing or is of more value, its owner may, at his option, appropriate the new thing to himself, after first paying indemnity for the value of the work, or demand indemnity for the material.

If in the making of the thing bad faith intervened, the owner of the material shall have the right to appropriate the work to himself without paying anything to the maker, or to demand of the latter that he indemnify him for the value of the material and the damages he may have suffered. However, the owner of the material cannot appropriate the work in case the value of the latter, for artistic or scientific reasons, is considerably more than that of the material. (383a)

Article 475. In the preceding articles, sentimental value shall be duly appreciated. (n)

CHAPTER 3Quieting of Title (n)

Article 476. Whenever there is a cloud on title to real property or any interest therein, by reason of any instrument, record, claim, encumbrance or proceeding which is apparently valid or effective but is in truth and in fact invalid, ineffective, voidable, or unenforceable, and may be prejudicial to said title, an action may be brought to remove such cloud or to quiet the title.

An action may also be brought to prevent a cloud from being cast upon title to real property or any interest therein.

Article 477. The plaintiff must have legal or equitable title to, or interest in the real property which is the subject matter of the action. He need not be in possession of said property.

Article 478. There may also be an action to quiet title or remove a cloud therefrom when the contract, instrument or other obligation has been extinguished or has terminated, or has been barred by extinctive prescription.

Article 479. The plaintiff must return to the defendant all benefits he may have received from the latter, or reimburse him for expenses that may have redounded to the plaintiff's benefit.

Article 480. The principles of the general law on the quieting of title are hereby adopted insofar as they are not in conflict with this Code.

Article 481. The procedure for the quieting of title or the removal of a cloud therefrom shall be governed by such rules of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgated.

CHAPTER 4Ruinous Buildings and Trees in Danger of Falling

Article 482. If a building, wall, column, or any other construction is in danger of falling, the owner shall be obliged to demolish it or to execute the necessary work in order to prevent it from falling.

If the proprietor does not comply with this obligation, the administrative authorities may order the demolition of the structure at the expense of the owner, or take measures to insure public safety. (389a)

Article 483. Whenever a large tree threatens to fall in such a way as to cause damage to the land or tenement of another or to travelers over a public or private road, the owner of the tree shall be obliged to fell and remove it; and should he not do so, it shall be done at his expense by order of the administrative authorities. (390a)

TITLE IIICO-OWNERSHIP

Article 484. There is co-ownership whenever the ownership of an undivided thing or right belongs to different persons.

In default of contracts, or of special provisions, co-ownership shall be governed by the provisions of this Title. (392)

Article 485. The share of the co-owners, in the benefits as well as in the charges, shall be proportional to their respective interests. Any stipulation in a contract to the contrary shall be void.

The portions belonging to the co-owners in the co-ownership shall be presumed equal, unless the contrary is proved. (393a)

Article 486. Each co-owner may use the thing owned in common, provided he does so in accordance with the purpose for which it is intended and in such a way as not to injure the interest of the co-ownership or prevent the other co-owners from using it according to their rights. The purpose of the co-ownership may be changed by agreement, express or implied. (394a)

Article 487. Any one of the co-owners may bring an action in ejectment. (n)

Article 488. Each co-owner shall have a right to compel the other co-owners to contribute to the expenses of preservation of the thing or right owned in common and to the taxes. Any one of the latter may exempt himself from this obligation by renouncing so much of his undivided interest as may be equivalent to his share of the expenses and taxes. No such waiver shall be made if it is prejudicial to the co-ownership. (395a)

Article 489. Repairs for preservation may be made at the will of one of the co-owners, but he must, if practicable, first notify his co-owners of the necessity for such repairs. Expenses to improve or embellish the thing shall be decided upon by a majority as determined in article 492. (n)

Article 490. Whenever the different stories of a house belong to different owners, if the titles of ownership do not specify the terms under which they should contribute to the necessary expenses and there exists no agreement on the subject, the following rules shall be observed:

(1) The main and party walls, the roof and the other things used in common, shall be preserved at the expense of all the owners in proportion to the value of the story belonging to each;

(2) Each owner shall bear the cost of maintaining the floor of his story; the floor of the entrance, front door, common yard and sanitary works common to all, shall be maintained at the expense of all the owners pro rata;

(3) The stairs from the entrance to the first story shall be maintained at the expense of all the owners pro rata, with the exception of the owner of the ground floor; the stairs from the first to the second story shall be preserved at the expense of all, except the owner of the ground floor and the owner of the first story; and so on successively. (396)

Article 491. None of the co-owners shall, without the consent of the others, make alterations in the thing owned in common, even though benefits for all would result therefrom. However, if the withholding of the consent by one or more of the co-owners is clearly prejudicial to the common interest, the courts may afford adequate relief. (397a)

Article 492. For the administration and better enjoyment of the thing owned in common, the resolutions of the majority of the co-owners shall be binding.

There shall be no majority unless the resolution is approved by the co-owners who represent the controlling interest in the object of the co-ownership.

Should there be no majority, or should the resolution of the majority be seriously prejudicial to those interested in the property owned in common, the court, at the instance of an interested party, shall order such measures as it may deem proper, including the appointment of an administrator.

Whenever a part of the thing belongs exclusively to one of the co-owners, and the remainder is owned in common, the preceding provision shall apply only to the part owned in common. (398)

Article 493. Each co-owner shall have the full ownership of his part and of the fruits and benefits pertaining thereto, and he may therefore alienate, assign or mortgage it, and even substitute another person in its enjoyment, except when personal rights are involved. But the effect of the alienation or the mortgage, with respect to the co-owners, shall be limited to the portion which may be allotted to him in the division upon the termination of the co-ownership. (399)

Article 494. No co-owner shall be obliged to remain in the co-ownership. Each co-owner may demand at any time the partition of the thing owned in common, insofar as his share is concerned.

Nevertheless, an agreement to keep the thing undivided for a certain period of time, not exceeding ten years, shall be valid. This term may be extended by a new agreement.

A donor or testator may prohibit partition for a period which shall not exceed twenty years.

Neither shall there be any partition when it is prohibited by law.

No prescription shall run in favor of a co-owner or co-heir against his co-owners or co-heirs so long as he expressly or impliedly recognizes the co-ownership. (400a)

Article 495. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the co-owners cannot demand a physical division of the thing owned in common, when to do so would render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended. But the co-ownership may be terminated in accordance with article 498. (401a)

Article 496. Partition may be made by agreement between the parties or by judicial proceedings. Partition shall be governed by the Rules of Court insofar as they are consistent with this Code. (402)

Article 497. The creditors or assignees of the co-owners may take part in the division of the thing owned in common and object to its being effected without their concurrence. But they cannot impugn any partition already executed, unless there has been fraud, or in case it was made notwithstanding a formal opposition presented to prevent it, without prejudice to the right of the debtor or assignor to maintain its validity. (403)

Article 498. Whenever the thing is essentially indivisible and the co-owners cannot agree that it be allotted to one of them who shall indemnify the others, it shall be sold and its proceeds distributed. (404)

Article 499. The partition of a thing owned in common shall not prejudice third persons, who shall retain the rights of mortgage, servitude or any other real rights belonging to them before the division was made. Personal rights pertaining to third persons against the co-ownership shall also remain in force, notwithstanding the partition. (405)

Article 500. Upon partition, there shall be a mutual accounting for benefits received and reimbursements for expenses made. Likewise, each co-owner shall pay for damages caused by reason of his negligence or fraud. (n)

Article 501. Every co-owner shall, after partition, be liable for defects of title and quality of the portion assigned to each of the other co-owners. (n)

TITLE IVSOME SPECIAL PROPERTIES

CHAPTER 1Waters

SECTION 1Ownership of Waters

Article 502. The following are of public dominion:

(1) Rivers and their natural beds;

(2) Continuous or intermittent waters of springs and brooks running in their natural beds and the beds themselves;

(3) Waters rising continuously or intermittently on lands of public dominion;

(4) Lakes and lagoons formed by Nature on public lands, and their beds;

(5) Rain waters running through ravines or sand beds, which are also of public dominion;

(6) Subterranean waters on public lands;

(7) Waters found within the zone of operation of public works, even if constructed by a contractor;

(8) Waters rising continuously or intermittently on lands belonging to private persons, to the State, to a province, or to a city or a municipality from the moment they leave such lands;

(9) The waste waters of fountains, sewers and public establishments. (407)

Article 503. The following are of private ownership:

(1) Continuous or intermittent waters rising on lands of private ownership, while running through the same;

(2) Lakes and lagoons, and their beds, formed by Nature on such lands;

(3) Subterranean waters found on the same;

(4) Rain waters falling on said lands, as long as they remain within the boundaries;

(5) The beds of flowing waters, continuous or intermittent, formed by rain water, and those of brooks, crossing lands which are not of public dominion.

In every drain or aqueduct, the water, bed, banks and floodgates shall be considered as an integral part of the land of building for which the waters are intended. The owners of lands, through which or along the boundaries of which the aqueduct passes, cannot claim ownership over it, or any right to the use of its bed or banks, unless the claim is based on titles of ownership specifying the right or ownership claimed. (408)

SECTION 2The Use of Public Waters

Article 504. The use of public waters is acquired:

(1) By administrative concession;

(2) By prescription for ten years.

The extent of the rights and obligations of the use shall be that established, in the first case, by the terms of the concession, and, in the second case, by the manner and form in which the waters have been used. (409a)

Article 505. Every concession for the use of waters is understood to be without prejudice to third persons. (410)

Article 506. The right to make use of public waters is extinguished by the lapse of the concession and by non-user for five years. (411a)

SECTION 3The Use of Waters of Private Ownership

Article 507. The owner of a piece of land on which a spring or brook rises, be it continuous or intermittent, may use its waters while they run through the same, but after the waters leave the land they shall become public, and their use shall be governed by the Special Law of Waters of August 3, 1866, and by the Irrigation Law. (412a)

Article 508. The private ownership of the beds of rain waters does not give a right to make works or constructions which may change their course to the damage of third persons, or whose destruction, by the force of floods, may cause such damage. (413)

Article 509. No one may enter private property to search waters or make use of them without permission from the owners, except as provided by the Mining Law. (414a)

Article 510. The ownership which the proprietor of a piece of land has over the waters rising thereon does not prejudice the rights which the owners of lower estates may have legally acquired to the use thereof. (415)

Article 511. Every owner of a piece of land has the right to construct within his property, reservoirs for rain waters, provided he causes no damage to the public or to third persons. (416)

SECTION 4Subterranean Waters

Article 512. Only the owner of a piece of land, or another person with his permission, may make explorations thereon for subterranean waters, except as provided by the Mining Law.

Explorations for subterranean waters on lands of public dominion may be made only with the permission of the administrative authorities. (417a)

Article 513. Waters artificially brought forth in accordance with the Special Law of Waters of August 3, 1866, belong to the person who brought them up. (418)

Article 514. When the owner of waters artificially brought to the surface abandons them to their natural course, they shall become of public dominion. (419)

SECTION 5General Provisions

Article 515. The owner of a piece of land on which there are defensive works to check waters, or on which, due to a change of their course, it may be necessary to reconstruct such works, shall be obliged, at his election, either to make the necessary repairs or construction himself, or to permit them to be done, without damage to him, by the owners of the lands which suffer or are clearly exposed to suffer injury. (420)

Article 516. The provisions of the preceding article are applicable to the case in which it may be necessary to clear a piece of land of matter, whose accumulation or fall may obstruct the course of the waters, to the damage or peril of third persons. (421)

Article 517. All the owners who participate in the benefits arising from the works referred to in the two preceding articles, shall be obliged to contribute to the expenses of construction in proportion to their respective interests. Those who by their fault may have caused the damage shall be liable for the expenses. (422)

Article 518. All matters not expressly determined by the provisions of this Chapter shall be governed by the Special Law of Waters of August 3, 1866, and by the Irrigation Law. (425a)

CHAPTER 2Minerals

Article 519. Mining claims and rights and other matters concerning minerals and mineral lands are governed by special laws. (427a)

CHAPTER 3Trade-marks and Trade-names

Article 520. A trade-mark or trade-name duly registered in the proper government bureau or office is owned by and pertains to the person, corporation, or firm registering the same, subject to the provisions of special laws. (n)

Article 521. The goodwill of a business is property, and may be transferred together with the right to use the name under which the business is conducted. (n)

Article 522. Trade-marks and trade-names are governed by special laws. (n)

TITLE VPOSSESSION

CHAPTER 1Possession and the Kinds Thereof

Article 523. Possession is the holding of a thing or the enjoyment of a right. (430a)

Article 524. Possession may be exercised in one's own name or in that of another. (413a)

Article 525. The possession of things or rights may be had in one of two concepts: either in the concept of owner, or in that of the holder of the thing or right to keep or enjoy it, the ownership pertaining to another person. (432)

Article 526. He is deemed a possessor in good faith who is not aware that there exists in his title or mode of acquisition any flaw which invalidates it.

He is deemed a possessor in bad faith who possesses in any case contrary to the foregoing.

Mistake upon a doubtful or difficult question of law may be the basis of good faith. (433a)

Article 527. Good faith is always presumed, and upon him who alleges bad faith on the part of a possessor rests the burden of proof. (434)

Article 528. Possession acquired in good faith does not lose this character except in the case and from the moment facts exist which show that the possessor is not unaware that he possesses the thing improperly or wrongfully. (435a)

Article 529. It is presumed that possession continues to be enjoyed in the same character in which it was acquired, until the contrary is proved. (436)

Article 530. Only things and rights which are susceptible of being appropriated may be the object of possession. (437)

CHAPTER 2Acquisition of Possession

Article 531. Possession is acquired by the material occupation of a thing or the exercise of a right, or by the fact that it is subject to the action of our will, or by the proper acts and legal formalities established for acquiring such right. (438a)

Article 532. Possession may be acquired by the same person who is to enjoy it, by his legal representative, by his agent, or by any person without any power whatever: but in the last case, the possession shall not be considered as acquired until the person in whose name the act of possession was executed has ratified the same, without prejudice to the juridical consequences of negotiorum gestio in a proper case. (439a)

Article 533. The possession of hereditary property is deemed transmitted to the heir without interruption and from the moment of the death of the decedent, in case the inheritance is accepted.

One who validly renounces an inheritance is deemed never to have possessed the same. (440)

Article 534. On who succeeds by hereditary title shall not suffer the consequences of the wrongful possession of the decedent, if it is not shown that he was aware of the flaws affecting it; but the effects of possession in good faith shall not benefit him except from the date of death of the decedent. (442)

Article 535. Minors and incapacitated persons may acquire the possession of things; but they need the assistance of their legal representatives in order to exercise the rights which from the possession arise in their favor. (443)

Article 536. In no case may possession be acquired through force or intimidation as long as there is a possessor who objects thereto. He who believes that he has an action or a right to deprive another of the holding of a thing, must invoke the aid of the competent court, if the holder should refuse to deliver the thing. (441a)

Article 537. Acts merely tolerated, and those executed clandestinely and without the knowledge of the possessor of a thing, or by violence, do not affect possession. (444)

Article 538. Possession as a fact cannot be recognized at the same time in two different personalities except in the cases of co-possession. Should a question arise regarding the fact of possession, the present possessor shall be preferred; if there are two possessors, the one longer in possession; if the dates of the possession are the same, the one who presents a title; and if all these conditions are equal, the thing shall be placed in judicial deposit pending determination of its possession or ownership through proper proceedings. (445)

CHAPTER 3Effects of Possession

Article 539. Every possessor has a right to be respected in his possession; and should he be disturbed therein he shall be protected in or restored to said possession by the means established by the laws and the Rules of Court.

A possessor deprived of his possession through forcible entry may within ten days from the filing of the complaint present a motion to secure from the competent court, in the action for forcible entry, a writ of preliminary mandatory injunction to restore him in his possession. The court shall decide the motion within thirty (30) days from the filing thereof. (446a)

Article 540. Only the possession acquired and enjoyed in the concept of owner can serve as a title for acquiring dominion. (447)

Article 541. A possessor in the concept of owner has in his favor the legal presumption that he possesses with a just title and he cannot be obliged to show or prove it. (448a)

Article 542. The possession of real property presumes that of the movables therein, so long as it is not shown or proved that they should be excluded. (449)

Article 543. Each one of the participants of a thing possessed in common shall be deemed to have exclusively possessed the part which may be allotted to him upon the division thereof, for the entire period during which the co-possession lasted. Interruption in the possession of the whole or a part of a thing possessed in common shall be to the prejudice of all the possessors. However, in case of civil interruption, the Rules of Court shall apply. (450a)

Article 544. A possessor in good faith is entitled to the fruits received before the possession is legally interrupted.

Natural and industrial fruits are considered received from the time they are gathered or severed.

Civil fruits are deemed to accrue daily and belong to the possessor in good faith in that proportion. (451)

Article 545. If at the time the good faith ceases, there should be any natural or industrial fruits, the possessor shall have a right to a part of the expenses of cultivation, and to a part of the net harvest, both in proportion to the time of the possession.

The charges shall be divided on the same basis by the two possessors.

The owner of the thing may, should he so desire, give the possessor in good faith the right to finish the cultivation and gathering of the growing fruits, as an indemnity for his part of the expenses of cultivation and the net proceeds; the possessor in good faith who for any reason whatever should refuse to accept this concession, shall lose the right to be indemnified in any other manner. (452a)

Article 546. Necessary expenses shall be refunded to every possessor; but only the possessor in good faith may retain the thing until he has been reimbursed therefor.

Useful expenses shall be refunded only to the possessor in good faith with the same right of retention, the person who has defeated him in the possession having the option of refunding the amount of the expenses or of paying the increase in value which the thing may have acquired by reason thereof. (453a)

Article 547. If the useful improvements can be removed without damage to the principal thing, the possessor in good faith may remove them, unless the person who recovers the possession exercises the option under paragraph 2 of the preceding article. (n) ARTICLE 548. Expenses for pure luxury or mere pleasure shall not be refunded to the possessor in good faith; but he may remove the ornaments with which he has embellished the principal thing if it suffers no injury thereby, and if his successor in the possession does not prefer to refund the amount expended. (454)

Article 549. The possessor in bad faith shall reimburse the fruits received and those which the legitimate possessor could have received, and shall have a right only to the expenses mentioned in paragraph 1 of article 546 and in article 443. The expenses incurred in improvements for pure luxury or mere pleasure shall not be refunded to the possessor in bad faith, but he may remove the objects for which such expenses have been incurred, provided that the thing suffers no injury thereby, and that the lawful possessor does not prefer to retain them by paying the value they may have at the time he enters into possession. (445a)

Article 550. The costs of litigation over the property shall be borne by every possessor. (n)

Article 551. Improvements caused by nature or time shall always inure to the benefit of the person who has succeeded in recovering possession. (456)

Article 552. A possessor in good faith shall not be liable for the deterioration or loss of the thing possessed, except in cases in which it is proved that he has acted with fraudulent intent or negligence, after the judicial summons.

A possessor in bad faith shall be liable for deterioration or loss in every case, even if caused by a fortuitous event. (457a)

Article 553. One who recovers possession shall not be obliged to pay for improvements which have ceased to exist at the time he takes possession of the thing. (458)

Article 554. A present possessor who shows his possession at some previous time, is presumed to have held possession also during the intermediate period, in the absence of proof to the contrary. (459)

Article 555. A possessor may lose his possession:

(1) By the abandonment of the thing;

(2) By an assignment made to another either by onerous or gratuitous title;

(3) By the destruction or total loss of the thing, or because it goes out of commerce;

(4) By the possession of another, subject to the provisions of article 537, if the new possession has lasted longer than one year. But the real right of possession is not lost till after the lapse of ten years. (460a)

Article 556. The possession of movables is not deemed lost so long as they remain under the control of the possessor, even though for the time being he may not know their whereabouts. (461)

Article 557. The possession of immovables and of real rights is not deemed lost, or transferred for purposes of prescription to the prejudice of third persons, except in accordance with the provisions of the Mortgage Law and the Land Registration laws. (462a)

Article 558. Acts relating to possession, executed or agreed to by one who possesses a thing belonging to another as a mere holder to enjoy or keep it, in any character, do not bind or prejudice the owner, unless he gave said holder express authority to do such acts, or ratifies them subsequently. (463)

Article 559. The possession of movable property acquired in good faith is equivalent to a title. Nevertheless, one who has lost any movable or has been unlawfully deprived thereof, may recover it from the person in possession of the same.

If the possessor of a movable lost or which the owner has been unlawfully deprived, has acquired it in good faith at a public sale, the owner cannot obtain its return without reimbursing the price paid therefor. (464a)

Article 560. Wild animals are possessed only while they are under one's control; domesticated or tamed animals are considered domestic or tame if they retain the habit of returning to the premises of the possessor. (465)

Article 561. One who recovers, according to law, possession unjustly lost, shall be deemed for all purposes which may redound to his benefit, to have enjoyed it without interruption. (466)

TITLE VIUSUFRUCT

CHAPTER 1Usufruct in General

Article 562. Usufruct gives a right to enjoy the property of another with the obligation of preserving its form and substance, unless the title constituting it or the law otherwise provides. (467)

Article 563. Usufruct is constituted by law, by the will of private persons expressed in acts inter vivos or in a last will and testament, and by prescription. (468)

Article 564. Usufruct may be constituted on the whole or a part of the fruits of the thing, in favor of one more persons, simultaneously or successively, and in every case from or to a certain day, purely or conditionally. It may also be constituted on a right, provided it is not strictly personal or intransmissible. (469)

Article 565. The rights and obligations of the usufructuary shall be those provided in the title constituting the usufruct; in default of such title, or in case it is deficient, the provisions contained in the two following Chapters shall be observed. (470)

CHAPTER 2Rights of the Usufructuary

Article 566. The usufructuary shall be entitled to all the natural, industrial and civil fruits of the property in usufruct. With respect to hidden treasure which may be found on the land or tenement, he shall be considered a stranger. (471)

Article 567. Natural or industrial fruits growing at the time the usufruct begins, belong to the usufructuary.

Those growing at the time the usufruct terminates, belong to the owner.

In the preceding cases, the usufructuary, at the beginning of the usufruct, has no obligation to refund to the owner any expenses incurred; but the owner shall be obliged to reimburse at the termination of the usufruct, from the proceeds of the growing fruits, the ordinary expenses of cultivation, for seed, and other similar expenses incurred by the usufructuary.

The provisions of this article shall not prejudice the rights of third persons, acquired either at the beginning or at the termination of the usufruct. (472)

Article 568. If the usufructuary has leased the lands or tenements given in usufruct, and the usufruct should expire before the termination of the lease, he or his heirs and successors shall receive only the proportionate share of the rent that must be paid by the lessee. (473)

Article 569. Civil fruits are deemed to accrue daily, and belong to the usufructuary in proportion to the time the usufruct may last. (474).

Article 570. Whenever a usufruct is constituted on the right to receive a rent or periodical pension, whether in money or in fruits, or in the interest on bonds or securities payable to bearer, each payment due shall be considered as the proceeds or fruits of such right.

Whenever it consists in the enjoyment of benefits accruing from a participation in any industrial or commercial enterprise, the date of the distribution of which is not fixed, such benefits shall have the same character.

In either case they shall be distributed as civil fruits, and shall be applied in the manner prescribed in the preceding article. (475)

Article 571. The usufructuary shall have the right to enjoy any increase which the thing in usufruct may acquire through accession, the servitudes established in its favor, and, in general, all the benefits inherent therein. (479)

Article 572. The usufructuary may personally enjoy the thing in usufruct, lease it to another, or alienate his right of usufruct, even by a gratuitous title; but all the contracts he may enter into as such usufructuary shall terminate upon the expiration of the usufruct, saving leases of rural lands, which shall be considered as subsisting during the agricultural year. (480)

Article 573. Whenever the usufruct includes things which, without being consumed, gradually deteriorate through wear and tear, the usufructuary shall have the right to make use thereof in accordance with the purpose for which they are intended, and shall not be obliged to return them at the termination of the usufruct except in their condition at that time; but he shall be obliged to indemnify the owner for any deterioration they may have suffered by reason of his fraud or negligence. (481)

Article 574. Whenever the usufruct includes things which cannot be used without being consumed, the usufructuary shall have the right to make use of them under the obligation of paying their appraised value at the termination of the usufruct, if they were appraised when delivered. In case they were not appraised, he shall have the right to return the same quantity and quality, or pay their current price at the time the usufruct ceases. (482)

Article 575. The usufructuary of fruit-bearing trees and shrubs may make use of the dead trunks, and even of those cut off or uprooted by accident, under the obligation to replace them with new plants. (483a)

Article 576. If in consequence of a calamity or extraordinary event, the trees or shrubs shall have disappeared in such considerable number that it would not be possible or it would be too burdensome to replace them, the usufructuary may leave the dead, fallen or uprooted trunks at the disposal of the owner, and demand that the latter remove them and clear the land. (484a)

Article 577. The usufructuary of woodland may enjoy all the benefits which it may produce according to its nature.

If the woodland is a copse or consists of timber for building, the usufructuary may do such ordinary cutting or felling as the owner was in the habit of doing, and in default of this, he may do so in accordance with the custom of the place, as to the manner, amount and season.

In any case the felling or cutting of trees shall be made in such manner as not to prejudice the preservation of the land.

In nurseries, the usufructuary may make the necessary thinnings in order that the remaining trees may properly grow.

With the exception of the provisions of the preceding paragraphs, the usufructuary cannot cut down trees unless it be to restore or improve some of the things in usufruct, and in such case shall first inform the owner of the necessity for the work. (485) ARTICLE 578. The usufructuary of an action to recover real property or a real right, or any movable property, has the right to bring the action and to oblige the owner thereof to give him the authority for this purpose and to furnish him whatever proof he may have. If in consequence of the enforcement of the action he acquires the thing claimed, the usufruct shall be limited to the fruits, the dominion remaining with the owner. (486)

Article 579. The usufructuary may make on the property held in usufruct such useful improvements or expenses for mere pleasure as he may deem proper, provided he does not alter its form or substance; but he shall have no right to be indemnified therefor. He may, however, remove such improvements, should it be possible to do so without damage to the property. (487)

Article 580. The usufructuary may set off the improvements he may have made on the property against any damage to the same. (488)

Article 581. The owner of property the usufruct of which is held by another, may alienate it, but he cannot alter its form or substance, or do anything thereon which may be prejudicial to the usufructuary. (489)

Article 582. The usufructuary of a part of a thing held in common shall exercise all the rights pertaining to the owner thereof with respect to the administration and the collection of fruits or interest. Should the co-ownership cease by reason of the division of the thing held in common, the usufruct of the part allotted to the co-owner shall belong to the usufructuary. (490)

CHAPTER 3Obligations of the Usufructuary

Article 583. The usufructuary, before entering upon the enjoyment of the property, is obliged:

(1) To make, after notice to the owner or his legitimate representative, an inventory of all the property, which shall contain an appraisal of the movables and a description of the condition of the immovables;

(2) To give security, binding himself to fulfill the obligations imposed upon him in accordance with this Chapter. (491)

Article 584. The provisions of No. 2 of the preceding article shall not apply to the donor who has reserved the usufruct of the property donated, or to the parents who are usufructuaries of their children's property, except when the parents contract a second marriage. (492a)

Article 585. The usufructuary, whatever may be the title of the usufruct, may be excused from the obligation of making an inventory or of giving security, when no one will be injured thereby. (493)

Article 586. Should the usufructuary fail to give security in the cases in which he is bound to give it, the owner may demand that the immovables be placed under administration, that the movables be sold, that the public bonds, instruments of credit payable to order or to bearer be converted into registered certificates or deposited in a bank or public institution, and that the capital or sums in cash and the proceeds of the sale of the movable property be invested in safe securities.

The interest on the proceeds of the sale of the movables and that on public securities and bonds, and the proceeds of the property placed under administration, shall belong to the usufructuary.

Furthermore, the owner may, if he so prefers, until the usufructuary gives security or is excused from so doing, retain in his possession the property in usufruct as administrator, subject to the obligation to deliver to the usufructuary the net proceeds thereof, after deducting the sums which may be agreed upon or judicially allowed him for such administration. (494)

Article 587. If the usufructuary who has not given security claims, by virtue of a promise under oath, the delivery of the furniture necessary for his use, and that he and his family be allowed to live in a house included in the usufruct, the court may grant this petition, after due consideration of the facts of the case.

The same rule shall be observed with respect to implements, tools and other movable property necessary for an industry or vocation in which he is engaged.

If the owner does not wish that certain articles be sold because of their artistic worth or because they have a sentimental value, he may demand their delivery to him upon his giving security for the payment of the legal interest on their appraised value. (495)

Article 588. After the security has been given by the usufructuary, he shall have a right to all the proceeds and benefits from the day on which, in accordance with the title constituting the usufruct, he should have commenced to receive them. (496)

Article 589. The usufructuary shall take care of the things given in usufruct as a good father of a family. (497)

Article 590. A usufructuary who alienates or leases his right of usufruct shall answer for any damage which the things in usufruct may suffer through the fault or negligence of the person who substitutes him. (498)

Article 591. If the usufruct be constituted on a flock or herd of livestock, the usufructuary shall be obliged to replace with the young thereof the animals that die each year from natural causes, or are lost due to the rapacity of beasts of prey.

If the animals on which the usufruct is constituted should all perish, without the fault of the usufructuary, on account of some contagious disease or any other uncommon event, the usufructuary shall fulfill his obligation by delivering to the owner the remains which may have been saved from the misfortune.

Should the herd or flock perish in part, also by accident and without the fault of the usufructuary, the usufruct shall continue on the part saved.

Should the usufruct be on sterile animals, it shall be considered, with respect to its effects, as though constituted on fungible things. (499a)

Article 592. The usufructuary is obliged to make the ordinary repairs needed by the thing given in usufruct.

By ordinary repairs are understood such as are required by the wear and tear due to the natural use of the thing and are indispensable for its preservation. Should the usufructuary fail to make them after demand by the owner, the latter may make them at the expense of the usufructuary. (500)

Article 593. Extraordinary repairs shall be at the expense of the owner. The usufructuary is obliged to notify the owner when the need for such repairs is urgent. (501)

Article 594. If the owner should make the extraordinary repairs, he shall have a right to demand of the usufructuary the legal interest on the amount expended for the time that the usufruct lasts.

Should he not make them when they are indispensable for the preservation of the thing, the usufructuary may make them; but he shall have a right to demand of the owner, at the termination of the usufruct, the increase in value which the immovable may have acquired by reason of the repairs. (502a)

Article 595. The owner may construct any works and make any improvements of which the immovable in usufruct is susceptible, or make new plantings thereon if it be rural, provided that such acts do not cause a diminution in the value of the usufruct or prejudice the right of the usufructuary. (503)

Article 596. The payment of annual charges and taxes and of those considered as a lien on the fruits, shall be at the expense of the usufructuary for all the time that the usufruct lasts. (504)

Article 597. The taxes which, during the usufruct, may be imposed directly on the capital, shall be at the expense of the owner.

If the latter has paid them, the usufructuary shall pay him the proper interest on the sums which may have been paid in that character; and, if the said sums have been advanced by the usufructuary, he shall recover the amount thereof at the termination of the usufruct. (505)

Article 598. If the usufruct be constituted on the whole of a patrimony, and if at the time of its constitution the owner has debts, the provisions of articles 758 and 759 relating to donations shall be applied, both with respect to the maintenance of the usufruct and to the obligation of the usufructuary to pay such debts.

The same rule shall be applied in case the owner is obliged, at the time the usufruct is constituted, to make periodical payments, even if there should be no known capital. (506)

Article 599. The usufructuary may claim any matured credits which form a part of the usufruct if he has given or gives the proper security. If he has been excused from giving security or has not been able to give it, or if that given is not sufficient, he shall need the authorization of the owner, or of the court in default thereof, to collect such credits.

The usufructuary who has given security may use the capital he has collected in any manner he may deem proper. The usufructuary who has not given security shall invest the said capital at interest upon agreement with the owner; in default of such agreement, with judicial authorization; and, in every case, with security sufficient to preserve the integrity of the capital in usufruct. (507)

Article 600. The usufructuary of a mortgaged immovable shall not be obliged to pay the debt for the security of which the mortgage was constituted.

Should the immovable be attached or sold judicially for the payment of the debt, the owner shall be liable to the usufructuary for whatever the latter may lose by reason thereof. (509)

Article 601. The usufructuary shall be obliged to notify the owner of any act of a third person, of which he may have knowledge, that may be prejudicial to the rights of ownership, and he shall be liable should he not do so, for damages, as if they had been caused through his own fault. (511)

Article 602. The expenses, costs and liabilities in suits brought with regard to the usufruct shall be borne by the usufructuary. (512)

CHAPTER 4Extinguishment of Usufruct

Article 603. Usufruct is extinguished:

(1) By the death of the usufructuary, unless a contrary intention clearly appears;

(2) By the expiration of the period for which it was constituted, or by the fulfillment of any resolutory condition provided in the title creating the usufruct;

(3) By merger of the usufruct and ownership in the same person;

(4) By renunciation of the usufructuary;

(5) By the total loss of the thing in usufruct;

(6) By the termination of the right of the person constituting the usufruct;

(7) By prescription. (513a)

Article 604. If the thing given in usufruct should be lost only in part, the right shall continue on the remaining part. (514)

Article 605. Usufruct cannot be constituted in favor of a town, corporation, or association for more than fifty years. If it has been constituted, and before the expiration of such period the town is abandoned, or the corporation or association is dissolved, the usufruct shall be extinguished by reason thereof. (515a)

Article 606. A usufruct granted for the time that may elapse before a third person attains a certain age, shall subsist for the number of years specified, even if the third person should die before the period expires, unless such usufruct has been expressly granted only in consideration of the existence of such person. (516)

Article 607. If the usufruct is constituted on immovable property of which a building forms part, and the latter should be destroyed in any manner whatsoever, the usufructuary shall have a right to make use of the land and the materials.

The same rule shall be applied if the usufruct is constituted on a building only and the same should be destroyed. But in such a case, if the owner should wish to construct another building, he shall have a right to occupy the land and to make use of the materials, being obliged to pay to the usufructuary, during the continuance of the usufruct, the interest upon the sum equivalent to the value of the land and of the materials. (517)

Article 608. If the usufructuary shares with the owner the insurance of the tenement given in usufruct, the former shall, in case of loss, continue in the enjoyment of the new building, should one be constructed, or shall receive the interest on the insurance indemnity if the owner does not wish to rebuild.

Should the usufructuary have refused to contribute to the insurance, the owner insuring the tenement alone, the latter shall receive the full amount of the insurance indemnity in case of loss, saving always the right granted to the usufructuary in the preceding article. (518a)

Article 609. Should the thing in usufruct be expropriated for public use, the owner shall be obliged either to replace it with another thing of the same value and of similar conditions, or to pay the usufructuary the legal interest on the amount of the indemnity for the whole period of the usufruct. If the owner chooses the latter alternative, he shall give security for the payment of the interest. (519)

Article 610. A usufruct is not extinguished by bad use of the thing in usufruct; but if the abuse should cause considerable injury to the owner, the latter may demand that the thing be delivered to him, binding himself to pay annually to the usufructuary the net proceeds of the same, after deducting the expenses and the compensation which may be allowed him for its administration. (520)

Article 611. A usufruct constituted in favor of several persons living at the time of its constitution shall not be extinguished until the death of the last survivor. (521)

Article 612. Upon the termination of the usufruct, the thing in usufruct shall be delivered to the owner, without prejudice to the right of retention pertaining to the usufructuary or his heirs for taxes and extraordinary expenses which should be reimbursed. After the delivery has been made, the security or mortgage shall be cancelled. (522a)

TITLE VIIEASEMENTS OF SERVITUDES

CHAPTER 1Easements in General

SECTION 1Different Kinds of Easements

Article 613. An easement or servitude is an encumbrance imposed upon an immovable for the benefit of another immovable belonging to a different owner.

The immovable in favor of which the easement is established is called the dominant estate; that which is subject thereto, the servient estate. (530)

Article 614. Servitudes may also be established for the benefit of a community, or of one or more persons to whom the encumbered estate does not belong. (531)

Article 615. Easements may be continuous or discontinuous, apparent or nonapparent.

Continuous easements are those the use of which is or may be incessant, without the intervention of any act of man.

Discontinuous easements are those which are used at intervals and depend upon the acts of man.

Apparent easements are those which are made known and are continually kept in view by external signs that reveal the use and enjoyment of the same.

Nonapparent easements are those which show no external indication of their existence. (532)

Article 616. Easements are also positive or negative.

A positive easement is one which imposes upon the owner of the servient estate the obligation of allowing something to be done or of doing it himself, and a negative easement, that which prohibits the owner of the servient estate from doing something which he could lawfully do if the easement did not exist. (533)

Article 617. Easements are inseparable from the estate to which they actively or passively belong. (534)

Article 618. Easements are indivisible. If the servient estate is divided between two or more persons, the easement is not modified, and each of them must bear it on the part which corresponds to him.

If it is the dominant estate that is divided between two or more persons, each of them may use the easement in its entirety, without changing the place of its use, or making it more burdensome in any other way. (535)

Article 619. Easements are established either by law or by the will of the owners. The former are called legal and the latter voluntary easements. (536)

SECTION 2Modes of Acquiring Easements

Article 620. Continuous and apparent easements are acquired either by virtue of a title or by prescription of ten years. (537a)

Article 621. In order to acquire by prescription the easements referred to in the preceding article, the time of possession shall be computed thus: in positive easements, from the day on which the owner of the dominant estate, or the person who may have made use of the easement, commenced to exercise it upon the servient estate; and in negative easements, from the day on which the owner of the dominant estate forbade, by an instrument acknowledged before a notary public, the owner of the servient estate, from executing an act which would be lawful without the easement. (538a)

Article 622. Continuous nonapparent easements, and discontinuous ones, whether apparent or not, may be acquired only by virtue of a title. (539)

Article 623. The absence of a document or proof showing the origin of an easement which cannot be acquired by prescription may be cured by a deed of recognition by the owner of the servient estate or by a final judgment. (540a)

Article 624. The existence of an apparent sign of easement between two estates, established or maintained by the owner of both, shall be considered, should either of them be alienated, as a title in order that the easement may continue actively and passively, unless, at the time the ownership of the two estates is divided, the contrary should be provided in the title of conveyance of either of them, or the sign aforesaid should be removed before the execution of the deed. This provision shall also apply in case of the division of a thing owned in common by two or more persons. (541a)

Article 625. Upon the establishment of an easement, all the rights necessary for its use are considered granted. (542)

Article 626. The owner of the dominant estate cannot use the easement except for the benefit of the immovable originally contemplated. Neither can he exercise the easement in any other manner than that previously established. (n)

SECTION 3Rights and Obligations of the Owners of the Dominant and Servient Estates

Article 627. The owner of the dominant estate may make, at his own expense, on the servient estate any works necessary for the use and preservation of the servitude, but without altering it or rendering it more burdensome.

For this purpose he shall notify the owner of the servient estate, and shall choose the most convenient time and manner so as to cause the least inconvenience to the owner of the servient estate. (543a)

Article 628. Should there be several dominant estates, the owners of all of them shall be obliged to contribute to the expenses referred to in the preceding article, in proportion to the benefits which each may derive from the work. Any one who does not wish to contribute may exempt himself by renouncing the easement for the benefit of the others.

If the owner of the servient estate should make use of the easement in any manner whatsoever, he shall also be obliged to contribute to the expenses in the proportion stated, saving an agreement to the contrary. (544)

Article 629. The owner of the servient estate cannot impair, in any manner whatsoever, the use of the servitude.

Nevertheless, if by reason of the place originally assigned, or of the manner established for the use of the easement, the same should become very inconvenient to the owner of the servient estate, or should prevent him from making any important works, repairs or improvements thereon, it may be changed at his expense, provided he offers another place or manner equally convenient and in such a way that no injury is caused thereby to the owner of the dominant estate or to those who may have a right to the use of the easement. (545)

Article 630. The owner of the servient estate retains the ownership of the portion on which the easement is established, and may use the same in such a manner as not to affect the exercise of the easement. (n)

SECTION 4Modes of Extinguishment of Easements

Article 631. Easements are extinguished:

(1) By merger in the same person of the ownership of the dominant and servient estates;

(2) By nonuser for ten years; with respect to discontinuous easements, this period shall be computed from the day on which they ceased to be used; and, with respect to continuous easements, from the day on which an act contrary to the same took place;

(3) When either or both of the estates fall into such condition that the easement cannot be used; but it shall revive if the subsequent condition of the estates or either of them should again permit its use, unless when the use becomes possible, sufficient time for prescription has elapsed, in accordance with the provisions of the preceding number;

(4) By the expiration of the term or the fulfillment of the condition, if the easement is temporary or conditional;

(5) By the renunciation of the owner of the dominant estate;

(6) By the redemption agreed upon between the owners of the dominant and servient estates. (546a)

Article 632. The form or manner of using the easement may prescribe as the easement itself, and in the same way. (547a)

Article 633. If the dominant estate belongs to several persons in common, the use of the easement by any one of them prevents prescription with respect to the others. (548)

CHAPTER 2Legal Easements

SECTION 1General Provisions

Article 634. Easements imposed by law have for their object either public use or the interest of private persons. (549)

Article 635. All matters concerning easements established for public or communal use shall be governed by the special laws and regulations relating thereto, and, in the absence thereof, by the provisions of this Title. (550)

Article 636. Easements established by law in the interest of private persons or for private use shall be governed by the provisions of this Title, without prejudice to the provisions of general or local laws and ordinances for the general welfare.

These easements may be modified by agreement of the interested parties, whenever the law does not prohibit it or no injury is suffered by a third person. (551a)

SECTION 2Easements Relating to Waters

Article 637. Lower estates are obliged to receive the waters which naturally and without the intervention of man descend from the higher estates, as well as the stones or earth which they carry with them.

The owner of the lower estate cannot construct works which will impede this easement; neither can the owner of the higher estate make works which will increase the burden. (552)

Article 638. The banks of rivers and streams, even in case they are of private ownership, are subject throughout their entire length and within a zone of three meters along their margins, to the easement of public use in the general interest of navigation, floatage, fishing and salvage.

Estates adjoining the banks of navigable or floatable rivers are, furthermore, subject to the easement of towpath for the exclusive service of river navigation and floatage.

If it be necessary for such purpose to occupy lands of private ownership, the proper indemnity shall first be paid. (553a)

Article 639. Whenever for the diversion or taking of water from a river or brook, or for the use of any other continuous or discontinuous stream, it should be necessary to build a dam, and the person who is to construct it is not the owner of the banks, or lands which must support it, he may establish the easement of abutment of a dam, after payment of the proper indemnity. (554)

Article 640. Compulsory easements for drawing water or for watering animals can be imposed only for reasons of public use in favor of a town or village, after payment of the proper indemnity. (555)

Article 641. Easements for drawing water and for watering animals carry with them the obligation of the owners of the servient estates to allow passage to persons and animals to the place where such easements are to be used, and the indemnity shall include this service. (556)

Article 642. Any person who may wish to use upon his own estate any water of which he can dispose shall have the right to make it flow through the intervening estates, with the obligation to indemnify their owners, as well as the owners of the lower estates upon which the waters may filter or descend. (557)

Article 643. One desiring to make use of the right granted in the preceding article is obliged:

(1) To prove that he can dispose of the water and that it is sufficient for the use for which it is intended;

(2) To show that the proposed right of way is the most convenient and the least onerous to third persons;

(3) To indemnify the owner of the servient estate in the manner determined by the laws and regulations. (558)

Article 644. The easement of aqueduct for private interest cannot be imposed on buildings, courtyards, annexes, or outhouses, or on orchards or gardens already existing. (559)

Article 645. The easement of aqueduct does not prevent the owner of the servient estate from closing or fencing it, or from building over the aqueduct in such manner as not to cause the latter any damage, or render necessary repairs and cleanings impossible. (560)

Article 646. For legal purposes, the easement of aqueduct shall be considered as continuous and apparent, even though the flow of the water may not be continuous, or its use depends upon the needs of the dominant estate, or upon a schedule of alternate days or hours. (561)

Article 647. One who for the purpose of irrigating or improving his estate, has to construct a stop lock or sluice gate in the bed of the stream from which the water is to be taken, may demand that the owners of the banks permit its construction, after payment of damages, including those caused by the new easement to such owners and to the other irrigators. (562)

Article 648. The establishment, extent, form and conditions of the servitudes of waters, to which this section refers, shall be governed by the special laws relating thereto insofar as no provision therefor is made in this Code. (563a)

SECTION 3Easement of Right of Way

Article 649. The owner, or any person who by virtue of a real right may cultivate or use any immovable, which is surrounded by other immovables pertaining to other persons and without adequate outlet to a public highway, is entitled to demand a right of way through the neighboring estates, after payment of the proper indemnity.

Should this easement be established in such a manner that its use may be continuous for all the needs of the dominant estate, establishing a permanent passage, the indemnity shall consist of the value of the land occupied and the amount of the damage caused to the servient estate.

In case the right of way is limited to the necessary passage for the cultivation of the estate surrounded by others and for the gathering of its crops through the servient estate without a permanent way, the indemnity shall consist in the payment of the damage caused by such encumbrance.

This easement is not compulsory if the isolation of the immovable is due to the proprietor's own acts. (564a)

Article 650. The easement of right of way shall be established at the point least prejudicial to the servient estate, and, insofar as consistent with this rule, where the distance from the dominant estate to a public highway may be the shortest. (565)

Article 651. The width of the easement of right of way shall be that which is sufficient for the needs of the dominant estate, and may accordingly be changed from time to time. (566a)

Article 652. Whenever a piece of land acquired by sale, exchange or partition, is surrounded by other estates of the vendor, exchanger, or co-owner, he shall be obliged to grant a right of way without indemnity.

In case of a simple donation, the donor shall be indemnified by the donee for the establishment of the right of way. (567a)

Article 653. In the case of the preceding article, if it is the land of the grantor that becomes isolated, he may demand a right of way after paying a indemnity. However, the donor shall not be liable for indemnity. (n)

Article 654. If the right of way is permanent, the necessary repairs shall be made by the owner of the dominant estate. A proportionate share of the taxes shall be reimbursed by said owner to the proprietor of the servient estate. (n)

Article 655. If the right of way granted to a surrounded estate ceases to be necessary because its owner has joined it to another abutting on a public road, the owner of the servient estate may demand that the easement be extinguished, returning what he may have received by way of indemnity. The interest on the indemnity shall be deemed to be in payment of rent for the use of the easement.

The same rule shall be applied in case a new road is opened giving access to the isolated estate.

In both cases, the public highway must substantially meet the needs of the dominant estate in order that the easement may be extinguished. (568a)

Article 656. If it be indispensable for the construction, repair, improvement, alteration or beautification of a building, to carry materials through the estate of another, or to raise therein scaffolding or other objects necessary for the work, the owner of such estate shall be obliged to permit the act, after receiving payment of the proper indemnity for the damage caused him. (569a)

Article 657. Easements of the right of way for the passage of livestock known as animal path, animal trail or any other, and those for watering places, resting places and animal folds, shall be governed by the ordinances and regulations relating thereto, and, in the absence thereof, by the usages and customs of the place.

Without prejudice to rights legally acquired, the animal path shall not exceed in any case the width of 75 meters, and the animal trail that of 37 meters and 50 centimeters.

Whenever it is necessary to establish a compulsory easement of the right of way or for a watering place for animals, the provisions of this Section and those of articles 640 and 641 shall be observed. In this case the width shall not exceed 10 meters. (570a)

SECTION 4Easement of Party Wall

Article 658. The easement of party wall shall be governed by the provisions of this Title, by the local ordinances and customs insofar as they do not conflict with the same, and by the rules of co-ownership. (571a)

Article 659. The existence of an easement of party wall is presumed, unless there is a title, or exterior sign, or proof to the contrary:

(1) In dividing walls of adjoining buildings up to the point of common elevation;

(2) In dividing walls of gardens or yards situated in cities, towns, or in rural communities;

(3) In fences, walls and live hedges dividing rural lands. (572)

Article 660. It is understood that there is an exterior sign, contrary to the easement of party wall:

(1) Whenever in the dividing wall of buildings there is a window or opening;

(2) Whenever the dividing wall is, on one side, straight and plumb on all its facement, and on the other, it has similar conditions on the upper part, but the lower part slants or projects outward;

(3) Whenever the entire wall is built within the boundaries of one of the estates;

(4) Whenever the dividing wall bears the burden of the binding beams, floors and roof frame of one of the buildings, but not those of the others;

(5) Whenever the dividing wall between courtyards, gardens, and tenements is constructed in such a way that the coping sheds the water upon only one of the estates;

(6) Whenever the dividing wall, being built of masonry, has stepping stones, which at certain intervals project from the surface on one side only, but not on the other;

(7) Whenever lands inclosed by fences or live hedges adjoin others which are not inclosed.

In all these cases, the ownership of the walls, fences or hedges shall be deemed to belong exclusively to the owner of the property or tenement which has in its favor the presumption based on any one of these signs. (573)

Article 661. Ditches or drains opened between two estates are also presumed as common to both, if there is no title or sign showing the contrary.

There is a sign contrary to the part-ownership whenever the earth or dirt removed to open the ditch or to clean it is only on one side thereof, in which case the ownership of the ditch shall belong exclusively to the owner of the land having this exterior sign in its favor. (574)

Article 662. The cost of repairs and construction of party walls and the maintenance of fences, live hedges, ditches, and drains owned in common, shall be borne by all the owners of the lands or tenements having the party wall in their favor, in proportion to the right of each.

Nevertheless, any owner may exempt himself from contributing to this charge by renouncing his part-ownership, except when the party wall supports a building belonging to him. (575)

Article 663. If the owner of a building, supported by a party wall desires to demolish the building, he may also renounce his part-ownership of the wall, but the cost of all repairs and work necessary to prevent any damage which the demolition may cause to the party wall, on this occasion only, shall be borne by him. (576)

Article 664. Every owner may increase the height of the party wall, doing so at his own expense and paying for any damage which may be caused by the work, even though such damage be temporary.

The expenses of maintaining the wall in the part newly raised or deepened at its foundation shall also be paid for by him; and, in addition, the indemnity for the increased expenses which may be necessary for the preservation of the party wall by reason of the greater height or depth which has been given it.

If the party wall cannot bear the increased height, the owner desiring to raise it shall be obliged to reconstruct it at his own expense and, if for this purpose it be necessary to make it thicker, he shall give the space required from his own land. (577)

Article 665. The other owners who have not contributed in giving increased height, depth or thickness to the wall may, nevertheless, acquire the right of part-ownership therein, by paying proportionally the value of the work at the time of the acquisition and of the land used for its increased thickness. (578a)

Article 666. Every part-owner of a party wall may use it in proportion to the right he may have in the co-ownership, without interfering with the common and respective uses by the other co-owners. (579a)

SECTION 5Easement of Light and View

Article 667. No part-owner may, without the consent of the others, open through the party wall any window or aperture of any kind. (580)

Article 668. The period of prescription for the acquisition of an easement of light and view shall be counted:

(1) From the time of the opening of the window, if it is through a party wall; or

(2) From the time of the formal prohibition upon the proprietor of the adjoining land or tenement, if the window is through a wall on the dominant estate. (n)

Article 669. When the distances in article 670 are not observed, the owner of a wall which is not party wall, adjoining a tenement or piece of land belonging to another, can make in it openings to admit light at the height of the ceiling joints or immediately under the ceiling, and of the size of thirty centimeters square, and, in every case, with an iron grating imbedded in the wall and with a wire screen.

Nevertheless, the owner of the tenement or property adjoining the wall in which the openings are made can close them should he acquire part-ownership thereof, if there be no stipulation to the contrary.

He can also obstruct them by constructing a building on his land or by raising a wall thereon contiguous to that having such openings, unless an easement of light has been acquired. (581a)

Article 670. No windows, apertures, balconies, or other similar projections which afford a direct view upon or towards an adjoining land or tenement can be made, without leaving a distance of two meters between the wall in which they are made and such contiguous property.

Neither can side or oblique views upon or towards such conterminous property be had, unless there be a distance of sixty centimeters.

The nonobservance of these distances does not give rise to prescription. (582a)

Article 671. The distance referred to in the preceding article shall be measured in cases of direct views from the outer line of the wall when the openings do not project, from the outer line of the latter when they do, and in cases of oblique view from the dividing line between the two properties. (583)

Article 672. The provisions of article 670 are not applicable to buildings separated by a public way or alley, which is not less than three meters wide, subject to special regulations and local ordinances. (584a)

Article 673. Whenever by any title a right has been acquired to have direct views, balconies or belvederes overlooking an adjoining property, the owner of the servient estate cannot build thereon at less than a distance of three meters to be measured in the manner provided in article 671. Any stipulation permitting distances less than those prescribed in article 670 is void. (585a)

SECTION 6Drainage of Buildings

Article 674. The owner of a building shall be obliged to construct its roof or covering in such manner that the rain water shall fall on his own land or on a street or public place, and not on the land of his neighbor, even though the adjacent land may belong to two or more persons, one of whom is the owner of the roof. Even if it should fall on his own land, the owner shall be obliged to collect the water in such a way as not to cause damage to the adjacent land or tenement. (586a)

Article 675. The owner of a tenement or a piece of land, subject to the easement of receiving water falling from roofs, may build in such manner as to receive the water upon his own roof or give it another outlet in accordance with local ordinances or customs, and in such a way as not to cause any nuisance or damage whatever to the dominant estate. (587)

Article 676. Whenever the yard or court of a house is surrounded by other houses, and it is not possible to give an outlet through the house itself to the rain water collected thereon, the establishment of an easement of drainage can be demanded, giving an outlet to the water at the point of the contiguous lands or tenements where its egress may be easiest, and establishing a conduit for the drainage in such manner as to cause the least damage to the servient estate, after payment of the property indemnity. (583)

SECTION 7Intermediate Distances and Works for Certain Constructions and Plantings

Article 677. No constructions can be built or plantings made near fortified places or fortresses without compliance with the conditions required in special laws, ordinances, and regulations relating thereto. (589)

Article 678. No person shall build any aqueduct, well, sewer, furnace, forge, chimney, stable, depository of corrosive substances, machinery, or factory which by reason of its nature or products is dangerous or noxious, without observing the distances prescribed by the regulations and customs of the place, and without making the necessary protective works, subject, in regard to the manner thereof, to the conditions prescribed by such regulations. These prohibitions cannot be altered or renounced by stipulation on the part of the adjoining proprietors.

In the absence of regulations, such precautions shall be taken as may be considered necessary, in order to avoid any damage to the neighboring lands or tenements. (590a)

Article 679. No trees shall be planted near a tenement or piece of land belonging to another except at the distance authorized by the ordinances or customs of the place, and, in the absence thereof, at a distance of at least two meters from the dividing line of the estates if tall trees are planted and at a distance of at least fifty centimeters if shrubs or small trees are planted.

Every landowner shall have the right to demand that trees hereafter planted at a shorter distance from his land or tenement be uprooted.

The provisions of this article also apply to trees which have grown spontaneously. (591a)

Article 680. If the branches of any tree should extend over a neighboring estate, tenement, garden or yard, the owner of the latter shall have the right to demand that they be cut off insofar as they may spread over his property, and, if it be the roots of a neighboring tree which should penetrate into the land of another, the latter may cut them off himself within his property. (592)

Article 681. Fruits naturally falling upon adjacent land belong to the owner of said land. (n)

SECTION 8Easement Against Nuisance (n)

Article 682. Every building or piece of land is subject to the easement which prohibits the proprietor or possessor from committing nuisance through noise, jarring, offensive odor, smoke, heat, dust, water, glare and other causes.

Article 683. Subject to zoning, health, police and other laws and regulations, factories and shops may be maintained provided the least possible annoyance is caused to the neighborhood.

SECTION 9

Lateral and Subjacent Support (n)

Article 684. No proprietor shall make such excavations upon his land as to deprive any adjacent land or building of sufficient lateral or subjacent support.

Article 685. Any stipulation or testamentary provision allowing excavations that cause danger to an adjacent land or building shall be void.

Article 686. The legal easement of lateral and subjacent support is not only for buildings standing at the time the excavations are made but also for constructions that may be erected.

Article 687. Any proprietor intending to make any excavation contemplated in the three preceding articles shall notify all owners of adjacent lands.

CHAPTER 3Voluntary Easements

Article 688. Every owner of a tenement or piece of land may establish thereon the easements which he may deem suitable, and in the manner and form which he may deem best, provided he does not contravene the laws, public policy or public order. (594)

Article 689. The owner of a tenement or piece of land, the usufruct of which belongs to another, may impose thereon, without the consent of the usufructuary, any servitudes which will not injure the right of usufruct. (595)

Article 690. Whenever the naked ownership of a tenement or piece of land belongs to one person and the beneficial ownership to another, no perpetual voluntary easement may be established thereon without the consent of both owners. (596)

Article 691. In order to impose an easement on an undivided tenement, or piece of land, the consent of all the co-owners shall be required.

The consent given by some only, must be held in abeyance until the last one of all the co-owners shall have expressed his conformity.

But the consent given by one of the co-owners separately from the others shall bind the grantor and his successors not to prevent the exercise of the right granted. (597a)

Article 692. The title and, in a proper case, the possession of an easement acquired by prescription shall determine the rights of the dominant estate and the obligations of the servient estate. In default thereof, the easement shall be governed by such provisions of this Title as are applicable thereto. (598)

Article 693. If the owner of the servient estate should have bound himself, upon the establishment of the easement, to bear the cost of the work required for the use and preservation thereof, he may free himself from this obligation by renouncing his property to the owner of the dominant estate. (599)

TITLE VIIINUISANCE (n)

Article 694. A nuisance is any act, omission, establishment, business, condition of property, or anything else which:

(1) Injures or endangers the health or safety of others; or

(2) Annoys or offends the senses; or

(3) Shocks, defies or disregards decency or morality; or

(4) Obstructs or interferes with the free passage of any public highway or street, or any body of water; or

(5) Hinders or impairs the use of property.

Article 695. Nuisance is either public or private. A public nuisance affects a community or neighborhood or any considerable number of persons, although the extent of the annoyance, danger or damage upon individuals may be unequal. A private nuisance is one that is not included in the foregoing definition.

Article 696. Every successive owner or possessor of property who fails or refuses to abate a nuisance in that property started by a former owner or possessor is liable therefor in the same manner as the one who created it.

Article 697. The abatement of a nuisance does not preclude the right of any person injured to recover damages for its past existence.

Article 698. Lapse of time cannot legalize any nuisance, whether public or private.

Article 699. The remedies against a public nuisance are:

(1) A prosecution under the Penal Code or any local ordinance: or

(2) A civil action; or

(3) Abatement, without judicial proceedings.

Article 700. The district health officer shall take care that one or all of the remedies against a public nuisance are availed of.

Article 701. If a civil action is brought by reason of the maintenance of a public nuisance, such action shall be commenced by the city or municipal mayor.

Article 702. The district health officer shall determine whether or not abatement, without judicial proceedings, is the best remedy against a public nuisance.

Article 703. A private person may file an action on account of a public nuisance, if it is specially injurious to himself.

Article 704. Any private person may abate a public nuisance which is specially injurious to him by removing, or if necessary, by destroying the thing which constitutes the same, without committing a breach of the peace, or doing unnecessary injury. But it is necessary:

(1) That demand be first made upon the owner or possessor of the property to abate the nuisance;

(2) That such demand has been rejected;

(3) That the abatement be approved by the district health officer and executed with the assistance of the local police; and

(4) That the value of the destruction does not exceed three thousand pesos.

Article 705. The remedies against a private nuisance are:

(1) A civil action; or

(2) Abatement, without judicial proceedings.

Article 706. Any person injured by a private nuisance may abate it by removing, or if necessary, by destroying the thing which constitutes the nuisance, without committing a breach of the peace or doing unnecessary injury. However, it is indispensable that the procedure for extrajudicial abatement of a public nuisance by a private person be followed.

Article 707. A private person or a public official extrajudicially abating a nuisance shall be liable for damages:

(1) If he causes unnecessary injury; or

(2) If an alleged nuisance is later declared by the courts to be not a real nuisance.

TITLE IXREGISTRY OF PROPERTY

Article 708. The Registry of Property has for its object the inscription or annotation of acts and contracts relating to the ownership and other rights over immovable property. (605)

Article 709. The titles of ownership, or of other rights over immovable property, which are not duly inscribed or annotated in the Registry of Property shall not prejudice third persons. (606)

Article 710. The books in the Registry of Property shall be public for those who have a known interest in ascertaining the status of the immovables or real rights annotated or inscribed therein. (607)

Article 711. For determining what titles are subject to inscription or annotation, as well as the form, effects, and cancellation of inscriptions and annotations, the manner of keeping the books in the Registry, and the value of the entries contained in said books, the provisions of the Mortgage Law, the Land Registration Act, and other special laws shall govern. (608a)

[codalsetal]

[Civil Code of the Philippines] Book III Title IV Succession

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

CHAPTER 2 TESTAMENTARY SUCCESSION

SECTION 1.— Wills

SUBSECTION 1.— Wills in General

SUBSECTION 2.—Testamentary Capacity and Intent

SUBSECTION 3.—Forms of Wills

SUBSECTION 4.—Witnesses to Wills

SUBSECTION 5.—Codicils and Incorporation by Reference

SUBSECTION 6.—Revocation of Wills and Testamentary Dispositions

SUBSECTION 7.—Republication and Revival of Wills

SUBSECTION 8.—Allowance and Disallowance of Wills

SECTION 2.— Institution of Heir

SECTION 3.—Substitution of Heirs

SECTION 4.—Conditional Testamentary Dispositions and Testamentary Dispositions With a Term

SECTION 5.— Legitime

SECTION 6.—Disinheritance

SECTION 7.—Legacies and Devises

CHAPTER 3 LEGAL OR INTESTATE SUCCESSION

SECTION 1.—General Provisions

SUBSECTION 1.—Relationship

SUBSECTION 2.—Right of Representation

SECTION 2.—Order of Intestate Succession

SUBSECTION 1.—Descending Direct Line

SUBSECTION 2.—Ascending Direct Line

SUBSECTION 3.—Illegitimate Children

SUBSECTION 4.—Surviving Spouse

SUBSECTION 5.—Collateral Relatives

SUBSECTION 6.—The State

CHAPTER 4 PROVISIONS COMMON TO TESTATE AND INTESTATE SUCCESSIONS

SECTION 1.—Right of Accretion

SECTION 2.—Capacity to Succeed by Will or by Intestacy

SECTION 3.—Acceptance and Repudiation of the Inheritance

SECTION 4.—Executors and Administrators

SECTION 5.—Collation

SECTION 6.—Partition and Distribution of the Estate

SUBSECTION 1.—Partition

SUBSECTION 2.—Effects of Partition

SUBSECTION 3.—Rescission and Nullity of Partition

Title IV.—SUCCESSION CHAPTER 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ART. 774. Succession is a mode of acquisition by virtue of which the property, rights and obligations to the extent of the value of the inheritance, of a person are transmitted through his death to another or others either by his will or by operation of law. (n) ART. 775. In this Title, “decedent” is the general term applied to the person whose property is transmitted through succession, whether or not he left a will. If he left a will, he is also called the testator. (n) ART. 776. The inheritance includes all the property, rights and obligations of a person which are not extinguished by his death. (659) ART. 777. The rights to the succession are transmitted from the moment of the death of the decedent. (657a) ART. 778. Succession may be: (1) Testamentary; (2) Legal or intestate; or (3) Mixed. (n) ART. 779. Testamentary succession is that which results from the designation of an heir, made in a will executed in the form prescribed by law. (n) ART. 780. Mixed succession is that effected partly by will and partly by operation of law. (n) ART. 781. The inheritance of a person includes not only the property and the transmissible rights and obligations existing at the time of his death, but also those which have accrued thereto since the opening of the succession. (n) ART. 782. An heir is a person called to the succession either by the provision of a will or by operation of law. Devisees and legatees are persons to whom gifts of real and personal property are respectively given by virtue of a will. (n) CHAPTER 2 TESTAMENTARY SUCCESSION SECTION 1.— Wills SUBSECTION 1.— Wills in General ART. 783. A will is an act whereby a person is permitted, with the formalities prescribed by law, to control to a certain degree the disposition of his estate, to take effect after his death. (667a) ART. 784. The making of a will is a strictly personal act; it cannot be left in whole or in part to the discretion of a third person, or accomplished through the instrumentality of an agent or attorney. (670a) ART. 785. The duration or efficacy of the designation of heirs, devisees or legatees, or the determination of the portions which they are to take, when referred to by name, cannot be left to the discretion of a third person. (670a) ART. 786. The testator may entrust to a third person the distribution of specific property or sums of money that he may leave in general to specified classes or causes, and also the designation of the persons, institutions or establishments to which such property or sums are to be given or applied. (671a) ART. 787. The testator may not make a testamentary disposition in such manner that another person has to determine whether or not it is to be operative. (n) ART. 788. If a testamentary disposition admits of different interpretations, in case of doubt, that interpretation by which the disposition is to be operative shall be preferred. (n) ART. 789. When there is an imperfect description, or when no person or property exactly answers the description, mistakes and omissions must be corrected, if the error appears from the context of the will or from extrinsic evidence, excluding the oral declarations of the testator as to his intention; and when an uncertainty arises upon the face of the will, as to the application of any of its provisions, the testator’s intention is to be ascertained from the words of the will, taking into consideration the circumstances under which it was made, excluding such oral declarations. (n) ART. 790. The words of a will are to be taken in their ordinary and grammatical sense, unless a clear intention to use them in another sense can be gathered, and that other can be ascertained. Technical words in a will are to be taken in their technical sense, unless the context clearly indicates a contrary intention, or unless it satisfactorily appears that the will was drawn solely by the testator, and that he was unacquainted with such technical sense. (675a) ART. 791. The words of a will are to receive an interpretation which will give to every expression some effect, rather than one which will render any of the expressions inoperative; and of two modes of interpreting a will, that is to be preferred which will prevent intestacy. (n) ART. 792. The invalidity of one of several dispositions contained in a will does not result in the invalidity of the other dispositions, unless it is to be presumed that the testator would not have made such other dispositions if the first invalid disposition had not been made. (n) ART. 793. Property acquired after the making of a will shall only pass thereby, as if the testator had possessed it at the time of making the will, should it expressly appear by the will that such was his intention. (n) ART. 794. Every devise or legacy shall convey all the interest which the testator could devise or bequeath in the property disposed of, unless it clearly appears from the will that he intended to convey a less interest. (n) ART. 795. The validity of a will as to its form depends upon the observance of the law in force at the time it is made. (n) SUBSECTION 2.— Testamentary Capacity and Intent ART. 796. All persons who are not expressly prohibited by law may make a will. (662) ART. 797. Persons of either sex under eighteen years of age cannot make a will. (n) ART. 798. In order to make a will it is essential that the testator be of sound mind at the time of its execution. (n) ART. 799. To be of sound mind, it is not necessary that the testator be in full possession of all his reasoning faculties, or that his mind be wholly unbroken, unimpaired, or unshattered by disease, injury or other cause. It shall be sufficient if the testator was able at the time of making the will to know the nature of the estate to be disposed of, the proper objects of his bounty, and the character of the testamentary act. (n) ART. 800. The law presumes that every person is of sound mind, in the absence of proof to the contrary. The burden of proof that the testator was not of sound mind at the time of making his dispositions is on the person who opposes the probate of the will; but if the testator, one month, or less, before making his will was publicly known to be insane, the person who maintains the validity of the will must prove that the testator made it during a lucid interval. (n) ART. 801. Supervening incapacity does not invalidate an effective will, nor is the will of an incapable validated by the supervening of capacity. (n) ART. 802. A married woman may make a will without the consent of her husband, and without the authority of the court. (n) ART. 803. A married woman may dispose by will of all her separate property as well as her share of the conjugal partnership or absolute community property. (n) SUBSECTION 3.— Forms of Wills ART. 804. Every will must be in writing and executed in a language or dialect known to the testator. (n) ART. 805. Every will, other than a holographic will, must be subscribed at the end thereof by the testator himself or by the testator’s name written by some other person in his presence, and by his express direction, and attested and subscribed by three or more credible witnesses in the presence of the testator and of one another. The testator or the person requested by him to write his name and the instrumental witnesses of the will, shall also sign, as aforesaid, each and every page thereof, except the last, on the left margin, and all the pages shall be numbered correlatively in letters placed on the upper part of each page. The attestation shall state the number of pages used upon which the will is written, and the fact that the testator signed the will and every page thereof, or caused some other person to write his name, under his express direction, in the presence of the instrumental witnesses, and that the latter witnessed and signed the will and all the pages thereof in the presence of the testator and of one another. If the attestation clause is in a language not known to the witnesses, it shall be interpreted to them. (n) ART. 806. Every will must be acknowledged before a notary public by the testator and the witnesses. The notary public shall not be required to retain a copy of the will, or file another with the office of the Clerk of Court. (n) ART. 807. If the testator be deaf, or a deaf-mute, he must personally read the will, if able to do so; otherwise, he shall designate two persons to read it and communicate to him, in some practicable manner, the contents thereof. (n) ART. 808. If the testator is blind, the will shall be read to him twice; once, by one of the subscribing witnesses, and again, by the notary public before whom the will is acknowledged. (n) ART. 809. In the absence of bad faith, forgery, or fraud, or undue and improper pressure and influence, defects and imperfections in the form of attestation or in the language used therein shall not render the will invalid if it is proved that the will was in fact executed and attested in substantial compliance with all the requirements of article 805. (n) ART. 810. A person may execute a holographic will which must be entirely written, dated, and signed by the hand of the testator himself. It is subject to no other form, and may be made in or out of the Philippines, and need not be witnessed. (678, 688a) ART. 811. In the probate of a holographic will, it shall be necessary that at least one witness who knows the handwriting and signature of the testator explicitly declare that the will and the signature are in the handwriting of the testator. If the will is contested, at least three of such witnesses shall be required. In the absence of any competent witness referred to in the preceding paragraph, and if the court deem it necessary, expert testimony may be resorted to. (691a) ART. 812. In holographic wills, the dispositions of the testator written below his signature must be dated and signed by him in order to make them valid as testamentary dispositions. (n) ART. 813. When a number of dispositions appearing in a holographic will are signed without being dated, and the last disposition has a signature and a date, such date validates the dispositions preceding it, whatever be the time of prior dispositions. (n) ART. 814. In case of any insertion, cancellation, erasure or alteration in a holographic will, the testator must authenticate the same by his full signature. (n) ART. 815. When a Filipino is in a foreign country, he is authorized to make a will in any of the forms established by the law of the country in which he may be. Such will may be probated in the Philippines. (n) ART. 816. The will of an alien who is abroad produces effect in the Philippines if made with the formalities prescribed by the law of the place in which he resides, or according to the formalities observed in his country, or in conformity with those which this Code prescribes. (n) ART. 817. A will made in the Philippines by a citizen or subject of another country, which is executed in accordance with the law of the country of which he is a citizen or subject, and which might be proved and allowed by the law of his own country, shall have the same effect as if executed according to the laws of the Philippines. (n) ART. 818. Two or more persons cannot make a will jointly, or in the same instrument, either for their reciprocal benefit or for the benefit of a third person. (669) ART. 819. Wills, prohibited by the preceding article, executed by Filipinos in a foreign country shall not be valid in the Philippines, even though authorized by the laws of the country where they may have been executed. (733a) SUBSECTION 4.— Witnesses to Wills ART. 820. Any person of sound mind and of the age of eighteen years or more, and not blind, deaf or dumb, and able to read and write, may be a witness to the execution of a will mentioned in article 805 of this Code. (n) ART. 821. The following are disqualified from being witnesses to a will: (1) Any person not domiciled in the Philippines; (2) Those who have been convicted of falsification of a document, perjury or false testimony. (n) ART. 822. If the witnesses attesting the execution of a will are competent at the time of attesting, their becoming subsequently incompetent shall not prevent the allowance of the will. (n) ART. 823. If a person attests the execution of a will, to whom or to whose spouse, or parent, or child, a devise or legacy is given by such will, such devise or legacy shall, so far only as concerns such person, or spouse, or parent, or child of such person, or any one claiming under such person or spouse, or parent, or child, be void, unless there are three other competent witnesses to such will. However, such person so attesting shall be admitted as a witness as if such devise or legacy had not been made or given. (n) ART. 824. A mere charge on the estate of the testator for the payment of debts due at the time of the testator’s death does not prevent his creditors from being competent witnesses to his will. (n) SUBSECTION 5.— Codicils and Incorporation by Reference ART. 825. A codicil is a supplement or addition to a will, made after the execution of a will and annexed to be taken as a part thereof, by which any disposition made in the original will is explained, added to, or altered. (n) ART. 826. In order that a codicil may be effective, it shall be executed as in the case of a will. (n) ART. 827. If a will, executed as required by this Code, incorporates into itself by reference any document or paper, such document or paper shall not be considered a part of the will unless the following requisites are present: (1) The document or paper referred to in the will must be in existence at the time of the execution of the will; (2) The will must clearly describe and identify the same, stating among other things the number of pages thereof; (3) It must be identified by clear and satisfactory proof as the document or paper referred to therein; and (4) It must be signed by the testator and the witnesses on each and every page, except in case of voluminous books of account or inventories. (n) SUBSECTION 6.— Revocation of Wills and Testamentary Dispositions ART. 828. A will may be revoked by the testator at any time before his death. Any waiver or restriction of this right is void. (737a) ART. 829. A revocation done outside the Philippines, by a person who does not have his domicile in this country, is valid when it is done according to the law of the place where the will was made, or according to the law of the place in which the testator had his domicile at the time; and if the revocation takes place in this country, when it is in accordance with the provisions of this Code. (n) ART. 830. No will shall be revoked except in the following cases: (1) By implication of law; or (2) By some will, codicil, or other writing executed as provided in case of wills; or (3) By burning, tearing, cancelling, or obliterating the will with the intention of revoking it, by the testator himself, or by some other person in his presence, and by his express direction. If burned, torn, cancelled, or obliterated by some other person, without the express direction of the testator, the will may still be established, and the estate distributed in accordance therewith, if its contents, and due execution, and the fact of its unauthorized destruction, cancellation, or obliteration are established according to the Rules of Court. (n) ART. 831. Subsequent wills which do not revoke the previous ones in an express manner, annul only such dispositions in the prior wills as are inconsistent with or contrary to those contained in the later wills. (n) ART. 832. A revocation made in a subsequent will shall take effect, even if the new will should become inoperative by reason of the incapacity of the heirs, devisees or legatees designated therein, or by their renunciation. (740a) ART. 833. A revocation of a will based on a false cause or an illegal cause is null and void. (n) ART. 834. The recognition of an illegitimate child does not lose its legal effect, even though the will wherein it was made should be revoked. (741) SUBSECTION 7.— Republication and Revival of Wills ART. 835. The testator cannot republish, without reproducing in a subsequent will, the dispositions contained in a previous one which is void as to its form. (n) ART. 836. The execution of a codicil referring to a previous will has the effect of republishing the will as modified by the codicil. (n) ART. 837. If after making a will, the testator makes a second will expressly revoking the first, the revocation of the second will does not revive the first will, which can be revived only by another will or codicil. (739a) SUBSECTION 8.— Allowance and Disallowance of Wills ART. 838. No will shall pass either real or personal property unless it is proved and allowed in accordance with the Rules of Court. The testator himself may, during his lifetime, petition the court having jurisdiction for the allowance of his will. In such case, the pertinent provisions of the Rules of Court for the allowance of wills after the testator’s death shall govern. The Supreme Court shall formulate such additional Rules of Court as may be necessary for the allowance of wills on petition of the testator. Subject to the right of appeal, the allowance of the will, either during the lifetime of the testator or after his death, shall be conclusive as to its due execution. (n) ART. 839. The will shall be disallowed in any of the following cases: (1) If the formalities required by law have not been complied with; (2) If the testator was insane, or otherwise mentally incapable of making a will, at the time of its execution; (3) If it was executed through force or under duress, or the influence of fear, or threats; (4) If it was procured by undue and improper pressure and influence, on the part of the beneficiary or of some other person; (5) If the signature of the testator was procured by fraud; (6) If the testator acted by mistake or did not intend that the instrument he signed should be his will at the time of affixing his signature thereto. (n) SECTION 2.— Institution of Heir ART. 840. Institution of heir is an act by virtue of which a testator designates in his will the person or persons who are to succeed him in his property and transmissible rights and obligations. (n) ART. 841. A will shall be valid even though it should not contain an institution of an heir, or such institution should not comprise the entire estate, and even though the person so instituted should not accept the inheritance or should be incapacitated to succeed. In such cases the testamentary dispositions made in accordance with law shall be complied with and the remainder of the estate shall pass to the legal heirs. (764) ART. 842. One who has no compulsory heirs may dispose by will of all his estate or any part of it in favor of any person having capacity to succeed. One who has compulsory heirs may dispose of his estate provided he does not contravene the provisions of this Code with regard to the legitime of said heirs. (763a) ART. 843. The testator shall designate the heir by his name and surname, and when there are two persons having the same names, he shall indicate some circumstance by which the instituted heir may be known. Even though the testator may have omitted the name of the heir, should he designate him in such manner that there can be no doubt as to who has been instituted, the institution shall be valid. (772) ART. 844. An error in the name, surname, or circumstances of the heir shall not vitiate the institution when it is possible, in any other manner, to know with certainty the person instituted. If among persons having the same names and surnames, there is a similarity of circumstances in such a way that, even with the use of other proof, the person instituted cannot be identified, none of them shall be an heir. (773a) ART. 845. Every disposition in favor of an unknown person shall be void, unless by some event or circumstance his identity becomes certain. However, a disposition in favor of a definite class or group of persons shall be valid. (750a) ART. 846. Heirs instituted without designation of shares shall inherit in equal parts. (765) ART. 847. When the testator institutes some heirs individually and others collectively as when he says, “I designate as my heirs A and B, and the children of C,” those collectively designated shall be considered as individually instituted, unless it clearly appears that the intention of the testator was otherwise. (769a) ART. 848. If the testator should institute his brothers and sisters, and he has some of full blood and others of half blood, the inheritance shall be distributed equally unless a different intention appears. (770a) ART. 849. When the testator calls to the succession a person and his children they are all deemed to have been instituted simultaneously and not successively. (771) ART. 850. The statement of a false cause for the institution of an heir shall be considered as not written, unless it appears from the will that the testator would not have made such institution if he had known the falsity of such cause. (767a) ART. 851. If the testator has instituted only one heir, and the institution is limited to an aliquot part of the inheritance, legal succession takes place with respect to the remainder of the estate. The same rule applies, if the testator has instituted several heirs each being limited to an aliquot part, and all the parts do not cover the whole inheritance. (n) ART. 852. If it was the intention of the testator that the instituted heirs should become sole heirs to the whole estate, or the whole free portion, as the case may be, and each of them has been instituted to an aliquot part of the inheritance and their aliquot parts together do not cover the whole inheritance, or the whole free portion, each part shall be increased proportionally. (n) ART. 853. If each of the instituted heirs has been given an aliquot part of the inheritance, and the parts together exceed the whole inheritance, or the whole free portion, as the case may be, each part shall be reduced proportionally. (n) ART. 854. The preterition or omission of one, some, or all of the compulsory heirs in the direct line, whether living at the time of the execution of the will or born after the death of the testator, shall annul the institution of heir; but the devises and legacies shall be valid insofar as they are not inofficious. If the omitted compulsory heirs should die before the testator, the institution shall be effectual, without prejudice to the right of representation. (814a) ART. 855. The share of a child or descendant omitted in a will must first be taken from the part of the estate not disposed of by the will, if any; if that is not sufficient, so much as may be necessary must be taken proportionally from the shares of the other compulsory heirs. (1080a) ART. 856. A voluntary heir who dies before the testator transmits nothing to his heirs. A compulsory heir who dies before the testator, a person incapacitated to succeed, and one who renounces the inheritance, shall transmit no right to his own heirs except in cases expressly provided for in this Code. (766a) SECTION 3.— Substitution of Heirs ART. 857. Substitution is the appointment of another heir so that he may enter into the inheritance in default of the heir originally instituted. (n) ART. 858. Substitution of heirs may be: (1) Simple or common; (2) Brief or compendious; (3) Reciprocal; or (4) Fideicommissary. (n) ART. 859. The testator may designate one or more persons to substitute the heir or heirs instituted in case such heir or heirs should die before him, or should not wish, or should be incapacitated to accept the inheritance. A simple substitution, without a statement of the cases to which it refers, shall comprise the three mentioned in the preceding paragraph, unless the testator has otherwise provided. (774) ART. 860. Two or more persons may be substituted for one; and one person for two or more heirs. (778) ART. 861. If heirs instituted in unequal shares should be reciprocally substituted, the substitute shall acquire the share of the heir who dies, renounces, or is incapacitated, unless it clearly appears that the intention of the testator was otherwise. If there are more than one substitute, they shall have the same share in the substitution as in the institution. (779a) ART. 862. The substitute shall be subject to the same charges and conditions imposed upon the instituted heir, unless the testator has expressly provided the contrary, or the charges or conditions are personally applicable only to the heir instituted. (780) ART. 863. A fideicommissary substitution by virtue of which the fiduciary or first heir instituted is entrusted with the obligation to preserve and to transmit to a second heir the whole or part of the inheritance, shall be valid and shall take effect, provided such substitution does not go beyond one degree from the heir originally instituted, and provided further, that the fiduciary or first heir and the second heir are living at the time of the death of the testator. (781a) ART. 864. A fideicommissary substitution can never burden the legitime. (782a) ART. 865. Every fideicommissary substitution must be expressly made in order that it may be valid. The fiduciary shall be obliged to deliver the inheritance to the second heir, without other deductions than those which arise from legitimate expenses, credits and improvements, save in the case where the testator has provided otherwise. (783) ART. 866. The second heir shall acquire a right to the succession from the time of the testator’s death, even though he should die before the fiduciary. The right of the second heir shall pass to his heirs. (784) ART. 867. The following shall not take effect: (1) Fideicommissary substitutions which are not made in an express manner, either by giving them this name, or imposing upon the fiduciary the absolute obligation to deliver the property to a second heir; (2) Provisions which contain a perpetual prohibition to alienate, and even a temporary one, beyond the limit fixed in article 863; (3) Those which impose upon the heir the charge of paying to various persons successively, beyond the limit prescribed in article 863, a certain income or pension; (4) Those which leave to a person the whole or part of the hereditary property in order that he may apply or invest the same according to secret instructions communicated to him by the testator. (785a) ART. 868. The nullity of the fideicommissary substitution does not prejudice the validity of the institution of the heirs first designated; the fideicommissary clause shall simply be considered as not written. (786) ART. 869. A provision whereby the testator leaves to a person the whole or part of the inheritance, and to another the usufruct, shall be valid. If he gives the usufruct to various persons, not simultaneously, but successively, the provisions of article 863 shall apply. (787a) ART. 870. The dispositions of the testator declaring all or part of the estate inalienable for more than twenty years are void. (n) SECTION 4.— Conditional Testamentary Dispositions and Testamentary Dispositions With a Term ART. 871. The institution of an heir may be made conditionally, or for a certain purpose or cause. (790a) ART. 872. The testator cannot impose any charge, condition, or substitution whatsoever upon the legitimes prescribed in this Code. Should he do so, the same shall be considered as not imposed. (813a) ART. 873. Impossible conditions and those contrary to law or good customs shall be considered as not imposed and shall in no manner prejudice the heir, even if the testator should otherwise provide. (792a) ART. 874. An absolute condition not to contract a first or subsequent marriage shall be considered as not written unless such condition has been imposed on the widow or widower by the deceased spouse, or by the latter’s ascendants or descendants. Nevertheless, the right of usufruct, or an allowance or some personal prestation may be devised or bequeathed to any person for the time during which he or she should remain unmarried or in widowhood. (793a) ART. 875. Any disposition made upon the condition that the heir shall make some provision in his will in favor of the testator or of any other person shall be void. (794a) ART. 876. Any purely potestative condition imposed upon an heir must be fulfilled by him as soon as he learns of the testator’s death. This rule shall not apply when the condition, already complied with, cannot be fulfilled again. (795a) ART. 877. If the condition is casual or mixed, it shall be sufficient if it happen or be fulfilled at any time before or after the death of the testator, unless he has provided otherwise. Should it have existed or should it have been fulfilled at the time the will was executed and the testator was unaware thereof, it shall be deemed as complied with. If he had knowledge thereof, the condition shall be considered fulfilled only when it is of such a nature that it can no longer exist or be complied with again. (796) ART. 878. A disposition with a suspensive term does not prevent the instituted heir from acquiring his rights and transmitting them to his heirs even before the arrival of the term. (799a) ART. 879. If the potestative condition imposed upon the heir is negative, or consists in not doing or not giving something, he shall comply by giving a security that he will not do or give that which has been prohibited by the testator, and that in case of contravention he will return whatever he may have received, together with its fruits and interests. (800a) ART. 880. If the heir be instituted under a suspensive condition or term, the estate shall be placed under administration until the condition is fulfilled, or until it becomes certain that it cannot be fulfilled, or until the arrival of the term. The same shall be done if the heir does not give the security required in the preceding article. (801a) ART. 881. The appointment of the administrator of the estate mentioned in the preceding article, as well as the manner of the administration and the rights and obligations of the administrator shall be governed by the Rules of Court. (804a) ART. 882. The statement of the object of the institution, or the application of the property left by the testator, or the charge imposed by him, shall not be considered as a condition unless it appears that such was his intention. That which has been left in this manner may be claimed at once provided that the instituted heir or his heirs give security for compliance with the wishes of the testator and for the return of anything he or they may receive, together with its fruits and interests, if he or they should disregard this obligation. (797a) ART. 883. When without the fault of the heir, an institution referred to in the preceding article cannot take effect in the exact manner stated by the testator, it shall be complied with in a manner most analogous to and in conformity with his wishes. If the person interested in the condition should prevent its fulfillment, without the fault of the heir, the condition shall be deemed to have been complied with. (798a) ART. 884. Conditions imposed by the testator upon the heirs shall be governed by the rules established for conditional obligations in all matters not provided for by this Section. (791a) ART. 885. The designation of the day or time when the effects of the institution of an heir shall commence or cease shall be valid. In both cases, the legal heir shall be considered as called to the succession until the arrival of the period or its expiration. But in the first case he shall not enter into possession of the property until after having given sufficient security, with the intervention of the instituted heir. (805) SECTION 5.— Legitime ART. 886. Legitime is that part of the testator’s property which he cannot dispose of because the law has reserved it for certain heirs who are, therefore, called compulsory heirs. (806) ART. 887. The following are compulsory heirs: (1) Legitimate children and descendants, with respect to their legitimate parents and ascendants; (2) In default of the foregoing, legitimate parents and ascendants, with respect to their legitimate children and descendants; (3) The widow or widower; (4) Acknowledged natural children, and natural children by legal fiction; (5) Other illegitimate children referred to in article 287. Compulsory heirs mentioned in Nos. 3, 4 and 5 are not excluded by those in Nos. 1 and 2; neither do they exclude one another. In all cases of illegitimate children, their filiation must be duly proved. The father or mother of illegitimate children of the three classes mentioned, shall inherit from them in the manner and to the extent established by this Code. (807a) ART. 888. The legitime of legitimate children and descendants consists of one-half of the hereditary estate of the father and of the mother. The latter may freely dispose of the remaining half, subject to the rights of illegitimate children and of the surviving spouse as hereinafter provided. (808a) ART. 889. The legitime of legitimate parents or ascendants consists of one-half of the hereditary estates of their children and descendants. The children or descendants may freely dispose of the other half, subject to the rights of illegitimate children and of the surviving spouse as hereinafter provided. (809a) ART. 890. The legitime reserved for the legitimate parents shall be divided between them equally; if one of the parents should have died, the whole shall pass to the survivor. If the testator leaves neither father nor mother, but is survived by ascendants of equal degree of the paternal and maternal lines, the legitime shall be divided equally between both lines. If the ascendants should be of different degrees, it shall pertain entirely to the ones nearest in degree of either line. (810) ART. 891. The ascendant who inherits from his descendant any property which the latter may have acquired by gratuitous title from another ascendant, or a brother or sister, is obliged to reserve such property as he may have acquired by operation of law for the benefit of relatives who are within the third degree and who belong to the line from which said property came. (871) ART. 892. If only one legitimate child or descendant of the deceased survives, the widow or widower shall be entitled to one-fourth of the hereditary estate. In case of a legal separation, the surviving spouse may inherit if it was the deceased who had given cause for the same. If there are two or more legitimate children or descendants, the surviving spouse shall be entitled to a portion equal to the legitime of each of the legitimate children or descendants. In both cases, the legitime of the surviving spouse shall be taken from the portion that can be freely disposed of by the testator. (834a) ART. 893. If the testator leaves no legitimate descendants, but leaves legitimate ascendants, the surviving spouse shall have a right to one-fourth of the hereditary estate. This fourth shall be taken from the free portion of the estate. (836a) ART. 894. If the testator leaves illegitimate children, the surviving spouse shall be entitled to one-third of the hereditary estate of the deceased and the illegitimate children to another third. The remaining third shall be at the free disposal of the testator. (n) ART. 895. The legitime of each of the acknowledged natural children and each of the natural children by legal fiction shall consist of one-half of the legitime of each of the legitimate children or descendants. The legitime of an illegitimate child who is neither an acknowledged natural, nor a natural child by legal fiction, shall be equal in every case to four-fifths of the legitime of an acknowledged natural child. The legitime of the illegitimate children shall be taken from the portion of the estate at the free disposal of the testator, provided that in no case shall the total legitime of such illegitimate children exceed that free portion, and that the legitime of the surviving spouse must first be fully satisfied. (840a) ART. 896. Illegitimate children who may survive with legitimate parents or ascendants of the deceased shall be entitled to one-fourth of the hereditary estate to be taken from the portion at the free disposal of the testator. (841a) ART. 897. When the widow or widower survives with legitimate children or descendants, and acknowledged natural children, or natural children by legal fiction, such surviving spouse shall be entitled to a portion equal to the legitime of each of the legitimate children which must be taken from that part of the estate which the testator can freely dispose of. (n) ART. 898. If the widow or widower survives with legitimate children or descendants, and with illegitimate children other than acknowledged natural, or natural children by legal fiction, the share of the surviving spouse shall be the same as that provided in the preceding article. (n) ART. 899. When the widow or widower survives with legitimate parents or ascendants and with illegitimate children, such surviving spouse shall be entitled to one-eighth of the hereditary estate of the deceased which must be taken from the free portion, and the illegitimate children shall be entitled to one-fourth of the estate which shall be taken also from the disposable portion. The testator may freely dispose of the remaining one-eighth of the estate. (n) ART. 900. If the only survivor is the widow or widower, she or he shall be entitled to one-half of the hereditary estate of the deceased spouse, and the testator may freely dispose of the other half. (837a) If the marriage between the surviving spouse and the testator was solemnized in articulo mortis, and the testator died within three months from the time of the marriage, the legitime of the surviving spouse as the sole heir shall be one-third of the hereditary estate, except when they have been living as husband and wife for more than five years. In the latter case, the legitime of the surviving spouse shall be that specified in the preceding paragraph. (n) ART. 901. When the testator dies leaving illegitimate children and no other compulsory heirs, such illegitimate children shall have a right to one-half of the hereditary estate of the deceased. The other half shall be at the free disposal of the testator. (842a) ART. 902. The rights of illegitimate children set forth in the preceding articles are transmitted upon their death to their descendants, whether legitimate or illegitimate. (843a) ART. 903. The legitime of the parents who have an illegitimate child, when such child leaves neither legitimate descendants, nor a surviving spouse, nor illegitimate children, is one-half of the hereditary estate of such illegitimate child. If only legitimate or illegitimate children are left, the parents are not entitled to any legitime whatsoever. If only the widow or widower survives with parents of the illegitimate child, the legitime of the parents is one-fourth of the hereditary estate of the child, and that of the surviving spouse also one-fourth of the estate. (n) ART. 904. The testator cannot deprive his compulsory heirs of their legitime, except in cases expressly specified by law. Neither can he impose upon the same any burden, encumbrance, condition, or substitution of any kind whatsoever. (813a) ART. 905. Every renunciation or compromise as regards a future legitime between the person owing it and his compulsory heirs is void, and the latter may claim the same upon the death of the former; but they must bring to collation whatever they may have received by virtue of the renunciation or compromise. (816) ART. 906. Any compulsory heir to whom the testator has left by any title less than the legitime belonging to him may demand that the same be fully satisfied. (815) ART. 907. Testamentary dispositions that impair or diminish the legitime of the compulsory heirs shall be reduced on petition of the same, insofar as they may be inofficious or excessive. (817) ART. 908. To determine the legitime, the value of the property left at the death of the testator shall be considered, deducting all debts and charges, which shall not include those imposed in the will. To the net value of the hereditary estate, shall be added the value of all donations by the testator that are subject to collation, at the time he made them. (818a) ART. 909. Donations given to children shall be charged to their legitime. Donations made to strangers shall be charged to that part of the estate of which the testator could have disposed by his last will. Insofar as they may be inofficious or may exceed the disposable portion, they shall be reduced according to the rules established by this Code. (819a) ART. 910. Donations which an illegitimate child may have received during the lifetime of his father or mother, shall be charged to his legitime. Should they exceed the portion that can be freely disposed of, they shall be reduced in the manner prescribed by this Code. (847a) ART. 911. After the legitime has been determined in accordance with the three preceding articles, the reduction shall be made as follows: (1) Donations shall be respected as long as the legitime can be covered, reducing or annulling, if necessary, the devises or legacies made in the will; (2) The reduction of the devises or legacies shall be pro rata, without any distinction whatever. If the testator has directed that a certain devise or legacy be paid in preference to others, it shall not suffer any reduction until the latter have been applied in full to the payment of the legitime. (3) If the devise or legacy consists of a usufruct or life annuity, whose value may be considered greater than that of the disposable portion, the compulsory heirs may choose between complying with the testamentary provision and delivering to the devisee or legatee the part of the inheritance of which the testator could freely dispose. (820a) ART. 912. If the devise subject to reduction should consist of real property, which cannot be conveniently divided, it shall go to the devisee if the reduction does not absorb one-half of its value; and in a contrary case, to the compulsory heirs; but the former and the latter shall reimburse each other in cash for what respectively belongs to them. The devisee who is entitled to a legitime may retain the entire property, provided its value does not exceed that of the disposable portion and of the share pertaining to him as legitime. (821) ART. 913. If the heirs or devisees do not choose to avail themselves of the right granted by the preceding article, any heir or devisee who did not have such right may exercise it; should the latter not make use of it, the property shall be sold at public auction at the instance of any one of the interested parties. (822) ART. 914. The testator may devise and bequeath the free portion as he may deem fit. (n) SECTION 6.— Disinheritance ART. 915. A compulsory heir may, in consequence of disinheritance, be deprived of his legitime, for causes expressly stated by law. (848a) ART. 916. Disinheritance can be effected only through a will wherein the legal cause therefor shall be specified. (849) ART. 917. The burden of proving the truth of the cause for disinheritance shall rest upon the other heirs of the testator, if the disinherited heir should deny it. (850) ART. 918. Disinheritance without a specification of the cause, or for a cause the truth of which, if contradicted, is not proved, or which is not one of those set forth in this Code, shall annul the institution of heirs insofar as it may prejudice the person disinherited; but the devises and legacies and other testamentary dispositions shall be valid to such extent as will not impair the legitime. (851a) ART. 919. The following shall be sufficient causes for the disinheritance of children and descendants, legitimate as well as illegitimate: (1) When a child or descendant has been found guilty of an attempt against the life of the testator, his or her spouse, descendants, or ascendants; (2) When a child or descendant has accused the testator of a crime for which the law prescribes imprisonment for six years or more, if the accusation has been found groundless; (3) When a child or descendant has been convicted of adultery or concubinage with the spouse of the testator; (4) When a child or descendant by fraud, violence, intimidation, or undue influence causes the testator to make a will or to change one already made; (5) A refusal without justifiable cause to support the parent or ascendant who disinherits such child or descendant; (6) Maltreatment of the testator by word or deed, by the child or descendant; (7) When a child or descendant leads a dishonorable or disgraceful life; (8) Conviction of a crime which carries with it the penalty of civil interdiction. (756, 853, 674a) ART. 920. The following shall be sufficient causes for the disinheritance of parents or ascendants, whether legitimate or illegitimate: (1) When the parents have abandoned their children or induced their daughters to live a corrupt or immoral life, or attempted against their virtue; (2) When the parent or ascendant has been convicted of an attempt against the life of the testator, his or her spouse, descendants, or ascendants; (3) When the parent or ascendant has accused the testator of a crime for which the law prescribes imprisonment for six years or more, if the accusation has been found to be false; (4) When the parent or ascendant has been convicted of adultery or concubinage with the spouse of the testator; (5) When the parent or ascendant by fraud, violence, intimidation, or undue influence causes the testator to make a will or to change one already made; (6) The loss of parental authority for causes specified in this Code; (7) The refusal to support the children or descendants without justifiable cause; (8) An attempt by one of the parents against the life of the other, unless there has been a reconciliation between them. (756, 854, 674a) ART. 921. The following shall be sufficient causes for disinheriting a spouse: (1) When the spouse has been convicted of an attempt against the life of the testator, his or her descendants, or ascendants; (2) When the spouse has accused the testator of a crime for which the law prescribes imprisonment of six years or more, and the accusation has been found to be false; (3) When the spouse by fraud, violence, intimidation, or undue influence cause the testator to make a will or to change one already made; (4) When the spouse has given cause for legal separation; (5) When the spouse has given grounds for the loss of parental authority; (6) Unjustifiable refusal to support the children or the other spouse. (756, 855, 674a) ART. 922. A subsequent reconciliation between the offender and the offended person deprives the latter of the right to disinherit, and renders ineffectual any disinheritance that may have been made. (856) ART. 923. The children and descendants of the person disinherited shall take his or her place and shall preserve the rights of compulsory heirs with respect to the legitime; but the disinherited parent shall not have the usufruct or administration of the property which constitutes the legitime. (857) SECTION 7.— Legacies and Devises ART. 924. All things and rights which are within the commerce of man may be bequeathed or devised. (865a) ART. 925. A testator may charge with legacies and devises not only his compulsory heirs but also the legatees and devisees. The latter shall be liable for the charge only to the extent of the value of the legacy or the devise received by them. The compulsory heirs shall not be liable for the charge beyond the amount of the free portion given them. (858a) ART. 926. When the testator charges one of the heirs with a legacy or devise, he alone shall be bound. Should he not charge anyone in particular, all shall be liable in the same proportion in which they may inherit. (859) ART. 927. If two or more heirs take possession of the estate, they shall be solidarily liable for the loss or destruction of a thing devised or bequeathed, even though only one of them should have been negligent. (n) ART. 928. The heir who is bound to deliver the legacy or devise shall be liable in case of eviction, if the thing is indeterminate and is indicated only by its kind. (860) ART. 929. If the testator, heir, or legatee owns only a part of, or an interest in the thing bequeathed, the legacy or devise shall be understood limited to such part or interest, unless the testator expressly declares that he gives the thing in its entirety. (864a) ART. 930. The legacy or devise of a thing belonging to another person is void, if the testator erroneously believed that the thing pertained to him. But if the thing bequeathed, though not belonging to the testator when he made the will, afterwards becomes his, by whatever title, the disposition shall take effect. (862a) ART. 931. If the testator orders that a thing belonging to another be acquired in order that it be given to a legatee or devisee, the heir upon whom the obligation is imposed or the estate must acquire it and give the same to the legatee or devisee; but if the owner of the thing refuses to alienate the same, or demands an excessive price therefor, the heir or the estate shall only be obliged to give the just value of the thing. (861a) ART. 932. The legacy or devise of a thing which at the time of the execution of the will already belonged to the legatee or devisee shall be ineffective, even though another person may have some interest therein. If the testator expressly orders that the thing be freed from such interest or encumbrance, the legacy or devise shall be valid to that extent. (866a) ART. 933. If the thing bequeathed belonged to the legatee or devisee at the time of the execution of the will, the legacy or devise shall be without effect, even though it may have subsequently alienated by him. If the legatee or devisee acquires it gratuitously after such time, he can claim nothing by virtue of the legacy or devise; but if it has been acquired by onerous title he can demand reimbursement from the heir or the estate. (878a) ART. 934. If the testator should bequeath or devise something pledged or mortgaged to secure a recoverable debt before the execution of the will, the estate is obliged to pay the debt, unless the contrary intention appears. The same rule applies when the thing is pledged or mortgaged after the execution of the will. Any other charge, perpetual or temporary, with which the thing bequeathed is burdened, passes with it to the legatee or devisee. (867a) ART. 935. The legacy of a credit against a third person or of the remission or release of a debt of the legatee shall be effective only as regards that part of the credit or debt existing at the time of the death of the testator. In the first case, the estate shall comply with the legacy by assigning to the legatee all rights of action it may have against the debtor. In the second case, by giving the legatee an acquittance, should he request one. In both cases, the legacy shall comprise all interests on the credit or debt which may be due the testator at the time of his death. (870a) ART. 936. The legacy referred to in the preceding article shall lapse if the testator, after having made it, should bring an action against the debtor for the payment of his debt, even if such payment should not have been effected at the time of his death. The legacy to the debtor of the thing pledged by him is understood to discharge only the right of pledge. (871) ART. 937. A generic legacy of release or remission of debts comprises those existing at the time of the execution of the will, but not subsequent ones. (872) ART. 938. A legacy or devise made to a creditor shall not be applied to his credit, unless the testator so expressly declares. In the latter case, the creditor shall have the right to collect the excess, if any, of the credit or of the legacy or devise. (873a) ART. 939. If the testator orders the payment of what he believes he owes but does not in fact owe, the disposition shall be considered as not written. If as regards a specified debt more than the amount thereof is ordered paid, the excess is not due, unless a contrary intention appears. The foregoing provisions are without prejudice to the fulfillment of natural obligations. (n) ART. 940. In alternative legacies or devises, the choice is presumed to be left to the heir upon whom the obligation to give the legacy or devise may be imposed, or the executor or administrator of the estate if no particular heir is so obliged. If the heir, legatee or devisee, who may have been given the choice, dies before making it, this right shall pass to the respective heirs. Once made, the choice is irrevocable. In the alternative legacies or devises, except as herein provided, the provisions of this Code regulating obligations of the same kind shall be observed, save such modifications as may appear from the intention expressed by the testator. (874a) ART. 941. A legacy of generic personal property shall be valid even if there be no things of the same kind in the estate. A devise of indeterminate real property shall be valid only if there be immovable property of its kind in the estate. The right of choice shall belong to the executor or administrator who shall comply with the legacy by the delivery of a thing which is neither of inferior nor of superior quality. (875a) ART. 942. Whenever the testator expressly leaves the right of choice to the heir, or to the legatee or devisee, the former may give or the latter may choose whichever he may prefer. (876a) ART. 943. If the heir, legatee or devisee cannot make the choice, in case it has been granted him, his right shall pass to his heirs; but a choice once made shall be irrevocable. (877a) ART. 944. A legacy for education lasts until the legatee is of age, or beyond the age of majority in order that the legatee may finish some professional, vocational or general course, provided he pursues his course diligently. A legacy for support lasts during the lifetime of the legatee, if the testator has not otherwise provided. If the testator has not fixed the amount of such legacies, it shall be fixed in accordance with the social standing and the circumstances of the legatee and the value of the estate. If the testator during his lifetime used to give the legatee a certain sum of money or other things by way of support, the same amount shall be deemed bequeathed, unless it be markedly disproportionate to the value of the estate. (879a) ART. 945. If a periodical pension, or a certain annual, monthly, or weekly amount is bequeathed, the legatee may petition the court for the first installment upon the death of the testator, and for the following ones which shall be due at the beginning of each period; such payment shall not be returned, even though the legatee should die before the expiration of the period which has commenced. (880a) ART. 946. If the thing bequeathed should be subject to a usufruct, the legatee or devisee shall respect such right until it is legally extinguished. (868a) ART. 947. The legatee or devisee acquires a right to the pure and simple legacies or devises from the death of the testator, and transmits it to his heirs. (881a) ART. 948. If the legacy or devise is of a specific and determinate thing pertaining to the testator, the legatee or devisee acquires the ownership thereof upon the death of the testator, as well as any growing fruits, or unborn offspring of animals, or uncollected income; but not the income which was due and unpaid before the latter’s death. From the moment of the testator’s death, the thing bequeathed shall be at the risk of the legatee or devisee, who shall, therefore, bear its loss or deterioration, and shall be benefited by its increase or improvement, without prejudice to the responsibility of the executor or administrator. (882a) ART. 949. If the bequest should not be of a specific and determinate thing, but is generic or of quantity, its fruits and interests from the time of the death of the testator shall pertain to the legatee or devisee if the testator has expressly so ordered. (884a) ART. 950. If the estate should not be sufficient to cover all the legacies or devises, their payment shall be made in the following order: (1) Remuneratory legacies or devises; (2) Legacies or devises declared by the testator to be preferential; (3) Legacies for support; (4) Legacies for education; (5) Legacies or devises of a specific, determinate thing which forms a part of the estate; (6) All others pro rata. (887a) ART. 951. The thing bequeathed shall be delivered with all its accessions and accessories and in the condition in which it may be upon the death of the testator. (883a) ART. 952. The heir, charged with a legacy or devise, or the executor or administrator of the estate, must deliver the very thing bequeathed if he is able to do so and cannot discharge this obligation by paying its value. Legacies of money must be paid in cash, even though the heir or the estate may not have any. The expenses necessary for the delivery of the thing bequeathed shall be for the account of the heir or the estate, but without prejudice to the legitime. (886a) ART. 953. The legatee or devisee cannot take possession of the thing bequeathed upon his own authority, but shall request its delivery and possession of the heir charged with the legacy or devise, or of the executor or administrator of the estate should he be authorized by the court to deliver it. (885a) ART. 954. The legatee or devisee cannot accept a part of the legacy or devise and repudiate the other, if the latter be onerous. Should he die before having accepted the legacy or devise, leaving several heirs, some of the latter may accept and the others may repudiate the share respectively belonging to them in the legacy or devise. (889a) ART. 955. The legatee or devisee of two legacies or devises, one of which is onerous, cannot renounce the onerous one and accept the other. If both are onerous or gratuitous, he shall be free to accept or renounce both, or to renounce either. But if the testator intended that the two legacies or devises should be inseparable from each other, the legatee or devisee must either accept or renounce both. Any compulsory heir who is at the same time a legatee or devisee may waive the inheritance and accept the legacy or devise, or renounce the latter and accept the former, or waive or accept both. (890a) ART. 956. If the legatee or devisee cannot or is unwilling to accept the legacy or devise, or if the legacy or devise for any reason should become ineffective, it shall be merged into the mass of the estate, except in cases of substitution and of the right of accretion. (888a) ART. 957. The legacy or devise shall be without effect: (1) If the testator transforms the thing bequeathed in such a manner that it does not retain either the form or the denomination it had; (2) If the testator by any title or for any cause alienates the thing bequeathed or any part thereof, it being understood that in the latter case the legacy or devise shall be without effect only with respect to the part thus alienated. If after the alienation the thing should again belong to the testator, even if it be by reason of nullity of the contract, the legacy or devise shall not thereafter be valid, unless the reacquisition shall have been effected by virtue of the exercise of the right of repurchase; (3) If the thing bequeathed is totally lost during the lifetime of the testator, or after his death without the heir’s fault. Nevertheless, the person obliged to pay the legacy or devise shall be liable for eviction if the thing bequeathed should not have been determinate as to its kind, in accordance with the provisions of article 928. (869a) ART. 958. A mistake as to the name of the thing bequeathed or devised, is of no consequence, if it is possible to identify the thing which the testator intended to bequeath or devise. (n) ART. 959. A disposition made in general terms in favor of the testator’s relatives shall be understood to be in favor of those nearest in degree. (751) CHAPTER 3 LEGAL OR INTESTATE SUCCESSION SECTION 1.— General Provisions ART. 960. Legal or intestate succession takes place: (1) If a person dies without a will, or with a void will, or one which has subsequently lost its validity; (2) When the will does not institute an heir to, or dispose of all the property belonging to the testator. In such case, legal succession shall take place only with respect to the property of which the testator has not disposed; (3) If the suspensive condition attached to the institution of heir does not happen or is not fulfilled, or if the heir dies before the testator, or repudiates the inheritance, there being no substitution, and no right of accretion takes place; (4) When the heir instituted is incapable of succeeding, except in cases provided in this Code. (912a) ART. 961. In default of testamentary heirs, the law vests the inheritance, in accordance with the rules hereinafter set forth, in the legitimate and illegitimate relatives of the deceased, in the surviving spouse, and in the State. (913a) ART. 962. In every inheritance, the relative nearest in degree excludes the more distant ones, saving the right of representation when it properly takes place. Relatives in the same degree shall inherit in equal shares, subject to the provisions of article 1006 with respect to relatives of the full and half blood, and of article 987, paragraph 2, concerning division between the paternal and maternal lines. (921a) SUBSECTION 1.— Relationship ART. 963. Proximity of relationship is determined by the number of generations. Each generation forms a degree. (915) ART. 964. A series of degrees forms a line, which may be either direct or collateral. A direct line is that constituted by the series of degrees among ascendants and descendants. A collateral line is that constituted by the series of degrees among persons who are not ascendants and descendants, but who come from a common ancestor. (916a) ART. 965. The direct line is either descending or ascending. The former unites the head of the family with those who descend from him. The latter binds a person with those from whom he descends. (917) ART. 966. In the line, as many degrees are counted as there are generations or persons, excluding the progenitor. In the direct line, ascent is made to the common ancestor. Thus, the child is one degree removed from the parent, two from the grandfather, and three from the great-grandparent. In the collateral line, ascent is made to the common ancestor and then descent is made to the person with whom the computation is to be made. Thus, a person is two degrees removed from his brother, three from his uncle, who is the brother of his father, four from his first cousin, and so forth. (918a) ART. 967. Full blood relationship is that existing between persons who have the same father and the same mother. Half blood relationship is that existing between persons who have the same father, but not the same mother, or the same mother, but not the same father. (920a) ART. 968. If there are several relatives of the same degree, and one or some of them are unwilling or incapacitated to succeed, his portion shall accrue to the others of the same degree, save the right of representation when it should take place. (922) ART. 969. If the inheritance should be repudiated by the nearest relative, should there be one only, or by all the nearest relatives called by law to succeed, should there be several, those of the following degree shall inherit in their own right and cannot represent the person or persons repudiating the inheritance. (923) SUBSECTION 2.— Right of Representation ART. 970. Representation is a right created by fiction of law, by virtue of which the representative is raised to the place and the degree of the person represented, and acquires the rights which the latter would have if he were living or if he could have inherited. (924a) ART. 971. The representative is called to the succession by the law and not by the person represented. The representative does not succeed the person represented but the one whom the person represented would have succeeded. (n) ART. 972. The right of representation takes place in the direct descending line, but never in the ascending. In the collateral line, it takes place only in favor of the children of brothers or sisters, whether they be of the full or half blood. (925) ART. 973. In order that representation may take place, it is necessary that the representative himself be capable of succeeding the decedent. (n) ART. 974. Whenever there is succession by representation, the division of the estate shall be made per stirpes, in such manner that the representative or representatives shall not inherit more than what the person they represent would inherit, if he were living or could inherit. (926a) ART. 975. When children of one or more brothers or sisters of the deceased survive, they shall inherit from the latter by representation, if they survive with their uncles or aunts. But if they alone survive, they shall inherit in equal portions. (927) ART. 976. A person may represent him whose inheritance he has renounced. (928a) ART. 977. Heirs who repudiate their share may not be represented. (929a) SECTION 2.— Order of Intestate Succession SUBSECTION 1.— Descending Direct Line ART. 978. Succession pertains, in the first place, to the descending direct line. (930) ART. 979. Legitimate children and their descendants succeed the parents and other ascendants, without distinction as to sex or age, and even if they should come from different marriages. An adopted child succeeds to the property of the adopting parents in the same manner as a legitimate child. (931a) ART. 980. The children of the deceased shall always inherit from him in their own right, dividing the inheritance in equal shares. (932) ART. 981. Should children of the deceased and descendants of other children who are dead, survive, the former shall inherit in their own right, and the latter by right of representation. (934a) ART. 982. The grandchildren and other descendants shall inherit by right of representation, and if any one of them should have died, leaving several heirs, the portion pertaining to him shall be divided among the latter in equal portions. (933) ART. 983. If illegitimate children survive with legitimate children, the shares of the former shall be in the proportions prescribed by article 895. (n) ART. 984. In case of the death of an adopted child, leaving no children or descendants, his parents and relatives by consanguinity and not by adoption, shall be his legal heirs. (n)

SUBSECTION 2.— Ascending Direct Line

ART. 985. In default of legitimate children and descendants of the deceased, his parents and ascendants shall inherit from him, to the exclusion of collateral relatives. (935a) ART. 986. The father and mother, if living, shall inherit in equal shares. Should one only of them survive, he or she shall succeed to the entire estate of the child. (936) ART. 987. In default of the father and mother, the ascendants nearest in degree shall inherit. Should there be more than one of equal degree belonging to the same line they shall divide the inheritance per capita; should they be of different lines but of equal degree, one-half shall go to the paternal and the other half to the maternal ascendants. In each line the division shall be made per capita. (937) SUBSECTION 3.— Illegitimate Children ART. 988. In the absence of legitimate descendants or ascendants, the illegitimate children shall succeed to the entire estate of the deceased. (939a) ART. 989. If, together with illegitimate children, there should survive descendants of another illegitimate child who is dead, the former shall succeed in their own right and the latter by right of representation. (940a) ART. 990. The hereditary rights granted by the two preceding articles to illegitimate children shall be transmitted upon their death to their descendants, who shall inherit by right of representation from their deceased grandparent. (941a) ART. 991. If legitimate ascendants are left, the illegitimate children shall divide the inheritance with them, taking one-half of the estate, whatever be the number of the ascendants or of the illegitimate children. (942, 841a) ART. 992. An illegitimate child has no right to inherit ab intestato from the legitimate children and relatives of his father or mother; nor shall such children or relatives inherit in the same manner from the illegitimate child. (943a) ART. 993. If an illegitimate child should die without issue, either legitimate or illegitimate, his father or mother shall succeed to his entire estate; and if the child’s filiation is duly proved as to both parents, who are both living, they shall inherit from him share and share alike. (944a) ART. 994. In default of the father or mother, an illegitimate child shall be succeeded by his or her surviving spouse, who shall be entitled to the entire estate. If the widow or widower should survive with brothers and sisters, nephews and nieces, she or he shall inherit one-half of the estate, and the latter the other half. (945a) SUBSECTION 4.— Surviving Spouse ART. 995. In the absence of legitimate descendants and ascendants, and illegitimate children and their descendants, whether legitimate or illegitimate, the surviving spouse shall inherit the entire estate, without prejudice to the rights of brothers and sisters, nephews and nieces, should there be any, under article 1001. (946a) ART. 996. If a widow or widower and legitimate children or descendants are left, the surviving spouse has in the succession the same share as that of each of the children. (834a) ART. 997. When the widow or widower survives with legitimate parents or ascendants, the surviving spouse shall be entitled to one-half of the estate, and the legitimate parents or ascendants to the other half. (836a) ART. 998. If a widow or widower survives with illegitimate children, such widow or widower shall be entitled to one-half of the inheritance, and the illegitimate children or their descendants, whether legitimate or illegitimate, to the other half. (n) ART. 999. When the widow or widower survives with legitimate children or their descendants and illegitimate children or their descendants, whether legitimate or illegitimate, such widow or widower shall be entitled to the same share as that of a legitimate child. (n) ART. 1000. If legitimate ascendants, the surviving spouse, and illegitimate children are left, the ascendants shall be entitled to one-half of the inheritance, and the other half shall be divided between the surviving spouse and the illegitimate children so that such widow or widower shall have one-fourth of the estate, and the illegitimate children the other fourth. (841a) ART. 1001. Should brothers and sisters or their children survive with the widow or widower, the latter shall be entitled to one-half of the inheritance and the brothers and sisters or their children to the other half. (953, 837a) ART. 1002. In case of a legal separation, if the surviving spouse gave cause for the separation, he or she shall not have any of the rights granted in the preceding articles. (n) SUBSECTION 5.— Collateral Relatives ART. 1003. If there are no descendants, ascendants, illegitimate children, or a surviving spouse, the collateral relatives shall succeed to the entire estate of the deceased in accordance with the following articles. (946a) ART. 1004. Should the only survivors be brothers and sisters of the full blood, they shall inherit in equal shares. (947) ART. 1005. Should brothers and sisters survive together with nephews and nieces, who are the children of the descendant’s brothers and sisters of the full blood, the former shall inherit per capita, and the latter per stirpes. (948) ART. 1006. Should brothers and sisters of the full blood survive together with brothers and sisters of the half blood, the former shall be entitled to a share double that of the latter. (949) ART. 1007. In case brothers and sisters of the half blood, some on the father’s and some on the mother’s side, are the only survivors, all shall inherit in equal shares without distinction as to the origin of the property. (950) ART. 1008. Children of brothers and sisters of the half blood shall succeed per capita or per stirpes, in accordance with the rules laid down for brothers and sisters of the full blood. (915) ART. 1009. Should there be neither brothers nor sisters, nor children of brothers or sisters, the other collateral relatives shall succeed to the estate. The latter shall succeed without distinction of lines or preference among them by reason of relationship by the whole blood. (954a) ART. 1010. The right to inherit ab intestato shall not extend beyond the fifth degree of relationship in the collateral line. (955a) SUBSECTION 6.— The State ART. 1011. In default of persons entitled to succeed in accordance with the provisions of the preceding Sections, the State shall inherit the whole estate. (956a) ART. 1012. In order that the State may take possession of the property mentioned in the preceding article, the pertinent provisions of the Rules of Court must be observed. (958a) ART. 1013. After the payment of debts and charges, the personal property shall be assigned to the municipality or city where the deceased last resided in the Philippines, and the real estate to the municipalities or cities, respectively, in which the same is situated. If the deceased never resided in the Philippines, the whole estate shall be assigned to the respective municipalities or cities where the same is located. Such estate shall be for the benefit of public schools, and public charitable institutions and centers, in such municipalities or cities. The court shall distribute the estate as the respective needs of each beneficiary may warrant. The court, at the instance of an interested party, or on its own motion, may order the establishment of a permanent trust, so that only the income from the property shall be used. (956a) ART. 1014. If a person legally entitled to the estate of the deceased appears and files a claim thereto with the court within five years from the date the property was delivered to the State, such person shall be entitled to the possession of the same, or if sold, the municipality or city shall be accountable to him for such part of the proceeds as may not have been lawfully spent. (n) CHAPTER 4 PROVISIONS COMMON TO TESTATE AND INTESTATE SUCCESSIONS SECTION 1.— Right of Accretion ART. 1015. Accretion is a right by virtue of which, when two or more persons are called to the same inheritance, devise or legacy, the part assigned to the one who renounces or cannot receive his share, or who died before the testator, is added or incorporated to that of his co-heirs, co-devisees, or co-legatees. (n) ART. 1016. In order that the right of accretion may take place in a testamentary succession, it shall be necessary: (1) That two or more persons be called to the same inheritance, or to the same portion thereof, pro indiviso; and (2) That one of the persons thus called die before the testator, or renounce the inheritance, or be incapacitated to receive it. (982a) ART. 1017. The words “one-half for each” or “in equal shares” or any others which, though designating an aliquot part, do not identify it by such description as shall make each heir the exclusive owner of determinate property, shall not exclude the right of accretion. In case of money or fungible goods, if the share of each heir is not earmarked, there shall be a right of accretion. (983a) ART. 1018. In legal succession the share of the person who repudiates the inheritance shall always accrue to his co-heirs. (981) ART. 1019. The heirs to whom the portion goes by the right of accretion take it in the same proportion that they inherit. (n) ART. 1020. The heirs to whom the inheritance accrues shall succeed to all the rights and obligations which the heir who renounced or could not receive it would have had. (984) ART. 1021. Among the compulsory heirs the right of accretion shall take place only when the free portion is left to two or more of them, or to any one of them and to a stranger. Should the part repudiated be the legitime, the other co-heirs shall succeed to it in their own right, and not by the right of accretion. (985) ART. 1022. In testamentary succession, when the right of accretion does not take place, the vacant portion of the instituted heirs, if no substitute has been designated, shall pass to the legal heirs of the testator, who shall receive it with the same charges and obligations. (986) ART. 1023. Accretion shall also take place among devisees, legatees and usufructuaries under the same conditions established for heirs. (987a) SECTION 2.— Capacity to Succeed by Will or by Intestacy ART. 1024. Persons not incapacitated by law may succeed by will or ab intestato. The provisions relating to incapacity by will are equally applicable to intestate succession. (744, 914) ART. 1025. In order to be capacitated to inherit, the heir, devisee or legatee must be living at the moment the succession opens, except in case of representation, when it is proper. A child already conceived at the time of the death of the decedent is capable of succeeding provided it be born later under the conditions prescribed in article 41. (n) ART. 1026. A testamentary disposition may be made to the State, provinces, municipal corporations, private corporations, organizations, or associations for religious, scientific, cultural, educational, or charitable purposes. All other corporations or entities may succeed under a will, unless there is a provision to the contrary in their charter or the laws of their creation, and always subject to the same. (746a) ART. 1027. The following are incapable of succeeding: (1) The priest who heard the confession of the testator during his last illness, or the minister of the gospel who extended spiritual aid to him during the same period; (2) The relatives of such priest or minister of the gospel within the fourth degree, the church, order, chapter, community, organization, or institution to which such priest or minister may belong; (3) A guardian with respect to testamentary dispositions given by a ward in his favor before the final accounts of the guardianship have been approved, even if the testator should die after the approval thereof; nevertheless, any provision made by the ward in favor of the guardian when the latter is his ascendant, descendant, brother, sister, or spouse, shall be valid; (4) Any attesting witness to the execution of a will, the spouse, parents, or children, or any one claiming under such witness, spouse, parents, or children; (5) Any physician, surgeon, nurse, health officer or druggist who took care of the testator during his last illness; (6) Individuals, associations and corporations not permitted by law to inherit. (745, 752, 753, 754a) ART. 1028. The prohibitions mentioned in article 739, concerning donations inter vivos shall apply to testamentary provisions. (n) ART. 1029. Should the testator dispose of the whole or part of his property for prayers and pious works for the benefit of his soul, in general terms and without specifying its application, the executor, with the court’s approval shall deliver one-half thereof or its proceeds to the church or denomination to which the testator may belong, to be used for such prayers and pious works, and the other half to the State, for the purposes mentioned in article 1013. (747a) ART. 1030. Testamentary provisions in favor of the poor in general, without designation of particular persons or of any community, shall be deemed limited to the poor living in the domicile of the testator at the time of his death, unless it should clearly appear that his intention was otherwise. The designation of the persons who are to be considered as poor and the distribution of the property shall be made by the person appointed by the testator for the purpose; in default of such person, by the executor, and should there be no executor, by the justice of the peace, the mayor, and the municipal treasurer, who shall decide by a majority of votes all questions that may arise. In all these cases, the approval of the Court of First Instance shall be necessary. The preceding paragraph shall apply when the testator has disposed of his property in favor of the poor of a definite locality. (749a) ART. 1031. A testamentary provision in favor of a disqualified person, even though made under the guise of an onerous contract, or made through an intermediary, shall be void. (755) ART. 1032. The following are incapable of succeeding by reason of unworthiness: (1) Parents who have abandoned their children or induced their daughters to lead a corrupt or immoral life, or attempted against their virtue; (2) Any person who has been convicted of an attempt against the life of the testator, his or her spouse, descendants, or ascendants; (3) Any person who has accused the testator of a crime for which the law prescribes imprisonment for six years or more, if the accusation has been found groundless; (4) Any heir of full age who, having knowledge of the violent death of the testator, should fail to report it to an officer of the law within a month, unless the authorities have already taken action; this prohibition shall not apply to cases wherein, according to law, there is no obligation to make an accusation; (5) Any person convicted of adultery or concubinage with the spouse of the testator; (6) Any person who by fraud, violence, intimidation, or undue influence should cause the testator to make a will or to change one already made; (7) Any person who by the same means prevents another from making a will, or from revoking one already made, or who supplants, conceals, or alters the latter’s will; (8) Any person who falsifies or forges a supposed will of the decedent. (756, 673, 674a) ART. 1033. The causes of unworthiness shall be without effect if the testator had knowledge thereof at the time he made the will, or if, having known of them subsequently, he should condone them in writing. (757a) ART. 1034. In order to judge the capacity of the heir, devisee or legatee, his qualification at the time of the death of the decedent shall be the criterion. In cases falling under Nos. 2, 3, or 5 of article 1032, it shall be necessary to wait until final judgment is rendered, and in the case falling under No. 4, the expiration of the month allowed for the report. If the institution, devise or legacy should be conditional, the time of the compliance with the condition shall also be considered. (758a) ART. 1035. If the person excluded from the inheritance by reason of incapacity should be a child or descendant of the decedent and should have children or descendants, the latter shall acquire his right to the legitime. The person so excluded shall not enjoy the usufruct and administration of the property thus inherited by his children. (761a) ART. 1036. Alienations of hereditary property, and acts of administration performed by the excluded heir, before the judicial order of exclusion, are valid as to the third persons who acted in good faith; but the co-heirs shall have a right to recover damages from the disqualified heir. (n) ART. 1037. The unworthy heir who is excluded from the succession has a right to demand indemnity for any expenses incurred in the preservation of the hereditary property, and to enforce such credits as he may have against the estate. (n) ART. 1038. Any person incapable of succession, who, disregarding the prohibition stated in the preceding articles, entered into the possession of the hereditary property, shall be obliged to return it together with its accessions. He shall be liable for all the fruits and rents he may have received, or could have received through the exercise of due diligence. (760a) ART. 1039. Capacity to succeed is governed by the law of the nation of the decedent. (n) ART. 1040. The action for a declaration of incapacity and for the recovery of the inheritance, devise or legacy shall be brought within five years from the time the disqualified person took possession thereof. It may be brought by any one who may have an interest in the succession. (762a) SECTION 3.— Acceptance and Repudiation of the Inheritance ART. 1041. The acceptance or repudiation of the inheritance is an act which is purely voluntary and free. (988) ART. 1042. The effects of the acceptance or repudiation shall always retroact to the moment of the death of the decedent. (989) ART. 1043. No person may accept or repudiate an inheritance unless he is certain of the death of the person from whom he is to inherit, and of his right to the inheritance. (991) ART. 1044. Any person having the free disposal of his property may accept or repudiate an inheritance. Any inheritance left to minors or incapacitated persons may be accepted by their parents or guardians. Parents or guardians may repudiate the inheritance left to their wards only by judicial authorization. The right to accept an inheritance left to the poor shall belong to the persons designated by the testator to determine the beneficiaries and distribute the property, or in their default, to those mentioned in article 1030. (992a) ART. 1045. The lawful representatives of corporations, associations, institutions and entities qualified to acquire property may accept any inheritance left to the latter, but in order to repudiate it, the approval of the court shall be necessary. (993a) ART. 1046. Public official establishments can neither accept nor repudiate an inheritance without the approval of the government. (994) ART. 1047. A married woman of age may repudiate an inheritance without the consent of her husband. (995a) ART. 1048. Deaf-mutes who can read and write may accept or repudiate the inheritance personally or through an agent. Should they not be able to read and write, the inheritance shall be accepted by their guardians. These guardians may repudiate the same with judicial approval. (996a) ART. 1049. Acceptance may be express or tacit. An express acceptance must be made in a public or private document. A tacit acceptance is one resulting from acts by which the intention to accept is necessarily implied, or which one would have no right to do except in the capacity of an heir. Acts of mere preservation or provisional administration do not imply an acceptance of the inheritance if, through such acts, the title or capacity of an heir has not been assumed. (999a) ART. 1050. An inheritance is deemed accepted: (1) If the heirs sells, donates, or assigns his right to a stranger, or to his co-heirs, or to any of them; (2) If the heir renounces the same, even though gratuitously, for the benefit of one or more of his co-heirs; (3) If he renounces it for a price in favor of all his co-heirs indiscriminately; but if this renunciation should be gratuitous, and the co-heirs in whose favor it is made are those upon whom the portion renounced should devolve by virtue of accretion, the inheritance shall not be deemed as accepted. (1000) ART. 1051. The repudiation of an inheritance shall be made in a public or authentic instrument, or by petition presented to the court having jurisdiction over the testamentary or intestate proceedings. (1008) ART. 1052. If the heir repudiates the inheritance to the prejudice of his own creditors, the latter may petition the court to authorize them to accept it in the name of the heir. The acceptance shall benefit the creditors only to an extent sufficient to cover the amount of their credits. The excess, should there be any, shall in no case pertain to the renouncer, but shall be adjudicated to the persons to whom, in accordance with the rules established in this Code, it may belong. (1001) ART. 1053. If the heir should die without having accepted or repudiated the inheritance his right shall be transmitted to his heirs. (1006) ART. 1054. Should there be several heirs called to the inheritance, some of them may accept and the others may repudiate it. (1007a) ART. 1055. If a person, who is called to the same inheritance as an heir by will and ab intestato, repudiates the inheritance in his capacity as a testamentary heir, he is understood to have repudiated it in both capacities. Should he repudiate it as an intestate heir, without knowledge of his being a testamentary heir, he may still accept it in the latter capacity. (1009) ART. 1056. The acceptance or repudiation of an inheritance, once made, is irrevocable, and cannot be impugned, except when it was made through any of the causes that vitiate consent, or when an unknown will appears. (997) ART. 1057. Within thirty days after the court has issued an order for the distribution of the estate in accordance with the Rules of Court, the heirs, devisees and legatees shall signify to the court having jurisdiction whether they accept or repudiate the inheritance. If they do not do so within that time, they are deemed to have accepted the inheritance. (n) SECTION 4.— Executors and Administrators ART. 1058. All matters relating to the appointment, powers and duties of executors and administrators and concerning the administration of estates of deceased persons shall be governed by the Rules of Court. (n) ART. 1059. If the assets of the estate of a decedent which can be applied to the payment of debts are not sufficient for that purpose, the provisions of articles 2239 to 2251 on Preference of Credits shall be observed, provided that the expenses referred to in article 2244, No. 8, shall be those involved in the administration of the decedent’s estate. (n) ART. 1060. A corporation or association authorized to conduct the business of a trust company in the Philippines may be appointed as an executor, administrator, guardian of an estate, or trustee, in like manner as an individual; but it shall not be appointed guardian of the person of a ward. (n) SECTION 5.— Collation ART. 1061. Every compulsory heir, who succeeds with other compulsory heirs, must bring into the mass of the estate any property or right which he may have received from the decedent, during the lifetime of the latter, by way of donation, or any other gratuitous title, in order that it may be computed in the determination of the legitime of each heir, and in the account of the partition. (1035a) ART. 1062. Collation shall not take place among compulsory heirs if the donor should have so expressly provided, or if the donee should repudiate the inheritance, unless the donation should be reduced as inofficious. (1036) ART. 1063. Property left by will is not deemed subject to collation, if the testator has not otherwise provided, but the legitime shall in any case remain unimpaired. (1037) ART. 1064. When grandchildren, who survive with their uncles, aunts, or cousins, inherit from their grandparents in representation of their father or mother, they shall bring to collation all that their parents, if alive, would have been obliged to bring, even though such grandchildren have not inherited the property. They shall also bring to collation all that they may have received from the decedent during his lifetime, unless the testator has provided otherwise, in which case his wishes must be respected, if the legitime of the co-heirs is not prejudiced. (1038) ART. 1065. Parents are not obliged to bring to collation in the inheritance of their ascendants any property which may have been donated by the latter to their children. (1039) ART. 1066. Neither shall donations to the spouse of the child be brought to collation; but if they have been given by the parent to the spouses jointly, the child shall be obliged to bring to collation one-half of the thing donated. (1040) ART. 1067. Expenses for support, education, medical attendance, even in extraordinary illness, apprenticeship, ordinary equipment, or customary gifts are not subject to collation. (1041) ART. 1068. Expenses incurred by the parents in giving their children a professional, vocational or other career shall not be brought to collation unless the parents so provide, or unless they impair the legitime; but when their collation is required, the sum which the child would have spent if he had lived in the house and company of his parents shall be deducted therefrom. (1042a) ART. 1069. Any sums paid by a parent in satisfaction of the debts of his children, election expenses, fines, and similar expenses shall be brought to collation. (1043a) ART. 1070. Wedding gifts by parents and ascendants consisting of jewelry, clothing, and outfit, shall not be reduced as inofficious except insofar as they may exceed one-tenth of the sum which is disposable by will. (1044) ART. 1071. The same things donated are not to be brought to collation and partition, but only their value at the time of the donation, even though their just value may not then have been assessed. Their subsequent increase or deterioration and even their total loss or destruction, be it accidental or culpable, shall be for the benefit or account and risk of the donee. (1045a) ART. 1072. In the collation of a donation made by both parents, one-half shall be brought to the inheritance of the father, and the other half, to that of the mother. That given by one alone shall be brought to collation in his or her inheritance. (1046a) ART. 1073. The donee’s share of the estate shall be reduced by an amount equal to that already received by him; and his co-heirs shall receive an equivalent, as much as possible, in property of the same nature, class and quality. (1047) ART. 1074. Should the provisions of the preceding article be impracticable, if the property donated was immovable, the co-heirs shall be entitled to receive its equivalent in cash or securities, at the rate of quotation; and should there be neither cash nor marketable securities in the estate, so much of the other property as may be necessary shall be sold at public auction. If the property donated was movable, the co-heirs shall only have a right to select an equivalent of other personal property of the inheritance at its just price. (1048) ART. 1075. The fruits and interest of the property subject to collation shall not pertain to the estate except from the day on which the succession is opened. For the purpose of ascertaining their amount, the fruits and interest of the property of the estate of the same kind and quality as that subject to collation shall be made the standard of assessment. (1049) ART. 1076. The co-heirs are bound to reimburse to the donee the necessary expenses which he has incurred for the preservation of the property donated to him, though they may not have augmented its value. The donee who collates in kind an immovable, which has been given to him, must be reimbursed by his co-heirs for the improvements which have increased the value of the property, and which exist at the time the partition is effected. As to works made on the estate for the mere pleasure of the donee, no reimbursement is due him for them; he has, however, the right to remove them, if he can do so without injuring the estate. (n) ART. 1077. Should any question arise among the co-heirs upon the obligation to bring to collation or as to the things which are subject to collation, the distribution of the estate shall not be interrupted for this reason, provided adequate security is given. (1050) SECTION 6.— Partition and Distribution of the Estate SUBSECTION 1.— Partition ART. 1078. Where there are two or more heirs, the whole estate of the decedent is, before its partition, owned in common by such heirs, subject to the payment of debts of the deceased. (n) ART. 1079. Partition, in general, is the separation, division and assignment of a thing held in common among those to whom it may belong. The thing itself may be divided, or its value. (n) ART. 1080. Should a person make a partition of his estate by an act inter vivos, or by will, such partition shall be respected, insofar as it does not prejudice the legitime of the compulsory heirs. A parent who, in the interest of his or her family, desires to keep any agricultural, industrial, or manufacturing enterprise intact, may avail himself of the right granted him in this article, by ordering that the legitime of the other children to whom the property is not assigned, be paid in cash. (1056a) ART. 1081. A person may, by an act inter vivos or mortis causa, intrust the mere power to make the partition after his death to any person who is not one of the co-heirs. The provisions of this and of the preceding article shall be observed even should there be among the co-heirs a minor or a person subject to guardianship; but the mandatory, in such case, shall make an inventory of the property of the estate, after notifying the co-heirs, the creditors, and the legatees or devisees. (1057a) ART. 1082. Every act which is intended to put an end to indivision among co-heirs and legatees or devisees is deemed to be a partition, although it should purport to be a sale, an exchange, a compromise, or any other transaction. (n) ART. 1083. Every co-heir has a right to demand the division of the estate unless the testator should have expressly forbidden its partition, in which case the period of indivision shall not exceed twenty years as provided in article 494. This power of the testator to prohibit division applies to the legitime. Even though forbidden by the testator, the co-ownership terminates when any of the causes for which partnership is dissolved takes place, or when the court finds for compelling reasons that division should be ordered, upon petition of one of the co-heirs. (1051a) ART. 1084. Voluntary heirs upon whom some condition has been imposed cannot demand a partition until the condition has been fulfilled; but the other co-heirs may demand it by giving sufficient security for the rights which the former may have in case the condition should be complied with; and until it is known that the condition has not been fulfilled or can never be complied with, the partition shall be understood to be provisional. (1054a) ART. 1085. In the partition of the estate, equality shall be observed as far as possible, dividing the property into lots, or assigning to each of the co-heirs things of the same nature, quality and kind. (1061) ART. 1086. Should a thing be indivisible, or would be much impaired by its being divided, it may be adjudicated to one of the heirs, provided he shall pay the others the excess in cash. Nevertheless, if any of the heirs should demand that the thing be sold at public auction and that strangers be allowed to bid, this must be done. (1062) ART. 1087. In the partition the co-heirs shall reimburse one another for the income and fruits which each one of them may have received from any property of the estate, for any useful and necessary expenses made upon such property, and for any damage thereto through malice or neglect. (1063) ART. 1088. Should any of the heirs sell his hereditary rights to a stranger before the partition, any or all of the co-heirs may be subrogated to the rights of the purchaser by reimbursing him for the price of the sale, provided they do so within the period of one month from the time they were notified in writing of the sale by the vendor. (1067a) ART. 1089. The titles of acquisition or ownership of each property shall be delivered to the co-heir to whom said property has been adjudicated. (1065a) ART. 1090. When the title comprises two or more pieces of land which have been assigned to two or more co-heirs, or when it covers one piece of land which has been divided between two or more co-heirs, the title shall be delivered to the one having the largest interest, and authentic copies of the title shall be furnished to the other co-heirs at the expense of the estate. If the interest of each co-heir should be the same, the oldest shall have the title. (1066a) SUBSECTION 2.— Effects of Partition ART. 1091. A partition legally made confers upon each heir the exclusive ownership of the property adjudicated to him. (1068) ART. 1092. After the partition has been made, the co-heirs shall be reciprocally bound to warrant the title to, and the quality of, each property adjudicated. (1069a) ART. 1093. The reciprocal obligation of warranty referred to in the preceding article shall be proportionate to the respective hereditary shares of the co-heirs, but if any one of them should be insolvent, the other co-heirs shall be liable for his part in the same proportion, deducting the part corresponding to the one who should be indemnified. Those who pay for the insolvent heir shall have a right of action against him for reimbursement, should his financial condition improve. (1071) ART. 1094. An action to enforce the warranty among co-heirs must be brought within ten years from the date the right of action accrues. (n) ART. 1095. If a credit should be assigned as collectible, the co-heirs shall not be liable for the subsequent insolvency of the debtor of the estate, but only for his insolvency at the time the partition is made. The warranty of the solvency of the debtor can only be enforced during the five years following the partition. Co-heirs do not warrant bad debts, if so known to, and accepted by, the distributee. But if such debts are not assigned to a co-heir, and should be collected, in whole or in part, the amount collected shall be distributed proportionately among the heirs. (1072a) ART. 1096. The obligation of warranty among co-heirs shall cease in the following cases: (1) When the testator himself has made the partition, unless it appears, or it may be reasonably presumed, that his intention was otherwise, but the legitime shall always remain unimpaired; (2) When it has been so expressly stipulated in the agreement of partition, unless there has been bad faith; (3) When the eviction is due to a cause subsequent to the partition, or has been caused by the fault of the distributee of the property. (1070a) SUBSECTION 3.— Rescission and Nullity of Partition ART. 1097. A partition may be rescinded or annulled for the same causes as contracts. (1073a) ART. 1098. A partition, judicial or extra-judicial, may also be rescinded on account of lesion, when any one of the co-heirs received things whose value is less, by at least one-fourth, than the share to which he is entitled, considering the value of the things at the time they were adjudicated. (1074a) ART. 1099. The partition made by the testator cannot be impugned on the ground of lesion, except when the legitime of the compulsory heirs is thereby prejudiced, or when it appears or may reasonably be presumed, that the intention of the testator was otherwise. (1075) ART. 1100. The action for rescission on account of lesion shall prescribe after four years from the time the partition was made. (1076) ART. 1101. The heir who is sued shall have the option of indemnifying the plaintiff for the loss, or consenting to a new partition. Indemnity may be made by payment in cash or by the delivery of a thing of the same kind and quality as that awarded to the plaintiff. If a new partition is made, it shall affect neither those who have not been prejudiced nor those have not received more than their just share. (1077a) ART. 1102. An heir who has alienated the whole or a considerable part of the real property adjudicated to him cannot maintain an action for rescission on the ground of lesion, but he shall have a right to be indemnified in cash. (1078a) ART. 1103. The omission of one or more objects or securities of the inheritance shall not cause the rescission of the partition on the ground of lesion, but the partition shall be completed by the distribution of the objects or securities which have been omitted. (1079a) ART. 1104. A partition made with preterition of any of the compulsory heirs shall not be rescinded, unless it be proved that there was bad faith or fraud on the part of the other persons interested; but the latter shall be proportionately obliged to pay to the person omitted the share which belongs to him. (1080) ART. 1105. A partition which includes a person believed to be an heir, but who is not, shall be void only with respect to such person. (1081a)

[codalsetal]

[Civil Code of the Philippines] Book IV Obligations and Contracts

BOOK IV

Obligations and Contracts

TITLE I Obligations

CHAPTER 1 General Provisions

Article 1156. An obligation is a juridical necessity to give, to do or not to do. (n)

Article 1157. Obligations arise from:

(1) Law;

(2) Contracts;

(3) Quasi-contracts;

(4) Acts or omissions punished by law; and

(5) Quasi-delicts. (1089a)

Article 1158. Obligations derived from law are not presumed. Only those expressly determined in this Code or in special laws are demandable, and shall be regulated by the precepts of the law which establishes them; and as to what has not been foreseen, by the provisions of this Book. (1090)

Article 1159. Obligations arising from contracts have the force of law between the contracting parties and should be complied with in good faith. (1091a)

Article 1160. Obligations derived from quasi-contracts shall be subject to the provisions of Chapter 1, Title XVII, of this Book. (n)

Article 1161. Civil obligations arising from criminal offenses shall be governed by the penal laws, subject to the provisions of article 2177, and of the pertinent provisions of Chapter 2, Preliminary Title, on Human Relations, and of Title XVIII of this Book, regulating damages. (1092a)

Article 1162. Obligations derived from quasi-delicts shall be governed by the provisions of Chapter 2, Title XVII of this Book, and by special laws. (1093a)

CHAPTER 2

Nature and Effect of Obligations

Article 1163. Every person obliged to give something is also obliged to take care of it with the proper diligence of a good father of a family, unless the law or the stipulation of the parties requires another standard of care. (1094a)

Article 1164. The creditor has a right to the fruits of the thing from the time the obligation to deliver it arises. However, he shall acquire no real right over it until the same has been delivered to him. (1095)

Article 1165. When what is to be delivered is a determinate thing, the creditor, in addition to the right granted him by article 1170, may compel the debtor to make the delivery.

If the thing is indeterminate or generic, he may ask that the obligation be complied with at the expense of the debtor.

If the obligor delays, or has promised to deliver the same thing to two or more persons who do not have the same interest, he shall be responsible for any fortuitous event until he has effected the delivery. (1096)

Article 1166. The obligation to give a determinate thing includes that of delivering all its accessions and accessories, even though they may not have been mentioned. (1097a)

Article 1167. If a person obliged to do something fails to do it, the same shall be executed at his cost.

This same rule shall be observed if he does it in contravention of the tenor of the obligation. Furthermore, it may be decreed that what has been poorly done be undone. (1098)

Article 1168. When the obligation consists in not doing, and the obligor does what has been forbidden him, it shall also be undone at his expense. (1099a)

Article 1169. Those obliged to deliver or to do something incur in delay from the time the obligee judicially or extrajudicially demands from them the fulfillment of their obligation.

However, the demand by the creditor shall not be necessary in order that delay may exist:

(1) When the obligation or the law expressly so declare; or

(2) When from the nature and the circumstances of the obligation it appears that the designation of the time when the thing is to be delivered or the service is to be rendered was a controlling motive for the establishment of the contract; or

(3) When demand would be useless, as when the obligor has rendered it beyond his power to perform.

In reciprocal obligations, neither party incurs in delay if the other does not comply or is not ready to comply in a proper manner with what is incumbent upon him. From the moment one of the parties fulfills his obligation, delay by the other begins. (1100a)

Article 1170. Those who in the performance of their obligations are guilty of fraud, negligence, or delay, and those who in any manner contravene the tenor thereof, are liable for damages. (1101)

Article 1171. Responsibility arising from fraud is demandable in all obligations. Any waiver of an action for future fraud is void. (1102a)

Article 1172. Responsibility arising from negligence in the performance of every kind of obligation is also demandable, but such liability may be regulated by the courts, according to the circumstances. (1103)

Article 1173. The fault or negligence of the obligor consists in the omission of that diligence which is required by the nature of the obligation and corresponds with the circumstances of the persons, of the time and of the place. When negligence shows bad faith, the provisions of articles 1171 and 2201, paragraph 2, shall apply.

If the law or contract does not state the diligence which is to be observed in the performance, that which is expected of a good father of a family shall be required. (1104a)

Article 1174. Except in cases expressly specified by the law, or when it is otherwise declared by stipulation, or when the nature of the obligation requires the assumption of risk, no person shall be responsible for those events which could not be foreseen, or which, though foreseen, were inevitable. (1105a)

Article 1175. Usurious transactions shall be governed by special laws. (n)

Article 1176. The receipt of the principal by the creditor without reservation with respect to the interest, shall give rise to the presumption that said interest has been paid.

The receipt of a later installment of a debt without reservation as to prior installments, shall likewise raise the presumption that such installments have been paid. (1110a)

Article 1177. The creditors, after having pursued the property in possession of the debtor to satisfy their claims, may exercise all the rights and bring all the actions of the latter for the same purpose, save those which are inherent in his person; they may also impugn the acts which the debtor may have done to defraud them. (1111)

Article 1178. Subject to the laws, all rights acquired in virtue of an obligation are transmissible, if there has been no stipulation to the contrary. (1112)

CHAPTER 3 Different Kinds of Obligations

SECTION 1 Pure and Conditional Obligations

Article 1179. Every obligation whose performance does not depend upon a future or uncertain event, or upon a past event unknown to the parties, is demandable at once.

Every obligation which contains a resolutory condition shall also be demandable, without prejudice to the effects of the happening of the event. (1113)

Article 1180. When the debtor binds himself to pay when his means permit him to do so, the obligation shall be deemed to be one with a period, subject to the provisions of article 1197. (n)

Article 1181. In conditional obligations, the acquisition of rights, as well as the extinguishment or loss of those already acquired, shall depend upon the happening of the event which constitutes the condition. (1114)

Article 1182. When the fulfillment of the condition depends upon the sole will of the debtor, the conditional obligation shall be void. If it depends upon chance or upon the will of a third person, the obligation shall take effect in conformity with the provisions of this Code. (1115)

Article 1183. Impossible conditions, those contrary to good customs or public policy and those prohibited by law shall annul the obligation which depends upon them. If the obligation is divisible, that part thereof which is not affected by the impossible or unlawful condition shall be valid.

The condition not to do an impossible thing shall be considered as not having been agreed upon. (1116a)

Article 1184. The condition that some event happen at a determinate time shall extinguish the obligation as soon as the time expires or if it has become indubitable that the event will not take place. (1117)

Article 1185. The condition that some event will not happen at a determinate time shall render the obligation effective from the moment the time indicated has elapsed, or if it has become evident that the event cannot occur.

If no time has been fixed, the condition shall be deemed fulfilled at such time as may have probably been contemplated, bearing in mind the nature of the obligation. (1118)

Article 1186. The condition shall be deemed fulfilled when the obligor voluntarily prevents its fulfillment. (1119)

Article 1187. The effects of a conditional obligation to give, once the condition has been fulfilled, shall retroact to the day of the constitution of the obligation. Nevertheless, when the obligation imposes reciprocal prestations upon the parties, the fruits and interests during the pendency of the condition shall be deemed to have been mutually compensated. If the obligation is unilateral, the debtor shall appropriate the fruits and interests received, unless from the nature and circumstances of the obligation it should be inferred that the intention of the person constituting the same was different.

In obligations to do and not to do, the courts shall determine, in each case, the retroactive effect of the condition that has been complied with. (1120)

Article 1188. The creditor may, before the fulfillment of the condition, bring the appropriate actions for the preservation of his right.

The debtor may recover what during the same time he has paid by mistake in case of a suspensive condition. (1121a)

Article 1189. When the conditions have been imposed with the intention of suspending the efficacy of an obligation to give, the following rules shall be observed in case of the improvement, loss or deterioration of the thing during the pendency of the condition:

(1) If the thing is lost without the fault of the debtor, the obligation shall be extinguished;

(2) If the thing is lost through the fault of the debtor, he shall be obliged to pay damages; it is understood that the thing is lost when it perishes, or goes out of commerce, or disappears in such a way that its existence is unknown or it cannot be recovered;

(3) When the thing deteriorates without the fault of the debtor, the impairment is to be borne by the creditor;

(4) If it deteriorates through the fault of the debtor, the creditor may choose between the rescission of the obligation and its fulfillment, with indemnity for damages in either case;

(5) If the thing is improved by its nature, or by time, the improvement shall inure to the benefit of the creditor;

(6) If it is improved at the expense of the debtor, he shall have no other right than that granted to the usufructuary. (1122)

Article 1190. When the conditions have for their purpose the extinguishment of an obligation to give, the parties, upon the fulfillment of said conditions, shall return to each other what they have received.

In case of the loss, deterioration or improvement of the thing, the provisions which, with respect to the debtor, are laid down in the preceding article shall be applied to the party who is bound to return.

As for the obligations to do and not to do, the provisions of the second paragraph of article 1187 shall be observed as regards the effect of the extinguishment of the obligation. (1123)

Article 1191. The power to rescind obligations is implied in reciprocal ones, in case one of the obligors should not comply with what is incumbent upon him.

The injured party may choose between the fulfillment and the rescission of the obligation, with the payment of damages in either case. He may also seek rescission, even after he has chosen fulfillment, if the latter should become impossible.

The court shall decree the rescission claimed, unless there be just cause authorizing the fixing of a period.

This is understood to be without prejudice to the rights of third persons who have acquired the thing, in accordance with articles 1385 and 1388 and the Mortgage Law. (1124)

Article 1192. In case both parties have committed a breach of the obligation, the liability of the first infractor shall be equitably tempered by the courts. If it cannot be determined which of the parties first violated the contract, the same shall be deemed extinguished, and each shall bear his own damages. (n)

SECTION 2 Obligations with a Period

Article 1193. Obligations for whose fulfillment a day certain has been fixed, shall be demandable only when that day comes.

Obligations with a resolutory period take effect at once, but terminate upon arrival of the day certain.

A day certain is understood to be that which must necessarily come, although it may not be known when.

If the uncertainty consists in whether the day will come or not, the obligation is conditional, and it shall be regulated by the rules of the preceding Section. (1125a)

Article 1194. In case of loss, deterioration or improvement of the thing before the arrival of the day certain, the rules in article 1189 shall be observed. (n)

Article 1195. Anything paid or delivered before the arrival of the period, the obligor being unaware of the period or believing that the obligation has become due and demandable, may be recovered, with the fruits and interests. (1126a)

Article 1196. Whenever in an obligation a period is designated, it is presumed to have been established for the benefit of both the creditor and the debtor, unless from the tenor of the same or other circumstances it should appear that the period has been established in favor of one or of the other. (1127)

Article 1197. If the obligation does not fix a period, but from its nature and the circumstances it can be inferred that a period was intended, the courts may fix the duration thereof.

The courts shall also fix the duration of the period when it depends upon the will of the debtor.

In every case, the courts shall determine such period as may under the circumstances have been probably contemplated by the parties. Once fixed by the courts, the period cannot be changed by them. (1128a)

Article 1198. The debtor shall lose every right to make use of the period:

(1) When after the obligation has been contracted, he becomes insolvent, unless he gives a guaranty or security for the debt;

(2) When he does not furnish to the creditor the guaranties or securities which he has promised;

(3) When by his own acts he has impaired said guaranties or securities after their establishment, and when through a fortuitous event they disappear, unless he immediately gives new ones equally satisfactory;

(4) When the debtor violates any undertaking, in consideration of which the creditor agreed to the period;

(5) When the debtor attempts to abscond. (1129a)

SECTION 3 Alternative Obligations

ARTICLE 1199. A person alternatively bound by different prestations shall completely perform one of them.

The creditor cannot be compelled to receive part of one and part of the other undertaking. (1131)

Article 1200. The right of choice belongs to the debtor, unless it has been expressly granted to the creditor.

The debtor shall have no right to choose those prestations which are impossible, unlawful or which could not have been the object of the obligation. (1132)

Article 1201. The choice shall produce no effect except from the time it has been communicated. (1133)

Article 1202. The debtor shall lose the right of choice when among the prestations whereby he is alternatively bound, only one is practicable. (1134)

Article 1203. If through the creditor's acts the debtor cannot make a choice according to the terms of the obligation, the latter may rescind the contract with damages. (n)

Article 1204. The creditor shall have a right to indemnity for damages when, through the fault of the debtor, all the things which are alternatively the object of the obligation have been lost, or the compliance of the obligation has become impossible.

The indemnity shall be fixed taking as a basis the value of the last thing which disappeared, or that of the service which last became impossible.

Damages other than the value of the last thing or service may also be awarded. (1135a)

Article 1205. When the choice has been expressly given to the creditor, the obligation shall cease to be alternative from the day when the selection has been communicated to the debtor.

Until then the responsibility of the debtor shall be governed by the following rules:

(1) If one of the things is lost through a fortuitous event, he shall perform the obligation by delivering that which the creditor should choose from among the remainder, or that which remains if only one subsists;

(2) If the loss of one of the things occurs through the fault of the debtor, the creditor may claim any of those subsisting, or the price of that which, through the fault of the former, has disappeared, with a right to damages;

(3) If all the things are lost through the fault of the debtor, the choice by the creditor shall fall upon the price of any one of them, also with indemnity for damages.

The same rules shall be applied to obligations to do or not to do in case one, some or all of the prestations should become impossible. (1136a)

Article 1206. When only one prestation has been agreed upon, but the obligor may render another in substitution, the obligation is called facultative.

The loss or deterioration of the thing intended as a substitute, through the negligence of the obligor, does not render him liable. But once the substitution has been made, the obligor is liable for the loss of the substitute on account of his delay, negligence or fraud. (n)

SECTION 4 Joint and Solidary Obligations

Article 1207. The concurrence of two or more creditors or of two or more debtors in one and the same obligation does not imply that each one of the former has a right to demand, or that each one of the latter is bound to render, entire compliance with the prestation. There is a solidary liability only when the obligation expressly so states, or when the law or the nature of the obligation requires solidarity. (1137a)

Article 1208. If from the law, or the nature or the wording of the obligations to which the preceding article refers the contrary does not appear, the credit or debt shall be presumed to be divided into as many shares as there are creditors or debtors, the credits or debts being considered distinct from one another, subject to the Rules of Court governing the multiplicity of suits. (1138a)

Article 1209. If the division is impossible, the right of the creditors may be prejudiced only by their collective acts, and the debt can be enforced only by proceeding against all the debtors. If one of the latter should be insolvent, the others shall not be liable for his share. (1139)

Article 1210. The indivisibility of an obligation does not necessarily give rise to solidarity. Nor does solidarity of itself imply indivisibility. (n)

Article 1211. Solidarity may exist although the creditors and the debtors may not be bound in the same manner and by the same periods and conditions. (1140)

Article 1212. Each one of the solidary creditors may do whatever may be useful to the others, but not anything which may be prejudicial to the latter. (1141a)

Article 1213. A solidary creditor cannot assign his rights without the consent of the others. (n)

Article 1214. The debtor may pay any one of the solidary creditors; but if any demand, judicial or extrajudicial, has been made by one of them, payment should be made to him. (1142a)

Article 1215. Novation, compensation, confusion or remission of the debt, made by any of the solidary creditors or with any of the solidary debtors, shall extinguish the obligation, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1219.

The creditor who may have executed any of these acts, as well as he who collects the debt, shall be liable to the others for the share in the obligation corresponding to them. (1143)

Article 1216. The creditor may proceed against any one of the solidary debtors or some or all of them simultaneously. The demand made against one of them shall not be an obstacle to those which may subsequently be directed against the others, so long as the debt has not been fully collected. (1144a)

Article 1217. Payment made by one of the solidary debtors extinguishes the obligation. If two or more solidary debtors offer to pay, the creditor may choose which offer to accept.

He who made the payment may claim from his co-debtors only the share which corresponds to each, with the interest for the payment already made. If the payment is made before the debt is due, no interest for the intervening period may be demanded.

When one of the solidary debtors cannot, because of his insolvency, reimburse his share to the debtor paying the obligation, such share shall be borne by all his co-debtors, in proportion to the debt of each. (1145a)

Article 1218. Payment by a solidary debtor shall not entitle him to reimbursement from his co-debtors if such payment is made after the obligation has prescribed or become illegal. (n)

Article 1219. The remission made by the creditor of the share which affects one of the solidary debtors does not release the latter from his responsibility towards the co-debtors, in case the debt had been totally paid by anyone of them before the remission was effected. (1146a)

Article 1220. The remission of the whole obligation, obtained by one of the solidary debtors, does not entitle him to reimbursement from his co-debtors. (n)

Article 1221. If the thing has been lost or if the prestation has become impossible without the fault of the solidary debtors, the obligation shall be extinguished.

If there was fault on the part of any one of them, all shall be responsible to the creditor, for the price and the payment of damages and interest, without prejudice to their action against the guilty or negligent debtor.

If through a fortuitous event, the thing is lost or the performance has become impossible after one of the solidary debtors has incurred in delay through the judicial or extrajudicial demand upon him by the creditor, the provisions of the preceding paragraph shall apply. (1147a)

Article 1222. A solidary debtor may, in actions filed by the creditor, avail himself of all defenses which are derived from the nature of the obligation and of those which are personal to him, or pertain to his own share. With respect to those which personally belong to the others, he may avail himself thereof only as regards that part of the debt for which the latter are responsible. (1148a)

SECTION 5 Divisible and Indivisible Obligations

Article 1223. The divisibility or indivisibility of the things that are the object of obligations in which there is only one debtor and only one creditor does not alter or modify the provisions of Chapter 2 of this Title. (1149)

Article 1224. A joint indivisible obligation gives rise to indemnity for damages from the time anyone of the debtors does not comply with his undertaking. The debtors who may have been ready to fulfill their promises shall not contribute to the indemnity beyond the corresponding portion of the price of the thing or of the value of the service in which the obligation consists. (1150)

Article 1225. For the purposes of the preceding articles, obligations to give definite things and those which are not susceptible of partial performance shall be deemed to be indivisible.

When the obligation has for its object the execution of a certain number of days of work, the accomplishment of work by metrical units, or analogous things which by their nature are susceptible of partial performance, it shall be divisible.

However, even though the object or service may be physically divisible, an obligation is indivisible if so provided by law or intended by the parties.

In obligations not to do, divisibility or indivisibility shall be determined by the character of the prestation in each particular case. (1151a)

SECTION 6 Obligations with a Penal Clause

Article 1226. In obligations with a penal clause, the penalty shall substitute the indemnity for damages and the payment of interests in case of noncompliance, if there is no stipulation to the contrary. Nevertheless, damages shall be paid if the obligor refuses to pay the penalty or is guilty of fraud in the fulfillment of the obligation.

The penalty may be enforced only when it is demandable in accordance with the provisions of this Code. (1152a)

Article 1227. The debtor cannot exempt himself from the performance of the obligation by paying the penalty, save in the case where this right has been expressly reserved for him. Neither can the creditor demand the fulfillment of the obligation and the satisfaction of the penalty at the same time, unless this right has been clearly granted him. However, if after the creditor has decided to require the fulfillment of the obligation, the performance thereof should become impossible without his fault, the penalty may be enforced. (1153a)

Article 1228. Proof of actual damages suffered by the creditor is not necessary in order that the penalty may be demanded. (n)

Article 1229. The judge shall equitably reduce the penalty when the principal obligation has been partly or irregularly complied with by the debtor. Even if there has been no performance, the penalty may also be reduced by the courts if it is iniquitous or unconscionable. (1154a)

Article 1230. The nullity of the penal clause does not carry with it that of the principal obligation.

The nullity of the principal obligation carries with it that of the penal clause. (1155)

CHAPTER 4 Extinguishment of Obligations

General Provisions

Article 1231. Obligations are extinguished:

(1) By payment or performance;

(2) By the loss of the thing due;

(3) By the condonation or remission of the debt;

(4) By the confusion or merger of the rights of creditor and debtor;

(5) By compensation;

(6) By novation.

Other causes of extinguishment of obligations, such as annulment, rescission, fulfillment of a resolutory condition, and prescription, are governed elsewhere in this Code. (1156a)

SECTION 1 Payment or Performance

Article 1232. Payment means not only the delivery of money but also the performance, in any other manner, of an obligation. (n)

Article 1233. A debt shall not be understood to have been paid unless the thing or service in which the obligation consists has been completely delivered or rendered, as the case may be. (1157)

Article 1234. If the obligation has been substantially performed in good faith, the obligor may recover as though there had been a strict and complete fulfillment, less damages suffered by the obligee. (n)

Article 1235. When the obligee accepts the performance, knowing its incompleteness or irregularity, and without expressing any protest or objection, the obligation is deemed fully complied with. (n)

Article 1236. The creditor is not bound to accept payment or performance by a third person who has no interest in the fulfillment of the obligation, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.

Whoever pays for another may demand from the debtor what he has paid, except that if he paid without the knowledge or against the will of the debtor, he can recover only insofar as the payment has been beneficial to the debtor. (1158a)

Article 1237. Whoever pays on behalf of the debtor without the knowledge or against the will of the latter, cannot compel the creditor to subrogate him in his rights, such as those arising from a mortgage, guaranty, or penalty. (1159a)

Article 1238. Payment made by a third person who does not intend to be reimbursed by the debtor is deemed to be a donation, which requires the debtor's consent. But the payment is in any case valid as to the creditor who has accepted it. (n)

Article 1239. In obligations to give, payment made by one who does not have the free disposal of the thing due and capacity to alienate it shall not be valid, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1427 under the Title on "Natural Obligations." (1160a)

Article 1240. Payment shall be made to the person in whose favor the obligation has been constituted, or his successor in interest, or any person authorized to receive it. (1162a)

Article 1241. Payment to a person who is incapacitated to administer his property shall be valid if he has kept the thing delivered, or insofar as the payment has been beneficial to him.

Payment made to a third person shall also be valid insofar as it has redounded to the benefit of the creditor. Such benefit to the creditor need not be proved in the following cases:

(1) If after the payment, the third person acquires the creditor's rights;

(2) If the creditor ratifies the payment to the third person;

(3) If by the creditor's conduct, the debtor has been led to believe that the third person had authority to receive the payment. (1163a)

Article 1242. Payment made in good faith to any person in possession of the credit shall release the debtor. (1164)

Article 1243. Payment made to the creditor by the debtor after the latter has been judicially ordered to retain the debt shall not be valid. (1165)

Article 1244. The debtor of a thing cannot compel the creditor to receive a different one, although the latter may be of the same value as, or more valuable than that which is due.

In obligations to do or not to do, an act or forbearance cannot be substituted by another act or forbearance against the obligee's will. (1166a)

Article 1245. Dation in payment, whereby property is alienated to the creditor in satisfaction of a debt in money, shall be governed by the law of sales. (n)

Article 1246. When the obligation consists in the delivery of an indeterminate or generic thing, whose quality and circumstances have not been stated, the creditor cannot demand a thing of superior quality. Neither can the debtor deliver a thing of inferior quality. The purpose of the obligation and other circumstances shall be taken into consideration. (1167a)

Article 1247. Unless it is otherwise stipulated, the extrajudicial expenses required by the payment shall be for the account of the debtor. With regard to judicial costs, the Rules of Court shall govern. (1168a)

Article 1248. Unless there is an express stipulation to that effect, the creditor cannot be compelled partially to receive the prestations in which the obligation consists. Neither may the debtor be required to make partial payments.

However, when the debt is in part liquidated and in part unliquidated, the creditor may demand and the debtor may effect the payment of the former without waiting for the liquidation of the latter. (1169a)

Article 1249. The payment of debts in money shall be made in the currency stipulated, and if it is not possible to deliver such currency, then in the currency which is legal tender in the Philippines.

The delivery of promissory notes payable to order, or bills of exchange or other mercantile documents shall produce the effect of payment only when they have been cashed, or when through the fault of the creditor they have been impaired.

In the meantime, the action derived from the original obligation shall be held in the abeyance. (1170)

Article 1250. In case an extraordinary inflation or deflation of the currency stipulated should supervene, the value of the currency at the time of the establishment of the obligation shall be the basis of payment, unless there is an agreement to the contrary. (n)

Article 1251. Payment shall be made in the place designated in the obligation.

There being no express stipulation and if the undertaking is to deliver a determinate thing, the payment shall be made wherever the thing might be at the moment the obligation was constituted.

In any other case the place of payment shall be the domicile of the debtor.

If the debtor changes his domicile in bad faith or after he has incurred in delay, the additional expenses shall be borne by him.

These provisions are without prejudice to venue under the Rules of Court. (1171a)

  SUBSECTION 1. Application of Payments

Article 1252. He who has various debts of the same kind in favor of one and the same creditor, may declare at the time of making the payment, to which of them the same must be applied. Unless the parties so stipulate, or when the application of payment is made by the party for whose benefit the term has been constituted, application shall not be made as to debts which are not yet due.

If the debtor accepts from the creditor a receipt in which an application of the payment is made, the former cannot complain of the same, unless there is a cause for invalidating the contract. (1172a)

Article 1253. If the debt produces interest, payment of the principal shall not be deemed to have been made until the interests have been covered. (1173)

Article 1254. When the payment cannot be applied in accordance with the preceding rules, or if application can not be inferred from other circumstances, the debt which is most onerous to the debtor, among those due, shall be deemed to have been satisfied.

If the debts due are of the same nature and burden, the payment shall be applied to all of them proportionately. (1174a)

  SUBSECTION 2. Payment by Cession

Article 1255. The debtor may cede or assign his property to his creditors in payment of his debts. This cession, unless there is stipulation to the contrary, shall only release the debtor from responsibility for the net proceeds of the thing assigned. The agreements which, on the effect of the cession, are made between the debtor and his creditors shall be governed by special laws. (1175a)

  SUBSECTION 3. Tender of Payment and Consignation

Article 1256. If the creditor to whom tender of payment has been made refuses without just cause to accept it, the debtor shall be released from responsibility by the consignation of the thing or sum due.

Consignation alone shall produce the same effect in the following cases:

(1) When the creditor is absent or unknown, or does not appear at the place of payment;

(2) When he is incapacitated to receive the payment at the time it is due;

(3) When, without just cause, he refuses to give a receipt;

(4) When two or more persons claim the same right to collect;

(5) When the title of the obligation has been lost. (1176a)

Article 1257. In order that the consignation of the thing due may release the obligor, it must first be announced to the persons interested in the fulfillment of the obligation.

The consignation shall be ineffectual if it is not made strictly in consonance with the provisions which regulate payment. (1177)

Article 1258. Consignation shall be made by depositing the things due at the disposal of judicial authority, before whom the tender of payment shall be proved, in a proper case, and the announcement of the consignation in other cases.

The consignation having been made, the interested parties shall also be notified thereof. (1178)

Article 1259. The expenses of consignation, when properly made, shall be charged against the creditor. (1179)

Article 1260. Once the consignation has been duly made, the debtor may ask the judge to order the cancellation of the obligation.

Before the creditor has accepted the consignation, or before a judicial declaration that the consignation has been properly made, the debtor may withdraw the thing or the sum deposited, allowing the obligation to remain in force. (1180)

Article 1261. If, the consignation having been made, the creditor should authorize the debtor to withdraw the same, he shall lose every preference which he may have over the thing. The co-debtors, guarantors and sureties shall be released. (1181a)

SECTION 2 Loss of the Thing Due

Article 1262. An obligation which consists in the delivery of a determinate thing shall be extinguished if it should be lost or destroyed without the fault of the debtor, and before he has incurred in delay.

When by law or stipulation, the obligor is liable even for fortuitous events, the loss of the thing does not extinguish the obligation, and he shall be responsible for damages. The same rule applies when the nature of the obligation requires the assumption of risk. (1182a)

Article 1263. In an obligation to deliver a generic thing, the loss or destruction of anything of the same kind does not extinguish the obligation. (n)

Article 1264. The courts shall determine whether, under the circumstances, the partial loss of the object of the obligation is so important as to extinguish the obligation. (n)

Article 1265. Whenever the thing is lost in the possession of the debtor, it shall be presumed that the loss was due to his fault, unless there is proof to the contrary, and without prejudice to the provisions of article 1165. This presumption does not apply in case of earthquake, flood, storm, or other natural calamity. (1183a)

Article 1266. The debtor in obligations to do shall also be released when the prestation becomes legally or physically impossible without the fault of the obligor. (1184a)

Article 1267. When the service has become so difficult as to be manifestly beyond the contemplation of the parties, the obligor may also be released therefrom, in whole or in part. (n)

Article 1268. When the debt of a thing certain and determinate proceeds from a criminal offense, the debtor shall not be exempted from the payment of its price, whatever may be the cause for the loss, unless the thing having been offered by him to the person who should receive it, the latter refused without justification to accept it. (1185)

Article 1269. The obligation having been extinguished by the loss of the thing, the creditor shall have all the rights of action which the debtor may have against third persons by reason of the loss. (1186)

SECTION 3 Condonation or Remission of the Debt

Article 1270. Condonation or remission is essentially gratuitous, and requires the acceptance by the obligor. It may be made expressly or impliedly.

One and the other kind shall be subject to the rules which govern inofficious donations. Express condonation shall, furthermore, comply with the forms of donation. (1187)

Article 1271. The delivery of a private document evidencing a credit, made voluntarily by the creditor to the debtor, implies the renunciation of the action which the former had against the latter.

If in order to nullify this waiver it should be claimed to be inofficious, the debtor and his heirs may uphold it by proving that the delivery of the document was made in virtue of payment of the debt. (1188)

Article 1272. Whenever the private document in which the debt appears is found in the possession of the debtor, it shall be presumed that the creditor delivered it voluntarily, unless the contrary is proved. (1189)

Article 1273. The renunciation of the principal debt shall extinguish the accessory obligations; but the waiver of the latter shall leave the former in force. (1190)

Article 1274. It is presumed that the accessory obligation of pledge has been remitted when the thing pledged, after its delivery to the creditor, is found in the possession of the debtor, or of a third person who owns the thing. (1191a)

SECTION 4 Confusion or Merger of Rights

Article 1275. The obligation is extinguished from the time the characters of creditor and debtor are merged in the same person. (1192a)

Article 1276. Merger which takes place in the person of the principal debtor or creditor benefits the guarantors. Confusion which takes place in the person of any of the latter does not extinguish the obligation. (1193)

Article 1277. Confusion does not extinguish a joint obligation except as regards the share corresponding to the creditor or debtor in whom the two characters concur. (1194)

SECTION 5 Compensation

Article 1278. Compensation shall take place when two persons, in their own right, are creditors and debtors of each other. (1195)

Article 1279. In order that compensation may be proper, it is necessary:

(1) That each one of the obligors be bound principally, and that he be at the same time a principal creditor of the other;

(2) That both debts consist in a sum of money, or if the things due are consumable, they be of the same kind, and also of the same quality if the latter has been stated;

(3) That the two debts be due;

(4) That they be liquidated and demandable;

(5) That over neither of them there be any retention or controversy, commenced by third persons and communicated in due time to the debtor. (1196)

Article 1280. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the guarantor may set up compensation as regards what the creditor may owe the principal debtor. (1197)

Article 1281. Compensation may be total or partial. When the two debts are of the same amount, there is a total compensation. (n)

Article 1282. The parties may agree upon the compensation of debts which are not yet due. (n)

Article 1283. If one of the parties to a suit over an obligation has a claim for damages against the other, the former may set it off by proving his right to said damages and the amount thereof. (n)

Article 1284. When one or both debts are rescissible or voidable, they may be compensated against each other before they are judicially rescinded or avoided. (n)

Article 1285. The debtor who has consented to the assignment of rights made by a creditor in favor of a third person, cannot set up against the assignee the compensation which would pertain to him against the assignor, unless the assignor was notified by the debtor at the time he gave his consent, that he reserved his right to the compensation.

If the creditor communicated the cession to him but the debtor did not consent thereto, the latter may set up the compensation of debts previous to the cession, but not of subsequent ones.

If the assignment is made without the knowledge of the debtor, he may set up the compensation of all credits prior to the same and also later ones until he had knowledge of the assignment. (1198a)

Article 1286. Compensation takes place by operation of law, even though the debts may be payable at different places, but there shall be an indemnity for expenses of exchange or transportation to the place of payment. (1199a)

Article 1287. Compensation shall not be proper when one of the debts arises from a depositum or from the obligations of a depositary or of a bailee in commodatum.

Neither can compensation be set up against a creditor who has a claim for support due by gratuitous title, without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph 2 of article 301. (1200a)

Article 1288. Neither shall there be compensation if one of the debts consists in civil liability arising from a penal offense. (n)

Article 1289. If a person should have against him several debts which are susceptible of compensation, the rules on the application of payments shall apply to the order of the compensation. (1201)

Article 1290. When all the requisites mentioned in article 1279 are present, compensation takes effect by operation of law, and extinguishes both debts to the concurrent amount, even though the creditors and debtors are not aware of the compensation. (1202a)

SECTION 6 Novation

Article 1291. Obligations may be modified by:

(1) Changing their object or principal conditions;

(2) Substituting the person of the debtor;

(3) Subrogating a third person in the rights of the creditor. (1203)

Article 1292. In order that an obligation may be extinguished by another which substitute the same, it is imperative that it be so declared in unequivocal terms, or that the old and the new obligations be on every point incompatible with each other. (1204)

Article 1293. Novation which consists in substituting a new debtor in the place of the original one, may be made even without the knowledge or against the will of the latter, but not without the consent of the creditor. Payment by the new debtor gives him the rights mentioned in articles 1236 and 1237. (1205a)

Article 1294. If the substitution is without the knowledge or against the will of the debtor, the new debtor's insolvency or non-fulfillment of the obligations shall not give rise to any liability on the part of the original debtor. (n)

Article 1295. The insolvency of the new debtor, who has been proposed by the original debtor and accepted by the creditor, shall not revive the action of the latter against the original obligor, except when said insolvency was already existing and of public knowledge, or known to the debtor, when the delegated his debt. (1206a)

Article 1296. When the principal obligation is extinguished in consequence of a novation, accessory obligations may subsist only insofar as they may benefit third persons who did not give their consent. (1207)

Article 1297. If the new obligation is void, the original one shall subsist, unless the parties intended that the former relation should be extinguished in any event. (n)

Article 1298. The novation is void if the original obligation was void, except when annulment may be claimed only by the debtor or when ratification validates acts which are voidable. (1208a)

Article 1299. If the original obligation was subject to a suspensive or resolutory condition, the new obligation shall be under the same condition, unless it is otherwise stipulated. (n)

Article 1300. Subrogation of a third person in the rights of the creditor is either legal or conventional. The former is not presumed, except in cases expressly mentioned in this Code; the latter must be clearly established in order that it may take effect. (1209a)

Article 1301. Conventional subrogation of a third person requires the consent of the original parties and of the third person. (n)

Article 1302. It is presumed that there is legal subrogation:

(1) When a creditor pays another creditor who is preferred, even without the debtor's knowledge;

(2) When a third person, not interested in the obligation, pays with the express or tacit approval of the debtor;

(3) When, even without the knowledge of the debtor, a person interested in the fulfillment of the obligation pays, without prejudice to the effects of confusion as to the latter's share. (1210a)

Article 1303. Subrogation transfers to the persons subrogated the credit with all the rights thereto appertaining, either against the debtor or against third person, be they guarantors or possessors of mortgages, subject to stipulation in a conventional subrogation. (1212a)

Article 1304. A creditor, to whom partial payment has been made, may exercise his right for the remainder, and he shall be preferred to the person who has been subrogated in his place in virtue of the partial payment of the same credit. (1213)

TITLE II CONTRACTS

CHAPTER 1 General Provisions

Article 1305. A contract is a meeting of minds between two persons whereby one binds himself, with respect to the other, to give something or to render some service. (1254a)

Article 1306. The contracting parties may establish such stipulations, clauses, terms and conditions as they may deem convenient, provided they are not contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order, or public policy. (1255a)

Article 1307. Innominate contracts shall be regulated by the stipulations of the parties, by the provisions of Titles I and II of this Book, by the rules governing the most analogous nominate contracts, and by the customs of the place. (n)

Article 1308. The contract must bind both contracting parties; its validity or compliance cannot be left to the will of one of them. (1256a)

Article 1309. The determination of the performance may be left to a third person, whose decision shall not be binding until it has been made known to both contracting parties. (n)

Article 1310. The determination shall not be obligatory if it is evidently inequitable. In such case, the courts shall decide what is equitable under the circumstances. (n)

Article 1311. Contracts take effect only between the parties, their assigns and heirs, except in case where the rights and obligations arising from the contract are not transmissible by their nature, or by stipulation or by provision of law. The heir is not liable beyond the value of the property he received from the decedent.

If a contract should contain some stipulation in favor of a third person, he may demand its fulfillment provided he communicated his acceptance to the obligor before its revocation. A mere incidental benefit or interest of a person is not sufficient. The contracting parties must have clearly and deliberately conferred a favor upon a third person. (1257a)

Article 1312. In contracts creating real rights, third persons who come into possession of the object of the contract are bound thereby, subject to the provisions of the Mortgage Law and the Land Registration Laws. (n)

Article 1313. Creditors are protected in cases of contracts intended to defraud them. (n)

Article 1314. Any third person who induces another to violate his contract shall be liable for damages to the other contracting party. (n)

Article 1315. Contracts are perfected by mere consent, and from that moment the parties are bound not only to the fulfillment of what has been expressly stipulated but also to all the consequences which, according to their nature, may be in keeping with good faith, usage and law. (1258)

Article 1316. Real contracts, such as deposit, pledge and commodatum, are not perfected until the delivery of the object of the obligation. (n)

Article 1317. No one may contract in the name of another without being authorized by the latter, or unless he has by law a right to represent him.

A contract entered into in the name of another by one who has no authority or legal representation, or who has acted beyond his powers, shall be unenforceable, unless it is ratified, expressly or impliedly, by the person on whose behalf it has been executed, before it is revoked by the other contracting party. (1259a)

CHAPTER 2 Essential Requisites of Contracts

General Provisions

Article 1318. There is no contract unless the following requisites concur:

(1) Consent of the contracting parties;

(2) Object certain which is the subject matter of the contract;

(3) Cause of the obligation which is established. (1261)

SECTION 1 Consent

Article 1319. Consent is manifested by the meeting of the offer and the acceptance upon the thing and the cause which are to constitute the contract. The offer must be certain and the acceptance absolute. A qualified acceptance constitutes a counter-offer.

Acceptance made by letter or telegram does not bind the offerer except from the time it came to his knowledge. The contract, in such a case, is presumed to have been entered into in the place where the offer was made. (1262a)

Article 1320. An acceptance may be express or implied. (n)

Article 1321. The person making the offer may fix the time, place, and manner of acceptance, all of which must be complied with. (n)

Article 1322. An offer made through an agent is accepted from the time acceptance is communicated to him. (n)

Article 1323. An offer becomes ineffective upon the death, civil interdiction, insanity, or insolvency of either party before acceptance is conveyed. (n)

Article 1324. When the offerer has allowed the offeree a certain period to accept, the offer may be withdrawn at any time before acceptance by communicating such withdrawal, except when the option is founded upon a consideration, as something paid or promised. (n)

Article 1325. Unless it appears otherwise, business advertisements of things for sale are not definite offers, but mere invitations to make an offer. (n)

Article 1326. Advertisements for bidders are simply invitations to make proposals, and the advertiser is not bound to accept the highest or lowest bidder, unless the contrary appears. (n)

Article 1327. The following cannot give consent to a contract:

(1) Unemancipated minors;

(2) Insane or demented persons, and deaf-mutes who do not know how to write. (1263a)

Article 1328. Contracts entered into during a lucid interval are valid. Contracts agreed to in a state of drunkenness or during a hypnotic spell are voidable. (n)

Article 1329. The incapacity declared in article 1327 is subject to the modifications determined by law, and is understood to be without prejudice to special disqualifications established in the laws. (1264)

Article 1330. A contract where consent is given through mistake, violence, intimidation, undue influence, or fraud is voidable. (1265a)

Article 1331. In order that mistake may invalidate consent, it should refer to the substance of the thing which is the object of the contract, or to those conditions which have principally moved one or both parties to enter into the contract.

Mistake as to the identity or qualifications of one of the parties will vitiate consent only when such identity or qualifications have been the principal cause of the contract.

A simple mistake of account shall give rise to its correction. (1266a)

Article 1332. When one of the parties is unable to read, or if the contract is in a language not understood by him, and mistake or fraud is alleged, the person enforcing the contract must show that the terms thereof have been fully explained to the former. (n)

Article 1333. There is no mistake if the party alleging it knew the doubt, contingency or risk affecting the object of the contract. (n)

Article 1334. Mutual error as to the legal effect of an agreement when the real purpose of the parties is frustrated, may vitiate consent. (n)

Article 1335. There is violence when in order to wrest consent, serious or irresistible force is employed.

There is intimidation when one of the contracting parties is compelled by a reasonable and well-grounded fear of an imminent and grave evil upon his person or property, or upon the person or property of his spouse, descendants or ascendants, to give his consent.

To determine the degree of intimidation, the age, sex and condition of the person shall be borne in mind.

A threat to enforce one's claim through competent authority, if the claim is just or legal, does not vitiate consent. (1267a)

Article 1336. Violence or intimidation shall annul the obligation, although it may have been employed by a third person who did not take part in the contract. (1268)

Article 1337. There is undue influence when a person takes improper advantage of his power over the will of another, depriving the latter of a reasonable freedom of choice. The following circumstances shall be considered: the confidential, family, spiritual and other relations between the parties, or the fact that the person alleged to have been unduly influenced was suffering from mental weakness, or was ignorant or in financial distress. (n)

Article 1338. There is fraud when, through insidious words or machinations of one of the contracting parties, the other is induced to enter into a contract which, without them, he would not have agreed to. (1269)

Article 1339. Failure to disclose facts, when there is a duty to reveal them, as when the parties are bound by confidential relations, constitutes fraud. (n)

Article 1340. The usual exaggerations in trade, when the other party had an opportunity to know the facts, are not in themselves fraudulent. (n)

Article 1341. A mere expression of an opinion does not signify fraud, unless made by an expert and the other party has relied on the former's special knowledge. (n)

Article 1342. Misrepresentation by a third person does not vitiate consent, unless such misrepresentation has created substantial mistake and the same is mutual. (n)

Article 1343. Misrepresentation made in good faith is not fraudulent but may constitute error. (n)

Article 1344. In order that fraud may make a contract voidable, it should be serious and should not have been employed by both contracting parties.

Incidental fraud only obliges the person employing it to pay damages. (1270)

Article 1345. Simulation of a contract may be absolute or relative. The former takes place when the parties do not intend to be bound at all; the latter, when the parties conceal their true agreement. (n)

Article 1346. An absolutely simulated or fictitious contract is void. A relative simulation, when it does not prejudice a third person and is not intended for any purpose contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public policy binds the parties to their real agreement. (n)

SECTION 2 Object of Contracts

Article 1347. All things which are not outside the commerce of men, including future things, may be the object of a contract. All rights which are not intransmissible may also be the object of contracts.

No contract may be entered into upon future inheritance except in cases expressly authorized by law.

All services which are not contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public policy may likewise be the object of a contract. (1271a)

Article 1348. Impossible things or services cannot be the object of contracts. (1272)

Article 1349. The object of every contract must be determinate as to its kind. The fact that the quantity is not determinate shall not be an obstacle to the existence of the contract, provided it is possible to determine the same, without the need of a new contract between the parties. (1273)

SECTION 3 Cause of Contracts

Article 1350. In onerous contracts the cause is understood to be, for each contracting party, the prestation or promise of a thing or service by the other; in remuneratory ones, the service or benefit which is remunerated; and in contracts of pure beneficence, the mere liberality of the benefactor. (1274)

Article 1351. The particular motives of the parties in entering into a contract are different from the cause thereof. (n)

Article 1352. Contracts without cause, or with unlawful cause, produce no effect whatever. The cause is unlawful if it is contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public policy. (1275a)

Article 1353. The statement of a false cause in contracts shall render them void, if it should not be proved that they were founded upon another cause which is true and lawful. (1276)

Article 1354. Although the cause is not stated in the contract, it is presumed that it exists and is lawful, unless the debtor proves the contrary. (1277)

Article 1355. Except in cases specified by law, lesion or inadequacy of cause shall not invalidate a contract, unless there has been fraud, mistake or undue influence. (n)

CHAPTER 3 Form of Contracts

Article 1356. Contracts shall be obligatory, in whatever form they may have been entered into, provided all the essential requisites for their validity are present. However, when the law requires that a contract be in some form in order that it may be valid or enforceable, or that a contract be proved in a certain way, that requirement is absolute and indispensable. In such cases, the right of the parties stated in the following article cannot be exercised. (1278a)

Article 1357. If the law requires a document or other special form, as in the acts and contracts enumerated in the following article, the contracting parties may compel each other to observe that form, once the contract has been perfected. This right may be exercised simultaneously with the action upon the contract. (1279a)

Article 1358. The following must appear in a public document:

(1) Acts and contracts which have for their object the creation, transmission, modification or extinguishment of real rights over immovable property; sales of real property or of an interest therein are governed by articles 1403, No. 2, and 1405;

(2) The cession, repudiation or renunciation of hereditary rights or of those of the conjugal partnership of gains;

(3) The power to administer property, or any other power which has for its object an act appearing or which should appear in a public document, or should prejudice a third person;

(4) The cession of actions or rights proceeding from an act appearing in a public document.

All other contracts where the amount involved exceeds five hundred pesos must appear in writing, even a private one. But sales of goods, chattels or things in action are governed by articles, 1403, No. 2 and 1405. (1280a)

CHAPTER 4 Reformation of Instruments (n)

Article 1359. When, there having been a meeting of the minds of the parties to a contract, their true intention is not expressed in the instrument purporting to embody the agreement, by reason of mistake, fraud, inequitable conduct or accident, one of the parties may ask for the reformation of the instrument to the end that such true intention may be expressed.

If mistake, fraud, inequitable conduct, or accident has prevented a meeting of the minds of the parties, the proper remedy is not reformation of the instrument but annulment of the contract.

Article 1360. The principles of the general law on the reformation of instruments are hereby adopted insofar as they are not in conflict with the provisions of this Code.

Article 1361. When a mutual mistake of the parties causes the failure of the instrument to disclose their real agreement, said instrument may be reformed.

Article 1362. If one party was mistaken and the other acted fraudulently or inequitably in such a way that the instrument does not show their true intention, the former may ask for the reformation of the instrument.

Article 1363. When one party was mistaken and the other knew or believed that the instrument did not state their real agreement, but concealed that fact from the former, the instrument may be reformed.

Article 1364. When through the ignorance, lack of skill, negligence or bad faith on the part of the person drafting the instrument or of the clerk or typist, the instrument does not express the true intention of the parties, the courts may order that the instrument be reformed.

Article 1365. If two parties agree upon the mortgage or pledge of real or personal property, but the instrument states that the property is sold absolutely or with a right of repurchase, reformation of the instrument is proper.

Article 1366. There shall be no reformation in the following cases:

(1) Simple donations inter vivos wherein no condition is imposed;

(2) Wills;

(3) When the real agreement is void.

Article 1367. When one of the parties has brought an action to enforce the instrument, he cannot subsequently ask for its reformation.

Article 1368. Reformation may be ordered at the instance of either party or his successors in interest, if the mistake was mutual; otherwise, upon petition of the injured party, or his heirs and assigns.

Article 1369. The procedure for the reformation of instrument shall be governed by rules of court to be promulgated by the Supreme Court.

CHAPTER 5 Interpretation of Contracts

Article 1370. If the terms of a contract are clear and leave no doubt upon the intention of the contracting parties, the literal meaning of its stipulations shall control.

If the words appear to be contrary to the evident intention of the parties, the latter shall prevail over the former. (1281)

Article 1371. In order to judge the intention of the contracting parties, their contemporaneous and subsequent acts shall be principally considered. (1282)

Article 1372. However general the terms of a contract may be, they shall not be understood to comprehend things that are distinct and cases that are different from those upon which the parties intended to agree. (1283)

Article 1373. If some stipulation of any contract should admit of several meanings, it shall be understood as bearing that import which is most adequate to render it effectual. (1284)

Article 1374. The various stipulations of a contract shall be interpreted together, attributing to the doubtful ones that sense which may result from all of them taken jointly. (1285)

Article 1375. Words which may have different significations shall be understood in that which is most in keeping with the nature and object of the contract. (1286)

Article 1376. The usage or custom of the place shall be borne in mind in the interpretation of the ambiguities of a contract, and shall fill the omission of stipulations which are ordinarily established. (1287)

Article 1377. The interpretation of obscure words or stipulations in a contract shall not favor the party who caused the obscurity. (1288)

Article 1378. When it is absolutely impossible to settle doubts by the rules established in the preceding articles, and the doubts refer to incidental circumstances of a gratuitous contract, the least transmission of rights and interests shall prevail. If the contract is onerous, the doubt shall be settled in favor of the greatest reciprocity of interests.

If the doubts are cast upon the principal object of the contract in such a way that it cannot be known what may have been the intention or will of the parties, the contract shall be null and void. (1289)

Article 1379. The principles of interpretation stated in Rule 123 of the Rules of Court shall likewise be observed in the construction of contracts. (n)

CHAPTER 6 Rescissible Contracts

Article 1380. Contracts validly agreed upon may be rescinded in the cases established by law. (1290)

Article 1381. The following contracts are rescissible:

(1) Those which are entered into by guardians whenever the wards whom they represent suffer lesion by more than one-fourth of the value of the things which are the object thereof;

(2) Those agreed upon in representation of absentees, if the latter suffer the lesion stated in the preceding number;

(3) Those undertaken in fraud of creditors when the latter cannot in any other manner collect the claims due them;

(4) Those which refer to things under litigation if they have been entered into by the defendant without the knowledge and approval of the litigants or of competent judicial authority;

(5) All other contracts specially declared by law to be subject to rescission. (1291a)

Article 1382. Payments made in a state of insolvency for obligations to whose fulfillment the debtor could not be compelled at the time they were effected, are also rescissible. (1292)

Article 1383. The action for rescission is subsidiary; it cannot be instituted except when the party suffering damage has no other legal means to obtain reparation for the same. (1294)

Article 1384. Rescission shall be only to the extent necessary to cover the damages caused. (n)

Article 1385. Rescission creates the obligation to return the things which were the object of the contract, together with their fruits, and the price with its interest; consequently, it can be carried out only when he who demands rescission can return whatever he may be obliged to restore.

Neither shall rescission take place when the things which are the object of the contract are legally in the possession of third persons who did not act in bad faith.

In this case, indemnity for damages may be demanded from the person causing the loss. (1295)

Article 1386. Rescission referred to in Nos. 1 and 2 of article 1381 shall not take place with respect to contracts approved by the courts. (1296a)

Article 1387. All contracts by virtue of which the debtor alienates property by gratuitous title are presumed to have been entered into in fraud of creditors, when the donor did not reserve sufficient property to pay all debts contracted before the donation.

Alienations by onerous title are also presumed fraudulent when made by persons against whom some judgment has been rendered in any instance or some writ of attachment has been issued. The decision or attachment need not refer to the property alienated, and need not have been obtained by the party seeking the rescission.

In addition to these presumptions, the design to defraud creditors may be proved in any other manner recognized by the law of evidence. (1297a)

Article 1388. Whoever acquires in bad faith the things alienated in fraud of creditors, shall indemnify the latter for damages suffered by them on account of the alienation, whenever, due to any cause, it should be impossible for him to return them.

If there are two or more alienations, the first acquirer shall be liable first, and so on successively. (1298a)

Article 1389. The action to claim rescission must be commenced within four years.

For persons under guardianship and for absentees, the period of four years shall not begin until the termination of the former's incapacity, or until the domicile of the latter is known. (1299)

CHAPTER 7 Voidable Contracts

Article 1390. The following contracts are voidable or annullable, even though there may have been no damage to the contracting parties:

(1) Those where one of the parties is incapable of giving consent to a contract;

(2) Those where the consent is vitiated by mistake, violence, intimidation, undue influence or fraud.

These contracts are binding, unless they are annulled by a proper action in court. They are susceptible of ratification. (n)

Article 1391. The action for annulment shall be brought within four years.

This period shall begin:

In cases of intimidation, violence or undue influence, from the time the defect of the consent ceases.

In case of mistake or fraud, from the time of the discovery of the same.

And when the action refers to contracts entered into by minors or other incapacitated persons, from the time the guardianship ceases. (1301a)

Article 1392. Ratification extinguishes the action to annul a voidable contract. (1309a)

Article 1393. Ratification may be effected expressly or tacitly. It is understood that there is a tacit ratification if, with knowledge of the reason which renders the contract voidable and such reason having ceased, the person who has a right to invoke it should execute an act which necessarily implies an intention to waive his right. (1311a)

Article 1394. Ratification may be effected by the guardian of the incapacitated person. (n)

Article 1395. Ratification does not require the conformity of the contracting party who has no right to bring the action for annulment. (1312)

Article 1396. Ratification cleanses the contract from all its defects from the moment it was constituted. (1313)

Article 1397. The action for the annulment of contracts may be instituted by all who are thereby obliged principally or subsidiarily. However, persons who are capable cannot allege the incapacity of those with whom they contracted; nor can those who exerted intimidation, violence, or undue influence, or employed fraud, or caused mistake base their action upon these flaws of the contract. (1302a)

Article 1398. An obligation having been annulled, the contracting parties shall restore to each other the things which have been the subject matter of the contract, with their fruits, and the price with its interest, except in cases provided by law.

In obligations to render service, the value thereof shall be the basis for damages. (1303a)

Article 1399. When the defect of the contract consists in the incapacity of one of the parties, the incapacitated person is not obliged to make any restitution except insofar as he has been benefited by the thing or price received by him. (1304)

Article 1400. Whenever the person obliged by the decree of annulment to return the thing can not do so because it has been lost through his fault, he shall return the fruits received and the value of the thing at the time of the loss, with interest from the same date. (1307a)

Article 1401. The action for annulment of contracts shall be extinguished when the thing which is the object thereof is lost through the fraud or fault of the person who has a right to institute the proceedings.

If the right of action is based upon the incapacity of any one of the contracting parties, the loss of the thing shall not be an obstacle to the success of the action, unless said loss took place through the fraud or fault of the plaintiff. (1314a)

Article 1402. As long as one of the contracting parties does not restore what in virtue of the decree of annulment he is bound to return, the other cannot be compelled to comply with what is incumbent upon him. (1308)

CHAPTER 8 Unenforceable Contracts (n)

Article 1403. The following contracts are unenforceable, unless they are ratified:

(1) Those entered into in the name of another person by one who has been given no authority or legal representation, or who has acted beyond his powers;

(2) Those that do not comply with the Statute of Frauds as set forth in this number. In the following cases an agreement hereafter made shall be unenforceable by action, unless the same, or some note or memorandum, thereof, be in writing, and subscribed by the party charged, or by his agent; evidence, therefore, of the agreement cannot be received without the writing, or a secondary evidence of its contents:

(a) An agreement that by its terms is not to be performed within a year from the making thereof;

(b) A special promise to answer for the debt, default, or miscarriage of another;

(c) An agreement made in consideration of marriage, other than a mutual promise to marry;

(d) An agreement for the sale of goods, chattels or things in action, at a price not less than five hundred pesos, unless the buyer accept and receive part of such goods and chattels, or the evidences, or some of them, of such things in action or pay at the time some part of the purchase money; but when a sale is made by auction and entry is made by the auctioneer in his sales book, at the time of the sale, of the amount and kind of property sold, terms of sale, price, names of the purchasers and person on whose account the sale is made, it is a sufficient memorandum;

(e) An agreement for the leasing for a longer period than one year, or for the sale of real property or of an interest therein;

( f ) A representation as to the credit of a third person.

(3) Those where both parties are incapable of giving consent to a contract.

Article 1404. Unauthorized contracts are governed by article 1317 and the principles of agency in Title X of this Book.

Article 1405. Contracts infringing the Statute of Frauds, referred to in No. 2 of article 1403, are ratified by the failure to object to the presentation of oral evidence to prove the same, or by the acceptance of benefit under them.

Article 1406. When a contract is enforceable under the Statute of Frauds, and a public document is necessary for its registration in the Registry of Deeds, the parties may avail themselves of the right under Article 1357.

Article 1407. In a contract where both parties are incapable of giving consent, express or implied ratification by the parent, or guardian, as the case may be, of one of the contracting parties shall give the contract the same effect as if only one of them were incapacitated.

If ratification is made by the parents or guardians, as the case may be, of both contracting parties, the contract shall be validated from the inception.

Article 1408. Unenforceable contracts cannot be assailed by third persons.

CHAPTER 9 Void and Inexistent Contracts

Article 1409. The following contracts are inexistent and void from the beginning:

(1) Those whose cause, object or purpose is contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public policy;

(2) Those which are absolutely simulated or fictitious;

(3) Those whose cause or object did not exist at the time of the transaction;

(4) Those whose object is outside the commerce of men;

(5) Those which contemplate an impossible service;

(6) Those where the intention of the parties relative to the principal object of the contract cannot be ascertained;

(7) Those expressly prohibited or declared void by law.

These contracts cannot be ratified. Neither can the right to set up the defense of illegality be waived.

Article 1410. The action or defense for the declaration of the inexistence of a contract does not prescribe.

Article 1411. When the nullity proceeds from the illegality of the cause or object of the contract, and the act constitutes a criminal offense, both parties being in pari delicto, they shall have no action against each other, and both shall be prosecuted. Moreover, the provisions of the Penal Code relative to the disposal of effects or instruments of a crime shall be applicable to the things or the price of the contract.

This rule shall be applicable when only one of the parties is guilty; but the innocent one may claim what he has given, and shall not be bound to comply with his promise. (1305)

Article 1412. If the act in which the unlawful or forbidden cause consists does not constitute a criminal offense, the following rules shall be observed:

(1) When the fault is on the part of both contracting parties, neither may recover what he has given by virtue of the contract, or demand the performance of the other's undertaking;

(2) When only one of the contracting parties is at fault, he cannot recover what he has given by reason of the contract, or ask for the fulfillment of what has been promised him. The other, who is not at fault, may demand the return of what he has given without any obligation to comply his promise. (1306)

Article 1413. Interest paid in excess of the interest allowed by the usury laws may be recovered by the debtor, with interest thereon from the date of the payment.

Article 1414. When money is paid or property delivered for an illegal purpose, the contract may be repudiated by one of the parties before the purpose has been accomplished, or before any damage has been caused to a third person. In such case, the courts may, if the public interest will thus be subserved, allow the party repudiating the contract to recover the money or property.

Article 1415. Where one of the parties to an illegal contract is incapable of giving consent, the courts may, if the interest of justice so demands allow recovery of money or property delivered by the incapacitated person.

Article 1416. When the agreement is not illegal per se but is merely prohibited, and the prohibition by the law is designed for the protection of the plaintiff, he may, if public policy is thereby enhanced, recover what he has paid or delivered.

Article 1417. When the price of any article or commodity is determined by statute, or by authority of law, any person paying any amount in excess of the maximum price allowed may recover such excess.

Article 1418. When the law fixes, or authorizes the fixing of the maximum number of hours of labor, and a contract is entered into whereby a laborer undertakes to work longer than the maximum thus fixed, he may demand additional compensation for service rendered beyond the time limit.

Article 1419. When the law sets, or authorizes the setting of a minimum wage for laborers, and a contract is agreed upon by which a laborer accepts a lower wage, he shall be entitled to recover the deficiency.

Article 1420. In case of a divisible contract, if the illegal terms can be separated from the legal ones, the latter may be enforced.

Article 1421. The defense of illegality of contract is not available to third persons whose interests are not directly affected.

Article 1422. A contract which is the direct result of a previous illegal contract, is also void and inexistent.

TITLE III NATURAL OBLIGATIONS

Article 1423. Obligations are civil or natural. Civil obligations give a right of action to compel their performance. Natural obligations, not being based on positive law but on equity and natural law, do not grant a right of action to enforce their performance, but after voluntary fulfillment by the obligor, they authorize the retention of what has been delivered or rendered by reason thereof. Some natural obligations are set forth in the following articles.

Article 1424. When a right to sue upon a civil obligation has lapsed by extinctive prescription, the obligor who voluntarily performs the contract cannot recover what he has delivered or the value of the service he has rendered.

Article 1425. When without the knowledge or against the will of the debtor, a third person pays a debt which the obligor is not legally bound to pay because the action thereon has prescribed, but the debtor later voluntarily reimburses the third person, the obligor cannot recover what he has paid.

Article 1426. When a minor between eighteen and twenty-one years of age who has entered into a contract without the consent of the parent or guardian, after the annulment of the contract voluntarily returns the whole thing or price received, notwithstanding the fact that he has not been benefited thereby, there is no right to demand the thing or price thus returned.

Article 1427. When a minor between eighteen and twenty-one years of age, who has entered into a contract without the consent of the parent or guardian, voluntarily pays a sum of money or delivers a fungible thing in fulfillment of the obligation, there shall be no right to recover the same from the obligee who has spent or consumed it in good faith. (1160A)

Article 1428. When, after an action to enforce a civil obligation has failed the defendant voluntarily performs the obligation, he cannot demand the return of what he has delivered or the payment of the value of the service he has rendered.

Article 1429. When a testate or intestate heir voluntarily pays a debt of the decedent exceeding the value of the property which he received by will or by the law of intestacy from the estate of the deceased, the payment is valid and cannot be rescinded by the payer.

Article 1430. When a will is declared void because it has not been executed in accordance with the formalities required by law, but one of the intestate heirs, after the settlement of the debts of the deceased, pays a legacy in compliance with a clause in the defective will, the payment is effective and irrevocable.

TITLE IV ESTOPPEL (n)

Article 1431. Through estoppel an admission or representation is rendered conclusive upon the person making it, and cannot be denied or disproved as against the person relying thereon.

Article 1432. The principles of estoppel are hereby adopted insofar as they are not in conflict with the provisions of this Code, the Code of Commerce, the Rules of Court and special laws.

Article 1433. Estoppel may in pais or by deed.

Article 1434. When a person who is not the owner of a thing sells or alienates and delivers it, and later the seller or grantor acquires title thereto, such title passes by operation of law to the buyer or grantee.

Article 1435. If a person in representation of another sells or alienates a thing, the former cannot subsequently set up his own title as against the buyer or grantee.

Article 1436. A lessee or a bailee is estopped from asserting title to the thing leased or received, as against the lessor or bailor.

Article 1437. When in a contract between third persons concerning immovable property, one of them is misled by a person with respect to the ownership or real right over the real estate, the latter is precluded from asserting his legal title or interest therein, provided all these requisites are present:

(1) There must be fraudulent representation or wrongful concealment of facts known to the party estopped;

(2) The party precluded must intend that the other should act upon the facts as misrepresented;

(3) The party misled must have been unaware of the true facts; and

(4) The party defrauded must have acted in accordance with the misrepresentation.

Article 1438. One who has allowed another to assume apparent ownership of personal property for the purpose of making any transfer of it, cannot, if he received the sum for which a pledge has been constituted, set up his own title to defeat the pledge of the property, made by the other to a pledgee who received the same in good faith and for value.

Article 1439. Estoppel is effective only as between the parties thereto or their successors in interest.

TITLE V TRUSTS (n)

CHAPTER 1 General Provisions

Article 1440. A person who establishes a trust is called the trustor; one in whom confidence is reposed as regards property for the benefit of another person is known as the trustee; and the person for whose benefit the trust has been created is referred to as the beneficiary.

Article 1441. Trusts are either express or implied. Express trusts are created by the intention of the trustor or of the parties. Implied trusts come into being by operation of law.

Article 1442. The principles of the general law of trusts, insofar as they are not in conflict with this Code, the Code of Commerce, the Rules of Court and special laws are hereby adopted.

CHAPTER 2 Express Trusts

Article 1443. No express trusts concerning an immovable or any interest therein may be proved by parol evidence.

Article 1444. No particular words are required for the creation of an express trust, it being sufficient that a trust is clearly intended.

Article 1445. No trust shall fail because the trustee appointed declines the designation, unless the contrary should appear in the instrument constituting the trust.

Article 1446. Acceptance by the beneficiary is necessary. Nevertheless, if the trust imposes no onerous condition upon the beneficiary, his acceptance shall be presumed, if there is no proof to the contrary.

CHAPTER 3 Implied Trusts

Article 1447. The enumeration of the following cases of implied trust does not exclude others established by the general law of trust, but the limitation laid down in article 1442 shall be applicable.

Article 1448. There is an implied trust when property is sold, and the legal estate is granted to one party but the price is paid by another for the purpose of having the beneficial interest of the property. The former is the trustee, while the latter is the beneficiary. However, if the person to whom the title is conveyed is a child, legitimate or illegitimate, of the one paying the price of the sale, no trust is implied by law, it being disputably presumed that there is a gift in favor of the child.

Article 1449. There is also an implied trust when a donation is made to a person but it appears that although the legal estate is transmitted to the donee, he nevertheless is either to have no beneficial interest or only a part thereof.

Article 1450. If the price of a sale of property is loaned or paid by one person for the benefit of another and the conveyance is made to the lender or payor to secure the payment of the debt, a trust arises by operation of law in favor of the person to whom the money is loaned or for whom its is paid. The latter may redeem the property and compel a conveyance thereof to him.

Article 1451. When land passes by succession to any person and he causes the legal title to be put in the name of another, a trust is established by implication of law for the benefit of the true owner.

Article 1452. If two or more persons agree to purchase property and by common consent the legal title is taken in the name of one of them for the benefit of all, a trust is created by force of law in favor of the others in proportion to the interest of each.

Article 1453. When property is conveyed to a person in reliance upon his declared intention to hold it for, or transfer it to another or the grantor, there is an implied trust in favor of the person whose benefit is contemplated.

Article 1454. If an absolute conveyance of property is made in order to secure the performance of an obligation of the grantor toward the grantee, a trust by virtue of law is established. If the fulfillment of the obligation is offered by the grantor when it becomes due, he may demand the reconveyance of the property to him.

Article 1455. When any trustee, guardian or other person holding a fiduciary relationship uses trust funds for the purchase of property and causes the conveyance to be made to him or to a third person, a trust is established by operation of law in favor of the person to whom the funds belong.

Article 1456. If property is acquired through mistake or fraud, the person obtaining it is, by force of law, considered a trustee of an implied trust for the benefit of the person from whom the property comes.

Article 1457. An implied trust may be proved by oral evidence.

[codalsetal]

[Civil Code of the Philippines] Book III Title V Prescription

TITLE VPRESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1General Provisions

Article 1106. By prescription, one acquires ownership and other real rights through the lapse of time in the manner and under the conditions laid down by law.

In the same way, rights and conditions are lost by prescription. (1930a)

Article 1107. Persons who are capable of acquiring property or rights by the other legal modes may acquire the same by means of prescription.

Minors and other incapacitated persons may acquire property or rights by prescription, either personally or through their parents, guardians or legal representatives. (1931a)

Article 1108. Prescription, both acquisitive and extinctive, runs against:

(1) Minors and other incapacitated persons who have parents, guardians or other legal representatives;

(2) Absentees who have administrators, either appointed by them before their disappearance, or appointed by the courts;

(3) Persons living abroad, who have managers or administrators;

(4) Juridical persons, except the State and its subdivisions.

Persons who are disqualified from administering their property have a right to claim damages from their legal representatives whose negligence has been the cause of prescription. (1932a)

Article 1109. Prescription does not run between husband and wife, even though there be a separation of property agreed upon in the marriage settlements or by judicial decree.

Neither does prescription run between parents and children, during the minority or insanity of the latter, and between guardian and ward during the continuance of the guardianship. (n)

Article 1110. Prescription, acquisitive and extinctive, runs in favor of, or against a married woman. (n)

Article 1111. Prescription obtained by a co-proprietor or a co-owner shall benefit the others. (1933)

Article 1112. Persons with capacity to alienate property may renounce prescription already obtained, but not the right to prescribe in the future.

Prescription is deemed to have been tacitly renounced when the renunciation results from acts which imply the abandonment of the right acquired. (1935)

Article 1113. All things which are within the commerce of men are susceptible of prescription, unless otherwise provided. Property of the State or any of its subdivisions not patrimonial in character shall not be the object of prescription. (1936a)

Article 1114. Creditors and all other persons interested in making the prescription effective may avail themselves thereof notwithstanding the express or tacit renunciation by the debtor or proprietor. (1937)

Article 1115. The provisions of the present Title are understood to be without prejudice to what in this Code or in special laws is established with respect to specific cases of prescription. (1938)

Article 1116. Prescription already running before the effectivity of this Code shall be governed by laws previously in force; but if since the time this Code took effect the entire period herein required for prescription should elapse, the present Code shall be applicable, even though by the former laws a longer period might be required. (1939)

CHAPTER 2Prescription of Ownership and Other Real Rights

Article 1117. Acquisitive prescription of dominion and other real rights may be ordinary or extraordinary.

Ordinary acquisitive prescription requires possession of things in good faith and with just title for the time fixed by law. (1940a)

Article 1118. Possession has to be in the concept of an owner, public, peaceful and uninterrupted. (1941)

Article 1119. Acts of possessory character executed in virtue of license or by mere tolerance of the owner shall not be available for the purposes of possession. (1942)

Article 1120. Possession is interrupted for the purposes of prescription, naturally or civilly. (1943)

Article 1121. Possession is naturally interrupted when through any cause it should cease for more than one year.

The old possession is not revived if a new possession should be exercised by the same adverse claimant. (1944a)

Article 1122. If the natural interruption is for only one year or less, the time elapsed shall be counted in favor of the prescription. (n)

Article 1123. Civil interruption is produced by judicial summons to the possessor. (1945a)

Article 1124. Judicial summons shall be deemed not to have been issued and shall not give rise to interruption:

(1) If it should be void for lack of legal solemnities;

(2) If the plaintiff should desist from the complaint or should allow the proceedings to lapse;

(3) If the possessor should be absolved from the complaint.

In all these cases, the period of the interruption shall be counted for the prescription. (1946a)

Article 1125. Any express or tacit recognition which the possessor may make of the owner's right also interrupts possession. (1948)

Article 1126. Against a title recorded in the Registry of Property, ordinary prescription of ownership or real rights shall not take place to the prejudice of a third person, except in virtue of another title also recorded; and the time shall begin to run from the recording of the latter.

As to lands registered under the Land Registration Act, the provisions of that special law shall govern. (1949a)

Article 1127. The good faith of the possessor consists in the reasonable belief that the person from whom he received the thing was the owner thereof, and could transmit his ownership. (1950a)

Article 1128. The conditions of good faith required for possession in articles 526, 527, 528, and 529 of this Code are likewise necessary for the determination of good faith in the prescription of ownership and other real rights. (1951)

Article 1129. For the purposes of prescription, there is just title when the adverse claimant came into possession of the property through one of the modes recognized by law for the acquisition of ownership or other real rights, but the grantor was not the owner or could not transmit any right. (n)

Article 1130. The title for prescription must be true and valid. (1953)

Article 1131. For the purposes of prescription, just title must be proved; it is never presumed. (1954a)

Article 1132. The ownership of movables prescribes through uninterrupted possession for four years in good faith.

The ownership of personal property also prescribes through uninterrupted possession for eight years, without need of any other condition.

With regard to the right of the owner to recover personal property lost or of which he has been illegally deprived, as well as with respect to movables acquired in a public sale, fair, or market, or from a merchant's store the provisions of articles 559 and 1505 of this Code shall be observed. (1955a)

Article 1133. Movables possessed through a crime can never be acquired through prescription by the offender. (1956a)

Article 1134. Ownership and other real rights over immovable property are acquired by ordinary prescription through possession of ten years. (1957a)

Article 1135. In case the adverse claimant possesses by mistake an area greater, or less than that expressed in his title, prescription shall be based on the possession. (n)

Article 1136. Possession in wartime, when the civil courts are not open, shall not be counted in favor of the adverse claimant. (n)

Article 1137. Ownership and other real rights over immovables also prescribe through uninterrupted adverse possession thereof for thirty years, without need of title or of good faith. (1959a)

Article 1138. In the computation of time necessary for prescription the following rules shall be observed:

(1) The present possessor may complete the period necessary for prescription by tacking his possession to that of his grantor or predecessor in interest;

(2) It is presumed that the present possessor who was also the possessor at a previous time, has continued to be in possession during the intervening time, unless there is proof to the contrary;

(3) The first day shall be excluded and the last day included. (1960a)

CHAPTER 3Prescription of Actions

Article 1139. Actions prescribe by the mere lapse of time fixed by law. (1961)

Article 1140. Actions to recover movables shall prescribe eight years from the time the possession thereof is lost, unless the possessor has acquired the ownership by prescription for a less period, according to articles 1132, and without prejudice to the provisions of articles 559, 1505, and 1133. (1962a)

Article 1141. Real actions over immovables prescribe after thirty years.

This provision is without prejudice to what is established for the acquisition of ownership and other real rights by prescription. (1963)

Article 1142. A mortgage action prescribes after ten years. (1964a)

Article 1143. The following rights, among others specified elsewhere in this Code, are not extinguished by prescription:

(1) To demand a right of way, regulated in article 649;

(2) To bring an action to abate a public or private nuisance. (n)

Article 1144. The following actions must be brought within ten years from the time the right of action accrues:

(1) Upon a written contract;

(2) Upon an obligation created by law;

(3) Upon a judgment. (n)

Article 1145. The following actions must be commenced within six years:

(1) Upon an oral contract;

(2) Upon a quasi-contract. (n)

Article 1146. The following actions must be instituted within four years:

(1) Upon an injury to the rights of the plaintiff;

(2) Upon a quasi-delict;

However, when the action arises from or out of any act, activity, or conduct of any public officer involving the exercise of powers or authority arising from Martial Law including the arrest, detention and/or trial of the plaintiff, the same must be brought within one (1) year. (As amended by PD No. 1755, Dec. 24, 1980.)

Article 1147. The following actions must be filed within one year:

(1) For forcible entry and detainer;

(2) For defamation. (n)

Article 1148. The limitations of action mentioned in articles 1140 to 1142, and 1144 to 1147 are without prejudice to those specified in other parts of this Code, in the Code of Commerce, and in special laws. (n)

Article 1149. All other actions whose periods are not fixed in this Code or in other laws must be brought within five years from the time the right of action accrues. (n)

Article 1150. The time for prescription for all kinds of actions, when there is no special provision which ordains otherwise, shall be counted from the day they may be brought. (1969)

Article 1151. The time for the prescription of actions which have for their object the enforcement of obligations to pay principal with interest or annuity runs from the last payment of the annuity or of the interest. (1970a)

Article 1152. The period for prescription of actions to demand the fulfillment of obligation declared by a judgment commences from the time the judgment became final. (1971)

Article 1153. The period for prescription of actions to demand accounting runs from the day the persons who should render the same cease in their functions.

The period for the action arising from the result of the accounting runs from the date when said result was recognized by agreement of the interested parties. (1972)

Article 1154. The period during which the obligee was prevented by a fortuitous event from enforcing his right is not reckoned against him. (n)

Article 1155. The prescription of actions is interrupted when they are filed before the court, when there is a written extrajudicial demand by the creditors, and when there is any written acknowledgment of the debt by the debtor. (1973a)

[codalsetal]

[Civil Code of the Philippines] Book IV Title XI-XVI [Credit Transactions]

TITLE XILOANGeneral Provisions

Article 1933. By the contract of loan, one of the parties delivers to another, either something not consumable so that the latter may use the same for a certain time and return it, in which case the contract is called a commodatum; or money or other consumable thing, upon the condition that the same amount of the same kind and quality shall be paid, in which case the contract is simply called a loan or mutuum.

Commodatum is essentially gratuitous.

Simple loan may be gratuitous or with a stipulation to pay interest.

In commodatum the bailor retains the ownership of the thing loaned, while in simple loan, ownership passes to the borrower. (1740a)

Article 1934. An accepted promise to deliver something by way of commodatum or simple loan is binding upon parties, but the commodatum or simple loan itself shall not be perfected until the delivery of the object of the contract. (n)

CHAPTER 1Commodatum

SECTION 1Nature of Commodatum

Article 1935. The bailee in commodatum acquires the use of the thing loaned but not its fruits; if any compensation is to be paid by him who acquires the use, the contract ceases to be a commodatum. (1941a)

Article 1936. Consumable goods may be the subject of commodatum if the purpose of the contract is not the consumption of the object, as when it is merely for exhibition. (n)

Article 1937. Movable or immovable property may be the object of commodatum. (n)

Article 1938. The bailor in commodatum need not be the owner of the thing loaned. (n)

Article 1939. Commodatum is purely personal in character. Consequently:

(1) The death of either the bailor or the bailee extinguishes the contract;

(2) The bailee can neither lend nor lease the object of the contract to a third person. However, the members of the bailee's household may make use of the thing loaned, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, or unless the nature of the thing forbids such use. (n)

Article 1940. A stipulation that the bailee may make use of the fruits of the thing loaned is valid. (n)

SECTION 2Obligations of the Bailee

Article 1941. The bailee is obliged to pay for the ordinary expenses for the use and preservation of the thing loaned. (1743a)

Article 1942. The bailee is liable for the loss of the thing, even if it should be through a fortuitous event:

(1) If he devotes the thing to any purpose different from that for which it has been loaned;

(2) If he keeps it longer than the period stipulated, or after the accomplishment of the use for which the commodatum has been constituted;

(3) If the thing loaned has been delivered with appraisal of its value, unless there is a stipulation exempting the bailee from responsibility in case of a fortuitous event;

(4) If he lends or leases the thing to a third person, who is not a member of his household;

(5) If, being able to save either the thing borrowed or his own thing, he chose to save the latter. (1744a and 1745)

Article 1943. The bailee does not answer for the deterioration of the thing loaned due only to the use thereof and without his fault. (1746)

Article 1944. The bailee cannot retain the thing loaned on the ground that the bailor owes him something, even though it may be by reason of expenses. However, the bailee has a right of retention for damages mentioned in article 1951. (1747a)

Article 1945. When there are two or more bailees to whom a thing is loaned in the same contract, they are liable solidarily. (1748a)

SECTION 3Obligations of the Bailor

ARTICLE 1946. The bailor cannot demand the return of the thing loaned till after the expiration of the period stipulated, or after the accomplishment of the use for which the commodatum has been constituted. However, if in the meantime, he should have urgent need of the thing, he may demand its return or temporary use.

In case of temporary use by the bailor, the contract of commodatum is suspended while the thing is in the possession of the bailor. (1749a)

Article 1947. The bailor may demand the thing at will, and the contractual relation is called a precarium, in the following cases:

(1) If neither the duration of the contract nor the use to which the thing loaned should be devoted, has been stipulated; or

(2) If the use of the thing is merely tolerated by the owner. (1750a)

Article 1948. The bailor may demand the immediate return of the thing if the bailee commits any act of ingratitude specified in article 765. (n)

Article 1949. The bailor shall refund the extraordinary expenses during the contract for the preservation of the thing loaned, provided the bailee brings the same to the knowledge of the bailor before incurring them, except when they are so urgent that the reply to the notification cannot be awaited without danger.

If the extraordinary expenses arise on the occasion of the actual use of the thing by the bailee, even though he acted without fault, they shall be borne equally by both the bailor and the bailee, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (1751a)

Article 1950. If, for the purpose of making use of the thing, the bailee incurs expenses other than those referred to in articles 1941 and 1949, he is not entitled to reimbursement. (n)

Article 1951. The bailor who, knowing the flaws of the thing loaned, does not advise the bailee of the same, shall be liable to the latter for the damages which he may suffer by reason thereof. (1752)

Article 1952. The bailor cannot exempt himself from the payment of expenses or damages by abandoning the thing to the bailee. (n)

CHAPTER 2Simple Loan or Mutuum

Article 1953. A person who receives a loan of money or any other fungible thing acquires the ownership thereof, and is bound to pay to the creditor an equal amount of the same kind and quality. (1753a)

Article 1954. A contract whereby one person transfers the ownership of non-fungible things to another with the obligation on the part of the latter to give things of the same kind, quantity, and quality shall be considered a barter. (n)

Article 1955. The obligation of a person who borrows money shall be governed by the provisions of articles 1249 and 1250 of this Code.

If what was loaned is a fungible thing other than money, the debtor owes another thing of the same kind, quantity and quality, even if it should change in value. In case it is impossible to deliver the same kind, its value at the time of the perfection of the loan shall be paid. (1754a)

Article 1956. No interest shall be due unless it has been expressly stipulated in writing. (1755a)

Article 1957. Contracts and stipulations, under any cloak or device whatever, intended to circumvent the laws against usury shall be void. The borrower may recover in accordance with the laws on usury. (n)

Article 1958. In the determination of the interest, if it is payable in kind, its value shall be appraised at the current price of the products or goods at the time and place of payment. (n)

Article 1959. Without prejudice to the provisions of article 2212, interest due and unpaid shall not earn interest. However, the contracting parties may by stipulation capitalize the interest due and unpaid, which as added principal, shall earn new interest. (n)

Article 1960. If the borrower pays interest when there has been no stipulation therefor, the provisions of this Code concerning solutio indebiti, or natural obligations, shall be applied, as the case may be. (n)

Article 1961. Usurious contracts shall be governed by the Usury Law and other special laws, so far as they are not inconsistent with this Code. (n)

TITLE XIIDEPOSIT

CHAPTER 1Deposit in General and its Different Kinds

Article 1962. A deposit is constituted from the moment a person receives a thing belonging to another, with the obligation of safely keeping it and of returning the same. If the safekeeping of the thing delivered is not the principal purpose of the contract, there is no deposit but some other contract. (1758a)

Article 1963. An agreement to constitute a deposit is binding, but the deposit itself is not perfected until the delivery of the thing. (n)

Article 1964. A deposit may be constituted judicially or extrajudicially. (1759)

Article 1965. A deposit is a gratuitous contract, except when there is an agreement to the contrary, or unless the depositary is engaged in the business of storing goods. (1760a)

Article 1966. Only movable things may be the object of a deposit. (1761)

Article 1967. An extrajudicial deposit is either voluntary or necessary. (1762)

CHAPTER 2Voluntary Deposit

SECTION 1General Provisions

Article 1968. A voluntary deposit is that wherein the delivery is made by the will of the depositor. A deposit may also be made by two or more persons each of whom believes himself entitled to the thing deposited with a third person, who shall deliver it in a proper case to the one to whom it belongs. (1763)

Article 1969. A contract of deposit may be entered into orally or in writing. (n)

Article 1970. If a person having capacity to contract accepts a deposit made by one who is incapacitated, the former shall be subject to all the obligations of a depositary, and may be compelled to return the thing by the guardian, or administrator, of the person who made the deposit, or by the latter himself if he should acquire capacity. (1764)

Article 1971. If the deposit has been made by a capacitated person with another who is not, the depositor shall only have an action to recover the thing deposited while it is still in the possession of the depositary, or to compel the latter to pay him the amount by which he may have enriched or benefited himself with the thing or its price. However, if a third person who acquired the thing acted in bad faith, the depositor may bring an action against him for its recovery. (1765a)

SECTION 2Obligations of the Depositary

Article 1972. The depositary is obliged to keep the thing safely and to return it, when required, to the depositor, or to his heirs and successors, or to the person who may have been designated in the contract. His responsibility, with regard to the safekeeping and the loss of the thing, shall be governed by the provisions of Title I of this Book.

If the deposit is gratuitous, this fact shall be taken into account in determining the degree of care that the depositary must observe. (1766a)

Article 1973. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary cannot deposit the thing with a third person. If deposit with a third person is allowed, the depositary is liable for the loss if he deposited the thing with a person who is manifestly careless or unfit. The depositary is responsible for the negligence of his employees. (n)

Article 1974. The depositary may change the way of the deposit if under the circumstances he may reasonably presume that the depositor would consent to the change if he knew of the facts of the situation. However, before the depositary may make such change, he shall notify the depositor thereof and wait for his decision, unless delay would cause danger. (n)

Article 1975. The depositary holding certificates, bonds, securities or instruments which earn interest shall be bound to collect the latter when it becomes due, and to take such steps as may be necessary in order that the securities may preserve their value and the rights corresponding to them according to law.

The above provision shall not apply to contracts for the rent of safety deposit boxes. (n)

Article 1976. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary may commingle grain or other articles of the same kind and quality, in which case the various depositors shall own or have a proportionate interest in the mass. (n)

Article 1977. The depositary cannot make use of the thing deposited without the express permission of the depositor.

Otherwise, he shall be liable for damages.

However, when the preservation of the thing deposited requires its use, it must be used but only for that purpose. (1767a)

Article 1978. When the depositary has permission to use the thing deposited, the contract loses the concept of a deposit and becomes a loan or commodatum, except where safekeeping is still the principal purpose of the contract.

The permission shall not be presumed, and its existence must be proved. (1768a)

Article 1979. The depositary is liable for the loss of the thing through a fortuitous event:

(1) If it is so stipulated;

(2) If he uses the thing without the depositor's permission;

(3) If he delays its return;

(4) If he allows others to use it, even though he himself may have been authorized to use the same. (n)

Article 1980. Fixed, savings, and current deposits of money in banks and similar institutions shall be governed by the provisions concerning simple loan. (n)

Article 1981. When the thing deposited is delivered closed and sealed, the depositary must return it in the same condition, and he shall be liable for damages should the seal or lock be broken through his fault.

Fault on the part of the depositary is presumed, unless there is proof to the contrary.

As regards the value of the thing deposited, the statement of the depositor shall be accepted, when the forcible opening is imputable to the depositary, should there be no proof to the contrary. However, the courts may pass upon the credibility of the depositor with respect to the value claimed by him.

When the seal or lock is broken, with or without the depositary's fault, he shall keep the secret of the deposit. (1769a)

Article 1982. When it becomes necessary to open a locked box or receptacle, the depositary is presumed authorized to do so, if the key has been delivered to him; or when the instructions of the depositor as regards the deposit cannot be executed without opening the box or receptacle. (n)

Article 1983. The thing deposited shall be returned with all its products, accessories and accessions.

Should the deposit consist of money, the provisions relative to agents in article 1896 shall be applied to the depositary. (1770)

Article 1984. The depositary cannot demand that the depositor prove his ownership of the thing deposited.

Nevertheless, should he discover that the thing has been stolen and who its true owner is, he must advise the latter of the deposit.

If the owner, in spite of such information, does not claim it within the period of one month, the depositary shall be relieved of all responsibility by returning the thing deposited to the depositor.

If the depositary has reasonable grounds to believe that the thing has not been lawfully acquired by the depositor, the former may return the same. (1771a)

Article 1985. When there are two or more depositors, if they are not solidary, and the thing admits of division, each one cannot demand more than his share.

When there is solidarity or the thing does not admit of division, the provisions of articles 1212 and 1214 shall govern. However, if there is a stipulation that the thing should be returned to one of the depositors, the depositary shall return it only to the person designated. (1772a)

Article 1986. If the depositor should lose his capacity to contract after having made the deposit, the thing cannot be returned except to the persons who may have the administration of his property and rights. (1773)

Article 1987. If at the time the deposit was made a place was designated for the return of the thing, the depositary must take the thing deposited to such place; but the expenses for transportation shall be borne by the depositor.

If no place has been designated for the return, it shall be made where the thing deposited may be, even if it should not be the same place where the deposit was made, provided that there was no malice on the part of the depositary. (1774)

Article 1988. The thing deposited must be returned to the depositor upon demand, even though a specified period or time for such return may have been fixed.

This provision shall not apply when the thing is judicially attached while in the depositary's possession, or should he have been notified of the opposition of a third person to the return or the removal of the thing deposited. In these cases, the depositary must immediately inform the depositor of the attachment or opposition. (1775)

Article 1989. Unless the deposit is for a valuable consideration, the depositary who may have justifiable reasons for not keeping the thing deposited may, even before the time designated, return it to the depositor; and if the latter should refuse to receive it, the depositary may secure its consignation from the court. (1776a)

Article 1990. If the depositary by force majeure or government order loses the thing and receives money or another thing in its place, he shall deliver the sum or other thing to the depositor. (1777a)

Article 1991. The depositor's heir who in good faith may have sold the thing which he did not know was deposited, shall only be bound to return the price he may have received or to assign his right of action against the buyer in case the price has not been paid him. (1778)

SECTION 3Obligations of the Depositor

Article 1992. If the deposit is gratuitous, the depositor is obliged to reimburse the depositary for the expenses he may have incurred for the preservation of the thing deposited. (1779a)

Article 1993. The depositor shall reimburse the depositary for any loss arising from the character of the thing deposited, unless at the time of the constitution of the deposit the former was not aware of, or was not expected to know the dangerous character of the thing, or unless he notified the depositary of the same, or the latter was aware of it without advice from the depositor. (n)

Article 1994. The depositary may retain the thing in pledge until the full payment of what may be due him by reason of the deposit. (1780)

Article 1995. A deposit its extinguished:

(1) Upon the loss or destruction of the thing deposited;

(2) In case of a gratuitous deposit, upon the death of either the depositor or the depositary. (n)

CHAPTER 3Necessary Deposit

Article 1996. A deposit is necessary:

(1) When it is made in compliance with a legal obligation;

(2) When it takes place on the occasion of any calamity, such as fire, storm, flood, pillage, shipwreck, or other similar events. (1781a)

Article 1997. The deposit referred to in No. 1 of the preceding article shall be governed by the provisions of the law establishing it, and in case of its deficiency, by the rules on voluntary deposit.

The deposit mentioned in No. 2 of the preceding article shall be regulated by the provisions concerning voluntary deposit and by article 2168. (1782)

Article 1998. The deposit of effects made by travellers in hotels or inns shall also be regarded as necessary. The keepers of hotels or inns shall be responsible for them as depositaries, provided that notice was given to them, or to their employees, of the effects brought by the guests and that, on the part of the latter, they take the precautions which said hotel-keepers or their substitutes advised relative to the care and vigilance of their effects. (1783)

Article 1999. The hotel-keeper is liable for the vehicles, animals and articles which have been introduced or placed in the annexes of the hotel. (n)

Article 2000. The responsibility referred to in the two preceding articles shall include the loss of, or injury to the personal property of the guests caused by the servants or employees of the keepers of hotels or inns as well as strangers; but not that which may proceed from any force majeure. The fact that travellers are constrained to rely on the vigilance of the keeper of the hotels or inns shall be considered in determining the degree of care required of him. (1784a)

Article 2001. The act of a thief or robber, who has entered the hotel is not deemed force majeure, unless it is done with the use of arms or through an irresistible force. (n)

Article 2002. The hotel-keeper is not liable for compensation if the loss is due to the acts of the guest, his family, servants or visitors, or if the loss arises from the character of the things brought into the hotel. (n)

Article 2003. The hotel-keeper cannot free himself from responsibility by posting notices to the effect that he is not liable for the articles brought by the guest. Any stipulation between the hotel-keeper and the guest whereby the responsibility of the former as set forth in articles 1998 to 2001 is suppressed or diminished shall be void. (n)

Article 2004. The hotel-keeper has a right to retain the things brought into the hotel by the guest, as a security for credits on account of lodging, and supplies usually furnished to hotel guests. (n)

CHAPTER 4

Sequestration or Judicial Deposit

Article 2005. A judicial deposit or sequestration takes place when an attachment or seizure of property in litigation is ordered. (1785)

Article 2006. Movable as well as immovable property may be the object of sequestration. (1786)

Article 2007. The depositary of property or objects sequestrated cannot be relieved of his responsibility until the controversy which gave rise thereto has come to an end, unless the court so orders. (1787a)

Article 2008. The depositary of property sequestrated is bound to comply, with respect to the same, with all the obligations of a good father of a family. (1788)

Article 2009. As to matters not provided for in this Code, judicial sequestration shall be governed by the Rules of Court. (1789a)

TITLE XIIIALEATORY CONTRACTS

General Provision

Article 2010. By an aleatory contract, one of the parties or both reciprocally bind themselves to give or to do something in consideration of what the other shall give or do upon the happening of an event which is uncertain, or which is to occur at an indeterminate time. (1790)

CHAPTER 1Insurance

Article 2011. The contract of insurance is governed by special laws. Matters not expressly provided for in such special laws shall be regulated by this Code. (n)

Article 2012. Any person who is forbidden from receiving any donation under article 739 cannot be named beneficiary of a life insurance policy by the person who cannot make any donation to him, according to said article. (n)

CHAPTER 2Gambling

Article 2013. A game of chance is that which depends more on chance or hazard than or skill or ability. For the purposes of the following articles, in case of doubt a game is deemed to be one of chance. (n)

Article 2014. No action can be maintained by the winner for the collection of what he has won in a game of chance. But any loser in a game of chance may recover his loss from the winner, with legal interest from the time he paid the amount lost, and subsidiarily from the operator or manager of the gambling house. (1799a)

Article 2015. If cheating or deceit is committed by the winner, he, and subsidiarily the operator or manager of the gambling house, shall pay by way of exemplary damages, not less than the equivalent of the sum lost, in addition to the latter amount. If both the winner and the loser have perpetrated fraud, no action for recovery can be brought by either. (n)

Article 2016. If the loser refuses or neglects to bring an action to recover what has been lost, his or her creditors, spouse, descendants or other persons entitled to be supported by the loser may institute the action. The sum thereby obtained shall be applied to the creditors' claims, or to the support of the spouse or relatives, as the case may be. (n)

Article 2017. The provisions of article 2014 and 2016 apply when two or more persons bet in a game of chance, although they take no active part in the game itself. (1799a)

Article 2018. If a contract which purports to be for the delivery of goods, securities or shares of stock is entered into with the intention that the difference between the price stipulated and the exchange or market price at the time of the pretended delivery shall be paid by the loser to the winner, the transaction is null and void. The loser may recover what he has paid. (n)

Article 2019. Betting on the result of sports, athletic competitions, or games of skill may be prohibited by local ordinances. (n)

Article 2020. The loser in any game which is not one of chance, when there is no local ordinance which prohibits betting therein, is under obligation to pay his loss, unless the amount thereof is excessive under the circumstances. In the latter case, the court shall reduce the loss to the proper sum. (1801a)

CHAPTER 3Life Annuity

Article 2021. The aleatory contract of life annuity binds the debtor to pay an annual pension or income during the life of one or more determinate persons in consideration of a capital consisting of money or other property, whose ownership is transferred to him at once with the burden of the income. (1802a)

Article 2022. The annuity may be constituted upon the life of the person who gives the capital, upon that of a third person, or upon the lives of various persons, all of whom must be living at the time the annuity is established.

It may also be constituted in favor of the person or persons upon whose life or lives the contract is entered into, or in favor of another or other persons. (1803a)

Article 2023. Life annuity shall be void if constituted upon the life of a person who was already dead at the time the contract was entered into, or who was at that time suffering from an illness which caused his death within twenty days following said date. (1804)

Article 2024. The lack of payment of the income due does not authorize the recipient of the life annuity to demand the reimbursement of the capital or to retake possession of the property alienated, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary; he shall have only a right judicially to claim the payment of the income in arrears and to require a security for the future income, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (1805a)

Article 2025. The income corresponding to the year in which the person enjoying it dies shall be paid in proportion to the days during which he lived; if the income should be paid by installments in advance, the whole amount of the installment which began to run during his life shall be paid. (1806)

Article 2026. He who constitutes an annuity by gratuitous title upon his property, may provide at the time the annuity is established that the same shall not be subject to execution or attachment on account of the obligations of the recipient of the annuity. If the annuity was constituted in fraud of creditors, the latter may ask for the execution or attachment of the property. (1807a)

Article 2027. No annuity shall be claimed without first proving the existence of the person upon whose life the annuity is constituted. (1808)

TITLE XIVCOMPROMISES AND ARBITRATIONS

CHAPTER 1Compromises

Article 2028. A compromise is a contract whereby the parties, by making reciprocal concessions, avoid a litigation or put an end to one already commenced. (1809a)

Article 2029. The court shall endeavor to persuade the litigants in a civil case to agree upon some fair compromise. (n)

Article 2030. Every civil action or proceeding shall be suspended:

(1) If willingness to discuss a possible compromise is expressed by one or both parties; or

(2) If it appears that one of the parties, before the commencement of the action or proceeding, offered to discuss a possible compromise but the other party refused the offer.

The duration and terms of the suspension of the civil action or proceeding and similar matters shall be governed by such provisions of the rules of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgate. Said rules of court shall likewise provide for the appointment and duties of amicable compounders. (n)

Article 2031. The courts may mitigate the damages to be paid by the losing party who has shown a sincere desire for a compromise. (n)

Article 2032. The court's approval is necessary in compromises entered into by guardians, parents, absentee's representatives, and administrators or executors of decedent's estates. (1810a)

Article 2033. Juridical persons may compromise only in the form and with the requisites which may be necessary to alienate their property. (1812a)

Article 2034. There may be a compromise upon the civil liability arising from an offense; but such compromise shall not extinguish the public action for the imposition of the legal penalty. (1813)

Article 2035. No compromise upon the following questions shall be valid:

(1) The civil status of persons;

(2) The validity of a marriage or a legal separation;

(3) Any ground for legal separation;

(4) Future support;

(5) The jurisdiction of courts;

(6) Future legitime. (1814a)

Article 2036. A compromise comprises only those objects which are definitely stated therein, or which by necessary implication from its terms should be deemed to have been included in the same.

A general renunciation of rights is understood to refer only to those that are connected with the dispute which was the subject of the compromise. (1815)

Article 2037. A compromise has upon the parties the effect and authority of res judicata; but there shall be no execution except in compliance with a judicial compromise. (1816)

Article 2038. A compromise in which there is mistake, fraud, violence, intimidation, undue influence, or falsity of documents, is subject to the provisions of article 1330 of this Code.

However, one of parties cannot set up a mistake of fact as against the other if the latter, by virtue of the compromise, has withdrawn from a litigation already commenced. (1817a)

Article 2039. When the parties compromise generally on all differences which they might have with each other, the discovery of documents referring to one or more but not to all of the questions settled shall not itself be a cause for annulment or rescission of the compromise, unless said documents have been concealed by one of the parties.

But the compromise may be annulled or rescinded if it refers only to one thing to which one of the parties has no right, as shown by the newly-discovered documents. (n)

Article 2040. If after a litigation has been decided by a final judgment, a compromise should be agreed upon, either or both parties being unaware of the existence of the final judgment, the compromise may be rescinded.

Ignorance of a judgment which may be revoked or set aside is not a valid ground for attacking a compromise. (1819a)

Article 2041. If one of the parties fails or refuses to abide by the compromise, the other party may either enforce the compromise or regard it as rescinded and insist upon his original demand. (n)

CHAPTER 2Arbitrations

Article 2042. The same persons who may enter into a compromise may submit their controversies to one or more arbitrators for decision. (1820a)

Article 2043. The provisions of the preceding Chapter upon compromises shall also be applicable to arbitrations. (1821a)

Article 2044. Any stipulation that the arbitrators' award or decision shall be final, is valid, without prejudice to articles 2038, 2039, and 2040. (n)

Article 2045. Any clause giving one of the parties power to choose more arbitrators than the other is void and of no effect. (n)

Article 2046. The appointment of arbitrators and the procedure for arbitration shall be governed by the provisions of such rules of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgate. (n)

TITLE XVGUARANTY

CHAPTER 1Nature and Extent of Guaranty

Article 2047. By guaranty a person, called the guarantor, binds himself to the creditor to fulfill the obligation of the principal debtor in case the latter should fail to do so.

If a person binds himself solidarily with the principal debtor, the provisions of Section 4, Chapter 3, Title I of this Book shall be observed. In such case the contract is called a suretyship. (1822a)

Article 2048. A guaranty is gratuitous, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Article 2049. A married woman may guarantee an obligation without the husband's consent, but shall not thereby bind the conjugal partnership, except in cases provided by law. (n)

Article 2050. If a guaranty is entered into without the knowledge or consent, or against the will of the principal debtor, the provisions of articles 1236 and 1237 shall apply. (n)

Article 2051. A guaranty may be conventional, legal or judicial, gratuitous, or by onerous title.

It may also be constituted, not only in favor of the principal debtor, but also in favor of the other guarantor, with the latter's consent, or without his knowledge, or even over his objection. (1823)

Article 2052. A guaranty cannot exist without a valid obligation.

Nevertheless, a guaranty may be constituted to guarantee the performance of a voidable or an unenforceable contract. It may also guarantee a natural obligation. (1824a)

Article 2053. A guaranty may also be given as security for future debts, the amount of which is not yet known; there can be no claim against the guarantor until the debt is liquidated. A conditional obligation may also be secured. (1825a)

Article 2054. A guarantor may bind himself for less, but not for more than the principal debtor, both as regards the amount and the onerous nature of the conditions.

Should he have bound himself for more, his obligations shall be reduced to the limits of that of the debtor. (1826)

Article 2055. A guaranty is not presumed; it must be express and cannot extend to more than what is stipulated therein.

If it be simple or indefinite, it shall compromise not only the principal obligation, but also all its accessories, including the judicial costs, provided with respect to the latter, that the guarantor shall only be liable for those costs incurred after he has been judicially required to pay. (1827a)

Article 2056. One who is obliged to furnish a guarantor shall present a person who possesses integrity, capacity to bind himself, and sufficient property to answer for the obligation which he guarantees. The guarantor shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the court of the place where this obligation is to be complied with. (1828a)

Article 2057. If the guarantor should be convicted in first instance of a crime involving dishonesty or should become insolvent, the creditor may demand another who has all the qualifications required in the preceding article. The case is excepted where the creditor has required and stipulated that a specified person should be the guarantor. (1829a)

CHAPTER 2Effects of Guaranty

SECTION 1Effects of Guaranty Between the Guarantor and the Creditor

Article 2058. The guarantor cannot be compelled to pay the creditor unless the latter has exhausted all the property of the debtor, and has resorted to all the legal remedies against the debtor. (1830a)

Article 2059. The excussion shall not take place:

(1) If the guarantor has expressly renounced it;

(2) If he has bound himself solidarily with the debtor;

(3) In case of insolvency of the debtor;

(4) When he has absconded, or cannot be sued within the Philippines unless he has left a manager or representative;

(5) If it may be presumed that an execution on the property of the principal debtor would not result in the satisfaction of the obligation. (1831a)

Article 2060. In order that the guarantor may make use of the benefit of exclusion, he must set it up against the creditor upon the latter's demand for payment from him, and point out to the creditor available property of the debtor within Philippine territory, sufficient to cover the amount of the debt. (1832)

Article 2061. The guarantor having fulfilled all the conditions required in the preceding article, the creditor who is negligent in exhausting the property pointed out shall suffer the loss, to the extent of said property, for the insolvency of the debtor resulting from such negligence. (1833a)

Article 2062. In every action by the creditor, which must be against the principal debtor alone, except in the cases mentioned in article 2059, the former shall ask the court to notify the guarantor of the action. The guarantor may appear so that he may, if he so desire, set up such defenses as are granted him by law. The benefit of excussion mentioned in article 2058 shall always be unimpaired, even if judgment should be rendered against the principal debtor and the guarantor in case of appearance by the latter. (1834a)

Article 2063. A compromise between the creditor and the principal debtor benefits the guarantor but does not prejudice him. That which is entered into between the guarantor and the creditor benefits but does not prejudice the principal debtor. (1835a)

Article 2064. The guarantor of a guarantor shall enjoy the benefit of excussion, both with respect to the guarantor and to the principal debtor. (1836)

Article 2065. Should there be several guarantors of only one debtor and for the same debt, the obligation to answer for the same is divided among all. The creditor cannot claim from the guarantors except the shares which they are respectively bound to pay, unless solidarity has been expressly stipulated.

The benefit of division against the co-guarantors ceases in the same cases and for the same reasons as the benefit of excussion against the principal debtor. (1837)

SECTION 2Effects of Guaranty Between the Debtor and the Guarantor

Article 2066. The guarantor who pays for a debtor must be indemnified by the latter.

The indemnity comprises:

(1) The total amount of the debt;

(2) The legal interests thereon from the time the payment was made known to the debtor, even though it did not earn interest for the creditor;

(3) The expenses incurred by the guarantor after having notified the debtor that payment had been demanded of him;

(4) Damages, if they are due. (1838a)

Article 2067. The guarantor who pays is subrogated by virtue thereof to all the rights which the creditor had against the debtor.

If the guarantor has compromised with the creditor, he cannot demand of the debtor more than what he has really paid. (1839)

Article 2068. If the guarantor should pay without notifying the debtor, the latter may enforce against him all the defenses which he could have set up against the creditor at the time the payment was made. (1840)

Article 2069. If the debt was for a period and the guarantor paid it before it became due, he cannot demand reimbursement of the debtor until the expiration of the period unless the payment has been ratified by the debtor. (1841a)

Article 2070. If the guarantor has paid without notifying the debtor, and the latter not being aware of the payment, repeats the payment, the former has no remedy whatever against the debtor, but only against the creditor. Nevertheless, in case of a gratuitous guaranty, if the guarantor was prevented by a fortuitous event from advising the debtor of the payment, and the creditor becomes insolvent, the debtor shall reimburse the guarantor for the amount paid. (1842a)

Article 2071. The guarantor, even before having paid, may proceed against the principal debtor:

(1) When he is sued for the payment;

(2) In case of insolvency of the principal debtor;

(3) When the debtor has bound himself to relieve him from the guaranty within a specified period, and this period has expired;

(4) When the debt has become demandable, by reason of the expiration of the period for payment;

(5) After the lapse of ten years, when the principal obligation has no fixed period for its maturity, unless it be of such nature that it cannot be extinguished except within a period longer than ten years;

(6) If there are reasonable grounds to fear that the principal debtor intends to abscond;

(7) If the principal debtor is in imminent danger of becoming insolvent.

In all these cases, the action of the guarantor is to obtain release from the guaranty, or to demand a security that shall protect him from any proceedings by the creditor and from the danger of insolvency of the debtor. (1834a)

Article 2072. If one, at the request of another, becomes a guarantor for the debt of a third person who is not present, the guarantor who satisfies the debt may sue either the person so requesting or the debtor for reimbursement. (n)

SECTION 3.Effects of Guaranty as Between Co-Guarantors

Article 2073. When there are two or more guarantors of the same debtor and for the same debt, the one among them who has paid may demand of each of the others the share which is proportionally owing from him.

If any of the guarantors should be insolvent, his share shall be borne by the others, including the payer, in the same proportion.

The provisions of this article shall not be applicable, unless the payment has been made by virtue of a judicial demand or unless the principal debtor is insolvent. (1844a)

Article 2074. In the case of the preceding article, the co-guarantors may set up against the one who paid, the same defenses which would have pertained to the principal debtor against the creditor, and which are not purely personal to the debtor. (1845) ARTICLE 2075. A sub-guarantor, in case of the insolvency of the guarantor for whom he bound himself, is responsible to the co-guarantors in the same terms as the guarantor. (1846)

CHAPTER 3Extinguishment of Guaranty

Article 2076. The obligation of the guarantor is extinguished at the same time as that of the debtor, and for the same causes as all other obligations. (1847)

Article 2077. If the creditor voluntarily accepts immovable or other property in payment of the debt, even if he should afterwards lose the same through eviction, the guarantor is released. (1849)

Article 2078. A release made by the creditor in favor of one of the guarantors, without the consent of the others, benefits all to the extent of the share of the guarantor to whom it has been granted. (1850)

Article 2079. An extension granted to the debtor by the creditor without the consent of the guarantor extinguishes the guaranty. The mere failure on the part of the creditor to demand payment after the debt has become due does not of itself constitute any extension of time referred to herein. (1851a)

Article 2080. The guarantors, even though they be solidary, are released from their obligation whenever by some act of the creditor they cannot be subrogated to the rights, mortgages, and preference of the latter. (1852)

Article 2081. The guarantor may set up against the creditor all the defenses which pertain to the principal debtor and are inherent in the debt; but not those that are personal to the debtor. (1853)

CHAPTER 4Legal and Judicial Bonds

Article 2082. The bondsman who is to be offered in virtue of a provision of law or of a judicial order shall have the qualifications prescribed in article 2056 and in special laws. (1854a)

Article 2083. If the person bound to give a bond in the cases of the preceding article, should not be able to do so, a pledge or mortgage considered sufficient to cover his obligation shall be admitted in lieu thereof. (1855)

Article 2084. A judicial bondsman cannot demand the exhaustion of the property of the principal debtor.

A sub-surety in the same case, cannot demand the exhaustion of the property of the debtor or of the surety.

TITLE XVIPLEDGE, MORTGAGE AND ANTICHRESIS

CHAPTER 1Provisions Common to Pledge and Mortgage

Article 2085. The following requisites are essential to the contracts of pledge and mortgage:

(1) That they be constituted to secure the fulfillment of a principal obligation;

(2) That the pledgor or mortgagor be the absolute owner of the thing pledged or mortgaged;

(3) That the persons constituting the pledge or mortgage have the free disposal of their property, and in the absence thereof, that they be legally authorized for the purpose.

Third persons who are not parties to the principal obligation may secure the latter by pledging or mortgaging their own property. (1857)

Article 2086. The provisions of article 2052 are applicable to a pledge or mortgage. (n)

Article 2087. It is also of the essence of these contracts that when the principal obligation becomes due, the things in which the pledge or mortgage consists may be alienated for the payment to the creditor. (1858)

Article 2088. The creditor cannot appropriate the things given by way of pledge or mortgage, or dispose of them. Any stipulation to the contrary is null and void. (1859a)

Article 2089. A pledge or mortgage is indivisible, even though the debt may be divided among the successors in interest of the debtor or of the creditor.

Therefore, the debtor's heir who has paid a part of the debt cannot ask for the proportionate extinguishment of the pledge or mortgage as long as the debt is not completely satisfied.

Neither can the creditor's heir who received his share of the debt return the pledge or cancel the mortgage, to the prejudice of the other heirs who have not been paid.

From these provisions is excepted the case in which, there being several things given in mortgage or pledge, each one of them guarantees only a determinate portion of the credit.

The debtor, in this case, shall have a right to the extinguishment of the pledge or mortgage as the portion of the debt for which each thing is specially answerable is satisfied. (1860)

Article 2090. The indivisibility of a pledge or mortgage is not affected by the fact that the debtors are not solidarily liable. (n)

Article 2091. The contract of pledge or mortgage may secure all kinds of obligations, be they pure or subject to a suspensive or resolutory condition. (1861)

Article 2092. A promise to constitute a pledge or mortgage gives rise only to a personal action between the contracting parties, without prejudice to the criminal responsibility incurred by him who defrauds another, by offering in pledge or mortgage as unencumbered, things which he knew were subject to some burden, or by misrepresenting himself to be the owner of the same. (1862)

CHAPTER 2Pledge

Article 2093. In addition to the requisites prescribed in article 2085, it is necessary, in order to constitute the contract of pledge, that the thing pledged be placed in the possession of the creditor, or of a third person by common agreement. (1863)

Article 2094. All movables which are within commerce may be pledged, provided they are susceptible of possession. (1864)

Article 2095. Incorporeal rights, evidenced by negotiable instruments, bills of lading, shares of stock, bonds, warehouse receipts and similar documents may also be pledged. The instrument proving the right pledged shall be delivered to the creditor, and if negotiable, must be indorsed. (n)

Article 2096. A pledge shall not take effect against third persons if a description of the thing pledged and the date of the pledge do not appear in a public instrument. (1865a)

Article 2097. With the consent of the pledgee, the thing pledged may be alienated by the pledgor or owner, subject to the pledge. The ownership of the thing pledged is transmitted to the vendee or transferee as soon as the pledgee consents to the alienation, but the latter shall continue in possession. (n)

Article 2098. The contract of pledge gives a right to the creditor to retain the thing in his possession or in that of a third person to whom it has been delivered, until the debt is paid. (1866a)

Article 2099. The creditor shall take care of the thing pledged with the diligence of a good father of a family; he has a right to the reimbursement of the expenses made for its preservation, and is liable for its loss or deterioration, in conformity with the provisions of this Code. (1867)

Article 2100. The pledgee cannot deposit the thing pledged with a third person, unless there is a stipulation authorizing him to do so.

The pledgee is responsible for the acts of his agents or employees with respect to the thing pledged. (n)

Article 2101. The pledgor has the same responsibility as a bailor in commodatum in the case under article 1951. (n)

Article 2102. If the pledge earns or produces fruits, income, dividends, or interests, the creditor shall compensate what he receives with those which are owing him; but if none are owing him, or insofar as the amount may exceed that which is due, he shall apply it to the principal. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the pledge shall extend to the interest and earnings of the right pledged.

In case of a pledge of animals, their offspring shall pertain to the pledgor or owner of animals pledged, but shall be subject to the pledge, if there is no stipulation to the contrary. (1868a)

Article 2103. Unless the thing pledged is expropriated, the debtor continues to be the owner thereof.

Nevertheless, the creditor may bring the actions which pertain to the owner of the thing pledged in order to recover it from, or defend it against a third person. (1869)

Article 2104. The creditor cannot use the thing pledged, without the authority of the owner, and if he should do so, or should misuse the thing in any other way, the owner may ask that it be judicially or extrajudicially deposited. When the preservation of the thing pledged requires its use, it must be used by the creditor but only for that purpose. (1870a)

Article 2105. The debtor cannot ask for the return of the thing pledged against the will of the creditor, unless and until he has paid the debt and its interest, with expenses in a proper case. (1871)

Article 2106. If through the negligence or wilful act of the pledgee, the thing pledged is in danger of being lost or impaired, the pledgor may require that it be deposited with a third person. (n)

Article 2107. If there are reasonable grounds to fear the destruction or impairment of the thing pledged, without the fault of the pledgee, the pledgor may demand the return of the thing, upon offering another thing in pledge, provided the latter is of the same kind as the former and not of inferior quality, and without prejudice to the right of the pledgee under the provisions of the following article.

The pledgee is bound to advise the pledgor, without delay, of any danger to the thing pledged. (n)

Article 2108. If, without the fault of the pledgee, there is danger of destruction, impairment, or diminution in value of the thing pledged, he may cause the same to be sold at a public sale. The proceeds of the auction shall be a security for the principal obligation in the same manner as the thing originally pledged. (n)

Article 2109. If the creditor is deceived on the substance or quality of the thing pledged, he may either claim another thing in its stead, or demand immediate payment of the principal obligation. (n)

Article 2110. If the thing pledged is returned by the pledgee to the pledgor or owner, the pledge is extinguished. Any stipulation to the contrary shall be void.

If subsequent to the perfection of the pledge, the thing is in the possession of the pledgor or owner, there is a prima facie presumption that the same has been returned by the pledgee. This same presumption exists if the thing pledged is in the possession of a third person who has received it from the pledgor or owner after the constitution of the pledge. (n)

Article 2111. A statement in writing by the pledgee that he renounces or abandons the pledge is sufficient to extinguish the pledge. For this purpose, neither the acceptance by the pledgor or owner, nor the return of the thing pledged is necessary, the pledgee becoming a depositary. (n)

Article 2112. The creditor to whom the credit has not been satisfied in due time, may proceed before a Notary Public to the sale of the thing pledged. This sale shall be made at a public auction, and with notification to the debtor and the owner of the thing pledged in a proper case, stating the amount for which the public sale is to be held. If at the first auction the thing is not sold, a second one with the same formalities shall be held; and if at the second auction there is no sale either, the creditor may appropriate the thing pledged. In this case he shall be obliged to give an acquittance for his entire claim. (1872a)

Article 2113. At the public auction, the pledgor or owner may bid. He shall, moreover, have a better right if he should offer the same terms as the highest bidder.

The pledgee may also bid, but his offer shall not be valid if he is the only bidder. (n)

Article 2114. All bids at the public auction shall offer to pay the purchase price at once. If any other bid is accepted, the pledgee is deemed to have been received the purchase price, as far as the pledgor or owner is concerned. (n)

Article 2115. The sale of the thing pledged shall extinguish the principal obligation, whether or not the proceeds of the sale are equal to the amount of the principal obligation, interest and expenses in a proper case. If the price of the sale is more than said amount, the debtor shall not be entitled to the excess, unless it is otherwise agreed. If the price of the sale is less, neither shall the creditor be entitled to recover the deficiency, notwithstanding any stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Article 2116. After the public auction, the pledgee shall promptly advise the pledgor or owner of the result thereof. (n)

Article 2117. Any third person who has any right in or to the thing pledged may satisfy the principal obligation as soon as the latter becomes due and demandable. (n)

Article 2118. If a credit which has been pledged becomes due before it is redeemed, the pledgee may collect and receive the amount due. He shall apply the same to the payment of his claim, and deliver the surplus, should there be any, to the pledgor. (n)

Article 2119. If two or more things are pledged, the pledgee may choose which he will cause to be sold, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. He may demand the sale of only as many of the things as are necessary for the payment of the debt. (n) ARTICLE 2120. If a third party secures an obligation by pledging his own movable property under the provisions of article 2085 he shall have the same rights as a guarantor under articles 2066 to 2070, and articles 2077 to 2081. He is not prejudiced by any waiver of defense by the principal obligor. (n)

Article 2121. Pledges created by operation of law, such as those referred to in articles 546, 1731, and 1994, are governed by the foregoing articles on the possession, care and sale of the thing as well as on the termination of the pledge. However, after payment of the debt and expenses, the remainder of the price of the sale shall be delivered to the obligor. (n)

Article 2122. A thing under a pledge by operation of law may be sold only after demand of the amount for which the thing is retained. The public auction shall take place within one month after such demand. If, without just grounds, the creditor does not cause the public sale to be held within such period, the debtor may require the return of the thing. (n)

Article 2123. With regard to pawnshops and other establishments, which are engaged in making loans secured by pledges, the special laws and regulations concerning them shall be observed, and subsidiarily, the provisions of this Title. (1873a)

CHAPTER 3Mortgage

Article 2124. Only the following property may be the object of a contract of mortgage:

(1) Immovables;

(2) Alienable real rights in accordance with the laws, imposed upon immovables.

Nevertheless, movables may be the object of a chattel mortgage. (1874a)

Article 2125. In addition to the requisites stated in article 2085, it is indispensable, in order that a mortgage may be validly constituted, that the document in which it appears be recorded in the Registry of Property. If the instrument is not recorded, the mortgage is nevertheless binding between the parties.

The persons in whose favor the law establishes a mortgage have no other right than to demand the execution and the recording of the document in which the mortgage is formalized. (1875a)

Article 2126. The mortgage directly and immediately subjects the property upon which it is imposed, whoever the possessor may be, to the fulfillment of the obligation for whose security it was constituted. (1876)

Article 2127. The mortgage extends to the natural accessions, to the improvements, growing fruits, and the rents or income not yet received when the obligation becomes due, and to the amount of the indemnity granted or owing to the proprietor from the insurers of the property mortgaged, or in virtue of expropriation for public use, with the declarations, amplifications and limitations established by law, whether the estate remains in the possession of the mortgagor, or it passes into the hands of a third person. (1877)

Article 2128. The mortgage credit may be alienated or assigned to a third person, in whole or in part, with the formalities required by law. (1878)

Article 2129. The creditor may claim from a third person in possession of the mortgaged property, the payment of the part of the credit secured by the property which said third person possesses, in the terms and with the formalities which the law establishes. (1879)

Article 2130. A stipulation forbidding the owner from alienating the immovable mortgaged shall be void. (n)

Article 2131. The form, extent and consequences of a mortgage, both as to its constitution, modification and extinguishment, and as to other matters not included in this Chapter, shall be governed by the provisions of the Mortgage Law and of the Land Registration Law. (1880a)

CHAPTER 4Antichresis

Article 2132. By the contract of antichresis the creditor acquires the right to receive the fruits of an immovable of his debtor, with the obligation to apply them to the payment of the interest, if owing, and thereafter to the principal of his credit. (1881)

Article 2133. The actual market value of the fruits at the time of the application thereof to the interest and principal shall be the measure of such application. (n)

Article 2134. The amount of the principal and of the interest shall be specified in writing; otherwise, the contract of antichresis shall be void. (n)

Article 2135. The creditor, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, is obliged to pay the taxes and charges upon the estate.

He is also bound to bear the expenses necessary for its preservation and repair.

The sums spent for the purposes stated in this article shall be deducted from the fruits. (1882)

Article 2136. The debtor cannot reacquire the enjoyment of the immovable without first having totally paid what he owes the creditor.

But the latter, in order to exempt himself from the obligations imposed upon him by the preceding article, may always compel the debtor to enter again upon the enjoyment of the property, except when there is a stipulation to the contrary. (1883)

Article 2137. The creditor does not acquire the ownership of the real estate for non-payment of the debt within the period agreed upon.

Every stipulation to the contrary shall be void. But the creditor may petition the court for the payment of the debt or the sale of the real property. In this case, the Rules of Court on the foreclosure of mortgages shall apply. (1884a)

Article 2138. The contracting parties may stipulate that the interest upon the debt be compensated with the fruits of the property which is the object of the antichresis, provided that if the value of the fruits should exceed the amount of interest allowed by the laws against usury, the excess shall be applied to the principal. (1885a)

Article 2139. The last paragraph of article 2085, and articles 2089 to 2091 are applicable to this contract. (1886a)

CHAPTER 5Chattel Mortgage

Article 2140. By a chattel mortgage, personal property is recorded in the Chattel Mortgage Register as a security for the performance of an obligation. If the movable, instead of being recorded, is delivered to the creditor or a third person, the contract is a pledge and not a chattel mortgage. (n)

Article 2141. The provisions of this Code on pledge, insofar as they are not in conflict with the Chattel Mortgage Law shall be applicable to chattel mortgages. (n)

[codalsetal]

R.A. 10607: The Insurance Code

[REPUBLIC ACT NO. 10607]

AN ACT STRENGTHENING THE INSURANCE INDUSTRY, FURTHER AMENDING PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 612, OTHERWISE KNOWN AS “THE INSURANCE CODE”, AS AMENDED BY PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NOS. 1141, 1280, 1455, 1460, 1814 AND 1981, AND BATAS PAMBANSA BLG. 874, AND FOR OTHER PURPOSES

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the Philippines in Congress assembled:

SECTION 1. Presidential Decree No. 612, as amended, is hereby further amended to read as follows:

“GENERAL PROVISIONS

“SECTION 1. This Decree shall be known as ‘The Insurance Code’.

“SEC. 2. Whenever used in this Code, the following terms shall have the respective meanings hereinafter set forth or indicated, unless the context otherwise requires:

“(a) A contract of insurance is an agreement whereby one undertakes for a consideration to indemnify another against loss, damage or liability arising from an unknown or contingent event.

“A contract of suretyship shall be deemed to be an insurance contract, within the meaning of this Code, only if made by a surety who or which, as such, is doing an insurance business as hereinafter provided.

“(b) The term doing an insurance business or transacting an insurance business, within the meaning of this Code, shall include:

“(1) Making or proposing to make, as insurer, any insurance contract;

“(2) Making or proposing to make, as surety, any contract of suretyship as a vocation and not as merely incidental to any other legitimate business or activity of the surety;

“(3) Doing any kind of business, including a reinsurance business, specifically recognized as constituting the doing of an insurance business within the meaning of this Code;

“(4) Doing or proposing to do any business in substance equivalent to any of the foregoing in a manner designed to evade the provisions of this Code.

“In the application of the provisions of this Code, the fact that no profit is derived from the making of insurance contracts, agreements or transactions or that no separate or direct consideration is received therefor, shall not be deemed conclusive to show that the making thereof does not constitute the doing or transacting of an insurance business.

“(c) As used in this Code, the term Commissioner means the Insurance Commissioner.

“CHAPTER I

“THE CONTRACT OF INSURANCE

“TITLE 1

“WHAT MAY BE INSURED

“SEC. 3. Any contingent or unknown event, whether past or future, which may damnify a person having an insurable interest, or create a liability against him, may be insured against, subject to the provisions of this chapter.

“The consent of the spouse is not necessary for the validity of an insurance policy taken out by a married person on his or her life or that of his or her children.

“All rights, title and interest in the policy of insurance taken out by an original owner on the life or health of the person insured shall automatically vest in the latter upon the death of the original owner, unless otherwise provided for in the policy.

“SEC. 4. The preceding section does not authorize an insurance for or against the drawing of any lottery, or for or against any chance or ticket in a lottery drawing a prize.

“SEC. 5. All kinds of insurance are subject to the provisions of this chapter so far as the provisions can apply.

“TITLE 2

“PARTIES TO THE CONTRACT

“SEC. 6. Every corporation, partnership, or association, duly authorized to transact insurance business as elsewhere provided in this Code, may be an insurer.

“SEC. 7. Anyone except a public enemy may be insured.

“SEC. 8. Unless the policy otherwise provides, where a mortgagor of property effects insurance in his own name providing that the loss shall be payable to the mortgagee, or assigns a policy of insurance to a mortgagee, the insurance is deemed to be upon the interest of the mortgagor, who does not cease to be a party to the original contract, and any act of his, prior to the loss, which would otherwise avoid the insurance, will have the same effect, although the property is in the hands of the mortgagee, but any act which, under the contract of insurance, is to be performed by the mortgagor, may be performed by the mortgagee therein named, with the same effect as if it had been performed by the mortgagor.

“SEC. 9. If an insurer assents to the transfer of an insurance from a mortgagor to a mortgagee, and, at the time of his assent, imposes further obligations on the assignee, making a new contract with him, the acts of the mortgagor cannot affect the rights of said assignee.

“TITLE 3

“INSURABLE INTEREST

“SEC. 10. Every person has an insurable interest in the life and health:

“(a) Of himself, of his spouse and of his children;

“(b) Of any person on whom he depends wholly or in part for education or support, or in whom he has a pecuniary interest;

“(c) Of any person under a legal obligation to him for the payment of money, or respecting property or services, of which death or illness might delay or prevent the performance; and

“(d) Of any person upon whose life any estate or interest vested in him depends.

“SEC. 11. The insured shall have the right to change the beneficiary he designated in the policy, unless he has expressly waived this right in said policy. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event the insured does not change the beneficiary during his lifetime, the designation shall be deemed irrevocable.

“SEC. 12. The interest of a beneficiary in a life insurance policy shall be forfeited when the beneficiary is the principal, accomplice, or accessory in willfully bringing about the death of the insured. In such a case, the share forfeited shall pass on to the other beneficiaries, unless otherwise disqualified. In the absence of other beneficiaries, the proceeds shall be paid in accordance with the policy contract. If the policy contract is silent, the proceeds shall be paid to the estate of the insured.

“SEC. 13. Every interest in property, whether real or personal, or any relation thereto, or liability in respect thereof, of such nature that a contemplated peril might directly damnify the insured, is an insurable interest.

“SEC. 14. An insurable interest in property may consist in:

“(a) An existing interest;

“(b) An inchoate interest founded on an existing interest; or

“(c) An expectancy, coupled with an existing interest in that out of which the expectancy arises.

“SEC. 15. A carrier or depository of any kind has an insurable interest in a thing held by him as such, to the extent of his liability but not to exceed the value thereof.

“SEC. 16. A mere contingent or expectant interest in any thing, not founded on an actual right to the thing, nor upon any valid contract for it, is not insurable.

“SEC. 17. The measure of an insurable interest in property is the extent to which the insured might be damnified by loss or injury thereof.

“SEC. 18. No contract or policy of insurance on property shall be enforceable except for the benefit of some person having an insurable interest in the property insured.

“SEC. 19. An interest in property insured must exist when the insurance takes effect, and when the loss occurs, but need not exist in the meantime; and interest in the life or health of a person insured must exist when the insurance takes effect, but need not exist thereafter or when the loss occurs.

“SEC. 20. Except in the cases specified in the next four sections, and in the cases of life, accident, and health insurance, a change of interest in any part of a thing insured unaccompanied by a corresponding change of interest in the insurance, suspends the insurance to an equivalent extent, until the interest in the thing and the interest in the insurance are vested in the same person.

“SEC. 21. A change of interest in a thing insured, after the occurrence of an injury which results in a loss, does not affect the right of the insured to indemnity for the loss.

“SEC. 22. A change of interest in one or more of several distinct things, separately insured by one policy, does not avoid the insurance as to the others.

“SEC. 23. A change of interest, by will or succession, on the death of the insured, does not avoid an insurance; and his interest in the insurance passes to the person taking his interest in the thing insured.

“SEC. 24. A transfer of interest by one of several partners, joint owners, or owners in common, who are jointly insured, to the others, does not avoid an insurance even though it has been agreed that the insurance shall cease upon an alienation of the thing insured.

“SEC. 25. Every stipulation in a policy of insurance for the payment of loss whether the person insured has or has not any interest in the property insured, or that the policy shall be received as proof of such interest, and every policy executed by way of gaming or wagering, is void.

“TITLE 4

“CONCEALMENT

“SEC. 26. A neglect to communicate that which a party knows and ought to communicate, is called a concealment.

“SEC. 27. A concealment whether intentional or unintentional entitles the injured party to rescind a contract of insurance.

“SEC. 28. Each party to a contract of insurance must communicate to the other, in good faith, all facts within his knowledge which are material to the contract and as to which he makes no warranty, and which the other has not the means of ascertaining.

“SEC. 29. An intentional and fraudulent omission, on the part of one insured, to communicate information of matters proving or tending to prove the falsity of a warranty, entitles the insurer to rescind.

“SEC. 30. Neither party to a contract of insurance is bound to communicate information of the matters following, except in answer to the inquiries of the other:

“(a) Those which the other knows;

“(b) Those which, in the exercise of ordinary care, the other ought to know, and of which the former has no reason to suppose him ignorant;

“(c) Those of which the other waives communication;

“(d) Those which prove or tend to prove the existence of a risk excluded by a warranty, and which are not otherwise material; and

“(e) Those which relate to a risk excepted from the policy and which are not otherwise material.

“SEC. 31. Materiality is to be determined not by the event, but solely by the probable and reasonable influence of the facts upon the party to whom the communication is due, in forming his estimate of the disadvantages of the proposed contract, or in making his inquiries.

“SEC. 32. Each party to a contract of insurance is bound to know all the general causes which are open to his inquiry, equally with that of the other, and which may affect the political or material perils contemplated; and all general usages of trade.

“SEC. 33. The right to information of material facts may be waived, either by the terms of insurance or by neglect to make inquiry as to such facts, where they are distinctly implied in other facts of which information is communicated.

“SEC. 34. Information of the nature or amount of the interest of one insured need not be communicated unless in answer to an inquiry, except as prescribed by Section 51.

“SEC. 35. Neither party to a contract of insurance is bound to communicate, even upon inquiry, information of his own judgment upon the matters in question.

“TITLE 5

“REPRESENTATION

“SEC. 36. A representation may be oral or written.

“SEC. 37. A representation may be made at the time of, or before, issuance of the policy.

“SEC. 38. The language of a representation is to be interpreted by the same rules as the language of contracts in general.

“SEC. 39. A representation as to the future is to be deemed a promise, unless it appears that it was merely a statement of belief or expectation.

“SEC. 40. A representation cannot qualify an express provision in a contract of insurance, but it may qualify an implied warranty.

“SEC. 41. A representation may be altered or withdrawn before the insurance is effected, but not afterwards.

“SEC. 42. A representation must be presumed to refer to the date on which the contract goes into effect.

“SEC. 43. When a person insured has no personal knowledge of a fact, he may nevertheless repeat information which he has upon the subject, and which he believes to be true, with the explanation that he does so on the information of others; or he may submit the information, in its whole extent, to the insurer; and in neither case is he responsible for its truth, unless it proceeds from an agent of the insured, whose duty it is to give the information.

“SEC. 44. A representation is to be deemed false when the facts fail to correspond with its assertions or stipulations.

“SEC. 45. If a representation is false in a material point, whether affirmative or promissory, the injured party is entitled to rescind the contract from the time when the representation becomes false.

“SEC. 46. The materiality of a representation is determined by the same rules as the materiality of a concealment.

“SEC. 47. The provisions of this chapter apply as well to a modification of a contract of insurance as to its original formation.

“SEC. 48. Whenever a right to rescind a contract of insurance is given to the insurer by any provision of this chapter, such right must be exercised previous to the commencement of an action on the contract.

“After a policy of life insurance made payable on the death of the insured shall have been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a period of two (2) years from the date of its issue or of its last reinstatement, the insurer cannot prove that the policy is void ab initio or is rescindable by reason of the fraudulent concealment or misrepresentation of the insured or his agent.

“TITLE 6

“THE POLICY

“SEC. 49. The written instrument in which a contract of insurance is set forth, is called a policy of insurance.

“SEC. 50. The policy shall be in printed form which may contain blank spaces; and any word, phrase, clause, mark, sign, symbol, signature, number, or word necessary to complete the contract of insurance shall be written on the blank spaces provided therein.

“Any rider, clause, warranty or endorsement purporting to be part of the contract of insurance and which is pasted or attached to said policy is not binding on the insured, unless the descriptive title or name of the rider, clause, warranty or endorsement is also mentioned and written on the blank spaces provided in the policy.

“Unless applied for by the insured or owner, any rider, clause, warranty or endorsement issued after the original policy shall be countersigned by the insured or owner, which countersignature shall be taken as his agreement to the contents of such rider, clause, warranty or endorsement.

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, the policy may be in electronic form subject to the pertinent provisions of Republic Act No. 8792, otherwise known as the ‘Electronic Commerce Act’ and to such rules and regulations as may be prescribed by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 51. A policy of insurance must specify:

“(a) The parties between whom the contract is made;

“(b) The amount to be insured except in the cases of open or running policies;

“(c) The premium, or if the insurance is of a character where the exact premium is only determinable upon the termination of the contract, a statement of the basis and rates upon which the final premium is to be determined;

“(d) The property or life insured;

“(e) The interest of the insured in property insured, if he is not the absolute owner thereof;

“(f) The risks insured against; and

“(g) The period during which the insurance is to continue.

“SEC. 52. Cover notes may be issued to bind insurance temporarily pending the issuance of the policy. Within sixty (60) days after issue of a cover note, a policy shall be issued in lieu thereof, including within its terms the identical insurance bound under the cover note and the premium therefor.

“Cover notes may be extended or renewed beyond such sixty (60) days with the written approval of the Commissioner if he determines that such extension is not contrary to and is not for the purpose of violating any provisions of this Code. The Commissioner may promulgate rules and regulations governing such extensions for the purpose of preventing such violations and may by such rules and regulations dispense with the requirement of written approval by him in the case of extension in compliance with such rules and regulations.

“SEC. 53. The insurance proceeds shall be applied exclusively to the proper interest of the person in whose name or for whose benefit it is made unless otherwise specified in the policy.

“SEC. 54. When an insurance contract is executed with an agent or trustee as the insured, the fact that his principal or beneficiary is the real party in interest may be indicated by describing the insured as agent or trustee, or by other general words in the policy.

“SEC. 55. To render an insurance effected by one partner or part-owner, applicable to the interest of his co-partners or other part-owners, it is necessary that the terms of the policy should be such as are applicable to the joint or common interest.

“SEC. 56. When the description of the insured in a policy is so general that it may comprehend any person or any class of persons, only he who can show that it was intended to include him, can claim the benefit of the policy.

“SEC. 57. A policy may be so framed that it will inure to the benefit of whomsoever, during the continuance of the risk, may become the owner of the interest insured.

“SEC. 58. The mere transfer of a thing insured does not transfer the policy, but suspends it until the same person becomes the owner of both the policy and the thing insured.

“SEC. 59. A policy is either open, valued or running.

“SEC. 60. An open policy is one in which the value of the thing insured is not agreed upon, and the amount of the insurance merely represents the insurer’s maximum liability. The value of such thing insured shall be ascertained at the time of the loss.

“SEC. 61. A valued policy is one which expresses on its face an agreement that the thing insured shall be valued at a specific sum.

“SEC. 62. A running policy is one which contemplates successive insurances, and which provides that the object of the policy may be from time to time defined, especially as to the subjects of insurance, by additional statements or indorsements.

“SEC. 63. A condition, stipulation, or agreement in any policy of insurance, limiting the time for commencing an action thereunder to a period of less than one (1) year from the time when the cause of action accrues, is void.

“SEC. 64. No policy of insurance other than life shall be cancelled by the insurer except upon prior notice thereof to the insured, and no notice of cancellation shall be effective unless it is based on the occurrence, after the effective date of the policy, of one or more of the following:

“(a) Nonpayment of premium;

“(b) Conviction of a crime arising out of acts increasing the hazard insured against;

“(c) Discovery of fraud or material misrepresentation;

“(d) Discovery of willful or reckless acts or omissions increasing the hazard insured against;

“(e) Physical changes in the property insured which result in the property becoming uninsurable;

“(f) Discovery of other insurance coverage that makes the total insurance in excess of the value of the property insured; or

“(g) A determination by the Commissioner that the continuation of the policy would violate or would place the insurer in violation of this Code.

“SEC. 65. All notices of cancellation mentioned in the preceding section shall be in writing, mailed or delivered to the named insured at the address shown in the policy, or to his broker provided the broker is authorized in writing by the policy owner to receive the notice of cancellation on his behalf, and shall state:

“(a) Which of the grounds set forth in Section 64 is relied upon; and

“(b) That, upon written request of the named insured, the insurer will furnish the facts on which the cancellation is based.

“SEC. 66. In case of insurance other than life, unless the insurer at least forty-five (45) days in advance of the end of the policy period mails or delivers to the named insured at the address shown in the policy notice of its intention not to renew the policy or to condition its renewal upon reduction of limits or elimination of coverages, the named insured shall be entitled to renew the policy upon payment of the premium due on the effective date of the renewal. Any policy written for a term of less than one (1) year shall be considered as if written for a term of one (1) year. Any policy written for a term longer than one (1) year or any policy with no fixed expiration date shall be considered as if written for successive policy periods or terms of one (1) year.

“TITLE 7

“WARRANTIES

“SEC. 67. A warranty is either expressed or implied.

“SEC. 68. A warranty may relate to the past, the present, the future, or to any or all of these.

“SEC. 69. No particular form of words is necessary to create a warranty.

“SEC. 70. Without prejudice to Section 51, every express warranty, made at or before the execution of a policy, must be contained in the policy itself, or in another instrument signed by the insured and referred to in the policy as making a part of it.

“SEC. 71. A statement in a policy, of a matter relating to the person or thing insured, or to the risk, as fact, is an express warranty thereof.

“SEC. 72. A statement in a policy, which imparts that it is intended to do or not to do a thing which materially affects the risk, is a warranty that such act or omission shall take place.

“SEC. 73. When, before the time arrives for the performance of a warranty relating to the future, a loss insured against happens, or performance becomes unlawful at the place of the contract, or impossible, the omission to fulfill the warranty does not avoid the policy.

“SEC. 74. The violation of a material warranty, or other material provision of a policy, on the part of either party thereto, entitles the other to rescind.

“SEC. 75. A policy may declare that a violation of specified provisions thereof shall avoid it, otherwise the breach of an immaterial provision does not avoid the policy.

“SEC. 76. A breach of warranty without fraud merely exonerates an insurer from the time that it occurs, or where it is broken in its inception, prevents the policy from attaching to the risk.

“TITLE 8

“PREMIUM

“SEC. 77. An insurer is entitled to payment of the premium as soon as the thing insured is exposed to the peril insured against. Notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary, no policy or contract of insurance issued by an insurance company is valid and binding unless and until the premium thereof has been paid, except in the case of a life or an industrial life policy whenever the grace period provision applies, or whenever under the broker and agency agreements with duly licensed intermediaries, a ninety (90)-day credit extension is given. No credit extension to a duly licensed intermediary should exceed ninety (90) days from date of issuance of the policy.

“SEC. 78. Employees of the Republic of the Philippines, including its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, and government-owned or -controlled corporations, may pay their insurance premiums and loan obligations through salary deduction: Provided, That the treasurer, cashier, paymaster or official of the entity employing the government employee is authorized, notwithstanding the provisions of any existing law, rules and regulations to the contrary, to make deductions from the salary, wage or income of the latter pursuant to the agreement between the insurer and the government employee and to remit such deductions to the insurer concerned, and collect such reasonable fee for its services.

“SEC. 79. An acknowledgment in a policy or contract of insurance or the receipt of premium is conclusive evidence of its payment, so far as to make the policy binding, notwithstanding any stipulation therein that it shall not be binding until the premium is actually paid.

“SEC. 80. A person insured is entitled to a return of premium, as follows:

“(a) To the whole premium if no part of his interest in the thing insured be exposed to any of the perils insured against;

“(b) Where the insurance is made for a definite period of time and the insured surrenders his policy, to such portion of the premium as corresponds with the unexpired time, at a pro rata rate, unless a short period rate has been agreed upon and appears on the face of the policy, after deducting from the whole premium any claim for loss or damage under the policy which has previously accrued: Provided, That no holder of a life insurance policy may avail himself of the privileges of this paragraph without sufficient cause as otherwise provided by law.

“SEC. 81. If a peril insured against has existed, and the insurer has been liable for any period, however short, the insured is not entitled to return of premiums, so far as that particular risk is concerned.

“SEC. 82. A person insured is entitled to a return of the premium when the contract is voidable, and subsequently annulled under the provisions of the Civil Code; or on account of the fraud or misrepresentation of the insurer, or of his agent, or on account of facts, or the existence of which the insured was ignorant of without his fault; or when by any default of the insured other than actual fraud, the insurer never incurred any liability under the policy.

“A person insured is not entitled to a return of premium if the policy is annulled, rescinded or if a claim is denied by reason of fraud.

“SEC. 83. In case of an over insurance by several insurers other than life, the insured is entitled to a ratable return of the premium, proportioned to the amount by which the aggregate sum insured in all the policies exceeds the insurable value of the thing at risk.

“SEC. 84. An insurer may contract and accept payments, in addition to regular premium, for the purpose of paying future premiums on the policy or to increase the benefits thereof.

“TITLE 9

“LOSS

“SEC. 85. An agreement not to transfer the claim of the insured against the insurer after the loss has happened, is void if made before the loss except as otherwise provided in the case of life insurance.

“SEC. 86. Unless otherwise provided by the policy, an insurer is liable for a loss of which a peril insured against was the proximate cause, although a peril not contemplated by the contract may have been a remote cause of the loss; but he is not liable for a loss of which the peril insured against was only a remote cause.

“SEC. 87. An insurer is liable where the thing insured is rescued from a peril insured against that would otherwise have caused a loss, if, in the course of such rescue, the thing is exposed to a peril not insured against, which permanently deprives the insured of its possession, in whole or in part; or where a loss is caused by efforts to rescue the thing insured from a peril insured against.

“SEC. 88. Where a peril is especially excepted in a contract of insurance, a loss, which would not have occurred but for such peril, is thereby excepted although the immediate cause of the loss was a peril which was not excepted.

“SEC. 89. An insurer is not liable for a loss caused by the willful act or through the connivance of the insured; but he is not exonerated by the negligence of the insured, or of the insurance agents or others.

“TITLE 10

“NOTICE OF LOSS

“SEC. 90. In case of loss upon an insurance against fire, an insurer is exonerated, if written notice thereof be not given to him by an insured, or some person entitled to the benefit of the insurance, without unnecessary delay. For other non-life insurance, the Commissioner may specify the period for the submission of the notice of loss.

“SEC. 91. When a preliminary proof of loss is required by a policy, the insured is not bound to give such proof as would be necessary in a court of justice; but it is sufficient for him to give the best evidence which he has in his power at the time.

“SEC. 92. All defects in a notice of loss, or in preliminary proof thereof, which the insured might remedy, and which the insurer omits to specify to him, without unnecessary delay, as grounds of objection, are waived.

“SEC. 93. Delay in the presentation to an insurer of notice or proof of loss is waived if caused by any act of him, or if he omits to take objection promptly and specifically upon that ground.

“SEC. 94. If the policy requires, by way of preliminary proof of loss, the certificate or testimony of a person other than the insured, it is sufficient for the insured to use reasonable diligence to procure it, and in case of the refusal of such person to give it, then to furnish reasonable evidence to the insurer that such refusal was not induced by any just grounds of disbelief in the facts necessary to be certified or testified.

“TITLE 11

“DOUBLE INSURANCE

“SEC. 95. A double insurance exists where the same person is insured by several insurers separately in respect to the same subject and interest.

“SEC. 96. Where the insured in a policy other than life is over insured by double insurance:

“(a) The insured, unless the policy otherwise provides, may claim payment from the insurers in such order as he may select, up to the amount for which the insurers are severally liable under their respective contracts;

“(b) Where the policy under which the insured claims is a valued policy, any sum received by him under any other policy shall be deducted from the value of the policy without regard to the actual value of the subject matter insured;

“(c) Where the policy under which the insured claims is an unvalued policy, any sum received by him under any policy shall be deducted against the full insurable value, for any sum received by him under any policy;

“(d) Where the insured receives any sum in excess of the valuation in the case of valued policies, or of the insurable value in the case of unvalued policies, he must hold such sum in trust for the insurers, according to their right of contribution among themselves;

“(e) Each insurer is bound, as between himself and the other insurers, to contribute ratably to the loss in proportion to the amount for which he is liable under his contract.

“TITLE 12

“REINSURANCE

“SEC. 97. A contract of reinsurance is one by which an insurer procures a third person to insure him against loss or liability by reason of such original insurance.

“SEC. 98. Where an insurer obtains reinsurance, except under automatic reinsurance treaties, he must communicate all the representations of the original insured, and also all the knowledge and information he possesses, whether previously or subsequently acquired, which are material to the risk.

“SEC. 99. A reinsurance is presumed to be a contract of indemnity against liability, and not merely against damage.

“SEC. 100. The original insured has no interest in a contract of reinsurance.

“CHAPTER II

“CLASSES OF INSURANCE

“TITLE I

“MARINE INSURANCE

“SUB-TITLE 1-A

“DEFINITION

“SEC. 101. Marine Insurance includes:

“(a) Insurance against loss of or damage to:

“(1) Vessels, craft, aircraft, vehicles, goods, freights, cargoes, merchandise, effects, disbursements, profits, moneys, securities, choses in action, instruments of debts, valuable papers, bottomry, and respondentia interests and all other kinds of property and interests therein, in respect to, appertaining to or in connection with any and all risks or perils of navigation, transit or transportation, or while being assembled, packed, crated, baled, compressed or similarly prepared for shipment or while awaiting shipment, or during any delays, storage, transhipment, or reshipment incident thereto, including war risks, marine builder’s risks, and all personal property floater risks;

“(2) Person or property in connection with or appertaining to a marine, inland marine, transit or transportation insurance, including liability for loss of or damage arising out of or in connection with the construction, repair, operation, maintenance or use of the subject matter of such insurance (but not including life insurance or surety bonds nor insurance against loss by reason of bodily injury to any person arising out of ownership, maintenance, or use of automobiles);

“(3) Precious stones, jewels, jewelry, precious metals, whether in course of transportation or otherwise; and

“(4) Bridges, tunnels and other instrumentalities of transportation and communication (excluding buildings, their furniture and furnishings, fixed contents and supplies held in storage); piers, wharves, docks and slips, and other aids to navigation and transportation, including dry docks and marine railways, dams and appurtenant facilities for the control of waterways.

“(b) Marine protection and indemnity insurance, meaning insurance against, or against legal liability of the insured for loss, damage, or expense incident to ownership, operation, chartering, maintenance, use, repair, or construction of any vessel, craft or instrumentality in use of ocean or inland waterways, including liability of the insured for personal injury, illness or death or for loss of or damage to the property of another person.

“SUB-TITLE 1-B

“INSURABLE INTEREST

“SEC. 102. The owner of a ship has in all cases an insurable interest in it, even when it has been chartered by one who covenants to pay him its value in case of loss: Provided, That in this case the insurer shall be liable for only that part of the loss which the insured cannot recover from the charterer.

“SEC. 103. The insurable interest of the owner of the ship hypothecated by bottomry is only the excess of its value over the amount secured by bottomry.

“SEC. 104. Freightage, in the sense of a policy of marine insurance, signifies all the benefits derived by the owner, either from the chartering of the ship or its employment for the carriage of his own goods or those of others.

“SEC. 105. The owner of a ship has an insurable interest in expected freightage which according to the ordinary and probable course of things he would have earned but for the intervention of a peril insured against or other peril incident to the voyage.

“SEC. 106. The interest mentioned in the last section exists, in case of a charter party, when the ship has broken ground on the chartered voyage. If a price is to be paid for the carriage of goods it exists when they are actually on board, or there is some contract for putting them on board, and both ship and goods are ready for the specified voyage.

“SEC. 107. One who has an interest in the thing from which profits are expected to proceed has an insurable interest in the profits.

“SEC. 108. The charterer of a ship has an insurable interest in it, to the extent that he is liable to be damnified by its loss.

“SUB-TITLE 1-C

“CONCEALMENT

“SEC. 109. In marine insurance, each party is bound to communicate, in addition to what is required by Section 28, all the information which he possesses, material to the risk, except such as is mentioned in Section 30, and to state the exact and whole truth in relation to all matters that he represents, or upon inquiry discloses or assumes to disclose.

“SEC. 110. In marine insurance, information of the belief or expectation of a third person, in reference to a material fact, is material.

“SEC. 111. A person insured by a contract of marine insurance is presumed to have knowledge, at the time of insuring, of a prior loss, if the information might possibly have reached him in the usual mode of transmission and at the usual rate of communication.

“SEC. 112. A concealment in a marine insurance, in respect to any of the following matters, does not vitiate the entire contract, but merely exonerates the insurer from a loss resulting from the risk concealed:

“(a) The national character of the insured;

“(b) The liability of the thing insured to capture and detention;

“(c) The liability to seizure from breach of foreign laws of trade;

“(d) The want of necessary documents; and

“(e) The use of false and simulated papers.

“SUB-TITLE 1-D

“REPRESENTATION

“SEC. 113. If a representation by a person insured by a contract of marine insurance, is intentionally false in any material respect, or in respect of any fact on which the character and nature of the risk depends, the insurer may rescind the entire contract.

“SEC. 114. The eventual falsity of a representation as to expectation does not, in the absence of fraud, avoid a contract of marine insurance.

“SUB-TITLE 1-E

“IMPLIED WARRANTIES

“SEC. 115. In every marine insurance upon a ship or freight, or freightage, or upon any thing which is the subject of marine insurance, a warranty is implied that the ship is seaworthy.

“SEC. 116. A ship is seaworthy when reasonably fit to perform the service and to encounter the ordinary perils of the voyage contemplated by the parties to the policy.

“SEC. 117. An implied warranty of seaworthiness is complied with if the ship be seaworthy at the time of the commencement of the risk, except in the following cases:

“(a) When the insurance is made for a specified length of time, the implied warranty is not complied with unless the ship be seaworthy at the commencement of every voyage it undertakes during that time;

“(b) When the insurance is upon the cargo which, by the terms of the policy, description of the voyage, or established custom of the trade, is to be transhipped at an intermediate port, the implied warranty is not complied with unless each vessel upon which the cargo is shipped, or transhipped, be seaworthy at the commencement of each particular voyage.

“SEC. 118. A warranty of seaworthiness extends not only to the condition of the structure of the ship itself, but requires that it be properly laden, and provided with a competent master, a sufficient number of competent officers and seamen, and the requisite appurtenances and equipment, such as ballasts, cables and anchors, cordage and sails, food, water, fuel and lights, and other necessary or proper stores and implements for the voyage.

“SEC. 119. Where different portions of the voyage contemplated by a policy differ in respect to the things requisite to make the ship seaworthy therefor, a warranty of seaworthiness is complied with if, at the commencement of each portion, the ship is seaworthy with reference to that portion.

“SEC. 120. When the ship becomes unseaworthy during the voyage to which an insurance relates, an unreasonable delay in repairing the defect exonerates the insurer on ship or shipowner’s interest from liability from any loss arising therefrom.

“SEC. 121. A ship which is seaworthy for the purpose of an insurance upon the ship may, nevertheless, by reason of being unfitted to receive the cargo, be unseaworthy for the purpose of insurance upon the cargo.

“SEC. 122. Where the nationality or neutrality of a ship or cargo is expressly warranted, it is implied that the ship will carry the requisite documents to show such nationality or neutrality and that it will not carry any documents which cast reasonable suspicion thereon.

“SUB-TITLE 1-F

“THE VOYAGE AND DEVIATION

“SEC. 123. When the voyage contemplated by a marine insurance policy is described by the places of beginning and ending, the voyage insured is one which conforms to the course of sailing fixed by mercantile usage between those places.

“SEC. 124. If the course of sailing is not fixed by mercantile usage, the voyage insured by a marine insurance policy is that way between the places specified, which to a master of ordinary skill and discretion, would mean the most natural, direct and advantageous.

“SEC. 125. Deviation is a departure from the course of the voyage insured, mentioned in the last two (2) sections, or an unreasonable delay in pursuing the voyage or the commencement of an entirely different voyage.

“SEC. 126. A deviation is proper:

“(a) When caused by circumstances over which neither the master nor the owner of the ship has any control;

“(b) When necessary to comply with a warranty, or to avoid a peril, whether or not the peril is insured against;

“(c) When made in good faith, and upon reasonable grounds of belief in its necessity to avoid a peril; or

“(d) When made in good faith, for the purpose of saving human life or relieving another vessel in distress.

“SEC. 127. Every deviation not specified in the last section is improper.

“SEC. 128. An insurer is not liable for any loss happening to the thing insured subsequent to an improper deviation.

“SUB-TITLE 1-G

“LOSS

“SEC. 129. A loss may be either total or partial.

“SEC. 130. Every loss which is not total is partial.

“SEC. 131. A total loss may be either actual or constructive.

“SEC. 132. An actual total loss is caused by:

“(a) A total destruction of the thing insured;

“(b) The irretrievable loss of the thing by sinking, or by being broken up;

“(c) Any damage to the thing which renders it valueless to the owner for the purpose for which he held it; or

“(d) Any other event which effectively deprives the owner of the possession, at the port of destination, of the thing insured.

“SEC. 133. A constructive total loss is one which gives to a person insured a right to abandon, under Section 141.

“SEC. 134. An actual loss may be presumed from the continued absence of a ship without being heard of. The length of time which is sufficient to raise this presumption depends on the circumstances of the case.

“SEC. 135. When a ship is prevented, at an intermediate port, from completing the voyage, by the perils insured against, the liability of a marine insurer on the cargo continues after they are thus reshipped.

“Nothing in this section shall prevent an insurer from requiring an additional premium if the hazard be increased by this extension of liability.

“SEC. 136. In addition to the liability mentioned in the last section, a marine insurer is bound for damages, expenses of discharging, storage, reshipment, extra freightage, and all other expenses incurred in saving cargo reshipped pursuant to the last section, up to the amount insured.

“Nothing in this or in the preceding section shall render a marine insurer liable for any amount in excess of the insured value or, if there be none, of the insurable value.

“SEC. 137. Upon an actual total loss, a person insured is entitled to payment without notice of abandonment.

“SEC. 138. Where it has been agreed that an insurance upon a particular thing, or class of things, shall be free from particular average, a marine insurer is not liable for any particular average loss not depriving the insured of the possession, at the port of destination, of the whole of such thing, or class of things, even though it becomes entirely worthless; but such insurer is liable for his proportion of all general average loss assessed upon the thing insured.

“SEC. 139. An insurance confined in terms to an actual loss does not cover a constructive total loss, but covers any loss, which necessarily results in depriving the insured of the possession, at the port of destination, of the entire thing insured.

“SUB-TITLE 1-H

“ABANDONMENT

“SEC. 140. Abandonment, in marine insurance, is the act of the insured by which, after a constructive total loss, he declares the relinquishment to the insurer of his interest in the thing insured.

“SEC. 141. A person insured by a contract of marine insurance may abandon the thing insured, or any particular portion thereof separately valued by the policy, or otherwise separately insured, and recover for a total loss thereof, when the cause of the loss is a peril insured against:

“(a) If more than three-fourths (¾) thereof in value is actually lost, or would have to be expended to recover it from the peril;

“(b) If it is injured to such an extent as to reduce its value more than three-fourths (¾);

“(c) If the thing insured is a ship, and the contemplated voyage cannot be lawfully performed without incurring either an expense to the insured of more than three-fourths (¾) the value of the thing abandoned or a risk which a prudent man would not take under the circumstances; or

“(d) If the thing insured, being cargo or freightage, and the voyage cannot be performed, nor another ship procured by the master, within a reasonable time and with reasonable diligence, to forward the cargo, without incurring the like expense or risk mentioned in the preceding subparagraph. But freightage cannot in any case be abandoned unless the ship is also abandoned.

“SEC. 142. An abandonment must be neither partial nor conditional.

“SEC. 143. An abandonment must be made within a reasonable time after receipt of reliable information of the loss, but where the information is of a doubtful character, the insured is entitled to a reasonable time to make inquiry.

“SEC. 144. Where the information upon which an abandonment has been made proves incorrect, or the thing insured was so far restored when the abandonment was made that there was then in fact no total loss, the abandonment becomes ineffectual.

“SEC. 145. Abandonment is made by giving notice thereof to the insurer, which may be done orally, or in writing: Provided, That if the notice be done orally, a written notice of such abandonment shall be submitted within seven (7) days from such oral notice.

“SEC. 146. A notice of abandonment must be explicit, and must specify the particular cause of the abandonment, but need state only enough to show that there is probable cause therefor, and need not be accompanied with proof of interest or of loss.

“SEC. 147. An abandonment can be sustained only upon the cause specified in the notice thereof.

“SEC. 148. An abandonment is equivalent to a transfer by the insured of his interest to the insurer, with all the chances of recovery and indemnity.

“SEC. 149. If a marine insurer pays for a loss as if it were an actual total loss, he is entitled to whatever may remain of the thing insured, or its proceeds or salvage, as if there had been a formal abandonment.

“SEC. 150. Upon an abandonment, acts done in good faith by those who were agents of the insured in respect to the thing insured, subsequent to the loss, are at the risk of the insurer, and for his benefit.

“SEC. 151. Where notice of abandonment is properly given, the rights of the insured are not prejudiced by the fact that the insurer refuses to accept the abandonment.

“SEC. 152. The acceptance of an abandonment may be either express or implied from the conduct of the insurer. The mere silence of the insurer for an unreasonable length of time after notice shall be construed as an acceptance.

“SEC. 153. The acceptance of an abandonment, whether express or implied, is conclusive upon the parties, and admits the loss and the sufficiency of the abandonment.

“SEC. 154. An abandonment once made and accepted is irrevocable, unless the ground upon which it was made proves to be unfounded.

“SEC. 155. On an accepted abandonment of a ship, freightage earned previous to the loss belongs to the insurer of said freightage; but freightage subsequently earned belongs to the insurer of the ship.

“SEC. 156. If an insurer refuses to accept a valid abandonment, he is liable as upon an actual total loss, deducting from the amount any proceeds of the thing insured which may have come to the hands of the insured.

“SEC. 157. If a person insured omits to abandon, he may nevertheless recover his actual loss.

“SUB-TITLE 1-I

“MEASURE OF INDEMNITY

“SEC. 158. A valuation in a policy of marine insurance is conclusive between the parties thereto in the adjustment of either a partial or total loss, if the insured has some interest at risk, and there is no fraud on his part; except that when a thing has been hypothecated by bottomry or respondentia, before its insurance, and without the knowledge of the person actually procuring the insurance, he may show the real value. But a valuation fraudulent in fact, entitles the insurer to rescind the contract.

“SEC. 159. A marine insurer is liable upon a partial loss, only for such proportion of the amount insured by him as the loss bears to the value of the whole interest of the insured in the property insured.

“SEC. 160. Where profits are separately insured in a contract of marine insurance, the insured is entitled to recover, in case of loss, a proportion of such profits equivalent to the proportion which the value of the property lost bears to the value of the whole.

“SEC. 161. In case of a valued policy of marine insurance on freightage or cargo, if a part only of the subject is exposed to risk, the valuation applies only in proportion to such part.

“SEC. 162. When profits are valued and insured by a contract of marine insurance, a loss of them is conclusively presumed from a loss of the property out of which they are expected to arise, and the valuation fixes their amount.

“SEC. 163. In estimating a loss under an open policy of marine insurance the following rules are to be observed:

“(a) The value of a ship is its value at the beginning of the risk, including all articles or charges which add to its permanent value or which are necessary to prepare it for the voyage insured;

“(b) The value of the cargo is its actual cost to the insured, when laden on board, or where the cost cannot be ascertained, its market value at the time and place of lading, adding the charges incurred in purchasing and placing it on board, but without reference to any loss incurred in raising money for its purchase, or to any drawback on its exportation, or to the fluctuation of the market at the port of destination, or to expenses incurred on the way or on arrival;

“(c) The value of freightage is the gross freightage, exclusive of primage, without reference to the cost of earning it; and

“(d) The cost of insurance is in each case to be added to the value thus estimated.

“SEC. 164. If cargo insured against partial loss arrives at the port of destination in a damaged condition, the loss of the insured is deemed to be the same proportion of the value which the market price at that port, of the thing so damaged, bears to the market price it would have brought if sound.

“SEC. 165. A marine insurer is liable for all the expenses attendant upon a loss which forces the ship into port to be repaired; and where it is stipulated in the policy that the insured shall labor for the recovery of the property, the insurer is liable for the expense incurred thereby, such expense, in either case, being in addition to a total loss, if that afterwards occurs.

“SEC. 166. A marine insurer is liable for a loss falling upon the insured, through a contribution in respect to the thing insured, required to be made by him towards a general average loss called for by a peril insured against: Provided, That the liability of the insurer shall be limited to the proportion of contribution attaching to his policy value where this is less than the contributing value of the thing insured.

“SEC. 167. When a person insured by a contract of marine insurance has a demand against others for contribution, he may claim the whole loss from the insurer, subrogating him to his own right to contribution. But no such claim can be made upon the insurer after the separation of the interests liable to contribution, nor when the insured, having the right and opportunity to enforce contribution from others, has neglected or waived the exercise of that right.

“SEC. 168. In the case of a partial loss of ship or its equipment, the old materials are to be applied towards payment for the new. Unless otherwise stipulated in the policy, a marine insurer is liable for only two-thirds (2/3) of the remaining cost of repairs after such deduction, except that anchors must be paid in full.

“TITLE 2

“FIRE INSURANCE

“SEC. 169. As used in this Code, the term fire insurance shall include insurance against loss by fire, lightning, windstorm, tornado or earthquake and other allied risks, when such risks are covered by extension to fire insurance policies or under separate policies.

“SEC. 170. An alteration in the use or condition of a thing insured from that to which it is limited by the policy made without the consent of the insurer, by means within the control of the insured, and increasing the risks, entitles an insurer to rescind a contract of fire insurance.

“SEC. 171. An alteration in the use or condition of a thing insured from that to which it is limited by the policy, which does not increase the risk, does not affect a contract of fire insurance.

“SEC. 172. A contract of fire insurance is not affected by any act of the insured subsequent to the execution of the policy, which does not violate its provisions, even though it increases the risk and is the cause of the loss.

“SEC. 173. If there is no valuation in the policy, the measure of indemnity in an insurance against fire is the expense it would be to the insured at the time of the commencement of the fire to replace the thing lost or injured in the condition in which it was at the time of the injury; but if there is a valuation in a policy of fire insurance, the effect shall be the same as in a policy of marine insurance.

“SEC. 174. Whenever the insured desires to have a valuation named in his policy, insuring any building or structure against fire, he may require such building or structure to be examined by an independent appraiser and the value of the insured’s interest therein may then be fixed as between the insurer and the insured. The cost of such examination shall be paid for by the insured. A clause shall be inserted in such policy stating substantially that the value of the insured’s interest in such building or structure has been thus fixed. In the absence of any change increasing the risk without the consent of the insurer or of fraud on the part of the insured, then in case of a total loss under such policy, the whole amount so insured upon the insured’s interest in such building or structure, as stated in the policy upon which the insurers have received a premium, shall be paid, and in case of a partial loss the full amount of the partial loss shall be so paid, and in case there are two (2) or more policies covering the insured’s interest therein, each policy shall contribute pro rata to the payment of such whole or partial loss. But in no case shall the insurer be required to pay more than the amount thus stated in such policy. This section shall not prevent the parties from stipulating in such policies concerning the repairing, rebuilding or replacing of buildings or structures wholly or partially damaged or destroyed.

“SEC. 175. No policy of fire insurance shall be pledged, hypothecated, or transferred to any person, firm or company who acts as agent for or otherwise represents the issuing company, and any such pledge, hypothecation, or transfer hereafter made shall be void and of no effect insofar as it may affect other creditors of the insured.

“TITLE 3

“CASUALTY INSURANCE

“SEC. 176. Casualty insurance is insurance covering loss or liability arising from accident or mishap, excluding certain types of loss which by law or custom are considered as falling exclusively within the scope of other types of insurance such as fire or marine. It includes, but is not limited to, employer’s liability insurance, motor vehicle liability insurance, plate glass insurance, burglary and theft insurance, personal accident and health insurance as written by non-life insurance companies, and other substantially similar kinds of insurance.

“TITLE 4

“SURETYSHIP

“SEC. 177. A contract of suretyship is an agreement whereby a party called the surety guarantees the performance by another party called the principal or obligor of an obligation or undertaking in favor of a third party called the obligee. It includes official recognizances, stipulations, bonds or undertakings issued by any company by virtue of and under the provisions of Act No. 536, as amended by Act No. 2206.

“SEC. 178. The liability of the surety or sureties shall be joint and several with the obligor and shall be limited to the amount of the bond. It is determined strictly by the terms of the contract of suretyship in relation to the principal contract between the obligor and the obligee.

“SEC. 179. The surety is entitled to payment of the premium as soon as the contract of suretyship or bond is perfected and delivered to the obligor. No contract of suretyship or bonding shall be valid and binding unless and until the premium therefor has been paid, except where the obligee has accepted the bond, in which case the bond becomes valid and enforceable irrespective of whether or not the premium has been paid by the obligor to the surety: Provided, That if the contract of suretyship or bond is not accepted by, or filed with the obligee, the surety shall collect only a reasonable amount, not exceeding fifty percent (50%) of the premium due thereon as service fee plus the cost of stamps or other taxes imposed for the issuance of the contract or bond: Provided, however, That if the nonacceptance of the bond be due to the fault or negligence of the surety, no such service fee, stamps or taxes shall be collected.

“In the case of a continuing bond, the obligor shall pay the subsequent annual premium as it falls due until the contract of suretyship is cancelled by the obligee or by the Commissioner or by a court of competent jurisdiction, as the case may be.

“SEC. 180. Pertinent provisions of the Civil Code of the Philippines shall be applied in a suppletory character whenever necessary in interpreting the provisions of a contract of suretyship.

“TITLE 5

“LIFE INSURANCE

“SEC. 181. Life insurance is insurance on human lives and insurance appertaining thereto or connected therewith.

“Every contract or undertaking for the payment of annuities including contracts for the payment of lump sums under a retirement program where a life insurance company manages or acts as a trustee for such retirement program shall be considered a life insurance contract for purposes of this Code.

“SEC. 182. An insurance upon life may be made payable on the death of the person, or on his surviving a specified period, or otherwise contingently on the continuance or cessation of life.

“Every contract or pledge for the payment of endowments or annuities shall be considered a life insurance contract for purposes of this Code.

“In the absence of a judicial guardian, the father, or in the latter’s absence or incapacity, the mother, of any minor, who is an insured or a beneficiary under a contract of life, health, or accident insurance, may exercise, in behalf of said minor, any right under the policy, without necessity of court authority or the giving of a bond, where the interest of the minor in the particular act involved does not exceed Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00) or in such reasonable amount as may be determined by the Commissioner. Such right may include, but shall not be limited to, obtaining a policy loan, surrendering the policy, receiving the proceeds of the Policy, and giving the minor’s consent to any transaction on the policy.

“In the absence or in case of the incapacity of the father or mother, the grandparent, the eldest brother or sister at least eighteen (18) years of age, or any relative who has actual custody of the minor insured or beneficiary, shall act as a guardian without need of a court order or judicial appointment as such guardian, as long as such person is not otherwise disqualified or incapacitated. Payment made by the insurer pursuant to this section shall relieve such insurer of any liability under the contract.

“SEC. 183. The insurer in a life insurance contract shall be liable in case of suicide only when it is committed after the policy has been in force for a period of two (2) years from the date of its issue or of its last reinstatement, unless the policy provides a shorter period: Provided, however, That suicide committed in the state of insanity shall be compensable regardless of the date of commission.

“SEC. 184. A policy of insurance upon life or health may pass by transfer, will or succession to any person, whether he has an insurable interest or not, and such person may recover upon it whatever the insured might have recovered.

“SEC. 185. Notice to an insurer of a transfer or bequest thereof is not necessary to preserve the validity of a policy of insurance upon life or health, unless thereby expressly required.

“SEC. 186. Unless the interest of a person insured is susceptible of exact pecuniary measurement, the measure of indemnity under a policy of insurance upon life or health is the sum fixed in the policy.

“TITLE 6

“MICROINSURANCE

“SEC. 187. Microinsurance is a financial product or service that meets the risk protection needs of the poor where:

“(a) The amount of contributions, premiums, fees or charges, computed on a daily basis, does not exceed seven and a half percent (7.5%) of the current daily minimum wage rate for nonagricultural workers in Metro Manila; and

“(b) The maximum sum of guaranteed benefits is not more than one thousand (1,000) times of the current daily minimum wage rate for nonagricultural workers in Metro Manila.

“SEC. 188. No insurance company or mutual benefit association shall engage in the business of microinsurance unless it possesses all the requirements as may be prescribed by the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall issue such rules and regulations governing microinsurance.

“CHAPTER II-A

“FINANCIAL REPORTING FRAMEWORK

“SEC. 189. All companies regulated by the Commission, unless otherwise required by law, should comply with the financial reporting frameworks adopted by the Commission for purposes of creating the statutory financial reports and the annual statements to be submitted to the Commission. Financial reporting framework means a set of accounting and reporting principles, standards, interpretations and pronouncements that must be adopted in the preparation and submission of the statutory financial statements and reports required by the Commission. This financial reporting framework is not the same as the financial reporting framework used to prepare the financial statements that the Securities and Exchange Commission may require. The main purpose of the statutory statements is to present important information about the level of risk and solvency situation of insurers. In prescribing the applicable statutory financial reporting framework, the Commissioner shall take into account international standards concerning solvency and insurance company reporting as well as generally accepted actuarial principles concerning financial reporting promulgated by the Actuarial Society of the Philippines.

“The assets and investments discussed in Sections 204 to 215 shall be accounted for in accordance with this section.

“The valuation of reserves shall be accounted for in accordance with Title 5 of this Code.

“CHAPTER III

“THE BUSINESS OF INSURANCE

“TITLE 1

“INSURANCE COMPANIES, ORGANIZATION, CAPITALIZATION AND AUTHORIZATION

“SEC. 190. For purposes of this Code, the term insurer or insurance company shall include all partnerships, associations, cooperatives or corporations, including government-owned or -controlled corporations or entities, engaged as principals in the insurance business, excepting mutual benefit associations. Unless the context otherwise requires, the term shall also include professional reinsurers defined in Section 288. Domestic company shall include companies formed, organized or existing under the laws of the Philippines. Foreign company when used without limitation shall include companies formed, organized, or existing under any laws other than those of the Philippines.

“SEC. 191. The provisions of the Corporation Code, as amended, shall apply to all insurance corporations now or hereafter engaged in business in the Philippines insofar as they do not conflict with the provisions of this chapter.

“SEC. 192. No corporation, partnership, or association of persons shall transact any insurance business in the Philippines except as agent of a corporation, partnership or association authorized to do the business of insurance in the Philippines, unless possessed of the capital and assets required of an insurance corporation doing the same kind of business in the Philippines and invested in the same manner; unless the Commissioner shall have granted it a certificate to the effect that it has complied with all the provisions of this Code.

“Every entity receiving any such certificate of authority shall be subject to the insurance and other applicable laws of the Philippines and to the jurisdiction and supervision of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 193. No insurance company shall transact any insurance business in the Philippines until after it shall have obtained a certificate of authority for that purpose from the Commissioner upon application therefor and payment by the company concerned of the fees hereinafter prescribed.

“The Commissioner may refuse to issue a certificate of authority to any insurance company if, in his judgment, such refusal will best promote the interest of the people of this country. No such certificate of authority shall be granted to any such company until the Commissioner shall have satisfied himself by such examination as he may make and such evidence as he may require that such company is qualified by the laws of the Philippines to transact business therein, that the grant of such authority appears to be justified in the light of local economic requirements, and that the direction and administration, as well as the integrity and responsibility of the organizers and administrators, the financial organization and the amount of capital, reasonably assure the safety of the interests of the policyholders and the public.

“In order to maintain the quality of the management of the insurance companies and afford better protection to policyholders and the public in general, any person of good moral character, unquestioned integrity and recognized competence may be elected or appointed director or officer of insurance companies in accordance with the pertinent provisions contained in the corporate governance circulars prescribed by the Commissioner. In addition hereto, the Commissioner shall prescribe the qualifications of directors, executive officers and other key officials of insurance companies for purposes of this section.

“No person shall concurrently be a Director and/or Officer of an insurance company and an adjustment company.

“Before issuing such certificate of authority, the Commissioner must be satisfied that the name of the company is not that of any other known company transacting a similar business in the Philippines, or a name so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public. The Commissioner may issue rules and regulations on the use of names of insurance companies and other supervised persons or entities.

“The certificate of authority issued by the Commissioner shall expire on the last day of December, three (3) years following its date of issuance, and shall be renewable every three (3) years thereafter, subject to the company’s continuing compliance with the provisions of this Code, circulars, instructions, rulings or decisions of the Commission.

“Every company receiving any such certificates of authority shall be subject to the provisions of this Code and other related laws and to the jurisdiction and supervision of the Commissioner.

“No insurance company may be authorized to transact in the Philippines the business of life and non-life insurance concurrently, unless specifically authorized to do so by the Commissioner: Provided, That the terms life and non-life insurance shall be deemed to include health, accident and disability insurance.

“No insurance company shall have equity in an adjustment company and neither shall an adjustment company have equity in an insurance company.

“No insurance company issued with a valid certificate of authority to transact insurance business anywhere in the Philippines by the Insurance Commissioner, shall be barred, prevented, or disenfranchised from issuing any insurance policy or from transacting any insurance business within the scope or coverage of its certificate of authority, anywhere in the Philippines, by any local government unit or authority, for whatever guise or reason whatsoever, including under any kind of ordinance, accreditation system, or scheme. Any local ordinance or local government unit regulatory issuance imposing such restriction or disenfranchisement on any insurance company shall be deemed null and void ab initio.

“SEC. 194. Except as provided in Section 289, no new domestic life or non-life insurance company shall, in a stock corporation, engage in business in the Philippines unless possessed of a paid-up capital equal to at least One billion pesos (P1,000,000,000.00): Provided, That a domestic insurance company already doing business in the Philippines shall have a net worth by June 30, 2013 of Two hundred fifty million pesos (P250,000,000.00). Furthermore, said company must have by December 31, 2016, an additional Three hundred million pesos (P300,000,000.00) in net worth; by December 31, 2019, an additional Three hundred fifty million pesos (P350,000,000.00) in net worth; and by December 31, 2022, an additional Four hundred million pesos (P400,000,000.00) in net worth.

“The Commissioner may, as a pre-licensing requirement of a new insurance company, in addition to the paid-up capital stock, require the stockholders to pay in cash to the company in proportion to their subscription interests a contributed surplus fund of not less than One hundred million pesos (P100,000,000.00). He may also require such company to submit to him a business plan showing the company’s estimated receipts and disbursements, as well as the basis therefor, for the next succeeding three (3) years.

“If organized as a mutual company, in lieu of such net worth, it must have available total members equity in an amount to be determined by the Insurance Commission above all liabilities for losses reported; expenses, taxes, legal reserve, and reinsurance of all outstanding risks, and the contributed surplus fund equal to the amounts required of stock corporations. A stock insurance company doing business in the Philippines may, subject to the pertinent law and regulation which now or hereafter may be in force, alter its organization and transform itself into a mutual insurance company.

“The Secretary of Finance may, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, increase such minimum paid-up capital stock or cash assets requirement under such terms and conditions as he may impose, to an amount which, in his opinion, would reasonably assure the safety of the interests of the policyholders and the public. The minimum paid-up capital and net worth requirement must remain unimpaired for the continuance of the license. The Commissioner may require the adoption of the risk-based capital approach and other internationally accepted forms of capital framework.

“For the purpose of this section, net worth shall consist of:

“(a) Paid-up capital;

“(b) Retained earnings;

“(c) Unimpaired surplus; and

“(d) Revaluation of assets as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“The Commission may adopt for purposes of compliance with capital build up requirement under this Code the recognition as part of the capital account, capital notes or debentures which are subordinate to all credits and senior only to common capital stocks.

“The President of the Philippines may order a periodic review every two (2) years the capital structure set out above to determine the capital adequacy of the local insurance industry from and after the integration and liberalization of the financial services, including insurance, in the ASEAN Region. For this purpose, a review committee consisting of representatives from the Department of Finance (DOF), the Insurance Commission (IC), the National Economic and Development Authority (NEDA), the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and other agencies which the President may designate shall conduct the review and may recommend to the President to adopt for implementation the necessary capital adjustment.

“SEC. 195. Every company must, before engaging in the business of insurance in the Philippines, file with the Commissioner the following:

“(a) A certified copy of the last annual statement or a verified financial statement exhibiting the condition and affairs of such company;

“(b) If incorporated under the laws of the Philippines, a copy of the articles of incorporation and bylaws, and any amendments to either, certified by the Securities and Exchange Commission to be a copy of that which is filed in its Office;

“(c) If incorporated under any laws other than those of the Philippines, a certificate from the Securities and Exchange Commission showing that it is duly registered in the mercantile registry of that Commission in accordance with the Corporation Code. A copy of the articles of incorporation and bylaws, and any amendments to either, if organized or formed under any law requiring such to be filed, duly certified by the officer having the custody of same, or if not so organized, a copy of the law, charter or deed of settlement under which the deed of organization is made, duly certified by the proper custodian thereof, or proved by affidavit to be a copy; also, a certificate under the hand and seal of the proper officer of such state or country having supervision of insurance business therein, if any there be, that such corporation or company is organized under the laws of such state or country, with the amount of capital stock or assets and legal reserve required by this Code;

“(d) If not incorporated and of foreign domicile, aside from the certificate mentioned in paragraph (c) of this section, a certificate setting forth the nature and character of the business, the location of the principal office, the name of the individual or names of the persons composing the partnership or association, the amount of actual capital employed or to be employed therein, and the names of all officers and persons by whom the business is or may be managed.

“The certificate must be verified by the affidavit of the chief officer, secretary, agent, or manager of the company; and if there are any written articles of agreement of the company, a copy thereof must accompany such certificate.

“SEC. 196. The Commissioner must require as a condition precedent to the transaction of insurance business in the Philippines by any foreign insurance company, that such company file in his office a written power of attorney designating some person who shall be a resident of the Philippines as its general agent, on whom any notice provided by law or by any insurance policy, proof of loss, summons and other legal processes may be served in all actions or other legal proceedings against such company, and consenting that service upon such general agent shall be admitted and held as valid as if served upon the foreign company at its home office. Any such foreign company shall, as further condition precedent to the transaction of insurance business in the Philippines, make and file with the Commissioner an agreement or stipulation, executed by the proper authorities of said company in form and substance as follows:

“The (name of company) does hereby stipulate and agree in consideration of the permission granted by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business in the Philippines, that if at any time said company shall leave the Philippines, or cease to transact business therein, or shall be without any agent in the Philippines on whom any notice, proof of loss, summons, or legal process may be served, then in any action or proceeding arising out of any business or transaction which occurred in the Philippines, service of any notice provided by law, or insurance policy, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process may be made upon the Insurance Commissioner, and that such service upon the Insurance Commissioner shall have the same force and effect as if made upon the company.

“Whenever such service of notice, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process shall be made upon the Commissioner, he must, within ten (10) days thereafter, transmit by mail, postage paid, a copy of such notice, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process to the company at its home or principal office. The sending of such copy by the Commissioner shall be a necessary part of the service of the notice, proof of loss, or other legal process.

“SEC. 197. No insurance company organized or existing under the government or laws other than those of the Philippines shall engage in business in the Philippines unless possessed of unimpaired capital or assets and reserve of not less than One billion pesos (P1,000,000,000.00), nor until it shall have deposited with the Commissioner for the benefit and security of the policyholders and creditors of such company in the Philippines, securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of good securities of the Philippines, including new issues of stock of registered enterprises, as this term is defined in Executive Order No. 226 of 1987, as amended, to the actual market value of not less than the amount herein required: Provided, That at least fifty percent (50%) of such securities shall consist of bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines, its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas: Provided, further, That the total investment of a foreign insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of said foreign insurance company nor twenty percent (20%) of the capital of the registered enterprise, unless previously authorized in writing by the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner may, as a pre-licensing requirement of a new branch office of a foreign insurance company, in addition to the required asset or net worth, require the company to have an additional surplus fund in an amount to be determined by the Insurance Commission.

“For purposes of this Code, the net worth of a foreign insurance company shall refer only to its net worth in the Philippines.

“SEC. 198. The Commissioner shall hold the securities, deposited as required in the immediately preceding section, for the benefit and security of all the policyholders and creditors of the company depositing the same: Provided, That the Commissioner may as long as the company is solvent, permit the company to collect the interest or dividends on the securities so deposited, and, from time to time, with his assent, to withdraw any of such securities, upon depositing with said Commissioner other like securities, the market value of which shall be equal to the market value of such as may be withdrawn. In the event of any company ceasing to do business in the Philippines, the securities deposited as aforesaid shall be returned to the company upon the Commissioner’s written approval and only after the company has duly proven in its application therefor that it has no further liability whatsoever under any of its policies nor to any of its creditors in the Philippines.

“SEC. 199. Every foreign company doing business in the Philippines shall set aside an amount corresponding to the legal reserves of the policies written in the Philippines and invest and keep the same therein in accordance with the provisions of this section. The legal reserve therein required to be set aside shall be invested only in the classes of Philippine securities described in Section 206: Provided, however, That no investment in stocks or bonds of any single entity shall, in the aggregate exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of the investing company or twenty percent (20%) of the capital of the issuing company, whichever is the lesser, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Commissioner. The securities purchased and kept in the Philippines under this section, shall not be sent out of the territorial jurisdiction of the Philippines without the written consent of the Commissioner.

“TITLE 2

“SOLVENCY

“SEC. 200. An insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall at all times maintain the minimum paid-up capital, and net worth requirements as prescribed by the Commissioner. Such solvency requirements shall be based on internationally accepted solvency frameworks and adopted only after due consultation with the insurance industry associations.

“Whenever the aforementioned requirement be found to be less than that herein required to be maintained, the Commissioner shall forthwith direct the company to make good any such deficiency by cash, to be contributed by all stockholders of record in proportion to their respective interests, and paid to the treasurer of the company, within fifteen (15) days from receipt of the order: Provided, That the company in the interim shall not be permitted to take any new risk of any kind or character unless and until it make good any such deficiency: Provided; further, That a stockholder who aside from paying the contribution due from him, pays the contribution due from another stockholder by reason of the failure or refusal of the latter to do so, shall have a lien on the certificates of stock of the insurance company concerned appearing in its books in the name of the defaulting stockholder on the date of default, as well as on any interests or dividends that have accrued or will accrue to the said certificates of stock, until the corresponding payment or reimbursement is made by the defaulting stockholder.

“SEC. 201. No domestic insurance corporation shall declare or distribute any dividend on its outstanding stocks unless it has met the minimum paid-up capital and net worth requirements under Section 194 and except from profits attested in a sworn statement to the Commissioner by the president or treasurer of the corporation to be remaining on hand after retaining unimpaired:

“(a) The entire paid-up capital stock;

“(b) The solvency requirements defined by Section 200;

“(c) In the case of life insurance corporations, the legal reserve fund required by Section 217;

“(d) In the case of corporations other than life, the legal reserve fund required by Section 219; and

“(e) A sum sufficient to pay all net losses reported, or in the course of settlement, and all liabilities for expenses and taxes.

“Any dividend declared or distributed under the preceding paragraph shall be reported to the Commissioner within thirty (30) days after such declaration or distribution.

“If the Commissioner finds that any such corporation has declared or distributed any such dividend in violation of this section, he may order such corporation to cease and desist from doing business until the amount of such dividend or the portion thereof in excess of the amount allowed under this section has been restored to said corporation.

“The Commissioner shall prescribe solvency requirements for branches of foreign insurance companies operating in the Philippines.

“TITLE 3

“ASSETS

“SEC. 202. In any determination of the financial condition of any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, there shall be allowed and admitted as assets only such assets legally or beneficially owned by the insurance company concerned as determined by the Commissioner which consist of:

“(a) Cash in the possession of the insurance company or in transit under its control, and the true and duly verified balance of any deposit of such company in a financially sound bank or trust company duly authorized by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

“(b) Investments in securities, including money market instruments, and in real property acquired or held in accordance with and subject to the applicable provisions of this Code and the income realized therefrom or accrued thereon.

“(c) Loans granted by the insurance company concerned to the extent of that portion thereof adequately secured by non-speculative assets with readily realizable values in accordance with and subject to the limitations imposed by applicable provisions of this Code.

“(d) Policy loans and other policy assets and liens on policies, contracts or certificates of a life insurance company, in an amount not exceeding legal reserves and other policy liabilities carried on each individual life insurance policy, contract or certificate.

“(e) The net amount of uncollected and deferred premiums and annuity considerations in the case of a life insurance company which carries the full mean tabular reserve liability.

“(f) Reinsurance recoverable by the ceding insurer:

“(1) From an insurer authorized to transact business in this country, the full amount thereof; or

“(2) From an insurer not authorized in this country, in an amount not exceeding the liabilities carried by the ceding insurer for amounts withheld under a reinsurance treaty with such unauthorized insurer as security for the payment of obligations thereunder if such funds are held subject to withdrawal by, and under the control of, the ceding insurer. The Commissioner may prescribe the conditions under which a ceding insurer may be allowed credit, as an asset or as a deduction from loss and unearned premium reserves, for reinsurance recoverable from an insurer not authorized in this country but which presents satisfactory evidence that it meets the applicable standards of solvency required in this country.

“(g) Funds withheld by a ceding insurer under a reinsurance treaty, provided reserves for unpaid losses and unearned premiums are adequately provided.

“(h) Deposits or amounts recoverable from underwriting associations, syndicates and reinsurance funds, or from any suspended banking institution, to the extent deemed by the Commissioner to be available for the payment of losses and claims and values to be determined by him.

“(i) Electronic data processing machines, as may be authorized by the Commissioner to be acquired by the insurance company concerned, the acquisition cost of which to be amortized in equal annual amounts within a period of five (5) years from the date of acquisition thereof.

“(j) Investments in mutual funds, real estate investment trusts, salary loans, unit investment trust funds and special deposit accounts, subject to the conditions as may be provided for by the Commissioner.

“(k) Other assets, not inconsistent with the provisions of paragraphs (a) to (j) hereof, which are deemed by the Commissioner to be readily realizable and available for the payment of losses and claims at values to be determined by him in a circular, rule or regulation.

“SEC. 203. In addition to such assets as the Commissioner may from time to time determine to be non-admitted assets of insurance companies doing business in the Philippines, the following assets shall in no case be allowed as admitted assets of an insurance company doing business in the Philippines, in any determination of its financial condition:

“(a) Goodwill, trade names, and other like intangible assets.

“(b) Prepaid or deferred charges for expenses and commissions paid by such insurance company.

“(c) Advances to officers (other than policy loans), which are not adequately secured and which are not previously authorized by the Commissioner, as well as advances to employees, agents, and other persons on mere personal security.

“(d) Shares of stock of such insurance company, owned by it, or any equity therein as well as loans secured thereby, or any proportionate interest in such shares of stock through the ownership by such insurance company of an interest in another corporation or business unit.

“(e) Furniture, furnishing, fixtures, safes, equipment, library, stationery, literature, and supplies.

“(f) Items of bank credits representing checks, drafts or notes returned unpaid after the date of statement.

“(g) The amount, if any, by which the aggregate value of investments as carried in the ledger assets of such insurance company exceeds the aggregate value thereof as determined in accordance with the provisions of this Code and/or the rules of the Commissioner.

“All non-admitted assets and all other assets of doubtful value or character included as ledger or non-ledger assets in any statement submitted by an insurance company to the Commissioner, or in any insurance examiner’s report to him, shall also be reported, to the extent of the value disallowed as deductions from the gross assets of such insurance company, except where the Commissioner permits a reserve to be carried among the liabilities of such insurance company in lieu of any such deduction.

“TITLE 4

“INVESTMENTS

“SEC. 204. A life insurance company may lend to any of its policyholders upon the security of the value of its policy such sum as may be determined pursuant to the provisions of the policy.

“No insurance company shall loan any of its money or deposits to any person, corporation or association, except upon the security of any of the following:

“(a) First mortgage or deeds of trust of registered, unencumbered, improved or unimproved real estate, including condominiums;

“(b) First mortgages or deeds of trust of actually cultivated, improved and unencumbered agricultural lands in the Philippines;

“(c) Purchase money mortgages, lease purchase agreements or similar securities executed or received by it on account of the sale or exchange of real property acquired pursuant to Sections 206 and 208;

“(d) Bonds or other instruments of indebtedness issued or guaranteed by the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions authorized by law to incur such obligations or issue such guarantees or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and instrumentalities including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas; or

“(e) Obligations issued or guaranteed by universal banks, commercial banks, offshore banking units, investment houses or other financial intermediaries duly registered with the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas; or

“(f) Obligations issued or guaranteed by foreign banks or corporations, each of which shall have total net worth of at least One hundred fifty million US dollars ($US150,000,000.00) or such other higher net worth as may be prescribed by the Insurance Commission, as shown in their financial statements as of the immediately preceding fiscal year; or

“(g) Assignments of monetary instruments such as cash deposits, deposit certificates or other similar instruments of universal banks, commercial banks, investment houses or other financial intermediaries duly registered with the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas; or

“(h) Pledges of shares of stock, bonds or other instruments of indebtedness specified in Section 209; or

“(i) Chattel mortgages over equipment not more than three (3) years old; and

“(j) Such other security as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“The loans provided in the preceding subsection shall be subject to the following conditions:

“(1) The amount of loan secured by real estate mortgage over a non-agricultural land shall not exceed seventy percent (70%) of its appraised value, and in the case of a loan secured by a real estate mortgage over an agricultural land, the amount of loan shall not exceed forty percent (40%) of its market value: Provided, That, in no case shall such loan have a maturity period in excess of twenty-five (25) years;

“(2) Unless approved by the Commissioner, no loan may be granted upon the security of a mortgage on improved real estate if the improvements thereon do not belong to the owner of the land, and the owner of the improvements does not sign the deed of mortgage. However, if the owner of the land is the Government of the Philippines or any of its political subdivisions and a long-term lease has been executed in favor of the owner of the improvements, the owner of the land need not be a party to the deed of mortgage. The expiration date of the lease shall not, however, precede the maturity of the loan. The phrase ‘improved real estate’ as used herein shall mean land with permanent building or buildings erected thereon;

“(3) Lease-agreements or similar securities received on the sale of real estate property shall not exceed one hundred percent (100%) of the selling price of said property, or one hundred percent (100%) of its market value at the time of its disposition, whichever amount is lower. However, in no case shall such agreement have a maturity period not exceeding thirty (30) years;

“(4) Loans secured by shares of stock of solvent corporations or institutions shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of:

“(i) The weighted average market price for the one hundred eighty (180) days preceding the approval of the loan for shares listed in the stock exchange; and

“(ii) For unlisted shares, the adjusted book value of such shares.

“(5) Loans secured by the chattel mortgages over equipment shall not exceed seventy percent (70%) of the market value of said equipment.

“SEC. 205. No loan by any insurance company on the security of real estate shall be made unless the title to such real estate shall have first been registered in accordance with the existing Land Registration Act, or shall have been previously registered under the provisions of the existing Mortgage Law and the lien or interest of the insurance company as mortgagee has been registered.

“SEC. 206. (a) An insurance company may purchase, hold, own and convey such property, real and personal, as may have been mortgaged, pledged, or conveyed to it in good faith in trust for its benefit by reason of money loaned by it in pursuance of the regular business of the company, and such real or personal property as may have been purchased by it at sales under pledges, mortgages or deeds of trust for its benefit on account of money loaned by it; and such real and personal property as may have been conveyed to it by borrowers in satisfaction and discharge of loans made by the company in payment or by reason of any loan made by the company in payment or by reason of any loan made by it shall be sold by the company within twenty (20) years after the title thereto has been vested in it.

“(b) An insurance company may purchase, hold, and own the following:

“(1) Real properties which serve as its main place of business and/or branch offices: Provided, That such investment shall not in the overall exceed twenty percent (20%) of its net worth as shown by its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner.

“(2) Bonds or other instruments of indebtedness of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions authorized by law to issue bonds at the reasonable market value thereof.

“(3) Bonds or other instruments of debt of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

“(4) Bonds, debentures or other instruments of indebtedness of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines: Provided, however, That the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing entity or its predecessors shall not have defaulted in the payment of interest on any of its securities and that during each of any three (3) including the last two (2) of the five (5) fiscal years next preceding the date of acquisition by such insurance company of such bonds, debentures, or other instruments of indebtedness, the net earnings of the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing institution available for its fixed charges, as hereinafter defined, shall have been not less than one and one-quarter (1¼) times the total of its fixed charges for such year: Provided, further, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon the obligations of any one institution in the kinds permitted under this subsection an amount in excess of twenty-five percent (25%) of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty-first next preceding the date of such investment.

“As used in this subsection the term net earnings available for fixed charges shall mean net income after deducting operating and maintenance expenses, taxes other than income taxes, depreciation and depletion; but excluding extraordinary nonrecurring items of income or expense appearing in the regular financial statement of the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing institution. The term fixed charges shall include interest on funded and unfunded debt, amortization of debt discount, and rentals for leased properties.

“(5) Preferred or guaranteed stocks of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines: Provided, That if the stocks are guaranteed, the amount of stocks so guaranteed is not in excess of fifty percent (50%) of the amount of the preferred or common stocks, as the case may be, of the guaranteeing corporation: Provided, finally, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon obligations of any one institution in the kinds permitted under this subsection an amount in excess of ten percent (10%) of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty-first next preceding the date of such investment.

“(6) Common stocks of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines: Provided, however, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon the obligations of any one corporation or institution in the kinds permitted under this subsection an amount in excess of ten percent (10%) of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty-first next preceding the date of such investment.

“(7) Securities issued by a registered enterprise, as this term is defined in Executive Order No. 226, otherwise known as the Omnibus Investments Code of 1987, as amended: Provided, That the total investment of a domestic non-life insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of said insurance company as shown by its aforesaid financial statement unless previously authorized by the Commissioner.

“(8) Certificates, notes and other obligations issued by the trustees or receivers of any institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines which, or the assets of which, are being administered under the direction of any court having jurisdiction: Provided, however, That such certificates, notes or other obligations are adequately secured as to principal and interests.

“(9) Equipment trust obligations or certificates which are adequately secured or other adequately secured instruments evidencing an interest in equipment wholly or in part within the Philippines: Provided, however, That there is a right to receive determined portions of rental, purchase or other fixed obligatory payments for the use or purchase of such equipment.

“(10) Any obligation of any corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines which is, on the date of acquisition by the insurer, adequately secured and has qualities and characteristics wherein the speculative elements are not predominant.

“(11) Such other securities as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“(c) Any domestic insurer which has outstanding insurance, annuity or reinsurance contracts in currencies other than the national currency of the Philippines may invest in, or otherwise acquire or loan upon securities and investments in such currency which are substantially of the same kinds, classes and investment grades as those eligible for investment under the foregoing subdivisions of this section; but the aggregate amount of such investments and of such cash in such currency which is at any time held by such insurer shall not exceed one and one-half (1½) times the amount of its reserves and other obligations under such contracts or the amount which such insurer is required by the law of any country or possession outside the Republic of the Philippines to be invested in such country or possession, whichever shall be greater.

“SEC. 207. An insurance company may:

“(1) Invest in equities of other financial institutions; and

“(2) Engage in the buying and selling of long-term debt instruments: Provided, That any or all of such investments shall be with the prior approval of the Commissioner. Insurance companies may, however, invest in listed equities of other financial institutions without need of prior approval by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 208. Any life insurance company may:

“(a) Acquire or construct housing projects and, in connection with any such project, may acquire land or any interest therein by purchase, lease or otherwise, or use land acquired pursuant to any other provision of this Code. Such company may thereafter own, maintain, manage, collect or receive income from, or sell and convey, any land or interest therein so acquired and any improvements thereon. The aggregate book value of the investments of any such company in all such projects shall not exceed at the time of such investments twenty-five percent (25%) of the total admitted assets of such company on the thirty-first day of December next preceding: Provided, That the funds of the company for the payment of pending claims and obligations shall not be used for such investments.

“(b) Acquire real property, other than property to be used primarily for providing housing and property for accommodation of its own business, as an investment for the production of income, or may acquire real property to be improved or developed for such investment purpose pursuant to a program therefor, subject to the condition that the cost of each parcel of real property so acquired under the authority of this paragraph (b), including the estimated cost to the company of the improvement or development thereof, when added to the book value of all other real property held by it pursuant to this paragraph (b), shall not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of its admitted assets as of the thirty-first day of December next preceding.

“SEC. 209. Every domestic insurance company shall, to the extent of an amount equal in value to twenty-five percent (25%) of the minimum net worth required under Section 194, invest its funds only in securities, satisfactory to the Commissioner, consisting of bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities, or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas: Provided, That such investments shall at all times be maintained free from any lien or encumbrance: Provided, further, That such securities shall be deposited with and held by the Commissioner for the faithful performance by the depositing insurer of all its obligations under its insurance contracts. The provisions of Section 198 shall, so far as practicable, apply to the securities deposited under this section.

“Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no judgment creditor or other claimant shall have the right to levy upon any of the securities of the insurer held on deposit under this section or held on deposit pursuant to the requirement of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 210. After satisfying the requirements contained in the preceding section, any domestic non-life insurance company, shall invest, to an amount prescribed below, its funds in, or otherwise, acquire or loan upon, only the classes of investments described in Section 206, including securities issued by any registered enterprise, as this term is defined in Executive Order No. 226, otherwise known as ‘The Omnibus Investments Code of 1987′ and such other classes of investments as may be authorized by the Commissioner for purposes of this section: Provided, That:

“(a) No more than twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of such company as shown by its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner shall be invested in the lot and building in which the insurance company conducts its business; and

“(b) The total investment of an insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of said insurance company as shown by its aforesaid financial statement nor twenty percent (20%) of the paid-up capital of the registered enterprise excluding the intended investment, unless previously authorized by the Commissioner: Provided, further, That such investments, free from any lien or encumbrance, shall be at least equal in amount to the aggregate amount of: (1) its legal reserve, as provided in Section 219, and (2) its reserve fund held for reinsurance as provided for in the pertinent treaty provision in the case of reinsurance ceded to authorized insurers.

“SEC. 211. After satisfying the requirements contained in Sections 197, 199, 209 and 210, any non-life insurance company may invest any portion of its funds representing earned surplus in any of the investments described in Sections 204, 206 and 207, or in any securities issued by a registered enterprise mentioned in the preceding sections: Provided, That no investment in stocks or bonds of any single entity shall in the aggregate, exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of the insurance company as shown in its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner or twenty percent (20%) of the paid-up capital of the issuing company, whichever is lesser, unless otherwise approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 212. After satisfying the minimum capital investment required in Section 209, any life insurance company may invest its legal policy reserve, as provided in Section 217 or in Section 218, in any of the classes of securities or types of investments described in Sections 204, 206, 207 and 208, subject to the limitations therein contained, and in any securities issued by any registered enterprise mentioned in Section 210, free from any lien or encumbrance, in such amounts as may be approved by the Commissioner. Such company may likewise invest any portion of its earned surplus in the aforesaid securities or investments subject to the aforesaid limitations.

“SEC. 213. Any investment made in violation of the applicable provisions of this title shall be considered non-admitted assets.

“SEC. 214. (a) All bonds or other instruments of indebtedness having a fixed term and rate of interest and held by any life insurance company authorized to do business in this country, if amply secured and if not in default as to principal or interest, shall be valued based on their amortized cost using effective interest method less impairment and unrecoverable amount based on appropriate measurement methods which are generally accepted in the industry and accepted by the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall have the power to determine the eligibility of any such investments for valuation on the basis of amortization, and may by regulation prescribe or limit the classes of securities so eligible for amortization. All bonds or other instruments of indebtedness which in the judgment of the Commissioner are not amply secured shall not be eligible for amortization and shall be valued in accordance with paragraph two. The Commissioner may, if he finds that the interest of policyholders so permit or require, by official regulation permit or require any class or classes of insurers, other than life insurance companies authorized to do business in this country, to value their bonds or other instruments of indebtedness in accordance with the foregoing rule.

“(b) The investments of all insurers authorized to do business in this country, except securities subject to amortization and except as otherwise provided in this chapter, shall be valued, in the discretion of the Commissioner, at their amortized cost using effective interest method less impairment and unrecoverable amount or at valuation representing their fair market value. If the Commissioner finds that in view of the character of investments of any insurer authorized to do business in this country it would be prudent for such insurer to establish a special reserve for possible losses or fluctuations in the values of its investments, he may require such insurer to establish such reserve, reasonable in amount, and include a report thereon in any statement or report of the financial condition of such insurer. The Commissioner may, in connection with any examination or required financial statement of an authorized insurer, require such insurer to furnish him complete financial statements and audited report of the financial condition of any corporation of which the securities are owned wholly or partly by such insurer and may cause an examination to be made of any subsidiary or affiliate of such insurer as appropriate to specific investments as provided in appropriate circulars issued by the Commissioner.

“(c) Investments in equity of an insurance company shall be valued as follows:

“(1) Listed stocks shall be valued at market value and periodically adjusted to reflect market changes through a special valuation account to reflect their realizable value when sold;

“(2) Unlisted stocks shall be valued at adjusted book value based on the latest unqualified audited financial statements of the company which issued such stocks; and

“(3) Stocks of a corporation under the control of the insurer shall be valued using the equity method which is the cost plus or minus the share of the controlling company in the earnings or losses of the controlled company after acquisition of such stocks.

“(d) The stock of an insurance company shall be valued at the lesser of its market value or its book value as shown by its last approved audited financial statement or the last report on examination, whichever is more recent. The book value of a share of common stock of an insurance company shall be ascertained by dividing (1) the amount of its capital and surplus less the value of all of its preferred stock, if any, outstanding, by (2) the number of shares of its common stock issued and outstanding.

“Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions, an insurer may, at its option, value its holdings of stock in a subsidiary insurance company in an amount not less than acquisition cost if such acquisition cost is less than the value determined as hereinbefore provided.

“(e) Real estate acquired by foreclosure or by deed in lieu thereof, in the absence of a recent appraisal deemed by the Commissioner to be reliable, shall not be valued at an amount greater than the unpaid principal of the defaulted loan at the date of such foreclosure or deed, together with any taxes and expenses paid or incurred by such insurer at such time in connection with such acquisition, and the cost of additions or improvements thereafter paid by such insurer and any amount or amounts thereafter paid by such insurer or any assessments levied for improvements in connection with the property.

“(f) Purchase money mortgages received on dispositions of real property held pursuant to Section 208 shall be valued in an amount equivalent to ninety percent (90%) of the value of such real property. Purchase money mortgages received on disposition of real property otherwise held shall be valued in an amount not exceeding ninety percent (90%) of the value of such real property as determined by an appraisal made by an appraiser at or about the time of disposition of such real property.

“(g) The stock of a subsidiary of an insurer shall be valued on the basis of the greater of:

“(1) The value of only such of the assets of such subsidiary as would constitute lawful investments for the insurer if acquired or held directly by the insurer; or

“(2) Such other value determined pursuant to standards and cumulative limitations, contained in a regulation to be promulgated by the Commissioner.

“(h) Notwithstanding any provision contained in this section or elsewhere in this chapter, if the Commissioner finds that the interests of policyholders so permit or require, he may permit or require any class or classes of insurers authorized to do business in this country to value their investments or any class or classes thereof as of any date heretofore or hereafter in accordance with any applicable valuation or method.

“SEC. 215. It shall be the duty of the officers of the insurance company to report within the first fifteen (15) days of every month all such investments as may be made by them during the preceding month, and the Commissioner may, if such investments or any of them seem injudicious to him, require the sale or disposal of the same. The report shall also include a list of investments sold or disposed of by the company during the same period.

“TITLE 5

“RESERVES

“SEC. 216. Every life insurance company, doing business in the Philippines, shall annually make a valuation of all policies, additions thereto, unpaid dividends, and all other obligations outstanding on the thirty-first day of December of the preceding year. All such valuations shall be made according to the standard adopted by the company, as prescribed by the Commissioner in accordance with internationally accepted actuarial standards, which standard shall be stated in its annual report.

“Such standard of valuations shall be according to a standard table of mortality with interest to be determined by the Insurance Commissioner. When the preliminary term basis is used, the term insurance shall be limited to the first policy year.

“The results of such valuations shall be reported to the Commissioner on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year accompanied by a sworn statement of a designated company officer and stating the methods and assumptions used in arriving at the values reported.

“SEC. 217. The aggregate net value so ascertained of the policies of such company shall be deemed its reserve liability, to provide for which it shall hold funds in secure investments equal to such net value, above all its other liabilities; and it shall be the duty of the Commissioner, after having verified, to such an extent as he may deem necessary, the valuation of all policies in force, to satisfy himself that the company has such amount in safe legal securities after all other debts and claims against it have been provided for.

“The reserve liability for variable contracts defined in Section 238 shall be established in accordance with actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of the benefits provided, and shall be approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 218. Every life insurance company, conducted on the mutual plan or a plan in which policyholders are by the terms of their policies entitled to share in the profits or surplus shall, on all policies of life insurance heretofore or hereafter issued, under the conditions of which the distribution of surplus is deferred to a fixed or specified time and contingent upon the policy being in force and the insured living at that time, annually ascertain the amount of the surplus to which all such policies as a separate class are entitled, and shall annually apportion to such policies as a class the amount of the surplus so ascertained, and carry the amount of such apportioned surplus, plus the actual interest earnings and accretions to such fund, as a distinct and separate liability to such class of policies on and for which the same was accumulated, and no company or any of its officers shall be permitted to use any part of such apportioned surplus fund for any purpose whatsoever other than for the express purpose for which the same was accumulated.

“SEC. 219. Every insurance company, other than life, shall maintain a reserve for unearned premiums on its policies in force, which shall be charged as a liability in any determination of its financial condition. Such reserve shall be calculated based on the twenty-fourth (24th) method.

“SEC. 220. In addition to its liabilities and reserves on contracts of insurance issued by it, every insurance company shall be charged with the estimated amount of all of its other liabilities, including taxes, expenses and other obligations due or accrued at the date of statement, and including any special reserves required by the Commissioner pursuant to the provisions of this Code.

TITLE 6

“LIMIT OF SINGLE RISK

“SEC. 221. No insurance company other than life, whether foreign or domestic, shall retain any risk on any one subject of insurance in an amount exceeding twenty percent (20%) of its net worth. For purposes of this section, the term subject of insurance shall include all properties or risks insured by the same insurer that customarily are considered by non-life company underwriters to be subject to loss or damage from the same occurrence of any hazard insured against.

“The Commissioner may issue regulations providing for a maximum limit on the overall retained risks of insurers to serve as a catastrophe cover requirement for the same.

“Reinsurance ceded as authorized under the succeeding title shall be deducted in determining the risk retained. As to surety risk, deduction shall also be made of the amount assumed by any other company authorized to transact surety business and the value of any security mortgaged, pledged, or held subject to the surety’s control and for the surety’s protection.

“TITLE 7

“REINSURANCE TRANSACTIONS

“SEC. 222. An insurance company doing business in the Philippines may accept reinsurances only of such risks, and retain risk thereon within such limits, as it is otherwise authorized to insure.

“SEC. 223. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall cede all or part of any risks situated in the Philippines by way of reinsurance directly to any foreign insurer not authorized to do business in the Philippines unless such foreign insurer or, if the services of a nonresident broker are utilized, such nonresident broker is represented in the Philippines by a resident agent duly registered with the Commissioner as required in this Code.

“The resident agent of such unauthorized foreign insurer or nonresident broker shall immediately upon registration furnish the Commissioner with the annual statement of such insurer, or of such company or companies where such broker may place Philippine business as of the year preceding such registration, and annually thereafter as soon as available.

“SEC. 224. All insurance companies, both life and non-life, authorized to do business in the Philippines shall cede their excess risks to other companies similarly authorized to do business in the Philippines in such amounts and under such arrangements as would be consistent with sound underwriting practices before they enter into reinsurance arrangements with unauthorized foreign insurers.

“SEC. 225. Any insurance company doing business in the Philippines desiring to cede their excess risks to foreign insurance or reinsurance companies not authorized to transact business in the Philippines may do so under such terms and conditions which the Commissioner may prescribe.

“Should any reinsurance agreement be for any reason cancelled or terminated, the ceding company concerned shall inform the Commissioner in writing of such cancellation or termination within thirty (30) days from the date of such cancellation or termination or from the date notice or information of such cancellation or termination is received by such company as the case may be.

“SEC. 226. Every insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines shall report to the Commissioner on forms prescribed by him the particulars of reinsurance treaties or any new treaties or changes in existing treaties within three (3) months from their effectivity.

“SEC. 227. No credit shall be allowed as an admitted asset or as a deduction from liability, to any ceding insurer for reinsurance made, ceded, renewed, or otherwise becoming effective after January 1, 1975, unless the reinsurance shall be payable by the assuming insurer on the basis of the liability of the ceding insurer under the contract or contracts reinsured without diminution because of the insolvency of the ceding insurer nor unless under the contract or contracts of reinsurance the liability for such reinsurance is assumed by the assuming insurer or insurers as of the same effective date; nor unless the reinsurance agreement provides that payments by the assuming insurer shall be made directly to the ceding insurer or to its liquidator, receiver, or statutory successor except:

“(a) Where the contract specifically provides another payee of such reinsurance in the event of the insolvency of the ceding insurer; and

“(b) Where the assuming insurer with the consent of the direct insured or insureds has assumed such policy obligations of the ceding insurer as direct obligations of the assuming insurer to the payees under such policies and in substitution for the obligations of the ceding insurer to such payees.

“SEC. 228. No life insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall reinsure its whole risk on any individual life or joint lives, or substantially all of its insurance in force, without having first obtained the written permission of the Commissioner.

“TITLE 8

“ANNUAL STATEMENT

“SEC. 229. Every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall terminate its fiscal period on the thirty-first day of December every year, and shall annually on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year render to the Commissioner a statement signed and sworn to by the chief officer of such company showing, in such form and details as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, the exact condition of its affairs on the preceding thirty-first day of December.

“The annual statement shall be prepared in accordance with the financial reporting framework as determined by the Commissioner. In addition, the Commissioner may require other relevant information. The form and details of such other relevant information shall be prescribed by the Commissioner and shall form part of the supplementary schedules to the annual statement.

“Any entry in the statement which is found to be false shall constitute a misdemeanor and the officer signing such statement shall be subject to the penalty provided for under Section 442.

“SEC. 230. Every insurance company authorized under Title 10 of this chapter to issue, deliver or use variable contracts shall annually file with the Commissioner separate annual statement of its separate variable accounts. Such statement shall be on a form prescribed or approved by the Commissioner and shall include details as to all of the income, disbursements, assets and liability items of and associated with the said separate variable accounts. Said statement shall be under oath of two (2) officers of the company and shall be filed simultaneously with the annual statement required by the preceding section.

“SEC. 231. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the annual statement approved by the Commissioner, every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall publish in a newspaper of general circulation, a full synopsis of its annual financial statement showing fully the conditions of its business, and setting forth its resources and liabilities in accordance with such form prescribed by the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner shall have the authority to make, amend, and rescind such accounting rules and regulations as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this Code, and define accounting, technical and trade terms used in this Code: Provided, That such shall be in accordance with internationally accepted accounting standards. Among other things, the Commissioner may prescribe the form or forms in which required information shall be set forth, the items or details to be shown in the balance sheet and income statement, and the methods to be followed in the preparation of accounts, appraisal or valuation of assets and liabilities, determination of recurring and nonrecurring income, differentiation of investment and operating income, and in the preparation, where the Commissioner deems it necessary or desirable, of consolidated balance sheets or income accounts of any person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by the insurance company.

“TITLE 9

“POLICY FORMS

“SEC. 232. No policy, certificate or contract of insurance shall be issued or delivered within the Philippines unless in the form previously approved by the Commissioner, and no application form shall be used with, and no rider, clause, warranty or endorsement shall be attached to, printed or stamped upon such policy, certificate or contract unless the form of such application, rider, clause, warranty or endorsement has been approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 233. In the case of individual life or endowment insurance, the policy shall contain in substance the following conditions:

“(a) A provision that the policyholder is entitled to a grace period either of thirty (30) days or of one (1) month within which the payment of any premium after the first may be made, subject at the option of the insurer to an interest charge not in excess of six percent (6%) per annum for the number of days of grace elapsing before the payment of the premium, during which period of grace the policy shall continue in full force, but in case the policy becomes a claim during the said period of grace before the overdue premium is paid, the amount of such premium with interest may be deducted from the amount payable under the policy in settlement;

“(b) A provision that the policy shall be incontestable after it shall have been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a period of two (2) years from its date of issue as shown in the policy, or date of approval of last reinstatement, except for nonpayment of premium and except for violation of the conditions of the policy relating to military or naval service in time of war;

“(c) A provision that the policy shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, but if the company desires to make the application a part of the contract it may do so provided a copy of such application shall be indorsed upon or attached to the policy when issued, and in such case the policy shall contain a provision that the policy and the application therefor shall constitute the entire contract between the parties;

“(d) A provision that if the age of the insured is considered in determining the premium and the benefits accruing under the policy, and the age of the insured has been misstated, the amount payable under the policy shall be such as the premium would have purchased at the correct age;

“(e) If the policy is participating, a provision that the company shall periodically ascertain and apportion any divisible surplus accruing on the policy under conditions specified therein;

“(f) A provision specifying the options to which the policyholder is entitled to in the event of default in a premium payment after three (3) full annual premiums shall have been paid. Such option shall consist of:

“(1) A cash surrender value payable upon surrender of the policy which shall not be less than the reserve on the policy, the basis of which shall be indicated, for the then current policy year and any dividend additions thereto, reduced by a surrender charge which shall not be more than one-fifth (1/5) of the entire reserve or two and one-half percent (2½%) of the amount insured and any dividend additions thereto; and

“(2) One or more paid-up benefits on a plan or plans specified in the policy of such value as may be purchased by the cash surrender value.

“(g) A provision that at any time after a cash surrender value is available under the policy and while the policy is in force, the company will advance, on proper assignment or pledge of the policy and on sole security thereof, a sum equal to, or at the option of the owner of the policy, less than the cash surrender value on the policy, at a specified rate of interest, not more than the maximum allowed by law, to be determined by the company from time to time, but not more often than once a year, subject to the approval of the Commissioner; and that the company will deduct from such loan value any existing indebtedness on the policy and any unpaid balance of the premium for the current policy year, and may collect interest in advance on the loan to the end of the current policy year, which provision may further provide that such loan may be deferred for not exceeding six (6) months after the application therefor is made;

“(h) A table showing in figures cash surrender values and paid-up options available under the policy each year upon default in premium payments, during at least twenty (20) years of the policy beginning with the year in which the values and options first become available, together with a provision that in the event of the failure of the policyholder to elect one of the said options within the time specified in the policy, one of said options shall automatically take effect and no policyholder shall ever forfeit his right to same by reason of his failure to so elect;

“(i) In case the proceeds of a policy are payable in installments or as an annuity, a table showing the minimum amounts of the installments or annuity payments;

“(j) A provision that the policyholder shall be entitled to have the policy reinstated at any time within three (3) years from the date of default of premium payment unless the cash surrender value has been duly paid, or the extension period has expired, upon production of evidence of insurability satisfactory to the company and upon payment of all overdue premiums and any indebtedness to the company upon said policy, with interest rate not exceeding that which would have been applicable to said premiums and indebtedness in the policy years prior to reinstatement.

“Any of the foregoing provisions or portions thereof not applicable to single premium or term policies shall to that extent not be incorporated therein; and any such policy may be issued and delivered in the Philippines which in the opinion of the Commissioner contains provisions on any one or more of the foregoing requirements more favorable to the policyholder than hereinbefore required.

“This section shall not apply to policies of group life or industrial life insurance.

“SEC. 234. No policy of group life insurance shall be issued and delivered in the Philippines unless it contains in substance the following provisions, or provisions which in the opinion of the Commissioner are more favorable to the persons insured, or at least as favorable to the persons insured and more favorable to the policyholders:

“(a) A provision that the policyholder is entitled to a grace period of either thirty (30) days or of one (1) month for the payment of any premium due after the first, during which grace period the death benefit coverage shall continue in force, unless the policyholder shall have given the insurer written notice of discontinuance in advance of the date of discontinuance and in accordance with the terms of the policy. The policy may provide that the policyholder shall be liable for the payment of a pro rata premium for the time the policy is in force during such grace period;

“(b) A provision that the validity of the policy shall not be contested, except for nonpayment of premiums after it has been in force for two (2) years from its date of issue; and that no statement made by any insured under the policy relating to his insurability shall be used in contesting the validity of the insurance with respect to which such statement was made after such insurance has been in force prior to the contest for a period of two (2) years during such person’s lifetime nor unless contained in a written instrument signed by him;

“(c) A provision that a copy of the application, if any, of the policyholder shall be attached to the policy when issued, that all statements made by the policyholder or by persons insured shall be deemed representations and not warranties, and that no statement made by any insured shall be used in any contest unless a copy of the instrument containing the statement is or has been furnished to such person or to his beneficiary;

“(d) A provision setting forth the conditions, if any, under which the insurer reserves the right to require a person eligible for insurance to furnish evidence of individual insurability satisfactory to the insurer as a condition to part or all of his coverage;

“(e) A provision specifying an equitable adjustment of premiums or of benefits or of both to be made in the event that the age of a person insured has been misstated, such provision to contain a clear statement of the method of adjustment to be used;

“(f) A provision that any sum becoming due by reason of death of the person insured shall be payable to the beneficiary designated by the insured, subject to the provisions of the policy in the event that there is no designated beneficiary, as to all or any part of such sum, living at the death of the insured, and subject to any right reserved by the insurer in the policy and set forth in the certificate to pay at its option a part of such sum not exceeding Five hundred pesos (P500.00) to any person appearing to the insurer to be equitably entitled thereto by reason of having incurred funeral or other expenses incident to the last illness or, death of the person insured;

“(g) A provision that the insurer will issue to the policyholder for delivery to each person insured a statement as to the insurance protection to which he is entitled, to whom the insurance benefits are payable, and the rights set forth in paragraphs (h), (i) and (j) following;

“(h) A provision that if the insurance, or any portion of it, on a person covered under the policy ceases because of termination of employment or of membership in the class or classes eligible for coverage under the policy, such person shall be entitled to have issued to him by the insurer, without evidence of insurability, an individual policy of life insurance without disability or other supplementary benefits, provided application for the individual policy and payment of the first premium to the insurer shall be made within thirty (30) days after such termination, and provided further that:

“(1) The individual policy shall be on any one of the forms, except term insurance, then customarily issued by the insurer at the age and for an amount not in excess of the coverage under the group policy; and

“(2) The premium on the individual policy shall be at the insurer’s then customary rate applicable to the form and amount of the individual policy, to the class of risk to which such person then belongs, and to his age attained on the effective date of the individual policy.

“(i) A provision that if the group policy terminates or is amended so as to terminate the insurance of any class of insured persons, every person insured thereunder at the date of such termination whose insurance terminates and who has been so insured for five (5) years prior to such termination date shall be entitled to have issued to him by the insurer an individual policy of life insurance subject to the same limitations as set forth in paragraph (h), except that the group policy may provide that the amount of such individual policy shall not exceed the amount of the person’s life insurance protection ceasing;

“(j) A provision that if a person insured under the group policy dies during the thirty (30)-day period within which he would have been entitled to an individual policy issued to him in accordance with paragraphs (h) and (i) above and before such individual policy shall have become effective, the amount of life insurance which he would have been entitled to have issued to him as an individual policy shall be payable as a claim under the group policy whether or not application for the individual policy or the payment of the first premium has been made;

“(k) In the case of a policy issued to a creditor to insure debtors of such creditor, a provision that the insurer will furnish to the policyholder for delivery to each debtor insured under the policy a form which will contain a statement that the life of the debtor is insured under the policy and that any death benefit paid thereunder by reason of his death shall be applied to reduce or extinguish indebtedness.

“The provisions of paragraphs (f) to (j) shall not apply to policies issued to a creditor to insure his debtors. If a group life policy is on a plan of insurance other than term, it shall contain a non-forfeiture provision or provisions which in the opinion of the Commissioner is or are equitable to the insured or the policyholder: Provided, That nothing herein contained shall be so construed as to require group life policies to contain the same non-forfeiture provisions as are required of individual life policies.

“SEC. 235. The term industrial life insurance as used in this Code shall mean that form of life insurance under which the premiums are payable either monthly or oftener, if the face amount of insurance provided in any policy is not more than five hundred times that of the current statutory minimum daily wage in the City of Manila, and if the words industrial policy are printed upon the policy as part of the descriptive matter.

“An industrial life policy shall not lapse for nonpayment of premium if such nonpayment was due to the failure of the company to send its representative or agent to the insured at the residence of the insured or at some other place indicated by him for the purpose of collecting such premium: Provided, That the provisions of this paragraph shall not apply when the premium on the policy remains unpaid for a period of three (3) months or twelve (12) weeks after the grace period has expired.

“SEC. 236. In the case of industrial life insurance, the policy shall contain in substance the following provisions:

“(a) A provision that the insured is entitled to a grace period of four (4) weeks within which the payment of any premium after the first may be made, except that where premiums are payable monthly, the period of grace shall be either one (1) month or thirty (30) days; and that during the period of grace, the policy shall continue in full force, but if during such grace period the policy becomes a claim, then any overdue and unpaid premiums may be deducted from any amount payable under the policy in settlement;

“(b) A provision that the policy shall be incontestable after it has been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a specified period, not more than two (2) years from its date of issue, except for nonpayment of premiums and except for violation of the conditions of the policy relating to naval or military service, or services auxiliary thereto, and except as to provisions relating to benefits in the event of disability as defined in the policy, and those granting additional insurance specifically against death by accident or by accidental means, or to additional insurance against loss of, or loss of use of, specific members of the body;

“(c) A provision that the policy shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, or if a copy of the application is endorsed upon and attached to the policy when issued, a provision that the policy and the application therefor shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, and in the latter case, a provision that all statements made by the insured shall, in the absence of fraud, be deemed representations and not warranties;

“(d) A provision that if the age of the person insured, or the age of any person, considered in determining the premium, or the benefits accruing under the policy, has been misstated, any amount payable or benefit accruing under the policy shall be such as the premium paid would have purchased at the correct age;

“(e) A provision that if the policy is a participating policy, the company shall periodically ascertain and apportion any divisible surplus accruing on the policy under the conditions specified therein;

“(f) A provision that in the event of default in premium payments after three (3) full years’ premiums have been paid, the policy shall be converted into a stipulated form of insurance, and that in the event of default in premium payments after five (5) full years’ premiums have been paid, a specified cash surrender value shall be available, in lieu of the stipulated form of insurance, at the option of the policyholder. The net value of such stipulated form of insurance and the amount of such cash value shall not be less than the reserve on the policy and dividend additions thereto, if any, at the end of the last completed policy year for which premiums shall have been paid (the policy to specify the mortality table, rate of interest and method of valuation adopted to compute such reserve), exclusive of any reserve on disability benefits and accidental death benefits, less an amount not to exceed two and one-half percent (2½%) of the maximum amount insured by the policy and dividend additions thereto, if any, when the issue age is under ten (10) years, and less an amount not to exceed two and one-half percent (2½%) of the current amount insured by the policy and dividend additions thereto, if any, if the issue age is ten (10) years or older, and less any existing indebtedness to the company on or secured by the policy;

“(g) A provision that the policy may be surrendered to the company at its home office within a period of not less than sixty (60) days after the due date of a premium in default for the specified cash value: Provided, That the insurer may defer payment for not more than six (6) months after the application therefor is made;

“(h) A table that shows in figures the nonforfeiture benefits available under the policy every year upon default in payment of premiums during at least the first twenty (20) years of the policy, such table to begin with the year in which such values become available, and a provision that the company will furnish upon request an extension of such table beyond the year shown in the policy;

“(i) A provision that specifies which one of the stipulated forms of insurance provided for under the provision of paragraph (f) of this section shall take effect in the event of the insured’s failure, within sixty (60) days from the due date of the premium in default, to notify the insurer in writing as to which one of such forms he has selected;

“(j) A provision that the policy may be reinstated at any time within two (2) years from the due date of the premium in default unless the cash surrender value has been paid or the period of extended term insurance expired, upon production of evidence of insurability satisfactory to the company and payment of arrears of premiums with interest at a rate not exceeding six percent (6%) per annum payable annually;

“(k) A provision that when a policy shall become a claim by death of the insured, settlement shall be made upon receipt of due proof of death, or not later than two (2) months after receipt of such proof;

“(l) A title on the face and on the back of the policy correctly describing its form;

“(m) A space on the front or the back of the policy for the name of the beneficiary designated by the insured with a reservation of the insured’s right to designate or change the beneficiary after the issuance of the policy. The policy may also provide that no designation or change of beneficiary shall be binding on the insurer until endorsed on the policy by the insurer, and that the insurer may refuse to endorse the name of any proposed beneficiary who does not appear to the insurer to have an insurable interest in the life of the insured. Such policy may also contain a provision that if the beneficiary designated in the policy does not surrender the policy with due proof of death within the period stated in the policy, which shall not be less than thirty (30) days after the death of the insured, or if the beneficiary is the estate of the insured, or is a minor, or dies before the insured, or is not legally competent to give valid release, then the insurer may make any payment thereunder to the executor or administrator of the insured, or to any of the insured’s relatives by blood or legal adoption or connections by marriage or to any person appearing to the insurer to be equitably entitled thereto by reason of having incurred expense for the maintenance, medical attention or burial of the insured; and

“(n) A provision that when an industrial life insurance policy is issued providing for accidental or health benefits, or both, in addition to life insurance, the foregoing provisions shall apply only to the life insurance portion of the policy.

“Any of the foregoing provisions or portions thereof not applicable to nonparticipating or term policies shall to that extent not be incorporated therein. The foregoing provisions shall not apply to policies issued or granted pursuant to the nonforfeiture provisions prescribed in provisions of paragraphs (f) and (i) of this section, nor shall provisions of paragraphs (f), (g), (h), and (i) hereof be required in term insurance of twenty (20) years or less but such term policies shall specify the mortality table, rate of interest, and method of computing reserves.

“SEC. 237. No policy of industrial life insurance shall be issued or delivered in the Philippines if it contains any of the following provisions:

“(a) A provision that gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void because the insured has had any disease or ailment, whether specified or not, or because the insured has received institutional, hospital, medical or surgical treatment or attention, except a provision which gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void if the insured has, within two (2) years prior to the issuance of the policy, received institutional, hospital, medical or surgical treatment or attention and if the insured or the claimant under the policy fails to show that the condition occasioning such treatment or attention was not of a serious nature or was not material to the risk;

“(b) A provision that gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void because the insured has been rejected for insurance, unless such right be conditioned upon a showing by the insurer that knowledge of such rejection would have led to a refusal by the insurer to make such contract;

“(c) A provision that allows the company to pay the proceeds of the policy at the death of the insured to any person other than the named beneficiary, except in accordance with a standard provision as specified under the provisions of paragraph (m) of the preceding section;

“(d) A provision that limits the time within which any action at law or in equity may be commenced to less than six (6) years after the cause of action shall accrue; and

“(e) A provision that specifies any mode of settlement at maturity of less value than the amount insured by the policy plus dividend additions, if any, less any indebtedness to the company on the policy and less any premium that may by the terms of the policy be deducted, payments to be made in accordance with the terms of the policy.

“Nothing contained in this section nor in the provision of paragraph (b) of the preceding section, relating to incontestability, shall be construed as prohibiting the life insurance company from placing in its industrial life policies provisions limiting its liability with respect to:

“(1) Death resulting from aviation other than as a fare-paying passenger on a regularly scheduled route between definitely established airports; and

“(2) Military or naval service: Provided, That if the liability of the company is limited as herein provided, such liability shall in no event be fixed at an amount less than the reserve on the policy (excluding the reserve for any additional benefits in the event of death by accident or accidental means or for benefits in the event of any type of disability), less any indebtedness on or secured by such policy; nor shall any provision of this section apply to any provision in an industrial life insurance policy for additional benefits in the event of death by accident or accidental means.

“TITLE 10

“VARIABLE CONTRACTS

“SEC. 238. (a) No insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines shall issue, deliver, sell or use any variable contract in the Philippines, unless and until such company shall have satisfied the Commissioner that its financial and general condition and its methods of operations, including the issue and sale of variable contracts, are not and will not be hazardous to the public or to its policy and contract owners. No foreign insurance company shall be authorized to issue, deliver or sell any variable contract in the Philippines, unless it is likewise authorized to do so by the laws of its domicile.

“(b) The term variable contract shall mean any policy or contract on either a group or on an individual basis issued by an insurance company providing for benefits or other contractual payments or values thereunder to vary so as to reflect investment results of any segregated portfolio of investments or of a designated separate account in which amounts received in connection with such contracts shall have been placed and accounted for separately and apart from other investments and accounts. This contract may also provide benefits or values incidental thereto payable in fixed or variable amounts, or both. It shall not be deemed to be a security or securities as defined in The Securities Act, as amended, or in the Investment Company Act, as amended, nor subject to regulations under said Acts.

“(c) In determining the qualifications of a company requesting authority to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts, the Commissioner shall always consider the following:

“(1) The history, financial and general condition of the company: Provided, That such company, if a foreign company, must have deposited with the Commissioner for the benefit and security of its variable contract owners in the Philippines, securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds of the Government of the Philippines or its instrumentalities with an actual market value of Two million pesos (P2,000,000.00);

“(2) The character, responsibility and fitness of the officers and directors of the company; and

“(3) The law and regulation under which the company is authorized in the state of domicile to issue such contracts.

“(d) If after notice and hearing, the Commissioner shall find that the company is qualified to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts in accordance with this Code and the regulations and rules issued thereunder, the corresponding order of authorization shall be issued. Any decision or order denying authority to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts shall clearly and distinctly state the reasons and grounds on which it is based.

“SEC. 239. Any insurance company issuing variable contracts pursuant to this Code may in its discretion issue contracts providing a combination of fixed amount and variable amount of benefits and for option lump-sum payment of benefits.

“SEC. 240. Every variable contract form delivered or issued for delivery in the Philippines, and every certified form evidencing variable benefits issued pursuant to any such contract on a group basis, and the application, rider and endorsement forms applicable thereto and used in connection therewith, shall be subject to the prior approval of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 241. Illustration of benefits payable under any variable contract shall not include or involve projections of past investment experience into the future and shall conform with the rules and regulations promulgated by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 242. Variable contracts may be issued on the industrial life basis, provided that the pertinent provisions of this Code and of the rules and regulations of the Commissioner governing variable contracts are complied with in connection with such contracts.

“SEC. 243. Every life insurance company authorized under the provisions of this Code to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts shall, in connection with the same, establish one or more separate accounts to be known as separate variable accounts. All amounts received by the company in connection with any such contracts which are required by the terms thereof, to be allocated or applied to one or more designated separate variable accounts shall be placed in such designated account or accounts. The assets and liabilities of each such separate variable account shall at all times be clearly identifiable and distinguishable from the assets and liabilities in all other accounts of the company. Notwithstanding any provision of law to the contrary, the assets held in any such separate variable account shall not be chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business the company may conduct but shall be held and applied exclusively for the benefit of the owners or beneficiaries of the variable contracts applicable thereto. In the event of the insolvency of the company, the assets of each such separate variable account shall be applied to the contractual claims of the owners or beneficiaries of the variable contracts applicable thereto. Except as otherwise specifically provided by the contract, no sale, exchange or other transfer of assets may be made by a company, between any of its separate accounts or between any other investment account and one or more of its separate accounts, unless in the case of a transfer into a separate account, such transfer is made solely to establish the account or to support the operation of the contracts with respect to the separate account to which the transfer is made, or in case of a transfer from a separate account, such transfer would not cause the remaining assets of the account to become less than the reserves and other contract liabilities with respect to such separate account. Such transfer, whether into or from a separate account, shall be made by a transfer of cash, or by a transfer of securities having a valuation which could be readily determined in the market place: Provided, That such transfer of securities is approved by the Commissioner. The Commissioner may authorize other transfers among such accounts, if, in his opinion, such transfers would not be inequitable. All amounts and assets allocated to any such separate variable account shall be owned by the company and with respect to the same the company shall not be nor hold itself out to be a trustee.

“SEC. 244. Any insurance company which has established one or more separate variable accounts pursuant to the preceding section may invest and reinvest all or any part of the assets allocated to any such account in the securities and investments authorized by Sections 204, 206, 207 and 208 for any of the funds of an insurance company in such amount or amounts as may be approved by the Commissioner. In addition thereto, such company may also invest in common stocks or other equities which are listed on or admitted to trading in a securities exchange located in the Philippines, or which are publicly held and traded in the over-the-counter market as defined by the Commissioner and as to which market quotations have been available: Provided, however, That no such company shall invest in excess of ten percent (10%) of the assets of any such separate variable accounts in any one corporation issuing such common stock. The assets and investments of such separate variable accounts shall not be taken into account in applying the quantitative investment limitations applicable to other investments of the company. In the purchase of common capital stock or other equities, the insurer shall designate to the broker, or to the seller if the purchase is not made through a broker, the specific variable account for which the investment is made.

“SEC. 245. Assets allocated to any separate variable account shall be valued at their market value on the date of any valuation, or if there is no readily available market value then in accordance with the terms of the variable contract applicable to such assets, or if there are no such contract terms then in such manner as may be prescribed by the rules and regulations of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 246. The reserve liability for variable contracts shall be established in accordance with actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of the benefits provided, and shall be approved by the Commissioner.

“TITLE 11

“CLAIMS SETTLEMENT

“SEC. 247. (a) No insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall refuse, without just cause, to pay or settle claims arising under coverages provided by its policies, nor shall any such company engage in unfair claim settlement practices. Any of the following acts by an insurance company, if committed without just cause and performed with such frequency as to indicate a general business practice, shall constitute unfair claim settlement practices:

“(1) Knowingly misrepresenting to claimants pertinent facts or policy provisions relating to coverage at issue;

“(2) Failing to acknowledge with reasonable promptness pertinent communications with respect to claims arising under its policies;

“(3) Failing to adopt and implement reasonable standards for the prompt investigation of claims arising under its policies;

“(4) Not attempting in good faith to effectuate prompt, fair and equitable settlement of claims submitted in which liability has become reasonably clear; or

“(5) Compelling policyholders to institute suits to recover amounts due under its policies by offering without justifiable reason substantially less than the amounts ultimately recovered in suits brought by them.

“(b) Evidence as to numbers and types of valid and justifiable complaints to the Commissioner against an insurance company, and the Commissioner’s complaint experience with other insurance companies writing similar lines of insurance shall be admissible in evidence in an administrative or judicial proceeding brought under this section.

“(c) If it is found, after notice and an opportunity to be heard, that an insurance company has violated this section, each instance of noncompliance with paragraph (a) may be treated as a separate violation of this section and shall be considered sufficient cause for the suspension or revocation of the company’s certificate of authority.

“SEC. 248. The proceeds of a life insurance policy shall be paid immediately upon maturity of the policy, unless such proceeds are made payable in installments or as an annuity, in which case the installments, or annuities shall be paid as they become due: Provided, however, That in the case of a policy maturing by the death of the insured, the proceeds thereof shall be paid within sixty (60) days after presentation of the claim and filing of the proof of death of the insured. Refusal or failure to pay the claim within the time prescribed herein will entitle the beneficiary to collect interest on the proceeds of the policy for the duration of the delay at the rate of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board, unless such failure or refusal to pay is based on the ground that the claim is fraudulent.

“The proceeds of the policy maturing by the death of the insured payable to the beneficiary shall include the discounted value of all premiums paid in advance of their due dates, but are not due and payable at maturity.

“SEC. 249. The amount of any loss or damage for which an insurer may be liable, under any policy other than life insurance policy, shall be paid within thirty (30) days after proof of loss is received by the insurer and ascertainment of the loss or damage is made either by agreement between the insured and the insurer or by arbitration; but if such ascertainment is not had or made within sixty (60) days after such receipt by the insurer of the proof of loss, then the loss or damage shall be paid within ninety (90) days after such receipt. Refusal or failure to pay the loss or damage within the time prescribed herein will entitle the assured to collect interest on the proceeds of the policy for the duration of the delay at the rate of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board, unless such failure or refusal to pay is based on the ground that the claim is fraudulent.

“SEC. 250. In case of any litigation for the enforcement of any policy or contract of insurance, it shall be the duty of the Commissioner or the Court, as the case may be, to make a finding as to whether the payment of the claim of the insured has been unreasonably denied or withheld; and in the affirmative case, the insurance company shall be adjudged to pay damages which shall consist of attorney’s fees and other expenses incurred by the insured person by reason of such unreasonable denial or withholding of payment plus interest of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board of the amount of the claim due the insured, from the date following the time prescribed in Section 248 or in Section 249, as the case may be, until the claim is fully satisfied: Provided, That failure to pay any such claim within the time prescribed in said sections shall be considered prima facie evidence of unreasonable delay in payment.

“SEC. 251. It is unlawful to:

“(a) Present or cause to be presented any fraudulent claim for the payment of a loss under a contract of insurance; and

“(b) Fraudulently prepare, make or subscribe any writing with intent to present or use the same, or to allow it to be presented in support of any such claim. Any person who violates this section shall be punished by a fine not exceeding twice the amount claimed or imprisonment of two (2) years, or both, at the discretion of the court.

“TITLE 12

“EXAMINATION OF COMPANIES

“SEC. 252. The Commissioner shall require every insurance company doing business in the Philippines to keep its books, records, accounts and vouchers in such manner that he or his authorized representatives may readily verify its annual statements and ascertain whether the company is solvent and has complied with the provisions of this Code or the circulars, instructions, rulings or decisions of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 253. The Commissioner shall at least once a year and whenever he considers the public interest so demands, cause an examination to be made into the affairs, financial condition and method of business of every insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines and of any other person, firm or corporation managing the affairs and/or property of such insurance company. Such company, as well as such managing person, firm or corporation, shall submit to the examiner all such books, papers and securities as he may require and such examiner shall also have the power to examine the officers of such company under oath touching its business and financial condition, and the authority to transact business in the Philippines of any such company shall be suspended by the Commissioner if such examination is refused and such company shall not thereafter be allowed to transact further business in the Philippines until it has fully complied with the provisions of this section.

“Government-owned or -controlled corporations or entities engaged in social or private insurance shall similarly be subject to such examination by the Commissioner unless their respective charters otherwise provide.

“TITLE 13

“SUSPENSION OR REVOCATION OF AUTHORITY

“SEC. 254. If the Commissioner is of the opinion upon examination of other evidence that any domestic or foreign insurance company is in an unsound condition, or that it has failed to comply with the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon it, or that its condition or method of business is such as to render its proceedings hazardous to the public or to its policyholders, or that its net worth requirement, in the case of a domestic stock company, or its available cash assets, in the case of a domestic mutual company, or its security deposits, in the case of a foreign company, is impaired or deficient, or that the margin of solvency required of such company is deficient, the Commissioner is authorized to suspend or revoke all certificates of authority granted to such insurance company, its officers and agents, and no new business shall thereafter be done by such company or for such company by its agent in the Philippines while such suspension, revocation or disability continues or until its authority to do business is restored by the Commissioner. Before restoring such authority, the Commissioner shall require the company concerned to submit to him a business plan showing the company’s estimated receipts and disbursements, as well as the basis therefor, for the next succeeding three (3) years.

“TITLE 14

“APPOINTMENT OF CONSERVATOR

“SEC. 255. If at any time before, or after, the suspension or revocation of the certificate of authority of an insurance company as provided in the preceding title, the Commissioner finds that such company is in a state of continuing inability or unwillingness to maintain a condition of solvency or liquidity deemed adequate to protect the interest of policyholders and creditors, he may appoint a conservator to take charge of the assets, liabilities, and the management of such company, collect all moneys and debts due to said company and exercise all powers necessary to preserve the assets of said company, reorganize the management thereof, and restore its viability. The said conservator shall have the power to overrule or revoke the actions of the previous management and board of directors of the said company, any provision of law, or of the articles of incorporation or bylaws of the company, to the contrary notwithstanding, and such other powers as the Commissioner shall deem necessary.

“The conservator may be another insurance company doing business in the Philippines, any officer or officers of such company, or any other competent and qualified person, firm or corporation. The remuneration of the conservator and other expenses attendant to the conservation shall be borne by the insurance company concerned.

“The conservator shall not be subject to any action, claim or demand by, or liability to, any person in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in good faith in the exercise, or in connection with the exercise, of the powers conferred on the conservator.

“The conservator appointed shall report and be responsible to the Commissioner until such time as the Commissioner is satisfied that the insurance company can continue to operate on its own and the conservatorship shall likewise be terminated should the Commissioner, on the basis of the report of the conservator or of his own findings, determine that the continuance in business of the insurance company would be hazardous to policyholders and creditors, in which case the provisions of Title 15 shall apply.

“No insurance company, life or non-life, or any professional reinsurer, ordered to be liquidated by the Commissioner under the provisions hereunder may be rehabilitated or authorized to transact anew, insurance or reinsurance business, as the case may be.

“TITLE 15

“PROCEEDINGS UPON INSOLVENCY

“SEC. 256. Whenever, upon examination or other evidence, it shall be disclosed that the condition of any insurance company doing business in the Philippines is one of insolvency, or that its continuance in business would be hazardous to its policyholders and creditors, the Commissioner shall forthwith order the company to cease and desist from transacting business in the Philippines and shall designate a receiver to immediately take charge of its assets and liabilities, as expeditiously as possible collect and gather all the assets and administer the same for the benefit of its policyholders and creditors, and exercise all the powers necessary for these purposes including, but not limited to, bringing suits and foreclosing mortgages in the name of the insurance company.

“The Commissioner shall thereupon determine within ninety (90) days whether the insurance company may be reorganized or otherwise placed in such condition so that it may be permitted to resume business with safety to its policyholders and creditors and shall prescribe the conditions under which such resumption of business shall take place as well as the time for fulfillment of such conditions. In such case, the expenses and fees in the collection and administration of the insurance company shall be determined by the Commissioner and shall be paid out of the assets of such company.

“If the Commissioner shall determine and confirm within the said period that the insurance company is insolvent, as defined hereunder, or cannot resume business with safety to its policyholders and creditors, he shall, if the public interest requires, order its liquidation, indicate the manner of its liquidation and approve a liquidation plan and implement it immediately. The Commissioner shall designate a competent and qualified person as liquidator who shall take over the functions of the receiver previously designated and, with all convenient speed, reinsure all its outstanding policies, convert the assets of the insurance company to cash, or sell, assign or otherwise dispose of the same to the policyholders, creditors and other parties for the purpose of settling the liabilities or paying the debts of such company and he may, in the name of the company, institute such actions as may be necessary in the appropriate court to collect and recover accounts and assets of the insurance company, and to do such other acts as may be necessary to complete the liquidation as ordered by the Commissioner.

“The provisions of any law to the contrary notwithstanding, the actions of the Commissioner under this section shall be final and executory, and can be set aside by the court upon petition by the company and only if there is convincing proof that the action is plainly arbitrary and made in bad faith. The Commissioner, through the Solicitor General, shall then file the corresponding answer reciting the proceeding taken and praying the assistance of the court in the liquidation of the company. No restraining order or injunction shall be issued by the court enjoining the Commissioner from implementing his actions under this section, unless there is convincing proof that the action of the Commissioner is plainly arbitrary and made in bad faith and the petitioner or plaintiff files with the Clerk or Judge of the Court in which the action is pending a bond executed in favor of the Commissioner in an amount to be fixed by the court. The restraining order or injunction shall be refused or, if granted, shall be dissolved upon filing by the Commissioner, if he so desires, of a bond in an amount twice the amount of the bond of the petitioner or plaintiff conditioned that it will pay the damages which the petition or plaintiff may suffer by the refusal or the dissolution of the injunction. The provisions of Rule 58 of the New Rules of Court insofar as they are applicable shall govern the issuance and dissolution of the restraining order or injunction contemplated in this section.

“All proceedings under this title shall be given preference in the courts. The Commissioner shall not be required to pay any fee to any public officer for filing, recording, or in any manner authenticating any paper or instrument relating to the proceedings.

“As used in this title, the term Insolvency shall mean the inability of an insurance company to pay its lawful obligations as they fall due in the usual and ordinary course of business as may be shown by its failure to maintain the solvency requirements under Section 200 of this Code.

“SEC. 257. The receiver or the liquidator, as the case may be, designated under the provisions of this title, shall not be subject to any action, claim or demand by, or liability to, any person in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in good faith in the exercise, or in connection with the exercise, of the powers conferred on such receiver or liquidator.

“TITLE 16

“CONSOLIDATION AND MERGER OF INSURANCE COMPANIES

“SEC. 258. Upon prior notice to the Commissioner, two (2) or more domestic insurance companies, acting through their respective boards of directors, may negotiate to merge into a single corporation which shall be one of the constituent corporations, or consolidate into a single corporation which shall be a new corporation to be formed by the consolidation. A common agreement of the proposed merger or consolidation shall be drawn up for submission to the stockholders or members of the constituent companies for adoption and approval in accordance with the provisions of the respective bylaws of the constituent companies and all existing laws that may be pertinent.

“SEC. 259. Such agreement shall include, aside from the proposed merger or consolidation, provisions relative to the manner of transfer of assets to and assumption of liabilities by the absorbing or acquiring company from the absorbed or dissolved company or companies; the proposed articles of merger or consolidation and bylaws of the surviving or acquiring company; the corporate name to be adopted which should not be that of any other existing company transacting similar business or one so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public; the rights of the stockholders or members of the absorbed or dissolved companies; date of effectivity of the merger or consolidation; and such particulars as may be necessary to explain and make manifest the objects and purposes of the absorbing or acquiring company.

“SEC. 260. Upon execution of such agreement to merge or consolidate by and between or among the boards of directors of the constituent companies, notice thereof shall be mailed immediately to their policyholders and creditors. The company or companies to be absorbed or dissolved shall discharge all its accrued liabilities; otherwise, such liabilities shall, with the consent of its creditors, be transferred to and assumed by the absorbing or acquiring company, or such liabilities be reinsured by the latter. In the case of such policies as are subject to cancellation by the company or companies to be absorbed or dissolved, same may be cancelled pursuant to the terms thereof in lieu of such transfer, assumption, or reinsurance.

“SEC. 261. Upon approval or adoption in the meetings of the stockholders or members called for the purpose in each of the constituent companies of the agreement to merge or consolidate, all stockholders or members dissenting or objecting to the merger or consolidation shall be paid the value of their shares by the company concerned in accordance with the bylaws thereof.

“SEC. 262. Upon approval or adoption of the agreement to merge or consolidate by the stockholders or members of the constituent companies, the corresponding articles of merger or of consolidation shall be duly executed by the presidents and attested by the corporate secretaries and shall bear the corporate seals of the merging or consolidating companies setting forth:

“(a) The plan of merger or the plan of consolidation;

“(b) As to each corporation, the number of shares outstanding, or in case of mutual corporations, the number of members; and

“(c) As to each corporation, the number of shares or members voted for and against such plan, respectively. Thereafter, a certified copy of such articles of merger or consolidation, together with a certificate of approval or adoption by the stockholders or members of such articles of merger or consolidation, verified by affidavits of such officers and under the seal of the constituent companies, shall be submitted to the Commissioner, together with such other papers or documents which the Commissioner may require, for his consideration.

“SEC. 263. The articles of merger or of consolidation, signed and verified as hereinabove required, shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission for its examination and approval.

“SEC. 264. Upon receipt from the Securities and Exchange Commission of the certificate of merger or of consolidation, the constituent companies shall surrender to the Commissioner their respective certificates of authority to transact insurance business. The absorbing or surviving company in case of merger, or the newly formed company in case of consolidation, shall immediately file with the Commissioner the corresponding application for issuance of a new certificate of authority to transact insurance business, together with a certified copy of the certificate of merger or of consolidation, and of the certificate of increase of stocks, if there is any, issued by the Securities and Exchange Commission.

“SEC. 265. Nothing in this title shall be construed to enlarge the powers of the absorbing or surviving company in case of merger, or the newly formed company in case of consolidation, except those conferred by the certificate of merger or of consolidation and the articles of merger or of consolidation, or the amended articles of incorporation, as registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

“SEC. 266. No director, officer, or stockholder of any such constituent companies shall receive any fee, commission, compensation, or other valuable consideration whatsoever, directly or indirectly, or in any manner aiding, promoting or assisting in such merger or consolidation.

“SEC. 267. The merger or consolidation of companies under this Code shall be subject to the provisions of the Corporation Code, and, in those cases specified in Republic Act No. 5455, as amended, be further subject to the provisions of said law.

“TITLE 17

“MUTUALIZATION OF STOCK LIFE INSURANCE COMPANIES

“SEC. 268. Any domestic stock life insurance company doing business in the Philippines may convert itself into an incorporated mutual life insurer. To that end it may provide and carry out a plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of its capital stock for the benefit of its policyholders, or any class or classes of its policyholders, by complying with the requirements of this chapter.

“SEC 269. Such plan shall include appropriate proceedings for amending the insurer’s articles of incorporation to give effect to the acquisition, by said insurer, for the benefit of its policyholders or any class or classes thereof, of the outstanding shares of its capital stock and the conversion of the insurer from a stock corporation into a nonstock corporation for the benefit of its members. The members of such nonstock corporation shall be the policyholders from time to time of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock of the insurer was acquired, and the policyholders of such other class or classes as may be specified in such corporation’s articles of incorporation as they may be amended from time to time. Such plan shall be:

“(a) Adopted by a vote of a majority of the directors;

“(b) Approved by the vote of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares at a special meeting of shareholders called for that purpose, or by the written consent of such shareholders;

“(c) Submitted to the Commissioner and approved by him in writing;

“(d) Approved by a majority vote of all the policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock is to be acquired voting at an election by the policyholders called for that purpose, subject to the provisions of Section 271. The terms policyholder or policyholders as used in this chapter shall be deemed to mean the person or persons insured under an individual policy of life insurance, or of health and accident insurance, or of any combination of life, health and accident insurance. They shall also include the person or persons to whom any annuity or pure endowment is presently or prospectively payable by the terms of an individual annuity or pure endowment contract, except where the policy or contract declares some other person to be the owner or holder thereof, in which case such other person shall be deemed policyholder. In any case where a policy or contract names two or more persons as joint insured, payees, owners or holders thereof, the persons so named shall be deemed collectively to be one (1) policyholder for the purpose of this chapter. In any case where a policy or contract shall have been assigned by assignment absolute on its face to an assignee other than the insurer, and such assignment shall have been filed at the principal office of the insurer at least thirty (30) days prior to the date of any election or meeting referred to in this chapter, then such assignee shall be deemed at such election or meeting to be the policyholder. For the purpose of this chapter the terms policyholder and policyholders include the employer to whom, or a president, secretary or other executive officer of any corporation or association to which a master group policy has been issued, but exclude the holders of certificates or policies issued under or in connection with a master group policy. Beneficiaries under unmatured contracts shall not as such be deemed to be policyholders; and

“(e) Filed with the Commissioner after having been approved as provided in this section.

“SEC. 270. The Commissioner shall examine the plan submitted to him under the provisions of subparagraph (c) of Section 269. He shall not approve such plan unless in his opinion the rights and interests of the insurer, its policyholders and shareholders are protected nor unless he is satisfied that the plan will be fair and equitable in its operation.

“SEC. 271. The election prescribed by subparagraph (d) of Section 269 shall be called by the board of directors or the president, and every policyholder of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock is to be acquired, whose insurance shall have been in force for at least one (1) year prior to such election shall have one vote, regardless of the number of policies or amount of insurance he holds, and regardless of whether such policies are policies of life insurance or policies of health and accident insurance or annuity contracts. Notice of such election shall be given to policyholders entitled to vote by mail from the principal office of such insurer at least thirty (30) days prior to the date set for such election, in a sealed envelope, postage prepaid, addressed to each such policyholder at his last known address.

“Voting shall be by one of the following methods:

“(a) At a meeting of such policyholders, held pursuant to such notice, by ballot in person or by proxy.

“(b) If not by the method described in the preceding subparagraph, then by mail pursuant to a procedure and on forms to be prescribed by such plan.

“Such election shall be conducted under the direction and supervision of three (3) impartial and disinterested inspectors appointed by the insurer and approved by the Commissioner. In case any person appointed as inspector fails to appear at such meeting or fails or refuses to act at such election, the vacancy, if occurring in advance of the convening of the meeting or in advance of the opening of the mail vote, may be filled in the manner prescribed for the appointment of inspectors and, if occurring at the meeting or during the canvass of the mail vote, may be filled by the person acting as chairman of said meeting or designated for that purpose in such plan. The decision, act or certificate of a majority of the inspectors shall be effective in all respects as the decision, act or certificate of all. The inspectors of election shall determine the number of policyholders, the voting power of each, the policyholders represented at the meeting or voting by mail, the existence of a quorum and the authenticity, validity and effect of proxies. They shall receive votes, hear and determine all challenges and questions in any way arising in connection with the right to vote, count and tabulate all votes, determine the result, and do such other acts as are proper to conduct the vote with fairness to all policyholders. The inspectors of election shall, before commencing performance of their duties, subscribe to and file with the insurer and with the Commissioner an oath that they, and each of them, will perform their duties impartially, in good faith, to the best of their ability and as expeditiously as is practicable. On the request of the insurer, the Commissioner, a policyholder or his proxy, the inspectors shall make a report in writing of any challenge or question or matter determined by them and execute a certificate of any fact found by them. They shall also certify the result of such vote to the insurer and to the Commissioner. Any report or certificate made by them shall be prima facie evidence of facts stated therein. All necessary expenses incurred in connection with such election shall be paid by the insurer. For the purpose of this section, a quorum shall consist of five percent (5%) of the policyholders of such insurer entitled to vote at such election.

“SEC. 272. In carrying out any such plan, the insurer may acquire any shares of its own stock by gift, bequest or purchase. Any shares so acquired shall, unless as a result of such acquisition all of the shares of the insurer shall have been acquired, be acquired in trust for the policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the plan provides that the stock of the insurer shall be acquired as hereinafter provided. Such shares shall be assigned and transferred on the books of such insurer and approved by the Commissioner. Such trustees shall hold such stock in trust until all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of such insurer have been acquired, but for not longer than thirty (30) years with such extensions of not more than five (5) years each as may be granted by the Commissioner. Such extensions may be granted by the Commissioner if the plan so provides and if in his opinion the plan of acquisition of all of such stock can be completed within a reasonable period. Such trustees shall vote such stock at all corporate meetings at which stockholders have the right to vote. When all the outstanding shares of capital stock of such insurer have been acquired, all said shares shall be cancelled, the certificate of amendment of the insurer’s articles of incorporation giving effect thereto shall be filed in accordance with the provisions of the Corporation Code, and the insurer shall become a nonstock corporation for the profit of its members and such trust shall thereupon terminate. Thereafter such corporation shall be conducted for the mutual benefit, ratably, of its policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock was acquired and shall have power to issue non-assessable policies on a reserve basis subject to all provisions of law applicable to incorporated life insurers issuing non-assessable policies on a reserve basis. Policies so issued may be upon the basis of full or partial participation therein as agreed between the insurer and the insured.

“Upon the termination of any such voting trust, either in accordance with its terms or as hereinabove provided, such plan of mutualization shall terminate, unless theretofore completed. Upon such termination, unless the plan of mutualization provides for the disposition of the shares acquired by the insurer under such plan or for the disposition of the proceeds thereof, the shares held by such trustees shall be disposed of in accordance with an order of the court of competent jurisdiction in the judicial district in which is located the principal office of such insurer, made upon a verified petition of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 273. Any such plan of mutualization may provide for the creation of a voting trust under a trust agreement for the holding and voting by three (3) or more trustees of any portion or all of the shares of the insurer not required upon the adoption of such plan. The voting trustees shall be named in accordance with such plan or, if no provision is made therein for the naming of such trustees, then by the insurer. The voting trust agreement and voting trustees shall be subject to the approval of the Commissioner. Any or all of the trustees under such voting trust agreement may be the same person or persons as any or all of the trustees referred to in Section 272. Such voting trust agreement shall provide that in the event of acquisition by the insurer of any of the shares of stock held thereunder in accordance with the provisions of the plan, such shares so acquired together with the voting rights thereof shall be transferred by the trustees named under the provisions of this section to the trustees named under the provisions of Section 272. Any voting trust agreement created pursuant to the provisions of this section may be made irrevocable for not longer than thirty (30) years and thereafter until the termination of the trust provided for in Section 272. The trust created pursuant to the provisions of this section shall terminate in any event upon termination of the trust provided for in Section 272. Upon the termination of the trust created pursuant to the provisions of this section, any shares held in such trust shall revert to the persons entitled thereto by law.

“SEC. 274. Every payment for the acquisition of any shares of the capital stock of such insurer, the purchase price of which is not fixed by such plan, shall be subject to the prior approval of the Commissioner. Neither such plan, nor any such payment, may be approved by the Commissioner unless he finds that the rights and interests of the insurer, its policyholders, and shareholders are protected.

“SEC. 275. The trustees referred to in Section 272 shall file with such insurer and with the Commissioner a verified acceptance of their appointments and verified declarations that they will faithfully discharge their duties as such trustees. All dividends and other sums received by said trustees on the shares held by them, after paying the necessary expenses of executing their trust, shall be immediately repaid to such insurer for the benefit of all who are, or may become, policyholders of such insurance of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock of such insurer was acquired and entitled to participate in the profits thereof and shall be added to and become part of the assets of such insurer.

“SEC. 276. If, at any time within the period provided in the plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of stock of the insurer, ninety percent (90%) thereof has already been acquired and transferred to the trustees under the plan, the insurer by a vote of a majority of the directors may determine to make an offer, with the permission of the Commissioner and subject to such requirement as he may specify, to acquire by purchase all of the shares not theretofore acquired under the plan, at a specified price which the insurer considers to be their fair value as of the date of making such offer.

“If the offer to acquire is permitted by the Commissioner, the insurer shall make a written offer by registered mail to each shareholder whose shares have not theretofore been acquired under the plan or otherwise, offering to acquire all his shares at such price if accepted in writing within thirty (30) days after the mailing of such offer. Any shareholder accepting such offer within the time therefor shall, within sixty (60) days after his acceptance, transfer to the insurer the certificates representing such shares and, upon doing so, shall be paid by the insurer the amount of such offer for his shares. Any share so acquired shall be assigned and transferred to the trustees under the plan and held by them as shares acquired pursuant to the plan.

“Each shareholder who does not accept such offer to acquire his shares within the time stated in such offer for acceptance thereof shall within fifteen (15) days after the expiration of such offer apply to the Secretary of Finance for a determination of the fair value of his shares as of the date of making such offer. The Secretary of Finance may himself, after due notice and hearing, determine upon the evidence received the fair value of the shares as of the date of making such offer, or appoint three (3) impartial and disinterested persons to appraise the fair value of such shares with such direction as he shall deem proper and necessary to expedite the proceedings. Upon completion of the appraisal proceedings, the appraisers shall file with the Secretary of Finance their report in writing stating the fair value of such shares as of the date of the making of such offer and setting forth their findings in support of such statement. The appraisers shall furnish each party to the proceedings a copy of their appraisal report, and within ten (10) days after receipt thereof, any such party may signify his objection, if any, to the report or move for the approval thereof. Upon the expiration of the period of ten (10) days referred to above, the report shall be set for hearing, after which the Secretary of Finance shall issue an order adopting, modifying or rejecting the report, in whole or in part, or he may receive further evidence or may recommit it with instructions. Whenever the Secretary of Finance shall determine in any manner, as aforesaid, the fair value of such shares, he may also determine the terms of payment thereof by the insurer. The expenses incidental to the proceedings including charges of the appraisers, if any, shall be paid equally by the insurer and the shareholder.

“The findings of the Secretary of Finance on all questions of fact raised at the hearing of the application for determination of the fair value of such shares shall be conclusive upon all parties to the proceedings. The order of the Secretary of Finance determining the fair value of the shares and the terms of payment thereof shall have the force and effect of a judgment which shall be appealable on any question of law. Such order shall become final and executory fifteen (15) days after receipt thereof by the parties to the proceedings.

“Upon any such order becoming final and from which no appeal is pending, or when the time to appeal therefrom has expired, each shareholder party to the proceedings shall transfer his shares to the insurer and surrender to the said insurer the certificates representing such shares and the insurer shall make payment therefor as provided in such order. Any shares so acquired by the insurer shall be assigned and transferred to the trustees and held by them as shares acquired pursuant to the plan.

“Any shareholder who does not apply to the Secretary of Finance in the manner and within the time hereinbefore prescribed shall be deemed to have accepted the offer referred to above, effective, however, upon the expiration of the time hereinabove prescribed for making such application, and such shareholder’s time for accepting such offer shall, for that purpose only, be deemed to have been extended accordingly.

“Any offer to acquire shares made pursuant to this section shall, except as otherwise provided herein, be irrevocable until all proceedings upon such offer have been completed or all shares have otherwise been earlier acquired by the insurer.

“Any shareholder who has expressly or impliedly accepted the plan or the offer to acquire his shares not theretofore acquired under the plan, and any shareholder who has rejected such plan or such offer and has applied, as aforesaid, to the Secretary of Finance for a determination of the fair value of his shares subsequent to which an agreement has been reached or a final order issued fixing such fair value but who fails to surrender his certificates for cancellation upon payment of the amount to which he is entitled, may be compelled to do so by an order of the Secretary of Finance for that purpose and such order may provide that upon failure of such shareholder to surrender such certificates for cancellation, such order shall stand in lieu of such surrender and cancellation.

“SEC. 277. Such insurer, after mutualization, shall be a continuation of the original insurer, and such mutualization shall not affect such insurer’s certificate of authority nor existing suits, rights or contracts except as provided in said plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of the capital stock of such insurer, approved as provided in this chapter. Such insurer, after mutualization, shall exercise all the rights and powers and shall perform all the duties conferred or imposed by law upon insurers writing the classes of insurance written by it, and to protect rights and contracts existing prior to mutualization, subject to the effect of said plan. The board of directors of such insurer, prior to mutualization, may adopt amendments to its bylaws to take effect upon mutualization.

“SEC. 278. (a) An annual meeting of members shall be held at ten o’clock in the morning of the fourth Tuesday of March of each year at the principal office of the insurer, unless a different time or place is provided in the bylaws.

“(b) Special meetings of the members, for any purpose or purposes whatsoever, may be called at any time by the president, or by the board of directors, or by one or more members holding not less than one-fifth (1/5) of the voting power of such insurer, or by such other officers or persons as the bylaws authorize.

(c) Notice of all meetings of members whether annual or special shall be given in writing to the members entitled to vote by the secretary, or an assistant secretary, or other person charged with that duty, or if there be no such officer, or in case of his neglect or refusal, by any director or member. At the option of the insurer such notice may be imprinted on premium notices or receipts or on both.

“A notice may be given by such insurer to any member either personally, or by mail, or other means of written communication, charges prepaid, addressed to such member at his address appearing on the books of the insurer, or given by him to the insurer for the purpose of notice. If a member gives no address, notice shall be deemed to have been given him if sent by mail or other means of written communication addressed to the place where the principal office of the insurer is situated, or if published at least once in some newspaper of general circulation in the place in which said office is located.

“Notice of any meeting of members shall be sent to each member entitled thereto not less than seven (7) days before such meeting, unless the bylaws provide otherwise.

“Notice of any meeting of members shall specify the place, the day and the hour of the meeting and the general nature of the business to be transacted.

“Notice of an annual meeting to be held at the time and place specified in subparagraph (a) of this section shall be sufficiently given if published at least once in each of four (4) successive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the place in which the principal office of such insurer is located, and if so published no other notice of such meeting shall be required.

“(d) The presence in person or by proxy of five percent (5%) of the members entitled to vote at any meeting shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business, including the amendment of the articles of incorporation and/or the bylaws unless otherwise provided by the bylaws.

“(e) Each such member shall have one (1) vote at any meeting of members regardless of the number of policies or the amount of insurance that such member holds and regardless of whether such policies are policies of life insurance, or of health and accident insurance, or both. Any member entitled to vote shall have the right to do so either in person or by an agent or agents authorized by a written proxy executed by such person or his duly authorized agent and filed with the secretary of such insurer.

“(f) The directors of the insurer in office at the time the insurer is mutualized as provided in this chapter shall continue in office until the first annual meeting of members. At the first annual meeting of members and at each annual meeting thereafter, directors shall be elected by the members for the term or terms authorized by this chapter.

“(g) The articles of incorporation or the bylaws may provide that the directors may be divided into two (2) or more classes whose terms of office shall expire at different times, but no terms shall continue longer than six (6) years. In the absence of such provisions, each director, except members of the board of directors at the time the insurer is mutualized, shall be elected for a term of one (1) year. All directors shall hold office for a term for which they are elected and until their successors are elected and qualified. A director may, but need not be a member or policyholder of the insurer of which he is acting as director. Vacancies in the board of directors may be filled by a majority of the remaining directors, though less than a quorum, and each director so elected shall hold office until the next annual meeting.

“(h) All insurers mutualized under the provisions of this chapter shall be subject to all other applicable provisions of this Code. The provisions of the Corporation Code shall apply in a suppletory manner.

“SEC. 279. The provisions of Commonwealth Act No. 83, otherwise known as the Securities Act, as amended, shall not apply to any of the following:

“(a) Shares of the capital stock of such insurer acquired as provided in Section 272 and assigned and transferred to the trustees as is provided in said section, and the assignment and transfer of said shares as so provided;

“(b) Any certificate or other instrument issued to a policyholder of such mutualized insurer conferring or evidencing membership in such mutualized insurer or conferring or evidencing such member’s right to participate in the profits or share in the assets of such mutualized insurer by virtue of his membership therein, and the issuance of such certificate or other instrument;

“(c) The plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of the capital stock of such insurer authorized by the provisions of this chapter, the submission of said plan to the Commissioner and to the policyholders of such insurer as provided in this chapter, and the approval and carrying out of said plan or any part thereof in accordance with the provisions of this chapter.

“SEC. 280. A domestic mutual life insurance company doing business in the Philippines may convert itself into an incorporated stock life insurance company by demutualization. To that end, it may provide and carry out a plan for the conversion by complying with the requirements of this title.

“The conversion of a domestic mutual life insurance company to an incorporated stock life insurance company shall be carried out pursuant to a conversion plan duly approved by the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner shall promulgate such rules and regulations as he or she may deem necessary to carry out the provisions of this title, after due consultation with representatives of the insurance industry.

“All converted insurers under the provisions of this title shall be subject to all other applicable provisions of this Code. The provisions of the Corporation Code shall apply in a suppletory manner.

“TITLE 18

“WITHDRAWAL OF FOREIGN INSURANCE COMPANIES

“SEC. 281. A foreign insurance company doing business in the Philippines, upon payment of the fee hereinafter prescribed and surrender to the Commissioner of its certificate of authority, may apply to withdraw from the Philippines. Such application shall be duly executed in writing, accompanied by evidence of due authority for such execution, properly acknowledged.

“SEC. 282. The Commissioner shall publish the application for withdrawal once a week for three (3) consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines. The expenses of such publication shall be paid by the insurance company filing such application.

“SEC. 283. Every foreign insurance company desiring to withdraw from the Philippines shall, prior to such withdrawal, discharge its liabilities to policyholders and creditors in this country. In case of its policies insuring residents of the Philippines, it shall cause the primary liabilities under such policies to be reinsured and assumed by another insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines. In the case of such policies as are subject to cancellation by the withdrawing company, it may cancel such policies pursuant to the terms thereof in lieu of such reinsurance and assumption of liabilities.

“SEC. 284. The Commissioner shall cause an examination of the books and records of the withdrawing company, and if, upon such examination, the Commissioner finds that the insurer has no outstanding liabilities to policyholders and creditors in the Philippines, and no policies uncancelled; or its primary liabilities have been reinsured or assumed by another insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines, as required in the preceding section, it shall cancel the withdrawing company’s certificate of authority, if unexpired, and shall permit the insurer to withdraw. The cost and expenses of all such examination shall be paid as prescribed in Section 440.

“SEC. 285. Upon the failure of such withdrawing insurance company or its agents in the Philippines to pay the expenses of such publication within thirty (30) days after the presentation of the bill therefor, the Commissioner shall collect such fee from the deposit furnished in accordance with the provisions of Section 197.

“SEC. 286. A foreign life insurance company that withdraws from the Philippines shall be considered a servicing insurance company if its business transactions are confined to accepting periodic premium payments from, or granting policy loans and paying cash surrender values of outstanding policies to, or reviving lapsed policies of, Philippine policyholders, and such other related services.

“SEC. 287. No company shall act as a servicing insurance company until after it shall have obtained a special certificate of authority to act as such from the Commissioner upon application therefor and payment by the company of the fees hereinafter prescribed. Such certificate shall expire on the last day of December of the third year and shall be renewed, while the company continues to service its policyholders, and to comply with all the applicable provisions of law and regulations.

“TITLE 19

“PROFESSIONAL REINSURERS

“SEC. 288. Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no partnership, association or corporation shall transact any business in the Philippines as a professional reinsurer until it shall have obtained a certificate of authority for that purpose from the Commissioner upon application therefor and payment by such entity of the fees hereinafter prescribed. As used in this Code, the term ‘professional reinsurer’ shall mean any entity that transacts solely and exclusively reinsurance business in the Philippines.

“The Commissioner may refuse to issue a certificate of authority to any such entity when such refusal will best promote public interest. No such certificate of authority shall be granted to any such entity unless and until the Commissioner is satisfied by such examination and such evidence as may be required that such entity is qualified by the laws of the Philippines to transact business therein as a professional reinsurer.

“Before issuing such certificate of authority, the Commissioner must be satisfied that the name of the applicant is not that of any other known company transacting insurance or reinsurance business in the Philippines, or a name so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public.

“Such certificate of authority shall expire on the last day of December the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“Every such partnership, association, or corporation receiving such certificate of authority shall be subject to the provisions of this Code and other related laws, and to the jurisdiction and supervision of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 289. Any partnership, association, or corporation authorized to transact solely reinsurance business must have a capitalization of at least Three billion pesos (P3,000,000,000.00) paid in cash of which at least fifty percent (50%) is paid-up and the remaining portion thereof is contributed surplus, which in no case shall be less than Four hundred million pesos (P400,000,000.00) or such capitalization as may be determined by the Secretary of Finance, upon the recommendation of the Commissioner: Provided, That twenty-five percent (25%) of the paid-up capital must be invested in securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities, or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas, and deposited with the Commissioner, and the remaining seventy-five percent (75%) in such other securities as may be allowed and permitted by the Commissioner, which securities shall at all times be maintained free from any lien or encumbrance: Provided, further, That the aforesaid capital requirement is without prejudice to other requirements to be imposed under any risk-based capital method that may be adopted by the Commissioner: Provided, finally, That the provisions of this chapter applicable to insurance companies shall as far as practicable be likewise applicable to professional reinsurers.

“TITLE 20

“HOLDING COMPANIES

“SEC. 290. As used in this title, the following terms shall have the respective meanings hereinafter set forth unless the context shall otherwise require:

“(a) Person means an individual, partnership, firm, association, corporation, trust, any similar entity or any combination of the foregoing acting in concert.

“(b) Control, including the terms controlling, controlled by and under common control with, means the possession directly or indirectly of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of a person, whether through the ownership of voting securities by a contract other than a commercial contract for goods or non-management services or otherwise. Subject to Section 292, control shall be presumed to exist if any person directly or indirectly owns, controls or holds with the power to vote forty percent (40%) or more of the voting securities of any other person: Provided, That no person shall be deemed to control another person solely by reason of his being an officer or director of such other person.

“(c) Holding company means any person who directly or indirectly controls any authorized insurer.

“(d) Controlled insurer means an authorized insurer controlled directly or indirectly by a holding company.

“(e) Controlled person means any person, other than a controlled insurer, who is controlled directly or indirectly by a holding company.

“(f) Holding company system means a holding company together with its controlled insurers and controlled persons.

“SEC. 291. Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of Section 290, the Commissioner may determine after notice and opportunity to be heard, that a person exercises directly or indirectly either alone or pursuant to an agreement with one or more other persons such a controlling influence over the management or policies of an authorized insurer as to make it necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of policyholders or stockholders of the insurer that the person be deemed to control the insurer.

“SEC. 292. The Commissioner may determine upon application that any person, either alone or pursuant to agreement with one or more other persons, does not or will not upon the taking of some proposed action control another person. The filing of an application hereunder in good faith by any person shall relieve the applicant from any obligation or liability imposed by this title with respect to the subject of the application, except as contained in Section 302, until the Commissioner has acted upon the application. Within thirty (30) days or such further period as he may prescribe, the Commissioner may prospectively revoke or modify his determination, after notice and opportunity to be heard, whenever in his judgment, revocation or modification is consistent with this title.

“SEC. 293. Notwithstanding any other provisions of this title, the following shall not be deemed holding companies:

“(a) Authorized insurers or reinsurers or their subsidiaries; and

“(b) The Government of the Philippines, or any political subdivision, agency or instrumentality thereof, or any corporation which is wholly owned directly or indirectly by one or more of the foregoing.

“The Commissioner may conditionally or unconditionally exempt any specified person or class of persons from any of the obligations or liabilities imposed under this title, if and to the extent he finds the exemption necessary or appropriate in the public interest or not adverse to the interests of policyholders or stockholders and consistent with the purposes of this title.

“SEC. 294. (a) Every person who on the date this Code takes effect is a controlled insurer and every person who thereafter becomes a controlled insurer, shall, within sixty (60) days thereafter, or within thirty (30) days after becoming a controlled insurer, whichever is later, register with the Commissioner. Such registration shall be amended within thirty (30) days following any change in the identity of its holding company. The Commissioner may grant one or more reasonable extensions of the time to register.

“(b) Every registrant shall furnish the Commissioner with the following information concerning its holding company:

“(1) A copy of its charter or articles of incorporation and its bylaws;

“(2) The identities of its principal shareholders, officers, directors and controlled persons; and

“(3) Information as to its capital structure and financial condition, and a description of its principal business activities.

“SEC. 295. Every controlled insurer shall file with the Commissioner such reports or material as he may direct for the purpose of disclosing information concerning the operations of persons within the holding company system which may materially affect the operations, management or financial condition of the insurer.

“SEC. 296. Every holding company and every controlled person within a holding company system shall be subject to examination by order of the Commissioner if he has cause to believe that the operations of such persons may materially affect the operations, management or financial condition of any controlled insurer with the system and that he is unable to obtain relevant information from such controlled insurer. The grounds relied upon by the Commissioner for such examination shall be stated in his order, which order shall be subject to judicial review only at the instance of the person sought to be examined. Such examination shall be confined to matters specified in the order. The cost of such examination shall be assessed against the person examined and no portion thereof shall thereafter be reimbursed to it directly or indirectly by the controlled insurer.

“SEC. 297. The Commissioner shall keep the contents of each report made pursuant to this title and any information obtained by him in connection therewith confidential and shall not make the same public without the prior written consent of the controlled insurer to which it pertains unless the Commissioner after notice and an opportunity to be heard shall determine that the interests of policyholders, stockholders or the public will be served by the publication thereof. In any action or proceeding by the Commissioner against the person examined or any other person within the same holding company system a report of such examination published by him shall be admissible as evidence of the facts stated therein.

“SEC. 298. Transactions within a holding company system to which a controlled insurer is a party shall be subject to the following:

“(a) The terms shall be fair and equitable;

“(b) Charges or fees for services performed shall be reasonable;

“(c) Expenses incurred and payments received shall be allocated to the insurer on an equitable basis in conformity with customary insurance accounting practices consistently applied.

“The books, accounts and records of each party to all such transactions shall be maintained as to clearly and accurately disclose the nature and details of the transactions including such accounting information as is necessary to support the reasonableness of the charges or fees to the respective parties.

“SEC. 299. The prior written approval of the Commissioner shall be required for the following transactions between a controlled insurer and any person in its holding company system: sales, purchases, exchanges, loans or extensions of credit, or investments, involving five percent (5%) or more of the insurer’s admitted assets as of the thirty-first day of December next preceding.

“SEC. 300. The following transactions between a controlled insurer and any person in its holding company system may not be entered into unless the insurer has notified the Commissioner in writing of its intention to enter into any such transaction at least thirty (30) days prior thereto, or such shorter period as he may permit, and he has not disapproved it within such period:

“(a) Sales, purchases, exchanges, loans or extensions of credit, or investments, involving more than one-half of one percent (½%) but less than five percent (5%) of the insurer’s admitted assets as of the thirty-first day of December next preceding;

“(b) Reinsurance treaties or agreements;

“(c) Rendering of services on a regular or systematic basis; or

“(d) Any material transaction, specified by regulation, which the Commissioner determines may adversely affect the interest of the insurer’s policyholders or stockholders or of the public.

“Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to authorize or permit any transaction which, in the case of a non-controlled insurer, would be otherwise contrary to law.

“SEC. 301. The Commissioner, in reviewing transactions pursuant to Sections 299 and 300, shall consider whether the transactions comply with the standard set forth in Section 298 and whether they may adversely affect the interests of policyholders. This section shall not apply to transactions subject to other sections of this Code which impose notice or approval requirements greater than those prescribed by this title.

“SEC. 302. (a) No person, other than an authorized insurer, shall acquire control of any domestic insurer, whether by purchase of its securities or otherwise, except:

“(1) After twenty (20) days written notice to its insurer or such shorter period as the Commissioner may permit, of its intention to acquire control; and

“(2) With the prior written approval of the Commissioner.

“(b) The Commissioner shall disapprove the acquisition of control of a domestic insurer if he determines, after notice and an opportunity to be heard, that such action is reasonably necessary to protect the interest of the people of this country. The following shall be the only factors to be considered by him in reaching the foregoing determination:

“(1) The financial condition of the acquiring person and the insurer;

“(2) The trustworthiness of the acquiring person or any of its officers or directors;

“(3) A plan for the proper and effective conduct of the insurer’s operations;

“(4) The source of the funds or assets for the acquisition;

“(5) The fairness of any exchange of stock, assets, cash or other consideration for the stock or assets to be received;

“(6) Whether the effect of the acquisition may be substantially to lessen competition in any line of commerce in insurance or to tend to create a monopoly therein; and

“(7) Whether the acquisition is likely to be hazardous or prejudicial to the insurer’s policyholders or stockholders.

“(c) The following conditions affecting any controlled insurer, regardless of when such control has been acquired, are violations of this title:

“(1) The controlling person or any of its officers or directors have demonstrated untrustworthiness; and

“(2) The effect of retention of control may be substantially to lessen competition in any line of commerce in insurance in this country or to tend to create a monopoly therein. If, after notice and an opportunity to be heard, the Commissioner determines that any of the foregoing violations exists, he shall reduce his findings to writing and shall issue an order based thereon and cause the same to be served upon the insurer and upon all persons affected thereby directing any person found to be in violation thereof to take appropriate action to cure such violation. Upon the failure of any such person to comply with such order, Section 306 shall become applicable.

“(d) The Commissioner may require the submission of such information as he deems necessary to determine whether any acquisition or retention of control complies with this title and may require, as a condition of approval of such acquisition or retention of control, that all or any portion of such information be disclosed to the insurer’s stockholders.

“(e) Unless subject to registration under Section 294 or unless acquisition of its control is subject to paragraphs (a) and (b) hereof, every authorized insurer shall notify the Commissioner in writing of the identity of any person whom the insurer then knows or has reason to believe controls or has taken any action, other than preliminary negotiations or discussion, to acquire control of the insurer.

“SEC. 303. (a) Notwithstanding the control of an authorized insurer by any person, the officers and directors of the insurer shall not thereby be relieved of any obligation or liability to which they would otherwise be subject by law, and the insurer shall be managed so as to assure its separate operating identity consistent with this title.

“(b) Nothing herein shall preclude an authorized insurer from having or sharing a common management or cooperative or joint use of personnel, property or services with one or more other persons under arrangements meeting the standards of Section 298.

“SEC. 304. To the extent that any information or material is set forth in forms or other matter on file with any government agency or in a registration form filed with the Commissioner by another person within the same holding company system, the controlled insurer may comply with the registration or reporting requirements of this title by referring in its registration form or report to such other filed matter and attaching a copy thereof certified by the insurer as a true and complete copy, to such registration form or report or, if such other filed matter is on file with the Commissioner, incorporating such matter by reference.

“SEC. 305. No holding company or controlled person shall directly or indirectly or through another person do or cause to be done for or in behalf of the controlled insurer any act intended to affect the insurance operations of the insurer which, if done by the insurer, would violate any provision of this Code.

“SEC. 306. In addition to any other penalty provided by law, the Commissioner may, upon the willful failure of any person within a holding company system to comply with this title or any regulation or order promulgated hereunder:

“(a) Proceed under Title 14 or Title 15, Chapter III of this Code with respect to insurer within the holding company system; or

“(b) Revoke or refuse to renew the authority to do business in this country of an insurer within the holding company system or refuse to issue such authority to any other insurer in the system; or

“(c) Direct that, in addition to any other penalty provided by law, such person forfeit to the people of this country a sum not less than Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00) for a first violation and Twenty-five thousand pesos (P25,000.00) for any subsequent violation. An additional sum not less than Twenty-five thousand pesos (P25,000.00) shall be imposed for each month during which any such violation shall continue.

“CHAPTER IV

“SALES AGENCIES AND TECHNICAL SERVICES

“TITLE l

“INSURANCE AGENTS AND INSURANCE BROKERS

“SEC. 307. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines, nor any agent thereof, shall pay any commission or other compensation to any person for services in obtaining insurance, unless such person shall have first procured from the Commissioner a license to act as an insurance agent of such company or as an insurance broker as hereinafter provided.

“No person shall act as an insurance agent or as an insurance broker in the solicitation or procurement of applications for insurance, or receive for services in obtaining insurance, any commission or other compensation from any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, or any agent thereof, without first procuring a license so to act from the Commissioner, which must be renewed every three (3) years thereafter. Such license shall be issued by the Commissioner only upon the written application of the person desiring it, such application if for a license to act as insurance agent, being approved or endorsed by the company such person desires to represent, and shall be upon a form prescribed by the Commissioner giving such information as he may require, and upon payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed. The Commissioner shall satisfy himself as to the competence and trustworthiness of the applicant and shall have the right to refuse to issue or renew and to suspend or revoke any such license in his discretion. The license shall expire after the thirty-first day of December of the third year following the date of issuance unless it is renewed.

“Licenses may be renewed in the case of the company represented by such agents, and in the case of insurance brokers, upon the application of the said brokers, themselves.

“SEC. 308. The provisions of Sections 307 and 309 shall apply to an employee who shall be engaged to sell insurance products by an insurance company.

“SEC. 309. Any person who for compensation solicits or obtains insurance on behalf of any insurance company or transmits for a person other than himself an application for a policy or contract of insurance to or from such company or offers or assumes to act in the negotiating of such insurance shall be an insurance agent within the intent of this section and shall thereby become liable to all the duties, requirements, liabilities and penalties to which an insurance agent is subject.

“An insurance agent is an independent contractor and not an employee of the company represented. ‘Insurance agent’ includes an agency leader, agency manager, or their equivalent.

“Since the insurance industry is imbued with public interest, the insurance companies upon approval of the Commissioner may exercise wide latitude in supervising the activities of their insurance agents to ensure the protection of the insuring public.

“SEC. 310. Any person who for any compensation, commission or other thing of value acts or aids in any manner in soliciting, negotiating or procuring the making of any insurance contract or in placing risk or taking out insurance, on behalf of an insured other than himself, shall be an insurance broker within the intent of this Code, and shall thereby become liable to all the duties, requirements, liabilities and penalties to which an insurance broker is subject.

“SEC. 311. Every applicant for an insurance broker’s license shall file with the application and shall thereafter maintain in force while so licensed, a bond in favor of the people of the Republic of the Philippines executed by a company authorized to become surety upon official recognizances, stipulations, bonds and undertakings. The bond shall be in such amount as may be fixed by the Commissioner, but in no case less than Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00), and shall be conditioned upon full accounting and due payment to the person entitled thereto of funds coming into the broker’s possession through insurance transactions under license. The bond shall remain in force until released by the Commissioner, or until cancelled by the surety. Without prejudice to any liability previously incurred thereunder, the surety may cancel the bond on thirty (30) days advance written notice to both the broker and the Commissioner.

“Upon approval of the application, the applicant must also file two (2) errors and omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies issued separately by two (2) insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines, satisfactory to the Commissioner to indemnify the applicant against any claim or claims for breach of duty as insurance broker which may be made against him by reason of any negligent act, error or omission, whenever or wherever committed or alleged to have been committed, on the part of the applicant or any person who has been, is now, or may hereafter during the subsistence of the policies be employed by the said applicant in his capacity as insurance broker: Provided, That the filing of any claim or claims under one of such policies shall preclude the filing of the said claim or claims under the other policy. The said policies shall be in such amounts as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, depending upon the size or amount of the broking business of the applicant, but in no case shall the amount of each of such policies be less than Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00).

“SEC. 312. The Commissioner shall, in order to determine the competence of every applicant to have the kind of license applied for, require such applicant to submit to a written examination and to pass the same to the satisfaction of the Commissioner. The Commissioner may delegate or authorize the administration of the examination to an independent organization, subject to such conditions that the Commissioner may provide.

“SEC. 313. An applicant for the written examination mentioned in the preceding section must be of good moral character and must not have been convicted of any crime involving moral turpitude. He must satisfactorily show to the Commissioner that he has been trained in the kind of insurance contemplated in the license applied for. Such examination may be waived if it is shown to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the applicant has undergone extensive education and/or training in insurance.

“SEC. 314. An application for the issuance or renewal of a license to act as an insurance agent or insurance broker may be refused, or such license, if already issued or renewed, shall be suspended or revoked if the Commissioner finds that the applicant for, or holder of, such license:

“(a) Has willfully violated any provision of this Code; or

“(b) Has intentionally made a material misstatement in the application to qualify for such license; or

“(c) Has obtained or attempted to obtain a license by fraud or misrepresentation; or

“(d) Has been guilty of fraudulent or dishonest practices; or

“(e) Has misappropriated or converted to his own use or illegally withheld moneys required to be held in a fiduciary capacity; or

“(f) Has not demonstrated trustworthiness and competence to transact business as an insurance agent or insurance broker in such manner as to safeguard the public; or

“(g) Has materially misrepresented the terms and conditions of policies or contracts of insurance which he seeks to sell or has sold; or

“(h) Has failed to pass the written examination prescribed, if not otherwise exempt from taking the same.

“In addition to the foregoing causes, no license to act as insurance agent or insurance broker shall be renewed if the holder thereof has not been actively engaged as such agent or broker in accordance with such rules as the Commissioner may prescribe.

“SEC. 315. The premium, or any portion thereof, which an insurance agent or insurance broker collects from an insured and which is to be paid to an insurance company because of the assumption of liability through the issuance of policies or contracts of insurance, shall be held by the agent or broker in a fiduciary capacity and shall not be misappropriated or converted to his own use or illegally withheld by the agent or broker.

“Any insurance company which delivers to an insurance agent or insurance broker a policy or contract of insurance shall be deemed to have authorized such agent or broker to receive on its behalf payment of any premium which is due on such policy or contract of insurance at the time of its issuance or delivery or which becomes due thereon.

“In order to ensure faithful performance by the insurance agent or insurance broker of these fiduciary responsibilities, the Insurance Commissioner shall prescribe the minimum terms and conditions on such matters in the standard agency or brokers agreement between the agents and/or the broker with the insurance companies.

“SEC. 316. Any provision of existing laws to the contrary notwithstanding, no person shall, within the Philippines, sell or offer for sale a variable contract or do or perform any act or thing in the sale, negotiation, making or consummating of any variable contract other than for himself unless such person shall have a valid and current license from the Commissioner authorizing such person to act as a variable contract agent. No such license shall be issued unless and until the Commissioner is satisfied, after examination that such person is by training, knowledge, ability and character qualified to act as such agent. Any such license may be withdrawn and cancelled by the Commissioner after notice and hearing, if he shall find that the holder thereof does not then have the qualifications required for the issuance of such license.

“SEC. 317. It shall be unlawful for any person, company or corporation in the Philippines to act as general agent of any insurance company unless he is empowered by a written power of attorney duly executed by such insurance company, and registered with the Commissioner to receive notices, summons and legal processes for and in behalf of the insurance company concerned in connection with actions or other legal proceedings against said insurance company. It shall be the duty of said general agent to notify the Commissioner of his post office address in the Philippines, or any change thereof. Notices, summons, or processes of any kind sent by registered mail to the last registered address of such general agent of the company concerned or to the Commissioner shall be sufficient service and deemed as if served on the insurance company itself.

“SEC. 318. Except as otherwise provided by law or treaty, it shall be unlawful for any person, partnership, association or corporation in the Philippines, for himself or itself, or for some other person, partnership, association or corporation, either to procure, receive or forward applications of insurance in, or to issue or to deliver or accept policies or contracts of insurance of or for, any insurance company or companies not authorized to transact business in the Philippines, covering risks, life or non-life, situated in the Philippines; and any such person, partnership, association or corporation violating the provisions of this section shall be deemed guilty of a penal offense, and upon conviction thereof, shall for each such offense be punished by a fine of Two hundred fifty thousand pesos (P250,000.00), or imprisonment of six (6) months, or both, at the discretion of the court: Provided, That the provisions of this section shall not apply to reinsurance.

“TITLE 2

“REINSURANCE BROKERS

“SEC. 319. Except as provided in the next succeeding title, no person shall act as reinsurance broker in the Philippines unless he is authorized as such by the Commissioner.

“A reinsurance broker is one who, for compensation, not being a duly authorized agent, employee or officer of an insurer in which any reinsurance is effected, acts or aids in any manner in negotiating contracts of reinsurance, or placing risks of effecting reinsurance, for any insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines.

“SEC. 320. Upon application and payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed, and the filing of two (2) errors and omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies hereinafter described, a person may, if found qualified, be issued a license to act as reinsurance broker by the Commissioner. No such license shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“The errors and omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies mentioned above shall indemnify the applicant against any claim or claims for breach of duty as reinsurance broker which may be made against him by reason of any negligent act, error or omission, whenever or wherever committed or alleged to have been committed, on the part of the applicant or any person who has been, is now, or may hereafter during the subsistence of the policies be employed by the said applicant in his capacity as reinsurance broker: Provided, That the filing of any claim or claims under one of such policies shall preclude the filing of the said claim or claims under the other policy. The said policies shall be issued separately by two (2) insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines and shall be in such amounts as may be prescribed by the Insurance Commissioner, depending upon the size or amount of the broking business of the applicant, but in no case shall the amount of each of such policies be less than Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00).

“SEC. 321. The Commissioner may recall, suspend or revoke the license granted to a reinsurance broker for violation of any existing law, rule and regulation, or any provision of this Code after due notice and hearing.

“TITLE 3

“RESIDENT AGENTS

“SEC. 322. No person shall act as resident agent, as hereinafter defined, unless he is registered as such with the Commissioner.

“SEC. 323. The term resident agent, as used in this title, is one duly appointed by a foreign insurer or broker not authorized to do business in the Philippines to receive in its behalf notices, summons and legal processes in connection with actions or other legal proceedings against such foreign insurer or broker.

“SEC. 324. The application for a certificate of registration as resident agent filed with the Commissioner must be accompanied with a copy of the power of attorney, duly notarized and authenticated by the Philippine Consul in the place where such foreign insurer or broker is domiciled, empowering the applicant to act as resident agent and to receive notices, summons and legal processes for and in behalf of such foreign insurer or broker in connection with any action or legal proceeding against such foreign insurer or broker.

“SEC. 325. It shall be the duty of such resident agent to notify immediately the Commissioner of any change of his office address.

“SEC. 326. A certificate of registration issued to a resident agent shall expire on the thirty-first day of December of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“The Commissioner may, after due notice and hearing, recall or cancel the certificate of registration issued to a resident agent for violation of any existing law, rule or regulation, or any provision of this Code.

“TITLE 4

“NON-LIFE COMPANY UNDERWRITER

“SEC. 327. No person shall act, and no company shall employ any person, as non-life company underwriter, whose duty and responsibility it shall be to select, evaluate and accept risks for, and to determine the terms and conditions, including those pertaining to amounts of retentions, under which such risks are to be accepted by the company, unless such underwriter is registered as such with the Commissioner.

“SEC. 328. Every non-life insurance company doing business in the Philippines must maintain at all times a register of risks accepted and a claims register for each line of risks engaged in by such non-life insurance company with such entries therein as are now or as may hereafter be required by the Commissioner, and it shall be the responsibility of the underwriter on the particular line of risk involved to see to it that the said registers are well maintained and kept, and that all entries therein are properly and correctly recorded. Such registers shall be open to inspection and examination of duly authorized representatives of the Commissioner at all times during business hours.

“SEC. 329. No person shall be registered with the Commissioner, unless such person shall be at least twenty-one (21) years of age on the date of such registration; a resident of the Philippines; of good moral character and with no conviction of any crime involving moral turpitude; has had at the time such registration is made at least two (2) years of underwriting work in the particular line of risk involved; and has passed such qualifying written examination that the Commissioner shall conduct at such time and in such place as he may decide to hold for applicants desiring to act as underwriters.

“Such examination shall not be required of any person who has served as non-life company underwriter for a period of at least five (5) years, if the Commissioner is satisfied of the applicant’s competence as shown by the results of his underwriting work in the non-life insurance company or companies that employed him in that capacity. The minimum underwriting experience herein required may be reduced or waived if it is shown to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the non-life company underwriter has undergone extensive education and/or training in insurance.

“SEC. 330. Any applicant who misrepresents or omits any material fact in his application for registration as a non-life company underwriter, or commits any dishonest act in taking or in connection with the qualifying written examination for underwriters, shall be barred from being registered as such non-life company underwriter and, if already registered, his registration shall be cancelled and the certificate of registration issued in his favor shall be recalled immediately by the Commissioner.

“In the event that the certificate of authority of a non-life insurance company to transact business is suspended or revoked due to business failure arising largely from the imprudent and injudicious acceptance of risks by the underwriter concerned, the registration of such underwriter shall likewise be cancelled and his certificate of registration shall be recalled by the Commissioner, and no similar certificate shall thereafter be issued in his favor.

“SEC. 331. No certificate of registration issued to an underwriter shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“The Commissioner may, after due notice and hearing, also suspend or cancel such certificate for violation of existing laws, rules and regulations or of any provisions of this Code.

“TITLE 5

“ADJUSTERS

“SEC. 332. No person, partnership, association, or corporation shall act as an adjuster, as hereinafter defined, unless authorized so to act by virtue of a license issued or renewed by the Commissioner pursuant to the provisions of this Code: Provided, That in the case of a natural person, he must be a Filipino citizen and in the case of a partnership, association or corporation, at least sixty percent (60%) of its capital must be owned by citizens of the Philippines.

“SEC. 333. An adjuster may be an independent adjuster or a public adjuster.

“The term independent adjuster means any person, partnership, association or corporation which, for money, commission or any other thing of value, acts for or on behalf of an insurer in the adjusting of claims arising under insurance contracts or policies issued by such insurer.

“The term public adjuster means any person, partnership, association or corporation which, for money, commission or any other thing of value, acts on behalf of an insured in negotiating for, or effecting, the settlement of a claim or claims of the said insured arising under insurance contracts or policies, or which advertises for or solicits employment as an adjuster of such claims.

“SEC. 334. For every line of insurance claim adjustment, adjusters shall be licensed either as independent adjusters or as public adjusters. No adjuster shall act on behalf of an insurer unless said adjuster is licensed as an independent adjuster; and no adjuster shall act on behalf of an insured unless said adjuster is licensed as a public adjuster: Provided, however, That when a firm or person has been licensed as a public adjuster, he shall not be granted another license as independent adjuster and vice versa.

“No license, however, shall be required of any company adjuster who is a salaried employee of an insurance company for the adjustment of claims filed under policies issued by such insurance company.

“SEC. 335. Such license or any renewal thereof may be issued by the Commissioner upon written application filed by the person interested on the form or forms prescribed by the Commissioner, which shall contain such information as he may require, and upon payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed.

“SEC. 336. The Commissioner shall conduct, at such times, and in such places as he may decide to hold, written examinations to determine the competence and ability of applicants desiring to act as adjuster of insurance claims.

“SEC. 337. No adjuster’s license issued hereunder shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following the issuance of such license unless it is renewed.

“SEC. 338. Nothing contained in this title shall apply to any duly licensed attorney-at-law who acts or aids in adjusting insurance claims as an incident to the practice of his profession and who does not advertise himself as an adjuster.

“SEC. 339. The Commissioner may suspend or revoke any adjuster’s license if, after giving notice and hearing to the adjuster concerned, the Commissioner finds that the said adjuster:

“(a) Has violated any provision of this Code and of the circulars, rulings and instructions of the Commissioner or has violated any law in the course of his dealings as an adjuster; or

“(b) Has made a material misstatement in the application for such license; or

“(c) Has been guilty of fraudulent or dishonest practices; or

“(d) Has demonstrated his incompetence or untrustworthiness to act as adjuster; or

“(e) Has made patently unjust valuation of loss; or

“(f) Has failed to make a report of the adjustment he proposed within sixty (60) days from the date of the filing of the claim by the insured with the insurer, unless prevented so to do by reasons beyond his control; or

“(g) Has refused to allow an examination into his affairs or method of doing business as hereinafter provided.

“SEC. 340. Every adjuster shall submit to the Commissioner a quarterly report of all losses which are the subject of adjustment effected by him during each month in the form prescribed by the Commissioner. The report shall be filed within one (1) month after the end of each quarter.

“SEC. 341. Every adjuster shall keep his or its books, records, reports, accounts, and vouchers in such manner that the Commissioner or his duly authorized representatives may readily verify the quarterly reports of the said adjuster and ascertain whether the said adjuster has complied with the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon him or whether the method of doing business of the said adjuster has been fair, just and honest.

“SEC. 342. The Commissioner shall, at least once a year and whenever he considers the public interest so demands, cause an examination to be made into the affairs and method of doing business of every adjuster.

“SEC. 343. Any violation of any provision of this title shall be punished by a fine of not less than Ten thousand pesos (P10,000.00), or by imprisonment at the discretion of the court: Provided, That, in case of a partnership, association or corporation, the said penalty shall be imposed upon the partner, president, manager, managing director, director or person in charge of its business or responsible for the violation.

“TITLE 6

“ACTUARIES

“SEC. 344. No life insurance company shall be licensed to do business in the Philippines nor shall any life insurance company doing business in the Philippines be allowed to continue doing such business unless they shall engage the services of an actuary duly accredited with the Commissioner who shall, during his tenure of office, be directly responsible for the direction and supervision of all actuarial work connected with or that may be involved in the business of the insurance company. The Commissioner may also require non-life insurance companies to engage the services of an accredited actuary, in accordance with the rules and regulations that the Commissioner will formulate.

“SEC. 345. Any person may be officially accredited by the Commissioner to act as an actuary in any life insurance company or in any mutual benefit association authorized to do business in the Philippines upon application therefor and the payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed: Provided, That:

“(a) He is a fellow of good standing of the Actuarial Society of the Philippines at the time of his appointment and remains in such good standing during the tenure of his engagement; or

“(b) In the case of one who is not a fellow of the Actuarial Society of the Philippines, he meets all the requirements of the said Society for accreditation as a fellow of the Society, and has been given permission by the pertinent government authorities in the Philippines to render services in the Philippines, in the event that he is not a citizen of the Philippines.

“The registration of the actuary shall be suspended or revoked by the Commissioner on the following grounds:

“(1) Failure to adequately perform required functions and duties under this Code;

“(2) Failure to disclose conflict of interest;

“(3) Failure to comply with the Code of Conduct of the Actuarial Society of the Philippines; or

“(4) Such other grounds that may be determined by the Commissioner.

“No actuary engaged by a life insurance company shall be at the same time a stockholder or a director of the board, chief executive officer or chief financial officer of the company or hold any position that the Commissioner may determine to have an inherent conflict of interest to the position of an actuary.

“No certificate of registration issued under this title shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“SEC. 346. The following documents, which are from time to time submitted to the Commissioner by a life insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines, shall be duly certified by an accredited actuary employed by such company:

“(a) Policy reserves, claims or loss reserves and net due and deferred premiums.

“(b) Statements of bases and net premiums, loading for gross premiums, and on non-forfeiture values and reserves, when applying for approval of gross premiums, reserves and non-forfeiture values.

“(c) Policies of insurance under any plan submitted to the Commissioner as required by law.

“(d) Annual statements and valuation reports submitted to the Commissioner as required by law.

“(e) Financial projection showing the probable income and outgo and reserve requirements, enumerating the actuarial assumptions and bases of projections.

“(f) Valuation of annuity funds or retirement plans.

“The Commissioner may also require non-life insurance companies to submit, from time to time, similar documents which shall be duly certified by an accredited actuary employed by such company.

“Any life insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines may employ any person who is not officially accredited under either of the qualifications for any kind of actuarial work: Provided, That he shall not, at any time, have the authority to certify to the correctness of the foregoing documents.

“SEC. 347. No accredited actuary shall serve more than one client or employer at the same time. However, one already in the employ of an insurance company may be allowed by the Commissioner to serve a mutual benefit association or any other insurance company, provided the following conditions are first complied with:

“(a) That the request to engage his services by the other employer is in writing;

“(b) That his present employer acquiesced to it in writing; and

“(c) That he furnishes the Commissioner with copies of said request and acquiescence.

“No external auditor shall be engaged by supervised persons or entities unless it has been issued an accreditation certificate by the Commissioner. The accreditation certificate shall be valid until December 31 of the third year from issuance unless it is revoked or suspended. The Commissioner shall issue rules and regulations to govern the accreditation of the external auditor and the revocation or suspension of the accreditation.

“TITLE 7

“RATING ORGANIZATION AND RATE MAKING

“SEC. 348. Every organization which now exists or which may hereafter be formed for the purpose of making rates to be used by more than one insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines shall be known as a rating organization. The term rate as used in this title shall generally mean the ratio of the premium to the amount insured and shall include, as the context may require, either the consideration to be paid or charged for insurance contracts, including surety bonds, or the elements and factors forming the basis for the determination or application of the same, or both.

“SEC. 349. Every rating organization which now exists or which may hereafter be formed shall be subject to the provisions of this title.

“SEC. 350. No rating organization hereafter formed shall commence rate-making operations until it shall have obtained a license from the Commissioner. Before obtaining such license, such rating organization shall file with the Commissioner a notice of its intention to commence rate-making operations, a copy of its constitution, articles of agreement or association, or of incorporation, and its bylaws, a list of insurance companies that have agreed to become members or subscribers, and such other information concerning such rating organization and its operations as may be required by the Commissioner. If the Commissioner finds that the organization has complied with the provisions of law and that it has a sufficient number of members or subscribers and is otherwise qualified to function as a rating organization, the Commissioner may issue a license to such rating organization authorizing it to make rates for the kinds of insurance or subdivisions thereof as may be specified in such license. No license issued to a rating organization shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed. No rating organization which now exists and is not licensed pursuant to this section shall continue rate-making operations until it shall have obtained from the Commissioner a license which he may issue if satisfied that such organization is complying with the provisions of this title. Every rating organization shall notify the Commissioner promptly of every change in:

“(a) Its constitution, its articles of agreement or association or its certificate of incorporation, and its bylaws, rules and regulations governing the conduct of its business; and

“(b) Its list of members and subscribers.

“A member means an insurer who participates in or is entitled to participate in the management of a rating organization.

“A subscriber means an insurer which is furnished at its request with rates and rating manuals by a rating organization of which it is not a member.

“SEC. 351. Each rating organization shall furnish its rating service without discrimination to all of its members and subscribers, and shall, subject to reasonable rules and regulations, permit any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, not admitted to membership, to become a subscriber to its rating services for any kind of insurance or subdivisions thereof. Notice of proposed changes in such rules and regulations shall be given to subscribers. The reasonableness of any rule or regulation in its application to subscribers, or the refusal of any rating organization to admit an insurance company as a subscriber, shall, at the request of any subscriber or any such insurance company, be reviewed by the Commissioner at a hearing held upon at least ten (10) days’ written notice to such rating organization and to such subscriber or insurance company. The Commissioner may, after such hearing, issue an appropriate order.

“SEC. 352. No rating organization or any other association shall refuse to do business with, or prohibit or prevent the payment of commissions to, any person licensed as an insurance broker pursuant to the provisions of Title 1 of this chapter.

“SEC. 353. Rating organizations shall be subject to examination by the Commissioner, as often as he may deem such examination expedient, pursuant to the provisions of this Code applicable to the examination of insurance companies. He shall cause such an examination of each rating organization to be made at least once in every five (5) years.

“SEC. 354. The Commissioner may suspend or revoke the license of any rating organization which fails to comply with his order within the time limited by such order, or any extension thereof which he may grant. The Commissioner may determine when a suspension of license shall become effective and it shall remain in effect for the period fixed by him, unless he modifies or rescinds such suspension.

“SEC. 355. Any rating organization may subscribe for or purchase actuarial, technical or other services, and such services shall be available to all members and subscribers without discrimination.

“SEC. 356. Any rating organization may provide for the examination of policies, daily reports, binders, renewal certificates, endorsements or other instruments of insurance, or the cancellation thereof, and may make reasonable rules governing their submission. Such rules shall contain a provision that in the event an insurance company does not within sixty (60) days furnish satisfactory evidence to the rating organization of the correction of any error or omission previously called to its attention by the rating organization, it shall be the duty of the rating organization to notify the Commissioner thereof. All information so submitted for examination shall be confidential.

“SEC. 357. Cooperation among rating organizations or among rating organizations and insurers in rate making or in other matters within the scope of this title is hereby authorized, provided the filings resulting from such cooperation are subject to all provisions of this title which are applicable to filings generally. The Commissioner may review such cooperative activities and practices and if he finds that any such activity or practice is unfair or unreasonable or otherwise inconsistent with the provisions of this title, he may issue a written order specifying in what respects such activity or practice is unfair or unreasonable or otherwise inconsistent with the provisions of this title, and requiring the discontinuance of such activity or practice.

“SEC. 358. Every rating organization and every insurance company which makes and files its own rates, shall make rates for all risks rated by such organization or insurance company in accordance with the following provisions:

“(a) Basic classification, manual, minimum, class, or schedule rates or rating plans, shall be made and adopted for all such risks. Any departure from such rates shall be in accordance with schedules, rating plans and rules filed with the Commissioner;

“(b) Rates shall be reasonable and adequate for the class of risks to which they apply;

“(c) No rate shall discriminate unfairly between risks involving essentially the same hazards and expense elements or between risks in the application of like charges and credits;

“(d) Consideration shall be given to the past and prospective loss experience, including the conflagration and catastrophe hazards, if any, to all factors reasonably attributable to the class of risks, to a reasonable profit, to commissions paid during the most recent annual period and to past and prospective other expenses. In case of fire insurance rates, consideration shall be given to the experience of the fire insurance business during a period of not less than five (5) years next preceding the year in which the review is made;

“(e) Risk may be grouped by classifications for the establishment of rates and minimum premiums. Classification rates may be modified to produce rates for individual risks in accordance with rating plans which establish standards for measuring variations in hazards or expense provisions, or both. Such standards may measure any difference among risks that can be demonstrated to have a probable effect upon losses or expenses.

“SEC. 359. No rating organization and no insurance company which makes and files its own rates shall make or promulgate any rate or schedule of rates which is to be applied to any fire risk on the condition that the whole amount of insurance on any risk or any specified part thereof shall be placed with the members of or subscribers to such rating organization or with such insurer.

“SEC. 360. Every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall annually file with the rating organization of which it is a member or subscriber, or with such other agency as the Commissioner may designate, a statistical report showing a classification schedule of its premiums and losses on all kinds or types of insurance business to which Section 358 is applicable, and such other information as the Commissioner may deem necessary or expedient for the administration of the provisions of this title.

“SEC. 361. Every non-life rating organization and every non-life insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall file with the Commissioner, except as to risks which by general custom of the business are not written according to manual rates or rating plans, every rate manual, schedule of rates, classification of risks, rating plan, and every other rating rule and every modification of any of the foregoing which it proposes to use. An insurance company may satisfy its obligation to make such filings for any kind or type of insurance by becoming a member of or subscriber to a rating organization which makes such filings for such kind or type of insurance, and by authorizing the Commissioner to accept such filings of the rating organization on behalf of such insurance company.

“SEC. 362. Every manual or schedule of rates and every rating plan filed as provided in the preceding section shall state or clearly indicate the character and extent of the coverage to which any such rate or any modification thereof will be applied.

“SEC. 363. The Commissioner shall review filings as soon as reasonably possible after they have been made in order to determine whether they meet the requirements of this title. When a filing is not accompanied by the information upon which the insurance company supports such filing, and the Commissioner does not have sufficient information to determine whether such filing meets the requirements of this title, he shall require such insurance company to furnish the information upon which it supports such filing. The information furnished in support of a filing may include:

“(a) The experience or judgment of the insurance company or rating organization making the filing;

“(b) Its interpretation of any statistical data it relies upon;

“(c) The experience of other insurance companies or rating organization; or

“(d) Any other relevant factors.

“SEC. 364. If the Commissioner finds that any rate filings theretofore filed with him do not comply with the provisions of this title or that they provide rates or rules which are inadequate, excessive, unfairly discriminatory or otherwise unreasonable, he may order the same withdrawn and at the expiration of sixty (60) days thereafter the same shall be deemed no longer on file. Before making any such finding and order, the Commissioner shall give notice, not less than ten (10) days in advance, and a hearing, to the rating organization, or to the insurer, which filed the same. Such order shall not affect any contract or policy made or issued prior to the expiration of such sixty (60)-day period.

“SEC. 365. No member or subscriber of a rating organization, and no insurance company doing business in the Philippines, or agent, employee or other representative of such company, and no insurance broker shall charge or demand a rate or receive a premium which deviates from the rates, rating plans, classifications, schedules, rules and standards, made and last filed by a rating organization or by or on behalf of the insurance company, or shall issue or make any policy or contract involving a violation of such rate filings.

“SEC. 366. Notwithstanding any other provisions of this title, upon the written application of the insurer, stating his reasons therefor, filed with and approved by the Commissioner, a rate in excess of that provided by a filing otherwise applicable may be used on any specific risk.

“SEC. 367. Whenever the Commissioner shall determine, after notice and a hearing, that the rates charged or filed on any class of risks are excessive, discriminatory, inadequate or unreasonable, he shall order that such rates be appropriately adjusted. For the purpose of applying the provisions of this section, the Commissioner may from time to time approve reasonable classifications of risks for any or all such classes, having due regard to the past and prospective loss experience, including conflagration or catastrophe hazards, if any, to all other relevant factors and to a reasonable profit.

“SEC. 368. Nothing contained in this title shall be construed as requiring any insurer to become a member of or subscriber to any rating organization.

“SEC. 369. Agreements may be made among insurance companies with respect to the equitable apportionment among them of insurance which may be afforded applicants who are in good faith entitled to but are unable to procure such insurance through ordinary methods and such insurance companies may agree among themselves on the use of reasonable rates and modifications for such insurance, such agreements and rate modifications to be subject to the approval of the Commissioner: Provided, however, That the provisions of this section shall not be deemed to apply to workmen’s compensation insurance.

“SEC. 370. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines or any agent thereof, no insurance broker, and no employee or other representative of any such insurance company, agent, or broker, shall make, procure or negotiate any contract of insurance or agreement as to policy contract, other than is plainly expressed in the policy or other written contract issued or to be issued as evidence thereof, or shall directly or indirectly, by giving or sharing a commission or in any manner whatsoever, pay or allow or offer to pay or allow to the insured or to any employee of such insured, either as an inducement to the making of such insurance or after such insurance has been effected, any rebate from the premium which is specified in the policy, or any special favor or advantage in the dividends or other benefits to accrue thereon, or shall give or offer to give any valuable consideration or inducement of any kind, directly or indirectly, which is not specified in such policy or contract of insurance; nor shall any such company, or any agent thereof, as to any policy or contract of insurance issued, make any discrimination against any Filipino in the sense that he is given less advantageous rates, dividends or other policy conditions or privileges than are accorded to other nationals because of his race.

“SEC. 371. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines, and no officer, director, or agent thereof, and no insurance broker or any other person, partnership or corporation shall issue or circulate or cause or permit to be issued or circulated any literature, illustration, circular or statement of any sort misrepresenting the terms of any policy issued by any insurance company of the benefits or advantages promised thereby, or any misleading estimate of the dividends or share of surplus to be received thereon, or shall use any name or title of any policy or class of policies misrepresenting the true nature thereof; nor shall any such company or agent thereof, or any other person, partnership or corporation make any misleading representation or incomplete comparison of policies to any person insured in such company for the purpose of inducing or tending to induce such person to lapse, forfeit, or surrender his said insurance.

“SEC. 372. If the Commissioner, after notice and hearing, finds that any insurance company, rating organization, agent, broker or other person has violated any of the provisions of this title, it shall order the payment of a fine not to exceed Twenty-five thousand pesos (P25,000.00) for each such offense, and shall immediately suspend or revoke the license issued to such insurance company, rating organization, agent, or broker. The issuance, procurement or negotiation of a single policy or contract of insurance shall be deemed a separate offense.

“TITLE 8

“PROVISION COMMON TO AGENTS, BROKERS AND ADJUSTERS

“SEC. 373. A license issued to a partnership, association or corporation to act as an insurance agent, general agent, insurance broker, reinsurance broker, or adjuster shall authorize only the individual named in the license who shall qualify therefor as though an individual licensee. The Commissioner shall charge, and the licensee shall pay, a full additional license fee as to each respective individual so named in such license in excess of one.

“Licenses and certificates of registration issued under the provisions of this chapter may be renewed by the filing of notices of intention on forms to be prescribed by the Commissioner and payment of the fees therefor.

“SEC. 374. The Commissioner, in consultation with the duly accredited associations representing the insurance industry, shall adopt and promulgate a code of conduct to promote integrity, honesty and ethical business practices among insurance agents, distributors and other intermediaries.

“TITLE 9

“BANCASSURANCE

“SEC. 375. The term bancassurance shall mean the presentation and sale to bank customers by an insurance company of its insurance products within the premises of the head office of such bank duly licensed by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas or any of its branches under such rules and regulations which the Commissioner and the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas may promulgate. To engage in bancassurance arrangement, a bank is not required to have equity ownership of the insurance company. No insurance company shall enter into a bancassurance arrangement unless it possesses all the requirements as may be prescribed by the Commissioner and the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

“No insurance product under this section, whether life or non-life, shall be issued or delivered unless in the form previously approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 376. Personnel tasked to present and sell insurance products within the bank premises shall be duly licensed by the Commissioner and shall be subject to the rules and regulations of this Act.

“SEC. 377. The Commissioner and the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas shall promulgate rules and regulations to effectively supervise the business of bancassurance.

“CHAPTER V

“SECURITY FUND

“SEC. 378. There is hereby created a fund to be known as the Security Fund which shall be used in the payment of allowed claims against an insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines remaining unpaid by reason of the insolvency of such company. The said Fund may also be used to reinsure the policy of the insolvent insurer in any solvent insurer authorized to do business in the Philippines as provided in Section 256. The Fund may likewise be used to pay insured claims which otherwise would not be compensable under the provisions of the policy. No payment from the Security Fund shall, however, be made to any person who owns or controls ten percent (10%) or more of the voting shares of stock of the insolvent insurer and no payment on any one claim shall exceed Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00).

“SEC. 379. Such Fund shall consist of all payments made to the Fund by insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines. Payments made by life insurance companies shall be treated separately from those made by non-life insurance companies and the corresponding fund shall be called Life Account and Non-Life Account, respectively, and shall be held and administered as such by the Commissioner in accordance with the provisions of this title. The Life Account shall be utilized exclusively for disbursements that refer to life insurance companies, while the Non-Life Account shall be utilized exclusively for disbursements that refer to non-life insurance companies.

“SEC. 380. All insurance companies doing business in the Philippines shall contribute to the Security Fund, Life or Non-Life Account, as the case may be, the aggregate amount of Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) for each Account. The contributions of the life insurance companies and of the non-life insurance companies shall be in direct proportion to the ratio between a particular life insurance company or a particular non-life insurance company’s net worth and the aggregate net worth of all life insurance companies or all non-life insurance companies, as the case may be, as shown in their latest financial statements approved by the Commissioner. This proportion applied to the Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) shall be the contribution of a particular company to the corresponding Account of the Security Fund.

“The amount of Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) in each Account shall be in the form of a revolving trust fund. The respective contributions of the companies shall remain as admitted assets in their books and any disbursement therefrom shall be deducted proportionately from the contributions of each company which will be allowed as deductions for income tax purposes. Any earnings of the Fund shall be turned over to the contributing companies in proportion to their contributions.

“In the case of disbursements of funds from the Fund as provided in the foregoing paragraph, the life and non-life companies, as the case may be, shall replenish the amount disbursed in direct proportion to the individual company’s net worth and the aggregate net worth of the life or non-life companies, as the case may be. However, in no case shall the Fund exceed the aggregate amount of Ten million pesos (P10,000,000.00), or Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) for each Account.

“Should the Fund, Life or Non-Life Account, as the case may be, be inadequate for a disbursement as provided for, then the Life or Non-Life companies, as the case may be, shall contribute to the Fund their respective shares in the proportion previously mentioned.

“SEC. 381. The Commissioner may adopt, amend, and enforce all reasonable rules and regulations necessary for the proper administration of the Fund and of the Accounts. In the event any insurer shall fail to make any payment required by this title, or that any payment made is incorrect, he shall have full authority to examine all the books and records of the insurer for the purpose of ascertaining the facts and shall determine the correct amount to be paid and may proceed in any court of competent jurisdiction to recover for the benefit of the Fund or of the Account concerned any sum shown to be due upon such examination and determination. Any insurer which fails to make any payment to the Fund or to the Account concerned when due, shall thereby forfeit to said Fund or Account concerned a penalty of five percent (5%) of the amount determined to be due as provided by this title, plus one percent (1%) of such amount for each month of delay or fraction thereof, after the expiration of the first month of such delay, but the Commissioner, if satisfied that the delay was excusable, may remit all or any part of such penalty. The Commissioner, in his discretion, may suspend or revoke the certificate of authority to do business in the Philippines of any insurance company which shall fail to comply with this title or to pay any penalty imposed in accordance therewith.

“SEC. 382. The Accounts created by this title shall be separate and apart from each other and from any other fund. The Treasurer of the Philippines shall be the custodian of the Life Account and Non-Life Account of the Security Fund; and all disbursements from any Account shall be made by the Treasurer of the Philippines upon vouchers signed by the Commissioner or his deputy, as hereinafter provided. The moneys of said Account may be invested by the Commissioner only in bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities. The Commissioner may sell any of the securities in which an Account is invested, if advisable, for its proper administration or in the best interest of such Account.

“SEC. 383. Payments from either the Life Insurance Account or Non-Life Account, as the case may be, shall be made by the Treasurer of the Philippines to the Commissioner, upon the authority of appropriate certificate filed with him by the Commissioner acting in such capacity.

“SEC. 384. The Commissioner may, in his discretion, designate or appoint a duly authorized representative or representatives to appear and defend before any court or other body or official having jurisdiction any or all actions or proceedings against principals or assureds on insurance policies or contracts issued to them where the insurer has become insolvent or unable to meet its insurance obligations. The Commissioner shall have, as of the date of insolvency of such insurer or as of the date of its inability to meet its insurance obligations, only the rights which such insurer would have had if it had not become insolvent or unable to meet its insurance obligations. For the purpose of this title, the Commissioner shall have power to employ such counsel, clerks and assistants as he may deem necessary.

“SEC. 385. The expense of administering an Account shall be paid out of the Account concerned. The Commissioner shall serve as administrator of the Fund and of the Accounts without additional compensation, but may be allowed and paid from the Account concerned expenses incurred in the performance of his duties in connection with said Account. The compensation of those persons employed by the Commissioner shall be deemed administration expense payable from the Account concerned. The Commissioner shall include in his annual report to the Secretary of Finance a statement of the expenses of administration of the Fund and of the Life Account and Non-Life Account for the preceding year.

“CHAPTER VI

“COMPULSORY MOTOR VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE

“SEC. 386. For purposes of this chapter:

“(a) Motor Vehicle is any vehicle as defined in Section 3, paragraph (a) of Republic Act No. 4136, otherwise known as the ‘Land Transportation and Traffic Code’.

“(b) Passenger is any fare paying person being transported and conveyed in and by a motor vehicle for transportation of passengers for compensation, including persons expressly authorized by law or by the vehicle’s operator or his agents to ride without fare.

“(c) Third party is any person other than a passenger as defined in this section and shall also exclude a member of the household, or a member of the family within the second degree of consanguinity or affinity, of a motor vehicle owner or land transportation operator, as likewise defined herein, or his employee in respect of death, bodily injury, or damage to property arising out of and in the course of employment.

“(d) Owner or motor vehicle owner means the actual legal owner of a motor vehicle, in whose name such vehicle is duly registered with the Land Transportation Office;

“(e) Land transportation operator means the owner or owners of motor vehicles for transportation of passengers for compensation, including school buses.

“(f) Insurance policy or Policy refers to a contract of insurance against passenger and third-party liability for death or bodily injuries and damage to property arising from motor vehicle accidents.

“SEC. 387. It shall be unlawful for any land transportation operator or owner of a motor vehicle to operate the same in the public highways unless there is in force in relation thereto a policy of insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond issued in accordance with the provisions of this chapter to indemnify the death, bodily injury, and/or damage to property of a third-party or passenger, as the case may be, arising from the use thereof.

“SEC. 388. The Commissioner shall furnish the Land Transportation Office with a list of insurance companies authorized to issue the policy of insurance or surety bond required by this chapter.

“SEC. 389. The Land Transportation Office shall not allow the registration or renewal of registration of any motor vehicle without first requiring from the land transportation operator or motor vehicle owner concerned the presentation and filing of a substantiating documentation in a form approved by the Commissioner evidencing that the policy of insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond required by this chapter is in effect.

“SEC. 390. Every land transportation operator and every owner of a motor vehicle shall, before applying for the registration or renewal of registration of any motor vehicle, at his option, either secure an insurance policy or surety bond issued by any insurance company authorized by the Commissioner or make a cash deposit in such amount as herein required as limit of liability for purposes specified in Section 387.

“(a) In the case of a land transportation operator, the insurance guaranty in cash or surety bond shall cover liability for death or bodily injuries of third-parties and/or passengers arising out of the use of such vehicle in the amount not less than Twelve thousand pesos (P12,000.00) per passenger or third-party and an amount, for each of such categories, in any one accident of not less than that set forth in the following scale:

“(1) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of twenty-six (26) or more passengers: Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00);

“(2) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of from twelve (12) to twenty-five (25) passengers: Forty thousand pesos (P40,000.00);

“(3) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of from six (6) to eleven (11) passengers: Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000.00);

“(4) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of five (5) or less passengers: Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00) multiplied by the authorized capacity.

“Provided, however, That such cash deposit made to, or surety bond posted with, the Commissioner shall be resorted to by him in cases of accidents the indemnities for which to third-parties and/or passengers are not settled accordingly by the land transportation operator and, in that event, the said cash deposit shall be replenished or such surety bond shall be restored within sixty (60) days after impairment or expiry, as the case may be, by such land transportation operator, otherwise, he shall secure the insurance policy required by this chapter. The aforesaid cash deposit may be invested by the Commissioner in readily marketable government bonds, and/or securities.

“(b) In the case of an owner of a motor vehicle, the insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond shall cover liability for death or injury to third-parties in an amount not less than that set forth in the following scale in any one accident:

“(1) Private Cars

“(i) Bantam: Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00);

“(ii) Light: Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00); and

“(iii) Heavy: Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000.00).

“(2) Other Private Vehicles

“(i) Tricycles, motorcycles and scooters: Twelve thousand pesos (P12,000.00);

“(ii) Vehicles with an unladen weight of 2,600 kilos or less: Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00);

“(iii) Vehicles with an unladen weight of between 2,601 kilos and 3,930 kilos: Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000.00); and

“(iv) Vehicles with an unladen weight over 3,930 kilos: Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00).

“The Commissioner may, if warranted, set forth schedule of indemnities for the payment of claims for death or bodily injuries with the coverages set forth herein.

“SEC. 391. Any claim for death or injury to any passenger or third-party pursuant to the provisions of this chapter shall be paid without the necessity of proving fault or negligence of any kind: Provided, That for purposes of this section:

“(a) The total indemnity in respect of any person shall not be less than Fifteen thousand pesos (P15,000.00);

“(b) The following proofs of loss, when submitted under oath, shall be sufficient evidence to substantiate the claim:

“(1) Police report of accident; and

“(2) Death certificate and evidence sufficient to establish the proper payee; or

“(3) Medical report and evidence of medical or hospital disbursement in respect of which refund is claimed;

“(c) Claim may be made against one motor vehicle only. In the case of an occupant of a vehicle, claim, shall lie against the insurer of the vehicle in which the occupant is riding, mounting or dismounting from. In any other case, claim shall lie against the insurer of the directly offending vehicle. In all cases, the right of the party paying the claim to recover against the owner of the vehicle responsible for the accident shall be maintained.

“SEC. 392. No land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle shall be unreasonably denied the policy of insurance or surety bond required by this chapter by the insurance companies authorized to issue the same, otherwise, the Land Transportation Office shall require from said land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle, in lieu of a policy of insurance or surety bond, a certificate that a cash deposit has been made with the Commissioner in such amount required as limits of indemnity in Section 390 to answer for the passenger and/or third-party liability of such land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle.

“No insurance company may issue the policy of insurance or surety bond required under this chapter unless so authorized under existing laws.

“The authority to engage in the casualty and/or surety lines of business of an insurance company that refuses to issue or renew, without just cause, the insurance policy or surety bond therein required shall be withdrawn immediately.

“SEC. 393. No cancellation of the policy shall be valid unless written notice thereof is given to the land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle and to the Land Transportation Office at least fifteen (15) days prior to the intended effective date thereof. Upon receipt of such notice, the Land Transportation Office, unless it receives evidence of a new valid insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond as prescribed in this chapter, or an endorsement of revival of the cancelled one, shall order the immediate confiscation of the plates of the motor vehicle covered by such cancelled policy. The same may be reissued only upon presentation of a new insurance policy or that a guaranty in cash or surety bond has been made or posted with the Commissioner and which meets the requirements of this chapter, or an endorsement or revival of the cancelled one.

“SEC. 394. If the cancellation of the policy or surety bond is contemplated by the land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle, he shall, before the policy or surety bond ceases to be effective, secure a similar policy of insurance or surety bond to replace the policy or surety bond to be cancelled or make a cash deposit in sufficient amount with the Commissioner, and without any gap, file the required documentation with the Land Transportation Office, and notify the insurance company concerned of the cancellation of its policy or surety bond.

“SEC. 395. In case of change of owner ship of a motor vehicle, or change of the engine of an insured vehicle, there shall be no need of issuing a new policy until the next date of registration or renewal of registration of such vehicle, and: Provided, That the insurance company shall agree to continue the policy, such change of ownership or such change of the engine shall be indicated in a corresponding endorsement by the insurance company concerned, and a signed duplicate of such endorsement shall, within a reasonable time, be filed with the Land Transportation Office.

“SEC. 396. In the settlement and payment of claims, the indemnity shall not be availed of by any accident victim or claimant as an instrument of enrichment by reason of an accident, but as an assistance or restitution insofar as can fairly be ascertained.

“SEC. 397. Any person having any claim upon the policy issued pursuant to this chapter shall, without any unnecessary delay, present to the insurance company concerned a written notice of claim setting forth the nature, extent and duration of the injuries sustained as certified by a duly licensed physician. Notice of claim must be filed within six (6) months from the date of accident, otherwise, the claim shall be deemed waived. Action or suit for recovery of damage due to loss or injury must be brought, in proper cases, with the Commissioner or the courts within one (1) year from denial of the claim, otherwise, the claimant’s right of action shall prescribe.

“SEC. 398. The insurance company concerned shall forthwith ascertain the truth and extent of the claim and make payment within five (5) working days after reaching an agreement. If no agreement is reached, the insurance company shall pay only the no-fault indemnity provided in Section 391 without prejudice to the claimant from pursuing his claim further, in which case, he shall not be required or compelled by the insurance company to execute any quit claim or document releasing it from liability under the policy of insurance or surety bond issued.

“In case of any dispute in the enforcement of the provisions of any policy issued pursuant to this chapter, the adjudication of such dispute shall be within the original and exclusive jurisdiction of the Commissioner, subject to the limitations provided in Section 439.

“SEC. 399. It shall be unlawful for a land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle to require his or its drivers or other employees to contribute in the payment of premiums.

“SEC. 400. No government office or agency having the duty of implementing the provisions of this chapter nor any official or employee thereof shall act as agent in procuring the insurance policy or surety bond provided for herein. The commission of an agent procuring the said policy or bond shall in no case exceed ten percent (10%) of the amount of the premiums therefor.

“SEC. 401. Any land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle or any other person violating any of the provisions of the preceding sections shall be punished by a fine of not less than Five hundred pesos (P500.00) and/or imprisonment for not more than six (6) months. The violation of Section 390 by a land transportation operator shall be a sufficient cause for the revocation of the certificate of public convenience issued by the Land Transportation Franchising and Regulatory Board covering the vehicle concerned.

“SEC. 402. Whenever any violation of the provisions of this chapter is committed by a corporation or association, or by a government office or entity, the executive officer or officers of said corporation, association or government office or entity who shall have knowingly permitted, or failed to prevent, said violation shall be held liable as principals.

“CHAPTER VII

“MUTUAL BENEFIT ASSOCIATIONS AND TRUSTS FOR CHARITABLE USES

“TITLE l

“MUTUAL BENEFIT ASSOCIATIONS

“SEC. 403. Any society, association or corporation, without capital stock, formed or organized not for profit but mainly for the purpose of paying sick benefits to members, or of furnishing financial support to members while out of employment, or of paying to relatives of deceased members of fixed or any sum of money, irrespective of whether such aim or purpose is carried out by means of fixed dues or assessments collected regularly from the members, or of providing, by the issuance of certificates of insurance, payment of its members of accident or life insurance benefits out of such fixed and regular dues or assessments, but in no case shall include any society, association, or corporation with such mutual benefit features and which shall be carried out purely from voluntary contributions collected not regularly and/or no fixed amount from whomsoever may contribute, shall be known as a mutual benefit association within the intent of this Code.

“Any society, association, or corporation principally organized as a labor union shall be governed by the Labor Code notwithstanding any mutual benefit feature provisions in its charter as incident to its organization.

“In no case shall a mutual benefit association be organized and authorized to transact business as a charitable or benevolent organization, and whenever it has this feature as incident to its existence, the corresponding charter provision shall be revised to conform with the provision of this section. Mutual benefit association, already licensed to transact business as such on the date this Code becomes effective, having charitable or benevolent feature shall abandon such incidental purpose upon effectivity of this Code if they desire to continue operating as such mutual benefit associations.

“SEC. 404. A mutual benefit association, before it may transact as such, must first secure a license from the Commissioner. The application for such license shall be filed with the Commissioner together with certified true copies of the articles of incorporation or the constitution and bylaws of the association, and all amendments thereto, and such other documents or testimonies as the Commissioner may require.

“No license shall be granted to a mutual benefit association until the Commissioner shall have been satisfied by such examination as he may make and such evidence as he may require that the association is qualified under existing laws to operate and transact business as such. The Commissioner may refuse to issue a license to any mutual benefit association if, in his judgment, such refusal will best promote the interest of the members of such association and of the people of this country. Any license issued shall expire on the last day of December of the third year following its issuance and, upon proper application, may be renewed if the association is continuing to comply with existing laws, rules and regulations, orders, instructions, rulings and decisions of the Commissioner. Every association receiving any such license shall be subject to the supervision of the Commissioner: Provided, That no such license shall be granted to any such association if such association has no actuary.

“SEC. 405. No mutual benefit association shall be issued a license to operate as such unless it has constituted and established a Guaranty Fund by depositing with the Commissioner an initial minimum amount of Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) in cash, or in government securities with a total value equal to such amount, to answer for any valid benefit claim of any of its members.

“All moneys received by the Commissioner for this purpose must be deposited by him in interest-bearing deposits with any bank or banks authorized to transact business in the Philippines for the account of the particular association constituting the Guaranty Fund.

“Any accrual to such fund, be it interest earned or dividend additions on moneys or securities so deposited, may, with the prior approval of the Commissioner, be withdrawn by the association if there is no pending benefit claim against it, including interest thereon or dividend additions thereto.

“The Commissioner, prior to or after licensing a mutual benefit association, may require such association to increase its Guaranty Fund from the initial minimum amount required to an amount equal to the capital investment required of an existing domestic insurance company under Section 209 of this Code.

“SEC. 406. Every mutual benefit association licensed to do business as such shall issue membership certificates to its members specifying the benefits to which such members are entitled.

“Such certificates, together with the articles of incorporation of the association or its constitution and bylaws, and all existing laws as may be pertinent shall constitute the agreement, as of the date of its issuance, between the association and the member. The membership certificate shall be in a form previously approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 407. A mutual benefit association may, by reinsurance agreement, cede in whole or in part any individual risk or risks under certificates of insurance issued by it, only to a life insurance company authorized to transact business or to a professional reinsurer authorized to accept life risks in the Philippines: Provided, That a copy of the draft of such reinsurance agreement shall be submitted to the Commissioner for his approval. The association may take credit for the reserves on such ceded risks to the extent reinsured.

“SEC. 408. The constitution or bylaws of a mutual benefit association must distinctly state the purpose for which dues and/or assessments are made and collected and the portion thereof which may be used for expenses.

“Death benefit and other relief funds shall be created and used exclusively for paying benefits due the members under their respective membership certificates. A general fund shall likewise be created and used for expenses of administration of the association.

“A mutual benefit association shall only maintain free and unassigned surplus of not more than twenty percent (20%) of its total liabilities as verified by the Commissioner. Any amount in excess shall be returned to the members by way of dividends, enhancing the equity value or providing benefits in kind and other relevant services. In addition, subject to the approval of the Commissioner, a mutual benefit association may allocate a portion for capacity building and research and development such as developing new products and services, upgrading and improving operating systems and equipment and continuing member education.

“SEC. 409. Every outstanding membership certificate must have an equity value equivalent to at least fifty percent (50%) of the total contributions collected thereon. The equity value only applies to basic life insurance product and excludes optional products.

“SEC. 410. Every mutual benefit association must accumulate and maintain, out of the periodic dues collected from its members, sufficient reserves for the payment of claims or obligations for which it shall hold funds in securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds of the Government of the Philippines, or any of its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, or in such other good securities as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“The reserve liability shall be established in accordance with actuarial procedures and shall be approved by the Commissioner.

“The articles of incorporation or the constitution and bylaws of a mutual benefit association must provide that if its reserve as to all or any class of certificates becomes impaired, its board of directors or trustees may require that there shall be paid by the members to the association the amount of the members’ equitable proportion of such deficiency as ascertained by said board and that if the payment be not made it shall stand as an indebtedness against the membership certificates of the defaulting members and draw interest not to exceed five percent (5%) per annum compounded annually.

“SEC. 411. A mutual benefit association may invest such portion of its funds as shall not be required to meet pending claims and other obligations in any of the classes of investments or types of securities in which life insurance companies doing business in the Philippines may invest.

“It may also grant loans to members on the security of a pledge or chattel mortgage of personal properties of the borrowers, or in the absence thereof, on the security of the membership certificate of the borrowing members, in which event such loan shall become a first lien on the proceeds thereof.

“SEC. 412. The Commissioner or any of his duly designated representatives, shall have the power of visitation, audit and examination into the affairs, financial condition, and methods of doing business of all mutual benefit associations, and he shall cause such examination to be made at least once every two (2) years or whenever it may be deemed proper and necessary. Free access to the books, records and documents of the association shall be accorded to the Commissioner, or to his representatives, in such manner that the Commissioner or his representatives may readily verify or determine the true affairs, financial condition, and method of doing business of such association. In the course of such examination, the Commissioner or his duly designated representatives shall have authority to administer oaths and take testimony or other evidence on any matter relating to the affairs of the association.

“All minutes of the proceedings of the board of directors or trustees of the association, and those of the regular or special meetings of the members, shall be taken, and a copy thereof, in English or in Pilipino, shall be submitted to the Commissioner’s representatives or examiners in the course of such examination.

“A copy of the findings of such examination, together with the recommendations of the Commissioner, shall be furnished the association for its information and compliance, and the same shall be taken up immediately in the meetings of the board of directors or trustees and of the members of the association.

“SEC. 413. Every mutual benefit association shall, annually on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year, render to the Commissioner an annual statement in such form and detail as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, signed and sworn to by the president, secretary, treasurer, and actuary of the association, showing the exact condition of its affairs on the preceding thirty-first day of December.

“SEC. 414. No money, aid or benefit to be paid, provided or tendered by any mutual benefit association, shall be liable to attachment, garnishment, or other process, or be seized, taken, appropriated, or applied by any legal or equitable process to pay any debt or liability of a member or beneficiary, or any other person who may have a right thereunder, either before or after payment.

“SEC. 415. Any member of a mutual benefit association shall have the right at all times to change the beneficiary or beneficiaries or add another beneficiary or other beneficiaries in accordance with the rules and regulations of the association unless he has expressly waived this right in the membership certificate. Every association may, under such rules as it may adopt, limit the scope of beneficiaries and provide that no beneficiary shall have or obtain any vested interest in the proceeds of any certificate until the certificate has become due and payable under the terms of the membership certificate.

“SEC. 416. Any chapter affiliate independently licensed as a mutual benefit association may consolidate or merge with any other similar chapter affiliate or with the mother association.

“SEC. 417. Any mutual benefit association may be converted into and licensed as a mutual life insurance company by complying with the requirements of the pertinent provisions of this Code and submitting the specific plan for such conversion to the Commissioner for his approval. Such plan, as approved, shall then be submitted to the members either in the regular meeting or in a special meeting called for the purpose for their adoption. The affirmative vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of all the members shall be necessary in order to consider such plan as adopted.

“No such conversion shall take effect unless and until approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 418. No mutual benefit association shall be dissolved without first notifying the Commissioner and furnishing him with a certified copy of the resolution authorizing the dissolution, duly adopted by the affirmative vote of two-thirds (2/3) of the members at a meeting called for that purpose, the financial statements as of the date of the resolution, and such other papers or documents as may be required by the Commissioner.

“No dissolution shall proceed until and unless approved by the Commissioner and all proceedings in connection therewith shall be witnessed and attested by his duly designated representative.

“No mutual benefit association shall be officially declared as dissolved until after the Commissioner so certifies that all outstanding claims against the association have been duly settled and liquidated.

“SEC. 419. The Commissioner shall, after notice and hearing, have the power either to suspend or revoke the license issued to a mutual benefit association if he finds that the association has:

“(a) Failed to comply with any provision of this Code;

“(b) Failed to comply with any other law or regulation obligatory upon it;

“(c) Failed to comply with any order, ruling, instruction, requirement or recommendation of the Commissioner;

“(d) Exceeded its power to the prejudice of its members;

“(e) Conducted its business fraudulently or hazardously;

“(f) Rendered its affairs and condition to one of insolvency; or

“(g) Failed to carry out its aims and purposes for which it was organized due to any cause.

“After receipt of the order from the Commissioner suspending or revoking the license, the association must immediately exert efforts to remove such cause or causes which brought about the order and, upon proper showing, may apply with the Commissioner for the lifting of the order and restoration or revival of the license so revoked or suspended.

“SEC. 420. For failure to remove such cause or causes which brought about the suspension or revocation of the license of a mutual benefit association, the Commissioner shall apply under this Code for an order from the proper court to liquidate such association.

“The provisions of Titles 14 and 15, Chapter III, pertaining to the appointment of a conservator and proceedings upon insolvency of an insurance company shall, insofar as practicable, apply to mutual benefit associations.

“SEC. 421. To secure the enforcement of any provision under this title, the Commissioner may issue such rules, rulings, instructions, orders and circulars.

“SEC. 422. The violation of any provision of this title shall subject the person violating or the officer of the association responsible therefor to a fine of not less than Ten thousand pesos (P10,000.00), or imprisonment of not exceeding three (3) years, or both such fine and imprisonment, at the discretion of the court.

“SEC. 423. All provisions of this Code governing life insurance companies and such other provisions whenever practicable and necessary, shall be applicable to mutual benefit associations.

“TITLE 2

“TRUSTS FOR CHARITABLE USES

“SEC. 424. The term trust for charitable uses, within the intent of this Code, shall include, all the real or personal properties or funds, as well as those acquired with the fruits or income therefrom or in exchange or substitution thereof, given to or received by any person, corporation, association, foundation, or entity, except the National Government, its instrumentalities or political subdivisions, for charitable, benevolent, educational, pious, religious, or other uses for the benefit of the public at large or a particular portion thereof or for the benefit of an indefinite number of persons.

“SEC. 425. The term trustee shall include any individual, corporation, association, foundation, or entity, except the National Government, its instrumentalities or political subdivisions, in charge of, or acting for, or concerned with the administration of, the trust referred to in the section immediately preceding and with the proper application of trust property.

“SEC. 426. The term trust property shall include all real or personal properties or funds pertaining to the trust as well as those acquired with the fruits or income therefrom or in exchange or substitution thereof.

“SEC. 427. All trustees shall, before entering in the performance of the duties of their trust, obtain a certificate of registration from the Commissioner. The registration shall expire on December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“All provisions of this Code governing mutual benefit associations and such other provisions herein, whenever practicable and necessary, shall be applicable to trusts for charitable uses.

“SEC. 428. The treasurer of a charitable trust shall file a fidelity bond in the amount commensurate with the value of the trust property in his custody, as may be determined by the Commissioner.

“CHAPTER VIII

“TRUST BUSINESS IN GENERAL

“SEC. 429. An insurance company may engage in limited trust business, consisting of managing funds pertaining only to retirement and pre-need plans, provided it has secured a license to do so from the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas. This trust business shall be separate and distinct from the general business of the insurance company and shall be subject to rules and regulations as may be promulgated by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas in consultation with the Commissioner.

“CHAPTER IX

“REGISTRATION, RESPONSIBILITIES AND OVERSIGHT OF SELF-REGULATORY ORGANIZATIONS

“SEC 430. The Commissioner shall have the power to register as a self-regulatory organization, or otherwise grant licenses, and to regulate, supervise, examine, suspend or otherwise discontinue, as a condition for the operation of organizations whose operations are related to or connected with the insurance market such as, but not limited to, associations of insurance companies, whether life or non-life, reinsurers, actuaries, agents, brokers, dealers, mutual benefit associations, trusts, rating agencies, and other persons regulated by the Commissioner, which are engaged in the business regulated by this Code.

“The Commissioner may prescribe rules and regulations which are necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of investors to govern self-regulatory organizations and other organizations licensed or regulated pursuant to the authority granted hereunder including, but not limited to, the requirement of cooperation within and among all participants in the insurance market to ensure transparency and facilitate exchange of information.

“SEC. 431. An association cannot be registered as a self-regulatory organization unless the Commissioner determines that:

“(a) The association is so organized and has the capacity to be able to carry out the purposes of this Code and to comply with, and to enforce compliance by its members and persons associated with its members, with the provisions of this Code, the rules and regulations thereunder, and the rules of the association.

“(b) The rules of the association, notwithstanding anything in the Corporation Code to the contrary, provide the following:

“(1) Qualifications and the disqualifications on membership of the association;

“(2) A fair representation of its members to serve on the board of directors of the association and the administration of its affairs, and that any natural person associated with a juridical entity that is a member shall also be deemed to be a member for this purpose;

“(3) The president of the association and at least two (2) independent directors as members of the board of directors of the association;

“(4) Equitable allocation of reasonable dues, fees, and other charges among members and other persons using any facility or system which the association operates or controls;

“(5) The prevention of fraudulent and manipulative acts and practices to protect the insuring public and the promotion of just and equitable principles of business;

“(6) Members and persons associated with its members subject to discipline for violation of any provision of this Code, the rules or regulations thereunder, or the rules of the association;

“(7) Fair procedure for the disciplining of members and persons associated with members; and

“(8) The prohibition or limitation of access to services offered by the association or a member thereof.

“SEC. 432. A self-regulatory organization may examine and verify the qualifications of an applicant to become a member in accordance with procedures established by the rules of the association.

“A self-regulatory organization shall deny membership or condition the membership of an entity, if it does not meet the standards of financial responsibility, operational capability, training, experience, or competence that are prescribed by the rules of the association; or has engaged, and there is a reasonable likelihood it will again engage, in acts or practices inconsistent with just and equitable principles of fair trade.

“A self-regulatory organization may deny membership to an entity not engaged in a type of business in which the rules of the association require members to be engaged.

“SEC. 433. Upon the filing of an application for registration as a self-regulatory organization under this title, the Commissioner shall have ninety (90) days within which to either grant registration or institute a proceeding to determine whether registration should be denied. In the event proceedings are instituted, the Commissioner shall have two hundred seventy (270) days within which to conclude such proceedings at which time he shall, by order, grant or deny such registration.

“SEC. 434. Every self-regulatory organization shall comply with the provisions of this Code, the rules and regulations thereunder, and its own rules, and enforce compliance therewith by its members, persons associated with its members or its participants, notwithstanding any provision of the Corporation Code to the contrary.

“SEC. 435. Each self-regulatory organization shall submit to the Commissioner for prior approval any proposed rule or amendment thereto, together with a concise statement of the reason and effect of the proposed amendment.

“Within sixty (60) days after submission of a proposed amendment, the Commissioner shall, by order, approve the proposed amendment. Otherwise, the same may be made effective by the self-regulatory organization.

“In the event of an emergency requiring action for the protection of the insuring public, a self-regulatory organization may put a proposed amendment into effect summarily: Provided, however, That a copy of the same shall be immediately submitted to the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner is further authorized, if after making appropriate request in writing to a self-regulatory organization that such organization effect on its own behalf specified changes in its rules and practices and, after due notice and hearing, it determines that such changes have not been effected, and that such changes are necessary, by rule or regulation or by order, may alter, abrogate or supplement the rules of such self-regulatory organization insofar as necessary or appropriate to effect such changes in respect of such matters as:

“(a) Safeguards in respect of the financial responsibility of members and adequate provision against the evasion of financial responsibility through the use of corporate forms or special partnerships;

“(b) The supervision of market practices;

“(c) The manner, method and place of soliciting business;

“(d) The fixing of reasonable rates of fees, interest, listing and other charges, but not rates of commission; and self-regulatory organization; and

“(e) The supervision, auditing and disciplining of members.

“In addition to the general powers of the Commissioner over the entities under supervision, the Commissioner, after due notice and hearing, is authorized, in the public interest and to protect the insuring public:

“(1) To suspend for a period not exceeding twelve (12) months or to revoke the registration of a self-regulatory organization, or to censure or impose limitations on the activities, functions and operations of such self-regulatory organization, if the Commission finds that such a self-regulatory organization has willfully violated or is unable to comply with any provision of this Code or of the rules and regulations thereunder, or its own rules, or has failed to enforce compliance therewith by a member of, person associated with a member, or a participant in such self-regulatory organization;

“(2) To expel from a self-regulatory organization any member thereof or any participant therein who is found to have willfully violated any provision of this Code or suspend for a period not exceeding twelve (12) months for violation of any provision of this Code or any other law administered by the Commission, or the rules and regulations thereunder, or effected, directly or indirectly, any transaction for any person who, such member or participant had reason to believe, was violating in respect of such transaction any of such provisions; and

“(3) To remove from office or censure any officer or director of a self-regulatory organization if it finds that such officer or director has violated any provision of this Code, any other law administered by the Commissioner, the rules or regulations thereunder and the rules of such self-regulatory organization, or has abused his authority, or without reasonable justification or excuse has failed to enforce compliance with any of such provisions.

“SEC. 436. (a) A self-regulatory organization is authorized to discipline a member of or participant in such self-regulatory organization, or any person associated with a member, including suspending or expelling such member or participant, or suspending or barring such person from being associated with a member, if engaged in acts or practices inconsistent with just and equitable principles of fairness or in willful violation of any provision of this Code, any other law administered by the Commission, the rules or regulations thereunder, or the rules of the self-regulatory organization. In any disciplinary proceeding by a self-regulatory organization (other than a summary proceeding pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section) the self-regulatory organization shall bring specific charges, provide notice to the person charged, afford the person charged with an opportunity to defend against the charges, and keep a record of the proceedings. A determination to impose a disciplinary sanction shall be supported by a written statement of the offense, a summary of the evidence presented and a statement of the sanction imposed.

“(b) A self-regulatory organization may summarily:

“(1) Suspend a member, participant or person associated with a member who has been or is expelled or suspended from any other self-regulatory organization; or

“(2) Suspend a member who the self-regulatory organization finds to be in such financial or operating difficulty that the member or participant cannot be permitted to continue to do business as a member with safety to investors, creditors, other members, participants or the self-regulatory organization: Provided, That the self-regulatory organization immediately notifies the Commission of the action taken. Any person aggrieved by a summary action pursuant to this paragraph shall be promptly afforded an opportunity for a hearing by the association in accordance with the preceding paragraph. The Commissioner, by order, may stay a summary action on his own or upon application by any person aggrieved thereby, if the Commissioner determines summarily or after due notice and hearing (which hearing may consist solely of the submission of affidavits or presentation of oral arguments), that a stay is consistent with the public interest and the protection of the insuring public.

“(c) A self-regulatory organization shall promptly notify the Commission of any disciplinary sanction on any member thereof or participant therein, any denial of membership or participation in such organization, or the imposition of any disciplinary sanction on a person associated with a member or a bar of such person from becoming so associated. Within thirty (30) days after such notice, any aggrieved person may appeal to the Commissioner from, or the Commissioner on its own motion within such period, may institute review of, the decision of the self-regulatory organization, at the conclusion of which, after due notice and hearing (which may consist solely of review of the record before the self-regulatory organization), the Commissioner shall affirm, modify or set aside the sanction. In such proceeding, the Commissioner shall determine whether the aggrieved person has engaged or omitted to engage in the acts and practices as found by the self-regulatory organization, whether such acts and practices constitute willful violations of this Code, any other law administered by the Commission, the rules or regulations thereunder, or the rules of the self-regulatory organization as specified by such organization, whether such provisions were applied in a manner consistent with the purposes of this Code, and whether, with due regard for the public interest and the protection of investors, the sanction is excessive or oppressive.

“CHAPTER X

“THE INSURANCE COMMISSIONER

“TITLE l

“ADMINISTRATIVE AND ADJUDICATORY POWERS

“SEC. 437. The Insurance Commissioner shall be appointed by the President of the Republic of the Philippines for a term of six (6) years without reappointment and who shall serve as such until the successor shall have been appointed and qualified. If the Insurance Commissioner is removed before the expiration of his term of office, the reason for the removal must be published.

“The Insurance Commissioner shall have the duty to see that all laws relating to insurance, insurance companies and other insurance matters, mutual benefit associations, and trusts for charitable uses are faithfully executed and to perform the duties imposed upon him by this Code, and shall, notwithstanding any existing laws to the contrary, have sole and exclusive authority to regulate the issuance and sale of variable contracts as defined in Section 238 hereof and to provide for the licensing of persons selling such contracts, and to issue such reasonable rules and regulations governing the same.

“The Commissioner may issue such rulings, instructions, circulars, orders and decisions as may be deemed necessary to secure the enforcement of the provisions of this Code, to ensure the efficient regulation of the insurance industry in accordance with global best practices and to protect the insuring public. Except as otherwise specified, decisions made by the Commissioner shall be appealable to the Secretary of Finance.

“In addition to the foregoing, the Commissioner shall have the following powers and functions:

“(a) Formulate policies and recommendations on issues concerning the insurance industry, advise Congress and other government agencies on all aspects of the insurance industry and propose legislation and amendments thereto;

“(b) Approve, reject, suspend or revoke licenses or certificates of registration provided for by this Code;

“(c) Impose sanctions for the violation of laws and the rules, regulations and orders issued pursuant thereto;

“(d) Prepare, approve, amend or repeal rules, regulations and orders, and issue opinions and provide guidance on and supervise compliance with such rules, regulations and orders;

“(e) Enlist the aid and support of, and/or deputize any and all enforcement agencies of the government in the implementation of its powers and functions under this Code;

“(f) Issue cease and desist orders to prevent fraud or injury to the insuring public;

“(g) Punish for contempt of the Commissioner, both direct and indirect, in accordance with the pertinent provisions of and penalties prescribed by the Rules of Court;

“(h) Compel the officers of any registered insurance corporation or association to call meetings of stockholders or members thereof under its supervision;

“(i) Issue subpoena duces tecum and summon witnesses to appear in any proceeding of the Commission and, in appropriate cases, order the examination, search and seizure of all documents, papers, files and records, tax returns, and books of accounts of any entity or person under investigation as may be necessary for the proper disposition of the cases before it, subject to the provisions of existing laws;

“(j) Suspend or revoke, after proper notice and hearing, the license or certificate of authority of any entity or person under its regulation, upon any of the grounds provided by law;

“(k) Conduct an examination to determine compliance with laws and regulations if the circumstances so warrant as determined by appropriate rules and regulations;

“(l) Investigate not oftener than once a year from the last date of examination to determine whether an institution is conducting its business on a safe and sound basis: Provided, That, the deficiencies/irregularities found by or discovered by an audit shall be immediately addressed;

“(m) Inquire into the solvency and liquidity of the institutions under its supervision and enforce prompt corrective action;

“(n) To retain and utilize, in addition to its annual budget, all fees, charges and other income derived from the regulation of insurance companies and other supervised persons or entities;

“(o) To fix and assess fees, charges and penalties as the Commissioner may find reasonable in the exercise of regulation; and

“(p) Exercise such other powers as may be provided by law as well as those which may be implied from, or which are necessary or incidental to the express powers granted the Commission to achieve the objectives and purposes of this Code.

“The Commission shall indemnify the Commissioner, Deputy Commissioner, and other officials of the Commission, including personnel performing supervision and examination functions, for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by such persons in connection with any civil or criminal actions, suits or proceedings to which they may be made a party to by the reason of the performance of their duties and functions, unless they are finally adjudged in such actions, suits or proceedings to be liable for negligence or misconduct.

“In the event of settlement or compromise, indemnification shall be provided only in connection with such matters covered by the settlement as to which the Commission is advised by external counsel that the persons to be indemnified did not commit any negligence or misconduct:

“The costs and expenses incurred in defending the aforementioned action, suit or proceeding may be paid by the Commission in advance of the final disposition of such action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of the Commissioner, Deputy Commissioner, officer or employee to repay the amount advanced should it ultimately be determined by the Commission that the person is not entitled to be indemnified.

“SEC. 438. In addition to the administrative sanctions provided elsewhere in this Code, the Insurance Commissioner is hereby authorized, at his discretion, to impose upon insurance companies, their directors and/or officers and/or agents, for any willful failure or refusal to comply with, or violation of any provision of this Code, or any order, instruction, regulation, or ruling of the Insurance Commissioner, or any commission or irregularities, and/or conducting business in an unsafe or unsound manner as may be determined by the Insurance Commissioner, the following:

“(a) Fines not less than Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00) and not more than Two hundred thousand pesos (P200,000.00); and

“(b) Suspension, or after due hearing, removal of directors and/or officers and/or agents.

“SEC. 439. The Commissioner shall have the power to adjudicate claims and complaints involving any loss, damage or liability for which an insurer may be answerable under any kind of policy or contract of insurance, or for which such insurer may be liable under a contract of suretyship, or for which a reinsurer may be sued under any contract of reinsurance it may have entered into; or for which a mutual benefit association may be held liable under the membership certificates it has issued to its members, where the amount of any such loss, damage or liability, excluding interest, cost and attorney’s fees, being claimed or sued upon any kind of insurance, bond, reinsurance contract, or membership certificate does not exceed in any single claim Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00).

“The power of the Commissioner does not cover the relationship between the insurance company and its agents/brokers but is limited to adjudicating claims and complaints filed by the insured against the insurance company.

“The Commissioner may authorize any officer or group of officers under him to conduct investigation, inquiry and/or hearing and decide claims and he may issue rules governing the conduct of adjudication and resolution of cases. The Rules of Court shall have suppletory application.

“The party filing an action pursuant to the provisions of this section thereby submits his person to the jurisdiction of the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall acquire jurisdiction over the person of the impleaded party or parties in accordance with and pursuant to the provisions of the Rules of Court.

“The authority to adjudicate granted to the Commissioner under this section shall be concurrent with that of the civil courts, but the filing of a complaint with the Commissioner shall preclude the civil courts from taking cognizance of a suit involving the same subject matter.

“Any decision, order or ruling rendered by the Commissioner after a hearing shall have the force and effect of a judgment. Any party may appeal from a final order, ruling or decision of the Commissioner by filing with the Commissioner within thirty (30) days from receipt of copy of such order, ruling or decision a notice of appeal to the Court of Appeals in the manner provided for in the Rules of Court for appeals from the Regional Trial Court to the Court of Appeals.

“For the purpose of any proceeding under this section, the Commissioner, or any officer thereof designated by him is empowered to administer oaths and affirmation, subpoena witnesses, compel their attendance, take evidence, and require the production of any books, papers, documents, or contracts or other records which are relevant or material to the inquiry.

“A full and complete record shall be kept of all proceedings had before the Commissioner, or the officers thereof designated by him, and all testimony shall be taken down and transcribed by a stenographer appointed by the Commissioner.

“In order to promote party autonomy in the resolution of cases, the Commissioner shall establish a system for resolving cases through the use of alternative dispute resolution.

“TITLE 2

“FEES AND OTHER SOURCES OF FUNDS

“SEC. 440. (a) For the issuance or renewal of certificates of authority, licenses and certificates of registration, pursuant to pertinent provisions of this Code, the Commissioner shall collect and receive fees which shall be not less than the following:

“For each certificate of authority issued to an insurance company doing business in the Philippines, Two hundred pesos (P200.00).

“For each special certificate of authority issued to a servicing insurance company, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each license issued to a general agent of an insurance company, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each license issued to an insurance agent, Twenty-five pesos (P25.00).

“For each license issued to an agent of variable contract policy, Twenty-five pesos (P25.00).

“For each license issued to an insurance broker, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each license issued to a reinsurance broker, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each license issued to an insurance adjuster, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to an actuary, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to a resident agent, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each license issued to a rating organization, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to a non-life company underwriter, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each license issued to a mutual benefit association, Ten pesos (P10.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to a trust for charitable uses, Ten pesos (P10.00).

“All certificates of authority and all other licenses, as well as all certificates of registration, issued to any person, partnership, association or corporation under the pertinent provisions of this Code for which no expiration date has been prescribed, shall expire on the last day of December of the third year from its issuance and shall be renewed upon application therefor and payment of the corresponding fee, if the licensee or holder of such license or certificate is continuing to comply with all the applicable provisions of existing laws, and of rules, instructions, orders and decisions of the Commissioner.

“(b) For the filing of the annual statement referred to in Section 229, the Commissioner shall collect and receive from the insurance company so filing a fee of not less than Five hundred pesos (P500.00): Provided, That a fine of not less than One hundred pesos (P100.00) shall be imposed and collected by the Commissioner for each week of delay, or any fraction thereof, in the filing of the annual statement.

“For the filing of annual statement referred to in Section 413, the Commissioner shall collect and receive from the mutual benefit association so filing a fee of not less than Ten pesos (P10.00): Provided, That a fine of not less than Ten pesos (P10.00) shall be imposed and collected by the Commissioner for each week of delay, or any fraction thereof, in the filing of the annual statement.

“(c) For the examination prescribed in Section 253, the Commissioner shall collect and receive fees according to the amount of its total assets, in the case of a domestic company, or of its assets in the Philippines, in the case of a foreign company, not less than the amount as follows:

“(1) Two million pesos or more but less than Four million pesos, Four hundred pesos (P400.00);

“(2) Four million pesos or more but less than Six million pesos, Eight hundred pesos (P800.00);

“(3) Six million pesos or more but less than Eight million pesos, One thousand two hundred pesos (P1,200.00);

“(4) Eight million pesos or more but less than Ten million pesos, One thousand six hundred pesos (P1,600.00);

“(5) Ten million pesos or more, Two thousand pesos (P2,000.00);

“Provided, That if the said examination is made in places outside the Metropolitan Manila area, besides these fees, the Commissioner shall require of the company examined the payment of the actual and necessary travelling and subsistence expenses of the examiner or examiners concerned.

“For the examination prescribed in Section 412, the Commissioner shall collect and receive a minimum fee of not less than One hundred pesos (P100.00) from the mutual benefit association examined: Provided, That if such association has total assets of more than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000.00), an additional fee of not less than Ten pesos (P10.00) for every Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00) in excess thereof shall be imposed:

“(d) For the filing of an application to withdraw from the Philippines under Title 18, the Commissioner shall collect and receive from the foreign company so withdrawing a fee of not less than One thousand pesos (P1,000.00).

“(e) The Commissioner may fix and collect fees or charges for documents, transcripts, or other materials which may be furnished by him not in excess of reasonable cost.

“SEC. 441. The Commissioner, in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Department of Budget and Management and other relevant regulatory agencies, shall source the salary, allowances and other expenses from the retained amount of the fees, charges, penalties and other income from the regulation of insurance companies and other covered persons and entities, and from the Insurance Fund, which is created out of the proceeds of taxes on insurance premiums mentioned in Section 255 of the National Internal Revenue Code, as amended.

“MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

“SEC. 442. Any person, company or corporation subject to the supervision and control of the Commissioner who violates any provision of this Code, for which no penalty is provided, shall be deemed guilty of a penal offense, and upon conviction be punished by a fine not exceeding Two hundred thousand pesos (P200,000.00) or imprisonment of six (6) months, or both, at the discretion of the court.

“If the offense is committed by a company or corporation, the officers, directors, or other persons responsible for its operation, management, or administration, unless it can be proved that they have taken no part in the commission of the offense, shall likewise be guilty of a penal offense, and upon conviction be punished by a fine not exceeding Two hundred thousand pesos (P200,000.00) or imprisonment of six (6) months, or both, at the discretion of the court.

“SEC. 443. All criminal actions for the violation of any of the provisions of this Code shall prescribe after three (3) years from the discovery of such violation: Provided, That such actions shall in any event prescribe after ten (10) years from the commission of such violation.

“SEC. 444. Any person, partnership, association or corporation heretofore authorized, licensed or registered by the Commissioner shall be deemed to have been authorized, licensed or registered under the provisions of this Code and shall be governed by the provisions thereof: Provided, however, That where any such person, partnership, association or corporation is affected by the new requirements of this Code, said person, partnership, association or corporation shall, unless otherwise herein provided, be given a period of one (1) year from the effectivity of this Code within which to comply with the same.

“SEC. 445. Transitory Provision. – Renewal of existing licenses, certificates of authority or accreditation which will expire on June 30, 2013 shall be valid until December 31, 2015. Thereafter, renewal shall be filed on the last day of December every third year following the date of expiry of the license, certificate of authority or accreditation.

“SEC. 446. Repealing Clause. – Except as expressly provided by this Code, all laws, decrees, orders, rules and regulations or parts thereof, inconsistent with any provision of this Code shall be deemed repealed, amended or modified accordingly.

“SEC. 447. Separability Clause. – If any provision of this Code or any part hereof be declared invalid or unconstitutional, the remainder of the law or other provisions not otherwise affected shall remain valid and subsisting.

“SEC. 448. This Code shall take effect fifteen (15) days following its publication in a newspaper of general circuation.”

[codalsetal]

Rules 110-127: Revised Rules of Criminal Procedure

THE REVISED RULES OF CRIMINAL PROCEDURE

(As amended, December 1, 2000)

RULE 110

Prosecution of Offenses

Section 1. Institution of criminal actions. — Criminal actions shall be instituted as follows:

(a) For offenses where a preliminary investigation is required pursuant to section 1 of Rule 112, by filing the complaint with the proper officer for the purpose of conducting the requisite preliminary investigation.

(b) For all other offenses, by filing the complaint or information directly with the Municipal Trial Courts and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts, or the complaint with the office of the prosecutor. In Manila and other chartered cities, the complaint shall be filed with the office of the prosecutor unless otherwise provided in their charters.

The institution of the criminal action shall interrupt the running period of prescription of the offense charged unless otherwise provided in special laws. (1a)

Section 2. The Complaint or information. — The complaint or information shall be in writing, in the name of the People of the Philippines and against all persons who appear to be responsible for the offense involved. (2a)

Section 3. Complaint defined. — A complaint is a sworn written statement charging a person with an offense, subscribed by the offended party, any peace officer, or other public officer charged with the enforcement of the law violated. (3)

Section 4. Information defined. — An information is an accusation in writing charging a person with an offense, subscribed by the prosecutor and filed with the court. (4a)

Section 5. Who must prosecute criminal actions. — All criminal actions commenced by a complaint or information shall be prosecuted under the direction and control of the prosecutor. However, in Municipal Trial Courts or Municipal Circuit Trial Courts when the prosecutor assigned thereto or to the case is not available, the offended party, any peace officer, or public officer charged with the enforcement of the law violated may prosecute the case. This authority cease upon actual intervention of the prosecutor or upon elevation of the case to the Regional Trial Court.       (This Section was repealed by A.M. No. 02-2-07-SC effective May 1, 2002)

The crimes of adultery and concubinage shall not be prosecuted except upon a complaint filed by the offended spouse. The offended party cannot institute criminal prosecution without including the guilty parties, if both alive, nor, in any case, if the offended party has consented to the offense or pardoned the offenders.

The offenses of seduction, abduction and acts of lasciviousness shall not be prosecuted except upon a complaint filed by the offended party or her parents, grandparents or guardian, nor, in any case, if the offender has been expressly pardoned by any of them. If the offended party dies or becomes incapacitated before she can file the complaint, and she has no known parents, grandparents or guardian, the State shall initiate the criminal action in her behalf.

The offended party, even if a minor, has the right to initiate the prosecution of the offenses of seduction, abduction and acts of lasciviousness independently of her parents, grandparents, or guardian, unless she is incompetent or incapable of doing so. Where the offended party, who is a minor, fails to file the complaint, her parents, grandparents, or guardian may file the same. The right to file the action granted to parents, grandparents or guardian shall be exclusive of all other persons and shall be exercised successively in the order herein provided, except as stated in the preceding paragraph.

No criminal action for defamation which consists in the imputation of the offenses mentioned above shall be brought except at the instance of and upon complaint filed by the offended party. (5a)

The prosecution for violation of special laws shall be governed by the provisions thereof. (n)

Section 6. Sufficiency of complaint or information. — A complaint or information is sufficient if it states the name of the accused; the designation of the offense given by the statute; the acts or omissions complained of as constituting the offense; the name of the offended party; the approximate date of the commission of the offense; and the place where the offense was committed.

When an offense is committed by more than one person, all of them shall be included in the complaint or information. (6a)

Section 7. Name of the accused. — The complaint or information must state the name and surname of the accused or any appellation or nickname by which he has been or is known. If his name cannot be ascertained, he must be described under a fictitious name with a statement that his true name is unknown.

If the true name of the accused is thereafter disclosed by him or appears in some other manner to the court, such true name shall be inserted in the complaint or information and record. (7a)

Section 8. Designation of the offense. — The complaint or information shall state the designation of the offense given by the statute, aver the acts or omissions constituting the offense, and specify its qualifying and aggravating circumstances. If there is no designation of the offense, reference shall be made to the section or subsection of the statute punishing it. (8a)

Section 9. Cause of the accusation. — The acts or omissions complained of as constituting the offense and the qualifying and aggravating circumstances must be stated in ordinary and concise language and not necessarily in the language used in the statute but in terms sufficient to enable a person of common understanding to know what offense is being charged as well as its qualifying and aggravating circumstances and for the court to pronounce judgment. (9a)

Section 10. Place of commission of the offense. — The complaint or information is sufficient if it can be understood from its allegations that the offense was committed or some of the essential ingredients occurred at some place within the jurisdiction of the court, unless the particular place where it was committed constitutes an essential element of the offense or is necessary for its identification. (10a)

Section 11. Date of commission of the offense. — It is not necessary to state in the complaint or information the precise date the offense was committed except when it is a material ingredient of the offense. The offense may be alleged to have been committed on a date as near as possible to the actual date of its commission. (11a)

Section 12. Name of the offended party. — The complaint or information must state the name and surname of the person against whom or against whose property the offense was committed, or any appellation or nickname by which such person has been or is known. If there is no better way of identifying him, he must be described under a fictitious name.

(a) In offenses against property, if the name of the offended party is unknown, the property must be described with such particularity as to properly identify the offense charged.

(b) If the true name of the of the person against whom or against whose properly the offense was committed is thereafter disclosed or ascertained, the court must cause the true name to be inserted in the complaint or information and the record.

(c) If the offended party is a juridical person, it is sufficient to state its name, or any name or designation by which it is known or by which it may be identified, without need of averring that it is a juridical person or that it is organized in accordance with law. (12a)

Section 13. Duplicity of the offense. — A complaint or information must charge but one offense, except when the law prescribes a single punishment for various offenses. (13a)

Section 14. Amendment or substitution. — A complaint or information may be amended, in form or in substance, without leave of court, at any time before the accused enters his plea. After the plea and during the trial, a formal amendment may only be made with leave of court and when it can be done without causing prejudice to the rights of the accused.

However, any amendment before plea, which downgrades the nature of the offense charged in or excludes any accused from the complaint or information, can be made only upon motion by the prosecutor, with notice to the offended party and with leave of court. The court shall state its reasons in resolving the motion and copies of its order shall be furnished all parties, especially the offended party. (n)

If it appears at any time before judgment that a mistake has been made in charging the proper offense, the court shall dismiss the original complaint or information upon the filing of a new one charging the proper offense in accordance with section 19, Rule 119, provided the accused shall not be placed in double jeopardy. The court may require the witnesses to give bail for their appearance at the trial. (14a)

Section 15. Place where action is to be instituted. —

(a) Subject to existing laws, the criminal action shall be instituted and tried in the court of the municipality or territory where the offense was committed or where any of its essential ingredients occurred.

(b) Where an offense is committed in a train, aircraft, or other public or private vehicle while in the course of its trip, the criminal action shall be instituted and tried in the court of any municipality or territory where such train, aircraft or other vehicle passed during such its trip, including the place of its departure and arrival.

(c) Where an offense is committed on board a vessel in the course of its voyage, the criminal action shall be instituted and tried in the court of the first port of entry or of any municipality or territory where the vessel passed during such voyage, subject to the generally accepted principles of international law.

(d) Crimes committed outside the Philippines but punishable under Article 2 of the Revised Penal Code shall be cognizable by the court where the criminal action is first filed. (15a)

Section 16. Intervention of the offended party in criminal action. — Where the civil action for recovery of civil liability is instituted in the criminal action pursuant to Rule 111, the offended party may intervene by counsel in the prosecution of the offense. (16a)

RULE 111

Prosecution of Civil Action

Section 1. Institution of criminal and civil actions. — (a) When a criminal action is instituted, the civil action for the recovery of civil liability arising from the offense charged shall be deemed instituted with the criminal action unless the offended party waives the civil action, reserves the right to institute it separately or institutes the civil action prior to the criminal action.

The reservation of the right to institute separately the civil action shall be made before the prosecution starts presenting its evidence and under circumstances affording the offended party a reasonable opportunity to make such reservation.

When the offended party seeks to enforce civil liability against the accused by way of moral, nominal, temperate, or exemplary damages without specifying the amount thereof in the complaint or information, the filing fees thereof shall constitute a first lien on the judgment awarding such damages.

Where the amount of damages, other than actual, is specified in the complaint or information, the corresponding filing fees shall be paid by the offended party upon the filing thereof in court.

Except as otherwise provided in these Rules, no filing fees shall be required for actual damages.

No counterclaim, cross-claim or third-party complaint may be filed by the accused in the criminal case, but any cause of action which could have been the subject thereof may be litigated in a separate civil action. (1a)

(b) The criminal action for violation of Batas Pambansa Blg. 22 shall be deemed to include the corresponding civil action. No reservation to file such civil action separately shall be allowed.

Upon filing of the aforesaid joint criminal and civil actions, the offended party shall pay in full the filing fees based on the amount of the check involved, which shall be considered as the actual damages claimed. Where the complaint or information also seeks to recover liquidated, moral, nominal, temperate or exemplary damages, the offended party shall pay additional filing fees based on the amounts alleged therein. If the amounts are not so alleged but any of these damages are subsequently awarded by the court, the filing fees based on the amount awarded shall constitute a first lien on the judgment.

Where the civil action has been filed separately and trial thereof has not yet commenced, it may be consolidated with the criminal action upon application with the court trying the latter case. If the application is granted, the trial of both actions shall proceed in accordance with section 2 of this Rule governing consolidation of the civil and criminal actions. (cir. 57-97)

Section 2. When separate civil action is suspended. — After the criminal action has been commenced, the separate civil action arising therefrom cannot be instituted until final judgment has been entered in the criminal action.

If the criminal action is filed after the said civil action has already been instituted, the latter shall be suspended in whatever stage it may be found before judgment on the merits. The suspension shall last until final judgment is rendered in the criminal action. Nevertheless, before judgment on the merits is rendered in the civil action, the same may, upon motion of the offended party, be consolidated with the criminal action in the court trying the criminal action. In case of consolidation, the evidence already adduced in the civil action shall be deemed automatically reproduced in the criminal action without prejudice to the right of the prosecution to cross-examine the witnesses presented by the offended party in the criminal case and of the parties to present additional evidence. The consolidated criminal and civil actions shall be tried and decided jointly.

During the pendency of the criminal action, the running of the period of prescription of the civil action which cannot be instituted separately or whose proceeding has been suspended shall be tolled. (n)

The extinction of the penal action does not carry with it extinction of the civil action. However, the civil action based on delict shall be deemed extinguished if there is a finding in a final judgment in the criminal action that the act or omission from which the civil liability may arise did not exist. (2a)

Section 3. When civil action may proceeded independently. — In the cases provided for in Articles 32, 33, 34 and 2176 of the Civil Code of the Philippines, the independent civil action may be brought by the offended party. It shall proceed independently of the criminal action and shall require only a preponderance of evidence. In no case, however, may the offended party recover damages twice for the same act or omission charged in the criminal action. (3a)

Section 4. Effect of death on civil actions. — The death of the accused after arraignment and during the pendency of the criminal action shall extinguish the civil liability arising from the delict. However, the independent civil action instituted under section 3 of this Rule or which thereafter is instituted to enforce liability arising from other sources of obligation may be continued against the estate or legal representative of the accused after proper substitution or against said estate, as the case may be. The heirs of the accused may be substituted for the deceased without requiring the appointment of an executor or administrator and the court may appoint a guardian ad litem for the minor heirs.

The court shall forthwith order said legal representative or representatives to appear and be substituted within a period of thirty (30) days from notice.

A final judgment entered in favor of the offended party shall be enforced in the manner especially provided in these rules for prosecuting claims against the estate of the deceased.

If the accused dies before arraignment, the case shall be dismissed without prejudice to any civil action the offended party may file against the estate of the deceased. (n)

Section 5. Judgment in civil action not a bar. — A final judgment rendered in a civil action absolving the defendant from civil liability is not a bar to a criminal action against the defendant for the same act or omission subject of the civil action. (4a)

Section 6. Suspension by reason of prejudicial question. — A petition for suspension of the criminal action based upon the pendency of a prejudicial question in a civil action may be filed in the office of the prosecutor or the court conducting the preliminary investigation. When the criminal action has been filed in court for trial, the petition to suspend shall be filed in the same criminal action at any time before the prosecution rests. (6a)

Section 7. Elements of prejudicial question. — The elements of a prejudicial question are: (a) the previously instituted civil action involves an issue similar or intimately related to the issue raised in the subsequent criminal action, and (b) the resolution of such issue determines whether or not the criminal action may proceed. (5a)

RULE 112

Preliminary Investigation

Section 1. Preliminary investigation defined; when required. — Preliminary investigation is an inquiry or proceeding to determine whether there is sufficient ground to engender a well-founded belief that a crime has been committed and the respondent is probably guilty thereof, and should be held for trial.

Except as provided in section 7 of this Rule, a preliminary investigation is required to be conducted before the filing of a complaint or information for an offense where the penalty prescribed by law is at least four (4) years, two (2) months and one (1) day without regard to the fine. (1a)

Section 2. Officers authorized to conduct preliminary investigations. —

The following may conduct preliminary investigations:

(a) Provincial or City Prosecutors and their assistants;

(b) Judges of the Municipal Trial Courts and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts;

(c) National and Regional State Prosecutors; and

(d) Other officers as may be authorized by law.

Their authority to conduct preliminary investigations shall include all crimes cognizable by the proper court in their respective territorial jurisdictions. (2a)

Section 3. Procedure. — The preliminary investigation shall be conducted in the following manner:

(a) The complaint shall state the address of the respondent and shall be accompanied by the affidavits of the complainant and his witnesses, as well as other supporting documents to establish probable cause. They shall be in such number of copies as there are respondents, plus two (2) copies for the official file. The affidavits shall be subscribed and sworn to before any prosecutor or government official authorized to administer oath, or, in their absence or unavailability, before a notary public, each of who must certify that he personally examined the affiants and that he is satisfied that they voluntarily executed and understood their affidavits.

(b) Within ten (10) days after the filing of the complaint, the investigating officer shall either dismiss it if he finds no ground to continue with the investigation, or issue a subpoena to the respondent attaching to it a copy of the complaint and its supporting affidavits and documents.

The respondent shall have the right to examine the evidence submitted by the complainant which he may not have been furnished and to copy them at his expense. If the evidence is voluminous, the complainant may be required to specify those which he intends to present against the respondent, and these shall be made available for examination or copying by the respondent at his expense.

Objects as evidence need not be furnished a party but shall be made available for examination, copying, or photographing at the expense of the requesting party.

(c) Within ten (10) days from receipt of the subpoena with the complaint and supporting affidavits and documents, the respondent shall submit his counter-affidavit and that of his witnesses and other supporting documents relied upon for his defense. The counter-affidavits shall be subscribed and sworn to and certified as provided in paragraph (a) of this section, with copies thereof furnished by him to the complainant. The respondent shall not be allowed to file a motion to dismiss in lieu of a counter-affidavit.

(d) If the respondent cannot be subpoenaed, or if subpoenaed, does not submit counter-affidavits within the ten (10) day period, the investigating officer shall resolve the complaint based on the evidence presented by the complainant.

(e) The investigating officer may set a hearing if there are facts and issues to be clarified from a party or a witness. The parties can be present at the hearing but without the right to examine or cross-examine. They may, however, submit to the investigating officer questions which may be asked to the party or witness concerned.

The hearing shall be held within ten (10) days from submission of the counter-affidavits and other documents or from the expiration of the period for their submission. It shall be terminated within five (5) days.

(f) Within ten (10) days after the investigation, the investigating officer shall determine whether or not there is sufficient ground to hold the respondent for trial. (3a)

Section 4. Resolution of investigating prosecutor and its review. — If the investigating prosecutor finds cause to hold the respondent for trial, he shall prepare the resolution and information. He shall certify under oath in the information that he, or as shown by the record, an authorized officer, has personally examined the complainant and his witnesses; that there is reasonable ground to believe that a crime has been committed and that the accused is probably guilty thereof; that the accused was informed of the complaint and of the evidence submitted against him; and that he was given an opportunity to submit controverting evidence. Otherwise, he shall recommend the dismissal of the complaint.

Within five (5) days from his resolution, he shall forward the record of the case to the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor, or to the Ombudsman or his deputy in cases of offenses cognizable by the Sandiganbayan in the exercise of its original jurisdiction. They shall act on the resolution within ten (10) days from their receipt thereof and shall immediately inform the parties of such action.

No complaint or information may be filed or dismissed by an investigating prosecutor without the prior written authority or approval of the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor or the Ombudsman or his deputy.

Where the investigating prosecutor recommends the dismissal of the complaint but his recommendation is disapproved by the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor or the Ombudsman or his deputy on the ground that a probable cause exists, the latter may, by himself, file the information against the respondent, or direct any other assistant prosecutor or state prosecutor to do so without conducting another preliminary investigation.

If upon petition by a proper party under such rules as the Department of Justice may prescribe or motu proprio, the Secretary of Justice reverses or modifies the resolution of the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor, he shall direct the prosecutor concerned either to file the corresponding information without conducting another preliminary investigation, or to dismiss or move for dismissal of the complaint or information with notice to the parties. The same rule shall apply in preliminary investigations conducted by the officers of the Office of the Ombudsman. (4a)

Section 5. Resolution of investigating judge and its review. — Within ten (10) days after the preliminary investigation, the investigating judge shall transmit the resolution of the case to the provincial or city prosecutor, or to the Ombudsman or his deputy in cases of offenses cognizable by the Sandiganbayan in the exercise of its original jurisdiction, for appropriate action. The resolution shall state the findings of facts and the law supporting his action, together with the record of the case which shall include: (a) the warrant, if the arrest is by virtue of a warrant; (b) the affidavits, counter-affidavits and other supporting evidence of the parties; (c) the undertaking or bail of the accused and the order for his release; (d) the transcripts of the proceedings during the preliminary investigation; and (e) the order of cancellation of his bail bond, if the resolution is for the dismissal of the complaint.

Within thirty (30) days from receipt of the records, the provincial or city prosecutor, or the Ombudsman or his deputy, as the case may be, shall review the resolution of the investigating judge on the existence of probable cause. Their ruling shall expressly and clearly state the facts and the law on which it is based and the parties shall be furnished with copies thereof. They shall order the release of an accused who is detained if no probable cause is found against him. (5a)

Section 6. When warrant of arrest may issue. — (a) By the Regional Trial Court. — Within ten (10) days from the filing of the complaint or information, the judge shall personally evaluate the resolution of the prosecutor and its supporting evidence. He may immediately dismiss the case if the evidence on record clearly fails to establish probable cause. If he finds probable cause, he shall issue a warrant of arrest, or a commitment order if the accused has already been arrested pursuant to a warrant issued by the judge who conducted the preliminary investigation or when the complaint or information was filed pursuant to section 7 of this Rule. In case of doubt on the existence of probable cause, the judge may order the prosecutor to present additional evidence within five (5) days from notice and the issue must be resolved by the court within thirty (30) days from the filing of the complaint of information.

(b) By the Municipal Trial Court. — When required pursuant to the second paragraph of section 1 of this Rule, the preliminary investigation of cases falling under the original jurisdiction of the Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court may be conducted by either the judge or the prosecutor. When conducted by the prosecutor, the procedure for the issuance of a warrant or arrest by the judge shall be governed by paragraph (a) of this section. When the investigation is conducted by the judge himself, he shall follow the procedure provided in section 3 of this Rule. If the findings and recommendations are affirmed by the provincial or city prosecutor, or by the Ombudsman or his deputy, and the corresponding information is filed, he shall issue a warrant of arrest. However, without waiting for the conclusion of the investigation, the judge may issue a warrant of arrest if he finds after an examination in writing and under oath of the complainant and his witnesses in the form of searching question and answers, that a probable cause exists and that there is a necessity of placing the respondent under immediate custody in order not to frustrate the ends of justice.

(c) When warrant of arrest not necessary. — A warrant of arrest shall not issue if the accused is already under detention pursuant to a warrant issued by the municipal trial court in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, or if the complaint or information was filed pursuant to section 7 of this Rule or is for an offense penalized by fine only. The court shall then proceed in the exercise of its original jurisdiction. (6a)

Section 7. When accused lawfully arrested without warrant. — When a person is lawfully arrested without a warrant involving an offense which requires a preliminary investigation, the complaint or information may be filed by a prosecutor without need of such investigation provided an inquest has been conducted in accordance with existing rules. In the absence or unavailability of an inquest prosecutor, the complaint may be filed by the offended party or a peace office directly with the proper court on the basis of the affidavit of the offended party or arresting officer or person.

Before the complaint or information is filed, the person arrested may ask for a preliminary investigation in accordance with this Rule, but he must sign a waiver of the provisions of Article 125 of the Revised Penal Code, as amended, in the presence of his counsel. Notwithstanding the waiver, he may apply for bail and the investigation must be terminated within fifteen (15) days from its inception.

After the filing of the complaint or information in court without a preliminary investigation, the accused may, within five (5) days from the time he learns of its filing, ask for a preliminary investigation with the same right to adduce evidence in his defense as provided in this Rule. (7a; sec. 2, R.A. No. 7438)

Section 8. Records. — (a) Records supporting the information or complaint. — An information or complaint filed in court shall be supported by the affidavits and counter-affidavits of the parties and their witnesses, together with the other supporting evidence and the resolution on the case.

(b) Record of preliminary investigation. — The record of the preliminary investigation, whether conducted by a judge or a fiscal, shall not form part of the record of the case. However, the court, on its own initiative or on motion of any party, may order the production of the record or any its part when necessary in the resolution of the case or any incident therein, or when it is to be introduced as an evidence in the case by the requesting party. (8a)

Section 9. Cases not requiring a preliminary investigation nor covered by the Rule on Summary Procedure. —

(a) If filed with the prosecutor. — If the complaint is filed directly with the prosecutor involving an offense punishable by imprisonment of less four (4) years, two (2) months and one (1) day, the procedure outlined in section 3(a) of this Rule shall be observed. The prosecutor shall act on the complaint based on the affidavits and other supporting documents submitted by the complainant within ten (10) days from its filing.

(b) If filed with the Municipal Trial Court. — If the complaint or information is filed directly with the Municipal Trial Court or Municipal Circuit Trial Court for an offense covered by this section, the procedure in section 3(a) of this Rule shall be observed. If within ten (10) days after the filing of the complaint or information, the judge finds no probable cause after personally evaluating the evidence, or after personally examining in writing and under oath the complainant and his witnesses in the form of searching question and answers, he shall dismiss the same. He may, however, require the submission of additional evidence, within ten (10) days from notice, to determine further the existence of probable cause. If the judge still finds no probable cause despite the additional evidence, he shall, within ten (10) days from its submission or expiration of said period, dismiss the case. When he finds probable cause, he shall issue a warrant of arrest, or a commitment order if the accused had already been arrested, and hold him for trial. However, if the judge is satisfied that there is no necessity for placing the accused under custody, he may issue summons instead of a warrant of arrest. (9a)

RULE 113

Arrest

Section 1. Definition of arrest. — Arrest is the taking of a person into custody in order that he may be bound to answer for the commission of an offense. (1)

Section 2. Arrest; how made. — An arrest is made by an actual restraint of a person to be arrested, or by his submission to the custody of the person making the arrest.

No violence or unnecessary force shall be used in making an arrest. The person arrested shall not be subject to a greater restraint than is necessary for his detention. (2a)

Section 3. Duty of arresting officer. — It shall be the duty of the officer executing the warrant to arrest the accused and to deliver him to the nearest police station or jail without unnecessary delay. (3a)

Section 4. Execution of warrant. — The head of the office to whom the warrant of arrest was delivered for execution shall cause the warrant to be executed within ten (10) days from its receipt. Within ten (10) days after the expiration of the period, the officer to whom it was assigned for execution shall make a report to the judge who issued the warrant. In case of his failure to execute the warrant, he shall state the reasons therefor. (4a)

Section 5. Arrest without warrant; when lawful. — A peace officer or a private person may, without a warrant, arrest a person:

(a) When, in his presence, the person to be arrested has committed, is actually committing, or is attempting to commit an offense;

(b) When an offense has just been committed, and he has probable cause to believe based on personal knowledge of facts or circumstances that the person to be arrested has committed it; and

(c) When the person to be arrested is a prisoner who has escaped from a penal establishment or place where he is serving final judgment or is temporarily confined while his case is pending, or has escaped while being transferred from one confinement to another.

In cases falling under paragraph (a) and (b) above, the person arrested without a warrant shall be forthwith delivered to the nearest police station or jail and shall be proceeded against in accordance with section 7 of Rule 112. (5a)

Section 6. Time of making arrest. — An arrest may be made on any day and at any time of the day or night. (6)

Section 7. Method of arrest by officer by virtue of warrant. — When making an arrest by virtue of a warrant, the officer shall inform the person to be arrested of the cause of the arrest and of the fact that a warrant has been issued for his arrest, except when he flees or forcibly resists before the officer has opportunity to so inform him, or when the giving of such information will imperil the arrest. The officer need not have the warrant in his possession at the time of the arrest but after the arrest, if the person arrested so requires, the warrant shall be shown to him as soon as practicable. (7a)

Section 8. Method of arrest by officer without warrant. — When making an arrest without a warrant, the officer shall inform the person to be arrested of his authority and the cause of the arrest, unless the latter is either engaged in the commission of an offense, is pursued immediately after its commission, has escaped, flees or forcibly resists before the officer has opportunity so to inform him, or when the giving of such information will imperil the arrest. (8a)

Section 9. Method of arrest by private person. — When making an arrest, a private person shall inform the person to be arrested of the intention to arrest him and cause of the arrest, unless the latter is either engaged in the commission of an offense, is pursued immediately after its commission, or has escaped, flees, or forcibly resists before the person making the arrest has opportunity to so inform him, or when the giving of such information will imperil the arrest. (9a)

Section 10. Officer may summon assistance. — An officer making a lawful arrest may orally summon as many persons as he deems necessary to assist him in effecting the arrest. Every person so summoned by an officer shall assist him in effecting the arrest when he can render such assistance without detriment to himself. (10a)

Section 11. Right of officer to break into building or enclosure. — An officer, in order to make an arrest either by virtue of a warrant, or without a warrant as provided in section 5, may break into any building or enclosure where the person to be arrested is or is reasonably believed to be, if he is refused admittance thereto, after announcing his authority and purpose. (11a)

Section 12. Right to break out from building or enclosure. — Whenever an officer has entered the building or enclosure in accordance with the preceding section, he may break out therefrom when necessary to liberate himself. (12a)

Section 13. Arrest after escape or rescue. — If a person lawfully arrested escapes or is rescued, any person may immediately pursue or retake him without a warrant at any time and in any place within the Philippines. (13)

Section 14. Right of attorney or relative to visit person arrested. — Any member of the Philippine Bar shall, at the request of the person arrested or of another acting in his behalf, have the right to visit and confer privately with such person in the jail or any other place of custody at any hour of the day or night. Subject to reasonable regulations, a relative of the person arrested can also exercise the same right. (14a)

RULE 114

Bail

Section 1. Bail defined. — Bail is the security given for the release of a person in custody of the law, furnished by him or a bondsman, to guarantee his appearance before any court as required under the conditions hereinafter specified. Bail may be given in the form of corporate surety, property bond, cash deposit, or recognizance. (1a)

Section 2. Conditions of the bail; requirements. — All kinds of bail are subject to the following conditions:

(a) The undertaking shall be effective upon approval, and unless cancelled, shall remain in force at all stages of the case until promulgation of the judgment of the Regional Trial Court, irrespective of whether the case was originally filed in or appealed to it;

(b) The accused shall appear before the proper court whenever required by the court of these Rules;

(c) The failure of the accused to appear at the trial without justification and despite due notice shall be deemed a waiver of his right to be present thereat. In such case, the trial may proceed in absentia; and

(d) The bondsman shall surrender the accused to the court for execution of the final judgment.

The original papers shall state the full name and address of the accused, the amount of the undertaking and the conditions herein required. Photographs (passport size) taken within the last six (6) months showing the face, left and right profiles of the accused must be attached to the bail. (2a)

Section 3. No release or transfer except on court order or bail. — No person under detention by legal process shall be released or transferred except upon order of the court or when he is admitted to bail. (3a)

Section 4. Bail, a matter of right; exception. — All persons in custody shall be admitted to bail as a matter of right, with sufficient sureties, or released on recognize as prescribed by law or this Rule (a) before or after conviction by the Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court, and (b) before conviction by the Regional Trial Court of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment. (4a)

Section 5. Bail, when discretionary. — Upon conviction by the Regional Trial Court of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment, admission to bail is discretionary. The application for bail may be filed and acted upon by the trial court despite the filing of a notice of appeal, provided it has not transmitted the original record to the appellate court. However, if the decision of the trial court convicting the accused changed the nature of the offense from non-bailable to bailable, the application for bail can only be filed with and resolved by the appellate court.

Should the court grant the application, the accused may be allowed to continue on provisional liberty during the pendency of the appeal under the same bail subject to the consent of the bondsman.

If the penalty imposed by the trial court is imprisonment exceeding six (6) years, the accused shall be denied bail, or his bail shall be cancelled upon a showing by the prosecution, with notice to the accused, of the following or other similar circumstances:

(a) That he is a recidivist, quasi-recidivist, or habitual delinquent, or has committed the crime aggravated by the circumstance of reiteration;

(b) That he has previously escaped from legal confinement, evaded sentence, or violated the conditions of his bail without valid justification;

(c) That he committed the offense while under probation, parole, or conditional pardon;

(d) That the circumstances of his case indicate the probability of flight if released on bail; or

(e) That there is undue risk that he may commit another crime during the pendency of the appeal.

The appellate court may, motu proprio or on motion of any party, review the resolution of the Regional Trial Court after notice to the adverse party in either case. (5a)

Section 6. Capital offense defined. — A capital offense is an offense which, under the law existing at the time of its commission and of the application for admission to bail, may be punished with death. (6a)

Section 7. Capital offense of an offense punishable by reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment, not bailable. — No person charged with a capital offense, or an offense punishable by reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment, shall be admitted to bail when evidence of guilt is strong, regardless of the stage of the criminal prosecution. (7a)

Section 8. Burden of proof in bail application. — At the hearing of an application for bail filed by a person who is in custody for the commission of an offense punishable by death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment, the prosecution has the burden of showing that evidence of guilt is strong. The evidence presented during the bail hearing shall be considered automatically reproduced at the trial, but upon motion of either party, the court may recall any witness for additional examination unless the latter is dead, outside the Philippines, or otherwise unable to testify. (8a)

Section 9. Amount of bail; guidelines. — The judge who issued the warrant or granted the application shall fix a reasonable amount of bail considering primarily, but not limited to, the following factors:

(a) Financial ability of the accused to give bail;

(b) Nature and circumstances of the offense;

(c) Penalty for the offense charged;

(d) Character and reputation of the accused;

(e) Age and health of the accused;

(f) Weight of the evidence against the accused;

(g) Probability of the accused appearing at the trial;

(h) Forfeiture of other bail;

(i) The fact that accused was a fugitive from justice when arrested; and

(j) Pendency of other cases where the accused is on bail.

Excessive bail shall not be required. (9a)

Section 10. Corporate surety. — Any domestic or foreign corporation, licensed as a surety in accordance with law and currently authorized to act as such, may provide bail by a bond subscribed jointly by the accused and an officer of the corporation duly authorized by its board of directors. (10a)

Section 11. Property bond, how posted. — A property bond is an undertaking constituted as lien on the real property given as security for the amount of the bail. Within ten (10) days after the approval of the bond, the accused shall cause the annotation of the lien on the certificate of title on file with the Register of Deeds if the land is registered, or if unregistered, in the Registration Book on the space provided therefor, in the Registry of Deeds for the province or city where the land lies, and on the corresponding tax declaration in the office of the provincial, city and municipal assessor concerned.

Within the same period, the accused shall submit to the court his compliance and his failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for the cancellation of the property bond and his re-arrest and detention. (11a)

Section 12. Qualifications of sureties in property bond. — The qualification of sureties in a property bond shall be as follows:

(a) Each must be a resident owner of real estate within the Philippines;

(b) Where there is only one surety, his real estate must be worth at least the amount of the undertaking;

(c) If there are two or more sureties, each may justify in an amount less than that expressed in the undertaking but the aggregate of the justified sums must be equivalent to the whole amount of bail demanded.

In all cases, every surety must be worth the amount specified in his own undertaking over and above all just debts, obligations and properties exempt from execution. (12a)

Section 13. Justification of sureties. — Every surety shall justify by affidavit taken before the judge that he possesses the qualifications prescribed in the preceding section. He shall describe the property given as security, stating the nature of his title, its encumbrances, the number and amount of other bails entered into by him and still undischarged, and his other liabilities. The court may examine the sureties upon oath concerning their sufficiency in such manner as it may deem proper. No bail shall be approved unless the surety is qualified. (13a)

Section 14. Deposit of cash as bail. — The accused or any person acting in his behalf may deposit in cash with the nearest collector or internal revenue or provincial, city, or municipal treasurer the amount of bail fixed by the court, or recommended by the prosecutor who investigated or filed the case. Upon submission of a proper certificate of deposit and a written undertaking showing compliance with the requirements of section 2 of this Rule, the accused shall be discharged from custody. The money deposited shall be considered as bail and applied to the payment of fine and costs while the excess, if any, shall be returned to the accused or to whoever made the deposit. (14a)

Section 15. Recognizance. — Whenever allowed by law or these Rules, the court may release a person in custody to his own recognizance or that of a responsible person. (15a)

Section 16. Bail, when not required; reduced bail or recognizance. — No bail shall be required when the law or these Rules so provide.

When a person has been in custody for a period equal to or more than the possible maximum imprisonment prescribe for the offense charged, he shall be released immediately, without prejudice to the continuation of the trial or the proceedings on appeal. If the maximum penalty to which the accused may be sentenced is destierro, he shall be released after thirty (30) days of preventive imprisonment.

A person in custody for a period equal to or more than the minimum of the principal penalty prescribed for the offense charged, without application of the Indeterminate Sentence Law or any modifying circumstance, shall be released on a reduced bail or on his own recognizance, at the discretion of the court. (16a)

Section 17. Bail, where filed. — (a) Bail in the amount fixed may be filed with the court where the case is pending, or in the absence or unavailability of the judge thereof, with any regional trial judge, metropolitan trial judge, municipal trial judge, or municipal circuit trial judge in the province, city, or municipality. If the accused is arrested in a province, city, or municipality other than where the case is pending, bail may also be filed with any regional trial court of said place, or if no judge thereof is available, with any metropolitan trial judge, municipal trial judge, or municipal circuit trial judge therein.

(b) Where the grant of bail is a matter of discretion, or the accused seeks to be released on recognizance, the application may only be filed in the court where the case is pending, whether on preliminary investigation, trial, or on appeal.

(c) Any person in custody who is not yet charged in court may apply for bail with any court in the province, city, or municipality where he is held. (17a)

Section 18. Notice of application to prosecutor. — In the application for bail under section 8 of this Rule, the court must give reasonable notice of the hearing to the prosecutor or require him to submit his recommendation. (18a)

Section 19. Release on bail. — The accused must be discharged upon approval of the bail by the judge with whom it was filed in accordance with section 17 of this Rule.

Whenever bail is filed with a court other than where the case is pending, the judge who accepted the bail shall forward it, together with the order of release and other supporting papers, to the court where the case is pending, which may, for good reason, require a different one to be filed. (19a)

Section 20. Increase or reduction of bail. — After the accused is admitted to bail, the court may, upon good cause, either increase or reduce its amount. When increased, the accused may be committed to custody if he does not give bail in the increased amount within a reasonable period. An accused held to answer a criminal charge, who is released without bail upon filing of the complaint or information, may, at any subsequent stage of the proceedings and whenever a strong showing of guilt appears to the court, be required to give bail in the amount fixed, or in lieu thereof, committed to custody. (20a)

Section 21. Forfeiture of bond. — When the presence of the accused is required by the court or these Rules, his bondsmen shall be notified to produce him before the court on a given date and time. If the accused fails to appear in person as required, his bail shall be declared forfeited and the bondsmen given thirty (30) days within which to produce their principal and to show cause why no judgment should be rendered against them for the amount of their bail. Within the said period, the bondsmen must:

(a) produce the body of their principal or give the reason for his non-production; and

(b) explain why the accused did not appear before the court when first required to do so.

Failing in these two requisites, a judgment shall be rendered against the bondsmen, jointly and severally, for the amount of the bail. The court shall not reduce or otherwise mitigate the liability of the bondsmen, unless the accused has been surrendered or is acquitted. (21a)

Section 22. Cancellation of bail. — Upon application of the bondsmen, with due notice to the prosecutor, the bail may be cancelled upon surrender of the accused or proof of his death.

The bail shall be deemed automatically cancelled upon acquittal of the accused, dismissal of the case, or execution of the judgment of conviction.

In all instances, the cancellation shall be without prejudice to any liability on the bond. (22a)

Section 23. Arrest of accused out on bail. — For the purpose of surrendering the accused, the bondsmen may arrest him or, upon written authority endorsed on a certified copy of the undertaking, cause him to be arrested by a police officer or any other person of suitable age and discretion.

An accused released on bail may be re-arrested without the necessity of a warrant if he attempts to depart from the Philippines without permission of the court where the case is pending. (23a)

Section 24. No bail after final judgment; exception. — No bail shall be allowed after the judgment of conviction has become final. If before such finality, the accused has applies for probation, he may be allowed temporary liberty under his bail. When no bail was filed or the accused is incapable of filing one, the court may allow his release on recognizance to the custody of a responsible member of the community. In no case shall bail be allowed after the accused has commenced to serve sentence. (24a)

Section 25. Court supervision of detainees. — The court shall exercise supervision over all persons in custody for the purpose of eliminating unnecessary detention. The executive judges of the Regional Trial Courts shall conduct monthly personal inspections of provincial, city, and municipal jails and their prisoners within their respective jurisdictions. They shall ascertain the number of detainees, inquire on their proper accommodation and health and examine the condition of the jail facilities. They shall order the segregation of sexes and of minors from adults, ensure the observance of the right of detainees to confer privately with counsel, and strive to eliminate conditions inimical to the detainees.

In cities and municipalities to be specified by the Supreme Court, the municipal trial judges or municipal circuit trial judges shall conduct monthly personal inspections of the municipal jails in their respective municipalities and submit a report to the executive judge of the Regional Trial Court having jurisdiction therein.

A monthly report of such visitation shall be submitted by the executive judges to the Court Administrator which shall state the total number of detainees, the names of those held for more than thirty (30) days, the duration of detention, the crime charged, the status of the case, the cause for detention, and other pertinent information. (25a)

Section 26. Bail not a bar to objections on illegal arrest, lack of or irregular preliminary investigation. — An application for or admission to bail shall not bar the accused from challenging the validity of his arrest or the legality of the warrant issued therefor, or from assailing the regularity or questioning the absence of a preliminary investigation of the charge against him, provided that he raises them before entering his plea. The court shall resolve the matter as early as practicable but not later than the start of the trial of the case. (n)

RULE 115

Rights of Accused

Section 1. Rights of accused at the trial. — In all criminal prosecutions, the accused shall be entitled to the following rights:

(a) To be presumed innocent until the contrary is proved beyond reasonable doubt.

(b) To be informed of the nature and cause of the accusation against him.

(c) To be present and defend in person and by counsel at every stage of the proceedings, from arraignment to promulgation of the judgment. The accused may, however, waive his presence at the trial pursuant to the stipulations set forth in his bail, unless his presence is specifically ordered by the court for purposes of identification. The absence of the accused without justifiable cause at the trial of which he had notice shall be considered a waiver of his right to be present thereat. When an accused under custody escapes, he shall be deemed to have waived his right to be present on all subsequent trial dates until custody over him is regained. Upon motion, the accused may be allowed to defend himself in person when it sufficiently appears to the court that he can properly protect his right without the assistance of counsel.

(d) To testify as a witness in his own behalf but subject to cross-examination on matters covered by direct examination. His silence shall not in any manner prejudice him.

(e) To be exempt from being compelled to be a witness against himself.

(f) To confront and cross-examine the witnesses against him at the trial. Either party may utilize as part of its evidence the testimony of a witness who is deceased, out of or can not with due diligence be found in the Philippines, unavailable or otherwise unable to testify, given in another case or proceeding, judicial or administrative, involving the same parties and subject matter, the adverse party having the opportunity to cross-examine him.

(g) To have compulsory process issued to secure the attendance of witnesses and production of other evidence in his behalf.

(h) To have speedy, impartial and public trial.

(i) To appeal in all cases allowed and in the manner prescribed by law. (1a)

RULE 116

Arraignment and Plea

Section 1. Arraignment and plea; how made. —

(a) The accused must be arraigned before the court where the complaint or information was filed or assigned for trial. The arraignment shall be made in open court by the judge or clerk by furnishing the accused with a copy of the complaint or information, reading the same in the language or dialect known to him, and asking him whether he pleads guilty or not guilty. The prosecution may call at the trial witnesses other than those named in the complaint or information.

(b) The accused must be present at the arraignment and must personally enter his plea. Both arraignment and plea shall be made of record, but failure to do so shall not affect the validity of the proceedings.

(c) When the accused refuses to plead or makes a conditional plea, a plea of not guilty shall be entered for him. (1a)

(d) When the accused pleads guilty but presents exculpatory evidence, his plea shall be deemed withdrawn and a plea of not guilty shall be entered for him. (n)

(e) When the accused is under preventive detention, his case shall be raffled and its records transmitted to the judge to whom the case was raffled within three (3) days from the filing of the information or complaint. The accused shall be arraigned within ten (10) days from the date of the raffle. The pre-trial conference of his case shall be held within ten (10) days after arraignment. (n)

(f) The private offended party shall be required to appear at the arraignment for purposes of plea bargaining, determination of civil liability, and other matters requiring his presence. In case of failure of the offended party to appear despite due notice, the court may allow the accused to enter a plea of guilty to a lesser offense which is necessarily included in the offense charged with the conformity of the trial prosecutor alone. (cir. 1-89)

(g) Unless a shorter period is provided by special law or Supreme Court circular, the arraignment shall be held within thirty (30) days from the date the court acquires jurisdiction over the person of the accused. The time of the pendency of a motion to quash or for a bill of particulars or other causes justifying suspension of the arraignment shall be excluded in computing the period. (sec. 2, cir. 38-98)

Section 2. Plea of guilty to a lesser offense. — At arraignment, the accused, with the consent of the offended party and the prosecutor, may be allowed by the trial court to plead guilty to a lesser offense which is necessarily included in the offense charged. After arraignment but before trial, the accused may still be allowed to plead guilty to said lesser offense after withdrawing his plea of not guilty. No amendment of the complaint or information is necessary. (sec. 4, circ. 38-98)

Section 3. Plea of guilty to capital offense; reception of evidence. — When the accused pleads guilty to a capital offense, the court shall conduct a searching inquiry into the voluntariness and full comprehension of the consequences of his plea and require the prosecution to prove his guilt and the precise degree of culpability. The accused may present evidence in his behalf. (3a)

Section 4. Plea of guilty to non-capital offense; reception of evidence, discretionary. — When the accused pleads guilty to a non-capital offense, the court may receive evidence from the parties to determine the penalty to be imposed. (4)

Section 5. Withdrawal of improvident plea of guilty. — At any time before the judgment of conviction becomes final, the court may permit an improvident plea of guilty to be withdrawn and be substituted by a plea of not guilty. (5)

Section 6. Duty of court to inform accused of his right to counsel. — Before arraignment, the court shall inform the accused of his right to counsel and ask him if he desires to have one. Unless the accused is allowed to defend himself in person or has employed a counsel of his choice, the court must assign a counsel de oficio to defend him. (6a)

Section 7. Appointment of counsel de oficio. — The court, considering the gravity of the offense and the difficulty of the questions that may arise, shall appoint as counsel de oficio only such members of the bar in good standing who, by reason of their experience and ability, can competently defend the accused. But in localities where such members of the bar are not available, the court may appoint any person, resident of the province and of good repute for probity and ability, to defend the accused. (7a)

Section 8. Time for counsel de oficio to prepare for arraignment. — Whenever a counsel de oficio is appointed by the court to defend the accused at the arraignment, he shall be given a reasonable time to consult with the accused as to his plea before proceeding with the arraignment. (8)

Section 9. Bill of particulars. — The accused may, before arraignment, move for a bill of particulars to enable him properly to plead and to prepare for trial. The motion shall specify the alleged defects of the complaint or information and the details desired. (10a)

Section 10. Production or inspection of material evidence in possession of prosecution. — Upon motion of the accused showing good cause and with notice to the parties, the court, in order to prevent surprise, suppression, or alteration, may order the prosecution to produce and permit the inspection and copying or photographing of any written statement given by the complainant and other witnesses in any investigation of the offense conducted by the prosecution or other investigating officers, as well as any designated documents, papers, books, accounts, letters, photographs, objects or tangible things not otherwise privileged, which constitute or contain evidence material to any matter involved in the case and which are in the possession or under the control of the prosecution, police, or other law investigating agencies. (11a)

Section 11. Suspension of arraignment. — Upon motion by the proper party, the arraignment shall be suspended in the following cases:

(a) The accused appears to be suffering from an unsound mental condition which effective renders him unable to fully understand the charge against him and to plead intelligently thereto. In such case, the court shall order his mental examination and, if necessary, his confinement for such purpose;

(b) There exists a prejudicial question; and

(c) A petition for review of the resolution of the prosecutor is pending at either the Department of Justice, or the Office of the President; provided, that the period of suspension shall not exceed sixty (60) days counted from the filing of the petition with the reviewing office. (12a)

RULE 117

Motion to Quash

Section 1. Time to move to quash. — At any time before entering his plea, the accused may move to quash the complaint or information. (1)

Section 2. Form and contents. — The motion to quash shall be in writing, signed by the accused or his counsel and shall distinctly specify its factual and legal grounds. The court shall consider no ground other than those stated in the motion, except lack of jurisdiction over the offense charged. (2a)

Section 3. Grounds. — The accused may move to quash the complaint or information on any of the following grounds:

(a) That the facts charged do not constitute an offense;

(b) That the court trying the case has no jurisdiction over the offense charged;

(c) That the court trying the case has no jurisdiction over the person of the accused;

(d) That the officer who filed the information had no authority to do so;

(e) That it does not conform substantially to the prescribed form;

(f) That more than one offense is charged except when a single punishment for various offenses is prescribed by law;

(g) That the criminal action or liability has been extinguished;

(h) That it contains averments which, if true, would constitute a legal excuse or justification; and

(i) That the accused has been previously convicted or acquitted of the offense charged, or the case against him was dismissed or otherwise terminated without his express consent. (3a)

Section 4. Amendment of the complaint or information. — If the motion to quash is based on an alleged defect of the complaint or information which can be cured by amendment, the court shall order that an amendment be made. (4a)

If it is based on the ground that the facts charged do not constitute an offense, the prosecution shall be given by the court an opportunity to correct the defect by amendment. The motion shall be granted if the prosecution fails to make the amendment, or the complaint or information still suffers from the same defect despite the amendment. (n)

Section 5. Effect of sustaining the motion to quash. — If the motion to quash is sustained, the court may order that another complaint or information be filed except as provided in section 6 of this rule. If the order is made, the accused, if in custody, shall not be discharged unless admitted to bail. If no order is made or if having been made, no new information is filed within the time specified in the order or within such further time as the court may allow for good cause, the accused, if in custody, shall be discharged unless he is also in custody for another charge. (5a)

Section 6. Order sustaining the motion to quash not a bar to another prosecution; exception. — An order sustaining the motion to quash is not a bar to another prosecution for the same offense unless the motion was based on the grounds specified in section 3 (g) and (i) of this Rule. (6a)

Section 7. Former conviction or acquittal; double jeopardy. — When an accused has been convicted or acquitted, or the case against him dismissed or otherwise terminated without his express consent by a court of competent jurisdiction, upon a valid complaint or information or other formal charge sufficient in form and substance to sustain a conviction and after the accused had pleaded to the charge, the conviction or acquittal of the accused or the dismissal of the case shall be a bar to another prosecution for the offense charged, or for any attempt to commit the same or frustration thereof, or for any offense which necessarily includes or is necessarily included in the offense charged in the former complaint or information.

However, the conviction of the accused shall not be a bar to another prosecution for an offense which necessarily includes the offense charged in the former complaint or information under any of the following instances:

(a) the graver offense developed due to supervening facts arising from the same act or omission constituting the former charge;

(b) the facts constituting the graver charge became known or were discovered only after a plea was entered in the former complaint or information; or

(c) the plea of guilty to the lesser offense was made without the consent of the prosecutor and of the offended party except as provided in section 1 (f) of Rule 116.

In any of the foregoing cases, where the accused satisfies or serves in whole or in part the judgment, he shall be credited with the same in the event of conviction for the graver offense. (7a)

Section 8. Provisional dismissal. — A case shall not be provisionally dismissed except with the express consent of the accused and with notice to the offended party.

The provisional dismissal of offenses punishable by imprisonment not exceeding six (6) years or a fine of any amount, or both, shall become permanent one (1) year after issuance of the order without the case having been revived. With respect to offenses punishable by imprisonment of more than six (6) years, their provisional dismissal shall become permanent two (2) years after issuance of the order without the case having been revived. (n)

Section 9. Failure to move to quash or to allege any ground therefor. — The failure of the accused to assert any ground of a motion to quash before he pleads to the complaint or information, either because he did not file a motion to quash or failed to allege the same in said motion, shall be deemed a waiver of any objections based on the grounds provided for in paragraphs (a), (b), (g), and (i) of section 3 of this Rule. (8)

RULE 118

Pre-Trial

Section 1. Pre-trial; mandatory in criminal cases. — In all criminal cases cognizable by the Sandiganbayan, Regional Trial Court, Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court and Municipal Circuit Trial Court, the court shall after arraignment and within thirty (30) days from the date the court acquires jurisdiction over the person of the accused, unless a shorter period is provided for in special laws or circulars of the Supreme Court, order a pre-trial conference to consider the following:

(a) plea bargaining;

(b) stipulation of facts;

(c) marking for identification of evidence of the parties;

(d) waiver of objections to admissibility of evidence;

(e) modification of the order of trial if the accused admits the charge but interposes a lawful defense; and

(f) such other matters as will promote a fair and expeditious trial of the criminal and civil aspects of the case. (secs. 2 and 3, cir. 38-98)

Section 2. Pre-trial agreement. — All agreements or admissions made or entered during the pre-trial conference shall be reduced in writing and signed by the accused and counsel, otherwise, they cannot be used against the accused. The agreements covering the matters referred to in section 1 of this Rule shall be approved by the court. (sec. 4, cir. 38-98)

Section 3. Non-appearance at pre-trial conference. — If the counsel for the accused or the prosecutor does not appear at the pre-trial conference and does not offer an acceptable excuse for his lack of cooperation, the court may impose proper sanctions or penalties. (se. 5, cir. 38-98)

Section 4. Pre-trial order. — After the pre-trial conference, the court shall issue an order reciting the actions taken, the facts stipulated, and evidence marked. Such order shall bind the parties, limit the trial to matters not disposed of, and control the course of the action during the trial, unless modified by the court to prevent manifest injustice. (3)

RULE 119

Trial

Section 1. Time to prepare for trial. — After a plea of not guilty is entered, the accused shall have at least fifteen (15) days to prepare for trial. The trial shall commence within thirty (30) days from receipt of the pre-trial order. (sec. 6, cir. 38-98)

Section 2. Continuous trial until terminated; postponements. — Trial once commenced shall continue from day to day as far as practicable until terminated. It may be postponed for a reasonable period of time for good cause. (2a)

The court shall, after consultation with the prosecutor and defense counsel, set the case for continuous trial on a weekly or other short-term trial calendar at the earliest possible time so as to ensure speedy trial. In no case shall the entire trial period exceed one hundred eighty (180) days from the first day of trial, except as otherwise authorized by the Supreme Court. (sec. 8, cir. 38-98).

The time limitations provided under this section and the preceding section shall not apply where special laws or circulars of the Supreme Court provide for a shorter period of trial. (n)

Section 3. Exclusions. — The following periods of delay shall be excluded in computing the time within which trial must commence:

(a) Any period of delay resulting from other proceedings concerning the accused, including but not limited to the following:

(1) Delay resulting from an examination of the physical and mental condition of the accused;

(2) Delay resulting from proceedings with respect to other criminal charges against the accused;

(3) Delay resulting from extraordinary remedies against interlocutory orders;

(4) Delay resulting from pre-trial proceedings; provided, that the delay does not exceed thirty (30) days;

(5) Delay resulting from orders of inhibition, or proceedings relating to change of venue of cases or transfer from other courts;

(6) Delay resulting from a finding of the existence of a prejudicial question; and

(7) Delay reasonably attributable to any period, not exceed thirty (30) days, during which any proceeding which any proceeding concerning the accused is actually under advisement.

(b) Any period of delay resulting from the absence or unavailability of an essential witness.

For purposes of this subparagraph, an essential witness shall be considered absent when his whereabouts are unknown or his whereabouts cannot be determined by due diligence. He shall be considered unavailable whenever his whereabouts are known but his presence for trial cannot be obtained by due diligence.

(c) Any period of delay resulting from the mental incompetence or physical inability of the accused to stand trial.

(d) If the information is dismissed upon motion of the prosecution and thereafter a charge is filed against the accused for the same offense, any period of delay from the date the charge was dismissed to the date the time limitation would commence to run as to the subsequent charge had there been no previous charge.

(e) A reasonable period of delay when the accused is joined for trial with a co-accused over whom the court has not acquired jurisdiction, or, as to whom the time for trial has not run and no motion for separate trial has been granted.

(f) Any period of delay resulting from a continuance granted by any court motu proprio, or on motion of either the accused or his counsel, or the prosecution, if the court granted the continuance on the basis of its findings set forth in the order that the ends of justice served by taking such action outweigh the best interest of the public and the accused in a speedy trial. (sec. 9, cir. 38-98)

Section 4. Factors for granting continuance. — The following factors, among others, shall be considered by a court in determining whether to grant a continuance under section 3(f) of this Rule.

(a) Whether or not the failure to grant a continuance in the proceeding would likely make a continuation of such proceeding impossible or result in a miscarriage of justice; and

(b) Whether or not the case taken as a whole is so novel, unusual and complex, due to the number of accused or the nature of the prosecution, or that it is unreasonable to expect adequate preparation within the periods of time established therein.

In addition, no continuance under section 3(f) of this Rule shall be granted because of congestion of the court's calendar or lack of diligent preparation or failure to obtain available witnesses on the part of the prosecutor. (sec. 10, cir. 38-98)

Section 5. Time limit following an order for new trial. — If the accused is to be tried again pursuant to an order for a new trial, the trial shall commence within thirty (30) days from notice of the order, provided that if the period becomes impractical due to unavailability of witnesses and other factors, the court may extend it but not to exceed one hundred eighty (180) days from notice of said order for a new trial. (sec. 11, cir. 38-98)

Section 6. Extended time limit. — Notwithstanding the provisions of section 1(g), Rule 116 and the preceding section 1, for the first twelve-calendar-month period following its effectivity on September 15, 1998, the time limit with respect to the period from arraignment to trial imposed by said provision shall be one hundred eighty (180) days. For the second twelve-month period, the limit shall be one hundred twenty (120) days, and for the third twelve-month period, the time limit shall be eighty (80) days. (sec. 7, cir. 38-98)

Section 7. Public attorney's duties where accused is imprisoned. — If the public attorney assigned to defend a person charged with a crime knows that the latter is preventively detained, either because he is charged with a bailable crime but has no means to post bail, or, is charged with a non-bailable crime, or, is serving a term of imprisonment in any penal institution, it shall be his duty to do the following:

(a) Shall promptly undertake to obtain the presence of the prisoner for trial or cause a notice to be served on the person having custody of the prisoner requiring such person to so advise the prisoner of his right to demand trial.

(b) Upon receipt of that notice, the custodian of the prisoner shall promptly advise the prisoner of the charge and of his right to demand trial. If at anytime thereafter the prisoner informs his custodian that he demands such trial, the latter shall cause notice to that effect to sent promptly to the public attorney.

(c) Upon receipt of such notice, the public attorney shall promptly seek to obtain the presence of the prisoner for trial.

(d) When the custodian of the prisoner receives from the public attorney a properly supported request for the availability of the prisoner for purposes of trial, the prisoner shall be made available accordingly. (sec. 12, cir. 38-98)

Section 8. Sanctions. — In any case in which private counsel for the accused, the public attorney, or the prosecutor.

(a) Knowingly allows the case to be set for trial without disclosing that a necessary witness would be unavailable for trial;

(b) Files a motion solely for delay which he knows is totally frivolous and without merit;

(c) Makes a statement for the purpose of obtaining continuance which he knows to be false and which is material to the granting of a continuance; or

(d) Willfully fails to proceed to trial without justification consistent with the provisions hereof, the court may punish such counsel, attorney, or prosecution, as follows:

(1) By imposing on a counsel privately retained in connection with the defense of an accused, a fine not exceeding twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00);

(2) By imposing on any appointed counsel de oficio, public attorney, or prosecutor a fine not exceeding five thousand pesos (P5,000.00); and

(3) By denying any defense counsel or prosecutor the right to practice before the court trying the case for a period not exceeding thirty (30) days. The punishment provided for by this section shall be without prejudice to any appropriate criminal action or other sanction authorized under these rules. (sec. 13, cir. 38-98)

Section 9. Remedy where accused is not brought to trial within the time limit. — If the accused is not brought to trial within the time limit required by Section 1(g), Rule 116 and Section 1, as extended by Section 6 of this rule, the information may be dismissed on motion of the accused on the ground of denial of his right of speedy trial. The accused shall have the burden of proving the motion but the prosecution shall have the burden of going forward with the evidence to establish the exclusion of time under section 3 of this rule. The dismissal shall be subject to the rules on double jeopardy.

Failure of the accused to move for dismissal prior to trial shall constitute a waiver of the right to dismiss under this section. (sec. 14, cir. 38-98)

Section 10. Law on speedy trial not a bar to provision on speedy trial in the Constitution. — No provision of law on speedy trial and no rule implementing the same shall be interpreted as a bar to any charge of denial of the right to speedy trial guaranteed by section 14(2), article III, of the 1987 Constitution. (sec. 15, cir. 38-98)

Section 11. Order of trial. — The trial shall proceed in the following order:

(a) The prosecution shall present evidence to prove the charge and, in the proper case, the civil liability.

(b) The accused may present evidence to prove his defense, and damages, if any, arising from the issuance of a provisional remedy in the case.

(c) The prosecution and the defense may, in that order, present rebuttal and sur-rebuttal evidence unless the court, in furtherance of justice, permits them to present additional evidence bearing upon the main issue.

(d) Upon admission of the evidence of the parties, the case shall be deemed submitted for decision unless the court directs them to argue orally or to submit written memoranda.

(e) When the accused admits the act or omission charged in the complaint or information but interposes a lawful defense, the order of trial may be modified. (3a)

Section 12. Application for examination of witness for accused before trial. —When the accused has been held to answer for an offense, he may, upon motion with notice to the other parties, have witnesses conditionally examined in his behalf. The motion shall state: (a) the name and residence of the witness; (b) the substance of his testimony; and (c) that the witness is sick or infirm as to afford reasonable ground for believing that he will not be able to attend the trial, or resides more than one hundred (100) kilometers from the place of trial and has no means to attend the same, or that other similar circumstances exist that would make him unavailable or prevent him from attending the trial. The motion shall be supported by an affidavit of the accused and such other evidence as the court may require. (4a)

Section 13. Examination of defense witness; how made. — If the court is satisfied that the examination of a witness for the accused is necessary, an order will be made directing that the witness be examined at a specified date, time and place and that a copy of the order be served on the prosecutor at least three (3) days before the scheduled examination. The examination shall be taken before a judge, or, if not practicable, a member of the Bar in good standing so designated by the judge in the order, or if the order be made by a court of superior jurisdiction, before an inferior court to be designated therein. The examination shall proceed notwithstanding the absence of the prosecutor provided he was duly notified of the hearing. A written record of the testimony shall be taken. (5a)

Section 14. Bail to secure appearance of material witness. — When the court is satisfied, upon proof or oath, that a material witness will not testify when required, it may, upon motion of either party, order the witness to post bail in such sum as may be deemed proper. Upon refusal to post bail, the court shall commit him to prison until he complies or is legally discharged after his testimony has been taken. (6a)

Section 15. Examination of witness for the prosecution. — When it satisfactorily appears that a witness for the prosecution is too sick or infirm to appear at the trial as directed by the order of the court, or has to leave the Philippines with no definite date of returning, he may forthwith be conditionally examined before the court where the case is pending. Such examination, in the presence of the accused, or in his absence after reasonable notice to attend the examination has been served on him, shall be conducted in the same manner as an examination at the trial. Failure or refusal of the accused to attend the examination after notice shall be considered a waiver. The statement taken may be admitted in behalf of or against the accused. (7a)

Section 16. Trial of several accused. — When two or more accused are jointly charged with any offense, they shall be tried jointly unless the court, in its discretion and upon motion of the prosecutor or any accused, orders separate trial for one or more accused. (8a)

Section 17. Discharge of accused to be state witness. — When two or more persons are jointly charged with the commission of any offense, upon motion of the prosecution before resting its case, the court may direct one or more of the accused to be discharged with their consent so that they may be witnesses for the state when, after requiring the prosecution to present evidence and the sworn statement of each proposed state witness at a hearing in support of the discharge, the court is satisfied that:

(a) There is absolute necessity for the testimony of the accused whose discharge is requested;

(b) The is no other direct evidence available for the proper prosecution of the offense committed, except the testimony of said accused;

(c) The testimony of said accused can be substantially corroborated in its material points;

(d) Said accused does not appear to be the most guilty; and

(e) Said accused has not at any time been convicted of any offense involving moral turpitude.

Evidence adduced in support of the discharge shall automatically form part of the trial. If the court denies the motion for discharge of the accused as state witness, his sworn statement shall be inadmissible in evidence. (9a)

Section 18. Discharge of accused operates as acquittal. — The order indicated in the preceding section shall amount to an acquittal of the discharged accused and shall be a bar to future prosecution for the same offense, unless the accused fails or refuses to testify against his co-accused in accordance with his sworn statement constituting the basis for the discharge. (10a)

Section 19. When mistake has been made in charging the proper offense. — When it becomes manifest at any time before judgment that a mistake has been made in charging the proper offense and the accused cannot be convicted of the offense charged or any other offense necessarily included therein, the accused shall not be discharged if there appears good cause to detain him. In such case, the court shall commit the accused to answer for the proper offense and dismiss the original case upon the filing of the proper information. (11a)

Section 20. Appointment of acting prosecutor. — When a prosecutor, his assistant or deputy is disqualified to act due to any of the grounds stated in section 1 of Rule 137 or for any other reasons, the judge or the prosecutor shall communicate with the Secretary of Justice in order that the latter may appoint an acting prosecutor. (12a)

Section 21. Exclusion of the public. — The judge may, motu proprio, exclude the public from the courtroom if the evidence to be produced during the trial is offensive to decency or public morals. He may also, on motion of the accused, exclude the public from the trial, except court personnel and the counsel of the parties. (13a)

Section 22. Consolidation of trials of related offenses. — Charges for offenses founded on the same facts or forming part of a series of offenses of similar character may be tried jointly at the discretion of the court. (14a)

Section 23. Demurrer to evidence. — After the prosecution rests its case, the court may dismiss the action on the ground of insufficiency of evidence (1) on its own initiative after giving the prosecution the opportunity to be heard or (2) upon demurrer to evidence filed by the accused with or without leave of court.

If the court denies the demurrer to evidence filed with leave of court, the accused may adduce evidence in his defense. When the demurrer to evidence is filed without leave of court, the accused waives the right to present evidence and submits the case for judgment on the basis of the evidence for the prosecution. (15a)

The motion for leave of court to file demurrer to evidence shall specifically state its grounds and shall be filed within a non-extendible period of five (5) days after the prosecution rests its case. The prosecution may oppose the motion within a non-extendible period of five (5) days from its receipt.

If leave of court is granted, the accused shall file the demurrer to evidence within a non-extendible period of ten (10) days from notice. The prosecution may oppose the demurrer to evidence within a similar period from its receipt.

The order denying the motion for leave of court to file demurrer to evidence or the demurrer itself shall not be reviewable by appeal or by certiorari before judgment. (n)

Section 24. Reopening. — At any time before finality of the judgment of conviction, the judge may, motu proprio or upon motion, with hearing in either case, reopen the proceedings to avoid a miscarrage of justice. The proceedings shall be terminated within thirty (30) days from the order grating it. (n)

RULE 120

Judgment

Section 1. Judgment definition and form. — Judgment is the adjudication by the court that the accused is guilty or not guilty of the offense charged and the imposition on him of the proper penalty and civil liability, if any. It must be written in the official language, personally and directly prepared by the judge and signed by him and shall contain clearly and distinctly a statement of the facts and the law upon which it is based. (1a)

Section 2. Contents of the judgment. — If the judgment is of conviction, it shall state (1) the legal qualification of the offense constituted by the acts committed by the accused and the aggravating or mitigating circumstances which attended its commission; (2) the participation of the accused in the offense, whether as principal, accomplice, or accessory after the fact; (3) the penalty imposed upon the accused; and (4) the civil liability or damages caused by his wrongful act or omission to be recovered from the accused by the offended party, if there is any, unless the enforcement of the civil liability by a separate civil action has been reserved or waived.

In case the judgment is of acquittal, it shall state whether the evidence of the prosecution absolutely failed to prove the guilt of the accused or merely failed to prove his guilt beyond reasonable doubt. In either case, the judgment shall determine if the act or omission from which the civil liability might arise did not exist. (2a)

Section 3. Judgment for two or more offenses. — When two or more offenses are charged in a single complaint or information but the accused fails to object to it before trial, the court may convict him of as many offenses as are charged and proved, and impose on him the penalty for each offense, setting out separately the findings of fact and law in each offense. (3a)

Section 4. Judgment in case of variance between allegation and proof. — When there is variance between the offense charged in the complaint or information and that proved, and the offense as charged is included in or necessarily includes the offense proved, the accused shall be convicted of the offense proved which is included in the offense charged, or of the offense charged which is included in the offense proved. (4a)

Section 5. When an offense includes or is included in another. — An offense charged necessarily includes the offense proved when some of the essential elements or ingredients of the former, as alleged in the complaint or information, constitute the latter. And an offense charged is necessarily included in the offense proved, when the essential ingredients of the former constitute or form a part of those constituting the latter. (5a)

Section 6. Promulgation of judgment. — The judgment is promulgated by reading it in the presence of the accused and any judge of the court in which it was rendered. However, if the conviction is for a light offense, the judgment may be pronounced in the presence of his counsel or representative. When the judge is absent or outside of the province or city, the judgment may be promulgated by the clerk of court.

If the accused is confined or detained in another province or city, the judgment may be promulgated by the executive judge of the Regional Trial Court having jurisdiction over the place of confinement or detention upon request of the court which rendered the judgment. The court promulgating the judgment shall have authority to accept the notice of appeal and to approve the bail bond pending appeal; provided, that if the decision of the trial court convicting the accused changed the nature of the offense from non-bailable to bailable, the application for bail can only be filed and resolved by the appellate court.

The proper clerk of court shall give notice to the accused personally or through his bondsman or warden and counsel, requiring him to be present at the promulgation of the decision. If the accused tried in absentia because he jumped bail or escaped from prison, the notice to him shall be served at his last known address.

In case the accused fails to appear at the scheduled date of promulgation of judgment despite notice, the promulgation shall be made by recording the judgment in the criminal docket and serving him a copy thereof at his last known address or thru his counsel.

If the judgment is for conviction and the failure of the accused to appear was without justifiable cause, he shall lose the remedies available in these rules against the judgment and the court shall order his arrest. Within fifteen (15) days from promulgation of judgment, however, the accused may surrender and file a motion for leave of court to avail of these remedies. He shall state the reasons for his absence at the scheduled promulgation and if he proves that his absence was for a justifiable cause, he shall be allowed to avail of said remedies within fifteen (15) days from notice. (6a)

Section 7. Modification of judgment. — A judgment of conviction may, upon motion of the accused, be modified or set aside before it becomes final or before appeal is perfected. Except where the death penalty is imposed, a judgment becomes final after the lapse of the period for perfecting an appeal, or when the sentence has been partially or totally satisfied or served, or when the accused has waived in writing his right to appeal, or has applied for probation. (7a)

Section 8. Entry of judgment. — After a judgment has become final, it shall be entered in accordance with Rule 36. (8)

Section 9. Existing provisions governing suspension of sentence, probation and parole not affected by this Rule. — Nothing in this Rule shall affect any existing provisions in the laws governing suspension of sentence, probation or parole. (9a)

RULE 121

New Trial or Reconsideration

Section 1. New trial or reconsideration. — At any time before a judgment of conviction becomes final, the court may, on motion of the accused or at its own instance but with the consent of the accused, grant a new trial or reconsideration. (1a)

Section 2. Grounds for a new trial. — The court shall grant a new trial on any of the following grounds:

(a) The errors of law or irregularities prejudicial to the substantial rights of the accused have been committed during the trial;

(b) The new and material evidence has been discovered which the accused could not with reasonable diligence have discovered and produced at the trial and which if introduced and admitted would probably change the judgment. (2a)

Section 3. Ground for reconsideration. — The court shall grant reconsideration on the ground of errors of law or fact in the judgment, which requires no further proceedings. (3a)

Section 4. Form of motion and notice to the prosecutor. — The motion for a new trial or reconsideration shall be in writing and shall state the grounds on which it is based. If based on a newly-discovered evidence, the motion must be supported by affidavits of witnesses by whom such evidence is expected to be given or by duly authenticated copies of documents which are proposed to be introduced in evidence. Notice of the motion for new trial or reconsideration shall be given to the prosecutor. (4a)

Section 5. Hearing on motion. — Where a motion for a new trial calls for resolution of any question of fact, the court may hear evidence thereon by affidavits or otherwise. (5a)

Section 6. Effects of granting a new trial or reconsideration. — The effects of granting a new trial or reconsideration are the following:

(a) When a new trial is granted on the ground of errors of law or irregularities committed during the trial, all proceedings and evidence affected thereby shall be set aside and taken anew. The court may, in the interest of justice, allow the introduction of additional evidence.

(b) When a new trial is granted on the ground of newly-discovered evidence, the evidence already adduced shall stand and the newly-discovered and such other evidence as the court may, in the interest of justice, allow to be introduced shall be taken and considered together with the evidence already in the record.

(c) In all cases, when the court grants new trial or reconsideration, the original judgment shall be set aside or vacated and a new judgment rendered accordingly. (6a)

RULE 122

Appeal

Section 1. Who may appeal. — Any party may appeal from a judgment or final order, unless the accused will be placed in double jeopardy. (2a)

Section 2. Where to appeal. — The appeal may be taken as follows:

(a) To the Regional Trial Court, in cases decided by the Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court;

(b) To the Court of Appeals or to the Supreme Court in the proper cases provided by law, in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court; and

(c) To the Supreme Court, in cases decided by the Court of Appeals. (1a)

Section 3. How appeal taken. —

(a) The appeal to the Regional Trial Court, or to the Court of Appeals in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court in the exercise of its original jurisdiction, shall be taken by filing a notice of appeal with the court which rendered the judgment or final order appealed from and by serving a copy thereof upon the adverse party.

(b) The appeal to the Court of Appeals in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court in the exercise of its appellate jurisdiction shall be by petition for review under Rule 42.

(c) The appeal to the Supreme Court in cases where the penalty imposed by the Regional Trial Court is death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment, or where a lesser penalty is imposed but for offenses committed on the same occasion or which arose out of the same occurrence that gave rise to the more serious offense for which the penalty of death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment is imposed, shall be by filing a notice of appeal in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section.

(d) No notice of appeal is necessary in cases where the death penalty is imposed by the Regional Trial Court. The same shall be automatically reviewed by the Supreme Court as provided in section 10 of this Rule.

(e) Except as provided in the last paragraph of section 13, Rule 124, all other appeals to the Supreme Court shall be by petition for review on certiorari under Rules 45. (3a)

Section 4. Publication of notice of appeal. — If personal service of the copy of the notice of appeal can not be made upon the adverse party or his counsel, service may be done by registered mail or by substituted service pursuant to sections 7 and 8 of Rule 13. (4a)

Section 5. Waiver of notice. — The appellee may waive his right to a notice that an appeal has been taken. The appellate court may, in its discretion, entertain an appeal notwithstanding failure to give such notice if the interests of justice so require. (5a)

Section 6. When appeal to be taken. — An appeal must be taken within fifteen (15) days from promulgation of the judgment or from notice of the final order appealed from. This period for perfecting an appeal shall be suspended from the time a motion for new trial or reconsideration is filed until notice of the order overruling the motion shall have been served upon the accused or his counsel at which time the balance of the period begins to run. (6a)

Section 7.Transcribing and filing notes of stenographic reporter upon appeal. — When notice of appeal is filed by the accused, the trial court shall direct the stenographic reporter to transcribe his notes of the proceedings. When filed by the People of the Philippines, the trial court shall direct the stenographic reporter to transcribe such portion of his notes of the proceedings as the court, upon motion, shall specify in writing. The stenographic reporter shall certify to the correctness of the notes and the transcript thereof, which shall consist of the original and four copies, and shall file the original and four copies with the clerk without unnecessary delay.

If death penalty is imposed, the stenographic reporter shall, within thirty (30) days from promulgation of the sentence, file with the clerk original and four copies of the duly certified transcript of his notes of the proceedings. No extension of time for filing of said transcript of stenographic notes shall be granted except by the Supreme Court and only upon justifiable grounds. (7a)

Section 8. Transmission of papers to appellate court upon appeal. — Within five (5) days from the filing of the notice of appeal, the clerk of the court with whom the notice of appeal was filed must transmit to the clerk of court of the appellate court the complete record of the case, together with said notice. The original and three copies of the transcript of stenographic notes, together with the records, shall also be transmitted to the clerk of the appellate court without undue delay. The other copy of the transcript shall remain in the lower court. (8a)

Section 9. Appeal to the Regional Trial Courts. —

(a) Within five (5) days from perfection of the appeal, the clerk of court shall transmit the original record to the appropriate Regional Trial Court.

(b) Upon receipt of the complete record of the case, transcripts and exhibits, the clerk of court of the Regional Trial Court shall notify the parties of such fact.

(c) Within fifteen (15) days from receipt of the said notice, the parties may submit memoranda or briefs, or may be required by the Regional Trial Court to do so. After the submission of such memoranda or briefs, or upon the expiration of the period to file the same, the Regional Trial Court shall decide the case on the basis of the entire record of the case and of such memoranda or briefs as may have been filed. (9a)

Section 10. Transmission of records in case of death penalty. — In all cases where the death penalty is imposed by the trial court, the records shall be forwarded to the Supreme Court for automatic review and judgment within five (5) days after the fifteenth (15) day following the promulgation of the judgment or notice of denial of a motion for new trial or reconsideration. The transcript shall also be forwarded within ten (10) days after the filing thereof by the stenographic reporter. (10a)

Section 11. Effect of appeal by any of several accused. —

(a) An appeal taken by one or more of several accused shall not affect those who did not appeal, except insofar as the judgment of the appellate court is favorable and applicable to the latter;

(b) The appeal of the offended party from the civil aspect shall not affect the criminal aspect of the judgment or order appealed from.

(c) Upon perfection of the appeal, the execution of the judgment or final order appealed from shall be stayed as to the appealing party. (11a)

Section 12. Withdrawal of appeal. — Notwithstanding the perfection of the appeal, the Regional Trial Court, Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court, as the case may be, may allow the appellant to withdraw his appeal before the record has been forwarded by the clerk of court to the proper appellate court as provided in section 8, in which case the judgment shall become final. The Regional Trial Court may also, in its discretion, allow the appellant from the judgment of a Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court to withdraw his appeal, provided a motion to that effect is filed before rendition of the judgment in the case on appeal, in which case the judgment of the court of origin shall become final and the case shall be remanded to the latter court for execution of the judgment. (12a)

Section 13. Appointment of counsel de oficio for accused on appeal. — It shall be the duty of the clerk of the trial court, upon filing of a notice of appeal, to ascertain from the appellant, if confined in prison, whether he desires the Regional Trial Court, Court of Appeals or the Supreme Court to appoint a counsel de oficio to defend him and to transmit with the record on a form to be prepared by the clerk of court of the appellate court, a certificate of compliance with this duty and of the response of the appellant to his inquiry. (13a)

RULE 123

Procedure in the Municipal Trial Courts

Section 1. Uniform Procedure. — The procedure to be observed in the Metropolitan Trial Courts, Municipal Trial Courts and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts shall be the same as in the Regional Trial Courts, except where a particular provision applies only to either of said courts and in criminal cases governed by the Revised Rule on Summary Procedure. (1a)

RULE 124

Procedure in the Court of Appeals

Section 1. Title of the case. — In all criminal cases appealed to the Court of Appeals, the party appealing the case shall be called the "appellant" and the adverse party the "appellee," but the title of the case shall remain as it was in the court of origin. (1a)

Section 2. Appointment of counsel de oficio for the accused. — If it appears from the record of the case as transmitted that (a) the accused is confined in prison, (b) is without counsel de parte on appeal, or (c) has signed the notice of appeal himself, the clerk of court of the Court of Appeals shall designate a counsel de oficio.

An appellant who is not confined in prison may, upon request, be assigned a counsel de oficio within ten (10) days from receipt of the notice to file brief and he establishes his right thereto. (2a)

Section 3. When brief for appellant to be filed. — Within thirty (30) days from receipt by the appellant or his counsel of the notice from the clerk of court of the Court of Appeals that the evidence, oral and documentary, is already attached to the record, the appellant shall file seven (7) copies of his brief with the clerk of court which shall be accompanied by proof of service of two (2) copies thereof upon the appellee. (3a)

Section 4. When brief for appellee to be filed; reply brief of the appellant. — Within thirty (30) days from the receipt of the brief of the appellant, the appellee shall file seven (7) copies of the brief of the appellee with the clerk of court which shall be accompanied by proof of service of two (2) copies thereof upon the appellant.

Within twenty (20) days from receipt of the brief of the appellee, the appellant may file a reply brief traversing matters raised in the former but not covered in the brief of the appellant. (4a)

Section 5. Extension of time for filing briefs. — Extension of time for the filing of briefs will not be allowed except for good and sufficient cause and only if the motion for extension is filed before the expiration of the time sought to be extended. (5a)

Section 6. Form of briefs. — Briefs shall either be printed, encoded or typewritten in double space on the legal size good quality unglazed paper, 330 mm. in length by 216 mm. in width. (6a)

Section 7. Contents of brief. —The briefs in criminal cases shall have the same contents as provided in sections 13 and 14 of Rule 44. A certified true copy of the decision or final order appealed from shall be appended to the brief of appellant. (7a)

Section 8. Dismissal of appeal for abandonment or failure to prosecute. — The Court of Appeals may, upon motion of the appellee or motu proprio and with notice to the appellant in either case, dismiss the appeal if the appellant fails to file his brief within the time prescribed by this Rule, except where the appellant is represented by a counsel de oficio.

The Court of Appeals may also, upon motion of the appellee or motu proprio, dismiss the appeal if the appellant escapes from prison or confinement, jumps bail or flees to a foreign country during the pendency of the appeal. (8a)

Section 9. Prompt disposition of appeals. — Appeals of accused who are under detention shall be given precedence in their disposition over other appeals. The Court of Appeals shall hear and decide the appeal at the earliest practicable time with due regard to the rights of the parties. The accused need not be present in court during the hearing of the appeal. (9a)

Section 10. Judgment not to be reversed or modified except for substantial error. — No judgment shall be reversed or modified unless the Court of Appeals, after an examination of the record and of the evidence adduced by the parties, is of the opinion that error was committed which injuriously affected the substantial rights of the appellant. (10a)

Section 11. Scope of judgment. — The Court of Appeals may reverse, affirm, or modify the judgment and increase or reduce the penalty imposed by the trial court, remand the case to the Regional Trial Court for new trial or retrial, or dismiss the case. (11a)

Section 12. Power to receive evidence — The Court of Appeals shall have the power to try cases and conduct hearings, receive evidence and perform any and all acts necessary to resolve factual issues raised in cases (a) falling within its original jurisdiction, (b) involving claims for damages arising from provisional remedies, or (c) where the court grants a new trial based only on the ground of newly-discovered evidence. (12a)

Section 13. Quorum of the court; certification or appeal of cases to Supreme Court. — Three (3) Justices of the Court of Appeals shall constitute a quorum for the sessions of a division. The unanimous vote of the three (3) Justices of a division shall be necessary for the pronouncement of a judgment or final resolution, which shall be reached in consultation before the writing of the opinion by a member of the division. In the event that the three (3) Justices can not reach a unanimous vote, the Presiding Justice shall direct the raffle committee of the Court to designate two (2) additional Justices to sit temporarily with them, forming a special division of five (5) members and the concurrence of a majority of such division shall be necessary for the pronouncement of a judgment or final resolution. The designation of such additional Justices shall be made strictly by raffle and rotation among all other Justices of the Court of Appeals.

Whenever the Court of Appeals finds that the penalty of death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment should be imposed in a case, the court, after discussion of the evidence and the law involved, shall render judgment imposing the penalty of death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment as the circumstances warrant. However, it shall refrain from entering the judgment and forthwith certify the case and elevate the entire record thereof to the Supreme Court for review. (13a)

Section 14. Motion for new trial. — At any time after the appeal from the lower court has been perfected and before the judgment of the Court of Appeals convicting the appellant becomes final, the latter may move for a new trial on the ground of newly-discovered evidence material to his defense. The motion shall conform with the provisions of section 4, Rule 121. (14a)

Section 15. Where new trial conducted. — When a new trial is granted, the Court of Appeals may conduct the hearing and receive evidence as provided in section 12 of this Rule or refer the trial to the court of origin. (15a)

Section 16. Reconsideration. — A motion for reconsideration shall be filed within fifteen (15) days after from notice of the decision or final order of the Court of Appeals, with copies served upon the adverse party, setting forth the grounds in support thereof. The mittimus shall be stayed during the pendency of the motion for reconsideration. No party shall be allowed a second motion for reconsideration of a judgment or final order. (16a)

Section 17. Judgment transmitted and filed in trial court. — When the entry of judgment of the Court of Appeals is issued, a certified true copy of the judgment shall be attached to the original record which shall be remanded to the clerk of the court from which the appeal was taken. (17a)

Section 18. Application of certain rules in civil to criminal cases. — The provisions of Rules 42, 44 to 46 and 48 to 56 relating to procedure in the Court of Appeals and in the Supreme Court in original and appealed civil cases shall be applied to criminal cases insofar as they are applicable and not inconsistent with the provisions of this Rule. (18a)

RULE 125

Procedure in the Supreme Court

Section 1. Uniform procedure. — Unless otherwise provided by the Constitution or by law, the procedure in the Supreme Court in original and in appealed cases shall be the same as in the Court of Appeals. (1a)

Section 2. Review of decisions of the Court of Appeals. — The procedure for the review by the Supreme Court of decisions in criminal cases rendered by the Court of Appeals shall be the same as in civil cases. (2a)

Section 3. Decision if opinion is equally divided. — When the Supreme Court en banc is equally divided in opinion or the necessary majority cannot be had on whether to acquit the appellant, the case shall again be deliberated upon and if no decision is reached after re-deliberation, the judgment of conviction of the lower court shall be reversed and the accused acquitted. (3a)

RULE 126

Search and Seizure

Section 1. Search warrant defined. — A search warrant is an order in writing issued in the name of the People of the Philippines, signed by a judge and directed to a peace officer, commanding him to search for personal property described therein and bring it before the court. (1)

Section 2. Court where application for search warrant shall be filed. — An application for search warrant shall be filed with the following:

a) Any court within whose territorial jurisdiction a crime was committed.

b) For compelling reasons stated in the application, any court within the judicial region where the crime was committed if the place of the commission of the crime is known, or any court within the judicial region where the warrant shall be enforced.

However, if the criminal action has already been filed, the application shall only be made in the court where the criminal action is pending. (n)

Section 3. Personal property to be seized. — A search warrant may be issued for the search and seizure of personal property:

(a) Subject of the offense;

(b) Stolen or embezzled and other proceeds, or fruits of the offense; or

(c) Used or intended to be used as the means of committing an offense. (2a)

Section 4. Requisites for issuing search warrant. — A search warrant shall not issue except upon probable cause in connection with one specific offense to be determined personally by the judge after examination under oath or affirmation of the complainant and the witnesses he may produce, and particularly describing the place to be searched and the things to be seized which may be anywhere in the Philippines. (3a)

Section 5. Examination of complainant; record. — The judge must, before issuing the warrant, personally examine in the form of searching questions and answers, in writing and under oath, the complainant and the witnesses he may produce on facts personally known to them and attach to the record their sworn statements, together with the affidavits submitted. (4a)

Section 6. Issuance and form of search warrant. — If the judge is satisfied of the existence of facts upon which the application is based or that there is probable cause to believe that they exist, he shall issue the warrant, which must be substantially in the form prescribed by these Rules. (5a)

Section 7. Right to break door or window to effect search. — The officer, if refused admittance to the place of directed search after giving notice of his purpose and authority, may break open any outer or inner door or window of a house or any part of a house or anything therein to execute the warrant or liberate himself or any person lawfully aiding him when unlawfully detained therein. (6)

Section 8. Search of house, room, or premise to be made in presence of two witnesses. — No search of a house, room, or any other premise shall be made except in the presence of the lawful occupant thereof or any member of his family or in the absence of the latter, two witnesses of sufficient age and discretion residing in the same locality. (7a)

Section 9. Time of making search. — The warrant must direct that it be served in the day time, unless the affidavit asserts that the property is on the person or in the place ordered to be searched, in which case a direction may be inserted that it be served at any time of the day or night. (8)

Section 10. Validity of search warrant. — A search warrant shall be valid for ten (10) days from its date. Thereafter it shall be void. (9a)

Section 11. Receipt for the property seized. — The officer seizing property under the warrant must give a detailed receipt for the same to the lawful occupant of the premises in whose presence the search and seizure were made, or in the absence of such occupant, must, in the presence of at least two witnesses of sufficient age and discretion residing in the same locality, leave a receipt in the place in which he found the seized property. (10a)

Section 12. Delivery of property and inventory thereof to court; return and proceedings thereon. — (a) The officer must forthwith deliver the property seized to the judge who issued the warrant, together with a true inventory thereof duly verified under oath.

(b) Ten (10) days after issuance of the search warrant, the issuing judge shall ascertain if the return has been made, and if none, shall summon the person to whom the warrant was issued and require him to explain why no return was made. If the return has been made, the judge shall ascertain whether section 11 of this Rule has been complained with and shall require that the property seized be delivered to him. The judge shall see to it that subsection (a) hereof has been complied with.

(c) The return on the search warrant shall be filed and kept by the custodian of the log book on search warrants who shall enter therein the date of the return, the result, and other actions of the judge.

A violation of this section shall constitute contempt of court.(11a)

Section 13. Search incident to lawful arrest. — A person lawfully arrested may be searched for dangerous weapons or anything which may have been used or constitute proof in the commission of an offense without a search warrant. (12a)

Section 14. Motion to quash a search warrant or to suppress evidence; where to file. — A motion to quash a search warrant and/or to suppress evidence obtained thereby may be filed in and acted upon only by the court where the action has been instituted. If no criminal action has been instituted, the motion may be filed in and resolved by the court that issued the search warrant. However, if such court failed to resolve the motion and a criminal case is subsequent filed in another court, the motion shall be resolved by the latter court. (n)

RULE 127

Provisional Remedies in Criminal Cases

Section 1. Availability of provisional remedies. — The provisional remedies in civil actions, insofar as they are applicable, may be availed of in connection with the civil action deemed instituted with the criminal action. (1a)

Section 2. Attachment. — When the civil action is properly instituted in the criminal action as provided in Rule 111, the offended party may have the property of the accused attached as security for the satisfaction of any judgment that may be recovered from the accused in the following cases:

(a) When the accused is about to abscond from the Philippines;

(b) When the criminal action is based on a claim for money or property embezzled or fraudulently misapplied or converted to the use of the accused who is a public officer, officer of a corporation, attorney, factor, broker, agent, or clerk, in the course of his employment as such, or by any other person in a fiduciary capacity, or for a willful violation of duty;

(c) When the accused has concealed, removed, or disposed of his property, or is about to do so; and

(d) When the accused resides outside the Philippines. (2a)

[codalsetal]

National Internal Revenue Code of 1997

TITLE I - ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE BUREAU OF INTERNAL REVENUE

SECTION 1. Title of the Code. - This Code shall be known as the National Internal Revenue Code of 1997.

SEC. 2. Powers and duties of the Bureau of Internal Revenue. - The Bureau of Internal Revenue shall be under the supervision and control of the Department of Finance and its powers and duties shall comprehend the assessment and collection of all national internal revenue taxes, fees, and charges, and the enforcement of all forfeitures, penalties, and fines connected therewith, including the execution of judgments in all cases decided in its favor by the Court of Tax Appeals and the ordinary courts. The Bureau shall give effect to and administer the supervisory and police powers conferred to it by this Code or other laws.

SEC. 3. Chief Officials of the Bureau of Internal Revenue. - The Bureau of Internal Revenue shall have a chief to be known as Commissioner of Internal Revenue, hereinafter referred to as the Commissioner and four (4) assistant chiefs to be known as Deputy Commissioners.

SEC. 4. Power of the Commissioner to Interpret Tax Laws and to Decide Tax Cases. - The power to interpret the provisions of this Code and other tax laws shall be under the exclusive and original jurisdiction of the Commissioner, subject to review by the Secretary of Finance.

The power to decide disputed assessments, refunds of internal revenue taxes, fees or other charges, penalties imposed in relation thereto, or other matters arising under this Code or other laws or portions thereof administered by the Bureau of Internal Revenue is vested in the Commissioner, subject to the exclusive appellate jurisdiction of the Court of Tax Appeals.

SEC. 5. Power of the Commissioner to Obtain Information, and to Summon, Examine, and Take Testimony of Persons. - In ascertaining the correctness of any return, or in making a return when none has been made, or in determining the liability of any person for any internal revenue tax, or in collecting any such liability, or in evaluating tax compliance, the Commissioner is authorized:

(A) To examine any book, paper, record, or other data which may be relevant or material to such inquiry;

(B) To Obtain on a regular basis from any person other than the person whose internal revenue tax liability is subject to audit or investigation, or from any office or officer of the national and local governments, government agencies and instrumentalities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas and government-owned or -controlled corporations, any information such as, but not limited to, costs and volume of production, receipts or sales and gross incomes of taxpayers, and the names, addresses, and financial statements of corporations, mutual fund companies, insurance companies, regional operating headquarters of multinational companies, joint accounts, associations, joint ventures of consortia and registered partnerships, and their members;

(C) To summon the person liable for tax or required to file a return, or any officer or employee of such person, or any person having possession, custody, or care of the books of accounts and other accounting records containing entries relating to the business of the person liable for tax, or any other person, to appear before the Commissioner or his duly authorized representative at a time and place specified in the summons and to produce such books, papers, records, or other data, and to give testimony;

(D) To take such testimony of the person concerned, under oath, as may be relevant or material to such inquiry; and

(E) To cause revenue officers and employees to make a canvass from time to time of any revenue district or region and inquire after and concerning all persons therein who may be liable to pay any internal revenue tax, and all persons owning or having the care, management or possession of any object with respect to which a tax is imposed.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraphs notwithstanding, nothing in this Section shall be construed as granting the Commissioner the authority to inquire into bank deposits other than as provided for in Section 6(F) of this Code.

SEC. 6. Power of the Commissioner to Make assessments and Prescribe additional Requirements for Tax Administration and Enforcement. -

(A) Examination of Returns and Determination of Tax Due. - After a return has been filed as required under the provisions of this Code, the Commissioner or his duly authorized representative may authorize the examination of any taxpayer and the assessment of the correct amount of tax: Provided, however; That failure to file a return shall not prevent the Commissioner from authorizing the examination of any taxpayer.

The tax or any deficiency tax so assessed shall be paid upon notice and demand from the Commissioner or from his duly authorized representative.

Any return, statement of declaration filed in any office authorized to receive the same shall not be withdrawn: Provided, That within three (3) years from the date of such filing , the same may be modified, changed, or amended: Provided, further, That no notice for audit or investigation of such return, statement or declaration has in the meantime been actually served upon the taxpayer.

(B) Failure to Submit Required Returns, Statements, Reports and other Documents. - When a report required by law as a basis for the assessment of any national internal revenue tax shall not be forthcoming within the time fixed by laws or rules and regulations or when there is reason to believe that any such report is false, incomplete or erroneous, the Commissioner shall assess the proper tax on the best evidence obtainable.

In case a person fails to file a required return or other document at the time prescribed by law, or willfully or otherwise files a false or fraudulent return or other document, the Commissioner shall make or amend the return from his own knowledge and from such information as he can obtain through testimony or otherwise, which shall be prima facie correct and sufficient for all legal purposes.

(C) Authority to Conduct Inventory-taking, surveillance and to Prescribe Presumptive Gross Sales and Receipts. - The Commissioner may, at any time during the taxable year, order inventory-taking of goods of any taxpayer as a basis for determining his internal revenue tax liabilities, or may place the business operations of any person, natural or juridical, under observation or surveillance if there is reason to believe that such person is not declaring his correct income, sales or receipts for internal revenue tax purposes. The findings may be used as the basis for assessing the taxes for the other months or quarters of the same or different taxable years and such assessment shall be deemed prima facie correct.

When it is found that a person has failed to issue receipts and invoices in violation of the requirements of Sections 113 and 237 of this Code, or when there is reason to believe that the books of accounts or other records do not correctly reflect the declarations made or to be made in a return required to be filed under the provisions of this Code, the Commissioner, after taking into account the sales, receipts, income or other taxable base of other persons engaged in similar businesses under similar situations or circumstances or after considering other relevant information may prescribe a minimum amount of such gross receipts, sales and taxable base, and such amount so prescribed shall be prima facie correct for purposes of determining the internal revenue tax liabilities of such person.

(D) Authority to Terminate Taxable Period. _ When it shall come to the knowledge of the Commissioner that a taxpayer is retiring from business subject to tax, or is intending to leave the Philippines or to remove his property therefrom or to hide or conceal his property, or is performing any act tending to obstruct the proceedings for the collection of the tax for the past or current quarter or year or to render the same totally or partly ineffective unless such proceedings are begun immediately, the Commissioner shall declare the tax period of such taxpayer terminated at any time and shall send the taxpayer a notice of such decision, together with a request for the immediate payment of the tax for the period so declared terminated and the tax for the preceding year or quarter, or such portion thereof as may be unpaid, and said taxes shall be due and payable immediately and shall be subject to all the penalties hereafter prescribed, unless paid within the time fixed in the demand made by the Commissioner.

(E) Authority of the Commissioner to Prescribe Real Property Values. - The Commissioner is hereby authorized to divide the Philippines into different zones or areas and shall, upon consultation with competent appraisers both from the private and public sectors, determine the fair market value of real properties located in each zone or area. For purposes of computing any internal revenue tax, the value of the property shall be, whichever is the higher of;

(1) the fair market value as determined by the Commissioner, or

(2) the fair market value as shown in the schedule of values of the Provincial and City Assessors.

 (F) Authority of the Commissioner to inquire into Bank Deposit Accounts. - Notwithstanding any contrary provision of Republic Act No. 1405 and other general or special laws, the Commissioner is hereby authorized to inquire into the bank deposits of:

(1) a decedent to determine his gross estate; and

(2) any taxpayer who has filed an application for compromise of his tax liability under Sec. 204 (A) (2) of this Code by reason of financial incapacity to pay his tax liability.

 In case a taxpayer files an application to compromise the payment of his tax liabilities on his claim that his financial position demonstrates a clear inability to pay the tax assessed, his application shall not be considered unless and until he waives in writing his privilege under Republic act NO. 1405 or under other general or special laws, and such waiver shall constitute the authority of the Commissioner to inquire into the bank deposits of the taxpayer.

(G) Authority to Accredit and Register Tax Agents. - The Commissioner shall accredit and register, based on their professional competence, integrity and moral fitness, individuals and general professional partnerships and their representatives who prepare and file tax returns, statements, reports, protests, and other papers with or who appear before, the Bureau for taxpayers. Within one hundred twenty (120) days from January 1, 1998, the Commissioner shall create national and regional accreditation boards, the members of which shall serve for three (3) years, and shall designate from among the senior officials of the Bureau, one (1) chairman and two (2) members for each board, subject to such rules and regulations as the Secretary of Finance shall promulgate upon the recommendation of the Commissioner.

Individuals and general professional partnerships and their representatives who are denied accreditation by the Commissioner and/or the national and regional accreditation boards may appeal such denial to the Secretary of Finance, who shall rule on the appeal within sixty (60) days from receipt of such appeal. Failure of the Secretary of Finance to rule on the Appeal within the prescribed period shall be deemed as approval of the application for accreditation of the appellant.

(H) Authority of the Commissioner to Prescribe Additional Procedural or Documentary Requirements. - The Commissioner may prescribe the manner of compliance with any documentary or procedural requirement in connection with the submission or preparation of financial statements accompanying the tax returns.

SEC. 7. - Authority of the Commissioner to Delegate Power. - The Commissioner may delegate the powers vested in him under the pertinent provisions of this Code to any or such subordinate officials with the rank equivalent to a division chief or higher, subject to such limitations and restrictions as may be imposed under rules and regulations to be promulgated by the Secretary of finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner: Provided, However, That the following powers of the Commissioner shall not be delegated:

(a) The power to recommend the promulgation of rules and regulations by the Secretary of Finance;

(b) The power to issue rulings of first impression or to reverse, revoke or modify any existing ruling of the Bureau;

(c) The power to compromise or abate, under Sec. 204 (A) and (B) of this Code, any tax liability: Provided, however, That assessments issued by the regional offices involving basic deficiency taxes of Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000) or less, and minor criminal violations, as may be determined by rules and regulations to be promulgated by the Secretary of finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, discovered by regional and district officials, may be compromised by a regional evaluation board which shall be composed of the Regional Director as Chairman, the Assistant Regional Director, the heads of the Legal, Assessment and Collection Divisions and the Revenue District Officer having jurisdiction over the taxpayer, as members; and

(d) The power to assign or reassign internal revenue officers to establishments where articles subject to excise tax are produced or kept.

 SEC. 8. Duty of the Commissioner to Ensure the Provision and Distribution of forms, Receipts, Certificates, and Appliances, and the Acknowledgment of Payment of Taxes.- 

(A) Provision and Distribution to Proper Officials. - It shall be the duty of the Commissioner, among other things, to prescribe, provide, and distribute to the proper officials the requisite licenses internal revenue stamps, labels all other forms, certificates, bonds, records, invoices, books, receipts, instruments, appliances and apparatus used in administering the laws falling within the jurisdiction of the Bureau. For this purpose, internal revenue stamps, strip stamps and labels shall be caused by the Commissioner to be printed with adequate security features.

Internal revenue stamps, whether of a bar code or fuson design, shall be firmly and conspicuously affixed on each pack of cigars and cigarettes subject to excise tax in the manner and form as prescribed by the Commissioner, upon approval of the Secretary of Finance.

(B) Receipts for Payment Made. - It shall be the duty of the Commissioner or his duly authorized representative or an authorized agent bank to whom any payment of any tax is made under the provision of this Code to acknowledge the payment of such tax, expressing the amount paid and the particular account for which such payment was made in a form and manner prescribed therefor by the Commissioner.

SEC. 9. - Internal Revenue Districts. - With the approval of the Secretary of Finance, the Commissioner shall divide the Philippines into such number of revenue districts as may form time to time be required for administrative purposes. Each of these districts shall be under the supervision of a Revenue District Officer.

SEC. 10. - Revenue Regional Director. - Under rules and regulations, policies and standards formulated by the Commissioner, with the approval of the Secretary of Finance, the Revenue Regional director shall, within the region and district offices under his jurisdiction, among others:

(a) Implement laws, policies, plans, programs, rules and regulations of the department or agencies in the regional area;

(b) Administer and enforce internal revenue laws, and rules and regulations, including the assessment and collection of all internal revenue taxes, charges and fees.

(c) Issue Letters of authority for the examination of taxpayers within the region;

(d) Provide economical, efficient and effective service to the people in the area;

(e) Coordinate with regional offices or other departments, bureaus and agencies in the area;

(f) Coordinate with local government units in the area;

(g) Exercise control and supervision over the officers and employees within the region; and

(h) Perform such other functions as may be provided by law and as may be delegated by the Commissioner.

 SEC. 11. Duties of Revenue District Officers and Other Internal Revenue Officers. - It shall be the duty of every Revenue District Officer or other internal revenue officers and employees to ensure that all laws, and rules and regulations affecting national internal revenue are faithfully executed and complied with, and to aid in the prevention, detection and punishment of frauds of delinquencies in connection therewith.

It shall be the duty of every Revenue District Officer to examine the efficiency of all officers and employees of the Bureau of Internal Revenue under his supervision, and to report in writing to the Commissioner, through the Regional Director, any neglect of duty, incompetency, delinquency, or malfeasance in office of any internal revenue officer of which he may obtain knowledge, with a statement of all the facts and any evidence sustaining each case.

SEC. 12. Agents and Deputies for Collection of National Internal Revenue Taxes. - The following are hereby constituted agents of the Commissioner:

(a) The Commissioner of Customs and his subordinates with respect to the collection of national internal revenue taxes on imported goods;

(b) The head of the appropriate government office and his subordinates with respect to the collection of energy tax; and

(c) Banks duly accredited by the Commissioner with respect to receipt of payments internal revenue taxes authorized to be made thru bank.

Any officer or employee of an authorized agent bank assigned to receive internal revenue tax payments and transmit tax returns or documents to the Bureau of Internal Revenue shall be subject to the same sanctions and penalties prescribed in Sections 269 and 270 of this Code.

SEC. 13. - Authority of a Revenue Offices. - subject to the rules and regulations to be prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, a Revenue Officer assigned to perform assessment functions in any district may, pursuant to a Letter of Authority issued by the Revenue Regional Director, examine taxpayers within the jurisdiction of the district in order to collect the correct amount of tax, or to recommend the assessment of any deficiency tax due in the same manner that the said acts could have been performed by the Revenue Regional Director himself.

SEC. 14. Authority of Officers to Administer Oaths and Take Testimony. - The Commissioner, Deputy Commissioners, Service Chiefs, Assistant Service Chiefs, Revenue Regional Directors, Assistant Revenue Regional Directors, Chiefs and Assistant Chiefs of Divisions, Revenue District Officers, special deputies of the Commissioner, internal revenue officers and any other employee of the Bureau thereunto especially deputized by the Commissioner shall have the power to administer oaths and to take testimony in any official matter or investigation conducted by them regarding matters within the jurisdiction of the Bureau.

SEC. 15. Authority of Internal Revenue Officers to Make Arrests and Seizures. - The Commissioner, the Deputy Commissioners, the Revenue Regional Directors, the Revenue District Officers and other internal revenue officers shall have authority to make arrests and seizures for the violation of any penal law, rule or regulation administered by the Bureau of Internal Revenue. Any person so arrested shall be forthwith brought before a court, there to be dealt with according to law.

SEC. 16. Assignment of Internal Revenue Officers Involved in Excise Tax Functions to Establishments Where Articles subject to Excise Tax are Produced or Kept. - The Commissioner shall employ, assign, or reassign internal revenue officers involved in excise tax functions, as often as the exigencies of the revenue service may require, to establishments or places where articles subject to excise tax are produced or kept: Provided, That an internal revenue officer assigned to any such establishment shall in no case stay in his assignment for more than two (2) years, subject to rules and regulations to be prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner.

SEC. 17. Assignment of Internal Revenue Officers and Other Employees to Other Duties. - The Commissioner may, subject to the provisions of Section 16 and the laws on civil service, as well as the rules and regulations to be prescribed by the Secretary of Finance upon the recommendation of the Commissioner, assign or reassign internal revenue officers and employees of the Bureau of Internal Revenue, without change in their official rank and salary, to other or special duties connected with the enforcement or administration of the revenue laws as the exigencies of the service may require: Provided, That internal revenue officers assigned to perform assessment or collection function shall not remain in the same assignment for more than three (3) years; Provided, further, That assignment of internal revenue officers and employees of the Bureau to special duties shall not exceed one (1) year.

SEC. 18. Reports of violation of Laws. - When an internal revenue officer discovers evidence of a violation of this Code or of any law, rule or regulations administered by the Bureau of Internal Revenue of such character as to warrant the institution of criminal proceedings, he shall immediately report the facts to the Commissioner through his immediate superior, giving the name and address of the offender and the names of the witnesses if possible: Provided, That in urgent cases, the Revenue Regional director or Revenue District Officer, as the case may be, may send the report to the corresponding prosecuting officer in the latter case, a copy of his report shall be sent to the Commissioner.

SEC. 19. Contents of Commissioner's Annual Report. - The annual Report of the Commissioner shall contain detailed statements of the collections of the Bureau with specifications of the sources of revenue by type of tax, by manner of payment, by revenue region and by industry group and its disbursements by classes of expenditures.

In case the actual collection exceeds or falls short of target as set in the annual national budget by fifteen percent (15%) or more, the Commissioner shall explain the reason for such excess or shortfall.

SEC. 20. Submission of Report and Pertinent Information by the Commissioner.

(A) Submission of Pertinent Information to Congress. - The provision of Section 270 of this Code to the contrary notwithstanding, the Commissioner shall, upon request of Congress and in aid of legislation, furnish its appropriate Committee pertinent information including but not limited to: industry audits, collection performance data, status reports in criminal actions initiated against persons and taxpayer's returns: Provided, however, That any return or return information which can be associated with, or otherwise identify, directly or indirectly, a particular taxpayer shall be furnished the appropriate Committee of Congress only when sitting in Executive Session Unless such taxpayer otherwise consents in writing to such disclosure.

(B) Report to Oversight Committee. - The Commissioner shall, with reference to Section 204 of this Code, submit to the Oversight Committee referred to in Section 290 hereof, through the Chairmen of the Committee on Ways and Means of the Senate and House of Representatives, a report on the exercise of his powers pursuant to the said section, every six (6) months of each calendar year.

SEC. 21. Sources of Revenue. - The following taxes, fees and charges are deemed to be national internal revenue taxes:

(a) Income tax;

(b) Estate and donor's taxes;

(c) Value-added tax;

(d) Other percentage taxes;

(e) Excise taxes;

(f) Documentary stamp taxes; and

(g) Such other taxes as are or hereafter may be imposed and collected by the Bureau of Internal Revenue.

CHAPTER I - DEFINITIONS SEC. 22. Definitions - When used in this Title:

(A) The term 'person' means an individual, a trust, estate or corporation.

(B) The term 'corporation' shall include partnerships, no matter how created or organized, joint-stock companies, joint accounts (cuentas en participacion), association, or insurance companies, but does not include general professional partnerships and a joint venture or consortium formed for the purpose of undertaking construction projects or engaging in petroleum, coal, geothermal and other energy operations pursuant to an operating consortium agreement under a service contract with the Government. 'General professional partnerships' are partnerships formed by persons for the sole purpose of exercising their common profession, no part of the income of which is derived from engaging in any trade or business.

(C) The term 'domestic,' when applied to a corporation, means created or organized in the Philippines or under its laws.

(D) The term 'foreign,' when applied to a corporation, means a corporation which is not domestic.

(E) The term 'nonresident citizen' means:

(1) A citizen of the Philippines who establishes to the satisfaction of the Commissioner the fact of his physical presence abroad with a definite intention to reside therein.

(2) A citizen of the Philippines who leaves the Philippines during the taxable year to reside abroad, either as an immigrant or for employment on a permanent basis.

(3) A citizen of the Philippines who works and derives income from abroad and whose employment thereat requires him to be physically present abroad most of the time during the taxable year.

(4) A citizen who has been previously considered as nonresident citizen and who arrives in the Philippines at any time during the taxable year to reside permanently in the Philippines shall likewise be treated as a nonresident citizen for the taxable year in which he arrives in the Philippines with respect to his income derived from sources abroad until the date of his arrival in the Philippines.

(5) The taxpayer shall submit proof to the Commissioner to show his intention of leaving the Philippines to reside permanently abroad or to return to and reside in the Philippines as the case may be for purpose of this Section.

(F) The term 'resident alien' means an individual whose residence is within the Philippines and who is not a citizen thereof.

(G) The term 'nonresident alien' means an individual whose residence is not within the Philippines and who is not a citizen thereof.

(H) The term 'resident foreign corporation' applies to a foreign corporation engaged in trade or business within the Philippines.

(I) The term 'nonresident foreign corporation' applies to a foreign corporation not engaged in trade or business within the Philippines.

(J) The term 'fiduciary' means a guardian, trustee, executor, administrator, receiver, conservator or any person acting in any fiduciary capacity for any person.

(K) The term 'withholding agent' means any person required to deduct and withhold any tax under the provisions of Section 57.

(L) The term 'shares of stock' shall include shares of stock of a corporation, warrants and/or options to purchase shares of stock, as well as units of participation in a partnership (except general professional partnerships), joint stock companies, joint accounts, joint ventures taxable as corporations, associations and recreation or amusement clubs (such as golf, polo or similar clubs), and mutual fund certificates.

(M) The term 'shareholder' shall include holders of a share/s of stock, warrant/s and/or option/s to purchase shares of stock of a corporation, as well as a holder of a unit of participation in a partnership (except general professional partnerships) in a joint stock company, a joint account, a taxable joint venture, a member of an association, recreation or amusement club (such as golf, polo or similar clubs) and a holder of a mutual fund certificate, a member in an association, joint-stock company, or insurance company.

(N) The term 'taxpayer' means any person subject to tax imposed by this Title.

(O) The terms 'including' and 'includes', when used in a definition contained in this Title, shall not be deemed to exclude other things otherwise within the meaning of the term defined.

(P) The term 'taxable year' means the calendar year, or the fiscal year ending during such calendar year, upon the basis of which the net income is computed under this Title. 'Taxable year' includes, in the case of a return made for a fractional part of a year under the provisions of this Title or under rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the commissioner, the period for which such return is made.

(Q) The term 'fiscal year' means an accounting period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of any month other than December.

(R) The terms 'paid or incurred' and 'paid or accrued' shall be construed according to the method of accounting upon the basis of which the net income is computed under this Title.

(S) The term 'trade or business' includes the performance of the functions of a public office.

(T) The term 'securities' means shares of stock in a corporation and rights to subscribe for or to receive such shares. The term includes bonds, debentures, notes or certificates, or other evidence or indebtedness, issued by any corporation, including those issued by a government or political subdivision thereof, with interest coupons or in registered form.

(U) The term 'dealer in securities' means a merchant of stocks or securities, whether an individual, partnership or corporation, with an established place of business, regularly engaged in the purchase of securities and the resale thereof to customers; that is, one who, as a merchant, buys securities and re-sells them to customers with a view to the gains and profits that may be derived therefrom.

(V) The term 'bank' means every banking institution, as defined in Section 2 of Republic Act No. 337, as amended, otherwise known as the General banking Act. A bank may either be a commercial bank, a thrift bank, a development bank, a rural bank or specialized government bank.

(W) The term 'non-bank financial intermediary' means a financial intermediary, as defined in Section 2(D)(C) of Republic Act No. 337, as amended, otherwise known as the General Banking Act, authorized by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) to perform quasi-banking activities.

(X) The term 'quasi-banking activities' means borrowing funds from twenty (20) or more personal or corporate lenders at any one time, through the issuance, endorsement, or acceptance of debt instruments of any kind other than deposits for the borrower's own account, or through the issuance of certificates of assignment or similar instruments, with recourse, or of repurchase agreements for purposes of relending or purchasing receivables and other similar obligations: Provided, however, That commercial, industrial and other non-financial companies, which borrow funds through any of these means for the limited purpose of financing their own needs or the needs of their agents or dealers, shall not be considered as performing quasi-banking functions.

(Y) The term 'deposit substitutes' shall mean an alternative from of obtaining funds from the public (the term 'public' means borrowing from twenty (20) or more individual or corporate lenders at any one time) other than deposits, through the issuance, endorsement, or acceptance of debt instruments for the borrowers own account, for the purpose of relending or purchasing of receivables and other obligations, or financing their own needs or the needs of their agent or dealer. These instruments may include, but need not be limited to bankers' acceptances, promissory notes, repurchase agreements, including reverse repurchase agreements entered into by and between the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) and any authorized agent bank, certificates of assignment or participation and similar instruments with recourse: Provided, however, That debt instruments issued for interbank call loans with maturity of not more than five (5) days to cover deficiency in reserves against deposit liabilities, including those between or among banks and quasi-banks, shall not be considered as deposit substitute debt instruments.

(Z) The term 'ordinary income' includes any gain from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset or property described in Section 39(A)(1). Any gain from the sale or exchange of property which is treated or considered, under other provisions of this Title, as 'ordinary income' shall be treated as gain from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset as defined in Section 39(A)(1). The term 'ordinary loss' includes any loss from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset. Any loss from the sale or exchange of property which is treated or considered, under other provisions of this Title, as 'ordinary loss' shall be treated as loss from the sale or exchange of property which is not a capital asset.

(AA) The term 'rank and file employees' shall mean all employees who are holding neither managerial nor supervisory position as defined under existing provisions of the Labor Code of the Philippines, as amended.

(BB) The term 'mutual fund company' shall mean an open-end and close-end investment company as defined under the Investment Company Act.

(CC) The term 'trade, business or profession' shall not include performance of services by the taxpayer as an employee.

(DD) The term 'regional or area headquarters' shall mean a branch established in the Philippines by multinational companies and which headquarters do not earn or derive income from the Philippines and which act as supervisory, communications and coordinating center for their affiliates, subsidiaries, or branches in the Asia-Pacific Region and other foreign markets.

(EE) The term 'regional operating headquarters' shall mean a branch established in the Philippines by multinational companies which are engaged in any of the following services: general administration and planning; business planning and coordination; sourcing and procurement of raw materials and components; corporate finance advisory services; marketing control and sales promotion; training and personnel management; logistic services; research and development services and product development; technical support and maintenance; data processing and communications; and business development.

(FF) The term 'long-term deposit or investment certificates' shall refer to certificate of time deposit or investment in the form of savings, common or individual trust funds, deposit substitutes, investment management accounts and other investments with a maturity period of not less than five (5) years, the form of which shall be prescribed by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) and issued by banks only (not by nonbank financial intermediaries and finance companies) to individuals in denominations of Ten thousand pesos (P10,000) and other denominations as may be prescribed by the BSP.

CHAPTER II - GENERAL PRINCIPLES

SEC. 23. General Principles of Income Taxation in the Philippines. - Except when otherwise provided in this Code:

(A) A citizen of the Philippines residing therein is taxable on all income derived from sources within and without the Philippines;

(B) A nonresident citizen is taxable only on income derived from sources within the Philippines;

(C) An individual citizen of the Philippines who is working and deriving income from abroad as an overseas contract worker is taxable only on income derived from sources within the Philippines: Provided, That a seaman who is a citizen of the Philippines and who receives compensation for services rendered abroad as a member of the complement of a vessel engaged exclusively in international trade shall be treated as an overseas contract worker;

(D) An alien individual, whether a resident or not of the Philippines, is taxable only on income derived from sources within the Philippines;

(E) A domestic corporation is taxable on all income derived from sources within and without the Philippines; and

(F) A foreign corporation, whether engaged or not in trade or business in the Philippines, is taxable only on income derived from sources within the Philippines.

CHAPTER III - TAX ON INDIVIDUALS SEC. 24. Income Tax Rates.

(A) Rates of Income Tax on Individual Citizen and Individual Resident Alien of the Philippines.

(1) An income tax is hereby imposed:

(a) On the taxable income defined in Section 31 of this Code, other than income subject to tax under Subsections (B), (C) and (D) of this Section, derived for each taxable year from all sources within and without the Philippines be every individual citizen of the Philippines residing therein;

(b) On the taxable income defined in Section 31 of this Code, other than income subject to tax under Subsections (B), (C) and (D) of this Section, derived for each taxable year from all sources within the Philippines by an individual citizen of the Philippines who is residing outside of the Philippines including overseas contract workers referred to in Subsection(C) of Section 23 hereof; and

(c) On the taxable income defined in Section 31 of this Code, other than income subject to tax under Subsections (b), (C) and (D) of this Section, derived for each taxable year from all sources within the Philippines by an individual alien who is a resident of the Philippines.

The tax shall be computed in accordance with and at the rates established in the following schedule:

Not over P10,000

5%

Over P10,000 but not over P30,000

P500+10% of the excess over P10,000

Over P30,000 but not over P70,000

P2,500+15% of the excess over P30,000

Over P70,000 but not over P140,000

P8,500+20% of the excess over P70,000

Over P140,000 but not over P250,000

P22,500+25% of the excess over P140,000

Over P250,000 but not over P500,000

P50,000+30% of the excess over P250,000

Over P500,000

P125,000+34% of the excess over P500,000 in 1998.

Provided, That effective January 1, 1999, the top marginal rate shall be thirty-three percent (33%) and effective January 1, 2000, the said rate shall be thirty-two percent (32%).

For married individuals, the husband and wife, subject to the provision of Section 51 (D) hereof, shall compute separately their individual income tax based on their respective total taxable income: Provided, That if any income cannot be definitely attributed to or identified as income exclusively earned or realized by either of the spouses, the same shall be divided equally between the spouses for the purpose of determining their respective taxable income.

(B) Rate of Tax on Certain Passive Income.

(1) Interests, Royalties, Prizes, and Other Winnings. - A final tax at the rate of twenty percent (20%) is hereby imposed upon the amount of interest from any currency bank deposit and yield or any other monetary benefit from deposit substitutes and from trust funds and similar arrangements; royalties, except on books, as well as other literary works and musical compositions, which shall be imposed a final tax of ten percent (10%); prizes (except prizes amounting to Ten thousand pesos (P10,000) or less which shall be subject to tax under Subsection (A) of Section 24; and other winnings (except Philippine Charity Sweepstakes and Lotto winnings), derived from sources within the Philippines: Provided, however, That interest income received by an individual taxpayer (except a nonresident individual) from a depository bank under the expanded foreign currency deposit system shall be subject to a final income tax at the rate of seven and one-half percent (7 1/2%) of such interest income: Provided, further, That interest income from long-term deposit or investment in the form of savings, common or individual trust funds, deposit substitutes, investment management accounts and other investments evidenced by certificates in such form prescribed by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) shall be exempt from the tax imposed under this Subsection: Provided, finally, That should the holder of the certificate pre-terminate the deposit or investment before the fifth (5th) year, a final tax shall be imposed on the entire income and shall be deducted and withheld by the depository bank from the proceeds of the long-term deposit or investment certificate based on the remaining maturity thereof:

Four (4) years to less than five (5) years - 5%;

Three (3) years to less than (4) years - 12%; and

Less than three (3) years - 20%

(2) Cash and/or Property Dividends - A final tax at the following rates shall be imposed upon the cash and/or property dividends actually or constructively received by an individual from a domestic corporation or from a joint stock company, insurance or mutual fund companies and regional operating headquarters of multinational companies, or on the share of an individual in the distributable net income after tax of a partnership (except a general professional partnership) of which he is a partner, or on the share of an individual in the net income after tax of an association, a joint account, or a joint venture or consortium taxable as a corporation of which he is a member or co-venturer:

Six percent (6%) beginning January 1, 1998;

Eight percent (8%) beginning January 1, 1999;

Ten percent (10% beginning January 1, 2000.

  Provided, however, That the tax on dividends shall apply only on income earned on or after January 1, 1998. Income forming part of retained earnings as of December 31, 1997 shall not, even if declared or distributed on or after January 1, 1998, be subject to this tax.

(C) Capital Gains from Sale of Shares of Stock not Traded in the Stock Exchange. - The provisions of Section 39(B) notwithstanding, a final tax at the rates prescribed below is hereby imposed upon the net capital gains realized during the taxable year from the sale, barter, exchange or other disposition of shares of stock in a domestic corporation, except shares sold, or disposed of through the stock exchange.

Not over P100,000…………………………….. 5%

On any amount in excess of P100,000………… 10%

(D) Capital Gains from Sale of Real Property. -

(1) In General. - The provisions of Section 39(B) notwithstanding, a final tax of six percent (6%) based on the gross selling price or current fair market value as determined in accordance with Section 6(E) of this Code, whichever is higher, is hereby imposed upon capital gains presumed to have been realized from the sale, exchange, or other disposition of real property located in the Philippines, classified as capital assets, including pacto de retro sales and other forms of conditional sales, by individuals, including estates and trusts: Provided, That the tax liability, if any, on gains from sales or other dispositions of real property to the government or any of its political subdivisions or agencies or to government-owned or controlled corporations shall be determined either under Section 24 (A) or under this Subsection, at the option of the taxpayer.

(2) Exception. - The provisions of paragraph (1) of this Subsection to the contrary notwithstanding, capital gains presumed to have been realized from the sale or disposition of their principal residence by natural persons, the proceeds of which is fully utilized in acquiring or constructing a new principal residence within eighteen (18) calendar months from the date of sale or disposition, shall be exempt from the capital gains tax imposed under this Subsection: Provided, That the historical cost or adjusted basis of the real property sold or disposed shall be carried over to the new principal residence built or acquired: Provided, further, That the Commissioner shall have been duly notified by the taxpayer within thirty (30) days from the date of sale or disposition through a prescribed return of his intention to avail of the tax exemption herein mentioned: Provided, still further, That the said tax exemption can only be availed of once every ten (10) years: Provided, finally, that if there is no full utilization of the proceeds of sale or disposition, the portion of the gain presumed to have been realized from the sale or disposition shall be subject to capital gains tax. For this purpose, the gross selling price or fair market value at the time of sale, whichever is higher, shall be multiplied by a fraction which the unutilized amount bears to the gross selling price in order to determine the taxable portion and the tax prescribed under paragraph (1) of this Subsection shall be imposed thereon.

SEC. 25. Tax on Nonresident Alien Individual. -

(A) Nonresident Alien Engaged in trade or Business Within the Philippines. -

(1) In General. - A nonresident alien individual engaged in trade or business in the Philippines shall be subject to an income tax in the same manner as an individual citizen and a resident alien individual, on taxable income received from all sources within the Philippines. A nonresident alien individual who shall come to the Philippines and stay therein for an aggregate period of more than one hundred eighty (180) days during any calendar year shall be deemed a 'nonresident alien doing business in the Philippines'. Section 22 (G) of this Code notwithstanding.

(2) Cash and/or Property Dividends from a Domestic Corporation or Joint Stock Company, or Insurance or Mutual Fund Company or Regional Operating Headquarter or Multinational Company, or Share in the Distributable Net Income of a Partnership (Except a General Professional Partnership), Joint Account, Joint Venture Taxable as a Corporation or Association., Interests, Royalties, Prizes, and Other Winnings. - Cash and/or property dividends from a domestic corporation, or from a joint stock company, or from an insurance or mutual fund company or from a regional operating headquarter of multinational company, or the share of a nonresident alien individual in the distributable net income after tax of a partnership (except a general professional partnership) of which he is a partner, or the share of a nonresident alien individual in the net income after tax of an association, a joint account, or a joint venture taxable as a corporation of which he is a member or a co-venturer; interests; royalties (in any form); and prizes (except prizes amounting to Ten thousand pesos (P10,000) or less which shall be subject to tax under Subsection (B)(1) of Section 24) and other winnings (except Philippine Charity Sweepstakes and Lotto winnings); shall be subject to an income tax of twenty percent (20%) on the total amount thereof: Provided, however, that royalties on books as well as other literary works, and royalties on musical compositions shall be subject to a final tax of ten percent (10%) on the total amount thereof: Provided, further, That cinematographic films and similar works shall be subject to the tax provided under Section 28 of this Code: Provided, furthermore, That interest income from long-term deposit or investment in the form of savings, common or individual trust funds, deposit substitutes, investment management accounts and other investments evidenced by certificates in such form prescribed by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) shall be exempt from the tax imposed under this Subsection: Provided, finally, that should the holder of the certificate pre-terminate the deposit or investment before the fifth (5th) year, a final tax shall be imposed on the entire income and shall be deducted and withheld by the depository bank from the proceeds of the long-term deposit or investment certificate based on the remaining maturity thereof:

Four (4) years to less than five (5) years - 5%;

Three (3) years to less than four (4) years - 12%; and

Less than three (3) years - 20%.

  (3) Capital Gains. - Capital gains realized from sale, barter or exchange of shares of stock in domestic corporations not traded through the local stock exchange, and real properties shall be subject to the tax prescribed under Subsections (C) and (D) of Section 24.

(B) Nonresident Alien Individual Not Engaged in Trade or Business Within the Philippines. - There shall be levied, collected and paid for each taxable year upon the entire income received from all sources within the Philippines by every nonresident alien individual not engaged in trade or business within the Philippines as interest, cash and/or property dividends, rents, salaries, wages, premiums, annuities, compensation, remuneration, emoluments, or other fixed or determinable annual or periodic or casual gains, profits, and income, and capital gains, a tax equal to twenty-five percent (25%) of such income. Capital gains realized by a nonresident alien individual not engaged in trade or business in the Philippines from the sale of shares of stock in any domestic corporation and real property shall be subject to the income tax prescribed under Subsections (C) and (D) of Section 24.

(C) Alien Individual Employed by Regional or Area Headquarters and Regional Operating Headquarters of Multinational Companies. - There shall be levied, collected and paid for each taxable year upon the gross income received by every alien individual employed by regional or area headquarters and regional operating headquarters established in the Philippines by multinational companies as salaries, wages, annuities, compensation, remuneration and other emoluments, such as honoraria and allowances, from such regional or area headquarters and regional operating headquarters, a tax equal to fifteen percent (15%) of such gross income: Provided, however, That the same tax treatment shall apply to Filipinos employed and occupying the same position as those of aliens employed by these multinational companies. For purposes of this Chapter, the term 'multinational company' means a foreign firm or entity engaged in international trade with affiliates or subsidiaries or branch offices in the Asia-Pacific Region and other foreign markets.

(D) Alien Individual Employed by Offshore Banking Units. - There shall be levied, collected and paid for each taxable year upon the gross income received by every alien individual employed by offshore banking units established in the Philippines as salaries, wages, annuities, compensation, remuneration and other emoluments, such as honoraria and allowances, from such off-shore banking units, a tax equal to fifteen percent (15%) of such gross income: Provided, however, That the same tax treatment shall apply to Filipinos employed and occupying the same positions as those of aliens employed by these offshore banking units.

(E) Alien Individual Employed by Petroleum Service Contractor and Subcontractor. - An Alien individual who is a permanent resident of a foreign country but who is employed and assigned in the Philippines by a foreign service contractor or by a foreign service subcontractor engaged in petroleum operations in the Philippines shall be liable to a tax of fifteen percent (15%) of the salaries, wages, annuities, compensation, remuneration and other emoluments, such as honoraria and allowances, received from such contractor or subcontractor: Provided, however, That the same tax treatment shall apply to a Filipino employed and occupying the same position as an alien employed by petroleum service contractor and subcontractor.

Any income earned from all other sources within the Philippines by the alien employees referred to under Subsections (C), (D) and (E) hereof shall be subject to the pertinent income tax, as the case may be, imposed under this Code.

SEC. 26. Tax Liability of Members of General Professional Partnerships. - A general professional partnership as such shall not be subject to the income tax imposed under this Chapter. Persons engaging in business as partners in a general professional partnership shall be liable for income tax only in their separate and individual capacities.

For purposes of computing the distributive share of the partners, the net income of the partnership shall be computed in the same manner as a corporation.

Each partner shall report as gross income his distributive share, actually or constructively received, in the net income of the partnership.

CHAPTER IV - TAX ON CORPORATIONS SEC. 27. Rates of Income tax on Domestic Corporations. -

(A) In General. - Except as otherwise provided in this Code, an income tax of thirty-five percent (35%) is hereby imposed upon the taxable income derived during each taxable year from all sources within and without the Philippines by every corporation, as defined in Section 22(B) of this Code and taxable under this Title as a corporation, organized in, or existing under the laws of the Philippines: Provided, That effective January 1, 1998, the rate of income tax shall be thirty-four percent (34%); effective January 1, 1999, the rate shall be thirty-three percent (33%); and effective January 1, 2000 and thereafter, the rate shall be thirty-two percent (32%).

In the case of corporations adopting the fiscal-year accounting period, the taxable income shall be computed without regard to the specific date when specific sales, purchases and other transactions occur. Their income and expenses for the fiscal year shall be deemed to have been earned and spent equally for each month of the period.

The reduced corporate income tax rates shall be applied on the amount computed by multiplying the number of months covered by the new rates within the fiscal year by the taxable income of the corporation for the period, divided by twelve.

Provided, further, That the President, upon the recommendation of the Secretary of Finance, may effective January 1, 2000, allow corporations the option to be taxed at fifteen percent (15%) of gross income as defined herein, after the following conditions have been satisfied:

(1) A tax effort ratio of twenty percent (20%) of Gross National Product (GNP);

(2) A ratio of forty percent (40%) of income tax collection to total tax revenues;

(3) A VAT tax effort of four percent (4%) of GNP; and

(4) A 0.9 percent (0.9%) ratio of the Consolidated Public Sector Financial Position (CPSFP) to GNP.

The option to be taxed based on gross income shall be available only to firms whose ratio of cost of sales to gross sales or receipts from all sources does not exceed fifty-five percent (55%).

The election of the gross income tax option by the corporation shall be irrevocable for three (3) consecutive taxable years during which the corporation is qualified under the scheme.

For purposes of this Section, the term 'gross income' derived from business shall be equivalent to gross sales less sales returns, discounts and allowances and cost of goods sold. "Cost of goods sold' shall include all business expenses directly incurred to produce the merchandise to bring them to their present location and use.

For a trading or merchandising concern, 'cost of goods' sold shall include the invoice cost of the goods sold, plus import duties, freight in transporting the goods to the place where the goods are actually sold, including insurance while the goods are in transit.

For a manufacturing concern, 'cost of goods manufactured and sold' shall include all costs of production of finished goods, such as raw materials used, direct labor and manufacturing overhead, freight cost, insurance premiums and other costs incurred to bring the raw materials to the factory or warehouse.

In the case of taxpayers engaged in the sale of service, 'gross income' means gross receipts less sales returns, allowances and discounts.

(B) Proprietary Educational Institutions and Hospitals. - Proprietary educational institutions and hospitals which are nonprofit shall pay a tax of ten percent (10%) on their taxable income except those covered by Subsection (D) hereof: Provided, that if the gross income from unrelated trade, business or other activity exceeds fifty percent (50%) of the total gross income derived by such educational institutions or hospitals from all sources, the tax prescribed in Subsection (A) hereof shall be imposed on the entire taxable income. For purposes of this Subsection, the term 'unrelated trade, business or other activity' means any trade, business or other activity, the conduct of which is not substantially related to the exercise or performance by such educational institution or hospital of its primary purpose or function. A 'Proprietary educational institution' is any private school maintained and administered by private individuals or groups with an issued permit to operate from the Department of Education, Culture and Sports (DECS), or the Commission on Higher Education (CHED), or the Technical Education and Skills Development Authority (TESDA), as the case may be, in accordance with existing laws and regulations.

(C) Government-owned or Controlled-Corporations, Agencies or Instrumentalities. - The provisions of existing special or general laws to the contrary notwithstanding, all corporations, agencies, or instrumentalities owned or controlled by the Government, except the Government Service Insurance System (GSIS), the Social Security System (SSS), the Philippine Health Insurance Corporation (PHIC), the Philippine Charity Sweepstakes Office (PCSO) and the Philippine Amusement and Gaming Corporation (PAGCOR), shall pay such rate of tax upon their taxable income as are imposed by this Section upon corporations or associations engaged in s similar business, industry, or activity.

(D) Rates of Tax on Certain Passive Incomes. -

(1) Interest from Deposits and Yield or any other Monetary Benefit from Deposit Substitutes and from Trust Funds and Similar Arrangements, and Royalties. - A final tax at the rate of twenty percent (20%) is hereby imposed upon the amount of interest on currency bank deposit and yield or any other monetary benefit from deposit substitutes and from trust funds and similar arrangements received by domestic corporations, and royalties, derived from sources within the Philippines: Provided, however, That interest income derived by a domestic corporation from a depository bank under the expanded foreign currency deposit system shall be subject to a final income tax at the rate of seven and one-half percent (7 1/2%) of such interest income.

(2) Capital Gains from the Sale of Shares of Stock Not Traded in the Stock Exchange. - A final tax at the rates prescribed below shall be imposed on net capital gains realized during the taxable year from the sale, exchange or other disposition of shares of stock in a domestic corporation except shares sold or disposed of through the stock exchange:

Not over P100,000…………………………. 5%

Amount in excess of P100,000…………….. 10%

(3) Tax on Income Derived under the Expanded Foreign Currency Deposit System. - Income derived by a depository bank under the expanded foreign currency deposit system from foreign currency transactions with local commercial banks, including branches of foreign banks that may be authorized by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) to transact business with foreign currency depository system units and other depository banks under the expanded foreign currency deposit system, including interest income from foreign currency loans granted by such depository banks under said expanded foreign currency deposit system to residents, shall be subject to a final income tax at the rate of ten percent (10%) of such income.

 Any income of nonresidents, whether individuals or corporations, from transactions with depository banks under the expanded system shall be exempt from income tax.

 (4) Intercorporate Dividends. - Dividends received by a domestic corporation from another domestic corporation shall not be subject to tax.

 (5) Capital Gains Realized from the Sale, Exchange or Disposition of Lands and/or Buildings. - A final tax of six percent (6%) is hereby imposed on the gain presumed to have been realized on the sale, exchange or disposition of lands and/or buildings which are not actually used in the business of a corporation and are treated as capital assets, based on the gross selling price of fair market value as determined in accordance with Section 6(E) of this Code, whichever is higher, of such lands and/or buildings.

(E) Minimum Corporate Income Tax on Domestic Corporations. -

(1) Imposition of Tax. - A minimum corporate income tax of two percent (2%0 of the gross income as of the end of the taxable year, as defined herein, is hereby imposed on a corporation taxable under this Title, beginning on the fourth taxable year immediately following the year in which such corporation commenced its business operations, when the minimum income tax is greater than the tax computed under Subsection (A) of this Section for the taxable year.

(2) Carry Froward of Excess Minimum Tax. - Any excess of the minimum corporate income tax over the normal income tax as computed under Subsection (A) of this Section shall be carried forward and credited against the normal income tax for the three (3) immediately succeeding taxable years.

(3) Relief from the Minimum Corporate Income Tax Under Certain Conditions. - The Secretary of Finance is hereby authorized to suspend the imposition of the minimum corporate income tax on any corporation which suffers losses on account of prolonged labor dispute, or because of force majeure, or because of legitimate business reverses.

The Secretary of Finance is hereby authorized to promulgate, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, the necessary rules and regulation that shall define the terms and conditions under which he may suspend the imposition of the minimum corporate income tax in a meritorious case.

(4) Gross Income Defined. - For purposes of applying the minimum corporate income tax provided under Subsection (E) hereof, the term 'gross income' shall mean gross sales less sales returns, discounts and allowances and cost of goods sold. "Cost of goods sold' shall include all business expenses directly incurred to produce the merchandise to bring them to their present location and use.

For a trading or merchandising concern, 'cost of goods sold' shall include the invoice cost of the goods sold, plus import duties, freight in transporting the goods to the place where the goods are actually sold including insurance while the goods are in transit.

For a manufacturing concern, cost of 'goods manufactured and sold' shall include all costs of production of finished goods, such as raw materials used, direct labor and manufacturing overhead, freight cost, insurance premiums and other costs incurred to bring the raw materials to the factory or warehouse.

In the case of taxpayers engaged in the sale of service, 'gross income' means gross receipts less sales returns, allowances, discounts and cost of services. 'Cost of services' shall mean all direct costs and expenses necessarily incurred to provide the services required by the customers and clients including (A) salaries and employee benefits of personnel, consultants and specialists directly rendering the service and (B) cost of facilities directly utilized in providing the service such as depreciation or rental of equipment used and cost of supplies: Provided, however, That in the case of banks, 'cost of services' shall include interest expense.

SEC. 28. Rates of Income Tax on Foreign Corporations. -

(A) Tax on Resident Foreign Corporations. -

(1) In General. - Except as otherwise provided in this Code, a corporation organized, authorized, or existing under the laws of any foreign country, engaged in trade or business within the Philippines, shall be subject to an income tax equivalent to thirty-five percent (35%) of the taxable income derived in the preceding taxable year from all sources within the Philippines: provided, That effective January 1, 1998, the rate of income tax shall be thirty-four percent (34%); effective January 1, 1999, the rate shall be thirty-three percent (33%), and effective January 1, 2000 and thereafter, the rate shall be thirty-two percent (32%).

In the case of corporations adopting the fiscal-year accounting period, the taxable income shall be computed without regard to the specific date when sales, purchases and other transactions occur. Their income and expenses for the fiscal year shall be deemed to have been earned and spent equally for each month of the period.

The reduced corporate income tax rates shall be applied on the amount computed by multiplying the number of months covered by the new rates within the fiscal year by the taxable income of the corporation for the period, divided by twelve.

Provided, however, That a resident foreign corporation shall be granted the option to be taxed at fifteen percent (15%) on gross income under the same conditions, as provided in Section 27 (A).

(2) Minimum Corporate Income Tax on Resident Foreign Corporations. - A minimum corporate income tax of two percent (2%) of gross income, as prescribed under Section 27 (E) of this Code, shall be imposed, under the same conditions, on a resident foreign corporation taxable under paragraph (1) of this Subsection.

(3) International Carrier. - An international carrier doing business in the Philippines shall pay a tax of two and one-half percent (2 1/2%) on its 'Gross Philippine Billings' as defined hereunder:

(a) International Air Carrier. - 'Gross Philippine Billings' refers to the amount of gross revenue derived from carriage of persons, excess baggage, cargo and mail originating from the Philippines in a continuous and uninterrupted flight, irrespective of the place of sale or issue and the place of payment of the ticket or passage document: Provided, That tickets revalidated, exchanged and/or indorsed to another international airline form part of the Gross Philippine Billings if the passenger boards a plane in a port or point in the Philippines: Provided, further, That for a flight which originates from the Philippines, but transshipment of passenger takes place at any port outside the Philippines on another airline, only the aliquot portion of the cost of the ticket corresponding to the leg flown from the Philippines to the point of transshipment shall form part of Gross Philippine Billings.

(b) International Shipping. - 'Gross Philippine Billings' means gross revenue whether for passenger, cargo or mail originating from the Philippines up to final destination, regardless of the place of sale or payments of the passage or freight documents.

(4) Offshore Banking Units. - The provisions of any law to the contrary notwithstanding, income derived by offshore banking units authorized by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) to transact business with offshore banking units, including any interest income derived from foreign currency loans granted to residents, shall be subject to a final income tax at the rate of ten percent (10%) of such income.

Any income of nonresidents, whether individuals or corporations, from transactions with said offshore banking units shall be exempt from income tax.

(5) Tax on Branch Profits Remittances. - Any profit remitted by a branch to its head office shall be subject to a tax of fifteen (15%) which shall be based on the total profits applied or earmarked for remittance without any deduction for the tax component thereof (except those activities which are registered with the Philippine Economic Zone Authority). The tax shall be collected and paid in the same manner as provided in Sections 57 and 58 of this Code: provided, that interests, dividends, rents, royalties, including remuneration for technical services, salaries, wages premiums, annuities, emoluments or other fixed or determinable annual, periodic or casual gains, profits, income and capital gains received by a foreign corporation during each taxable year from all sources within the Philippines shall not be treated as branch profits unless the same are effectively connected with the conduct of its trade or business in the Philippines.

(6) Regional or Area Headquarters and Regional Operating Headquarters of Multinational Companies. -

(a) Regional or area headquarters as defined in Section 22(DD) shall not be subject to income tax.

(b) Regional operating headquarters as defined in Section 22(EE) shall pay a tax of ten percent (10%) of their taxable income.

  (7) Tax on Certain Incomes Received by a Resident Foreign Corporation. -

(a) Interest from Deposits and Yield or any other Monetary Benefit from Deposit Substitutes, Trust Funds and Similar Arrangements and Royalties. - Interest from any currency bank deposit and yield or any other monetary benefit from deposit substitutes and from trust funds and similar arrangements and royalties derived from sources within the Philippines shall be subject to a final income tax at the rate of twenty percent (20%) of such interest: Provided, however, That interest income derived by a resident foreign corporation from a depository bank under the expanded foreign currency deposit system shall be subject to a final income tax at the rate of seven and one-half percent (7 1/2%) of such interest income.

(b) Income Derived under the Expanded Foreign Currency Deposit System. - Income derived by a depository bank under the expanded foreign currency deposit system from foreign currency transactions with local commercial banks including branches of foreign banks that may be authorized by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP) to transact business with foreign currency deposit system units, including interest income from foreign currency loans granted by such depository banks under said expanded foreign currency deposit system to residents, shall be subject to a final income tax at the rate of ten percent (10%) of such income.

Any income of nonresidents, whether individuals or corporations, from transactions with depository banks under the expanded system shall be exempt from income tax.

(c) Capital Gains from Sale of Shares of Stock Not Traded in the Stock Exchange. - A final tax at the rates prescribed below is hereby imposed upon the net capital gains realized during the taxable year from the sale, barter, exchange or other disposition of shares of stock in a domestic corporation except shares sold or disposed of through the stock exchange:

Not over P100,000………………………… 5%

On any amount in excess of P100,000……. 10%

(d) Intercorporate Dividends. - Dividends received by a resident foreign corporation from a domestic corporation liable to tax under this Code shall not be subject to tax under this Title.

 (B) Tax on Nonresident Foreign Corporation. -

(1) In General. - Except as otherwise provided in this Code, a foreign corporation not engaged in trade or business in the Philippines shall pay a tax equal to thirty-five percent (35%) of the gross income received during each taxable year from all sources within the Philippines, such as interests, dividends, rents, royalties, salaries, premiums (except reinsurance premiums), annuities, emoluments or other fixed or determinable annual, periodic or casual gains, profits and income, and capital gains, except capital gains subject to tax under subparagraphs (C) and (d): Provided, That effective 1, 1998, the rate of income tax shall be thirty-four percent (34%); effective January 1, 1999, the rate shall be thirty-three percent (33%); and, effective January 1, 2000 and thereafter, the rate shall be thirty-two percent (32%).

 (2) Nonresident Cinematographic Film Owner, Lessor or Distributor. - A cinematographic film owner, lessor, or distributor shall pay a tax of twenty-five percent (25%) of its gross income from all sources within the Philippines.

 (3) Nonresident Owner or Lessor of Vessels Chartered by Philippine Nationals. - A nonresident owner or lessor of vessels shall be subject to a tax of four and one-half percent (4 1/2%) of gross rentals, lease or charter fees from leases or charters to Filipino citizens or corporations, as approved by the Maritime Industry Authority.

 (4) Nonresident Owner or Lessor of Aircraft, Machineries and Other Equipment. - Rentals, charters and other fees derived by a nonresident lessor of aircraft, machineries and other equipment shall be subject to a tax of seven and one-half percent (7 1/2%) of gross rentals or fees.

 (5) Tax on Certain Incomes Received by a Nonresident Foreign Corporation. -

(a) Interest on Foreign Loans. - A final withholding tax at the rate of twenty percent (20%) is hereby imposed on the amount of interest on foreign loans contracted on or after August 1, 1986; /FONT>

(b) Intercorporate Dividends. - A final withholding tax at the rate of fifteen percent (15%) is hereby imposed on the amount of cash and/or property dividends received from a domestic corporation, which shall be collected and paid as provided in Section 57 (A) of this Code, subject to the condition that the country in which the nonresident foreign corporation is domiciled, shall allow a credit against the tax due from the nonresident foreign corporation taxes deemed to have been paid in the Philippines equivalent to twenty percent (20%) for 1997, nineteen percent (19%) for 1998, eighteen percent (18%) for 1999, and seventeen percent (17%) thereafter, which represents the difference between the regular income tax of thirty-five percent (35%) in 1997, thirty-four percent (34%) in 1998, and thirty-three percent (33%) in 1999, and thirty-two percent (32%) thereafter on corporations and the fifteen percent (15%) tax on dividends as provided in this subparagraph;

(c) Capital Gains from Sale of Shares of Stock not Traded in the Stock Exchange. - A final tax at the rates prescribed below is hereby imposed upon the net capital gains realized during the taxable year from the sale, barter, exchange or other disposition of shares of stock in a domestic corporation, except shares sold, or disposed of through the stock exchange:

Not over P100,000…………..………………… 5%

On any amount in excess of P100,000………… 10%

SEC. 29. Imposition of Improperly Accumulated Earnings Tax. -

(A) In General. - In addition to other taxes imposed by this Title, there is hereby imposed for each taxable year on the improperly accumulated taxable income of each corporation described in Subsection B hereof, an improperly accumulated earnings tax equal to ten percent (10%) of the improperly accumulated taxable income.

(B) Tax on Corporations Subject to Improperly Accumulated Earnings Tax. -

(1) In General. - The improperly accumulated earnings tax imposed in the preceding Section shall apply to every corporation formed or availed for the purpose of avoiding the income tax with respect to its shareholders or the shareholders of any other corporation, by permitting earnings and profits to accumulate instead of being divided or distributed.

(2) Exceptions. - The improperly accumulated earnings tax as provided for under this Section shall not apply to:

(a) Publicly-held corporations;

(b) Banks and other nonbank financial intermediaries; and

(c) Insurance companies.

(C) Evidence of Purpose to Avoid Income Tax. -

(1) Prima Facie Evidence. - the fact that any corporation is a mere holding company or investment company shall be prima facie evidence of a purpose to avoid the tax upon its shareholders or members.

(2) Evidence Determinative of Purpose. - The fact that the earnings or profits of a corporation are permitted to accumulate beyond the reasonable needs of the business shall be determinative of the purpose to avoid the tax upon its shareholders or members unless the corporation, by the clear preponderance of evidence, shall prove to the contrary.

(D) Improperly Accumulated Taxable Income. - For purposes of this Section, the term 'improperly accumulated taxable income' means taxable income' adjusted by:

(1) Income exempt from tax;

(2) Income excluded from gross income;

(3) Income subject to final tax; and

(4) The amount of net operating loss carry-over deducted;

And reduced by the sum of:

(1) Dividends actually or constructively paid; and

(2) Income tax paid for the taxable year.

Provided, however, That for corporations using the calendar year basis, the accumulated earnings under tax shall not apply on improperly accumulated income as of December 31, 1997. In the case of corporations adopting the fiscal year accounting period, the improperly accumulated income not subject to this tax, shall be reckoned, as of the end of the month comprising the twelve (12)-month period of fiscal year 1997-1998.

(E) Reasonable Needs of the Business. - For purposes of this Section, the term 'reasonable needs of the business' includes the reasonably anticipated needs of the business.

SEC. 30. Exemptions from Tax on Corporations. - The following organizations shall not be taxed under this Title in respect to income received by them as such:

(A) Labor, agricultural or horticultural organization not organized principally for profit;

(B) Mutual savings bank not having a capital stock represented by shares, and cooperative bank without capital stock organized and operated for mutual purposes and without profit;

(C) A beneficiary society, order or association, operating fort he exclusive benefit of the members such as a fraternal organization operating under the lodge system, or mutual aid association or a nonstock corporation organized by employees providing for the payment of life, sickness, accident, or other benefits exclusively to the members of such society, order, or association, or nonstock corporation or their dependents;

(D) Cemetery company owned and operated exclusively for the benefit of its members;

(E) Nonstock corporation or association organized and operated exclusively for religious, charitable, scientific, athletic, or cultural purposes, or for the rehabilitation of veterans, no part of its net income or asset shall belong to or inures to the benefit of any member, organizer, officer or any specific person;

(F) Business league chamber of commerce, or board of trade, not organized for profit and no part of the net income of which inures to the benefit of any private stock-holder, or individual;

(G) Civic league or organization not organized for profit but operated exclusively for the promotion of social welfare;

(H) A nonstock and nonprofit educational institution;

(I) Government educational institution;

(J) Farmers' or other mutual typhoon or fire insurance company, mutual ditch or irrigation company, mutual or cooperative telephone company, or like organization of a purely local character, the income of which consists solely of assessments, dues, and fees collected from members for the sole purpose of meeting its expenses; and

(K) Farmers', fruit growers', or like association organized and operated as a sales agent for the purpose of marketing the products of its members and turning back to them the proceeds of sales, less the necessary selling expenses on the basis of the quantity of produce finished by them;

Notwithstanding the provisions in the preceding paragraphs, the income of whatever kind and character of the foregoing organizations from any of their properties, real or personal, or from any of their activities conducted for profit regardless of the disposition made of such income, shall be subject to tax imposed under this Code.

CHAPTER V - COMPUTATION OF TAXABLE INCOME SEC. 31. Taxable Income Defined. - The term taxable income means the pertinent items of gross income specified in this Code, less the deductions and/or personal and additional exemptions, if any, authorized for such types of income by this Code or other special laws. CHAPTER VI - COMPUTATION OF GROSS INCOME SEC. 32. Gross Income. -

(A) General Definition. - Except when otherwise provided in this Title, gross income means all income derived from whatever source, including (but not limited to) the following items:

(1) Compensation for services in whatever form paid, including, but not limited to fees, salaries, wages, commissions, and similar items;

(2) Gross income derived from the conduct of trade or business or the exercise of a profession;

(3) Gains derived from dealings in property;

(4) Interests;

(5) Rents;

(6) Royalties;

(7) Dividends;

(8) Annuities;

(9) Prizes and winnings;

(10) Pensions; and

(11) Partner's distributive share from the net income of the general professional partnership.

(B) Exclusions from Gross Income. - The following items shall not be included in gross income and shall be exempt from taxation under this title:

(1) Life Insurance. - The proceeds of life insurance policies paid to the heirs or beneficiaries upon the death of the insured, whether in a single sum or otherwise, but if such amounts are held by the insurer under an agreement to pay interest thereon, the interest payments shall be included in gross income.

(2) Amount Received by Insured as Return of Premium. - The amount received by the insured, as a return of premiums paid by him under life insurance, endowment, or annuity contracts, either during the term or at the maturity of the term mentioned in the contract or upon surrender of the contract.

(3) Gifts, Bequests, and Devises. _ The value of property acquired by gift, bequest, devise, or descent: Provided, however, That income from such property, as well as gift, bequest, devise or descent of income from any property, in cases of transfers of divided interest, shall be included in gross income.

(4) Compensation for Injuries or Sickness. - amounts received, through Accident or Health Insurance or under Workmen's Compensation Acts, as compensation for personal injuries or sickness, plus the amounts of any damages received, whether by suit or agreement, on account of such injuries or sickness.

(5) Income Exempt under Treaty. - Income of any kind, to the extent required by any treaty obligation binding upon the Government of the Philippines.

(6) Retirement Benefits, Pensions, Gratuities, etc.-

(a) Retirement benefits received under Republic Act No. 7641 and those received by officials and employees of private firms, whether individual or corporate, in accordance with a reasonable private benefit plan maintained by the employer: Provided, That the retiring official or employee has been in the service of the same employer for at least ten (10) years and is not less than fifty (50) years of age at the time of his retirement: Provided, further, That the benefits granted under this subparagraph shall be availed of by an official or employee only once. For purposes of this Subsection, the term 'reasonable private benefit plan' means a pension, gratuity, stock bonus or profit-sharing plan maintained by an employer for the benefit of some or all of his officials or employees, wherein contributions are made by such employer for the officials or employees, or both, for the purpose of distributing to such officials and employees the earnings and principal of the fund thus accumulated, and wherein its is provided in said plan that at no time shall any part of the corpus or income of the fund be used for, or be diverted to, any purpose other than for the exclusive benefit of the said officials and employees.

(b) Any amount received by an official or employee or by his heirs from the employer as a consequence of separation of such official or employee from the service of the employer because of death sickness or other physical disability or for any cause beyond the control of the said official or employee.

(c) The provisions of any existing law to the contrary notwithstanding, social security benefits, retirement gratuities, pensions and other similar benefits received by resident or nonresident citizens of the Philippines or aliens who come to reside permanently in the Philippines from foreign government agencies and other institutions, private or public.

(d) Payments of benefits due or to become due to any person residing in the Philippines under the laws of the United States administered by the United States Veterans Administration.

(e) Benefits received from or enjoyed under the Social Security System in accordance with the provisions of Republic Act No. 8282.

(f) Benefits received from the GSIS under Republic Act No. 8291, including retirement gratuity received by government officials and employees.

(7) Miscellaneous Items. -

(a) Income Derived by Foreign Government. - Income derived from investments in the Philippines in loans, stocks, bonds or other domestic securities, or from interest on deposits in banks in the Philippines by (i) foreign governments, (ii) financing institutions owned, controlled, or enjoying refinancing from foreign governments, and (iii) international or regional financial institutions established by foreign governments.

(b) Income Derived by the Government or its Political Subdivisions. - Income derived from any public utility or from the exercise of any essential governmental function accruing to the Government of the Philippines or to any political subdivision thereof.

(c) Prizes and Awards. - Prizes and awards made primarily in recognition of religious, charitable, scientific, educational, artistic, literary, or civic achievement but only if:

(i) The recipient was selected without any action on his part to enter the contest or proceeding; and

(ii) The recipient is not required to render substantial future services as a condition to receiving the prize or award.

(d) Prizes and Awards in sports Competition. - All prizes and awards granted to athletes in local and international sports competitions and tournaments whether held in the Philippines or abroad and sanctioned by their national sports associations.

(e) 13th Month Pay and Other Benefits. - Gross benefits received by officials and employees of public and private entities: Provided, however, That the total exclusion under this subparagraph shall not exceed Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000) which shall cover:

(i) Benefits received by officials and employees of the national and local government pursuant to Republic Act No. 6686;

(ii) Benefits received by employees pursuant to Presidential Decree No. 851, as amended by Memorandum Order No. 28, dated August 13, 1986;

(iii) Benefits received by officials and employees not covered by Presidential decree No. 851, as amended by Memorandum Order No. 28, dated August 13, 1986; and

(iv) Other benefits such as productivity incentives and Christmas bonus: Provided, further, That the ceiling of Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000) may be increased through rules and regulations issued by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, after considering among others, the effect on the same of the inflation rate at the end of the taxable year.

(f) GSIS, SSS, Medicare and Other Contributions. - GSIS, SSS, Medicare and Pag-ibig contributions, and union dues of individuals.

(g) Gains from the Sale of Bonds, Debentures or other Certificate of Indebtedness. - Gains realized from the same or exchange or retirement of bonds, debentures or other certificate of indebtedness with a maturity of more than five (5) years.

(h) Gains from Redemption of Shares in Mutual Fund. - Gains realized by the investor upon redemption of shares of stock in a mutual fund company as defined in Section 22 (BB) of this Code.

SEC. 33. Special Treatment of Fringe Benefit.-

(A) Imposition of Tax.- A final tax of thirty-four percent (34%) effective January 1, 1998; thirty-three percent (33%) effective January 1, 1999; and thirty-two percent (32%) effective January 1, 2000 and thereafter, is hereby imposed on the grossed-up monetary value of fringe benefit furnished or granted to the employee (except rank and file employees as defined herein) by the employer, whether an individual or a corporation (unless the fringe benefit is required by the nature of, or necessary to the trade, business or profession of the employer, or when the fringe benefit is for the convenience or advantage of the employer). The tax herein imposed is payable by the employer which tax shall be paid in the same manner as provided for under Section 57 (A) of this Code. The grossed-up monetary value of the fringe benefit shall be determined by dividing the actual monetary value of the fringe benefit by sixty-six percent (66%) effective January 1, 1998; sixty-seven percent (67%) effective January 1, 1999; and sixty-eight percent (68%) effective January 1, 2000 and thereafter: Provided, however, That fringe benefit furnished to employees and taxable under Subsections (B), (C), (D) and (E) of Section 25 shall be taxed at the applicable rates imposed thereat: Provided, further, That the grossed -Up value of the fringe benefit shall be determined by dividing the actual monetary value of the fringe benefit by the difference between one hundred percent (100%) and the applicable rates of income tax under Subsections (B), (C), (D), and (E) of Section 25.

(B) Fringe Benefit defined.- For purposes of this Section, the term 'fringe benefit' means any good, service or other benefit furnished or granted in cash or in kind by an employer to an individual employee (except rank and file employees as defined herein) such as, but not limited to, the following:

(1) Housing;

(2) Expense account;

(3) Vehicle of any kind;

(4) Household personnel, such as maid, driver and others;

(5) Interest on loan at less than market rate to the extent of the difference between the market rate and actual rate granted;

(6) Membership fees, dues and other expenses borne by the employer for the employee in social and athletic clubs or other similar organizations;

(7) Expenses for foreign travel;

(8) Holiday and vacation expenses;

(9) Educational assistance to the employee or his dependents; and

(10) Life or health insurance and other non-life insurance premiums or similar amounts in excess of what the law allows.

(C) Fringe Benefits Not Taxable. - The following fringe benefits are not taxable under this Section:

(1) fringe benefits which are authorized and exempted from tax under special laws;

(2) Contributions of the employer for the benefit of the employee to retirement, insurance and hospitalization benefit plans;

(3) Benefits given to the rank and file employees, whether granted under a collective bargaining agreement or not; and

(4) De minimis benefits as defined in the rules and regulations to be promulgated by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner.

The Secretary of Finance is hereby authorized to promulgate, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, such rules and regulations as are necessary to carry out efficiently and fairly the provisions of this Section, taking into account the peculiar nature and special need of the trade, business or profession of the employer.

CHAPTER VII - ALLOWABLE DEDUCTIONS

SEC. 34. Deductions from Gross Income. - Except for taxpayers earning compensation income arising from personal services rendered under an employer-employee relationship where no deductions shall be allowed under this Section other than under subsection (M) hereof, in computing taxable income subject to income tax under Sections 24 (A); 25 (A); 26; 27 (A), (B) and (C); and 28 (A) (1), there shall be allowed the following deductions from gross income;

(A) Expenses. -

(1) Ordinary and Necessary Trade, Business or Professional Expenses.-

(a) In General. - There shall be allowed as deduction from gross income all the ordinary and necessary expenses paid or incurred during the taxable year in carrying on or which are directly attributable to, the development, management, operation and/or conduct of the trade, business or exercise of a profession, including:

(i) A reasonable allowance for salaries, wages, and other forms of compensation for personal services actually rendered, including the grossed-up monetary value of fringe benefit furnished or granted by the employer to the employee: Provided, That the final tax imposed under Section 33 hereof has been paid;

(ii) A reasonable allowance for travel expenses, here and abroad, while away from home in the pursuit of trade, business or profession;

(iii) A reasonable allowance for rentals and/or other payments which are required as a condition for the continued use or possession, for purposes of the trade, business or profession, of property to which the taxpayer has not taken or is not taking title or in which he has no equity other than that of a lessee, user or possessor;

(iv) A reasonable allowance for entertainment, amusement and recreation expenses during the taxable year, that are directly connected to the development, management and operation of the trade, business or profession of the taxpayer, or that are directly related to or in furtherance of the conduct of his or its trade, business or exercise of a profession not to exceed such ceilings as the Secretary of Finance may, by rules and regulations prescribe, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, taking into account the needs as well as the special circumstances, nature and character of the industry, trade, business, or profession of the taxpayer: Provided, That any expense incurred for entertainment, amusement or recreation that is contrary to law, morals public policy or public order shall in no case be allowed as a deduction.

 (b) Substantiation Requirements. - No deduction from gross income shall be allowed under Subsection (A) hereof unless the taxpayer shall substantiate with sufficient evidence, such as official receipts or other adequate records: (i) the amount of the expense being deducted, and (ii) the direct connection or relation of the expense being deducted to the development, management, operation and/or conduct of the trade, business or profession of the taxpayer.

 (c) Bribes, Kickbacks and Other Similar Payments. - No deduction from gross income shall be allowed under Subsection (A) hereof for any payment made, directly or indirectly, to an official or employee of the national government, or to an official or employee of any local government unit, or to an official or employee of a government-owned or -controlled corporation, or to an official or employee or representative of a foreign government, or to a private corporation, general professional partnership, or a similar entity, if the payment constitutes a bribe or kickback.

(2)  Expenses Allowable to Private Educational Institutions. - In addition to the expenses allowable as deductions under this Chapter, a private educational institution, referred to under Section 27 (B) of this Code, may at its option elect either: (a) to deduct expenditures otherwise considered as capital outlays of depreciable assets incurred during the taxable year for the expansion of school facilities or (b) to deduct allowance for depreciation thereof under Subsection (F) hereof.

 (B) Interest.-

(1) In General. - The amount of interest paid or incurred within a taxable year on indebtedness in connection with the taxpayer's profession, trade or business shall be allowed as deduction from gross income: Provided, however, That the taxpayer's otherwise allowable deduction for interest expense shall be reduced by an amount equal to the following percentages of the interest income subjected to final tax:

Forty-one percent (41%) beginning January 1, 1998;

Thirty-nine percent (39%) beginning January 1, 1999; and

Thirty-eight percent (38%) beginning January 1, 2000;

  (2) Exceptions. - No deduction shall be allowed in respect of interest under the succeeding subparagraphs:

 (a)  If within the taxable year an individual taxpayer reporting income on the cash basis incurs an indebtedness on which an interest is paid in advance through discount or otherwise: Provided, That such interest shall be allowed a a deduction in the year the indebtedness is paid: Provided, further, That if the indebtedness is payable in periodic amortizations, the amount of interest which corresponds to the amount of the principal amortized or paid during the year shall be allowed as deduction in such taxable year;

(b)If both the taxpayer and the person to whom the payment has been made or is to be made are persons specified under Section 36 (B); or

(c)If the indebtedness is incurred to finance petroleum exploration.

(3) Optional Treatment of Interest Expense. - At the option of the taxpayer, interest incurred to acquire property used in trade business or exercise of a profession may be allowed as a deduction or treated as a capital expenditure.

(C) Taxes.-

(1) In General. - Taxes paid or incurred within the taxable year in connection with the taxpayer's profession, trade or business, shall be allowed as deduction, except

(a) The income tax provided for under this Title;

(b) Income taxes imposed by authority of any foreign country; but this deduction shall be allowed in the case of a taxpayer who does not signify in his return his desire to have to any extent the benefits of paragraph (3) of this subsection (relating to credits for taxes of foreign countries);

(c) Estate and donor's taxes; and

(d) Taxes assessed against local benefits of a kind tending to increase the value of the property assessed.

 Provided, That taxes allowed under this Subsection, when refunded or credited, shall be included as part of gross income in the year of receipt to the extent of the income tax benefit of said deduction.

(2) Limitations on Deductions. - In the case of a nonresident alien individual engaged in trade or business in the Philippines and a resident foreign corporation, the deductions for taxes provided in paragraph (1) of this Subsection (C) shall be allowed only if and to the extent that they are connected with income from sources within the Philippines.

(3) Credit Against Tax for Taxes of Foreign Countries. - If the taxpayer signifies in his return his desire to have the benefits of this paragraph, the tax imposed by this Title shall be credited with:

(a) Citizen and Domestic Corporation. - In the case of a citizen of the Philippines and of a domestic corporation, the amount of income taxes paid or incurred during the taxable year to any foreign country; and

(b) Partnerships and Estates. - In the case of any such individual who is a member of a general professional partnership or a beneficiary of an estate or trust, his proportionate share of such taxes of the general professional partnership or the estate or trust paid or incurred during the taxable year to a foreign country, if his distributive share of the income of such partnership or trust is reported for taxation under this Title.

An alien individual and a foreign corporation shall not be allowed the credits against the tax for the taxes of foreign countries allowed under this paragraph.

(4) Limitations on Credit. - The amount of the credit taken under this Section shall be subject to each of the following limitations:

(a) The amount of the credit in respect to the tax paid or incurred to any country shall not exceed the same proportion of the tax against which such credit is taken, which the taxpayer's taxable income from sources within such country under this Title bears to his entire taxable income for the same taxable year; and

(b) The total amount of the credit shall not exceed the same proportion of the tax against which such credit is taken, which the taxpayer's taxable income from sources without the Philippines taxable under this Title bears to his entire taxable income for the same taxable year.

(5) Adjustments on Payment of Incurred Taxes. - If accrued taxes when paid differ from the amounts claimed as credits by the taxpayer, or if any tax paid is refunded in whole or in part, the taxpayer shall notify the Commissioner; who shall redetermine the amount of the tax for the year or years affected, and the amount of tax due upon such redetermination, if any, shall be paid by the taxpayer upon notice and demand by the Commissioner, or the amount of tax overpaid, if any, shall be credited or refunded to the taxpayer. In the case of such a tax incurred but not paid, the Commissioner as a condition precedent to the allowance of this credit may require the taxpayer to give a bond with sureties satisfactory to and to be approved by the Commissioner in such sum as he may require, conditioned upon the payment by the taxpayer of any amount of tax found due upon any such redetermination. The bond herein prescribed shall contain such further conditions as the Commissioner may require.

(6) Year in Which Credit Taken. - The credits provided for in Subsection (C)(3) of this Section may, at the option of the taxpayer and irrespective of the method of accounting employed in keeping his books, be taken in the year which the taxes of the foreign country were incurred, subject, however, to the conditions prescribed in Subsection (C)(5) of this Section. If the taxpayer elects to take such credits in the year in which the taxes of the foreign country accrued, the credits for all subsequent years shall be taken upon the same basis and no portion of any such taxes shall be allowed as a deduction in the same or any succeeding year.

(7)Proof of Credits. - The credits provided in Subsection (C)(3) hereof shall be allowed only if the taxpayer establishes to the satisfaction of the Commissioner the following:

(a) The total amount of income derived from sources without the Philippines;

(b) The amount of income derived from each country, the tax paid or incurred to which is claimed as a credit under said paragraph, such amount to be determined under rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Finance; and

(c) All other information necessary for the verification and computation of such credits.

(D) Losses. -

(1) In General.- Losses actually sustained during the taxable year and not compensated for by insurance or other forms of indemnity shall be allowed as deductions:

(a) If incurred in trade, profession or business;

(b) Of property connected with the trade, business or profession, if the loss arises from fires, storms, shipwreck, or other casualties, or from robbery, theft or embezzlement.

The Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, is hereby authorized to promulgate rules and regulations prescribing, among other things, the time and manner by which the taxpayer shall submit a declaration of loss sustained from casualty or from robbery, theft or embezzlement during the taxable year: Provided, however, That the time limit to be so prescribed in the rules and regulations shall not be less than thirty (30) days nor more than ninety (90) days from the date of discovery of the casualty or robbery, theft or embezzlement giving rise to the loss.

(c) No loss shall be allowed as a deduction under this Subsection if at the time of the filing of the return, such loss has been claimed as a deduction for estate tax purposes in the estate tax return.

(2) Proof of Loss. - In the case of a nonresident alien individual or foreign corporation, the losses deductible shall be those actually sustained during the year incurred in business, trade or exercise of a profession conducted within the Philippines, when such losses are not compensated for by insurance or other forms of indemnity. The secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, is hereby authorized to promulgate rules and regulations prescribing, among other things, the time and manner by which the taxpayer shall submit a declaration of loss sustained from casualty or from robbery, theft or embezzlement during the taxable year: Provided, That the time to be so prescribed in the rules and regulations shall not be less than thirty (30) days nor more than ninety (90) days from the date of discovery of the casualty or robbery, theft or embezzlement giving rise to the loss; and

(3) Net Operating Loss Carry-Over. - The net operating loss of the business or enterprise for any taxable year immediately preceding the current taxable year, which had not been previously offset as deduction from gross income shall be carried over as a deduction from gross income for the next three (3) consecutive taxable years immediately following the year of such loss: Provided, however, That any net loss incurred in a taxable year during which the taxpayer was exempt from income tax shall not be allowed as a deduction under this Subsection: Provided, further, That a net operating loss carry-over shall be allowed only if there has been no substantial change in the ownership of the business or enterprise in that -

 (i) Not less than seventy-five percent (75%) in nominal value of outstanding issued shares., if the business is in the name of a corporation, is held by or on behalf of the same persons; or

(ii) Not less than seventy-five percent (75%) of the paid up capital of the corporation, if the business is in the name of a corporation, is held by or on behalf of the same persons.

"For purposes of this subsection, the term 'not operating loss' shall mean the excess of allowable deduction over gross income of the business in a taxable year.

Provided, That for mines other than oil and gas wells, a net operating loss without the benefit of incentives provided for under Executive Order No. 226, as amended, otherwise known as the Omnibus Investments Code of 1987, incurred in any of the first ten (10) years of operation may be carried over as a deduction from taxable income for the next five (5) years immediately following the year of such loss. The entire amount of the loss shall be carried over to the first of the five (5) taxable years following the loss, and any portion of such loss which exceeds, the taxable income of such first year shall be deducted in like manner form the taxable income of the next remaining four (4) years.

(4) Capital Losses. -

(a) Limitation. - Loss from sales or Exchanges of capital assets shall be allowed only to the extent provided in Section 39.

(b) Securities Becoming worthless. - If securities as defined in Section 22 (T) become worthless during the taxable year and are capital assets, the loss resulting therefrom shall, for purposes of this Title, be considered as a loss from the sale or exchange, on the last day of such taxable year, of capital assets.

(5) Losses From Wash Sales of Stock or Securities. - Losses from 'wash sales' of stock or securities as provided in Section 38.

(6) Wagering Losses. - Losses from wagering transactions shall b allowed only to the extent of the gains from such transactions.

(7) Abandonment Losses. -

(a) In the event a contract area where petroleum operations are undertaken is partially or wholly abandoned, all accumulated exploration and development expenditures pertaining thereto shall be allowed as a deduction: Provided, That accumulated expenditures incurred in that area prior to January 1, 1979 shall be allowed as a deduction only from any income derived from the same contract area. In all cases, notices of abandonment shall be filed with the Commissioner.

(b) In case a producing well is subsequently abandoned, the unamortized costs thereof, as well as the undepreciated costs of equipment directly used therein , shall be allowed as a deduction in the year such well, equipment or facility is abandoned by the contractor: Provided, That if such abandoned well is reentered and production is resumed, or if such equipment or facility is restored into service, the said costs shall be included as part of gross income in the year of resumption or restoration and shall be amortized or depreciated, as the case may be.

(E) Bad Debts. -

(1) In General. - Debts due to the taxpayer actually ascertained to be worthless and charged off within the taxable year except those not connected with profession, trade or business and those sustained in a transaction entered into between parties mentioned under Section 36 (B) of this Code: Provided, That recovery of bad debts previously allowed as deduction in the preceding years shall be included as part of the gross income in the year of recovery to the extent of the income tax benefit of said deduction.

(2) Securities Becoming Worthless. - If securities, as defined in Section 22 (T), are ascertained to be worthless and charged off within the taxable year and are capital assets, the loss resulting therefrom shall, in the case of a taxpayer other than a bank or trust company incorporated under the laws of the Philippines a substantial part of whose business is the receipt of deposits, for the purpose of this Title, be considered as a loss from the sale or exchange, on the last day of such taxable year, of capital assets.

 (F) Depreciation. -

(1) General Rule. - There shall be allowed as a depreciation deduction a reasonable allowance for the exhaustion, wear and tear (including reasonable allowance for obsolescence) of property used in the trade or business. In the case of property held by one person for life with remainder to another person, the deduction shall be computed as if the life tenant were the absolute owner of the property and shall be allowed to the life tenant. In the case of property held in trust, the allowable deduction shall be apportioned between the income beneficiaries and the trustees in accordance with the pertinent provisions of the instrument creating the trust, or in the absence of such provisions, on the basis of the trust income allowable to each.

(2) Use of Certain Methods and Rates. - The term 'reasonable allowance' as used in the preceding paragraph shall include, but not limited to, an allowance computed in accordance with rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, under any of the following methods:

(a) The straight-line method;

(b) Declining-balance method, using a rate not exceeding twice the rate which would have been used had the annual allowance been computed under the method described in Subsection (F) (1);

(c) The sum-of-the-years-digit method; and

(d) any other method which may be prescribed by the Secretary of Finance upon recommendation of the Commissioner.

  (3) Agreement as to Useful Life on Which Depreciation Rate is Based. - Where under rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Finance upon recommendation of the Commissioner, the taxpayer and the Commissioner have entered into an agreement in writing specifically dealing with the useful life and rate of depreciation of any property, the rate so agreed upon shall be binding on both the taxpayer and the national Government in the absence of facts and circumstances not taken into consideration during the adoption of such agreement. The responsibility of establishing the existence of such facts and circumstances shall rest with the party initiating the modification. Any change in the agreed rate and useful life of the depreciable property as specified in the agreement shall not be effective for taxable years prior to the taxable year in which notice in writing by certified mail or registered mail is served by the party initiating such change to the other party to the agreement:

Provided, however, that where the taxpayer has adopted such useful life and depreciation rate for any depreciable and claimed the depreciation expenses as deduction from his gross income, without any written objection on the part of the Commissioner or his duly authorized representatives, the aforesaid useful life and depreciation rate so adopted by the taxpayer for the aforesaid depreciable asset shall be considered binding for purposes of this Subsection.

(4) Depreciation of Properties Used in Petroleum Operations. - An allowance for depreciation in respect of all properties directly related to production of petroleum initially placed in service in a taxable year shall be allowed under the straight-line or declining-balance method of depreciation at the option of the service contractor.

However, if the service contractor initially elects the declining-balance method, it may at any subsequent date, shift to the straight-line method. 

The useful life of properties used in or related to production of petroleum shall be ten (10) years of such shorter life as may be permitted by the Commissioner. 

Properties not used directly in the production of petroleum shall be depreciated under the straight-line method on the basis of an estimated useful life of five (5) years. 

(5) Depreciation of Properties Used in Mining Operations. - an allowance for depreciation in respect of all properties used in mining operations other than petroleum operations, shall be computed as follows:

(a) At the normal rate of depreciation if the expected life is ten (10) years or less; or 

(b) Depreciated over any number of years between five (5) years and the expected life if the latter is more than ten (10) years, and the depreciation thereon allowed as deduction from taxable income: Provided, That the contractor notifies the Commissioner at the beginning of the depreciation period which depreciation rate allowed by this Section will be used.

  (6) Depreciation Deductible by Nonresident Aliens Engaged in Trade or Business or Resident Foreign Corporations. - In the case of a nonresident alien individual engaged in trade or business or resident foreign corporation, a reasonable allowance for the deterioration of Property arising out of its use or employment or its non-use in the business trade or profession shall be permitted only when such property is located in the Philippines.

(G) Depletion of Oil and Gas Wells and Mines. -

(1) In General. - In the case of oil and gas wells or mines, a reasonable allowance for depletion or amortization computed in accordance with the cost-depletion method shall be granted under rules and regulations to be prescribed by the Secretary of finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner. Provided, That when the allowance for depletion shall equal the capital invested no further allowance shall be granted: Provided, further, That after production in commercial quantities has commenced, certain intangible exploration and development drilling costs: (a) shall be deductible in the year incurred if such expenditures are incurred for non-producing wells and/or mines, or (b) shall be deductible in full in the year paid or incurred or at the election of the taxpayer, may be capitalized and amortized if such expenditures incurred are for producing wells and/or mines in the same contract area. 

'Intangible costs in petroleum operations' refers to any cost incurred in petroleum operations which in itself has no salvage value and which is incidental to and necessary for the drilling of wells and preparation of wells for the production of petroleum: Provided, That said costs shall not pertain to the acquisition or improvement of property of a character subject to the allowance for depreciation except that the allowances for depreciation on such property shall be deductible under this Subsection. 

Any intangible exploration, drilling and development expenses allowed as a deduction in computing taxable income during the year shall not be taken into consideration in computing the adjusted cost basis for the purpose of computing allowable cost depletion. 

(2) Election to Deduct Exploration and Development Expenditures. - In computing taxable income from mining operations, the taxpayer may at his option, deduct exploration and development expenditures accumulated as cost or adjusted basis for cost depletion as of date of prospecting, as well as exploration and development expenditures paid or incurred during the taxable year: Provided, That the amount deductible for exploration and development expenditures shall not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the net income from mining operations computed without the benefit of any tax incentives under existing laws. The actual exploration and development expenditures minus twenty-five percent (25%) of the net income from mining shall be carried forward to the succeeding years until fully deducted. 

The election by the taxpayer to deduct the exploration and development expenditures is irrevocable and shall be binding in succeeding taxable years. 

'Net income from mining operations', as used in this Subsection, shall mean gross income from operations less 'allowable deductions' which are necessary or related to mining operations. 'Allowable deductions' shall include mining, milling and marketing expenses, and depreciation of properties directly used in the mining operations. This paragraph shall not apply to expenditures for the acquisition or improvement of property of a character which is subject to the allowance for depreciation.

In no case shall this paragraph apply with respect to amounts paid or incurred for the exploration and development of oil and gas. 

The term 'exploration expenditures' means expenditures paid or incurred for the purpose of ascertaining the existence, location, extent or quality of any deposit of ore or other mineral, and paid or incurred before the beginning of the development stage of the mine or deposit. 

The term 'development expenditures' means expenditures paid or incurred during the development stage of the mine or other natural deposits. The development stage of a mine or other natural deposit shall begin at the time when deposits of ore or other minerals are shown to exist in sufficient commercial quantity and quality and shall end upon commencement of actual commercial extraction. 

(3) Depletion of Oil and Gas Wells and Mines Deductible by a Nonresident Alien individual or Foreign Corporation. - In the case of a nonresident alien individual engaged in trade or business in the Philippines or a resident foreign corporation, allowance for depletion of oil and gas wells or mines under paragraph (1) of this Subsection shall be authorized only in respect to oil and gas wells or mines located within the Philippines.

(H) Charitable and Other Contributions. -  

(1) In General. - Contributions or gifts actually paid or made within the taxable year to, or for the use of the Government of the Philippines or any of its agencies or any political subdivision thereof exclusively for public purposes, or to accredited domestic corporation or associations organized and operated exclusively for religious, charitable, scientific, youth and sports development, cultural or educational purposes or for the rehabilitation of veterans, or to social welfare institutions, or to non-government organizations, in accordance with rules and regulations promulgated by the Secretary of finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, no part of the net income of which inures to the benefit of any private stockholder or individual in an amount not in excess of ten percent (10%) in the case of an individual, and five percent (%) in the case of a corporation, of the taxpayer's taxable income derived from trade, business or profession as computed without the benefit of this and the following subparagraphs. 

(2) Contributions Deductible in Full. - Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding subparagraph, donations to the following institutions or entities shall be deductible in full;

(a) Donations to the Government. - Donations to the Government of the Philippines or to any of its agencies or political subdivisions, including fully-owned government corporations, exclusively to finance, to provide for, or to be used in undertaking priority activities in education, health, youth and sports development, human settlements, science and culture, and in economic development according to a National Priority Plan determined by the National Economic and Development Authority (NEDA), In consultation with appropriate government agencies, including its regional development councils and private philantrophic persons and institutions: Provided, That any donation which is made to the Government or to any of its agencies or political subdivisions not in accordance with the said annual priority plan shall be subject to the limitations prescribed in paragraph (1) of this Subsection;

(b) Donations to Certain Foreign Institutions or International Organizations. - donations to foreign institutions or international organizations which are fully deductible in pursuance of or in compliance with agreements, treaties, or commitments entered into by the Government of the Philippines and the foreign institutions or international organizations or in pursuance of special laws; 

(c) Donations to Accredited Nongovernment Organizations. - the term 'nongovernment organization' means a non profit domestic corporation:

(1) Organized and operated exclusively for scientific, research, educational, character-building and youth and sports development, health, social welfare, cultural or charitable purposes, or a combination thereof, no part of the net income of which inures to the benefit of any private individual;

(2) Which, not later than the 15th day of the third month after the close of the accredited nongovernment organizations taxable year in which contributions are received, makes utilization directly for the active conduct of the activities constituting the purpose or function for which it is organized and operated, unless an extended period is granted by the Secretary of Finance in accordance with the rules and regulations to be promulgated, upon recommendation of the Commissioner; 

(3) The level of administrative expense of which shall, on an annual basis, conform with the rules and regulations to be prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, but in no case to exceed thirty percent (30%) of the total expenses; and 

(4) The assets of which, in the even of dissolution, would be distributed to another nonprofit domestic corporation organized for similar purpose or purposes, or to the state for public purpose, or would be distributed by a court to another organization to be used in such manner as in the judgment of said court shall best accomplish the general purpose for which the dissolved organization was organized. 

Subject to such terms and conditions as may be prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, the term 'utilization' means: 

(i) Any amount in cash or in kind (including administrative expenses) paid or utilized to accomplish one or more purposes for which the accredited nongovernment organization was created or organized.

(ii) Any amount paid to acquire an asset used (or held for use) directly in carrying out one or more purposes for which the accredited nongovernment organization was created or organized.

 An amount set aside for a specific project which comes within one or more purposes of the accredited nongovernment organization may be treated as a utilization, but only if at the time such amount is set aside, the accredited nongovernment organization has established to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the amount will be paid for the specific project within a period to be prescribed in rules and regulations to be promulgated by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, but not to exceed five (5) years, and the project is one which can be better accomplished by setting aside such amount than by immediate payment of funds.

 (3) Valuation. - The amount of any charitable contribution of property other than money shall be based on the acquisition cost of said property. 

(4) Proof of Deductions. - Contributions or gifts shall be allowable as deductions only if verified under the rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner.

(I) Research and Development.-

(1) In General. - a taxpayer may treat research or development expenditures which are paid or incurred by him during the taxable year in connection with his trade, business or profession as ordinary and necessary expenses which are not chargeable to capital account. The expenditures so treated shall be allowed as deduction during the taxable year when paid or incurred. 

(2) Amortization of Certain Research and Development Expenditures. - At the election of the taxpayer and in accordance with the rules and regulations to be prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, the following research and development expenditures may be treated as deferred expenses:

(a) Paid or incurred by the taxpayer in connection with his trade, business or profession;

(b) Not treated as expenses under paragraph 91) hereof; and

(c) Chargeable to capital account but not chargeable to property of a character which is subject to depreciation or depletion. 

In computing taxable income, such deferred expenses shall be allowed as deduction ratably distributed over a period of not less than sixty (60) months as may be elected by the taxpayer (beginning with the month in which the taxpayer first realizes benefits from such expenditures). 

The election provided by paragraph (2) hereof may be made for any taxable year beginning after the effectivity of this Code, but only if made not later than the time prescribed by law for filing the return for such taxable year. The method so elected, and the period selected by the taxpayer, shall be adhered to in computing taxable income for the taxable year for which the election is made and for all subsequent taxable years unless with the approval of the Commissioner, a change to a different method is authorized with respect to a part or all of such expenditures. The election shall not apply to any expenditure paid or incurred during any taxable year for which the taxpayer makes the election.

(3) Limitations on deduction. - This Subsection shall not apply to:

(a) Any expenditure for the acquisition or improvement of land, or for the improvement of property to be used in connection with research and development of a character which is subject to depreciation and depletion; and 

(b) Any expenditure paid or incurred for the purpose of ascertaining the existence, location, extent, or quality of any deposit of ore or other mineral, including oil or gas.

(J) Pension Trusts. - An employer establishing or maintaining a pension trust to provide for the payment of reasonable pensions to his employees shall be allowed as a deduction (in addition to the contributions to such trust during the taxable year to cover the pension liability accruing during the year, allowed as a deduction under Subsection (A) (1) of this Section ) a reasonable amount transferred or paid into such trust during the taxable year in excess of such contributions, but only if such amount (1)has not theretofore been allowed as a deduction, and (2) is apportioned in equal parts over a period of ten (10) consecutive years beginning with the year in which the transfer or payment is made. 

(K) Additional Requirements for Deductibility of Certain Payments. - Any amount paid or payable which is otherwise deductible from, or taken into account in computing gross income or for which depreciation or amortization may be allowed under this Section, shall be allowed as a deduction only if it is shown that the tax required to be deducted and withheld therefrom has been paid to the Bureau of Internal Revenue in accordance with this Section 58 and 81 of this Code.

(L) Optional Standard Deduction. - In lieu of the deductions allowed under the preceding Subsections, an individual subject to tax under Section 24, other than a nonresident alien, may elect a standard deduction in an amount not exceeding ten percent (10%) of his gross income. Unless the taxpayer signifies in his return his intention to elect the optional standard deduction, he shall be considered as having availed himself of the deductions allowed in the preceding Subsections. Such election when made in the return shall be irrevocable for the taxable year for which the return is made: Provided, That an individual who is entitled to and claimed for the optional standard deduction shall not be required to submit with his tax return such financial statements otherwise required under this Code: Provided, further, That except when the Commissioner otherwise permits, the said individual shall keep such records pertaining to his gross income during the taxable year, as may be required by the rules and regulations promulgated by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner.

(M) Premium Payments on Health and/or Hospitalization Insurance of an Individual Taxpayer. - the amount of premiums not to exceed Two thousand four hundred pesos (P2,400) per family or Two hundred pesos (P200) a month paid during the taxable year for health and/or hospitalization insurance taken by the taxpayer for himself, including his family, shall be allowed as a deduction from his gross income: Provided, That said family has a gross income of not more than Two hundred fifty thousand pesos (P250,000) for the taxable year: Provided, finally, That in the case of married taxpayers, only the spouse claiming the additional exemption for dependents shall be entitled to this deduction. 

Notwithstanding the provision of the preceding Subsections, The Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, after a public hearing shall have been held for this purpose, may prescribe by rules and regulations, limitations or ceilings for any of the itemized deductions under Subsections (A) to (J) of this Section: Provided, That for purposes of determining such ceilings or limitations, the Secretary of Finance shall consider the following factors: (1) adequacy of the prescribed limits on the actual expenditure requirements of each particular industry; and (2)effects of inflation on expenditure levels: Provided, further, That no ceilings shall further be imposed on items of expense already subject to ceilings under present law.

SEC. 35. Allowance of Personal Exemption for Individual Taxpayer. -  

(A) In General. - For purposes of determining the tax provided in Section 24 (A) of this Title, there shall be allowed a basic personal exemption as follows:

For single individual or married individual judicially decreed as legally

   separated with no qualified dependents                                              P20,000

For Head of Family                                                                             P25,000

For each married individual                                                                  P32,000

In the case of married individuals where only one of the spouses is deriving gross income, only such spouse shall be allowed the personal exemption. 

For purposes of this paragraph, the term 'head of family' means an unmarried or legally separated man or woman with one or both parents, or with one or more brothers or sisters, or with one or more legitimate, recognized natural or legally adopted children living with and dependent upon him for their chief support, where such brothers or sisters or children are not more than twenty-one (21) years of age, unmarried and not gainfully employed or where such children, brothers or sisters, regardless of age are incapable of self-support because of mental or physical defect. 

(B) Additional Exemption for Dependents. - There shall be allowed an additional exemption of Eight thousand pesos (P8,000) for each dependent not exceeding four (4). 

The additional exemption for dependent shall be claimed by only one of the spouses in the case of married individuals. 

In the case of legally separated spouses, additional exemptions may be claimed only by the spouse who has custody of the child or children: Provided, That the total amount of additional exemptions that may be claimed by both shall not exceed the maximum additional exemptions herein allowed.

For purposes of this Subsection, a 'dependent' means a legitimate, illegitimate or legally adopted child chiefly dependent upon and living with the taxpayer if such dependent is not more than twenty-one (21) years of age, unmarried and not gainfully employed or if such dependent, regardless of age, is incapable of self-support because of mental or physical defect.

(C) Change of Status. - If the taxpayer marries or should have additional dependent(s) as defined above during the taxable year, the taxpayer may claim the corresponding additional exemption, as the case may be, in full for such year.

If the taxpayer dies during the taxable year, his estate may still claim the personal and additional exemptions for himself and his dependent(s) as if he died at the close of such year. 

If the spouse or any of the dependents dies or if any of such dependents marries, becomes twenty-one (21) years old or becomes gainfully employed during the taxable year, the taxpayer may still claim the same exemptions as if the spouse or any of the dependents died, or as if such dependents married, became twenty-one (21) years old or became gainfully employed at the close of such year.

(D) Personal Exemption Allowable to Nonresident Alien Individual. - A nonresident alien individual engaged in trade, business or in the exercise of a profession in the Philippines shall be entitled to a personal exemption in the amount equal to the exemptions allowed in the income tax law in the country of which he is a subject - or citizen, to citizens of the Philippines not residing in such country, not to exceed the amount fixed in this Section as exemption for citizens or resident of the Philippines: Provided, That said nonresident alien should file a true and accurate return of the total income received by him from all sources in the Philippines, as required by this Title.

SEC. 36. Items not Deductible.-

(A) General Rule. - In computing net income, no deduction shall in any case be allowed in respect to - 

(1) Personal, living or family expenses;

(2) Any amount paid out for new buildings or for permanent improvements, or betterments made to increase the value of any property or estate; 

This Subsection shall not apply to intangible drilling and development costs incurred in petroleum operations which are deductible under Subsection (G) (1) of Section 34 of this Code. 

(3) Any amount expended in restoring property or in making good the exhaustion thereof for which an allowance is or has been made; or 

(4) Premiums paid on any life insurance policy covering the life of any officer or employee, or of any person financially interested in any trade or business carried on by the taxpayer, individual or corporate, when the taxpayer is directly or indirectly a beneficiary under such policy.

(B) Losses from Sales or Exchanges of Property. - In computing net income, no deductions shall in any case be allowed in respect of losses from sales or exchanges of property directly or indirectly -

(1) Between members of a family. For purposes of this paragraph, the family of an individual shall include only his brothers and sisters (whether by the whole or half-blood), spouse, ancestors, and lineal descendants; or 

(2) Except in the case of distributions in liquidation, between an individual and corporation more than fifty percent (50%) in value of the outstanding stock of which is owned, directly or indirectly, by or for such individual; or 

(3) Except in the case of distributions in liquidation, between two corporations more than fifty percent (50%) in value of the outstanding stock of which is owned, directly or indirectly, by or for the same individual if either one of such corporations, with respect to the taxable year of the corporation preceding the date of the sale of exchange was under the law applicable to such taxable year, a personal holding company or a foreign personal holding company;

(4) Between the grantor and a fiduciary of any trust; or 

(5) Between the fiduciary of and the fiduciary of a trust and the fiduciary of another trust if the same person is a grantor with respect to each trust; or 

(6) Between a fiduciary of a trust and beneficiary of such trust.

SEC. 37. Special Provisions Regarding Income and Deductions of Insurance Companies, Whether Domestic or Foreign. -

(A) Special Deduction Allowed to Insurance Companies. - In the case of insurance companies, whether domestic or foreign doing business in the Philippines, the net additions, if any, required by law to be made within the year to reserve funds and the sums other than dividends paid within the year on policy and annuity contracts may be deducted from their gross income: Provided, however, That the released reserve be treated as income for the year of release. 

(B) Mutual Insurance Companies. - In the case of mutual fire and mutual employers' liability and mutual workmen's compensation and mutual casualty insurance companies requiring their members to make premium deposits to provide for losses and expenses, said companies shall not return as income any portion of the premium deposits returned to their policyholders, but shall return as taxable income all income received by them from all other sources plus such portion of the premium deposits as are retained by the companies for purposes other than the payment of losses and expenses and reinsurance reserves. 

(C) Mutual Marine Insurance Companies. - Mutual marine insurance companies shall include in their return of gross income, gross premiums collected and received by them less amounts paid to policyholders on account of premiums previously paid by them and interest paid upon those amounts between the ascertainment and payment thereof. 

(D)Assessment Insurance Companies.- Assessment insurance companies, whether domestic or foreign, may deduct from their gross income the actual deposit of sums with the officers of the Government of the Philippines pursuant to law, as additions to guarantee or reserve funds.

SEC. 38. Losses from Wash Sales of Stock or Securities. -  

(A) In the case of any loss claimed to have been sustained from any sale or other disposition of shares of stock or securities where it appears that within a period beginning thirty (30) days before the date of such sale or disposition and ending thirty (30) days after such date, the taxpayer has acquired (by purchase or by exchange upon which the entire amount of gain or loss was recognized by law), or has entered into a contact or option so to acquire, substantially identical stock or securities, then no deduction for the loss shall be allowed under Section 34 unless the claim is made by a dealer in stock or securities and with respect to a transaction made in the ordinary course of the business of such dealer. 

(B) If the amount of stock or securities acquired (or covered by the contract or option to acquire) is less than the amount of stock or securities sold or otherwise disposed of, then the particular shares of stock or securities, the loss form the sale or other disposition of which is not deductible, shall be determined under rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner. 

(C) If the amount of stock or securities acquired (or covered by the contract or option to acquire which) resulted in the non-deductibility of the loss, shall be determined under rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Finance, upon recommendation of the Commissioner.

SEC. 39. Capital Gains and Losses. -  

(A) Definitions. - As used in this Title -

(1) Capital Assets. - the term 'capital assets' means property held by the taxpayer (whether or not connected with his trade or business), but

[codalsetal]

Rules 1-71: The 1997 Rules of Civil Procedure

1997 RULES OF CIVIL PROCEDURE, AS AMENDED

(RULES 1-71, RULES OF COURT)

EFFECTIVE JULY 1, 1997

Per Resolution of the Supreme Court in Bar Matter No. 803 Adopted in Baguio City on April 8, 1997

RULES OF COURT

Pursuant to the provisions of section 5 (5) of Article VIII of the Constitution, the Supreme Court hereby adopts and promulgates the following rules concerning the protection and enforcement of constitutional rights, pleading, practice and procedure in all courts, the admission to the practice of law, the Integrated Bar, and legal assistance to the underprivileged:

RULE 1

General Provisions

Section 1. Title of the Rules. — These Rule shall be known and cited as the Rules of Court. (1)

Section 2. In what courts applicable. — These Rules shall apply in all the courts, except as otherwise provided by the Supreme Court. (n)

Section 3. Cases governed. — These Rules shall govern the procedure to be observed in actions, civil or criminal and special proceedings.

(a) A civil action is one by which a party sues another for the enforcement or protection of a right, or the prevention or redress of a wrong, (1a, R2)

A civil action may either be ordinary or special. Both are governed by the rules for ordinary civil actions, subject to the specific rules prescribed for a special civil action. (n)

(b) A criminal action is one by which the State prosecutes a person for an act or omission punishable by law. (n)

(c) A special proceeding is a remedy by which a party seeks to establish a status, a right, or a particular fact. (2a, R2)

Section 4. In what case not applicable. — These Rules shall not apply to election cases, land registration, cadastral, naturalization and insolvency proceedings, and other cases not herein provided for, except by analogy or in a suppletory character and whenever practicable and convenient. (R143a)

Section 5. Commencement of action. — A civil action is commenced by the filing of the original complaint in court. If an additional defendant is impleaded in a later pleading, the action is commenced with regard to him on the dated of the filing of such later pleading, irrespective of whether the motion for its admission, if necessary, is denied by the court. (6a)

Section 6. Construction. — These Rules shall be liberally construed in order to promote their objective of securing a just, speedy and inexpensive disposition of every action and proceeding. (2a)

Civil Actions

Ordinary Civil Actions

RULE 2

Cause of Action

Section 1. Ordinary civil actions, basis of. — Every ordinary civil action must be based on a cause of action. (n)

Section 2. Cause of action, defined. — A cause of action is the act or omission by which a party violates a right of another. (n)

Section 3. One suit for a single cause of action. — A party may not institute more than one suit for a single cause of action. (3a)

Section 4. Splitting a single cause of action; effect of. — If two or more suits are instituted on the basis of the same cause of action, the filing of one or a judgment upon the merits in any one is available as a ground for the dismissal of the others. (4a)

Section 5. Joinder of causes of action. — A party may in one pleading assert, in the alternative or otherwise, as many causes of action as he may have against an opposing party, subject to the following conditions:

(a) The party joining the causes of action shall comply with the rules on joinder of parties;

(b) The joinder shall not include special civil actions or actions governed by special rules;

(c) Where the causes of action are between the same parties but pertain to different venues or jurisdictions, the joinder may be allowed in the Regional Trial Court provided one of the causes of action falls within the jurisdiction of said court and the venue lies therein; and

(d) Where the claims in all the causes action are principally for recovery of money, the aggregate amount claimed shall be the test of jurisdiction. (5a)

Section 6. Misjoinder of causes of action. — Misjoinder of causes of action is not a ground for dismissal of an action. A misjoined cause of action may, on motion of a party or on the initiative of the court, be severed and proceeded with separately. (n)

RULE 3

Parties to Civil Actions

Section 1. Who may be parties; plaintiff and defendant. — Only natural or juridical persons, or entities authorized by law may be parties in a civil action. The term "plaintiff" may refer to the claiming party, the counter-claimant, the cross-claimant, or the third (fourth, etc.) — party plaintiff. The term "defendant" may refer to the original defending party, the defendant in a counter-claim, the cross-defendant, or the third (fourth, etc.) — party defendant. (1a)

Section 2. Parties in interest. — A real party in interest is the party who stands to be benefited or injured by the judgment in the suit, or the party entitled to the avails of the suit. Unless otherwise authorized by law or these Rules, every action must be prosecuted or defended in the name of the real party in interest. (2a)

Section 3. Representatives as parties. — Where the action is allowed to be prosecuted and defended by a representative or someone acting in a fiduciary capacity, the beneficiary shall be included in the title of the case and shall be deemed to be the real property in interest. A representative may be a trustee of an expert trust, a guardian, an executor or administrator, or a party authorized by law or these Rules. An agent acting in his own name and for the benefit of an undisclosed principal may sue or be sued without joining the principal except when the contract involves things belonging to the principal. (3a)

Section 4. Spouses as parties. — Husband and wife shall sue or be sued jointly, except as provided by law. (4a)

Section 5. Minor or incompetent persons. — A minor or a person alleged to be incompetent, may sue or be sued with the assistance of his father, mother, guardian, or if he has none, a guardian ad litem. (5a)

Section 6. Permissive joinder of parties. — All persons in whom or against whom any right to relief in respect to or arising out of the same transaction or series of transactions is alleged to exist, whether jointly, severally, or in the alternative, may, except as otherwise provided in these Rules, join as plaintiffs or be joined as defendants in one complaint, where any question of law or fact common to all such plaintiffs or to all such defendants may arise in the action; but the court may make such orders as may be just to prevent any plaintiff or defendant from being embarrassed or put to expense in connection with any proceedings in which he may have no interest. (6n)

Section 7. Compulsory joinder of indispensable parties. — Parties in interest without whom no final determination can be had of an action shall be joined either as plaintiffs or defendants. (7)

Section 8. Necessary party. — A necessary party is one who is not indispensable but who ought to be joined as a party if complete relief is to be accorded as to those already parties, or for a complete determination or settlement of the claim subject of the action. (8a)

Section 9. Non-joinder of necessary parties to be pleaded. — Whenever in any pleading in which a claim is asserted a necessary party is not joined, the pleader shall set forth his name, if known, and shall state why he is omitted. Should the court find the reason for the omission unmeritorious, it may order the inclusion of the omitted necessary party if jurisdiction over his person may be obtained.

The failure to comply with the order for his inclusion, without justifiable cause, shall be deemed a waiver of the claim against such party.

The non-inclusion of a necessary party does not prevent the court from proceeding in the action, and the judgment rendered therein shall be without prejudice to the rights of such necessary party. (8a, 9a)

Section 10. Unwilling co-plaintiff. — If the consent of any party who should be joined as plaintiff can not be obtained, he may be made a defendant and the reason therefor shall be stated in the complaint. (10)

Section 11. Misjoinder and non-joinder of parties. — Neither misjoinder nor non-joinder of parties is ground for dismissal of an action. Parties may be dropped or added by order of the court on motion of any party or on its own initiative at any stage the action and on such terms as are just. Any claim against a misjoined party may be severed and proceeded with separately. (11a)

Section 12. Class suit. — When the subject matter of the controversy is one of common or general interest to many persons so numerous that it is impracticable to join all as parties, a number of them which the court finds to be sufficiently numerous and representative as to fully protect the interests of all concerned may sue or defend for the benefit of all. Any party in interest shall have the right to intervene to protect his individual interest. (12a)

Section 13. Alternative defendants. — Where the plaintiff is uncertain against who of several persons he is entitled to relief, he may join any or all of them as defendants in the alternative, although a right to relief against one may be inconsistent with a right of relief against the other. (13a)

Section 14. Unknown identity or name of defendant. — Whenever the identity or name of a defendant is unknown, he may be sued as the unknown owner heir devisee, or by such other designation as the case may require, when his identity or true name is discovered, the pleading must be amended accordingly. (14)

Section 15. Entity without juridical personality as defendant. — When two or more persons not organized as an entity with juridical personality enter into a transaction, they may be sued under the name by which they are generally or commonly known.

In the answer of such defendant, the name and addresses of the persons composing said entity must all be revealed. (15a)

Section 16. Death of party; duty of counsel. — Whenever a party to a pending action dies, and the claim is not thereby extinguished, it shall be the duty of his counsel to inform the court within thirty (30) days after such death of the fact thereof, and to give the name and address of his legal representative or representatives. Failure of counsel to comply with his duty shall be a ground for disciplinary action.

The heirs of the deceased may be allowed to be substituted for the deceased, without requiring the appointment of an executor or administrator and the court may appoint a guardian ad litem for the minor heirs.

The court shall forthwith order said legal representative or representatives to appear and be substituted within a period of thirty (30) days from notice.

If no legal representative is named by the counsel for the deceased party, or if the one so named shall fail to appear within the specified period, the court may order the opposing party, within a specified time to procure the appointment of an executor or administrator for the estate of the deceased and the latter shall immediately appear for and on behalf of the deceased. The court charges in procuring such appointment, if defrayed by the opposing party, may be recovered as costs. (16a, 17a)

Section 17. Death or separation of a party who is a public officer. — When a public officer is a party in an action in his official capacity and during its pendency dies, resigns, or otherwise ceases to hold office, the action may be continued and maintained by or against his successor if, within thirty (30) days after the successor takes office or such time as may be granted by the court, it is satisfactorily shown to the court by any party that there is a substantial need for continuing or maintaining it and that the successor adopts or continues or threatens to adopt or continue to adopt or continue the action of his predecessor. Before a substitution is made, the party or officer to be affected, unless expressly assenting thereto, shall be given reasonable notice of the application therefor and accorded an opportunity to be heard. (18a)

Section 18. Incompetency or incapacity. — If a party becomes incompetent or incapacitated, the court, upon motion with notice, may allow the action to be continued by or against the incompetent or incapacitated person assisted by his legal guardian or guardian ad litem. (19a)

Section 19. Transfer of interest. — In case of any transfer of interest, the action may be continued by or against the original party, unless the court upon motion directs the person to whom the interest is transferred to be substituted in the action or joined with the original party. (20)

Section 20. Action and contractual money claims. — When the action is for recovery of money arising from contract, express or implied, and the defendant dies before entry of final judgment in the court in which the action was pending at the time of such death, it shall not be dismissed but shall instead be allowed to continue until entry of final judgment. A favorable judgment obtained by the plaintiff therein shall be enforced in the manner especially provided in these Rules for prosecuting claims against the estate of a deceased person. (21a)

Section 21. Indigent party. — A party may be authorized to litigate his action, claim or defense as an indigent if the court, upon an ex parte application and hearing, is satisfied that the party is one who has no money or property sufficient and available for food, shelter and basic necessities for himself and his family.

Such authority shall include an exemption from payment of docket and other lawful fees, and of transcripts of stenographic notes which the court may order to be furnished him. The amount of the docket and other lawful fees which the indigent was exempted from paying shall be a lien on any judgment rendered in the case favorable to the indigent, unless the court otherwise provides.

Any adverse party may contest the grant of such authority at any time before judgment is rendered by the trial court. If the court should determine after hearing that the party declared as an indigent is in fact a person with sufficient income or property, the proper docket and other lawful fees shall be assessed and collected by the clerk of court. If payment is not made within the time fixed by the court, execution shall issue or the payment thereof, without prejudice to such other sanctions as the court may impose. (22a)

Section 22. Notice to the Solicitor General. — In any action involving the validity of any treaty, law, ordinance, executive order, presidential decree, rules or regulations, the court, in its discretion, may require the appearance of the Solicitor General who may be heard in person or a representative duly designated by him. (23a)

RULE 4

Venue of Actions

Section 1. Venue of real actions. — Actions affecting title to or possession of real property, or interest therein, shall be commenced and tried in the proper court which has jurisdiction over the area wherein the real property involved, or a portion thereof, is situated.

Forcible entry and detainer actions shall be commenced and tried in the municipal trial court of the municipality or city wherein the real property involved, or a portion thereof, is situated. (1[a], 2[a]a)

Section 2. Venue of personal actions. — All other actions may be commenced and tried where the plaintiff or any of the principal plaintiffs resides, or where the defendant or any of the principal defendants resides, or in the case of a non-resident defendant where he may be found, at the election of the plaintiff. (2[b]a)

Section 3. Venue of actions against nonresidents. — If any of the defendants does not reside and is not found in the Philippines, and the action affects the personal status of the plaintiff, or any property of said defendant located in the Philippines, the action may be commenced and tried in the court of the place where the plaintiff resides, or where the property or any portion thereof is situated or found. (2[c]a)

Section 4. When Rule not applicable. — This Rule shall not apply.

(a) In those cases where a specific rule or law provides otherwise; or

(b) Where the parties have validly agreed in writing before the filing of the action on the exclusive venue thereof. (3a, 5a)

RULE 5

Uniform Procedure In Trial Courts

Section 1. Uniform procedure. — The procedure in the Municipal Trial Courts shall be the same as in the Regional Trial Courts, except (a) where a particular provision expressly or impliedly applies only to either of said courts, or (b) in civil cases governed by the Rule on Summary Procedure. (n)

Section 2. Meaning of terms. — The term "Municipal Trial Courts" as used in these Rules shall include Metropolitan Trial Courts, Municipal Trial Courts in Cities, Municipal Trial Courts, and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts. (1a)

Procedure In Regional Trial Courts

RULE 6

Kinds Of Pleadings

Section 1. Pleadings defined. — Pleadings are the written statements of the respective claims and defenses of the parties submitted to the court for appropriate judgment. (1a)

Section 2. Pleadings allowed. — The claims of a party are asserted in a complaint, counterclaim, cross-claim, third (fourth, etc.)-party complaint, or complaint-in-intervention.

The defenses of a party are alleged in the answer to the pleading asserting a claim against him.

An answer may be responded to by a reply. (n)

Section 3. Complaint. — The complaint is the pleading alleging the plaintiff's cause or causes of action. The names and residences of the plaintiff and defendant must be stated in the complaint. (3a)

Section 4. Answer. — An answer is a pleading in which a defending party sets forth his defenses. (4a)

Section 5. Defenses. — Defenses may either be negative or affirmative.

(a) A negative defense is the specific denial of the material fact or facts alleged in the pleading of the claimant essential to his cause or causes of action.

(b) An affirmative defense is an allegation of a new matter which, while hypothetically admitting the material allegations in the pleading of the claimant, would nevertheless prevent or bar recovery by him. The affirmative defenses include fraud, statute of limitations, release, payment, illegality, statute of frauds, estoppel, former recovery, discharge in bankruptcy, and any other matter by way of confession and avoidance. (5a)

Section 6. Counterclaim. — A counterclaim is any claim which a defending party may have against an opposing party. (6a)

Section 7. Compulsory counterclaim. — A compulsory counterclaim is one which, being cognizable by the regular courts of justice, arises out of or is connected with the transaction or occurrence constituting the subject matter of the opposing party's claim and does not require for its adjudication the presence of third parties of whom the court cannot acquire jurisdiction. Such a counterclaim must be within the jurisdiction of the court both as to the amount and the nature thereof, except that in an original action before the Regional Trial Court, the counter-claim may be considered compulsory regardless of the amount. (n)

Section 8. Cross-claim. — A cross-claim is any claim by one party against a co-party arising out of the transaction or occurrence that is the subject matter either of the original action or of a counterclaim therein. Such cross-claim may include a claim that the party against whom it is asserted is or may be liable to the cross-claimant for all or part of a claim asserted in the action against the cross-claimant. (7)

Section 9. Counter-counterclaims and counter-crossclaims. — A counter-claim may be asserted against an original counter-claimant.

A cross-claim may also be filed against an original cross-claimant. (n)

Section 10. Reply. — A reply is a pleading, the office or function of which is to deny, or allege facts in denial or avoidance of new matters alleged by way of defense in the answer and thereby join or make issue as to such new matters. If a party does not file such reply, all the new matters alleged in the answer are deemed controverted.

If the plaintiff wishes to interpose any claims arising out of the new matters so alleged, such claims shall be set forth in an amended or supplemental complaint. (11)

Section 11. Third, (fourth, etc.)—party complaint. — A third (fourth, etc.) — party complaint is a claim that a defending party may, with leave of court, file against a person not a party to the action, called the third (fourth, etc.) — party defendant for contribution, indemnity, subrogation or any other relief, in respect of his opponent's claim. (12a)

Section 12. Bringing new parties. — When the presence of parties other than those to the original action is required for the granting of complete relief in the determination of a counterclaim or cross-claim, the court shall order them to be brought in as defendants, if jurisdiction over them can be obtained. (14)

Section 13. Answer to third (fourth, etc.)—party complaint. — A third (fourth, etc.) — party defendant may allege in his answer his defenses, counterclaims or cross-claims, including such defenses that the third (fourth, etc.) — party plaintiff may have against the original plaintiff's claim. In proper cases, he may also assert a counterclaim against the original plaintiff in respect of the latter's claim against the third-party plaintiff. (n)

RULE 7

Parts of a Pleading

Section 1. Caption. — The caption sets forth the name of the court, the title of the action, and the docket number if assigned.

The title of the action indicates the names of the parties. They shall all be named in the original complaint or petition; but in subsequent pleadings, it shall be sufficient if the name of the first party on each side be stated with an appropriate indication when there are other parties.

Their respective participation in the case shall be indicated. (1a, 2a)

Section 2. The body. — The body of the pleading sets fourth its designation, the allegations of the party's claims or defenses, the relief prayed for, and the date of the pleading. (n)

(a) Paragraphs. — The allegations in the body of a pleading shall be divided into paragraphs so numbered to be readily identified, each of which shall contain a statement of a single set of circumstances so far as that can be done with convenience. A paragraph may be referred to by its number in all succeeding pleadings. (3a)

(b) Headings. — When two or more causes of action are joined the statement of the first shall be prefaced by the words "first cause of action,'' of the second by "second cause of action", and so on for the others.

When one or more paragraphs in the answer are addressed to one of several causes of action in the complaint, they shall be prefaced by the words "answer to the first cause of action" or "answer to the second cause of action" and so on; and when one or more paragraphs of the answer are addressed to several causes of action, they shall be prefaced by words to that effect. (4)

(c) Relief. — The pleading shall specify the relief sought, but it may add a general prayer for such further or other relief as may be deemed just or equitable. (3a, R6)

(d) Date. — Every pleading shall be dated. (n)

Section 3. Signature and address. — Every pleading must be signed by the party or counsel representing him, stating in either case his address which should not be a post office box.

The signature of counsel constitutes a certificate by him that he has read the pleading; that to the best of his knowledge, information, and belief there is good ground to support it; and that it is not interposed for delay.

An unsigned pleading produces no legal effect. However, the court may, in its discretion, allow such deficiency to be remedied if it shall appear that the same was due to mere inadvertence and not intended for delay. Counsel who deliberately files an unsigned pleading, or signs a pleading in violation of this Rule, or alleges scandalous or indecent matter therein, or fails promptly report to the court a change of his address, shall be subject to appropriate disciplinary action. (5a)

Section 4. Verification. — Except when otherwise specifically required by law or rule, pleadings need not be under oath, verified or accompanied by affidavit .(5a)

A pleading is verified by an affidavit that the affiant has read the pleading and that the allegations therein are true and correct of his knowledge and belief.

A pleading required to be verified which contains a verification based on "information and belief", or upon "knowledge, information and belief", or lacks a proper verification, shall be treated as an unsigned pleading. (6a)

Section 5. Certification against forum shopping. — The plaintiff or principal party shall certify under oath in the complaint or other initiatory pleading asserting a claim for relief, or in a sworn certification annexed thereto and simultaneously filed therewith: (a) that he has not theretofore commenced any action or filed any claim involving the same issues in any court, tribunal or quasi-judicial agency and, to the best of his knowledge, no such other action or claim is pending therein; (b) if there is such other pending action or claim, a complete statement of the present status thereof; and (c) if he should thereafter learn that the same or similar action or claim has been filed or is pending, he shall report that fact within five (5) days therefrom to the court wherein his aforesaid complaint or initiatory pleading has been filed.

Failure to comply with the foregoing requirements shall not be curable by mere amendment of the complaint or other initiatory pleading but shall be cause for the dismissal of the case without prejudice, unless otherwise provided, upon motion and after hearing. The submission of a false certification or non-compliance with any of the undertakings therein shall constitute indirect contempt of court, without prejudice to the corresponding administrative and criminal actions. If the acts of the party or his counsel clearly constitute willful and deliberate forum shopping, the same shall be ground for summary dismissal with prejudice and shall constitute direct contempt, as well as a cause for administrative sanctions. (n)

RULE 8

Manner of Making Allegations in Pleadings

Section 1. In general. — Every pleading shall contain in a methodical and logical form, a plain, concise and direct statement of the ultimate facts on which the party pleading relies for his claim or defense, as the case may be, omitting the statement of mere evidentiary facts. (1)

If a defense relied on is based on law, the pertinent provisions thereof and their applicability to him shall be clearly and concisely stated. (n)

Section 2. Alternative causes of action or defenses. — A party may set forth two or more statements of a claim or defense alternatively or hypothetically, either in one cause of action or defense or in separate causes of action or defenses. When two or more statements are made in the alternative and one of them if made independently would be sufficient, the pleading is not made insufficient by the insufficiency of one or more of the alternative statements. (2)

Section 3. Conditions precedent. — In any pleading a general averment of the performance or occurrence of all conditions precedent shall be sufficient. (3)

Section 4. Capacity. — Facts showing the capacity of a party to sue or be sued or the authority of a party to sue or be sued in a representative capacity or the legal existence of an organized association of person that is made a party, must be averred. A party desiring to raise an issue as to the legal existence of any party or the capacity of any party to sue or be sued in a representative capacity, shall do so by specific denial, which shall include such supporting particulars as are peculiarly within the pleader's knowledge. (4)

Section 5. Fraud, mistake, condition of the mind. — In all averments of fraud or mistake the circumstances constituting fraud or mistake must be stated with particularity. Malice, intent, knowledge, or other condition of the mind of a person may be averred generally.(5a)

Section 6. Judgment. — In pleading a judgment or decision of a domestic or foreign court, judicial or quasi-judicial tribunal, or of a board or officer, it is sufficient to aver the judgment or decision without setting forth matter showing jurisdiction to render it. (6)

Section 7. Action or defense based on document. — Whenever an action or defense is based upon a written instrument or document, the substance of such instrument or document shall be set forth in the pleading, and the original or a copy thereof shall be attached to the pleading as an exhibit, which shall be deemed to be a part of the pleading, or said copy may with like effect be set forth in the pleading. (7)

Section 8. How to contest such documents. — When an action or defense is founded upon a written instrument, copied in or attached to the corresponding pleading as provided in the preceding section, the genuineness and due execution of the instrument shall be deemed admitted unless the adverse party, under oath specifically denies them, and sets forth what he claims to be the facts, but the requirement of an oath does not apply when the adverse party does not appear to be a party to the instrument or when compliance with an order for an inspection of the original instrument is refused. (8a)

Section 9. Official document or act. — In pleading an official document or official act, it is sufficient to aver that the document was issued or the act done in compliance with law. (9)

Section 10. Specific denial. — A defendant must specify each material allegation of fact the truth of which he does not admit and, whenever practicable, shall set forth the substance of the matters upon which he relies to support his denial. Where a defendant desires to deny only a part of an averment, he shall specify so much of it as is true and material and shall deny only the remainder. Where a defendant is without knowledge or information sufficient to form a belief as to the truth of a material averment made to the complaint, he shall so state, and this shall have the effect of a denial. (10a)

Section 11. Allegations not specifically denied deemed admitted. — Material averment in the complaint, other than those as to the amount of unliquidated damages, shall be deemed admitted when not specifically denied. Allegations of usury in a complaint to recover usurious interest are deemed admitted if not denied under oath. (1a, R9)

Section 12. Striking out of pleading or matter contained therein. — Upon motion made by a party before responding to a pleading or, if no responsive pleading is permitted by these Rules, upon motion made by a party within twenty (20) days after the service of the pleading upon him, or upon the court's own initiative at any time, the court may order any pleading to be stricken out or that any sham or false, redundant, immaterial, impertinent, or scandalous matter be stricken out therefrom. (5, R9)

RULE 9

Effect of Failure to Plead

Section 1. Defenses and objections not pleaded. — Defenses and objections not pleaded either in a motion to dismiss or in the answer are deemed waived. However, when it appears from the pleadings or the evidence on record that the court has no jurisdiction over the subject matter, that there is another action pending between the same parties for the same cause, or that the action is barred by a prior judgment or by statute of limitations, the court shall dismiss the claim. (2a)

Section 2. Compulsory counterclaim, or cross-claim, not set up barred. — A compulsory counterclaim, or a cross-claim, not set up shall be barred. (4a)

Section 3. Default; declaration of. — If the defending party fails to answer within the time allowed therefor, the court shall, upon motion of the claiming party with notice to the defending party, and proof of such failure, declare the defending party in default. Thereupon, the court shall proceed to render judgment granting the claimant such relief as his pleading may warrant, unless the court in its discretion requires the claimant to submit evidence. Such reception of evidence may be delegated to the clerk of court. (1a, R18)

(a) Effect of order of default. — A party in default shall be entitled to notice of subsequent proceedings but not to take part in the trial. (2a, R18)

(b) Relief from order of default. — A party declared in default may at any time after notice thereof and before judgment file a motion under oath to set aside the order of default upon proper showing that his failure to answer was due to fraud, accident, mistake or excusable negligence and that he has a meritorious defense. In such case, the order of default may be set aside on such terms and conditions as the judge may impose in the interest of justice. (3a, R18)

(c) Effect of partial default. — When a pleading asserting a claim states a common cause of action against several defending parties, some of whom answer and the others fail to do so, the court shall try the case against all upon the answers thus filed and render judgment upon the evidence presented. (4a, R18).

(d) Extent of relief to be awarded. — A judgment rendered against a party in default shall not exceed the amount or be different in kind from that prayed for nor award unliquidated damages. (5a, R18).

(e) Where no defaults allowed. — If the defending party in an action for annulment or declaration of nullity of marriage or for legal separation fails to answer, the court shall order the prosecuting attorney to investigate whether or not a collusion between the parties exists, and if there is no collusion, to intervene for the State in order to see to it that the evidence submitted is not fabricated. (6a, R18)

RULE 10

Amended and Supplemental Pleadings

Section 1. Amendments in general. — Pleadings may be amended by adding or striking out an allegation or the name of any party, or by correcting a mistake in the name of a party or a mistaken or inadequate allegation or description in any other respect, so that the actual merits of the controversy may speedily be determined, without regard to technicalities, and in the most expeditious and inexpensive manner. (1)

Section 2. Amendments as a matter of right. — A party may amend his pleading once as a matter of right at any time before a responsive pleading is served or, in the case of a reply, at any time within ten (10) days after it is served. (2a)

Section 3. Amendments by leave of court. — Except as provided in the next preceding section, substantial amendments may be made only upon leave of court. But such leave may be refused if it appears to the court that the motion was made with intent to delay. Orders of the court upon the matters provided in this section shall be made upon motion filed in court, and after notice to the adverse party, and an opportunity to be heard. (3a)

Section 4. Formal amendments. — A defect in the designation of the parties and other clearly clerical or typographical errors may be summarily corrected by the court at any stage of the action, at its initiative or on motion, provided no prejudice is caused thereby to the adverse party. (4a)

Section 5. Amendment to conform to or authorize presentation of evidence. — When issues not raised by the pleadings are tried with the express or implied consent of the parties they shall be treated in all respects as if they had been raised in the pleadings. Such amendment of the pleadings as may be necessary to cause them to conform to the evidence and to raise these issues may be made upon motion of any party at any time, even after judgment; but failure to amend does not affect the result of the trial of these issues. If evidence is objected to at the trial on the ground that it is not within the issues made by the pleadings, the court may allow the pleadings to be amended and shall do so with liberality if the presentation of the merits of the action and the ends of substantial justice will be subserved thereby. The court may grant a continuance to enable the amendment to be made. (5a)

Section 6. Supplemental pleadings. — Upon motion of a party the court may, upon reasonable notice and upon such terms as are just, permit him to serve a supplemental pleading setting forth transactions, occurrences or events which have happened since the date of the pleading sought to be supplemented. The adverse party may plead thereto within ten (10) days from notice of the order admitting the supplemental pleading. (6a)

Section 7. Filing of amended pleadings. — When any pleading is amended, a new copy of the entire pleading, incorporating the amendments, which shall be indicated by appropriate marks, shall be filed. (7a)

Section 8. Effect of amended pleadings. — An amended pleading supersedes the pleading that it amends. However, admissions in superseded pleadings may be received in evidence against the pleader, and claims or defenses alleged therein not incorporated in the amended pleading shall be deemed waived. (n)

RULE 11

When to File Responsive Pleadings

Section 1. Answer to the complaint. — The defendant shall file his answer to the complaint within fifteen (15) days after service of summons, unless a different period is fixed by the court. (la)

Section 2. Answer of a defendant foreign private juridical entity. — Where the defendant is a foreign private juridical entity and service of summons is made on the government official designated by law to receive the same, the answer shall be filed within thirty (30) days after receipt of summons by such entity. (2a)

Section 3. Answer to amended complaint. — When the plaintiff files an amended complaint as a matter of right, the defendant shall answer the same within fifteen (15) days after being served with a copy thereof.

Where its filing is not a matter of right, the defendant shall answer the amended complaint within ten (l0) days from notice of the order admitting the same. An answer earlier filed may serve as the answer to the amended complaint if no new answer is filed.

This Rule shall apply to the answer to an amended counterclaim, amended cross-claim, amended third (fourth, etc.)—party complaint, and amended complaint-in-intervention. (3a)

Section 4. Answer to counterclaim or cross-claim. — A counterclaim or cross-claim must be answered within ten (10) days from service. (4)

Section 5. Answer to third (fourth, etc.)-party complaint. — The time to answer a third (fourth, etc.)—party complaint shall be governed by the same rule as the answer to the complaint. (5a)

Section 6. Reply. — A reply may be filed within ten (10) days from service of the pleading responded to. (6)

Section 7. Answer to supplemental complain. — A supplemental complaint may be answered within ten (10) days from notice of the order admitting the same, unless a different period is fixed by the court. The answer to the complaint shall serve as the answer to the supplemental complaint if no new or supplemental answer is filed. (n)

Section 8. Existing counterclaim or cross-claim. — A compulsory counterclaim or a cross-claim that a defending party has at the time he files his answer shall be contained therein. (8a, R6)

Section 9. Counterclaim or cross-claim arising after answer. — A counterclaim or a cross-claim which either matured or was acquired by a party after serving his pleading may, with the permission of the court, be presented as a counterclaim or a cross-claim by supplemental pleading before judgment. (9, R6)

Section 10. Omitted counterclaim or cross-claim. — When a pleader fails to set up a counterclaim or a cross-claim through oversight, inadvertence, or excusable neglect, or when justice requires, he may, by leave of court, set up the counterclaim or cross-claim by amendment before judgment. (3, R9)

Section 11. Extension of time to plead. — Upon motion and on such terms as may be just, the court may extend the time to plead provided in these Rules.

The court may also, upon like terms, allow an answer or other pleading to be filed after the time fixed by these Rules. (7)

RULE 12

Bill of Particulars

Section 1. When applied for; purpose. — Before responding to a pleading, a party may move for a definite statement or for a bill of particulars of any matter which is not averted with sufficient definiteness or particularity to enable him properly to prepare his responsive pleading. If the pleading is a reply, the motion must be filed within ten (10) days from service thereof. Such motion shall point out the defects complained of, the paragraphs wherein they are contained, and the details desired. (1a)

Section 2. Action by the court. — Upon the filing of the motion, the clerk of court must immediately bring it to the attention of the court which may either deny or grant it outright, or allow the parties the opportunity to be heard. (n)

Section 3. Compliance with order. — If the motion is granted, either in whole or in part, the compliance therewith must be effected within ten (10) days from notice of the order, unless a different period is fixed by the court. The bill of particulars or a more definite statement ordered by the court may be filed either in a separate or in an amended pleading, serving a copy thereof on the adverse party. (n)

Section 4. Effect of non-compliance. — If the order is not obeyed, or in case of insufficient compliance therewith, the court may order the striking out of the pleading or the portions thereof to which the order was directed or make such other order as it deems just. (1[c]a)

Section 5. Stay of period to file responsive pleading. — After service of the bill of particulars or of a more definite pleading, or after notice of denial of his motion, the moving party may file his responsive pleading within the period to which he was entitled at the time of filing his motion, which shall not be less than five (5) days in any event. (1[b]a)

Section 6. Bill a part of pleading. — A bill of particulars becomes part of the pleading for which it is intended. (1[a]a)

RULE 13

Filing and Service of Pleadings, Judgments and Other Papers

Section 1. Coverage. — This Rule shall govern the filing of all pleadings and other papers, as well as the service thereof, except those for which a different mode of service is prescribed. (n)

Section 2. Filing and service, defined. — Filing is the act of presenting the pleading or other paper to the clerk of court.

Service is the act of providing a party with a copy of the pleading or paper concerned. If any party has appeared by counsel, service upon him shall be made upon his counsel or one of them, unless service upon the party himself is ordered by the court. Where one counsel appears for several parties, he shall only be entitled to one copy of any paper served upon him by the opposite side. (2a)

Section 3. Manner of filing. — The filing of pleadings, appearances, motions, notices, orders, judgments and all other papers shall be made by presenting the original copies thereof, plainly indicated as such, personally to the clerk of court or by sending them by registered mail. In the first case, the clerk of court shall endorse on the pleading the date and hour of filing. In the second case, the date of the mailing of motions, pleadings, or any other papers or payments or deposits, as shown by the post office stamp on the envelope or the registry receipt, shall be considered as the date of their filing, payment, or deposit in court. The envelope shall be attached to the record of the case. (1a)

Section 4. Papers required to be filed and served. — Every judgment, resolution, order, pleading subsequent to the complaint, written motion, notice, appearance, demand, offer of judgment or similar papers shall be filed with the court, and served upon the parties affected. (2a)

Section 5. Modes of service. — Service of pleadings motions, notices, orders, judgments and other papers shall be made either personally or by mail. (3a)

Section 6. Personal service. — Service of the papers may be made by delivering personally a copy to the party or his counsel, or by leaving it in his office with his clerk or with a person having charge thereof. If no person is found in his office, or his office is not known, or he has no office, then by leaving the copy, between the hours of eight in the morning and six in the evening, at the party's or counsel's residence, if known, with a person of sufficient age and discretion then residing therein. (4a)

Section 7. Service by mail. — Service by registered mail shall be made by depositing the copy in the post office in a sealed envelope, plainly addressed to the party or his counsel at his office, if known, otherwise at his residence, if known, with postage fully prepaid, and with instructions to the postmaster to return the mail to the sender after ten (10) days if undelivered. If no registry service is available in the locality of either the senders or the addressee, service may be done by ordinary mail. (5a; Bar Matter No. 803, 17 February 1998)

Section 8. Substituted service. — If service of pleadings, motions, notices, resolutions, orders and other papers cannot be made under the two preceding sections, the office and place of residence of the party or his counsel being unknown, service may be made by delivering the copy to the clerk of court, with proof of failure of both personal service and service by mail. The service is complete at the time of such delivery. (6a)

Section 9. Service of judgments, final orders, or resolutions. — Judgments, final orders or resolutions shall be served either personally or by registered mail. When a party summoned by publication has failed to appear in the action, judgments, final orders or resolutions against him shall be served upon him also by publication at the expense of the prevailing party. (7a)

Section 10. Completeness of service. — Personal service is complete upon actual delivery. Service by ordinary mail is complete upon the expiration of ten (10) days after mailing, unless the court otherwise provides. Service by registered mail is complete upon actual receipt by the addressee, or after five (5) days from the date he received the first notice of the postmaster, whichever date is earlier. (8a)

Section 11. Priorities in modes of service and filing. — Whenever practicable, the service and filing of pleadings and other papers shall be done personally. Except with respect to papers emanating from the court, a resort to other modes must be accompanied by a written explanation why the service or filing was not done personally. A violation of this Rule may be cause to consider the paper as not filed. (n)

Section 12. Proof of filing. — The filing of a pleading or paper shall be proved by its existence in the record of the case. If it is not in the record, but is claimed to have been filed personally, the filing shall be proved by the written or stamped acknowledgment of its filing by the clerk of court on a copy of the same; if filed by registered mail, by the registry receipt and by the affidavit of the person who did the mailing, containing a full statement of the date and place of depositing the mail in the post office in a sealed envelope addressed to the court, with postage fully prepaid, and with instructions to the postmaster to return the mail to the sender after ten (10) days if not delivered. (n)

Section 13. Proof of Service. — Proof of personal service shall consist of a written admission of the party served, or the official return of the server, or the affidavit of the party serving, containing a full statement of the date, place and manner of service. If the service is by ordinary mail, proof thereof shall consist of an affidavit of the person mailing of facts showing compliance with section 7 of this Rule. If service is made by registered mail, proof shall be made by such affidavit and the registry receipt issued by the mailing office. The registry return card shall be filed immediately upon its receipt by the sender, or in lieu thereof the unclaimed letter together with the certified or sworn copy of the notice given by the postmaster to the addressee. (10a)

Section 14. Notice of lis pendens. — In an action affecting the title or the right of possession of real property, the plaintiff and the defendant, when affirmative relief is claimed in his answer, may record in the office of the registry of deeds of the province in which the property is situated notice of the pendency of the action. Said notice shall contain the names of the parties and the object of the action or defense, and a description of the property in that province affected thereby. Only from the time of filing such notice for record shall a purchaser, or encumbrancer of the property affected thereby, be deemed to have constructive notice of the pendency of the action, and only of its pendency against the parties designated by their real names.

The notice of lis pendens hereinabove mentioned may be cancelled only upon order of the court, after proper showing that the notice is for the purpose of molesting the adverse party, or that it is not necessary to protect the rights of the rights of the party who caused it to be recorded. (24a, R-14)

RULE 14

Summons

Section 1. Clerk to issue summons. — Upon the filing of the complaint and the payment of the requisite legal fees, the clerk of court shall forthwith issue the corresponding summons to the defendants. (1a)

Section 2. Contents. — The summons shall be directed to the defendant, signed by the clerk of court under seal and contain (a) the name of the court and the names of the parties to the action; (b) a direction that the defendant answer within the time fixed by these Rules; (c) a notice that unless the defendant so answers plaintiff will take judgment by default and may be granted the relief applied for.

A copy of the complaint and order for appointment of guardian ad litem if any, shall be attached to the original and each copy of the summons. (3a)

Section 3. By whom served. — The summons may be served by the sheriff, his deputy, or other proper court officer, or for justifiable reasons by any suitable person authorized by the court issuing the summons. (5a)

Section 4. Return. — When the service has been completed, the server shall, within five (5) days therefrom, serve a copy of the return, personally or by registered mail, to the plaintiff's counsel, and shall return the summons to the clerk, who issued it, accompanied by proof of service. (6a)

Section 5. Issuance of alias summons. — If a summons is returned without being served on any or all of the defendants, the server shall also serve a copy of the return on the plaintiff's counsel, stating the reasons for the failure of service, within five (5) days therefrom. In such a case, or if the summons has been lost, the clerk, on demand of the plaintiff, may issue an alias summons. (4a)

Section 6. Service in person on defendant. — Whenever practicable, the summons shall be served by handling a copy thereof to the defendant in person, or, if he refuses to receive and sign for it, by tendering it to him. (7a)

Section 7. Substituted service. — If, for justifiable causes, the defendant cannot be served within a reasonable time as provided in the preceding section, service may be effected (a) by leaving copies of the summons at the defendant's residence with some person of suitable age and discretion then residing therein, or (b) by leaving the copies at defendant's office or regular place of business with some competent person in charge thereof. (8a)

Section 8. Service upon entity without juridical personality. — When persons associated in an entity without juridical personality are sued under the name by which they are generally or commonly known, service may be effected upon all the defendants by serving upon any one of them, or upon the person in charge of the office or place of business maintained in such name. But such service shall not bind individually any person whose connection with the entity has, upon due notice, been severed before the action was brought. (9a)

Section 9. Service upon prisoners. — When the defendant is a prisoner confined in a jail or institution, service shall be effected upon him by the officer having the management of such jail or institution who is deemed deputized as a special sheriff for said purpose. (12a)

Section 10. Service upon minors and incompetents. — When the defendant is a minor, insane or otherwise an incompetent, service shall be made upon him personally and on his legal guardian if he has one, or if none his guardian ad litem whose appointment shall be applied for by the plaintiff. In the case of a minor, service may also be made on his father or mother. (l0a, 11a)

Section 11. Service upon domestic private juridical entity. — When the defendant is a corporation, partnership or association organized under the laws of the Philippines with a juridical personality, service may be made on the president, managing partner, general manager, corporate secretary, treasurer, or in-house counsel. (13a)

Section 12. Service upon foreign private juridical entities. — When the defendant is a foreign private juridical entity which has transacted business in the Philippines, service may be made on its resident agent designated in accordance with law for that purpose, or, if there be no such agent, on the government official designated by law to that effect, or on any of its officers or agents within the Philippines. (14a)

Section 13. Service upon public corporations. — When the defendant is the Republic of the Philippines, service may be effected on the Solicitor General; in case of a province, city or municipality, or like public corporations, service may be effected on its executive head, or on such other officer or officers as the law or the court may direct. (15)

Section 14. Service upon defendant whose identity or whereabouts are unknown. — In any action where the defendant is designated as an unknown owner, or the like, or whenever his whereabouts are unknown and cannot be ascertained by diligent inquiry, service may, by leave of court, be effected upon him by publication in a newspaper of general circulation and in such places and for such time as the court may order. (16a)

Section 15. Extraterritorial service. — When the defendant does not reside and is not found in the Philippines, and the action affects the personal status of the plaintiff or relates to, or the subject of which is, property within the Philippines, in which the defendant has or claims a lien or interest, actual or contingent, or in which the relief demanded consists, wholly or in part, in excluding the defendant from any interest therein, or the property of the defendant has been attached within the Philippines, service may, by leave of court, be effected out of the Philippines by personal service as under section 6; or by publication in a newspaper of general circulation in such places and for such time as the court may order, in which case a copy of the summons and order of the court shall be sent by registered mail to the last known address of the defendant, or in any other manner the court may deem sufficient. Any order granting such leave shall specify a reasonable time, which shall not be less than sixty (60) days after notice, within which the defendant must answer. (17a)

Section 16. Residents temporarily out of the Philippines. — When any action is commenced against a defendant who ordinarily resides within the Philippines, but who is temporarily out of it, service may, by leave of court, be also effected out of the Philippines, as under the preceding section. (18a)

Section 17. Leave of court. — Any application to the court under this Rule for leave to effect service in any manner for which leave of court is necessary shall be made by motion in writing, supported by affidavit of the plaintiff or some person on his behalf, setting forth the grounds for the application. (19)

Section 18. Proof of service. — The proof of service of a summons shall be made in writing by the server and shall set forth the manner, place, and date of service; shall specify any papers which have been served with the process and the name of the person who received the same; and shall be sworn to when made by a person other than a sheriff or his deputy. (20)

Section 19. Proof of service by publication. — If the service has been made by publication, service may be proved by the affidavit of the printer, his foreman or principal clerk, or of the editor, business or advertising manager, to which affidavit a copy of the publication shall be attached and by an affidavit showing the deposit of a copy of the summons and order for publication in the post office, postage prepaid, directed to the defendant by registered mail to his last known address. (21)

Section 20. Voluntary appearance. — The defendant's voluntary appearance in the action shall be equivalent to service of summons. The inclusion in a motion to dismiss of other grounds aside from lack of jurisdiction over the person of the defendant shall not be deemed a voluntary appearance. (23a)

RULE 15

Motions

Section 1. Motion defined. — A motion is an application for relief other than by a pleading. (1a)

Section 2. Motions must be in writings. — All motions shall be in writing except those made in open court or in the course of a hearing or trial. (2a)

Section 3. Contents. — A motion shall state the relief sought to be obtained and the grounds upon which it is based, and if required by these Rules or necessary to prove facts alleged therein, shall be accompanied by supporting affidavits and other papers. (3a)

Section 4. Hearing of motion. — Except for motions which the court may act upon without prejudicing the rights of the adverse party, every written motion shall be set for hearing by the applicant.

Every written motion required to be heard and the notice of the hearing thereof shall be served in such a manner as to ensure its receipt by the other party at least three (3) days before the date of hearing, unless the court for good cause sets the hearing on shorter notice. (4a)

Section 5. Notice of hearing. — The notice of hearing shall be addressed to all parties concerned, and shall specify the time and date of the hearing which must not be later than ten (10) days after the filing of the motion. (5a)

Section 6. Proof of service necessary. — No written motion set for hearing shall be acted upon by the court without proof of service thereof. (6a)

Section 7. Motion day. — Except for motions requiring immediate action, all motions shall be scheduled for hearing on Friday afternoons, or if Friday is a non-working day, in the afternoon of the next working day. (7a)

Section 8. Omnibus motion. — Subject to the provisions of section 1 of Rule 9, a motion attacking a pleading, order, judgment, or proceeding shall include all objections then available, and all objections not so included shall be deemed waived. (8a)

Section 9. Motion for leave. — A motion for leave to file a pleading or motion shall be accompanied by the pleading or motion sought to be admitted. (n)

Section 10. Form. — The Rules applicable to pleadings shall apply to written motions so far as concerns caption, designation, signature, and other matters of form. (9a)

RULE 16

Motion to Dismiss

Section 1. Grounds. — Within the time for but before filing the answer to the complaint or pleading asserting a claim, a motion to dismiss may be made on any of the following grounds:

(a) That the court has no jurisdiction over the person of the defending party;

(b) That the court has no jurisdiction over the subject matter of the claim;

(c) That venue is improperly laid;

(d) That the plaintiff has no legal capacity to sue;

(e) That there is another action pending between the same parties for the same cause;

(f) That the cause of action is barred by a prior judgment or by the statute of limitations;

(g) That the pleading asserting the claim states no cause of action;

(h) That the claim or demand set forth in the plaintiff's pleading has been paid, waived, abandoned, or otherwise extinguished;

(i) That the claim on which the action is founded is enforceable under the provisions of the statute of frauds; and

(j) That a condition precedent for filing the claim has not been complied with. (1a)

Section 2. Hearing of motion. — At the hearing of the motion, the parties shall submit their arguments on the questions of law and their evidence on the questions of fact involved except those not available at that time. Should the case go to trial, the evidence presented during the hearing shall automatically be part of the evidence of the party presenting the same. (n)

Section 3. Resolution of Motion. — After the hearing, the court may dismiss the action or claim, deny the motion, or order the amendment of the pleading.

The court shall not defer the resolution of the motion for the reason that the ground relied upon is not indubitable.

In every case, the resolution shall state clearly and distinctly the reasons therefor. (3a)

Section 4. Time to plead. — If the motion is denied, the movant shall file his answer within the balance of the period prescribed by Rule 11 to which he was entitled at the time of serving his motion, but not less than five (5) days in any event, computed from his receipt of the notice of the denial. If the pleading is ordered to be amended, he shall file his answer within the period prescribed by Rule 11 counted from service of the amended pleading, unless the court provides a longer period. (4a)

Section 5. Effect of dismissal. — Subject to the right of appeal, an order granting a motion to dismiss based on paragraphs (f), (h) and (i) of section 1 hereof shall bar the refiling of the same action or claim. (n)

Section 6. Pleading grounds as affirmative defenses. — If no motion to dismiss has been filed, any of the grounds for dismissal provided for in this Rule may be pleaded as an affirmative defense in the answer and, in the discretion of the court, a preliminary hearing may be had thereon as if a motion to dismiss had been filed. (5a)

The dismissal of the complaint under this section shall be without prejudice to the prosecution in the same or separate action of a counterclaim pleaded in the answer. (n)

RULE 17

Dismissal of Actions

Section 1. Dismissal upon notice by plaintiff. — A complaint may be dismissed by the plaintiff by filing a notice of dismissal at any time before service of the answer or of a motion for summary judgment. Upon such notice being filed, the court shall issue an order confirming the dismissal. Unless otherwise stated in the notice, the dismissal is without prejudice, except that a notice operates as an adjudication upon the merits when filed by a plaintiff who has once dismissed in a competent court an action based on or including the same claim. (1a)

Section 2. Dismissal upon motion of plaintiff. — Except as provided in the preceding section, a complaint shall not be dismissed at the plaintiff's instance save upon approval of the court and upon such terms and conditions as the court deems proper. If a counterclaim has been pleaded by a defendant prior to the service upon him of the plaintiffs motion for dismissal, the dismissal shall be limited to the complaint. The dismissal shall be without prejudice to the right of the defendant to prosecute his counterclaim in a separate action unless within fifteen (15) days from notice of the motion he manifests his preference to have his counterclaim resolved in the same action. Unless otherwise specified in the order, a dismissal under this paragraph shall be without prejudice. A class suit shall not be dismissed or compromised without the approval of the court. (2a)

Section 3. Dismissal due to fault of plaintiff. — If, for no justifiable cause, the plaintiff fails to appear on the date of the presentation of his evidence in chief on the complaint, or to prosecute his action for an unreasonable length of time, or to comply with these Rules or any order of the court, the complaint may be dismissed upon motion of the defendant or upon the court's own motion, without prejudice to the right of the defendant to prosecute his counterclaim in the same or in a separate action. This dismissal shall have the effect of an adjudication upon the merits, unless otherwise declared by the court. (3a)

Section 4. Dismissal of counterclaim, cross-claim, or third-party complaint. — The provisions of this Rule shall apply to the dismissal of any counterclaim, cross-claim, or third-party complaint. A voluntary dismissal by the claimant by notice as in section 1 of this Rule, shall be made before a responsive pleading or a motion for summary judgment is served or, if there is none, before the introduction of evidence at the trial or hearing. (4a)

RULE 18

Pre-Trial

Section 1. When conducted. — After the last pleading has been served and filed, if shall be the duty of the plaintiff to promptly move ex parte that the case be set for pre-trial (5a, R20)

Section 2. Nature and purpose. — The pre-trial is mandatory. The court shall consider:

(a) The possibility of an amicable settlement or of a submission to alternative modes of dispute resolution;

(b) The simplification of the issues;

(c) The necessity or desirability of amendments to the pleadings;

(d) The possibility of obtaining stipulations or admissions of facts and of documents to avoid unnecessary proof;

(e) The limitation of the number of witnesses;

(f) The advisability of a preliminary reference of issues to a commissioner;

(g) The propriety of rendering judgment on the pleadings, or summary judgment, or of dismissing the action should a valid ground therefor be found to exist;

(h) The advisability or necessity of suspending the proceedings; and

(i) Such other matters as may aid in the prompt disposition of the action. (1a, R20)

Section 3. Notice of pre-trial. — The notice of pre-trial shall be served on counsel, or on the party who has no counsel. The counsel served with such notice is charged with the duty of notifying the party represented by him. (n)

Section 4. Appearance of parties. — It shall be the duty of the parties and their counsel to appear at the pre-trial. The non-appearance of a party may be excused only if a valid cause is shown therefor or if a representative shall appear in his behalf fully authorized in writing to enter into an amicable settlement, to submit to alternative modes of dispute resolution, and to enter into stipulations or admissions of facts and of documents. (n)

Section 5. Effect of failure to appear. — The failure of the plaintiff to appear when so required pursuant to the next preceding section shall be cause for dismissal of the action. The dismissal shall be with prejudice, unless other-wise ordered by the court. A similar failure on the part of the defendant shall be cause to allow the plaintiff to present his evidence ex parte and the court to render judgment on the basis thereof. (2a, R20)

Section 6. Pre-trial brief. — The parties shall file with the court and serve on the adverse party, in such manner as shall ensure their receipt thereof at least three (3) days before the date of the pre-trial, their respective pre-trial briefs which shall contain, among others:

(a) A statement of their willingness to enter into amicable settlement or alternative modes of dispute resolution, indicating the desired terms thereof;

(b) A summary of admitted facts and proposed stipulation of facts;

(c) The issues to be tried or resolved;

(d) The documents or exhibits to be presented stating the purpose thereof;

(e) A manifestation of their having availed or their intention to avail themselves of discovery procedures or referral to commissioners; and

(f) The number and names of the witnesses, and the substance of their respective testimonies.

Failure to file the pre-trial brief shall have the same effect as failure to appear at the pre-trial. (n)

Section 7. Record of pre-trial. — The proceedings in the pre-trial shall be recorded. Upon the termination thereof, the court shall issue an order which shall recite in detail the matters taken up in the conference, the action taken thereon, the amendments allowed to the pleadings, and the agreements or admissions made by the parties as to any of the matters considered. Should the action proceed to trial, the order shall, explicitly define and limit the issues to be tried. The contents of the order shall control the subsequent course of the action, unless modified before trial to prevent manifest injustice. (5a, R20)

RULE 19

Intervention

Section 1. Who may intervene. — A person who has a legal interest in the matter in litigation, or in the success of either of the parties, or an interest against both, or is so situated as to be adversely affected by a distribution or other disposition of property in the custody of the court or of an officer thereof may, with leave of court, be allowed to intervene in the action. The court shall consider whether or not the intervention will unduly delay or prejudice the adjudication of the rights of the original parties, and whether or not the intervenor's rights may be fully protected in a separate proceeding. (2[a], [b]a, R12)

Section 2. Time to intervene. — The motion to intervene may be filed at any time before rendition of judgment by the trial court. A copy of the pleading-in-intervention shall be attached to the motion and served on the original parties. (n)

Section 3. Pleadings-in-intervention. — The intervenor shall file a complaint-in-intervention if he asserts a claim against either or all of the original parties, or an answer-in-intervention if he unites with the defending party in resisting a claim against the latter. (2[c]a, R12)

Section 4. Answer to complaint-in-intervention. — The answer to the complaint-in-intervention shall be filed within fifteen (15) days from notice of the order admitting the same, unless a different period is fixed by the court. (2[d]a, R12)

RULE 20

Calendar of Cases

Section 1. Calendar of cases. — The clerk of court, under the direct supervision of the judge, shall keep a calendar of cases for pre-trial, for trial, those whose trials were adjourned or postponed, and those with motions to set for hearing. Preference shall be given to habeas corpus cases, election cases, special civil actions, and those so required by law. (1a, R22)

Section 2. Assignment of cases. — The assignment of cases to the different branches of a court shall be done exclusively by raffle. The assignment shall be done in open session of which adequate notice shall be given so as to afford interested parties the opportunity to be present. (7a, R22)

RULE 21

Subpoena

Section 1. Subpoena and subpoena duces tecum. — Subpoena is a process directed to a person requiring him to attend and to testify at the hearing or the trial of an action, or at any investigation conducted by competent authority, or for the taking of his deposition. It may also require him to bring with him any books, documents, or other things under his control, in which case it is called a subpoena duces tecum. (1a, R23)

Section 2. By whom issued. — The subpoena may be issued by —

(a) the court before whom the witness is required to attend;

(b) the court of the place where the deposition is to be taken;

(c) the officer or body authorized by law to do so in connection with investigations conducted by said officer or body; or

(d) any Justice of the Supreme Court or of the Court of Appeals in any case or investigation pending within the Philippines.

When application for a subpoena to a prisoner is made, the judge or officer shall examine and study carefully such application to determine whether the same is made for a valid purpose.

No prisoner sentenced to death, reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment and who is confined in any penal institution shall be brought outside the said penal institution for appearance or attendance in any court unless authorized by the Supreme Court (2a, R23)

Section 3. Form and contents. — A subpoena shall state the name of the court and the title of the action or investigation, shall be directed to the person whose attendance is required, and in the case of a subpoena duces tecum, it shall also contain a reasonable description of the books, documents or things demanded which must appear to the court prima facie relevant. (3a, R23)

Section 4. Quashing a subpoena. — The court may quash a subpoena duces tecum upon motion promptly made and, in any event, at or before the time specified therein if it is unreasonable and oppressive, or the relevancy of the books, documents or things does not appear, or if the person in whose behalf the subpoena is issued fails to advance the reasonable cost of the production thereof.

The court may quash a subpoena ad testificandum on the ground that the witness is not bound thereby. In either case, the subpoena may be quashed on the ground that the witness fees and kilometrage allowed by these Rules were not tendered when the subpoena was served. (4a, R23)

Section 5. Subpoena for depositions. — Proof of service of a notice to take a deposition, as provided in sections 15 and 25 of Rule 23, shall constitute sufficient authorization for the issuance of subpoenas for the persons named in said notice by the clerk of the court of the place in which the deposition is to be taken. The clerk shall not, however, issue a subpoena duces tecum to any such person without an order of the court. (5a, R23)

Section 6. Service. — Service of a subpoena shall be made in the same manner as personal or substituted service of summons. The original shall be exhibited and a copy thereof delivered to the person on whom it is served, tendering to him the fees for one day's attendance and the kilometrage allowed by these Rules, except that, when a subpoena is issued by or on behalf of the Republic of the Philippines or an officer or agency thereof, the tender need not be made. The service must be made so as to allow the witness a reasonable time for preparation and travel to the place of attendance. If the subpoena is duces tecum, the reasonable cost of producing the books, documents or things demanded shall also be tendered. (6a, R23)

Section 7. Personal appearance in court. — A person present in court before a judicial officer may be required to testify as if he were in attendance upon a subpoena is sued by such court or officer. (10, R23)

Section 8. Compelling attendance. — In case of failure of a witness to attend, the court or judge issuing the subpoena, upon proof of the service thereof and of the failure of the witness, may issue a warrant to the sheriff of the province, or his deputy, to arrest the witness and bring him before the court or officer where his attendance is required, and the cost of such warrant and seizure of such witness shall be paid by the witness if the court issuing it shall determine that his failure to answer the subpoena was willful and without just excuse. (11, R23)

Section 9. Contempt. — Failure by any person without adequate cause to obey a subpoena served upon him shall be deemed a contempt of the court from which the subpoena is issued. If the subpoena was not issued by a court, the disobedience thereto shall be punished in accordance with the applicable law or Rule. (12a R23)

Section 10. Exceptions. — The provisions of sections 8 and 9 of this Rule shall not apply to a witness who resides more than one hundred (100) kilometers from his residence to the place where he is to testify by the ordinary course of travel, or to a detention prisoner if no permission of the court in which his case is pending was obtained. (9a, R23)

RULE 22

Computation of Time

Section 1. How to compute time. — In computing any period of time prescribed or allowed by these Rules, or by order of the court, or by any applicable statute, the day of the act or event from which the designated period of time begins to run is to be excluded and the date of performance included. If the last day of the period, as thus computed, falls on a Saturday a Sunday, or a legal holiday in the place where the court sits, the time shall not run until the next working day. (a)

Section 2. Effect of interruption. — Should an act be done which effectively interrupts the running of the period, the allowable period after such interruption shall start to run on the day after notice of the cessation of the cause thereof.

The day of the act that caused the interruption shall be excluded in the computation of the period. (n)

RULE 23

Depositions Pending Action

Section 1. Depositions pending action, when may be taken. — By leave of court after jurisdiction has been obtained over any defendant or over property which is the subject of the action, or without such leave after an answer has been served, the testimony of any person, whether a party or not, may be taken, at the instance of any party, by deposition upon oral examination or written interrogatories. The attendance of witnesses may be compelled by the use of a subpoena as provided in Rule 21. Depositions shall be taken only in accordance with these Rules. The deposition of a person confined in prison may be taken only by leave of court on such terms as the court prescribes. (1a, R24)

Section 2. Scope of examination. — Unless otherwise ordered by the court as provided by section 16 or 18 of this Rule, the deponent may be examined regarding any matter, not privileged, which is relevant to the subject of the pending action, whether relating to the claim or defense of any other party, including the existence, description, nature, custody, condition, and location of any books, documents, or other tangible things and the identity and location of persons having knowledge of relevant facts. (2, R24)

Section 3. Examination and cross-examination. — Examination and cross-examination of deponents may proceed as permitted at the trial under sections 3 to 18 of Rule 132. (3a, R24)

Section 4. Use of depositions. — At the trial or upon the hearing of a motion or an interlocutory proceeding, any part or all of a deposition, so far as admissible under the rules of evidence, may be used against any party who was present or represented at the taking of the deposition or who had due notice thereof, in accordance with any one of the following provisions;

(a) Any deposition may be used by any party for the purpose of contradicting or impeaching the testimony of deponent as a witness;

(b) The deposition of a party or of any one who at the time of taking the deposition was an officer, director, or managing agent of a public or private corporation, partnership, or association which is a party may be used by an adverse party for any purpose;

(c) The deposition of a witness, whether or not a party, may be used by any party for any purpose if the court finds: (1) that the witness is dead, or (2) that the witness resides at a distance more than one hundred (100) kilometers from the place of trial or hearing, or is out of the Philippines, unless it appears that his absence was procured by the party offering the deposition, or (3) that the witness is unable to attend or testify because of age, sickness, infirmity, or imprisonment, or (4) that the party offering the deposition has been unable to procure the attendance of the witness by subpoena; or (5) upon application and notice, that such exceptional circumstances exist as to make it desirable, in the interest of justice and with due regard to the importance of presenting the testimony of witnesses orally in open court, to allow the deposition to be used; and

(d) If only part of a deposition is offered in evidence by a party, the adverse party may require him to introduce all of it which is relevant to the part introduced, and any party may introduce any other parts. (4a, R24)

Section 5. Effect of substitution of parties. — Substitution of parties does not affect the right to use depositions previously taken; and, when an action has been dismissed and another action involving the same subject is afterward brought between the same parties or their representatives or successors in interest, all depositions lawfully taken and duly filed in the former action may be used in the latter as if originally taken therefor. (5, R24)

Section 6. Objections to admissibility. — Subject to the provisions of section 29 of this Rule, objection may be made at the trial or hearing, to receiving in evidence any deposition or part thereof for any reason which would require the exclusion of the evidence if the witness were then present and testifying (6, R24)

Section 7. Effect of taking depositions. — A party shall not be deemed to make a person his own witness for any purpose by taking his deposition. (7, R24)

Section 8. Effect of using depositions. — The introduction in evidence of the deposition or any part thereof for any purpose other than that of contradicting or impeaching the deponent makes the deponent the witness of the party introducing the deposition, but this shall not apply to the use by an adverse party of a deposition as described in paragraph (b) of section 4 of this Rule. (8, R24)

Section 9. Rebutting deposition. — At the trial or hearing any party may rebut any relevant evidence contained in a deposition whether introduced by him or by any other party. (9, R24)

Section 10. Persons before whom depositions may be taken within the Philippines. — Within the Philippines depositions may be taken before any judge, notary public, or the person referred to in section 14 hereof. (10a, R24)

Section 11. Persons before whom depositions may be taken in foreign countries. — In a foreign state or country, depositions may be taken (a) on notice before a secretary of embassy or legation, consul general, consul, vice-consul, or consular agent of the Republic of the Philippines, (b) before such person or officer as may be appointed by commission or under letters rogatory; or (c) the person referred to in section 14 hereof. (11a, R24)

Section 12. Commission or letters rogatory. — A commission or letters rogatory shall be issued only when necessary or convenient, on application and notice, and on such terms, and with such direction as are just and appropriate. Officers may be designated in notices or commissions either by name or descriptive title and letters rogatory may be addressed to the appropriate judicial authority in the foreign country. (12a, R24)

Section 13. Disqualification by interest. — No deposition shall be taken before a person who is a relative within the sixth degree of consanguinity or affinity, or employee or counsel of any of the parties, or who is a relative within the same degree, or employee of such counsel; or who is financially interested in the action. (13a, R24)

Section 14. Stipulations regarding taking of depositions. — If the parties so stipulate in writing, depositions may be taken before any person authorized to administer oaths, at any time or place, in accordance with these Rules and when so taken may be used like other depositions. (14a, R24)

Section 15. Deposition upon oral examination; notice; time and place. — A party desiring to take the deposition of any person upon oral examination shall give reasonable notice in writing, to every other party to the action. The notice shall state the time and place for taking the deposition and the name and address of each person to be examined, if known, and if the name is not known, a general description sufficient to identify him or the particular class or group to which he belongs. On motion of any party upon whom the notice is served, the court may for cause shown enlarge or shorten the time. (15, R24)

Section 16. Orders for the protection of parties and deponents. — After notice is served for taking a deposition by oral examination, upon motion seasonably made by any party or by the person to be examined and for good cause shown, the court in which the action is pending may make an order that the deposition shall not be taken, or that it may be taken only at some designated place other than that stated in the notice, or that it may be taken only on written interrogatories, or that certain matters shall not be inquired into, or that the scope of the examination shall be held with no one present except the parties to the action and their officers or counsel, or that after being sealed the deposition shall be opened only by order of the court, or that secret processes, developments, or research need not be disclosed, or that the parties shall simultaneously file specified documents or information enclosed in sealed envelopes to be opened as directed by the court or the court may make any other order which justice requires to protect the party or witness from annoyance, embarrassment, or oppression. (16a, R24)

Section 17. Record of examination, oath; objections. — The officer before whom the deposition is to be taken shall put the witness on oath and shall personally, or by some one acting under his direction and in his presence, record the testimony of the witness. The testimony shall be taken stenographically unless the parties agree otherwise. All objections made at the time of the examination to the qualifications of the officer taking the deposition, or to the manner of talking it, or to the evidence presented, or to the conduct of any party, and any other objection to the proceedings, shall be noted by the officer upon the deposition. Evidence objected to shall be taken subject to the objections. In lieu of participating in the oral examination, parties served with notice of taking a deposition may transmit written interrogatories to the officers, who shall propound them to the witness and record the answers verbatim. (17, R24)

Section 18. Motion to terminate or limit examination. — At any time during the taking of the deposition, on motion or petition of any party or of the deponent, and upon a showing that the examination is being conducted in bad faith or in such manner as unreasonably to annoy, embarrass, or oppress the deponent or party, the court in which the action is pending or the Regional Trial Court of the place where the deposition is being taken may order the officer conducting the examination to cease forthwith from taking the deposition, or may limit the scope and manner of the taking of the deposition, as provided in section 16 of this Rule. If the order made terminates the examination, it shall be resumed thereafter only upon the order of the court in which the action is pending. Upon demand of the objecting party or deponent, the taking of the deposition shall be suspended for the time necessary to make a notice for an order. In granting or refusing such order, the court may impose upon either party or upon the witness the requirement to pay such costs or expenses as the court may deem reasonable. (18a, R24)

Section 19. Submission to witness; changes; signing. — When the testimony is fully transcribed, the deposition shall be submitted to the witness for examination and shall be read to or by him, unless such examination and reading are waived by the witness and by the parties. Any changes in form or substance which the witness desires to make shall be entered upon the deposition by the officer with a statement of the reasons given by the witness for making them. The deposition shall then be signed by the witness, unless the parties by stipulation waive the signing or the witness is ill or cannot be found or refuses to sign. If the deposition is not signed by the witness, the officer shall sign it and state on the record the fact of the waiver or of the illness or absence of the witness or the fact of the refusal to sign together with the reason be given therefor, if any, and the deposition may then be used as fully as though signed, unless on a motion to suppress under section 29 (f) of this Rule, the court holds that the reasons given for the refusal to sign require rejection of the deposition in whole or in part. (19a, R24)

Section 20. Certification, and filing by officer. — The officer shall certify on the deposition that the witness was duly sworn to by him and that the deposition is a true record of the testimony given by the witness. He shall then securely seal the deposition in an envelope indorsed with the title of the action and marked "Deposition of (here insert the name of witness)" and shall promptly file it with the court in which the action is pending or send it by registered mail to the clerk thereof for filing. (20, R24)

Section 21. Notice of filing. — The officer taking the deposition shall give prompt notice of its filing to all the parties. (21, R24)

Section 22. Furnishing copies. — Upon payment of reasonable charges therefor, the officer shall furnish a copy of the deposition to any party or to the deponent. (22, R24)

Section 23. Failure to attend of party giving notice. — If the party giving the notice of the taking of a deposition fails to attend and proceed therewith and another attends in person or by counsel pursuant to the notice, the court may order the party giving the notice to pay such other party the amount of the reasonable expenses incurred by him and his counsel in so attending, including reasonable attorney's fees. (23a, R24)

Section 24. Failure of party giving notice to serve subpoena. — If the party giving the notice of the taking of a deposition of a witness fails to serve a subpoena upon him and the witness because of such failure does not attend, and if another party attends in person or by counsel because he expects the deposition of that witness to be taken, the court may order the party giving the notice to pay to such other party the amount of the reasonable expenses incurred by him and his counsel in so attending, including reasonable attorney's fees. (24a, R24)

Section 25. Deposition upon written interrogatories; service of notice and of interrogatories. — A party desiring to take the deposition of any person upon written interrogatories shall serve them upon every other party with a notice stating the name and address of the person who is to answer them and the name or descriptive title and address of the officer before whom the deposition is to be taken. Within ten (10) days thereafter, a party so served may serve cross-interrogatories upon the party proposing to take the deposition. Within five (5) days thereafter, the latter may serve re-direct interrogatories upon a party who has served cross-interrogatories. Within three (3) days after being served with re-direct interrogatories, a party may serve recross-interrogatories upon the party proposing to take the deposition. (25, R24)

Section 26. Officers to take responses and prepare record. — A copy of the notice and copies of all interrogatories served shall be delivered by the party taking the deposition to the officer designated in the notice, who shall proceed promptly, in the manner provided by sections 17, 19 and 20 of this Rule, to take the testimony of the witness in response to the interrogatories and to prepare, certify, and file or mail the deposition, attaching thereto the copy of the notice and the interrogatories received by him. (26, R24)

Section 27. Notice of filing and furnishing copies. — When a deposition upon interrogatories is filed, the officer taking it shall promptly give notice thereof to all the parties, and may furnish copies to them or to the deponent upon payment of reasonable charges therefor. (27, R24)

Section 28. Order for the protection of parties and deponents. — After the service of the interrogatories and prior to the taking of the testimony of the deponent, the court in which the action is pending, on motion promptly made by a party or a deponent, and for good cause shown, may make any order specified in sections 15, 16 and 18 of this Rule which is appropriate and just or an order that the deposition shall not be taken before the officer designated in the notice or that it shall not be taken except upon oral examination. (28a, R24)

Section 29. Effect of errors and irregularities in depositions. —

(a) As to notice. — All errors and irregularities in the notice for taking a deposition are waived unless written objection is promptly served upon the party giving the notice.

(b) As to disqualification of officer. — Objection to taking a deposition because of disqualification of the officer before whom it is to be taken is waived unless made before the taking of the deposition begins or as soon thereafter as the disqualification becomes known or could be discovered with reasonable diligence.

(c) As to competency or relevancy of evidence. — Objections to the competency of witness or the competency, relevancy, or materiality of testimony are not waived by failure to make them before or during the taking of the deposition, unless the ground, of the objection is one which might have been obviated or removed if presented at that time.

(d) As to oral examination and other particulars. — Errors and irregularities occurring at the oral examination in the manner of taking the deposition in the form of the questions or answers, in the oath or affirmation, or in the conduct of the parties and errors of any kind which might be obviated, removed, or cured if promptly prosecuted, are waived unless reasonable objection thereto is made at the taking of the deposition.

(e) As to form of written interrogatories. — Objections to the form of written interrogatories submitted under sections 25 and 26 of this Rule are waived unless served in writing upon the party propounding them within the time allowed for serving succeeding cross or other interrogatories and within three (3) days after service of the last interrogatories authorized.

(f) As to manner of preparation. — Errors and irregularities in the manner in which the testimony is transcribed or the deposition is prepared, signed, certified, sealed, indorsed, transmitted, filed, or otherwise dealt with by the officer under sections 17, 19, 20 and 26 of this Rule are waived unless a motion to suppress the deposition or some part thereof is made with reasonable promptness after such defect is, or with due diligence might have been, ascertained. (29a, R24)

RULE 24

Depositions Before Action or Pending Appeal

Section 1. Depositions before action; petition. — A person who desires to perpetuate his own testimony or that of another person regarding any matter that may be cognizable in any court of the Philippines may file a verified petition in the court of the place of the residence of any expected adverse party. (1a R134)

Section 2. Contents of petition. — The petition shall be entitled in the name of the petitioner and shall show: (a) that the petitioner expects to be a party to an action in a court of the Philippines but is presently unable to bring it or cause it to be brought; (b) the subject matter of the expected action and his interest therein; (c) the facts which he desires to establish by the proposed testimony and his reasons for desiring to perpetuate it; (d) the names or a description of the persons he expects will be adverse parties and their addresses so far as known; and (e) the names and addresses of the persons to be examined and the substance of the testimony which he expects to elicit from each, and shall ask for an order authorizing the petitioner to take the depositions of the persons to be examined named in the petition for the purpose of perpetuating their testimony. (2, R134)

Section 3. Notice and service. — The petitioner shall serve a notice upon each person named in the petition as an expected adverse party, together with a copy of the petition, stating that the petitioner will apply to the court, at a time and place named therein, for the order described in the petition. At least twenty (20) days before the date of the hearing, the court shall cause notice thereof to be served on the parties and prospective deponents in the manner provided for service of summons. (3a, R134)

Section 4. Order and examination. — If the court is satisfied that the perpetuation of the testimony may prevent a failure or delay of justice, it shall make an order designating or describing the persons whose deposition may be taken and specifying the subject matter of the examination and whether the depositions shall be taken upon oral examination or written interrogatories. The depositions may be taken in accordance with Rule 23 before the hearing. (4a, R134)

Section 5. Reference to court. — For the purpose of applying Rule 23 to depositions for perpetuating testimony, each reference therein to the court in which the action is pending shall be deemed to refer to the court in which the petition for such deposition was filed. (5a, R134)

Section 6. Use of deposition. — If a deposition to perpetuate testimony is taken under this Rule, or if, although not so taken, it would be admissible in evidence, it may be used in any action involving the same subject matter sub-sequently brought in accordance with the provisions of sections 4 and 5 of Rule 23. (6a, R134)

Section 7. Depositions pending appeal. — If an appeal has been taken from a judgment of a court, including the Court of Appeals in proper cases, or before the taking of an appeal if the time therefor has not expired, the court in which the judgment was rendered may allow the taking of depositions of witnesses to perpetuate their testimony for in the event of further proceedings in the said court. In such case the party who desires to perpetuate the testimony may make a motion in the said court for leave to take the depositions, upon the same notice and service thereof as if the action was pending therein. The motion shall state (a) the names and addresses of the persons to be examined and the substance of the testimony which he expects to elicit from each, and (b) the reason for perpetuating their testimony. If the court finds that the perpetuation of the testimony is proper to avoid a failure or delay of justice, it may make an order allowing the deposition to be taken, and thereupon the depositions may be taken and used in the same manner and under the same conditions as are prescribed in these Rules for depositions taken in pending actions. (7a, R134)

RULE 25

Interrogatories to Parties

Section 1. Interrogatories to parties; service thereof. — Under the same conditions specified in section 1 of Rule 23, any party desiring to elicit material and relevant facts from any adverse parties shall file and serve upon the latter written interrogatories to be answered by the party served or, if the party served is a public or private corporation or a partnership or association, by any officer thereof competent to testify in its behalf. (1a)

Section 2. Answer to interrogatories. — The interrogatories shall be answered fully in writing and shall be signed and sworn to by the person making them. The party upon whom the interrogatories have been served shall file and serve a copy of the answers on the party submitting the interrogatories within fifteen (15) days after service thereof unless the court on motion and for good cause shown, extends or shortens the time. (2a)

Section 3. Objections to interrogatories. — Objections to any interrogatories may be presented to the court within ten (10) days after service thereof, with notice as in case of a motion; and answers shall be deferred until the objections are resolved, which shall be at as early a time as is practicable. (3a)

Section 4. Number of interrogatories. — No party may, without leave of court, serve more than one set of interrogatories to be answered by the same party. (4)

Section 5. Scope and use of interrogatories. — Interrogatories may relate to any matters that can be inquired into under section 2 of Rule 23, and the answers may be used for the same purposes provided in section 4 of the same Rule. (5a)

Section 6. Effect of failure to serve written interrogatories. — Unless thereafter allowed by the court for good cause shown and to prevent a failure of justice, a party not served with written interrogatories may not be compelled by the adverse party to give testimony in open court, or to give a deposition pending appeal. (n)

RULE 26

Admission by Adverse Party

Section 1. Request for admission. — At any time after issues have been joined, a party may file and serve upon any other party may file and serve upon any other party a written request for the admission by the latter of the genuineness of any material and relevant document described in and exhibited with the request or of the truth of any material and relevant matter of fact set forth in the request. Copies of the documents shall be delivered with the request unless copy have already been furnished. (1a)

Section 2. Implied admission. — Each of the matters of which an admission is requested shall be deemed admitted unless, within a period designated in the request, which shall not be less than fifteen (15) days after service thereof, or within such further time as the court may allow on motion, the party to whom the request is directed files and serves upon the party requesting the admission a sworn statement either denying specifically the matters of which an admission is requested or setting forth in detail the reasons why he cannot truthfully either admit or deny those matters.

Objections to any request for admission shall be submitted to the court by the party requested within the period for and prior to the filing of his sworn statement as contemplated in the preceding paragraph and his compliance therewith shall be deferred until such objections are resolved, which resolution shall be made as early as practicable. (2a)

Section 3. Effect of admission. — Any admission made by a party pursuant to such request is for the purpose of the pending action only and shall not constitute an admission by him for any other purpose nor may the same be used against him in any other proceeding. (3)

Section 4. Withdrawal. — The court may allow the party making an admission under the Rule, whether express or implied, to withdraw or amend it upon such terms as may be just. (4)

Section 5. Effect of failure to file and serve request for admission. — Unless otherwise allowed by the court for good cause shown and to prevent a failure of justice a party who fails to file and serve a request for admission on the adverse party of material and relevant facts at issue which are, or ought to be, within the personal knowledge of the latter, shall not be permitted to present evidence on such facts. (n)

RULE 27

Production or Inspection of Documents or Things

Section 1. Motion for production or inspection; order. — Upon motion of any party showing good cause therefor, the court in which an action is pending may (a) order any party to produce and permit the inspection and copying or photographing, by or on behalf of the moving party, of any designated documents, papers, books, accounts, letters, photographs, objects or tangible things, not privileged, which constitute or contain evidence material to any matter involved in the action and which are in his possession, custody or control, or (b) order any party to permit entry upon designated land or other property in his possession or control for the purpose of inspecting, measuring, surveying, or photographing the property or any designated relevant object or operation thereon. The order shall specify the time, place and manner of making the inspection and taking copies and photographs, and may prescribe such terms and conditions as are just. (1a)

RULE 28

Physical and Mental Examination of Persons

Section 1. When examination may be ordered. — In an action in which the mental or physical condition of a party is in controversy, the court in which the action is pending may in its discretion order him to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician. (1)

Section 2. Order for examination. — The order for examination may be made only on motion for good cause shown and upon notice to the party to be examined and to all other parties, and shall specify the time, place, manner, conditions and scope of the examination and the person or persons by whom it is to be made. (2)

Section 3. Report of findings. — If requested by the party examined, the party causing the examination to be made shall deliver to him a copy of a detailed written report of the examining physician setting out his findings and conclusions. After such request and delivery, the party causing the examination to be made shall be entitled upon request to receive from the party examined a like report of any examination, previously or thereafter made, of the same mental or physical condition. If the party examined refuses to deliver such report, the court on motion and notice may make an order requiring delivery on such terms as are just, and if a physician fails or refuses to make such a report the court may exclude his testimony if offered at the trial. (3a)

Section 4. Waiver of privilege. — By requesting and obtaining a report of the examination so ordered or by taking the deposition of the examiner, the party examined waives any privilege he may have in that action or any other involving the same controversy, regarding the testimony of every other person who has examined or may thereafter examine him in respect of the same mental or physical examination. (4)

RULE 29

Refusal to Comply with Modes of Discovery

Section 1. Refusal to answer. — If a party or other deponent refuses to answer any question upon oral examination, the examination may be completed on other matters or adjourned as the proponent of the question may prefer. The proponent may thereafter apply to the proper court of the place where the deposition is being taken, for an order to compel an answer. The same procedure may be availed of when a party or a witness refuses to answer any interrogatory submitted under Rules 23 or 25.

If the application is granted, the court shall require the refusing party or deponent to answer the question or interrogatory and if it also finds that the refusal to answer was without substantial justification, it may require the refusing party or deponent or the counsel advising the refusal, or both of them, to pay the proponent the amount of the reasonable expenses incurred in obtaining the order, including attorney's fees.

If the application is denied and the court finds that it was filed without substantial justification, the court may require the proponent or the counsel advising the filing of the application, or both of them, to pay to the refusing party or deponent the amount of the reasonable expenses incurred in opposing the application, including attorney's fees. (1a)

Section 2. Contempt of court. — If a party or other witness refuses to be sworn or refuses to answer any question after being directed to do so by the court of the place in which the deposition is being taken, the refusal may be considered a contempt of that court. (2a)

Section 3. Other consequences. — If any party or an officer or managing agent of a party refuses to obey an order made under section 1 of this Rule requiring him to answer designated questions, or an order under Rule 27 to produce any document or other thing for inspection, copying, or photographing or to permit it to be done, or to permit entry upon land or other property or an order made under Rule 28 requiring him to submit to a physical or mental examination, the court may make such orders in regard to the refusal as are just, and among others the following:

(a) An order that the matters regarding which the questions were asked, or the character or description of the thing or land, or the contents of the paper, or the physical or mental condition of the party, or any other designated facts shall be taken to be established for the purposes of the action in accordance with the claim of the party obtaining the order;

(b) An order refusing to allow the disobedient party to support or oppose designated claims or defenses or prohibiting him from introducing in evidence designated documents or things or items of testimony, or from introducing evidence of physical or mental condition;

(c) An order striking out pleadings or parts thereof, or staying further proceedings until the order is obeyed, or dismissing the action or proceeding or any part thereof, or rendering a judgment by default against the disobedient party; and

(d) In lieu of any of the foregoing orders or in addition thereto, an order directing the arrest of any party or agent of a party for disobeying any of such orders except an order to submit to a physical or mental examination. (3a)

Section 4. Expenses on refusal to admit. — If a party after being served with a request under Rule 26 to admit the genuineness of any document or the truth of any matter of fact serves a sworn denial thereof and if the party requesting the admissions thereafter proves the genuineness of such document or the truth of any such matter of fact, he may apply to the court for an order requiring the other party to pay him the reasonable expenses incurred in making such proof, including attorney's fees. Unless the court finds that there were good reasons for the denial or that admissions sought were of no substantial importance, such order shall be issued. (4a)

Section 5. Failure of party to attend or serve answers. — If a party or an officer or managing agent of a party wilfully fails to appear before the officer who is to take his deposition, after being served with a proper notice, or fails to serve answers to interrogatories submitted under Rule 25 after proper service of such interrogatories, the court on motion and notice, may strike out all or any part of any pleading of that party, or dismiss the action or proceeding or any part thereof, or enter a judgment by default against that party, and in its discretion, order him to pay reasonable expenses incurred by the other, including attorney's fees. (5)

Section 6. Expenses against the Republic of the Philippines. — Expenses and attorney's fees are not to be imposed upon the Republic of the Philippines under this Rule. (6)

RULE 30

Trial

Section 1. Notice of Trial. — Upon entry of a case in the trial calendar, the clerk shall notify the parties of the date of its trial in such manner as shall ensure his receipt of that notice at least five (5) days before such date. (2a, R22)

Section 2. Adjournments and postponements. — A court may adjourn a trial from day to day, and to any stated time, as the expeditious and convenient transaction of business may require, but shall have no power to adjourn a trial for a longer period than one month for each adjournment nor more than three months in all, except when authorized in writing by the Court Administrator, Supreme Court. (3a, R22)

Section 3. Requisites of motion to postpone trial for absence of evidence. — A motion to postpone a trial on the ground of absence of evidence can be granted only upon affidavit showing the materiality or relevancy of such evidence, and that due diligence has been used to procure it. But if the adverse party admits the facts to be given in evidence, even if he objects or reserves the right to object to their admissibility, the trial shall not be postponed. (4a, R22; Bar Matter No. 803, 21 July 1998)

Section 4. Requisites of motion to postpone trial for illness of party or counsel. — A motion to postpone a trial on the ground of illness of a party or counsel may be granted if it appears upon affidavit or sworn certification that the presence of such party or counsel at the trial is indispensable and that the character of his illness is such as to render his non-attendance excusable. (5a, R22)

Section 5. Order of trial. — Subject to the provisions of section 2 of Rule 31, and unless the court for special reasons otherwise directs, the trial shall be limited to the issues stated in the pre-trial order and shall proceed as follows:

(a) The plaintiff shall adduce evidence in support of his complaint;

(b) The defendant shall then adduce evidence in support of his defense, counterclaim, cross-claim and third-party complaints;

(c) The third-party defendant if any, shall adduce evidence of his defense, counterclaim, cross-claim and fourth-party complaint;

(d) The fourth-party, and so forth, if any, shall adduce evidence of the material facts pleaded by them;

(e) The parties against whom any counterclaim or cross-claim has been pleaded, shall adduce evidence in support of their defense, in the order to be prescribed by the court;

(f) The parties may then respectively adduce rebutting evidence only, unless the court, for good reasons and in the furtherance of justice, permits them to adduce evidence upon their original case; and

(g) Upon admission of the evidence, the case shall be deemed submitted for decision, unless the court directs the parties to argue or to submit their respective memoranda or any further pleadings.

If several defendants or third-party defendants, and so forth, having separate defenses appear by different counsel, the court shall determine the relative order of presentation of their evidence. (1a, R30)

Section 6. Agreed statement of facts. — The parties to any action may agree, in writing, upon the facts involved in the litigation, and submit the case for judgment on the facts agreed upon, without the introduction of evidence.

If the parties agree only on some of the facts in issue, the trial shall be held as to the disputed facts in such order as the court shall prescribe. (2a, R30)

Section 7. Statement of judge. — During the hearing or trial of a case any statement made by the judge with reference to the case, or to any of the parties, witnesses or counsel, shall be made of record in the stenographic notes. (3a, R30)

Section 8. Suspension of actions. — The suspension of actions shall be governed by the provisions of the Civil Code. (n)

Section 9. Judge to receive evidence; delegation to clerk of court. — The judge of the court where the case is pending shall personally receive the evidence to be adduced by the parties. However, in default or ex parte hearings, and in any case where the parties agree in writing, the court may delegate the reception of evidence to its clerk of court who is a member of the bar. The clerk of court shall have no power to rule on objections to any question or to the admission of exhibits, which objections shall be resolved by the court upon submission of his report and the transcripts within ten (10) days from termination of the hearing. (n)

RULE 31

Consolidation or Severance

Section 1. Consolidation. — When actions involving a common question of law or fact are pending before the court, it may order a joint hearing or trial of any or all the matters in issue in the actions; it may order all the actions consolidated, and it may make such orders concerning proceedings therein as may tend to avoid unnecessary costs or delay. (1)

Section 2. Separate trials. — The court, in furtherance of convenience or to avoid prejudice, may order a separate trial of any claim, cross-claim, counterclaim, or third-party complaint, or of any separate issue or of any number of claims, cross-claims, counterclaims, third-party complaints or issues. (2a)

RULE 32

Trial by Commissioner

Section 1. Reference by consent. — By written consent of both parties, the court may order any or all of the issues in a case to be referred to a commissioner to be agreed upon by the parties or to be appointed by the court. As used in these Rules, the word "commissioner" includes a referee, an auditor and an examiner. (1a, R33)

Section 2. Reference ordered on motion. — When the parties do not consent, the court may, upon the application of either or of its own motion, direct a reference to a commissioner in the following cases:

(a) When the trial of an issue of fact requires the examination of a long account on either side, in which case the commissioner may be directed to hear and report upon the whole issue or any specific question involved therein;

(b) When the taking of an account is necessary for the information of the court before judgment, or for carrying a judgment or order into effect.

(c) When a question of fact, other than upon the pleadings, arises upon motion or otherwise, in any stage of a case, or for carrying a judgment or order into effect. (2a, R33)

Section 3. Order of reference; powers of the commissioner. — When a reference is made, the clerk shall forthwith furnish the commissioner with a copy of the order of reference. The order may specify or limit the powers of the commissioner, and may direct him to report only upon particular issues, or to do or perform particular acts, or to receive and report evidence only and may fix the date for beginning and closing the hearings and for the filing of his report. Subject to other specifications and limitations stated in the order, the commissioner has and shall exercise the power to regulate the proceedings in every hearing before him and to do all acts and take all measures necessary or proper for the efficient performance of his duties under the order. He may issue subpoenas and subpoenas duces tecum, swear witnesses, and unless otherwise provided in the order of reference, he may rule upon the admissibility of evidence. The trial or hearing before him shall proceed in all respects as it would if held before the court. (3a, R33)

Section 4. Oath of commissioner. — Before entering upon his duties the commissioner shall be sworn to a faithful and honest performance thereof. (14, R33)

Section 5. Proceedings before commissioner. — Upon receipt of the order of reference and unless otherwise provided therein, the commissioner shall forthwith set a time and place for the first meeting of the parties or their counsel to be held within ten (10) days after the date of the order of reference and shall notify the parties or their counsel. (5a, R33)

Section 6. Failure of parties to appear before commissioner. — If a party fails to appear at the time and place appointed, the commissioner may proceed ex parte or, in his discretion, adjourn the proceedings to a future day, giving notice to the absent party or his counsel of the adjournment. (6a, R33)

Section 7. Refusal of witness. — The refusal of a witness to obey a subpoena issued by the commissioner or to give evidence before him, shall be deemed a contempt of the court which appointed the commissioner. (7a R33)

Section 8. Commissioner shall avoid delays. — It is the duty of the commissioner to proceed with all reasonable diligence. Either party, on notice to the parties and commissioner, may apply to the court for an order requiring the commissioner to expedite the proceedings and to make his report. (8a, R33)

Section 9. Report of commissioner. — Upon the completion of the trial or hearing or proceeding before the commissioner, he shall file with the court his report in writing upon the matters submitted to him by the order of reference. When his powers are not specified or limited, he shall set forth his findings of fact and conclusions of law in his report. He shall attach thereto all exhibits, affidavits, depositions, papers and the transcript, if any, of the testimonial evidence presented before him. (9a, R33)

Section 10. Notice to parties of the filing of report. — Upon the filing of the report, the parties shall be notified by the clerk, and they shall be allowed ten (10) days within which to signify grounds of objections to the findings of the report, if they so desire. Objections to the report based upon grounds which were available to the parties during the proceedings before the commissioner, other than objections to the findings and conclusions therein, set forth, shall not be considered by the court unless they were made before the commissioner. (10, R33)

Section 11. Hearing upon report. — Upon the expiration of the period of ten (10) days referred to in the preceding section, the report shall be set for hearing, after which the court shall issue an order adopting, modifying, or rejecting the report in whole or in part, or recommitting it with instructions, or requiring the parties to present further evidence before the commissioner or the court. (11a, R33)

Section 12. Stipulations as to findings. — When the parties stipulate that a commissioner's findings of fact shall be final, only questions of law shall thereafter be considered. (12a, R33)

Section 13. Compensation of commissioner. — The court shall allow the commissioner such reasonable compensation as the circumstances of the case warrant, to be taxed as costs against the defeated party, or apportioned, as justice requires. (13, R33)

RULE 33

Demurrer to Evidence

Section 1. Demurrer to evidence. — After the plaintiff has completed the presentation of his evidence, the defendant may move for dismissal on the ground that upon the facts and the law the plaintiff has shown no right to relief. If his motion is denied he shall have the right to present evidence. If the motion is granted but on appeal the order of dismissal is reversed he shall be deemed to have waived the right to present evidence. (1a, R35)

RULE 34

Judgment on the Pleadings

Section 1. Judgment on the pleadings. — Where an answer fails to tender an issue, or otherwise admits the material allegations of the adverse party's pleading, the court may; on motion of that party, direct judgment on such pleading. However, in actions for declaration of nullity or annulment of marriage or for legal separation, the material facts alleged in the complaint shall always be proved. (1a, R19)

RULE 35

Summary Judgments

Section 1. Summary judgment for claimant. — A party seeking to recover upon a claim, counterclaim, or cross-claim or to obtain a declaratory relief may, at any time after the pleading in answer thereto has been served, move with supporting affidavits, depositions or admissions for a summary judgment in his favor upon all or any part thereof. (1a, R34)

Section 2. Summary judgment for defending party. — A party against whom a claim, counterclaim, or cross-claim is asserted or a declaratory relief is sought may, at any time, move with supporting affidavits, depositions or admissions for a summary judgment in his favor as to all or any part thereof. (2a, R34)

Section 3. Motion and proceedings thereon. — The motion shall be served at least ten (10) days before the time specified for the hearing. The adverse party may serve opposing affidavits, depositions, or admissions at least three (3) days before the hearing. After the hearing, the judgment sought shall be rendered forthwith if the pleadings, supporting affidavits, depositions, and admissions on file, show that, except as to the amount of damages, there is no genuine issue as to any material fact and that the moving party is entitled to a judgment as a matter of law. (3a, R34)

Section 4. Case not fully adjudicated on motion. — If on motion under this Rule, judgment is not rendered upon the whole case or for all the reliefs sought and a trial is necessary, the court at the hearing of the motion, by examining the pleadings and the evidence before it and by interrogating counsel shall ascertain what material facts exist without substantial controversy and what are actually and in good faith controverted. It shall thereupon make an order specifying the facts that appear without substantial controversy, including the extent to which the amount of damages or other relief is not in controversy, and directing such further proceedings in the action as are just. The facts so specified shall be deemed established, and the trial shall be conducted on the controverted facts accordingly. (4a, R34)

Section 5. Form of affidavits and supporting papers. — Supporting and opposing affidavits shall be made on personal knowledge, shall set forth such facts as would be admissible in evidence, and shall show affirmatively that the affiant is competent to testify to the matters stated therein. Certified true copies of all papers or parts thereof referred to in the affidavit shall be attached thereto or served therewith. (5a, R34)

Section 6. Affidavits in bad faith. — Should it appear to its satisfaction at any time that any of the affidavits presented pursuant to this Rule are presented in bad faith, or solely for the purpose of delay, the court shall forthwith order the offending party or counsel to pay to the other party the amount of the reasonable expenses which the filing of the affidavits caused him to incur including attorney's fees, it may, after hearing further adjudge the offending party or counsel guilty of contempt. (6a, R34)

RULE 36

Judgments, Final Orders and Entry Thereof

Section 1. Rendition of judgments and final orders. — A judgment or final order determining the merits of the case shall be in writing personally and directly prepared by the judge, stating clearly and distinctly the facts and the law on which it is based, signed by him, and filed with the clerk of the court. (1a)

Section 2. Entry of judgments and final orders. — If no appeal or motion for new trial or reconsideration is filed within the time provided in these Rules, the judgment or final order shall forthwith be entered by the clerk in the book of entries of judgments. The date of finality of the judgment or final order shall be deemed to be the date of its entry. The record shall contain the dispositive part of the judgment or final order and shall be signed by the clerk, within a certificate that such judgment or final order has become final and executory. (2a, 10, R51)

Section 3. Judgment for or against one or more of several parties. — Judgment may be given for or against one or more of several plaintiffs and for or against one or more of several defendants. When justice so demands, the court may require the parties on each side to file adversary pleadings as between themselves and determine their ultimate rights and obligations. (3)

Section 4. Several judgments. — In an action against several defendants, the court may, when a several judgment is proper, render judgment against one or more of them, leaving the action to proceed against the others. (4)

Section 5. Separate judgments. — When more than one claim for relief is presented in an action, the court, at any stage, upon a determination of the issues material to a particular claim and all counterclaims arising out of the transaction or occurrence which is the subject matter of the claim, may render a separate judgment disposing of such claim. The judgment shall terminate the action with respect to the claim so disposed of and the action shall proceed as to the remaining claims. In case a separate judgment is rendered the court by order may stay its enforcement until the rendition of a subsequent judgment or judgments and may prescribe such conditions as may be necessary to secure the benefit thereof to the party in whose favor the judgment is rendered. (5a)

Section 6. Judgment against entity without juridical personality. — When judgment is rendered against two or more persons sued as an entity without juridical personality, the judgment shall set out their individual or proper names, if known. (6a)

RULE 37

New Trial or Reconsiderations

Section 1. Grounds of and period for filing motion for new trial or reconsideration. — Within the period for taking an appeal, the aggrieved party may move the trial court to set aside the judgment or final order and grant a new trial for one or more of the following causes materially affecting the substantial rights of said party:

(a) Fraud, accident, mistake or excusable negligence which ordinary prudence could not have guarded against and by reason of which such aggrieved party has probably been impaired in his rights; or

(b) Newly discovered evidence, which he could not, with reasonable diligence, have discovered and produced at the trial, and which if presented would probably alter the result.

Within the same period, the aggrieved party may also move for reconsideration upon the grounds that the damages awarded are excessive, that the evidence is insufficient to justify the decision or final order, or that the decision or final order is contrary to law. (1a)

Section 2. Contents of motion for new trial or reconsideration and notice thereof. — The motion shall be made in writing stating the ground or grounds therefor, a written notice of which shall be served by the movant on the adverse party.

A motion for new trial shall be proved in the manner provided for proof of motion. A motion for the cause mentioned in paragraph (a) of the preceding section shall be supported by affidavits of merits which may be rebutted by affidavits. A motion for the cause mentioned in paragraph (b) shall be supported by affidavits of the witnesses by whom such evidence is expected to be given, or by duly authenticated documents which are proposed to be introduced in evidence.

A motion for reconsideration shall point out a specifically the findings or conclusions of the judgment or final order which are not supported by the evidence or which are contrary to law making express reference to the testimonial or documentary evidence or to the provisions of law alleged to be contrary to such findings or conclusions.

A pro forma motion for new trial or reconsideration shall not toll the reglementary period of appeal. (2a)

Section 3. Action upon motion for new trial or reconsideration. — The trial court may set aside the judgment or final order and grant a new trial, upon such terms as may be just, or may deny the motion. If the court finds that excessive damages have been awarded or that the judgment or final order is contrary to the evidence or law, it may amend such judgment or final order accordingly. (3a)

Section 4. Resolution of motion. — A motion for new trial or reconsideration shall be resolved within thirty (30) days from the time it is submitted for resolution. (n)

Section 5. Second motion for new trial. — A motion for new trial shall include all grounds then available and those not so included shall be deemed waived. A second motion for new trial, based on a ground not existing nor available when the first motion was made, may be filed within the time herein provided excluding the time during which the first motion had been pending.

No party shall be allowed a second motion for reconsideration of a judgment or final order (4a, 4, IRG)

Section 6. Effect of granting of motion for new trial. — If a new trial is granted in accordance with the provisions of this Rules the original judgment or final order shall be vacated, and the action shall stand for trial de novo; but the recorded evidence taken upon the former trial, insofar as the same is material and competent to establish the issues, shall be used at the new trial without retaking the same. (5a)

Section 7. Partial new trial or reconsideration. — If the grounds for a motion under this Rule appear to the court to affect the issues as to only a part, or less than an of the matter in controversy, or only one, or less than all, of the parties to it, the court may order a new trial or grant reconsideration as to such issues if severable without interfering with the judgment or final order upon the rest. (6a)

Section 8. Effect of order for partial new trial. — When less than all of the issues are ordered retried, the court may either enter a judgment or final order as to the rest, or stay the enforcement of such judgment or final order until after the new trial. (7a)

Section 9. Remedy against order denying a motion for new trial or reconsideration. — An order denying a motion for new trial or reconsideration is not appealed, the remedy being an appeal from the judgment or final order. (n)

RULE 38

Relief from Judgments, Orders, or Other Proceedings

Section 1. Petition for relief from judgment, order, or other proceedings. — When a judgment or final order is entered, or any other proceeding is thereafter taken against a party in any court through fraud, accident, mistake, or excusable negligence, he may file a petition in such court and in the same case praying that the judgment, order or proceeding be set aside. (2a)

Section 2. Petition for relief from denial of appeal. — When a judgment or final order is rendered by any court in a case, and a party thereto, by fraud, accident, mistake, or excusable negligence, has been prevented from taking an appeal, he may file a petition in such court and in the same case praying that the appeal be given due course. (1a)

Section 3. Time for filing petition; contents and verification. — A petition provided for in either of the preceding sections of this Rule must be verified, filed within sixty (60) days after the petitioner learns of the judgment, final order, or other proceeding to be set aside, and not more than six (6) months after such judgment or final order was entered, or such proceeding was taken, and must be accompanied with affidavits showing the fraud, accident, mistake, or excusable negligence relied upon, and the facts constituting the petitioner's good and substantial cause of action or defense, as the case may be. (3)

Section 4. Order to file an answer. — If the petition is sufficient in form and substance to justify relief, the court in which it is filed, shall issue an order requiring the adverse parties to answer the same within fifteen (15) days from the receipt thereof. The order shall be served in such manner as the court may direct, together with copies of the petition and the accompanying affidavits. (4a)

Section 5. Preliminary injunction pending proceedings. — The court in which the petition is filed may grant such preliminary injunction as may be necessary for the preservation of the rights of the parties, upon the filing by the petitioner of a bond in favor of the adverse party, conditioned that if the petition is dismissed or the petitioner fails on the trial of the case upon its merits, he will pay the adverse party all damages and costs that may be awarded to him by reason of the issuance of such injunction or the other proceedings following the petition, but such injunction shall not operate to discharge or extinguish any lien which the adverse party may have acquired upon, the property, of the petitioner. (5a)

Section 6. Proceedings after answer is filed. — After the filing of the answer or the expiration of the period therefor, the court shall hear the petition and if after such hearing, it finds that the allegations thereof are not true, the petition shall be dismissed; but if it finds said allegations to be true, it shall set aside the judgment or final order or other proceeding complained of upon such terms as may be just. Thereafter the case shall stand as if such judgment, final order or other proceeding had never been rendered, issued or taken. The court shall then proceed to hear and determine the case as if a timely motion for a new trial or reconsideration had been granted by it. (6a)

Section 7. Procedure where the denial of an appeal is set aside. — Where the denial of an appeal is set aside, the lower court shall be required to give due course to the appeal and to elevate the record of the appealed case as if a timely and proper appeal had been made. (7a)

RULE 39

Execution, Satisfaction and Effect of Judgments

Section 1. Execution upon judgments or final orders. — Execution shall issue as a matter of right, or motion, upon a judgment or order that disposes of the action or proceeding upon the expiration of the period to appeal therefrom if no appeal has been duly perfected. (1a)

If the appeal has been duly perfected and finally resolved, the execution may forthwith be applied for in the court of origin, on motion of the judgment obligee, submitting therewith certified true copies of the judgment or judgments or final order or orders sought to be enforced and of the entry thereof, with notice to the adverse party.

The appellate court may, on motion in the same case, when the interest of justice so requires, direct the court of origin to issue the writ of execution. (n)

Section 2. Discretionary execution. —

(a) Execution of a judgment or final order pending appeal. — On motion of the prevailing party with notice to the adverse party filed in the trial court while it has jurisdiction over the case and is in possession of either the original record or the record on appeal, as the case may be, at the time of the filing of such motion, said court may, in its discretion, order execution of a judgment or final order even before the expiration of the period to appeal.

After the trial court has lost jurisdiction the motion for execution pending appeal may be filed in the appellate court.

Discretionary execution may only issue upon good reasons to be stated in a special order after due hearing.

(b) Execution of several, separate or partial judgments. — A several, separate or partial judgment may be executed under the same terms and conditions as execution of a judgment or final order pending appeal. (2a)

Section 3. Stay of discretionary execution. — Discretionary execution issued under the preceding section may be stayed upon approval by the proper court of a sufficient supersedeas bond filed by the party against whom it is directed, conditioned upon the performance of the judgment or order allowed to be executed in case it shall be finally sustained in whole or in part. The bond thus given may be proceeded against on motion with notice to the surety. (3a )

Section 4. Judgments not stayed by appeal. — Judgments in actions for injunction, receivership, accounting and support, and such other judgments as are now or may hereafter be declared to be immediately executory, shall be enforceable after their rendition and shall not, be stayed by an appeal taken therefrom, unless otherwise ordered by the trial court. On appeal therefrom, the appellate court in its discretion may make an order suspending, modifying, restoring or granting the injunction, receivership, accounting, or award of support.

The stay of execution shall be upon such terms as to bond or otherwise as may be considered proper for the security or protection of the rights of the adverse party. (4a)

Section 5. Effect of reversal of executed judgment. — Where the executed judgment is reversed totally or partially, or annulled, on appeal or otherwise, the trial court may, on motion, issue such orders of restitution or reparation of damages as equity and justice may warrant under the circumstances. (5a)

Section 6. Execution by motion or by independent action. — A final and executory judgment or order may be executed on motion within five (5) years from the date of its entry. After the lapse of such time, and before it is barred by the statute of limitations, a judgment may be enforced by action. The revived judgment may also be enforced by motion within five (5) years from the date of its entry and thereafter by action before it is barred by the statute of limitations. (6a)

Section 7. Execution in case of death of party. — In case of the death of a party, execution may issue or be enforced in the following manner:

(a) In case of the death of the judgment obligee, upon the application of his executor or administrator, or successor in interest;

(b) In case of the death of the judgment obligor, against his executor or administrator or successor in interest, if the judgment be for the recovery of real or personal property, or the enforcement of a lien thereon;

(c) In case of the death of the judgment obligor, after execution is actually levied upon any of his property, the same may be sold for the satisfaction of the judgment obligation, and the officer making the sale shall account to the corresponding executor or administrator for any surplus in his hands. (7a)

Section 8. Issuance, form and contents of a writ of execution. — The writ of execution shall: (1) issue in the name of the Republic of the Philippines from the court which granted the motion; (2) state the name of the court, the case number and title, the dispositive part of the subject judgment or order; and (3) require the sheriff or other proper officer to whom it is directed to enforce the writ according to its terms, in the manner hereinafter provided:

(a) If the execution be against the property of the judgment obligor, to satisfy the judgment, with interest, out of the real or personal property of such judgment obligor;

(b) If it be against real or personal property in the hands of personal representatives, heirs, devisees, legatees, tenants, or trustees of the judgment obligor, to satisfy the judgment, with interest, out of such property;

(c) If it be for the sale of real or personal property to sell such property describing it, and apply the proceeds in conformity with the judgment, the material parts of which shall be recited in the writ of execution;

(d) If it be for the delivery of the possession of real or personal property, to deliver the possession of the same, describing it, to the party entitled thereto, and to satisfy any costs, damages, rents, or profits covered by the judgment out of the personal property of the person against whom it was rendered, and if sufficient personal property cannot be found, then out of the real property; and

(e) In all cases, the writ of execution shall specifically state the amount of the interest, costs, damages, rents, or profits due as of the date of the issuance of the writ, aside from the principal obligation under the judgment. For this purpose, the motion for execution shall specify the amounts of the foregoing reliefs sought by the movant.(8a)

Section 9. Execution of judgments for money, how enforced. —

(a) Immediate payment on demand. — The officer shall enforce an execution of a judgment for money by demanding from the judgment obligor the immediate payment of the full amount stated in the writ of execution and all lawful fees. The judgment obligor shall pay in cash, certified bank check payable to the judgment obligee, or any other form of payment acceptable to the latter, the amount of the judgment debt under proper receipt directly to the judgment obligee or his authorized representative if present at the time of payment. The lawful fees shall be handed under proper receipt to the executing sheriff who shall turn over the said amount within the same day to the clerk of court of the court that issued the writ.

If the judgment obligee or his authorized representative is not present to receive payment, the judgment obligor shall deliver the aforesaid payment to the executing sheriff. The latter shall turn over all the amounts coming into his possession within the same day to the clerk of court of the court that issued the writ, or if the same is not practicable, deposit said amounts to a fiduciary account in the nearest government depository bank of the Regional Trial Court of the locality.

The clerk of said court shall thereafter arrange for the remittance of the deposit to the account of the court that issued the writ whose clerk of court shall then deliver said payment to the judgment obligee in satisfaction of the judgment. The excess, if any, shall be delivered to the judgment obligor while the lawful fees shall be retained by the clerk of court for disposition as provided by law. In no case shall the executing sheriff demand that any payment by check be made payable to him.

(b) Satisfaction by levy. — If the judgment obligor cannot pay all or part of the obligation in cash, certified bank check or other mode of payment acceptable to the judgment obligee, the officer shall levy upon the properties of the judgment obligor of every kind and nature whatsoever which may be disposed, of for value and not otherwise exempt from execution giving the latter the option to immediately choose which property or part thereof may be levied upon, sufficient to satisfy the judgment. If the judgment obligor does not exercise the option, the officer shall first levy on the personal properties, if any, and then on the real properties if the personal properties are insufficient to answer for the judgment.

The sheriff shall sell only a sufficient portion of the personal or real property of the judgment obligor which has been levied upon.

When there is more property of the judgment obligor than is sufficient to satisfy the judgment and lawful fees, he must sell only so much of the personal or real property as is sufficient to satisfy the judgment and lawful fees.

Real property, stocks, shares, debts, credits, and other personal property, or any interest in either real or personal property, may be levied upon in like manner and with like effect as under a writ of attachment.

(c) Garnishment of debts and credits. — The officer may levy on debts due the judgment obligor and other credits, including bank deposits, financial interests, royalties, commissions and other personal property not capable of manual delivery in the possession or control of third parties. Levy shall be made by serving notice upon the person owing such debts or having in his possession or control such credits to which the judgment obligor is entitled. The garnishment shall cover only such amount as will satisfy the judgment and all lawful fees.

The garnishee shall make a written report to the court within five (5) days from service of the notice of garnishment stating whether or not the judgment obligor has sufficient funds or credits to satisfy the amount of the judgment. If not, the report shall state how much funds or credits the garnishee holds for the judgment obligor. The garnished amount in cash, or certified bank check issued in the name of the judgment obligee, shall be delivered directly to the judgment obligee within ten (10) working days from service of notice on said garnishee requiring such delivery, except the lawful fees which shall be paid directly to the court.

In the event there are two or more garnishees holding deposits or credits sufficient to satisfy the judgment, the judgment obligor, if available, shall have the right to indicate the garnishee or garnishees who shall be required to deliver the amount due, otherwise, the choice shall be made by the judgment obligee.

The executing sheriff shall observe the same procedure under paragraph (a) with respect to delivery of payment to the judgment obligee. (8a, 15a)

Section 10. Execution of judgments for specific act. —

(a) Conveyance, delivery of deeds, or other specific acts; vesting title. — If a judgment directs a party to execute a conveyance of land or personal property, or to deliver deeds or other documents, or to perform, any other specific act in connection therewith, and the party fails to comply within the time specified, the court may direct the act to be done at the cost of the disobedient party by some other person appointed by the court and the act when so done shall have like effect as if done by the party. If real or personal property is situated within the Philippines, the court in lieu of directing a conveyance thereof may by an order divest the title of any party and vest it in others, which shall have the force and effect of a conveyance executed in due form of law. (10a)

(b) Sale of real or personal property. — If the judgment be for the sale of real or personal property, to sell such property, describing it, and apply the proceeds in conformity with the judgment. (8[c]a)

(c) Delivery or restitution of real property. — The officer shall demand of the person against whom the judgment for the delivery or restitution of real property is rendered and all persons claiming rights under him to peaceably vacate the property within three (3) working days, and restore possession thereof to the judgment obligee, otherwise, the officer shall oust all such persons therefrom with the assistance, if necessary, of appropriate peace officers, and employing such means as may be reasonably necessary to retake possession, and place the judgment obligee in possession of such property. Any costs, damages, rents or profits awarded by the judgment shall be satisfied in the same manner as a judgment for money. (13a)

(d) Removal of improvements on property subject of execution. — When the property subject of the execution contains improvements constructed or planted by the judgment obligor or his agent, the officer shall not destroy, demolish or remove said improvements except upon special order of the court, issued upon motion of the judgment obligee after the hearing and after the former has failed to remove the same within a reasonable time fixed by the court. (14a)

(e) Delivery of personal property. — In judgment for the delivery of personal property, the officer shall take possession of the same and forthwith deliver it to the party entitled thereto and satisfy any judgment for money as therein provided. (8a)

Section 11. Execution of special judgments. — When a judgment requires the performance of any act other than those mentioned in the two preceding sections, a certified copy of the judgment shall be attached to the writ of execution and shall be served by the officer upon the party against whom the same is rendered, or upon any other person required thereby, or by law, to obey the same, and such party or person may be punished for contempt if he disobeys such judgment. (9a)

Section 12. Effect of levy on execution as to third person. — The levy on execution shall create a lien in favor of the judgment obligee over the right, title and interest of the judgment obligor in such property at the time of the levy, subject to liens and encumbrances then existing. (16a)

Section 13. Property exempt from execution. — Except as otherwise expressly provided by law, the following property, and no other, shall be exempt from execution:

(a) The judgment obligor's family home as provided by law, or the homestead in which he resides, and land necessarily used in connection therewith;

(b) Ordinary tools and implements personally used by him in his trade, employment, or livelihood;

(c) Three horses, or three cows, or three carabaos, or other beasts of burden, such as the judgment obligor may select necessarily used by him in his ordinary occupation;

(d) His necessary clothing and articles for ordinary personal use, excluding jewelry;

(e) Household furniture and utensils necessary for housekeeping, and used for that purpose by the judgment obligor and his family, such as the judgment obligor may select, of a value not exceeding one hundred thousand pesos;

(f) Provisions for individual or family use sufficient for four months;

(g) The professional libraries and equipment of judges, lawyers, physicians, pharmacists, dentists, engineers, surveyors, clergymen, teachers, and other professionals, not exceeding three hundred thousand pesos in value;

(h) One fishing boat and accessories not exceeding the total value of one hundred thousand pesos owned by a fisherman and by the lawful use of which he earns his livelihood;

(i) So much of the salaries, wages, or earnings of the judgment obligor for his personal services within the four months preceding the levy as are necessary for the support of his family;

(j) Lettered gravestones;

(k) Monies, benefits, privileges, or annuities accruing or in any manner growing out of any life insurance;

(l) The right to receive legal support, or money or property obtained as such support, or any pension or gratuity from the Government;

(m) Properties specially exempted by law.

But no article or species of property mentioned in this section shall be exempt from execution issued upon a judgment recovered for its price or upon a judgment of foreclosure of a mortgage thereon. (12a)

Section 14. Return of writ of execution. — The writ of execution shall be returnable to the court issuing it immediately after the judgment has been satisfied in part or in full. If the judgment cannot be satisfied in full within thirty (30) days after his receipt of the writ, the officer shall report to the court and state the reason therefor. Such writ shall continue in effect during the period within which the judgment may be enforced by motion. The officer shall make a report to the court every thirty (30) days on the proceedings taken thereon until the judgment is satisfied in full, or its effectivity expires. The returns or periodic reports shall set forth the whole of the proceedings taken, and shall be filed with the court and copies thereof promptly furnished the parties. (11a)

Section 15. Notice of sale of property on execution. — Before the sale of property on execution, notice thereof must be given as follows:

(a) In case of perishable property, by posting written notice of the time and place of the sale in three (3) public places, preferably in conspicuous areas of the municipal or city hall, post office and public market in the municipality or city where the sale is to take place, for such time as may be reasonable, considering the character and condition of the property;

(b) In case of other personal property, by posting a similar notice in the three (3) public places above-mentioned for not less than five (5) days;

(c) In case of real property, by posting for twenty (20) days in the three (3) public places abovementioned a similar notice particularly describing the property and stating where the property is to be sold, and if the assessed value of the property exceeds fifty thousand (P50,000.00) pesos, by publishing a copy of the notice once a week for two (2) consecutive weeks in one newspaper selected by raffle, whether in English, Filipino, or any major regional language published, edited and circulated or, in the absence thereof, having general circulation in the province or city;

(d) In all cases, written notice of the sale shall be given to the judgment obligor, at least three (3) days before the sale, except as provided in paragraph (a) hereof where notice shall be given the same manner as personal service of pleadings and other papers as provided by section 6 of Rule 13.

The notice shall specify the place, date and exact time of the sale which should not be earlier than nine o'clock in the morning and not later than two o'clock in the afternoon. The place of the sale may be agreed upon by the parties. In the absence of such agreement, the sale of the property or personal property not capable of manual delivery shall be held in the office of the clerk of court of the Regional Trial Court or the Municipal Trial Court which issued the writ of or which was designated by the appellate court. In the case of personal property capable of manual delivery, the sale shall be held in the place where the property is located. (18a)

Section 16. Proceedings where property claimed by third person. — If the property levied on is claimed by any person other than the judgment obligor or his agent, and such person makes an affidavit of his title thereto or right to the possession thereof, stating the grounds of such right or title, and serves the same upon the officer making the levy and copy thereof, stating the grounds of such right or tittle, and a serves the same upon the officer making the levy and a copy thereof upon the judgment obligee, the officer shall not be bound to keep the property, unless such judgment obligee, on demand of the officer, files a bond approved by the court to indemnity the third-party claimant in a sum not less than the value of the property levied on. In case of disagreement as to such value, the same shall be determined by the court issuing the writ of execution. No claim for damages for the taking or keeping of the property may be enforced against the bond unless the action therefor is filed within one hundred twenty (120) days from the date of the filing of the bond.

The officer shall not be liable for damages for the taking or keeping of the property, to any third-party claimant if such bond is filed. Nothing herein contained shall prevent such claimant or any third person from vindicating his claim to the property in a separate action, or prevent the judgment obligee from claiming damages in the same or a separate action against a third-party claimant who filed a frivolous or plainly spurious claim.

When the writ of execution is issued in favor of the Republic of the Philippines, or any officer duly representing it, the filing of such bond shall not be required, and in case the sheriff or levying officer is sued for damages as a result of the levy, he shall be represented by the Solicitor General and if held liable therefor, the actual damages adjudged by the court shall be paid by the National Treasurer out of such funds as may be appropriated for the purpose. (17a)

Section 17. Penalty for selling without notice, or removing or defacing notice. — An officer selling without the notice prescribed by section 15 of this Rule shall be liable to pay punitive damages in the amount of five thousand (P5,000.00) pesos to any person injured thereby, in addition to his actual damages, both to be recovered by motion in the same action; and a person willfully removing or defacing the notice posted, if done before the sale, or before the satisfaction of the judgment if it be satisfied before the sale, shall be liable to pay five thousand (P5,000.00) pesos to any person injured by reason thereof, in addition to his actual damages, to be recovered by motion in the same action. (19a)

Section 18. No sale if judgment and costs paid. — At any time before the sale of property on execution, the judgment obligor may prevent the sale by paying the amount required by the execution and the costs that have been incurred therein. (20a)

Section 19. How property sold on execution; who may direct manner and order of sale. — All sales of property under execution must be made at public auction, to the highest bidder, to start at the exact time fixed in the notice. After sufficient property has been sold to satisfy the execution, no more shall be sold and any excess property or proceeds of the sale shall be promptly delivered to the judgment obligor or his authorized representative, unless otherwise directed by the judgment or order of the court. When the sale is of real property, consisting of several known lots, they must be sold separately; or, when a portion of such real property is claimed by a third person, he may require it to be sold separately. When the sale is of personal property capable of manual delivery, it must be sold within view of those attending the same and in such parcels as are likely to bring the highest price. The judgment obligor, if present at the sale, may direct the order in which property, real or personal shall be sold, when such property consists of several known lots or parcels which can be sold to advantage separately. Neither the officer conducting the execution sale, nor his deputies, can become a purchaser, nor be interested directly or indirectly in any purchase at such sale. (21a)

Section 20. Refusal of purchaser to pay. — If a purchaser refuses to pay the amount bid by him for property struck off to him at a sale under execution, the officer may again sell the property to the highest bidder and shall not be responsible for any loss occasioned thereby; but the court may order the refusing purchaser to pay into the court the amount of such loss, with costs, and may punish him for contempt if he disobeys the order. The amount of such payment shall be for the benefit of the person entitled to the proceeds of the execution, unless the execution has been fully satisfied, in which event such proceeds shall be for the benefit of the judgment obligor. The officer may thereafter reject any subsequent bid of such purchaser who refuses to pay. (22a)

Section 21. Judgment obligee as purchaser. — When the purchaser is the judgment obligee, and no third-party claim has been filed, he need not pay the amount of the bid if it does not exceed the amount of his judgment. If it does, he shall pay only the excess. (23a)

Section 22. Adjournment of sale. — By written consent of the judgment obligor and obligee, or their duly authorized representatives, the officer may adjourn the sale to any date and time agreed upon by them. Without such agreement, he may adjourn the sale from day to day if it becomes necessary to do so for lack of time to complete the sale on the day fixed in the notice or the day to which it was adjourned. (24a)

Section 23. Conveyance to purchaser of personal property capable of manual delivery. — When the purchaser of any personal property, capable of manual delivery, pays the purchase price, the officer making the sale must deliver the property to the purchaser and, if desired, execute and deliver to him a certificate of sale. The sale conveys to the purchaser all the rights which the judgment obligor had in such property as of the date of the levy on execution or preliminary attachment. (25a)

Section 24. Conveyance to purchaser of personal property not capable of manual delivery. — When the purchaser of any personal property, not capable of manual delivery, pays the purchase price, the officer making the sale must execute and deliver to the purchaser a certificate of sale. Such certificate conveys to the purchaser all the rights which the judgment obligor had in such property as of the date of the levy on execution or preliminary attachment. (26a)

Section 25. Conveyance of real property; certificate thereof given to purchaser and filed with registry of deeds. — Upon a sale of real property, the officer must give to the purchaser a certificate of sale containing:

(a) A particular description of the real property sold;

(b) The price paid for each distinct lot or parcel;

(c) The whole price paid by him;

(d) A statement that the right of redemption expires one (1) year from the date of the registration of the certificate of sale.

Such certificate must be registered in the registry of deeds of the place where the property is situated. (27 a)

Section 26. Certificate of sale where property claimed by third person. — When a property sold by virtue of a writ of execution has been claimed by a third person, the certificate of sale to be issued by the sheriff pursuant to sections 23, 24 and 25 of this Rule shall make express mention of the existence of such third-party claim. (28a)

Section 27. Who may redeem real property so sold. — Real property sold as provided in the last preceding section, or any part thereof sold separately, may be redeemed in the manner hereinafter provided, by the following persons:

(a) The judgment obligor; or his successor in interest in the whole or any part of the property;

(b) A creditor having a lien by virtue of an attachment, judgment or mortgage on the property sold, or on some part thereof, subsequent to the lien under which the property was sold. Such redeeming creditor is termed a redemptioner. (29a)

Section 28. Time and manner of, and amounts payable on, successive redemptions; notice to be given and filed. — The judgment obligor, or redemptioner, may redeem the property from the purchaser, at any time within one (1) year from the date of the registration of the certificate of sale, by paying the purchaser the amount of his purchase, with the per centum per month interest thereon in addition, up to the time of redemption, together with the amount of any assessments or taxes which the purchaser may have paid thereon after purchase, and interest on such last named amount at the same rate; and if the purchaser be also a creditor having a prior lien to that of the redemptioner, other than the judgment under which such purchase was made, the amount of such other lien, with interest.

Property so redeemed may again be redeemed within sixty (60) days after the last redemption upon payment of the sum paid on the last redemption, with two per centum thereon in addition and the amount of any assessments or taxes which the last redemptioner may have paid thereon after redemption by him, with interest on such last named amount, and in addition, the amount of any liens held by said last redemptioner prior to his own, with interest. The property may be again, and as often as a redemptioner is so disposed, redeemed from any previous redemptioner within sixty (60) days after the last redemption, on paying the sum paid on the last previous redemption, with two per centum thereon in addition, and the amounts of any assessments or taxes which the last previous redemptioner paid after the redemption thereon, with interest thereon, and the amount of any liens held by the last redemptioner prior to his own, with interest.

Written notice of any redemption must be given to the officer who made the sale and a duplicate filed with the registry of deeds of the place, and if any assessments or taxes are paid by the redemptioner or if he has or acquires any lien other than that upon which the redemption was made, notice thereof must in like manner be given to the officer and filed with the registry of deeds; if such notice be not filed, the property may be redeemed without paying such assessments, taxes, or liens. (30a)

Section 29. Effect of redemption by judgment obligor, and a certificate to be delivered and recorded thereupon; to whom payments on redemption made. — If the judgment obligor redeems he must make the same payments as are required to effect a redemption by a redemptioner, whereupon, no further redemption shall be allowed and he is restored to his estate. The person to whom the redemption payment is made must execute and deliver to him a certificate of redemption acknowledged before a notary public or other officer authorized to take acknowledgments of conveyances of real property. Such certificate must be filed and recorded in the registry of deeds of the place in which the property is situated and the registrar of deeds must note the record thereof on the margin of the record of the certificate of sale. The payments mentioned in this and the last preceding sections may be made to the purchaser or redemptioner, or for him to the officer who made the sale. (31a)

Section 30. Proof required of redemptioner. — A redemptioner must produce to the officer, or person from whom he seeks to redeem, and serve with his notice to the officer a copy of the judgment or final order under which he claims the right to redeem, certified by the clerk of the court wherein the judgment or final order is entered, or, if he redeems upon a mortgage or other lien, a memorandum of the record thereof, certified by the registrar of deeds, or an original or certified copy of any assignment necessary to establish his claim; and an affidavit executed by him or his agent, showing the amount then actually due on the lien. (32a)

Section 31. Manner of using premises pending redemption; waste restrained. — Until the expiration of the time allowed for redemption, the court may, as in other proper cases, restrain the commission of waste on the property by injunction, on the application of the purchaser or the judgment obligee, with or without notice; but it is not waste for a person in possession of the property at the time of the sale, or entitled to possession afterwards, during the period allowed for redemption, to continue to use it in the same manner in which it was previously used, or to use it in the ordinary course of husbandry; or to make the necessary repairs to buildings thereon while he occupies the property. (33a)

Section 32. Rents, earnings and income of property pending redemption. — The purchaser or a redemptioner shall not be entitled to receive the rents, earnings and income of the property sold on execution, or the value of the use and occupation thereof when such property is in the possession of a tenant. All rents, earnings and income derived from the property pending redemption shall belong to the judgment obligor until the expiration of his period of redemption. (34a)

Section 33. Deed and possession to be given at expiration of redemption period; by whom executed or given. — If no redemption be made within one (1) year from the date of the registration of the certificate of sale, the purchaser is entitled to a conveyance and possession of the property; or, if so redeemed whenever sixty (60) days have elapsed and no other redemption has been made, and notice thereof given, and the time for redemption has expired, the last redemptioner is entitled to the conveyance and possession; but in all cases the judgment obligor shall have the entire period of one (1) year from the date of the registration of the sale to redeem the property. The deed shall be executed by the officer making the sale or by his successor in office, and in the latter case shall have the same validity as though the officer making the sale had continued in office and executed it.

Upon the expiration of the right of redemption, the purchaser or redemptioner shall be substituted to and acquire all the rights, title, interest and claim of the judgment obligor to the property as of the time of the levy. The possession of the property shall be given to the purchaser or last redemptioner by the same officer unless a third party adversely to the judgment obligor. (35a)

Section 34. Recovery of price if sale not effective; revival of judgment. — If the purchaser of real property sold on execution, or his successor in interest, fails to recover the possession thereof, or is evicted therefrom, in consequence of irregularities in the proceedings concerning the sale, or because the judgment has been reversed or set aside, or because the property sold was exempt from execution, or because a third person has vindicated his claim to the property, he may on motion in the same action or in a separate action recover from the judgment obligee the price paid, with interest, or so much thereof as has not been delivered to the judgment obligor, or he may, on motion, have the original judgment revived in his name for the whole price with interest, or so much thereof as has been delivered to the judgment obligor. The judgment so revived shall have the same force and effect as an original judgment would have as of the date of the revival and no more. (36a)

Section 35. Right to contribution or reimbursement. — When property liable to an execution against several persons is sold thereon, and more than a due proportion of the judgment is satisfied out of the proceeds of the sale of the property of one of them, or one of them pays, without a sale, more than his proportion, he may compel a contribution from the others; and when a judgment is upon an obligation of one of them, as security for another, and the surety pays the amount, or any part thereof, either by sale of his property or before sale, he may compel repayment from the principal. (37a)

Section 36. Examination of judgment obligor when judgment unsatisfied. — When the return of a writ of execution issued against property of a judgment obligor, or any one of several obligors in the same judgment, shows that the judgment remains unsatisfied, in whole or in part, the judgment obligee, at any time after such return is made, shall be entitled to an order from the court which rendered the said judgment, requiring such judgment obligor to appear and be examined concerning his property and income before such court or before a commissioner appointed by it at a specified time and place; and proceedings may thereupon be had for the application of the property and income of the judgment obligor towards the satisfaction of the judgment. But no judgment obligor shall be so required to appear before a court or commissioner outside the province or city in which such obligor resides or is found. (38a)

Section 37. Examination of obligor of judgment obligor. — When the return of a writ of execution against the property of a judgment obligor shows that the judgment remain unsatisfied, in whole or in part, and upon proof to the satisfaction of the court which issued the writ, that a person, corporation, or other juridical entity has property of such judgment obligor or is indebted to him, the court may, by an order, require such person, corporation, or other juridical entity, or any officer, or member thereof, to appear before the court or a commissioner appointed by it, at a time and place within the province or city where such debtor resides or is found, and be examined concerning the same. The service of the order shall bind all credits due the judgment obligor and all money and property of the judgment obligor in the possession or in the control of such person corporation, or juridical entity from the time of service; and the court may also require notice of such proceedings to be given to any party to the action in such manner as it may deem proper. (39a)

Section 38. Enforcement of attendance and conduct of examination. — A party or other person may be compelled, by an order or subpoena, to attend before the court or commissioner to testify as provided in the two preceding sections, and upon failure to obey such order or subpoena or to be sworn, or to answer as a witness or to subscribe his deposition, may be punished for contempt as in other cases. Examinations shall not be unduly prolonged, but the proceedings may be adjourned from time to time, until they are completed. If the examination is before a commissioner, he must take it in writing and certify it to the court. All examinations and answers before a court commissioner must be under oath, and when a corporation or other juridical entity answers, it must be on the oath of an authorized officer or agent thereof. (40a)

Section 39. Obligor may pay execution against obligee. — After a writ of execution against property has been issued, a person indebted to the judgment obligor may pay to the sheriff holding the writ of execution the amount of his debt or so much thereof as may be necessary to satisfy the judgment, in the manner prescribed in section 9 of this Rule, and the sheriff's receipt shall be a sufficient discharge for the amount so paid or directed to be credited by the judgment obligee on the execution. (41a)

Section 40. Order for application of property and income to satisfaction of judgment. — The court may order any property of the judgment obligor, or money due him, not exempt from execution, in the hands of either himself or another person, or of a corporation or other juridical entity, to be applied to the satisfaction of the judgment, subject to any prior rights over such property.

If, upon investigation of his current income and expenses, it appears that the earnings of the judgment obligor for his personal services are more than necessary for the support of his family, the court may order that he pay the judgment in fixed monthly installments, and upon his failure to pay any such installment when due without good excuse, may punish him for indirect contempt. (42a)

Section 41. Appointment of receiver. — The court may appoint a receiver of the property of the judgment obligor; and it may also forbid a transfer or other disposition of, or any interference with, the property of the judgment obligor not exempt from execution. (43a)

Section 42. Sale of ascertainable interest of judgment obligor in real estate. — If it appears that the judgment obligor has an interest in real estate in the place in which proceedings are had, as mortgagor or mortgagee or other- wise, and his interest therein can be ascertained without controversy the receiver may be ordered to sell and convey such real estate or the interest of the obligor therein; and such sale shall be conducted in all respects in the same manner as is provided for the sale of real state upon execution, and the proceedings thereon shall be approved by the court before the execution of the deed. (34a)

Section 43. Proceedings when indebtedness denied or another person claims the property. — If it appears that a person or corporation, alleged to have property of the judgment obligor or to be indebted to him, claims an interest in the property adverse to him or denied the debt, the court may authorize, by an order made to that effect, the judgment obligee to institute an action against such person or corporation for the recovery of such interest or debt, forbid a transfer or other disposition of such interest or debt within one hundred twenty (120) days from notice of the order, and may punish disobedience of such order as for contempt. Such order may be modified or vacated at any time by the court which issued it, or by the court in which the action is brought, upon such terms as may be just. (45a)

Section 44. Entry of satisfaction of judgment by clerk of court. — Satisfaction of a judgment shall be entered by the clerk of court in the court docket, and in the execution book, upon the return of a writ of execution showing the full satisfaction of the judgment, or upon the filing of an admission to the satisfaction of the judgment executed and acknowledged in the same manner as a conveyance of real property by the judgment obligee or by his counsel unless a revocation of his authority is filed, or upon the endorsement of such admission by the judgment obligee or his counsel, on the face of the record of the judgment. (46a)

Section 45. Entry of satisfaction with or without admission. — Whenever a judgment is satisfied in fact, or otherwise than upon an execution on demand of the judgment obligor, the judgment obligee or his counsel must execute and acknowledge, or indorse an admission of the satisfaction as provided in the last preceding section, and after notice and upon motion the court may order either the judgment obligee or his counsel to do so, or may order the entry of satisfaction to be made without such admission. (47a)

Section 46. When principal bound by judgment against surety. — When a judgment is rendered against a party who stands as surety for another, the latter is also bound from the time that he has notice of the action or proceeding, and an opportunity at the surety's request to join in the defense. (48a)

Section 47. Effect of judgments or final orders. — The effect of a judgment or final order rendered by a court of the Philippines, having jurisdiction to pronounce the judgment or final order, may be as follows:

(a) In case of a judgment or final order against a specific thing, or in respect to the probate of a will, or the administration of the estate of a deceased person, or in respect to the personal, political, or legal condition or status of a particular person or his relationship to another, the judgment or final order is conclusive upon the title to the thing, the will or administration or the condition, status or relationship of the person, however, the probate of a will or granting of letters of administration shall only be prima facie evidence of the death of the testator or intestate;

(b) In other cases, the judgment or final order is, with respect to the matter directly adjudged or as to any other matter that could have been missed in relation thereto, conclusive between the parties and their successors in interest, by title subsequent to the commencement of the action or special proceeding, litigating for the same thing and under the same title and in the same capacity; and

(c) In any other litigation between the same parties or their successors in interest, that only is deemed to have been adjudged in a former judgment or final order which appears upon its face to have been so adjudged, or which was actually and necessarily included therein or necessary thereto. (49a)

Section 48. Effect of foreign judgments or final orders. — The effect of a judgment or final order of a tribunal of a foreign country, having jurisdiction to render the judgment or final order is as follows:

(a) In case of a judgment or final order upon a specific thing, the judgment or final order, is conclusive upon the title to the thing, and

(b) In case of a judgment or final order against a person, the judgment or final order is presumptive evidence of a right as between the parties and their successors in interest by a subsequent title.

In either case, the judgment or final order may be repelled by evidence of a want of jurisdiction, want of notice to the party, collusion, fraud, or clear mistake of law or fact. (50a)

Appeals

RULE 40

Appeal From Municipal Trial Courts to the Regional Trial Courts

Section 1. Where to appeal. — An appeal from a judgment or final order of a Municipal Trial Court may be taken to the Regional Trial Court exercising jurisdiction over the area to which the former pertains. The title of the case shall remain as it was in the court of origin, but the party appealing the case shall be further referred to as the appellant and the adverse party as the appellee. (a)

Section 2. When to appeal. — An appeal may be taken within fifteen (15) days after notice to the appellant of the judgment or final order appealed from. Where a record on appeal is required, the appellant shall file a notice of appeal and a record on appeal within thirty (30) days after notice of the judgment or final order.

The period of appeal shall be interrupted by a timely motion for new trial or reconsideration. No motion for extension of time to file a motion for new trial or reconsideration shall be allowed. (n)

Section 3. How to appeal. — The appeal is taken by filing a notice of appeal with the court that rendered the judgment or final order appealed from. The notice of appeal shall indicate the parties to the appeal, the judgment or final order or part thereof appealed from, and state the material dates showing the timeliness of the appeal.

A record on appeal shall be required only in special proceedings and in other cases of multiple or separate appeals.

The form and contents of the record on appeal shall be as provided in section 6, Rule 41.

Copies of the notice of appeal, and the record on appeal where required, shall be served on the adverse party. (n)

Section 4. Perfection of appeal; effect thereof. — The perfection of the appeal and the effect thereof shall be governed by the provisions of section 9, Rule 41. (n)

Section 5. Appellate court docket and other lawful fees. — Within the period for taking an appeal, the appellant shall pay to the clerk of the court which rendered the judgment or final order appealed from the full amount of the appellate court docket and other lawful fees. Proof of payment thereof shall be transmitted to the appellate court together with the original record or the record on appeal, as the case may be. (n)

Section 6. Duty of the clerk of court. — Within fifteen (15) days from the perfection of the appeal, the clerk of court or the branch clerk of court of the lower court shall transmit the original record or the record on appeal, together with the transcripts and exhibits, which he shall certify as complete, to the proper Regional Trial Court. A copy of his letter of transmittal of the records to the appellate court shall be furnished the parties. (n)

Section 7. Procedure in the Regional Trial Court. —

(a) Upon receipt of the complete record or the record on appeal, the clerk of court of the Regional Trial Court shall notify the parties of such fact.

(b) Within fifteen (15) days from such notice, it shall be the duty of the appellant to submit a memorandum which shall briefly discuss the errors imputed to the lower court, a copy of which shall be furnished by him to the adverse party. Within fifteen (15) days from receipt of the appellant's memorandum, the appellee may file his memorandum. Failure of the appellant to file a memorandum shall be a ground for dismissal of the appeal.

(c) Upon the filing of the memorandum of the appellee, or the expiration of the period to do so, the case shall be considered submitted for decision. The Regional Trial Court shall decide the case on the basis of the entire record of the proceedings had in the court of original and such memoranda as are filed. (n)

Section 8. Appeal from orders dismissing case without trial; lack of jurisdiction. — If an appeal is taken from an order of the lower court dismissing the case without a trial on the merits, the Regional Trial Court may affirm or reverse it, as the case may be. In case of affirmance and the ground of dismissal is lack of jurisdiction over the subject matter, the Regional Trial Court, if it has jurisdiction thereover, shall try the case on the merits as if the case was originally filed with it. In case of reversal, the case shall be remanded for further proceedings.

If the case was tried on the merits by the lower court without jurisdiction over the subject matter, the Regional Trial Court on appeal shall not dismiss the case if it has original jurisdiction thereof, but shall decide the case in accordance with the preceding section, without prejudice to the admission of amended pleadings and additional evidence in the interest of justice. (n)

Section 9. Applicability of Rule 41. — The other provisions of Rule 41 shall apply to appeals provided for herein insofar as they are not inconsistent with or may serve to supplement the provisions of this Rule. (n)

RULE 41

Appeal From The Regional Trial Courts

Section 1. Subject of appeal. — An appeal may be taken from a judgment or final order that completely disposes of the case, or of a particular matter therein when declared by these Rules to be appealable.

No appeal may be taken from:

(a) An order denying a motion for new trial or reconsideration;

(b) An order denying a petition for relief or any similar motion seeking relief from judgment;

(c) An interlocutory order;

(d) An order disallowing or dismissing an appeal;

(e) An order denying a motion to set aside a judgment by consent, confession or compromise on the ground of fraud, mistake or duress, or any other ground vitiating consent;

(f) An order of execution;

(g) A judgment or final order for or against one or more of several parties or in separate claims, counterclaims, cross-claims and third-party complaints, while the main case is pending, unless the court allows an appeal therefrom; and

(h) An order dismissing an action without prejudice.

In all the above instances where the judgment or final order is not appealable, the aggrieved party may file an appropriate special civil action under Rule 65. (n)

Section 2. Modes of appeal. —

(a) Ordinary appeal. — The appeal to the Court of Appeals in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court in the exercise of its original jurisdiction shall be taken by filing a notice of appeal with the court which rendered the judgment or final order appealed from and serving a copy thereof upon the adverse party. No record on appeal shall be required except in special proceedings and other cases of multiple or separate appeals where law on these Rules so require. In such cases, the record on appeal shall be filed and served in like manner.

(b) Petition for review. — The appeal to the Court of Appeals in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court in the exercise of its appellate jurisdiction shall be by petition for review in accordance with Rule 42.

(c) Appeal by certiorari. — In all cases where only questions of law are raised or involved, the appeal shall be to the Supreme Court by petition for review on certiorari in accordance with the Rule 45. (n)

Section 3. Period of ordinary appeal. — The appeal shall be taken within fifteen (15) days from notice of the judgment or final order appealed from. Where a record on appeal is required, the appellant shall file a notice of appeal and a record on appeal within thirty (30) days from notice of the judgment or final order.

The period of appeal shall be interrupted by a timely motion for new trial or reconsideration. No motion for extension of time to file a motion for new trial or reconsideration shall be allowed. (n)

Section 4. Appellate court docket and other lawful fees. — Within the period for taking an appeal, the appellant shall pay to the clerk of the court which rendered the judgment or final order appealed from, the full amount of the appellate court docket and other lawful fees. Proof of payment of said fees shall be transmitted to the appellate court together with the original record or the record on appeal. (n)

Section 5. Notice of appeal. — The notice of appeal shall indicate the parties to the appeal, specify the judgment or final order or part thereof appealed from, specify the court to which the appeal is being taken, and state the material dates showing the timeliness of the appeal. (4a)

Section 6. Record on appeal; form and contents thereof. — The full names of all the parties to the proceedings shall be stated in the caption of the record on appeal and it shall include the judgment or final order from which the appeal is taken and, in chronological order, copies of only such pleadings, petitions, motions and all interlocutory orders as are related to the appealed judgment or final order for the proper understanding of the issue involved, together with such data as will show that the appeal was perfected on time. If an issue of fact is to be raised on appeal, the record on appeal shall include by reference all the evidence, testimonial and documentary, taken upon the issue involved. The reference shall specify the documentary evidence by the exhibit numbers or letters by which it was identified when admitted or offered at the hearing, and the testimonial evidence by the names of the corresponding witnesses. If the whole testimonial and documentary evidence in the case is to be included, a statement to that effect will be sufficient without mentioning the names of the witnesses or the numbers or letters of exhibits. Every record on appeal exceeding twenty (20) pages must contain a subject index. (6a)

Section 7. Approval of record on appeal. — Upon the filing of the record on appeal for approval and if no objection is filed by the appellee within five (5) days from receipt of a copy thereof, the trial court may approve it as presented or upon its own motion or at the instance of the appellee, may direct its amendment by the inclusion of any omitted matters which are deemed essential to the determination of the issue of law or fact involved in the appeal. If the trial court orders the amendment of the record, the appellant, within the time limited in the order, or such extension thereof as may be granted, or if no time is fixed by the order within ten (10) days from receipt thereof, shall redraft the record by including therein, in their proper chronological sequence, such additional matters as the court may have directed him to incorporate, and shall thereupon submit the redrafted record for approval, upon notice to the appellee, in like manner as the original draft. (7a)

Section 8. Joint record on appeal. — Where both parties are appellants, they may file a joint record on appeal within the time fixed by section 3 of this Rule, or that fixed by the court. (8a)

Section 9. Perfection of appeal; effect thereof. — A party's appeal by notice of appeal is deemed perfected as to him upon the filing of the notice of appeal in due time.

A party's appeal by record on appeal is deemed perfected as to him with respect to the subject matter thereof upon the approval of the record on appeal filed in due time.

In appeals by notice of appeal, the court loses jurisdiction over the case upon the perfection of the appeals filed in due time and the expiration of the time to appeal of the other parties.

In appeals by record on appeal, the court loses jurisdiction only over the subject matter thereof upon the approval of the records on appeal filed in due time and the expiration of the appeal of the other parties.

In either case, prior to the transmittal of the original record or the record on appeal, the court may issue orders for the protection and preservation of the rights of the parties which do not involve any matter litigated by the appeal, approve compromises, permit appeals of indigent litigants, order execution pending appeal in accordance with 2 of Rule 39, and allow withdrawal of the appeal. (9a)

Section 10. Duty of clerk of court of the lower court upon perfection of appeal. — Within thirty (30) days after perfection of all the appeals in accordance with the preceding section, it shall be the duty of the clerk of court of the lower court:

(a) To verify the correctness of the original record or the record on appeal, as the case may be aid to make certification of its correctness;

(b) To verify the completeness of the records that will be, transmitted to the appellate court;

(c) If found to be incomplete, to take such measures as may be required to complete the records, availing of the authority that he or the court may exercise for this purpose; and

(d) To transmit the records to the appellate court.

If the efforts to complete the records fail, he shall indicate in his letter of transmittal the exhibits or transcripts not included in the records being transmitted to the appellate court, the reasons for their non-transmittal, and the steps taken or that could be taken to have them available.

The clerk of court shall furnish the parties with copies of his letter of transmittal of the records to the appellate court. (10a)

Section 11. Transcript. — Upon the perfection of the appeal, the clerk shall immediately direct the stenographers concerned to attach to the record of the case five (5) copies of the transcripts of the testimonial evidence referred to in the record on appeal. The stenographers concerned shall transcribe such testimonial evidence and shall prepare and affix to their transcripts an index containing the names of the witnesses and the pages wherein their testimonies are found, and a list of the exhibits and the pages wherein each of them appears to have been offered and admitted or rejected by the trial court. The transcripts shall be transmitted to the clerk of the trial court who shall thereupon arrange the same in the order in which the witnesses testified at the trial, and shall cause the pages to be numbered consecutively. (12a)

Section 12. Transmittal. — The clerk of the trial court shall transmit to the appellate court the original record or the approved record on appeal within thirty (30) days from the perfection of the appeal, together with the proof of payment of the appellate court docket and other lawful fees, a certified true copy of the minutes of the proceedings, the order of approval, the certificate of correctness, the original documentary evidence referred to therein, and the original and three (3) copies of the transcripts. Copies of the transcripts and certified true copies of the documentary evidence shall remain in the lower court for the examination of the parties. (11a)

Section 13. Dismissal of appeal. — Prior to the transmittal of the original record or the record on appeal to the appellate court, the trial court may motu propio or on motion dismiss the appeal for having been taken out of time. (14a)

RULE 42

Petition for Review From the Regional Trial Courts to the Court of Appeals

Section 1. How appeal taken; time for filing. — A party desiring to appeal from a decision of the Regional Trial Court rendered in the exercise of its appellate jurisdiction may file a verified petition for review with the Court of Appeals, paying at the same time to the clerk of said court the corresponding docket and other lawful fees, depositing the amount of P500.00 for costs, and furnishing the Regional Trial Court and the adverse party with a copy of the petition. The petition shall be filed and served within fifteen (15) days from notice of the decision sought to be reviewed or of the denial of petitioner's motion for new trial or reconsideration filed in due time after judgment. Upon proper motion and the payment of the full amount of the docket and other lawful fees and the deposit for costs before the expiration of the reglementary period, the Court of Appeals may grant an additional period of fifteen (15) days only within which to file the petition for review. No further extension shall be granted except for the most compelling reason and in no case to exceed fifteen (15) days. (n)

Section 2. Form and contents. — The petition shall be filed in seven (7) legible copies, with the original copy intended for the court being indicated as such by the petitioner, and shall (a) state the full names of the parties to the case, without impleading the lower courts or judges thereof either as petitioners or respondents; (b) indicate the specific material dates showing that it was filed on time; (c) set forth concisely a statement of the matters involved, the issues raised, the specification of errors of fact or law, or both, allegedly committed by the Regional Trial Court, and the reasons or arguments relied upon for the allowance of the appeal; (d) be accompanied by clearly legible duplicate originals or true copies of the judgments or final orders of both lower courts, certified correct by the clerk of court of the Regional Trial Court, the requisite number of plain copies thereof and of the pleadings and other material portions of the record as would support the allegations of the petition.

The petitioner shall also submit together with the petition a certification under oath that he has not theretofore commenced any other action involving the same issues in the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals or different divisions thereof, or any other tribunal or agency; if there is such other action or proceeding, he must state the status of the same; and if he should thereafter learn that a similar action or proceeding has been filed or is pending before the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals, or different divisions thereof, or any other tribunal or agency, he undertakes to promptly inform the aforesaid courts and other tribunal or agency thereof within five (5) days therefrom. (n)

Section 3. Effect of failure to comply with requirements. — The failure of the petitioner to comply with any of the foregoing requirements regarding the payment of the docket and other lawful fees, the deposit for costs, proof of service of the petition, and the contents of and the documents which should accompany the petition shall be sufficient ground for the dismissal thereof. (n)

Section 4. Action on the petition. — The Court of Appeals may require the respondent to file a comment on the petition, not a motion to dismiss, within ten (10) days from notice, or dismiss the petition if it finds the same to be patently without merit, prosecuted manifestly for delay, or that the questions raised therein are too insubstantial to require consideration. (n)

Section 5. Contents of comment. — The comment of the respondent shall be filed in seven (7) legible copies, accompanied by certified true copies of such material portions of the record referred to therein together with other supporting papers and shall (a) state whether or not he accepts the statement of matters involved in the petition; (b) point out such insufficiencies or inaccuracies as he believes exist in petitioner's statement of matters involved but without repetition; and (c) state the reasons why the petition should not be given due course. A copy thereof shall be served on the petitioner. (a)

Section 6. Due course. — If upon the filing of the comment or such other pleadings as the court may allow or require, or after the expiration of the period for the filing thereof without such comment or pleading having been submitted, the Court of Appeals finds prima facie that the lower court has committed an error of fact or law that will warrant a reversal or modification of the appealed decision, it may accordingly give due course to the petition. (n)

Section 7. Elevation of record. — Whenever the Court of Appeals deems it necessary, it may order the clerk of court of the Regional Trial Court to elevate the original record of the case including the oral and documentary evidence within fifteen (15) days from notice. (n)

Section 8. Perfection of appeal; effect thereof. — (a) Upon the timely filing of a petition for review and the payment of the corresponding docket and other lawful fees, the appeal is deemed perfected as to the petitioner.

The Regional Trial Court loses jurisdiction over the case upon the perfection of the appeals filed in due time and the expiration of the time to appeal of the other parties.

However, before the Court of Appeals gives due course to the petition, the Regional Trial Court may issue orders for the protection and preservation of the rights of the parties which do not involve any matter litigated by the appeal, approve compromises, permit appeals of indigent litigants, order execution pending appeal in accordance with section 2 of Rule 39, and allow withdrawal of the appeal. (9a, R41)

(b) Except in civil cases decided under the Rule on Summary Procedure, the appeal shall stay the judgment or final order unless the Court of Appeals, the law, or these Rules shall provide otherwise. (a)

Section 9. Submission for decision. — If the petition is given due course, the Court of Appeals may set the case for oral argument or require the parties to submit memoranda within a period of fifteen (15) days from notice. The case shall be deemed submitted for decision upon the filing of the last pleading or memorandum required by these Rules or by the court itself. (n)

RULE 43

Appeals From the Court of Tax Appeals and Quasi-Judicial Agencies to the Court of Appeals

Section 1. Scope. — This Rule shall apply to appeals from judgments or final orders of the Court of Tax Appeals and from awards, judgments, final orders or resolutions of or authorized by any quasi-judicial agency in the exercise of its quasi-judicial functions. Among these agencies are the Civil Service Commission, Central Board of Assessment Appeals, Securities and Exchange Commission, Office of the President, Land Registration Authority, Social Security Commission, Civil Aeronautics Board, Bureau of Patents, Trademarks and Technology Transfer, National Electrification Administration, Energy Regulatory Board, National Telecommunications Commission, Department of Agrarian Reform under Republic Act No. 6657, Government Service Insurance System, Employees Compensation Commission, Agricultural Invention Board, Insurance Commission, Philippine Atomic Energy Commission, Board of Investments, Construction Industry Arbitration Commission, and voluntary arbitrators authorized by law. (n)

Section 2. Cases not covered. — This Rule shall not apply to judgments or final orders issued under the Labor Code of the Philippines. (n)

Section 3. Where to appeal. — An appeal under this Rule may be taken to the Court of Appeals within the period and in the manner herein provided, whether the appeal involves questions of fact, of law, or mixed questions of fact and law. (n)

Section 4. Period of appeal. — The appeal shall be taken within fifteen (15) days from notice of the award, judgment, final order or resolution, or from the date of its last publication, if publication is required by law for its effectivity, or of the denial of petitioner's motion for new trial or reconsideration duly filed in accordance with the governing law of the court or agency a quo. Only one (1) motion for reconsideration shall be allowed. Upon proper motion and the payment of the full amount of the docket fee before the expiration of the reglementary period, the Court of Appeals may grant an additional period of fifteen (15) days only within which to file the petition for review. No further extension shall be granted except for the most compelling reason and in no case to exceed fifteen (15) days. (n)

Section 5. How appeal taken. — Appeal shall be taken by filing a verified petition for review in seven (7) legible copies with the Court of Appeals, with proof of service of a copy thereof on the adverse party and on the court or agency a quo. The original copy of the petition intended for the Court of Appeals shall be indicated as such by the petitioner.

Upon the filing of the petition, the petitioner shall pay to the clerk of court of the Court of Appeals the docketing and other lawful fees and deposit the sum of P500.00 for costs. Exemption from payment of docketing and other lawful fees and the deposit for costs may be granted by the Court of Appeals upon a verified motion setting forth valid grounds therefor. If the Court of Appeals denies the motion, the petitioner shall pay the docketing and other lawful fees and deposit for costs within fifteen (15) days from notice of the denial. (n)

Section 6. Contents of the petition. — The petition for review shall (a) state the full names of the parties to the case, without impleading the court or agencies either as petitioners or respondents; (b) contain a concise statement of the facts and issues involved and the grounds relied upon for the review; (c) be accompanied by a clearly legible duplicate original or a certified true copy of the award, judgment, final order or resolution appealed from, together with certified true copies of such material portions of the record referred to therein and other supporting papers; and (d) contain a sworn certification against forum shopping as provided in the last paragraph of section 2, Rule 42. The petition shall state the specific material dates showing that it was filed within the period fixed herein. (2a)

Section 7. Effect of failure to comply with requirements. — The failure of the petitioner to comply with any of the foregoing requirements regarding the payment of the docket and other lawful fees, the deposit for costs, proof of service of the petition, and the contents of and the documents which should accompany the petition shall be sufficient ground for the dismissal thereof. (n)

Section 8. Action on the petition. — The Court of Appeals may require the respondent to file a comment on the petition not a motion to dismiss, within ten (10) days from notice, or dismiss the petition if it finds the same to be patently without merit, prosecuted manifestly for delay, or that the questions raised therein are too unsubstantial to require consideration. (6a)

Section 9. Contents of comment. — The comment shall be filed within ten (10) days from notice in seven (7) legible copies and accompanied by clearly legible certified true copies of such material portions of the record referred to therein together with other supporting papers. The comment shall (a) point out insufficiencies or inaccuracies in petitioner's statement of facts and issues; and (b) state the reasons why the petition should be denied or dismissed. A copy thereof shall be served on the petitioner, and proof of such service shall be filed with the Court of Appeals. (9a)

Section 10. Due course. — If upon the filing of the comment or such other pleadings or documents as may be required or allowed by the Court of Appeals or upon the expiration of the period for the filing thereof, and on the records the Court of Appeals finds prima facie that the court or agency concerned has committed errors of fact or law that would warrant reversal or modification of the award, judgment, final order or resolution sought to be reviewed, it may give due course to the petition; otherwise, it shall dismiss the same. The findings of fact of the court or agency concerned, when supported by substantial evidence, shall be binding on the Court of Appeals. (n)

Section 11. Transmittal of record. — Within fifteen (15) days from notice that the petition has been given due course, the Court of Appeals may require the court or agency concerned to transmit the original or a legible certified true copy of the entire record of the proceeding under review. The record to be transmitted may be abridged by agreement of all parties to the proceeding. The Court of Appeals may require or permit subsequent correction of or addition to the record. (8a)

Section 12. Effect of appeal. — The appeal shall not stay the award, judgment, final order or resolution sought to be reviewed unless the Court of Appeals shall direct otherwise upon such terms as it may deem just. (10a)

Section 13. Submission for decision. — If the petition is given due course, the Court of Appeals may set the case for oral argument or require the parties to submit memoranda within a period of fifteen (15) days from notice. The case shall be deemed submitted for decision upon the filing of the last pleading or memorandum required by these Rules or by the court of Appeals. (n)

Procedure in the Court of Appeals

RULE 44

Ordinary Appealed Cases

Section 1. Title of cases. — In all cases appealed to the Court of Appeals under Rule 41, the title of the case shall remain as it was in the court of origin, but the party appealing the case shall be further referred to as the appellant and the adverse party as the appellee. (1a, R46)

Section 2. Counsel and guardians. — The counsel and guardians ad litem of the parties in the court of origin shall be respectively considered as their counsel and guardians ad litem in the Court of Appeals. When others appear or are appointed, notice thereof shall be served immediately on the adverse party and filed with the court. (2a, R46)

Section 3. Order of transmittal of record. — If the original record or the record on appeal is not transmitted to the Court of Appeals within thirty (30) days after the perfection of the appeal, either party may file a motion with the trial court, with notice to the other, for the transmittal of such record or record on appeal. (3a, R46)

Section 4. Docketing of case. — Upon receiving the original record or the record on appeal and the accompanying documents and exhibits transmitted by the lower court, as well as the proof of payment of the docket and other lawful fees, the clerk of court of the Court of Appeals shall docket the case and notify the parties thereof. (4a, R46)

Within ten (10) days from receipt of said notice, the appellant, in appeals by record on appeal, shall file with the clerk of court seven (7) clearly legible copies of the approved record on appeal, together with the proof of service of two (2) copies thereof upon the appellee.

Any unauthorized alteration, omission or addition in the approved record on appeal shall be a ground for dismissal of the appeal. (n)

Section 5. Completion of record. — Where the record of the docketed case is incomplete, the clerk of court of the Court of Appeals shall so inform said court and recommend to it measures necessary to complete the record. It shall be the duty of said court to take appropriate action towards the completion of the record within the shortest possible time. (n)

Section 6. Dispensing with complete record. — Where the completion of the record could not be accomplished within a sufficient period allotted for said purpose due to insuperable or extremely difficult causes, the court, on its own motion or on motion of any of the parties, may declare that the record and its accompanying transcripts and exhibits so far available are sufficient to decide the issues raised in the appeal, and shall issue an order explaining the reasons for such declaration. (n)

Section 7. Appellant's brief. — It shall be the duty of the appellant to file with the court, within forty-five (45) days from receipt of the notice of the clerk that all the evidence, oral and documentary, are attached to the record, seven (7) copies of his legibly typewritten, mimeographed or printed brief, with proof of service of two (2) copies thereof upon the appellee. (10a, R46)

Section 8. Appellee's brief. — Within forty-five (45) days from receipt of the appellant's brief, the appellee shall file with the court seven (7) copies of his legibly typewritten, mimeographed or printed brief, with proof of service of two (2) copies thereof upon the appellant. (11a, R46)

Section 9. Appellant's reply brief. — Within twenty (20) days from receipt of the appellee's brief, the appellant may file a reply brief answering points in the appellee's brief not covered in his main brief. (12a, R46)

Section 10. Time of filing memoranda in special cases. — In certiorari, prohibition, mandamus, quo warranto and habeas corpus cases, the parties shall file in lieu of briefs, their respective memoranda within a non-extendible period of thirty (30) days from receipt of the notice issued by the clerk that all the evidence, oral and documentary, is already attached to the record. (13a, R46)

The failure of the appellant to file his memorandum within the period therefor may be a ground for dismissal of the appeal. (n)

Section 11. Several appellants or appellees or several counsel for each party. — Where there are several appellants or appellees, each counsel representing one or more but not all of them shall be served with only one copy of the briefs. When several counsel represent one appellant or appellee, copies of the brief may be served upon any of them. (14a, R46)

Section 12. Extension of time for filing briefs. — Extension of time for the filing of briefs will not be allowed, except for good and sufficient cause, and only if the motion for extension is filed before the expiration of the time sought to be extended. (15, R46)

Section 13. Contents of appellant's brief. — The appellant's brief shall contain, in the order herein indicated, the following:

(a) A subject index of the matter in the brief with a digest of the arguments and page references, and a table of cases alphabetically arranged, textbooks and statutes cited with references to the pages where they are cited;

(b) An assignment of errors intended to be urged, which errors shall be separately, distinctly and concisely stated without repetition and numbered consecutively;

(c) Under the heading "Statement of the Case," a clear and concise statement of the nature of the action, a summary of the proceedings, the appealed rulings and orders of the court, the nature of the judgment and any other matters necessary to an understanding of the nature of the controversy with page references to the record;

(d) Under the heading "Statement of Facts," a clear and concise statement in a narrative form of the facts admitted by both parties and of those in controversy, together with the substance of the proof relating thereto in sufficient detail to make it clearly intelligible, with page references to the record;

(e) A clear and concise statement of the issues of fact or law to be submitted, to the court for its judgment;

(f) Under the heading "Argument," the appellant's arguments on each assignment of error with page references to the record. The authorities relied upon shall be cited by the page of the report at which the case begins and the page of the report on which the citation is found;

(g) Under the heading "Relief," a specification of the order or judgment which the appellant seeks; and

(h) In cases not brought up by record on appeal, the appellant's brief shall contain, as an appendix, a copy of the judgment or final order appealed from. (16a, R46)

Section 14. Contents of appellee's brief. — The appellee's brief shall contain, in the order herein indicated the following:

(a) A subject index of the matter in the brief with a digest of the arguments and page references, and a table of cases alphabetically arranged, textbooks and statutes cited with references to the pages where they are cited;

(b) Under the heading "Statement of Facts," the appellee shall state that he accepts the statement of facts in the appellant's brief, or under the heading "Counter-Statement of Facts," he shall point out such insufficiencies or inaccuracies as he believes exist in the appellant's statement of facts with references to the pages of the record in support thereof, but without repetition of matters in the appellant's statement of facts; and

(c) Under the heading "Argument," the appellee shall set forth his arguments in the case on each assignment of error with page references to the record. The authorities relied on shall be cited by the page of the report at which the case begins and the page of the report on which the citation is found. (17a, R46)

Section 15. Questions that may be raised on appeal. — Whether or not the appellant has filed a motion for new trial in the court below he may include in his assignment of errors any question of law or fact that has been raised in the court below and which is within the issues framed by the parties. (18, R46)

RULE 45

Appeal by Certiorari to the Supreme Court

Section 1. Filing of petition with Supreme Court. — A party desiring to appeal by certiorari from a judgment or final order or resolution of the Court of Appeals, the Sandiganbayan, the Regional Trial Court or other courts whenever authorized by law, may file with the Supreme Court a verified petition for review on certiorari. The petition shall raise only questions of law which must be distinctly set forth. (1a, 2a)

Section 2. Time for filing; extension. — The petition shall be filed within fifteen (15) days from notice of the judgment or final order or resolution appealed from, or of the denial of the petitioner's motion for new trial or reconsideration filed in due time after notice of the judgment. On motion duly filed and served, with full payment of the docket and other lawful fees and the deposit for costs before the expiration of the reglementary period, the Supreme Court may for justifiable reasons grant an extension of thirty (30) days only within which to file the petition. (1a, 5a)

Section 3. Docket and other lawful fees; proof of service of petition. — Unless he has theretofore done so, the petitioner shall pay the corresponding docket and other lawful fees to the clerk of court of the Supreme Court and deposit the amount of P500.00 for costs at the time of the filing of the petition. Proof of service of a copy, thereof on the lower court concerned and on the adverse party shall be submitted together with the petition. (1a)

Section 4. Contents of petition. — The petition shall be filed in eighteen (18) copies, with the original copy intended for the court being indicated as such by the petitioner and shall (a) state the full name of the appealing party as the petitioner and the adverse party as respondent, without impleading the lower courts or judges thereof either as petitioners or respondents; (b) indicate the material dates showing when notice of the judgment or final order or resolution subject thereof was received, when a motion for new trial or reconsideration, if any, was filed and when notice of the denial thereof was received; (c) set forth concisely a statement of the matters involved, and the reasons or arguments relied on for the allowance of the petition; (d) be accompanied by a clearly legible duplicate original, or a certified true copy of the judgment or final order or resolution certified by the clerk of court of the court a quo and the requisite number of plain copies thereof, and such material portions of the record as would support the petition; and (e) contain a sworn certification against forum shopping as provided in the last paragraph of section 2, Rule 42. (2a)

Section 5. Dismissal or denial of petition. — The failure of the petitioner to comply with any of the foregoing requirements regarding the payment of the docket and other lawful fees, deposit for costs, proof of service of the petition, and the contents of and the documents which should accompany the petition shall be sufficient ground for the dismissal thereof.

The Supreme Court may on its own initiative deny the petition on the ground that the appeal is without merit, or is prosecuted manifestly for delay, or that the questions raised therein are too unsubstantial to require consideration. (3a)

Section 6. Review discretionary. — A review is not a matter of right, but of sound judicial discretion, and will be granted only when there are special and important reasons thereof. The following, while neither controlling nor fully measuring the court's discretion, indicate the character of the reasons which will be considered:

(a) When the court a quo has decided a question of substance, not theretofore determined by the Supreme Court, or has decided it in a way probably not in accord with law or with the applicable decisions of the Supreme Court; or

(b) When the court a quo has so far departed from the accepted and usual course of judicial proceedings, or so far sanctioned such departure by a lower court, as to call for an exercise of the power of supervision. (4a)

Section 7. Pleadings and documents that may be required; sanctions. — For purposes of determining whether the petition should be dismissed or denied pursuant to section 5 of this Rule, or where the petition is given due course under section 8 hereof, the Supreme Court may require or allow the filing of such pleadings, briefs, memoranda or documents as it may deem necessary within such periods and under such conditions as it may consider appropriate, and impose the corresponding sanctions in case of non-filing or unauthorized filing of such pleadings and documents or non-compliance with the conditions therefor. (n)

Section 8. Due course; elevation of records. — If the petition is given due course, the Supreme Court may require the elevation of the complete record of the case or specified parts thereof within fifteen (15) days from notice. (2a)

Section 9. Rule applicable to both civil and criminal cases. — The mode of appeal prescribed in this Rule shall be applicable to both civil and criminal cases, except in criminal cases where the penalty imposed is death, reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment. (n)

RULE 46

Original Cases

Section 1. Title of cases. — In all cases originally filed in the Court of Appeals, the party instituting the action shall be called the petitioner and the opposing party the respondent. (1a)

Section 2. To what actions applicable. — This Rule shall apply to original actions for certiorari, prohibition, mandamus and quo warranto.

Except as otherwise provided, the actions for annulment of judgment shall be governed by Rule 47, for certiorari, prohibition and mandamus by Rule 65, and for quo warranto by Rule 66. (n)

Section 3. Contents and filing of petition; effect of noncompliance with requirements. — The petition shall contain the full names and actual addresses of all the petitioners and respondents, a concise statement of the matters involved, the factual background of the case, and the grounds relied upon for the relief prayed for.

In actions filed under Rule 65, the petition shall further indicate the material dates showing when notice of the judgment or final order or resolution subject thereof was received, when a motion for new trial or reconsideration, if any, was filed and when notice of the denial thereof was received.

It shall be filed in seven (7) clearly legible copies together with proof of service thereof on the respondent with the original copy intended for the court indicated as such by the petitioner, and shall be accompanied by a clearly legible duplicate original or certified true copy of the judgment, order, resolution, or ruling subject thereof, such material portions of the record as are referred to therein, and other documents relevant or pertinent thereto. The certification shall be accomplished by the proper clerk of court or by his duly authorized representative, or by the proper officer of the court, tribunal, agency or office involved or by his duly authorized representative. The other requisite number of copies of the petition shall be accompanied by clearly legible plain copies of all documents attached to the original.

The petitioner shall also submit together with the petition a sworn certification that he has not theretofore commenced any other action involving the same issues in the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals or different divisions thereof, or any other tribunal or agency; if there is such other action or proceeding, he must state the status of the same; and if he should thereafter learn that a similar action or proceeding has been filed or is pending before the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals, or different divisions thereof, or any other tribunal or agency, he undertakes to promptly inform the aforesaid courts and other tribunal or agency thereof within five (5) days therefrom.

The petitioner shall pay the corresponding docket and other lawful fees to the clerk of court and deposit the amount of P500.00 for costs at the time of the filing of the petition.

The failure of the petitioner to comply any of the requirements shall be sufficient ground for the dismissal of the petition. (n; Bar Matter No. 803, 21 July 1998)

Section 4. Jurisdiction over person of respondent, how acquired. — The court shall acquire jurisdiction over the person of the respondent by the service on him of its order or resolution indicating its initial action on the petition or by his voluntary submission to such jurisdiction. (n)

Section 5. Action by the court. — The court may dismiss the petition outright with specific reasons for such dismissal or require the respondent to file a comment on the same within ten (10) days from notice. Only pleadings required by the court shall be allowed. All other pleadings and papers, may be filed only with leave of court. (n)

Section 6. Determination of factual issues. — Whenever necessary to resolve factual issues, the court itself may conduct hearings thereon or delegate the reception of the evidence on such issue to any of its members or to an appropriate court, agency or office. (n)

Section 7. Effect of failure to file comment. — When no comment is filed by any of the respondents, the case may be decided on the basis of the record, without prejudice to any disciplinary action which the court may take against the disobedient party. (n)

RULE 47

Annulment of Judgments of Final Orders and Resolutions

Section 1. Coverage. — This Rule shall govern the annulment by the Court of Appeals of judgments or final orders and resolutions in civil actions of Regional Trial Courts for which the ordinary remedies of new trial, appeal, petition for relief or other appropriate remedies are no longer available through no fault of the petitioner. (n)

Section 2. Grounds for annulment. — The annulment may be based only on the grounds of extrinsic fraud and lack of jurisdiction.

Extrinsic fraud shall not be a valid ground if it was availed of, or could have been availed of, in a motion for new trial or petition for relief. (n)

Section 3. Period for filing action. — If based on extrinsic fraud, the action must be filed within four (4) years from its discovery; and if based on lack of jurisdiction, before it is barred by laches or estoppel. (n)

Section 4. Filing and contents of petition. — The action shall be commenced by filing a verified petition alleging therein with particularity the facts and the law relied upon for annulment, as well as those supporting the petitioner's good and substantial cause of action or defense, as the case may be.

The petition shall be filed in seven (7) clearly legible copies, together with sufficient copies corresponding to the number of respondents. A certified true copy of the judgment or final order or resolution shall be attached to the original copy of the petition intended for the court and indicated as such by the petitioner.

The petitioner shall also submit together with the petition affidavits of witnesses or documents supporting the cause of action or defense and a sworn certification that he has not theretofore commenced any other action involving the same issues in the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals or different divisions thereof, or any other tribunal or agency if there is such other action or proceeding, he must state the status of the same, and if he should thereafter learn that a similar action or proceeding has been filed or is pending before the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals, or different divisions thereof, or any other tribunal or agency, he undertakes to promptly inform the aforesaid courts and other tribunal or agency thereof within five (5) days therefrom. (n)

Section 5. Action by the court. — Should the court find no substantial merit in the petition, the same may be dismissed outright with specific reasons for such dismissal.

Should prima facie merit be found in the petition, the same shall be given due course and summons shall be served on the respondent. (n)

Section 6. Procedure. — The procedure in ordinary civil cases shall be observed. Should trial be necessary, the reception of the evidence may be referred to a member of the court or a judge of a Regional Trial Court. (n)

Section 7. Effect of judgment. — A judgment of annulment shall set aside the questioned judgment or final order or resolution and render the same null and void, without prejudice to the original action being refiled in the proper court. However, where the judgment or final order or resolution is set aside on the ground of extrinsic fraud, the court may on motion order the trial court to try the case as if a timely motion for new trial had been granted therein. (n)

Section 8. Suspension prescriptive period. — The prescriptive period for the refiling of the aforesaid original action shall be deemed suspended from the filing of such original action until the finality of the judgment of annulment. However, the prescriptive period shall not be suspended where the extrinsic-fraud is attributable to the plaintiff in the original action. (n)

Section 9. Relief available. — The judgment of annulment may include the award of damages, attorney's fees and other relief.

If the questioned judgment or final order or resolution had already been executed the court may issue such orders of restitution or other relief as justice and equity may warrant under the circumstances. (n)

Section 10. Annulment of judgments or final orders of Municipal Trial Courts. — An action to annul a judgment or final order of a Municipal Trial Court shall be filed in the Regional Trial Court having jurisdiction over the former. It shall be treated as an ordinary civil action and sections 2, 3, 4, 7, 8 and 9 of this Rule shall be applicable thereto. (n)

RULE 48

Preliminary Conference

Section 1. Preliminary conference. — At any time during the pendency of a case, the court may call the parties and their counsel to a preliminary conference.

(a) To consider the possibility of an amicable settlement, except when the case is not allowed by law to be compromised

(b) To define, simplify and clarify the issues for determination;

(c) To formulate stipulations of facts and admissions of documentary exhibits, limit the number of witnesses to be presented in cases falling within the original jurisdiction of the court, or those within its appellate jurisdiction where a motion for new trial is granted on the ground of newly discovered evidence; and

(d) To take up such other matters which may aid the court in the prompt disposition of the case. (Rule 7, CA Internal Rules) (n)

Section 2. Record of the conference. — The proceedings at such conference shall be recorded and, upon the conclusion thereof, a resolution shall be issued embodying all the actions taken therein, the stipulations and admissions made and the issues defined. (n)

Section 3. Binding effect of the results of the conference. — Subject to such modifications which may be made to prevent manifest injustice, the resolution in the preceding section shall control the subsequent proceedings in the case unless, within five (5) days from notice thereof, any party shall satisfactorily show valid cause why the same should not be followed. (n)

RULE 49

Oral Argument

Section 1. When allowed. — At its own instance or upon motion of a party, the court may hear the parties in oral argument on the merits of a case, or on any material incident in connection therewith. (n)

The oral argument shall be limited to such matters as the court may specify in its order or resolution. (1a, R48)

Section 2. Conduct of oral argument. — Unless authorized by the court, only one counsel may argue for a party. The duration allowed for each party, the sequence of the argumentation, and all other related matters shall be as directed by the court. (n)

Section 3. No hearing or oral argument for motions. — Motions shall not be set for hearing and, unless the court otherwise directs, no hearing or oral argument shall be allowed in support thereof. The adverse party may file objections to the motion within five (5) days from service, upon the expiration of which such motion shall be deemed submitted for resolution. (29, R49)

RULE 50

Dismissal of Appeal

Section 1. Grounds for dismissal of appeal. — An appeal may be dismissed by the Court of Appeals, on its own motion or on that of the appellee, on the following grounds:

(a) Failure of the record on appeal to show on its face that the appeal was taken within the period fixed by these Rules;

(b) Failure to file the notice of appeal or the record on appeal within the period prescribed by these Rules;

(c) Failure of the appellant to pay the docket and other lawful fees as provided in section 5, Rule 40 and section 4 of Rule 41; (Bar Matter No. 803, 17 February 1998)

(d) Unauthorized alterations, omissions or additions in the approved record on appeal as provided in section 4 of Rule 44;

(e) Failure of the appellant to serve and file the required number of copies of his brief or memorandum within the time provided by these Rules;

(f) Absence of specific assignment of errors in the appellant's brief, or of page references to the record as required in section 13, paragraphs (a), (c), (d) and (f) of Rule 44;

(g) Failure of the appellant to take the necessary steps for the correction or completion of the record within the time limited by the court in its order;

(h) Failure of the appellant to appear at the preliminary conference under Rule 48 or to comply with orders, circulars, or directives of the court without justifiable cause; and

(i) The fact that the order or judgment appealed from is not appealable. (1a)

Section 2. Dismissal of improper appeal to the Court of Appeals. — An appeal under Rule 41 taken from the Regional Trial Court to the Court of Appeals raising only questions of law shall be dismissed, issues purely of law not being reviewable by said court. Similarly, an appeal by notice of appeal instead of by petition for review from the appellate judgment of a Regional Trial Court shall be dismissed. (n)

An appeal erroneously taken to the Court of Appeals shall not be transferred to the appropriate court but shall be dismissed outright. (3a)

Section 3. Withdrawal of appeal. — An appeal may be withdrawn as of right at any time before the filing of the appellee's brief. Thereafter, the withdrawal may be allowed in the discretion of the court. (4a)

RULE 51

Judgment

Section 1. When case deemed submitted for judgment. — A case shall be deemed submitted for judgment:

A. In ordinary appeals. —

1) Where no hearing on the merits of the main case is held, upon the filing of the last pleading, brief, or memorandum required by the Rules or by the court itself, or the expiration of the period for its filing.

2) Where such a hearing is held, upon its termination or upon the filing of the last pleading or memorandum as may be required or permitted to be filed by the court, or the expiration of the period for its filing.

B. In original actions and petitions for review. —

1) Where no comment is filed, upon the expiration of the period to comment.

2) Where no hearing is held, upon the filing of the last pleading required or permitted to be filed by the court, or the expiration of the period for its filing.

3) Where a hearing on the merits of the main case is held, upon its termination or upon the filing of the last pleading or memorandum as may be required or permitted to be filed by the court, or the expiration of the period for its filing. (n)

Section 2. By whom rendered. — The judgment shall be rendered by the members of the court who participated in the deliberation on the merits of the case before its assignment to a member for the writing of the decision. (n)

Section 3. Quorum and voting in the court. — The participation of all three Justices of a division shall be necessary at the deliberation and the unanimous vote of the three Justices shall be required for the pronouncement of a judgment or final resolution. If the three justices do not reach a unanimous vote, the clerk shall enter the votes of the dissenting Justices in the record. Thereafter, the Chairman of the division shall refer the case, together with the minutes of the deliberation, to the Presiding Justice who shall designate two Justices chosen by raffle from among all the other members of the court to sit temporarily with them, forming a special division of five Justices. The participation of all the five members of the special division shall be necessary for the deliberation required in section 2 of this Rule and the concurrence of a majority of such division shall be required for the pronouncement of a judgment or final resolution. (2a)

Section 4. Disposition of a case. — The Court of Appeals, in the exercise of its appellate jurisdiction, may affirm, reverse, or modify the judgment or final order appealed from, and may direct a new trial or further proceedings to be had. (3a)

Section 5. Form of decision. — Every decision or final resolution of the court in appealed cases shall clearly and distinctly state the findings of fact and the conclusions of law on which it is based, which may be contained in the decision or final resolution itself, or adopted from those set forth in the decision, order, or resolution appealed from. (Sec. 40, BP Blg. 129) (n)

Section 6. Harmless error. — No error in either the admission or the exclusion of evidence and no error or defect in any ruling or order or in anything done or omitted by the trial court or by any of the parties is ground for granting a new trial or for setting aside, modifying, or otherwise disturbing a judgment or order, unless refusal to take such action appears to the court inconsistent with substantial justice. The court at every stage of the proceeding must disregard any error or defect which does not affect the substantial rights of the parties. (5a)

Section 7. Judgment where there are several parties. — In all actions or proceedings, an appealed judgment may be affirmed as to some of the appellants, and reversed as to others, and the case shall thereafter be proceeded with, so far as necessary, as if separate actions had been begun and prosecuted, and execution of the judgment of affirmance may be had accordingly, and costs may be adjudged in such cases, as the court shall deem proper. (6)

Section 8. Questions that may be decided. — No error which does not affect the jurisdiction over the subject matter or the validity of the judgment appealed from or the proceedings therein will be considered unless stated in the assignment of errors, or closely related to or dependent on an assigned error and properly argued in the brief, save as the court may pass upon plain errors and clerical errors. (7a)

Section 9. Promulgation and notice of judgment. — After the judgment or final resolution and dissenting or separate opinions, if any, are signed by the Justices taking part, they shall be delivered for filing to the clerk who shall indicate thereon the date of promulgation and cause true copies thereof to be served upon the parties or their counsel. (n)

Section 10. Entry of judgments and final resolutions. — If no appeal or motion for new trial or reconsideration is filed within the time provided in these Rules, the judgment or final resolution shall forthwith be entered by the clerk in the book of entries of judgments. The date when the judgment or final resolution becomes executory shall be deemed as the date of its entry. The record shall contain the dispositive part of the judgment or final resolution and shall be signed by the clerk, with a certificate that such judgment or final resolution has become final and executory. (2a, R36)

Section 11. Execution of judgment. — Except where the judgment or final order or resolution, or a portion thereof, is ordered to be immediately executory, the motion for its execution may only be filed in the proper court after its entry.

In original actions in the Court of Appeals, its writ of execution shall be accompanied by a certified true copy of the entry of judgment or final resolution and addressed to any appropriate officer for its enforcement.

In appealed cases, where the motion for execution pending appeal is filed in the Court of Appeals at a time that it is in possession of the original record or the record on appeal, the resolution granting such motion shall be transmitted to the lower court from which the case originated, together with a certified true copy of the judgment or final order to be executed, with a directive for such court of origin to issue the proper writ for its enforcement. (n)

RULE 52

Motion for Reconsideration

Section 1. Period for filing. — A party may file a motion for reconsideration of a judgment or final resolution within fifteen (15) days from notice thereof, with proof of service on the adverse party. (n)

Section 2. Second motion for reconsideration. — No second motion for reconsideration of a judgment or final resolution by the same party shall be entertained. (n)

Section 3. Resolution of motion. — In the Court of Appeals, a motion for reconsideration shall be resolved within ninety (90) days from the date when the court declares it submitted for resolution. (n)

Section 4. Stay of execution. — The pendency of a motion for reconsideration filed on time and by the proper party shall stay the execution of the judgment or final resolution sought to be reconsidered unless the court, for good reasons, shall otherwise direct. (n)

RULE 53

New Trial

Section 1. Period for filing; ground. — At any time after the appeal from the lower court has been perfected and before the Court of Appeals loses jurisdiction over the case, a party may file a motion for a new trial on the ground of newly discovered evidence which could not have been discovered prior to the trial in the court below by the exercise of due diligence and which is of such a character as would probably change the result. The motion shall be accompanied by affidavits showing the facts constituting the grounds therefor and the newly discovered evidence. (1a)

Section 2. Hearing and order. — The Court of Appeals shall consider the new evidence together with that adduced at the trial below, and may grant or refuse a new trial, or may make such order, with notice to both parties, as to the taking of further testimony, either orally in court, or by depositions, or render such other judgment as ought to be rendered upon such terms as it may deem just. (2a)

Section 3. Resolution of motion. — In the Court of Appeals, a motion for new trial shall be resolved within ninety (90) days from the date when the court declares it submitted for resolution. (n)

Section 4. Procedure in new trial. — Unless the court otherwise directs, the procedure in the new trial shall be the same as that granted by a Regional Trial Court. (3a)

RULE 54

Internal Business

Section 1. Distribution of cases among divisions. — All the cases of the Court of Appeals shall be allotted among the different divisions thereof for hearing and decision. The Court of Appeals, sitting en banc, shall make proper orders or rules to govern the allotment of cases among the different divisions, the constitution of such divisions, the regular rotation of Justices among them, the filing of vacancies occurring therein, and other matters relating to the business of the court; and such rules shall continue in force until repealed or altered by the Supreme Court. (1a)

Section 2. Quorum of the court. — A majority of the actual members of the court shall constitute a quorum for its sessions en banc. Three members shall constitute a quorum for the sessions of a division. The affirmative votes of the majority of the members present shall be necessary to pass a resolution of the court en banc. The affirmative votes of three members of a division shall be necessary for the pronouncement of a judgment or final resolution, which shall be reached in consultation before the writing of the opinion by any member of the division. (Sec. 11, first par. of BP Blg. 129, as amended by Sec. 6 of EO 33). (3a)

RULE 55

Publications of Judgments and Final Resolutions

Section 1. Publication. — The judgments and final resolutions of the court shall be published in the Official Gazette and in the Reports officially authorized by the court in the language in which they have been originally written, together with the syllabi therefor prepared by the reporter in consultation with the writers thereof. Memoranda of all other judgments and final resolutions not so published shall be made by the reporter and published in the Official Gazette and the authorized reports. (1a)

Section 2. Preparation of opinions for publication. — The reporter shall prepare and publish with each reported judgment and final resolution a concise synopsis of the facts necessary for a clear understanding of the case, the names of counsel, the material and controverted points involved, the authorities cited therein, and a syllabus which shall be confined to points of law. (Sec. 22a, R.A. No. 296) (n)

Section 3. General make-up of volumes. — The published decisions and final resolutions of the Supreme Court shall be called "Philippine Reports," while those of the Court of Appeals shall be known as the "Court of Appeals Reports." Each volume thereof shall contain a table of the cases reported and the cases cited in the opinions, with a complete alphabetical index of the subject matters of the volume. It shall consist of not less than seven hundred pages printed upon good paper, well bound and numbered consecutively in the order of the volumes published. (Sec. 23a, R.A. No. 296) (n)

Procedure In The Supreme Court

RULE 56

A. Original Cases

Section 1. Original cases cognizable. — Only petitions for certiorari, prohibition, mandamus, quo warranto, habeas corpus, disciplinary proceedings against members of the judiciary and attorneys, and cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls may be filed originally in the Supreme Court. (n)

Section 2. Rules applicable. — The procedure in original cases for certiorari, prohibition, mandamus, quo warranto and habeas corpus shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Constitution, laws, and Rules 46, 48, 49, 51, 52 and this Rule, subject to the following provisions:

a) All references in said Rules to the Court of Appeals shall be understood to also apply to the Supreme Court;

b) The portions of said Rules dealing strictly with and specifically intended for appealed cases in the Court of Appeals shall not be applicable; and

c) Eighteen (18) clearly legible copies of the petition shall be filed, together with proof of service on all adverse parties.

The proceedings for disciplinary action against members of the judiciary shall be governed by the laws and Rules prescribed therefor, and those against attorneys by Rules 139-B, as amended. (n)

B. Appealed Cases

Section 3. Mode of appeal. — An appeal to the Supreme Court may be taken only by a petition for review on certiorari, except in criminal cases where the penalty imposed is death, reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment. (n)

Section 4. Procedure. — The appeal shall be governed by and disposed of in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Constitution, laws, Rules 45, 48, sections 1, 2, and 5 to 11 of Rule 51, 52 and this Rule. (n)

Section 5. Grounds for dismissal of appeal. — The appeal may be dismissed motu proprio or on motion of the respondent on the following grounds:

(a) Failure to take the appeal within the reglementary period;

(b) Lack of merit in the petition;

(c) Failure to pay the requisite docket fee and other lawful fees or to make a deposit for costs;

(d) Failure to comply with the requirements regarding proof of service and contents of and the documents which should accompany the petition;

(e) Failure to comply with any circular, directive or order of the Supreme Court without justifiable cause;

(f) Error in the choice or mode of appeal; and

(g) The fact that the case is not appealable to the Supreme Court. (n)

Section 6. Disposition of improper appeal. — Except as provided in section 3, Rule 122 regarding appeals in criminal cases where the penalty imposed is death, reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment, an appeal taken to the Supreme Court by notice of appeal shall be dismissed.

An appeal by certiorari taken to the Supreme Court from the Regional Trial Court submitting issues of fact may be referred to the Court of Appeals for decision or appropriate action. The determination of the Supreme Court on whether or not issues of fact are involved shall be final. (n)

Section 7. Procedure if opinion is equally divided. — Where the court en banc is equally divided in opinion, or the necessary majority cannot be had, the case shall again be deliberated on, and if after such deliberation no decision is reached, the original action commenced in the court shall be dismissed, in appealed cases, the judgment or order appealed from shall stand affirmed; and on all incidental matters, the petition or motion shall be denied.

Provisional Remedies

RULE 57

Preliminary Attachment

Section 1. Grounds upon which attachment may issue. — At the commencement of the action or at any time before entry of judgment, a plaintiff or any proper party may have the property of the adverse party attached as security for the satisfaction of any judgment that may be recovered in the following cases:

(a) In an action for the recovery of a specified amount of money or damages, other than moral and exemplary, on a cause of action arising from law, contract, quasi-contract, delict or quasi-delict against a party who is about to depart from the Philippines with intent to defraud his creditors;

(b) In an action for money or property embezzled or fraudulently misapplied or converted to his own use by a public officer, or an officer of a corporation, or an attorney, factor, broker, agent, or clerk, in the course of his employment as such, or by any other person in a fiduciary capacity, or for a willful violation of duty;

(c) In an action to recover the possession of property unjustly or fraudulently taken, detained or converted, when the property, or any part thereof, has been concealed, removed, or disposed of to prevent its being found or taken by the applicant or an authorized person;

(d) In an action against a party who has been guilty of a fraud in contracting the debt or incurring the obligation upon which the action is brought, or in the performance thereof;

(e) In an action against a party who has removed or disposed of his property, or is about to do so, with intent to defraud his creditors; or

(f) In an action against a party who does not reside and is not found in the Philippines, or on whom summons may be served by publication. (1a)

Section 2. Issuance and contents of order. — An order of attachment may be issued either ex parte or upon motion with notice and hearing by the court in which the action is pending, or by the Court of Appeals or the Supreme Court, and must require the sheriff of the court to attach so much of the property in the Philippines of the party against whom it is issued, not exempt from execution, as may be sufficient to satisfy the applicant's demand, unless such party makes deposit or gives a bond as hereinafter provided in an amount equal to that fixed in the order, which may be the amount sufficient to satisfy the applicant's demand or the value of the property to be attached as stated by the applicant, exclusive of costs. Several writs may be issued at the same time to the sheriffs of the courts of different judicial regions. (2a)

Section 3. Affidavit and bond required. — An order of attachment shall be granted only when it appears by the affidavit of the applicant, or of some other person who personally knows the facts, that a sufficient cause of action exists, that the case is one of those mentioned in section 1 hereof, that there is no other sufficient security for the claim sought to be enforced by the action, and that the amount due to the applicant, or the value of the property the possession of which he is entitled to recover, is as much as the sum for which the order is granted above all legal counterclaims. The affidavit, and the bond required by the next succeeding section, must be duly filed with the court before the order issues. (3a)

Section 4. Condition of applicant's bond. — The party applying for the order must thereafter give a bond executed to the adverse party in the amount fixed by the court in its order granting the issuance of the writ, conditioned that the latter will pay all the costs which may be adjudged to the adverse party and all damages which he may sustain by reason of the attachment, if the court shall finally adjudge that the applicant was not entitled thereto. (4a)

Section 5. Manner of attaching property. — The sheriff enforcing the writ shall without delay and with all reasonable diligence attach, to await judgment and execution in the action, only so much of the property in the Philippines of the party against whom the writ is issued, not exempt from execution, as may be sufficient to satisfy the applicant's demand, unless the former makes a deposit with the court from which the writ is issued, or gives a counter-bond executed to the applicant, in an amount equal to the bond fixed by the court in the order of attachment or to the value of the property to be attached, exclusive of costs. No levy on attachment pursuant to the writ issued under section 2 hereof shall be enforced unless it is preceded, or contemporaneously accompanied, by service of summons, together with a copy of the complaint, the application for attachment the applicant's affidavit and bond, and the order and writ of attachment, on the defendant within the Philippines.

The requirement of prior or contemporaneous service of summons shall not apply where the summons could not be served personally or by substituted service despite diligent efforts, or the defendant is a resident of the Philippines temporarily absent therefrom, or the defendant is a non-resident of the Philippines, or the action is one in rem or quasi in rem. (5a)

Section 6. Sheriff's return. — After enforcing the writ, the sheriff must likewise without delay make a return thereon to the court from which the writ issued, with a full statement of his proceedings under the writ and a complete inventory of the property attached, together with any counter-bond given by the party against whom attachment is issued, and serve copies thereof on the applicant. (6a)

Section 7. Attachment of real and personal property; recording thereof. — Real and personal property shall be attached by the sheriff executing the writ in the following manner:

(a) Real property, or growing crops thereon, or any interest therein, standing upon the record of the registry of deeds of the province in the name of the party against whom attachment is issued, or not appearing at all upon such records, or belonging to the party against whom attachment is issued and held by any other person, or standing on the records of the registry of deeds in the name of any other person, by filing with the registry of deeds a copy of the order, together with a description of the property attached, and a notice that it is attached, or that such real property and any interest therein held by or standing in the name of such other person are attached, and by leaving a copy of such order, description, and notice with the occupant of the property, if any, or with such other person or his agent if found within the province. Where the property has been brought under the operation of either the Land Registration Act or the Property Registration Decree, the notice shall contain a reference to the number of the certificate of title, the volume and page in the registration book where the certificate is registered, and the registered owner or owners thereof.

The registrar of deeds must index attachments filed under this section in the names of the applicant, the adverse party, or the person by whom the property is held or in whose name it stands in the records. If the attachment is not claimed on the entire area of the land covered by the certificate of title, a description sufficiently accurate for the identification of the land or interest to be affected shall be included in the registration of such attachment;

(b) Personal property capable of manual delivery, by taking and safely keeping it in his custody, after issuing the corresponding receipt therefor.

(c) Stocks or shares, or an interest in stocks or shares, of any corporation or company, by leaving with the president or managing agent thereof, a copy of the writ, and a notice stating that the stock or interest of the party against whom the attachment is issued is attached in pursuance of such writ;

(d) Debts and credits, including bank deposits, financial interest, royalties, commissions and other personal property not capable of manual delivery, by leaving with the person owing such debts, or having in his possession or under his control, such credits or other personal property, or with his agent, a copy of the writ, and notice that the debts owing by him to the party against whom attachment is issued, and the credits and other personal property in his possession, or under his control, belonging to said party, are attached in pursuance of such writ;

(e) The interest of the party against whom attachment is issued in property belonging to the estate of the decedent, whether as heir, legatee, or devisee, by serving the executor or administrator or other personal representative of the decedent with a copy of the writ and notice that said interest is attached. A copy of said writ of attachment and of said notice shall also be filed in the office of the clerk of the court in which said estate is being settled and served upon the heir, legatee or devisee concerned.

If the property sought to be attached is in custodia legis, a copy of the writ of attachment shall be filed with the proper court or quasi-judicial agency, and notice of the attachment served upon the custodian of such property. (7a)

Section 8. Effect of attachment of debts, credits and all other similar personal property. — All persons having in their possession or under their control any credits or other similar personal property belonging to the party against whom attachment is issued, or owing any debts to him, at the time of service upon them of the copy of the writ of attachment and notice as provided in the last preceding section, shall be liable to the applicant for the amount of such credits, debts or other similar personal property, until the attachment is discharged, or any judgment recovered by him is satisfied, unless such property is delivered or transferred, or such debts are paid, to the clerk, sheriff, or other proper officer of the court issuing the attachment. (8a)

Section 9. Effect of attachment of interests in property belonging to the estate of a decedent. — The attachment of the interest of an heir, legatee, or devisee in the property belonging to the estate of a decedent shall not impair the powers of the executor, administrator, or other personal representative of the decedent over such property for the purpose of administration. Such personal representative, however, shall report the attachment to the court when any petition for distribution is filed, and in the order made upon such petition, distribution may be awarded to such heir, legatee or devisee, but the property attached shall be ordered delivered to the sheriff making the levy, subject to the claim of such heir, legatee, or devisee, or any person claiming under him. (9a)

Section 10. Examination of party whose property is attached and persons indebted to him or controlling his property; delivery of property to sheriff. — Any person owing debts to the party whose property is attached or having in his possession or under his control any credit or other personal property belonging to such party, may be required to attend before the court in which the action is pending, or before a commissioner appointed by the court, and be examined on oath respecting the same. The party whose property is attached may also be required to attend for the purpose of giving information respecting his property, and may be examined on oath. The court may, after such examination, order personal property capable of manual delivery belonging to him, in the possession of the person so required to attend before the court, to be delivered to the clerk of the court or sheriff on such terms as may be just, having reference to any lien thereon or claim against the same, to await the judgment in the action. (10a)

Section 11. When attached property may be sold after levy on attachment and before entry of judgment. — Whenever it shall be made to appear to the court in which the action is pending, upon hearing with notice to both parties, that the property attached is perishable, or that the interests of all the parties to the action will be subserved by the sale thereof, the court may order such property to be sold at public auction in such manner as it may direct, and the proceeds of such sale to be deposited in court to abide the judgment in the action. (11a)

Section 12. Discharge of attachment upon giving counter-bond. — After a writ of attachment has been enforced, the party whose property has been attached, or the person appearing on his behalf, may move for the discharge of the attachment wholly or in part on the security given. The court shall, after due notice and hearing, order the discharge of the attachment if the movant makes a cash deposit, or files a counter-bond executed to the attaching party with the clerk of the court where the application is made, in an amount equal to that fixed by the court in the order of attachment, exclusive of costs. But if the attachment is sought to be discharged with respect to a particular property, the counter-bond shall be equal to the value of that property as determined by the court. In either case, the cash deposit or the counter-bond shall secure the payment of any judgment that the attaching party may recover in the action. A notice of the deposit shall forthwith be served on the attaching party. Upon the discharge of an attachment in accordance with the provisions of this section, the property attached, or the proceeds of any sale thereof, shall be delivered to the party making the deposit or giving the counter-bond, or to the person appearing on his behalf, the deposit or counter-bond aforesaid standing in place of the property so released. Should such counter-bond for any reason be found to be or become insufficient, and the party furnishing the same fail to file an additional counter-bond, the attaching party may apply for a new order of attachment. (12a)

Section 13. Discharge of attachment on other grounds. — The party whose property has been ordered attached may file a motion with the court in which he action is pending, before or after levy or even after the release of the attached property, for an order to set aside or discharge the attachment on the ground that the same was improperly or irregularly issued or enforced, or that the bond is insufficient. If the attachment is excessive, the discharge shall be limited to the excess. If the motion be made on affidavits on the part of the movant but not otherwise, the attaching party may oppose the motion by counter-affidavits or other evidence in addition to that on which the attachment was made. After due notice and hearing, the court shall order the setting aside or the corresponding discharge of the attachment if it appears that it was improperly or irregularly issued or enforced, or that the bond is insufficient, or that the attachment is excessive, and the defect is not cured forthwith. (13a)

Section 14. Proceedings where property claimed by third person. — If the property attached is claimed by any person other than the party against whom attachment had been issued or his agent, and such person makes an affidavit of his title thereto, or right to the possession thereof, stating the grounds of such right or title, and serves such affidavit upon the sheriff while the latter has possession of the attached property, and a copy thereof upon the attaching party, the sheriff shall not be bound to keep the property under attachment, unless the attaching party or his agent, on demand of the sheriff, shall file a bond approved by the court to indemnify the third-party claimant in a sum not less than the value of the property levied upon. In case of disagreement as to such value, the same shall be decided by the court issuing the writ of attachment. No claim for damages for the taking or keeping of the property may be enforced against the bond unless the action therefor is filed within one hundred twenty (120) days from the date of the filing of the bond.

The sheriff shall not be liable for damages for the taking or keeping of such property to any such third-party claimant, if such bond shall be filed. Nothing herein contained shall prevent such claimant or any third person from vindicating his claim to the property, or prevent the attaching party from claiming damages against a third-party claimant who filed a frivolous or plainly spurious claim, in the same or a separate action.

When the writ of attachment is issued in favor of the Republic of the Philippines, or any officer duly representing it, the filing of such bond shall not be required, and in case the sheriff is sued for damages as a result of the attachment, he shall be represented by the Solicitor General, and if held liable therefor, the actual damages adjudged by the court shall be paid by the National Treasurer out of the funds to be appropriated for the purpose. (14a)

Section 15. Satisfaction of judgment out of property attached, return of sheriff. — If judgment be recovered by the attaching party and execution issue thereon, the sheriff may cause the judgment to be satisfied out of the property attached, if it be sufficient for that purpose in the following manner:

(a) By paying to the judgment obligee the proceeds of all sales of perishable or other property sold in pursuance of the order of the court, or so much as shall be necessary to satisfy the judgment;

(b) If any balance remains due, by selling so much of the property, real or personal, as may be necessary to satisfy the balance, if enough for that purpose remain in the sheriff's hands, or in those the clerk of the court;

(c) By collecting from all persons having in their possession credits belonging to the judgment obligor, or owing debts to the latter at the time of the attachment of such credits or debts, the amount of such credits and debts as determined by the court in the action, and stated in the judgment, and paying the proceeds of such collection over to the judgment obligee.

The sheriff shall forthwith make a return in writing to the court of his proceedings under this section and furnish the parties with copies thereof. (15a)

Section 16. Balance due collected upon an execution; excess delivered to judgment obligor. — If after realizing upon all the property attached, including the proceeds of any debts or credits collected, and applying the proceeds to the satisfaction of the judgment less the expenses of proceedings upon the judgment any balance shall remain due, the sheriff must proceed to collect such balance as upon ordinary execution. Whenever the judgment shall have been paid, the sheriff, upon reasonable demand, must return to the judgment obligor the attached property remaining in his hands, and any proceeds of the sale of the property attached not applied to the judgment. (16a)

Section 17. Recovery upon the counter-bond. — When the judgment has become executory, the surety or sureties on any counter-bond given pursuant to the provisions of this Rule to secure the payment of the judgment shall become charged on such counter-bond and bound to pay the judgment obligee upon demand the amount due under the judgment, which amount may be recovered from such surety or sureties after notice and summary hearing in the same action. (17a)

Section 18. Disposition of money deposited. — Where the party against whom attachment had been issued has deposited money instead of giving counter-bond, it shall be applied under the direction of the court to the satisfaction of any judgment rendered in favor of the attaching party, and after satisfying the judgment the balance shall be refunded to the depositor or his assignee. If the judgment is in favor of the party against whom attachment was issued, the whole sum deposited must be refunded to him or his assignee. (18a)

Section 19. Disposition of attached property where judgment is for party against whom attachment was issued. — If judgment be rendered against the attaching party, all the proceeds of sales and money collected or received by the sheriff, under the order of attachment, and all property attached remaining in any such officer's hands, shall be delivered to the party against whom attachment was issued, and the order of attachment discharged. (19a)

Section 20. Claim for damages on account of improper, irregular or excessive attachment. — An application for damages on account of improper, irregular or excessive attachment must be filed before the trial or before appeal is perfected or before the judgment becomes executory, with due notice to the attaching party and his surety or sureties setting forth the facts showing his right to damages and the amount thereof. Such damages may be awarded only after proper hearing and shall be included in the judgment on the main case.

If the judgment of the appellate court be favorable to the party against whom the attachment was issued he must claim damages sustained during the pendency of the appeal by filing an application in the appellate court, with notice to the party in whose favor the attachment was issued or his surety or sureties, before the judgment of the appellate court becomes executory. The appellate court may allow the application to be heard and decided by the trial court.

Nothing herein contained shall prevent the party against whom the attachment was issued from recovering in the same action the damages awarded to him from any property of the attaching party not exempt from execution should the bond or deposit given by the latter be insufficient or fail to fully satisfy the award. (20a)

RULE 58

Preliminary Injunction

Section 1. Preliminary injunction defined; classes. — A preliminary injunction is an order granted at any stage of an action or proceeding prior to the judgment or final order, requiring a party or a court, agency or a person to refrain from a particular act or acts. It may also require the performance of a particular act or acts, in which case it shall be known as a preliminary mandatory injunction. (1a)

Section 2. Who may grant preliminary injunction. — A preliminary injunction may be granted by the court where the action or proceeding is pending. If the action or proceeding is pending in the Court of Appeals or in the Supreme Court, it may be issued by said court or any member thereof. (2a)

Section 3. Grounds for issuance of preliminary injunction. — A preliminary injunction may be granted when it is established:

(a) That the applicant is entitled to the relief demanded, and the whole or part of such relief consists in restraining the commission or continuance of the act or acts complained of, or in requiring the performance of an act or acts either for a limited period or perpetually;

(b) That the commission, continuance or non-performance of the act or acts complained of during the litigation would probably work injustice to the applicant; or

(c) That a party, court, agency or a person is doing, threatening, or is attempting to do, or is procuring or suffering to be done some act or acts probably in violation of the rights of the applicant respecting the subject of the action or proceeding, and tending to render the judgment ineffectual. (3a)

Section 4. Verified application and bond for preliminary injunction or temporary restraining order. — A preliminary injunction or temporary restraining order may be granted only when:

(a) The application in the action or proceeding is verified, and shows facts entitling the applicant to the relief demanded; and

(b) Unless exempted by the court the applicant files with the court where the action or proceeding is pending, a bond executed to the party or person enjoined, in an amount to be fixed by the court, to the effect that the applicant will pay to such party or person all damages which he may sustain by reason of the injunction or temporary restraining order if the court should finally decide that the applicant was not entitled thereto. Upon approval of the requisite bond, a writ of preliminary injunction shall be issued. (4a)

(c) When an application for a writ of preliminary injunction or a temporary restraining order is included in a complaint or any initiatory pleading, the case, if filed in a multiple-sala court, shall be raffled only after notice to and in the presence of the adverse party or the person to be enjoined. In any event, such notice shall be preceded, or contemporaneously accompanied, by service of summons, together with a copy of the complaint or initiatory pleading and the applicant's affidavit and bond, upon the adverse party in the Philippines.

However, where the summons could not be served personally or by substituted service despite diligent efforts, or the adverse party is a resident of the Philippines temporarily absent therefrom or is a nonresident thereof, the requirement of prior or contemporaneous service of summons shall not apply.

(d) The application for a temporary restraining order shall thereafter be acted upon only after all parties are heard in a summary hearing which shall be conducted within twenty-four (24) hours after the sheriff's return of service and/or the records are received by the branch selected by raffle and to which the records shall be transmitted immediately.

Section 5. Preliminary injunction not granted without notice; exception. — No preliminary injunction shall be granted without hearing and prior notice to the party or person sought to be enjoined. If it shall appear from facts shown by affidavits or by the verified application that great or irreparable injury would result to the applicant before the matter can be heard on notice, the court to which the application for preliminary injunction was made, may issue a temporary restraining order to be effective only for a period of twenty (20) days from service on the party or person sought to be enjoined, except as herein provided. Within the said twenty-day period, the court must order said party or person to show cause, at a specified time and place, why the injunction should not be granted, determine within the same period whether or not the preliminary injunction shall be granted, and accordingly issue the corresponding order. (Bar Matter No. 803, 17 February 1998)

However, and subject to the provisions of the preceding sections, if the matter is of extreme urgency and the applicant will suffer grave injustice and irreparable injury, the executive judge of a multiple-sala court or the presiding judge of a single sala court may issue ex parte a temporary restraining order effective for only seventy-two (72) hours from issuance but he shall immediately comply with the provisions of the next preceding section as to service of summons and the documents to be served therewith. Thereafter, within the aforesaid seventy-two (72) hours, the judge before whom the case is pending shall conduct a summary hearing to determine whether the temporary restraining order shall be extended until the application for preliminary injunction can be heard. In no case shall the total period of effectivity of the temporary restraining order exceed twenty (20) days, including the original seventy-two hours provided herein.

In the event that the application for preliminary injunction is denied or not resolved within the said period, the temporary restraining order is deemed, automatically vacated. The effectivity of a temporary restraining order is not extendible without need of any judicial declaration to that effect and no court shall have authority to extend or renew the same on the same ground for which it was issued.

However, if issued by the Court of Appeals or a member thereof, the temporary restraining order shall be effective for sixty (60) days from service on the party or person sought to be enjoined. A restraining, order issued by the Supreme Court or a member thereof shall be effective until further orders. (5a)

Section 6. Grounds for objection to, or for motion of dissolution of, injunction or restraining order. — The application for injunction or restraining order may be denied, upon a showing of its insufficiency. The injunction or restraining order may also be denied, or, if granted, may be dissolved, on other grounds upon affidavits of the party or person enjoined, which may be opposed by the applicant also by affidavits. It may further be denied, or if granted, may be dissolved, if it appears after hearing that although the applicant is entitled to the injunction or restraining order, the issuance or continuance thereof, as the case may be, would cause irreparable damage to the party or person enjoined while the applicant can be fully compensated for such damages as he may suffer, and the former files a bond in an amount fixed by the court conditioned that he will pay all damages which the applicant may suffer by the denial or the dissolution of the injunction or restraining order. If it appears that the extent of the preliminary injunction or restraining order granted is too great, it may be modified. (6a)

Section 7. Service of copies of bonds; effect of disapproval of same. — The party filing a bond in accordance with the provisions of this Rule shall forthwith serve a copy of such bond on the other party, who may except to the sufficiency of the bond, or of the surety or sureties thereon. If the applicant's bond is found to be insufficient in amount, or if the surety or sureties thereon fail to justify, and a bond sufficient in amount with sufficient sureties approved after justification is not filed forthwith the injunction shall be dissolved. If the bond of the adverse party is found to be insufficient in amount, or the surety or sureties thereon fail to justify a bond sufficient in amount with sufficient sureties approved after justification is not filed forthwith, the injunction shall be granted or restored, as the case may be. (8a)

Section 8. Judgment to include damages against party and sureties. — At the trial, the amount of damages to be awarded to either party, upon the bond of the adverse party, shall be claimed, ascertained, and awarded under the same procedure prescribed in section 20 of Rule 57. (9a)

Section 9. When final injunction granted. — If after the trial of the action it appears that the applicant is entitled to have the act or acts complained of permanently enjoined the court shall grant a final injunction perpetually restraining the party or person enjoined from the commission or continuance of the act or acts of confirming the preliminary mandatory injunction. (10a)

RULE 59

Receivership

Section 1. Appointment of receiver. — Upon a verified application, one or more receivers of the property subject of the action or proceeding may be appointed by the court where the action is pending or by the Court of Appeals or by the Supreme Court, or a member thereof, in the following cases:

(a) When it appears from the verified application, and such other proof as the court may require, that the party applying for the appointment of a receiver has an interest in the property or fund which is the subject of the action or proceeding, and that such property or fund is in danger of being lost, removed, or materially injured unless a receiver be appointed to administer and preserve it;

(b) When it appears in an action by the mortgagee for the foreclosure of a mortgage that the property is in danger of being wasted or dissipated or materially injured, and that its value is probably insufficient to discharge the mortgage debt, or that the parties have so stipulated in the contract of mortgage;

(c) After judgment, to preserve the property during the pendency of an appeal, or to dispose of it according to the judgment, or to aid execution when the execution has been returned unsatisfied or the judgment obligor refuses to apply his property in satisfaction of the judgment, or otherwise to carry the judgment into effect;

(d) Whenever in other cases it appears that the appointment of a receiver is the most convenient and feasible means of preserving, administering, or disposing of the property in litigation.

During the pendency of an appeal, the appellate court may allow an application for the appointment of a receiver to be filed in and decided by the court of origin and the receiver appointed to be subject to the control of said court. (1a)

Section 2. Bond on appointment of receiver. — Before issuing the order appointing a receiver the court shall require the applicant to file a bond executed to the party against whom the application is presented, in an amount to be fixed by the court, to the effect that the applicant will pay such party all damages he may sustain by reason of the appointment of such receiver in case the applicant shall have procured such appointment without sufficient cause; and the court may, in its discretion, at any time after the appointment, require an additional bond as further security for such damages. (3a)

Section 3. Denial of application or discharge of receiver. — The application may be denied, or the receiver discharged, when the adverse party files a bond executed to the applicant, in an amount to be fixed by the court, to the effect that such party will pay the applicant all damages he may suffer by reason of the acts, omissions, or other matters specified in the application as ground for such appointment. The receiver may also be discharged if it is shown that his appointment was obtained without sufficient cause. (4a)

Section 4. Oath and bond of receiver. — Before entering upon his duties, the receiver shall be sworn to perform them faithfully, and shall file a bond, executed to such person and in such sum as the court may direct, to the effect that he will faithfully discharge his duties in the action or proceeding and obey the orders of the court. (5a)

Section 5. Service of copies of bonds; effect of disapproval of same. — The person filing a bond in accordance with the provisions of this Rule shall forthwith serve a copy thereof on each interested party, who may except to its sufficiency or of the surety or sureties thereon. If either the applicant's or the receiver's bond is found to be insufficient in amount, or if the surety or sureties thereon fail to justify, and a bond sufficient in amount with sufficient sureties approved after justification is not filed forthwith, the application shall be denied or the receiver discharged, as the case may be. If the bond of the adverse party is found to be insufficient in amount or the surety or sureties thereon fail to justify, and a bond sufficient in amount with sufficient sureties approved after justification is not filed forthwith, the receiver shall be appointed or re-appointed, as the case may be. (6a)

Section 6. General powers of receiver. — Subject to the control of the court in which the action or proceeding is pending a receiver shall have the power to bring and defend, in such capacity, actions in his own name; to take and keep possession of the property in controversy; to receive rents; to collect debts due to himself as receiver or to the fund, property, estate, person, or corporation of which he is the receiver; to compound for and compromise the same; to make transfers; to pay outstanding debts; to divide the money and other property that shall remain among the persons legally entitled to receive the same; and generally to do such acts respecting the property as the court may authorize. However, funds in the hands of a receiver may be invested only by order of the court upon the written consent of all the parties to the action. (7a)

No action may be filed by or against a receiver without leave of the court which appointed him. (n)

Section 7. Liability for refusal or neglect to deliver property to receiver. — A person who refuses or neglects, upon reasonable demand, to deliver to the receiver all the property, money, books, deeds, notes, bills, documents and papers within his power or control, subject of or involved in the action or proceeding, or in case of disagreement, as determined and ordered by the court, may be punished for contempt and shall be liable to the receiver for the money or the value of the property and other things so refused or neglected to be surrendered, together with all damages that may have been sustained by the party or parties entitled thereto as a consequence of such refusal or neglect. (n)

Section 8. Termination of receivership; compensation of receiver. — Whenever the court, motu proprio or on motion of either party, shall determine that the necessity for a receiver no longer exists, it shall, after due notice to all interested parties and hearing, settle the accounts of the receiver, direct the delivery of the funds and other property in his possession to the person adjudged to be entitled to receive them and order the discharge of the receiver from further duty as such. The court shall allow the receiver such reasonable compensation as the circumstances of the case warrant, to be taxed as costs against the defeated party, or apportioned, as justice requires. (8a)

Section 9. Judgment to include recovery against sureties. — The amount, if any, to be awarded to any party upon any bond filed in accordance with the provisions of this Rule, shall be claimed, ascertained, and granted under the same procedure prescribed in section 20 of Rule 57. (9a)

RULE 60

Replevin

Section 1. Application. — A party praying for the recovery of possession of personal property may, at the commencement of the action or at any time before answer, apply for an order for the delivery of such property to him, in the manner hereinafter provided. (1a)

Section 2. Affidavit and bond. — The applicant must show by his own affidavit or that of some other person who personally knows the facts:

(a) That the applicant is the owner of the property claimed, particularly describing it, or is entitled to the possession thereof;

(b) That the property is wrongfully detained by the adverse party, alleging the cause of detention thereof according to the best of his knowledge, information, and belief ;

(c) That the property has not been distrained or taken for a tax assessment or a fine pursuant to law, or seized under a writ of execution or preliminary attachment, or otherwise placed under custodia legis, or if so seized, that it is exempt from such seizure or custody; and

(d) The actual market value of the property.

The applicant must also give a bond, executed to the adverse party in double the value of the property as stated in the affidavit aforementioned, for the return of the property to the adverse party if such return be adjudged, and for the payment to the adverse party of such sum as he may recover from the applicant in the action. (2a)

Section 3. Order. — Upon the filing of such affidavit and approval of the bond, the court shall issue an order and the corresponding writ of replevin, describing the personal property alleged to be wrongfully detained and requiring the sheriff forthwith to take such property into his custody. (3a)

Section 4. Duty of the sheriff. — Upon receiving such order, the sheriff must serve a copy thereof on the adverse party, together with a copy of the application, affidavit and bond, and must forthwith take the property, if it be in the possession of the adverse party, or his agent, and retain it in his custody. If the property or any part thereof be concealed in a building or enclosure, the sheriff must demand its delivery, and if it be not delivered, he must cause the building or enclosure to be broken open and take the property into his possession. After the sheriff has take possession of the property as herein provided, he must keep it in a secure place and shall be responsible for its delivery to the party entitled thereto upon receiving his fees and necessary expenses for taking and keeping the same. (4a)

Section 5. Return of property. — If the adverse party objects to the sufficiency of the applicant's bond, or of the surety or sureties thereon, he cannot immediately require the return of the property, but if he does not so object, he may, at any time before the delivery of the property to the applicant, require the return thereof, by filing with the court where the action is pending a bond executed to the applicant, in double the value of the property as stated in the applicant's affidavit for the delivery thereof to the applicant, if such delivery be adjudged, and for the payment of such sum, to him as may be recovered against the adverse party, and by serving a copy of such bond on the applicant. (5a)

Section 6. Disposition of property by sheriff. — If within five (5) days after the taking of the property by the sheriff, the adverse party does not object to the sufficiency of the bond, or of the surety or sureties thereon; or if the adverse party so objects and the court affirms its approval of the applicant's bond or approves a new bond, or if the adverse party requires the return of the property but his bond is objected to and found insufficient and he does not forthwith file an approved bond, the property shall be delivered to the applicant. If for any reason the property is not delivered to the applicant, the sheriff must return it to the adverse party. (6a)

Section 7. Proceedings where property claimed by third person. — If the property taken is claimed by any person other than the party against whom the writ of replevin had been issued or his agent, and such person makes an affidavit of his title thereto, or right to the possession thereof, stating the grounds therefor, and serves such affidavit upon the sheriff while the latter has possession of the property and a copy thereof upon the applicant, the sheriff shall not be bound to keep the property under replevin or deliver it to the applicant unless the applicant or his agent, on demand of said sheriff, shall file a bond approved by the court to indemnify the third-party claimant in a sum not less than the value of the property under replevin as provided in section 2 hereof. In case of disagreement as to such value, the court shall determine the same. No claim for damages for the taking or keeping, of the property may be enforced against the bond unless the action therefor is filed within one hundred twenty (120) days from the date of the filing of the bond.

The sheriff shall not be liable for damages, for the taking or keeping of such property, to any such third-party claimant if such bond shall be filed. Nothing herein contained shall prevent such claimant or any third person from vindicating his claim to the property, or prevent the applicant from claiming damages against a third-party claimant who filed a frivolous or plainly spurious claim, in the same or a separate action.

When the writ of replevin is issued in favor of the Republic of the Philippines, or any officer duly representing it, the filing of such bond shall not be required, and in case the sheriff is sued for damages as a result of the replevin, he shall be represented by the Solicitor General, and if held liable therefor, the actual damages adjudged by the court shall be paid by the National Treasurer out of the funds to be appropriated for the purpose. (7a)

Section 8. Return of papers. — The sheriff must file the order, with his proceedings indorsed, thereon, with the court within ten (10) days after taking the property mentioned therein. (8a)

Section 9. Judgment. — After trial of the issues the court shall determine who has the right of possession to and the value of the property and shall render judgment in the alternative for the delivery thereof to the party entitled to the same, or for its value in case delivery cannot be made, and also for such damages as either party may prove, with costs. (9a)

Section 10. Judgment to include recovery against sureties. — The amount, if any, to be awarded to any party upon any bond filed in accordance with the provisions of this Rule, shall be claimed, ascertained, and granted under the same procedure as prescribed in section 20 of Rule 57. (10a)

RULE 61

Support Pendente Lite

Section 1. Application. — At the commencement of the proper action or proceeding, or at any time prior to the judgment or final order, a verified application for support pendente lite may be filed by any party stating the grounds for the claim and the financial conditions of both parties, and accompanied by affidavits, depositions or other authentic documents in support thereof. (1a)

Section 2. Comment. — A copy of the application and all supporting documents shall be served upon the adverse party, who shall have five (5) days to comment thereon unless a different period is fixed by the court upon his motion. The comment shall be verified and shall be accompanied by affidavits, depositions or other authentic documents in support thereof. (2a, 3a)

Section 3. Hearing. — After the comment is filed, or after the expiration of the period for its filing, the application shall be set for hearing not more than three (3) days thereafter. The facts in issue shall be proved in the same manner as is provided for evidence on motions. (4a)

Section 4. Order. — The court shall determine provisionally the pertinent facts, and shall render such orders as justice and equity may require, having the regard to the probable outcome of the case and such other circumstances as may aid in the proper resolution of the question involved. If the application is granted, the court shall fix the amount of money to be provisionally paid or such other forms of support as should be provided, taking into account the necessities of the applicant and the resources or means of the adverse party, and the terms of payment or mode for providing the support. If the application is denied, the principal case shall be tried and decided as early as possible. (5a)

Section 5. Enforcement of order. — If the adverse party fails to comply with an order granting support pendente lite, the court shall, motu proprio or upon motion; issue an order of execution against him, without prejudice to his liability for contempt. (6a)

When the person ordered to give support pendente lite refuses or fails to do so, any third person who furnished that support to the applicant may, after due notice and hearing in the same case obtain a writ of execution to enforce his right of reimbursement against the person ordered to provide such support. (h)

Section 6. Support in criminal cases. — In criminal actions where the civil liability includes support for the offspring as a consequence of the crime and the civil aspect thereof has not been waived, reserved and instituted prior to its filing, the accused may be ordered to provide support pendente lite to the child born to the offended party allegedly because of the crime. The application therefor may be filed successively by the offended party, her parents, grandparents or guardian and the State in the corresponding criminal case during its pendency, in accordance with the procedure established under this Rule. (n)

Section 7. Restitution. — When the judgment or final order of the court finds that the person who has been providing support pendente lite is not liable therefor, it shall order the recipient thereof to return to the former the amounts already paid with legal interest from the dates of actual payment, without prejudice to the right of the recipient to obtain reimbursement in a separate action from the person legally obliged to give the support. Should the recipient fail to reimburse said amounts, the person who provided the same may likewise seek reimbursement thereof in a separate action from the person legally obliged to give such support. (n)

Special Civil Actions

RULE 62

Interpleader

Section 1. When interpleader proper. — Whenever conflicting claims upon the same subject matter are or may be made against a person who claims no interest whatever in the subject matter, or an interest which in whole or in part is not disputed by the claimants, he may bring an action against the conflicting claimants to compel them to interplead and litigate their several claims among themselves. (1a, R63)

Section 2. Order. — Upon the filing of the complaint, the court shall issue an order requiring the conflicting claimants to interplead with one another. If the interests of justice so require, the court may direct in such order that the subject matter be paid or delivered to the court. (2a, R63)

Section 3. Summons. — Summons shall be served upon the conflicting claimants, together with a copy of the complaint and order. (3, R63)

Section 4. Motion to dismiss. — Within the time for filing an answer, each claimant may file a motion to dismiss on the ground of impropriety of the interpleader action or on other appropriate grounds specified in Rule 16. The period to file the answer shall be tolled and if the motion is denied, the movant may file his answer within the remaining period, but which shall not be less than five (5) days in any event, reckoned from notice of denial. (n)

Section 5. Answer and other pleadings. — Each claimant shall file his answer setting forth his claim within fifteen (15) days from service of the summons upon him, serving a copy thereof upon each of the other conflicting claimants who may file their reply thereto as provided by these Rules. If any claimant fails to plead within the time herein fixed, the court may, on motion, declare him in default and thereafter render judgment barring him from any claim in respect to the subject matter.

The parties in an interpleader action may file counterclaims, cross-claims, third-party complaints and responsive pleadings thereto, as provided by these Rules. (4a, R63)

Section 6. Determination. — After the pleadings of the conflicting claimants have been filed, and pre-trial has been conducted in accordance with the Rules, the court shall proceed to determine their respective rights and adjudicate their several claims. (5a, R63)

Section 7. Docket and other lawful fees, costs and litigation expenses as liens. — The docket and other lawful fees paid by the party who filed a complaint under this Rule, as well as the costs and litigation expenses, shall constitute a lien or change upon the subject matter of the action, unless the court shall order otherwise. (6a, R63)

RULE 63

Declaratory Relief and Similar Remedies

Section 1. Who may file petition. — Any person interested under a deed, will, contract or other written instrument, or whose rights are affected by a statute, executive order or regulation, ordinance, or any other governmental regulation may, before breach or violation thereof bring an action in the appropriate Regional Trial Court to determine any question of construction or validity arising, and for a declaration of his rights or duties, thereunder. (Bar Matter No. 803, 17 February 1998)

An action for the reformation of an instrument, to quiet title to real property or remove clouds therefrom, or to consolidate ownership under Article 1607 of the Civil Code, may be brought under this Rule. (1a, R64)

Section 2. Parties. — All persons who have or claim any interest which would be affected by the declaration shall be made parties; and no declaration shall, except as otherwise provided in these Rules, prejudice the rights of persons not parties to the action. (2a, R64)

Section 3. Notice on Solicitor General. — In any action which involves the validity of a statute, executive order or regulation, or any other governmental regulation, the Solicitor General shall be notified by the party assailing the same and shall be entitled to be heard upon such question. (3a, R64)

Section 4. Local government ordinances. — In any action involving the validity of a local government ordinance, the corresponding prosecutor or attorney of the local governmental unit involved shall be similarly notified and entitled to be heard. If such ordinance is alleged to be unconstitutional, the Solicitor General shall also be notified and entitled to be heard. (4a, R64)

Section 5. Court action discretionary. — Except in actions falling under the second paragraph of section 1 of this Rule, the court, motu proprio or upon motion, may refuse to exercise the power to declare rights and to construe instruments in any case where a decision would not terminate the uncertainty or controversy which gave rise to the action, or in any case where the declaration or construction is not necessary and proper under the circumstances. (5a, R64)

Section 6. Conversion into ordinary action. — If before the final termination of the case, a breach or violation of an instrument or a statute, executive order or regulation, ordinance, or any other governmental regulation should take place, the action may thereupon be converted into an ordinary action, and the parties shall be allowed to file such pleadings as may be necessary or proper. (6a, R64)

RULE 64

Review of Judgments and Final Orders or Resolutions of the Commission on Elections and the Commission on Audit

Section 1. Scope. — This Rule shall govern the review of judgments and final orders or resolutions of the Commission on Elections and the Commission on Audit. (n)

Section 2. Mode of review. — A judgment or final order or resolution of the Commission on Elections and the Commission on Audit may be brought by the aggrieved party to the Supreme Court on certiorari under Rule 65, except as hereinafter provided. (n; Bar Matter No. 803, 17 February 1998)

Section 3. Time to file petition. — The petition shall be filed within thirty (30) days from notice of the judgment or final order or resolution sought to be reviewed. The filing of a motion for new trial or reconsideration of said judgment or final order or resolution, if allowed under the procedural rules of the Commission concerned, shall interrupt the period herein fixed. If the motion is denied, the aggrieved party may file the petition within the remaining period, but which shall not be less than five (5) days in any event, reckoned from notice of denial. (n)

Section 4. Docket and other lawful fees. — Upon the filing of the petition, the petitioner shall pay to the clerk of court the docket and other lawful fees and deposit the amount of P500.00 for costs. (n)

Section 5. Form and contents of petition. — The petition shall be verified and filed in eighteen (18) legible copies. The petition shall name the aggrieved party as petitioner and shall join as respondents the Commission concerned and the person or persons interested in sustaining the judgment, final order or resolution a quo. The petition shall state the facts with certainty, present clearly the issues involved, set forth the grounds and brief arguments relied upon for review, and pray for judgment annulling or modifying the questioned judgment, final order or resolution. Findings of fact of the Commission supported by substantial evidence shall be final and non-reviewable.

The petition shall be accompanied by a clearly legible duplicate original or certified true copy of the judgment, final order or resolution subject thereof, together with certified true copies of such material portions of the record as are referred to therein and other documents relevant and pertinent thereto. The requisite number of copies of the petition shall contain plain copies of all documents attached to the original copy of said petition.

The petition shall state the specific material dates showing that it was filed within the period fixed herein, and shall contain a sworn certification against forum shopping as provided in the third paragraph of section 3, Rule 46.

The petition shall further be accompanied by proof of service of a copy thereof on the Commission concerned and on the adverse party, and of the timely payment of docket and other lawful fees.

The failure of petitioner to comply with any of the foregoing requirements shall be sufficient ground for the dismissal of the petition. (n)

Section 6. Order to comment. — If the Supreme Court finds the petition sufficient in form and substance, it shall order the respondents to file their comments on the petition within ten (10) days from notice thereof; otherwise, the Court may dismiss the petition outright. The Court may also dismiss the petition if it was filed manifestly for delay or the questions raised are too unsubstantial to warrant further proceedings. (n)

Section 7. Comments of respondents. — The comments of the respondents shall be filed in eighteen (18) legible copies. The original shall be accompanied by certified true copies of such material portions of the record as are referred to therein together with other supporting papers. The requisite number of copies of the comments shall contain plain copies of all documents attached to the original and a copy thereof shall be served on the petitioner.

No other pleading may be filed by any party unless required or allowed by the Court. (n)

Section 8. Effect of filing. — The filing of a petition for certiorari shall not stay the execution of the judgment or final order or resolution sought to be reviewed, unless the Supreme Court shall direct otherwise upon such terms as it may deem just. (n)

Section 9. Submission for decision. — Unless the Court sets the case for oral argument, or requires the parties to submit memoranda, the case shall be deemed submitted for decision upon the filing of the comments on the petition, or of such other pleadings or papers as may be required or allowed, or the expiration of the period to do so. (n)

RULE 65

Certiorari, Prohibition and Mandamus

Section 1. Petition for certiorari. — When any tribunal, board or officer exercising judicial or quasi-judicial functions has acted without or in excess its or his jurisdiction, or with grave abuse of discretion amounting to lack or excess of jurisdiction, and there is no appeal, or any plain, speedy, and adequate remedy in the ordinary course of law, a person aggrieved thereby may file a verified petition in the proper court, alleging the facts with certainty and praying that judgment be rendered annulling or modifying the proceedings of such tribunal, board or officer, and granting such incidental reliefs as law and justice may require.

The petition shall be accompanied by a certified true copy of the judgment, order or resolution subject thereof, copies of all pleadings and documents relevant and pertinent thereto, and a sworn certification of non-forum shopping as provided in the third paragraph of section 3, Rule 46. (1a)

Section 2. Petition for prohibition. — When the proceedings of any tribunal, corporation, board, officer or person, whether exercising judicial, quasi-judicial or ministerial functions, are without or in excess of its or his jurisdiction, or with grave abuse of discretion amounting to lack or excess of jurisdiction, and there is no appeal or any other plain, speedy, and adequate remedy in the ordinary course of law, a person aggrieved thereby may file a verified petition in the proper court, alleging the facts with certainty and praying that judgment be rendered commanding the respondent to desist from further proceedings in the action or matter specified therein, or otherwise granting such incidental reliefs as law and justice may require.

The petition shall likewise be accompanied by a certified true copy of the judgment, order or resolution subject thereof, copies of all pleadings and documents relevant and pertinent thereto, and a sworn certification of non-forum shopping as provided in the third paragraph of section 3, Rule 46. (2a)

Section 3. Petition for mandamus. — When any tribunal, corporation, board, officer or person unlawfully neglects the performance of an act which the law specifically enjoins as a duty resulting from an office, trust, or station, or unlawfully excludes another from the use and enjoyment of a right or office to which such other is entitled, and there is no other plain, speedy and adequate remedy in the ordinary course of law, the person aggrieved thereby may file a verified petition in the proper court, alleging the facts with certainty and praying that judgment be rendered commanding the respondent, immediately or at some other time to be specified by the court, to do the act required to be done to protect the rights of the petitioner, and to pay the damages sustained by the petitioner by reason of the wrongful acts of the respondent.

The petition shall also contain a sworn certification of non-forum shopping as provided in the third paragraph of section 3, Rule 46. (3a)

Section 4. When and where petition filed. — The petition shall be filed not later than sixty (60) days from notice of the judgment, order or resolution. In case a motion for reconsideration or new trial is timely filed, whether such motion is required or not, the sixty (60) day period shall be counted from notice of the denial of said motion.

The petition shall be filed in the Supreme Court or, if it relates to the acts or omissions of a lower court or of a corporation, board, officer or person, in the Regional Trial Court exercising jurisdiction over the territorial area as defined by the Supreme Court. It may also be filed in the Court of Appeals whether or not the same is in aid of its appellate jurisdiction, or in the Sandiganbayan if it is in aid of its appellate jurisdiction. If it involves the acts or omissions of a quasi-judicial agency, unless otherwise provided by law or these Rules, the petition shall be filed in and cognizable only by the Court of Appeals.

No extension of time to file the petition shall be granted except for compelling reason and in no case exceeding fifteen (15) days. (4a) (Bar Matter No. 803, 21 July 1998; A.M. No. 00-2-03-SC)

Section 5. Respondents and costs in certain cases. — When the petition filed relates to the acts or omissions of a judge, court, quasi-judicial agency, tribunal, corporation, board, officer or person, the petitioner shall join, as private respondent or respondents with such public respondent or respondents, the person or persons interested in sustaining the proceedings in the court; and it shall be the duty of such private respondents to appear and defend, both in his or their own behalf and in behalf of the public respondent or respondents affected by the proceedings, and the costs awarded in such proceedings in favor of the petitioner shall be against the private respondents only, and not against the judge, court, quasi-judicial agency, tribunal, corporation, board, officer or person impleaded as public respondent or respondents.

Unless otherwise specifically directed by the court where the petition is pending, the public respondents shall not appear in or file an answer or comment to the petition or any pleading therein. If the case is elevated to a higher court by either party, the public respondents shall be included therein as nominal parties. However, unless otherwise specifically directed by the court, they shall not appear or participate in the proceedings therein. (5a)

Section 6. Order to comment. — If the petition is sufficient in form and substance to justify such process, the court shall issue an order requiring the respondent or respondents to comment on the petition within ten (10) days from receipt of a copy thereof. Such order shall be served on the respondents in such manner as the court may direct together with a copy of the petition and any annexes thereto.

In petitions for certiorari before the Supreme Court and the Court of Appeals, the provisions of section 2, Rule 56, shall be observed. Before giving due course thereto, the court may require the respondents to file their comment to, and not a motion to dismiss, the petition. Thereafter, the court may require the filing of a reply and such other responsive or other pleadings as it may deem necessary and proper. (6a)

Section 7. Expediting proceedings; injunctive relief. — The court in which the petition is filed may issue orders expediting the proceedings, and it may also grant a temporary restraining order or a writ of preliminary injunction for the preservation of the rights of the parties pending such proceedings. The petition shall not interrupt the course of the principal case unless a temporary restraining order or a writ of preliminary injunction has been issued against the public respondent from further proceeding in the case. (7a)

Section 8. Proceedings after comment is filed. — After the comment or other pleadings required by the court are filed, or the time for the filing thereof has expired, the court may hear the case or require the parties to submit memoranda. If after such hearing or submission of memoranda or the expiration of the period for the filing thereof the court finds that the allegations of the petition are true, it shall render judgment for the relief prayed for or to which the petitioner is entitled.

The court, however, may dismiss the petition if it finds the same to be patently without merit, prosecuted manifestly for delay, or that the questions raised therein are too unsubstantial to require consideration. (8a)

Section 9. Service and enforcement of order or judgment. — A certified copy of the judgment rendered in accordance with the last preceding section shall be served upon the court, quasi-judicial agency, tribunal, corporation, board, officer or person concerned in such manner as the court may direct, and disobedience thereto shall be punished as contempt. An execution may issue for any damages or costs awarded in accordance with section 1 of Rule 39. (9a)

RULE 66

Quo Warranto

Section 1. Action by Government against individuals. — An action for the usurpation of a public office, position or franchise may be commenced by a verified petition brought in the name of the Republic of the Philippines against:

(a) A person who usurps, intrudes into, or unlawfully holds or exercises a public office, position or franchise;

(b) A public officer who does or suffers an act which, by the provision of law, constitutes a ground for the forfeiture of his office; or

(c) An association which acts as a corporation within the Philippines without being legally incorporated or without lawful authority so to act. (1a)

Section 2. When Solicitor General or public prosecutor must commence action. — The Solicitor General or a public prosecutor, when directed by the President of the Philippines, or when upon complaint or otherwise he has good reason to believe that any case specified in the preceding section can be established by proof, must commence such action. (3a)

Section 3. When Solicitor General or public prosecutor may commence action with permission of court. — The Solicitor General or a public prosecutor may, with the permission of the court in which the action is to be commenced, bring such an action at the request and upon the relation of another person; but in such case the officer bringing it may first require an indemnity for the expenses and costs of the action in an amount approved by and to be deposited in the court by the person at whose request and upon whose relation the same is brought. (4a)

Section 4. When hearing had on application for permission to commence action. — Upon application for permission to commence such action in accordance with the next preceding section, the court shall direct that notice be given to the respondent so that he may be heard in opposition thereto; and if permission is granted, the court shall issue an order to that effect, copies of which shall be served on all interested parties, and the petition shall then be filed within the period ordered by the court. (5a)

Section 5. When an individual may commence such an action. — A person claiming to be entitled to a public office or position usurped or unlawfully held or exercised by another may bring an action therefor in his own name. (6)

Section 6. Parties and contents of petition against usurpation. — When the action is against a person for usurping a public office, position or franchise, the petition shall set forth the name of the person who claim to be entitled thereto, if any, with an averment of his right to the same and that the respondent is unlawfully in possession thereof. All persons who claim to be entitled to the public office, position or franchise may be made parties, and their respective rights to such public office, position or franchise determined, in the same action. (7a)

Section 7. Venue. — An action under the preceding six sections can be brought only in the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals, or in the Regional Trial Court exercising jurisdiction over the territorial area where the respondent or any of the respondents resides, but when the Solicitor General commences the action, it may be brought in a Regional Trial Court in the City of Manila, in the Court of Appeals, or in the Supreme Court. (8a)

Section 8. Period for pleadings and proceedings may be reduced; action given precedence. — The court may reduce the period provided by these Rules for filing pleadings and for all other proceedings in the action in order to secure the most expeditious determination of the matters involved therein consistent with the rights of the parties. Such action may be given precedence over any other civil matter pending in the court. (9a)

Section 9. Judgment where usurpation found. — When the respondent is found guilty of usurping into, intruding into, or unlawfully holding or exercising a public office, position or franchise, judgment shall be rendered that such respondent be ousted and altogether excluded therefrom, and that the petitioner or relator, as the case may be, recover his costs. Such further judgment may be rendered determining the respective rights in and to the public office, position or franchise of all the parties to the action as justice requires. (10a)

Section 10. Rights of persons adjudged entitled to public office; delivery of books and papers; damages. — If judgment be rendered in favor of the person averred in the complaint to be entitled to the public office he may, after taking the oath of office and executing any official bond required by law, take upon himself the execution of the office, and may immediately thereafter demand of the respondent all the books and papers in the respondent's custody or control appertaining to the office to which the judgment relates. If the respondent refuses or neglects to deliver any book or paper pursuant to such demand, he may be punished for contempt as having disobeyed a lawful order of the court. The person adjudged entitled to the office may also bring action against the respondent to recover the damages sustained by such person by reason of the usurpation. (15a)

Section 11. Limitations. — Nothing contained in this Rule shall be construed to authorize an action against a public officer or employee for his ouster from office unless the same be commenced within one (1) year after the cause of such ouster, or the right of the petitioner to hold such office or position, arose, nor to authorize an action for damages in accordance with the provisions of the next preceding section unless the same be commenced within one (1) year after the entry of the judgment establishing the petitioner's right to the office in question. (16a)

Section 12. Judgment for costs. — In an action brought in accordance with the provisions of this Rule, the court may render judgment for costs against either the petitioner, the relator, or the respondent, or the person or persons claiming to be a corporation, or may apportion the costs, as justice requires. (17a)

RULE 67

Expropriation

Section 1. The complaint. — The right of eminent domain shall be exercised by the filing of a verified complaint which shall state with certainty the right and purpose of expropriation, describe the real or personal property sought to be expropriated, and join as defendants all persons owning or claiming to own, or occupying, any part thereof or interest therein, showing, so far as practicable, the separate interest of each defendant. If the title to any property sought to be expropriated appears to be in the Republic of the Philippines, although occupied by private individuals, or if the title is otherwise obscure or doubtful so that the plaintiff cannot with accuracy or certainty specify who are the real owners, averment to that effect shall be made in the complaint. (1a)

Section 2. Entry of plaintiff upon depositing value with authorized government depositary. — Upon the filing of the complaint or at any time thereafter and after due notice to the defendant, the plaintiff shall have the right to take or enter upon the possession of the real property involved if he deposits with the authorized government depositary an amount equivalent to the assessed value of the property for purposes of taxation to be held by such bank subject to the orders of the court. Such deposit shall be in money, unless in lieu thereof the court authorizes the deposit of a certificate of deposit of a government bank of the Republic of the Philippines payable on demand to the authorized government depositary.

If personal property is involved, its value shall be provisionally ascertained and the amount to be deposited shall be promptly fixed by the court.

After such deposit is made the court shall order the sheriff or other proper officer to forthwith place the plaintiff in possession of the property involved and promptly submit a report thereof to the court with service of copies to the parties. (2a)

Section 3. Defenses and objections. — If a defendant has no objection or defense to the action or the taking of his property, he may file and serve a notice of appearance and a manifestation to that effect, specifically designating or identifying the property in which he claims to be interested, within the time stated in the summons. Thereafter, he shall be entitled to notice of all proceedings affecting the same.

If a defendant has any objection to the filing of or the allegations in the complaint, or any objection or defense to the taking of his property, he shall serve his answer within the time stated in the summons. The answer shall specifically designate or identify the property in which he claims to have an interest, state the nature and extent of the interest claimed, and adduce all his objections and defenses to the taking of his property. No counterclaim, cross-claim or third-party complaint shall be alleged or allowed in the answer or any subsequent pleading.

A defendant waives all defenses and objections not so alleged but the court, in the interest of justice, may permit amendments to the answer to be made not later than ten (10) days from the filing thereof. However, at the trial of the issue of just compensation whether or not a defendant has previously appeared or answered, he may present evidence as to the amount of the compensation to be paid for his property, and he may share in the distribution of the award. (n)

Section 4. Order of expropriation. — If the objections to and the defenses against the right of the plaintiff to expropriate the property are overruled, or when no party appears to defend as required by this Rule, the court may issue an order of expropriation declaring that the plaintiff has a lawful right to take the property sought to be expropriated, for the public use or purpose described in the complaint, upon the payment of just compensation to be determined as of the date of the taking of the property or the filing of the complaint, whichever came first.

A final order sustaining the right to expropriate the property may be appealed by any party aggrieved thereby. Such appeal, however, shall not prevent the court from determining the just compensation to be paid.

After the rendition of such an order, the plaintiff shall not be permitted to dismiss or discontinue the proceeding except on such terms as the court deems just and equitable. (4a)

Section 5. Ascertainment of compensation. — Upon the rendition of the order of expropriation, the court shall appoint not more than three (3) competent and disinterested persons as commissioners to ascertain and report to the court the just compensation for the property sought to be taken. The order of appointment shall designate the time and place of the first session of the hearing to be held by the commissioners and specify the time within which their report shall be submitted to the court.

Copies of the order shall be served on the parties. Objections to the appointment of any of the commissioners shall be filed with the court within ten (10) days from service, and shall be resolved within thirty (30) days after all the commissioners shall have received copies of the objections. (5a)

Section 6. Proceedings by commissioners. — Before entering upon the performance of their duties, the commissioners shall take and subscribe an oath that they will faithfully perform their duties as commissioners, which oath shall be filed in court with the other proceedings in the case. Evidence may be introduced by either party before the commissioners who are authorized to administer oaths on hearings before them, and the commissioners shall, unless the parties consent to the contrary, after due notice to the parties, to attend, view and examine the property sought to be expropriated and its surroundings, and may measure the same, after which either party may, by himself or counsel, argue the case. The commissioners shall assess the consequential damages to the property not taken and deduct from such consequential damages the consequential benefits to be derived by the owner from the public use or purpose of the property taken, the operation of its franchise by the corporation or the carrying on of the business of the corporation or person taking the property. But in no case shall the consequential benefits assessed exceed the consequential damages assessed, or the owner be deprived of the actual value of his property so taken. (6a)

Section 7. Report by commissioners and judgment thereupon. — The court may order the commissioners to report when any particular portion of the real estate shall have been passed upon by them, and may render judgment upon such partial report, and direct the commissioners to proceed with their work as to subsequent portions of the property sought to be expropriated, and may from time to time so deal with such property. The commissioners shall make a full and accurate report to the court of all their proceedings, and such proceedings shall not be effectual until the court shall have accepted their report and rendered judgment in accordance with their recommendations. Except as otherwise expressly ordered by the court, such report shall be filed within sixty (60) days from the date the commissioners were notified of their appointment, which time may be extended in the discretion of the court. Upon the filing of such report, the clerk of the court shall serve copies thereof on all interested parties, with notice that they are allowed ten (10) days within which to file objections to the findings of the report, if they so desire. (7a)

Section 8. Action upon commissioners' report. — Upon the expiration of the period of ten (10) days referred to in the preceding section, or even before the expiration of such period but after all the interested parties have filed their objections to the report or their statement of agreement therewith, the court may, after hearing, accept the report and render judgment in accordance therewith, or, for cause shown, it may recommit the same to the commissioners for further report of facts, or it may set aside the report and appoint new commissioners; or it may accept the report in part and reject it in part and it may make such order or render such judgment as shall secure to the plaintiff the property essential to the exercise of his right of expropriation, and to the defendant just compensation for the property so taken. (8a)

Section 9. Uncertain ownership; conflicting claims. — If the ownership of the property taken is uncertain, or there are conflicting claims to any part thereof, the court may order any sum or sums awarded as compensation for the property to be paid to the court for the benefit of the person adjudged in the same proceeding to be entitled thereto. But the judgment shall require the payment of the sum or sums awarded to either the defendant or the court before the plaintiff can enter upon the property, or retain it for the public use or purpose if entry has already been made. (9a)

Section 10. Rights of plaintiff after judgment and payment. — Upon payment by the plaintiff to the defendant of the compensation fixed by the judgment, with legal interest thereon from the taking of the possession of the property, or after tender to him of the amount so fixed and payment of the costs, the plaintiff shall have the right to enter upon the property expropriated and to appropriate it for the public use or purpose defined in the judgment, or to retain it should he have taken immediate possession thereof under the provisions of section 2 hereof. If the defendant and his counsel absent themselves from the court, or decline to receive the amount tendered, the same shall be ordered to be deposited in court and such deposit shall have the same effect as actual payment thereof to the defendant or the person ultimately adjudged entitled thereto. (10a)

Section 11. Entry not delayed by appeal; effect of reversal. — The right of the plaintiff to enter upon the property of the defendant and appropriate the same for public use or purpose shall not be delayed by an appeal from the judgment. But if the appellate court determines that plaintiff has no right of expropriation, judgment shall be rendered ordering the Regional Trial Court to forthwith enforce the restoration to the defendant of the possession of the property, and to determine the damages which the defendant sustained and may recover by reason of the possession taken by the plaintiff. (11a)

Section 12. Costs, by whom paid. — The fees of the commissioners shall be taxed as a part of the costs of the proceedings. All costs, except those of rival claimants litigating their claims, shall be paid by the plaintiff, unless an appeal is taken by the owner of the property and the judgment is affirmed, in which event the costs of the appeal shall be paid by the owner. (12a)

Section 13. Recording judgment, and its effect. — The judgment entered in expropriation proceedings shall state definitely, by an adequate description, the particular property or interest therein expropriated, and the nature of the public use or purpose for which it is expropriated. When real estate is expropriated, a certified copy of such judgment shall be recorded in the registry of deeds of the place in which the property is situated, and its effect shall be to vest in the plaintiff the title to the real estate so described for such public use or purpose. (13a)

Section 14. Power of guardian in such proceedings. — The guardian or guardian ad litem of a minor or of a person judicially declared to be incompetent may, with the approval of the court first had, do and perform on behalf of his ward any act, matter, or thing respecting the expropriation for public use or purpose of property belonging to such minor or person judicially declared to be incompetent, which such minor or person judicially declared to be incompetent could do in such proceedings if he were of age or competent. (14a)

RULE 68

Foreclosure of Real Estate Mortgage

Section 1. Complaint in action for foreclosure. — In an action for the foreclosure of a mortgage or other encumbrance upon real estate, the complaint shall set forth the date and due execution of the mortgage; its assignments, if any; the names and residences of the mortgagor and the mortgagee; a description of the mortgaged property; a statement of the date of the note or other documentary evidence of the obligation secured by the mortgage, the amount claimed to be unpaid thereon; and the names and residences of all persons having or claiming an interest in the property subordinate in right to that of the holder of the mortgage, all of whom shall be made defendants in the action. (1a)

Section 2. Judgment on foreclosure for payment or sale. — If upon the trial in such action the court shall find the facts set forth in the complaint to be true, it shall ascertain the amount due to the plaintiff upon the mortgage debt or obligation, including interest and other charges as approved by the court, and costs, and shall render judgment for the sum so found due and order that the same be paid to the court or to the judgment obligee within a period of not less than ninety (90) days nor more than one hundred twenty (120) days from the entry of judgment, and that in default of such payment the property shall be sold at public auction to satisfy the judgment. (2a)

Section 3. Sale of mortgaged property; effect. — When the defendant, after being directed to do so as provided in the next preceding section, fails to pay the amount of the judgment within the period specified therein, the court, upon motion, shall order the property to be sold in the manner and under the provisions of Rule 39 and other regulations governing sales of real estate under execution. Such sale shall not affect the rights of persons holding prior encumbrances upon the property or a part thereof, and when confirmed by an order of the court, also upon motion, it shall operate to divest the rights in the property of all the parties to the action and to vest their rights in the purchaser, subject to such rights of redemption as may be allowed by law.

Upon the finality of the order of confirmation or upon the expiration of the period of redemption when allowed by law, the purchaser at the auction sale or last redemptioner, if any, shall be entitled to the possession of the property unless a third party is actually holding the same adversely to the judgment obligor. The said purchaser or last redemptioner may secure a writ of possession, upon motion, from the court which ordered the foreclosure. (3a)

Section 4. Disposition of proceeds of sale. — The amount realized from the foreclosure sale of the mortgaged property shall, after deducting the costs of the sale, be paid to the person foreclosing the mortgage, and when there shall be any balance or residue, after paying off the mortgage debt due, the same shall be paid to junior encumbrancers in the order of their priority, to be ascertained by the court, or if there be no such encumbrancers or there be a balance or residue after payment to them, then to the mortgagor or his duly authorized agent, or to the person entitled to it. (4a)

Section 5. How sale to proceed in case the debt is not all due. — If the debt for which the mortgage or encumbrance was held is not all due as provided in the judgment as soon as a sufficient portion of the property has been sold to pay the total amount and the costs due, the sale shall terminate; and afterwards as often as more becomes due for principal or interest and other valid charges, the court may, on motion, order more to be sold. But if the property cannot be sold in portions without prejudice to the parties, the whole shall be ordered to be sold in the first instance, and the entire debt and costs shall be paid, if the proceeds of the sale be sufficient therefor, there being a rebate of interest where such rebate is proper. (5a)

Section 6. Deficiency judgment. — If upon the sale of any real property as provided in the next preceding section there be a balance due to the plaintiff after applying the proceeds of the sale, the court, upon motion, shall render judgment against the defendant for any such balance for which, by the record of the case, he may be personally liable to the plaintiff, upon which execution may issue immediately if the balance is all due at the time of the rendition of the judgment; otherwise; the plaintiff shall be entitled to execution at such time as the balance remaining becomes due under the terms of the original contract, which time shall be stated in the judgment. (6a)

Section 7. Registration. — A certified copy of the final order of the court confirming the sale shall be registered in the registry of deeds. If no right of redemption exists, the certificate of title in the name of the mortgagor shall be cancelled, and a new one issued in the name of the purchaser.

Where a right of redemption exists, the certificate of title in the name of the mortgagor shall not be cancelled, but the certificate of sale and the order confirming the sale shall be registered and a brief memorandum thereof made by the registrar of deeds upon the certificate of title. In the event the property is redeemed, the deed of redemption shall be registered with the registry of deeds, and a brief memorandum thereof shall be made by the registrar of deeds on said certificate of title.

If the property is not redeemed, the final deed of sale executed by the sheriff in favor of the purchaser at the foreclosure sale shall be registered with the registry of deeds; whereupon the certificate of title in the name of the mortgagor shall be cancelled and a new one issued in the name of the purchaser. (n)

Section 8. Applicability of other provisions. — The provisions of sections 31, 32 and 34 of Rule 39 shall be applicable to the judicial foreclosure of real estate mortgages under this Rule insofar as the former are not inconsistent with or may serve to supplement the provisions of the latter. (8a)

RULE 69

Partition

Section 1. Complaint in action for partition of real estate. — A person having the right to compel the partition of real estate may do so as provided in this Rule, setting forth in his complaint the nature and extent of his title and an adequate description of the real estate of which partition is demanded and joining as defendants all other persons interested in the property. (1a)

Section 2. Order for partition and partition by agreement thereunder. — If after the trial the court finds that the plaintiff has the right thereto, it shall order the partition of the real estate among all the parties in interest. Thereupon the parties may, if they are able to agree, make the partition among themselves by proper instruments of conveyance, and the court shall confirm the partition so agreed upon by all the parties, and such partition, together with the order of the court confirming the same, shall be recorded in the registry of deeds of the place in which the property is situated. (2a)

A final order decreeing partition and accounting may be appealed by any party aggrieved thereby. (n)

Section 3. Commissioners to make partition when parties fail to agree. — If the parties are unable to agree upon the partition, the court shall appoint not more than three (3) competent and disinterested persons as commissioners to make the partition, commanding them to set off to the plaintiff and to each party in interest such part and proportion of the property as the court shall direct. (3a)

Section 4. Oath and duties of commissioners. — Before making such partition; the commissioners shall take and subscribe an oath that they will faithfully perform their duties as commissioners, which oath shall be filed in court with the other proceedings in the case. In making the partition, the commissioners shall view and examine the real estate, after due notice to the parties to attend at such view and examination, and shall hear the parties as to their preference in the portion of the property to be set apart to them and the comparative value thereof, and shall set apart the same to the parties in lots or parcels as will be most advantageous and equitable, having due regard to the improvements, situation and quality of the different parts thereof. (4a)

Section 5. Assignment or sale of real estate by commissioners. — When it is made to appear to the commissioners that the real state, or a portion thereof, cannot be divided without prejudice to the interests of the parties, the court may order it assigned to one of the parties willing to take the same, provided he pays to the other parties such amount as the commissioners deem equitable, unless one of the interested parties asks that the property be sold instead of being so assigned, in which case the court shall order the commissioners to sell the real estate at public sale under such conditions and within such time as the court may determine. (5a)

Section 6. Report of commissioners; proceedings not binding until confirmed. — The commissioners shall make a full and accurate report to the court of all their proceedings as to the partition, or the assignment of real estate to one of the parties, or the sale of the same. Upon the filing of such report, the clerk of court shall serve copies thereof on all the interested parties with notice that they are allowed ten (10) days within which to file objections to the findings of the report, if they so desire. No proceeding had before or conducted by the commissioners and rendered judgment thereon. (6a)

Section 7. Action of the court upon commissioners report. — Upon the expiration of the period of ten (10) days referred to in the preceding section or even before the expiration of such period but after the interested parties have filed their objections to the report or their statement of agreement therewith the court may, upon hearing, accept the report and render judgment in accordance therewith, or, for cause shown recommit the same to the commissioners for further report of facts; or set aside the report and appoint new commissioners; or accept the report in part and reject it in part; and may make such order and render such judgment as shall effectuate a fair and just partition of the real estate, or of its value, if assigned or sold as above provided, between the several owners thereof. (7)

Section 8. Accounting for rent and profits in action for partition. — In an action for partition in accordance with this Rule, a party shall recover from another his just share of rents and profits received by such other party from the real estate in question, and the judgment shall include an allowance for such rents and profits. (8a)

Section 9. Power of guardian in such proceedings. — The guardian or guardian ad litem of a minor or person judicially declared to be incompetent may, with the approval of the court first had, do and perform on behalf of his ward any act, matter, or thing respecting the partition of real estate, which the minor or person judicially declared to be incompetent could do in partition proceedings if he were of age or competent. (9a)

Section 10. Costs and expenses to be taxed and collected. — The court shall equitably tax and apportion between or among the parties the costs and expenses which accrue in the action, including the compensation of the commissioners, having regard to the interests of the parties, and execution may issue therefor as in other cases. (10a)

Section 11. The judgment and its effect; copy to be recorded in registry of deeds. — If actual partition of property is made, the judgment shall state definitely, by metes and bounds and adequate description, the particular portion of the real estate assigned to each party, and the effect of the judgment shall be to vest in each party to the action in severalty the portion of the real estate assigned to him. If the whole property is assigned to one of the parties upon his paying to the others the sum or sums ordered by the court, the judgment shall state the fact of such payment and of the assignment of the real estate to the party making the payment, and the effect of the judgment shall be to vest in the party making the payment the whole of the real estate free from any interest on the part of the other parties to the action. If the property is sold and the sale confirmed by the court, the judgment shall state the name of the purchaser or purchasers and a definite description of the parcels of real estate sold to each purchaser, and the effect of the judgment shall be to vest the real estate in the purchaser or purchasers making the payment or payments, free from the claims of any of the parties to the action. A certified copy of the judgment shall in either case be recorded in the registry of deeds of the place in which the real estate is situated, and the expenses of such recording shall be taxed as part of the costs of the action. (11a)

Section 12. Neither paramount rights nor amicable partition affected by this Rule. — Nothing in this Rule contained shall be construed so as to prejudice, defeat, or destroy the right or title of any person claiming the real estate involved by title under any other person, or by title paramount to the title of the parties among whom the partition may have been made, nor so as to restrict or prevent persons holding real estate jointly or in common from making an amicable partition thereof by agreement and suitable instruments of conveyance without recourse to an action. (12a)

Section 13. Partition of personal property. — The provisions of this Rule shall apply to partitions of estates composed of personal property, or of both real and personal property, in so far as the same may be applicable. (13)

RULE 70

Forcible Entry and Unlawful Detainer

Section 1. Who may institute proceedings, and when. — Subject to the provisions of the next succeeding section, a person deprived of the possession of any land or building by force, intimidation, threat, strategy, or stealth, or a lessor, vendor, vendee, or other person against whom the possession of any land or building is unlawfully withheld after the expiration or termination of the right to hold possession, by virtue of any contract, express or implied, or the legal representatives or assigns of any such lessor, vendor, vendee, or other person, may, at any time within one (1) year after such unlawful deprivation or withholding of possession, bring an action in the proper Municipal Trial Court against the person or persons unlawfully withholding or depriving of possession, or any person or persons claiming under them, for the restitution of such possession, together with damages and costs. (1a)

Section 2. Lessor to proceed against lessee only after demand. — Unless otherwise stipulated, such action by the lesser shall be commenced only after demand to pay or comply with the conditions of the lease and to vacate is made upon the lessee, or by serving written notice of such demand upon the person found on the premises if no person be found thereon, and the lessee fails to comply therewith after fifteen (15) days in the case of land or five (5) days in the case of buildings. (2a)

Section 3. Summary procedure. — Except in cases covered by the agricultural tenancy laws or when the law otherwise expressly provides, all actions for forcible entry and unlawful detainer, irrespective of the amount of damages or unpaid rentals sought to be recovered, shall be governed by the summary procedure hereunder provided. (n)

Section 4. Pleadings allowed. — The only pleadings allowed to be filed are the complaint, compulsory counterclaim and cross-claim pleaded in the answer, and the answers thereto. All pleadings shall be verified. (3a, RSP)

Section 5. Action on complaint. — The court may, from an examination of the allegations in the complaint and such evidence as may be attached thereto, dismiss the case outright on any of the grounds for the dismissal of a civil action which are apparent therein. If no ground for dismissal is found, it shall forthwith issue summons. (n)

Section 6. Answers. — Within ten (10) days from service of summons, the defendant shall file his answer to the complaint and serve a copy thereof on the plaintiff. Affirmative and negative defenses not pleaded therein shall be deemed waived, except lack of jurisdiction over the subject matter. Cross-claims and compulsory counterclaims not asserted in the answer shall be considered barred. The answer to counterclaims or cross-claims shall be served and filed within ten (10) days from service of the answer in which they are pleaded. (5 RSP)

Section 7. Effect of failure to answer. — Should the defendant fail to answer the complaint within the period above provided, the court, motu proprio or on motion of the plaintiff, shall render judgment as may be warranted by the facts alleged in the complaint and limited to what is prayed for therein. The court may in its discretion reduce the amount of damages and attorney's fees claimed for being excessive or otherwise unconscionable, without prejudice to the applicability of section 3 (c), Rule 9 if there are two or more defendants. (6, RSP)

Section 8. Preliminary conference; appearance of parties. — Not later than thirty (30) days after the last answer is filed, a preliminary conference shall be held. The provisions of Rule 18 on pre-trial shall be applicable to the preliminary conference unless inconsistent with the provisions of this Rule.

The failure of the plaintiff to appear in the preliminary conference shall be cause for the dismissal of his complaint. The defendant who appears in the absence of the plaintiff shall be entitled to judgment on his counterclaim in accordance with the next preceding section. All cross-claims shall be dismissed. (7, RSP)

If a sole defendant shall fail to appear, the plaintiff shall likewise be entitled to judgment in accordance with the next preceding section. This procedure shall not apply where one of two or more defendants sued under a common cause of action defense shall appear at the preliminary conference.

No postponement of the preliminary conference shall be granted except for highly meritorious grounds and without prejudice to such sanctions as the court in the exercise of sound discretion may impose on the movant. (n)

Section 9. Record of preliminary conference. — Within five (5) days after the termination of the preliminary conference, the court shall issue an order stating the matters taken up therein, including but not limited to:

1. Whether the parties have arrived at an amicable settlement, and if so, the terms thereof;

2. The stipulations or admissions entered into by the parties;

3. Whether, on the basis of the pleadings and the stipulations and admission made by the parties, judgment may be rendered without the need of further proceedings, in which event the judgment shall be rendered within thirty (30) days from issuance of the order;

4. A clear specification of material facts which remain converted; and

5. Such other matters intended to expedite the disposition of the case. (8, RSP)

Section 10. Submission of affidavits and position papers. — Within ten (10) days from receipt of the order mentioned in the next preceding section, the parties shall submit the affidavits of their witnesses and other evidence on the factual issues defined in the order, together with their position papers setting forth the law and the facts relied upon by them. (9, RSP)

Section 11. Period for rendition of judgment. — Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the affidavits and position papers, or the expiration of the period for filing the same, the court shall render judgment.

However, should the court find it necessary to clarify certain material facts, during the said period, issue an order specifying the matters to be clarified, and require the parties to submit affidavits or other evidence on the said matters within ten (10) days from receipt of said order. Judgment shall be rendered within fifteen (15) days after the receipt of the last affidavit or the expiration of the period for filing the same.

The court shall not resort to the foregoing procedure just to gain time for the rendition of the judgment. (n)

Section 12. Referral for conciliation. — Cases requiring referral for conciliation, where there is no showing of compliance with such requirement, shall be dismissed without prejudice, and may be revived only after that requirement shall have been complied with. (18a, RSP)

Section 13. Prohibited pleadings and motions. — The following petitions, motions, or pleadings shall not be allowed:

1. Motion to dismiss the complaint except on the ground of lack of jurisdiction over the subject matter, or failure to comply with section 12;

2. Motion for a bill of particulars;

3. Motion for new trial, or for reconsideration of a judgment, or for reopening of trial;

4. Petition for relief from judgment;

5. Motion for extension of time to file pleadings, affidavits or any other paper;

6. Memoranda;

7. Petition for certiorari, mandamus, or prohibition against any interlocutory order issued by the court;

8. Motion to declare the defendant in default;

9. Dilatory motions for postponement;

10. Reply;

11. Third-party complaints;

12. Interventions. (19a, RSP)

Section 14. Affidavits. — The affidavits required to be submitted under this Rule shall state only facts of direct personal knowledge of the affiants which are admissible in evidence, and shall show their competence to testify to the matters stated therein.

A violation of this requirement may subject the party or the counsel who submits the same to disciplinary action, and shall be cause to expunge the inadmissible affidavit or portion thereof from the record. (20, RSP)

Section 15. Preliminary injunction. — The court may grant preliminary injunction, in accordance with the provisions of Rule 58 hereof, to prevent the defendant from committing further acts of dispossession against the plaintiff.

A possessor deprived of his possession through forcible from the filing of the complaint, present a motion in the action for forcible entry or unlawful detainer for the issuance of a writ of preliminary mandatory injunction to restore him in his possession. The court shall decide the motion within thirty (30) days from the filing thereof. (3a)

Section 16. Resolving defense of ownership. — When the defendant raises the defense of ownership in his pleadings and the question of possession cannot be resolved without deciding the issue of ownership, the issue of ownership shall be resolved only to determine the issue of possession. (4a)

Section 17. Judgment. — If after trial court finds that the allegations of the complaint are true, it shall render judgment in favor of the plaintiff for the restitution of the premises, the sum justly due as arrears of rent or as reasonable compensation for the use and occupation of the premises, attorney's fees and costs. If a counterclaim is established, the court shall render judgment for the sum found in arrears from either party and award costs as justice requires. (6a)

Section 18. Judgment conclusive only on possession; not conclusive in actions involving title or ownership. — The judgment rendered in an action for forcible entry or detainer shall be conclusive with respect to the possession only and shall in no wise bind the title or affect the ownership of the land or building. Such judgment shall not bar an action between the same parties respecting title to the land or building.

The judgment or final order shall be appealable to the appropriate Regional Trial Court which shall decide the same on the basis of the entire record of the proceedings had in the court of origin and such memoranda and/or briefs as may be submitted by the parties or required by the Regional Trial Court. (7a)

Section 19. Immediate execution of judgment; how to stay same. — If judgment is rendered against the defendant, execution shall issue immediately upon motion unless an appeal has been perfected and the defendant to stay execution files a sufficient supersedeas bond, approved by the Municipal Trial Court and executed in favor of the plaintiff to pay the rents, damages, and costs accruing down to the time of the judgment appealed from, and unless, during the pendency of the appeal, he deposits with the appellate court the amount of rent due from time to time under the contract, if any, as determined by the judgment of the Municipal Trial Court. In the absence of a contract, he shall deposit with the Regional Trial Court the reasonable value of the use and occupation of the premises for the preceding month or period at the rate determined by the judgment of the lower court on or before the tenth day of each succeeding month or period. The supersedeas bond shall be transmitted by the Municipal Trial Court, with the papers, to the clerk of the Regional Trial Court to which the action is appealed.

All amounts so paid to the appellate court shall be deposited with said court or authorized government depositary bank, and shall be held there until the final disposition of the appeal, unless the court, by agreement of the interested parties, or in the absence of reasonable grounds of opposition to a motion to withdraw, or for justifiable reasons, shall decree otherwise. Should the defendant fail to make the payments above prescribed from time to time during the pendency of the appeal, the appellate court, upon motion of the plaintiff, and upon proof of such failure, shall order the execution of the judgment appealed from with respect to the restoration of possession, but such execution shall not be a bar to the appeal taking its course until the final disposition thereof on the merits.

After the case is decided by the Regional Trial Court, any money paid to the court by the defendant for purposes of the stay of execution shall be disposed of in accordance with the provisions of the judgment of the Regional Trial Court. In any case wherein it appears that the defendant has been deprived of the lawful possession of land or building pending the appeal by virtue of the execution of the judgment of the Municipal Trial Court, damages for such deprivation of possession and restoration of possession and restoration of possession may be allowed the defendant in the judgment of the Regional Trial Court disposing of the appeal. (8a)

Section 20. Preliminary mandatory injunction in case of appeal. — Upon motion of the plaintiff, within ten (10) days from the perfection of the appeal to the Regional Trial Court, the latter may issue a writ of preliminary mandatory injunction to restore the plaintiff in possession if the court is satisfied that the defendant's appeal is frivolous or dilatory or that the appeal of the plaintiff is prima facie meritorious. (9a)

Section 21. Immediate execution on appeal to Court of Appeals or Supreme Court. — The judgment of the Regional Trial Court against the defendant shall be immediately executory, without prejudice to a further appeal that may be taken therefrom. (10a)

RULE 71

Contempt

Section 1. Direct contempt punished summarily. — A person guilty of misbehavior in the presence of or so near a court as to obstruct or interrupt the proceedings before the same, including disrespect toward the court, offensive personalities toward others, or refusal to be sworn or to answer as a witness, or to subscribe an affidavit or deposition when lawfully required to do so, may be summarily adjudged in contempt by such court and punished by a fine not exceeding two thousand pesos or imprisonment not exceeding ten (10) days, or both, if it be a Regional Trial Court or a court of equivalent or higher rank, or by a fine not exceeding two hundred pesos or imprisonment not exceeding one (1) day, or both, if it be a lower court. (1a)

Section 2. Remedy therefrom. — The person adjudged in direct contempt by any court may not appeal therefrom, but may avail himself of the remedies of certiorari or prohibition. The execution of the judgment shall be suspended pending resolution of such petition, provided such person files a bond fixed by the court which rendered the judgment and conditioned that he will abide by and perform the judgment should the petition be decided against him. (2a)

Section 3. Indirect contempt to be punished after charge and hearing. — After a charge in writing has been filed, and an opportunity given to the respondent to comment thereon within such period as may be fixed by the court and to be heard by himself or counsel, a person guilty of any of the following acts may be punished for indirect contempt;

(a) Misbehavior of an officer of a court in the performance of his official duties or in his official transactions;

(b) Disobedience of or resistance to a lawful writ, process, order, or judgment of a court, including the act of a person who, after being dispossessed or ejected from any real property by the judgment or process of any court of competent jurisdiction, enters or attempts or induces another to enter into or upon such real property, for the purpose of executing acts of ownership or possession, or in any manner disturbs the possession given to the person adjudged to be entitled thereto;

(c) Any abuse of or any unlawful interference with the processes or proceedings of a court not constituting direct contempt under section 1 of this Rule;

(d) Any improper conduct tending, directly or indirectly, to impede, obstruct, or degrade the administration of justice;

(e) Assuming to be an attorney or an officer of a court, and acting as such without authority;

(f) Failure to obey a subpoena duly served;

(g) The rescue, or attempted rescue, of a person or property in the custody of an officer by virtue of an order or process of a court held by him.

But nothing in this section shall be so construed as to prevent the court from issuing process to bring the respondent into court, or from holding him in custody pending such proceedings. (3a)

Section 4. How proceedings commenced. — Proceedings for indirect contempt may be initiated motu propio by the court against which the contempt was committed by an order or any other formal charge requiring the respondent to show cause why he should not be punished for contempt.

In all other cases, charges for indirect contempt shall be commenced by a verified petition with supporting particulars and certified true copies of documents or papers involved therein, and upon full compliance with the requirements for filing initiatory pleadings for civil actions in the court concerned. If the contempt charges arose out of or are related to a principal action pending in the court, the petition for contempt shall allege that fact but said petition shall be docketed, heard and decided separately, unless the court in its discretion orders the consolidation of the contempt charge and the principal action for joint hearing and decision. (n)

Section 5. Where charge to be filed. — Where the charge for indirect contempt has been committed against a Regional Trial Court or a court of equivalent or higher rank, or against an officer appointed by it, the charge may be filed with such court. Where such contempt has been committed against a lower court, the charge may be filed with the Regional Trial Court of the place in which the lower court is sitting; but the proceedings may also be instituted in such lower court subject to appeal to the Regional Trial Court of such place in the same manner as provided in section 11 of this Rule. (4a; Bar Matter No. 803, 21 July 1998)

Section 6. Hearing; release on bail. — If the hearing is not ordered to be had forthwith, the respondent may be released from custody upon filing a bond, in an amount fixed by the court, for his appearance at the hearing of the charge. On the day set therefor, the court shall proceed to investigate the charge and consider such comment, testimony or defense as the respondent may make or offer. (5a)

Section 7. Punishment for indirect contempt. — If the respondent is adjudged guilty of indirect contempt committed against a Regional Trial Court or a court of equivalent or higher rank, he may be punished by a fine not exceeding thirty thousand pesos or imprisonment not exceeding six (6) months, or both. If he is adjudged guilty of contempt committed against a lower court, he may be punished by a fine not exceeding five thousand pesos or imprisonment not exceeding one (1) month, or both. If the contempt consists in the violation of a writ of injunction, temporary restraining order or status quo order, he may also be ordered to make complete restitution to the party injured by such violation of the property involved or such amount as may be alleged and proved.

The writ of execution, as in ordinary civil actions, shall issue for the enforcement of a judgment imposing a fine unless the court otherwise provides. (6a)

Section 8. Imprisonment until order obeyed. — When the contempt consists in the refusal or omission to do an act which is yet in the power of the respondent to perform, he may be imprisoned by order of the court concerned until he performs it. (7a)

Section 9. Proceeding when party released on bail fails to answer. — When a respondent released on bail fails to appear on the day fixed for the hearing, the court may issue another order of arrest or may order the bond for his appearance to be forfeited and confiscated, or both; and, if the bond be proceeded against, the measure of damages shall be the extent of the loss or injury sustained by the aggrieved party by reason of the misconduct for which the contempt charge was prosecuted, with the costs of the proceedings, and such recovery shall be for the benefit of the party injured. If there is no aggrieved party, the bond shall be liable and disposed of as in criminal cases. (8a)

Section 10. Court may release respondent. — The court which issued the order imprisoning a person for contempt may discharge him from imprisonment when it appears that public interest will not be prejudiced by his release. (9a)

Section 11. Review of judgment or final order; bond for stay. — The judgment or final order of a court in a case of indirect contempt may be appealed to the proper court as in criminal cases. But execution of the judgment or final order shall not be suspended until a bond is filed by the person adjudged in contempt, in an amount fixed by the court from which the appeal is taken, conditioned that if the appeal be decided against him he will abide by and perform the judgment or final order. (10a)

Section 12. Contempt against quasi-judicial entities. — Unless otherwise provided by law, this Rule shall apply to contempt committed against persons, entities, bodies or agencies exercising quasi-judicial functions, or shall have suppletory effect to such rules as they may have adopted pursuant to authority granted to them by law to punish for contempt. The Regional Trial Court of the place wherein the contempt has been committed shall have jurisdiction over such charges as may be filed therefor. (n)

[codalsetal]

Rules 128-134: Revised Rules on Evidence

REVISED RULES ON EVIDENCE

(Rules 128-134, Rules of Court)

AS AMENDED PER RESOLUTION

ADOPTED ON MARCH 14, 1989

  PART IV

RULES OF EVIDENCE

RULE 128

General Provisions

Section 1. Evidence defined. — Evidence is the means, sanctioned by these rules, of ascertaining in a judicial proceeding the truth respecting a matter of fact. (1)

Section 2. Scope. — The rules of evidence shall be the same in all courts and in all trials and hearings, except as otherwise provided by law or these rules. (2a)

Section 3. Admissibility of evidence. — Evidence is admissible when it is relevant to the issue and is not excluded by the law of these rules. (3a)

Section 4. Relevancy; collateral matters. — Evidence must have such a relation to the fact in issue as to induce belief in its existence or non-existence. Evidence on collateral matters shall not be allowed, except when it tends in any reasonable degree to establish the probability or improbability of the fact in issue. (4a)

RULE 129

What Need Not Be Proved

Section 1. Judicial notice, when mandatory. — A court shall take judicial notice, without the introduction of evidence, of the existence and territorial extent of states, their political history, forms of government and symbols of nationality, the law of nations, the admiralty and maritime courts of the world and their seals, the political constitution and history of the Philippines, the official acts of legislative, executive and judicial departments of the Philippines, the laws of nature, the measure of time, and the geographical divisions. (1a)

Section 2. Judicial notice, when discretionary. — A court may take judicial notice of matters which are of public knowledge, or are capable to unquestionable demonstration, or ought to be known to judges because of their judicial functions. (1a)

Section 3. Judicial notice, when hearing necessary. — During the trial, the court, on its own initiative, or on request of a party, may announce its intention to take judicial notice of any matter and allow the parties to be heard thereon.

After the trial, and before judgment or on appeal, the proper court, on its own initiative or on request of a party, may take judicial notice of any matter and allow the parties to be heard thereon if such matter is decisive of a material issue in the case. (n)

Section 4. Judicial admissions. — An admission, verbal or written, made by the party in the course of the proceedings in the same case, does not require proof. The admission may be contradicted only by showing that it was made through palpable mistake or that no such admission was made. (2a)

RULE 130

Rules of Admissibility

A. OBJECT (REAL) EVIDENCE

Section 1. Object as evidence. — Objects as evidence are those addressed to the senses of the court. When an object is relevant to the fact in issue, it may be exhibited to, examined or viewed by the court. (1a)

B. DOCUMENTARY EVIDENCE

Section 2. Documentary evidence. — Documents as evidence consist of writing or any material containing letters, words, numbers, figures, symbols or other modes of written expression offered as proof of their contents. (n)

1. Best Evidence Rule

Section 3. Original document must be produced; exceptions. — When the subject of inquiry is the contents of a document, no evidence shall be admissible other than the original document itself, except in the following cases:

(a) When the original has been lost or destroyed, or cannot be produced in court, without bad faith on the part of the offeror;

(b) When the original is in the custody or under the control of the party against whom the evidence is offered, and the latter fails to produce it after reasonable notice;

(c) When the original consists of numerous accounts or other documents which cannot be examined in court without great loss of time and the fact sought to be established from them is only the general result of the whole; and

(d) When the original is a public record in the custody of a public officer or is recorded in a public office. (2a)

Section 4. Original of document. —

(a) The original of the document is one the contents of which are the subject of inquiry.

(b) When a document is in two or more copies executed at or about the same time, with identical contents, all such copies are equally regarded as originals.

(c) When an entry is repeated in the regular course of business, one being copied from another at or near the time of the transaction, all the entries are likewise equally regarded as originals. (3a)

2. Secondary Evidence

Section 5. When original document is unavailable. — When the original document has been lost or destroyed, or cannot be produced in court, the offeror, upon proof of its execution or existence and the cause of its unavailability without bad faith on his part, may prove its contents by a copy, or by a recital of its contents in some authentic document, or by the testimony of witnesses in the order stated. (4a)

Section 6. When original document is in adverse party's custody or control. — If the document is in the custody or under the control of adverse party, he must have reasonable notice to produce it. If after such notice and after satisfactory proof of its existence, he fails to produce the document, secondary evidence may be presented as in the case of its loss. (5a)

Section 7. Evidence admissible when original document is a public record. — When the original of document is in the custody of public officer or is recorded in a public office, its contents may be proved by a certified copy issued by the public officer in custody thereof. (2a)

Section 8. Party who calls for document not bound to offer it. — A party who calls for the production of a document and inspects the same is not obliged to offer it as evidence. (6a)

3. Parol Evidence Rule

Section 9. Evidence of written agreements. — When the terms of an agreement have been reduced to writing, it is considered as containing all the terms agreed upon and there can be, between the parties and their successors in interest, no evidence of such terms other than the contents of the written agreement.

However, a party may present evidence to modify, explain or add to the terms of written agreement if he puts in issue in his pleading:

(a) An intrinsic ambiguity, mistake or imperfection in the written agreement;

(b) The failure of the written agreement to express the true intent and agreement of the parties thereto;

(c) The validity of the written agreement; or

(d) The existence of other terms agreed to by the parties or their successors in interest after the execution of the written agreement.

The term "agreement" includes wills. (7a)

4. Interpretation Of Documents

Section 10. Interpretation of a writing according to its legal meaning. — The language of a writing is to be interpreted according to the legal meaning it bears in the place of its execution, unless the parties intended otherwise. (8)

Section 11. Instrument construed so as to give effect to all provisions. — In the construction of an instrument, where there are several provisions or particulars, such a construction is, if possible, to be adopted as will give effect to all. (9)

Section 12. Interpretation according to intention; general and particular provisions. — In the construction of an instrument, the intention of the parties is to be pursued; and when a general and a particular provision are inconsistent, the latter is paramount to the former. So a particular intent will control a general one that is inconsistent with it. (10)

Section 13. Interpretation according to circumstances. — For the proper construction of an instrument, the circumstances under which it was made, including the situation of the subject thereof and of the parties to it, may be shown, so that the judge may be placed in the position of those who language he is to interpret. (11)

Section 14. Peculiar signification of terms. — The terms of a writing are presumed to have been used in their primary and general acceptation, but evidence is admissible to show that they have a local, technical, or otherwise peculiar signification, and were so used and understood in the particular instance, in which case the agreement must be construed accordingly. (12)

Section 15. Written words control printed. — When an instrument consists partly of written words and partly of a printed form, and the two are inconsistent, the former controls the latter. (13)

Section 16. Experts and interpreters to be used in explaining certain writings. — When the characters in which an instrument is written are difficult to be deciphered, or the language is not understood by the court, the evidence of persons skilled in deciphering the characters, or who understand the language, is admissible to declare the characters or the meaning of the language. (14)

Section 17. Of Two constructions, which preferred. — When the terms of an agreement have been intended in a different sense by the different parties to it, that sense is to prevail against either party in which he supposed the other understood it, and when different constructions of a provision are otherwise equally proper, that is to be taken which is the most favorable to the party in whose favor the provision was made. (15)

Section 18. Construction in favor of natural right. — When an instrument is equally susceptible of two interpretations, one in favor of natural right and the other against it, the former is to be adopted. (16)

Section 19. Interpretation according to usage. — An instrument may be construed according to usage, in order to determine its true character. (17)

C. TESTIMONIAL EVIDENCE

1. Qualification of Witnesses

Section 20. Witnesses; their qualifications. — Except as provided in the next succeeding section, all persons who can perceive, and perceiving, can make their known perception to others, may be witnesses.

Religious or political belief, interest in the outcome of the case, or conviction of a crime unless otherwise provided by law, shall not be ground for disqualification. (18a)

Section 21. Disqualification by reason of mental incapacity or immaturity. — The following persons cannot be witnesses:

(a) Those whose mental condition, at the time of their production for examination, is such that they are incapable of intelligently making known their perception to others;

(b) Children whose mental maturity is such as to render them incapable of perceiving the facts respecting which they are examined and of relating them truthfully. (19a)

Section 22. Disqualification by reason of marriage. — During their marriage, neither the husband nor the wife may testify for or against the other without the consent of the affected spouse, except in a civil case by one against the other, or in a criminal case for a crime committed by one against the other or the latter's direct descendants or ascendants. (20a)

Section 23. Disqualification by reason of death or insanity of adverse party. — Parties or assignor of parties to a case, or persons in whose behalf a case is prosecuted, against an executor or administrator or other representative of a deceased person, or against a person of unsound mind, upon a claim or demand against the estate of such deceased person or against such person of unsound mind, cannot testify as to any matter of fact occurring before the death of such deceased person or before such person became of unsound mind. (20a)

Section 24. Disqualification by reason of privileged communication. — The following persons cannot testify as to matters learned in confidence in the following cases:

(a) The husband or the wife, during or after the marriage, cannot be examined without the consent of the other as to any communication received in confidence by one from the other during the marriage except in a civil case by one against the other, or in a criminal case for a crime committed by one against the other or the latter's direct descendants or ascendants;

(b) An attorney cannot, without the consent of his client, be examined as to any communication made by the client to him, or his advice given thereon in the course of, or with a view to, professional employment, nor can an attorney's secretary, stenographer, or clerk be examined, without the consent of the client and his employer, concerning any fact the knowledge of which has been acquired in such capacity;

(c) A person authorized to practice medicine, surgery or obstetrics cannot in a civil case, without the consent of the patient, be examined as to any advice or treatment given by him or any information which he may have acquired in attending such patient in a professional capacity, which information was necessary to enable him to act in capacity, and which would blacken the reputation of the patient;

(d) A minister or priest cannot, without the consent of the person making the confession, be examined as to any confession made to or any advice given by him in his professional character in the course of discipline enjoined by the church to which the minister or priest belongs;

(e) A public officer cannot be examined during his term of office or afterwards, as to communications made to him in official confidence, when the court finds that the public interest would suffer by the disclosure. (21a)

2. Testimonial Privilege

Section 25. Parental and filial privilege. — No person may be compelled to testify against his parents, other direct ascendants, children or other direct descendants. (20a)

3. Admissions and Confessions

Section 26. Admission of a party. — The act, declaration or omission of a party as to a relevant fact may be given in evidence against him. (22)

Section 27. Offer of compromise not admissible. — In civil cases, an offer of compromise is not an admission of any liability, and is not admissible in evidence against the offeror.

In criminal cases, except those involving quasi-offenses (criminal negligence) or those allowed by law to be compromised, an offer of compromised by the accused may be received in evidence as an implied admission of guilt.

A plea of guilty later withdrawn, or an unaccepted offer of a plea of guilty to lesser offense, is not admissible in evidence against the accused who made the plea or offer.

An offer to pay or the payment of medical, hospital or other expenses occasioned by an injury is not admissible in evidence as proof of civil or criminal liability for the injury. (24a)

Section 28. Admission by third party. — The rights of a party cannot be prejudiced by an act, declaration, or omission of another, except as hereinafter provided. (25a)

Section 29. Admission by co-partner or agent. — The act or declaration of a partner or agent of the party within the scope of his authority and during the existence of the partnership or agency, may be given in evidence against such party after the partnership or agency is shown by evidence other than such act or declaration. The same rule applies to the act or declaration of a joint owner, joint debtor, or other person jointly interested with the party. (26a)

Section 30. Admission by conspirator. — The act or declaration of a conspirator relating to the conspiracy and during its existence, may be given in evidence against the co-conspirator after the conspiracy is shown by evidence other than such act of declaration. (27)

Section 31. Admission by privies. — Where one derives title to property from another, the act, declaration, or omission of the latter, while holding the title, in relation to the property, is evidence against the former. (28)

Section 32. Admission by silence. — An act or declaration made in the presence and within the hearing or observation of a party who does or says nothing when the act or declaration is such as naturally to call for action or comment if not true, and when proper and possible for him to do so, may be given in evidence against him. (23a)

Section 33. Confession. — The declaration of an accused acknowledging his guilt of the offense charged, or of any offense necessarily included therein, may be given in evidence against him. (29a)

4. Previous Conduct as Evidence

Section 34. Similar acts as evidence. — Evidence that one did or did not do a certain thing at one time is not admissible to prove that he did or did not do the same or similar thing at another time; but it may be received to prove a specific intent or knowledge; identity, plan, system, scheme, habit, custom or usage, and the like. (48a)

Section 35. Unaccepted offer. — An offer in writing to pay a particular sum of money or to deliver a written instrument or specific personal property is, if rejected without valid cause, equivalent to the actual production and tender of the money, instrument, or property. (49a)

5. Testimonial Knowledge

Section 36. Testimony generally confined to personal knowledge; hearsay excluded. — A witness can testify only to those facts which he knows of his personal knowledge; that is, which are derived from his own perception, except as otherwise provided in these rules. (30a)

6. Exceptions To The Hearsay Rule

Section 37. Dying declaration. — The declaration of a dying person, made under

the consciousness of an impending death, may be received in any case wherein his death is the subject of inquiry, as evidence of the cause and surrounding circumstances of such death. (31a)

Section 38. Declaration against interest. — The declaration made by a person deceased, or unable to testify, against the interest of the declarant, if the fact is asserted in the declaration was at the time it was made so far contrary to declarant's own interest, that a reasonable man in his position would not have made the declaration unless he believed it to be true, may be received in evidence against himself or his successors in interest and against third persons. (32a)

Section 39. Act or declaration about pedigree. — The act or declaration of a person deceased, or unable to testify, in respect to the pedigree of another person related to him by birth or marriage, may be received in evidence where it occurred before the controversy, and the relationship between the two persons is shown by evidence other than such act or declaration. The word "pedigree" includes relationship, family genealogy, birth, marriage, death, the dates when and the places where these fast occurred, and the names of the relatives. It embraces also facts of family history intimately connected with pedigree. (33a)

Section 40. Family reputation or tradition regarding pedigree. — The reputation or tradition existing in a family previous to the controversy, in respect to the pedigree of any one of its members, may be received in evidence if the witness testifying thereon be also a member of the family, either by consanguinity or affinity. Entries in family bibles or other family books or charts, engravings on rings, family portraits and the like, may be received as evidence of pedigree. (34a)

Section 41. Common reputation. — Common reputation existing previous to the controversy, respecting facts of public or general interest more than thirty years old, or respecting marriage or moral character, may be given in evidence. Monuments and inscriptions in public places may be received as evidence of common reputation. (35)

Section 42. Part of res gestae. — Statements made by a person while a starting occurrence is taking place or immediately prior or subsequent thereto with respect to the circumstances thereof, may be given in evidence as part of res gestae. So, also, statements accompanying an equivocal act material to the issue, and giving it a legal significance, may be received as part of the res gestae. (36a)

Section 43. Entries in the course of business. — Entries made at, or near the time of transactions to which they refer, by a person deceased, or unable to testify, who was in a position to know the facts therein stated, may be received as prima facie evidence, if such person made the entries in his professional capacity or in the performance of duty and in the ordinary or regular course of business or duty. (37a)

Section 44. Entries in official records. — Entries in official records made in the performance of his duty by a public officer of the Philippines, or by a person in the performance of a duty specially enjoined by law, are prima facie evidence of the facts therein stated. (38)

Section 45. Commercial lists and the like. — Evidence of statements of matters of interest to persons engaged in an occupation contained in a list, register, periodical, or other published compilation is admissible as tending to prove the truth of any relevant matter so stated if that compilation is published for use by persons engaged in that occupation and is generally used and relied upon by them therein. (39)

Section 46. Learned treatises. — A published treatise, periodical or pamphlet on a subject of history, law, science, or art is admissible as tending to prove the truth of a matter stated therein if the court takes judicial notice, or a witness expert in the subject testifies, that the writer of the statement in the treatise, periodical or pamphlet is recognized in his profession or calling as expert in the subject. (40a)

Section 47. Testimony or deposition at a former proceeding. — The testimony or deposition of a witness deceased or unable to testify, given in a former case or proceeding, judicial or administrative, involving the same parties and subject matter, may be given in evidence against the adverse party who had the opportunity to cross-examine him. (41a)

7. Opinion Rule

Section 48. General rule. — The opinion of witness is not admissible, except as indicated in the following sections. (42)

Section 49. Opinion of expert witness. — The opinion of a witness on a matter requiring special knowledge, skill, experience or training which he shown to posses, may be received in evidence. (43a)

Section 50. Opinion of ordinary witnesses. — The opinion of a witness for which proper basis is given, may be received in evidence regarding —

(a) the identity of a person about whom he has adequate knowledge;

(b) A handwriting with which he has sufficient familiarity; and

(c) The mental sanity of a person with whom he is sufficiently acquainted.

The witness may also testify on his impressions of the emotion, behavior, condition or appearance of a person. (44a)

8. Character Evidence

Section 51. Character evidence not generally admissible; exceptions: —

(a) In Criminal Cases:

(1) The accused may prove his good moral character which is pertinent to the moral trait involved in the offense charged.

(2) Unless in rebuttal, the prosecution may not prove his bad moral character which is pertinent to the moral trait involved in the offense charged.

(3) The good or bad moral character of the offended party may be proved if it tends to establish in any reasonable degree the probability or improbability of the offense charged.

(b) In Civil Cases:

Evidence of the moral character of a party in civil case is admissible only when pertinent to the issue of character involved in the case.

(c) In the case provided for in Rule 132, Section 14, (46a, 47a)

RULE 131

Burden of Proof and Presumptions

Section 1. Burden of proof. — Burden of proof is the duty of a party to present evidence on the facts in issue necessary to establish his claim or defense by the amount of evidence required by law. (1a, 2a)

Section 2. Conclusive presumptions. — The following are instances of conclusive presumptions:

(a) Whenever a party has, by his own declaration, act, or omission, intentionally and deliberately led to another to believe a particular thing true, and to act upon such belief, he cannot, in any litigation arising out of such declaration, act or omission, be permitted to falsify it:

(b) The tenant is not permitted to deny the title of his landlord at the time of commencement of the relation of landlord and tenant between them. (3a)

Section 3. Disputable presumptions. — The following presumptions are satisfactory if uncontradicted, but may be contradicted and overcome by other evidence:

(a) That a person is innocent of crime or wrong;

(b) That an unlawful act was done with an unlawful intent;

(c) That a person intends the ordinary consequences of his voluntary act;

(d) That a person takes ordinary care of his concerns;

(e) That evidence willfully suppressed would be adverse if produced;

(f) That money paid by one to another was due to the latter;

(g) That a thing delivered by one to another belonged to the latter;

(h) That an obligation delivered up to the debtor has been paid;

(i) That prior rents or installments had been paid when a receipt for the later one is produced;

(j) That a person found in possession of a thing taken in the doing of a recent wrongful act is the taker and the doer of the whole act; otherwise, that things which a person possess, or exercises acts of ownership over, are owned by him;

(k) That a person in possession of an order on himself for the payment of the money, or the delivery of anything, has paid the money or delivered the thing accordingly;

(l) That a person acting in a public office was regularly appointed or elected to it;

(m) That official duty has been regularly performed;

(n) That a court, or judge acting as such, whether in the Philippines or elsewhere, was acting in the lawful exercise of jurisdiction;

(o) That all the matters within an issue raised in a case were laid before the court and passed upon by it; and in like manner that all matters within an issue raised in a dispute submitted for arbitration were laid before the arbitrators and passed upon by them;

(p) That private transactions have been fair and regular;

(q) That the ordinary course of business has been followed;

(r) That there was a sufficient consideration for a contract;

(s) That a negotiable instrument was given or indorsed for a sufficient consideration;

(t) That an endorsement of negotiable instrument was made before the instrument was overdue and at the place where the instrument is dated;

(u) That a writing is truly dated;

(v) That a letter duly directed and mailed was received in the regular course of the mail;

(w) That after an absence of seven years, it being unknown whether or not the absentee still lives, he is considered dead for all purposes, except for those of succession.

The absentee shall not be considered dead for the purpose of opening his succession till after an absence of ten years. If he disappeared after the age of seventy-five years, an absence of five years shall be sufficient in order that his succession may be opened.

The following shall be considered dead for all purposes including the division of the estate among the heirs:

(1) A person on board a vessel lost during a sea voyage, or an aircraft with is missing, who has not been heard of for four years since the loss of the vessel or aircraft;

(2) A member of the armed forces who has taken part in armed hostilities, and has been missing for four years;

(3) A person who has been in danger of death under other circumstances and whose existence has not been known for four years;

(4) If a married person has been absent for four consecutive years, the spouse present may contract a subsequent marriage if he or she has well-founded belief that the absent spouse is already death. In case of disappearance, where there is a danger of death the circumstances hereinabove provided, an absence of only two years shall be sufficient for the purpose of contracting a subsequent marriage. However, in any case, before marrying again, the spouse present must institute a summary proceedings as provided in the Family Code and in the rules for declaration of presumptive death of the absentee, without prejudice to the effect of reappearance of the absent spouse.

(x) That acquiescence resulted from a belief that the thing acquiesced in was conformable to the law or fact;

(y) That things have happened according to the ordinary course of nature and ordinary nature habits of life;

(z) That persons acting as copartners have entered into a contract of copartneship;

(aa) That a man and woman deporting themselves as husband and wife have entered into a lawful contract of marriage;

(bb) That property acquired by a man and a woman who are capacitated to marry each other and who live exclusively with each other as husband and wife without the benefit of marriage or under void marriage, has been obtained by their joint efforts, work or industry.

(cc) That in cases of cohabitation by a man and a woman who are not capacitated to marry each other and who have acquire properly through their actual joint contribution of money, property or industry, such contributions and their corresponding shares including joint deposits of money and evidences of credit are equal.

(dd) That if the marriage is terminated and the mother contracted another marriage within three hundred days after such termination of the former marriage, these rules shall govern in the absence of proof to the contrary:

(1) A child born before one hundred eighty days after the solemnization of the subsequent marriage is considered to have been conceived during such marriage, even though it be born within the three hundred days after the termination of the former marriage.

(2) A child born after one hundred eighty days following the celebration of the subsequent marriage is considered to have been conceived during such marriage, even though it be born within the three hundred days after the termination of the former marriage.

(ee) That a thing once proved to exist continues as long as is usual with things of the nature;

(ff) That the law has been obeyed;

(gg) That a printed or published book, purporting to be printed or published by public authority, was so printed or published;

(hh) That a printed or published book, purporting contain reports of cases adjudged in tribunals of the country where the book is published, contains correct reports of such cases;

(ii) That a trustee or other person whose duty it was to convey real property to a particular person has actually conveyed it to him when such presumption is necessary to perfect the title of such person or his successor in interest;

(jj) That except for purposes of succession, when two persons perish in the same calamity, such as wreck, battle, or conflagration, and it is not shown who died first, and there are no particular circumstances from which it can be inferred, the survivorship is determined from the probabilities resulting from the strength and the age of the sexes, according to the following rules:

1. If both were under the age of fifteen years, the older is deemed to have survived;

2. If both were above the age sixty, the younger is deemed to have survived;

3. If one is under fifteen and the other above sixty, the former is deemed to have survived;

4. If both be over fifteen and under sixty, and the sex be different, the male is deemed to have survived, if the sex be the same, the older;

5. If one be under fifteen or over sixty, and the other between those ages, the latter is deemed to have survived.

(kk) That if there is a doubt, as between two or more persons who are called to succeed each other, as to which of them died first, whoever alleges the death of one prior to the other, shall prove the same; in the absence of proof, they shall be considered to have died at the same time. (5a)

Section 4. No presumption of legitimacy or illegitimacy. — There is no presumption of legitimacy of a child born after three hundred days following the dissolution of the marriage or the separation of the spouses. Whoever alleges the legitimacy or illegitimacy of such child must prove his allegation. (6)

RULE 132

Presentation of Evidence

A. EXAMINATION OF WITNESSES

Section 1. Examination to be done in open court. — The examination of witnesses presented in a trial or hearing shall be done in open court, and under oath or affirmation. Unless the witness is incapacitated to speak, or the questions calls for a different mode of answer, the answers of the witness shall be given orally. (1a)

Section 2. Proceedings to be recorded. — The entire proceedings of a trial or hearing, including the questions propounded to a witness and his answers thereto, the statements made by the judge or any of the parties, counsel, or witnesses with reference to the case, shall be recorded by means of shorthand or stenotype or by other means of recording found suitable by the court.

A transcript of the record of the proceedings made by the official stenographer, stenotypist or recorder and certified as correct by him shall be deemed prima facie a correct statement of such proceedings. (2a)

Section 3. Rights and obligations of a witness. — A witness must answer questions, although his answer may tend to establish a claim against him. However, it is the right of a witness:

(1) To be protected from irrelevant, improper, or insulting questions, and from harsh or insulting demeanor;

(2) Not to be detained longer than the interests of justice require;

(3) Not to be examined except only as to matters pertinent to the issue;

(4) Not to give an answer which will tend to subject him to a penalty for an offense unless otherwise provided by law; or

(5) Not to give an answer which will tend to degrade his reputation, unless it to be the very fact at issue or to a fact from which the fact in issue would be presumed. But a witness must answer to the fact of his previous final conviction for an offense. (3a, 19a)

Section 4. Order in the examination of an individual witness. — The order in which the individual witness may be examined is as follows;

(a) Direct examination by the proponent;

(b) Cross-examination by the opponent;

(c) Re-direct examination by the proponent;

(d) Re-cross-examination by the opponent. (4)

Section 5. Direct examination. — Direct examination is the examination-in-chief of a witness by the party presenting him on the facts relevant to the issue. (5a)

Section 6. Cross-examination; its purpose and extent. — Upon the termination of the direct examination, the witness may be cross-examined by the adverse party as to many matters stated in the direct examination, or connected therewith, with sufficient fullness and freedom to test his accuracy and truthfulness and freedom from interest or bias, or the reverse, and to elicit all important facts bearing upon the issue. (8a)

Section 7. Re-direct examination; its purpose and extent. — After the cross-examination of the witness has been concluded, he may be re-examined by the party calling him, to explain or supplement his answers given during the cross-examination. On re-direct-examination, questions on matters not dealt with during the cross-examination, may be allowed by the court in its discretion. (12)

Section 8. Re-cross-examination. — Upon the conclusion of the re-direct examination, the adverse party may re-cross-examine the witness on matters stated in his re-direct examination, and also on such other matters as may be allowed by the court in its discretion. (13)

Section 9. Recalling witness. — After the examination of a witness by both sides has been concluded, the witness cannot be recalled without leave of the court. The court will grant or withhold leave in its discretion, as the interests of justice may require. (14)

Section 10. Leading and misleading questions. — A question which suggests to the witness the answer which the examining party desires is a leading question. It is not allowed, except:

(a) On cross examination;

(b) On preliminary matters;

(c) When there is a difficulty is getting direct and intelligible answers from a witness who is ignorant, or a child of tender years, or is of feeble mind, or a deaf-mute;

(d) Of an unwilling or hostile witness; or

(e) Of a witness who is an adverse party or an officer, director, or managing agent of a public or private corporation or of a partnership or association which is an adverse party.

A misleading question is one which assumes as true a fact not yet testified to by the witness, or contrary to that which he has previously stated. It is not allowed. (5a, 6a, and 8a)

Section 11. Impeachment of adverse party's witness. — A witness may be impeached by the party against whom he was called, by contradictory evidence, by evidence that his general reputation for truth, honestly, or integrity is bad, or by evidence that he has made at other times statements inconsistent with his present, testimony, but not by evidence of particular wrongful acts, except that it may be shown by the examination of the witness, or the record of the judgment, that he has been convicted of an offense. (15)

Section 12. Party may not impeach his own witness. — Except with respect to witnesses referred to in paragraphs (d) and (e) of Section 10, the party producing a witness is not allowed to impeach his credibility.

A witness may be considered as unwilling or hostile only if so declared by the court upon adequate showing of his adverse interest, unjustified reluctance to testify, or his having misled the party into calling him to the witness stand.

The unwilling or hostile witness so declared, or the witness who is an adverse party, may be impeached by the party presenting him in all respects as if he had been called by the adverse party, except by evidence of his bad character. He may also be impeached and cross-examined by the adverse party, but such cross-examination must only be on the subject matter of his examination-in-chief. (6a, 7a)

Section 13. How witness impeached by evidence of inconsistent statements. — Before a witness can be impeached by evidence that he has made at other times statements inconsistent with his present testimony, the statements must be related to him, with the circumstances of the times and places and the persons present, and he must be asked whether he made such statements, and if so, allowed to explain them. If the statements be in writing they must be shown to the witness before any question is put to him concerning them. (16)

Section 14. Evidence of good character of witness. — Evidence of the good character of a witness is not admissible until such character has been impeached. (17)

Section 15. Exclusion and separation of witnesses. — On any trial or hearing, the judge may exclude from the court any witness not at the time under examination, so that he may not hear the testimony of other witnesses. The judge may also cause witnesses to be kept separate and to be prevented from conversing with one another until all shall have been examined. (18)

Section 16. When witness may refer to memorandum. — A witness may be allowed to refresh his memory respecting a fact, by anything written or recorded by himself or under his direction at the time when the fact occurred, or immediately thereafter, or at any other time when the fact was fresh in his memory and knew that the same was correctly written or recorded; but in such case the writing or record must be produced and may be inspected by the adverse party, who may, if he chooses, cross examine the witness upon it, and may read it in evidence. So, also, a witness may testify from such writing or record, though he retain no recollection of the particular facts, if he is able to swear that the writing or record correctly stated the transaction when made; but such evidence must be received with caution. (10a)

Section 17. When part of transaction, writing or record given in evidence, the remainder, the remainder admissible. — When part of an act, declaration, conversation, writing or record is given in evidence by one party, the whole of the same subject may be inquired into by the other, and when a detached act, declaration, conversation, writing or record is given in evidence, any other act, declaration, conversation, writing or record necessary to its understanding may also be given in evidence. (11a)

Section 18. Right to respect writing shown to witness. — Whenever a writing is shown to a witness, it may be inspected by the adverse party. (9a)

B. AUTHENTICATION AND PROOF OF DOCUMENTS

Section 19. Classes of Documents. — For the purpose of their presentation evidence, documents are either public or private.

Public documents are:

(a) The written official acts, or records of the official acts of the sovereign authority, official bodies and tribunals, and public officers, whether of the Philippines, or of a foreign country;

(b) Documents acknowledge before a notary public except last wills and testaments; and

(c) Public records, kept in the Philippines, of private documents required by law to the entered therein.

All other writings are private. (20a)

Section 20. Proof of private document. — Before any private document offered as authentic is received in evidence, its due execution and authenticity must be proved either:

(a) By anyone who saw the document executed or written; or

(b) By evidence of the genuineness of the signature or handwriting of the maker.

Any other private document need only be identified as that which it is claimed to be. (21a)

Section 21. When evidence of authenticity of private document not necessary. — Where a private document is more than thirty years old, is produced from the custody in which it would naturally be found if genuine, and is unblemished by any alterations or circumstances of suspicion, no other evidence of its authenticity need be given. (22a)

Section 22. How genuineness of handwriting proved. — The handwriting of a person may be proved by any witness who believes it to be the handwriting of such person because he has seen the person write, or has seen writing purporting to be his upon which the witness has acted or been charged, and has thus acquired knowledge of the handwriting of such person. Evidence respecting the handwriting may also be given by a comparison, made by the witness or the court, with writings admitted or treated as genuine by the party against whom the evidence is offered, or proved to be genuine to the satisfaction of the judge. (23a)

Section 23. Public documents as evidence. — Documents consisting of entries in public records made in the performance of a duty by a public officer are prima facie evidence of the facts therein stated. All other public documents are evidence, even against a third person, of the fact which gave rise to their execution and of the date of the latter. (24a)

Section 24. Proof of official record. — The record of public documents referred to in paragraph (a) of Section 19, when admissible for any purpose, may be evidenced by an official publication thereof or by a copy attested by the officer having the legal custody of the record, or by his deputy, and accompanied, if the record is not kept in the Philippines, with a certificate that such officer has the custody. If the office in which the record is kept is in foreign country, the certificate may be made by a secretary of the embassy or legation, consul general, consul, vice consul, or consular agent or by any officer in the foreign service of the Philippines stationed in the foreign country in which the record is kept, and authenticated by the seal of his office. (25a)

Section 25. What attestation of copy must state. — Whenever a copy of a document or record is attested for the purpose of evidence, the attestation must state, in substance, that the copy is a correct copy of the original, or a specific part thereof, as the case may be. The attestation must be under the official seal of the attesting officer, if there be any, or if he be the clerk of a court having a seal, under the seal of such court. (26a)

Section 26. Irremovability of public record. — Any public record, an official copy of which is admissible in evidence, must not be removed from the office in which it is kept, except upon order of a court where the inspection of the record is essential to the just determination of a pending case. (27a)

Section 27. Public record of a private document. — An authorized public record of a private document may be proved by the original record, or by a copy thereof, attested by the legal custodian of the record, with an appropriate certificate that such officer has the custody. (28a)

Section 28. Proof of lack of record. — A written statement signed by an officer having the custody of an official record or by his deputy that after diligent search no record or entry of a specified tenor is found to exist in the records of his office, accompanied by a certificate as above provided, is admissible as evidence that the records of his office contain no such record or entry. (29)

Section 29. How judicial record impeached. — Any judicial record may be impeached by evidence of: (a) want of jurisdiction in the court or judicial officer, (b) collusion between the parties, or (c) fraud in the party offering the record, in respect to the proceedings. (30a)

Section 30. Proof of notarial documents. — Every instrument duly acknowledged or proved and certified as provided by law, may be presented in evidence without further proof, the certificate of acknowledgment being prima facie evidence of the execution of the instrument or document involved. (31a)

Section 31. Alteration in document, how to explain. — The party producing a document as genuine which has been altered and appears to have been altered after its execution, in a part material to the question in dispute, must account for the alteration. He may show that the alteration was made by another, without his concurrence, or was made with the consent of the parties affected by it, or was otherwise properly or innocent made, or that the alteration did not change the meaning or language of the instrument. If he fails to do that, the document shall not be admissible in evidence. (32a)

Section 32. Seal. — There shall be no difference between sealed and unsealed private documents insofar as their admissibility as evidence is concerned. (33a)

Section 33. Documentary evidence in an unofficial language. — Documents written in an unofficial language shall not be admitted as evidence, unless accompanied with a translation into English or Filipino. To avoid interruption of proceedings, parties or their attorneys are directed to have such translation prepared before trial. (34a)

C. OFFER AND OBJECTION

Section 34. Offer of evidence. — The court shall consider no evidence which has not been formally offered. The purpose for which the evidence is offered must be specified. (35)

Section 35. When to make offer. — As regards the testimony of a witness, the offer must be made at the time the witness is called to testify.

Documentary and object evidence shall be offered after the presentation of a party's testimonial evidence. Such offer shall be done orally unless allowed by the court to be done in writing. (n)

Section 36. Objection. — Objection to evidence offered orally must be made immediately after the offer is made.

Objection to a question propounded in the course of the oral examination of a witness shall be made as soon as the grounds therefor shall become reasonably apparent.

An offer of evidence in writing shall be objected to within three (3) days after notice of the unless a different period is allowed by the court.

In any case, the grounds for the objections must be specified. (36a)

Section 37. When repetition of objection unnecessary. — When it becomes reasonably apparent in the course of the examination of a witness that the question being propounded are of the same class as those to which objection has been made, whether such objection was sustained or overruled, it shall not be necessary to repeat the objection, it being sufficient for the adverse party to record his continuing objection to such class of questions. (37a)

Section 38. Ruling. — The ruling of the court must be given immediately after the objection is made, unless the court desires to take a reasonable time to inform itself on the question presented; but the ruling shall always be made during the trial and at such time as will give the party against whom it is made an opportunity to meet the situation presented by the ruling.

The reason for sustaining or overruling an objection need not be stated. However, if the objection is based on two or more grounds, a ruling sustaining the objection on one or some of them must specify the ground or grounds relied upon. (38a)

Section 39. Striking out answer. — Should a witness answer the question before the adverse party had the opportunity to voice fully its objection to the same, and such objection is found to be meritorious, the court shall sustain the objection and order the answer given to be stricken off the record.

On proper motion, the court may also order the striking out of answers which are incompetent, irrelevant, or otherwise improper. (n)

Section 40. Tender of excluded evidence. — If documents or things offered in evidence are excluded by the court, the offeror may have the same attached to or made part of the record. If the evidence excluded is oral, the offeror may state for the record the name and other personal circumstances of the witness and the substance of the proposed testimony. (n)

RULE 133

Weight and Sufficiency of Evidence

Section 1. Preponderance of evidence, how determined. — In civil cases, the party having burden of proof must establish his case by a preponderance of evidence. In determining where the preponderance or superior weight of evidence on the issues involved lies, the court may consider all the facts and circumstances of the case, the witnesses' manner of testifying, their intelligence, their means and opportunity of knowing the facts to which there are testifying, the nature of the facts to which they testify, the probability or improbability of their testimony, their interest or want of interest, and also their personal credibility so far as the same may legitimately appear upon the trial. The court may also consider the number of witnesses, though the preponderance is not necessarily with the greater number. (1a)

Section 2. Proof beyond reasonable doubt. — In a criminal case, the accused is entitled to an acquittal, unless his guilt is shown beyond reasonable doubt. Proof beyond reasonable doubt does not mean such a degree of proof, excluding possibility of error, produces absolute certainly. Moral certainly only is required, or that degree of proof which produces conviction in an unprejudiced mind. (2a)

Section 3. Extrajudicial confession, not sufficient ground for conviction. — An extrajudicial confession made by an accused, shall not be sufficient ground for conviction, unless corroborated by evidence of corpus delicti. (3)

Section 4. Circumstantial evidence, when sufficient. — Circumstantial evidence is sufficient for conviction if:

(a) There is more than one circumstances;

(b) The facts from which the inferences are derived are proven; and

(c) The combination of all the circumstances is such as to produce a conviction beyond reasonable doubt. (5)

Section 5. Substantial evidence. — In cases filed before administrative or quasi-judicial bodies, a fact may be deemed established if it is supported by substantial evidence, or that amount of relevant evidence which a reasonable mind might accept as adequate to justify a conclusion. (n)

Section 6. Power of the court to stop further evidence. — The court may stop the introduction of further testimony upon any particular point when the evidence upon it is already so full that more witnesses to the same point cannot be reasonably expected to be additionally persuasive. But this power should be exercised with caution. (6)

Section 7. Evidence on motion. — When a motion is based on facts not appearing of record the court may hear the matter on affidavits or depositions presented by the respective parties, but the court may direct that the matter be heard wholly or partly on oral testimony or depositions. (7)

RULE 134 1

Perpetuation of Testimony

Section 1. Petition. — A person who desires to perpetuate his own testimony or that of another person regarding any matter that may be cognizable in any court of the Philippines, any file a verified petition in the court of the province of the residence of any expected adverse party.

Section 2. Contents of petition. — The petition shall be entitled in the name of the petitioner and shall show: (a) that the petitioner expects to be a party to an action in a court of the Philippines by is presently unable to bring it or cause it to be brought; (b) the subject matter of the expected action and his interest therein; (c) the facts which he desires to establish by the proposed testimony and his reasons for desiring to perpetuate it; (d) the names of a description of the persons he expects will be adverse parties and their addresses so far as known; and (e) the names and addresses of the persons to be examined and the substance of the testimony which he expects to elicit from each, and shall ask for an order authorizing the petitioner to take the depositions of the persons to be examined named in the petition for the purpose of perpetuating their testimony.

Section 3. Notice and service. — The petitioner shall thereafter serve a notice upon each person named in the petition as an expected adverse party, together with a copy of a petition, stating that the petitioner will apply to the court, at a time and place named therein, for the order described in the petition. At least twenty (20) days before the date of hearing the notice shall be served in the manner provided for service of summons.

Section 4. Order of examination. — If the court is satisfied that the perpetuation of the testimony may prevent a failure or delay of justice, it shall make an order designating or describing the persons whose deposition may be taken and specifying the subject matter of the examination, and whether the depositions shall be taken upon oral examination or written interrogatories. The depositions may then be taken in accordance with Rule 24 before the hearing.

Section 5. Reference to court. — For the purpose of applying Rule 24 to depositions for perpetuating testimony, each reference therein to the court in which the action is pending shall be deemed to refer to the court in which the petition for such deposition was filed.

Section 6. Use of deposition. — If a deposition to perpetuate testimony is taken under this rule, or if, although not so taken, it would be admissible in evidence, it may be used in any action involving the same subject matter subsequently brought in accordance with the provisions of Sections 4 and 5 of Rule 24.

Section 7. Depositions pending appeal. — If an appeal has been taken from a judgment of the Regional Trial Court or before the taking of an appeal if the time therefor has not expired, the Regional Trial Court in which the judgment was rendered may allow the taking of depositions of witnesses to perpetuate their testimony for use in the event of further proceedings in the said court. In such case the party who desires to perpetuate the testimony may make a motion in the said Regional Trial Court for leave to take the depositions, upon the same notice and service thereof as if the action was pending therein. The motion shall show (a) the name and the addresses of the persons to be examined and the substance of the testimony which he expects to elicit from each; and (b) the reason for perpetuating their testimony. If the court finds that the perpetuation of the testimony is proper to avoid a failure or delay of justice, it may make an order allowing the depositions to be taken, and thereupon the depositions may be taken and used in the same manner and under the same conditions as are prescribed in these rules for depositions taken in actions pending in the Regional Trial Court. (7a)

Footnote

This rule will be transposed to Part 1 of the Rules of Court on Deposition and Discovery.

[codalsetal]

Code of Professional Responsibility

CANON 1 - A LAWYER SHALL UPHOLD THE CONSTITUTION, OBEY THE LAWS OF THE LAND AND PROMOTE RESPECT FOR LAW AND LEGAL PROCESSES.

Rule 1.01 - A lawyer shall not engage in unlawful, dishonest, immoral or deceitful conduct.

Rule 1.02 - A lawyer shall not counsel or abet activities aimed at defiance of the law or at lessening confidence in the legal system.

Rule 1.03 - A lawyer shall not, for any corrupt motive or interest, encourage any suit or proceeding or delay any man’s cause.

Rule 1.04 - A lawyer shall encourage his clients to avoid, end or settle a controversy if it will admit of a fair settlement.

CANON 2 - A LAWYER SHALL MAKE HIS LEGAL SERVICES AVAILABLE IN AN EFFICIENT AND CONVENIENT MANNER COMPATIBLE WITH THE INDEPENDENCE, INTEGRITY AND EFFECTIVE-NESS OF THE PROFESSION.

Rule 2.01 - A lawyer shall not reject, except for valid reasons, the cause of the defenseless or the oppressed. Rule 2.02 - In such cases, even if the lawyer does not accept a case, he shall not refuse to render legal advice to the person concerned if only to the extent necessary to safeguard the latter’s rights. Rule 2.03 - A lawyer shall not do or permit to be done any act designed primarily to solicit legal business. Rule 2.04 - A lawyer shall not charge rates lower than those customarily prescribed unless the circumstances so warrant.

CANON 3 - A LAWYER IN MAKING KNOWN HIS LEGAL SERVICES SHALL USE ONLY TRUE, HONEST, FAIR, DIGNIFIED AND OBJECTIVE INFORMATION OR STATEMENT OF FACTS.

Rule 3.01 - A lawyer shall not use or permit the use of any false, fraudulent, misleading, deceptive, undignified, self-laudatory or unfair statement or claim regarding his qualifications or legal services.

Rule 3.02 - In the choice of a firm name, no false, misleading or assumed name shall be used. The continued use of the name of a deceased partner is permissible provided that the firm indicates in all its communications that said partner is deceased.

Rule 3.03 - Where a partner accepts public office, he shall withdraw from the firm and his name shall be dropped from the firm name unless the law allows him to practice law concurrently.

Rule 3.04 - A lawyer shall not pay or give anything of value to representatives of the mass media in anticipation of, or in return for, publicity to attract legal business.

CANON 4 - A LAWYER SHALL PARTICIPATE IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE LEGAL SYSTEM BY INITIATING OR SUPPORTING EFFORTS IN LAW REFORM AND IN THE IMPROVEMENT OF THE ADMINISTRATION OF JUSTICE.

CANON 5 - A LAWYER SHALL KEEP ABREAST OF LEGAL DEVELOPMENTS, PARTICIPATE IN CONTINUING LEGAL EDUCATION PROGRAMS, SUPPORT EFFORTS TO ACHIEVE HIGH STANDARDS IN LAW SCHOOLS AS WELL AS IN THE PRACTICAL TRAINING OF LAW STUDENTS AND ASSIST IN DISSEMINATING INFORMATION REGARDING THE LAW AND JURISPRUDENCE.

CANON 6 - THESE CANONS SHALL APPLY TO LAWYERS IN GOVERNMENT SERVICE IN THE DISCHARGE OF THEIR OFFICIAL TASKS.

Rule 6.01 - The primary duty of a lawyer engaged in public prosecution is not to convict but to see that justice is done. The suppression of facts or the concealment of witnesses capable of establishing the innocence of the accused is highly reprehensible and is cause for disciplinary action.

Rule 6.02 - A lawyer in the government service shall not use his public position to promote or advance his private interests, nor allow the latter to interfere with his public duties.

Rule 6.03 - A lawyer shall not, after leaving government service, accept engagement or employment in connection with any matter in which he had intervened while in said service.

CHAPTER II. LAWYER AND THE LEGAL PROFESSION

CANON 7 - A LAWYER SHALL AT ALL TIMES UPHOLD THE INTEGRITY AND DIGNITY OF THE LEGAL PROFESSION AND SUPPORT THE ACTIVITIES OF THE INTEGRATED BAR.

Rule 7.01 - A lawyer shall be answerable for knowingly making a false statement or suppressing a material fact in connection with his application for admission to the bar.

Rule 7.02 - A lawyer shall not support the application for admission to the bar of any person known by him to be unqualified in respect to character, education, or other relevant attribute.

Rule 7.03 - A lawyer shall not engage in conduct that adversely reflects on his fitness to practice law, nor shall he, whether in public or private life, behave in a scandalous manner to the discredit of the legal profession.

CANON 8 - A LAWYER SHALL CONDUCT HIMSELF WITH COURTESY, FAIRNESS AND CANDOR TOWARD HIS PROFESSIONAL COLLEAGUES, AND SHALL AVOID HARASSING TACTICS AGAINST OPPOSING COUNSEL.

Rule 8.01 - A lawyer shall not, in his professional dealings, use language which is abusive, offensive or otherwise improper.

Rule 8.02 - A lawyer shall not, directly or indirectly, encroach upon the professional employment of another lawyer; however, it is the right of any lawyer, without fear or favor, to give proper advice and assistance to those seeking relief against unfaithful or neglectful counsel.

CANON 9 - A LAWYER SHALL NOT, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, ASSIST IN THE UNAUTHORIZED PRACTICE OF LAW.

Rule 9.01 - A lawyer shall not delegate to any unqualified person the performance of any task which by law may only be performed by a member of the Bar in good standing.

Rule 9.02 - A lawyer shall not divide or stipulate to divide a fee for legal services with persons not licensed to practice law, except: a) Where there is a pre-existing agreement with a partner or associate that, upon the latter’s death, money shall be paid over a reasonable period of time to his estate or to persons specified in the agreement; or b) Where a lawyer undertakes to complete unfinished legal business of a deceased lawyer; or c) Where a lawyer or law firm includes non-lawyer employees in a retirement plan, even if the plan is based in whole or in part, on a profitable sharing arrangement.

CHAPTER III. THE LAWYER AND THE COURTS

CANON 10 - A LAWYER OWES CANDOR, FAIRNESS AND GOOD FAITH TO THE COURT.

Rule 10.01 - A lawyer shall not do any falsehood, nor consent to the doing of any in Court; nor shall he mislead, or allow the Court to be misled by any artifice.

Rule 10.02 - A lawyer shall not knowingly misquote or misrepresent the contents of paper, the language or the argument of opposing counsel, or the text of a decision or authority, or knowingly cite as law a provision already rendered inoperative by repeal or amendment, or assert as a fact that which has not been proved.

Rule 10.03 - A lawyer shall observe the rules of procedure and shall not misuse them to defeat the ends of justice.

CANON 11 - A LAWYER SHALL OBSERVE AND MAINTAIN THE RESPECT DUE TO THE COURTS AND TO JUDICIAL OFFICERS AND SHOULD INSIST ON SIMILAR CONDUCT BY OTHERS.

Rule 11.01 - A lawyer shall appear in court properly attired.

Rule 11.02 - A lawyer shall punctually appear at court hearings.

Rule 11.03 - A lawyer shall abstain from scandalous, offensive or menacing language or behavior before the Courts.

Rule 11.04 - A lawyer shall not attribute to a Judge motives not supported by the record or have no materiality to the case.

Rule 11.05 - A lawyer shall submit grievances against a Judge to the proper authorities only.

CANON 12 - A LAWYER SHALL EXERT EVERY EFFORT AND CONSIDER IT HIS DUTY TO ASSIST IN THE SPEEDY AND EFFICIENT ADMINISTRATION OF JUSTICE.

Rule 12.01 - A lawyer shall not appear for trial unless he has adequately prepared himself on the law and the facts of his case, the evidence he will adduce and the order of its preferences. He should also be ready with the original documents for comparison with the copies.

Rule 12.02 - A lawyer shall not file multiple actions arising from the same cause.

Rule 12.03 - A lawyer shall not, after obtaining extensions of time to file pleadings, memoranda or briefs, let the period lapse without submitting the same or offering an explanation for his failure to do so.

Rule 12.04 - A lawyer shall not unduly delay a case, impede the execution of a judgement or misuse Court processes.

Rule 12.05 - A lawyer shall refrain from talking to his witness during a break or recess in the trial, while the witness is still under examination.

Rule 12.06 - A lawyer shall not knowingly assist a witness to misrepresent himself or to impersonate another.

Rule 12.07 - A lawyer shall not abuse, browbeat or harass a witness nor needlessly inconvenience him.

Rule 12.08 - A lawyer shall avoid testifying in behalf of his client, except: a) on formal matters, such as the mailing, authentication or custody of an instrument, and the like, or b) on substantial matters, in cases where his testimony is essential to the ends of justice, in which event he must, during his testimony, entrust the trial of the case to another counsel.

CANON 13 - A LAWYER SHALL RELY UPON THE MERITS OF HIS CAUSE AND REFRAIN FROM ANY IMPROPRIETY WHICH TENDS TO INFLUENCE, OR GIVES THE APPEARANCE OF INFLUENCING THE COURT

Rule 13.01 - A lawyer shall not extend extraordinary attention or hospitality to, nor seek opportunity for cultivating familiarity with Judges.

Rule 13.02 - A lawyer shall not make public statements in the media regarding a pending case tending to arouse public opinion for or against a party.

Rule 13.03 - A lawyer shall not brook or invite interference by another branch or agency of the government in the normal course of judicial proceedings.

CHAPTER IV. THE LAWYER AND THE CLIENT

CANON 14 - A LAWYER SHALL NOT REFUSE HIS SERVICES TO THE NEEDY.

Rule 14.01 - A lawyer shall not decline to represent a person solely on account of the latter’s race, sex, creed or status of life, or because of his own opinion regarding the guilt of said person.

Rule 14.02 - A lawyer shall not decline, except for serious and sufficient cause, an appointment as counsel de oficio or as amicus curiae, or a request from the Integrated Bar of the Philippines or any of its chapters for rendition of free legal aid.

Rule 14.03 - A lawyer may not refuse to accept representation of an indigent client unless: a) he is in no position to carry out the work effectively or competently; b) he labors under a conflict of interest between him and the prospective client or between a present client and the prospective client;

Rule 14.04 - A lawyer who accepts the cause of a person unable to pay his professional fees shall observe the same standard of conduct governing his relations with paying clients.

CANON 15 - A LAWYER SHALL OBSERVE CANDOR, FAIRNESS AND LOYALTY IN ALL HIS DEALINGS AND TRANSACTIONS WITH HIS CLIENTS.

Rule 15.01 - A lawyer, in conferring with a prospective client, shall ascertain as soon as practicable whether the matter would involve a conflict with another client or his own interest, and if so, shall forthwith inform the prospective client.

Rule 15.02 - A lawyer shall be bound by the rule on privilege communication in respect of matters disclosed to him by a prospective client.

Rule 15.03 - A lawyer shall not represent conflicting interests except by written consent of all concerned given after a full disclosure of the facts.

Rule 15.04 - A lawyer may, with the written consent of all concerned, act as mediator, conciliator or arbitrator in settling disputes.

Rule 15.05 - A lawyer when advising his client, shall give a candid and honest opinion on the merits and probable results of the client’s case, neither overstating nor understating the prospects of the case.

Rule 15.06 - A lawyer shall not state or imply that he is able to influence any public official, tribunal or legislative body.

Rule 15.07 - A lawyer shall impress upon his client compliance with the laws and principles of fairness.

Rule 15.08 - A lawyer who is engaged in another profession or occupation concurrently with the practice of law shall make clear to his client whether he is acting as a lawyer or in another capacity.

CANON 16 - A LAWYER SHALL HOLD IN TRUST ALL MONEYS AND PROPERTIES OF HIS CLIENT THAT MAY COME INTO HIS POSSESSION.

Rule 16.01 - A lawyer shall account for all money or property collected or received for or from the client.

Rule 16.02 - A lawyer shall keep the funds of each client separate and apart from his own and those of others kept by him.

Rule 16.03 - A lawyer shall deliver the funds and property of his client when due or upon demand. However, he shall have a lien over the funds and may apply so much thereof as may be necessary to satisfy his lawful fees and disbursements, giving notice promptly thereafter to his client. He shall also have a lien to the same extent on all judgements and executions he has secured for his client as provided for in the Rules of Court.

Rule 16.04 - A lawyer shall not borrow money from his client unless the client’s interests are fully protected by the nature of the case or by independent advice. Neither shall a lawyer lend money to a client except, when in the interest of justice, he has to advance necessary expenses in a legal matter he is handling for the client.

CANON 17 - A LAWYER OWES FIDELITY TO THE CAUSE OF HIS CLIENT AND HE SHALL BE MINDFUL OF THE TRUST AND CONFIDENCE REPOSED IN HIM.

CANON 18 - A LAWYER SHALL SERVE HIS CLIENT WITH COMPETENCE AND DILIGENCE.

Rule 18.01 - A lawyer shall not undertake a legal service which he knows or should know that he is not qualified to render. However, he may render such service if, with the consent of his client, he can obtain as collaborating counsel a lawyer who is competent on the matter.

Rule 18.02 - A lawyer shall not handle any legal matter without adequate preparation.

Rule 18.03 - A lawyer shall not neglect a legal matter entrusted to him, and his negligence in connection there with shall render him liable.

Rule 18.04 - A lawyer shall keep the client informed of the status of his case and shall respond within a reasonable time to client’s request for information.

CANON 19 - A LAWYER SHALL REPRESENT HIS CLIENT WITH ZEAL WITHIN THE BOUNDS OF THE LAW.

Rule 19.01 - A lawyer shall employ only fair and honest means to attain the lawful objectives of his client and shall not present, participate in presenting or threaten to present unfounded criminal charges to obtain an improper advantage in any case or proceeding.

Rule 19.02 - A lawyer who has received information that his client has, in the course of the representation, perpetrated a fraud upon a person or tribunal, shall promptly call upon the client to rectify the same, and failing which he shall terminate the relationship with such client in accordance with the Rules of Court.

Rule 19.03 - A lawyer shall not allow his client to dictate the procedure on handling the case.

CANON 20 - A LAWYER SHALL CHARGE ONLY FAIR AND REASONABLE FEES.

Rule 20.01 - A lawyer shall be guided by the following factors in determining his fees: a) The time spent and the extent of the services rendered or required; b) The novelty and difficulty of the questions involved; c) The importance of the subject matter; d) The skill demanded; e) The probability of losing other employment as a result of acceptance of the proffered case; f) The customary charges for similar services and the schedule of fees of the IBP chapter to which he belongs; g) The amount involved in the controversy and the benefits resulting to the client form the service; h) The contingency or certainty of compensation; i) The character of the employment, whether occasional or established; and j) The professional standing of the lawyer.

Rule 20.02 - A lawyer shall, in cases of referral, with the consent of the client, be entitled to a division of fees in proportion to work performed and responsibility assumed.

Rule 20.03 - A lawyer shall not, without the full knowledge and consent of the client, accept any fee, reward, costs, commission, interest, rebate or forwarding allowance or other compensation whatsoever related to his professional employment from anyone other than the client.

Rule 20.04 - A lawyer shall avoid controversies with clients concerning his compensation and shall resort to judicial action only to prevent imposition, injustice of fraud.

CANON 21 - A LAWYER SHALL PRESERVE THE CONFIDENCE AND SECRETS OF HIS CLIENT EVEN AFTER THE ATTORNEY-CLIENT RELATION IS TERMINATED

Rule 21.01 - A lawyer shall not reveal the confidences or secrets of his client except: a) When authorized by the client after acquianting him of the consequences of the disclosure; b) When required by law; c) When necessary to collect his fees or to defend himself, his employees or associates or by judicial action.

Rule 21.02 - A lawyer shall not, to the disadvantage of his client, use information acquired in the course of employment, nor shall he use he same to his own advantage or that of a third person, unless the client with full knowledge of the circumstances consents thereto.

Rule 21.03 - A lawyer shall not, without the written consent of his client, give information from his files to an outside agency seeking such information for auditing, statistical, bookkeeping, accounting, data processing, or any similar purpose.

Rule 21.04 - A lawyer may disclose the affairs of a client of the firm to partners or associates thereof unless prohibited by the client.

Rule 21.05 - A lawyer shall adopt such measures as may be required to prevent those whose services are utilized by him, from disclosing or using confidences or secrets of the client.

Rule 21.06 - A lawyer shall avoid indiscreet conversation about a client’s affairs even with members of his family.

Rule 21.07 - A lawyer shall not reveal that he has been consulted about a particular case except to avoid possible conflict of interest.

CANON 22 - A LAWYER SHALL WITHDRAW HIS SERVICES ONLY FOR GOOD CAUSE AND UPON NOTICE APPROPRIATE IN THE CIRTUMSTANCES.

Rule 22.01 -A lawyer may withdraw his services in any of the following cases: a) When the client pursues an illegal or immoral course of conduct in connection with the matter he is handling; b) When the client insists that the lawyer pursue conduct violative of these canons and rules; c) When his inability to work with co-counsel will not promote the best interest of the client; d) When the mental or physical condition of the lawyer renders it difficult for him to carry out the employment effectively; e) When the client deliberately fails to pay the fees for the services or fails to comply with the retainer agreement; f) When the lawyer is elected or appointed to public office; and g) Other similar cases.

Rule 22.02 - A lawyer who withdraws or is discharged shall, subject to a retainer lien, immediately turn over all papers and property to which the client is entitled, and shall cooperate with his successor in the orderly transfer of the matter, including all information necessary for the proper handling of the matter.

The Code of Professionall Responsibility was initially drafted by the Committee on Professional Responsibility, Discipline and Disbarment of the Integrated Bar of the Philippines, composed of Dean Irene Cortes as Chairman and Justice Carolina Griño-Aquino, Attys. Gonzalo W. Gonzalez, Marcelo B. Fernan, Camilo Quiason, Jose F. Espinosa and Carmelo V. Sison as members, with former Chief Justice Roberto Concepcion and former Justice Jose B.L. Reyes as consultants, and Prof. Myrna S. Feliciano and Atty.Concepcion Lim-Jardeleza as resource persons.

[codalsetal]

The Family Code of the Philippines

EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 209 

THE FAMILY CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES

July 6, 1987

I, CORAZON C. AQUINO, President of the Philippines, by virtue of the powers vested in me by the Constitution, do hereby order and promulgate the Family Code of the Philippines, as follows:   

TITLE I

  MARRIAGE

  Chapter 1. Requisites of Marriage

   Article 1. Marriage is a special contract of permanent union between a man and a woman entered into in accordance with law for the establishment of conjugal and family life. It is the foundation of the family and an inviolable social institution whose nature, consequences, and incidents are governed by law and not subject to stipulation, except that marriage settlements may fix the property relations during the marriage within the limits provided by this Code. (52a)

Art. 2. No marriage shall be valid, unless these essential requisites are present:

(1) Legal capacity of the contracting parties who must be a male and a female; and

(2) Consent freely given in the presence of the solemnizing officer. (53a)

Art. 3. The formal requisites of marriage are:

(1) Authority of the solemnizing officer;

(2) A valid marriage license except in the cases provided for in Chapter 2 of this Title; and

(3) A marriage ceremony which takes place with the appearance of the contracting parties before the solemnizing officer and their personal declaration that they take each other as husband and wife in the presence of not less than two witnesses of legal age. (53a, 55a)

Art. 4. The absence of any of the essential or formal requisites shall render the marriage void ab initio, except as stated in Article 35 (2).

A defect in any of the essential requisites shall not affect the validity of the marriage but the party or parties responsible for the irregularity shall be civilly, criminally and administratively liable. (n)

Art. 5. Any male or female of the age of eighteen years or upwards not under any of the impediments mentioned in Articles 37 and 38, may contract marriage. (54a)

Art. 6. No prescribed form or religious rite for the solemnization of the marriage is required. It shall be necessary, however, for the contracting parties to appear personally before the solemnizing officer and declare in the presence of not less than two witnesses of legal age that they take each other as husband and wife. This declaration shall be contained in the marriage certificate which shall be signed by the contracting parties and their witnesses and attested by the solemnizing officer.

In case of a marriage in articulo mortis, when the party at the point of death is unable to sign the marriage certificate, it shall be sufficient for one of the witnesses to the marriage to write the name of said party, which fact shall be attested by the solemnizing officer. (55a)

Art. 7. Marriage may be solemnized by:

(1) Any incumbent member of the judiciary within the court's jurisdiction;

(2) Any priest, rabbi, imam, or minister of any church or religious sect duly authorized by his church or religious sect and registered with the civil registrar general, acting within the limits of the written authority granted by his church or religious sect and provided that at least one of the contracting parties belongs to the solemnizing officer's church or religious sect;

(3) Any ship captain or airplane chief only in the case mentioned in Article 31;     (4)  Any military commander of a unit to which a chaplain is assigned, in the absence of the latter, during a military operation, likewise only in the cases mentioned in Article 32;

(5) Any consul-general, consul or vice-consul in the case provided in Article 10. (56a)

Article. 8. The marriage shall be solemnized publicly in the chambers of the judge or in open court, in the church, chapel or temple, or in the office the consul-general, consul or vice-consul, as the case may be, and not elsewhere, except in cases of marriages contracted on the point of death or in remote places in accordance with Article 29 of this Code, or where both of the parties request the solemnizing officer in writing in which case the marriage may be solemnized at a house or place designated by them in a sworn statement to that effect. (57a)

Art. 9. A marriage license shall be issued by the local civil registrar of the city or municipality where either contracting party habitually resides, except in marriages where no license is required in accordance with Chapter 2 of this Title. (58a)

Art. 10. Marriages between Filipino citizens abroad may be solemnized by a consul-general, consul or vice-consul of the Republic of the Philippines. The issuance of the marriage license and the duties of the local civil registrar and of the solemnizing officer with regard to the celebration of marriage shall be performed by said consular official. (75a)

Art. 11. Where a marriage license is required, each of the contracting parties shall file separately a sworn application for such license with the proper local civil registrar which shall specify the following:

(1) Full name of the contracting party;

(2) Place of birth;

(3) Age and date of birth;

(4) Civil status;

(5) If previously married, how, when and where the previous marriage was dissolved or annulled;

(6) Present residence and citizenship;

(7) Degree of relationship of the contracting parties;

(8) Full name, residence and citizenship of the father;

(9) Full name, residence and citizenship of the mother; and

(10) Full name, residence and citizenship of the guardian or person having charge, in case the contracting party has neither father nor mother and is under the age of twenty-one years.

The applicants, their parents or guardians shall not be required to exhibit their residence certificates in any formality in connection with the securing of the marriage license. (59a)

Art. 12. The local civil registrar, upon receiving such application, shall require the presentation of the original birth certificates or, in default thereof, the baptismal certificates of the contracting parties or copies of such documents duly attested by the persons having custody of the originals. These certificates or certified copies of the documents by this Article need not be sworn to and shall be exempt from the documentary stamp tax. The signature and official title of the person issuing the certificate shall be sufficient proof of its authenticity.

If either of the contracting parties is unable to produce his birth or baptismal certificate or a certified copy of either because of the destruction or loss of the original or if it is shown by an affidavit of such party or of any other person that such birth or baptismal certificate has not yet been received though the same has been required of the person having custody thereof at least fifteen days prior to the date of the application, such party may furnish in lieu thereof his current residence certificate or an instrument drawn up and sworn to before the local civil registrar concerned or any public official authorized to administer oaths. Such instrument shall contain the sworn declaration of two witnesses of lawful age, setting forth the full name, residence and citizenship of such contracting party and of his or her parents, if known, and the place and date of birth of such party. The nearest of kin of the contracting parties shall be preferred as witnesses, or, in their default, persons of good reputation in the province or the locality.

The presentation of birth or baptismal certificate shall not be required if the parents of the contracting parties appear personally before the local civil registrar concerned and swear to the correctness of the lawful age of said parties, as stated in the application, or when the local civil registrar shall, by merely looking at the applicants upon their personally appearing before him, be convinced that either or both of them have the required age. (60a)

Art. 13. In case either of the contracting parties has been previously married, the applicant shall be required to furnish, instead of the birth or baptismal certificate required in the last preceding article, the death certificate of the deceased spouse or the judicial decree of the absolute divorce, or the judicial decree of annulment or declaration of nullity of his or her previous marriage.

In case the death certificate cannot be secured, the party shall make an affidavit setting forth this circumstance and his or her actual civil status and the name and date of death of the deceased spouse. (61a)

Art. 14. In case either or both of the contracting parties, not having been emancipated by a previous marriage, are between the ages of eighteen and twenty-one, they shall, in addition to the requirements of the preceding articles, exhibit to the local civil registrar, the consent to their marriage of their father, mother, surviving parent or guardian, or persons having legal charge of them, in the order mentioned. Such consent shall be manifested in writing by the interested party, who personally appears before the proper local civil registrar, or in the form of an affidavit made in the presence of two witnesses and attested before any official authorized by law to administer oaths. The personal manifestation shall be recorded in both applications for marriage license, and the affidavit, if one is executed instead, shall be attached to said applications. (61a)

Art. 15. Any contracting party between the age of twenty-one and twenty-five shall be obliged to ask their parents or guardian for advice upon the intended marriage. If they do not obtain such advice, or if it be unfavorable, the marriage license shall not be issued till after three months following the completion of the publication of the application therefor. A sworn statement by the contracting parties to the effect that such advice has been sought, together with the written advice given, if any, shall be attached to the application for marriage license. Should the parents or guardian refuse to give any advice, this fact shall be stated in the sworn statement. (62a)

Art. 16. In the cases where parental consent or parental advice is needed, the party or parties concerned shall, in addition to the requirements of the preceding articles, attach a certificate issued by a priest, imam or minister authorized to solemnize marriage under Article 7 of this Code or a marriage counselor duly accredited by the proper government agency to the effect that the contracting parties have undergone marriage counseling. Failure to attach said certificates of marriage counseling shall suspend the issuance of the marriage license for a period of three months from the completion of the publication of the application. Issuance of the marriage license within the prohibited period shall subject the issuing officer to administrative sanctions but shall not affect the validity of the marriage.

Should only one of the contracting parties need parental consent or parental advice, the other party must be present at the counseling referred to in the preceding paragraph. (n)

Art. 17. The local civil registrar shall prepare a notice which shall contain the full names and residences of the applicants for a marriage license and other data given in the applications. The notice shall be posted for ten consecutive days on a bulletin board outside the office of the local civil registrar located in a conspicuous place within the building and accessible to the general public. This notice shall request all persons having knowledge of any impediment to the marriage to advise the local civil registrar thereof. The marriage license shall be issued after the completion of the period of publication. (63a)

Art. 18. In case of any impediment known to the local civil registrar or brought to his attention, he shall note down the particulars thereof and his findings thereon in the application for marriage license, but shall nonetheless issue said license after the completion of the period of publication, unless ordered otherwise by a competent court at his own instance or that of any interest party. No filing fee shall be charged for the petition nor a corresponding bond required for the issuances of the order.(64a)

Art. 19. The local civil registrar shall require the payment of the fees prescribed by law or regulations before the issuance of the marriage license. No other sum shall be collected in the nature of a fee or tax of any kind for the issuance of said license. It shall, however, be issued free of charge to indigent parties, that is those who have no visible means of income or whose income is insufficient for their subsistence a fact established by their affidavit, or by their oath before the local civil registrar. (65a)

Art. 20. The license shall be valid in any part of the Philippines for a period of one hundred twenty days from the date of issue, and shall be deemed automatically canceled at the expiration of the said period if the contracting parties have not made use of it. The expiry date shall be stamped in bold characters on the face of every license issued. (65a)

Art. 21. When either or both of the contracting parties are citizens of a foreign country, it shall be necessary for them before a marriage license can be obtained, to submit a certificate of legal capacity to contract marriage, issued by their respective diplomatic or consular officials.

Stateless persons or refugees from other countries shall, in lieu of the certificate of legal capacity herein required, submit an affidavit stating the circumstances showing such capacity to contract marriage. (66a)

Art. 22. The marriage certificate, in which the parties shall declare that they take each other as husband and wife, shall also state:

(1) The full name, sex and age of each contracting party;

(2) Their citizenship, religion and habitual residence;

(3) The date and precise time of the celebration of the marriage;

(4) That the proper marriage license has been issued according to law, except in marriage provided for in Chapter 2 of this Title;

(5) That either or both of the contracting parties have secured the parental consent in appropriate cases;

(6) That either or both of the contracting parties have complied with the legal requirement regarding parental advice in appropriate cases; and

(7) That the parties have entered into marriage settlement, if any, attaching a copy thereof. (67a)

Art. 23. It shall be the duty of the person solemnizing the marriage to furnish either of the contracting parties the original of the marriage certificate referred to in Article 6 and to send the duplicate and triplicate copies of the certificate not later than fifteen days after the marriage, to the local civil registrar of the place where the marriage was solemnized. Proper receipts shall be issued by the local civil registrar to the solemnizing officer transmitting copies of the marriage certificate. The solemnizing officer shall retain in his file the quadruplicate copy of the marriage certificate, the copy of the marriage certificate, the original of the marriage license and, in proper cases, the affidavit of the contracting party regarding the solemnization of the marriage in place other than those mentioned in Article 8. (68a)

Art. 24. It shall be the duty of the local civil registrar to prepare the documents required by this Title, and to administer oaths to all interested parties without any charge in both cases. The documents and affidavits filed in connection with applications for marriage licenses shall be exempt from documentary stamp tax. (n)

Art. 25. The local civil registrar concerned shall enter all applications for marriage licenses filed with him in a registry book strictly in the order in which the same are received. He shall record in said book the names of the applicants, the date on which the marriage license was issued, and such other data as may be necessary. (n)

Art. 26. All marriages solemnized outside the Philippines, in accordance with the laws in force in the country where they were solemnized, and valid there as such, shall also be valid in this country, except those prohibited under Articles 35 (1), (4), (5) and (6), 3637 and 38. (17a)

Where a marriage between a Filipino citizen and a foreigner is validly celebrated and a divorce is thereafter validly obtained abroad by the alien spouse capacitating him or her to remarry, the Filipino spouse shall have capacity to remarry under Philippine law. (As amended by Executive Order 227)   

Chapter 2. Marriages Exempted from License Requirement

   Art. 27. In case either or both of the contracting parties are at the point of death, the marriage may be solemnized without necessity of a marriage license and shall remain valid even if the ailing party subsequently survives. (72a)

Art. 28. If the residence of either party is so located that there is no means of transportation to enable such party to appear personally before the local civil registrar, the marriage may be solemnized without necessity of a marriage license. (72a)

Art. 29. In the cases provided for in the two preceding articles, the solemnizing officer shall state in an affidavit executed before the local civil registrar or any other person legally authorized to administer oaths that the marriage was performed inarticulo mortis or that the residence of either party, specifying the barrio or barangay, is so located that there is no means of transportation to enable such party to appear personally before the local civil registrar and that the officer took the necessary steps to ascertain the ages and relationship of the contracting parties and the absence of legal impediment to the marriage.(72a)

Art. 30. The original of the affidavit required in the last preceding article, together with the legible copy of the marriage contract, shall be sent by the person solemnizing the marriage to the local civil registrar of the municipality where it was performed within the period of thirty days after the performance of the marriage. (75a)

Art. 31. A marriage in articulo mortis between passengers or crew members may also be solemnized by a ship captain or by an airplane pilot not only while the ship is at sea or the plane is in flight, but also during stopovers at ports of call. (74a)

Art. 32. A military commander of a unit, who is a commissioned officer, shall likewise have authority to solemnize marriages in articulo mortis between persons within the zone of military operation, whether members of the armed forces or civilians. (74a)

Art. 33. Marriages among Muslims or among members of the ethnic cultural communities may be performed validly without the necessity of marriage license, provided they are solemnized in accordance with their customs, rites or practices. (78a)

Art. 34. No license shall be necessary for the marriage of a man and a woman who have lived together as husband and wife for at least five years and without any legal impediment to marry each other. The contracting parties shall state the foregoing facts in an affidavit before any person authorized by law to administer oaths. The solemnizing officer shall also state under oath that he ascertained the qualifications of the contracting parties are found no legal impediment to the marriage. (76a)   

Chapter 3. Void and Voidable Marriages

   Art. 35. The following marriages shall be void from the beginning:

(1) Those contracted by any party below eighteen years of age even with the consent of parents or guardians;

(2) Those solemnized by any person not legally authorized to perform marriages unless such marriages were contracted with either or both parties believing in good faith that the solemnizing officer had the legal authority to do so;

(3) Those solemnized without license, except those covered the preceding Chapter;

(4) Those bigamous or polygamous marriages not failing under Article 41;

(5) Those contracted through mistake of one contracting party as to the identity of the other; and

(6) Those subsequent marriages that are void under Article 53.

Art. 36. A marriage contracted by any party who, at the time of the celebration, was psychologically incapacitated to comply with the essential marital obligations of marriage, shall likewise be void even if such incapacity becomes manifest only after its solemnization. (As amended by Executive Order 227)

Art. 37. Marriages between the following are incestuous and void from the beginning, whether relationship between the parties be legitimate or illegitimate:

(1) Between ascendants and descendants of any degree; and

(2) Between brothers and sisters, whether of the full or half blood. (81a)

Art. 38. The following marriages shall be void from the beginning for reasons of public policy:

(1) Between collateral blood relatives whether legitimate or illegitimate, up to the fourth civil degree;

(2) Between step-parents and step-children;

(3) Between parents-in-law and children-in-law;

(4) Between the adopting parent and the adopted child;

(5) Between the surviving spouse of the adopting parent and the adopted child;

(6) Between the surviving spouse of the adopted child and the adopter;

(7) Between an adopted child and a legitimate child of the adopter;

(8) Between adopted children of the same adopter; and

(9) Between parties where one, with the intention to marry the other, killed that other person's spouse, or his or her own spouse. (82)

Art. 39. The action or defense for the declaration of absolute nullity of a marriage shall not prescribe. (As amended by Executive Order 227 and Republic Act No. 8533; The phrase "However, in case of marriage celebrated before the effectivity of this Code and falling under Article 36, such action or defense shall prescribe in ten years after this Code shall taken effect" has been deleted by Republic Act No. 8533 [Approved February 23, 1998]).

Art. 40. The absolute nullity of a previous marriage may be invoked for purposes of remarriage on the basis solely of a final judgment declaring such previous marriage void. (n)

Art. 41. A marriage contracted by any person during subsistence of a previous marriage shall be null and void, unless before the celebration of the subsequent marriage, the prior spouse had been absent for four consecutive years and the spouse present has a well-founded belief that the absent spouse was already dead. In case of disappearance where there is danger of death under the circumstances set forth in the provisions of Article 391 of the Civil Code, an absence of only two years shall be sufficient.

For the purpose of contracting the subsequent marriage under the preceding paragraph the spouse present must institute a summary proceeding as provided in this Code for the declaration of presumptive death of the absentee, without prejudice to the effect of reappearance of the absent spouse. (83a)

Art. 42. The subsequent marriage referred to in the preceding Article shall be automatically terminated by the recording of the affidavit of reappearance of the absent spouse, unless there is a judgment annulling the previous marriage or declaring it void ab initio.

A sworn statement of the fact and circumstances of reappearance shall be recorded in the civil registry of the residence of the parties to the subsequent marriage at the instance of any interested person, with due notice to the spouses of the subsequent marriage and without prejudice to the fact of reappearance being judicially determined in case such fact is disputed. (n)

Art. 43. The termination of the subsequent marriage referred to in the preceding Article shall produce the following effects:

(1) The children of the subsequent marriage conceived prior to its termination shall be considered legitimate;

(2) The absolute community of property or the conjugal partnership, as the case may be, shall be dissolved and liquidated, but if either spouse contracted said marriage in bad faith, his or her share of the net profits of the community property or conjugal partnership property shall be forfeited in favor of the common children or, if there are none, the children of the guilty spouse by a previous marriage or in default of children, the innocent spouse;

(3) Donations by reason of marriage shall remain valid, except that if the donee contracted the marriage in bad faith, such donations made to said donee are revoked by operation of law;

(4) The innocent spouse may revoke the designation of the other spouse who acted in bad faith as beneficiary in any insurance policy, even if such designation be stipulated as irrevocable; and

(5) The spouse who contracted the subsequent marriage in bad faith shall be disqualified to inherit from the innocent spouse by testate and intestate succession. (n)

Art. 44. If both spouses of the subsequent marriage acted in bad faith, said marriage shall be void ab initio and all donations by reason of marriage and testamentary dispositions made by one in favor of the other are revoked by operation of law. (n)

Art. 45. A marriage may be annulled for any of the following causes, existing at the time of the marriage:

(1) That the party in whose behalf it is sought to have the marriage annulled was eighteen years of age or over but below twenty-one, and the marriage was solemnized without the consent of the parents, guardian or person having substitute parental authority over the party, in that order, unless after attaining the age of twenty-one, such party freely cohabited with the other and both lived together as husband and wife;

(2) That either party was of unsound mind, unless such party after coming to reason, freely cohabited with the other as husband and wife;

(3) That the consent of either party was obtained by fraud, unless such party afterwards, with full knowledge of the facts constituting the fraud, freely cohabited with the other as husband and wife;

(4) That the consent of either party was obtained by force, intimidation or undue influence, unless the same having disappeared or ceased, such party thereafter freely cohabited with the other as husband and wife;

(5) That either party was physically incapable of consummating the marriage with the other, and such incapacity continues and appears to be incurable; or

(6) That either party was afflicted with a sexually-transmissible disease found to be serious and appears to be incurable.(85a)

Art. 46. Any of the following circumstances shall constitute fraud referred to in Number 3 of the preceding Article:

(1) Non-disclosure of a previous conviction by final judgment of the other party of a crime involving moral turpitude;

(2) Concealment by the wife of the fact that at the time of the marriage, she was pregnant by a man other than her husband;

(3) Concealment of sexually transmissible disease, regardless of its nature, existing at the time of the marriage; or

(4) Concealment of drug addiction, habitual alcoholism or homosexuality or lesbianism existing at the time of the marriage.

No other misrepresentation or deceit as to character, health, rank, fortune or chastity shall constitute such fraud as will give grounds for action for the annulment of marriage. (86a)

Art. 47. The action for annulment of marriage must be filed by the following persons and within the periods indicated herein:

(1) For causes mentioned in number 1 of Article 45 by the party whose parent or guardian did not give his or her consent, within five years after attaining the age of twenty-one, or by the parent or guardian or person having legal charge of the minor, at any time before such party has reached the age of twenty-one;

(2) For causes mentioned in number 2 of Article 45, by the same spouse, who had no knowledge of the other's insanity; or by any relative or guardian or person having legal charge of the insane, at any time before the death of either party, or by the insane spouse during a lucid interval or after regaining sanity;

(3) For causes mentioned in number 3 of Article 45, by the injured party, within five years after the discovery of the fraud;

(4) For causes mentioned in number 4 of Article 45, by the injured party, within five years from the time the force, intimidation or undue influence disappeared or ceased;

(5) For causes mentioned in number 5 and 6 of Article 45, by the injured party, within five years after the marriage. (87a)

Art. 48. In all cases of annulment or declaration of absolute nullity of marriage, the Court shall order the prosecuting attorney or fiscal assigned to it to appear on behalf of the State to take steps to prevent collusion between the parties and to take care that evidence is not fabricated or suppressed.

In the cases referred to in the preceding paragraph, no judgment shall be based upon a stipulation of facts or confession of judgment. (88a)

Art. 49. During the pendency of the action and in the absence of adequate provisions in a written agreement between the spouses, the Court shall provide for the support of the spouses and the custody and support of their common children. The Court shall give paramount consideration to the moral and material welfare of said children and their choice of the parent with whom they wish to remain as provided to in Title IX. It shall also provide for appropriate visitation rights of the other parent.(n)

Art. 50. The effects provided for by paragraphs (2), (3), (4) and (5) of Article 43 and by Article 44 shall also apply in the proper cases to marriages which are declared ab initio or annulled by final judgment under Articles 40 and 45.

The final judgment in such cases shall provide for the liquidation, partition and distribution of the properties of the spouses, the custody and support of the common children, and the delivery of third presumptive legitimes, unless such matters had been adjudicated in previous judicial proceedings.

All creditors of the spouses as well as of the absolute community or the conjugal partnership shall be notified of the proceedings for liquidation.

In the partition, the conjugal dwelling and the lot on which it is situated, shall be adjudicated in accordance with the provisions of Articles 102 and 129.

Art. 51. In said partition, the value of the presumptive legitimes of all common children, computed as of the date of the final judgment of the trial court, shall be delivered in cash, property or sound securities, unless the parties, by mutual agreement judicially approved, had already provided for such matters.

The children or their guardian or the trustee of their property may ask for the enforcement of the judgment.

The delivery of the presumptive legitimes herein prescribed shall in no way prejudice the ultimate successional rights of the children accruing upon the death of either of both of the parents; but the value of the properties already received under the decree of annulment or absolute nullity shall be considered as advances on their legitime. (n)

Art. 52. The judgment of annulment or of absolute nullity of the marriage, the partition and distribution of the properties of the spouses and the delivery of the children's presumptive legitimes shall be recorded in the appropriate civil registry and registries of property; otherwise, the same shall not affect third persons. (n)

Art. 53. Either of the former spouses may marry again after compliance with the requirements of the immediately preceding Article; otherwise, the subsequent marriage shall be null and void.

Art. 54. Children conceived or born before the judgment of annulment or absolute nullity of the marriage under Article 36 has become final and executory shall be considered legitimate. Children conceived or born of the subsequent marriage under Article 53 shall likewise be legitimate.   

TITLE II

  LEGAL SEPARATION

   Art. 55. A petition for legal separation may be filed on any of the following grounds:

(1) Repeated physical violence or grossly abusive conduct directed against the petitioner, a common child, or a child of the petitioner;

(2) Physical violence or moral pressure to compel the petitioner to change religious or political affiliation;

(3) Attempt of respondent to corrupt or induce the petitioner, a common child, or a child of the petitioner, to engage in prostitution, or connivance in such corruption or inducement;

(4) Final judgment sentencing the respondent to imprisonment of more than six years, even if pardoned;

(5) Drug addiction or habitual alcoholism of the respondent;

(6) Lesbianism or homosexuality of the respondent;

(7) Contracting by the respondent of a subsequent bigamous marriage, whether in the Philippines or abroad;

(8) Sexual infidelity or perversion;

(9) Attempt by the respondent against the life of the petitioner; or

(10) Abandonment of petitioner by respondent without justifiable cause for more than one year.

For purposes of this Article, the term "child" shall include a child by nature or by adoption. (9a)

Art. 56. The petition for legal separation shall be denied on any of the following grounds:

(1) Where the aggrieved party has condoned the offense or act complained of;

(2) Where the aggrieved party has consented to the commission of the offense or act complained of;

(3) Where there is connivance between the parties in the commission of the offense or act constituting the ground for legal separation;

(4) Where both parties have given ground for legal separation;

(5) Where there is collusion between the parties to obtain decree of legal separation; or

(6) Where the action is barred by prescription. (100a)

Art. 57. An action for legal separation shall be filed within five years from the time of the occurrence of the cause. (102)

Art. 58. An action for legal separation shall in no case be tried before six months shall have elapsed since the filing of the petition. (103)

Art. 59. No legal separation may be decreed unless the Court has taken steps toward the reconciliation of the spouses and is fully satisfied, despite such efforts, that reconciliation is highly improbable. (n)

Art. 60. No decree of legal separation shall be based upon a stipulation of facts or a confession of judgment.

In any case, the Court shall order the prosecuting attorney or fiscal assigned to it to take steps to prevent collusion between the parties and to take care that the evidence is not fabricated or suppressed. (101a)

Art. 61. After the filing of the petition for legal separation, the spouses shall be entitled to live separately from each other.

The court, in the absence of a written agreement between the spouses, shall designate either of them or a third person to administer the absolute community or conjugal partnership property. The administrator appointed by the court shall have the same powers and duties as those of a guardian under the Rules of Court. (104a)

Art. 62. During the pendency of the action for legal separation, the provisions of Article 49 shall likewise apply to the support of the spouses and the custody and support of the common children. (105a)

Art. 63. The decree of legal separation shall have the following effects:

(1) The spouses shall be entitled to live separately from each other, but the marriage bonds shall not be severed;

(2) The absolute community or the conjugal partnership shall be dissolved and liquidated but the offending spouse shall have no right to any share of the net profits earned by the absolute community or the conjugal partnership, which shall be forfeited in accordance with the provisions of Article 43(2);

(3) The custody of the minor children shall be awarded to the innocent spouse, subject to the provisions of Article 213 of this Code; and

(4) The offending spouse shall be disqualified from inheriting from the innocent spouse by intestate succession. Moreover, provisions in favor of the offending spouse made in the will of the innocent spouse shall be revoked by operation of law. (106a)

Art. 64. After the finality of the decree of legal separation, the innocent spouse may revoke the donations made by him or by her in favor of the offending spouse, as well as the designation of the latter as beneficiary in any insurance policy, even if such designation be stipulated as irrevocable. The revocation of the donations shall be recorded in the registries of property in the places where the properties are located. Alienations, liens and encumbrances registered in good faith before the recording of the complaint for revocation in the registries of property shall be respected. The revocation of or change in the designation of the insurance beneficiary shall take effect upon written notification thereof to the insured.

The action to revoke the donation under this Article must be brought within five years from the time the decree of legal separation become final. (107a)

Art. 65. If the spouses should reconcile, a corresponding joint manifestation under oath duly signed by them shall be filed with the court in the same proceeding for legal separation. (n)

Art. 66. The reconciliation referred to in the preceding Articles shall have the following consequences:

(1) The legal separation proceedings, if still pending, shall thereby be terminated at whatever stage; and

(2) The final decree of legal separation shall be set aside, but the separation of property and any forfeiture of the share of the guilty spouse already effected shall subsist, unless the spouses agree to revive their former property regime.

The court's order containing the foregoing shall be recorded in the proper civil registries. (108a)

Art. 67. The agreement to revive the former property regime referred to in the preceding Article shall be executed under oath and shall specify:

(1) The properties to be contributed anew to the restored regime;

(2) Those to be retained as separated properties of each spouse; and

(3) The names of all their known creditors, their addresses and the amounts owing to each.

The agreement of revival and the motion for its approval shall be filed with the court in the same proceeding for legal separation, with copies of both furnished to the creditors named therein. After due hearing, the court shall, in its order, take measure to protect the interest of creditors and such order shall be recorded in the proper registries of properties.

The recording of the ordering in the registries of property shall not prejudice any creditor not listed or not notified, unless the debtor-spouse has sufficient separate properties to satisfy the creditor's claim. (195a, 108a)   

TITLE III

  RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS BETWEEN HUSBAND AND WIFE

Art. 68. The husband and wife are obliged to live together, observe mutual love, respect and fidelity, and render mutual help and support. (109a)

Art. 69. The husband and wife shall fix the family domicile. In case of disagreement, the court shall decide.

The court may exempt one spouse from living with the other if the latter should live abroad or there are other valid and compelling reasons for the exemption. However, such exemption shall not apply if the same is not compatible with the solidarity of the family. (110a)

Art. 70. The spouses are jointly responsible for the support of the family. The expenses for such support and other conjugal obligations shall be paid from the community property and, in the absence thereof, from the income or fruits of their separate properties. In case of insufficiency or absence of said income or fruits, such obligations shall be satisfied from the separate properties. (111a)

Art. 71. The management of the household shall be the right and the duty of both spouses. The expenses for such management shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Article 70. (115a)

Art. 72. When one of the spouses neglects his or her duties to the conjugal union or commits acts which tend to bring danger, dishonor or injury to the other or to the family, the aggrieved party may apply to the court for relief. (116a)

Art. 73. Either spouse may exercise any legitimate profession, occupation, business or activity without the consent of the other. The latter may object only on valid, serious, and moral grounds.

In case of disagreement, the court shall decide whether or not:

(1) The objection is proper; and

(2) Benefit has occurred to the family prior to the objection or thereafter. If the benefit accrued prior to the objection, the resulting obligation shall be enforced against the separate property of the spouse who has not obtained consent.

The foregoing provisions shall not prejudice the rights of creditors who acted in good faith. (117a)   

TITLE IV

  PROPERTY RELATIONS BETWEEN HUSBAND AND WIFE

  Chapter 1. General Provisions

   Art. 74. The property relationship between husband and wife shall be governed in the following order:

(1) By marriage settlements executed before the marriage;

(2) By the provisions of this Code; and

(3) By the local custom. (118)

Art. 75. The future spouses may, in the marriage settlements, agree upon the regime of absolute community, conjugal partnership of gains, complete separation of property, or any other regime. In the absence of a marriage settlement, or when the regime agreed upon is void, the system of absolute community of property as established in this Code shall govern. (119a)

Art. 76. In order that any modification in the marriage settlements may be valid, it must be made before the celebration of the marriage, subject to the provisions of Articles 66, 67, 128, 135 and 136. (121)

Art. 77. The marriage settlements and any modification thereof shall be in writing, signed by the parties and executed before the celebration of the marriage. They shall not prejudice third persons unless they are registered in the local civil registry where the marriage contract is recorded as well as in the proper registries of properties. (122a)

Art. 78. A minor who according to law may contract marriage may also execute his or her marriage settlements, but they shall be valid only if the persons designated in Article 14 to give consent to the marriage are made parties to the agreement, subject to the provisions of Title IX of this Code. (120a)

Art. 79. For the validity of any marriage settlement executed by a person upon whom a sentence of civil interdiction has been pronounced or who is subject to any other disability, it shall be indispensable for the guardian appointed by a competent court to be made a party thereto. (123a)

Art. 80. In the absence of a contrary stipulation in a marriage settlement, the property relations of the spouses shall be governed by Philippine laws, regardless of the place of the celebration of the marriage and their residence.

This rule shall not apply:

(1) Where both spouses are aliens;

(2) With respect to the extrinsic validity of contracts affecting property not situated in the Philippines and executed in the country where the property is located; and

(3) With respect to the extrinsic validity of contracts entered into in the Philippines but affecting property situated in a foreign country whose laws require different formalities for its extrinsic validity. (124a)

Art. 81. Everything stipulated in the settlements or contracts referred to in the preceding articles in consideration of a future marriage, including donations between the prospective spouses made therein, shall be rendered void if the marriage does not take place. However, stipulations that do not depend upon the celebration of the marriages shall be valid. (125a)   

Chapter 2. Donations by Reason of Marriage

   Art. 82. Donations by reason of marriage are those which are made before its celebration, in consideration of the same, and in favor of one or both of the future spouses. (126)

Art. 83. These donations are governed by the rules on ordinary donations established in Title III of Book III of the Civil Code, insofar as they are not modified by the following articles. (127a)

Art. 84. If the future spouses agree upon a regime other than the absolute community of property, they cannot donate to each other in their marriage settlements more than one-fifth of their present property. Any excess shall be considered void.

Donations of future property shall be governed by the provisions on testamentary succession and the formalities of wills. (130a)

Art. 85. Donations by reason of marriage of property subject to encumbrances shall be valid. In case of foreclosure of the encumbrance and the property is sold for less than the total amount of the obligation secured, the donee shall not be liable for the deficiency. If the property is sold for more than the total amount of said obligation, the donee shall be entitled to the excess. (131a)

Art. 86. A donation by reason of marriage may be revoked by the donor in the following cases:

(1) If the marriage is not celebrated or judicially declared void ab initio except donations made in the marriage settlements, which shall be governed by Article 81;

(2) When the marriage takes place without the consent of the parents or guardian, as required by law;

(3) When the marriage is annulled, and the donee acted in bad faith;

(4) Upon legal separation, the donee being the guilty spouse;

(5) If it is with a resolutory condition and the condition is complied with;

(6) When the donee has committed an act of ingratitude as specified by the provisions of the Civil Code on donations in general. (132a)

Art. 87. Every donation or grant of gratuitous advantage, direct or indirect, between the spouses during the marriage shall be void, except moderate gifts which the spouses may give each other on the occasion of any family rejoicing. The prohibition shall also apply to persons living together as husband and wife without a valid marriage. (133a)   

Chapter 3. System of Absolute Community

  Section 1. General Provisions

   Art. 88. The absolute community of property between spouses shall commence at the precise moment that the marriage is celebrated. Any stipulation, express or implied, for the commencement of the community regime at any other time shall be void. (145a)

Art. 89. No waiver of rights, shares and effects of the absolute community of property during the marriage can be made except in case of judicial separation of property.

When the waiver takes place upon a judicial separation of property, or after the marriage has been dissolved or annulled, the same shall appear in a public instrument and shall be recorded as provided in Article 77. The creditors of the spouse who made such waiver may petition the court to rescind the waiver to the extent of the amount sufficient to cover the amount of their credits. (146a)

Art. 90. The provisions on co-ownership shall apply to the absolute community of property between the spouses in all matters not provided for in this Chapter. (n)   

Section 2. What Constitutes Community Property

   Art. 91. Unless otherwise provided in this Chapter or in the marriage settlements, the community property shall consist of all the property owned by the spouses at the time of the celebration of the marriage or acquired thereafter. (197a)

Art. 92. The following shall be excluded from the community property:

(1) Property acquired during the marriage by gratuitous title by either spouse, and the fruits as well as the income thereof, if any, unless it is expressly provided by the donor, testator or grantor that they shall form part of the community property;

(2) Property for personal and exclusive use of either spouse. However, jewelry shall form part of the community property;

(3) Property acquired before the marriage by either spouse who has legitimate descendants by a former marriage, and the fruits as well as the income, if any, of such property. (201a)

Art. 93. Property acquired during the marriage is presumed to belong to the community, unless it is proved that it is one of those excluded therefrom. (160)   

Section 3. Charges and Obligations of the Absolute Community

   Art. 94. The absolute community of property shall be liable for:

(1) The support of the spouses, their common children, and legitimate children of either spouse; however, the support of illegitimate children shall be governed by the provisions of this Code on Support;

(2) All debts and obligations contracted during the marriage by the designated administrator-spouse for the benefit of the community, or by both spouses, or by one spouse with the consent of the other;

(3) Debts and obligations contracted by either spouse without the consent of the other to the extent that the family may have been benefited;

(4) All taxes, liens, charges and expenses, including major or minor repairs, upon the community property;

(5) All taxes and expenses for mere preservation made during marriage upon the separate property of either spouse used by the family;

(6) Expenses to enable either spouse to commence or complete a professional or vocational course, or other activity for self-improvement;

(7) Ante-nuptial debts of either spouse insofar as they have redounded to the benefit of the family;

(8) The value of what is donated or promised by both spouses in favor of their common legitimate children for the exclusive purpose of commencing or completing a professional or vocational course or other activity for self-improvement;

(9) Ante-nuptial debts of either spouse other than those falling under paragraph (7) of this Article, the support of illegitimate children of either spouse, and liabilities incurred by either spouse by reason of a crime or a quasi-delict, in case of absence or insufficiency of the exclusive property of the debtor-spouse, the payment of which shall be considered as advances to be deducted from the share of the debtor-spouse upon liquidation of the community; and

(10) Expenses of litigation between the spouses unless the suit is found to be groundless.

If the community property is insufficient to cover the foregoing liabilities, except those falling under paragraph (9), the spouses shall be solidarily liable for the unpaid balance with their separate properties. (161a, 162a, 163a, 202a-205a)     Art. 95. Whatever may be lost during the marriage in any game of chance, betting, sweepstakes, or any other kind of gambling, whether permitted or prohibited by law, shall be borne by the loser and shall not be charged to the community but any winnings therefrom shall form part of the community property. (164a)   

Section 4. Ownership, Administrative,

Enjoyment and Disposition of the Community Property

   Art. 96. The administration and enjoyment of the community property shall belong to both spouses jointly. In case of disagreement, the husband's decision shall prevail, subject to recourse to the court by the wife for proper remedy, which must be availed of within five years from the date of the contract implementing such decision.

In the event that one spouse is incapacitated or otherwise unable to participate in the administration of the common properties, the other spouse may assume sole powers of administration. These powers do not include disposition or encumbrance without authority of the court or the written consent of the other spouse. In the absence of such authority or consent, the disposition or encumbrance shall be void. However, the transaction shall be construed as a continuing offer on the part of the consenting spouse and the third person, and may be perfected as a binding contract upon the acceptance by the other spouse or authorization by the court before the offer is withdrawn by either or both offerors. (206a)

Art. 97. Either spouse may dispose by will of his or her interest in the community property. (n)

Art. 98. Neither spouse may donate any community property without the consent of the other. However, either spouse may, without the consent of the other, make moderate donations from the community property for charity or on occasions of family rejoicing or family distress. (n)   

Section 5. Dissolution of Absolute Community Regime

Art. 99. The absolute community terminates:

(1) Upon the death of either spouse;

(2) When there is a decree of legal separation;

(3) When the marriage is annulled or declared void; or

(4) In case of judicial separation of property during the marriage under Articles 134 to 138. (175a)

Art. 100. The separation in fact between husband and wife shall not affect the regime of absolute community except that:

(1) The spouse who leaves the conjugal home or refuses to live therein, without just cause, shall not have the right to be supported;

(2) When the consent of one spouse to any transaction of the other is required by law, judicial authorization shall be obtained in a summary proceeding;

(3) In the absence of sufficient community property, the separate property of both spouses shall be solidarily liable for the support of the family. The spouse present shall, upon proper petition in a summary proceeding, be given judicial authority to administer or encumber any specific separate property of the other spouse and use the fruits or proceeds thereof to satisfy the latter's share. (178a)

Art. 101. If a spouse without just cause abandons the other or fails to comply with his or her obligations to the family, the aggrieved spouse may petition the court for receivership, for judicial separation of property or for authority to be the sole administrator of the absolute community, subject to such precautionary conditions as the court may impose.

The obligations to the family mentioned in the preceding paragraph refer to marital, parental or property relations.

A spouse is deemed to have abandoned the other when her or she has left the conjugal dwelling without intention of returning. The spouse who has left the conjugal dwelling for a period of three months or has failed within the same period to give any information as to his or her whereabouts shall be prima facie presumed to have no intention of returning to the conjugal dwelling. (178a)   

Section 6. Liquidation of the Absolute Community

Assets and Liabilities

   Art. 102. Upon dissolution of the absolute community regime, the following procedure shall apply:

(1) An inventory shall be prepared, listing separately all the properties of the absolute community and the exclusive properties of each spouse.

(2) The debts and obligations of the absolute community shall be paid out of its assets. In case of insufficiency of said assets, the spouses shall be solidarily liable for the unpaid balance with their separate properties in accordance with the provisions of the second paragraph of Article 94.

(3) Whatever remains of the exclusive properties of the spouses shall thereafter be delivered to each of them.

(4) The net remainder of the properties of the absolute community shall constitute its net assets, which shall be divided equally between husband and wife, unless a different proportion or division was agreed upon in the marriage settlements, or unless there has been a voluntary waiver of such share provided in this Code. For purpose of computing the net profits subject to forfeiture in accordance with Articles 43, No. (2) and 63, No. (2), the said profits shall be the increase in value between the market value of the community property at the time of the celebration of the marriage and the market value at the time of its dissolution.

(5) The presumptive legitimes of the common children shall be delivered upon partition, in accordance with Article 51.

(6) Unless otherwise agreed upon by the parties, in the partition of the properties, the conjugal dwelling and the lot on which it is situated shall be adjudicated to the spouse with whom the majority of the common children choose to remain. Children below the age of seven years are deemed to have chosen the mother, unless the court has decided otherwise. In case there in no such majority, the court shall decide, taking into consideration the best interests of said children. (n)

Art. 103. Upon the termination of the marriage by death, the community property shall be liquidated in the same proceeding for the settlement of the estate of the deceased.

If no judicial settlement proceeding is instituted, the surviving spouse shall liquidate the community property either judicially or extra-judicially within six months from the death of the deceased spouse. If upon the lapse of the six months period, no liquidation is made, any disposition or encumbrance involving the community property of the terminated marriage shall be void.

Should the surviving spouse contract a subsequent marriage without compliance with the foregoing requirements, a mandatory regime of complete separation of property shall govern the property relations of the subsequent marriage. (n)

Art. 104. Whenever the liquidation of the community properties of two or more marriages contracted by the same person before the effectivity of this Code is carried out simultaneously, the respective capital, fruits and income of each community shall be determined upon such proof as may be considered according to the rules of evidence. In case of doubt as to which community the existing properties belong, the same shall be divided between the different communities in proportion to the capital and duration of each. (189a)   

Chapter 4. Conjugal Partnership of Gains

  Section 1. General Provisions

   Art. 105. In case the future spouses agree in the marriage settlements that the regime of conjugal partnership gains shall govern their property relations during marriage, the provisions in this Chapter shall be of supplementary application.

The provisions of this Chapter shall also apply to conjugal partnerships of gains already established between spouses before the effectivity of this Code, without prejudice to vested rights already acquired in accordance with the Civil Code or other laws, as provided in Article 256. (n)

Art. 106. Under the regime of conjugal partnership of gains, the husband and wife place in a common fund the proceeds, products, fruits and income from their separate properties and those acquired by either or both spouses through their efforts or by chance, and, upon dissolution of the marriage or of the partnership, the net gains or benefits obtained by either or both spouses shall be divided equally between them, unless otherwise agreed in the marriage settlements. (142a)

Art. 107. The rules provided in Articles 88 and 89 shall also apply to conjugal partnership of gains. (n)

Art. 108. The conjugal partnership shall be governed by the rules on the contract of partnership in all that is not in conflict with what is expressly determined in this Chapter or by the spouses in their marriage settlements. (147a)   

Section 2. Exclusive Property of Each Spouse

   Art. 109. The following shall be the exclusive property of each spouse:

(1) That which is brought to the marriage as his or her own;

(2) That which each acquires during the marriage by gratuitous title;

(3) That which is acquired by right of redemption, by barter or by exchange with property belonging to only one of the spouses; and

(4) That which is purchased with exclusive money of the wife or of the husband. (148a)

Art. 110. The spouses retain the ownership, possession, administration and enjoyment of their exclusive properties.

Either spouse may, during the marriage, transfer the administration of his or her exclusive property to the other by means of a public instrument, which shall be recorded in the registry of property of the place the property is located. (137a, 168a, 169a)

Art. 111. A spouse of age may mortgage, encumber, alienate or otherwise dispose of his or her exclusive property, without the consent of the other spouse, and appear alone in court to litigate with regard to the same. (n)

Art. 112. The alienation of any exclusive property of a spouse administered by the other automatically terminates the administration over such property and the proceeds of the alienation shall be turned over to the owner-spouse. (n)

Art. 113. Property donated or left by will to the spouses, jointly and with designation of determinate shares, shall pertain to the donee-spouses as his or her own exclusive property, and in the absence of designation, share and share alike, without prejudice to the right of accretion when proper. (150a)

Art. 114. If the donations are onerous, the amount of the charges shall be borne by the exclusive property of the donee spouse, whenever they have been advanced by the conjugal partnership of gains. (151a)

Art. 115. Retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, gratuities, usufructs and similar benefits shall be governed by the rules on gratuitous or onerous acquisitions as may be proper in each case. (n)   

Section 3. Conjugal Partnership Property

   Art. 116. All property acquired during the marriage, whether the acquisition appears to have been made, contracted or registered in the name of one or both spouses, is presumed to be conjugal unless the contrary is proved. (160a)

Art. 117. The following are conjugal partnership properties:

(1) Those acquired by onerous title during the marriage at the expense of the common fund, whether the acquisition be for the partnership, or for only one of the spouses;

(2) Those obtained from the labor, industry, work or profession of either or both of the spouses;

(3) The fruits, natural, industrial, or civil, due or received during the marriage from the common property, as well as the net fruits from the exclusive property of each spouse;

(4) The share of either spouse in the hidden treasure which the law awards to the finder or owner of the property where the treasure is found;

(5) Those acquired through occupation such as fishing or hunting;

(6) Livestock existing upon the dissolution of the partnership in excess of the number of each kind brought to the marriage by either spouse; and

(7) Those which are acquired by chance, such as winnings from gambling or betting. However, losses therefrom shall be borne exclusively by the loser-spouse. (153a, 154a, 155, 159)

Art. 118. Property bought on installments paid partly from exclusive funds of either or both spouses and partly from conjugal funds belongs to the buyer or buyers if full ownership was vested before the marriage and to the conjugal partnership if such ownership was vested during the marriage. In either case, any amount advanced by the partnership or by either or both spouses shall be reimbursed by the owner or owners upon liquidation of the partnership. (n)

Art. 119. Whenever an amount or credit payable within a period of time belongs to one of the spouses, the sums which may be collected during the marriage in partial payments or by installments on the principal shall be the exclusive property of the spouse. However, interests falling due during the marriage on the principal shall belong to the conjugal partnership. (156a, 157a)

Art. 120. The ownership of improvements, whether for utility or adornment, made on the separate property of the spouses at the expense of the partnership or through the acts or efforts of either or both spouses shall pertain to the conjugal partnership, or to the original owner-spouse, subject to the following rules:

When the cost of the improvement made by the conjugal partnership and any resulting increase in value are more than the value of the property at the time of the improvement, the entire property of one of the spouses shall belong to the conjugal partnership, subject to reimbursement of the value of the property of the owner-spouse at the time of the improvement; otherwise, said property shall be retained in ownership by the owner-spouse, likewise subject to reimbursement of the cost of the improvement.

In either case, the ownership of the entire property shall be vested upon the reimbursement, which shall be made at the time of the liquidation of the conjugal partnership. (158a)

Section 4. Charges Upon and Obligations of

the Conjugal Partnership

   Art. 121. The conjugal partnership shall be liable for:

(1) The support of the spouse, their common children, and the legitimate children of either spouse; however, the support of illegitimate children shall be governed by the provisions of this Code on Support;

(2) All debts and obligations contracted during the marriage by the designated administrator-spouse for the benefit of the conjugal partnership of gains, or by both spouses or by one of them with the consent of the other;

(3) Debts and obligations contracted by either spouse without the consent of the other to the extent that the family may have benefited;

(4) All taxes, liens, charges, and expenses, including major or minor repairs upon the conjugal partnership property;

(5) All taxes and expenses for mere preservation made during the marriage upon the separate property of either spouse;

(6) Expenses to enable either spouse to commence or complete a professional, vocational, or other activity for self-improvement;

(7) Ante-nuptial debts of either spouse insofar as they have redounded to the benefit of the family;

(8) The value of what is donated or promised by both spouses in favor of their common legitimate children for the exclusive purpose of commencing or completing a professional or vocational course or other activity for self-improvement; and

(9) Expenses of litigation between the spouses unless the suit is found to groundless.

If the conjugal partnership is insufficient to cover the foregoing liabilities, the spouses shall be solidarily liable for the unpaid balance with their separate properties. (161a)

Art. 122. The payment of personal debts contracted by the husband or the wife before or during the marriage shall not be charged to the conjugal properties partnership except insofar as they redounded to the benefit of the family.

Neither shall the fines and pecuniary indemnities imposed upon them be charged to the partnership.

However, the payment of personal debts contracted by either spouse before the marriage, that of fines and indemnities imposed upon them, as well as the support of illegitimate children of either spouse, may be enforced against the partnership assets after the responsibilities enumerated in the preceding Article have been covered, if the spouse who is bound should have no exclusive property or if it should be insufficient; but at the time of the liquidation of the partnership, such spouse shall be charged for what has been paid for the purpose above-mentioned. (163a)

Art. 123. Whatever may be lost during the marriage in any game of chance or in betting, sweepstakes, or any other kind of gambling whether permitted or prohibited by law, shall be borne by the loser and shall not be charged to the conjugal partnership but any winnings therefrom shall form part of the conjugal partnership property. (164a)   

Section 5. Administration of the

Conjugal Partnership Property

   Art. 124. The administration and enjoyment of the conjugal partnership shall belong to both spouses jointly. In case of disagreement, the husband's decision shall prevail, subject to recourse to the court by the wife for proper remedy, which must be availed of within five years from the date of the contract implementing such decision.

In the event that one spouse is incapacitated or otherwise unable to participate in the administration of the conjugal properties, the other spouse may assume sole powers of administration. These powers do not include disposition or encumbrance without authority of the court or the written consent of the other spouse. In the absence of such authority or consent, the disposition or encumbrance shall be void. However, the transaction shall be construed as a continuing offer on the part of the consenting spouse and the third person, and may be perfected as a binding contract upon the acceptance by the other spouse or authorization by the court before the offer is withdrawn by either or both offerors. (165a)

Art. 125. Neither spouse may donate any conjugal partnership property without the consent of the other. However, either spouse may, without the consent of the other, make moderate donations from the conjugal partnership property for charity or on occasions of family rejoicing or family distress. (174a)   

Section 6. Dissolution of Conjugal Partnership Regime

   Art. 126. The conjugal partnership terminates:

(1) Upon the death of either spouse;

(2) When there is a decree of legal separation;

(3) When the marriage is annulled or declared void; or

(4) In case of judicial separation of property during the marriage under Articles 134 to 138. (175a)

Art. 127. The separation in fact between husband and wife shall not affect the regime of conjugal partnership, except that:

(1) The spouse who leaves the conjugal home or refuses to live therein, without just cause, shall not have the right to be supported;

(2) When the consent of one spouse to any transaction of the other is required by law, judicial authorization shall be obtained in a summary proceeding;

(3) In the absence of sufficient conjugal partnership property, the separate property of both spouses shall be solidarily liable for the support of the family. The spouse present shall, upon petition in a summary proceeding, be given judicial authority to administer or encumber any specific separate property of the other spouse and use the fruits or proceeds thereof to satisfy the latter's share. (178a)

Art. 128. If a spouse without just cause abandons the other or fails to comply with his or her obligation to the family, the aggrieved spouse may petition the court for receivership, for judicial separation of property, or for authority to be the sole administrator of the conjugal partnership property, subject to such precautionary conditions as the court may impose.

The obligations to the family mentioned in the preceding paragraph refer to marital, parental or property relations.

A spouse is deemed to have abandoned the other when he or she has left the conjugal dwelling without intention of returning. The spouse who has left the conjugal dwelling for a period of three months or has failed within the same period to give any information as to his or her whereabouts shall be prima facie presumed to have no intention of returning to the conjugal dwelling. (167a, 191a)   

Section 7. Liquidation of the

Conjugal Partnership Assets and Liabilities

   Art. 129. Upon the dissolution of the conjugal partnership regime, the following procedure shall apply:

(1) An inventory shall be prepared, listing separately all the properties of the conjugal partnership and the exclusive properties of each spouse.

(2) Amounts advanced by the conjugal partnership in payment of personal debts and obligations of either spouse shall be credited to the conjugal partnership as an asset thereof.

(3) Each spouse shall be reimbursed for the use of his or her exclusive funds in the acquisition of property or for the value of his or her exclusive property, the ownership of which has been vested by law in the conjugal partnership.

(4) The debts and obligations of the conjugal partnership shall be paid out of the conjugal assets. In case of insufficiency of said assets, the spouses shall be solidarily liable for the unpaid balance with their separate properties, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (2) of Article 121.

(5) Whatever remains of the exclusive properties of the spouses shall thereafter be delivered to each of them.

(6) Unless the owner had been indemnified from whatever source, the loss or deterioration of movables used for the benefit of the family, belonging to either spouse, even due to fortuitous event, shall be paid to said spouse from the conjugal funds, if any.

(7) The net remainder of the conjugal partnership properties shall constitute the profits, which shall be divided equally between husband and wife, unless a different proportion or division was agreed upon in the marriage settlements or unless there has been a voluntary waiver or forfeiture of such share as provided in this Code.

(8) The presumptive legitimes of the common children shall be delivered upon the partition in accordance with Article 51.

(9) In the partition of the properties, the conjugal dwelling and the lot on which it is situated shall, unless otherwise agreed upon by the parties, be adjudicated to the spouse with whom the majority of the common children choose to remain. Children below the age of seven years are deemed to have chosen the mother, unless the court has decided otherwise. In case there is no such majority, the court shall decide, taking into consideration the best interests of said children. (181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 185a)

Art. 130. Upon the termination of the marriage by death, the conjugal partnership property shall be liquidated in the same proceeding for the settlement of the estate of the deceased.

If no judicial settlement proceeding is instituted, the surviving spouse shall liquidate the conjugal partnership property either judicially or extra-judicially within six months from the death of the deceased spouse. If upon the lapse of the six-month period no liquidation is made, any disposition or encumbrance involving the conjugal partnership property of the terminated marriage shall be void.

Should the surviving spouse contract a subsequent marriage without compliance with the foregoing requirements, a mandatory regime of complete separation of property shall govern the property relations of the subsequent marriage. (n)

Art. 131. Whenever the liquidation of the conjugal partnership properties of two or more marriages contracted by the same person before the effectivity of this Code is carried out simultaneously, the respective capital, fruits and income of each partnership shall be determined upon such proof as may be considered according to the rules of evidence. In case of doubt as to which partnership the existing properties belong, the same shall be divided between the different partnerships in proportion to the capital and duration of each. (189a)

Art. 132. The Rules of Court on the administration of estates of deceased persons shall be observed in the appraisal and sale of property of the conjugal partnership, and other matters which are not expressly determined in this Chapter. (187a)

Art. 133. From the common mass of property support shall be given to the surviving spouse and to the children during the liquidation of the inventoried property and until what belongs to them is delivered; but from this shall be deducted that amount received for support which exceeds the fruits or rents pertaining to them. (188a)   

Chapter 5. Separation of Property of the

Spouses and Administration of Common Property by

One Spouse During the Marriage

   Art. 134. In the absence of an express declaration in the marriage settlements, the separation of property between spouses during the marriage shall not take place except by judicial order. Such judicial separation of property may either be voluntary or for sufficient cause. (190a)

Art. 135. Any of the following shall be considered sufficient cause for judicial separation of property:

(1) That the spouse of the petitioner has been sentenced to a penalty which carries with it civil interdiction;

(2) That the spouse of the petitioner has been judicially declared an absentee;

(3) That loss of parental authority of the spouse of petitioner has been decreed by the court;

(4) That the spouse of the petitioner has abandoned the latter or failed to comply with his or her obligations to the family as provided for in Article 101;

(5) That the spouse granted the power of administration in the marriage settlements has abused that power; and

(6) That at the time of the petition, the spouses have been separated in fact for at least one year and reconciliation is highly improbable.

In the cases provided for in Numbers (1), (2) and (3), the presentation of the final judgment against the guilty or absent spouse shall be enough basis for the grant of the decree of judicial separation of property. (191a)

Art. 136. The spouses may jointly file a verified petition with the court for the voluntary dissolution of the absolute community or the conjugal partnership of gains, and for the separation of their common properties.

All creditors of the absolute community or of the conjugal partnership of gains, as well as the personal creditors of the spouse, shall be listed in the petition and notified of the filing thereof. The court shall take measures to protect the creditors and other persons with pecuniary interest. (191a)

Art. 137. Once the separation of property has been decreed, the absolute community or the conjugal partnership of gains shall be liquidated in conformity with this Code.

During the pendency of the proceedings for separation of property, the absolute community or the conjugal partnership shall pay for the support of the spouses and their children. (192a)

Art. 138. After dissolution of the absolute community or of the conjugal partnership, the provisions on complete separation of property shall apply. (191a)

Art. 139. The petition for separation of property and the final judgment granting the same shall be recorded in the proper local civil registries and registries of property. (193a)

Art. 140. The separation of property shall not prejudice the rights previously acquired by creditors. (194a)

Art. 141. The spouses may, in the same proceedings where separation of property was decreed, file a motion in court for a decree reviving the property regime that existed between them before the separation of property in any of the following instances:

(1) When the civil interdiction terminates;

(2) When the absentee spouse reappears;

(3) When the court, being satisfied that the spouse granted the power of administration in the marriage settlements will not again abuse that power, authorizes the resumption of said administration;

(4) When the spouse who has left the conjugal home without a decree of legal separation resumes common life with the other;

(5) When parental authority is judicially restored to the spouse previously deprived thereof;

(6) When the spouses who have separated in fact for at least one year, reconcile and resume common life; or

(7) When after voluntary dissolution of the absolute community of property or conjugal partnership has been judicially decreed upon the joint petition of the spouses, they agree to the revival of the former property regime. No voluntary separation of property may thereafter be granted.

The revival of the former property regime shall be governed by Article 67. (195a)

Art. 142. The administration of all classes of exclusive property of either spouse may be transferred by the court to the other spouse:

(1) When one spouse becomes the guardian of the other;

(2) When one spouse is judicially declared an absentee;

(3) When one spouse is sentenced to a penalty which carries with it civil interdiction; or

(4) When one spouse becomes a fugitive from justice or is in hiding as an accused in a criminal case.

If the other spouse is not qualified by reason of incompetence, conflict of interest, or any other just cause, the court shall appoint a suitable person to be the administrator. (n)       

Chapter 6. Regime of Separation of Property

   Art. 143. Should the future spouses agree in the marriage settlements that their property relations during marriage shall be governed by the regime of separation of property, the provisions of this Chapter shall be suppletory. (212a)

Art. 144. Separation of property may refer to present or future property or both. It may be total or partial. In the latter case, the property not agreed upon as separate shall pertain to the absolute community. (213a)

Art. 145. Each spouse shall own, dispose of, possess, administer and enjoy his or her own separate estate, without need of the consent of the other. To each spouse shall belong all earnings from his or her profession, business or industry and all fruits, natural, industrial or civil, due or received during the marriage from his or her separate property. (214a)

Art. 146. Both spouses shall bear the family expenses in proportion to their income, or, in case of insufficiency or default thereof, to the current market value of their separate properties.

The liabilities of the spouses to creditors for family expenses shall, however, be solidary. (215a)   

Chapter 7. Property Regime of Unions Without Marriage

   Art. 147. When a man and a woman who are capacitated to marry each other, live exclusively with each other as husband and wife without the benefit of marriage or under a void marriage, their wages and salaries shall be owned by them in equal shares and the property acquired by both of them through their work or industry shall be governed by the rules on co-ownership.

In the absence of proof to the contrary, properties acquired while they lived together shall be presumed to have been obtained by their joint efforts, work or industry, and shall be owned by them in equal shares. For purposes of this Article, a party who did not participate in the acquisition by the other party of any property shall be deemed to have contributed jointly in the acquisition thereof if the former's efforts consisted in the care and maintenance of the family and of the household.

Neither party can encumber or dispose by acts inter vivos of his or her share in the property acquired during cohabitation and owned in common, without the consent of the other, until after the termination of their cohabitation.

When only one of the parties to a void marriage is in good faith, the share of the party in bad faith in the co-ownership shall be forfeited in favor of their common children. In case of default of or waiver by any or all of the common children or their descendants, each vacant share shall belong to the respective surviving descendants. In the absence of descendants, such share shall belong to the innocent party. In all cases, the forfeiture shall take place upon termination of the cohabitation. (144a)

Art. 148. In cases of cohabitation not falling under the preceding Article, only the properties acquired by both of the parties through their actual joint contribution of money, property, or industry shall be owned by them in common in proportion to their respective contributions. In the absence of proof to the contrary, their contributions and corresponding shares are presumed to be equal. The same rule and presumption shall apply to joint deposits of money and evidences of credit.

If one of the parties is validly married to another, his or her share in the co-ownership shall accrue to the absolute community or conjugal partnership existing in such valid marriage. If the party who acted in bad faith is not validly married to another, his or her shall be forfeited in the manner provided in the last paragraph of the preceding Article.

The foregoing rules on forfeiture shall likewise apply even if both parties are in bad faith. (144a)   

TITLE V

  THE FAMILY

  Chapter 1. The Family as an Institution

   Art. 149. The family, being the foundation of the nation, is a basic social institution which public policy cherishes and protects. Consequently, family relations are governed by law and no custom, practice or agreement destructive of the family shall be recognized or given effect. (216a, 218a)

Art. 50. Family relations include those:

(1) Between husband and wife;

(2) Between parents and children;

(3) Among brothers and sisters, whether of the full or half-blood. (217a)

Art. 151. No suit between members of the same family shall prosper unless it should appear from the verified complaint or petition that earnest efforts toward a compromise have been made, but that the same have failed. If it is shown that no such efforts were in fact made, the same case must be dismissed.

This rules shall not apply to cases which may not be the subject of compromise under the Civil Code. (222a)   

Chapter 2. The Family Home

   Art. 152. The family home, constituted jointly by the husband and the wife or by an unmarried head of a family, is the dwelling house where they and their family reside, and the land on which it is situated. (223a)

Art. 153. The family home is deemed constituted on a house and lot from the time it is occupied as a family residence. From the time of its constitution and so long as any of its beneficiaries actually resides therein, the family home continues to be such and is exempt from execution, forced sale or attachment except as hereinafter provided and to the extent of the value allowed by law. (223a)

Art. 154. The beneficiaries of a family home are:

(1) The husband and wife, or an unmarried person who is the head of a family; and

(2) Their parents, ascendants, descendants, brothers and sisters, whether the relationship be legitimate or illegitimate, who are living in the family home and who depend upon the head of the family for legal support. (226a)

Art. 155. The family home shall be exempt from execution, forced sale or attachment except:

(1) For nonpayment of taxes;

(2) For debts incurred prior to the constitution of the family home;

(3) For debts secured by mortgages on the premises before or after such constitution; and

(4) For debts due to laborers, mechanics, architects, builders, materialmen and others who have rendered service or furnished material for the construction of the building. (243a)

Art. 156. The family home must be part of the properties of the absolute community or the conjugal partnership, or of the exclusive properties of either spouse with the latter's consent. It may also be constituted by an unmarried head of a family on his or her own property.

Nevertheless, property that is the subject of a conditional sale on installments where ownership is reserved by the vendor only to guarantee payment of the purchase price may be constituted as a family home. (227a, 228a)

Art. 157. The actual value of the family home shall not exceed, at the time of its constitution, the amount of the three hundred thousand pesos in urban areas, and two hundred thousand pesos in rural areas, or such amounts as may hereafter be fixed by law.

In any event, if the value of the currency changes after the adoption of this Code, the value most favorable for the constitution of a family home shall be the basis of evaluation.

For purposes of this Article, urban areas are deemed to include chartered cities and municipalities whose annual income at least equals that legally required for chartered cities. All others are deemed to be rural areas. (231a)

Art. 158. The family home may be sold, alienated, donated, assigned or encumbered by the owner or owners thereof with the written consent of the person constituting the same, the latter's spouse, and a majority of the beneficiaries of legal age. In case of conflict, the court shall decide. (235a)

Art. 159. The family home shall continue despite the death of one or both spouses or of the unmarried head of the family for a period of ten years or for as long as there is a minor beneficiary, and the heirs cannot partition the same unless the court finds compelling reasons therefor. This rule shall apply regardless of whoever owns the property or constituted the family home.(238a)

Art. 160. When a creditor whose claims is not among those mentioned in Article 155 obtains a judgment in his favor, and he has reasonable grounds to believe that the family home is actually worth more than the maximum amount fixed in Article 157, he may apply to the court which rendered the judgment for an order directing the sale of the property under execution. The court shall so order if it finds that the actual value of the family home exceeds the maximum amount allowed by law as of the time of its constitution. If the increased actual value exceeds the maximum allowed in Article 157 and results from subsequent voluntary improvements introduced by the person or persons constituting the family home, by the owner or owners of the property, or by any of the beneficiaries, the same rule and procedure shall apply.

At the execution sale, no bid below the value allowed for a family home shall be considered. The proceeds shall be applied first to the amount mentioned in Article 157, and then to the liabilities under the judgment and the costs. The excess, if any, shall be delivered to the judgment debtor. (247a, 248a)

Art. 161. For purposes of availing of the benefits of a family home as provided for in this Chapter, a person may constitute, or be the beneficiary of, only one family home. (n)

Art. 162. The provisions in this Chapter shall also govern existing family residences insofar as said provisions are applicable. (n)  

TITLE VI

  PATERNITY AND FILIATION

  Chapter 1. Legitimate Children

   Art. 163. The filiation of children may be by nature or by adoption. Natural filiation may be legitimate or illegitimate. (n)

Art. 164. Children conceived or born during the marriage of the parents are legitimate.

Children conceived as a result of artificial insemination of the wife with the sperm of the husband or that of a donor or both are likewise legitimate children of the husband and his wife, provided, that both of them authorized or ratified such insemination in a written instrument executed and signed by them before the birth of the child. The instrument shall be recorded in the civil registry together with the birth certificate of the child. (55a, 258a)

Art. 165. Children conceived and born outside a valid marriage are illegitimate, unless otherwise provided in this Code. (n)

Art. 166. Legitimacy of a child may be impugned only on the following grounds:

(1) That it was physically impossible for the husband to have sexual intercourse with his wife within the first 120 days of the 300 days which immediately preceded the birth of the child because of:   

(a) the physical incapacity of the husband to have sexual intercourse with his wife;

(b) the fact that the husband and wife were living separately in such a way that sexual intercourse was not possible; or

(c) serious illness of the husband, which absolutely prevented sexual intercourse;

(2) That it is proved that for biological or other scientific reasons, the child could not have been that of the husband, except in the instance provided in the second paragraph of Article 164; or

(3) That in case of children conceived through artificial insemination, the written authorization or ratification of either parent was obtained through mistake, fraud, violence, intimidation, or undue influence. (255a)

Art. 167. The child shall be considered legitimate although the mother may have declared against its legitimacy or may have been sentenced as an adulteress. (256a)

Art. 168. If the marriage is terminated and the mother contracted another marriage within three hundred days after such termination of the former marriage, these rules shall govern in the absence of proof to the contrary:

(1) A child born before one hundred eighty days after the solemnization of the subsequent marriage is considered to have been conceived during the former marriage, provided it be born within three hundred days after the termination of the former marriage;

(2) A child born after one hundred eighty days following the celebration of the subsequent marriage is considered to have been conceived during such marriage, even though it be born within the three hundred days after the termination of the former marriage. (259a)

Art. 169. The legitimacy or illegitimacy of a child born after three hundred days following the termination of the marriage shall be proved by whoever alleges such legitimacy or illegitimacy. (261a)

Art. 170. The action to impugn the legitimacy of the child shall be brought within one year from the knowledge of the birth or its recording in the civil register, if the husband or, in a proper case, any of his heirs, should reside in the city or municipality where the birth took place or was recorded.

If the husband or, in his default, all of his heirs do not reside at the place of birth as defined in the first paragraph or where it was recorded, the period shall be two years if they should reside in the Philippines; and three years if abroad. If the birth of the child has been concealed from or was unknown to the husband or his heirs, the period shall be counted from the discovery or knowledge of the birth of the child or of the fact of registration of said birth, whichever is earlier. (263a)

Art. 171. The heirs of the husband may impugn the filiation of the child within the period prescribed in the preceding article only in the following cases:

(1) If the husband should died before the expiration of the period fixed for bringing his action;

(2) If he should die after the filing of the complaint without having desisted therefrom; or

(3) If the child was born after the death of the husband. (262a)

Chapter 2. Proof of Filiation

   Art. 172. The filiation of legitimate children is established by any of the following:

(1) The record of birth appearing in the civil register or a final judgment; or

(2) An admission of legitimate filiation in a public document or a private handwritten instrument and signed by the parent concerned.

In the absence of the foregoing evidence, the legitimate filiation shall be

proved by:

(1) The open and continuous possession of the status of a legitimate child; or

(2) Any other means allowed by the Rules of Court and special laws. (265a, 266a, 267a)

Art. 173. The action to claim legitimacy may be brought by the child during his or her lifetime and shall be transmitted to the heirs should the child die during minority or in a state of insanity. In these cases, the heirs shall have a period of five years within which to institute the action.

Art. 174. Legitimate children shall have the right:

(1) To bear the surnames of the father and the mother, in conformity with the provisions of the Civil Code on Surnames;

(2) To receive support from their parents, their ascendants, and in proper cases, their brothers and sisters, in conformity with the provisions of this Code on Support; and

(3) To be entitled to the legitimate and other successional rights granted to them by the Civil Code. (264a)

Chapter 3. Illegitimate Children

   Art. 175. Illegitimate children may establish their illegitimate filiation in the same way and on the same evidence as legitimate children.

The action must be brought within the same period specified in Article 173, except when the action is based on the second paragraph of Article 172, in which case the action may be brought during the lifetime of the alleged parent. (289a)

Art. 176. Illegitimate children shall use the surname and shall be under the parental authority of their mother, and shall be entitled to support in conformity with this Code. The legitime of each illegitimate child shall consist of one-half of the legitime of a legitimate child. Except for this modification, all other provisions in the Civil Code governing successional rights shall remain in force. (287a)   

Chapter 4. Legitimated Children

   Art. 177. Only children conceived and born outside of wedlock of parents who, at the time of the conception of the former, were not disqualified by any impediment to marry each other may be legitimated. (269a)

Art. 178. Legitimation shall take place by a subsequent valid marriage between parents. The annulment of a voidable marriage shall not affect the legitimation. (270a)

Art. 179. Legitimated children shall enjoy the same rights as legitimate children. (272a)

Art. 180. The effects of legitimation shall retroact to the time of the child's birth. (273a)

Art. 181. The legitimation of children who died before the celebration of the marriage shall benefit their descendants. (274)

Art. 182. Legitimation may be impugned only by those who are prejudiced in their rights, within five years from the time their cause of action accrues. (275a)   

TITLE VII

  ADOPTION

   Art. 183. A person of age and in possession of full civil capacity and legal rights may adopt, provided he is in a position to support and care for his children, legitimate or illegitimate, in keeping with the means of the family.

Only minors may be adopted, except in the cases when the adoption of a person of majority age is allowed in this Title.

In addition, the adopter must be at least sixteen years older than the person to be adopted, unless the adopter is the parent by nature of the adopted, or is the spouse of the legitimate parent of the person to be adopted. (27a, E. O. 91 and PD 603)

Art. 184. The following persons may not adopt:

(1) The guardian with respect to the ward prior to the approval of the final accounts rendered upon the termination of their guardianship relation;

(2) Any person who has been convicted of a crime involving moral turpitude;

(3) An alien, except:   

(a) A former Filipino citizen who seeks to adopt a relative by consanguinity;

(b) One who seeks to adopt the legitimate child of his or her Filipino spouse; or

(c) One who is married to a Filipino citizen and seeks to adopt jointly with his or her spouse a relative by consanguinity of the latter.

Aliens not included in the foregoing exceptions may adopt Filipino children in accordance with the rules on inter-country adoptions as may be provided by law. (28a, E. O. 91 and PD 603)

Art. 185. Husband and wife must jointly adopt, except in the following cases:

(1) When one spouse seeks to adopt his own illegitimate child; or

(2) When one spouse seeks to adopt the legitimate child of the other. (29a, E. O. 91 and PD 603)

Art. 186. In case husband and wife jointly adopt or one spouse adopts the legitimate child of the other, joint parental authority shall be exercised by the spouses in accordance with this Code. (29a, E. O. and PD 603)

Art. 187. The following may not be adopted:

(1) A person of legal age, unless he or she is a child by nature of the adopter or his or her spouse, or, prior to the adoption, said person has been consistently considered and treated by the adopter as his or her own child during minority.

(2) An alien with whose government the Republic of the Philippines has no diplomatic relations; and

(3) A person who has already been adopted unless such adoption has been previously revoked or rescinded. (30a, E. O. 91 and PD 603)

Art. 188. The written consent of the following to the adoption shall be necessary:

(1) The person to be adopted, if ten years of age or over,

(2) The parents by nature of the child, the legal guardian, or the proper government instrumentality;

(3) The legitimate and adopted children, ten years of age or over, of the adopting parent or parents;

(4) The illegitimate children, ten years of age or over, of the adopting parent, if living with said parent and the latter's spouse, if any; and

(5) The spouse, if any, of the person adopting or to be adopted. (31a, E. O. 91 and PD 603)

Art. 189. Adoption shall have the following effects:

(1) For civil purposes, the adopted shall be deemed to be a legitimate child of the adopters and both shall acquire the reciprocal rights and obligations arising from the relationship of parent and child, including the right of the adopted to use the surname of the adopters;

(2) The parental authority of the parents by nature over the adopted shall terminate and be vested in the adopters, except that if the adopter is the spouse of the parent by nature of the adopted, parental authority over the adopted shall be exercised jointly by both spouses; and

(3) The adopted shall remain an intestate heir of his parents and other blood relatives. (39(1)a, (3)a, PD 603)

Art. 190. Legal or intestate succession to the estate of the adopted shall be governed by the following rules:

(1) Legitimate and illegitimate children and descendants and the surviving spouse of the adopted shall inherit from the adopted, in accordance with the ordinary rules of legal or intestate succession;

(2) When the parents, legitimate or illegitimate, or the legitimate ascendants of the adopted concur with the adopter, they shall divide the entire estate, one-half to be inherited by the parents or ascendants and the other half, by the adopters;

(3) When the surviving spouse or the illegitimate children of the adopted concur with the adopters, they shall divide the entire estate in equal shares, one-half to be inherited by the spouse or the illegitimate children of the adopted and the other half, by the adopters.

(4) When the adopters concur with the illegitimate children and the surviving spouse of the adopted, they shall divide the entire estate in equal shares, one-third to be inherited by the illegitimate children, one-third by the surviving spouse, and one-third by the adopters;

(5) When only the adopters survive, they shall inherit the entire estate; and

(6) When only collateral blood relatives of the adopted survive, then the ordinary rules of legal or intestate succession shall apply. (39(4)a, PD 603)

Art. 191. If the adopted is a minor or otherwise incapacitated, the adoption may be judicially rescinded upon petition of any person authorized by the court or proper government instrumental acting on his behalf, on the same grounds prescribed for loss or suspension of parental authority. If the adopted is at least eighteen years of age, he may petition for judicial rescission of the adoption on the same grounds prescribed for disinheriting an ascendant. (40a, PD 603)

Art. 192. The adopters may petition the court for the judicial rescission of the adoption in any of the following cases:

(1) If the adopted has committed any act constituting ground for disinheriting a descendant; or

(2) When the adopted has abandoned the home of the adopters during minority for at least one year, or, by some other acts, has definitely repudiated the adoption. (41a, PD 603)

Art. 193. If the adopted minor has not reached the age of majority at the time of the judicial rescission of the adoption, the court in the same proceeding shall reinstate the parental authority of the parents by nature, unless the latter are disqualified or incapacitated, in which case the court shall appoint a guardian over the person and property of the minor. If the adopted person is physically or mentally handicapped, the court shall appoint in the same proceeding a guardian over his person or property or both.

Judicial rescission of the adoption shall extinguish all reciprocal rights and obligations between the adopters and the adopted arising from the relationship of parent and child. The adopted shall likewise lose the right to use the surnames of the adopters and shall resume his surname prior to the adoption.

The court shall accordingly order the amendment of the records in the proper registries. (42a, PD 603)   

TITLE VIII

  SUPPORT

   Art. 194. Support comprises everything indispensable for sustenance, dwelling, clothing, medical attendance, education and transportation, in keeping with the financial capacity of the family.

The education of the person entitled to be supported referred to in the preceding paragraph shall include his schooling or training for some profession, trade or vocation, even beyond the age of majority. Transportation shall include expenses in going to and from school, or to and from place of work. (290a)

Art. 105. Subject to the provisions of the succeeding articles, the following are obliged to support each other to the whole extent set forth in the preceding article:

(1) The spouses;

(2) Legitimate ascendants and descendants;

(3) Parents and their legitimate children and the legitimate and illegitimate children of the latter;

(4) Parents and their illegitimate children and the legitimate and illegitimate children of the latter; and

(5) Legitimate brothers and sisters, whether of full or half-blood (291a)

Art. 196. Brothers and sisters not legitimately related, whether of the full or half-blood, are likewise bound to support each other to the full extent set forth in Article 194, except only when the need for support of the brother or sister, being of age, is due to a cause imputable to the claimant's fault or negligence. (291a)

Art. 197. In case of legitimate ascendants; descendants, whether legitimate or illegitimate; and brothers and sisters, whether legitimately or illegitimately related, only the separate property of the person obliged to give support shall be answerable provided that in case the obligor has no separate property, the absolute community or the conjugal partnership, if financially capable, shall advance the support, which shall be deducted from the share of the spouse obliged upon the liquidation of the absolute community or of the conjugal partnership. (n)

Art. 198. During the proceedings for legal separation or for annulment of marriage, and for declaration of nullity of marriage, the spouses and their children shall be supported from the properties of the absolute community or the conjugal partnership. After the final judgment granting the petition, the obligation of mutual support between the spouses ceases. However, in case of legal separation, the court may order that the guilty spouse shall give support to the innocent one, specifying the terms of such order. (292a)

Art. 199. Whenever two or more persons are obliged to give support, the liability shall devolve upon the following persons in the order herein provided:

(1) The spouse;

(2) The descendants in the nearest degree;

(3) The ascendants in the nearest degree; and

(4) The brothers and sisters. (294a)

Art. 200. When the obligation to give support falls upon two or more persons, the payment of the same shall be divided between them in proportion to the resources of each.

However, in case of urgent need and by special circumstances, the judge may order only one of them to furnish the support provisionally, without prejudice to his right to claim from the other obligors the share due from them.

When two or more recipients at the same time claim support from one and the same person legally obliged to give it, should the latter not have sufficient means to satisfy all claims, the order established in the preceding article shall be followed, unless the concurrent obligees should be the spouse and a child subject to parental authority, in which case the child shall be preferred. (295a)

Art. 201. The amount of support, in the cases referred to in Articles 195 and 196, shall be in proportion to the resources or means of the giver and to the necessities of the recipient. (296a)

Art. 202. Support in the cases referred to in the preceding article shall be reduced or increased proportionately, according to the reduction or increase of the necessities of the recipient and the resources or means of the person obliged to furnish the same. (297a)

Art. 203. The obligation to give support shall be demandable from the time the person who has a right to receive the same needs it for maintenance, but it shall not be paid except from the date of judicial or extra-judicial demand.

Support pendente lite may be claimed in accordance with the Rules of Court.

Payment shall be made within the first five days of each corresponding month or when the recipient dies, his heirs shall not be obliged to return what he has received in advance. (298a)

Art. 204. The person obliged to give support shall have the option to fulfill the obligation either by paying the allowance fixed, or by receiving and maintaining in the family dwelling the person who has a right to receive support. The latter alternative cannot be availed of in case there is a moral or legal obstacle thereto. (299a)

Art. 205. The right to receive support under this Title as well as any money or property obtained as such support shall not be levied upon on attachment or execution. (302a)

Art. 206. When, without the knowledge of the person obliged to give support, it is given by a stranger, the latter shall have a right to claim the same from the former, unless it appears that he gave it without intention of being reimbursed. (2164a)

Art. 207. When the person obliged to support another unjustly refuses or fails to give support when urgently needed by the latter, any third person may furnish support to the needy individual, with right of reimbursement from the person obliged to give support. This Article shall particularly apply when the father or mother of a child under the age of majority unjustly refuses to support or fails to give support to the child when urgently needed. (2166a)

Art. 208. In case of contractual support or that given by will, the excess in amount beyond that required for legal support shall be subject to levy on attachment or execution.

Furthermore, contractual support shall be subject to adjustment whenever modification is necessary due to changes of circumstances manifestly beyond the contemplation of the parties. (n)   

TITLE IX

  PARENTAL AUTHORITY

  Chapter 1. General Provisions

   Art. 209. Pursuant to the natural right and duty of parents over the person and property of their unemancipated children, parental authority and responsibility shall include the caring for and rearing them for civic consciousness and efficiency and the development of their moral, mental and physical character and well-being. (n)

Art. 210. Parental authority and responsibility may not be renounced or transferred except in the cases authorized by law.(313a)

Art. 211. The father and the mother shall jointly exercise parental authority over the persons of their common children. In case of disagreement, the father's decision shall prevail, unless there is a judicial order to the contrary.

Children shall always observe respect and reverence towards their parents and are obliged to obey them as long as the children are under parental authority. (311a)  

Art. 212. In case of absence or death of either parent, the parent present shall continue exercising parental authority. The remarriage of the surviving parent shall not affect the parental authority over the children, unless the court appoints another person to be the guardian of the person or property of the children. (n)

Art. 213. In case of separation of the parents, parental authority shall be exercised by the parent designated by the Court. The Court shall take into account all relevant considerations, especially the choice of the child over seven years of age, unless the parent chosen is unfit. (n)

Art. 214. In case of death, absence or unsuitability of the parents, substitute parental authority shall be exercised by the surviving grandparent. In case several survive, the one designated by the court, taking into account the same consideration mentioned in the preceding article, shall exercise the authority. (355a)

Art. 215. No descendant shall be compelled, in a criminal case, to testify against his parents and grandparents, except when such testimony is indispensable in a crime against the descendant or by one parent against the other. (315a)   

Chapter 2. Substitute and Special Parental Authority

   Art. 216. In default of parents or a judicially appointed guardian, the following person shall exercise substitute parental authority over the child in the order indicated:

(1) The surviving grandparent, as provided in Art. 214;

(2) The oldest brother or sister, over twenty-one years of age, unless unfit or disqualified; and

(3) The child's actual custodian, over twenty-one years of age, unless unfit or disqualified.

Whenever the appointment or a judicial guardian over the property of the child becomes necessary, the same order of preference shall be observed. (349a, 351a, 354a)

Art. 217. In case of foundlings, abandoned neglected or abused children and other children similarly situated, parental authority shall be entrusted in summary judicial proceedings to heads of children's homes, orphanages and similar institutions duly accredited by the proper government agency. (314a)

Art. 218. The school, its administrators and teachers, or the individual, entity or institution engaged in child are shall have special parental authority and responsibility over the minor child while under their supervision, instruction or custody.

Authority and responsibility shall apply to all authorized activities whether inside or outside the premises of the school, entity or institution. (349a)

Art. 129. Those given the authority and responsibility under the preceding Article shall be principally and solidarily liable for damages caused by the acts or omissions of the unemancipated minor. The parents, judicial guardians or the persons exercising substitute parental authority over said minor shall be subsidiarily liable.

The respective liabilities of those referred to in the preceding paragraph shall not apply if it is proved that they exercised the proper diligence required under the particular circumstances.

All other cases not covered by this and the preceding articles shall be governed by the provisions of the Civil Code on quasi-delicts. (n)   

Chapter 3. Effect of Parental Authority

  Upon the Persons of the Children

   Art. 220. The parents and those exercising parental authority shall have with the respect to their unemancipated children on wards the following rights and duties:

(1) To keep them in their company, to support, educate and instruct them by right precept and good example, and to provide for their upbringing in keeping with their means;

(2) To give them love and affection, advice and counsel, companionship and understanding;

(3) To provide them with moral and spiritual guidance, inculcate in them honesty, integrity, self-discipline, self-reliance, industry and thrift, stimulate their interest in civic affairs, and inspire in them compliance with the duties of citizenship;

(4) To furnish them with good and wholesome educational materials, supervise their activities, recreation and association with others, protect them from bad company, and prevent them from acquiring habits detrimental to their health, studies and morals;

(5) To represent them in all matters affecting their interests;

(6) To demand from them respect and obedience;

(7) To impose discipline on them as may be required under the circumstances; and

(8) To perform such other duties as are imposed by law upon parents and guardians. (316a)

Art. 221. Parents and other persons exercising parental authority shall be civilly liable for the injuries and damages caused by the acts or omissions of their unemancipated children living in their company and under their parental authority subject to the appropriate defenses provided by law. (2180(2)a and (4)a )

Art. 222. The courts may appoint a guardian of the child's property or a guardian ad litem when the best interests of the child so requires. (317)

Art. 223. The parents or, in their absence or incapacity, the individual, entity or institution exercising parental authority, may petition the proper court of the place where the child resides, for an order providing for disciplinary measures over the child. The child shall be entitled to the assistance of counsel, either of his choice or appointed by the court, and a summary hearing shall be conducted wherein the petitioner and the child shall be heard.

However, if in the same proceeding the court finds the petitioner at fault, irrespective of the merits of the petition, or when the circumstances so warrant, the court may also order the deprivation or suspension of parental authority or adopt such other measures as it may deem just and proper. (318a)

Art. 224. The measures referred to in the preceding article may include the commitment of the child for not more than thirty days in entities or institutions engaged in child care or in children's homes duly accredited by the proper government agency.

The parent exercising parental authority shall not interfere with the care of the child whenever committed but shall provide for his support. Upon proper petition or at its own instance, the court may terminate the commitment of the child whenever just and proper. (391a)   

Chapter 4. Effect of Parental Authority Upon

the Property of the Children

   Art. 225. The father and the mother shall jointly exercise legal guardianship over the property of the unemancipated common child without the necessity of a court appointment. In case of disagreement, the father's decision shall prevail, unless there is a judicial order to the contrary.

Where the market value of the property or the annual income of the child exceeds P50,000, the parent concerned shall be required to furnish a bond in such amount as the court may determine, but not less than ten per centum (10%) of the value of the property or annual income, to guarantee the performance of the obligations prescribed for general guardians.

A verified petition for approval of the bond shall be filed in the proper court of the place where the child resides, or, if the child resides in a foreign country, in the proper court of the place where the property or any part thereof is situated.

The petition shall be docketed as a summary special proceeding in which all incidents and issues regarding the performance of the obligations referred to in the second paragraph of this Article shall be heard and resolved.

The ordinary rules on guardianship shall be merely suppletory except when the child is under substitute parental authority, or the guardian is a stranger, or a parent has remarried, in which case the ordinary rules on guardianship shall apply. (320a)

Art. 226. The property of the unemancipated child earned or acquired with his work or industry or by onerous or gratuitous title shall belong to the child in ownership and shall be devoted exclusively to the latter's support and education, unless the title or transfer provides otherwise.

The right of the parents over the fruits and income of the child's property shall be limited primarily to the child's support and secondarily to the collective daily needs of the family. (321a, 323a)

Art. 227. If the parents entrust the management or administration of any of their properties to an unemancipated child, the net proceeds of such property shall belong to the owner. The child shall be given a reasonable monthly allowance in an amount not less than that which the owner would have paid if the administrator were a stranger, unless the owner, grants the entire proceeds to the child. In any case, the proceeds thus give in whole or in part shall not be charged to the child's legitime. (322a)   

Chapter 5. Suspension or Termination of Parental Authority

   Art. 228. Parental authority terminates permanently:

(1) Upon the death of the parents;

(2) Upon the death of the child; or

(3) Upon emancipation of the child. (327a)

Art. 229. Unless subsequently revived by a final judgment, parental authority also terminates:

(1) Upon adoption of the child;

(2) Upon appointment of a general guardian;

(3) Upon judicial declaration of abandonment of the child in a case filed for the purpose;

(4) Upon final judgment of a competent court divesting the party concerned of parental authority; or

(5) Upon judicial declaration of absence or incapacity of the person exercising parental authority. (327a)

Art. 230. Parental authority is suspended upon conviction of the parent or the person exercising the same of a crime which carries with it the penalty of civil interdiction. The authority is automatically reinstated upon service of the penalty or upon pardon or amnesty of the offender. (330a)

Art. 231. The court in an action filed for the purpose in a related case may also suspend parental authority if the parent or the person exercising the same:

(1) Treats the child with excessive harshness or cruelty;

(2) Gives the child corrupting orders, counsel or example;

(3) Compels the child to beg; or

(4) Subjects the child or allows him to be subjected to acts of lasciviousness.

The grounds enumerated above are deemed to include cases which have resulted from culpable negligence of the parent or the person exercising parental authority.

If the degree of seriousness so warrants, or the welfare of the child so demands, the court shall deprive the guilty party of parental authority or adopt such other measures as may be proper under the circumstances.

The suspension or deprivation may be revoked and the parental authority revived in a case filed for the purpose or in the same proceeding if the court finds that the cause therefor has ceased and will not be repeated. (33a)

Art. 232. If the person exercising parental authority has subjected the child or allowed him to be subjected to sexual abuse, such person shall be permanently deprived by the court of such authority. (n)

Art. 233. The person exercising substitute parental authority shall have the same authority over the person of the child as the parents.

In no case shall the school administrator, teacher of individual engaged in child care exercising special parental authority inflict corporal punishment upon the child. (n)   

TITLE X

  EMANCIPATION AND AGE OF MAJORITY

   Art. 234. Emancipation takes place by the attainment of majority. Unless otherwise provided, majority commences at the age of twenty-one years.

Emancipation also takes place:

(1) By the marriage of the minor; or

(2) By the recording in the Civil Register of an agreement in a public instrument executed by the parent exercising parental authority and the minor at least eighteen years of age. Such emancipation shall be irrevocable. (397a, 398a, 400a, 401a)

Art. 235. The provisions governing emancipation by recorded agreement shall also apply to an orphan minor and the person exercising parental authority but the agreement must be approved by the court before it is recorded. (n)

Art. 236. Emancipation for any cause shall terminate parental authority over the person and property of the child who shall then be qualified and responsible for all acts of civil life. (412a)

Art. 237. The annulment or declaration of nullity of the marriage of a minor or of the recorded agreement mentioned in the foregoing. Articles 234 and 235 shall revive the parental authority over the minor but shall not affect acts and transactions that took place prior to the recording of the final judgment in the Civil Register. (n)   

TITLE XI

  SUMMARY JUDICIAL PROCEEDINGS IN THE FAMILY LAW

  Chapter 1. Prefatory Provisions

   Art. 238. Until modified by the Supreme Court, the procedural rules provided for in this Title shall apply as regards separation in fact between husband and wife, abandonment by one of the other, and incidents involving parental authority. (n)   

Chapter 2. Separation in Fact

   Art. 239. When a husband and wife are separated in fact, or one has abandoned the other and one of them seeks judicial authorization for a transaction where the consent of the other spouse is required by law but such consent is withheld or cannot be obtained, a verified petition may be filed in court alleging the foregoing facts.

The petition shall attach the proposed deed, if any, embodying the transaction, and, if none, shall describe in detail the said transaction and state the reason why the required consent thereto cannot be secured. In any case, the final deed duly executed by the parties shall be submitted to and approved by the court. (n)

Art. 240. Claims for damages by either spouse, except costs of the proceedings, may be litigated only in a separate action. (n)

Art. 241. Jurisdiction over the petition shall, upon proof of notice to the other spouse, be exercised by the proper court authorized to hear family cases, if one exists, or in the regional trial court or its equivalent sitting in the place where either of the spouses resides. (n)

Art. 242. Upon the filing of the petition, the court shall notify the other spouse, whose consent to the transaction is required, of said petition, ordering said spouse to show cause why the petition should not be granted, on or before the date set in said notice for the initial conference. The notice shall be accompanied by a copy of the petition and shall be served at the last known address of the spouse concerned. (n)

Art. 243. A preliminary conference shall be conducted by the judge personally without the parties being assisted by counsel. After the initial conference, if the court deems it useful, the parties may be assisted by counsel at the succeeding conferences and hearings. (n)

Art. 244. In case of non-appearance of the spouse whose consent is sought, the court shall inquire into the reasons for his failure to appear, and shall require such appearance, if possible. (n)

Art. 245. If, despite all efforts, the attendance of the non-consenting spouse is not secured, the court may proceed ex parte and render judgment as the facts and circumstances may warrant. In any case, the judge shall endeavor to protect the interests of the non-appearing spouse. (n)

Art. 246. If the petition is not resolved at the initial conference, said petition shall be decided in a summary hearing on the basis of affidavits, documentary evidence or oral testimonies at the sound discretion of the court. If testimony is needed, the court shall specify the witnesses to be heard and the subject-matter of their testimonies, directing the parties to present said witnesses. (n)

Art. 247. The judgment of the court shall be immediately final and executory. (n)

Art. 248. The petition for judicial authority to administer or encumber specific separate property of the abandoning spouse and to use the fruits or proceeds thereof for the support of the family shall also be governed by these rules. (n)   

Chapter 3. Incidents Involving Parental Authority

   Art. 249. Petitions filed under Articles 223, 225 and 235 of this Code involving parental authority shall be verified. (n)

Art. 250. Such petitions shall be verified and filed in the proper court of the place where the child resides. (n)

Art. 251. Upon the filing of the petition, the court shall notify the parents or, in their absence or incapacity, the individuals, entities or institutions exercising parental authority over the child. (n)

Art. 252. The rules in Chapter 2 hereof shall also govern summary proceedings under this Chapter insofar as they are applicable. (n)   

Chapter 4. Other Matters Subject to Summary Proceedings

   Art. 253. The foregoing rules in Chapters 2 and 3 hereof shall likewise govern summary proceedings filed under Articles 41, 51, 69, 73, 96, 124 and 127, insofar as they are applicable. (n)   

TITLE XII

  FINAL PROVISIONS

   Art. 254. Titles III, IV, V, VI, VIII, IX, XI, and XV of Book 1 of Republic Act No. 386, otherwise known as the Civil Code of the Philippines, as amended, and Articles 17, 18, 19, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 39, 40, 41, and 42 of Presidential Decree No. 603, otherwise known as the Child and Youth Welfare Code, as amended, and all laws, decrees, executive orders, proclamations, rules and regulations, or parts thereof, inconsistent herewith are hereby repealed.

Art. 255. If any provision of this Code is held invalid, all the other provisions not affected thereby shall remain valid.

Art. 256. This Code shall have retroactive effect insofar as it does not prejudice or impair vested or acquired rights in accordance with the Civil Code or other laws.

Art. 257. This Code shall take effect one year after the completion of its publication in a newspaper of general circulation, as certified by the Executive Secretary, Office of the President.

Done in the City of Manila, this 6th day of July, in the year of Our Lord, nineteen hundred and eighty-seven.

[codalsetal]

1987 Constitution of the Philippines

PREAMBLE

We, the sovereign Filipino people, imploring the aid of Almighty God, in order to build a just and humane society, and establish a Government that shall embody our ideals and aspirations, promote the common good, conserve and develop our patrimony, and secure to ourselves and our posterity, the blessings of independence and democracy under the rule of law and a regime of truth, justice, freedom, love, equality, and peace, do ordain and promulgate this Constitution.

ARTICLE I

NATIONAL TERRITORY

The national territory comprises the Philippine archipelago, with all the islands and waters embraced therein, and all other territories over which the Philippines has sovereignty or jurisdiction, consisting of its terrestrial, fluvial and aerial domains, including its territorial sea, the seabed, the subsoil, the insular shelves, and other submarine areas. The waters around, between, and connecting the islands of the archipelago, regardless of their breadth and dimensions, form part of the internal waters of the Philippines.

ARTICLE II DECLARATION OF PRINCIPLES AND STATE POLICIES PRINCIPLES

Section 1. The Philippines is a democratic and republican State. Sovereignty resides in the people and all government authority emanates from them.

Section 2. The Philippines renounces war as an instrument of national policy, adopts the generally accepted principles of international law as part of the law of the land and adheres to the policy of peace, equality, justice, freedom, cooperation, and amity with all nations.

Section 3. Civilian authority is, at all times, supreme over the military. The Armed Forces of the Philippines is the protector of the people and the State. Its goal is to secure the sovereignty of the State and the integrity of the national territory.

Section 4. The prime duty of the Government is to serve and protect the people. The Government may call upon the people to defend the State and, in the fulfillment thereof, all citizens may be required, under conditions provided by law, to render personal, military or civil service.

Section 5. The maintenance of peace and order, the protection of life, liberty, and property, and promotion of the general welfare are essential for the enjoyment by all the people of the blessings of democracy.

Section 6. The separation of Church and State shall be inviolable.

STATE POLICIES

Section 7. The State shall pursue an independent foreign policy. In its relations with other states, the paramount consideration shall be national sovereignty, territorial integrity, national interest, and the right to self-determination.

Section 8. The Philippines, consistent with the national interest, adopts and pursues a policy of freedom from nuclear weapons in its territory.

Section 9. The State shall promote a just and dynamic social order that will ensure the prosperity and independence of the nation and free the people from poverty through policies that provide adequate social services, promote full employment, a rising standard of living, and an improved quality of life for all.

Section 10. The State shall promote social justice in all phases of national development.

Section 11. The State values the dignity of every human person and guarantees full respect for human rights.

Section 12. The State recognizes the sanctity of family life and shall protect and strengthen the family as a basic autonomous social institution. It shall equally protect the life of the mother and the life of the unborn from conception. The natural and primary right and duty of parents in the rearing of the youth for civic efficiency and the development of moral character shall receive the support of the Government.

Section 13. The State recognizes the vital role of the youth in nation-building and shall promote and protect their physical, moral, spiritual, intellectual, and social well-being. It shall inculcate in the youth patriotism and nationalism, and encourage their involvement in public and civic affairs.

Section 14. The State recognizes the role of women in nation-building, and shall ensure the fundamental equality before the law of women and men.

Section 15. The State shall protect and promote the right to health of the people and instill health consciousness among them.

Section 16. The State shall protect and advance the right of the people to a balanced and healthful ecology in accord with the rhythm and harmony of nature.

Section 17. The State shall give priority to education, science and technology, arts, culture, and sports to foster patriotism and nationalism, accelerate social progress, and promote total human liberation and development.

Section 18. The State affirms labor as a primary social economic force. It shall protect the rights of workers and promote their welfare.

Section 19. The State shall develop a self-reliant and independent national economy effectively controlled by Filipinos.

Section 20. The State recognizes the indispensable role of the private sector, encourages private enterprise, and provides incentives to needed investments.

Section 21. The State shall promote comprehensive rural development and agrarian reform.

Section 22. The State recognizes and promotes the rights of indigenous cultural communities within the framework of national unity and development.

Section 23. The State shall encourage non-governmental, community-based, or sectoral organizations that promote the welfare of the nation.

Section 24. The State recognizes the vital role of communication and information in nation-building.

Section 25. The State shall ensure the autonomy of local governments.

Section 26. The State shall guarantee equal access to opportunities for public service and prohibit political dynasties as may be defined by law.

Section 27. The State shall maintain honesty and integrity in the public service and take positive and effective measures against graft and corruption.

Section 28. Subject to reasonable conditions prescribed by law, the State adopts and implements a policy of full public disclosure of all its transactions involving public interest.

ARTICLE III

BILL OF RIGHTS

Section 1. No person shall be deprived of life, liberty, or property without due process of law, nor shall any person be denied the equal protection of the laws.

Section 2. The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers, and effects against unreasonable searches and seizures of whatever nature and for any purpose shall be inviolable, and no search warrant or warrant of arrest shall issue except upon probable cause to be determined personally by the judge after examination under oath or affirmation of the complainant and the witnesses he may produce, and particularly describing the place to be searched and the persons or things to be seized.

Section 3.

The privacy of communication and correspondence shall be inviolable except upon lawful order of the court, or when public safety or order requires otherwise, as prescribed by law.

Any evidence obtained in violation of this or the preceding section shall be inadmissible for any purpose in any proceeding.

Section 4. No law shall be passed abridging the freedom of speech, of expression, or of the press, or the right of the people peaceably to assemble and petition the government for redress of grievances.

Section 5. No law shall be made respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof. The free exercise and enjoyment of religious profession and worship, without discrimination or preference, shall forever be allowed. No religious test shall be required for the exercise of civil or political rights.

Section 6. The liberty of abode and of changing the same within the limits prescribed by law shall not be impaired except upon lawful order of the court. Neither shall the right to travel be impaired except in the interest of national security, public safety, or public health, as may be provided by law.

Section 7. The right of the people to information on matters of public concern shall be recognized. Access to official records, and to documents and papers pertaining to official acts, transactions, or decisions, as well as to government research data used as basis for policy development, shall be afforded the citizen, subject to such limitations as may be provided by law.

Section 8. The right of the people, including those employed in the public and private sectors, to form unions, associations, or societies for purposes not contrary to law shall not be abridged.

Section 9. Private property shall not be taken for public use without just compensation.

Section 10. No law impairing the obligation of contracts shall be passed.

Section 11. Free access to the courts and quasi-judicial bodies and adequate legal assistance shall not be denied to any person by reason of poverty.

Section 12.

Any person under investigation for the commission of an offense shall have the right to be informed of his right to remain silent and to have competent and independent counsel preferably of his own choice. If the person cannot afford the services of counsel, he must be provided with one. These rights cannot be waived except in writing and in the presence of counsel.

No torture, force, violence, threat, intimidation, or any other means which vitiate the free will shall be used against him. Secret detention places, solitary, incommunicado, or other similar forms of detention are prohibited.

Any confession or admission obtained in violation of this or Section 17 hereof shall be inadmissible in evidence against him.

The law shall provide for penal and civil sanctions for violations of this Section as well as compensation to the rehabilitation of victims of torture or similar practices, and their families.

Section 13. All persons, except those charged with offenses punishable by reclusion perpetua when evidence of guilt is strong, shall, before conviction, be bailable by sufficient sureties, or be released on recognizance as may be provided by law. The right to bail shall not be impaired even when the privilege of the writ of habeas corpus is suspended. Excessive bail shall not be required.

Section 14.

No person shall be held to answer for a criminal offense without due process of law.

In all criminal prosecutions, the accused shall be presumed innocent until the contrary is proved, and shall enjoy the right to be heard by himself and counsel, to be informed of the nature and cause of the accusation against him, to have a speedy, impartial, and public trial, to meet the witnesses face to face, and to have compulsory process to secure the attendance of witnesses and the production of evidence in his behalf. However, after arraignment, trial may proceed notwithstanding the absence of the accused: Provided, that he has been duly notified and his failure to appear is unjustifiable.

Section 15. The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended except in cases of invasion or rebellion, when the public safety requires it.

Section 16. All persons shall have the right to a speedy disposition of their cases before all judicial, quasi-judicial, or administrative bodies.

Section 17. No person shall be compelled to be a witness against himself.

Section 18.

No person shall be detained solely by reason of his political beliefs and aspirations.

No involuntary servitude in any form shall exist except as a punishment for a crime whereof the party shall have been duly convicted.

Section 19.

Excessive fines shall not be imposed, nor cruel, degrading or inhuman punishment inflicted. Neither shall death penalty be imposed, unless, for compelling reasons involving heinous crimes, the Congress hereafter provides for it. Any death penalty already imposed shall be reduced to reclusion perpetua.

The employment of physical, psychological, or degrading punishment against any prisoner or detainee or the use of substandard or inadequate penal facilities under subhuman conditions shall be dealt with by law.

Section 20. No person shall be imprisoned for debt or non-payment of a poll tax.

Section 21. No person shall be twice put in jeopardy of punishment for the same offense. If an act is punished by a law and an ordinance, conviction or acquittal under either shall constitute a bar to another prosecution for the same act.

Section 22. No ex post facto law or bill of attainder shall be enacted.

ARTICLE IV CITIZENSHIP

Section 1. The following are citizens of the Philippines:

Those who are citizens of the Philippines at the time of the adoption of this Constitution;

Those whose fathers or mothers are citizens of the Philippines;

Those born before January 17, 1973, of Filipino mothers, who elect Philippine Citizenship upon reaching the age of majority; and

Those who are naturalized in the accordance with law.

Section 2. Natural-born citizens are those who are citizens of the Philippines from birth without having to perform any act to acquire or perfect their Philippine citizenship. Those who elect Philippine citizenship in accordance with paragraph (3), Section 1 hereof shall be deemed natural-born citizens.

Section 3. Philippine citizenship may be lost or reacquired in the manner provided by law.

Section 4. Citizens of the Philippines who marry aliens shall retain their citizenship, unless by their act or omission they are deemed, under the law to have renounced it.

Section 5. Dual allegiance of citizens is inimical to the national interest and shall be dealt with by law.

ARTICLE V SUFFRAGE

Section 1. Suffrage may be exercised by all citizens of the Philippines, not otherwise disqualified by law, who are at least eighteen years of age, and who shall have resided in the Philippines for at least one year and in the place wherein they propose to vote, for at least six months immediately preceding the election. No literacy, property, or other substantive requirement shall be imposed on the exercise of suffrage.

Section 2. The Congress shall provide a system for securing the secrecy and sanctity of the ballot as well as a system for absentee voting by qualified Filipinos abroad.

The Congress shall also design a procedure for the disabled and the illiterates to vote without the assistance of other persons. Until then, they shall be allowed to vote under existing laws and such rules as the Commission on Elections may promulgate to protect the secrecy of the ballot.

ARTICLE VI THE LEGISLATIVE DEPARTMENT

Section 1. The legislative power shall be vested in the Congress of the Philippines which shall consist of a Senate and a House of Representatives, except to the extent reserved to the people by the provision on initiative and referendum.

Section 2. The Senate shall be composed of twenty-four Senators who shall be elected at large by the qualified voters of the Philippines, as may be provided by law.

Section 3. No person shall be a Senator unless he is a natural-born citizen of the Philippines and, on the day of the election, is at least thirty-five years of age, able to read and write, a registered voter, and a resident of the Philippines for not less than two years immediately preceding the day of the election.

Section 4. The term of office of the Senators shall be six years and shall commence, unless otherwise provided by law, at noon on the thirtieth day of June next following their election. No Senator shall serve for more than two consecutive terms. Voluntary renunciation of the office for any length of time shall not be considered as an interruption in the continuity of his service for the full term of which he was elected.

Section 5.

The House of Representatives shall be composed of not more than two hundred and fifty members, unless otherwise fixed by law, who shall be elected from legislative districts apportioned among the provinces, cities, and the Metropolitan Manila area in accordance with the number of their respective inhabitants, and on the basis of a uniform and progressive ratio, and those who, as provided by law, shall be elected through a party-list system of registered national, regional, and sectoral parties or organizations.

The party-list representatives shall constitute twenty per centum of the total number of representatives including those under the party list. For three consecutive terms after the ratification of this Constitution, one-half of the seats allocated to party-list representatives shall be filled, as provided by law, by selection or election from the labor, peasant, urban poor, indigenous cultural communities, women, youth, and such other sectors as may be provided by law, except the religious sector.

Each legislative district shall comprise, as far as practicable, contiguous, compact, and adjacent territory. Each city with a population of at least two hundred fifty thousand, or each province, shall have at least one representative.

Within three years following the return of every census, the Congress shall make a reapportionment of legislative districts based on the standards provided in this section.

Section 6. No person shall be a Member of the House of Representatives unless he is a natural-born citizen of the Philippines and, on the day of the election, is at least twenty-five years of age, able to read and write, and, except the party-list representatives, a registered voter in the district in which he shall be elected, and a resident thereof for a period of not less than one year immediately preceding the day of the election.

Section 7. The Members of the House of Representatives shall be elected for a term of three years which shall begin, unless otherwise provided by law, at noon on the thirtieth day of June next following their election. No Member of the House of Representatives shall serve for more than three consecutive terms. Voluntary renunciation of the office for any length of time shall not be considered as an interruption in the continuity of his service for the full term for which he was elected.

Section 8. Unless otherwise provided by law, the regular election of the Senators and the Members of the House of Representatives shall be held on the second Monday of May.

Section 9. In case of vacancy in the Senate or in the House of Representatives, a special election may be called to fill such vacancy in the manner prescribed by law, but the Senator or Member of the House of Representatives thus elected shall serve only for the unexpired term.

Section 10. The salaries of Senators and Members of the House of Representatives shall be determined by law. No increase in said compensation shall take effect until after the expiration of the full term of all the Members of the Senate and the House of Representatives approving such increase.

Section 11. A Senator or Member of the House of Representatives shall, in all offenses punishable by not more than six years imprisonment, be privileged from arrest while the Congress is in session. No Member shall be questioned nor be held liable in any other place for any speech or debate in the Congress or in any committee thereof.

Section 12. All Members of the Senate and the House of Representatives shall, upon assumption of office, make a full disclosure of their financial and business interests. They shall notify the House concerned of a potential conflict of interest that may arise from the filing of a proposed legislation of which they are authors.

Section 13. No Senator or Member of the House of Representatives may hold any other office or employment in the Government, or any subdivision, agency, or instrumentality thereof, including government-owned or controlled corporations or their subsidiaries, during his term without forfeiting his seat. Neither shall he be appointed to any office which may have been created or the emoluments thereof increased during the term for which he was elected.

Section 14. No Senator or Member of the House of Representatives may personally appear as counsel before any court of justice or before the Electoral Tribunals, or quasi-judicial and other administrative bodies. Neither shall he, directly or indirectly, be interested financially in any contract with, or in any franchise or special privilege granted by the Government, or any subdivision, agency, or instrumentality thereof, including any government-owned or controlled corporation, or its subsidiary, during his term of office. He shall not intervene in any matter before any office of the Government for his pecuniary benefit or where he may be called upon to act on account of his office.

Section 15. The Congress shall convene once every year on the fourth Monday of July for its regular session, unless a different date is fixed by law, and shall continue to be in session for such number of days as it may determine until thirty days before the opening of its next regular session, exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays. The President may call a special session at any time.

Section 16.

The Senate shall elect its President and the House of Representatives, its Speaker, by a majority vote of all its respective Members. Each House shall choose such other officers as it may deem necessary.

A majority of each House shall constitute a quorum to do business, but a smaller number may adjourn from day to day and may compel the attendance of absent Members in such manner, and under such penalties, as such House may provide.

Each House may determine the rules of its proceedings, punish its Members for disorderly behavior, and, with the concurrence of two-thirds of all its Members, suspend or expel a Member. A penalty of suspension, when imposed, shall not exceed sixty days.

Each House shall keep a Journal of its proceedings, and from time to time publish the same, excepting such parts as may, in its judgment, affect national security; and the yeas and nays on any question shall, at the request of one-fifth of the Members present, be entered in the Journal. Each House shall also keep a Record of its proceedings.

Neither House during the sessions of the Congress shall, without the consent of the other, adjourn for more than three days, nor to any other place than that in which the two Houses shall be sitting.

Section 17. The Senate and the House of Representatives shall each have an Electoral Tribunal which shall be the sole judge of all contests relating to the election, returns, and qualifications of their respective Members. Each Electoral Tribunal shall be composed of nine Members, three of whom shall be Justices of the Supreme Court to be designated by the Chief Justice, and the remaining six shall be Members of the Senate or the House of Representatives, as the case may be, who shall be chosen on the basis of proportional representation from the political parties and the parties or organizations registered under the party-list system represented therein. The senior Justice in the Electoral Tribunal shall be its Chairman.

Section 18. There shall be a Commission on Appointments consisting of the President of the Senate, as ex officio Chairman, twelve Senators, and twelve Members of the House of Representatives, elected by each House on the basis of proportional representation from the political parties and parties or organizations registered under the party-list system represented therein. The chairman of the Commission shall not vote, except in case of a tie. The Commission shall act on all appointments submitted to it within thirty session days of the Congress from their submission. The Commission shall rule by a majority vote of all the Members.

Section 19. The Electoral Tribunals and the Commission on Appointments shall be constituted within thirty days after the Senate and the House of Representatives shall have been organized with the election of the President and the Speaker. The Commission on Appointments shall meet only while the Congress is in session, at the call of its Chairman or a majority of all its Members, to discharge such powers and functions as are herein conferred upon it.

Section 20. The records and books of accounts of the Congress shall be preserved and be open to the public in accordance with law, and such books shall be audited by the Commission on Audit which shall publish annually an itemized list of amounts paid to and expenses for each Member.

Section 21. The Senate or the House of Representatives or any of its respective committees may conduct inquiries in aid of legislation in accordance with its duly published rules of procedure. The rights of persons appearing in, or affected by, such inquiries shall be respected.

Section 22. The heads of departments may, upon their own initiative, with the consent of the President, or upon the request of either House, as the rules of each House shall provide, appear before and be heard by such House on any matter pertaining to their departments. Written questions shall be submitted to the President of the Senate or the Speaker of the House of Representatives at least three days before their scheduled appearance. Interpellations shall not be limited to written questions, but may cover matters related thereto. When the security of the State or the public interest so requires and the President so states in writing, the appearance shall be conducted in executive session.

Section 23.

The Congress, by a vote of two-thirds of both Houses in joint session assembled, voting separately, shall have the sole power to declare the existence of a state of war.

In times of war or other national emergency, the Congress may, by law, authorize the President, for a limited period and subject to such restrictions as it may prescribe, to exercise powers necessary and proper to carry out a declared national policy. Unless sooner withdrawn by resolution of the Congress, such powers shall cease upon the next adjournment thereof.

Section 24. All appropriation, revenue or tariff bills, bills authorizing increase of the public debt, bills of local application, and private bills, shall originate exclusively in the House of Representatives, but the Senate may propose or concur with amendments.

Section 25.

The Congress may not increase the appropriations recommended by the President for the operation of the Government as specified in the budget. The form, content, and manner of preparation of the budget shall be prescribed by law.

No provision or enactment shall be embraced in the general appropriations bill unless it relates specifically to some particular appropriation therein. Any such provision or enactment shall be limited in its operation to the appropriation to which it relates.

The procedure in approving appropriations for the Congress shall strictly follow the procedure for approving appropriations for other departments and agencies.

A special appropriations bill shall specify the purpose for which it is intended, and shall be supported by funds actually available as certified by the National Treasurer, or to be raised by a corresponding revenue proposal therein.

No law shall be passed authorizing any transfer of appropriations; however, the President, the President of the Senate, the Speaker of the House of Representatives, the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court, and the heads of Constitutional Commissions may, by law, be authorized to augment any item in the general appropriations law for their respective offices from savings in other items of their respective appropriations.

Discretionary funds appropriated for particular officials shall be disbursed only for public purposes to be supported by appropriate vouchers and subject to such guidelines as may be prescribed by law.

If, by the end of any fiscal year, the Congress shall have failed to pass the general appropriations bill for the ensuing fiscal year, the general appropriations law for the preceding fiscal year shall be deemed re-enacted and shall remain in force and effect until the general appropriations bill is passed by the Congress.

Section 26.

Every bill passed by the Congress shall embrace only one subject which shall be expressed in the title thereof.

No bill passed by either House shall become a law unless it has passed three readings on separate days, and printed copies thereof in its final form have been distributed to its Members three days before its passage, except when the President certifies to the necessity of its immediate enactment to meet a public calamity or emergency. Upon the last reading of a bill, no amendment thereto shall be allowed, and the vote thereon shall be taken immediately thereafter, and the yeas and nays entered in the Journal.

Section 27.

Every bill passed by the Congress shall, before it becomes a law, be presented to the President. If he approves the same he shall sign it; otherwise, he shall veto it and return the same with his objections to the House where it originated, which shall enter the objections at large in its Journal and proceed to reconsider it. If, after such reconsideration, two-thirds of all the Members of such House shall agree to pass the bill, it shall be sent, together with the objections, to the other House by which it shall likewise be reconsidered, and if approved by two-thirds of all the Members of that House, it shall become a law. In all such cases, the votes of each House shall be determined by yeas or nays, and the names of the Members voting for or against shall be entered in its Journal. The President shall communicate his veto of any bill to the House where it originated within thirty days after the date of receipt thereof, otherwise, it shall become a law as if he had signed it.

The President shall have the power to veto any particular item or items in an appropriation, revenue, or tariff bill, but the veto shall not affect the item or items to which he does not object.

Section 28.

The rule of taxation shall be uniform and equitable. The Congress shall evolve a progressive system of taxation.

The Congress may, by law, authorize the President to fix within specified limits, and subject to such limitations and restrictions as it may impose, tariff rates, import and export quotas, tonnage and wharfage dues, and other duties or imposts within the framework of the national development program of the Government.

Charitable institutions, churches and personages or convents appurtenant thereto, mosques, non-profit cemeteries, and all lands, buildings, and improvements, actually, directly, and exclusively used for religious, charitable, or educational purposes shall be exempt from taxation.

No law granting any tax exemption shall be passed without the concurrence of a majority of all the Members of the Congress.

Section 29.

No money shall be paid out of the Treasury except in pursuance of an appropriation made by law.

No public money or property shall be appropriated, applied, paid, or employed, directly or indirectly, for the use, benefit, or support of any sect, church, denomination, sectarian institution, or system of religion, or of any priest, preacher, minister, other religious teacher, or dignitary as such, except when such priest, preacher, minister, or dignitary is assigned to the armed forces, or to any penal institution, or government orphanage or leprosarium.

All money collected on any tax levied for a special purpose shall be treated as a special fund and paid out for such purpose only. If the purpose for which a special fund was created has been fulfilled or abandoned, the balance, if any, shall be transferred to the general funds of the Government.

Section 30. No law shall be passed increasing the appellate jurisdiction of the Supreme Court as provided in this Constitution without its advice and concurrence.

Section 31. No law granting a title of royalty or nobility shall be enacted.

Section 32. The Congress shall, as early as possible, provide for a system of initiative and referendum, and the exceptions therefrom, whereby the people can directly propose and enact laws or approve or reject any act or law or part thereof passed by the Congress or local legislative body after the registration of a petition therefor signed by at least ten per centum of the total number of registered voters, of which every legislative district must be represented by at least three per centum of the registered voters thereof.

ARTICLE VII EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT

Section 1. The executive power shall be vested in the President of the Philippines.

Section 2. No person may be elected President unless he is a natural-born citizen of the Philippines, a registered voter, able to read and write, at least forty years of age on the day of the election, and a resident of the Philippines for at least ten years immediately preceding such election.

Section 3. There shall be a Vice-President who shall have the same qualifications and term of office and be elected with, and in the same manner, as the President. He may be removed from office in the same manner as the President.

The Vice-President may be appointed as a Member of the Cabinet. Such appointment requires no confirmation.

Section 4. The President and the Vice-President shall be elected by direct vote of the people for a term of six years which shall begin at noon on the thirtieth day of June next following the day of the election and shall end at noon of the same date, six years thereafter. The President shall not be eligible for any re-election. No person who has succeeded as President and has served as such for more than four years shall be qualified for election to the same office at any time.

No Vice-President shall serve for more than two successive terms. Voluntary renunciation of the office for any length of time shall not be considered as an interruption in the continuity of the service for the full term for which he was elected.

Unless otherwise provided by law, the regular election for President and Vice-President shall be held on the second Monday of May.

The returns of every election for President and Vice-President, duly certified by the board of canvassers of each province or city, shall be transmitted to the Congress, directed to the President of the Senate. Upon receipt of the certificates of canvass, the President of the Senate shall, not later than thirty days after the day of the election, open all the certificates in the presence of the Senate and the House of Representatives in joint public session, and the Congress, upon determination of the authenticity and due execution thereof in the manner provided by law, canvass the votes.

The person having the highest number of votes shall be proclaimed elected, but in case two or more shall have an equal and highest number of votes, one of them shall forthwith be chosen by the vote of a majority of all the Members of both Houses of the Congress, voting separately.

The Congress shall promulgate its rules for the canvassing of the certificates.

The Supreme Court, sitting en banc, shall be the sole judge of all contests relating to the election, returns, and qualifications of the President or Vice-President, and may promulgate its rules for the purpose.

Section 5. Before they enter on the execution of their office, the President, the Vice-President, or the Acting President shall take the following oath or affirmation:

"I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faithfully and conscientiously fulfill my duties as President (or Vice-President or Acting President) of the Philippines, preserve and defend its Constitution, execute its laws, do justice to every man, and consecrate myself to the service of the Nation. So help me God." (In case of affirmation, last sentence will be omitted.)

Section 6. The President shall have an official residence. The salaries of the President and Vice-President shall be determined by law and shall not be decreased during their tenure. No increase in said compensation shall take effect until after the expiration of the term of the incumbent during which such increase was approved. They shall not receive during their tenure any other emolument from the Government or any other source.

Section 7. The President-elect and the Vice President-elect shall assume office at the beginning of their terms.

If the President-elect fails to qualify, the Vice President-elect shall act as President until the President-elect shall have qualified.

If a President shall not have been chosen, the Vice President-elect shall act as President until a President shall have been chosen and qualified.

If at the beginning of the term of the President, the President-elect shall have died or shall have become permanently disabled, the Vice President-elect shall become President.

Where no President and Vice-President shall have been chosen or shall have qualified, or where both shall have died or become permanently disabled, the President of the Senate or, in case of his inability, the Speaker of the House of Representatives, shall act as President until a President or a Vice-President shall have been chosen and qualified.

The Congress shall, by law, provide for the manner in which one who is to act as President shall be selected until a President or a Vice-President shall have qualified, in case of death, permanent disability, or inability of the officials mentioned in the next preceding paragraph.

Section 8. In case of death, permanent disability, removal from office, or resignation of the President, the Vice-President shall become the President to serve the unexpired term. In case of death, permanent disability, removal from office, or resignation of both the President and Vice-President, the President of the Senate or, in case of his inability, the Speaker of the House of Representatives, shall then act as President until the President or Vice-President shall have been elected and qualified.

The Congress shall, by law, provide who shall serve as President in case of death, permanent disability, or resignation of the Acting President. He shall serve until the President or the Vice-President shall have been elected and qualified, and be subject to the same restrictions of powers and disqualifications as the Acting President.

Section 9. Whenever there is a vacancy in the Office of the Vice-President during the term for which he was elected, the President shall nominate a Vice-President from among the Members of the Senate and the House of Representatives who shall assume office upon confirmation by a majority vote of all the Members of both Houses of the Congress, voting separately.

Section 10. The Congress shall, at ten o'clock in the morning of the third day after the vacancy in the offices of the President and Vice-President occurs, convene in accordance with its rules without need of a call and within seven days, enact a law calling for a special election to elect a President and a Vice-President to be held not earlier than forty-five days nor later than sixty days from the time of such call. The bill calling such special election shall be deemed certified under paragraph 2, Section 26, Article V1 of this Constitution and shall become law upon its approval on third reading by the Congress. Appropriations for the special election shall be charged against any current appropriations and shall be exempt from the requirements of paragraph 4, Section 25, Article V1 of this Constitution. The convening of the Congress cannot be suspended nor the special election postponed. No special election shall be called if the vacancy occurs within eighteen months before the date of the next presidential election.

Section 11. Whenever the President transmits to the President of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives his written declaration that he is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, and until he transmits to them a written declaration to the contrary, such powers and duties shall be discharged by the Vice-President as Acting President.

Whenever a majority of all the Members of the Cabinet transmit to the President of the Senate and to the Speaker of the House of Representatives their written declaration that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, the Vice-President shall immediately assume the powers and duties of the office as Acting President.

Thereafter, when the President transmits to the President of the Senate and to the Speaker of the House of Representatives his written declaration that no inability exists, he shall reassume the powers and duties of his office. Meanwhile, should a majority of all the Members of the Cabinet transmit within five days to the President of the Senate and to the Speaker of the House of Representatives, their written declaration that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, the Congress shall decide the issue. For that purpose, the Congress shall convene, if it is not in session, within forty-eight hours, in accordance with its rules and without need of call.

If the Congress, within ten days after receipt of the last written declaration, or, if not in session, within twelve days after it is required to assemble, determines by a two-thirds vote of both Houses, voting separately, that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, the Vice-President shall act as President; otherwise, the President shall continue exercising the powers and duties of his office.

Section 12. In case of serious illness of the President, the public shall be informed of the state of his health. The members of the Cabinet in charge of national security and foreign relations and the Chief of Staff of the Armed Forces of the Philippines, shall not be denied access to the President during such illness.

Section 13. The President, Vice-President, the Members of the Cabinet, and their deputies or assistants shall not, unless otherwise provided in this Constitution, hold any other office or employment during their tenure. They shall not, during said tenure, directly or indirectly, practice any other profession, participate in any business, or be financially interested in any contract with, or in any franchise, or special privilege granted by the Government or any subdivision, agency, or instrumentality thereof, including government-owned or controlled corporations or their subsidiaries. They shall strictly avoid conflict of interest in the conduct of their office.

The spouse and relatives by consanguinity or affinity within the fourth civil degree of the President shall not, during his tenure, be appointed as Members of the Constitutional Commissions, or the Office of the Ombudsman, or as Secretaries, Undersecretaries, chairmen or heads of bureaus or offices, including government-owned or controlled corporations and their subsidiaries.

Section 14. Appointments extended by an Acting President shall remain effective, unless revoked by the elected President, within ninety days from his assumption or reassumption of office.

Section 15. Two months immediately before the next presidential elections and up to the end of his term, a President or Acting President shall not make appointments, except temporary appointments to executive positions when continued vacancies therein will prejudice public service or endanger public safety.

Section 16. The President shall nominate and, with the consent of the Commission on Appointments, appoint the heads of the executive departments, ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls, or officers of the armed forces from the rank of colonel or naval captain, and other officers whose appointments are vested in him in this Constitution. He shall also appoint all other officers of the Government whose appointments are not otherwise provided for by law, and those whom he may be authorized by law to appoint. The Congress may, by law, vest the appointment of other officers lower in rank in the President alone, in the courts, or in the heads of departments, agencies, commissions, or boards.

The President shall have the power to make appointments during the recess of the Congress, whether voluntary or compulsory, but such appointments shall be effective only until disapproved by the Commission on Appointments or until the next adjournment of the Congress.

Section 17. The President shall have control of all the executive departments, bureaus, and offices. He shall ensure that the laws be faithfully executed.

Section 18. The President shall be the Commander-in-Chief of all armed forces of the Philippines and whenever it becomes necessary, he may call out such armed forces to prevent or suppress lawless violence, invasion or rebellion. In case of invasion or rebellion, when the public safety requires it, he may, for a period not exceeding sixty days, suspend the privilege of the writ of habeas corpus or place the Philippines or any part thereof under martial law. Within forty-eight hours from the proclamation of martial law or the suspension of the privilege of the writ of habeas corpus, the President shall submit a report in person or in writing to the Congress. The Congress, voting jointly, by a vote of at least a majority of all its Members in regular or special session, may revoke such proclamation or suspension, which revocation shall not be set aside by the President. Upon the initiative of the President, the Congress may, in the same manner, extend such proclamation or suspension for a period to be determined by the Congress, if the invasion or rebellion shall persist and public safety requires it.

The Congress, if not in session, shall, within twenty-four hours following such proclamation or suspension, convene in accordance with its rules without need of a call.

The Supreme Court may review, in an appropriate proceeding filed by any citizen, the sufficiency of the factual basis of the proclamation of martial law or the suspension of the privilege of the writ or the extension thereof, and must promulgate its decision thereon within thirty days from its filing.

A state of martial law does not suspend the operation of the Constitution, nor supplant the functioning of the civil courts or legislative assemblies, nor authorize the conferment of jurisdiction on military courts and agencies over civilians where civil courts are able to function, nor automatically suspend the privilege of the writ.

The suspension of the privilege of the writ shall apply only to persons judicially charged for rebellion or offenses inherent in or directly connected with invasion.

During the suspension of the privilege of the writ, any person thus arrested or detained shall be judicially charged within three days, otherwise he shall be released.

Section 19. Except in cases of impeachment, or as otherwise provided in this Constitution, the President may grant reprieves, commutations, and pardons, and remit fines and forfeitures, after conviction by final judgment.

He shall also have the power to grant amnesty with the concurrence of a majority of all the Members of the Congress.

Section 20. The President may contract or guarantee foreign loans on behalf of the Republic of the Philippines with the prior concurrence of the Monetary Board, and subject to such limitations as may be provided by law. The Monetary Board shall, within thirty days from the end of every quarter of the calendar year, submit to the Congress a complete report of its decision on applications for loans to be contracted or guaranteed by the Government or government-owned and controlled corporations which would have the effect of increasing the foreign debt, and containing other matters as may be provided by law.

Section 21. No treaty or international agreement shall be valid and effective unless concurred in by at least two-thirds of all the Members of the Senate.

Section 22. The President shall submit to the Congress, within thirty days from the opening of every regular session as the basis of the general appropriations bill, a budget of expenditures and sources of financing, including receipts from existing and proposed revenue measures.

Section 23. The President shall address the Congress at the opening of its regular session. He may also appear before it at any other time.

ARTICLE VIII JUDICIAL DEPARTMENT

Section 1. The judicial power shall be vested in one Supreme Court and in such lower courts as may be established by law.

Judicial power includes the duty of the courts of justice to settle actual controversies involving rights which are legally demandable and enforceable, and to determine whether or not there has been a grave abuse of discretion amounting to lack or excess of jurisdiction on the part of any branch or instrumentality of the Government.

Section 2. The Congress shall have the power to define, prescribe, and apportion the jurisdiction of the various courts but may not deprive the Supreme Court of its jurisdiction over cases enumerated in Section 5 hereof.

No law shall be passed reorganizing the Judiciary when it undermines the security of tenure of its Members.

Section 3. The Judiciary shall enjoy fiscal autonomy. Appropriations for the Judiciary may not be reduced by the legislature below the amount appropriated for the previous year and, after approval, shall be automatically and regularly released.

Section 4.

The Supreme Court shall be composed of a Chief Justice and fourteen Associate Justices. It may sit en banc or in its discretion, in division of three, five, or seven Members. Any vacancy shall be filled within ninety days from the occurrence thereof.

All cases involving the constitutionality of a treaty, international or executive agreement, or law, which shall be heard by the Supreme Court en banc, and all other cases which under the Rules of Court are required to be heard en banc, including those involving the constitutionality, application, or operation of presidential decrees, proclamations, orders, instructions, ordinances, and other regulations, shall be decided with the concurrence of a majority of the Members who actually took part in the deliberations on the issues in the case and voted thereon.

Cases or matters heard by a division shall be decided or resolved with the concurrence of a majority of the Members who actually took part in the deliberations on the issues in the case and voted thereon, and in no case without the concurrence of at least three of such Members. When the required number is not obtained, the case shall be decided en banc: Provided, that no doctrine or principle of law laid down by the court in a decision rendered en banc or in division may be modified or reversed except by the court sitting en banc.

Section 5. The Supreme Court shall have the following powers:

Exercise original jurisdiction over cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls, and over petitions for certiorari, prohibition, mandamus, quo warranto, and habeas corpus.

Review, revise, reverse, modify, or affirm on appeal or certiorari, as the law or the Rules of Court may provide, final judgments and orders of lower courts in:

All cases in which the constitutionality or validity of any treaty, international or executive agreement, law, presidential decree, proclamation, order, instruction, ordinance, or regulation is in question.

All cases involving the legality of any tax, impost, assessment, or toll, or any penalty imposed in relation thereto.

All cases in which the jurisdiction of any lower court is in issue.

All criminal cases in which the penalty imposed is reclusion perpetua or higher.

All cases in which only an error or question of law is involved.

Assign temporarily judges of lower courts to other stations as public interest may require. Such temporary assignment shall not exceed six months without the consent of the judge concerned.

Order a change of venue or place of trial to avoid a miscarriage of justice.

Promulgate rules concerning the protection and enforcement of constitutional rights, pleading, practice, and procedure in all courts, the admission to the practice of law, the integrated bar, and legal assistance to the under-privileged. Such rules shall provide a simplified and inexpensive procedure for the speedy disposition of cases, shall be uniform for all courts of the same grade, and shall not diminish, increase, or modify substantive rights. Rules of procedure of special courts and quasi-judicial bodies shall remain effective unless disapproved by the Supreme Court.

Appoint all officials and employees of the Judiciary in accordance with the Civil Service Law.

Section 6. The Supreme Court shall have administrative supervision over all courts and the personnel thereof.

Section 7.

No person shall be appointed Member of the Supreme Court or any lower collegiate court unless he is a natural-born citizen of the Philippines. A Member of the Supreme Court must be at least forty years of age, and must have been for fifteen years or more, a judge of a lower court or engaged in the practice of law in the Philippines.

The Congress shall prescribe the qualifications of judges of lower courts, but no person may be appointed judge thereof unless he is a citizen of the Philippines and a member of the Philippine Bar.

A Member of the Judiciary must be a person of proven competence, integrity, probity, and independence.

Section 8.

A Judicial and Bar Council is hereby created under the supervision of the Supreme Court composed of the Chief Justice as ex officio Chairman, the Secretary of Justice, and a representative of the Congress as ex officio Members, a representative of the Integrated Bar, a professor of law, a retired Member of the Supreme Court, and a representative of the private sector.

The regular members of the Council shall be appointed by the President for a term of four years with the consent of the Commission on Appointments. Of the Members first appointed, the representative of the Integrated Bar shall serve for four years, the professor of law for three years, the retired Justice for two years, and the representative of the private sector for one year.

The Clerk of the Supreme Court shall be the Secretary ex officio of the Council and shall keep a record of its proceedings.

The regular Members of the Council shall receive such emoluments as may be determined by the Supreme Court. The Supreme Court shall provide in its annual budget the appropriations for the Council.

The Council shall have the principal function of recommending appointees to the judiciary. It may exercise such other functions and duties as the Supreme Court may assign to it.

Section 9. The Members of the Supreme Court and judges of lower courts shall be appointed by the President from a list of at least three nominees preferred by the Judicial and Bar Council for every vacancy. Such appointments need no confirmation.

For the lower courts, the President shall issued the appointment within ninety days from the submission of the list.

Section 10. The salary of the Chief Justice and of the Associate Justices of the Supreme Court, and of judges of lower courts shall be fixed by law. During the continuance in office, their salary shall not be decreased.

Section 11. The Members of the Supreme Court and judges of the lower court shall hold office during good behavior until they reach the age of seventy years or become incapacitated to discharge the duties of their office. The Supreme Court en banc shall have the power to discipline judges of lower courts, or order their dismissal by a vote of majority of the Members who actually took part in the deliberations on the issues in the case and voted in thereon.

Section 12. The Members of the Supreme Court and of other courts established by law shall not be designated to any agency performing quasi-judicial or administrative function.

Section 13. The conclusions of the Supreme Court in any case submitted to it for the decision en banc or in division shall be reached in consultation before the case the case assigned to a Member for the writing of the opinion of the Court. A certification to this effect signed by the Chief Justice shall be issued and a copy thereof attached to the record of the case and served upon the parties. Any Member who took no part, or dissented, or abstained from a decision or resolution must state the reason therefor. The same requirements shall be observed by all lower collegiate court.

Section 14. No decision shall be rendered by any court without expressing therein clearly and distinctly the facts and the law on which it is based.

No petition for review or motion for reconsideration of a decision of the court shall be refused due course or denied without stating the legal basis therefor.

Section 15.

All cases or matters filed after the effectivity of this Constitution must be decided or resolved within twenty-four months from date of submission for the Supreme Court, and, unless reduced by the Supreme Court, twelve months for all lower collegiate courts, and three months for all other lower courts.

A case or matter shall be deemed submitted for decision or resolution upon the filing of the last pleading, brief, or memorandum required by the Rules of Court or by the court itself.

Upon the expiration of the corresponding period, a certification to this effect signed by the Chief Justice or the presiding judge shall forthwith be issued and a copy thereof attached to the record of the case or matter, and served upon the parties. The certification shall state why a decision or resolution has not been rendered or issued within said period.

Despite the expiration of the applicable mandatory period, the court, without prejudice to such responsibility as may have been incurred in consequence thereof, shall decide or resolve the case or matter submitted thereto for determination, without further delay.

Section 16. The Supreme Court shall, within thirty days from the opening of each regular session of the Congress, submit to the President and the Congress an annual report on the operations and activities of the Judiciary.

ARTICLE IX CONSTITUTIONAL COMMISSION

A. COMMON PROVISIONS

Section 1. The Constitutional Commissions, which shall be independent, are the Civil Service Commission, the Commission on Elections, and the Commission on Audit.

Section 2. No member of a Constitutional Commission shall, during his tenure, hold any other office or employment. Neither shall he engage in the practice of any profession or in the active management or control of any business which, in any way, may be affected by the functions of his office, nor shall he be financially interested, directly or indirectly, in any contract with, or in any franchise or privilege granted by the Government, any of its subdivisions, agencies, or instrumentalities, including government-owned or controlled corporations or their subsidiaries.

Section 3. The salary of the Chairman and the Commissioners shall be fixed by law and shall not be decreased during their tenure.

Section 4. The Constitutional Commissions shall appoint their officials and employees in accordance with law.

Section 5. The Commission shall enjoy fiscal autonomy. Their approved annual appropriations shall be automatically and regularly released.

Section 6. Each Commission en banc may promulgate its own rules concerning pleadings and practice before it or before any of its offices. Such rules, however, shall not diminish, increase, or modify substantive rights.

Section 7. Each Commission shall decide by a majority vote of all its Members, any case or matter brought before it within sixty days from the date of its submission for decision or resolution. A case or matter is deemed submitted for decision or resolution upon the filing of the last pleading, brief, or memorandum required by the rules of the Commission or by the Commission itself. Unless otherwise provided by this Constitution or by law, any decision, order, or ruling of each Commission may be brought to the Supreme Court on certiorari by the aggrieved party within thirty days from receipt of a copy thereof.

Section 8. Each Commission shall perform such other functions as may be provided by law.

B. THE CIVIL SERVICE COMMISSION

Section 1.

The civil service shall be administered by the Civil Service Commission composed of a Chairman and two Commissioners who shall be natural-born citizens of the Philippines and, at the time of their appointment, at least thirty-five years of age, with proven capacity for public administration, and must not have been candidates for any elective position in the elections immediately preceding their appointment.

The Chairman and the Commissioners shall be appointed by the President with the consent of the Commission on Appointments for a term of seven years without reappointment. Of those first appointed, the Chairman shall hold office for seven years, a Commissioner for five years, and another Commissioner for three years, without reappointment. Appointment to any vacancy shall be only for the unexpired term of the predecessor. In no case shall any Member be appointed or designated in a temporary or acting capacity.

Section 2.

The civil service embraces all branches, subdivisions, instrumentalities, and agencies of the Government, including government-owned or controlled corporations with original charters.

Appointments in the civil service shall be made only according to merit and fitness to be determined, as far as practicable, and, except to positions which are policy-determining, primarily confidential, or highly technical, by competitive examination.

No officer or employee of the civil service shall be removed or suspended except for cause provided by law.

No officer or employee in the civil service shall engage, directly or indirectly, in any electioneering or partisan political campaign.

The right to self-organization shall not be denied to government employees.

Temporary employees of the Government shall be given such protection as may be provided by law.

Section 3. The Civil Service Commission, as the central personnel agency of the Government, shall establish a career service and adopt measures to promote morale, efficiency, integrity, responsiveness, progressiveness, and courtesy in the civil service. It shall strengthen the merit and rewards system, integrate all human resources development programs for all levels and ranks, and institutionalize a management climate conducive to public accountability. It shall submit to the President and the Congress an annual report on its personnel programs.

Section 4. All public officers and employees shall take an oath or affirmation to uphold and defend this Constitution.

Section 5. The Congress shall provide for the standardization of compensation of government officials and employees, including those in government-owned or controlled corporations with original charters, taking into account the nature of the responsibilities pertaining to, and the qualifications required for, their positions.

Section 6. No candidate who has lost in any election, shall within one year after such election, be appointed to any office in the Government or any Government-owned or controlled corporations or in any of their subsidiaries.

Section 7. No elective official shall be eligible for appointment or designation in any capacity to any public office or position during his tenure.

Unless otherwise allowed by law or by the primary functions of his position, no appointive official shall hold any other office or employment in the Government or any subdivision, agency or instrumentality thereof, including Government-owned or controlled corporations or their subsidiaries.

Section 8. No elective or appointive public officer or employee shall receive additional, double, or indirect compensation, unless specifically authorized by law, nor accept without the consent of the Congress, any present, emolument, office, or title of any kind from any foreign government.

Pensions or gratuities shall not be considered as additional, double, or indirect compensation.

C. THE COMMISSION ON ELECTIONS

Section 1.

There shall be a Commission on Elections composed of a Chairman and six Commissioners who shall be natural-born citizens of the Philippines and, at the time of their appointment, at least thirty-five years of age, holders of a college degree, and must not have been candidates for any elective positions in the immediately preceding elections. However, a majority thereof, including the Chairman, shall be members of the Philippine Bar who have been engaged in the practice of law for at least ten years.

The Chairman and the Commissioners shall be appointed by the President with the consent of the Commission on Appointments for a term of seven years without reappointment. Of those first appointed, three Members shall hold office for seven years, two Members for five years, and the last Members for three years, without reappointment. Appointment to any vacancy shall be only for the unexpired term of the predecessor. In no case shall any Member be appointed or designated in a temporary or acting capacity.

Section 2. The Commission on Elections shall exercise the following powers and functions:

Enforce and administer all laws and regulations relative to the conduct of an election, plebiscite, initiative, referendum, and recall.

Exercise exclusive original jurisdiction over all contests relating to the elections, returns, and qualifications of all elective regional, provincial, and city officials, and appellate jurisdiction over all contests involving elective municipal officials decided by trial courts of general jurisdiction, or involving elective barangay officials decided by trial courts of limited jurisdiction.

Decisions, final orders, or rulings of the Commission on election contests involving elective municipal and barangay offices shall be final, executory, and not appealable.

Decide, except those involving the right to vote, all questions affecting elections, including determination of the number and location of polling places, appointment of election officials and inspectors, and registration of voters.

Deputize, with the concurrence of the President, law enforcement agencies and instrumentalities of the Government, including the Armed Forces of the Philippines, for the exclusive purpose of ensuring free, orderly, honest, peaceful, and credible elections.

Register, after sufficient publication, political parties, organizations, or coalitions which, in addition to other requirements, must present their platform or program of government; and accredit citizens' arms of the Commission on Elections. Religious denominations and sects shall not be registered. Those which seek to achieve their goals through violence or unlawful means, or refuse to uphold and adhere to this Constitution, or which are supported by any foreign government shall likewise be refused registration.

Financial contributions from foreign governments and their agencies to political parties, organizations, coalitions, or candidates related to elections, constitute interference in national affairs, and, when accepted, shall be an additional ground for the cancellation of their registration with the Commission, in addition to other penalties that may be prescribed by law.

File, upon a verified complaint, or on its own initiative, petitions in court for inclusion or exclusion of voters; investigate and, where appropriate, prosecute cases of violations of election laws, including acts or omissions constituting election frauds, offenses, and malpractices.

Recommend to the Congress effective measures to minimize election spending, including limitation of places where propaganda materials shall be posted, and to prevent and penalize all forms of election frauds, offenses, malpractices, and nuisance candidacies.

Recommend to the President the removal of any officer or employee it has deputized, or the imposition of any other disciplinary action, for violation or disregard of, or disobedience to, its directive, order, or decision.

Submit to the President and the Congress, a comprehensive report on the conduct of each election, plebiscite, initiative, referendum, or recall.

Section 3. The Commission on Elections may sit en banc or in two divisions, and shall promulgate its rules of procedure in order to expedite disposition of election cases, including pre- proclamation controversies. All such election cases shall be heard and decided in division, provided that motions for reconsideration of decisions shall be decided by the Commission en banc.

Section 4. The Commission may, during the election period, supervise or regulate the enjoyment or utilization of all franchises or permits for the operation of transportation and other public utilities, media of communication or information, all grants, special privileges, or concessions granted by the Government or any subdivision, agency, or instrumentality thereof, including any government-owned or controlled corporation or its subsidiary. Such supervision or regulation shall aim to ensure equal opportunity, time, and space ,and the right to reply, including reasonable, equal rates therefor, for public information campaigns and forums among candidates in connection with the objective of holding free, orderly, honest, peaceful, and credible elections.

Section 5. No pardon, amnesty, parole, or suspension of sentence for violation of election laws, rules, and regulations shall be granted by the President without the favorable recommendation of the Commission.

Section 6. A free and open party system shall be allowed to evolve according to the free choice of the people, subject to the provisions of this Article.

Section 7. No votes cast in favor of a political party, organization, or coalition shall be valid, except for those registered under the party-list system as provided in this Constitution.

Section 8. Political parties, or organizations or coalitions registered under the party-list system, shall not be represented in the voters' registration boards, boards of election inspectors, boards of canvassers, or other similar bodies. However, they shall be entitled to appoint poll watchers in accordance with law.

Section 9. Unless otherwise fixed by the Commission in special cases, the election period shall commence ninety days before the day of election and shall end thirty days thereafter.

Section 10. Bona fide candidates for any public office shall be free from any form of harassment and discrimination.

Section 11. Funds certified by the Commission as necessary to defray the expenses for holding regular and special elections, plebiscites, initiatives, referenda, and recalls, shall be provided in the regular or special appropriations and, once approved, shall be released automatically upon certification by the Chairman of the Commission

D. THE COMMISSION ON AUDIT

Section 1.

There shall be a Commission on Audit composed of a Chairman and two Commissioners, who shall be natural-born citizens of the Philippines and, at the time of their appointment, at least thirty-five years of age, Certified Public Accountants with not less than ten years of auditing experience, or members of the Philippine Bar who have been engaged in the practice of law for at least ten years, and must not have been candidates for any elective position in the elections immediately preceding their appointment. At no time shall all Members of the Commission belong to the same profession.

The Chairman and the Commissioners shall be appointed by the President with the consent of the Commission on Appointments for a term of seven years without reappointment. Of those first appointed, the Chairman shall hold office for seven years, one Commissioner for five years, and the other Commissioner for three years, without reappointment. Appointment to any vacancy shall be only for the unexpired portion of the term of the predecessor. In no case shall any Member be appointed or designated in a temporary or acting capacity.

Section 2.

The Commission on Audit shall have the power, authority, and duty to examine, audit, and settle all accounts pertaining to the revenue and receipts of, and expenditures or uses of funds and property, owned or held in trust by, or pertaining to, the Government, or any of its subdivisions, agencies, or instrumentalities, including government-owned or controlled corporations with original charters, and on a post- audit basis:

constitutional bodies, commissions and offices that have been granted fiscal autonomy under this Constitution;

autonomous state colleges and universities;

other government-owned or controlled corporations and their subsidiaries; and

such non-governmental entities receiving subsidy or equity, directly or indirectly, from or through the Government, which are required by law or the granting institution to submit to such audit as a condition of subsidy or equity. However, where the internal control system of the audited agencies is inadequate, the Commission may adopt such measures, including temporary or special pre-audit, as are necessary and appropriate to correct the deficiencies. It shall keep the general accounts of the Government and, for such period as may be provided by law, preserve the vouchers and other supporting papers pertaining thereto.

The Commission shall have exclusive authority, subject to the limitations in this Article, to define the scope of its audit and examination, establish the techniques and methods required therefor, and promulgate accounting and auditing rules and regulations, including those for the prevention and disallowance of irregular, unnecessary, excessive, extravagant, or unconscionable expenditures or uses of government funds and properties.

Section 3. No law shall be passed exempting any entity of the Government or its subsidiaries in any guise whatever, or any investment of public funds, from the jurisdiction of the Commission on Audit.

Section 4. The Commission shall submit to the President and the Congress, within the time fixed by law, an annual report covering the financial condition and operation of the Government, its subdivisions, agencies, and instrumentalities, including government-owned or controlled corporations, and non-governmental entities subject to its audit, and recommend measures necessary to improve their effectiveness and efficiency. It shall submit such other reports as may be required by law.

ARTICLE X LOCAL GOVERNMENT

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1. The territorial and political subdivisions of the Republic of the Philippines are the provinces, cities, municipalities, and barangays. There shall be autonomous regions in Muslim Mindanao and the Cordilleras as hereinafter provided.

Section 2. The territorial and political subdivisions shall enjoy local autonomy.

Section 3. The Congress shall enact a local government code which shall provide for a more responsive and accountable local government structure instituted through a system of decentralization with effective mechanisms of recall, initiative, and referendum, allocate among the different local government units their powers, responsibilities, and resources, and provide for the qualifications, election, appointment and removal, term, salaries, powers and functions and duties of local officials, and all other matters relating to the organization and operation of the local units.

Section 4. The President of the Philippines shall exercise general supervision over local governments. Provinces with respect to component cities and municipalities, and cities and municipalities with respect to component barangays, shall ensure that the acts of their component units are within the scope of their prescribed powers and functions.

Section 5. Each local government unit shall have the power to create its own sources of revenues and to levy taxes, fees and charges subject to such guidelines and limitations as the Congress may provide, consistent with the basic policy of local autonomy. Such taxes, fees, and charges shall accrue exclusively to the local governments.

Section 6. Local government units shall have a just share, as determined by law, in the national taxes which shall be automatically released to them.

Section 7. Local governments shall be entitled to an equitable share in the proceeds of the utilization and development of the national wealth within their respective areas, in the manner provided by law, including sharing the same with the inhabitants by way of direct benefits.

Section 8. The term of office of elective local officials, except barangay officials, which shall be determined by law, shall be three years and no such official shall serve for more than three consecutive terms. Voluntary renunciation of the office for any length of time shall not be considered as an interruption in the continuity of his service for the full term for which he was elected.

Section 9. Legislative bodies of local governments shall have sectoral representation as may be prescribed by law.

Section 10. No province, city, municipality, or barangay may be created, divided, merged, abolished, or its boundary substantially altered, except in accordance with the criteria established in the local government code and subject to approval by a majority of the votes cast in a plebiscite in the political units directly affected.

Section 11. The Congress may, by law, create special metropolitan political subdivisions, subject to a plebiscite as set forth in Section 10 hereof. The component cities and municipalities shall retain their basic autonomy and shall be entitled to their own local executive and legislative assemblies. The jurisdiction of the metropolitan authority that will thereby be created shall be limited to basic services requiring coordination.

Section 12. Cities that are highly urbanized, as determined by law, and component cities whose charters prohibit their voters from voting for provincial elective officials, shall be independent of the province. The voters of component cities within a province, whose charters contain no such prohibition, shall not be deprived of their right to vote for elective provincial officials.

Section 13. Local government units may group themselves, consolidate or coordinate their efforts, services, and resources for purposes commonly beneficial to them in accordance with law.

Section 14. The President shall provide for regional development councils or other similar bodies composed of local government officials, regional heads of departments and other government offices, and representatives from non-governmental organizations within the regions for purposes of administrative decentralization to strengthen the autonomy of the units therein and to accelerate the economic and social growth and development of the units in the region.

AUTONOMOUS REGIONS

Section 15. There shall be created autonomous regions in Muslim Mindanao and in the Cordilleras consisting of provinces, cities, municipalities, and geographical areas sharing common and distinctive historical and cultural heritage, economic and social structures, and other relevant characteristics within the framework of this Constitution and the national sovereignty as well as territorial integrity of the Republic of the Philippines.

Section 16. The President shall exercise general supervision over autonomous regions to ensure that laws are faithfully executed.

Section 17. All powers, functions, and responsibilities not granted by this Constitution or by law to the autonomous regions shall be vested in the National Government.

Section 18. The Congress shall enact an organic act for each autonomous region with the assistance and participation of the regional consultative commission composed of representatives appointed by the President from a list of nominees from multi-sectoral bodies. The organic act shall define the basic structure of government for the region consisting of the executive department and legislative assembly, both of which shall be elective and representative of the constituent political units. The organic acts shall likewise provide for special courts with personal, family, and property law jurisdiction consistent with the provisions of this Constitution and national laws.

The creation of the autonomous region shall be effective when approved by majority of the votes cast by the constituent units in a plebiscite called for the purpose, provided that only provinces, cities, and geographic areas voting favorably in such plebiscite shall be included in the autonomous region.

Section 19. The first Congress elected under this Constitution shall, within eighteen months from the time of organization of both Houses, pass the organic acts for the autonomous regions in Muslim Mindanao and the Cordilleras.

Section 20. Within its territorial jurisdiction and subject to the provisions of this Constitution and national laws, the organic act of autonomous regions shall provide for legislative powers over:

Administrative organization;

Creation of sources of revenues;

Ancestral domain and natural resources;

Personal, family, and property relations;

Regional urban and rural planning development;

Economic, social, and tourism development;

Educational policies;

Preservation and development of the cultural heritage; and

Such other matters as may be authorized by law for the promotion of the general welfare of the people of the region.

Section 21. The preservation of peace and order within the regions shall be the responsibility of the local police agencies which shall be organized, maintained, supervised, and utilized in accordance with applicable laws. The defense and security of the regions shall be the responsibility of the National Government.

ARTICLE XI ACCOUNTABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICERS

Section 1. Public office is a public trust. Public officers and employees must, at all times, be accountable to the people, serve them with utmost responsibility, integrity, loyalty, and efficiency; act with patriotism and justice, and lead modest lives.

Section 2. The President, the Vice-President, the Members of the Supreme Court, the Members of the Constitutional Commissions, and the Ombudsman may be removed from office on impeachment for, and conviction of, culpable violation of the Constitution, treason, bribery, graft and corruption, other high crimes, or betrayal of public trust. All other public officers and employees may be removed from office as provided by law, but not by impeachment.

Section 3.

The House of Representatives shall have the exclusive power to initiate all cases of impeachment.

A verified complaint for impeachment may be filed by any Member of the House of Representatives or by any citizen upon a resolution or endorsement by any Member thereof, which shall be included in the Order of Business within ten session days, and referred to the proper Committee within three session days thereafter. The Committee, after hearing, and by a majority vote of all its Members, shall submit its report to the House within sixty session days from such referral, together with the corresponding resolution. The resolution shall be calendared for consideration by the House within ten session days from receipt thereof.

A vote of at least one-third of all the Members of the House shall be necessary either to affirm a favorable resolution with the Articles of Impeachment of the Committee, or override its contrary resolution. The vote of each Member shall be recorded.

In case the verified complaint or resolution of impeachment is filed by at least one-third of all the Members of the House, the same shall constitute the Articles of Impeachment, and trial by the Senate shall forthwith proceed.

No impeachment proceedings shall be initiated against the same official more than once within a period of one year.

The Senate shall have the sole power to try and decide all cases of impeachment. When sitting for that purpose, the Senators shall be on oath or affirmation. When the President of the Philippines is on trial, the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court shall preside, but shall not vote. No person shall be convicted without the concurrence of two-thirds of all the Members of the Senate.

Judgment in cases of impeachment shall not extend further than removal from office and disqualification to hold any office under the Republic of the Philippines, but the party convicted shall nevertheless be liable and subject to prosecution, trial, and punishment, according to law.

The Congress shall promulgate its rules on impeachment to effectively carry out the purpose of this section.

Section 4. The present anti-graft court known as the Sandiganbayan shall continue to function and exercise its jurisdiction as now or hereafter may be provided by law.

Section 5. There is hereby created the independent Office of the Ombudsman, composed of the Ombudsman to be known as Tanodbayan, one overall Deputy and at least one Deputy each for Luzon, Visayas, and Mindanao. A separate Deputy for the military establishment may likewise be appointed.

Section 6. The officials and employees of the Office of the Ombudsman, other than the Deputies, shall be appointed by the Ombudsman, according to the Civil Service Law.

Section 7. The existing Tanodbayan shall hereafter be known as the Office of the Special Prosecutor. It shall continue to function and exercise its powers as now or hereafter may be provided by law, except those conferred on the Office of the Ombudsman created under this Constitution.

Section 8. The Ombudsman and his Deputies shall be natural-born citizens of the Philippines, and at the time of their appointment, at least forty years old, of recognized probity and independence, and members of the Philippine Bar, and must not have been candidates for any elective office in the immediately preceding election. The Ombudsman must have, for ten years or more, been a judge or engaged in the practice of law in the Philippines.

During their tenure, they shall be subject to the same disqualifications and prohibitions as provided for in Section 2 of Article 1X-A of this Constitution.

Section 9. The Ombudsman and his Deputies shall be appointed by the President from a list of at least six nominees prepared by the Judicial and Bar Council, and from a list of three nominees for every vacancy thereafter. Such appointments shall require no confirmation. All vacancies shall be filled within three months after they occur.

Section 10. The Ombudsman and his Deputies shall have the rank of Chairman and Members, respectively, of the Constitutional Commissions, and they shall receive the same salary which shall not be decreased during their term of office.

Section 11. The Ombudsman and his Deputies shall serve for a term of seven years without reappointment. They shall not be qualified to run for any office in the election immediately succeeding their cessation from office.

Section 12. The Ombudsman and his Deputies, as protectors of the people, shall act promptly on complaints filed in any form or manner against public officials or employees of the Government, or any subdivision, agency or instrumentality thereof, including government-owned or controlled corporations, and shall, in appropriate cases, notify the complainants of the action taken and the result thereof.

Section 13. The Office of the Ombudsman shall have the following powers, functions, and duties:

Investigate on its own, or on complaint by any person, any act or omission of any public official, employee, office or agency, when such act or omission appears to be illegal, unjust, improper, or inefficient.

Direct, upon complaint or at its own instance, any public official or employee of the Government, or any subdivision, agency or instrumentality thereof, as well as of any government-owned or controlled corporation with original charter, to perform and expedite any act or duty required by law, or to stop, prevent, and correct any abuse or impropriety in the performance of duties.

Direct the officer concerned to take appropriate action against a public official or employee at fault, and recommend his removal, suspension, demotion, fine, censure, or prosecution, and ensure compliance therewith.

Direct the officer concerned, in any appropriate case, and subject to such limitations as may be provided by law, to furnish it with copies of documents relating to contracts or transactions entered into by his office involving the disbursement or use of public funds or properties, and report any irregularity to the Commission on Audit for appropriate action.

Request any government agency for assistance and information necessary in the discharge of its responsibilities, and to examine, if necessary, pertinent records and documents.

Publicize matters covered by its investigation when circumstances so warrant and with due prudence.

Determine the causes of inefficiency, red tape, mismanagement, fraud, and corruption in the Government and make recommendations for their elimination and the observance of high standards of ethics and efficiency.

Promulgate its rules of procedure and exercise such other powers or perform such functions or duties as may be provided by law.

Section 14. The Office of the Ombudsman shall enjoy fiscal autonomy. Its approved annual appropriations shall be automatically and regularly released.

Section 15. The right of the State to recover properties unlawfully acquired by public officials or employees, from them or from their nominees or transferees, shall not be barred by prescription, laches, or estoppel.

Section 16. No loan, guaranty, or other form of financial accommodation for any business purpose may be granted, directly or indirectly, by any government-owned or controlled bank or financial institution to the President, the Vice-President, the Members of the Cabinet, the Congress, the Supreme Court, and the Constitutional Commissions, the Ombudsman, or to any firm or entity in which they have controlling interest, during their tenure.

Section 17. A public officer or employee shall, upon assumption of office and as often thereafter as may be required by law, submit a declaration under oath of his assets, liabilities, and net worth. In the case of the President, the Vice-President, the Members of the Cabinet, the Congress, the Supreme Court, the Constitutional Commissions and other constitutional offices, and officers of the armed forces with general or flag rank, the declaration shall be disclosed to the public in the manner provided by law.

Section 18. Public officers and employees owe the State and this Constitution allegiance at all times and any public officer or employee who seeks to change his citizenship or acquire the status of an immigrant of another country during his tenure shall be dealt with by law.

ARTICLE XII NATIONAL ECONOMY AND PATRIMONY

Section 1. The goals of the national economy are a more equitable distribution of opportunities, income, and wealth; a sustained increase in the amount of goods and services produced by the nation for the benefit of the people; and an expanding productivity as the key to raising the quality of life for all, especially the underprivileged.

The State shall promote industrialization and full employment based on sound agricultural development and agrarian reform, through industries that make full of efficient use of human and natural resources, and which are competitive in both domestic and foreign markets. However, the State shall protect Filipino enterprises against unfair foreign competition and trade practices.

In the pursuit of these goals, all sectors of the economy and all region s of the country shall be given optimum opportunity to develop. Private enterprises, including corporations, cooperatives, and similar collective organizations, shall be encouraged to broaden the base of their ownership.

Section 2. All lands of the public domain, waters, minerals, coal, petroleum, and other mineral oils, all forces of potential energy, fisheries, forests or timber, wildlife, flora and fauna, and other natural resources are owned by the State. With the exception of agricultural lands, all other natural resources shall not be alienated. The exploration, development, and utilization of natural resources shall be under the full control and supervision of the State. The State may directly undertake such activities, or it may enter into co-production, joint venture, or production-sharing agreements with Filipino citizens, or corporations or associations at least 60 per centum of whose capital is owned by such citizens. Such agreements may be for a period not exceeding twenty-five years, renewable for not more than twenty-five years, and under such terms and conditions as may provided by law. In cases of water rights for irrigation, water supply, fisheries, or industrial uses other than the development of waterpower, beneficial use may be the measure and limit of the grant.

The State shall protect the nations marine wealth in its archipelagic waters, territorial sea, and exclusive economic zone, and reserve its use and enjoyment exclusively to Filipino citizens.

The Congress may, by law, allow small-scale utilization of natural resources by Filipino citizens, as well as cooperative fish farming, with priority to subsistence fishermen and fish workers in rivers, lakes, bays, and lagoons.

The President may enter into agreements with foreign-owned corporations involving either technical or financial assistance for large-scale exploration, development, and utilization of minerals, petroleum, and other mineral oils according to the general terms and conditions provided by law, based on real contributions to the economic growth and general welfare of the country. In such agreements, the State shall promote the development and use of local scientific and technical resources.

The President shall notify the Congress of every contract entered into in accordance with this provision, within thirty days from its execution.

Section 3. Lands of the public domain are classified into agricultural, forest or timber, mineral lands and national parks. Agricultural lands of the public domain may be further classified by law according to the uses to which they may be devoted. Alienable lands of the public domain shall be limited to agricultural lands. Private corporations or associations may not hold such alienable lands of the public domain except by lease, for a period not exceeding twenty-five years, renewable for not more than twenty-five years, and not to exceed one thousand hectares in area. Citizens of the Philippines may lease not more than five hundred hectares, or acquire not more than twelve hectares thereof, by purchase, homestead, or grant.

Taking into account the requirements of conservation, ecology, and development, and subject to the requirements of agrarian reform, the Congress shall determine, by law, the size of lands of the public domain which may be acquired, developed, held, or leased and the conditions therefor.

Section 4. The Congress shall, as soon as possible, determine, by law, the specific limits of forest lands and national parks, marking clearly their boundaries on the ground. Thereafter, such forest lands and national parks shall be conserved and may not be increased nor diminished, except by law. The Congress shall provide for such period as it may determine, measures to prohibit logging in endangered forests and watershed areas.

Section 5. The State, subject to the provisions of this Constitution and national development policies and programs, shall protect the rights of indigenous cultural communities to their ancestral lands to ensure their economic, social, and cultural well-being.

The Congress may provide for the applicability of customary laws governing property rights or relations in determining the ownership and extent of ancestral domain.

Section 6. The use of property bears a social function, and all economic agents shall contribute to the common good. Individuals and private groups, including corporations, cooperatives, and similar collective organizations, shall have the right to own, establish, and operate economic enterprises, subject to the duty of the State to promote distributive justice and to intervene when the common good so demands.

Section 7. Save in cases of hereditary succession, no private lands shall be transferred or conveyed except to individuals, corporations, or associations qualified to acquire or hold lands of the public domain.

Section 8. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 7 of this Article, a natural-born citizen of the Philippines who has lost his Philippine citizenship may be a transferee of private lands, subject to limitations provided by law.

Section 9. The Congress may establish an independent economic and planning agency headed by the President, which shall, after consultations with the appropriate public agencies, various private sectors, and local government units, recommend to Congress, and implement continuing integrated and coordinated programs and policies for national development.

Until the Congress provides otherwise, the National Economic and Development Authority shall function as the independent planning agency of the government.

Section 10. The Congress shall, upon recommendation of the economic and planning agency, when the national interest dictates, reserve to citizens of the Philippines or to corporations or associations at least sixty per centum of whose capital is owned by such citizens, or such higher percentage as Congress may prescribe, certain areas of investments. The Congress shall enact measures that will encourage the formation and operation of enterprises whose capital is wholly owned by Filipinos.

In the grant of rights, privileges, and concessions covering the national economy and patrimony, the State shall give preference to qualified Filipinos.

The State shall regulate and exercise authority over foreign investments within its national jurisdiction and in accordance with its national goals and priorities.

Section 11. No franchise, certificate, or any other form of authorization for the operation of a public utility shall be granted except to citizens of the Philippines or to corporations or associations organized under the laws of the Philippines, at least sixty per centum of whose capital is owned by such citizens; nor shall such franchise, certificate, or authorization be exclusive in character or for a longer period than fifty years. Neither shall any such franchise or right be granted except under the condition that it shall be subject to amendment, alteration, or repeal by the Congress when the common good so requires. The State shall encourage equity participation in public utilities by the general public. The participation of foreign investors in the governing body of any public utility enterprise shall be limited to their proportionate share in its capital, and all the executive and managing officers of such corporation or association must be citizens of the Philippines.

Section 12. The State shall promote the preferential use of Filipino labor, domestic materials and locally produced goods, and adopt measures that help make them competitive.

Section 13. The State shall pursue a trade policy that serves the general welfare and utilizes all forms and arrangements of exchange on the basis of equality and reciprocity.

Section 14. The sustained development of a reservoir of national talents consisting of Filipino scientists, entrepreneurs, professionals, managers, high-level technical manpower and skilled workers and craftsmen in all fields shall be promoted by the State. The State shall encourage appropriate technology and regulate its transfer for the national benefit. The practice of all professions in the Philippines shall be limited to Filipino citizens, save in cases prescribed by law.

Section 15. The Congress shall create an agency to promote the viability and growth of cooperatives as instruments for social justice and economic development.

Section 16. The Congress shall not, except by general law, provide for the formation, organization, or regulation of private corporations. Government-owned or controlled corporations may be created or established by special charters in the interest of the common good and subject to the test of economic viability.

Section 17. In times of national emergency, when the public interest so requires, the State may, during the emergency and under reasonable terms prescribed by it, temporarily take over or direct the operation of any privately-owned public utility or business affected with public interest.

Section 18. The State may, in the interest of national welfare or defense, establish and operate vital industries and, upon payment of just compensation, transfer to public ownership utilities and other private enterprises to be operated by the Government.

Section 19. The State shall regulate or prohibit monopolies when the public interest so requires. No combinations in restraint of trade or unfair competition shall be allowed.

Section 20. The Congress shall establish an independent central monetary authority, the members of whose governing board must be natural-born Filipino citizens, of known probity, integrity, and patriotism, the majority of whom shall come from the private sector. They shall also be subject to such other qualifications and disabilities as may be prescribed by law. The authority shall provide policy direction in the areas of money, banking, and credit. It shall have supervision over the operations of banks and exercise such regulatory powers as may be provided by law over the operations of finance companies and other institutions performing similar functions.

Until the Congress otherwise provides, the Central Bank of the Philippines operating under existing laws, shall function as the central monetary authority.

Section 21. Foreign loans may only be incurred in accordance with law and the regulation of the monetary authority. Information on foreign loans obtained or guaranteed by the Government shall be made available to the public.

Section 22. Acts which circumvent or negate any of the provisions of this Article shall be considered inimical to the national interest and subject to criminal and civil sanctions, as may be provided by law.

ARTICLE XIII SOCIAL JUSTICE AND HUMAN RIGHTS

Section 1. The Congress shall give highest priority to the enactment of measures that protect and enhance the right of all the people to human dignity, reduce social, economic, and political inequalities, and remove cultural inequities by equitably diffusing wealth and political power for the common good.

To this end, the State shall regulate the acquisition, ownership, use, and disposition of property and its increments.

Section 2. The promotion of social justice shall include the commitment to create economic opportunities based on freedom of initiative and self-reliance.

LABOR

Section 3. The State shall afford full protection to labor, local and overseas, organized and unorganized, and promote full employment and equality of employment opportunities for all.

It shall guarantee the rights of all workers to self-organization, collective bargaining and negotiations, and peaceful concerted activities, including the right to strike in accordance with law. They shall be entitled to security of tenure, humane conditions of work, and a living wage. They shall also participate in policy and decision-making processes affecting their rights and benefits as may be provided by law.

The State shall promote the principle of shared responsibility between workers and employers and the preferential use of voluntary modes in settling disputes, including conciliation, and shall enforce their mutual compliance therewith to foster industrial peace.

The State shall regulate the relations between workers and employers, recognizing the right of labor to its just share in the fruits of production and the right of enterprises to reasonable returns to investments, and to expansion and growth.

AGRARIAN AND NATURAL RESOURCES REFORM

Section 4. The State shall, by law, undertake an agrarian reform program founded on the right of farmers and regular farmworkers who are landless, to own directly or collectively the lands they till or, in the case of other farmworkers, to receive a just share of the fruits thereof. To this end, the State shall encourage and undertake the just distribution of all agricultural lands, subject to such priorities and reasonable retention limits as the Congress may prescribe, taking into account ecological, developmental, or equity considerations, and subject to the payment of just compensation. In determining retention limits, the State shall respect the right of small landowners. The State shall further provide incentives for voluntary land-sharing.

Section 5. The State shall recognize the right of farmers, farmworkers, and landowners, as well as cooperatives, and other independent farmers' organizations to participate in the planning, organization, and management of the program, and shall provide support to agriculture through appropriate technology and research, and adequate financial, production, marketing, and other support services.

Section 6. The State shall apply the principles of agrarian reform or stewardship, whenever applicable in accordance with law, in the disposition or utilization of other natural resources, including lands of the public domain under lease or concession suitable to agriculture, subject to prior rights, homestead rights of small settlers, and the rights of indigenous communities to their ancestral lands. The State may resettle landless farmers and farmworkers in its own agricultural estates which shall be distributed to them in the manner provided by law.

Section 7. The State shall protect the rights of subsistence fishermen, especially of local communities, to the preferential use of the communal marine and fishing resources, both inland and offshore. It shall provide support to such fishermen through appropriate technology and research, adequate financial, production, and marketing assistance, and other services. The State shall also protect, develop, and conserve such resources. The protection shall extend to offshore fishing grounds of subsistence fishermen against foreign intrusion. Fishworkers shall receive a just share from their labor in the utilization of marine and fishing resources.

Section 8. The State shall provide incentives to landowners to invest the proceeds of the agrarian reform program to promote industrialization, employment creation, and privatization of public sector enterprises. Financial instruments used as payment for their lands shall be honored as equity in enterprises of their choice.

URBAN LAND REFORM AND HOUSING

Section 9. The State shall, by law, and for the common good, undertake, in cooperation with the private sector, a continuing program of urban land reform and housing which will make available at affordable cost, decent housing and basic services to under-privileged and homeless citizens in urban centers and resettlement areas. It shall also promote adequate employment opportunities to such citizens. In the implementation of such program the State shall respect the rights of small property owners.

Section 10. Urban or rural poor dwellers shall not be evicted nor their dwelling demolished, except in accordance with law and in a just and humane manner.

No resettlement of urban or rural dwellers shall be undertaken without adequate consultation with them and the communities where they are to be relocated.

HEALTH

Section 11. The State shall adopt an integrated and comprehensive approach to health development which shall endeavor to make essential goods, health and other social services available to all the people at affordable cost. There shall be priority for the needs of the under-privileged, sick, elderly, disabled, women, and children. The State shall endeavor to provide free medical care to paupers.

Section 12. The State shall establish and maintain an effective food and drug regulatory system and undertake appropriate health, manpower development, and research, responsive to the country's health needs and problems.

Section 13. The State shall establish a special agency for disabled person for their rehabilitation, self-development, and self-reliance, and their integration into the mainstream of society.

WOMEN

Section 14. The State shall protect working women by providing safe and healthful working conditions, taking into account their maternal functions, and such facilities and opportunities that will enhance their welfare and enable them to realize their full potential in the service of the nation.

ROLE AND RIGHTS OF PEOPLE'S ORGANIZATIONS

Section 15. The State shall respect the role of independent people's organizations to enable the people to pursue and protect, within the democratic framework, their legitimate and collective interests and aspirations through peaceful and lawful means.

People's organizations are bona fide associations of citizens with demonstrated capacity to promote the public interest and with identifiable leadership, membership, and structure.

Section 16. The right of the people and their organizations to effective and reasonable participation at all levels of social, political, and economic decision-making shall not be abridged. The State shall, by law, facilitate the establishment of adequate consultation mechanisms.

HUMAN RIGHTS

Section 17.

There is hereby created an independent office called the Commission on Human Rights.

The Commission shall be composed of a Chairman and four Members who must be natural-born citizens of the Philippines and a majority of whom shall be members of the Bar. The term of office and other qualifications and disabilities of the Members of the Commission shall be provided by law.

Until this Commission is constituted, the existing Presidential Committee on Human Rights shall continue to exercise its present functions and powers.

The approved annual appropriations of the Commission shall be automatically and regularly released.

Section 18. The Commission on Human Rights shall have the following powers and functions:

Investigate, on its own or on complaint by any party, all forms of human rights violations involving civil and political rights;

Adopt its operational guidelines and rules of procedure, and cite for contempt for violations thereof in accordance with the Rules of Court;

Provide appropriate legal measures for the protection of human rights of all persons within the Philippines, as well as Filipinos residing abroad, and provide for preventive measures and legal aid services to the under-privileged whose human rights have been violated or need protection;

Exercise visitorial powers over jails, prisons, or detention facilities;

Establish a continuing program of research, education, and information to enhance respect for the primacy of human rights;

Recommend to Congress effective measures to promote human rights and to provide for compensation to victims of violations of human rights, or their families;

Monitor the Philippine Government's compliance with international treaty obligations on human rights;

Grant immunity from prosecution to any person whose testimony or whose possession of documents or other evidence is necessary or convenient to determine the truth in any investigation conducted by it or under its authority;

Request the assistance of any department, bureau, office, or agency in the performance of its functions;

Appoint its officers and employees in accordance with law; and

Perform such other duties and functions as may be provided by law.

Section 19. The Congress may provide for other cases of violations of human rights that should fall within the authority of the Commission, taking into account its recommendations.

ARTICLE XIV EDUCATION, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, ARTS, CULTURE AND SPORTS

EDUCATION

Section 1. The State shall protect and promote the right of all citizens to quality education at all levels, and shall take appropriate steps to make such education accessible to all.

Section 2. The State shall:

Establish, maintain, and support a complete, adequate, and integrated system of education relevant to the needs of the people and society;

Establish and maintain, a system of free public education in the elementary and high school levels. Without limiting the natural rights of parents to rear their children, elementary education is compulsory for all children of school age;

Establish and maintain a system of scholarship grants, student loan programs, subsidies, and other incentives which shall be available to deserving students in both public and private schools, especially to the under-privileged;

Encourage non-formal, informal, and indigenous learning systems, as well as self-learning, independent, and out-of-school study programs particularly those that respond to community needs; and

Provide adult citizens, the disabled, and out-of-school youth with training in civics, vocational efficiency, and other skills.

Section 3.

All educational institutions shall include the study of the Constitution as part of the curricula.

They shall inculcate patriotism and nationalism, foster love of humanity, respect for human rights, appreciation of the role of national heroes in the historical development of the country, teach the rights and duties of citizenship, strengthen ethical and spiritual values, develop moral character and personal discipline, encourage critical and creative thinking, broaden scientific and technological knowledge, and promote vocational efficiency.

At the option expressed in writing by the parents or guardians, religion shall be allowed to be taught to their children or wards in public elementary and high schools within the regular class hours by instructors designated or approved by the religious authorities of the religion to which the children or wards belong, without additional cost to the Government.

Section 4.

The State recognizes the complementary roles of public and private institutions in the educational system and shall exercise reasonable supervision and regulation of all educational institutions.

Educational institutions, other than those established by religious groups and mission boards, shall be owned solely by citizens of the Philippines or corporations or associations at least sixty per centum of the capital of which is owned by such citizens. The Congress may, however, require increased Filipino equity participation in all educational institutions. The control and administration of educational institutions shall be vested in citizens of the Philippines.

No educational institution shall be established exclusively for aliens and no group of aliens shall comprise more than one-third of the enrollment in any school. The provisions of this sub section shall not apply to schools established for foreign diplomatic personnel and their dependents and, unless otherwise provided by law, for other foreign temporary residents.

All revenues and assets of non-stock, non-profit educational institutions used actually, directly, and exclusively for educational purposes shall be exempt from taxes and duties. Upon the dissolution or cessation of the corporate existence of such institutions, their assets shall be disposed of in the manner provided by law.

Proprietary educational institutions, including those cooperatively owned, may likewise be entitled to such exemptions, subject to the limitations provided by law, including restrictions on dividends and provisions for reinvestment.

Subject to conditions prescribed by law, all grants, endowments, donations, or contributions used actually, directly, and exclusively for educational purposes shall be exempt from tax.

Section 5.

the State shall take into account regional and sectoral needs and conditions and shall encourage local planning in the development of educational policies and programs.

Academic freedom shall be enjoyed in all institutions of higher learning.

Every citizen has a right to select a profession or course of study, subject to fair, reasonable, and equitable admission and academic requirements.

The State shall enhance the right of teachers to professional advancement. Non-teaching academic and non-academic personnel shall enjoy the protection of the State.

The State shall assign the highest budgetary priority to education and ensure that teaching will attract and retain its rightful share of the best available talents through adequate remuneration and other means of job satisfaction and fulfillment.

LANGUAGE

Section 6. The national language of the Philippines is Filipino. As it evolves, it shall be further developed and enriched on the basis of existing Philippine and other languages.

Subject to provisions of law and as the Congress may deem appropriate, the Government shall take steps to initiate and sustain the use of Filipino as a medium of official communication and as language of instruction in the educational system.

Section 7. For purposes of communication and instruction, the official languages of the Philippines are Filipino and, until otherwise provided by law, English.

The regional languages are the auxiliary official languages in the regions and shall serve as auxiliary media of instruction therein.

Spanish and Arabic shall be promoted on a voluntary and optional basis.

Section 8. This Constitution shall be promulgated in Filipino and English and shall be translated into major regional languages, Arabic, and Spanish.

Section 9. The Congress shall establish a national language commission composed of representatives of various regions and disciplines which shall undertake, coordinate, and promote researches for the development, propagation, and preservation of Filipino and other languages.

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

Section 10. Science and technology are essential for national development and progress. The State shall give priority to research and development, invention, innovation, and their utilization; and to science and technology education, training, and services. It shall support indigenous, appropriate, and self-reliant scientific and technological capabilities, and their application to the country's productive systems and national life.

Section 11. The Congress may provide for incentives, including tax deductions, to encourage private participation in programs of basic and applied scientific research. Scholarships, grants-in-aid, or other forms of incentives shall be provided to deserving science students, researchers, scientists, inventors, technologists, and specially gifted citizens.

Section 12. The State shall regulate the transfer and promote the adaptation of technology from all sources for the national benefit. It shall encourage the widest participation of private groups, local governments, and community-based organizations in the generation and utilization of science and technology.

Section 13. The State shall protect and secure the exclusive rights of scientists, inventors, artists, and other gifted citizens to their intellectual property and creations, particularly when beneficial to the people, for such period as may be provided by law.

ARTS AND CULTURE

Section 14. The State shall foster the preservation, enrichment, and dynamic evolution of a Filipino national culture based on the principle of unity in diversity in a climate of free artistic and intellectual expression.

Section 15. Arts and letters shall enjoy the patronage of the State. The State shall conserve, promote, and popularize the nation's historical and cultural heritage and resources, as well as artistic creations.

Section 16. All the country's artistic and historic wealth constitutes the cultural treasure of the nation and shall be under the protection of the State which may regulate its disposition.

Section 17. The State shall recognize, respect, and protect the rights of indigenous cultural communities to preserve and develop their cultures, traditions, and institutions. It shall consider these rights in the formulation of national plans and policies.

Section 18.

The State shall ensure equal access to cultural opportunities through the educational system, public or private cultural entities, scholarships, grants and other incentives, and community cultural centers, and other public venues.

The State shall encourage and support researches and studies on the arts and culture.

SPORTS

Section 19.

The State shall promote physical education and encourage sports programs, league competitions, and amateur sports, including training for international competitions, to foster self-discipline, teamwork, and excellence for the development of a healthy and alert citizenry.

All educational institutions shall undertake regular sports activities throughout the country in cooperation with athletic clubs and other sectors.

ARTICLE XV THE FAMILY

Section 1. The State recognizes the Filipino family as the foundation of the nation. Accordingly, it shall strengthen its solidarity and actively promote its total development.

Section 2. Marriage, as an inviolable social institution, is the foundation of the family and shall be protected by the State.

Section 3. The State shall defend:

The right of spouses to found a family in accordance with their religious convictions and the demands of responsible parenthood;

The right of children to assistance, including proper care and nutrition, and special protection from all forms of neglect, abuse, cruelty, exploitation and other conditions prejudicial to their development;

The right of the family to a family living wage and income; and

The right of families or family associations to participate in the planning and implementation of policies and programs that affect them.

Section 4. The family has the duty to care for its elderly members but the State may also do so through just programs of social security.

ARTICLE XVI GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1. The flag of the Philippines shall be red, white, and blue, with a sun and three stars, as consecrated and honored by the people and recognized by law.

Section 2. The Congress may, by law, adopt a new name for the country, a national anthem, or a national seal, which shall all be truly reflective and symbolic of the ideals, history, and traditions of the people. Such law shall take effect only upon its ratification by the people in a national referendum.

Section 3. The State may not be sued without its consent.

Section 4. The Armed Forces of the Philippines shall be composed of a citizen armed force which shall undergo military training and serve as may be provided by law. It shall keep a regular force necessary for the security of the State.

Section 5.

All members of the armed forces shall take an oath or affirmation to uphold and defend this Constitution.

The State shall strengthen the patriotic spirit and nationalist consciousness of the military, and respect for people's rights in the performance of their duty.

Professionalism in the armed forces and adequate remuneration and benefits of its members shall be a prime concern of the State. The armed forces shall be insulated from partisan politics. No member of the military shall engage, directly or indirectly, in any partisan political activity, except to vote.

No member of the armed forces in the active service shall, at any time, be appointed or designated in any capacity to a civilian position in the Government, including government-owned or controlled corporations or any of their subsidiaries.

Laws on retirement of military officers shall not allow extension of their service.

The officers and men of the regular force of the armed forces shall be recruited proportionately from all provinces and cities as far as practicable.

The tour of duty of the Chief of Staff of the armed forces shall not exceed three years. However, in times of war or other national emergency declared by the Congress, the President may extend such tour of duty.

Section 6. The State shall establish and maintain one police force, which shall be national in scope and civilian in character, to be administered and controlled by a national police commission. The authority of local executives over the police units in their jurisdiction shall be provided by law.

Section 7. The State shall provide immediate and adequate care, benefits, and other forms of assistance to war veterans and veterans of military campaigns, their surviving spouses and orphans. Funds shall be provided therefor and due consideration shall be given them in the disposition of agricultural lands of the public domain and, in appropriate cases, in the utilization of natural resources.

Section 8. The State shall, from time to time, review to increase the pensions and other benefits due to retirees of both the government and the private sectors.

Section 9. The State shall protect consumers from trade malpractices and from substandard or hazardous products.

Section 10. The State shall provide the policy environment for the full development of Filipino capability and the emergence of communication structures suitable to the needs and aspirations of the nation and the balanced flow of information into, out of, and across the country, in accordance with a policy that respects the freedom of speech and of the press.

Section 11.

The ownership and management of mass media shall be limited to citizens of the Philippines, or to corporations, cooperatives or associations, wholly-owned and managed by such citizens.

The Congress shall regulate or prohibit monopolies in commercial mass media when the public interest so requires. No combinations in restraint of trade or unfair competition therein shall be allowed.

The advertising industry is impressed with public interest, and shall be regulated by law for the protection of consumers and the promotion of the general welfare.

Only Filipino citizens or corporations or associations at least seventy per centum of the capital of which is owned by such citizens shall be allowed to engage in the advertising industry.

The participation of foreign investors in the governing body of entities in such industry shall be limited to their proportionate share in the capital thereof, and all the executive and managing officers of such entities must be citizens of the Philippines.

Section 12. The Congress may create a consultative body to advise the President on policies affecting indigenous cultural communities, the majority of the members of which shall come from such communities.

ARTICLE XVII AMENDMENTS OR REVISIONS

Section 1. Any amendment to, or revision of, this Constitution may be proposed by:

The Congress, upon a vote of three-fourths of all its Members; or

A constitutional convention.

Section 2. Amendments to this Constitution may likewise be directly proposed by the people through initiative upon a petition of at least twelve per centum of the total number of registered voters, of which every legislative district must be represented by at least three per centum of the registered voters therein. No amendment under this section shall be authorized within five years following the ratification of this Constitution nor oftener than once every five years thereafter.

The Congress shall provide for the implementation of the exercise of this right.

Section 3. The Congress may, by a vote of two-thirds of all its Members, call a constitutional convention, or by a majority vote of all its Members, submit to the electorate the question of calling such a convention.

Section 4.Any amendment to, or revision of, this Constitution under Section 1 hereof shall be valid when ratified by a majority of the votes cast in a plebiscite which shall be held not earlier than sixty days nor later than ninety days after the approval of such amendment or revision.

Any amendment under Section 2 hereof shall be valid when ratified by a majority of the votes cast in a plebiscite which shall be held not earlier than sixty days nor later than ninety days after the certification by the Commission on Elections of the sufficiency of the petition.

ARTICLE XVIII TRANSITORY PROVISIONS

Section 1. The first elections of Members of the Congress under this Constitution shall be held on the second Monday of May, 1987.

The first local elections shall be held on a date to be determined by the President, which may be simultaneous with the election of the Members of the Congress. It shall include the election of all Members of the city or municipal councils in the Metropolitan Manila area.

Section 2. The Senators, Members of the House of Representatives, and the local officials first elected under this Constitution shall serve until noon of June 30, 1992.

Of the Senators elected in the elections in 1992, the first twelve obtaining the highest number of votes shall serve for six years and the remaining twelve for three years.

Section 3. All existing laws, decrees, executive orders, proclamations, letters of instructions, and other executive issuances not inconsistent with this Constitution shall remain operative until amended, repealed, or revoked.

Section 4. All existing treaties or international agreements which have not been ratified shall not be renewed or extended without the concurrence of at least two-thirds of all the Members of the Senate.

Section 5. The six-year term of the incumbent President and Vice-President elected in the February 7, 1986 election is, for purposes of synchronization of elections, hereby extended to noon of June 30, 1992.

The first regular elections for the President and Vice-President under this Constitution shall be held on the second Monday of May, 1992.

Section 6. The incumbent President shall continue to exercise legislative powers until the first Congress is convened.

Section 7. Until a law is passed, the President may fill by appointment from a list of nominees by the respective sectors, the seats reserved for sectoral representation in paragraph (2), Section 5 of Article V1 of this Constitution.

Section 8. Until otherwise provided by the Congress, the President may constitute the Metropolitan Manila Authority to be composed of the heads of all local government units comprising the Metropolitan Manila area.

Section 9. A sub-province shall continue to exist and operate until it is converted into a regular province or until its component municipalities are reverted to the mother province.

Section 10. All courts existing at the time of the ratification of this Constitution shall continue to exercise their jurisdiction, until otherwise provided by law. The provisions of the existing Rules of Court, judiciary acts, and procedural laws not inconsistent with this Constitution shall remain operative unless amended or repealed by the Supreme Court or the Congress.

Section 11. The incumbent Members of the Judiciary shall continue in office until they reach the age of seventy years or become incapacitated to discharge the duties of their office or are removed for cause.

Section 12. The Supreme Court shall, within one year after the ratification of this Constitution, adopt a systematic plan to expedite the decision or resolution of cases or matters pending in the Supreme Court or the lower courts prior to the effectivity of this Constitution. A similar plan shall be adopted for all special courts and quasi-judicial bodies.

Section 13. The legal effect of the lapse, before the ratification of this Constitution, of the applicable period for the decision or resolution of the cases or matters submitted for adjudication by the courts, shall be determined by the Supreme Court as soon as practicable.

Section 14. The provisions of paragraphs (3) and (4), Section 15 of Article VIII of this Constitution shall apply to cases or matters filed before the ratification of this Constitution, when the applicable period lapses after such ratification.

Section 15. The incumbent Members of the Civil Service Commission, the Commission on Elections, and the Commission on Audit shall continue in office for one year after the ratification of this Constitution, unless they are sooner removed for cause or become incapacitated to discharge the duties of their office or appointed to a new term thereunder. In no case shall any Member serve longer than seven years including service before the ratification of this Constitution.

Section 16. Career civil service employees separated from the service not for cause but as a result of the reorganization pursuant to Proclamation No. 3 dated March 25, 1986 and the reorganization following the ratification of this Constitution shall be entitled to appropriate separation pay and to retirement and other benefits accruing to them under the laws of general application in force at the time of their separation. In lieu thereof, at the option of the employees, they may be considered for employment in the Government or in any of its subdivisions, instrumentalities, or agencies, including government-owned or controlled corporations and their subsidiaries. This provision also applies to career officers whose resignation, tendered in line with the existing policy, had been accepted.

Section 17. Until the Congress provides otherwise, the President shall receive an annual salary of three hundred thousand pesos; the Vice-President, the President of the Senate, the Speaker of the House of Representatives, and the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court, two hundred forty thousand pesos each; the Senators, the Members of the House of Representatives, the Associate Justices of the Supreme Court, and the Chairmen of the Constitutional Commissions, two hundred four thousand pesos each; and the Members of the Constitutional Commissions, one hundred eighty thousand pesos each.

Section 18. At the earliest possible time, the Government shall increase the salary scales of the other officials and employees of the National Government.

Section 19. All properties, records, equipment, buildings, facilities, and other assets of any office or body abolished or reorganized under Proclamation No. 3 dated March 25, 1986 or this Constitution shall be transferred to the office or body to which its powers, functions, and responsibilities substantially pertain.

Section 20. The first Congress shall give priority to the determination of the period for the full implementation of free public secondary education.

Section 21. The Congress shall provide efficacious procedures and adequate remedies for the reversion to the State of all lands of the public domain and real rights connected therewith which were acquired in violation of the Constitution or the public land laws, or through corrupt practices. No transfer or disposition of such lands or real rights shall be allowed until after the lapse of one year from the ratification of this Constitution.

Section 22. At the earliest possible time, the Government shall expropriate idle or abandoned agricultural lands as may be defined by law, for distribution to the beneficiaries of the agrarian reform program.

Section 23. Advertising entities affected by paragraph (2), Section 11 of Article XV1 of this Constitution shall have five years from its ratification to comply on a graduated and proportionate basis with the minimum Filipino ownership requirement therein.

Section 24. Private armies and other armed groups not recognized by duly constituted authority shall be dismantled. All paramilitary forces including Civilian Home Defense Forces not consistent with the citizen armed force established in this Constitution, shall be dissolved or, where appropriate, converted into the regular force.

Section 25. After the expiration in 1991 of the Agreement between the Republic of the Philippines and the United States of America concerning military bases, foreign military bases, troops, or facilities shall not be allowed in the Philippines except under a treaty duly concurred in by the Senate and, when the Congress so requires, ratified by a majority of the votes cast by the people in a national referendum held for that purpose, and recognized as a treaty by the other contracting State.

Section 26. The authority to issue sequestration or freeze orders under Proclamation No. 3 dated March 25, 1986 in relation to the recovery of ill-gotten wealth shall remain operative for not more than eighteen months after the ratification of this Constitution. However, in the national interest, as certified by the President, the Congress may extend such period.

A sequestration or freeze order shall be issued only upon showing of a prima facie case. The order and the list of the sequestered or frozen properties shall forthwith be registered with the proper court. For orders issued before the ratification of this Constitution, the corresponding judicial action or proceeding shall be filed within six months from its ratification. For those issued after such ratification, the judicial action or proceeding shall be commenced within six months from the issuance thereof.

The sequestration or freeze order is deemed automatically lifted if no judicial action or proceeding is commenced as herein provided.

Section 27. This Constitution shall take effect immediately upon its ratification by a majority of the votes cast in a plebiscite held for the purpose and shall supersede all previous Constitutions.

The foregoing proposed Constitution of the Republic of the Philippines was approved by the Constitutional Commission of 1986 on the twelfth day of October, Nineteen hundred and eighty-six, and accordingly signed on the fifteenth day of October, Nineteen hundred and eighty-six at the Plenary Hall, National Government Center, Quezon City, by the Commissioners whose signatures are hereunder affixed.

Adopted:

President : Cecilia Munoz Palma

Vice-President

: Ambrosio B. Padilla Floor Leader : Napoleon G. Rama Assistant Floor Leaders : Ahmad Domocao Alonto : Jose D. Calderon

Yusuf R. Abubakar Felicitas S. Aquino Adolfo S. Azcuna Teodoro C. Bacani Jose F. S. Bengzon, Jr. Ponciano L. Bennagen Joaquin G. Bernas Florangel Rosario Braid Crispino M. de Castro Jose C. Colayco Roberto R. Concepcion Hilario G. Davide, Jr. Vicente B. Foz Edmundo G. Garcia Jose Luis Martin C. Gascon Serafin V.C. Guingona Alberto M. K. Jamir Jose B. Laurel, Jr. Eulogio R. Lerum Regalado E. Maambong Christian S. Monsod Teodulo C. Natividad Ma. Teresa F. Nieva Jose N. Nolledo Blas F. Ople Minda Luz M. Quesada Florenz D. Regalado Rustico F. de los Reyes, Jr. Cirilo A. Rigos Francisco A. Rodrigo Ricardo J. Romulo Decoroso R. Rosales Rene V. Sarmiento Jose E. Suarez Lorenzo M. Sumulong Jaime S. L. Tadeo Christine O. Tan Gregorio J. Tingson Efrain B. Trenas Lugum L. Uka Wilfrido V. Villacorta Bernardo M. Villegas

Attested by : Flerida Ruth P. Romero Secretary-General

ORDINANCE APPORTIONING THE SEATS OF THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES OF THE CONGRESS OF THE PHILIPPINES TO THE DIFFERENT LEGISLATIVE DISTRICTS IN PROVINCES AND CITIES AND THE METROPOLITAN MANILA AREA

Section 1. For purposes of the election of Members of the House of Representatives of the First Congress of the Philippines under the Constitution proposed by the 1986 Constitutional Commission and subsequent elections, and until otherwise provided by law, the Members thereof shall be elected from legislative districts apportioned among the provinces, cities, and the Metropolitan Manila Area as follows:

Metropolitan Manila Area MANILA, six (6) -

First District: Barangays Nos.1-146,

N-City Boundary between Manila and Caloocan;

E - From Estero de Sunog Apog going South to Estero de Vitas up to the bridge spanning Juan Luna Street, eastward to Tayuman Street up to the Railroad Tracks along Dagupan Street,thence southward to Claro M. Recto Avenue;

SE - From point Claro M. Recto Avenue extending westward to Manila Bay;

W - Manila Bay northward to City boundary between Manila and Caloocan.

Second District: Barangays Nos. 147-267,

N - City boundary between Manila and Caloocan;

E - From end of Rizal Avenue Extension extending southward to Railroad Tracks at Antipolo Street; from corner Antipolo Street and Rizal Avenue on southern side of Railroad Tracks extending westward to Estero de San Lazaro, southward along Estero de San Lazaro up to corner of C. M. Recto Avenue westward to bridge spanning Claro M. Recto at Estero de la Reina;

W - Estero de la Reina to Estero de Vitas to Estero Sunog Apog to City boundary between Manila and Caloocan;

Third District: Barangays Nos. 268-394,

N - City boundary between Manila and Caloocan;

E - A. Bonifacio Street extending southward to Dimasalang, to Anda-lucia, Claro M. Recto Avenue eastward to Estero de San Miguel ending at Pasig River;

S - Mouth of Estero de San Miguel at Pasig River, westward to Del Pan Bridge, thence to Del Pan Street;

W - Del Pan Street northward up to Claro M. Recto Extension to Estero de San Lazaro, northward to Antipolo Street, eastward to Rizal Avenue Extension, northward to boundary between Manila and Caloocan;

Fourth District: Barangays Nos. 395 - 586,

SW - Estero de San Miguel up to Mendiola Bridge, thence to C. M. Recto Avenue to Quezon Boulevard;

W - Quezon Boulevard, Andalucia, Dimasalang up to boundary between Manila and Quezon City;

NE - City boundary between Manila and Quezon City up to Ramon Magsaysay Boulevard; SE - Ramon Magsaysay Boulevard up to V. Mapa Street;

S - Ramon Magsaysay Boulevard up to point Estero de San Miguel where Ramon Magsaysay Boulevard spans Estero de San Miguel;

Fifth District: Barangays Nos. 649-828,

N - Mouth of Pasig River inland to point Paz M. Guanzon Street extending to Estero de Pandacan;

NE - Estero de Pandacan up to Pedro Gil Street to Tejeron Street up to boundary of Manila and Makati;

SE - City boundary between Manila and Makati up to Estero de Tripa de Gallina;

S - City boundary between Pasay and Manila down to Roxas Boulevard up to edge of reclaimed areas westward to Manila Bay;

W - Manila Bay up to mouth of Pasig River,

Sixth District: Barangays Nos. 587-648; and 829-905

N - Starting from point which is mouth of Estero de San Miguel going eastward to Mendiola Bridge, following line along Estero de San Miguel up to point where Ramon Magsaysay Boulevard eastward to City boundary between Manila and Quezon Cityl;

NE - City boundary up to point city boundary of Manila, San Juan and Quezon City;

E - Manila-San Juan-Mandaluyong-Makati boundaries up to Tejeron Street;

SE - Tejeron Street to Pedro Gil Street up to bridge spanning Estero de Pandacan;

SW & W - Estero de Pandacan going northward to Paz M. Guanzon Street, then northward on Paz M. Guazon Street up to Pasig River to mouth of Estero de San Miguel on Pasig River.

QUEZON CITY, four (4)

First District :

Barangays Del Monte,

Paltok,

Bungad,

San Antonio,

Katipunan,

Veterans Village,

Talayan,

Damayan,

Mariblo,

Paraiso,

Sta. Cruz,

Nayong Kanluran,

Philam,

West Triangle,

N.S. Amoranto,

San Isidro Labrador,

Sta. Teresita,

Salvacion,

Maharlika,

St. Peter,

Lourdes,

Sto. Domingo,

Sienna,

San Jose,

Manresa,

Pag-ibig sa Nayon,

Balingasa,

Masambong,

Damar,

Bahay Toro,

St. Cristo,

Ramon Magsaysay,

Project 6,

Vasra, Alicia,

and Bagong Pag-asa;

Second District:

Barangays Fairview,

New Era,

Holy Spirit,

Batasan Hills,

Commonwealth,

Payatas,

Bagong Silangan,

Sauyo,

Talipapa,

Bagbag,

San Bartolome,

Sta. Lucia,

Gulod,

Novaliches Proper,

San Agustin,

Nagkaisang Nayon,

Sta. Monica,

Kaligayahan,

Pasong Putik,

Apolonio Samson,

Unang Sigaw,

Tandang Sora,

Pasong Tamo,

Culiat,

Baesa,

Capri,

Balumbato, and

Sangandaan:

Third District :

Barangays E. Rodriguez,

Silangan,

Quirino 3-A,

Duyan-Duyan,

Quirino 3-B,

Amihan,

Socorro,

San Roque,

Manga,

Zobel Dioquino,

Tagumpay,

Aguinaldo, Escopa 1,

Escopa 2,

Escopa 3,

Escopa 4,

West Kamias,

East Kamias,

Quirino 2 A,

Quririno 2 B,

Quirino 2 C,

Ugong Norte,

Bagumbayan, Libis,

Villa Maria Clara,

Masagana,

Milagrosa,

Marilag,

Bagumbayan,

Loyola Heights,

Pansol, and

Matandang Balara;

Fourth District:

Barangays Bagong Lipunan,

Kaunlaran,

San Martin,

Immaculate Concepcion,

South Triangle,

Sacred Heart,

Laging Handa,

Paligsahan,

Obrero,

Roxas, Kamuning,

Kanluran,

Kamuning Silangan,

Tatalon,

Don Manuel,

Dona Josefa,

San Isidro,

Dona Aurora,

Santo Nino,

Santol,

Dona Imelda,

Kristong Hari,

Kalusugan,

Damayang Lagi,

Mariana,

Valencia,

Horseshoe,

Pinagkaisahan,

San Vicente,

U.P. Campus,

Krus Na Ligas,

Central,

Old Capital Site,

U.P. Village,

Teacher's East,

Teacher's West,

Sikatuna,

Malaya,

Pinahan, and

Botocan

CALOOCAN CITY, two (2) -

First District : 70 Barangays;

All of Caloocan North EDSA;

Second District: 118 Barangays;

All of Caloocan South EDSA.

PASAY CITY, one (1)

MALABON and NAVOTAS, one (1)

SAN JUAN and MANDALUYONG, one (1)

MARIKINA, one (1)

MAKATI, one (1)

PASIG, one (1) PARANAQUE, one (1)

LAS PINAS and MUNTINGLUPA, one (1)

PATEROS and TAGUIG, one (1)

VALENZUELA, one (1)

MEMBERS OF THE CONSTITUTIONAL COMMISSION [CON COM] WHICH DRAFTED THE 1987 CONSTITUTION OF THE PHILIPPINES

President : Cecilia Munoz Palma

Vice-President

: Ambrosio B. Padilla Floor Leader : Napoleon G. Rama Assistant Floor Leaders : Ahmad Domocao Alonto : Jose D. Calderon

Yusuf R. Abubakar Felicitas S. Aquino Adolfo S. Azcuna Teodoro C. Bacani Jose F. S. Bengzon, Jr. Ponciano L. Bennagen Joaquin G. Bernas Florangel Rosario Braid Crispino M. de Castro Jose C. Colayco Roberto R. Concepcion Hilario G. Davide, Jr. Vicente B. Foz Edmundo G. Garcia Jose Luis Martin C. Gascon Serafin V.C. Guingona Alberto M. K. Jamir Jose B. Laurel, Jr. Eulogio R. Lerum Regalado E. Maambong Christian S. Monsod Teodulo C. Natividad Ma. Teresa F. Nieva Jose N. Nolledo Blas F. Ople Minda Luz M. Quesada Florenz D. Regalado Rustico F. de los Reyes, Jr. Cirilo A. Rigos Francisco A. Rodrigo Ricardo J. Romulo Decoroso R. Rosales Rene V. Sarmiento Jose E. Suarez Lorenzo M. Sumulong Jaime S. L. Tadeo Christine O. Tan Gregorio J. Tingson Efrain B. Trenas Lugum L. Uka Wilfrido V. Villacorta Bernardo M. Villegas

Attested by : Flerida Ruth P. Romero Secretary-General

[codalsetal]

The Corporation Code of the Philippines

Be it enacted by the Batasang Pambansa in session assembled:

TITLE I - GENERAL PROVISIONS

DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS

Section 1. Title of the Code. – This Code shall be known as “The Corporation Code of the Philippines.” (n)

Section 2. Corporation defined. – A corporation is an artificial being created by operation of law, having the right of succession and the powers, attributes and properties expressly authorized by law or incident to its existence. (2)

Section 3. Classes of corporations. – Corporations formed or organized under this Code may be stock or non-stock corporations. Corporations which have capital stock divided into shares and are authorized to distribute to the holders of such shares dividends or allotments of the surplus profits on the basis of the shares held are stock corporations. All other corporations are non-stock corporations. (3a)

Section 4. Corporations created by special laws or charters. – Corporations created by special laws or charters shall be governed primarily by the provisions of the special law or charter creating them or applicable to them, supplemented by the provisions of this Code, insofar as they are applicable. (n)

Section 5. Corporators and incorporators, stockholders and members. – Corporators are those who compose a corporation, whether as stockholders or as members. Incorporators are those stockholders or members mentioned in the articles of incorporation as originally forming and composing the corporation and who are signatories thereof.

Corporators in a stock corporation are called stockholders or shareholders. Corporators in a non-stock corporation are called members. (4a)

Section 6. Classification of shares. – The shares of stock of stock corporations may be divided into classes or series of shares, or both, any of which classes or series of shares may have such rights, privileges or restrictions as may be stated in the articles of incorporation: Provided, That no share may be deprived of voting rights except those classified and issued as “preferred” or “redeemable” shares, unless otherwise provided in this Code: Provided, further, That there shall always be a class or series of shares which have complete voting rights. Any or all of the shares or series of shares may have a par value or have no par value as may be provided for in the articles of incorporation: Provided, however, That banks, trust companies, insurance companies, public utilities, and building and loan associations shall not be permitted to issue no-par value shares of stock.

Preferred shares of stock issued by any corporation may be given preference in the distribution of the assets of the corporation in case of liquidation and in the distribution of dividends, or such other preferences as may be stated in the articles of incorporation which are not violative of the provisions of this Code: Provided, That preferred shares of stock may be issued only with a stated par value. The board of directors, where authorized in the articles of incorporation, may fix the terms and conditions of preferred shares of stock or any series thereof: Provided, That such terms and conditions shall be effective upon the filing of a certificate thereof with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Shares of capital stock issued without par value shall be deemed fully paid and non-assessable and the holder of such shares shall not be liable to the corporation or to its creditors in respect thereto: Provided; That shares without par value may not be issued for a consideration less than the value of five (P5.00) pesos per share: Provided, further, That the entire consideration received by the corporation for its no-par value shares shall be treated as capital and shall not be available for distribution as dividends.

A corporation may, furthermore, classify its shares for the purpose of insuring compliance with constitutional or legal requirements.

Except as otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation and stated in the certificate of stock, each share shall be equal in all respects to every other share.

Where the articles of incorporation provide for non-voting shares in the cases allowed by this Code, the holders of such shares shall nevertheless be entitled to vote on the following matters:

1. Amendment of the articles of incorporation;

2. Adoption and amendment of by-laws;

3. Sale, lease, exchange, mortgage, pledge or other disposition of all or substantially all of the corporate property;

4. Incurring, creating or increasing bonded indebtedness;

5. Increase or decrease of capital stock;

6. Merger or consolidation of the corporation with another corporation or other corporations;

7. Investment of corporate funds in another corporation or business in accordance with this Code; and

8. Dissolution of the corporation.

Except as provided in the immediately preceding paragraph, the vote necessary to approve a particular corporate act as provided in this Code shall be deemed to refer only to stocks with voting rights. (5a)

Section 7. Founders’ shares. – Founders’ shares classified as such in the articles of incorporation may be given certain rights and privileges not enjoyed by the owners of other stocks, provided that where the exclusive right to vote and be voted for in the election of directors is granted, it must be for a limited period not to exceed five (5) years subject to the approval of the Securities and Exchange Commission. The five-year period shall commence from the date of the aforesaid approval by the Securities and Exchange Commission. (n)

Section 8. Redeemable shares. – Redeemable shares may be issued by the corporation when expressly so provided in the articles of incorporation. They may be purchased or taken up by the corporation upon the expiration of a fixed period, regardless of the existence of unrestricted retained earnings in the books of the corporation, and upon such other terms and conditions as may be stated in the articles of incorporation, which terms and conditions must also be stated in the certificate of stock representing said shares. (n)

Section 9. Treasury shares. – Treasury shares are shares of stock which have been issued and fully paid for, but subsequently reacquired by the issuing corporation by purchase, redemption, donation or through some other lawful means. Such shares may again be disposed of for a reasonable price fixed by the board of directors. (n)

TITLE II

INCORPORATION AND ORGANIZATION OF PRIVATE CORPORATIONS

Section 10. Number and qualifications of incorporators. – Any number of natural persons not less than five (5) but not more than fifteen (15), all of legal age and a majority of whom are residents of the Philippines, may form a private corporation for any lawful purpose or purposes. Each of the incorporators of s stock corporation must own or be a subscriber to at least one (1) share of the capital stock of the corporation. (6a)

Section 11. Corporate term. – A corporation shall exist for a period not exceeding fifty (50) years from the date of incorporation unless sooner dissolved or unless said period is extended. The corporate term as originally stated in the articles of incorporation may be extended for periods not exceeding fifty (50) years in any single instance by an amendment of the articles of incorporation, in accordance with this Code; Provided, That no extension can be made earlier than five (5) years prior to the original or subsequent expiry date(s) unless there are justifiable reasons for an earlier extension as may be determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission. (6)

Section 12. Minimum capital stock required of stock corporations. – Stock corporations incorporated under this Code shall not be required to have any minimum authorized capital stock except as otherwise specifically provided for by special law, and subject to the provisions of the following section.

Section 13. Amount of capital stock to be subscribed and paid for the purposes of incorporation. – At least twenty-five percent (25%) of the authorized capital stock as stated in the articles of incorporation must be subscribed at the time of incorporation, and at least twenty-five (25%) per cent of the total subscription must be paid upon subscription, the balance to be payable on a date or dates fixed in the contract of subscription without need of call, or in the absence of a fixed date or dates, upon call for payment by the board of directors: Provided, however, That in no case shall the paid-up capital be less than five Thousand (P5,000.00) pesos. (n)

Section 14. Contents of the articles of incorporation. – All corporations organized under this code shall file with the Securities and Exchange Commission articles of incorporation in any of the official languages duly signed and acknowledged by all of the incorporators, containing substantially the following matters, except as otherwise prescribed by this Code or by special law:

1. The name of the corporation;

2. The specific purpose or purposes for which the corporation is being incorporated. Where a corporation has more than one stated purpose, the articles of incorporation shall state which is the primary purpose and which is/are the secondary purpose or purposes: Provided, That a non-stock corporation may not include a purpose which would change or contradict its nature as such;

3. The place where the principal office of the corporation is to be located, which must be within the Philippines;

4. The term for which the corporation is to exist;

5. The names, nationalities and residences of the incorporators;

6. The number of directors or trustees, which shall not be less than five (5) nor more than fifteen (15);

7. The names, nationalities and residences of persons who shall act as directors or trustees until the first regular directors or trustees are duly elected and qualified in accordance with this Code;

8. If it be a stock corporation, the amount of its authorized capital stock in lawful money of the Philippines, the number of shares into which it is divided, and in case the share are par value shares, the par value of each, the names, nationalities and residences of the original subscribers, and the amount subscribed and paid by each on his subscription, and if some or all of the shares are without par value, such fact must be stated;

9. If it be a non-stock corporation, the amount of its capital, the names, nationalities and residences of the contributors and the amount contributed by each; and

10. Such other matters as are not inconsistent with law and which the incorporators may deem necessary and convenient.

The Securities and Exchange Commission shall not accept the articles of incorporation of any stock corporation unless accompanied by a sworn statement of the Treasurer elected by the subscribers showing that at least twenty-five (25%) percent of the authorized capital stock of the corporation has been subscribed, and at least twenty-five (25%) of the total subscription has been fully paid to him in actual cash and/or in property the fair valuation of which is equal to at least twenty-five (25%) percent of the said subscription, such paid-up capital being not less than five thousand (P5,000.00) pesos.

Section 15. Forms of Articles of Incorporation. – Unless otherwise prescribed by special law, articles of incorporation of all domestic corporations shall comply substantially with the following form:

ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION OF

__________________________

(Name of Corporation)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

The undersigned incorporators, all of legal age and a majority of whom are residents of the Philippines, have this day voluntarily agreed to form a (stock) (non-stock) corporation under the laws of the Republic of the Philippines;

AND WE HEREBY CERTIFY:

FIRST: That the name of said corporation shall be “_____________________, INC. or CORPORATION”;

SECOND: That the purpose or purposes for which such corporation is incorporated are: (If there is more than one purpose, indicate primary and secondary purposes);

THIRD: That the principal office of the corporation is located in the City/Municipality of ________________________, Province of _______________________, Philippines;

FOURTH: That the term for which said corporation is to exist is _____________ years from and after the date of issuance of the certificate of incorporation;

FIFTH: That the names, nationalities and residences of the incorporators of the corporation are as follows:

NAME NATIONALITY RESIDENCE ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________

SIXTH: That the number of directors or trustees of the corporation shall be _______; and the names, nationalities and residences of the first directors or trustees of the corporation are as follows:

NAME NATIONALITY RESIDENCE ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________

SEVENTH: That the authorized capital stock of the corporation is ______________________ (P___________) PESOS in lawful money of the Philippines, divided into __________ shares with the par value of ____________________ (P_____________) Pesos per share.

(In case all the share are without par value):

That the capital stock of the corporation is ______________ shares without par value. (In case some shares have par value and some are without par value): That the capital stock of said corporation consists of _____________ shares of which ______________ shares are of the par value of _________________ (P____________) PESOS each, and of which _________________ shares are without par value.

EIGHTH: That at least twenty five (25%) per cent of the authorized capital stock above stated has been subscribed as follows:

Name of Subscriber

Nationality

No of Shares

Subscribed

Amount

Subscribed

_________________ __________ ____________  _____________________________ __________ ____________  ____________ _________________ __________ ____________  ____________ _________________ __________ ____________  ____________ _________________ __________ ____________  ____________

NINTH: That the above-named subscribers have paid at least twenty-five (25%) percent of the total subscription as follows:

Name of Subscriber Amount Subscribed Total Paid-In ___________________  ___________________  ___________________ ___________________  ___________________  ___________________ ___________________  ___________________  ___________________ ___________________  ___________________  ___________________ ___________________  ___________________  ___________________

(Modify Nos. 8 and 9 if shares are with no par value. In case the corporation is non-stock, Nos. 7, 8 and 9 of the above articles may be modified accordingly, and it is sufficient if the articles state the amount of capital or money contributed or donated by specified persons, stating the names, nationalities and residences of the contributors or donors and the respective amount given by each.)

TENTH: That _____________________ has been elected by the subscribers as Treasurer of the Corporation to act as such until his successor is duly elected and qualified in accordance with the by-laws, and that as such Treasurer, he has been authorized to receive for and in the name and for the benefit of the corporation, all subscription (or fees) or contributions or donations paid or given by the subscribers or members.

ELEVENTH: (Corporations which will engage in any business or activity reserved for Filipino citizens shall provide the following):

“No transfer of stock or interest which shall reduce the ownership of Filipino citizens to less than the required percentage of the capital stock as provided by existing laws shall be allowed or permitted to be recorded in the proper books of the corporation and this restriction shall be indicated in all stock certificates issued by the corporation.”

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto signed these Articles of Incorporation, this __________ day of ________________, 19 ______ in the City/Municipality of ____________________, Province of ________________________, Republic of the Philippines.

_______________________ _______________________

_______________________ _______________________

________________________________

(Names and signatures of the incorporators)

SIGNED IN THE PRESENCE OF:

_______________________ _______________________

(Notarial Acknowledgment)

TREASURER’S AFFIDAVIT

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES)

CITY/MUNICIPALITY OF ) S.S.

PROVINCE OF )

I, ____________________, being duly sworn, depose and say:

That I have been elected by the subscribers of the corporation as Treasurer thereof, to act as such until my successor has been duly elected and qualified in accordance with the by-laws of the corporation, and that as such Treasurer, I hereby certify under oath that at least 25% of the authorized capital stock of the corporation has been subscribed and at least 25% of the total subscription has been paid, and received by me, in cash or property, in the amount of not less than P5,000.00, in accordance with the Corporation Code.

____________________

(Signature of Treasurer)

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me, a Notary Public, for and in the City/Municipality of___________________Province of _____________________, this _______ day of ___________, 19 _____; by __________________ with Res. Cert. No. ___________ issued at _______________________ on ____________, 19 ______

NOTARY PUBLIC

My commission expires on

_________, 19 _____

Doc. No. _________;

Page No. _________;

Book No. ________;

Series of 19____ (7a)

Section 16. Amendment of Articles of Incorporation. – Unless otherwise prescribed by this Code or by special law, and for legitimate purposes, any provision or matter stated in the articles of incorporation may be amended by a majority vote of the board of directors or trustees and the vote or written assent of the stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, without prejudice to the appraisal right of dissenting stockholders in accordance with the provisions of this Code, or the vote or written assent of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members if it be a non-stock corporation.

The original and amended articles together shall contain all provisions required by law to be set out in the articles of incorporation. Such articles, as amended shall be indicated by underscoring the change or changes made, and a copy thereof duly certified under oath by the corporate secretary and a majority of the directors or trustees stating the fact that said amendment or amendments have been duly approved by the required vote of the stockholders or members, shall be submitted to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

The amendments shall take effect upon their approval by the Securities and Exchange Commission or from the date of filing with the said Commission if not acted upon within six (6) months from the date of filing for a cause not attributable to the corporation.

Section 17. Grounds when articles of incorporation or amendment may be rejected or disapproved. – The Securities and Exchange Commission may reject the articles of incorporation or disapprove any amendment thereto if the same is not in compliance with the requirements of this Code: Provided, That the Commission shall give the incorporators a reasonable time within which to correct or modify the objectionable portions of the articles or amendment. The following are grounds for such rejection or disapproval:

1. That the articles of incorporation or any amendment thereto is not substantially in accordance with the form prescribed herein;

2. That the purpose or purposes of the corporation are patently unconstitutional, illegal, immoral, or contrary to government rules and regulations;

3. That the Treasurer’s Affidavit concerning the amount of capital stock subscribed and/or paid is false;

4. That the percentage of ownership of the capital stock to be owned by citizens of the Philippines has not been complied with as required by existing laws or the Constitution.

No articles of incorporation or amendment to articles of incorporation of banks, banking and quasi-banking institutions, building and loan associations, trust companies and other financial intermediaries, insurance companies, public utilities, educational institutions, and other corporations governed by special laws shall be accepted or approved by the Commission unless accompanied by a favorable recommendation of the appropriate government agency to the effect that such articles or amendment is in accordance with law. (n)

Section 18. Corporate name. – No corporate name may be allowed by the Securities and Exchange Commission if the proposed name is identical or deceptively or confusingly similar to that of any existing corporation or to any other name already protected by law or is patently deceptive, confusing or contrary to existing laws. When a change in the corporate name is approved, the Commission shall issue an amended certificate of incorporation under the amended name. (n)

Section 19. Commencement of corporate existence. – A private corporation formed or organized under this Code commences to have corporate existence and juridical personality and is deemed incorporated from the date the Securities and Exchange Commission issues a certificate of incorporation under its official seal; and thereupon the incorporators, stockholders/members and their successors shall constitute a body politic and corporate under the name stated in the articles of incorporation for the period of time mentioned therein, unless said period is extended or the corporation is sooner dissolved in accordance with law. (n)

Section 20. De facto corporations. – The due incorporation of any corporation claiming in good faith to be a corporation under this Code, and its right to exercise corporate powers, shall not be inquired into collaterally in any private suit to which such corporation may be a party. Such inquiry may be made by the Solicitor General in a quo warranto proceeding. (n)

Section 21. Corporation by estoppel. – All persons who assume to act as a corporation knowing it to be without authority to do so shall be liable as general partners for all debts, liabilities and damages incurred or arising as a result thereof: Provided, however, That when any such ostensible corporation is sued on any transaction entered by it as a corporation or on any tort committed by it as such, it shall not be allowed to use as a defense its lack of corporate personality.

On who assumes an obligation to an ostensible corporation as such, cannot resist performance thereof on the ground that there was in fact no corporation. (n)

Section 22. Effects on non-use of corporate charter and continuous inoperation of a corporation. – If a corporation does not formally organize and commence the transaction of its business or the construction of its works within two (2) years from the date of its incorporation, its corporate powers cease and the corporation shall be deemed dissolved. However, if a corporation has commenced the transaction of its business but subsequently becomes continuously inoperative for a period of at least five (5) years, the same shall be a ground for the suspension or revocation of its corporate franchise or certificate of incorporation. (19a)

This provision shall not apply if the failure to organize, commence the transaction of its businesses or the construction of its works, or to continuously operate is due to causes beyond the control of the corporation as may be determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission.

TITLE III

BOARD OF DIRECTORS/TRUSTEES AND OFFICERS

Section 23. The board of directors or trustees. – Unless otherwise provided in this Code, the corporate powers of all corporations formed under this Code shall be exercised, all business conducted and all property of such corporations controlled and held by the board of directors or trustees to be elected from among the holders of stocks, or where there is no stock, from among the members of the corporation, who shall hold office for one (1) year until their successors are elected and qualified. (28a)

Every director must own at least one (1) share of the capital stock of the corporation of which he is a director, which share shall stand in his name on the books of the corporation. Any director who ceases to be the owner of at least one (1) share of the capital stock of the corporation of which he is a director shall thereby cease to be a director. Trustees of non-stock corporations must be members thereof. A majority of the directors or trustees of all corporations organized under this Code must be residents of the Philippines.

Section 24. Election of directors or trustees. – At all elections of directors or trustees, there must be present, either in person or by representative authorized to act by written proxy, the owners of a majority of the outstanding capital stock, or if there be no capital stock, a majority of the members entitled to vote. The election must be by ballot if requested by any voting stockholder or member. In stock corporations, every stockholder entitled to vote shall have the right to vote in person or by proxy the number of shares of stock standing, at the time fixed in the by-laws, in his own name on the stock books of the corporation, or where the by-laws are silent, at the time of the election; and said stockholder may vote such number of shares for as many persons as there are directors to be elected or he may cumulate said shares and give one candidate as many votes as the number of directors to be elected multiplied by the number of his shares shall equal, or he may distribute them on the same principle among as many candidates as he shall see fit: Provided, That the total number of votes cast by him shall not exceed the number of shares owned by him as shown in the books of the corporation multiplied by the whole number of directors to be elected: Provided, however, That no delinquent stock shall be voted. Unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation or in the by-laws, members of corporations which have no capital stock may cast as many votes as there are trustees to be elected but may not cast more than one vote for one candidate. Candidates receiving the highest number of votes shall be declared elected. Any meeting of the stockholders or members called for an election may adjourn from day to day or from time to time but not sine die or indefinitely if, for any reason, no election is held, or if there are not present or represented by proxy, at the meeting, the owners of a majority of the outstanding capital stock, or if there be no capital stock, a majority of the member entitled to vote. (31a)

Section 25. Corporate officers, quorum. – Immediately after their election, the directors of a corporation must formally organize by the election of a president, who shall be a director, a treasurer who may or may not be a director, a secretary who shall be a resident and citizen of the Philippines, and such other officers as may be provided for in the by-laws. Any two (2) or more positions may be held concurrently by the same person, except that no one shall act as president and secretary or as president and treasurer at the same time.

The directors or trustees and officers to be elected shall perform the duties enjoined on them by law and the by-laws of the corporation. Unless the articles of incorporation or the by-laws provide for a greater majority, a majority of the number of directors or trustees as fixed in the articles of incorporation shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of corporate business, and every decision of at least a majority of the directors or trustees present at a meeting at which there is a quorum shall be valid as a corporate act, except for the election of officers which shall require the vote of a majority of all the members of the board.

Directors or trustees cannot attend or vote by proxy at board meetings. (33a)

Section 26. Report of election of directors, trustees and officers. – Within thirty (30) days after the election of the directors, trustees and officers of the corporation, the secretary, or any other officer of the corporation, shall submit to the Securities and Exchange Commission, the names, nationalities and residences of the directors, trustees, and officers elected. Should a director, trustee or officer die, resign or in any manner cease to hold office, his heirs in case of his death, the secretary, or any other officer of the corporation, or the director, trustee or officer himself, shall immediately report such fact to the Securities and Exchange Commission. (n)

Section 27. Disqualification of directors, trustees or officers. – No person convicted by final judgment of an offense punishable by imprisonment for a period exceeding six (6) years, or a violation of this Code committed within five (5) years prior to the date of his election or appointment, shall qualify as a director, trustee or officer of any corporation. (n)

Section 28. Removal of directors or trustees. – Any director or trustee of a corporation may be removed from office by a vote of the stockholders holding or representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, or if the corporation be a non-stock corporation, by a vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members entitled to vote: Provided, That such removal shall take place either at a regular meeting of the corporation or at a special meeting called for the purpose, and in either case, after previous notice to stockholders or members of the corporation of the intention to propose such removal at the meeting. A special meeting of the stockholders or members of a corporation for the purpose of removal of directors or trustees, or any of them, must be called by the secretary on order of the president or on the written demand of the stockholders representing or holding at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock, or, if it be a non-stock corporation, on the written demand of a majority of the members entitled to vote. Should the secretary fail or refuse to call the special meeting upon such demand or fail or refuse to give the notice, or if there is no secretary, the call for the meeting may be addressed directly to the stockholders or members by any stockholder or member of the corporation signing the demand. Notice of the time and place of such meeting, as well as of the intention to propose such removal, must be given by publication or by written notice prescribed in this Code. Removal may be with or without cause: Provided, That removal without cause may not be used to deprive minority stockholders or members of the right of representation to which they may be entitled under Section 24 of this Code. (n)

Section 29. Vacancies in the office of director or trustee. – Any vacancy occurring in the board of directors or trustees other than by removal by the stockholders or members or by expiration of term, may be filled by the vote of at least a majority of the remaining directors or trustees, if still constituting a quorum; otherwise, said vacancies must be filled by the stockholders in a regular or special meeting called for that purpose. A director or trustee so elected to fill a vacancy shall be elected only or the unexpired term of his predecessor in office.

Any directorship or trusteeship to be filled by reason of an increase in the number of directors or trustees shall be filled only by an election at a regular or at a special meeting of stockholders or members duly called for the purpose, or in the same meeting authorizing the increase of directors or trustees if so stated in the notice of the meeting. (n)

Section 30. Compensation of directors. – In the absence of any provision in the by-laws fixing their compensation, the directors shall not receive any compensation, as such directors, except for reasonable per diems: Provided, however, That any such compensation other than per diems may be granted to directors by the vote of the stockholders representing at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock at a regular or special stockholders’ meeting. In no case shall the total yearly compensation of directors, as such directors, exceed ten (10%) percent of the net income before income tax of the corporation during the preceding year. (n)

Section 31. Liability of directors, trustees or officers. - Directors or trustees who wilfully and knowingly vote for or assent to patently unlawful acts of the corporation or who are guilty of gross negligence or bad faith in directing the affairs of the corporation or acquire any personal or pecuniary interest in conflict with their duty as such directors or trustees shall be liable jointly and severally for all damages resulting therefrom suffered by the corporation, its stockholders or members and other persons.

When a director, trustee or officer attempts to acquire or acquires, in violation of his duty, any interest adverse to the corporation in respect of any matter which has been reposed in him in confidence, as to which equity imposes a disability upon him to deal in his own behalf, he shall be liable as a trustee for the corporation and must account for the profits which otherwise would have accrued to the corporation. (n)

Section 32. Dealings of directors, trustees or officers with the corporation. – A contract of the corporation with one or more of its directors or trustees or officers is voidable, at the option of such corporation, unless all the following conditions are present:

1. That the presence of such director or trustee in the board meeting in which the contract was approved was not necessary to constitute a quorum for such meeting;

2. That the vote of such director or trustee was not necessary for the approval of the contract;

3. That the contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances; and

4. That in case of an officer, the contract has been previously authorized by the board of directors.

Where any of the first two conditions set forth in the preceding paragraph is absent, in the case of a contract with a director or trustee, such contract may be ratified by the vote of the stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock or of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members in a meeting called for the purpose: Provided, That full disclosure of the adverse interest of the directors or trustees involved is made at such meeting: Provided, however, That the contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances. (n)

Section 33. Contracts between corporations with interlocking directors. – Except in cases of fraud, and provided the contract is fair and reasonable under the circumstances, a contract between two or more corporations having interlocking directors shall not be invalidated on that ground alone: Provided, That if the interest of the interlocking director in one corporation is substantial and his interest in the other corporation or corporations is merely nominal, he shall be subject to the provisions of the preceding section insofar as the latter corporation or corporations are concerned.

Stockholdings exceeding twenty (20%) percent of the outstanding capital stock shall be considered substantial for purposes of interlocking directors. (n)

Section 34. Disloyalty of a director. – Where a director, by virtue of his office, acquires for himself a business opportunity which should belong to the corporation, thereby obtaining profits to the prejudice of such corporation, he must account to the latter for all such profits by refunding the same, unless his act has been ratified by a vote of the stockholders owning or representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock. This provision shall be applicable, notwithstanding the fact that the director risked his own funds in the venture. (n)

Section 35. Executive committee. – The by-laws of a corporation may create an executive committee, composed of not less than three members of the board, to be appointed by the board. Said committee may act, by majority vote of all its members, on such specific matters within the competence of the board, as may be delegated to it in the by-laws or on a majority vote of the board, except with respect to: (1) approval of any action for which shareholders’ approval is also required; (2) the filing of vacancies in the board; (3) the amendment or repeal of by-laws or the adoption of new by-laws; (4) the amendment or repeal of any resolution of the board which by its express terms is not so amendable or repealable; and (5) a distribution of cash dividends to the shareholders.

TITLE IV

POWERS OF CORPORATIONS

Section 36. Corporate powers and capacity. – Every corporation incorporated under this Code has the power and capacity:

1. To sue and be sued in its corporate name;

2. Of succession by its corporate name for the period of time stated in the articles of incorporation and the certificate of incorporation;

3. To adopt and use a corporate seal;

4. To amend its articles of incorporation in accordance with the provisions of this Code;

5. To adopt by-laws, not contrary to law, morals, or public policy, and to amend or repeal the same in accordance with this Code;

6. In case of stock corporations, to issue or sell stocks to subscribers and to sell stocks to subscribers and to sell treasury stocks in accordance with the provisions of this Code; and to admit members to the corporation if it be a non-stock corporation;

7. To purchase, receive, take or grant, hold, convey, sell, lease, pledge, mortgage and otherwise deal with such real and personal property, including securities and bonds of other corporations, as the transaction of the lawful business of the corporation may reasonably and necessarily require, subject to the limitations prescribed by law and the Constitution;

8. To enter into merger or consolidation with other corporations as provided in this Code;

9. To make reasonable donations, including those for the public welfare or for hospital, charitable, cultural, scientific, civic, or similar purposes: Provided, That no corporation, domestic or foreign, shall give donations in aid of any political party or candidate or for purposes of partisan political activity;

10. To establish pension, retirement, and other plans for the benefit of its directors, trustees, officers and employees; and

11. To exercise such other powers as may be essential or necessary to carry out its purpose or purposes as stated in the articles of incorporation. (13a)

Section 37. Power to extend or shorten corporate term. – A private corporation may extend or shorten its term as stated in the articles of incorporation when approved by a majority vote of the board of directors or trustees and ratified at a meeting by the stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock or by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members in case of non-stock corporations. Written notice of the proposed action and of the time and place of the meeting shall be addressed to each stockholder or member at his place of residence as shown on the books of the corporation and deposited to the addressee in the post office with postage prepaid, or served personally: Provided, That in case of extension of corporate term, any dissenting stockholder may exercise his appraisal right under the conditions provided in this code. (n)

Section 38. Power to increase or decrease capital stock; incur, create or increase bonded indebtedness. – No corporation shall increase or decrease its capital stock or incur, create or increase any bonded indebtedness unless approved by a majority vote of the board of directors and, at a stockholder’s meeting duly called for the purpose, two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock shall favor the increase or diminution of the capital stock, or the incurring, creating or increasing of any bonded indebtedness. Written notice of the proposed increase or diminution of the capital stock or of the incurring, creating, or increasing of any bonded indebtedness and of the time and place of the stockholder’s meeting at which the proposed increase or diminution of the capital stock or the incurring or increasing of any bonded indebtedness is to be considered, must be addressed to each stockholder at his place of residence as shown on the books of the corporation and deposited to the addressee in the post office with postage prepaid, or served personally.

A certificate in duplicate must be signed by a majority of the directors of the corporation and countersigned by the chairman and the secretary of the stockholders’ meeting, setting forth:

(1) That the requirements of this section have been complied with;

(2) The amount of the increase or diminution of the capital stock;

(3) If an increase of the capital stock, the amount of capital stock or number of shares of no-par stock thereof actually subscribed, the names, nationalities and residences of the persons subscribing, the amount of capital stock or number of no-par stock subscribed by each, and the amount paid by each on his subscription in cash or property, or the amount of capital stock or number of shares of no-par stock allotted to each stock-holder if such increase is for the purpose of making effective stock dividend therefor authorized;

(4) Any bonded indebtedness to be incurred, created or increased;

(5) The actual indebtedness of the corporation on the day of the meeting;

(6) The amount of stock represented at the meeting; and

(7) The vote authorizing the increase or diminution of the capital stock, or the incurring, creating or increasing of any bonded indebtedness.

Any increase or decrease in the capital stock or the incurring, creating or increasing of any bonded indebtedness shall require prior approval of the Securities and Exchange Commission.

One of the duplicate certificates shall be kept on file in the office of the corporation and the other shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and attached to the original articles of incorporation. From and after approval by the Securities and Exchange Commission and the issuance by the Commission of its certificate of filing, the capital stock shall stand increased or decreased and the incurring, creating or increasing of any bonded indebtedness authorized, as the certificate of filing may declare: Provided, That the Securities and Exchange Commission shall not accept for filing any certificate of increase of capital stock unless accompanied by the sworn statement of the treasurer of the corporation lawfully holding office at the time of the filing of the certificate, showing that at least twenty-five (25%) percent of such increased capital stock has been subscribed and that at least twenty-five (25%) percent of the amount subscribed has been paid either in actual cash to the corporation or that there has been transferred to the corporation property the valuation of which is equal to twenty-five (25%) percent of the subscription: Provided, further, That no decrease of the capital stock shall be approved by the Commission if its effect shall prejudice the rights of corporate creditors.

Non-stock corporations may incur or create bonded indebtedness, or increase the same, with the approval by a majority vote of the board of trustees and of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members in a meeting duly called for the purpose.

Bonds issued by a corporation shall be registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission, which shall have the authority to determine the sufficiency of the terms thereof. (17a)

Section 39. Power to deny pre-emptive right. – All stockholders of a stock corporation shall enjoy pre-emptive right to subscribe to all issues or disposition of shares of any class, in proportion to their respective shareholdings, unless such right is denied by the articles of incorporation or an amendment thereto: Provided, That such pre-emptive right shall not extend to shares to be issued in compliance with laws requiring stock offerings or minimum stock ownership by the public; or to shares to be issued in good faith with the approval of the stockholders representing two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, in exchange for property needed for corporate purposes or in payment of a previously contracted debt.

Section 40. Sale or other disposition of assets. – Subject to the provisions of existing laws on illegal combinations and monopolies, a corporation may, by a majority vote of its board of directors or trustees, sell, lease, exchange, mortgage, pledge or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its property and assets, including its goodwill, upon such terms and conditions and for such consideration, which may be money, stocks, bonds or other instruments for the payment of money or other property or consideration, as its board of directors or trustees may deem expedient, when authorized by the vote of the stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, or in case of non-stock corporation, by the vote of at least to two-thirds (2/3) of the members, in a stockholder’s or member’s meeting duly called for the purpose. Written notice of the proposed action and of the time and place of the meeting shall be addressed to each stockholder or member at his place of residence as shown on the books of the corporation and deposited to the addressee in the post office with postage prepaid, or served personally: Provided, That any dissenting stockholder may exercise his appraisal right under the conditions provided in this Code.

A sale or other disposition shall be deemed to cover substantially all the corporate property and assets if thereby the corporation would be rendered incapable of continuing the business or accomplishing the purpose for which it was incorporated.

After such authorization or approval by the stockholders or members, the board of directors or trustees may, nevertheless, in its discretion, abandon such sale, lease, exchange, mortgage, pledge or other disposition of property and assets, subject to the rights of third parties under any contract relating thereto, without further action or approval by the stockholders or members.

Nothing in this section is intended to restrict the power of any corporation, without the authorization by the stockholders or members, to sell, lease, exchange, mortgage, pledge or otherwise dispose of any of its property and assets if the same is necessary in the usual and regular course of business of said corporation or if the proceeds of the sale or other disposition of such property and assets be appropriated for the conduct of its remaining business.

In non-stock corporations where there are no members with voting rights, the vote of at least a majority of the trustees in office will be sufficient authorization for the corporation to enter into any transaction authorized by this section.

Section 41. Power to acquire own shares. – A stock corporation shall have the power to purchase or acquire its own shares for a legitimate corporate purpose or purposes, including but not limited to the following cases: Provided, That the corporation has unrestricted retained earnings in its books to cover the shares to be purchased or acquired:

1. To eliminate fractional shares arising out of stock dividends;

2. To collect or compromise an indebtedness to the corporation, arising out of unpaid subscription, in a delinquency sale, and to purchase delinquent shares sold during said sale; and

3. To pay dissenting or withdrawing stockholders entitled to payment for their shares under the provisions of this Code. (a)

Section 42. Power to invest corporate funds in another corporation or business or for any other purpose. – Subject to the provisions of this Code, a private corporation may invest its funds in any other corporation or business or for any purpose other than the primary purpose for which it was organized when approved by a majority of the board of directors or trustees and ratified by the stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, or by at least two thirds (2/3) of the members in the case of non-stock corporations, at a stockholder’s or member’s meeting duly called for the purpose. Written notice of the proposed investment and the time and place of the meeting shall be addressed to each stockholder or member at his place of residence as shown on the books of the corporation and deposited to the addressee in the post office with postage prepaid, or served personally: Provided, That any dissenting stockholder shall have appraisal right as provided in this Code: Provided, however, That where the investment by the corporation is reasonably necessary to accomplish its primary purpose as stated in the articles of incorporation, the approval of the stockholders or members shall not be necessary. (17 1/2a)

Section 43. Power to declare dividends. - The board of directors of a stock corporation may declare dividends out of the unrestricted retained earnings which shall be payable in cash, in property, or in stock to all stockholders on the basis of outstanding stock held by them: Provided, That any cash dividends due on delinquent stock shall first be applied to the unpaid balance on the subscription plus costs and expenses, while stock dividends shall be withheld from the delinquent stockholder until his unpaid subscription is fully paid: Provided, further, That no stock dividend shall be issued without the approval of stockholders representing not less than two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock at a regular or special meeting duly called for the purpose. (16a)

Stock corporations are prohibited from retaining surplus profits in excess of one hundred (100%) percent of their paid-in capital stock, except: (1) when justified by definite corporate expansion projects or programs approved by the board of directors; or (2) when the corporation is prohibited under any loan agreement with any financial institution or creditor, whether local or foreign, from declaring dividends without its/his consent, and such consent has not yet been secured; or (3) when it can be clearly shown that such retention is necessary under special circumstances obtaining in the corporation, such as when there is need for special reserve for probable contingencies. (n)

Section 44. Power to enter into management contract. – No corporation shall conclude a management contract with another corporation unless such contract shall have been approved by the board of directors and by stockholders owning at least the majority of the outstanding capital stock, or by at least a majority of the members in the case of a non-stock corporation, of both the managing and the managed corporation, at a meeting duly called for the purpose: Provided, That (1) where a stockholder or stockholders representing the same interest of both the managing and the managed corporations own or control more than one-third (1/3) of the total outstanding capital stock entitled to vote of the managing corporation; or (2) where a majority of the members of the board of directors of the managing corporation also constitute a majority of the members of the board of directors of the managed corporation, then the management contract must be approved by the stockholders of the managed corporation owning at least two-thirds (2/3) of the total outstanding capital stock entitled to vote, or by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members in the case of a non-stock corporation. No management contract shall be entered into for a period longer than five years for any one term.

The provisions of the next preceding paragraph shall apply to any contract whereby a corporation undertakes to manage or operate all or substantially all of the business of another corporation, whether such contracts are called service contracts, operating agreements or otherwise: Provided, however, That such service contracts or operating agreements which relate to the exploration, development, exploitation or utilization of natural resources may be entered into for such periods as may be provided by the pertinent laws or regulations. (n)

Section 45. Ultra vires acts of corporations. – No corporation under this Code shall possess or exercise any corporate powers except those conferred by this Code or by its articles of incorporation and except such as are necessary or incidental to the exercise of the powers so conferred. (n)

TITLE V

BY LAWS

Section 46. Adoption of by-laws. – Every corporation formed under this Code must, within one (1) month after receipt of official notice of the issuance of its certificate of incorporation by the Securities and Exchange Commission, adopt a code of by-laws for its government not inconsistent with this Code. For the adoption of by-laws by the corporation the affirmative vote of the stockholders representing at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock, or of at least a majority of the members in case of non-stock corporations, shall be necessary. The by-laws shall be signed by the stockholders or members voting for them and shall be kept in the principal office of the corporation, subject to the inspection of the stockholders or members during office hours. A copy thereof, duly certified to by a majority of the directors or trustees countersigned by the secretary of the corporation, shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission which shall be attached to the original articles of incorporation.

Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding paragraph, by-laws may be adopted and filed prior to incorporation; in such case, such by-laws shall be approved and signed by all the incorporators and submitted to the Securities and Exchange Commission, together with the articles of incorporation.

In all cases, by-laws shall be effective only upon the issuance by the Securities and Exchange Commission of a certification that the by-laws are not inconsistent with this Code.

The Securities and Exchange Commission shall not accept for filing the by-laws or any amendment thereto of any bank, banking institution, building and loan association, trust company, insurance company, public utility, educational institution or other special corporations governed by special laws, unless accompanied by a certificate of the appropriate government agency to the effect that such by-laws or amendments are in accordance with law. (20a)

Section 47. Contents of by-laws. – Subject to the provisions of the Constitution, this Code, other special laws, and the articles of incorporation, a private corporation may provide in its by-laws for:

1. The time, place and manner of calling and conducting regular or special meetings of the directors or trustees;

2. The time and manner of calling and conducting regular or special meetings of the stockholders or members;

3. The required quorum in meetings of stockholders or members and the manner of voting therein;

4. The form for proxies of stockholders and members and the manner of voting them;

5. The qualifications, duties and compensation of directors or trustees, officers and employees;

6. The time for holding the annual election of directors of trustees and the mode or manner of giving notice thereof;

7. The manner of election or appointment and the term of office of all officers other than directors or trustees;

8. The penalties for violation of the by-laws;

9. In the case of stock corporations, the manner of issuing stock certificates; and

10. Such other matters as may be necessary for the proper or convenient transaction of its corporate business and affairs. (21a)

Section 48. Amendments to by-laws. – The board of directors or trustees, by a majority vote thereof, and the owners of at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock, or at least a majority of the members of a non-stock corporation, at a regular or special meeting duly called for the purpose, may amend or repeal any by-laws or adopt new by-laws. The owners of two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock or two-thirds (2/3) of the members in a non-stock corporation may delegate to the board of directors or trustees the power to amend or repeal any by-laws or adopt new by-laws: Provided, That any power delegated to the board of directors or trustees to amend or repeal any by-laws or adopt new by-laws shall be considered as revoked whenever stockholders owning or representing a majority of the outstanding capital stock or a majority of the members in non-stock corporations, shall so vote at a regular or special meeting.

Whenever any amendment or new by-laws are adopted, such amendment or new by-laws shall be attached to the original by-laws in the office of the corporation, and a copy thereof, duly certified under oath by the corporate secretary and a majority of the directors or trustees, shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission the same to be attached to the original articles of incorporation and original by-laws.

The amended or new by-laws shall only be effective upon the issuance by the Securities and Exchange Commission of a certification that the same are not inconsistent with this Code. (22a and 23a)

TITLE VI

MEETINGS

Section 49. Kinds of meetings. – Meetings of directors, trustees, stockholders, or members may be regular or special. (n)

Section 50. Regular and special meetings of stockholders or members. - Regular meetings of stockholders or members shall be held annually on a date fixed in the by-laws, or if not so fixed, on any date in April of every year as determined by the board of directors or trustees: Provided, That written notice of regular meetings shall be sent to all stockholders or members of record at least two (2) weeks prior to the meeting, unless a different period is required by the by-laws.

Special meetings of stockholders or members shall be held at any time deemed necessary or as provided in the by-laws: Provided, however, That at least one (1) week written notice shall be sent to all stockholders or members, unless otherwise provided in the by-laws.

Notice of any meeting may be waived, expressly or impliedly, by any stockholder or member.

Whenever, for any cause, there is no person authorized to call a meeting, the Securities and Exchange Commission, upon petition of a stockholder or member on a showing of good cause therefor, may issue an order to the petitioning stockholder or member directing him to call a meeting of the corporation by giving proper notice required by this Code or by the by-laws. The petitioning stockholder or member shall preside thereat until at least a majority of the stockholders or members present have chosen one of their number as presiding officer. (24, 26)

Section 51. Place and time of meetings of stockholders of members. – Stockholder’s or member’s meetings, whether regular or special, shall be held in the city or municipality where the principal office of the corporation is located, and if practicable in the principal office of the corporation: Provided, That Metro Manila shall, for purposes of this section, be considered a city or municipality.

Notice of meetings shall be in writing, and the time and place thereof stated therein.

All proceedings had and any business transacted at any meeting of the stockholders or members, if within the powers or authority of the corporation, shall be valid even if the meeting be improperly held or called, provided all the stockholders or members of the corporation are present or duly represented at the meeting. (24 and 25)

Section 52. Quorum in meetings. – Unless otherwise provided for in this Code or in the by-laws, a quorum shall consist of the stockholders representing a majority of the outstanding capital stock or a majority of the members in the case of non-stock corporations. (n)

Section 53. Regular and special meetings of directors or trustees. – Regular meetings of the board of directors or trustees of every corporation shall be held monthly, unless the by-laws provide otherwise.

Special meetings of the board of directors or trustees may be held at any time upon the call of the president or as provided in the by-laws.

Meetings of directors or trustees of corporations may be held anywhere in or outside of the Philippines, unless the by-laws provide otherwise. Notice of regular or special meetings stating the date, time and place of the meeting must be sent to every director or trustee at least one (1) day prior to the scheduled meeting, unless otherwise provided by the by-laws. A director or trustee may waive this requirement, either expressly or impliedly. (n)

Section 54. Who shall preside at meetings. – The president shall preside at all meetings of the directors or trustee as well as of the stockholders or members, unless the by-laws provide otherwise. (n)

Section 55. Right to vote of pledgors, mortgagors, and administrators. – In case of pledged or mortgaged shares in stock corporations, the pledgor or mortgagor shall have the right to attend and vote at meetings of stockholders, unless the pledgee or mortgagee is expressly given by the pledgor or mortgagor such right in writing which is recorded on the appropriate corporate books. (n)

Executors, administrators, receivers, and other legal representatives duly appointed by the court may attend and vote in behalf of the stockholders or members without need of any written proxy. (27a)

Section 56. Voting in case of joint ownership of stock. – In case of shares of stock owned jointly by two or more persons, in order to vote the same, the consent of all the co-owners shall be necessary, unless there is a written proxy, signed by all the co-owners, authorizing one or some of them or any other person to vote such share or shares: Provided, That when the shares are owned in an “and/or” capacity by the holders thereof, any one of the joint owners can vote said shares or appoint a proxy therefor. (n)

Section 57. Voting right for treasury shares. – Treasury shares shall have no voting right as long as such shares remain in the Treasury. (n)

Section 58. Proxies. – Stockholders and members may vote in person or by proxy in all meetings of stockholders or members. Proxies shall in writing, signed by the stockholder or member and filed before the scheduled meeting with the corporate secretary. Unless otherwise provided in the proxy, it shall be valid only for the meeting for which it is intended. No proxy shall be valid and effective for a period longer than five (5) years at any one time. (n)

Section 59. Voting trusts. – One or more stockholders of a stock corporation may create a voting trust for the purpose of conferring upon a trustee or trustees the right to vote and other rights pertaining to the shares for a period not exceeding five (5) years at any time: Provided, That in the case of a voting trust specifically required as a condition in a loan agreement, said voting trust may be for a period exceeding five (5) years but shall automatically expire upon full payment of the loan. A voting trust agreement must be in writing and notarized, and shall specify the terms and conditions thereof. A certified copy of such agreement shall be filed with the corporation and with the Securities and Exchange Commission; otherwise, said agreement is ineffective and unenforceable. The certificate or certificates of stock covered by the voting trust agreement shall be cancelled and new ones shall be issued in the name of the trustee or trustees stating that they are issued pursuant to said agreement. In the books of the corporation, it shall be noted that the transfer in the name of the trustee or trustees is made pursuant to said voting trust agreement.

The trustee or trustees shall execute and deliver to the transferors voting trust certificates, which shall be transferable in the same manner and with the same effect as certificates of stock.

The voting trust agreement filed with the corporation shall be subject to examination by any stockholder of the corporation in the same manner as any other corporate book or record: Provided, That both the transferor and the trustee or trustees may exercise the right of inspection of all corporate books and records in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

Any other stockholder may transfer his shares to the same trustee or trustees upon the terms and conditions stated in the voting trust agreement, and thereupon shall be bound by all the provisions of said agreement.

No voting trust agreement shall be entered into for the purpose of circumventing the law against monopolies and illegal combinations in restraint of trade or used for purposes of fraud.

Unless expressly renewed, all rights granted in a voting trust agreement shall automatically expire at the end of the agreed period, and the voting trust certificates as well as the certificates of stock in the name of the trustee or trustees shall thereby be deemed cancelled and new certificates of stock shall be reissued in the name of the transferors.

The voting trustee or trustees may vote by proxy unless the agreement provides otherwise. (36a)

TITLE VII

STOCKS AND STOCKHOLDERS

Section 60. Subscription contract. – Any contract for the acquisition of unissued stock in an existing corporation or a corporation still to be formed shall be deemed a subscription within the meaning of this Title, notwithstanding the fact that the parties refer to it as a purchase or some other contract. (n)

Section 61. Pre-incorporation subscription. – A subscription for shares of stock of a corporation still to be formed shall be irrevocable for a period of at least six (6) months from the date of subscription, unless all of the other subscribers consent to the revocation, or unless the incorporation of said corporation fails to materialize within said period or within a longer period as may be stipulated in the contract of subscription: Provided, That no pre-incorporation subscription may be revoked after the submission of the articles of incorporation to the Securities and Exchange Commission. (n)

Section 62. Consideration for stocks. – Stocks shall not be issued for a consideration less than the par or issued price thereof. Consideration for the issuance of stock may be any or a combination of any two or more of the following:

1. Actual cash paid to the corporation;

2. Property, tangible or intangible, actually received by the corporation and necessary or convenient for its use and lawful purposes at a fair valuation equal to the par or issued value of the stock issued;

3. Labor performed for or services actually rendered to the corporation;

4. Previously incurred indebtedness of the corporation;

5. Amounts transferred from unrestricted retained earnings to stated capital; and

6. Outstanding shares exchanged for stocks in the event of reclassification or conversion.

Where the consideration is other than actual cash, or consists of intangible property such as patents of copyrights, the valuation thereof shall initially be determined by the incorporators or the board of directors, subject to approval by the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Shares of stock shall not be issued in exchange for promissory notes or future service.

The same considerations provided for in this section, insofar as they may be applicable, may be used for the issuance of bonds by the corporation.

The issued price of no-par value shares may be fixed in the articles of incorporation or by the board of directors pursuant to authority conferred upon it by the articles of incorporation or the by-laws, or in the absence thereof, by the stockholders representing at least a majority of the outstanding capital stock at a meeting duly called for the purpose. (5 and 16)

Section 63. Certificate of stock and transfer of shares. – The capital stock of stock corporations shall be divided into shares for which certificates signed by the president or vice president, countersigned by the secretary or assistant secretary, and sealed with the seal of the corporation shall be issued in accordance with the by-laws. Shares of stock so issued are personal property and may be transferred by delivery of the certificate or certificates indorsed by the owner or his attorney-in-fact or other person legally authorized to make the transfer. No transfer, however, shall be valid, except as between the parties, until the transfer is recorded in the books of the corporation showing the names of the parties to the transaction, the date of the transfer, the number of the certificate or certificates and the number of shares transferred.

No shares of stock against which the corporation holds any unpaid claim shall be transferable in the books of the corporation. (35)

Section 64. Issuance of stock certificates. – No certificate of stock shall be issued to a subscriber until the full amount of his subscription together with interest and expenses (in case of delinquent shares), if any is due, has been paid. (37)

Section 65. Liability of directors for watered stocks. – Any director or officer of a corporation consenting to the issuance of stocks for a consideration less than its par or issued value or for a consideration in any form other than cash, valued in excess of its fair value, or who, having knowledge thereof, does not forthwith express his objection in writing and file the same with the corporate secretary, shall be solidarily, liable with the stockholder concerned to the corporation and its creditors for the difference between the fair value received at the time of issuance of the stock and the par or issued value of the same. (n)

Section 66. Interest on unpaid subscriptions. – Subscribers for stock shall pay to the corporation interest on all unpaid subscriptions from the date of subscription, if so required by, and at the rate of interest fixed in the by-laws. If no rate of interest is fixed in the by-laws, such rate shall be deemed to be the legal rate. (37)

Section 67. Payment of balance of subscription. – Subject to the provisions of the contract of subscription, the board of directors of any stock corporation may at any time declare due and payable to the corporation unpaid subscriptions to the capital stock and may collect the same or such percentage thereof, in either case with accrued interest, if any, as it may deem necessary.

Payment of any unpaid subscription or any percentage thereof, together with the interest accrued, if any, shall be made on the date specified in the contract of subscription or on the date stated in the call made by the board. Failure to pay on such date shall render the entire balance due and payable and shall make the stockholder liable for interest at the legal rate on such balance, unless a different rate of interest is provided in the by-laws, computed from such date until full payment. If within thirty (30) days from the said date no payment is made, all stocks covered by said subscription shall thereupon become delinquent and shall be subject to sale as hereinafter provided, unless the board of directors orders otherwise. (38)

Section 68. Delinquency sale. – The board of directors may, by resolution, order the sale of delinquent stock and shall specifically state the amount due on each subscription plus all accrued interest, and the date, time and place of the sale which shall not be less than thirty (30) days nor more than sixty (60) days from the date the stocks become delinquent.

Notice of said sale, with a copy of the resolution, shall be sent to every delinquent stockholder either personally or by registered mail. The same shall furthermore be published once a week for two (2) consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the province or city where the principal office of the corporation is located.

Unless the delinquent stockholder pays to the corporation, on or before the date specified for the sale of the delinquent stock, the balance due on his subscription, plus accrued interest, costs of advertisement and expenses of sale, or unless the board of directors otherwise orders, said delinquent stock shall be sold at public auction to such bidder who shall offer to pay the full amount of the balance on the subscription together with accrued interest, costs of advertisement and expenses of sale, for the smallest number of shares or fraction of a share. The stock so purchased shall be transferred to such purchaser in the books of the corporation and a certificate for such stock shall be issued in his favor. The remaining shares, if any, shall be credited in favor of the delinquent stockholder who shall likewise be entitled to the issuance of a certificate of stock covering such shares.

Should there be no bidder at the public auction who offers to pay the full amount of the balance on the subscription together with accrued interest, costs of advertisement and expenses of sale, for the smallest number of shares or fraction of a share, the corporation may, subject to the provisions of this Code, bid for the same, and the total amount due shall be credited as paid in full in the books of the corporation. Title to all the shares of stock covered by the subscription shall be vested in the corporation as treasury shares and may be disposed of by said corporation in accordance with the provisions of this Code. (39a-46a)

Section 69. When sale may be questioned. – No action to recover delinquent stock sold can be sustained upon the ground of irregularity or defect in the notice of sale, or in the sale itself of the delinquent stock, unless the party seeking to maintain such action first pays or tenders to the party holding the stock the sum for which the same was sold, with interest from the date of sale at the legal rate; and no such action shall be maintained unless it is commenced by the filing of a complaint within six (6) months from the date of sale. (47a)

Section 70. Court action to recover unpaid subscription. – Nothing in this Code shall prevent the corporation from collecting by action in a court of proper jurisdiction the amount due on any unpaid subscription, with accrued interest, costs and expenses. (49a)

Section 71. Effect of delinquency. – No delinquent stock shall be voted for or be entitled to vote or to representation at any stockholder’s meeting, nor shall the holder thereof be entitled to any of the rights of a stockholder except the right to dividends in accordance with the provisions of this Code, until and unless he pays the amount due on his subscription with accrued interest, and the costs and expenses of advertisement, if any. (50a)

Section 72. Rights of unpaid shares. – Holders of subscribed shares not fully paid which are not delinquent shall have all the rights of a stockholder. (n)

Section 73. Lost or destroyed certificates. – The following procedure shall be followed for the issuance by a corporation of new certificates of stock in lieu of those which have been lost, stolen or destroyed:

1. The registered owner of a certificate of stock in a corporation or his legal representative shall file with the corporation an affidavit in triplicate setting forth, if possible, the circumstances as to how the certificate was lost, stolen or destroyed, the number of shares represented by such certificate, the serial number of the certificate and the name of the corporation which issued the same. He shall also submit such other information and evidence which he may deem necessary;

2. After verifying the affidavit and other information and evidence with the books of the corporation, said corporation shall publish a notice in a newspaper of general circulation published in the place where the corporation has its principal office, once a week for three (3) consecutive weeks at the expense of the registered owner of the certificate of stock which has been lost, stolen or destroyed. The notice shall state the name of said corporation, the name of the registered owner and the serial number of said certificate, and the number of shares represented by such certificate, and that after the expiration of one (1) year from the date of the last publication, if no contest has been presented to said corporation regarding said certificate of stock, the right to make such contest shall be barred and said corporation shall cancel in its books the certificate of stock which has been lost, stolen or destroyed and issue in lieu thereof new certificate of stock, unless the registered owner files a bond or other security in lieu thereof as may be required, effective for a period of one (1) year, for such amount and in such form and with such sureties as may be satisfactory to the board of directors, in which case a new certificate may be issued even before the expiration of the one (1) year period provided herein: Provided, That if a contest has been presented to said corporation or if an action is pending in court regarding the ownership of said certificate of stock which has been lost, stolen or destroyed, the issuance of the new certificate of stock in lieu thereof shall be suspended until the final decision by the court regarding the ownership of said certificate of stock which has been lost, stolen or destroyed.

Except in case of fraud, bad faith, or negligence on the part of the corporation and its officers, no action may be brought against any corporation which shall have issued certificate of stock in lieu of those lost, stolen or destroyed pursuant to the procedure above-described. (R.A. 201a)

TITLE VIII

CORPORATE BOOKS AND RECORDS

Section 74. Books to be kept; stock transfer agent. – Every corporation shall keep and carefully preserve at its principal office a record of all business transactions and minutes of all meetings of stockholders or members, or of the board of directors or trustees, in which shall be set forth in detail the time and place of holding the meeting, how authorized, the notice given, whether the meeting was regular or special, if special its object, those present and absent, and every act done or ordered done at the meeting. Upon the demand of any director, trustee, stockholder or member, the time when any director, trustee, stockholder or member entered or left the meeting must be noted in the minutes; and on a similar demand, the yeas and nays must be taken on any motion or proposition, and a record thereof carefully made. The protest of any director, trustee, stockholder or member on any action or proposed action must be recorded in full on his demand.

The records of all business transactions of the corporation and the minutes of any meetings shall be open to inspection by any director, trustee, stockholder or member of the corporation at reasonable hours on business days and he may demand, in writing, for a copy of excerpts from said records or minutes, at his expense.

Any officer or agent of the corporation who shall refuse to allow any director, trustees, stockholder or member of the corporation to examine and copy excerpts from its records or minutes, in accordance with the provisions of this Code, shall be liable to such director, trustee, stockholder or member for damages, and in addition, shall be guilty of an offense which shall be punishable under Section 144 of this Code: Provided, That if such refusal is made pursuant to a resolution or order of the board of directors or trustees, the liability under this section for such action shall be imposed upon the directors or trustees who voted for such refusal: and Provided, further, That it shall be a defense to any action under this section that the person demanding to examine and copy excerpts from the corporation’s records and minutes has improperly used any information secured through any prior examination of the records or minutes of such corporation or of any other corporation, or was not acting in good faith or for a legitimate purpose in making his demand.

Stock corporations must also keep a book to be known as the “stock and transfer book”, in which must be kept a record of all stocks in the names of the stockholders alphabetically arranged; the installments paid and unpaid on all stock for which subscription has been made, and the date of payment of any installment; a statement of every alienation, sale or transfer of stock made, the date thereof, and by and to whom made; and such other entries as the by-laws may prescribe. The stock and transfer book shall be kept in the principal office of the corporation or in the office of its stock transfer agent and shall be open for inspection by any director or stockholder of the corporation at reasonable hours on business days.

No stock transfer agent or one engaged principally in the business of registering transfers of stocks in behalf of a stock corporation shall be allowed to operate in the Philippines unless he secures a license from the Securities and Exchange Commission and pays a fee as may be fixed by the Commission, which shall be renewable annually: Provided, That a stock corporation is not precluded from performing or making transfer of its own stocks, in which case all the rules and regulations imposed on stock transfer agents, except the payment of a license fee herein provided, shall be applicable. (51a and 32a; P.B. No. 268.)

Section 75. Right to financial statements. – Within ten (10) days from receipt of a written request of any stockholder or member, the corporation shall furnish to him its most recent financial statement, which shall include a balance sheet as of the end of the last taxable year and a profit or loss statement for said taxable year, showing in reasonable detail its assets and liabilities and the result of its operations.

At the regular meeting of stockholders or members, the board of directors or trustees shall present to such stockholders or members a financial report of the operations of the corporation for the preceding year, which shall include financial statements, duly signed and certified by an independent certified public accountant.

However, if the paid-up capital of the corporation is less than P50,000.00, the financial statements may be certified under oath by the treasurer or any responsible officer of the corporation. (n)

TITLE IX

MERGER AND CONSOLIDATION

Section 76. Plan or merger of consolidation. – Two or more corporations may merge into a single corporation which shall be one of the constituent corporations or may consolidate into a new single corporation which shall be the consolidated corporation.

The board of directors or trustees of each corporation, party to the merger or consolidation, shall approve a plan of merger or consolidation setting forth the following:

1. The names of the corporations proposing to merge or consolidate, hereinafter referred to as the constituent corporations;

2. The terms of the merger or consolidation and the mode of carrying the same into effect;

3. A statement of the changes, if any, in the articles of incorporation of the surviving corporation in case of merger; and, with respect to the consolidated corporation in case of consolidation, all the statements required to be set forth in the articles of incorporation for corporations organized under this Code; and

4. Such other provisions with respect to the proposed merger or consolidation as are deemed necessary or desirable. (n)

Section 77. Stockholder’s or member’s approval. – Upon approval by majority vote of each of the board of directors or trustees of the constituent corporations of the plan of merger or consolidation, the same shall be submitted for approval by the stockholders or members of each of such corporations at separate corporate meetings duly called for the purpose. Notice of such meetings shall be given to all stockholders or members of the respective corporations, at least two (2) weeks prior to the date of the meeting, either personally or by registered mail. Said notice shall state the purpose of the meeting and shall include a copy or a summary of the plan of merger or consolidation. The affirmative vote of stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock of each corporation in the case of stock corporations or at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members in the case of non-stock corporations shall be necessary for the approval of such plan. Any dissenting stockholder in stock corporations may exercise his appraisal right in accordance with the Code: Provided, That if after the approval by the stockholders of such plan, the board of directors decides to abandon the plan, the appraisal right shall be extinguished.

Any amendment to the plan of merger or consolidation may be made, provided such amendment is approved by majority vote of the respective boards of directors or trustees of all the constituent corporations and ratified by the affirmative vote of stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock or of two-thirds (2/3) of the members of each of the constituent corporations. Such plan, together with any amendment, shall be considered as the agreement of merger or consolidation. (n)

Section 78. Articles of merger or consolidation. – After the approval by the stockholders or members as required by the preceding section, articles of merger or articles of consolidation shall be executed by each of the constituent corporations, to be signed by the president or vice-president and certified by the secretary or assistant secretary of each corporation setting forth:

1. The plan of the merger or the plan of consolidation;

2. As to stock corporations, the number of shares outstanding, or in the case of non-stock corporations, the number of members; and

3. As to each corporation, the number of shares or members voting for and against such plan, respectively. (n)

Section 79. Effectivity of merger or consolidation. – The articles of merger or of consolidation, signed and certified as herein above required, shall be submitted to the Securities and Exchange Commission in quadruplicate for its approval: Provided, That in the case of merger or consolidation of banks or banking institutions, building and loan associations, trust companies, insurance companies, public utilities, educational institutions and other special corporations governed by special laws, the favorable recommendation of the appropriate government agency shall first be obtained. If the Commission is satisfied that the merger or consolidation of the corporations concerned is not inconsistent with the provisions of this Code and existing laws, it shall issue a certificate of merger or of consolidation, at which time the merger or consolidation shall be effective.

If, upon investigation, the Securities and Exchange Commission has reason to believe that the proposed merger or consolidation is contrary to or inconsistent with the provisions of this Code or existing laws, it shall set a hearing to give the corporations concerned the opportunity to be heard. Written notice of the date, time and place of hearing shall be given to each constituent corporation at least two (2) weeks before said hearing. The Commission shall thereafter proceed as provided in this Code. (n)

Section 80. Effects of merger or consolidation. – The merger or consolidation shall have the following effects:

1. The constituent corporations shall become a single corporation which, in case of merger, shall be the surviving corporation designated in the plan of merger; and, in case of consolidation, shall be the consolidated corporation designated in the plan of consolidation;

2. The separate existence of the constituent corporations shall cease, except that of the surviving or the consolidated corporation;

3. The surviving or the consolidated corporation shall possess all the rights, privileges, immunities and powers and shall be subject to all the duties and liabilities of a corporation organized under this Code;

4. The surviving or the consolidated corporation shall thereupon and thereafter possess all the rights, privileges, immunities and franchises of each of the constituent corporations; and all property, real or personal, and all receivables due on whatever account, including subscriptions to shares and other choses in action, and all and every other interest of, or belonging to, or due to each constituent corporation, shall be deemed transferred to and vested in such surviving or consolidated corporation without further act or deed; and

5. The surviving or consolidated corporation shall be responsible and liable for all the liabilities and obligations of each of the constituent corporations in the same manner as if such surviving or consolidated corporation had itself incurred such liabilities or obligations; and any pending claim, action or proceeding brought by or against any of such constituent corporations may be prosecuted by or against the surviving or consolidated corporation. The rights of creditors or liens upon the property of any of such constituent corporations shall not be impaired by such merger or consolidation. (n)

TITLE X

APPRAISAL RIGHT

Section 81. Instances of appraisal right. – Any stockholder of a corporation shall have the right to dissent and demand payment of the fair value of his shares in the following instances:

1. In case any amendment to the articles of incorporation has the effect of changing or restricting the rights of any stockholder or class of shares, or of authorizing preferences in any respect superior to those of outstanding shares of any class, or of extending or shortening the term of corporate existence;

2. In case of sale, lease, exchange, transfer, mortgage, pledge or other disposition of all or substantially all of the corporate property and assets as provided in the Code; and

3. In case of merger or consolidation. (n)

Section 82. How right is exercised. – The appraisal right may be exercised by any stockholder who shall have voted against the proposed corporate action, by making a written demand on the corporation within thirty (30) days after the date on which the vote was taken for payment of the fair value of his shares: Provided, That failure to make the demand within such period shall be deemed a waiver of the appraisal right. If the proposed corporate action is implemented or affected, the corporation shall pay to such stockholder, upon surrender of the certificate or certificates of stock representing his shares, the fair value thereof as of the day prior to the date on which the vote was taken, excluding any appreciation or depreciation in anticipation of such corporate action.

If within a period of sixty (60) days from the date the corporate action was approved by the stockholders, the withdrawing stockholder and the corporation cannot agree on the fair value of the shares, it shall be determined and appraised by three (3) disinterested persons, one of whom shall be named by the stockholder, another by the corporation, and the third by the two thus chosen. The findings of the majority of the appraisers shall be final, and their award shall be paid by the corporation within thirty (30) days after such award is made: Provided, That no payment shall be made to any dissenting stockholder unless the corporation has unrestricted retained earnings in its books to cover such payment: and Provided, further, That upon payment by the corporation of the agreed or awarded price, the stockholder shall forthwith transfer his shares to the corporation. (n)

Section 83. Effect of demand and termination of right. – From the time of demand for payment of the fair value of a stockholder’s shares until either the abandonment of the corporate action involved or the purchase of the said shares by the corporation, all rights accruing to such shares, including voting and dividend rights, shall be suspended in accordance with the provisions of this Code, except the right of such stockholder to receive payment of the fair value thereof: Provided, That if the dissenting stockholder is not paid the value of his shares within 30 days after the award, his voting and dividend rights shall immediately be restored. (n)

Section 84. When right to payment ceases. – No demand for payment under this Title may be withdrawn unless the corporation consents thereto. If, however, such demand for payment is withdrawn with the consent of the corporation, or if the proposed corporate action is abandoned or rescinded by the corporation or disapproved by the Securities and Exchange Commission where such approval is necessary, or if the Securities and Exchange Commission determines that such stockholder is not entitled to the appraisal right, then the right of said stockholder to be paid the fair value of his shares shall cease, his status as a stockholder shall thereupon be restored, and all dividend distributions which would have accrued on his shares shall be paid to him. (n)

Section 85. Who bears costs of appraisal. – The costs and expenses of appraisal shall be borne by the corporation, unless the fair value ascertained by the appraisers is approximately the same as the price which the corporation may have offered to pay the stockholder, in which case they shall be borne by the latter. In the case of an action to recover such fair value, all costs and expenses shall be assessed against the corporation, unless the refusal of the stockholder to receive payment was unjustified. (n)

Section 86. Notation on certificates; rights of transferee. – Within ten (10) days after demanding payment for his shares, a dissenting stockholder shall submit the certificates of stock representing his shares to the corporation for notation thereon that such shares are dissenting shares. His failure to do so shall, at the option of the corporation, terminate his rights under this Title. If shares represented by the certificates bearing such notation are transferred, and the certificates consequently cancelled, the rights of the transferor as a dissenting stockholder under this Title shall cease and the transferee shall have all the rights of a regular stockholder; and all dividend distributions which would have accrued on such shares shall be paid to the transferee. (n)

TITLE XI

NON-STOCK CORPORATIONS

Section 87. Definition. – For the purposes of this Code, a non-stock corporation is one where no part of its income is distributable as dividends to its members, trustees, or officers, subject to the provisions of this Code on dissolution: Provided, That any profit which a non-stock corporation may obtain as an incident to its operations shall, whenever necessary or proper, be used for the furtherance of the purpose or purposes for which the corporation was organized, subject to the provisions of this Title.

The provisions governing stock corporation, when pertinent, shall be applicable to non-stock corporations, except as may be covered by specific provisions of this Title. (n)

Section 88. Purposes. – Non-stock corporations may be formed or organized for charitable, religious, educational, professional, cultural, fraternal, literary, scientific, social, civic service, or similar purposes, like trade, industry, agricultural and like chambers, or any combination thereof, subject to the special provisions of this Title governing particular classes of non-stock corporations. (n)

CHAPTER I MEMBERS

Section 89. Right to vote. – The right of the members of any class or classes to vote may be limited, broadened or denied to the extent specified in the articles of incorporation or the by-laws. Unless so limited, broadened or denied, each member, regardless of class, shall be entitled to one vote.

Unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation or the by-laws, a member may vote by proxy in accordance with the provisions of this Code. (n)

Voting by mail or other similar means by members of non-stock corporations may be authorized by the by-laws of non-stock corporations with the approval of, and under such conditions which may be prescribed by, the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Section 90. Non-transferability of membership. – Membership in a non-stock corporation and all rights arising therefrom are personal and non-transferable, unless the articles of incorporation or the by-laws otherwise provide. (n)

Section 91. Termination of membership. – Membership shall be terminated in the manner and for the causes provided in the articles of incorporation or the by-laws. Termination of membership shall have the effect of extinguishing all rights of a member in the corporation or in its property, unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation or the by-laws. (n)

CHAPTER II TRUSTEES AND OFFICES

Section 92. Election and term of trustees. – Unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation or the by-laws, the board of trustees of non-stock corporations, which may be more than fifteen (15) in number as may be fixed in their articles of incorporation or by-laws, shall, as soon as organized, so classify themselves that the term of office of one-third (1/3) of their number shall expire every year; and subsequent elections of trustees comprising one-third (1/3) of the board of trustees shall be held annually and trustees so elected shall have a term of three (3) years. Trustees thereafter elected to fill vacancies occurring before the expiration of a particular term shall hold office only for the unexpired period.

No person shall be elected as trustee unless he is a member of the corporation.

Unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation or the by-laws, officers of a non-stock corporation may be directly elected by the members. (n)

Section 93. Place of meetings. – The by-laws may provide that the members of a non-stock corporation may hold their regular or special meetings at any place even outside the place where the principal office of the corporation is located: Provided, That proper notice is sent to all members indicating the date, time and place of the meeting: and Provided, further, That the place of meeting shall be within the Philippines. (n)

CHAPTER III DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS IN NON-STOCK CORPORATIONS

Section 94. Rules of distribution. – In case dissolution of a non-stock corporation in accordance with the provisions of this Code, its assets shall be applied and distributed as follows:

1. All liabilities and obligations of the corporation shall be paid, satisfied and discharged, or adequate provision shall be made therefore;

2. Assets held by the corporation upon a condition requiring return, transfer or conveyance, and which condition occurs by reason of the dissolution, shall be returned, transferred or conveyed in accordance with such requirements;

3. Assets received and held by the corporation subject to limitations permitting their use only for charitable, religious, benevolent, educational or similar purposes, but not held upon a condition requiring return, transfer or conveyance by reason of the dissolution, shall be transferred or conveyed to one or more corporations, societies or organizations engaged in activities in the Philippines substantially similar to those of the dissolving corporation according to a plan of distribution adopted pursuant to this Chapter;

4. Assets other than those mentioned in the preceding paragraphs, if any, shall be distributed in accordance with the provisions of the articles of incorporation or the by-laws, to the extent that the articles of incorporation or the by-laws, determine the distributive rights of members, or any class or classes of members, or provide for distribution; and

5. In any other case, assets may be distributed to such persons, societies, organizations or corporations, whether or not organized for profit, as may be specified in a plan of distribution adopted pursuant to this Chapter. (n)

Section 95. Plan of distribution of assets. – A plan providing for the distribution of assets, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Title, may be adopted by a non-stock corporation in the process of dissolution in the following manner:

The board of trustees shall, by majority vote, adopt a resolution recommending a plan of distribution and directing the submission thereof to a vote at a regular or special meeting of members having voting rights. Written notice setting forth the proposed plan of distribution or a summary thereof and the date, time and place of such meeting shall be given to each member entitled to vote, within the time and in the manner provided in this Code for the giving of notice of meetings to members. Such plan of distribution shall be adopted upon approval of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members having voting rights present or represented by proxy at such meeting. (n)

TITLE XII

CLOSE CORPORATIONS

Section 96. Definition and applicability of Title. - A close corporation, within the meaning of this Code, is one whose articles of incorporation provide that: (1) All the corporation’s issued stock of all classes, exclusive of treasury shares, shall be held of record by not more than a specified number of persons, not exceeding twenty (20); (2) all the issued stock of all classes shall be subject to one or more specified restrictions on transfer permitted by this Title; and (3) The corporation shall not list in any stock exchange or make any public offering of any of its stock of any class. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a corporation shall not be deemed a close corporation when at least two-thirds (2/3) of its voting stock or voting rights is owned or controlled by another corporation which is not a close corporation within the meaning of this Code.

Any corporation may be incorporated as a close corporation, except mining or oil companies, stock exchanges, banks, insurance companies, public utilities, educational institutions and corporations declared to be vested with public interest in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

The provisions of this Title shall primarily govern close corporations: Provided, That the provisions of other Titles of this Code shall apply suppletorily except insofar as this Title otherwise provides.

Section 97. Articles of incorporation. – The articles of incorporation of a close corporation may provide:

1. For a classification of shares or rights and the qualifications for owning or holding the same and restrictions on their transfers as may be stated therein, subject to the provisions of the following section;

2. For a classification of directors into one or more classes, each of whom may be voted for and elected solely by a particular class of stock; and

3. For a greater quorum or voting requirements in meetings of stockholders or directors than those provided in this Code.

The articles of incorporation of a close corporation may provide that the business of the corporation shall be managed by the stockholders of the corporation rather than by a board of directors. So long as this provision continues in effect:

1. No meeting of stockholders need be called to elect directors;

2. Unless the context clearly requires otherwise, the stockholders of the corporation shall be deemed to be directors for the purpose of applying the provisions of this Code; and

3. The stockholders of the corporation shall be subject to all liabilities of directors.

The articles of incorporation may likewise provide that all officers or employees or that specified officers or employees shall be elected or appointed by the stockholders, instead of by the board of directors.

Section 98. Validity of restrictions on transfer of shares. – Restrictions on the right to transfer shares must appear in the articles of incorporation and in the by-laws as well as in the certificate of stock; otherwise, the same shall not be binding on any purchaser thereof in good faith. Said restrictions shall not be more onerous than granting the existing stockholders or the corporation the option to purchase the shares of the transferring stockholder with such reasonable terms, conditions or period stated therein. If upon the expiration of said period, the existing stockholders or the corporation fails to exercise the option to purchase, the transferring stockholder may sell his shares to any third person.

Section 99. Effects of issuance or transfer of stock in breach of qualifying conditions. -

1. If stock of a close corporation is issued or transferred to any person who is not entitled under any provision of the articles of incorporation to be a holder of record of its stock, and if the certificate for such stock conspicuously shows the qualifications of the persons entitled to be holders of record thereof, such person is conclusively presumed to have notice of the fact of his ineligibility to be a stockholder.

2. If the articles of incorporation of a close corporation states the number of persons, not exceeding twenty (20), who are entitled to be holders of record of its stock, and if the certificate for such stock conspicuously states such number, and if the issuance or transfer of stock to any person would cause the stock to be held by more than such number of persons, the person to whom such stock is issued or transferred is conclusively presumed to have notice of this fact.

3. If a stock certificate of any close corporation conspicuously shows a restriction on transfer of stock of the corporation, the transferee of the stock is conclusively presumed to have notice of the fact that he has acquired stock in violation of the restriction, if such acquisition violates the restriction.

4. Whenever any person to whom stock of a close corporation has been issued or transferred has, or is conclusively presumed under this section to have, notice either (a) that he is a person not eligible to be a holder of stock of the corporation, or (b) that transfer of stock to him would cause the stock of the corporation to be held by more than the number of persons permitted by its articles of incorporation to hold stock of the corporation, or (c) that the transfer of stock is in violation of a restriction on transfer of stock, the corporation may, at its option, refuse to register the transfer of stock in the name of the transferee.

5. The provisions of subsection (4) shall not be applicable if the transfer of stock, though contrary to subsections (1), (2) or (3), has been consented to by all the stockholders of the close corporation, or if the close corporation has amended its articles of incorporation in accordance with this Title.

6. The term “transfer”, as used in this section, is not limited to a transfer for value.

7. The provisions of this section shall not impair any right which the transferee may have to rescind the transfer or to recover under any applicable warranty, express or implied.

Section 100. Agreements by stockholders. -

1. Agreements by and among stockholders executed before the formation and organization of a close corporation, signed by all stockholders, shall survive the incorporation of such corporation and shall continue to be valid and binding between and among such stockholders, if such be their intent, to the extent that such agreements are not inconsistent with the articles of incorporation, irrespective of where the provisions of such agreements are contained, except those required by this Title to be embodied in said articles of incorporation.

2. An agreement between two or more stockholders, if in writing and signed by the parties thereto, may provide that in exercising any voting rights, the shares held by them shall be voted as therein provided, or as they may agree, or as determined in accordance with a procedure agreed upon by them.

3. No provision in any written agreement signed by the stockholders, relating to any phase of the corporate affairs, shall be invalidated as between the parties on the ground that its effect is to make them partners among themselves.

4. A written agreement among some or all of the stockholders in a close corporation shall not be invalidated on the ground that it so relates to the conduct of the business and affairs of the corporation as to restrict or interfere with the discretion or powers of the board of directors: Provided, That such agreement shall impose on the stockholders who are parties thereto the liabilities for managerial acts imposed by this Code on directors.

5. To the extent that the stockholders are actively engaged in the management or operation of the business and affairs of a close corporation, the stockholders shall be held to strict fiduciary duties to each other and among themselves. Said stockholders shall be personally liable for corporate torts unless the corporation has obtained reasonably adequate liability insurance.

Section 101. When board meeting is unnecessary or improperly held. - Unless the by-laws provide otherwise, any action by the directors of a close corporation without a meeting shall nevertheless be deemed valid if:

1. Before or after such action is taken, written consent thereto is signed by all the directors; or

2. All the stockholders have actual or implied knowledge of the action and make no prompt objection thereto in writing; or

3. The directors are accustomed to take informal action with the express or implied acquiescence of all the stockholders; or

4. All the directors have express or implied knowledge of the action in question and none of them makes prompt objection thereto in writing.

If a director’s meeting is held without proper call or notice, an action taken therein within the corporate powers is deemed ratified by a director who failed to attend, unless he promptly files his written objection with the secretary of the corporation after having knowledge thereof.

Section 102. Pre-emptive right in close corporations. – The pre-emptive right of stockholders in close corporations shall extend to all stock to be issued, including reissuance of treasury shares, whether for money, property or personal services, or in payment of corporate debts, unless the articles of incorporation provide otherwise.

Section 103. Amendment of articles of incorporation. – Any amendment to the articles of incorporation which seeks to delete or remove any provision required by this Title to be contained in the articles of incorporation or to reduce a quorum or voting requirement stated in said articles of incorporation shall not be valid or effective unless approved by the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock, whether with or without voting rights, or of such greater proportion of shares as may be specifically provided in the articles of incorporation for amending, deleting or removing any of the aforesaid provisions, at a meeting duly called for the purpose.

Section 104. Deadlocks. – Notwithstanding any contrary provision in the articles of incorporation or by-laws or agreement of stockholders of a close corporation, if the directors or stockholders are so divided respecting the management of the corporation’s business and affairs that the votes required for any corporate action cannot be obtained, with the consequence that the business and affairs of the corporation can no longer be conducted to the advantage of the stockholders generally, the Securities and Exchange Commission, upon written petition by any stockholder, shall have the power to arbitrate the dispute. In the exercise of such power, the Commission shall have authority to make such order as it deems appropriate, including an order: (1) cancelling or altering any provision contained in the articles of incorporation, by-laws, or any stockholder’s agreement; (2) cancelling, altering or enjoining any resolution or act of the corporation or its board of directors, stockholders, or officers; (3) directing or prohibiting any act of the corporation or its board of directors, stockholders, officers, or other persons party to the action; (4) requiring the purchase at their fair value of shares of any stockholder, either by the corporation regardless of the availability of unrestricted retained earnings in its books, or by the other stockholders; (5) appointing a provisional director; (6) dissolving the corporation; or (7) granting such other relief as the circumstances may warrant.

A provisional director shall be an impartial person who is neither a stockholder nor a creditor of the corporation or of any subsidiary or affiliate of the corporation, and whose further qualifications, if any, may be determined by the Commission. A provisional director is not a receiver of the corporation and does not have the title and powers of a custodian or receiver. A provisional director shall have all the rights and powers of a duly elected director of the corporation, including the right to notice of and to vote at meetings of directors, until such time as he shall be removed by order of the Commission or by all the stockholders. His compensation shall be determined by agreement between him and the corporation subject to approval of the Commission, which may fix his compensation in the absence of agreement or in the event of disagreement between the provisional director and the corporation.

Section 105. Withdrawal of stockholder or dissolution of corporation. – In addition and without prejudice to other rights and remedies available to a stockholder under this Title, any stockholder of a close corporation may, for any reason, compel the said corporation to purchase his shares at their fair value, which shall not be less than their par or issued value, when the corporation has sufficient assets in its books to cover its debts and liabilities exclusive of capital stock: Provided, That any stockholder of a close corporation may, by written petition to the Securities and Exchange Commission, compel the dissolution of such corporation whenever any of acts of the directors, officers or those in control of the corporation is illegal, or fraudulent, or dishonest, or oppressive or unfairly prejudicial to the corporation or any stockholder, or whenever corporate assets are being misapplied or wasted.

TITLE XIII

SPECIAL CORPORATIONS CHAPTER I - EDUCATIONAL CORPORATIONS

Section 106. Incorporation. – Educational corporations shall be governed by special laws and by the general provisions of this Code. (n)

Section 107. Pre-requisites to incorporation. – Except upon favorable recommendation of the Ministry of Education and Culture, the Securities and Exchange Commission shall not accept or approve the articles of incorporation and by-laws of any educational institution. (168a)

Section 108. Board of trustees. – Trustees of educational institutions organized as non-stock corporations shall not be less than five (5) nor more than fifteen (15): Provided, however, That the number of trustees shall be in multiples of five (5).

Unless otherwise provided in the articles of incorporation on the by-laws, the board of trustees of incorporated schools, colleges, or other institutions of learning shall, as soon as organized, so classify themselves that the term of office of one-fifth (1/5) of their number shall expire every year. Trustees thereafter elected to fill vacancies, occurring before the expiration of a particular term, shall hold office only for the unexpired period. Trustees elected thereafter to fill vacancies caused by expiration of term shall hold office for five (5) years. A majority of the trustees shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. The powers and authority of trustees shall be defined in the by-laws.

For institutions organized as stock corporations, the number and term of directors shall be governed by the provisions on stock corporations. (169a)

CHAPTER II RELIGIOUS CORPORATIONS

Section 109. Classes of religious corporations. – Religious corporations may be incorporated by one or more persons. Such corporations may be classified into corporations sole and religious societies.

Religious corporations shall be governed by this Chapter and by the general provisions on non-stock corporations insofar as they may be applicable. (n)

Section 110. Corporation sole. – For the purpose of administering and managing, as trustee, the affairs, property and temporalities of any religious denomination, sect or church, a corporation sole may be formed by the chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or other presiding elder of such religious denomination, sect or church. (154a)

Section 111. Articles of incorporation. – In order to become a corporation sole, the chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder of any religious denomination, sect or church must file with the Securities and Exchange Commission articles of incorporation setting forth the following:

1. That he is the chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder of his religious denomination, sect or church and that he desires to become a corporation sole;

2. That the rules, regulations and discipline of his religious denomination, sect or church are not inconsistent with his becoming a corporation sole and do not forbid it;

3. That as such chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder, he is charged with the administration of the temporalities and the management of the affairs, estate and properties of his religious denomination, sect or church within his territorial jurisdiction, describing such territorial jurisdiction;

4. The manner in which any vacancy occurring in the office of chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi of presiding elder is required to be filled, according to the rules, regulations or discipline of the religious denomination, sect or church to which he belongs; and

5. The place where the principal office of the corporation sole is to be established and located, which place must be within the Philippines.

The articles of incorporation may include any other provision not contrary to law for the regulation of the affairs of the corporation. (n)

Section 112. Submission of the articles of incorporation. – The articles of incorporation must be verified, before filing, by affidavit or affirmation of the chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder, as the case may be, and accompanied by a copy of the commission, certificate of election or letter of appointment of such chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder, duly certified to be correct by any notary public.

From and after the filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission of the said articles of incorporation, verified by affidavit or affirmation, and accompanied by the documents mentioned in the preceding paragraph, such chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder shall become a corporation sole and all temporalities, estate and properties of the religious denomination, sect or church theretofore administered or managed by him as such chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder shall be held in trust by him as a corporation sole, for the use, purpose, behalf and sole benefit of his religious denomination, sect or church, including hospitals, schools, colleges, orphan asylums, parsonages and cemeteries thereof. (n)

Section 113. Acquisition and alienation of property. – Any corporation sole may purchase and hold real estate and personal property for its church, charitable, benevolent or educational purposes, and may receive bequests or gifts for such purposes. Such corporation may sell or mortgage real property held by it by obtaining an order for that purpose from the Court of First Instance of the province where the property is situated upon proof made to the satisfaction of the court that notice of the application for leave to sell or mortgage has been given by publication or otherwise in such manner and for such time as said court may have directed, and that it is to the interest of the corporation that leave to sell or mortgage should be granted. The application for leave to sell or mortgage must be made by petition, duly verified, by the chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder acting as corporation sole, and may be opposed by any member of the religious denomination, sect or church represented by the corporation sole: Provided, That in cases where the rules, regulations and discipline of the religious denomination, sect or church, religious society or order concerned represented by such corporation sole regulate the method of acquiring, holding, selling and mortgaging real estate and personal property, such rules, regulations and discipline shall control, and the intervention of the courts shall not be necessary. (159a)

Section 114. Filling of vacancies. – The successors in office of any chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder in a corporation sole shall become the corporation sole on their accession to office and shall be permitted to transact business as such on the filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission of a copy of their commission, certificate of election, or letters of appointment, duly certified by any notary public.

During any vacancy in the office of chief archbishop, bishop, priest, minister, rabbi or presiding elder of any religious denomination, sect or church incorporated as a corporation sole, the person or persons authorized and empowered by the rules, regulations or discipline of the religious denomination, sect or church represented by the corporation sole to administer the temporalities and manage the affairs, estate and properties of the corporation sole during the vacancy shall exercise all the powers and authority of the corporation sole during such vacancy. (158a)

Section 115. Dissolution. – A corporation sole may be dissolved and its affairs settled voluntarily by submitting to the Securities and Exchange Commission a verified declaration of dissolution.

The declaration of dissolution shall set forth:

1. The name of the corporation;

2. The reason for dissolution and winding up;

3. The authorization for the dissolution of the corporation by the particular religious denomination, sect or church;

4. The names and addresses of the persons who are to supervise the winding up of the affairs of the corporation.

Upon approval of such declaration of dissolution by the Securities and Exchange Commission, the corporation shall cease to carry on its operations except for the purpose of winding up its affairs. (n)

Section 116. Religious societies. – Any religious society or religious order, or any diocese, synod, or district organization of any religious denomination, sect or church, unless forbidden by the constitution, rules, regulations, or discipline of the religious denomination, sect or church of which it is a part, or by competent authority, may, upon written consent and/or by an affirmative vote at a meeting called for the purpose of at least two-thirds (2/3) of its membership, incorporate for the administration of its temporalities or for the management of its affairs, properties and estate by filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission, articles of incorporation verified by the affidavit of the presiding elder, secretary, or clerk or other member of such religious society or religious order, or diocese, synod, or district organization of the religious denomination, sect or church, setting forth the following:

1. That the religious society or religious order, or diocese, synod, or district organization is a religious organization of a religious denomination, sect or church;

2. That at least two-thirds (2/3) of its membership have given their written consent or have voted to incorporate, at a duly convened meeting of the body;

3. That the incorporation of the religious society or religious order, or diocese, synod, or district organization desiring to incorporate is not forbidden by competent authority or by the constitution, rules, regulations or discipline of the religious denomination, sect, or church of which it forms a part;

4. That the religious society or religious order, or diocese, synod, or district organization desires to incorporate for the administration of its affairs, properties and estate;

5. The place where the principal office of the corporation is to be established and located, which place must be within the Philippines; and

The names, nationalities, and residences of the trustees elected by the religious society or religious order, or the diocese, synod, or district organization to serve for the first year or such other period as may be prescribed by the laws of the religious society or religious order, or of the diocese, synod, or district organization, the board of trustees to be not less than five (5) nor more than fifteen (15). (160a)

TITLE XIV

DISSOLUTION

Section 117. Methods of dissolution. – A corporation formed or organized under the provisions of this Code may be dissolved voluntarily or involuntarily. (n)

Section 118. Voluntary dissolution where no creditors are affected. – If dissolution of a corporation does not prejudice the rights of any creditor having a claim against it, the dissolution may be effected by majority vote of the board of directors or trustees, and by a resolution duly adopted by the affirmative vote of the stockholders owning at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock or of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members of a meeting to be held upon call of the directors or trustees after publication of the notice of time, place and object of the meeting for three (3) consecutive weeks in a newspaper published in the place where the principal office of said corporation is located; and if no newspaper is published in such place, then in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines, after sending such notice to each stockholder or member either by registered mail or by personal delivery at least thirty (30) days prior to said meeting. A copy of the resolution authorizing the dissolution shall be certified by a majority of the board of directors or trustees and countersigned by the secretary of the corporation. The Securities and Exchange Commission shall thereupon issue the certificate of dissolution. (62a)

Section 119. Voluntary dissolution where creditors are affected. – Where the dissolution of a corporation may prejudice the rights of any creditor, the petition for dissolution shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission. The petition shall be signed by a majority of its board of directors or trustees or other officers having the management of its affairs, verified by its president or secretary or one of its directors or trustees, and shall set forth all claims and demands against it, and that its dissolution was resolved upon by the affirmative vote of the stockholders representing at least two-thirds (2/3) of the outstanding capital stock or by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the members at a meeting of its stockholders or members called for that purpose.

If the petition is sufficient in form and substance, the Commission shall, by an order reciting the purpose of the petition, fix a date on or before which objections thereto may be filed by any person, which date shall not be less than thirty (30) days nor more than sixty (60) days after the entry of the order. Before such date, a copy of the order shall be published at least once a week for three (3) consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation published in the municipality or city where the principal office of the corporation is situated, or if there be no such newspaper, then in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines, and a similar copy shall be posted for three (3) consecutive weeks in three (3) public places in such municipality or city.

Upon five (5) day’s notice, given after the date on which the right to file objections as fixed in the order has expired, the Commission shall proceed to hear the petition and try any issue made by the objections filed; and if no such objection is sufficient, and the material allegations of the petition are true, it shall render judgment dissolving the corporation and directing such disposition of its assets as justice requires, and may appoint a receiver to collect such assets and pay the debts of the corporation. (Rule 104, RCa)

Section 120. Dissolution by shortening corporate term. – A voluntary dissolution may be effected by amending the articles of incorporation to shorten the corporate term pursuant to the provisions of this Code. A copy of the amended articles of incorporation shall be submitted to the Securities and Exchange Commission in accordance with this Code. Upon approval of the amended articles of incorporation of the expiration of the shortened term, as the case may be, the corporation shall be deemed dissolved without any further proceedings, subject to the provisions of this Code on liquidation. (n)

Section 121. Involuntary dissolution. – A corporation may be dissolved by the Securities and Exchange Commission upon filing of a verified complaint and after proper notice and hearing on the grounds provided by existing laws, rules and regulations. (n)

Section 122. Corporate liquidation. – Every corporation whose charter expires by its own limitation or is annulled by forfeiture or otherwise, or whose corporate existence for other purposes is terminated in any other manner, shall nevertheless be continued as a body corporate for three (3) years after the time when it would have been so dissolved, for the purpose of prosecuting and defending suits by or against it and enabling it to settle and close its affairs, to dispose of and convey its property and to distribute its assets, but not for the purpose of continuing the business for which it was established.

At any time during said three (3) years, the corporation is authorized and empowered to convey all of its property to trustees for the benefit of stockholders, members, creditors, and other persons in interest. From and after any such conveyance by the corporation of its property in trust for the benefit of its stockholders, members, creditors and others in interest, all interest which the corporation had in the property terminates, the legal interest vests in the trustees, and the beneficial interest in the stockholders, members, creditors or other persons in interest.

Upon the winding up of the corporate affairs, any asset distributable to any creditor or stockholder or member who is unknown or cannot be found shall be escheated to the city or municipality where such assets are located.

Except by decrease of capital stock and as otherwise allowed by this Code, no corporation shall distribute any of its assets or property except upon lawful dissolution and after payment of all its debts and liabilities. (77a, 89a, 16a)

TITLE XV

FOREIGN CORPORATIONS

Section 123. Definition and rights of foreign corporations. – For the purposes of this Code, a foreign corporation is one formed, organized or existing under any laws other than those of the Philippines and whose laws allow Filipino citizens and corporations to do business in its own country or state. It shall have the right to transact business in the Philippines after it shall have obtained a license to transact business in this country in accordance with this Code and a certificate of authority from the appropriate government agency. (n)

Section 124. Application to existing foreign corporations. – Every foreign corporation which on the date of the effectivity of this Code is authorized to do business in the Philippines under a license therefore issued to it, shall continue to have such authority under the terms and condition of its license, subject to the provisions of this Code and other special laws. (n)

Section 125. Application for a license. – A foreign corporation applying for a license to transact business in the Philippines shall submit to the Securities and Exchange Commission a copy of its articles of incorporation and by-laws, certified in accordance with law, and their translation to an official language of the Philippines, if necessary. The application shall be under oath and, unless already stated in its articles of incorporation, shall specifically set forth the following:

1. The date and term of incorporation;

2. The address, including the street number, of the principal office of the corporation in the country or state of incorporation;

3. The name and address of its resident agent authorized to accept summons and process in all legal proceedings and, pending the establishment of a local office, all notices affecting the corporation;

4. The place in the Philippines where the corporation intends to operate;

5. The specific purpose or purposes which the corporation intends to pursue in the transaction of its business in the Philippines: Provided, That said purpose or purposes are those specifically stated in the certificate of authority issued by the appropriate government agency;

6. The names and addresses of the present directors and officers of the corporation;

7. A statement of its authorized capital stock and the aggregate number of shares which the corporation has authority to issue, itemized by classes, par value of shares, shares without par value, and series, if any;

8. A statement of its outstanding capital stock and the aggregate number of shares which the corporation has issued, itemized by classes, par value of shares, shares without par value, and series, if any;

9. A statement of the amount actually paid in; and

10. Such additional information as may be necessary or appropriate in order to enable the Securities and Exchange Commission to determine whether such corporation is entitled to a license to transact business in the Philippines, and to determine and assess the fees payable.

Attached to the application for license shall be a duly executed certificate under oath by the authorized official or officials of the jurisdiction of its incorporation, attesting to the fact that the laws of the country or state of the applicant allow Filipino citizens and corporations to do business therein, and that the applicant is an existing corporation in good standing. If such certificate is in a foreign language, a translation thereof in English under oath of the translator shall be attached thereto.

The application for a license to transact business in the Philippines shall likewise be accompanied by a statement under oath of the president or any other person authorized by the corporation, showing to the satisfaction of the Securities and Exchange Commission and other governmental agency in the proper cases that the applicant is solvent and in sound financial condition, and setting forth the assets and liabilities of the corporation as of the date not exceeding one (1) year immediately prior to the filing of the application.

Foreign banking, financial and insurance corporations shall, in addition to the above requirements, comply with the provisions of existing laws applicable to them. In the case of all other foreign corporations, no application for license to transact business in the Philippines shall be accepted by the Securities and Exchange Commission without previous authority from the appropriate government agency, whenever required by law. (68a)

Section 126. Issuance of a license. – If the Securities and Exchange Commission is satisfied that the applicant has complied with all the requirements of this Code and other special laws, rules and regulations, the Commission shall issue a license to the applicant to transact business in the Philippines for the purpose or purposes specified in such license. Upon issuance of the license, such foreign corporation may commence to transact business in the Philippines and continue to do so for as long as it retains its authority to act as a corporation under the laws of the country or state of its incorporation, unless such license is sooner surrendered, revoked, suspended or annulled in accordance with this Code or other special laws.

Within sixty (60) days after the issuance of the license to transact business in the Philippines, the license, except foreign banking or insurance corporation, shall deposit with the Securities and Exchange Commission for the benefit of present and future creditors of the licensee in the Philippines, securities satisfactory to the Securities and Exchange Commission, consisting of bonds or other evidence of indebtedness of the Government of the Philippines, its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, or of government-owned or controlled corporations and entities, shares of stock in “registered enterprises” as this term is defined in Republic Act No. 5186, shares of stock in domestic corporations registered in the stock exchange, or shares of stock in domestic insurance companies and banks, or any combination of these kinds of securities, with an actual market value of at least one hundred thousand (P100,000.) pesos; Provided, however, That within six (6) months after each fiscal year of the licensee, the Securities and Exchange Commission shall require the licensee to deposit additional securities equivalent in actual market value to two (2%) percent of the amount by which the licensee’s gross income for that fiscal year exceeds five million (P5,000,000.00) pesos. The Securities and Exchange Commission shall also require deposit of additional securities if the actual market value of the securities on deposit has decreased by at least ten (10%) percent of their actual market value at the time they were deposited. The Securities and Exchange Commission may at its discretion release part of the additional securities deposited with it if the gross income of the licensee has decreased, or if the actual market value of the total securities on deposit has increased, by more than ten (10%) percent of the actual market value of the securities at the time they were deposited. The Securities and Exchange Commission may, from time to time, allow the licensee to substitute other securities for those already on deposit as long as the licensee is solvent. Such licensee shall be entitled to collect the interest or dividends on the securities deposited. In the event the licensee ceases to do business in the Philippines, the securities deposited as aforesaid shall be returned, upon the licensee’s application therefor and upon proof to the satisfaction of the Securities and Exchange Commission that the licensee has no liability to Philippine residents, including the Government of the Republic of the Philippines. (n)

Section 127. Who may be a resident agent. – A resident agent may be either an individual residing in the Philippines or a domestic corporation lawfully transacting business in the Philippines: Provided, That in the case of an individual, he must be of good moral character and of sound financial standing. (n)

Section 128. Resident agent; service of process. – The Securities and Exchange Commission shall require as a condition precedent to the issuance of the license to transact business in the Philippines by any foreign corporation that such corporation file with the Securities and Exchange Commission a written power of attorney designating some person who must be a resident of the Philippines, on whom any summons and other legal processes may be served in all actions or other legal proceedings against such corporation, and consenting that service upon such resident agent shall be admitted and held as valid as if served upon the duly authorized officers of the foreign corporation at its home office. Any such foreign corporation shall likewise execute and file with the Securities and Exchange Commission an agreement or stipulation, executed by the proper authorities of said corporation, in form and substance as follows:

“The (name of foreign corporation) does hereby stipulate and agree, in consideration of its being granted by the Securities and Exchange Commission a license to transact business in the Philippines, that if at any time said corporation shall cease to transact business in the Philippines, or shall be without any resident agent in the Philippines on whom any summons or other legal processes may be served, then in any action or proceeding arising out of any business or transaction which occurred in the Philippines, service of any summons or other legal process may be made upon the Securities and Exchange Commission and that such service shall have the same force and effect as if made upon the duly-authorized officers of the corporation at its home office.”

Whenever such service of summons or other process shall be made upon the Securities and Exchange Commission, the Commission shall, within ten (10) days thereafter, transmit by mail a copy of such summons or other legal process to the corporation at its home or principal office. The sending of such copy by the Commission shall be necessary part of and shall complete such service. All expenses incurred by the Commission for such service shall be paid in advance by the party at whose instance the service is made.

In case of a change of address of the resident agent, it shall be his or its duty to immediately notify in writing the Securities and Exchange Commission of the new address. (72a; and n)

Section 129. Law applicable. – Any foreign corporation lawfully doing business in the Philippines shall be bound by all laws, rules and regulations applicable to domestic corporations of the same class, except such only as provide for the creation, formation, organization or dissolution of corporations or those which fix the relations, liabilities, responsibilities, or duties of stockholders, members, or officers of corporations to each other or to the corporation. (73a)

Section 130. Amendments to articles of incorporation or by-laws of foreign corporations. – Whenever the articles of incorporation or by-laws of a foreign corporation authorized to transact business in the Philippines are amended, such foreign corporation shall, within sixty (60) days after the amendment becomes effective, file with the Securities and Exchange Commission, and in the proper cases with the appropriate government agency, a duly authenticated copy of the articles of incorporation or by-laws, as amended, indicating clearly in capital letters or by underscoring the change or changes made, duly certified by the authorized official or officials of the country or state of incorporation. The filing thereof shall not of itself enlarge or alter the purpose or purposes for which such corporation is authorized to transact business in the Philippines. (n)

Section 131. Amended license. – A foreign corporation authorized to transact business in the Philippines shall obtain an amended license in the event it changes its corporate name, or desires to pursue in the Philippines other or additional purposes, by submitting an application therefor to the Securities and Exchange Commission, favorably endorsed by the appropriate government agency in the proper cases. (n)

Section 132. Merger or consolidation involving a foreign corporation licensed in the Philippines. – One or more foreign corporations authorized to transact business in the Philippines may merge or consolidate with any domestic corporation or corporations if such is permitted under Philippine laws and by the law of its incorporation: Provided, That the requirements on merger or consolidation as provided in this Code are followed.

Whenever a foreign corporation authorized to transact business in the Philippines shall be a party to a merger or consolidation in its home country or state as permitted by the law of its incorporation, such foreign corporation shall, within sixty (60) days after such merger or consolidation becomes effective, file with the Securities and Exchange Commission, and in proper cases with the appropriate government agency, a copy of the articles of merger or consolidation duly authenticated by the proper official or officials of the country or state under the laws of which merger or consolidation was effected: Provided, however, That if the absorbed corporation is the foreign corporation doing business in the Philippines, the latter shall at the same time file a petition for withdrawal of its license in accordance with this Title. (n)

Section 133. Doing business without a license. – No foreign corporation transacting business in the Philippines without a license, or its successors or assigns, shall be permitted to maintain or intervene in any action, suit or proceeding in any court or administrative agency of the Philippines; but such corporation may be sued or proceeded against before Philippine courts or administrative tribunals on any valid cause of action recognized under Philippine laws. (69a)

Section 134. Revocation of license. – Without prejudice to other grounds provided by special laws, the license of a foreign corporation to transact business in the Philippines may be revoked or suspended by the Securities and Exchange Commission upon any of the following grounds:

1. Failure to file its annual report or pay any fees as required by this Code;

2. Failure to appoint and maintain a resident agent in the Philippines as required by this Title;

3. Failure, after change of its resident agent or of his address, to submit to the Securities and Exchange Commission a statement of such change as required by this Title;

4. Failure to submit to the Securities and Exchange Commission an authenticated copy of any amendment to its articles of incorporation or by-laws or of any articles of merger or consolidation within the time prescribed by this Title;

5. A misrepresentation of any material matter in any application, report, affidavit or other document submitted by such corporation pursuant to this Title;

6. Failure to pay any and all taxes, imposts, assessments or penalties, if any, lawfully due to the Philippine Government or any of its agencies or political subdivisions;

7. Transacting business in the Philippines outside of the purpose or purposes for which such corporation is authorized under its license;

8. Transacting business in the Philippines as agent of or acting for and in behalf of any foreign corporation or entity not duly licensed to do business in the Philippines; or

9. Any other ground as would render it unfit to transact business in the Philippines. (n)

Section 135. Issuance of certificate of revocation. – Upon the revocation of any such license to transact business in the Philippines, the Securities and Exchange Commission shall issue a corresponding certificate of revocation, furnishing a copy thereof to the appropriate government agency in the proper cases.

The Securities and Exchange Commission shall also mail to the corporation at its registered office in the Philippines a notice of such revocation accompanied by a copy of the certificate of revocation. (n)

Section 136. Withdrawal of foreign corporations. – Subject to existing laws and regulations, a foreign corporation licensed to transact business in the Philippines may be allowed to withdraw from the Philippines by filing a petition for withdrawal of license. No certificate of withdrawal shall be issued by the Securities and Exchange Commission unless all the following requirements are met;

1. All claims which have accrued in the Philippines have been paid, compromised or settled;

2. All taxes, imposts, assessments, and penalties, if any, lawfully due to the Philippine Government or any of its agencies or political subdivisions have been paid; and

3. The petition for withdrawal of license has been published once a week for three (3) consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines.

TITLE XVI

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Section 137. Outstanding capital stock defined. – The term “outstanding capital stock”, as used in this Code, means the total shares of stock issued under binding subscription agreements to subscribers or stockholders, whether or not fully or partially paid, except treasury shares. (n)

Section 138. Designation of governing boards. – The provisions of specific provisions of this Code to the contrary notwithstanding, non-stock or special corporations may, through their articles of incorporation or their by-laws, designate their governing boards by any name other than as board of trustees. (n)

Section 139. Incorporation and other fees. – The Securities and Exchange Commission is hereby authorized to collect and receive fees as authorized by law or by rules and regulations promulgated by the Commission. (n)

Section 140. Stock ownership in certain corporations. – Pursuant to the duties specified by Article XIV of the Constitution, the National Economic and Development Authority shall, from time to time, make a determination of whether the corporate vehicle has been used by any corporation or by business or industry to frustrate the provisions thereof or of applicable laws, and shall submit to the Batasang Pambansa, whenever deemed necessary, a report of its findings, including recommendations for their prevention or correction.

Maximum limits may be set by the Batasang Pambansa for stockholdings in corporations declared by it to be vested with a public interest pursuant to the provisions of this section, belonging to individuals or groups of individuals related to each other by consanguinity or affinity or by close business interests, or whenever it is necessary to achieve national objectives, prevent illegal monopolies or combinations in restraint or trade, or to implement national economic policies declared in laws, rules and regulations designed to promote the general welfare and foster economic development.

In recommending to the Batasang Pambansa corporations, businesses or industries to be declared vested with a public interest and in formulating proposals for limitations on stock ownership, the National Economic and Development Authority shall consider the type and nature of the industry, the size of the enterprise, the economies of scale, the geographic location, the extent of Filipino ownership, the labor intensity of the activity, the export potential, as well as other factors which are germane to the realization and promotion of business and industry.

Section 141. Annual report or corporations. – Every corporation, domestic or foreign, lawfully doing business in the Philippines shall submit to the Securities and Exchange Commission an annual report of its operations, together with a financial statement of its assets and liabilities, certified by any independent certified public accountant in appropriate cases, covering the preceding fiscal year and such other requirements as the Securities and Exchange Commission may require. Such report shall be submitted within such period as may be prescribed by the Securities and Exchange Commission. (n)

Section 142. Confidential nature of examination results. – All interrogatories propounded by the Securities and Exchange Commission and the answers thereto, as well as the results of any examination made by the Commission or by any other official authorized by law to make an examination of the operations, books and records of any corporation, shall be kept strictly confidential, except insofar as the law may require the same to be made public or where such interrogatories, answers or results are necessary to be presented as evidence before any court. (n)

Section 143. Rule-making power of the Securities and Exchange Commission. – The Securities and Exchange Commission shall have the power and authority to implement the provisions of this Code, and to promulgate rules and regulations reasonably necessary to enable it to perform its duties hereunder, particularly in the prevention of fraud and abuses on the part of the controlling stockholders, members, directors, trustees or officers. (n)

Section 144. Violations of the Code. – Violations of any of the provisions of this Code or its amendments not otherwise specifically penalized therein shall be punished by a fine of not less than one thousand (P1,000.00) pesos but not more than ten thousand (P10,000.00) pesos or by imprisonment for not less than thirty (30) days but not more than five (5) years, or both, in the discretion of the court. If the violation is committed by a corporation, the same may, after notice and hearing, be dissolved in appropriate proceedings before the Securities and Exchange Commission: Provided, That such dissolution shall not preclude the institution of appropriate action against the director, trustee or officer of the corporation responsible for said violation: Provided, further, That nothing in this section shall be construed to repeal the other causes for dissolution of a corporation provided in this Code. (190 1/2 a)

Section 145. Amendment or repeal. – No right or remedy in favor of or against any corporation, its stockholders, members, directors, trustees, or officers, nor any liability incurred by any such corporation, stockholders, members, directors, trustees, or officers, shall be removed or impaired either by the subsequent dissolution of said corporation or by any subsequent amendment or repeal of this Code or of any part thereof. (n)

Section 146. Repealing clause. – Except as expressly provided by this Code, all laws or parts thereof inconsistent with any provision of this Code shall be deemed repealed. (n)

Section 147. Separability of provisions. – Should any provision of this Code or any part thereof be declared invalid or unconstitutional, the other provisions, so far as they are separable, shall remain in force. (n)

Section 148. Applicability to existing corporations. – All corporations lawfully existing and doing business in the Philippines on the date of the effectivity of this Code and heretofore authorized, licensed or registered by the Securities and Exchange Commission, shall be deemed to have been authorized, licensed or registered under the provisions of this Code, subject to the terms and conditions of its license, and shall be governed by the provisions hereof: Provided, That if any such corporation is affected by the new requirements of this Code, said corporation shall, unless otherwise herein provided, be given a period of not more than two (2) years from the effectivity of this Code within which to comply with the same. (n)

Section 149. Effectivity. – This Code shall take effect immediately upon its approval.

Approved, May 1, 1980

[codalsetal]

P.D. No. 1529: Property Registration Decree

PRESIDENTIAL DECREE No. 1529

AMENDING AND CODIFYING THE LAWS RELATIVE TO REGISTRATION OF PROPERTY AND FOR OTHER PURPOSES

WHEREAS, there is a need to update the Land Registration Act and to codify the various laws relative to registration of property, in order to facilitate effective implementation of said laws;

WHEREAS, to strengthen the Torrens system, it is deemed necessary to adopt safeguards to prevent anomalous titling of real property, and to streamline and simplify registration proceedings and the issuance of certificates of title;

WHEREAS, the decrees promulgated relative to the registration of certificates of land transfer and emancipation patents issued pursuant to Presidential Decree No. 27 to hasten the implementation of the land reform program of the country form an integral part of the property registration laws;

NOW, THEREFORE, I, FERDINAND E. MARCOS, President of the Republic of the Philippines, by virtue of the powers vested in me by the Constitution, do hereby order and decree the following:

CHAPTER I GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1. Title of Decree. This Decree shall be known as the PROPERTY REGISTRATION DECREE.

Section 2. Nature of registration proceedings; jurisdiction of courts. Judicial proceedings for the registration of lands throughout the Philippines shall be in rem and shall be based on the generally accepted principles underlying the Torrens system.

Courts of First Instance shall have exclusive jurisdiction over all applications for original registration of title to lands, including improvements and interests therein, and over all petitions filed after original registration of title, with power to hear and determine all questions arising upon such applications or petitions. The court through its clerk of court shall furnish the Land Registration Commission with two certified copies of all pleadings, exhibits, orders, and decisions filed or issued in applications or petitions for land registration, with the exception of stenographic notes, within five days from the filing or issuance thereof.

Section 3. Status of other pre-existing land registration system. The system of registration under the Spanish Mortgage Law is hereby discontinued and all lands recorded under said system which are not yet covered by Torrens title shall be considered as unregistered lands.

Hereafter, all instruments affecting lands originally registered under the Spanish Mortgage Law may be recorded under Section 113 of this Decree, until the land shall have been brought under the operation of the Torrens system.

The books of registration for unregistered lands provided under Section 194 of the Revised Administrative Code, as amended by Act No. 3344, shall continue to remain in force; provided, that all instruments dealing with unregistered lands shall henceforth be registered under Section 113 of this Decree.

CHAPTER II THE LAND REGISTRATION COMMISSION AND ITS REGISTRIES OF DEEDS

Section 4. Land Registration Commission. In order to have a more efficient execution of the laws relative to the registration of lands, geared to the massive and accelerated land reform and social justice program of the government, there is created a commission to be known as the Land Registration Commission under the executive supervision of the Department of Justice.

Section 5. Officials and employees of the Commission. The Land Registration Commission shall have a chief and an assistant chief to be known, respectively, as the Commissioner and the Deputy Commissioner of Land Registration who shall be appointed by the President. The Commissioner shall be duly qualified member of the Philippine Bar with at least ten years of practice in the legal profession, and shall have the same rank, compensation and privileges as those of a Judge of the Court of First Instance. The Deputy Commissioner, who shall possess the same qualifications as those required of the Commissioner, shall receive compensation which shall be three thousand pesos per annum less than that of the Commissioner. He shall act as Commissioner of Land Registration during the absence or disability of the Commissioner and when there is a vacancy in the position until another person shall have been designated or appointed in accordance with law. The Deputy Commissioner shall also perform such other functions as the Commissioner may assign to him.

They shall be assisted by such number of division chiefs as may be necessary in the interest of the functioning of the Commission, by a Special Assistant to the Commissioner, and by a Chief Geodetic Engineer who shall each receive compensation at the rate of three thousand four hundred pesos per annum less than that of the Deputy Commissioner.

All other officials and employees of the Land Registration Commission including those of the Registries of Deeds whose salaries are not herein provided, shall receive salaries corresponding to the minimum of their respective upgraded ranges as provided under paragraph 3.1 of Budget Circular No. 273, plus sixty per centum thereof across the board, notwithstanding the maximum salary allowed for their respective civil service eligibilities.

The salaries of officials and employees provided in this Decree shall be without prejudice to such benefits and adjustments as may from time to time be granted by the President or by the legislature to government employees.

All officials and employees of the Commission except Registers of Deeds shall be appointed by the Secretary of Justice upon recommendation of the Commissioner of Land Registration.

Section 6. General Functions.

(1) The Commissioner of Land Registration shall have the following functions:

(a) Issue decrees of registration pursuant to final judgments of the courts in land registration proceedings and cause the issuance by the Registers of Deeds of the corresponding certificates of title;

(b) Exercise supervision and control over all Registers of Deeds and other personnel of the Commission;

(c) Resolve cases elevated en consulta by, or on appeal from decision of, Registers of Deeds;

(d) Exercise executive supervision over all clerks of court and personnel of the Courts of First Instance throughout the Philippines with respect to the discharge of their duties and functions in relation to the registration of lands;

(e) Implement all orders, decisions, and decrees promulgated relative to the registration of lands and issue, subject to the approval of the Secretary of Justice, all needful rules and regulations therefor;

(f) Verify and approve subdivision, consolidation, and consolidation-subdivision survey plans of properties titled under Act No. 496 except those covered by P.D. No. 957.

(2) The Land Registration Commission shall have the following functions:

(a) Extend speedy and effective assistance to the Department of Agrarian Reform, the Land Bank, and other agencies in the implementation of the land reform program of the government;

(b) Extend assistance to courts in ordinary and cadastral land registration proceedings;

(c) Be the central repository of records relative to original registration of lands titled under the Torrens system, including subdivision and consolidation plans of titled lands.

Section 7. Office of the Register of Deeds. There shall be at least one Register of Deeds for each province and one for each city. Every Registry with a yearly average collection of more than sixty thousand pesos during the last three years shall have one Deputy Register of Deeds, and every Registry with a yearly average collection of more than three hundred thousand pesos during the last three years, shall have one Deputy Register of Deeds and one second Deputy Register of Deeds.

The Secretary of Justice shall define the official station and territorial jurisdiction of each Registry upon the recommendation of the Commissioner of Land Registration, with the end in view of making every registry easily accessible to the people of the neighboring municipalities.

The province or city shall furnish a suitable space or building for the office of the Register of Deeds until such time as the same could be furnished out of national funds.

Section 8. Appointment of Registers of Deeds and their Deputies and other subordinate personnel; salaries. Registers of Deeds shall be appointed by the President of the Philippines upon recommendation of the Secretary of Justice. Deputy Registers of Deeds and all other subordinate personnel of the Registries of Deeds shall be appointed by the Secretary of Justice upon the recommendation of the Commissioner of Land Registration.

The salaries of Registers of Deeds and their Deputies shall be at the following rates:

(1) First Class Registries The salaries of Registers of Deeds in first class Registries shall be three thousand four hundred pesos per annum less than that of the Deputy Commissioner.

(2) Second Class Registries The salaries of Registers of Deeds in second class Registries shall be three thousand four hundred pesos per annum less than those of Registers of Deeds in first class Registries.

(3) Third Class Registries The salaries of Registers of Deeds in third class Registries shall be three thousand four hundred pesos per annum less than those of Registers of Deeds in second class Registries.

(4) The salaries of Deputy Registers of Deeds and Second Deputy Registers of Deeds shall be three thousand four hundred pesos per annum less than those of their corresponding Registers of Deeds and Deputy Registers of Deeds, respectively.

The Secretary of Justice, upon recommendation of the Commissioner of Land Registration, shall cause the reclassification of Registries based either on work load or the class of province/city, whichever will result in a higher classification, for purposes of salary adjustments in accordance with the rates hereinabove provided.

Section 9. Qualifications of Registers of Deeds and Deputy Registers of Deeds. No person shall be appointed Register of Deeds unless he has been admitted to the practice of law in the Philippines and shall have been actually engaged in such practice for at least three years or has been employed for a like period in any branch of government the functions of which include the registration of property.

The Deputy Register of Deeds shall be a member of the Philippine Bar. Provided, however, that no Register of Deeds or Deputy Register of Deeds holding office as such upon the passage of this Decree shall by reason hereof, be removed from office or be demoted to a lower category or scale of salary except for cause and upon compliance with due process as provided for by law.

Section 10. General functions of Registers of Deeds. The office of the Register of Deeds constitutes a public repository of records of instruments affecting registered or unregistered lands and chattel mortgages in the province or city wherein such office is situated.

It shall be the duty of the Register of Deeds to immediately register an instrument presented for registration dealing with real or personal property which complies with all the requisites for registration. He shall see to it that said instrument bears the proper documentary and science stamps and that the same are properly canceled. If the instrument is not registerable, he shall forthwith deny registration thereof and inform the presentor of such denial in writing, stating the ground or reason therefor, and advising him of his right to appeal by consulta in accordance with Section 117 of this Decree.

Section 11. Discharge of duties of Register of Deeds in case of vacancy, etc.

(1) Until a regular Register of Deeds shall have been appointed for a province or city, or in case of vacancy in the office, or upon the occasion of the absence, illness, suspension, or inability of the Register of Deeds to discharge his duties, said duties shall be performed by the following officials, in the order in which they are mentioned below, unless the Secretary of Justice designates another official to act temporarily in his place:

(a) For the province or city where there is a Deputy Register of Deeds, by said Deputy Register of Deeds, or by the second Deputy Register of Deeds, should there be one;

(b) For the province or city where there is no Deputy or second Deputy Register of Deeds, by the Provincial or City Fiscal, or any Assistant Fiscal designated by the Provincial or City Fiscal;

(2) In case of absence, disability or suspension of the Register of Deeds without pay, or in case of vacancy in the position, the Secretary of Justice may, in his discretion, authorize the payment of an additional compensation to the official acting as Register of Deeds, such additional compensation together with his actual salary not to exceed the salary authorized for the position thus filled by him.

(3) In case of a newly-created province or city and pending establishment of a Registry of Deeds and the appointment of a regular Register of Deeds for the new province or city, the Register of Deeds of the mother province or city shall be the ex-officio Register of Deeds for said new province or city.

Section 12. Owner's Index; reports. There shall be prepared in every Registry an index system which shall contain the names of all registered owners alphabetically arranged. For this purpose, an index card which shall be prepared in the name of each registered owner which shall contain a list of all lands registered in his name.

The Register of Deeds shall submit to the Land Registration Commission within ten days after the month to which they pertain his monthly reports on collections and accomplishments. He shall also submit to the Commission at the end of December of each year, an annual inventory of all titles and instruments in his Registry.

Section 13. Chief Geodetic Engineer. There shall be a Chief Geodetic Engineer in the Land Registration Commission who shall be the technical adviser of the Commission on all matters involving surveys and shall be responsible to him for all plats, plans and works requiring the services of a geodetic engineer in said office. He shall perform such other functions as may, from time to time, be assigned to him by the Commissioner.

CHAPTER III ORIGINAL REGISTRATION

I ORDINARY REGISTRATION PROCEEDINGS

A. APPLICATIONS

Section 14.Who may apply. The following persons may file in the proper Court of First Instance an application for registration of title to land, whether personally or through their duly authorized representatives:

(1) Those who by themselves or through their predecessors-in-interest have been in open, continuous, exclusive and notorious possession and occupation of alienable and disposable lands of the public domain under a bona fide claim of ownership since June 12, 1945, or earlier.

(2) Those who have acquired ownership of private lands by prescription under the provision of existing laws.

(3) Those who have acquired ownership of private lands or abandoned river beds by right of accession or accretion under the existing laws.

(4) Those who have acquired ownership of land in any other manner provided for by law.

Where the land is owned in common, all the co-owners shall file the application jointly.

Where the land has been sold under pacto de retro, the vendor a retro may file an application for the original registration of the land, provided, however, that should the period for redemption expire during the pendency of the registration proceedings and ownership to the property consolidated in the vendee a retro, the latter shall be substituted for the applicant and may continue the proceedings.

A trustee on behalf of his principal may apply for original registration of any land held in trust by him, unless prohibited by the instrument creating the trust.

Section 15. Form and contents. The application for land registration shall be in writing, signed by the application or the person duly authorized in his behalf, and sworn to before any officer authorized to administer oaths for the province or city where the application was actually signed. If there is more than one applicant, the application shall be signed and sworn to by and in behalf of each. The application shall contain a description of the land and shall state the citizenship and civil status of the applicant, whether single or married, and, if married, the name of the wife or husband, and, if the marriage has been legally dissolved, when and how the marriage relation terminated. It shall also state the full names and addresses of all occupants of the land and those of the adjoining owners, if known, and, if not known, it shall state the extent of the search made to find them.

The application, shall, in form, be substantially as follows:

Republic of the Philippines Court of First Instance of _________________

The undersigned, ____________________________________________________________hereby applies (or apply) to have the land hereinafter described brought under the operation of the Property Registration Decree, and to have the title thereto registered and confirmed:

AND DECLARE . . . . .

1. That the applicants/s is/are the owners of the land (by virtue of inheritance or deed of sale or conveyance and/or possession in accordance with Section 14 of said Decree), together with the building and improvements thereon, with the exception of the following:__________________________________________________________________ which is/are the property of _________________________ residing at _________________________ The said land, consisting of ____________________ parcel/s is/are situated, bounded and described as shown on the plan and technical descriptions attached hereto and made a part hereof, with the following exception:___________________________________________________________________

2. That said land at the last assessment for taxation was assessed at P ____, Philippine currency, and the buildings and other improvements at P ___________, Philippine currency.

3. That to the best of my/our knowledge and belief, there is no mortgage or encumbrance of any kind whatsoever affecting said land, nor any other person having any interest therein, legal or equitable, or in possession, other than as follows: _______________________________________________________________________________

4. That the applicant/s has/have acquired said land in the following manner: ________________________________

(Note: Refer to Sec. 14 of said Decree. State also whether the property is conjugal, paraphernal or exclusive property of the applicant/s)

5. That said land is occupied by the following person: _____________________________ ______________________________________________

6. That the names in full and addresses, as far as known to the undersigned, of the owners of all adjoining properties, of the persons mentioned in paragraphs 3 and 5, and of the persons shown on the plan as claimants, are as follows: ________________________________________________________________________________________

7. That the applicant/s is/are single or married to ____________________ (Note: if marriage has been legally dissolved, state when and how the marriage relation terminated.)_________________________________________________________________ _____________________

8. That the applicant's/s' full name, age, citizenship, residence, and postal address/es is/are as follows: ___________________________________________________________________

9. That (Note: If the land included in the application is bounded by a public or private way or road, there should be stated in this paragraph whether or not the applicant claims any and what land within the limits of the way or road and whether the applicant desires to have the line of the way or road determined.) ________________________________________ ___________________________

10. That the following documents are attached hereto and made a part hereof: ___________________________________ ________________________________

Signed at ___________________ this _____________________ day of ____________________, in the year nineteen hundred and ______________________.

__________________________ Applicant

_________________________ (Post Office Address)

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES PROVINCE (OR CITY) OF _______________

On this _______________ day of _________________________,19 ________ personally appeared before me the above- named __________________________________________________ known to me to be the person/s who executed the foregoing application and made oath that the statements therein are true of his/their knowledge, information and belief.

The Residence Certificate/s ______________________ of the applicant/s ______________ was/were exhibited to me being No. _________________ issued at ___________________ dated ____________, 19 __________.

________________________

(Notary Public, or other Officer authorized to administer oaths)

PTR NO. _________________

Section 16. Non-resident applicant. If the applicant is not a resident of the Philippines, he shall file with his application an instrument in due form appointing an agent or representative residing in the Philippines, giving his full name and postal address, and shall therein agree that the service of any legal process in the proceedings under or growing out of the application made upon his agent or representative shall be of the same legal effect as if made upon the applicant within the Philippines. If the agent or representative dies, or leaves the Philippines, the applicant shall forthwith make another appointment for the substitute, and, if he fails to do so the court may dismiss the application.

Section 17. What and where to file. The application for land registration shall be filed with the Court of First Instance of the province or city where the land is situated. The applicant shall file together with the application all original muniments of titles or copies thereof and a survey plan of the land approved by the Bureau of Lands.

The clerk of court shall not accept any application unless it is shown that the applicant has furnished the Director of Lands with a copy of the application and all annexes.

Section 18. Application covering two or more parcels. An application may include two or more parcels of land belonging to the applicant/s provided they are situated within the same province or city. The court may at any time order an application to be amended by striking out one or more of the parcels or by a severance of the application.

Section 19. Amendments. Amendments to the application including joinder, substitution, or discontinuance as to parties may be allowed by the court at any stage of the proceedings upon just and reasonable terms.

Amendments which shall consist in a substantial change in the boundaries or an increase in area of the land applied for or which involve the inclusion of an additional land shall be subject to the same requirements of publication and notice as in an original application.

Section 20. When land applied for borders on road. If the application describes the land as bounded by a public or private way or road, it shall state whether or not the applicant claims any and what portion of the land within the limits of the way or road, and whether the applicant desires to have the line of the way or road determined.

Section 21. Requirement of additional facts and papers; ocular inspection. The court may require facts to be stated in the application in addition to those prescribed by this Decree not inconsistent therewith and may require the filing of any additional paper. It may also conduct an ocular inspection, if necessary.

Section 22. Dealings with land pending original registration. After the filing of the application and before the issuance of the decree of registration, the land therein described may still be the subject of dealings in whole or in part, in which case the interested party shall present to the court the pertinent instruments together with a subdivision plan approved by the Director of Lands in case of transfer of portions thereof and the court, after notice to the parties, shall order such land registered subject to the conveyance or encumbrance created by said instruments, or order that the decree of registration be issued in the name of the person to whom the property has been conveyed by said instruments.

B. PUBLICATION, OPPOSITION AND DEFAULT

Section 23. Notice of initial hearing, publication, etc. The court shall, within five days from filing of the application, issue an order setting the date and hour of the initial hearing which shall not be earlier than forty-five days nor later than ninety days from the date of the order.

The public shall be given notice of the initial hearing of the application for land registration by means of (1) publication; (2) mailing; and (3) posting.

1. By publication.

Upon receipt of the order of the court setting the time for initial hearing, the Commissioner of Land Registration shall cause notice of initial hearing to be published once in the Official Gazette and once in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines: Provided, however, that the publication in the Official Gazette shall be sufficient to confer jurisdiction upon the court. Said notice shall be addressed to all persons appearing to have an interest in the land involved including the adjoining owners so far as known, and "to all whom it may concern". Said notice shall also require all persons concerned to appear in court at a certain date and time to show cause why the prayer of said application shall not be granted.

2. By mailing.

(a) Mailing of notice to persons named in the application. The Commissioner of Land Registration shall also, within seven days after publication of said notice in the Official Gazette, as hereinbefore provided, cause a copy of the notice of initial hearing to be mailed to every person named in the notice whose address is known.

(b) Mailing of notice to the Secretary of Public Highways, the Provincial Governor and the Mayor. If the applicant requests to have the line of a public way or road determined, the Commissioner of Land Registration shall cause a copy of said notice of initial hearing to be mailed to the Secretary of Public Highways, to the Provincial Governor, and to the Mayor of the municipality or city, as the case may be, in which the land lies.

(c) Mailing of notice to the Secretary of Agrarian Reform, the Solicitor General, the Director of Lands, the Director of Public Works, the Director of Forest Development, the Director of Mines and the Director of Fisheries and Aquatic Resources. If the land borders on a river, navigable stream or shore, or on an arm of the sea where a river or harbor line has been established, or on a lake, or if it otherwise appears from the application or the proceedings that a tenant-farmer or the national government may have a claim adverse to that of the applicant, notice of the initial hearing shall be given in the same manner to the Secretary of Agrarian Reform, the Solicitor General, the Director of Lands, the Director of Mines and/or the Director of Fisheries and Aquatic Resources, as may be appropriate.

3. By posting.

The Commissioner of Land Registration shall also cause a duly attested copy of the notice of initial hearing to be posted by the sheriff of the province or city, as the case may be, or by his deputy, in a conspicuous place on each parcel of land included in the application and also in a conspicuous place on the bulletin board of the municipal building of the municipality or city in which the land or portion thereof is situated, fourteen days at least before the date of initial hearing.

The court may also cause notice to be served to such other persons and in such manner as it may deem proper.

The notice of initial hearing shall, in form, be substantially as follows:

(Caption and Title)

NOTICE OF INITIAL HEARING

To (here insert the names of all persons appearing to have an interest and the adjoining owners so far as known, and to all whom it may concern):

An application (or petition) having been filed in the above-entitled case by (full name and address) praying for the registration and confirmation (or for the settlement and adjudication, in case of petition in cadastral proceedings) of title to the following described lands:

(Insert description)

You are hereby served this notice to appear before this Court at its session to be held at _________________ on the ______________ day of _______________, 19 ______, at _____________ o'clock in the _________ then and there to present such claims as you may have to said lands or any portion thereof, and to submit evidence in support of such claim; and unless you appear at said Court at the time and place aforesaid, your default will be recorded and the title to the lands will be adjudicated and determined in accordance with law and the evidence before the Court, and thereafter you will forever be barred from contesting said application (or petition) or any decree entered thereon.

Witness, the Hon. ________________________ Judge of the Court of First Instance of _______ this _______ day of _________________, in the year 19______.

Attest:

Commissioner of Land Registration

Section 24. Proof of publication and notice. The certification of the Commissioner of Land Registration and of the sheriff concerned to the effect that the notice of initial hearing, as required by law, has been complied with shall be filed in the case before the date of initial hearing, and shall be conclusive proof of such fact.

Section 25. Opposition to application in ordinary proceedings. Any person claiming an interest, whether named in the notice or not, may appear and file an opposition on or before the date of initial hearing, or within such further time as may be allowed by the court. The opposition shall state all the objections to the application and shall set forth the interest claimed by the party filing the same and apply for the remedy desired, and shall be signed and sworn to by him or by some other duly authorized person.

If the opposition or the adverse claim of any person covers only a portion of the lot and said portion is not properly delimited on the plan attached to the application, or in case of undivided co-ownership, conflicting claims of ownership or possession, or overlapping of boundaries, the court may require the parties to submit a subdivision plan duly approved by the Director of Lands.

Section 26. Order of default; effect. If no person appears and answers within the time allowed, the court shall, upon motion of the applicant, no reason to the contrary appearing, order a default to be recorded and require the applicant to present evidence. By the description in the notice "To all Whom It May Concern", all the world are made parties defendant and shall be concluded by the default order.

Where an appearance has been entered and an answer filed, a default order shall be entered against persons who did not appear and answer.

C. HEARING JUDGMENT AND DECREE OF REGISTRATION

Section 27. Speedy hearing; reference to a referee. The trial court shall see to it that all registration-proceedings are disposed or within ninety days from the date the case is submitted for decision,

The Court, if it deems necessary, may refer the case or any part thereof to a referee who shall hear the parties and their evidence, and the referee shall submit his report thereon to the Court within fifteen days after the termination of such hearing. Hearing before a referee may be held at any convenient place within the province or city as may be fixed by him and after reasonable notice thereof shall have been served the parties concerned. The court may render judgment in accordance with the report as though the facts have been found by the judge himself: Provided, however, that the court may in its discretion accept the report, or set it aside in whole or in part, or order the case to be recommitted for further proceedings:

Section 28. Partial judgment. In a case where only a portion of the land subject of registration is contested, the court may render partial judgment provided that a subdivision plan showing the contested and uncontested portions approved by the Director of Lands is previously submitted to said court.

Section 29. Judgment confirming title. All conflicting claims of ownership and interest in the land subject of the application shall be determined by the court. If the court, after considering the evidence and the reports of the Commissioner of Land Registration and the Director of Lands, finds that the applicant or the oppositor has sufficient title proper for registration, judgment shall be rendered confirming the title of the applicant, or the oppositor, to the land or portions thereof.

Section 30. When judgment becomes final; duty to cause issuance of decree. The judgment rendered in a land registration proceedings becomes final upon the expiration of thirty days to be counted from the data of receipt of notice of the judgment. An appeal may be taken from the judgment of the court as in ordinary civil cases.

After judgment has become final and executory, it shall devolve upon the court to forthwith issue an order in accordance with Section 39 of this Decree to the Commissioner for the issuance of the decree of registration and the corresponding certificate of title in favor of the person adjudged entitled to registration.

Section 31. Decree of registration. Every decree of registration issued by the Commissioner shall bear the date, hour and minute of its entry, and shall be signed by him. It shall state whether the owner is married or unmarried, and if married, the name of the husband or wife: Provided, however, that if the land adjudicated by the court is conjugal property, the decree shall be issued in the name of both spouses. If the owner is under disability, it shall state the nature of disability, and if a minor, his age. It shall contain a description of the land as finally determined by the court, and shall set forth the estate of the owner, and also, in such manner as to show their relative priorities, all particular estates, mortgages, easements, liens, attachments, and other encumbrances, including rights of tenant-farmers, if any, to which the land or owner's estate is subject, as well as any other matters properly to be determined in pursuance of this Decree.

The decree of registration shall bind the land and quiet title thereto, subject only to such exceptions or liens as may be provided by law. It shall be conclusive upon and against all persons, including the National Government and all branches thereof, whether mentioned by name in the application or notice, the same being included in the general description "To all whom it may concern".

Section 32. Review of decree of registration; Innocent purchaser for value. The decree of registration shall not be reopened or revised by reason of absence, minority, or other disability of any person adversely affected thereby, nor by any proceeding in any court for reversing judgments, subject, however, to the right of any person, including the government and the branches thereof, deprived of land or of any estate or interest therein by such adjudication or confirmation of title obtained by actual fraud, to file in the proper Court of First Instance a petition for reopening and review of the decree of registration not later than one year from and after the date of the entry of such decree of registration, but in no case shall such petition be entertained by the court where an innocent purchaser for value has acquired the land or an interest therein, whose rights may be prejudiced. Whenever the phrase "innocent purchaser for value" or an equivalent phrase occurs in this Decree, it shall be deemed to include an innocent lessee, mortgagee, or other encumbrancer for value.

Upon the expiration of said period of one year, the decree of registration and the certificate of title issued shall become incontrovertible. Any person aggrieved by such decree of registration in any case may pursue his remedy by action for damages against the applicant or any other persons responsible for the fraud.

Section 33. Appeal from judgment, etc. The judgment and orders of the court hearing the land registration case are appealable to the Court of Appeals or to the Supreme Court in the same manner as in ordinary actions:

Section 34. Rules of procedure. The Rules of Court shall, insofar as not inconsistent with the provision of this Decree, be applicable to land registration and cadastral cases by analogy or in a suppletory character and whenever practicable and convenient.

II CADASTRAL REGISTRATION PROCEEDINGS

A. ORDER FOR SPEEDY SETTLEMENT AND ADJUDICATION; SURVEY; NOTICES

Section 35. Cadastral Survey preparatory to filing of petition.

(a) When in the opinion of the President of the Philippines public interest so requires that title to any unregistered lands be settled and adjudicated, he may to this end direct and order the Director of Lands to cause to be made a cadastral survey of the lands involved and the plans and technical description thereof prepared in due form.

(b) Thereupon, the Director of Lands shall give notice to persons claiming any interest in the lands as well as to the general public, of the day on which such survey will begin, giving as fully and accurately as possible the description of the lands to be surveyed. Such notice shall be punished once in the Official Gazette, and a copy of the notice in English or the national language shall be posted in a conspicuous place on the bulletin board of the municipal building of the municipality in which the lands or any portion thereof is situated. A copy of the notice shall also be sent to the mayor of such municipality as well as to the barangay captain and likewise to the Sangguniang Panlalawigan and the Sangguniang Bayan concerned.

(c) The Geodetic Engineers or other employees of the Bureau of Lands in charge of the survey shall give notice reasonably in advance of the date on which the survey of any portion of such lands is to begin, which notice shall be posted in the bulletin board of the municipal building of the municipality or barrio in which the lands are situated, and shall mark the boundaries of the lands by monuments set up in proper places thereon. It shall be lawful for such Geodetic Engineers and other employees to enter upon the lands whenever necessary for the purposes of such survey or the placing of monuments.

(d) It shall be the duty of every person claiming an interest in the lands to be surveyed, or in any parcel thereof, to communicate with the Geodetic Engineer upon his request therefor all information possessed by such person concerning the boundary lines of any lands to which he claims title or in which he claims any interest.

(e) Any person who shall willfully obstruct the making of any survey undertaken by the Bureau of Lands or by a licensed Geodetic Engineer duly authorized to conduct the survey under this Section, or shall maliciously interfere with the placing of any monument or remove such monument, or shall destroy or remove any notice of survey posted on the land pursuant to law, shall be punished by a fine of not more than one thousand pesos or by imprisonment for not more than one year, or both.

B. PETITION; LOT NUMBERS

Section 36. Petition for registration. When the lands have been surveyed or plotted, the Director of Lands, represented by the Solicitor General, shall institute original registration proceedings by filing the necessary petition in the Court of First Instance of the place where the land is situated against the holders, claimants, possessors, or occupants of such lands or any part thereof, stating in substance that public interest requires that the title to such lands be settled and adjudicated and praying that such titles be so settled and adjudicated:

The petition shall contain a description of the lands and shall be accompanied by a plan thereof, and may contain such other data as may serve to furnish full notice to the occupants of the lands and to all persons who may claim any right or interest therein.

Where the land consists of two or more parcels held or occupied by different persons, the plan shall indicate the boundaries or limits of the various parcels as accurately as possible. The parcels shall be known as "lots" and shall on the plan filed in the case be given separate numbers by the Director of Lands, which numbers shall be known as "cadastral lot numbers". The lots situated within each municipality shall, as far as practicable, be numbered consecutively beginning with number "one", and only one series of numbers shall be used for that purpose in each municipality. However in cities or townsites, a designation of the landholdings by blocks and lot numbers may be employed instead of the designation by cadastral lot numbers.

The cadastral number of a lot shall not be changed after final decision has been entered decreasing the registration thereof, except by order of court. Future subdivisions of any lot shall be designated by a letter or letters of the alphabet added to the cadastral number of the lot to which the respective subdivisions pertain. The letter with which a subdivision is designated shall be known as its "cadastral letter": Provided, however, that the subdivisions of cities or townsites may be designated by blocks and lot numbers.

C. ANSWER

Section 37. Answer to petition in cadastral proceedings. Any claimant in cadastral proceedings, whether named in the notice or not, shall appear before the court by himself or by some other authorized person in his behalf, and shall file an answer on or before the date of initial hearing or within such further time as may be allowed by the court. The answer shall be signed and sworn to by the claimant or by some other authorized person in his behalf, and shall state whether the claimant is married or unmarried, and if married, the name of the spouse and the date of marriage, his nationality, residence and postal address, and shall also contain:

(a) The age of the claimant;

(b) The cadastral number of the lot or lots claimed, as appearing on the plan filed in the case by the Director of Lands, or the block and lot numbers, as the case may be;

(c) The name of the barrio and municipality in which the lots are situated;

(d) The names and addresses of the owners of the adjoining lots so far as known to the claimant;

(e) If the claimant is in possession of the lots claimed and can show no express grant of the land by the government to him or to his predecessors-in-interest, the answer shall state the length of time he has held such possession and the manner in which it has been acquired, and shall also state the length of time, as far as known, during which the predecessors, if any, held possession;

(f) If the claimant is not in possession or occupation of the land, the answer shall fully set forth the interest claimed by him and the time and manner of his acquisition;

(g) if the lots have been assessed for taxation, their last assessed value; and

(h) The encumbrances, if any, affecting the lots and the names of adverse claimants, as far as known.

D. HEARING; JUDGMENT; DECREE

Section 38. Hearing, Judgment, Decree. The trial of the case may occur at any convenient place within the province in which the lands are situated and shall be conducted, and orders for default and confessions entered, in the same manner as in ordinary land registration proceedings and shall be governed by the same rules. All conflicting interests shall be adjudicated by the court and decrees awarded in favor of the persons entitled to the lands or to parts thereof and such decrees shall be the basis for issuance of original certificates of title in favor of said persons and shall have the same effect as certificates of title granted on application for registration of land under ordinary land registration proceedings.

CHAPTER IV CERTIFICATE OF TITLE

Section 39. Preparation of decree and Certificate of Title. After the judgment directing the registration of title to land has become final, the court shall, within fifteen days from entry of judgment, issue an order directing the Commissioner to issue the corresponding decree of registration and certificate of title. The clerk of court shall send, within fifteen days from entry of judgment, certified copies of the judgment and of the order of the court directing the Commissioner to issue the corresponding decree of registration and certificate of title, and a certificate stating that the decision has not been amended, reconsidered, nor appealed, and has become final. Thereupon, the Commissioner shall cause to be prepared the decree of registration as well as the original and duplicate of the corresponding original certificate of title. The original certificate of title shall be a true copy of the decree of registration. The decree of registration shall be signed by the Commissioner, entered and filed in the Land Registration Commission. The original of the original certificate of title shall also be signed by the Commissioner and shall be sent, together with the owner's duplicate certificate, to the Register of Deeds of the city or province where the property is situated for entry in his registration book.

Section 40. Entry of Original Certificate of Title. Upon receipt by the Register of Deeds of the original and duplicate copies of the original certificate of title the same shall be entered in his record book and shall be numbered, dated, signed and sealed by the Register of Deeds with the seal of his office. Said certificate of title shall take effect upon the date of entry thereof. The Register of Deeds shall forthwith send notice by mail to the registered owner that his owner's duplicate is ready for delivery to him upon payment of legal fees.

Section 41. Owner's duplicate certificate of title. The owner's duplicate certificate of title shall be delivered to the registered owner or to his duly authorized representative. If two or more persons are registered owners, one owner's duplicate certificate may be issued for the whole land, or if the co-owners so desire, a separate duplicate may be issued to each of them in like form, but all outstanding certificates of title so issued shall be surrendered whenever the Register of Deeds shall register any subsequent voluntary transaction affecting the whole land or part thereof or any interest therein. The Register of Deeds shall note on each certificate of title a statement as to whom a copy thereof was issued.

Section 42. Registration Books. The original copy of the original certificate of title shall be filed in the Registry of Deeds. The same shall be bound in consecutive order together with similar certificates of title and shall constitute the registration book for titled properties.

Section 43. Transfer Certificate of Title. The subsequent certificate of title that may be issued by the Register of Deeds pursuant to any voluntary or involuntary instrument relating to the same land shall be in like form, entitled "Transfer Certificate of Title", and likewise issued in duplicate. The certificate shall show the number of the next previous certificate covering the same land and also the fact that it was originally registered, giving the record number, the number of the original certificate of title, and the volume and page of the registration book in which the latter is found.

Section 44. Statutory liens affecting title. Every registered owner receiving a certificate of title in pursuance of a decree of registration, and every subsequent purchaser of registered land taking a certificate of title for value and in good faith, shall hold the same free from all encumbrances except those noted in said certificate and any of the following encumbrances which may be subsisting, namely:

First. Liens, claims or rights arising or existing under the laws and Constitution of the Philippines which are not by law required to appear of record in the Registry of Deeds in order to be valid against subsequent purchasers or encumbrancers of record.

Second. Unpaid real estate taxes levied and assessed within two years immediately preceding the acquisition of any right over the land by an innocent purchaser for value, without prejudice to the right of the government to collect taxes payable before that period from the delinquent taxpayer alone.

Third. Any public highway or private way established or recognized by law, or any government irrigation canal or lateral thereof, if the certificate of title does not state that the boundaries of such highway or irrigation canal or lateral thereof have been determined.

Fourth. Any disposition of the property or limitation on the use thereof by virtue of, or pursuant to, Presidential Decree No. 27 or any other law or regulations on agrarian reform.

Section 45. Statement of personal circumstances in the certificate. Every certificate of title shall set forth the full names of all persons whose interests make up the full ownership in the whole land, including their civil status, and the names of their respective spouses, if married, as well as their citizenship, residence and postal address. If the property covered belongs to the conjugal partnership, it shall be issued in the names of both spouses.

Section 46. General incidents of registered land. Registered land shall be subject to such burdens and incidents as may arise by operation of law. Nothing contained in this decree shall in any way be construed to relieve registered land or the owners thereof from any rights incident to the relation of husband and wife, landlord and tenant, or from liability to attachment or levy on execution, or from liability to any lien of any description established by law on the land and the buildings thereon, or on the interest of the owner in such land or buildings, or to change the laws of descent, or the rights of partition between co-owners, or the right to take the same by eminent domain, or to relieve such land from liability to be recovered by an assignee in insolvency or trustee in bankcruptcy under the laws relative to preferences, or to change or affect in any way other rights or liabilities created by law and applicable to unregistered land, except as otherwise provided in this Decree.

Section 47. Registered land not subject to prescriptions. No title to registered land in derogation of the title of the registered owner shall be acquired by prescription or adverse possession.

Section 48. Certificate not subject to collateral attack. A certificate of title shall not be subject to collateral attack. It cannot be altered, modified, or canceled except in a direct proceeding in accordance with law.

Section 49. Splitting, or consolidation of titles. A registered owner of several distinct parcels of land embraced in and covered by a certificate of title desiring in lieu thereof separate certificates, each containing one or more parcels, may file a written request for that purpose with the Register of Deeds concerned, and the latter, upon the surrender of the owner's duplicate, shall cancel it together with its original and issue in lieu thereof separate certificates as desired. A registered owner of several distinct parcels of land covered by separate certificates of title desiring to have in lieu thereof a single certificate for the whole land, or several certificates for the different parcels thereof, may also file a written request with the Register of Deeds concerned, and the latter, upon the surrender of the owner's duplicates, shall cancel them together with their originals, and issue in lieu thereof one or separate certificates as desired.

Section 50. Subdivision and consolidation plans. Any owner subdividing a tract of registered land into lots which do not constitute a subdivision project has defined and provided for under P.D. No. 957, shall file with the Commissioner of Land Registration or with the Bureau of Lands a subdivision plan of such land on which all boundaries, streets, passageways and waterways, if any, shall be distinctly and accurately delineated.

If a subdivision plan, be it simple or complex, duly approved by the Commissioner of Land Registration or the Bureau of Lands together with the approved technical descriptions and the corresponding owner's duplicate certificate of title is presented for registration, the Register of Deeds shall, without requiring further court approval of said plan, register the same in accordance with the provisions of the Land Registration Act, as amended: Provided, however, that the Register of Deeds shall annotate on the new certificate of title covering the street, passageway or open space, a memorandum to the effect that except by way of donation in favor of the national government, province, city or municipality, no portion of any street, passageway, waterway or open space so delineated on the plan shall be closed or otherwise disposed of by the registered owner without the approval of the Court of First Instance of the province or city in which the land is situated.

A registered owner desiring to consolidate several lots into one or more, requiring new technical descriptions, shall file with the Land Registration Commission, a consolidation plan on which shall be shown the lots to be affected, as they were before, and as they will appear after the consolidation. Upon the surrender of the owner's duplicate certificates and the receipt of consolidation plan duty approved by the Commission, the Register of Deeds concerned shall cancel the corresponding certificates of title and issue a new one for the consolidated lots.

The Commission may not order or cause any change, modification, or amendment in the contents of any certificate of title, or of any decree or plan, including the technical description therein, covering any real property registered under the Torrens system, nor order the cancellation of the said certificate of title and the issuance of a new one which would result in the enlargement of the area covered by the certificate of title.

CHAPTER V SUBSEQUENT REGISTRATION

I VOLUNTARY DEALINGS WITH REGISTERED LANDS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 51. Conveyance and other dealings by registered owner. An owner of registered land may convey, mortgage, lease, charge or otherwise deal with the same in accordance with existing laws. He may use such forms of deeds, mortgages, leases or other voluntary instruments as are sufficient in law. But no deed, mortgage, lease, or other voluntary instrument, except a will purporting to convey or affect registered land shall take effect as a conveyance or bind the land, but shall operate only as a contract between the parties and as evidence of authority to the Register of Deeds to make registration.

The act of registration shall be the operative act to convey or affect the land insofar as third persons are concerned, and in all cases under this Decree, the registration shall be made in the office of the Register of Deeds for the province or city where the land lies.

Section 52. Constructive notice upon registration. Every conveyance, mortgage, lease, lien, attachment, order, judgment, instrument or entry affecting registered land shall, if registered, filed or entered in the office of the Register of Deeds for the province or city where the land to which it relates lies, be constructive notice to all persons from the time of such registering, filing or entering.

Section 53. Presentation of owner's duplicate upon entry of new certificate. No voluntary instrument shall be registered by the Register of Deeds, unless the owner's duplicate certificate is presented with such instrument, except in cases expressly provided for in this Decree or upon order of the court, for cause shown.

The production of the owner's duplicate certificate, whenever any voluntary instrument is presented for registration, shall be conclusive authority from the registered owner to the Register of Deeds to enter a new certificate or to make a memorandum of registration in accordance with such instrument, and the new certificate or memorandum shall be binding upon the registered owner and upon all persons claiming under him, in favor of every purchaser for value and in good faith.

In all cases of registration procured by fraud, the owner may pursue all his legal and equitable remedies against the parties to such fraud without prejudice, however, to the rights of any innocent holder for value of a certificate of title. After the entry of the decree of registration on the original petition or application, any subsequent registration procured by the presentation of a forged duplicate certificate of title, or a forged deed or other instrument, shall be null and void.

Section 54. Dealings less than ownership, how registered. No new certificate shall be entered or issued pursuant to any instrument which does not divest the ownership or title from the owner or from the transferee of the registered owners. All interests in registered land less than ownership shall be registered by filing with the Register of Deeds the instrument which creates or transfers or claims such interests and by a brief memorandum thereof made by the Register of Deeds upon the certificate of title, and signed by him. A similar memorandum shall also be made on the owner's duplicate. The cancellation or extinguishment of such interests shall be registered in the same manner.

Section 55. Grantee's name, nationality, etc., to be stated. Every deed or other voluntary instrument presented for registration shall contain or have endorsed upon it the full name, nationality, residence and postal address of the grantee or other person acquiring or claiming an interest under such instrument, and every deed shall also state whether the grantee is married or unmarried, and if married, the name in full of the husband or wife. If the grantee is a corporation or association, the instrument must contain a recital to show that such corporation or association is legally qualified to acquire private lands. Any change in the residence or postal address of such person shall be endorsed by the Register of Deeds on the original copy of the corresponding certificate of title, upon receiving a sworn statement of such change. All names and addresses shall also be entered on all certificates.

Notices and processed issued in relation to registered land in pursuance of this Decree may be served upon any person in interest by mailing the same to the addresses given, and shall be binding, whether such person resides within or without the Philippines, but the court may, in its discretion, require further or other notice to be given in any case, if in its opinion the interest of justice so requires.

Section 56. Primary Entry Book; fees; certified copies. Each Register of Deeds shall keep a primary entry book in which, upon payment of the entry fee, he shall enter, in the order of their reception, all instruments including copies of writs and processes filed with him relating to registered land. He shall, as a preliminary process in registration, note in such book the date, hour and minute of reception of all instruments, in the order in which they were received. They shall be regarded as registered from the time so noted, and the memorandum of each instrument, when made on the certificate of title to which it refers, shall bear the same date: Provided, that the national government as well as the provincial and city governments shall be exempt from the payment of such fees in advance in order to be entitled to entry and registration.

Every deed or other instrument, whether voluntary or involuntary, so filed with the Register of Deeds shall be numbered and indexed and endorsed with a reference to the proper certificate of title. All records and papers relative to registered land in the office of the Register of Deeds shall be open to the public in the same manner as court records, subject to such reasonable regulations as the Register of Deeds, under the direction of the Commissioner of Land Registration, may prescribe.

All deeds and voluntary instruments shall be presented with their respective copies and shall be attested and sealed by the Register of Deeds, endorsed with the file number, and copies may be delivered to the person presenting them.

Certified copies of all instruments filed and registered may also be obtained from the Register of Deeds upon payment of the prescribed fees.

(A) CONVEYANCES AND TRANSFERS

Section 57. Procedure in registration of conveyances. An owner desiring to convey his registered land in fee simple shall execute and register a deed of conveyance in a form sufficient in law. The Register of Deeds shall thereafter make out in the registration book a new certificate of title to the grantee and shall prepare and deliver to him an owner's duplicate certificate. The Register of Deeds shall note upon the original and duplicate certificate the date of transfer, the volume and page of the registration book in which the new certificate is registered and a reference by number to the last preceding certificate. The original and the owner's duplicate of the grantor's certificate shall be stamped "canceled". The deed of conveyance shall be filled and indorsed with the number and the place of registration of the certificate of title of the land conveyed.

Section 58. Procedure where conveyance involves portion of land. If a deed or conveyance is for a part only of the land described in a certificate of title, the Register of Deeds shall not enter any transfer certificate to the grantee until a plan of such land showing all the portions or lots into which it has been subdivided and the corresponding technical descriptions shall have been verified and approved pursuant to Section 50 of this Decree. Meanwhile, such deed may only be annotated by way of memorandum upon the grantor's certificate of title, original and duplicate, said memorandum to serve as a notice to third persons of the fact that certain unsegregated portion of the land described therein has been conveyed, and every certificate with such memorandum shall be effectual for the purpose of showing the grantee's title to the portion conveyed to him, pending the actual issuance of the corresponding certificate in his name.

Upon the approval of the plan and technical descriptions, the original of the plan, together with a certified copy of the technical descriptions shall be filed with the Register of Deeds for annotation in the corresponding certificate of title and thereupon said officer shall issue a new certificate of title to the grantee for the portion conveyed, and at the same time cancel the grantor's certificate partially with respect only to said portion conveyed, or, if the grantor so desires, his certificate may be canceled totally and a new one issued to him describing therein the remaining portion: Provided, however, that pending approval of said plan, no further registration or annotation of any subsequent deed or other voluntary instrument involving the unsegregated portion conveyed shall be effected by the Register of Deeds, except where such unsegregated portion was purchased from the Government or any of its instrumentalities. If the land has been subdivided into several lots, designated by numbers or letters, the Register of Deeds may, if desired by the grantor, instead of canceling the latter's certificate and issuing a new one to the same for the remaining unconveyed lots, enter on said certificate and on its owner's duplicate a memorandum of such deed of conveyance and of the issuance of the transfer certificate to the grantee for the lot or lots thus conveyed, and that the grantor's certificate is canceled as to such lot or lots.

Section 59. Carry over of encumbrances. If, at the time of any transfer, subsisting encumbrances or annotations appear in the registration book, they shall be carried over and stated in the new certificate or certificates; except so far as they may be simultaneously released or discharged.

(B) MORTGAGES AND LEASES

Section 60. Mortgage or lease of registered land. Mortgage and leases shall be registered in the manner provided in Section 54 of this Decree. The owner of registered land may mortgage or lease it by executing the deed in a form sufficient in law. Such deed of mortgage or lease and all instruments which assign, extend, discharge or otherwise deal with the mortgage or lease shall be registered, and shall take effect upon the title only from time of registration.

No mortgagee's or lessee's duplicate certificate of title shall hereafter be issued by the Registers of Deeds, and those issued prior to the effectivity of this Decree are hereby deemed canceled and the holders thereof shall immediately surrender the same to the Register of Deeds concerned.

Section 61. Registration. Upon presentation for registration of the deed of mortgage or lease together with the owner's duplicate, the Register of Deeds shall enter upon the original of the certificate of title and also upon the owner's duplicate certificate a memorandum thereof, the date and time of filing and the file number assigned to the deed, and shall sign the said memorandum. He shall also note on the deed the date and time of filing and a reference to the volume and page of the registration book in which it is registered.

Section 62. Discharge or cancellation. A mortgage or lease on registered land may be discharge or canceled by means of an instrument executed by the mortgage or lessee in a form sufficient in law, which shall be filed with the Register of Deeds who shall make the appropriate memorandum upon the certificate of title.

Section 63. Foreclosure of Mortgage. (a) If the mortgage was foreclosed judicially, a certified copy of the final order of the court confirming the sale shall be registered with the Register of Deeds. If no right of redemption exists, the certificate of title of the mortgagor shall be canceled, and a new certificate issued in the name of the purchaser.

Where the right of redemption exists, the certificate of title of the mortgagor shall not be canceled, but the certificate of sale and the order confirming the sale shall be registered by a brief memorandum thereof made by the Register of Deeds upon the certificate of title. In the event the property is redeemed, the certificate or deed of redemption shall be filed with the Register of Deeds, and a brief memorandum thereof shall be made by the Register of Deeds on the certificate of title of the mortgagor.

If the property is not redeemed, the final deed of sale executed by the sheriff in favor of the purchaser at a foreclosure sale shall be registered with the Register of Deeds; whereupon the title of the mortgagor shall be canceled, and a new certificate issued in the name of the purchaser.

(b) If the mortgage was foreclosed extrajudicially, a certificate of sale executed by the officer who conducted the sale shall be filed with the Register of Deeds who shall make a brief memorandum thereof on the certificate of title.

In the event of redemption by the mortgagor, the same rule provided for in the second paragraph of this section shall apply.

In case of non-redemption, the purchaser at foreclosure sale shall file with the Register of Deeds, either a final deed of sale executed by the person authorized by virtue of the power of attorney embodied in the deed of mortgage, or his sworn statement attesting to the fact of non-redemption; whereupon, the Register of Deeds shall issue a new certificate in favor of the purchaser after the owner's duplicate of the certificate has been previously delivered and canceled.

(C) POWERS OF ATTORNEY; TRUSTS

Section 64. Power of attorney. Any person may, by power of attorney, convey or otherwise deal with registered land and the same shall be registered with the Register of Deeds of the province or city where the land lies. Any instrument revoking such power of attorney shall be registered in like manner.

Section 65. Trusts in registered land. If a deed or other instrument is filed in order to transfer registered land in trust, or upon any equitable condition or limitation expressed therein, or to create or declare a trust or other equitable interests in such land without transfer, the particulars of the trust, condition, limitation or other equitable interest shall not be entered on the certificate; but only a memorandum thereof shall be entered by the words "in trust", or "upon condition", or other apt words, and by a reference by number to the instrument authorizing or creating the same. A similar memorandum shall be made upon the original instrument creating or declaring the trust or other equitable interest with a reference by number to the certificate of title to which it relates and to the volume and page in the registration book in which it is registered.

Section 66. Trust with power of sale, etc., how expressed. If the instrument creating or declaring a trust or other equitable interest contains an express power to sell, mortgage or deal with the land in any manner, such power shall be stated in the certificate of title by the words "with power to sell", or "power to mortgage", or by apt words of description in case of other powers. No instrument which transfers, mortgages or in any way deals with registered land in trust shall be registered, unless the enabling power thereto is expressly conferred in the trust instrument, or unless a final judgment or order of a court of competent jurisdiction has construed the instrument in favor of the power, in which case a certified copy of such judgment or order may be registered.

Section 67. Judicial appointment of new trustee. If a new trustee of registered land is appointed by a court of competent jurisdiction, a new certificate may be issued to him upon presentation to the Register of Deeds of a certified copy of the order or judicial appointment and the surrender for cancellation of the duplicate certificate.

Section 68. Implied, trusts, how established. Whoever claims an interest in registered land by reason of any implied or constructive trust shall file for registration with the Register of Deeds a sworn statement thereof containing a description of the land, the name of the registered owner and a reference to the number of the certificate of title. Such claim shall not affect the title of a purchaser for value and in good faith before its registration.

II INVOLUNTARY DEALINGS

Section 69. Attachments. An attachment, or a copy of any writ, order or process issued by a court of record, intended to create or preserve any lien, status, right, or attachment upon registered land, shall be filed and registered in the Registry of Deeds for the province or city in which the land lies, and, in addition to the particulars required in such papers for registration, shall contain a reference to the number of the certificate of title to be affected and the registered owner or owners thereof, and also if the attachment, order, process or lien is not claimed on all the land in any certificate of title a description sufficiently accurate for identification of the land or interest intended to be affected. A restraining order, injunction or mandamus issued by the court shall be entered and registered on the certificate of title affected, free of charge.

Section 70. Adverse claim. Whoever claims any part or interest in registered land adverse to the registered owner, arising subsequent to the date of the original registration, may, if no other provision is made in this Decree for registering the same, make a statement in writing setting forth fully his alleged right or interest, and how or under whom acquired, a reference to the number of the certificate of title of the registered owner, the name of the registered owner, and a description of the land in which the right or interest is claimed.

The statement shall be signed and sworn to, and shall state the adverse claimant's residence, and a place at which all notices may be served upon him. This statement shall be entitled to registration as an adverse claim on the certificate of title. The adverse claim shall be effective for a period of thirty days from the date of registration. After the lapse of said period, the annotation of adverse claim may be canceled upon filing of a verified petition therefor by the party in interest: Provided, however, that after cancellation, no second adverse claim based on the same ground shall be registered by the same claimant.

Before the lapse of thirty days aforesaid, any party in interest may file a petition in the Court of First Instance where the land is situated for the cancellation of the adverse claim, and the court shall grant a speedy hearing upon the question of the validity of such adverse claim, and shall render judgment as may be just and equitable. If the adverse claim is adjudged to be invalid, the registration thereof shall be ordered canceled. If, in any case, the court, after notice and hearing, shall find that the adverse claim thus registered was frivolous, it may fine the claimant in an amount not less than one thousand pesos nor more than five thousand pesos, in its discretion. Before the lapse of thirty days, the claimant may withdraw his adverse claim by filing with the Register of Deeds a sworn petition to that effect.

Section 71. Surrender of certificate in involuntary dealings. If an attachment or other lien in the nature of involuntary dealing in registered land is registered, and the duplicate certificate is not presented at the time of registration, the Register of Deeds shall, within thirty-six hours thereafter, send notice by mail to the registered owner, stating that such paper has been registered, and requesting him to send or produce his duplicate certificate so that a memorandum of the attachment or other lien may be made thereon. If the owner neglects or refuses to comply within a reasonable time, the Register of Deeds shall report the matter to the court, and it shall, after notice, enter an order to the owner, to produce his certificate at a time and place named therein, and may enforce the order by suitable process.

Section 72. Dissolution, etc. of attachments, etc. Attachments and liens of every description upon registered land shall be continued, reduced, discharged and dissolved by any method sufficient in law, and to give effect to the continuance, reduction, discharge or dissolution thereof the certificate or other instrument for that purpose shall be registered with the Register of Deeds.

Section 73. Registration of orders of court, etc. If an attachment is continued, reduced, dissolved, or otherwise affected by an order, decision or judgment of the court where the action or proceedings in which said attachment was made is pending or by an order of a court having jurisdiction thereof, a certificate of the entry of such order, decision or judgment from the clerk of court or the judge by which such decision, order or judgment has been rendered and under the seal of the court, shall be entitled to be registered upon presentation to the Register of Deeds.

Section 74. Enforcement of liens on registered land. Whenever registered land is solved on execution, or taken or sold for taxes or for any assessment or to enforce a lien of any character, or for any costs and charges incident to such liens, any execution or copy of execution, any officer's return, or any deed, demand, certificate, or affidavit, or other instrument made in the course of the proceedings to enforce such liens and required by law to be recorded, shall be filed with the Register of Deeds of the province or city where the land lies and registered in the registration book, and a memorandum made upon the proper certificate of title in each case as lien or encumbrance.

Section 75. Application for new certificate upon expiration of redemption period. Upon the expiration of the time, if any, allowed by law for redemption after registered land has been sold on execution taken or sold for the enforcement of a lien of any description, except a mortgage lien, the purchaser at such sale or anyone claiming under him may petition the court for the entry of a new certificate of title to him.

Before the entry of a new certificate of title, the registered owner may pursue all legal and equitable remedies to impeach or annul such proceedings.

Section 76. Notice of lis pendens. No action to recover possession of real estate, or to quiet title thereto, or to remove clouds upon the title thereof, or for partition, or other proceedings of any kind in court directly affecting the title to land or the use or occupation thereof or the buildings thereon, and no judgment, and no proceeding to vacate or reverse any judgment, shall have any effect upon registered land as against persons other than the parties thereto, unless a memorandum or notice stating the institution of such action or proceeding and the court wherein the same is pending, as well as the date of the institution thereof, together with a reference to the number of the certificate of title, and an adequate description of the land affected and the registered owner thereof, shall have been filed and registered.

Section 77. Cancellation of lis pendens. Before final judgment, a notice of lis pendens may be canceled upon order of the court, after proper showing that the notice is for the purpose of molesting the adverse party, or that it is not necessary to protect the rights of the party who caused it to be registered. It may also be canceled by the Register of Deeds upon verified petition of the party who caused the registration thereof.

At any time after final judgment in favor of the defendant, or other disposition of the action such as to terminate finally all rights of the plaintiff in and to the land and/or buildings involved, in any case in which a memorandum or notice of lis pendens has been registered as provided in the preceding section, the notice of lis pendens shall be deemed canceled upon the registration of a certificate of the clerk of court in which the action or proceeding was pending stating the manner of disposal thereof.

CHAPTER VI REGISTRATION OF JUDGMENTS; ORDERS; PARTITIONS

Section 78. Judgment for Plaintiff. Whenever in any action to recover possession or ownership of real estate or any interest therein affecting registered land judgment is entered for the plaintiff, such judgment shall be entitled to registration on presentation of a certificate of the entry thereof from the clerk of court where the action is pending to the Register of Deeds for the province or city where the land lies, who shall enter a memorandum upon the certificate of title of the land to which such judgment relates. If the judgment does not apply to all the land described in the certificate of title, the certificate of the clerk of the court where the action is pending and the memorandum entered by the Register of Deeds shall contain a description of the land affected by the judgment.

Section 79. Judgment adjudicating ownership. When in any action to recover the ownership of real estate or an interest therein execution has been issued in favor of the plaintiff, the latter shall be entitled to the entry of a new certificate of title and to the cancellation of the original certificate and owner's duplicate of the former registered owner. If the registered owner neglects or refuses within a reasonable time after request of the plaintiff to produce his duplicate certificate in order that the same may be canceled, the court shall, on application and after notice, enter an order to the owner to produce his certificate at the time and place designated, and may enforce the order by suitable process.

Section 80. Execution of deed by virtue of judgment. Every court rendering judgment in favor of the plaintiff affecting registered land shall, upon petition of said plaintiff, order and parties before it to execute for registration any deed or instrument necessary to give effect to the judgment, and shall require the registered owner to deliver his duplicate certificate to the plaintiff or to the Register of Deeds to be canceled or to have a memorandum annotated upon it. In case the person required to execute any deed or other instrument necessary to give effect to the judgment is absent from the Philippines, or is a minor, or insane, or for any reason not amenable to the process of the court rendering the judgment, said court may appoint a suitable person as trustee to execute such instrument which, when executed, shall be entitled to registration.

Section 81. Judgment of partition. In proceedings for partition of registered land, after the entry of the final judgment of partition, a copy of such final judgment, certified by the clerk of the court rendering the same, shall be filed and registered; thereupon, if the land is set of to the owners in severalty, each owner shall be entitled to have his certificate entered showing the share set off to him in severalty, and to receive an owner's duplicate thereof.

If the land is ordered by the court to be sold, the purchaser or his assigns shall be entitled to certificate of title entered in his or their favor upon presenting a certified copy of the judgment confirming the sale.

In case the land is ordered by the court to be assigned to one of the parties upon payment to the others of the sum ordered by the court, the party to whom the land is thus assigned shall be entitled to have a certificate of title entered in his favor upon presenting a certified copy of the judgment: Provided, however, that any new certificate entered in pursuance of partition proceedings, whether by way of set-off or of assignment or of sale, shall contain a reference memorandum to the final judgment of partition, and shall be conclusive as to the title to the same extent and against the same persons as such judgment is made conclusive by the laws applicable thereto: and provided, further, that any person holding such certificate of title or a transfer thereof shall have the right to petition the court at any time to cancel the memorandum relating to such judgment or order and the court, after notice and hearing, may grant the petition. Such certificate shall thereafter be conclusive in the same manner and to the same extent as other certificates of title.

Section 82. Registration of prior registered mortgaged or lease on partitioned property. If a certified copy of a final judgment or decree of partition is presented and it appears that a mortgage or lease affecting a specific portion or an undivided share of the premises had previously been registered, the Register of Deeds shall carry over such encumbrance on the certificate of title that may be issued.

Section 83. Notice of insolvency. Whenever proceeding in bankruptcy or insolvency, or analogous proceedings, are instituted against a debtor who owns registered land, it shall be the duty of the officer serving the notice of the institution of such proceedings on the debtor to file a copy thereof with the office of the Register of Deeds for the province or city where the land of the debtor lies. The assignee or trustee appointed by the court in such proceedings shall be entitled to the entry of a new certificate of the registered land of the debtor or bankrupt, upon presenting and filing a certified copy of the assignment in insolvency or order or adjudication in bankruptcy with the insolvent's or bankrupt's duplicate certificate of title; but the new certificate shall state that it is entered to him as assignee in insolvency or trustee in bankruptcy or other proceedings, as the case may be.

Section 84. Judgment or order vacating insolvency proceedings. Whenever any of the proceedings of the character named in the preceding section against a registered owner, of which notice has been registered, is vacated by judgment, a certified copy of the judgment or order may be registered. Where a new certificate has been entered in the name of the assignee or trustee, such certificate shall be surrendered for cancellation and forthwith the debtor shall be entitled to the entry of a new certificate to him.

Section 85. Land taken by eminent domain. Whenever any registered land, or interest therein, is expropriated or taken by eminent domain, the National Government, province, city, municipality, or any other agency or instrumentality exercising such right shall file for registration in the proper Registry a certified copy of the judgment which shall state definitely, by an adequate description, the particular property or interest expropriated, the number of the certificate of title, and the nature of the public use. A memorandum of the right or interest taken shall be made on each certificate of title by the Register of Deeds, and where the fee simple title is taken, a new certificate shall be issued in favor of the National Government, province, city, municipality, or any other agency or instrumentality exercising such right for the land so taken. The legal expenses incident to the memorandum of registration or issuances incident to the memorandum of registration or issuance of a new certificate shall be for the account of the authority taking the land or interest therein.

Section 86. Extrajudicial settlement of estate. When a deed of extrajudicial settlement has been duly registered, the Register of Deeds shall annotate on the proper title the two-year lien mentioned in Section 4 of Rule 74 of the Rules of Court. Upon the expiration of the two-year period and presentation of a verified petition by the registered heirs, devisees or legatees or any other party in interest that no claim or claims of any creditor, heir or other person exist, the Register of Deeds shall cancel the two-year lien noted on the title without the necessity of a court order. The verified petition shall be entered in the Primary Entry Book and a memorandum thereof made on the title.

No deed of extrajudicial settlement or affidavit of adjudication shall be registered unless the fact of extrajudicial settlement or adjudication is published once a week for three consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the province and proof thereof is filed with the Register of Deeds. The proof may consist of the certification of the publisher, printer, his foreman or principal clerk, or of the editor, business or advertising manager of the newspaper concerned, or a copy of each week's issue of the newspaper wherein the publication appeared.

Section 87. Filing of letters of administration and will. Before the executor or administrator of the estate of a deceased owner of registered land may deal with the same, he shall file with the office of the Register of Deeds a certified copy of his letters of administration or if there is a will, a certified copy thereof and the order allowing the same, together with the letters testamentary or of administration with the will annexed, as the case may be, and shall produce the duplicate certificate of title, and thereupon the Register of Deeds shall enter upon the certificate a memorandum thereof, making reference to the letters and/or will by their file number, and the date of filing the same.

Section 88. Dealings by administering subject to court approval. After a memorandum of the will, if any, and order allowing the same, and letters testamentary or letters of administration have been entered upon the certificate of title as hereinabove provided, the executor or administrator may alienate or encumber registered land belonging to the estate, or any interest therein, upon approval of the court obtained as provided by the Rules of Court.

Section 89. Land devised to executor. When it appears by will, a certified copy of which with letters testamentary had already been filed as provided in this Decree, that registered land is devised to the executor to his own use, or upon some trust, the executor may have the land transferred to himself upon the register in like manner and subject to like terms and conditions and to like rights as in the case of a transfer pursuant to a deed filed in the office of the Register of Deeds.

Section 90. When executor empowered by will to sell, etc. When the will of a deceased owner of registered lands, or an interest therein, empowers the executor to sell, convey, encumber, charge or otherwise deal with the land, a certified copy of the will and letters testamentary being filed as provided in this Decree, such executor may sell, convey, encumber, charge or otherwise deal with the land pursuant to the power in like manner as if he were registered owner, subject to the terms and conditions and limitations expressed in the will.

Section 91. Transfer in anticipation of final distribution. Whenever the court having jurisdiction of the testate or intestate proceedings directs the executor or administrator to take over and transfer to the devisees or heirs, or any of them, in anticipation of final distribution a portion or the whole of the registered land to which they might be entitled on final distribution, upon the filing of a certified copy of such order in the office of the Register of Deeds, the executor or administratory may cause such transfer to be made upon the register in like manner as in case of a sale, and upon the presentation of the owner's duplicate certificate to the Register of Deeds, the devisees or heirs concerned shall be entitled to the issuance of the corresponding certificates of title.

Section 92. Registration of final distribution of estate. A certified copy of the partition and distribution, together with the final judgment or order of the court approving the same or otherwise making final distribution, supported by evidence of payment of estate taw or exemption therefrom, as the case may be, shall be filed with the Register of Deeds, and upon the presentation of the owner's duplicate certificate of title, new certificates of title shall be issued to the parties severally entitled thereto in accordance with the approved partition and distribution.

CHAPTER VII ASSURANCE FUND

Section 93. Contribution to Assurance Fund. Upon the entry of a certificate of title in the name of the registered owner, and also upon the original registration on the certificate of title of a building or other improvements on the land covered by said certificate, as well as upon the entry of a certificate pursuant to any subsequent transfer of registered land, there shall be paid to the Register of Deeds one-fourth of one per cent of the assessed value of the real estate on the basis of the last assessment for taxation purposes, as contribution to the Assurance Fund. Where the land involved has not yet been assessed for taxation, its value for purposes of this decree shall be determined by the sworn declaration of two disinterested persons to the effect that the value fixed by them is to their knowledge, a fair valuation.

Nothing in this section shall in any way preclude the court from increasing the valuation of the property should it appear during the hearing that the value stated is too small.

Section 94. Custody and investment of fund. All money received by the Register of Deeds under the preceding section shall be paid to the National Treasurer. He shall keep this money in an Assurance Fund which may be invested in the manner and form authorized by law, and shall report annually to the Commissioner of the Budget the condition and income thereof.

The income of the Assurance Fund shall be added to the principal until said fund amounts to five hundred thousand pesos, in which event the excess income from investments as well as from the collections of such fund shall be paid into the National Treasury to the account of the Assurance Fund.

Section 95. Action for compensation from funds. A person who, without negligence on his part, sustains loss or damage, or is deprived of land or any estate or interest therein in consequence of the bringing of the land under the operation of the Torrens system of arising after original registration of land, through fraud or in consequence of any error, omission, mistake or misdescription in any certificate of title or in any entry or memorandum in the registration book, and who by the provisions of this Decree is barred or otherwise precluded under the provision of any law from bringing an action for the recovery of such land or the estate or interest therein, may bring an action in any court of competent jurisdiction for the recovery of damages to be paid out of the Assurance Fund.

Section 96. Against whom action filed. If such action is brought to recover for loss or damage or for deprivation of land or of any estate or interest therein arising wholly through fraud, negligence, omission, mistake or misfeasance of the court personnel, Register of Deeds, his deputy, or other employees of the Registry in the performance of their respective duties, the action shall be brought against the Register of Deeds of the province or city where the land is situated and the National Treasurer as defendants. But if such action is brought to recover for loss or damage or for deprivation of land or of any interest therein arising through fraud, negligence, omission, mistake or misfeasance of person other than court personnel, the Register of Deeds, his deputy or other employees of the Registry, such action shall be brought against the Register of Deeds, the National Treasurer and other person or persons, as co-defendants. It shall be the duty of the Solicitor General in person or by representative to appear and to defend all such suits with the aid of the fiscal of the province or city where the land lies: Provided, however, that nothing in this Decree shall be construed to deprive the plaintiff of any right of action which he may have against any person for such loss or damage or deprivation without joining the National Treasurer as party defendant. In every action filed against the Assurance Fund, the court shall consider the report of the Commissioner of Land Registration.

Section 97. Judgment, how satisfied. If there are defendants other than the National Treasurer and the Register of Deeds and judgment is entered for the plaintiff and against the National Treasury, the Register of Deeds and any of the other defendants, execution shall first issue against such defendants other than the National and the Register of Deeds. If the execution is returned unsatisfied in whole or in part, and the officer returning the same certificates that the amount due cannot be collected from the land or personal property of such other defendants, only then shall the court, upon proper showing, order the amount of the execution and costs, or so much thereof as remains unpaid, to be paid by the National treasurer out of the Assurance Fund. In an action under this Decree, the plaintiff cannot recover as compensation more than the fair market value of the land at the time he suffered the loss, damage, or deprivation thereof.

Section 98. General Fund when liable. If at any time the Assurance Fund is not sufficient to satisfy such judgment, the National Treasurer shall make up for the deficiency from any funds available in the treasury not otherwise appropriated.

Section 99. Subrogation of government to plaintiff's rights. In every case where payment has been made by the National Treasurer in accordance with the provisions of this Decree, the Government of the Republic of the Philippines shall be subrogated to the rights of the plaintiff against any other parties or securities. The National Treasurer shall enforce said rights and the amount recovered shall be paid to the account of the Assurance Fund.

Section 100. Register of Deeds as party in interest. When it appears that the Assurance Fund may be liable for damages that may be incurred due to the unlawful or erroneous issuance of a certificate of title, the Register of Deeds concerned shall be deemed a proper party in interest who shall, upon authority of the Commissioner of Land Registration, file the necessary action in court to annul or amend the title.

The court may order the Register of Deeds to amend or cancel a certificate of title or to do any other act as may be just and equitable.

Section 101. Losses not recoverable. The Assurance Fund shall not be liable for any loss, damage or deprivation caused or occasioned by a breach of trust, whether express, implied or constructive or by any mistake in the resurveyed or subdivision of registered land resulting in the expansion of area in the certificate of title.

Section 102. Limitation of Action. Any action for compensation against the Assurance Fund by reason of any loss, damage or deprivation of land or any interest therein shall be instituted within a period of six years from the time the right to bring such action first occurred: Provided, That the right of action herein provided shall survive to the legal representative of the person sustaining loss or damage, unless barred in his lifetime; and Provided, further, That if at the time such right of action first accrued the person entitled to bring such action was a minor or insane or imprisoned, or otherwise under legal disability, such person or anyone claiming from, by or under him may bring the proper action at any time within two years after such disability has been removed, notwithstanding the expiration of the original period of six years first above provided.

CHAPTER VIII REGISTRATION OF PATENTS

Section 103. Certificates of title pursuant to patents. Whenever public land is by the Government alienated, granted or conveyed to any person, the same shall be brought forthwith under the operation of this Decree. It shall be the duty of the official issuing the instrument of alienation, grant, patent or conveyance in behalf of the Government to cause such instrument to be filed with the Register of Deeds of the province or city where the land lies, and to be there registered like other deeds and conveyance, whereupon a certificate of title shall be entered as in other cases of registered land, and an owner's duplicate issued to the grantee. The deed, grant, patent or instrument of conveyance from the Government to the grantee shall not take effect as a conveyance or bind the land but shall operate only as a contract between the Government and the grantee and as evidence of authority to the Register of Deeds to make registration. It is the act of registration that shall be the operative act to affect and convey the land, and in all cases under this Decree, registration shall be made in the office of the Register of Deeds of the province or city where the land lies. The fees for registration shall be paid by the grantee. After due registration and issuance of the certificate of title, such land shall be deemed to be registered land to all intents and purposes under this Decree.

CHAPTER IX CERTIFICATE OF LAND TRANSFER, EMANCIPATION PATENT, AFFIDAVIT OF NON-TENANCY

Section 104. Provisional Register of Documents. The Department of Agrarian Reform shall prepare by automate data processing a special registry book to be known as the "Provisional Register of Documents issued under PD-27" which shall be kept and maintained in every Registry of Deeds throughout the country. Said Registry Book shall be a register of:

a. All Certificates of Land Transfer (CLT) issued pursuant to P.D. No. 27; and

b. All subsequent transactions affecting Certificates of Land Transfer such as adjustments, transfer, duplication and cancellations of erroneous Certificates of Land Transfer.

Section 105. Certificates of Land Transfer Emancipation Patents. The Department of Agrarian reform shall pursuant to P.D. No. 27 issue in duplicate, a Certificate of Land Transfer for every land brought under "Operation Land Transfer", the original of which shall be kept by the tenant-farmer and the duplicate, in the Registry of Deeds.

After the tenant-farmer shall have fully complied with the requirements for a grant of title under P.D. No. 27, an Emancipation Patent which may cover previously titled or untitled property shall be issued by the Department of Agrarian Reform.

The Register of Deeds shall complete the entries on the aforementioned Emancipation Patent and shall assign an original certificate of title number in case of unregistered land, and in case of registered property, shall issue the corresponding transfer certificate of title without requiring the surrender of the owner's duplicate of the title to be canceled.

In case of death of the grantee, the Department of Agrarian Reform shall determine his heirs or successors-in-interest and shall notify the Register of Deeds accordingly.

In case of subsequent transfer of property covered by an Emancipation Patent or a Certificate of Title emanating from an Emancipation Patent, the Register of Deeds shall affect the transfer only upon receipt of the supporting papers from the Department of Agrarian Reform.

No fee, premium, of tax of any kind shall be charged or imposed in connection with the issuance of an original Emancipation Patent and for the registration or related documents.

Section 106. Sale of agricultural land; affidavit. No voluntary deed or instrument purporting to be a subdivision, mortgage, lease, sale or any other mode of encumbrance or conveyance of private agricultural land principally devoted to rice or corn or any portion thereof shall be registered unless accompanied by an affidavit of the vendor or executor stating that the land involved is not tenanted, or if tenanted, the same is not primarily devoted to the production of rice and/or corn.

If only a portion of the land is primarily devoted to the production of rice and/or corn, and such area so devoted is tenanted, no such deed or instrument shall be registered unless accompanied by an affidavit stating the area (size) of the portion which is tenanted and primarily devoted to rice and/or corn, and stating further that the deed or instrument covers only the untenanted portion or that which is not primarily devoted to the production of rice and/or corn. A memorandum of said affidavit shall be annotated on the certificate of title. The Register of Deeds shall cause a copy of the registered deed or instrument, together with the affidavit, to be furnished the Department of Agrarian Reform Regional Office where the land is located. The affidavit provided in this section shall not be required in the case of a tenant-farmer who deals with his Certificate of Land Transfer or Emancipation Patent in accordance with law.

CHAPTER X PETITIONS AND ACTIONS AFTER ORIGINAL REGISTRATION

Section 107. Surrender of withhold duplicate certificates. Where it is necessary to issue a new certificate of title pursuant to any involuntary instrument which divests the title of the registered owner against his consent or where a voluntary instrument cannot be registered by reason of the refusal or failure of the holder to surrender the owner's duplicate certificate of title, the party in interest may file a petition in court to compel surrender of the same to the Register of Deeds. The court, after hearing, may order the registered owner or any person withholding the duplicate certificate to surrender the same, and direct the entry of a new certificate or memorandum upon such surrender. If the person withholding the duplicate certificate is not amenable to the process of the court, or if not any reason the outstanding owner's duplicate certificate cannot be delivered, the court may order the annulment of the same as well as the issuance of a new certificate of title in lieu thereof. Such new certificate and all duplicates thereof shall contain a memorandum of the annulment of the outstanding duplicate.

Section 108. Amendment and alteration of certificates. No erasure, alteration, or amendment shall be made upon the registration book after the entry of a certificate of title or of a memorandum thereon and the attestation of the same be Register of Deeds, except by order of the proper Court of First Instance. A registered owner of other person having an interest in registered property, or, in proper cases, the Register of Deeds with the approval of the Commissioner of Land Registration, may apply by petition to the court upon the ground that the registered interests of any description, whether vested, contingent, expectant or inchoate appearing on the certificate, have terminated and ceased; or that new interest not appearing upon the certificate have arisen or been created; or that an omission or error was made in entering a certificate or any memorandum thereon, or, on any duplicate certificate; or that the same or any person on the certificate has been changed; or that the registered owner has married, or, if registered as married, that the marriage has been terminated and no right or interests of heirs or creditors will thereby be affected; or that a corporation which owned registered land and has been dissolved has not convened the same within three years after its dissolution; or upon any other reasonable ground; and the court may hear and determine the petition after notice to all parties in interest, and may order the entry or cancellation of a new certificate, the entry or cancellation of a memorandum upon a certificate, or grant any other relief upon such terms and conditions, requiring security or bond if necessary, as it may consider proper; Provided, however, That this section shall not be construed to give the court authority to reopen the judgment or decree of registration, and that nothing shall be done or ordered by the court which shall impair the title or other interest of a purchaser holding a certificate for value and in good faith, or his heirs and assigns, without his or their written consent. Where the owner's duplicate certificate is not presented, a similar petition may be filed as provided in the preceding section.

All petitions or motions filed under this Section as well as under any other provision of this Decree after original registration shall be filed and entitled in the original case in which the decree or registration was entered.

Section 109. Notice and replacement of lost duplicate certificate. In case of loss or theft of an owner's duplicate certificate of title, due notice under oath shall be sent by the owner or by someone in his behalf to the Register of Deeds of the province or city where the land lies as soon as the loss or theft is discovered. If a duplicate certificate is lost or destroyed, or cannot be produced by a person applying for the entry of a new certificate to him or for the registration of any instrument, a sworn statement of the fact of such loss or destruction may be filed by the registered owner or other person in interest and registered.

Upon the petition of the registered owner or other person in interest, the court may, after notice and due hearing, direct the issuance of a new duplicate certificate, which shall contain a memorandum of the fact that it is issued in place of the lost duplicate certificate, but shall in all respects be entitled to like faith and credit as the original duplicate, and shall thereafter be regarded as such for all purposes of this decree.

Section 110. Reconstitution of lost or destroyed original of Torrens title. Original copies of certificates of title lost or destroyed in the offices of Register of Deeds as well as liens and encumbrances affecting the lands covered by such titles shall be reconstituted judicially in accordance with the procedure prescribed in Republic Act No. 26 insofar as not inconsistent with this Decree. The procedure relative to administrative reconstitution of lost or destroyed certificate prescribed in said Act is hereby abrogated.

Notice of all hearings of the petition for judicial reconstitution shall be given to the Register of Deeds of the place where the land is situated and to the Commissioner of Land Registration. No order or judgment ordering the reconstitution of a certificate of title shall become final until the lapse of thirty days from receipt by the Register of Deeds and by the Commissioner of Land Registration of a notice of such order or judgment without any appeal having been filed by any of such officials.

CHAPTER XI SCHEDULE OF FEES: SPECIAL FUND

Section 111. Fees payable. The fees payable to the Clerk of Court, the Sheriff, the Register of Deeds and the Land Registration Commission shall be as follows:

A. Fees payable to the Clerk of Court. The fees payable to the clerk of court or his deputies shall be as follows:

1. For filing an application for the registration of land, the fees shall be based on the assessed value of the property for the current year, in accordance with the following schedule

(a) When the value of the property does not exceed two thousand pesos, fifteen pesos for the first five hundred pesos, or fractional part thereof, and five pesos for each additional five hundred pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(b) When the value of the property does not exceed two thousand pesos but does not exceed ten thousand pesos, thirty five pesos for the first three thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and five pesos for each additional one thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(c) When the value of the property is more than ten thousand pesos but does not exceed one hundred thousand pesos, eighty pesos for the first twenty thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and ten pesos for each additional ten thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(d) When the value of the property is more than one hundred thousand pesos but does not exceed five hundred thousand pesos, one hundred eighty pesos for the first one hundred twenty-five thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and twenty pesos for each additional twenty-five thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(e) When the value of the property is more than five hundred thousand pesos, five hundred twenty pesos for the first five hundred fifty thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and forty pesos for each additional fifty thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

If the property has not been assessed for taxation, the fees above prescribed shall be based on the current market value; and the applicant shall file with his application a sworn declaration of three disinterested persons that the value fixed by him is to their knowledge a fair valuation.

2. For filing a petition for review of judgment and decree, or other claim adverse to the registered owner, for each petition, twenty pesos.

3. For filing a petition after the decision has become final, twenty pesos. If it affects land decrees in more than one case, for each additional case, one peso. If it affects several lots or parcels of land in which the petitioners have no common interest, each of such petitioners shall pay the corresponding fees as if separate petitions had been filed by him.

B. Fees payable to the Sheriff. The sheriff shall collect fees for his services rendered in connection with land registration and cadastral proceedings as follows:

1. For posting notices of initial hearing of land registration cases in conspicuous places on the lands described in the notice, for each parcel of land on which a copy of such notice is posted, besides travel fees, three pesos.

2. For posting notices of initial hearing of cadastral cases in conspicuous places on the lands included in the survey, for each group of one hundred lots on which a copy of the notice is posted, besides travel fees, three pesos.

3. For posting one copy of a notice of initial hearing in a conspicuous place upon the municipal building of the city, municipality, or municipal district in which the land or portion thereof lies, besides travel fees, three pesos.

4. For serving notices upon cadastral claimants to appear before the court, travel fees only as provided in the Rules of Court.

5. For all other services not mentioned above, the same fees including travel fees as provided in the Rules of Court for similar services.

C. Fees payable to the Register of Deeds. The Register of Deeds shall collect fees for all services rendered by him under this Decree in accordance with the following schedule:

1. Original certificate of title. For the entry of one original certificate of title and issuance of one owner's duplicate certificate, ten pesos for the first parcel of land described thereon and five pesos for each additional parcel.

2. Entry fee. For each entry fee in the primary entry book, five pesos.

3. Attachment, levy, etc. For the annotation of an attachment, levy, writ of execution, adverse claim, five pesos for each parcel of land affected thereby.

4. Lis Pendens, etc. For the annotation of a notice of lis pendens, or of any document or order in connection therewith, for each of land affected thereby, five pesos.

5. Release of encumbrance. For the annotation of a release of any encumbrance, except mortgage, lease, or other lien for the cancellation of which a specific fee is prescribed herein, for each parcel of land so released, five pesos; but the total amount of fees to be collected shall not exceed the amount of fees paid for the registration of such encumbrance.

6. Court Order. For the annotation of an order of the court for the amendment of, or the making of a memorandum on, a certificate of title, except inclusion of buildings or improvements, or any order directing the registration of a document, or of any right or interest referred to in said order, or the cancellation of a certificate of title and/or the issuance of a new one, ten pesos for each certificate of title on which the annotation is made, in addition to the fees prescribed under paragraphs sixteen or seventeen, as the case may be, of this subsection, in the same are also due for the registration of such document, right or interest.

7. Building. For the annotation of an order of the court for the inclusion of building and/or improvement in a certificate of title, ten pesos for each certificate of title.

8. Powers of attorney, letters of administration, appointment of guardian, resolution or revocation thereof. For registering and filing a power of attorney, letters of administration or letters testamentary whether or not accompanied by a copy of the testament, certificate of allowance of a will with attested copy of the will annexed, appointment of guardian for a minor or incompetent person, appointment of receiver, trustee, or administrator, articles of incorporation of any corporation, association or partnership, or resolution of its board of directors empowering an officer or member thereof to act in behalf of the same, twenty pesos; and for the annotation of such papers on certificates of title when required by existing laws or regulations, five pesos for each certificate of title so annotated: Provided, however, that when the certificate of allowance of a will and the letters testamentary or letters of administration are filed together, only one fee shall be collected. For registering an instrument of revocation of any of the paper mentioned above, five pesos, and if annotated on the corresponding certificate of title, three pesos for each certificate of title.

9. Notice of tax lien, loss, etc. For the annotation of a notice of tax lien of any description notice of lost duplicate or copy of a certificate of title, order of the court declaring such duplicate or copy null and void, notice of change of address, or the cancellation of any such annotation, for each certificate of title, five pesos.

10. Carry over of annotation. For transferring the memorandum of an encumbrance of any kind from one certificate of title which is canceled to a new one in lieu thereof, for each memorandum thus transferred, five pesos.

11. Annotation on additional copy of title. For any memorandum made in a standing co-owner's copy of a certificate of title after a similar memorandum has been made in the original thereof, of each certificate of title, five pesos.

12. No specific fee. For any memorandum made in a certificate of title for which no specific fee is prescribe above, for each certificate of title, five pesos.

13. Transfer to trustee, executor, administrator receiver. For the issuance of a transfer certificate of title, including its duplicate, to a trustee, executor, administrator, or receiver, or for the cancellation of such certificate of title and issuance of a new one, including its duplicate, to the cestui que trust in case of trusteeship, ten pesos. If the certificate covers more than one parcel or lot, an additional fee of five pesos shall be collected for each additional parcel or lot.

14. Transfer certificate of title. For the issuance of a transfer certificate of title, including its duplicate, to a person other than those named in the next preceding paragraph, ten pesos, in addition to the fees hereinafter prescribed in paragraph sixteen or seventeen, as the case may be, of this subsection, if the same are also due. If the certificate covers more than one parcel or lot, an additional fee of five pesos shall be collected for each additional parcel or lot.

15. Additional copy of title. For the issuance of a new owner's duplicate or a co-owner's copy of a certificate of title, or any additional duplicate or copy thereof, ten pesos for the first page and five pesos for each subsequent page, or fraction thereof.

16. Registration fee. For the registration of a deed of sale, conveyance, transfer, exchange, partition, or donation; a deed of sale with pacto de retro, conditional sale, sheriff's sale at public auction, sale for non-payment of taxes, or any sale subject to redemption, or the repurchase or redemption of the property so sold; any instrument, order, judgment or decree divesting the title of the registered owner, except in favor of a trustee, executor, administrator or receiver; option to purchase or promise to sell; any mortgage, surety, bond, lease, easement, right-of-way, or other real right or lien created or constituted by virtue of a distinct contract or agreement, and not as an incidental condition of sale, transfer or conveyance; the assignment, enlargement, extension or novation of a mortgage or of any other real right, or a release of mortgage, termination of lease, or consolidation of ownership over a property sold with pacto de retro; where no specific fee is prescribed therefor in the preceding paragraphs, the fees shall be based on the value of the consideration in accordance with the following schedule:

(a) Six thousand pesos maximum. When the value of the consideration does not exceed six thousand pesos, seven pesos for the first five hundred pesos, or fractional part thereof, and three pesos for each additional five hundred pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(b) Thirty thousand pesos maximum. When the value of the consideration is more than six thousand pesos but does not exceed thirty thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and eight pesos for each additional two thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(c) One hundred thousand pesos maximum. When the value of the consideration is more than thirty thousand pesos but does not exceed one hundred thousand pesos, one hundred fifty pesos for the first thirty-five thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and fourteen pesos or each additional five thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(d) Five hundred thousand pesos maximum. When the value of the consideration is more than one hundred thousand pesos but does not exceed five hundred thousand pesos, three hundred fifty-two pesos for the first one hundred ten thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and twenty pesos for each additional ten thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(e) More than five hundred thousand pesos. When the value of the consideration is more than five hundred thousand pesos, one thousand one hundred sixty-two pesos for the first five hundred twenty thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof, and thirty pesos for each additional twenty thousand pesos, or fractional part thereof.

17. Fees for specific transactions. In the following transactions, however, the basis of the fees collectible under paragraph sixteen of this subsection, whether or not the value of the consideration is stated in the instrument, shall be as hereunder set forth:

(a) Exchange. In the exchange of real property the basis of the fees to be paid by each party shall be the current assessed value of the properties acquired by one party from the other, in addition to the value of any other consideration, if any, stated in the contract.

(b) Hereditary transfer. In the transmission of an hereditary estate without partition or subdivision of the property among the heirs, devisees or legatees, although with specification of the share of each in the value of the estate, the basis shall be the total current assessed value of the property thus transmitted.

(c) Partition of hereditary estate; Conjugal property. In the partition of an hereditary estate which is still in the name of the deceased, in which determinate properties are adjudicated to each heir devisee or legatee, or to each group of heirs, devisees or legatees, the basis of the fees to be paid by each person or group, as the case may be, shall be the total current assessed value of the properties thus adjudicated to each person or group. In the case, however, of conjugal property, the basis of the fees for the registration of one-half thereof in the name of the surviving spouse shall be the total current assessed value of the properties adjudicated to said spouse.

(d) Subdivision or partition. In the partition of real property held in common by several registered co-owner's the basis of the fees to be paid by each co-owner or group of co-owners shall be the total assessed value of the property taken by each co-owner or group.

(e) Conveyance: several lots and parties. In the sale, conveyance or transfer of two or more parcels of land in favor of two or more separate parties but executed in one single instrument, the basis shall be the total selling price paid by each party-buyer, or, in the case of lump sum consideration, such portion thereof as apportioned in accordance with the assessed value of the respective land acquired by each party-buyer.

(f) Conveyance of properties in different places. In the sale, conveyance, or transfer of properties situated in different cities or provinces, the basis of the fees in each Registry of Deeds where the instrument is to be registered shall be the total selling price of the properties situated in the respective city or province, or, in the case of lump sum consideration, such portion thereof as obtained for those properties lying within the jurisdiction of the respective registry after apportioning the total consideration of the sale, conveyance or transfer in accordance with the current assessed value of such properties.

(g) Conveyance of mortgaged properties. In the sale, conveyance, or transfer of a mortgaged property, the basis shall be the selling price of the property proper plus the full amount of the mortgage, or the unpaid balance thereof if the latter is stated in the instrument. If the properties are situated in different cities or provinces, the basis of the fees in each Registry of Deeds where the instrument is to be registered shall be such sum as obtained for the properties situated in the respective city or province after apportioning in accordance with the current assessed values of said properties the total amount of consideration as above computed, unless the selling price of the properties in each city or province and the proportionate share thereof in the amount of unpaid balance of the mortgage are stated in the instrument, in which case, the aggregate of such selling price and share shall be the basis. In any case, however, where the aggregate value of the consideration as above computed shall be less than the current assessed value of the properties in the city or province concerned, such assessed value shall be the basis of the fees in the respective Registry.

(h) Mortgage of properties in different places. In a mortgage affecting properties situated in different cities or provinces, the basis of the fees in each Registry of Deeds where the document is to be registered shall be such amount as obtained for the properties lying within the jurisdiction of said Registry after apportioning the total amount of the mortgage in accordance with the current assessed value of such properties.

(i) Release of mortgage. In the release of a mortgage the basis of the fees shall be an amount equal to ten per centum of the total amount of obligation secured by the mortgage. If the properties are situated in different cities or provinces, the basis of the fees in each Registry shall be ten per centum of such sum as obtained for the properties in the respective city or province after apportioning the amount of the mortgage in accordance with the current assessed values of such properties. In the case of a partial release, the fees shall be based on ten per centum of the current assessed value of the property so released in the respective city or province; Provided, however, That where several partial releases had been registered, the fees corresponding to the final release shall be computed on the basis of ten per centum of the difference between the amount of the mortgage and the aggregate of the consideration used as basis for the collection of the fees paid for the registration of all previous partial releases.

(j) Certificate of sale. In a certificate of sale at public auction by virtue of an order of execution or sale for delinquency in the payment of taxes, or repurchase of the property so sold, the basis of the fees in each Registry shall be ten per centum of the selling or repurchase price of the property lying within the jurisdiction of the Registry.

(k) Affidavit of consolidation of ownership. In an affidavit for the consolidation of ownership over a property sold with pacto de retro or pursuant to an extra judicial foreclosure under the provisions of Act Numbered Thirty-one hundred and thirty-five, as amended, the basis of the fees in each Registry shall be an amount equivalent to ten per centum of the consideration of the sale in the respective city or province.

(l) Contract of lease. In contracts of lease, the basis of the fees in each Registry shall be the sum total to be paid by the lessee for the properties situated in the respective city or province during the entire period specified in the contract, including the extension contemplated by the parties which may be given effect without the necessity of further registration. If the period is from year to year, or otherwise not fixed, the basis shall be the total amount of rentals due for thirty months. If the rentals are not distributed, the total amount thereof as above computed shall be apportioned to said properties in accordance with their assessed values, and the proportionate sum thus obtained for each city or province shall be the basis of the fees to be collected in the Registry concerned.

(m) Termination of lease. In the termination of lease, the basis of the fees in each registry shall be ten per centum of the amount used as basis for the collection of the fees paid for the registration of said lease.

(n) Option to purchase or promise to sell. In contracts of option to purchase or promise to sell, the basis of the fees in each Registry shall be ten per centum of the current assessed value of the property subject of such contract in the respective city or province.

(o) Consideration not stated or fixed or less than assessed value. In other transactions where the actual value of the consideration is not fixed in the contract or cannot be determined from the terms thereof, or, in case of a sale, conveyance, or transfer, the consideration stated is less than the current assessed value of the property, the basis of the fees shall be the current assessed value of the property involved in the transaction. If the properties are situated in different cities or provinces, the basis of the fees in each Registry shall be the current assessed value of the properties lying within the jurisdiction of the Registry concerned.

18. Issuance of copy of document. For furnishing copies of any entry, decree, document, or other papers on file, fifty centavos for each hundred words of fraction thereof contained in the copies thus furnished.

19. Certified copy. For certifying a copy furnished under the next preceding paragraph, for each certification, five pesos for one page and one peso for each additional page certified.

20. Certification. For issuing a certificate relative to, or showing the existence or non-existence of, an entry in the registration books or a document on file, for each such certificate containing not more than two hundred words, five pesos; if it exceeds that number an additional fee of one peso shall be collected for every hundred words, or fraction thereof, in excess of the first two hundred words.

21. Research fee. For services rendered in attending to request for reference or researches on any records or documents on file in the Registry, there shall be collected two pesos per document or record.

D. Fees payable to the Commissioner of Land Registration. The fees payable to the Commissioner of Land Registration shall be as follows:

1. For verification and approval of subdivision plans, the fee shall be:

(a)For each lot ...………………………………….............P2.00 (b)For each corner of a lot, irrespective of whether such corner is common to two or more lots ...............0.20 (c)For each traverse station .........………………………...0.10 (d)For each observation ...........……………………………0.50 (e)In case the plan is a resurveyed or relocation plan an additional 40 per cent of the rates prescribed above shall be collected.

Provided, however, that the total fee as computed above, whether for subdivision and/or consolidation-subdivision survey, resurveyed or relocation plan, shall in no case be less than P8.00 per plan.

2. For changing or correcting the name of any person appearing on the subdivision plan or other plan in order to have it conform to that stated in the certificate of title covering the land, and for the cancellation of an approved plan when so requested by the interested party, there shall be a fee of P5.00 per plan.

3. The rates of fees prescribed in paragraph 1 and 2, inclusive, shall apply to similar services rendered in connection with the examination, verification, and approval of consolidation, consolidation-subdivision, resubdivision, and reconsolidation plans, special work order plans on the basis of certified copies of technical descriptions of plans approved by the Land Registration Commission or the Bureau of Lands, private surveys, and other plans of similar nature.

In the computation of fees relative to lots subject of consolidation and consolidation-subdivision plans, a fee of two pesos shall be collected per lot as appearing in the old survey in addition to the fee collectible in paragraph 1 hereof for the new lots.

4. For the preparation of a plan in a tracing cloth of any survey, the data of which are available in the Commission, except when the same is merely traced from an existing plan, the fees shall be computed as follows:

(a) When the plan to be so prepared contains only one lot:

1.For the first ten corners or fraction thereof .........…………P40.00 2.For the next ten corners or fraction thereof ....……………......6.00 3.For each corner in excess of the first twenty corners ...........0.40

(b) When the plan to be so prepared contains two or more lots:

1. For the first lot, which must be the biggest of the group, irrespective of the number of its corner .........……………………………….P40.00 2.For each additional lot, irrespective of the number of its corners, said lot being adjacent to the first lot or any other lot ……………………..P15.00 3.For each non-adjacent lot (other than the first charged lot), irrespective of the number of its corners ........……………………………... P20.00 4.If any lot contains more than twenty corners for each corner of such lot in the first twenty corners ........……………………………………. P0.40

5. For the preparation of a plan in tracing cloth, to be traced from an existing plan, complete with bearings and distances of corners and tie lines, the fee shall be 30 per centum of the fees prescribed in paragraph 4 above.

6. For the preparation of a plan in tracing cloth, to be copied from an existing plan, complete with bearings and distances of sides and tie-lines, but using a different scale, the fee shall be 50 per centum of the fees prescribed under paragraph 4 above, if made on a reduced scale; or 60 per centum of the same fees, if made on an enlarged scale.

7. For the preparation of a simple plan or sketch of any available survey or plan on any paper other than a tracing cloth, the fee on the basis of each lot, shall be as follows:

(a)For the first ten corners or fraction thereof ....……………………………………........ P20.00 (b)For the second ten corners or fraction thereof .......…………………………………....... 5.00 (c)For the third ten corners or fraction thereof ........……………………………………….... 2.00 (d)For each corner in excess of the first thirty corners …………………………….............. 0.20 (e)If the sketch is prepared in tracing cloth, add to the total fees as above computed ... 5.00 (f)If the plan or sketch so prepared contains the bearing and distances of the sides and tie-lines, add to the total fees as above computed 10 per centum thereof.

8. For furnishing a plan copy (blue-print, or white print) of any plan on file in the Commission, the fee shall be as follows:

(a)For the copy of any size not exceeding forty square decimeters ..……...………..P3.00 (b)For one copy of more than forty square decimeters but not exceeding eighty square decimeters in size .....…………………………....... 6.00 (c)For one copy of more than eighty square decimeters but not exceeding one hundred twenty square decimeter in size ………………….. 9.00 (d)For one copy in excess of one hundred twenty square decimeters in size, the basis rate of nine pesos plus for every twenty square decimeters or fraction thereof in excess …………………………………........ 0.50

9. For the preparation of technical descriptions, other than mere copying from an existing copy, there shall be collected the following fees:

(a)For technical descriptions of lots or parcels, typewritten in triplicate and double-spaced, including certification: 1.For each lot ........... P3.00 2.For each corner of a lot ........... 0.20 3.For each extra carbon copy, extra charge .... 0.20 4.Minimum total charge ............. 3.00 (b)For lot description prepared in tracing cloth (on tabulated form) including certification: 1.For each sheet ......... P1.50 2.For each lot .......... 0.20 3.For each corner in excess of ten for a lot .... 0.10 (c)Any common corner shall be counted as many items as there are lots to which it pertains.

10. For certification of plans or copies of plans as to the correctness of the same, per plan or print copy P3.00 and for the issuance of all other certification P5.00 plus one 30-centavo documentary stamp to be affixed thereto.

11. For inspection of land subject of private surveys, simple or complex subdivision plans, or consolidation, consolidation-subdivision, resubdivision, or reconsolidation plans, special work orders, and other plans of similar nature for the purpose of verification and/or approval:

(a)For each plan with an aggregate area of 1,000 sq. m. or less ......... P100.00 (b)For each subdivision with an aggregate area of more than 1,000 sq. m.: 1.For the first 1,000 s.m. ............. P100.00 2.For every succeeding 1,000 sq. m. or fraction thereof ........... 10.00

12. For actual field work of subdivision survey, relocation survey and resurveyed of land, the fees shall be as follows:

(a) Subdivision survey:

1. Rural (Agricultural)

AreaSurvey Fee For the first hectare ...........P 350.00 For the 2nd ha. to 10th ha.An additional 60.00 per ha. For the 11th ha. to 20th ha.An additional P30.00 per ha. For the 21st ha. to 30th ha.An additional P20.00 per ha. For the 31st ha. to 200th ha.An additional P10.00 per ha. For the 201st ha. or overAn additional P8.00 per ha.

A fraction of a hectare shall be considered one hectare.

2. Urban (Solar):

First 200 sq. m. or less ......... P350.00 Succeeding 201 sq. m. or more ........... P20.00 100 sq. m.

(b) Relocation Survey or Resurveyed:

The fee for relocation survey or resurveyed shall be one hundred fifty per cent (150%) of the amount of survey fee collectible on the basis of the schedule of fees for subdivision survey as provided in the preceding paragraph plus one per cent (1%) of the assessed value of the land.

Special Account. Twenty per centum of all the collections of the Registers of Deeds and of the Land Registration Commission under this Section and Sections 118 and 116 of this Decree shall be appropriated and upon approval of a budget for it by the Ministry of the Budget, such amounts shall be disbursed and all offices under the Land Registration Commission, for the purchase of necessary equipment, for payment of allowances of officials and employees of the Commission, including those of the Registries of Deeds, as authorized by the Commissioner, for contracts regarding security printing of Land title forms, for survey contracts, and for the maintenance and other operating expenses of the Commission.

CHAPTER XII FORMS USED IN LAND REGISTRATION AND CONVEYANCING

Section 112. Forms in conveyancing. The Commissioner of Land Registration shall prepare convenient blank forms as may be necessary to help facilitate the proceedings in land registration and shall take charge of the printing of land title forms.

Deeds, conveyances, encumbrances, discharges, powers of attorney and other voluntary instruments, whether affecting registered or unregistered land, executed in accordance with law in the form of public instruments shall be registerable: Provided, that, every such instrument shall be signed by the person or persons executing the same in the presence of at least two witnesses who shall likewise sign thereon, and shall acknowledged to be the free act and deed of the person or persons executing the same before a notary public or other public officer authorized by law to take acknowledgment. Where the instrument so acknowledged consists of two or more pages including the page whereon acknowledgment is written, each page of the copy which is to be registered in the office of the Register of Deeds, or if registration is not contemplated, each page of the copy to be kept by the notary public, except the page where the signatures already appear at the foot of the instrument, shall be signed on the left margin thereof by the person or persons executing the instrument and their witnesses, and all the ages sealed with the notarial seal, and this fact as well as the number of pages shall be stated in the acknowledgment. Where the instrument acknowledged relates to a sale, transfer, mortgage or encumbrance of two or more parcels of land, the number thereof shall likewise be set forth in said acknowledgment.

CHAPTER XIII DEALINGS WITH UNREGISTERED LANDS

Section 113. Recording of instruments relating to unregistered lands. No deed, conveyance, mortgage, lease, or other voluntary instrument affecting land not registered under the Torrens system shall be valid, except as between the parties thereto, unless such instrument shall have been recorded in the manner herein prescribed in the office of the Register of Deeds for the province or city where the land lies.

(a) The Register of Deeds for each province or city shall keep a Primary Entry Book and a Registration Book. The Primary Entry Book shall contain, among other particulars, the entry number, the names of the parties, the nature of the document, the date, hour and minute it was presented and received. The recording of the deed and other instruments relating to unregistered lands shall be effected by any of annotation on the space provided therefor in the Registration Book, after the same shall have been entered in the Primary Entry Book.

(b) If, on the face of the instrument, it appears that it is sufficient in law, the Register of Deeds shall forthwith record the instrument in the manner provided herein. In case the Register of Deeds refuses its administration to record, said official shall advise the party in interest in writing of the ground or grounds for his refusal, and the latter may appeal the matter to the Commissioner of Land Registration in accordance with the provisions of Section 117 of this Decree. It shall be understood that any recording made under this section shall be without prejudice to a third party with a better right.

(c) After recording on the Record Book, the Register of Deeds shall endorse among other things, upon the original of the recorded instruments, the file number and the date as well as the hour and minute when the document was received for recording as shown in the Primary Entry Book, returning to the registrant or person in interest the duplicate of the instrument, with appropriate annotation, certifying that he has recorded the instrument after reserving one copy thereof to be furnished the provincial or city assessor as required by existing law.

(d) Tax sale, attachment and levy, notice of lis pendens, adverse claim and other instruments in the nature of involuntary dealings with respect to unregistered lands, if made in the form sufficient in law, shall likewise be admissible to record under this section.

(e) For the services to be rendered by the Register of Deeds under this section, he shall collect the same amount of fees prescribed for similar services for the registration of deeds or instruments concerning registered lands.

CHAPTER XIV REGISTRATION OF CHATTEL MORTGAGES

Section 114. Recording of chattel mortgages. A chattel mortgage shall be recorded in the office of the Register of Deeds of the province or city where the mortgagor resides as well as where the property is situated or ordinarily kept.

Section 115. Manner of recording chattel mortgages. Every Register of Deeds shall keep a Primary Entry Book and a Registration Book for chattel mortgages; shall certify on each mortgage filed for record, as well as on its duplicate, the date, hour, and minute when the same was by him received; and shall record in such books any chattel mortgage, assignment or discharge thereof, and any other instrument relating to a recorded mortgage, and all such instruments shall be presented to him in duplicate, the original to be filed and the duplicate to be returned to the person concerned.

The recording of a mortgage shall be effected by making an entry, which shall be given a correlative number, setting forth the names of the mortgagee and the mortgagor, the sum or obligation guaranteed, date of the instrument, name of the notary before whom it was sworn to or acknowledged, and a note that the property mortgaged, as well as the terms and conditions of the mortgage, is mentioned in detail in the instrument filed, giving the proper file number thereof. The recording of other instruments relating to a recorded mortgage shall be effected by way of annotation on the space provided therefor in the Registration Book, after the same shall have been entered in the primary Entry Book.

The Register of Deeds shall also certify the officer's return of sale upon any mortgage, making reference upon the record of such officer's return to the volume and page of the record of the mortgage, and a reference of such return on the record of the mortgage itself, and give a certified copy thereof, when requested, upon payment of the legal fees for such copy thereof, when requested, upon payment of the legal fees for such copy and certify upon each mortgage officer's return of sale or discharge of mortgage, and upon any other instrument relating to such a recorded mortgage, both on the original and in the duplicate, the date, hour, and minute when the same is received for record and record such certificate index of mortgagors and mortgagees, which record and index shall be open to public inspection.

Duly certified copies of such records and of filed instruments shall be receivable as evidence in any court.

Section 116. Fees for chattel mortgages, etc. The register of Deeds shall collect the following fees for services rendered by him under this section:

1. Entry fee. For entry or presentation of any document in the Primary Entry Book, five pesos. Supporting papers presented together with the principal document need not be charged any entry or presentation fee unless the party in interest desires that they be likewise entered.

2. Chattel Mortgage. For filing and recording each chattel mortgage, including the necessary certificates and affidavits, the fees established in the following schedule shall be collected:

(a) Six thousand pesos maximum. When the amount of the mortgage does not exceed six thousand pesos, seven pesos for the first five hundred pesos, or fractional part thereof, and three pesos for each additional five hundred pesos, or fractional part thereof.

(b) Thirty thousand pesos maximum. When the amount of the mortgage is more than six thousand pesos but does not exceed thirty thousand pesos, forty-eight pesos for the initial amount not exceeding eight thousand pesos, and eight pesos for each additional two thousand pesos or fractional part thereof.

(c) One hundred thousand pesos maximum. When the amount of the mortgage is more than thirty thousand pesos but does not exceed one hundred thousand pesos, one hundred fifty pesos for the initial amount not exceeding thirty-five thousand pesos, and fourteen pesos for each additional five thousand pesos of fractional part thereof.

(d) Five hundred thousand pesos maximum. When the amount of the mortgage is more than one hundred thousand pesos but does not exceed five hundred thousand pesos, three hundred fifty-two pesos for the initial amount not exceeding one hundred ten thousand pesos and twenty pesos for each additional ten thousand pesos or fractional part thereof.

(e) More than five hundred thousand pesos. When the amount of the mortgage is more than five hundred thousand pesos, one thousand one hundred sixty-two pesos for the initial amount not exceeding five hundred twenty thousand pesos, and thirty pesos for each additional twenty thousand pesos or fractional part thereof: Provided, however, that registration of the mortgage in the province where the property is situated shall be sufficient registration and provided, further, that if the mortgage is to be registered in more than one city or province, the Register of Deeds of the city or province where the instrument is first presented for registration shall collect the full amount of the fees due in accordance with the schedule prescribed above, and the Register of Deeds of the other city of province where the same instrument is also to be registered shall collect only a sum equivalent to twenty per centum of the amount of fees due and paid in the first city of province, but in no case shall the fees payable in any Registry be less than the minimum fixed in this schedule.

3. Conveyance of mortgaged property, etc. For recording each instrument of sale, conveyance, or transfer of the property which is subject of a recorded mortgage, or of the assignment of mortgage credit, the fees established in the preceding schedule shall be collected on the bases of ten per centum of the amount of the mortgage or unpaid balance thereof, provided, that the latter is stated in the instrument.

4. Notice of attachment. For recording each notice of attachment, including the necessary index and annotations, eight pesos.

5. Release of mortgage. For recording such release of mortgage, including the necessary index and references, the fees established in the schedule under paragraph (b) above shall be collected on the basis of five per centum of the amount of the mortgage.

6. Release of attachment. For recording each release of attachment, including the proper annotations, five pesos.

7. Sheriff's return of sale. For recording each sheriff's return of sale, including the index and references, seven pesos.

8. Power of attorney, appointment of guardian, administrator or trustee. For recording a power of attorney, appointment of judicial guardian, administrator, or trustee, or any other instrument in which a person is given power to act in behalf of another in connection with a mortgage, ten pesos.

9. No specific fee. For recording each instrument or order relating to a recorded mortgage, including the necessary index and references, for which no specific fee is provided above, five pesos.

10. Certified copy. For certified copies of records, such fees as are allowed by law for copies kept by the Register of Deeds.

11. Certification. For issuing a certificate relative to, or showing the existence or non-existence of an entry in the registration book, or a document on file, for each such certificate containing not more than two hundred words, five pesos; if it exceeds that number, an additional fee of one peso shall be collected for every one hundred words or fractional part thereof, in excess of the first two hundred words.

12. Research Fee. For services rendered in attending to requests for references to, or researches on any document on file in the Registry, there shall be collected a fee of two pesos per document.

CHAPTER XV CONSULTAS

Section 117. Procedure. When the Register of Deeds is in doubt with regard to the proper step to be taken or memorandum to be made in pursuance of any deed, mortgage or other instrument presented to him for registration, or where any party in interest does not agree with the action taken by the Register of Deeds with reference to any such instrument, the question shall be submitted to the Commissioner of Land Registration by the Register of Deeds, or by the party in interest thru the Register of Deeds.

Where the instrument is denied registration, the Register of Deeds shall notify the interested party in writing, setting forth the defects of the instrument or legal grounds relied upon, and advising him that if he is not agreeable to such ruling, he may, without withdrawing the documents from the Registry, elevate the matter by consulta within five days from receipt of notice of the denial of registration to the Commissioner of Land Registration.

The Register of Deeds shall make a memorandum of the pending consulta on the certificate of title which shall be canceled motu proprio by the Register of Deeds after final resolution or decision thereof, or before resolution, if withdrawn by petitioner.

The Commissioner of Land Registration, considering the consulta and the records certified to him after notice to the parties and hearing, shall enter an order prescribing the step to be taken or memorandum to be made. His resolution or ruling in consultas shall be conclusive and binding upon all Registers of Deeds, provided, that the party in interest who disagrees with the final resolution, ruling or order of the Commissioner relative to consultas may appeal to the Court of Appeals within the period and in manner provided in Republic Act No. 5434.

CHAPTER XVI FINAL PROVISIONS

Section 118. Appropriation. There is hereby appropriated initially the sum of TWELVE MILLION THREE HUNDRED FORTY THOUSAND PESOS (P12,340,000.00) from the National Treasury not otherwise appropriated for the implementation of this decree; thereafter, said sum shall be added to the regular appropriation act of every year.

Section 119. Postage exemption. No postage stamps or mailing charges shall be required in all matters transmitted by the Land Registration Commission or any of its Registry of Deeds in the implementation of Sections 21, 40, 106, 118 and 117 of this Decree.

Section 120. Repealing clause. All laws, decrees, orders, rules and regulations, or parts thereof, in conflict or inconsistent with any of the provisions of this Decree are hereby repealed or modified accordingly.

Section 121. Separability clause. In the event that any provision of this Decree is declared unconstitutional, the validity of the remainder shall not be affected thereby.

Section 122. Effectivity. This Decree shall take effect upon its approval.

Done in the City of Manila, this 11th day of June, in the year of Our Lord, nineteen hundred and seventy-eight.

[codalsetal]

P.D. 442: Labor Code of the Philippines

PRELIMINARY TITLE

Chapter I

General Provisions

ARTICLE 1. Name of Decree. — This Decree shall be known as the "Labor Code of the Philippines."

ART. 2. Date of Effectivity. - This Code shall take effect six months after its promulgation.

ART. 3. Declaration of Basic Policy. — The State shall afford protection to labor, promote full employment, ensure equal work opportunities regardless of sex, race or creed, and regulate the relations between workers and employers. The State shall assure the rights of workers to self-organization, collective bargaining, security of tenure and just and humane conditions of work.

ART. 4. Construction in Favor of Labor. — All doubts in the implementation and interpretation of the provisions of this Code, including its implementing rules and regulations, shall be resolved in favor of labor.

ART. 5. Rules and Regulations. — The Department of Labor and other government agencies charged with the administration and enforcement of this Code or any of its parts shall promulgate the necessary implementing rules and regulations. Such rules and regulations shall become effective fifteen (15) days after announcement of their adoption in newspapers of general circulation.

ART. 6. Applicability to Agricultural Workers. — In addition to the rights conferred upon them by Republic Act Numbered Thirty-eight Hundred and Forty-four, as amended, otherwise known as the Code of Agrarian Reforms of the Philippines, agricultural workers shall enjoy the rights and benefits granted by this Code to nonagricultural workers.

Chapter II

Emancipation of Tenants

ART. 7. Statement of Objectives. — Inasmuch as the old concept of land ownership by a few has spawned valid and legitimate grievances that gave rise to violent conflict and social tension and the redress of such legitimate grievances being one of the fundamental objectives of the New Society, it has become imperative to start reformation with the emancipation of the tiller of the soil from his bondage.

ART. 8. Transfer of Lands to Tenant Workers. - Being a vital part of the labor force, tenant-farmers on private agricultural lands primarily devoted to rice and corn under a system of share crop or lease tenancy whether classified as landed estate or not shall be deemed owner of a portion constituting a family-size farm of five (5) hectares if not irrigated and three (3) hectares if irrigated.

In all cases, the landowner may retain an area of not more than seven (7) hectares if such landowner is cultivating such area or will now cultivate it.

ART. 9. Determination of Land Value. For the purpose of determining the cost of the land to be transferred to the tenant-farmer, the value of the land shall be equivalent to two and a half (2 1/2) times the average harvest of three (3) normal crop years.

The total cost of the land, including interest at the rate of six (6) per centum per annum, shall be paid by the tenant in fifteen (15) equal amortizations.

In case of default, the amortizations due shall be paid by the farmers' cooperative having a right of recourse against him.

The Government shall guaranty such amortizations with shares of stock in government-owned and government-controlled corporations.

ART. 10. Conditions of Ownership. - No title to the land owned by the tenant-farmers shall be actually issued to a tenant-farmer unless and until the tenant has become a full-fledged member of a duly recognized farmers' cooperative.

Title to the land acquired pursuant to Presidential Decree No. 27 or the land Reform Program of the Government shall not be transferable except by hereditary-succession or to the Government in accordance with the provisions of this Code, the Code of Agrarian Reforms and other existing laws and regulations.

ART. 11. Implementing Agency. — The Department of Agrarian Reform shall promulgate the necessary rules and regulations to implement the provisions of this Chapter.

BOOK I

PRE EMPLOYMENT

ART. 12. Statement of Objectives. It is the policy of the State —

To promote and maintain a state of full employment through improved manpower training, allocation and utilization;

To protect every citizen desiring to work locally or overseas by securing for him the best possible terms and conditions of employment;

To facilitate a free choice of available employment by persons seeking work in conformity with the national interest;

To facilitate and regulate the movement of workers in conformity with the national interest;

To regulate the employment of nonresident aliens;

To strengthen the network of public employment offices and to undertake the phasing out of private fee-charging employment agencies; and

To insure careful selection of Filipino workers for overseas employment in order to protect the good name of the Philippines abroad.

Title I

RECRUITMENT AND PLACEMENT OF WORKERS

Chapter 1

General Provisions

ART. 13. Definition of Terms. — (a) "Private fee-charging employment agency" means any individual or entity engaged in the business of recruitment and placement of workers for a fee, whether the fee is charged from the workers or from the employers or both.

"Private non-fee-charging employment agency" refers to any individual or entity engaged in the recruitment and placement of workers free of charge, whether from the workers or from the employers or both.

"Recruitment" refers to any act of canvassing, enlisting, contracting, transporting, utilizing, hiring or procuring workers, including referrals, contact services, promising employment or advertising for employment locally or abroad whether for profit or not: Provided, That whenever two or more persons are in any manner promised or offered employment for a fee, the individual or entity making such offer or promise shall be deemed engaged in recruitment.

"Worker" or "Employee" includes any individual employed by an employer or any person hired to perform service of any kind for a valuable consideration, including household or domestic helpers and crew members of vessels or seamen.

"Immigrant worker" means any person who works in a foreign country by virtue of an immigrant visa or resident permit as distinguished from a work permit or working visa.

"License" means a document issued to an individual or entity by the Department of Labor authorizing such individual or entity to operate private fee-charging employment agency.

"Authority" refers to the document issued to any person or entity by the Department of Labor authorizing such person or entity to operate a private non-fee-charging employment agency.

"Seamen" includes all persons employed on any vessel engaged in maritime navigation.

ART. 14. Employment Promotion. — The Secretary of Labor shall have the power and authority to:

Organize and establish new employment offices in addition to the existing employment offices under the Department of Labor as the need arises;

Organize and establish a nationwide job clearance and information system to inform applicants registering with a particular employment office of job opportunities in other parts of the country as well as job opportunities abroad;

Develop and organize programs that will facilitate occupational, industrial and geographical mobility of labor and provide assistance in the relocation of workers from one area to another; and

Require any person, establishment, organization or institution to submit such employment information as may be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 15. Power to Phase Out. — The Department of Labor shall phase out within four (4) years from the effectivity of this Code the operation of all private fee-charging employment agencies, including those engaged in the overseas recruitment and placement of individuals for personal services or for the crew of a vessel.

Upon the completion of such phaseout, no person or entity shall directly or indirectly engage, for profit or any pecuniary or material advantage, in any recruitment or placement activity. Non-fee-charging employment agencies or placement services undertaken by schools or by civic or charitable organizations or by employers for their own use may continue under such rules and regulations as may be promulgated by the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 16, Over-seas Employment Development Board, Creation of. — An Overseas Employment Development Board is hereby created to undertake a systematic program for overseas employment of Filipino workers, other than seamen, in excess of domestic needs and to protect their rights to fair and equitable employment practices.

It shall seek to:

Meet the increasing demand for trained and competent Filipino workers in foreign countries;

Generate foreign exchange from the earnings of Filipinos employed under the program;

Promote the employment of Filipinos under government-to-government arrangement;

Secure better terms and conditions of employment of Filipino workers overseas; and

Promote the development of the skills and careful selection of employment of Filipino workers for overseas employment.

The Board shall be attached to the Department of Labor for policy and program coordination and for the efficient conduct of its duties.

ART. 17. Composition of Overseas Employment Development Board. — The Board shall be composed of:

The Secretary of Labor as Chairman and a representative each of the Department of National Defense, the Department of Foreign Affairs, the Central Bank and the Department of Justice, as members.

The Board shall be assisted by a Secretariat headed by an Executive Director. The Executive Director shall be appointed by the President of the Philippines upon recommendation of the Secretary of Labor who shall appoint the members of the Secretariat. The Executive Director and members of the Secretariat shall be exempt from the provisions of laws, rules and regulations of the Wage and Position Classification Office except clerical and janitorial services.

The Executive Director shall be a Filipino citizen with sufficient experience in manpower administration, including overseas employment activities.

The Executive Director shall receive an annual salary of P40,000 and a commutable representation and transportation allowance of P500 a month.

The Auditor General shall appoint his representative to the Board to audit its accounts in accordance with auditing laws and pertinent rules and regulations.

The Chairman and all members of the Board shall each receive a per diem of P100 for their attendance of every meeting of the Board: Provided, That where the representative of an ex officio member attends a meeting in behalf of the latter, such representative shall be entitled to receive the per diem.

ART. 18. Board Authorized to Collect Fees. —The Board shall have the power to impose and collect fees from workers and employers concerned or both, the proceeds of which shall accrue to a special fund to be used exclusively for the promotion of the objectives of the Board.

ART. 19. Board to Issue Rules and Regulations. —The Board shall issue appropriate rules and regulations to carry out its functions.

ART. 20. National Seamen Board, Creation of. — There is hereby created a body to be known as a National Seamen Board.

It shall:

Establish and maintain a comprehensive seamen training program;

Provide free placement services for seamen;

Obtain the best possible terms and conditions of employment for seamen;

Secure full implementation of the employment contracts of seamen; and

Maintain a complete registry of all seamen.

ART. 21. Composition of National Seamen Board. — The Board shall be attached to the Department of Labor for policy and program coordination and shall be composed of: the Secretary of Labor as Chairman, the Commandant of the Philippine Coast Guard, and a representative of each of the Department of Foreign Affairs, a national seafarers organization and a national shipping association, as members.

The Chairman and all members of the Board shall each receive a per diem of F100 for their attendance of every meeting of the Board: Provided, That where the representative of the ex officio member attends a meeting in behalf of the latter, such representative shall be entitled to receive the per diem.

The Board shall be assisted by a Secretariat headed by an Executive Director. The Executive Director and members of the Secretariat shall be exempt from the provisions of laws, rules and regulations of the Wage and Position Classification Office except clerical and janitorial services.

The Executive Director shall be a Filipino citizen with sufficient experience in manpower administration, including overseas employment activities.

The Executive Director shall receive an annual salary of P24,000 and a commutable representation and transportation allowance of P500 a month.

The Auditor General shall appoint his representative to the Board to audit its accounts in accordance with auditing laws and pertinent rules and regulations.

ART. 22. Board Authorized to Collect Fees. — The Board shall have the power to impose and collect fees from workers and employers concerned or both, the proceeds of which shall accrue to a special fund to be used exclusively for the promotion of the objectives of the Board.

ART. 23. Board to Issue Rules and Regulations. — The Board shall issue appropriate rules and regulations to carry out its functions.

Chapter II

Regulation of Recruitment and Placement Activities

ART. 24. Authority or License to Recruit. — No .individual or entity may engage in the business of a private fee-charging employment agency without first obtaining a license from the Department of Labor.

No individual or entity may operate a private non-fee-charging employment agency without first obtaining an authority from the Department of Labor.

ART. 25. Travel Agencies Prohibited to Recruit. — Travel agencies are prohibited from engaging in the business of recruitment and placement of workers for overseas employment whether for profit or not.

The Secretary of Labor shall issue rules and regulations establishing the requirements and the procedures for the issuance of a license or authority.

Every existing authority or license to hire or recruit workers on the date of effectivity of this Code shall remain valid for the duration indicated therein unless sooner cancelled, revoked, or suspended for cause by the Secretary of Labor. However, said authority or license to hire or recruit may be renewed: Provided, That the holders thereof shall comply with all applicable provisions of this Code and its implementing rules and regulations.

ART. 26. Citizenship Requirement. — No license or authority to recruit or hire workers shall be issued or renewed except in favor of Filipino citizens or corporations, partnerships or entities at least 60 percent of the authorized capital stock of which is owned and/or controlled by Filipino citizens.

ART. 27. Capitalization. — All applicants for license to recruit and currently licensed recruiters for overseas employment are required to have a minimum capitalization or assets in the amount of P150,000 in the case of private individuals and a paid-up capital of P150,000 in the case of corporations, partnerships or other entities.

ART. 28. Nontransferability of License or Authority. — No license or authority shall be issued directly or indirectly by any person other than the one in whose favor it was issued at any place other than that stated in the license or authority, nor may such license or authority be transferred, conveyed or assigned to any other person or entity. Any transfer of business address, appointment or designation of any agent or representative including the establishment of additional offices anywhere shall be subject to the prior approval of the Department of Labor.

ART. 29. License Fee. — Any private fee-charging employment agency applying for license or renewal thereof under this Code shall file a written application with the Secretary of Labor and shall pay to the account of the Department of Labor an annual license fee of P2,000 in the case of recruitment for local employment and P6,000 in the case of recruitment for overseas employment.

ART. 30. Bond. - Any private fee-charging employment agency shall post a cash bond in the amount of P10,000 and a surety bond in the amount of P50,000 if engaged in recruitment for overseas employment; a cash bond in the amount of P5,000 and a surety bond in the amount of P25,000 if engaged in the recruitment for local employment, to guarantee compliance with prescribed recruitment procedures, rules and regulations and terms and conditions of employment as appropriate.

The Secretary of Labor shall have the exclusive power to determine, decide, order, or direct payment from or application of the cash and surety bond for any claim or injury covered and guaranteed by the bond.

ART. 31. Allowable Fee. — Any person applying with a private fee-charging employment agency for employment assistance shall not be charged any fee until he has obtained employment through its efforts or has actually commenced employment. Such fee shall be always covered with approved receipt clearly showing the amount paid. The Secretary of Labor shall promulgate a schedule of allowable fees.

ART. 32. Mandatory Remittance of Foreign Exchange Earnings. — It shall be mandatory for all contract workers abroad to remit a portion of their foreign exchange earnings to their families, dependents, and/or beneficiaries in the country in accordance with rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Labor in consultation with the committee on mandatory remittance of foreign exchange earnings established by the President under Letter of Instruction No. 90, dated June 16, 1973.

ART. 33. Prohibited Practices. — It shall be unlawful for any individual, entity, licensee or holder of authority:

To charge or accept directly or indirectly any amount greater than that specified in the schedule of allowable fees prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, or to make a worker pay any amount greater than that actually received by him as a loan or advance;

To furnish or publish any false notice or information or document in relation to recruitment or employment;

To give any false notice, testimony, information or document or commit any act of misrepresentation for the purpose of securing a license or authority under this Code;

To induce or attempt to induce a worker already employed to quit his employment in order to offer him to another unless the transfer is designed to liberate a worker from oppressive terms and conditions of employment;

To influence or attempt to influence any person or entity not to employ any worker who has not applied for employment through his agency;

To engage in the recruitment or placement of workers in jobs harmful to public health or morality or to the dignity of the Republic of the Philippines;

To obstruct or attempt to obstruct inspection by the Secretary of Labor or by his duly authorized representatives;

To fail to file reports on the status of employment, placement vacancies, remittance of foreign exchange earnings, separation from jobs, departures and such other matters or information as may be required by the Secretary of Labor;

To substitute or alter employment contracts approved and verified by the Department of Labor from the time of actual signing thereof by the parties up to and including the period of expiration of the same without the approval of the Department of Labor;

To become officer or member of the board of any corporation engaged in travel agency or to be engaged directly or indirectly in the management of a travel agency; and

To withhold or deny travel documents from applicant workers before departure for monetary or financial considerations other than those authorized under this Code and its implementing rules and regulations.

ART. 34. Suspension and/or Cancellation of License or Authority. —The Secretary of Labor shall have the power to suspend or cancel any license or authority to recruit employees for overseas employment for violation of rules and regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor, the Overseas Employment Development Board, and the National Seamen Board, or for violations of the provisions of this and other Presidential decrees, the Revised Penal Code, the Anti-Dummy Law, general orders and letters of instruction.

ART. 35. Foreign Service Role/Participation. — To provide ample protection to Filipino workers abroad, Philippine labor attaches or labor reporting officers duly designated by the Secretary of Labor through the Department of Foreign Affairs or any Philippine diplomatic or consular officials concerned shall, even without prior instruction or advice from the home office:

Provide counselling assistance to all Filipino workers within their jurisdiction on all matters arising out of employment;

Ensure that Filipino workers are not exploited and discriminated against;

Gather and analyze available information on the employment situation, and its probable trends and to make such information available to the Department of Labor and the Department of Foreign Affairs for dissemination to the public;

Make continuous and special researches/studies and recommendations on the various aspects of the employment market within their jurisdictional area; and

Perform such other duties as may be required of them from time to time.

Chapter III

Miscellaneous Provisions

ART. 36. Regulatory Powers. — (a) The Secretary of Labor shall have the power to restrict and regulate the recruitment activities of all agencies within the coverage of this Title and is hereby authorized to issue orders and promulgate rules and regulations to carry out the objectives and implement the provisions hereof.

Whenever the public interest so requires, the Secretary of Labor may direct all persons or entities within the coverage of this Title to submit a report on the status of employment, placement, vacancies, details of job requisitions, separation from jobs, wages and other terms and conditions of employment.

The Secretary of Labor or his duly authorized representatives may at any time inspect the premises, books of accounts and records of any person or entity covered by this Title, require it to submit reports regularly on prescribed forms and to act on violations of any provisions under this Title.

ART. 37. Jurisdiction.— (a) Any violation of the provisions of this Title or its implementing rules and regulations as promulgated by the Secretary of Labor shall fall within the concurrent jurisdiction of the Military Tribunals and the regular courts. The court that first assumes jurisdiction shall exclude the other.

All matters or questions involving employer-employee relations, including money claims arising from this Title, shall be under the original and exclusive jurisdiction of the National Labor Relations Commission.

ART. 38. Penalty. — Persons who arc licensees or holders of authority under the provisions of this Title found violating or causing another to violate any provisions of this Title or of the rules and regulations issued thereunder shall, upon conviction thereof, suffer the penalty of imprisonment of not less than two (2) years nor more than five (5) years or a fine of not less than P2,000 nor more than P30,000 or both imprisonment and fine at the discretion of the court; while persons who are not licensees or holders of authority under this Title found violating any provision of this Title shall upon conviction therefor suffer the penalty of imprisonment of not less than Four (4) years but not more than eight (8) years or a fine of not less than P5,000 nor more than P35,000 or both imprisonment and fine at the discretion of the court.

In addition thereto such conviction shall cause the automatic forfeiture of the bond — cash as well as surety — in favor of the special fund for the promotion of the objectives of the Overseas Employment Development Board or the National Seamen Board, as the case may be, and also the automatic revocation of the license or authority and all permits and privileges granted to such person or entity under this Title: Provided, however, That if the offender is a corporation, partnership, association, or entity, the penalty shall be imposed upon the guilty officer or officers, as the case may be, of the corporation, partnership, association or entity; and if such guilty officer is an alien, in addition to the penalties herein prescribed, he shall be deported without further proceedings.

Title II

EMPLOYMENT OF NONRESIDENT ALIENS

ART. 39. Employment Permit for Nonresident Aliens. — Any alien seeking admission to the Philippines for employment purposes and any domestic or foreign employer who desires to engage an alien for employment in the Philippines shall obtain an employment permit from the Department of Labor.

The employment permit may be issued to a nonresident alien or to the applicant employer after a determination of the non-availability of a person in the Philippines who is competent, able and willing at the time of application to perform the services for which the alien is desired.

For an enterprise registered in preferred areas of investments, said employment permit may be issued upon recommendation of the government agency charged with the supervision of said registered enterprise.

ART. 40. Prohibition Against Transfer of Employment. — After the issuance of an employment permit, the alien shall not transfer to another job or change his employer without prior approval of the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 41. Submission of List. — Any employer employing nonresident foreign nationals on the effective date of this Code shall submit a list of such nationals to the Secretary of Labor within thirty (30) days after such date indicating their names, citizenship, foreign and local addresses, nature of employment and status of stay in the country. The Secretary of Labor shall then determine if they are entitled to an employment permit.

BOOK II

HUMAN RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT

Title I

NATIONAL MANPOWER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

Chapter I

National Policies and Administrative Machinery for Their Implementation

ART. 42. Statement of Objective. - It is the objective of this Title to develop human resources, establish training institutions, and formulate such plans and programs as will ensure efficient allocation, development and utilization of the nation's manpower and thereby promote employment and accelerate economic and social growth.

ART. 43. Definition. — As used in this Title (a) "Manpower" shall mean that portion of the nation's population which has actual or potential capability to contribute directly to the production of goods and services; and

"Entrepreneurship" shall mean training for self-employment or assisting individual or small industries within the purview of this Title.

ART. 44. National Manpower and Youth Council, Composition. - To carry out the objectives of this Title, the National Manpower and Youth Council, which is attached to the Department of Labor for policy and program coordination and hereinafter referred to as the Council, shall be composed of the Secretary of Labor as ex officio chairman, the Secretary of Education and Culture as ex officio vice-chairman, and us ex officio members: the Director-General of the National Economic and Development Authority; the Secretary of Agriculture and Natural Resources; the Secretary of Social Welfare; the Secretary of Local Government and Community Development; the Chairman of the National Science Development Board; the Secretary of Industry and the Executive Director of the Council. The Executive Director of the Council shall have no vote.

In addition, the President shall appoint the following members from the private sector: two representatives of national organizations of employers; two representatives of national workers organizations; and two from national family and youth organizations, each for a term of three years.

All Council members shall be entitled to per diems of one hundred pesos (P100) for each meeting and for not more than thirty {30) meetings within one (1) year and payment of the travelling expenses incurred in connection with their duties therein.

ART. 45. National Manpower Plan. - The Council shall formulate a long-term national manpower plan for the optimum allocation, development and utilization of manpower for employment, entrepreneurship and economic and social growth. This manpower plan shall, after adoption by the Council, be updated annually and submitted to the President for his approval. Thereafter, it shall be the controlling plan £or the development of manpower resources for the entire country in accordance with the national development plan. The Council shall call upon any agency of the Government or the private sector to assist in this effort.

ART. 46. National Manpower Skills Center. — The Council shall establish a National Manpower Skills Center and regional and local training centers for the purpose of promoting the development of skills. The centers shall be administered and operated under such rules and regulations as may be established by the Council.

ART. 47. Establishment and Formulation of Skills Standards. — There shall be national skills standards for industry trades to be established by the Council in consultation with employers and workers organizations and appropriate government authorities. The Council shall thereafter administer the national skills standards.

ART. 48. Administration of Training Programs. — The Council shall provide through the Secretariat instructor training, entrepreneurship development, training in vocations, trades and other fields of employment, and assist any employer or organization in training schemes designed to attain its objectives under rules and regulations which the Council shall establish for this purpose.

The Council shall exercise, through the Secretariat, authority and jurisdiction over, and administer, ongoing technical assistance programs and/or grants-in-aid for manpower and youth development including those which may be entered into between the Government of the Philippines and international and foreign organizations and nations, as well as persons and organizations in the Philippines.

In order to integrate the national manpower development effort, all manpower training schemes as provided for in this Code shall be coordinated with the Council particularly those having to do with the setting of skills standards. For this purpose, existing manpower training programs in the Government and in the private sector shall be reported to the Council which may regulate such programs to make them conform with national development programs.

This Article shall not include apprentices, learners and handicapped workers as governed by appropriate provisions of this Code.

ART. 49. Industry Boards. — The Council shall establish industry boards to assist in the establishment of manpower development schemes, trades and skills standards and such other functions as will provide direct participation of employers and workers in the fulfillment of the Council's objectives, in accordance with guidelines to be established by the Council and in consultation with the National Economic and Development Authority.

ART. 50. Employment Service Training Functions. — The Council shall utilize the employment service of the Department of Labor for the placement of its graduates. The Bureau of Employment Services shall render assistance to the Council in the measurement of unemployment and underemployment, conduct of local manpower resource surveys and occupational studies including an inventory of the labor force, establishment and maintenance without charge of a national register of technicians who have successfully completed a training program under this Act, and skilled manpower including its periodic publication, maintenance of an adequate and up-to-date system of employment information.

ART. 51. Incentive Scheme. — An additional deduction from taxable income of one-half (Vi) of the value of labor training expenses incurred for developing or upgrading the productivity and efficiency of unskilled labor or for management development programs shall be granted to the person or enterprise concerned provided such training program is approved by the Council and provided that such deduction shall not exceed 10% of direct labor wage.

ART. 52. Council Secretariat. — To carry out the objectives of this Title, the Council shall have a Secretariat headed by an Executive Director appointed by the President on recommendation of the Council. The Executive Director shall be assisted by one Deputy Executive Director who shall be a career administrator likewise to be appointed by the President on recommendation of the Council. The Secretariat shall have an Office of Manpower Planning and Development, a National Manpower Skills Center, regional manpower development centers, and such other offices as may be deemed necessary.

The Executive Director shall have the rank and emoluments of an undersecretary and shall serve for a term of ten (10) years. The directors of the Office of Manpower Planning and Development and the Skills Center shall have the rank and emoluments of a bureau director and shall be subject to Civil Service Law, rules and regulations. The Executive Director, Deputy Executive Director, and Directors shall be natural-born citizens, from 30 to 50 years of aye at the time of appointment, have a master's degree or its equivalent, and experience in national planning and development of human resources. The Director of the Skills Center shall, in addition to the foregoing qualifications, have undergone training in center management. Directors shall be appointed by the President on recommendation of the Council.

The Executive Director shall appoint such personnel necessary to carry out the objectives, policies and functions of the Council subject to Civil Service rules.

The Secretariat shall have the following functions and responsibilities:

To prepare and recommend the manpower plan for approval by the Council;

To recommend allocation of resources for the implementation of the manpower plan as approved by the Council;

To carry out the manpower plan as the implementing arm of the Council;

To effect the efficient performance of the functions of the Council and the achievement of the objectives of this Title;

To determine specific allocation of resources for projects to be undertaken pursuant to approved manpower plans;

To submit to the Council periodic reports on progress and accomplishment of work programs;

To prepare for approval by the Council an annual report to the President on plans, programs and projects on manpower and out-of-school youth development;

To enter into agreements to implement approved plans and programs and perform any and all such acts as will fulfill the objectives of this Code as well as ensure the efficient performance of the functions of the Council; and

To perform such other functions as may be authorized by the Council.

ART. 53. Regional Manpower Development Centers. — The Council shall create regional manpower development centers which shall determine the manpower needs of industry, agriculture and other sectors of the economy within their respective jurisdictions; provide the Council central planners with the data for updating the National Manpower plan; recommend programs for the regional level agencies engaged in manpower and youth development within the policies formulated by the Council; perform such other duties as may be assigned by the Council; administer and supervise Secretariat training programs within the region; and perform such other functions as may be authorized by the Council.

ART. 54. Consultants and Technical Assistance, Publication and Research. — In pursuing its objectives, the Council is authorized to set aside a portion of its appropriation for the hiring of the services of qualified consultants, and/or private organizations for research work publication. It shall avail itself of the services of other agencies of the Government as may be required.

ART. 55. Rules and Regulations. — The Council shall define its broad functions and issue appropriate rules and regulations necessary to implement the provisions of this Code.

Title II

TRAINING AND EMPLOYMENT OF SPECIAL WORKERS

Chapter I

Apprenticeship

ART. 56. Statement of Objectives. — This Title aims:

To help meet the demand of the economy for trained manpower;

To establish a national apprenticeship program through the participation of employers, workers, and government and non-government agencies; and

To establish apprenticeship standards for the protection of apprentices.

ART. 57. Definition of Terms. — As used in this Title:

"Apprenticeship" means practical training on the job supplemented by related theoretical instruction;

An "apprentice" is a worker who is covered by a written apprenticeship agreement with an individual employer or any of the entities recognized under this Chapter;

An "apprenticeable occupation" means any trade, form of employment or occupation which requires more than three (3) months of practical training on the job supplemented by related theoretical instruction; and

"Apprenticeship agreement" is an employment contract wherein the employer binds himself to train the apprentice and the apprentice in turn accepts the terms of training.

ART. 58. Qualifications of Apprentice. — To qualify as an apprentice, a person shall:

Be at least fourteen (14) years of age;

Possess vocational aptitude and capacity for apprenticeship as established through appropriate tests; and

Possess the ability to comprehend and follow oral and written instructions.

Trade and industry associations may recommend to the Secretary of Labor appropriate educational requirements for different occupations.

ART. 59. Who May Employ Apprentices. — Employers may enter into apprenticeship agreements or otherwise employ apprentices only in apprenticeable trades and occupations approved by the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 60. Contents of Apprenticeship Agreements. — Apprenticeship agreements including wage rates of apprentices shall conform with applicable rules and regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor.

Apprenticeship agreements providing for wage rates below the legal minimum wage may be entered into only in accordance with apprenticeship programs duly approved by the Department of Labor. The Department shall develop standard model programs of apprenticeship.

ART. 61. Signing of Apprenticeship Agreement. —Every apprenticeship agreement shall be signed by the employer or his agent, or by an authorized representative of any of the recognized organizations, associations or groups, and by the apprentice.

An apprenticeship agreement with a minor shall be signed in his behalf by his parent or guardian and the same shall be binding up to the stipulated termination of the contract.

Every apprenticeship agreement entered into under this Title shall be ratified by the appropriate apprenticeship committees, if any, and a copy thereof shall be furnished both the employer and the apprentice.

ART. 62. Venue of Apprenticeship Programs. — Any firm, employer group or association, industry organization or civic group wishing to organize an apprenticeship program may choose from any of the following apprenticeship schemes as the training venue for apprentices:

Apprenticeship conducted entirely by and within the sponsoring firm, establishment or entity;

Apprenticeship entirely within a Department of Labor training center or other public training institution; or

Initial training in trade fundamentals in a training center or other institution with subsequent actual work participation within the sponsoring firm or entity during the final stage of training.

ART. 63. Sponsoring of Apprenticeship Program. — Any of the apprenticeship schemes recognized herein may be undertaken or sponsored by a single employer or firm or by a group or association thereof, or by a civic organization. Actual training of apprentices may be undertaken:

In the premises of the sponsoring employer in the case of individual apprenticeship programs;

In the premises of one or several designated firms in the case of programs sponsored by a group or association of employers or by a civic organization; or

In a Department of Labor training center or other public training institution.

ART. 64. Investigation of Violation of Apprenticeship Agreement. — Upon complaint of any interested person or upon its own initiative, the appropriate agency of the Department of Labor or its authorized representative shall investigate any violation of an apprenticeship agreement pursuant to such rules and regulations as may be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 65. Appeal to the Secretary of Labor. — The decision of the authorized agency of the Department of Labor may be appealed by any aggrieved person to the Secretary of Labor within five (5) days from receipt of the decision. The decision of the Secretary of Labor shall be final and executory.

ART. 66. Exhaustion of Administrative Remedies. — No person shall institute any action for the enforcement of any apprenticeship agreement, or damages for breach of any-such agreement, unless he has exhausted all available administrative remedies.

ART. 67. Aptitude Testing of Applicants. — Consonant with the minimum qualifications of apprentice-applicants required under this Chapter, employers or entities with duly approved apprenticeship programs shall have primary responsibility for providing appropriate aptitude tests in the selection of apprentices. If they do not have adequate facilities for the purpose, the Department of Labor shall perform the services free of charge.

ART. 68. Responsibility for Theoretical Instruction. — Supplementary theoretical instruction to apprentices in cases where the program is undertaken in the plant may be done by the employer. If the latter is not prepared to assume the responsibility, the same may be delegated to an appropriate government agency.

ART. 69. Voluntary Organization of Apprenticeship Programs; Exceptions. — The organization of apprenticeship programs shall be primarily a voluntary undertaking of employers. When national security or particular requirements of economic development so demand, the President of the Philippines may require compulsory training of apprentices in certain trades, occupations, jobs or employment levels where shortage of trained manpower is deemed critical as determined by the Secretary of Labor. Appropriate rules in this connection shall be promulgated by the Secretary of Labor as the need arises.

The number of apprentices to be compulsorily employed, in the case of factories and other industrial enterprises, shall depend upon the exigencies of the situation.

ART. 70. Deductibility of Training Costs. — An additional deduction from taxable income of one-half (1/2) of the value of labor training expenses incurred for developing the productivity and efficiency of apprentices shall be granted to the person or enterprise organizing an apprenticeship program provided such program is duly recognized by the Department of Labor: Provided, further, That such deduction shall not exceed 10% of direct labor wage: And provided, finally, That the person or enterprise who wishes to avail of this incentive should pay his apprentices the minimum wage.

ART. 71. Apprentices Without Compensation. — The Secretary of Labor may authorize the hiring of apprentices without compensation whose training on the job is required by the school or training program curriculum or as a requisite for graduation or board examination.

Chapter II

Learners

ART. 72. Learners Defined. — Learners are persons hired as trainees in semiskilled and other industrial occupations which are non-apprenticeable and which may be learned through practical training on the job in a relatively short period of time which shall not exceed three (3) months.

ART. 73. When Learners May Be Hired. — Learners may be employed when no experienced workers are available, the employment of learners is necessary to prevent curtailment of employment opportunities, and the employment does not create unfair competition in terms of labor costs or impair or lower working standards.

ART. 74. Learnership Agreement. — Any employer desiring to employ learners shall enter into a learnership agreement with them, which agreement shall include:

The names and addresses of the learners;

The duration of the learnership period, which shall not exceed three (3) months;

The wages or salary rates of the learners which shall begin at not less than seventy-five percent (75%) of the applicable minimum wage; and

A commitment to employ the learners, if they so desire, as regular employees upon completion of the learnership. All learners who have been allowed or suffered to work during the first two (2) months shall be deemed regular employees if training is terminated by the employer before the end of the stipulated period through no fault of the learner.

The learnership agreement shall be subject to inspection by the Secretary of Labor or his duly authorized representative.

ART. 75. Learners in Piecework. — Learners employed in piece or incentive rate jobs during the training period shall be paid in full for the work done.

ART. 76. Penalty Clause. — Any violation of this Chapter or its implementing rules and regulations shall be subject to the general penalty clause provided for in this Code.

Chapter III

Handicapped Workers

ART. 77. Definition. — Handicapped workers are those whose earning capacity is impaired by age or physical or mental deficiency or injury.

ART. 78. When Employable. — Handicapped workers may be employed when their employment is necessary to prevent curtailment of employment opportunities and when it does not create unfair competition in labor costs or impair or lower working standards.

ART. 79. Employment Agreement. — Any employer who employs handicapped workers shall enter into an employment agreement with them, which agreement shall include:

The names and addresses of the handicapped workers to be employed;

The rate to be paid the handicapped workers which shall be not less than seventy-five percent (75%) of the applicable legal minimum wage;

The duration of employment period; and

The work to be performed by handicapped workers.

The employment agreement shall be subject to inspection by the Secretary of Labor or his duly authorized representatives.

ART. 80. Eligibility for Apprenticeship. — Subject to the appropriate provisions of this Code, handicapped workers may be hired as apprentices or learners if their handicap is not such as to effectively impede the performance of job operations in the particular occupations for which they are hired.

ART. 81. Penalty Clause. — Violation of any provision of this Chapter or its implementing rules and regulations shall be subject to the general penalty clause provided for in this Code.

BOOK III

CONDITIONS OF EMPLOYMENT

Title I

WORKING CONDITIONS AND REST PERIODS

Chapter I

Hours of Work

ART. 82. Coverage. The provisions of this Chapter shall apply to employees in all establishments and undertakings, whether for profit or not, but not to government employees, managerial employees, field personnel, domestic servants, persons in the personal service of another, workers who are paid by results when their output rates have been fixed by the Secretary of Labor as provided for in this Book, and members of the family of the employer who are dependent on him for support.

As used herein, "managerial employee" refers (a) to those whose primary duty consists of the management of the establishment in which they are employed or of a department or subdivision thereof or (b) to other officers or members of the managerial staff.

"Field personnel" shall refer to n on agricultural employees who regularly perform their duties away from the principal or branch office or place of business of the employer and whose actual hours of work in the field cannot be determined with reasonable certainty.

ART. 83. Normal Hours of Work. — The normal hours of work of any employee shall not exceed eight (8} in a day.

Health personnel shall hold regular office hours for eight (8) hours a day, for five (5) days a week, or a total of forty (40) hours a week, exclusive of time for lunch, if their services are rendered in cities and municipalities with a population of one (1) million or more or in hospitals and clinics with a bed capacity of at least one hundred (100). For purposes of this Article, "health personnel" shall include government and private resident physicians, nurses, nutritionists, dieticians, pharmacists, social workers, laboratory technicians, paramedical technicians, psychologists, midwives, attendants and all other hospital or clinic personnel.

ART. 84. Hours Worked. — Hours worked shall include:

All time during which an employee is required to be on duty or to be at a prescribed workplace; and

All time during which an employee is suffered or permitted to work.

Rest periods of short duration during working hours shall be counted as hours worked.

ART. 85. Meal Periods. — Subject to such regulations as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe, it shall be the duty of every employer to give his employees not less than sixty (60) minutes time-off for their regular meals.

ART. 86. Overtime Work.— Work may be performed beyond eight (8) hours a day provided that the employee is paid for the overtime work an additional compensation equivalent to his regular wage plus at least twenty-five percent (25%) thereof.

ART. 87. Premium and Overtime Pay for Holiday and Rest Day Work. — Any employee performing work on holidays or on his scheduled rest days, not exceeding eight (8) hours, shall be paid an additional compensation of not less than thirty percent (30%) of his regular wage. For work performed in excess of eight (8) hours on such days, he shall be paid an additional compensation equivalent to his rate for the first eight (8) hours on a holiday or rest day plus at least thirty percent (30%) thereof.

ART. 88. Undertime Not Offset by Overtime. — Undertime work on any particular day shall not be offset by overtime work on any other day. Permission given to the employee to go on leave on some other day of the week shall not exempt the employer from paying the additional compensation required in this Chapter.

ART. 89. Emergency Overtime Work. — Any employee may be required by the employer to perform overtime work in any of the following cases:

When the country is at war or when any other national or local emergency has been declared by the National Assembly or the Chief Executive;

When it is necessary to prevent loss of life or property or in case of imminent danger to public safety due to an actual or impending emergency in the locality caused by serious accidents, fire, flood, typhoon, earthquake, epidemic, or other disaster or calamity;

When there is urgent work to be performed on machines, installation, or equipment, in order to avoid serious loss or damage to the employer or some other cause of similar nature;

When the work is necessary to prevent loss or damage to perishable goods; and

Where the completion or continuation of the work started before the eighth hour is necessary to prevent serious obstruction or prejudice to the business or operations of the employer.

Any employee required to render overtime work under this Article shall be paid the additional compensation required in this Chapter.

ART. 90. Computation of Additional Compensation. — For purposes of computing overtime and other additional remuneration as required by this Chapter, the "regular wage" of an employee shall include the cash wage only, without deduction on account of facilities provided by the employer.

Chapter II

Weekly Rest Periods

ART. 91. Right to Weekly Rest Day. — It shall be the duty of any employer, whether operating for profit or not, to provide each of his employees a rest period of not less than twenty-four (24) consecutive hours for every seven (7) consecutive days.

ART. 92. Determination of Rest Day. — The employer shall determine and schedule the weekly rest day of his employees, subject to collective bargaining agreement and to such rules and regulations as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe. The preference of the employees as to their weekly rest days shall be respected by the employer if the same is based on religious grounds.

ART. 93. When Employer May Require Work on a Rest Day. — The employer may require his employees to work on any day:

In case of actual or impending emergencies caused by serious accident, fire, flood, typhoon, earthquake, epidemic or other disaster or calamity to prevent loss of life and property, or imminent danger to public safety; or in cases of urgent work to be performed on the machinery, equipment, or installation, to avoid serious loss which the employer would otherwise suffer;

In the event of abnormal pressure of work due to special circumstances, where the employer cannot ordinarily be expected to resort to other measures;

To prevent loss or damage to perishable goods;

Where the nature of the work requires continuous operations and the stoppage of work may result in irreparable injury or loss to the employer; and

Under other circumstances analogous or similar to the foregoing as determined by the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 94. Compensation for Rest Day/Sunday/Holiday Work. —

Where an employee is made or permitted to work on his scheduled rest day, he shall be paid an additional compensation of at least thirty percent (30%) of his regular wage. An employee shall be entitled to such additional compensation for work performed on Sunday only when it is his established rest day.

When the nature of the work of the employee is such that he has no regular work days and no regular rest days can be scheduled, he shall be paid an additional compensation of at least thirty percent (30%) of his regular wage for work performed on Sundays and holidays.

Work performed on any legal holiday shall be paid with an additional compensation of at least thirty percent (30%) of the regular wage of the employee. Where such holiday work falls on the employee's scheduled rest day, lie shall be entitled to an additional compensation of at least fifty percent (50%) of his regular wage.

Where the collective bargaining agreement or other applicable employment contract stipulates the payment of a higher premium pay than that prescribed under this Article, the employer shall pay such higher rate.

Title II

WAGES

Chapter I

Preliminary Matters

ART. 95. Definitions. — As used in this Title:

"Person" means an individual, partnership, association, corporation, business trust, legal representative, or any organized group of persons;

"Employer" includes any person acting directly or indirectly in the interest of an employer in relation to an employee and shall include the Government and all its branches, subdivisions and instrumentalities, all government-owned or -controlled corporations and institutions, as well as nonprofit private institutions or organizations;

"Employee" includes any individual employed by an employer;

"Agriculture" includes farming in all its branches and among other things includes the cultivation and tillage of soil, dairying, the production, cultivation, growing and harvesting of any agricultural and horticultural commodities, the raising of livestock or poultry, and any practices performed by a farmer or on a farm as an incident to or in conjunction with such farming operations but does not include the manufacturing or processing of sugar, coconut, abaca, tobacco, pineapples or other farm products;

"Employ" includes to suffer or permit to work; and

"Wage" paid to any employee shall mean the remuneration or earnings, however designated, capable of being expressed in terms of money, whether fixed or ascertained on a time, task, piece, or commission basis, or other method of calculating the same, which is payable by an employer to an employee under a written or unwritten contract of employment for work done or to be done, or for services rendered or to be rendered, and includes the fair and reasonable value, as determined by the Secretary of Labor, of board, lodging, or other facilities customarily furnished by the employer to the employee. "Fair and reasonable value" shall not include any profit to the employer or to any person affiliated with the employer.

ART. 96. Application of Title. — This Title shall not apply to farm tenancy or leasehold, domestic service and persons working in their respective homes in needlework or in any cottage industry duly registered in accordance with law.

Chapter II

Minimum Wage Rates

ART. 97. Statutory Minimum Wages. — The minimum wage rates for agricultural and nonagricultural employees shall be those prescribed by law in force on the date this Code takes effect.

ART. 98. Prohibition Against Reduction or Elimination of Wages or Benefits. — Nothing in this Title shall be construed to authorize any employer to eliminate, or diminish in any way, supplements, or other employee benefits being enjoyed at the time of promulgation of this Code.

ART. 99. Payment by Results. — The Secretary of Labor shall regulate the payment of wages by results, including pakyao, piecework and other non-time work, in order to ensure the payment of fair and reasonable wage rates, preferably through time and motion studies or in consultation with representatives of workers' and employers' organizations.

Chapter III

Payment of Wages

ART. 100. Forms of Payment. — No employer shall pay the wages of an employee by means of promissory notes, vouchers, coupons, tokens, tickets, chits or any object other than legal tender, even when expressly requested by the employee.

Payment of wages by check or money order shall be allowed when such manner of payment is customary on the date of effectivity of this Code, or is necessary because of special circumstances as specified in appropriate regulations to be issued by the Secretary of Labor or is stipulated in a collective bargaining agreement.

ART. 101. Time of Payment - Wages shall be paid at least once every two (2) weeks or twice a month at intervals not exceeding sixteen (16) days. If on account of force majeure or circumstances beyond the employer's control, payment of wages on or within the time herein provided cannot be made, the employer shall pay the wages immediately after such force majeure or circumstances have ceased.

The payment of wages of employees engaged to perform a task which cannot be completed in two (2) weeks shall be subject to the following conditions in the absence of a collective bargaining agreement or arbitration award:

That payments arc made at intervals not exceeding sixteen (16) days, in proportion to the amount of work completed; and

That final settlement is made upon completion of the work.

No employer shall make payment with less frequency than once a month.

ART. 102. Place of Payment. — Payment of wages shall be made at or near the place of undertaking, except as otherwise provided by such regulations as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe under conditions to ensure greater protection of wages.

ART. 103. Direct Payment of Wages. — Wages shall be paid directly to the workers to whom they arc due, except:

In cases of force majeure rendering such payments impossible or under other special circumstances to be determined by the Secretary of Labor in appropriate regulations, in which cases the worker may be paid through another person under written authority given by the worker for the purpose; and

Where the worker has died, in which case the employer may pay the wages of the deceased worker to the heirs of the latter without the necessity of intestate proceedings. The claimants, if they are all of age, shall execute an affidavit attesting to their relationship to the deceased and the fact that they arc his heirs, to the exclusion of all other persons. If any of the heirs is a minor, the affidavit shall be executed on his behalf by his natural guardian or next of kin. The affidavit shall be presented to the employer who shall make payment through the Secretary of Labor or his representative. The representative of the Secretary of Labor shall act as referee in dividing the amount paid among the heirs. The payment of wages under this Article shall absolve the employer of any further liability with respect to the amount paid.

ART. 104. Contractor or Subcontractor. — Whenever an employer enters into a contract with another person for the performance of the former's work, the employees of the contractor and of the latter's subcontractor, if any, shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

In the event that the contractor or subcontractor fails to pay the wages of his employees in accordance with this Code, the employer shall be jointly and severally liable with his contractor or subcontractor to such employees to the extent of the work performed under the contract, in the same manner and extent that he is liable to employees directly employed by him.

The Secretary of Labor may, by appropriate regulations, restrict or prohibit the contracting out of labor to protect the rights of workers established under this Code. In so prohibiting or restricting, he may make appropriate distinctions between labor-only contracting, and job contracting, as well as differentiations within these types of contracting, and determine who among the parties involved shall be considered the employer for purposes of this Code, to prevent any violation or circumvention of any provision of this Code.

Labor-only contracting shall he deemed unlawful where the person supplying workers to an employer dues not have substantial capital or investment in the form of tools, equipment, machineries, work premises, among others, and the workers recruited and placed by such person are performing activities which are directly related to the principal business of such employer. In such cases, the person or intermediary shall be considered merely as an agent of the employer who shall be responsible to the workers in the same manner and extent as if the latter were directly employed by him.

ART. 105. Indirect Employer. — The provisions of the immediately preceding Article shall likewise apply to any person, partnership, association or corporation which, not being an employer, contracts with an independent contractor for the performance of any work, task, job or project.

ART. 106. Posting of Bond. — An employer or indirect employer may require the contractor or subcontractor lo furnish a bond equal to the cost of labor under contract, on condition that, the bond will answer for the wages due the employees should the contractor or subcontractor, as the case may be, fail to pay the same.

ART. 107. Solidary Liability. — The provisions of existing laws to the contrary notwithstanding, every employer or indirect employer shall be held responsible with his contractor or subcontractor for any violation of any provision of this Code. For purposes of determining the extent of their civil liability under this Chapter, they shall be considered as direct employers.

ART. 108. Worker Preference in Case of Bankruptcy. — In the event of bankruptcy or liquidation of an employer's business, his workers shall enjoy first preference as regards Wages due them for services rendered during the period prior to the bankruptcy or liquidation, any provision of law to the contrary notwithstanding. Unpaid wages shall be paid in full before other creditors may establish any claim to a share in the assets of the employer.

ART. 109. Attorney's Fees. — Attorney's fees in any judicial or administrative proceedings for the recovery of wages shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of the amount awarded.

Chapter IV

Prohibitions Regarding Wages

ART. 110. Noninterference in Disposal of Wages. — No employer shall limit or otherwise interfere with the freedom of any employee lo dispose of his wages. He shall not in any manner force, compel, or oblige his employees to purchase merchandise, commodities, or other property from the employer or from any other person or otherwise make use of any store or services of such employer or any other person.

ART. 111. Wage Deduction. No employer, in his own behalf or in behalf of any person, shall make any deduction from the wages of his employees except:

In cases where the worker is insured with his consent by the employer, and the deduction is to recompense the employer for the amount paid by him as premium on the insurance;

In cases where the right of the worker or his union to check off has been recognized by the employer or authorized in writing by the individual worker concerned; and

In cases where the employer is authorized by law or regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 112. Deposits for Loss or Damage. — No employer shall require his worker to make deposits from which deductions shall be made for the reimbursement of loss of or damage to tools, materials, or equipment supplied by the employer, except when the employer is engaged in such trades, occupations or businesses where the practice of making deductions or requiring deposits is a recognized one, or is necessary or desirable as determined by the Secretary of Labor m appropriate rules and regulations.

ART. 113. Limitations. — No deduction from the deposits of an employee for the actual amount of the loss or damage shall be made unless the employee has been heard thereon, and his responsibility has been clearly shown.

ART. 114. Withholding of Wages and Kickbacks Prohibited. — It shall be unlawful for any person, directly or indirectly, to withhold any amount from the wages of a worker or induce him to give up any part of his wages by force, stealth, intimidation, threat or dismissal or by any other means whatsoever without the worker's consent.

ART. 115. Deduction to Ensure Employment. — It shall be unlawful to make any deduction from the wages of any employee for the benefit of the employer or his representative or intermediary as consideration of a promise of employment or retention in employment.

ART. 116. Retaliatory Measures. — It shall be unlawful for an employer to refuse to pay, reduce the wages, discharge or in any manner discriminate against any employee who has filed any complaint or instituted any proceeding under this Title.

ART. 117. False Reporting. — It shall be unlawful for any person to make any statement, report, or record filed or kept pursuant to the provisions of this Code knowing such statement, report or record to be false in any material respect.

Chapter V

Wage Studies, Wage Agreements and Wage Determination

ART. 118. Wage Studies — (a) The Wage Commission in the Department of Labor shall conduct a continuing study of wage rates in the various agricultural and non-agricultural industries all over the country for the purpose of ascertaining whether a substantial number of employees in a given industry arc receiving wages which, although complying with the minimum provided for in this Title, are less than sufficient to maintain them in health, efficiency and general well-being, taking into account the peculiar circumstances of the industry and its geographical location, among others. If after such study or studies the Commission is of the opinion that such number of employees arc receiving such wages, it shall, subject to the approval of the Secretary of Labor, proceed to determine the same after notice and hearing.

ART. 119. Wage Recommendations. —The Commission shall have 60 days within which to conduct hearings and recommend to the Secretary of Labor the issuance of a wage order establishing the minimum wage or wages to be paid by employers in the industry or the various branches thereof.

ART. 120. Wage Order. — Upon submission of the Commission recommendation, the Secretary of Labor shall give notice to interested parties and conduct a public hearing thereon within 15 days. On the basis of the Commission recommendation and of the results of the public hearing, the Secretary of Labor shall, within 15 days after the termination of the hearing, approve or reject but shall not modify the minimum wages recommended by the Commission. If he rejects the recommendation, he shall issue a statement of his reasons therefor and shall direct the Commission to consider the same immediately. If he approves the recommendation of the Commission, original or modified, he shall immediately issue a wage order, subject to the approval of the President of the Philippines, prescribing the minimum wage to be paid to the employees in the industry.

ART. 121. Criteria for Minimum Wage Fixing. — A minimum wage to be established by the Commission shall be as nearly adequate as is economically feasible to maintain the minimum standards of living necessary for the health, efficiency and general well-being of the employees within the framework of the national economic and social development program. In the determination of a minimum wage, the Commission shall, among other relevant factors, consider the following:

Cost of living;

Comparable wages and other incomes in the economy;

Fair return of the capital invested; and

The imperatives of economic and social development.

The wages established in accordance with the provisions of this Title shall not be the standard prevailing minimum wages in the industry on the effective date of this Code and in no case less than the minimum wage rates set forth in Chapter II of this Title. These wages may include wages varying with localities if in the judgment of the Commission and the Secretary of Labor conditions make such local differentiation proper and necessary to effectuate the purposes of this Title.

ART. 122. Effectivity of the Wage Order. — A Wage Order shall take effect 15 days after publication in at least one (1) newspaper of general circulation and by such other means as the Secretary of Labor deems reasonably calculated lo give the interested parties general notice of such issuance. From the date of the effectivity of a Wage Order, no employee who is within the scope of such order shall be paid wages below the rate fixed therein.

Only the Wage Order itself shall be published.

ART. 123. Freedom to Bargain. — No Wage Order shall be construed to prevent workers in particular firms or enterprises of industries from bargaining for higher wages with their respective employers.

ART. 124. Prohibition Against Injunction. — No injunction may be issued by any court to restrain any proceeding of or before the Wage Commission or the Secretary of Labor except on the basis of question of law by the Supreme Court on certiorari.

ART. 125. Power of the Commission. — In conducting a continuing study of wage rates and other economic conditions in any industry or branches thereof, the Commission may call upon the assistance and cooperation of any regional, provincial and local government agency and may call interested parties to furnish information in aid of its deliberations.

Chapter VI

Administration and Enforcement

ART. 126. Visitorial Powers. — The Secretary of Labor or his duly authorized representatives, including, but not restricted to, the labor inspectorate, shall have access to employers' records and premises at any time of the day or night whenever work is being undertaken therein, and the right Lo copy therefrom, to question any employee and investigate any fact, condition or matter which may be necessary to determine violations or in aid in the enforcement of this Title and of any wage order or regulation issued pursuant to this Code.

ART. 127. Recovery of Wages. — Upon application of any interested party, the Bureau of Labor Relations or any regional office of the Department of Labor may certify to the National Labor Relations Commission established under this Code any matter involving the recovery of wages and other benefits owing to an employee under this Code, with legal interest. Any sum thus recovered on behalf of an employee pursuant to this Article shall be held in a special deposit account by and shall be paid, on order of the Secretary of Labor, directly to the employee concerned. Any such sum not paid to the employee because he cannot be located within a period of two (2) years shall be held as a special fund of the Department of Labor to be used exclusively in the administration and enforcement of labor laws.

The Secretary of Labor or his duly authorized representative may supervise the payment of unpaid wages and other benefits found owing to any employee under this Code.

Title III

WORKING CONDITIONS FOR SPECIAL GROUPS OF EMPLOYEES

Chapter I

Employment of Women

ART. 128. Night Work Prohibition. — No woman, regardless of age, shall be employed or permitted or suffered to work, with or without compensation:

In any industrial undertaking or branch thereof between ten o'clock at night and six o'clock in the morning of the following day; or

In any commercial or non-industrial undertaking or branch thereof, other than agricultural, between midnight and six o'clock in the morning of the following day; or

In any agricultural undertaking at nighttime unless she is given a period of rest of not less than nine (9) consecutive hours.

ART. 129. Exceptions. — The prohibitions prescribed by the preceding Article shall not apply in any of the following cases:

In cases of actual or impending emergencies caused by serious accident, fire, flood, typhoon, earthquake, epidemic or other disasters or calamity, to prevent loss of life or property, or in cases of force majeure or imminent danger to public safety;

In case of urgent work to be performed on machineries, equipment or installation, to avoid serious loss which the employer would otherwise suffer;

Where the work is necessary' to prevent serious loss of perishable goods;

Where the woman employee holds a responsible position of managerial or technical nature, or where the woman employee has been engaged to provide health and welfare services;

Where the nature of the work requires the manual skill and dexterity of women workers and the same cannot be performed with equal efficiency by male workers;

Where the women employees are immediate members of the family operating the establishment or undertaking; and

Under other analogous cases exempted by the Secretary of Labor in appropriate regulations.

ART. 130. Facilities for Women. — The Secretary of Labor shall establish standards that will insure the safety and health of women employees. In appropriate cases, he shall by regulations require any employer to:

Provide seats proper for women and permit them to use such seats when they are free from work and during working hours, provided they can perform their duties in this position without detriment to efficiency;

Establish separate toilet rooms and lavatories for men and women and provide at least a dressing room for women;

Establish a nursery in a workplace for the benefit of the women employees therein; and

Determine appropriate minimum age and other standards for retirement or termination in special occupations such as those of flight attendants and the like.

ART. 131. Maternity Leave Benefits. —

Every employer shall grant to any pregnant woman employee who has rendered an aggregate service of at least six (6) months for the last twelve (12) months, maternity leave of at least two (2) weeks prior to the expected date of delivery and another four (4) weeks after normal delivery or abortion, with full pay based on her regular or average weekly wages. The employer may require from any woman employee applying for maternity leave the production of a medical certificate stating that delivery will probably take place within two (2) weeks.

The maternity leave shall be extended without pay on account of illness medically certified to arise out of the pregnancy, delivery, abortion, or miscarriage, which renders the woman unfit for work, unless she has earned unused leave credits from which such extended leave may be charged.

The maternity leave provided in this Article shall be paid by the employer only for the first four (4) deliveries by a woman employee after the effectivity of this Code.

ART. 132. Family Planning Services; Incentives for Family Planning. —

Establishments which are required by law to maintain a clinic or infirmary shall provide free family planning services to their employees which shall include, but not limited to, the application or use of contraceptive pills and intrauterine devices.

In coordination with other agencies of the Government engaged in the promotion of family planning, the Department of Labor shall develop and prescribe incentive bonus schemes to encourage family planning among female workers in any establishment or enterprise.

ART. 133. Discrimination Prohibited. — No employer shall discriminate against any woman with respect to terms and conditions of employment on account of her sex. Equal remuneration shall be paid to both men and women for work of equal value.

ART. 134. Stipulation Against Marriage. — It shall be unlawful for an employer to require as a condition of employment or continuation of employment that a woman employee shall not get married, or to stipulate expressly or tacitly that upon getting married a woman employee shall be deemed resigned or separated, or to actually dismiss, discharge, discriminate or otherwise prejudice a woman employee merely by reason of her marriage.

ART. 135. Prohibited Acts. — (a) It shall he unlawful for any employer:

To deny any woman employee the benefits provided for in this Chapter or to discharge any woman employed by him for the purpose of preventing her from enjoying any of the benefits provided for under this Code;

To discharge such woman on account of her pregnancy, or while on leave or in confinement due to her pregnancy; or

To discharge or refuse the admission of such woman upon returning to her work for fear that she may again be pregnant.

ART. 136. Classification of Certain Women Workers. — Any woman who is permitted or suffered to work, for a substantial period of time under the effective control or supervision of the employer, with or without compensation, in any night club, cocktail lounge, bar, massage clinic, or any similar place, shall be considered as an employee of such establishment for purposes of existing labor and social legislations.

Chapter 11

Employment of Minors

ART. 137. Minimum Employable Age. — No child below fourteen (14) years of age shall be employed by an employer, except where the child works directly under the sole responsibility of his parent or guardian, involving activities which arc not hazardous in nature and which do not in any way interfere with his schooling.

ART. 138. Age Eligibility for Employment. — Any person between fourteen (14) and eighteen (18) years of age may be employed in any non-hazardous undertaking for such number of hours and during certain periods of the day as determined by the Secretary of Labor in appropriate regulations. The employer shall not discriminate against any such person in respect to terms and conditions of employment on account of his age.

Chapter III

Employment of Househelpers

ART. 139. Coverage. - This Chapter shall apply to all persons rendering services in the households for a compensation, except those who do not live therein but return to their own houses after their work.

"Domestic or household service" shall mean such service in the employer's home which is usually necessary or desirable for the maintenance and enjoyment thereof and include ministering to the personal comfort and convenience of the members of the employer's household, including services of family drivers.

ART. 140. Contract of Domestic Service. — The original contract of domestic service shall not last for more than two (2) years but it may be renewed for such periods as may be agreed upon by the parties.

ART. 141. Minimum Wage. — (a) Househelpers shall be paid the following minimum wage rates:

Sixty pesos (P60) a month for househelpers in Manila, Quezon, Pasay and Caloocan cities and the municipalities of Makati, San Juan, Mandaluyong, Muntinglupa, Navotas, Malabon, Paranaque, Las Pinas, Pasig and Marikina in Rizal Province;

Forty-five pesos (P45) a month for those in other chartered cities and first class municipalities;

Thirty pesos (P30) a month for those in other municipalities.

ART. 142. Minimum Cash Wage. —The minimum wage rates prescribed under this Chapter shall be the basic cash wages which shall be paid to the househelpcr in addition to lodging, food and medical attendance.

ART. 143, Assignment to Non-Household Work. — No househelper shall be assigned to work in a commercial, industrial or agricultural enterprise at a wage or salary rate lower than that provided for agricultural or nonagricultural worker as prescribed herein.

ART. 144. Opportunity for Education. — If the househelper is under the age of eighteen (18) years, the employer shall give him or her an opportunity for at least elementary education. The cost of such education shall be part of the househelper compensation, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.

ART. 145. Treatment of Househelpers. — The employer shall treat the househelper in a just and humane manner. In no case shall physical violence be used upon the househelper.

ART. 146. Board, Lodging and Medical Attendance. — The employer shall furnish the househelper free of charge suitable and sanitary living quarters as well as adequate food and medical attendance.

ART. 147. Indemnity for Unjust Termination of Services. — If the period of household service is fixed, neither the employer nor the househelper may terminate the contract before the expiration of the term, except for a just cause. If the househelper is unjustly dismissed, he or she shall be paid the compensation already earned plus that for fifteen (15) days by way of indemnity.

If the househelper leaves without justifiable reason, he or she shall forfeit any unpaid salary due him or her not exceeding fifteen (15) days.

ART. 148. Rules on Services of Termination Notice. — If the duration of the household service is not determined either by stipulation or by the nature of the service, the employer or the househelper may give notice to put an end to the relationship five (5) days before the intended termination of the service.

ART. 149. Employment Certification. —Upon the severance of the household service relation, the employer shall give the househelper a written statement of the nature and duration of the service and his or her efficiency and conduct as househelper.

ART. 150. Employment Records. — The employer may keep such records as he may deem necessary to reflect the actual terms and conditions of employment of his househelper which the latter shall authenticate by signature or thumbmark upon request of the employer.

Chapter IV

Employment of Homeworkers

ART. 151. Regulation of Industrial Homework. — The employment of industrial homeworkers and field personnel shall be regulated by the Government through appropriate regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor to ensure the general welfare and protection of homeworkers and field personnel and the industries employing them.

ART. 152. Regulations of Secretary of Labor. — The regulations or orders to be issued pursuant to this Chapter shall be designed to assure the average employee of an undertaking the minimum terms and conditions of employment applicable to the industrial homeworkers or field personnel involved.

ART. 153. Distribution of Homework. — For the purposes of this Chapter, the "employer" of homeworkers includes any person, natural or artificial, who for his account or benefit, or on behalf of any person residing outside the country, directly or indirectly, or through any employee, agent, contractor, subcontractor or any other person:

Delivers, or causes to he delivered, any goods, articles or materials to be processed or fabricated in or about a home and thereafter to be returned or to be disposed of or distributed in accordance with his directions; or

Sells any goods, articles or materials for the purpose of having the same processed or fabricated in or about a home and then rebuys them after such processing or fabrication, either himself or through some other person.

BOOK IV

HEALTH, SAFETY AND SOCIAL WELFARE BENEFITS

Title I

MEDICAL, DENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY

Chapter I

Medical and Dental Services

ART. 154. First-Aid Treatment. — Every employer shall keep in his establishment such first-aid medicines and equipment as the nature and conditions of work may require, in accordance with such regulations as the Department of Labor shall prescribe.

The employer shall take steps for the training of a sufficient number of employees in first-aid treatment.

ART. 155. Emergency Medical and Dental Services. — It shall be the duty of any employer to furnish his employees in any locality with free medical and dental attendance and facilities consisting of:

The services of a properly trained first-aider when the number of employees does not exceed two hundred (200) except when the employer maintains hazardous workplaces, in which case the services of a registered nurse or full-time graduate first-aider shall be provided for the protection of the workers; the Secretary of Labor shall determine by appropriate orders hazardous workplaces for purposes of this Article;

The services of a full-time registered nurse, a part-time physician and dentist, and an emergency clinic, when the number of employees exceeds two hundred (200) but not more than three hundred (300); and

The services of a full-time physician and dentist, a dental clinic, and an infirmary or emergency hospital with one bed capacity for every one hundred (100) employees, when the number of employees exceeds three hundred (300).

In cases of hazardous workplaces, no employer shall engage the services of a physician or dentist who cannot stay in the premises of the establishment for at least two (2) hours, in the case of those engaged on part-time basis, and not less than eight (8) hours in the case of those employed on full-time basis. Where the undertaking is non-hazardous in nature, the physician and dentist may be engaged on retained basis, subject to such regulations as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe to insure immediate availability of medical and dental treatment and attendance in cases of emergency.

ART. 156. When Emergency hospital Not Required. — The requirement for an emergency hospital or dental clinic shall not be applicable in case there is a hospital or dental clinic which is accessible from the employer's establishment and he makes arrangements for the reservation therein of the necessary beds and dental facilities for the use of his employees.

ART. 157. Health Program. — The physician engaged by an employer shall, in addition to his duties under this Chapter, develop and implement a comprehensive occupational health program for the benefit of the employees of his employer.

ART. 158. Qualifications of Health Personnel. — The physicians, dentists, and nurses employed by employers pursuant to this Chapter shall have the necessary training in industrial medicine and occupational safety and health. The Secretary of Labor, in consultation with industrial, medical, and occupational safety and health associations, shall establish the qualifications, criteria and conditions of employment of such health personnel.

ART. 159. Assistance of Employer. — It shall be the duty of any employer to provide all the necessary assistance to ensure the adequate and immediate medical and dental attendance and treatment to an injured or sick employee in case of emergency.

Chapter II

Occupational Health and Safety

ART. 160. Safety and Health Standards. — The Secretary of Labor shall by appropriate orders set and enforce mandatory occupational safety and health standards to eliminate or reduce occupational safety and health hazards in all workplaces and institute new and update existing programs to ensure safe and healthful working conditions in all places of employment.

ART. 161. Research. — It shall be the responsibility of the Department of Labor to conduct continuing studies and research to develop innovative methods, techniques and approaches for dealing with occupational safely and health problems; to discover latent diseases by establishing causal connections between diseases and work in environmental conditions; and to develop medical criteria which will assure insofar as practicable that no employee will suffer impairment or diminution in health, functional capacity, or life expectancy as a result of his work and working conditions.

ART. 162. Training Programs. — The Department of Labor shall develop and implement training programs to increase the number and competence of personnel in the field of occupational safety and industrial health.

ART. 163. Administration of Safely and Health Laws. — The Department of Labor shall be solely responsible for the administration and enforcement of occupational safety and health laws in all establishments and workplaces wherever they may be located; however, chartered cities may be allowed to conduct industrial safety inspections of establishments within their respective jurisdictions where they have adequate facilities and competent personnel for the purpose as determined by the Department of Labor and subject to national standards established by the latter.

Title II

EMPLOYEES COMPENSATION AND STATE INSURANCE FUND

Chapter I

Policy, Definitions, and Coverage

ART. 164. Policy. - The State shall provide an employees compensation program whereby workers or their dependents, in the event of work-connected injuries or death, may promptly secure adequate financial, medical and related benefits.

ART. 165. Definitions of Terms. — As used in this Title, unless the context otherwise requires:

"Appliance" means crutches, artificial members and other similar devices and their replacement or repair;

"Commission" means the Employees Compensation Commission created under this Title;

"Compensation" means all payments made under the provisions of this Title representing the sum of income benefits and medical and related benefits;

"Contractor" means a person who contracts with another to have work performed of a kind which is a regular or recurrent part of the trade, business, occupation, or profession of such person;

"Death" means loss of life resulting from an injury;

"Disability" means loss or impairment of a physical or mental function;

"GSIS" means the Government Service Insurance System created under Commonwealth Act Numbered One Hundred Eighty-six, as amended;

"Income benefits" means payments made under the provisions of this Title to the injured employee, or to his dependents in case of death, other than medical and related benefits;

"Injury" means any harmful change in the human organism arising out of and in the course of employment, or damage Lo or loss of prosthetic appliance, but does not include any communicable disease unless it is proven by the employee that the risk of contracting such disease is increased by the nature or conditions of employment;

"Medical and related benefits" means payments made for medical, rehabilitation, hospital, burial and other services and supplies provided for in this Title other than income benefits, but including reasonable travel expenses between the employee's residence and the place of treatment or rehabilitation, as well as reasonable board and lodging expenses;

"Person" includes any individual, partnership, firm, association, trust, corporation or legal representative thereof;

"SSS" means the Social Security System created under Republic Act Numbered One Thousand One Hundred Sixty-one, as amended;

"State Insurance Fund" means all premiums, monies, revenues, penalties and all other collections under this Title;

"Subcontractor" means the other person with whom the contractor subcontracts all or parts of a contract;

"Supplies" means medicine mid other medical, dental and surgical supplies;

"System" means the SSS or the GSIS, as the case may be; and

"Wages" means, in addition to money payments for services rendered, the reasonable value of board, rent, housing, lodging, fuel or similar supplements or facilities furnished by the employer.

ART. 166. Definitions Relating to Family Relationships. — As used in this Title:

"Actually Dependent" means dependent in fact upon the employee for his substantial support and whose dependency is not attributable to his fault or neglect in not securing suitable employment. When used as a noun, the word "dependent" means any person entitled to death benefits;

"Brother" or "sister" means an unmarried brother or sister under 18 years of age or over but physically or mentally incapable of self-support, and actually dependent in fact upon the employee for support. The terms "brothers" and "sisters" include stepbrothers and stepsisters, half brothers and half sisters, and brothers and sisters by adoption;

"Child" means an unmarried child under 18 years of age, or an unmarried child between the ages of 18 and 21, but who is continuing his studies, or an unmarried child who is physically or mentally incapable of self-support. The term "child" includes a posthumous child, a child legally adopted, an actually dependent stepchild or an actually dependent acknowledged illegitimate child;

"Grandchild" means an unmarried offspring of the employee's child who is under 18 years of age or over 18 years of age but physically or mentally incapable of self-support, and actually dependent upon the employee for support. "Grandchild" includes the child of an adopted child but not the child of a stepchild, the stepchild of a child, the stepchild of a stepchild, and the stepchild of an adopted stepchild;

"Grandparent" means a parent of a parent, even by adoption, who is actually dependent in fact upon the employee for support, but docs not include a parent of a stepparent, a stepparent of a parent, or a stepparent of a stepparent;

"Parent" means mother or father, stepparent or parent by adoption, who is actually dependent in fact upon the employee for support;

"Wife" or "widow" means the employee's lawful wife living with or actually dependent upon him at the time of his injury or death, or living apart from the employee for any cause not due to her fault; and

"Widower" means the deceased employee's lawful husband living with and actually dependent upon her.

ART. 167. Limitation of Liability for Compensation. —The State Insurance Fund shall be liable for compensation for injury or death to the employee except where the same was occasioned solely by the employee's intoxication, by his willful intention to injure or kill himself or another, or by his notorious negligence:

ART. 168. Compulsory Coverage of Employers. — "Employer" under this Title shall include:

Every person having one or more employees; and

The National Government and its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, including government-owned and -controlled corporations.

ART. 169. Coverage of Employees. — "Employee" under this Title shall include:

Every person in the service of an employer under any contract of hire or apprenticeship, express or implied; and

Every person performing service in the course of the trade, business, profession or occupation of an employer at the time of the injury, provided such person in relation to this service does not maintain a separate business and is not himself an employer, subject to the provisions of this Title.

ART. 170. Exemptions. — The following employees are exempt from the coverage of this Title:

Any person whose employment is purely casual and is not for the purposes of the occupation or business of the employer;

Any person employed as a domestic helper;

Any immediate member of the family of the employer who lives with him; and

Any elective public official.

ART. 171. Foreign Employment. —The Commission shall ensure adequate coverage and protection of Filipino workers employed abroad, subject to such rules and regulations as it may promulgate.

ART. 172. Registration. —Every employer covered under Article 168 of this Title shall register with the SSS or the GSIS, as the case may be, in accordance with such procedures as the SSS or the GSIS may prescribe.

ART. 173. Exclusiveness of Liability. — Unless otherwise provided by law, the liability of the System under this Title shall be exclusive and in place of all other liabilities of the employer to the employee, his legal representative, dependents or nearest of kin or anyone otherwise entitled to receive damages under the Civil Code on account of such injury or death.

In the case of government employees, the right to compensation under this Title shall be a bar to the recovery of benefits for the same injuries or death provided for in Section 699 of the Revised Administrative Code, as amended, and other existing laws, except those granted by the Government Service Insurance System.

ART. 174. Liability of Third Parties. — (a) In case the injury or death for which compensation is due under this Title is caused by circumstances creating a legal liability in some person other than the employer, it shall be optional for the injured employee or his dependent either to claim compensation from the System under this Title or to sue such other person for damages in accordance with law.

In case compensation is claimed and allowed in accordance with this Title, the System shall be subrogated to the rights of the injured employee or his dependents in accordance with the general law.

Where the System recovers from such third person damages in excess of those paid or allowed under this Title, such excess shall be delivered to the injured employee or another person entitled thereto, after deduction of the expenses of the System and the cost of the proceedings. The sum paid by the System for compensation or the amount of compensation to which the employee or his dependents are entitled under the provisions of this Title shall be admissible as evidence in any damage suit or action.

ART. 175. Deprivation of Benefits. — No contract, rule, regulation or device whatsoever shall operate to diminish or deprive the employee or his dependents of benefits granted under this Title.

Chapter II

Administration of the Fund

ART. 176. State Insurance Fund. — The compensation and other related benefits and services herein provided shall be paid from a State Insurance Fund which is hereby established in the SSS and the GSIS.

ART. 177. Employees Compensation Commission. —The Employees Compensation Commission shall be composed of the Secretary of Labor as ex officio Chairman with the following as members: The Administrator of the SSS, the Genera) Manager of the GSIS, 2 members representing the employees and 2 members representing the employers. The last four (4) members of the Commission shall be appointed by the President of the Philippines for a term of six (6) years. The first two (2) appointive members shall be appointed for three (3) years, and the other two for six (6) years, respectively. All vacancies, except through the expiration of the terms, shall be filled for the unexpired term only. The members of the Commission shall receive a per diem of one hundred pesos (P100) for each meeting actually attended exclusive of actual, ordinary and necessary travel expenses chargeable to the State Insurance Fund. Members of the Commission who are government officials shall serve without additional compensation but may be allowed actual, ordinary and necessary travel expenses.

In the absence of the Secretary of Labor, the Undersecretary or any member of the Commission designated by him shall act as Chairman. In his absence, the Administrator of the SSS or the General Manager of the GSIS may designate his representative to act in his behalf.

ART. 178. Powers and Duties. — The Commission shall:

Assess and fix a rate of premium from all employers covered under Article 168 of this Title;

Determine, under such rules and regulations as it may promulgate, the rate of premium payable by an employer whose records show a high frequency of work accidents or occupational diseases in the preceding year due to failure by the said employer to observe adequate safety measures;

Promulgate rules and regulations governing the processing of claims and the settlement of disputes arising therefrom;

Authorize the GSIS and the SSS to conduct actuarial and financial studies of the State Insurance Fund. The initial study concerned particularly with the granting of constant help and of pension benefits for permanent total disability, permanent partial disability, death, and the integration of the benefits under this Title with other benefits administered by the SSS and the GSIS, shall be made as soon as feasible, but not later than 1975; (e) Appoint and maintain through the Chairman, subject to existing Civil Service Law and rules, the personnel of its staff;

Prepare the annual budget of the Employees Compensation Commission chargeable against the State Insurance Fund;

Authorize the SSS and the GSIS to prepare their respective annual budgets for the operational expenses or administration of the State Insurance Fund: Provided, That the said budget, together with that of the Employees Compensation Commission, is not less than 7% nor more than 12% of the premiums and all income therefrom collected by them, respectively, without prejudice, however, to change in the minimum herein allowed as may be actuarially warranted;

Perform such other functions and exercise such other authority as may be necessary to attain the purposes and objectives for which the Commission is organized; and

Have the power to administer oath and affirmation, and to issue subpoena and subpoena duces tecum in connection with any question or issue arising under this Title.

ART. 179. Review. — Actions of the Commission under paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of the preceding Article may be reviewed on certiorari upon petition of an aggrieved party by (he Supreme Court only on questions of law within ten (10) days from notice thereof.

ART. 180. Enforcement of Decisions. — Any decision, order, or resolution of the Employees Compensation Commission shall become final and executory within ten (10) days from notice thereof if no appeal is taken therefrom, and all monetary awards involved in cases appealed from decisions of the System shall be paid by the System within fifteen (15) days from receipt of notice.

In all other cases, decisions, orders, and resolutions of the Employees Compensation Commission which have become final and executory shall be enforced and executed in the same manner as decisions of the Court of First Instance, and the Commission shall have the power to issue to the City or Provincial Sheriff or to the Sheriff whom it may appoint such writs of execution as may be necessary for the enforcement of such decisions, orders or resolutions and any person who shall fail or refuse to comply therewith shall, upon application by the Commission, be punished by the proper court for contempt.

ART. 181. Secretariat. — There shall be created a Secretariat in the Commission to be headed by a chief executive officer who shall be appointed by the President of the Philippines, subject to Civil Service Law and rules. He shall have previous experience in technical and administrative fields related to the purposes of this Title. His salary shall be fixed by the Commission payable from the State Insurance Fund.

Chapter III

Premiums

ART. 182. Assessment of Premium Rates of Employers. — The Employees Compensation Commission shall assess and fix a rate of premium from all employers covered under Article 168 of this Title. The rate of premiums shall be reviewed periodically and may be revised as the underwriting experience, hazard risk, loss experience, legitimate claims, cost of administration, including anticipated as well as unexpected losses, may require.

ART. 183. Premiums from Private Employers. — The SSS shall collect from every employer under Article 168(a) of this Title premiums in accordance with rates prescribed in the next preceding Article.

ART. 184. Premiums from Public Agencies. — In the case of the National Government and its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, as well as government-owned and/or controlled corporations, the premiums shall be determined by the Commission, taking into account actuarial studies, to be collected by the GSIS. Any deficiency shall be met with supplemental appropriations.

ART. 185. Payments. — The initial payment of premiums shall be made within thirty (30) days from the effectivity of this Code. Thereafter, remittance of premiums shall be made within such time and in such manner as may be prescribed by the GSIS or SSS.

Premiums under this Title shall be paid in their entirety by the employer and any contract or device for the deduction of any portion thereof from the wages of the employees or laborers shall be null and void.

ART. 186. Effect of Nonpayment. — Any employer who defaults in the payment of such premium after they become due and payable shall, in addition thereto, be liable to a surcharge of three percent (3%) thereon for every month of default, both of which may be collected pursuant to distraint issued by the Commission, the SSS or the GSIS. The defaulting employee shall be solely liable to the System during the entire period of default for payment of compensation and related benefits which may have been paid by the System to his employees or their dependents, and any and all premiums, compensation and related benefits and other expenses to which such employer is liable shall constitute a lien on all his property, real and personal, which is hereby declared to be preferred to any credit except taxes. Failure or refusal of the employer to pay or remit the premiums herein prescribed shall not prejudice the right of the employee or his dependents to the benefits under this Title.

ART. 187. Administration and Disbursement of Funds. — All revenues of the State Insurance Fund shall be kept separate and distinct from all other funds, and shall be administered and disbursed in the same manner and under the same conditions, requirements and safeguards as provided by Republic Act Numbered One Thousand One Hundred Sixty-one, as amended, and Commonwealth Act Numbered One Hundred Eighty-six, as amended, with regard to such other funds as are thereunder being paid to and/or collected by the SSS and the GSIS, respectively: Provided, That they conform with the policies, rules and regulations, decisions, orders and resolutions of the Employees Compensation Commission.

All revenues of the State Insurance Fund and of the SSS and the GSIS, as the case may be, as are not needed to meet the current administrative and operational expenses under this Title shall he accumulated in a fund to be known as "Reserve Fund" which shall be used exclusively for the payment of all benefits, medical, rehabilitation and burial services under this Title, and no amount thereof shall be withdrawn or used for any other purpose. All amounts accruing to the Reserve Fund shall be deposited with any authorized depository hanks approved by the Commission, or invested in high interest securities that will mature within one (1) year.

Chapter IV

Medical, Rehabilitation and Burial Services

ART. 188. Medical Services, Appliances and Supplies. — Immediately after an employee has suffered an injury and during the subsequent period of disability the System shall provide the employee with such medical services, appliances and supplies as the nature of his disability and the process of his recovery may require.

ART. 189. System Not Liable for Improper Selection by Employee. — The System shall not be responsible for the changes made by the employee without the approval of the System in medical services, appliances and supplies or any physician furnished or selected by the System nor for compensation for any aggravation of the employee's injury attributable to such unauthorized changes.

ART. 190. Attending Physicians Subject to Rules and Regulations. — All physicians attending injured employees shall comply with all the rules and regulations adopted by the System and shall make reports in forms prescribed by the System at such time as may be required concerning the condition or treatment of any injured employee. All medical information relevant to the particular injury shall, on demand, be made available to the employee and the System. No information developed in connection with treatment or examination for which compensation is sought shall be considered as privileged communication.

ART. 191. Refusal to Submit to Examination or Treatment. — If the employee unreasonably refuses to submit to medical examination or treatment, the System shall suspend the payment of further compensation and his right to further proceedings during such time as such refusal continues. What constitutes an unreasonable refusal shall be determined by the System, which may, on its own initiative, determine the necessity, character, and sufficiency of any medical service furnished or to be furnished and shall have the authority to order a change of physician, hospital or rehabilitation facility when in its judgment such a change is desirable or necessary.

ART. 192. Fees for Medical Services. — All fees and other charges for such medical services shall not be higher than those prevailing in the community for similar services to injured persons in general and shall be subject to regulation by the System.

ART. 193. Rehabilitation Program. — The System shall establish a continuing program for the rehabilitation of injured employees.

ART. 194. Rehabilitation Services. — An employee who has suffered an injury covered by this Title shall be entitled to prompt medical rehabilitation services. When, as a result of the injury, he is unable to perform work for which he has had previous training or experience, he shall be entitled to such vocational rehabilitation services, including retraining, as may be reasonably necessary to restore him to suitable employment.

ART. 195. Reasonable Cost of Board, Lodging or Travel to be Paid by the System. — Where rehabilitation requires residence at or near the facility or institution away from the employee's customary residence, reasonable cost of his board, lodging or travel shall be paid by the System.

ART. 196. Refusal to Accept Rehabilitation Pursuant to Order. — Refusal to accept rehabilitation pursuant to an order of the System or Commission shall result in loss of the right to such service.

ART. 197. Occupational Diseases and Periodic Medical Examinations. — The Commission may by regulation provide for a schedule of occupational diseases which are peculiar to or characteristic of particular processes, trades, or occupations.

For this purpose, it may require pre-employment examination and periodic .medical examination during employment for the early detection of occupational hazards and diseases, and to take such other measures as may be necessary.

ART. 198. Burial Expenses, - If death results from an injury covered by this Title, the System shall pay an amount of five hundred pesos (P500) as burial expenses to any person who incurred such expenses or has liability therefor. However, the GSIS or SSS shall deduct this amount from the funeral expense benefit it grants to its members.

Chapter V

Disability Benefits

ART. 199. Temporary Total Disability. — In case the injury causes temporary total disability for labor, the System shall, during such disability( pay the injured employee a weekly income benefit equivalent to sixty percent (60%) of his average weekly wage for a period not beyond two hundred eight (208) weeks but the total compensation shall not exceed twelve thousand pesos (P12,000).

His income benefit shall not be less than twenty-six pesos (726) per week, except where his average weekly wage is less than this amount, in which case the weekly compensation shall be the entire amount of such average weekly wage. No income benefit shall be allowed for the first three (3) calendar days of disability; but if the disability extends beyond that period, compensation shall be allowed from the date of disability. The day on which the injury occurred shall be included in computing this waiting period unless the employee has been paid full wages for that day.

ART. 200. Total and Permanent Disability. — In case the injury causes permanent total disability, the System shall pay the injured employee a weekly income benefit equal to sixty percent (60%) of his average weekly wage, but which shall not be less than twenty-six pesos (P26) in any case and shall not extend beyond two hundred sixty (260) weeks, but the total compensation shall not exceed twelve thousand pesos (PI2,000). No award of total and permanent disability compensation shall take effect until after two (2) weeks have elapsed from the date of the injury.

In the case of the following injuries, the disability caused thereby shall be deemed total and permanent:

The total and permanent loss of the sight of both eyes;

The loss of both feet at or above the ankle;

The loss of both hands at or above the wrist;

The loss of one hand and one foot;

An injury to the spine resulting in complete and permanent paralysis of both legs or both arms or one leg and one arm; and

An injury to the brain resulting in incurable imbecility or insanity.

The enumeration above shall not be considered exclusive; but in case of illness, the permanent total disability must be certified by the medical officer of the System.

ART. 201. Permanent Partial Disability. — In case the injury causes permanent partial disability, the System shall pay the injured employee a weekly income benefit equal to fifty percent (50%) of his average weekly wage for the period designated in the following schedules:

Thumb and fingers: For the loss of the thumb, forty (40) weeks; For the loss of the first finger, commonly called the index finger, thirty (30) weeks; For the loss of the second finger, twenty-five (25) weeks; For the loss of the third finger, commonly called the little finger, ten (10) weeks; For the loss of the first joint of the thumb or any other finger, one-half of the income benefit above specified for the loss of the thumb or finger. The loss of more than one joint of the thumb or a finger shall be considered as loss of the entire thumb or finger. However, the sum paid for the loss of more than one finger shall in no case exceed the sum provided for in this list for the loss of a hand.

Toes: For the loss of a big toe, twenty-five (25) weeks; For the loss of a toe other than the big toe, ten (10) weeks. The loss of the first joint of any toe shall be considered equal to the loss of half of the toe and the income benefit shall be one-half of the sum specified for the loss of the toe. The loss of more than one joint of any toe shall be considered equal to the loss of the entire toe.

Hand: For the loss of a hand, one hundred and sixty (160) weeks;

Arm: For the loss of an arm, two hundred and eight (208) weeks;

Foot: For the loss of a foot, one hundred and thirty (130) weeks;

Leg: For the loss of a leg, one hundred and ninety (190) weeks;

Eye: For the loss of an eye, one hundred (100) weeks;

Ear: For the complete and permanent loss of the sense of hearing in both ears, two hundred and eight (208) weeks; For the complete and permanent loss of the sense of hearing in one ear, forty (40) weeks; For the loss of both ears, eighty-four (84) weeks; For the loss of one ear, forty (40) weeks;

Loss of Use:

The permanent loss of the use of a hand, an arm, a foot, a leg, an eye, a thumb, a finger, a toe, or a joint shall be considered equivalent to and be compensated at the same rate as the loss of a hand, arm, foot, leg, eye, thumb, finger, toe or joint.

ART. 202. Partial Loss of Use of Member Named in Schedule. — In cases of a permanent partial disability due to the injury of any of the members specified in the next preceding Article, less than the total loss of the member or less than the total loss of its use, and in case the disability is not otherwise compensated in the next preceding Article, the income benefits shall be paid in the proportion prescribed in the next preceding Article for the total loss of the member or for total loss of use thereof, and for the period of time hereinafter specified.

The proportion which the permanent partial disability bears to the total disability of the same member, as specified in the schedule, shall be determined and the income benefit above prescribed shall be paid for a portion of the period above established for the total loss of the member or for the total loss of the use thereof, in accordance with the proportion which the disability bears to the total disability of the members.

ART. 203. Amputation. — Amputation between elbow and wrist shall be considered equivalent to the loss of a hand. Amputation between knee and ankle shall be considered loss of a foot. Amputation at or above the elbow shall be considered equivalent to the loss of an arm. Amputation at or above the knees shall be considered equivalent to the loss of a leg.

ART. 204. Disfigurement. — In case of an injury producing serious disfigurement of the face or hand, the System may, at the request of the interested party, determine and award such income benefits not exceeding twelve thousand pesos (P12,000), as may be fair and proper in view of the nature of the disfigurement. Disfigurement is separate from other permanent partial disability and includes scarring and other disfigurement consequences caused by medical, surgical and hospital treatment of the employee.

ART. 205. Other Cases. — In all cases of permanent partial disability, weekly income benefits shall be paid at the rate and subject to the limitations specified in this Chapter for a period which bears the same relation to a period named in Article 201 as the disability sustained bears to a comparable disability named in the said Article.

ART. 206. Unconditional Nature and Time of Commencement of Payment. — Income benefits for permanent partial disability shall be paid regardless of the earnings of the disabled employee subsequent to the injury. Payments shall not commence until after termination of any temporary total disability that may be caused by the injury.

ART. 207. Provisions Common to Temporary and Permanent Partial Disability; Maximum Benefits. — No awards for partial disability shall be made until after two (2) weeks from the date of the injury. Income benefits used under this Chapter shall not include the benefits provided for in the preceding Chapter: Provided, That the aggregate liability of the System for all types of disability benefits shall not exceed in any case the amount of twelve thousand pesos (P12,000).

Chapter VI

Death Benefits

ART. 208. Payment After Death. — If an employee entitled to weekly income benefits for disability dies from any cause, payment of any unpaid balance of such benefits to the extent that the System is liable therefor shall be made to his dependents, as follows:

To the widow or widower, if there is no child under the age of 18 or incapable of self-support;

If there are both such widow or widower and such child or children, one-half to the widow or widower and the other half to the child or children; or

If there is no such widow or widower but such child or children, then to the child or children to be divided equally among them if more than one;

If there is no such widow or widower or such child or children, but there is a parent, then to such parent, or if both parents are actually dependent, to both of them, to be divided equally between them; or if there are no such parents, but an actually dependent grandparent, then to such grandparent or if more than one, then to all of them to be divided equally among them;

If there is no such widow, widower, child, parent or grandparent, but there is an actually dependent grandchild, brother or sister, then to such dependent, or if more than one, to all of them to be divided equally among them; and

If there are no such dependents, the unpaid balance of the compensation shall revert to the State Insurance Fund.

ART. 209. Income Benefits for Death. — If the injury causes death, the System shall pay a weekly income benefit, but not to exceed two hundred sixty (260) weeks nor the total sum of twelve thousand pesos (P12,000) equivalent to the following percentages of the employee's average weekly wage as determined under Article 214 which shall be reckoned with at not more than P80 and the weekly income benefit shall not be less than twenty-six pesos (P26), to or for the corresponding persons in the order of priority and during the period specified below:

To the widow or widower, where there are no children of the deceased as defined in Article 166, forty-five percent (45%) during widowhood or widowerhood.

To the widow or widower in case there are not more than two children, fifty percent (50%), and if there are three or more, sixty percent (60%). The compensation to the widow or widower shall be for the use or benefit of the widow or widower and for the children, and the Commission may, by regulation, adjust the compensation between them in the most equitable manner possible.

If there is no widow or widower, but a dependent child, forty percent (40%), if there are two or more children, fifty percent (50%), which shall be divided equally among them.

To a parent if actually dependent, forty percent (40%). If both parents are actually dependent, each shall be paid one-half of such income benefits.

To the brothers, sisters, grandparents, and grandchildren if actually dependent, twenty-five percent (25%) to each such dependent. If there should be more than one of such dependents, forty percent (40%), which shall be distributed share and share alike among dependents.

ART. 210. Time of Determination of Relationship and Dependency. — All questions of relationship and dependency shall initially be determined as of the time of death for purposes of income benefits for death.

ART. 211. Status of Alien as Dependent. — An alien shall not be considered a dependent if he is not at the time of the employee's death a resident of the Philippines, and any dependent alien leaving the Philippines shall automatically forfeit his right to compensation under this Title.

ART. 212. Change in Dependents. — Upon the cessation of income benefits under the preceding Article to any person, the income benefits of the remaining persons entitled to the same for the unexpired part of the period during which their income benefits are payable shall be that which such persons would have received if they alone had been entitled to income benefits at the time of the dependent's death.

ART. 213. Effect of Erroneous Payment. — If the System in good faith pays income benefits to a dependent who is inferior in right to another dependent or with whom another dependent is entitled to share, such payment shall discharge the System unless and until such other dependent notifies the System of his claim. In case the System is in doubt as to the respective rights of rival claimants, it shall institute the appropriate proceedings for determination of the proper beneficiary.

Chapter VII

Provisions Common to Income Benefits

ART. 214. Determination of Average Weekly Wage. — Except as otherwise provided in this Title, the average weekly wage of die injured employee at the time of the injury shall be taken as the basis upon which to compute income benefits and shall be determined as follows:

If at the time of the injury the wages are fixed by week, the amount so fixed shall be the average weekly wage.

If at the time of the injury the wages are fixed by the month, the average weekly wage shall be the monthly wages so fixed multiplied by twelve and divided by fifty-two.

If at the time of the injury the wages are fixed by the year, the average weekly wage shall be the yearly wage so fixed divided by fifty-two.

If at the time of injury the wages are fixed by the day, hour or by the output of the employee, the average weekly wage shall be computed in such manner that it shall be the best computation that can be made of the weekly earnings of the employee during the twelve (12) weeks next preceding the injury; however, the weeks when he did not work shall be excluded in the computation.

If on account of the shortness of the time during which the employee has been employed or the casual nature of terms of the employment it is not feasible to compute the average weekly wage on the basis of the injured employee's earnings from such employment, regard may be had to the average weekly wage which during the twelve (12) weeks preceding the injury was being earned by an employee in comparable employment.

In occupations which are exclusively seasonal and therefore cannot be carried on throughout the year, the average weekly wage shall be taken to be one-fifteenth of the total wages which the employee has earned from all occupations during the twelve (12) calendar months immediately preceding the injury.

ART. 215. Income Benefits Payable Despite Other Benefits. — Income benefits shall, with respect to any period of disability, be payable in accordance with this Title to an employee although he has received or is entitled to receive for such period any payment or allowance for holidays, vacation or sick leave, award or any benefit under a collective bargaining or other agreement.

ART. 216. Payment for Second Injuries. — (a) If an employee who has a permanent partial physical impairment suffers an injury which results in a permanent partial or permanent total disability materially and substantially greater than that which would have resulted from the subsequent injury alone, the System shall be liable fully under Chapter 5 of this Title, and shall pay to the injured employee income benefits equivalent to the actual disability sustained in the second injury.

If the subsequent injury as set forth in the preceding paragraph results in death of the employee, the System shall pay one hundred percent (100%) of the prescribed compensation.

ART. 217. Right to Additional Income Benefits. — In case the employee's injury or death was due to the failure of the employer to comply with any law, or fail to install and maintain safety appliances, or take other precautions for the prevention of injury, said employer shall pay to the employee or his dependents additional income benefits equal to twenty-five percent (25%) of those fixed by this Title.

Chapter VIII

Records, Reports, and Notices

ART. 218. Report of Death or Injury. — (a) Within five (5) days after the employer has notice or knowledge of the occurrence of a death or an injury in the employment resulting in absence of his employee from work for a day or more, the employer shall give written notice thereof under oath and on a form prescribed by the System to the nearest regional office of the SSS or the GSIS, as the case may be, or to the Commission setting forth (1) the name, address, and business of the employer; (2) the name, address, sex, age, occupation and wage of the employee; (3) the full circumstances as to the nature and cause of the injury or death; (4) the year, month, day and hour when, and the particular place where the injury occurred; and (5) such other information as the System may prescribe by regulation.

Said report shall be accompanied by a sworn certificate of the company physician or other doctor as to the nature and cause' of the injury or death and its relation to the employment, if any. Such certificate shall be made on a form prescribed by the System.

Should the employer give false information or withhold any material information already in his possession, or fail or refuse to give the notice herein required without justifiable cause, he shall be held liable for damages equivalent to fifty percent (50%) of the income benefits to which the employee is entitled, which shall accrue to the System.

In case of payment of benefits upon any claim later determined to be fraudulent, the employer shall reimburse the System fifty percent (50%) of such benefits if the System was misled by any false information given by the employer.

ART. 219. Notice of Injury or Death. — Notice of injury or death shall be given to the employer and the System as soon as the employee or his dependents are informed of the nature of the injury and its relationship to the employment. No notice shall be required if injury or death is known to the employer or to his agents or representatives.

ART. 220. Form of Notice. — The notice of injury or death shall be sufficient if the same contains the name and address of the employee and of his employer and a statement of the time, place, nature and cause of the injury or death.

ART. 221. Delivery of Notice. — The notice of injury or death shall be by personal service or by registered mail. It shall be made by the employee or, in case of death, by any person claiming to be entitled to compensation for such death or by another person on his behalf.

ART. 222. Notice as Claim; Prescriptive Period. — The notice referred to in the three Articles immediately preceding shall operate as a claim for benefits under this Title. Except in cases where the notice is not required as stated in Article 219 the right to compensation and related benefits for injury or death shall be barred unless notice is given within two (2) years from occurrence of such injury or death.

ART. 223. Assignment of Rights. — No claim for compensation under this Title is transferable, and all compensation or rights to compensation shall be exempt from any creditor's claim.

ART. 224. Application for Modification. — The System, upon its own initiative or upon application of any party in interest, may review for purposes of modification any previous award, finding or action within two (2) years after the date of the last payment or the furnishing of compensation, upon the following grounds:

Clerical error or mistakes in mathematical calculations;

Change in the nature or extent of the employee's injury, wage-earning capacity or status of the claimant; or

Fraud.

Title III

MEDICARE

Chapter I

Preliminary Matters

ART. 225. Statement of Objectives. — The State shall gradually provide total medical service for the people by adopting and implementing a comprehensive and coordinated medical care program based on accepted concepts of health, namely:

Total coverage of medical services according to the needs of patients;

Coordination and cooperation in the use of all medical facilities of both the Government and. the private sector; and

Preservation of the freedom of choice of physicians and hospitals and the family doctor-patient relationship.

ART. 226. Terms Defined. — For the purposes of the Title, the following terms shall, unless the context indicates otherwise, have the following meaning:

SSS. — The Social Security System created under Republic Act Numbered One Thousand One Hundred Sixty-one, as amended.

GSIS. — The Government Service Insurance System created under Commonwealth Act Numbered One Hundred Eighty-six, as amended.

Employee. — Any person compulsorily covered by the SSS under Republic Act Numbered One Thousand One Hundred Sixty-one, as amended; or by the GSIS under Commonwealth Act Numbered One Hundred Eighty-six, as amended, except members of the Armed Forces of the Philippines.

Employer. — The employer of the employee.

Benefit. — The hospitalization, surgical and medical expense benefit provided for under this Title.

Hospital. — Any hospital, Government or private, licensed with the Bureau of Medical Services.

Medical Practitioner. — Any doctor of medicine duly licensed to practice in the Philippines and an active member of good standing of the Philippine Medical Association.

Confinement. — Confinement in a hospital defined in paragraph (f) of this Article, due to sickness or bodily injury.

Single Period of Confinement. — A continuous period of confinement or periods of confinement for the same or any related illness, injury or condition not separated from each other by more than nine (9) days,

Commission. — Philippine Medical Care Commission created under Republic Act Numbered Six Thousand One Hundred Eleven.

Service Beds.— Beds reserved for beneficiaries under Program II.

Community Mutual Health Funds. — Funds accruing from the contributions of residents in each chartered city or municipality, plus the one hundred percent (100%) government counterpart funds.

Administrator. — Refers to the Administrator of the Commission unless specified otherwise.

ART. 227. Purposes and Objectives. — The main purposes and objectives of this Title are:

Extension of medical care to all residents in an evolutionary way within our economic means and ability as a nation; and

To provide the people of the country practical means of helping themselves pay for adequate medicare.

ART. 228. Functions, Powers, and Duties of the Medical Care Commission.— To carry out the above purposes and objectives, the Philippine Medical Care Commission as now constituted, and referred to in this Title as the Commission, shall exercise the following functions and powers:

To formulate policies, administer and implement the Medical Care Plan, hereinafter provided;

To organize its offices, fix the compensation and appoint such personnel as may be deemed necessary in accordance with Civil Service Law, rules and regulations. The plantilla of the Commission shall be included in the Appropriations Act for the next fiscal year and yearly thereafter. The respective Community Health Funds of the provinces, cities and municipalities shall not be used for payment of salaries of the employees of the Commission;

To establish the provincial, city, and municipal Medical Care Councils;

To authorize actuarial studies for the purposes of determining and fixing, from time to time, the contributions necessary and the extent and scope of benefits of the beneficiaries of the Plan as its resources may permit in order to ensure adequate financing and disbursement of funds to all participants of the Plan;

To set up the requisites and procedures for the registration of beneficiaries under this Title;

To devise control measures to prevent abuses of the Plan;

To provide them from its funds the necessary amount for the Provincial Medical Care Council, the City Medical Care Council and the Municipal Medical Care Council to carry out their respective functions under the Plan;

To be empowered to withhold, withdraw or suspend medical care benefits from any one who refuses to pay his contribution as provided herein except in emergency cases;

To promulgate such supplementary rules and regulations as may be necessary to implement the provisions of this Title;

To submit to the Chief Executive and the National Assembly annually within the first ten (10) days of each regular session, a report covering its activities in the administration and enforcement of this Title during the preceding year; and

Generally to exercise all powers necessary to attain the purposes and objectives for which the Commission is organized.

ART. 229. Board Meetings. — Regular meetings of the Commission shall be held once a week. Special meetings not to exceed four (4) sessions a month may be held at the discretion of the Chairman or at the written request of the majority of the members of the Commission. The presence of five (5) members of the Commission shall constitute a quorum. Members of the Commission who are government officials shall serve without additional compensation, but may be allowed traveling and other necessary expenses. Members who are not government officials shall receive a per diem of one hundred pesos (P100) for each session actually attended by them. The Commission shall fix the compensation of, and appoint its secretary

ART. 230. The Chairman of the Commission. — The Chairman shall be a reputable member of the medical profession with at least twelve (12) years of experience in medical practice and with proven executive ability in business or medical undertakings. He shall hold office on a full-time basis and shall receive a compensation of at least thirty thousand pesos (P30,000) per annum. He shall be entitled to commutable traveling and representation expenses not to exceed six thousand pesos (P6,000) per annum. He shall preside at all meetings of the Commission and shall exercise such other duties as will achieve the purposes and objectives of this Title.

ART. 231. Administrator of the Commission. — The Commission shall have under its general supervision an Administrator, who shall serve as its Chief Executive Officer. He shall hold office on a full-time basis for a term of six (6) years and may not be removed except for cause. The Administrator shall be a duly registered physician with at least ten (10) years experience in practice, who has proven executive ability and experience in business or medical undertakings. He shall be appointed by the President of the Philippines and shall receive a minimum compensation of P24,000 per annum and such other privileges as may be fixed by the Commission. All travel and other representation expenses shall not be more than six thousand pesos (P6,000) per annum. No other allowances and/or representation expenses under any denomination shall be allowed.

ART. 232. The Philippine Medical Care Plan. — The Philippine Medical Care Plan shall consist of two (2) basic programs, namely:

Program I — For the members of the SSS and GS1S; and

Program II — For those not covered in Program I.

Beneficiaries under Program I shall be entitled in subsequent sections of this Title.

The Commission shall, within one year after the effectivity of this Code, formulate an integrated program for the proper implementation of Program II as envisioned in this Title. Likewise, it shall, within the same period, recommend to the Legislature who shall be entitled to Medical Care benefits under Program II and the amount of contributions they shall make.

Chapter II

Program I

ART. 233. Medical Care for SSS and GSIS Members. — The SSS and the GSIS shall set up their respective medical care funds and shall administer the same in accordance with the following provisions of this Title and the policies and implementing rules and regulations promulgated by the Commission.

Within two (2) years from the approval of this Code, the SSS and the GSIS shall with the approval of the Commission, respectively, adopt a supplementary plan designated to take over the medical care needs of the legal dependents of their members from Program I for which the SSS and the GSIS may require additional premiums.

ART. 234. Compulsory Coverage. — Coverage under this Title shall be compulsory and automatic upon all employees defined under this Title. In the case of an employee who is both covered by the SSS and GSIS, only his employment with the latter shall be considered for purposes of his coverage.

ART. 235. Effect of Separation from Employment. — Subject to such rules, regulations and/or conditions as the SSS or GSIS may prescribe, an employee who is no longer obliged to contribute under Article 245 by separation from employment, may elect to continue paying contributions representing the contribution of the employer as well as that of the employee only within sixty (60) days following the date of such separation. An employee shall be entitled to the benefits under this Title if he has satisfied the contribution requirement specified in Article 244.

ART. 236. Hospitalization Expense Benefit. — Under such rules, regulations and/or conditions as the SSS and GSIS may prescribe, subject to the approval of the Commission, an employee who is confined in a hospital on account of sickness or bodily injury requiring hospitalization, shall be entitled to confinement not exceeding forty-five (45) days annually to:

Room and board expense benefit for each day of confinement in a hospital not exceeding twelve pesos (P12) a day; and

Special charge expense benefit for charges necessary for the care of the employee, such as laboratory examination fees, drugs, X-ray, operating room and the like, not to exceed one hundred fifty pesos (P150).

For drugs and medicines that may be essential under paragraph (b), the employee shall have the option to secure the same from either the hospital pharmacy wherein he is confined or from any retail drugstore of his own choice, subject only to the rules and regulations promulgated by the Commission.

ART. 237. Surgical Expense Benefit. — Under such rules, regulations and/or conditions as the SSS or GSIS may prescribe, subject to the approval of the Commission, an employee who shall have undergone surgical procedure in a hospital, shall be entitled to a surgical expense benefit as may be determined by the SSS or GSIS, as the case may be, taking into account the nature and complexity of the procedure. The amount of benefit shall not exceed fifty pesos (P50) for a minor operation, two hundred pesos (P200) for a medium operation and five hundred pesos (P500) for a major operation.

ART. 238. Medical Expense Benefit. — Under such rules, regulations and/or conditions as the SSS or the GSIS may prescribe, subject to the approval of the Commission, an employee who shall have received necessary professional medical treatment by a medical practitioner while confined shall be entitled to a medical expense benefit of P5.00 for each daily visit, but the maximum benefit shall not exceed one hundred pesos (P100) for a single period of confinement or for any one sickness or injury. In determining the compensable daily visit occasioned by any one sickness or injury not more than one visit for any one day shall be counted. Specialists who are properly certified by the Philippine Medical Association shall be entitled to collect ten pesos (P10.00) for each daily visit,

ART. 239. Free Choice of Hospital or Medical Practitioner. —Any employee who becomes sick or is injured shall be free to choose the hospital in which he will be confined and the medical practitioner by whom he will be treated.

ART. 240. Notification of Illness Confinement and Confinement Supervision. — When an employee becomes sick or is injured and confined in a hospital, his confinement as well as the nature of his sickness or injury shall be communicated by said hospital to the SSS or GSIS, as the case may be. The SSS or the GSIS may exercise supervision over the confined employee and, at its expense, require him to be examined by a medical practitioner of his choice.

ART. 241. Payment of Claims. - Benefits provided under this Title shall be payable directly to the hospital, the medical practitioner and the retail drugstore, if any, under such rules, regulations and/or conditions the SSS or GSIS may prescribe, subject to the approval of the Commission. When the charges and fees agreed upon between the employee and the hospital and/or medical practitioner are in excess of the amount of the benefits provided for under this Title such employee shall be liable only for the payment of that portion of such fees and charges as are in excess of the benefits payable under this Title.

ART. 242. Limitation on the Right to Benefits. - (a) No employee shall be entitled to the benefits herein granted unless he shall have paid at least three (3) monthly contributions during the last twelve (12) months prior to the first day of the single period of confinement. In case of sickness on which surgery may be deferred at the election of the employee in such cases as herniotomy, hemorrhoidectomy, tonsillectomy, adenotomy and the like, the required monthly contributions paid immediately prior to the operation shall be at least for twelve (12) consecutive monthly installments. Until such time that such an employee is entitled to the benefits under Program I, he shall be covered by Program II.

When the SSS or GSIS, as the case may be, has not been duly notified by the hospital in the manner prescribed under Article 240 no claim for any of the benefits of the Title shall be paid to the hospital concerned and said hospital shall further pay to the medical practitioner damages equivalent to the benefits which said medical practitioner would have received had there been due notification. In no case may a claim for benefit filed after the lapse of sixty (60) days from the last day of confinement be paid.

The SSS or GSIS may deny or reduce any benefits provided under Chapter 2 of this Title when an employee, hospital or medical practitioner, as the case may be:

Fails without good cause or legal ground to comply with the advice of the medical practitioner with respect to hospitalization;

Furnishes false or incorrect information concerning the matter;

Is guilty during his confinement or illness of gross negligence with regard to his health;

Refuses to be examined by or fails to comply with the advice of the medical practitioner appointed for supervision purposes by the SSS or GSIS; and

Fails to comply with any provisions of this Chapter or rules and regulations of the SSS or GSIS required for entitlement to the benefits provided in this Title.

ART. 243. Exclusions. — The benefits granted under this Title shall not cover any expense for:

Cosmetic surgery or treatment.

Dental service except major dental surgery or operation which needs hospitalization.

Optometric service or surgery. (d) Services related to the case of psychiatric illness or of diseases traceable to such illness.

ART. 244. Rates of Contributions. — For employees covered by the GSIS and the SSS, the initial monthly contributions shall be in accordance with the following schedule:

Monthly Salary Wage or Earnings

Covered Wage

Employer's Contribution

Employee's Contribution

Below

P 49.99

  P 25.00

P0.30

P0.30

50.00 —

99.99

  75.00

0.95

0.95

100.00 —

149.99

  125.00

1.55

1.55

150.00 —

199.99

  175.00

2.20

2.20

200.00 —

249.99

  225.00

2.80

2.80

250.00 —

Over  

300.00

3.75

3.75

  ART. 245. Collections of Employee's and Employer's Contribution. — (a) Within such time and manner as the SSS or GSIS may prescribe the employer shall deduct and withhold from his employee's monthly compensation the employee's contribution; and

Within such time and manner as the SSS or GSIS may prescribe, but not beyond twenty (20) days from the date due, the employer shall remit directly to the GSIS or SSS, as the case may be, his corresponding contributions together with the employee's contributions. No employer shall deduct, directly or indirectly, from the compensation of the covered employees or otherwise recover from them his own contributions in behalf of such employees. Failure of the employer to remit to the GSIS or SSS the corresponding employee's and employer's contributions shall not be a reason for depriving the employee of the benefits of this Title.

ART. 246. Health Insurance Fund. — The Health Insurance Funds of the SSS and the GSIS are hereby created which shall consist of all contributions and all accruals thereto and shall be kept separate and distinct from all other funds paid to and collected by said agencies to be utilized for the purpose of meeting claims for benefits under this Title.

ART. 247. Administration and Disbursement of Funds. — Subject to the next succeeding article, the Health Insurance Funds of the SSS or GSIS shall be administered and disbursed in the same manner and under the same conditions, requirements and safeguards as provided by Republic Act Numbered One Thousand One Hundred Sixty-one, as amended, and Commonwealth Act Numbered One Hundred Eighty-six, as amended, with regard to such other funds as are thereunder being paid to or collected by the SSS and the GSIS, respectively: Provided, That they conform with the policies, rules and regulations established by the Commission.

ART. 248. Deposit of Contributions. — All the contributions collected by and remitted to the GSIS and SSS under this Title shall, within thirty (30) days of receipt, he deposited in interest bearing government deposit banks doing business in the Philippines, having an unimpaired paid-up capital and surplus equivalent to one million five hundred thousand pesos (P1,500,000) or over.

ART. 249. Records and Reports. — The Philippine Medical Care Commission, the provincial, city and municipal Medical Care Councils, the SSS and the GSIS shall keep and cause to be kept records of the operation of their respective funds and of disbursement thereof, and all accounts or payments made out of said funds. They shall also cause to be kept such records as may be required for the purpose of making actuarial valuations including such data necessary in the computation of the rate of morbidity in the Philippines and any other information that may be useful for the adjustment of benefits.

Chapter III

Program II

ART. 250. Hospitalization, Out-Patient and Domiciliary Care. — Subject to the provisions of Article 236, for purposes of hospitalization under this Title, private hospitals and clinics duly licensed by the Bureau of Medical Services shall set aside at least twenty percent (20%) of their total bed capacity as service beds to be subsidized at the rate of P10.00 per bed per day to be paid by the month not later than the tenth day of the Following month, from any special fund appropriated for this purpose. Said service beds shall remain such only when payments of these monthly subsidies do not become delinquent for more than three (3) consecutive months.

Hospital loans shall be given priority by government financing institutions, especially in the rural areas where there arc no existing government or private hospitals, at a maximum rate of six percent (6%) per annum on a long-term basis.

Until such time as the Commission can otherwise provide therefor the major aspect of out-patient and domiciliary care shall he carried out initially by existing government hospitals, rural health units, and other government clinics.

ART. 251, Registration and Contribution. - To be entitled to the benefits under this Title, and subject to the regulations and procedures for registration to be promulgated by the Commission, every resident shall be registered and issued a medical card upon payment to the respective provincial, city, or municipal treasurer concerned of the required yearly assessments to be fixed by the Commission. The yearly assessments shall be payable on or before January 20 of each year to be collected by the City or Municipal Treasurer concerned, and shall respectively be held by them in trust for the City Medical Care Council or the Municipal Medical Care Council, as agents of the latter.

ART. 252. Provincial Medical Care Council. - The Commission shall establish in each province a Provincial Medical Care Council of seven (7) members to be composed of:

The Provincial Health Officer;

The Provincial Governor;

A representative of the Provincial Governor;

The duly designated representative of the component society of the Philippine Medical Association;

A representative of the Philippine Hospital Association from one of the private hospitals in the province, if any, preferably a chief of a hospital; and

Two private citizens from the province, one of whom shall be a duly registered physician, to be appointed by the Commission.

The last four (4) mentioned members shall be appointed for a term of four (4) years each, arranged on a staggered basis so that only one is appointed annually, except the initial appointees who have terms of one, two, three, and four years, respectively.

The Council shall elect its Chairman and shall:

Supervise the operation of the program on the municipal level;

Insure homogenous distribution and maximum utilization of medical facilities within the province;

Act as an adjudicators' body for the parties involved in claims for payment;

Perform such other functions and duties as may be assigned to it by the Commission; and

Hold in trust through the Provincial Treasurer, as member of the Provincial Medical Care Council, Community Mutual Health Funds of cities and municipalities as provided for under Article 251 (b).

ART. 253. City Medical Care Council. — The Commission shall establish in each chartered city a City Medical Care Council of seven (7) members, to be composed of:

The City Health Officer;

The City Treasurer;

A representative of the Mayor;

The duly designated representative or the component society of the Philippine Medical Association;

A representative to be appointed by the Commission upon recommendation of the Philippine Hospital Association preferably from one of the city private hospitals; and

Two (2) private citizens from the city, one of whom shall be a duly registered physician, to be appointed by the Commission.

The last four (4) mentioned members shall have terms of four (4) years each, arranged on a staggered basis so that only one is appointed annually, except the initial appointee who shall have terms of one, two, three and four years, respectively. This Council shall elect its Chairman, shall administer the Community Mutual Health Fund, as provided for in Article 255, and implement the rules and regulations set forth by the Commission. It shall disburse funds for the payment of medical and hospital care for its members directly to the institution or medical practitioner concerned. Whenever it may be deemed expedient or necessary, the City Medical Care Council may set up a number of Community Medical Care Councils to be composed of five (5) members chosen from representatives of the community, civic and government sectors. The latter shall assist the City Medical Care Council in the discharge of its functions.

ART. 254. Municipal Medical Care Council. - The Commission shall establish in each municipality a Municipal Medical Care Council of seven (7) members, to be composed of:

The Municipal Health Officer;

The Municipal Treasurer;

A representative of the Mayor;

A designee of the component society or the Philippine Medical Association preferably a resident medical practitioner;

A representative of the Philippine Hospital Association in places with registered hospitals, or in their absence, the highest public school official in town; and

Two (2) private citizens from the municipality, one of whom shall preferably be a duly registered physician, to be appointed by the Commission.

The last four (4) mentioned members shall be appointed for a term of four (4) years each, arranged on a staggered basis so that only one is appointed annually, except the initial appointees who shall have terms of one, two, three, and four years, respectively.

This Council shall elect its own Chairman, Vice-Chairman, and Secretary; administer the Community Health Fund; implement rules and regulations promulgated by the Commission; and disburse funds for the payment of hospitalization and hospital care for its members directly to the institution or medical practitioner concerned within ten (10) days after receipt of the bill.

ART. 255. Community Mutual Health Fund. — (a) There is hereby established in each city or municipality a Community Mutual Health Fund. To this Fund shall accrue the yearly contributions of residents in the city or municipality, and a national government counterpart in aid amounting to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount collected by the city or municipality.

Community Mutual Health funds of cities or municipalities which, by virtue of the change of corporate personality, or loss of any portion thereof through regrouping, shall be held in trust by the Provincial Medical Care Council until such time as the Commission shall have established the new Medical Care Council and defined its jurisdiction.

Chapter IV

Funding

ART. 256. Revolving Funds. — The gross income of every government hospital shall be constituted into a revolving fund for that particular hospital for the upgrading and expansion of its facilities and for its maintenance and operation, subject to the approval of the Department of Health.

ART. 257. Reparation Allocation. — The Reparations Commission shall allocate and include in accordance with the reparations law, as amended, in its annual schedule beginning with the fourteenth up to the twentieth reparations year the procurement of machineries, equipment and instruments worth at least $1.5 million annually as the Philippine Medical Care Commission may recommend. The latter shall, with the approval by the Department of Health distribute such machineries, equipment and supplies to the different government hospital and rural health units. A similar allocation of at least $1.5 million shall likewise be made for the private hospitals involved in this plan pursuant to the provision of this Title.

Title IV

OTHER BENEFITS

Chapter I

Adult Education

ART. 258. Adult Education. — Every employer shall render assistance in the establishment and operation of adult education programs for their workers and employees as prescribed by regulations jointly approved by the Department of Labor and the Department of Education and Culture.

BOOK V

LABOR RELATIONS

Title I

POLICY AND DEFINITIONS

Chapter I

Objectives

ART. 259. Statement of Objectives. - It is the policy of the State:

To promote free collective bargaining, including voluntary arbitration, as a mode of settling labor disputes;

To promote free trade unionism as an agent of democracy, social justice and development;

To rationalize and restructure the labor movement in order to eradicate inter-union and intra-union conflicts;

To promote the enlightenment of workers concerning their rights and obligations as union members and as employees;

To provide an adequate administrative machinery for the expeditious settlement of labor disputes; and (f) To ensure a stable but dynamic and just industrial peace.

Chapter II

Definitions

ART. 260. Definitions. — (a) "Commission" means the National Labor Relations Commission established by this Code.

"Bureau" means the Bureau of Labor Relations and/or Labor Relations Divisions in the regional offices established under Presidential Decree No. 1, in the Department of Labor.

"Employer" includes any person acting in the interest of an employer, directly or indirectly. The term shall not include any labor organization or any of its officers or agents except when acting as employer.

"Employee" includes any person in the employ of an employer. The term shall not be limited to the employees of a particular employer, unless this Code so explicitly states. It shall include any individual whose work has ceased as a result of or in connection with am, current labor dispute or because of any unfair labor practice if he has not obtained any other substantially equivalent and regular employment.

"Labor organization" means any union or association of employees which exists in whole or in part for the purpose of collective bargaining concerning terms and conditions of employment.

"Legitimate labor organization" means any labor organization duly registered with the Department of Labor and includes any branch or local thereof.

"Company union" means any labor organization whose function or administration has been assisted by any act defined as unfair labor practice by this Code.

"Bargaining representative" means a legitimate labor organization or any officer or agent of such organization whether or not employed by the employer.

"Unfair labor practice" means any unfair labor practice as defined by this Code.

"Labor dispute" includes any controversy or matter concerning terms or conditions of employment or the association or representation of persons in negotiating the fixing, maintaining, changing or arranging of terms and conditions of employment regardless of whether or not the disputants stand in the proximate relations of employers and employees.

"Managerial employee" is one who is vested with powers or prerogatives to lay down and execute management policies and/or to hire, transfer, suspend, lay off, recall, discharge, assign or discipline employees, or to effectively recommend such managerial actions. All employees not falling within this definition arc considered rank and file employees for purposes of this Book.

"Strike" means any temporary stoppage of work by the concerted action of employees.

"Lockout" means the temporary refusal of any employer to furnish work.

"Internal union dispute" includes all disputes or grievances arising from any violation of or disagreement over any provision of the constitution and bylaws of a union, including any violation of the rights of union membership provided for in this Code.

Title II

NATIONAL LABOR RELATIONS COMMISSION

Chapter I

Creation and Composition

ART. 261. Creation of National Labor Relations Commission. — A National Labor Relations Commission is hereby established in the Department of Labor. It shall be under the administrative supervision of the Secretary of Labor and shall be composed of a chairman representing the public, two (2) members representing the workers and two (2) members representing the employers.

ART. 262. Headquarters and Regional Branches. — The Chairman of the Commission, subject to the approval of the Secretary of Labor, shall establish as many regional branches as are necessary, each to be headed by a Labor Arbiter. The Commission shall have its main office in the Greater Manila area.

The Chairman of the Commission shall have administrative supervision over all the Labor Arbiters and their staff and personnel.

ART. 263. Appointment and Qualifications. — The Chairman and members of the Commission shall have at least five (5) years of experience in handling labor-management relations and the Labor Arbiters shall have at least two (2) years experience in the same field. In addition, the Chairman and one (1) representative each of the workers and the employers shall be members of the bar.

The members representing the employers and the members representing the workers shall be chosen from among the nominees of workers organizations and employers organizations, respectively.

The Chairman and four (4) members of the Commission shall be appointed by the President and shall hold office for a period of six (6) years without prejudice to reappointment. The Labor Arbiters shall likewise be appointed by the President and shall be subject to Civil Service Law and rules and regulations.

The Secretary of Labor shall appoint the staff and personnel of the Commission and the regional branches as the needs of the service may require subject to the Civil Service Law and rules and regulations.

ART. 264. Salaries. — The Chairman shall receive an annual salary of forty thousand pesos (P40.000). Each of the members shall receive an annual salary of thirty-six thousand pesos (P36.000) and each of the Labor Arbiters shall receive an annual salary of twenty-four thousand pesos (P24.000).

Chapter II

Powers and Duties

ART. 265. Jurisdiction of the Commission. — The Commission shall have exclusive appellate jurisdiction over all cases decided by the Labor Arbiters and compulsory arbitrators.

The Labor Arbiters shall have exclusive jurisdiction to hear and decide the following:

Unfair labor practice cases;

Unresolved issues in collective bargaining, including wages, hours of work and other terms and conditions of employment which are usually settled through collective bargaining duly certified by the Bureau of Labor Relations in accordance with the provisions of this Code;

Claims involving non-payment or under-payment of wages, overtime compensation, separation pay, maternity leave and other money claims arising from employer-employee relations, except claims for workmen's compensation, social security and medicare benefits. The power of the Court of Agrarian Relations to hear and decide representation cases in relation to agricultural workers is hereby transferred to the Bureau;

Violations of labor standard laws;

Cases involving household services; and

All other cases or matters arising from employer-employee relations, unless expressly excluded by this Book.

ART. 266. Powers of the Commission. — The Commission shall have the power and authority:

To promulgate, subject to the approval of die Secretary of Labor, rules and regulations governing the hearing and disposition of cases before it and its regional branches, as well as those pertaining to its internal functions and such rules and regulations as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of this Code;

To administer oaths, summon the parties to a controversy, issue subpoenas requiring the attendance and testimony of witnesses or the production of such books, papers, contracts, records, statements of accounts, agreements, and others, as may be material to a just determination of the matter under investigation, and to testily in any investigation or hearing conducted in pursuance of this Code;

To conduct investigation for the determination of a question, matter or controversy within its jurisdiction, proceed to hear and determine the disputes in the absence of any party thereto who has been summoned or served with notice to appear, conduct its proceedings or any part thereof in public or in private, adjourn its hearings to any time and place, refer technical matters or accounts to an expert and to accept his report as evidence after hearing of the parties upon due notice, direct parties to be joined in or excluded from the proceedings, correct, amend, or waive any error, defect or irregularity, whether in substance or in form, give all such directions as it may deem necessary or expedient in the determination of the dispute before it, and dismiss any matter or refrain from hearing further or from determining the dispute or part thereof, where it is trivial or where further proceeding by the Commission are not necessary or desirable; and

To hold any person in contempt, directly or indirectly, and impose appropriate penalties therefor.

A person guilty of misbehavior in the presence of or so near the Chairman or any member of the Commission or any Labor Arbiter as to obstruct or interrupt the proceedings before the same, including disrespect toward said officials, offensive personalities toward others, or refusal to be sworn to, or to answer as a witness or to subscribe to an affidavit or deposition when lawfully required to do so, may be summarily adjudged in direct contempt by said officials and punished by fine not exceeding two hundred pesos (P200) or imprisonment not exceeding ten (10) days, or both, if it be the Commission, or a member thereof, or by fine not exceeding ten pesos (P10.00) or imprisonment not exceeding one (1) day, or both, if it be a Labor Arbiter.

The person adjudged in direct contempt by a Labor Arbiter may appeal to the Commission and the execution of the judgment shall be suspended pending the resolution of the appeal upon the filing of such person of a bond on condition that he will abide by and perform the judgment should the appeal be decided against him. Judgment of the Commission on direct contempt is immediately executory and nonappealable.

Indirect contempt shall be dealt with by the Commission or Labor Arbiter in the manner prescribed under Rule 7 1 of the Revised Rules of Court.

ART. 267. Ocular Inspection. - The Chairman, any Commissioner, Labor Arbiter or their duly authorized representatives may, at any time during working hours, conduct an ocular inspection on any establishment, building, ship or vessel, place or premises, including any work, material, implement, machinery, appliance or any object therein, and ask any employee, laborer, or any person, as the case may be, for any information or data concerning any matter or question relative to the object of the investigation.

ART. 268. Execution of Awards. — As soon as a decision, order or award has become final and executory, the Commission or any Labor Arbiter shall, motu proprio, or on motion of any interested party, issue a writ of execution requiring the sheriff or the proper officer to execute said decision, order or award of the Commission, the Labor Arbiters, or compulsory or voluntary arbitrators.

ART. 269. Compulsory Arbitrators. — The Commission or any Labor Arbiter shall have the power to seek the assistance of other government officials and qualified private citizens to act as compulsory arbitrators m cases referred to them and to fix and assess the fees of such compulsory arbitrators.

ART. 270. Technical Rules Not Binding. — In any proceeding before the Commission or any of the Labor Arbiters, the rules of evidence prevailing in courts of law or equity shall not be controlling and it is the spirit and intention of this Code that the Commission and its members and the Labor Arbiters shall use every and all reasonable means to ascertain the facts in each case speedily and objectively and without regard to technicalities of law or procedure, all in the interest of due process. In any proceeding before the Commission or any Labor Arbiter, the parties may be represented by legal counsel but it shall be the duty of the chairman, any Commissioner or any Labor Arbiter to exercise complete control of the proceedings at all stages.

ART. 271. Appearance of Non-lawyers. - Non-lawyers may appear before the Commission or any Labor Arbiter only:

If they represent themselves; and

If they represent their organization or members thereof.

Title III

BUREAU OF LABOR RELATIONS

ART. 272. Bureau of Labor Relations. — The Bureau of Labor Relations and the Labor Relations Divisions in the regional offices of the Department of Labor shall-have original and exclusive authority to act, at their own initiative or upon request of either or both parties, in all inter-union and intra-union conflicts, and all disputes, grievances or problems arising from or affecting labor-management relations, except those arising from the implementation or interpretation of collective bargaining agreements which shall be the subject of grievance procedure and/or voluntary arbitration.

The Bureau shall have fifteen (15) working days to act on all labor cases, subject to extension by agreement of the parties, after which the Bureau shall certify the cases to the appropriate Labor Arbiters. The 15-working-day deadline, however, shall not apply to cases involving deadlocks in collective bargaining which the Bureau shall certify to the appropriate Labor Arbiters only after all possibilities of voluntary settlement shall have been tried.

ART. 273. Compromise Agreements. — Any compromise settlement, including those involving labor standard laws, voluntarily agreed upon by the parties with the assistance of the Bureau or the regional office of the Department of Labor, shall be final and binding upon the parties. The National Labor Relations Commission or any court shall not assume jurisdiction over issues involved therein except in case of noncompliance thereof or it there is prima facie evidence that the settlement was obtained through fraud, misrepresentation, or coercion.

ART. 274. Certification of Cases to the Commission. — The Labor Arbiters shall entertain only cases certified to them for compulsory arbitration by the Bureau or by the Regional Director of the Department of Labor.

ART. 275. Issuance of Subpoenas. — The Bureau shall have the power to require the appearance of any person or the production of any paper, document, or matter relevant to a labor dispute under its jurisdiction either at the request of any interested party or at its own initiative.

ART. 276. Appointment of Bureau Personnel. — The Secretary of Labor may appoint, in addition to the present personnel of the Bureau and the Labor Relations Division, such number of conciliators, examiners and other assistants as may be necessary to carry out the purpose of this Code.

ART. 277. Registry and Certification Division. — The Bureau shall keep a registry of legitimate labor organizations, their branches or locals.

The Bureau is hereby empowered to certify collective bargaining agreements which comply with standards established by the Secretary of Labor for such purpose.

The present Research and Statistics Section of the Conciliation Division of the Bureau is renamed the Collective Bargaining Certification Division.

The Division shall maintain a file of all collective bargaining agreements and other related agreements, records of settlement of labor disputes, and copies of orders, awards and decisions of the Commission and voluntary arbitrators. It shall analyze the terms and conditions of collective bargaining agreements and prepare certifications of collective bargaining agreements.

The file shall be open and accessible to interested parties under conditions prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, except that no specific information submitted in confidence shall be disclosed. The Division shall perform such other functions as the Bureau may require.

ART. 278. Prohibition on Certification Election. — The Bureau shall not entertain any petition for certification election or any other action which may disturb the administration of collective bargaining agreements duly certified by it except under Articles 300 and 304 of this Code.

ART. 279. Privileged Communication. — Information and statements made at conciliation proceedings shall be treated as privileged communication and shall not be used as evidence in the Commission. Conciliators and similar officials shall not testify in any court or body regarding any matters taken up at conciliation proceedings conducted by them.

Title IV

LABOR ORGANIZATIONS

Chapter I

Registration and Cancellation

ART. 280. Requirements of Registration. — Any applicant labor organization, association or group of unions or workers shall acquire legal personality and shall be entitled to the rights and privileges granted by law to legitimate labor organizations upon issuance of the certificate of registration based on the following requirements:

Fifty pesos (P50) registration fee;

The names of its officers, their addresses, the principal address of the labor organization, the minutes of the organizational meetings and the list of the workers who participated in such meetings;

The names of all the members it seeks to represent. At least fifty percent (50%) of the employees in the bargaining unit shall be members of the applicant union;

If the applicant union has been in existence for one or more years, a copy of its annual financial reports; and

Four (4) copies of the constitution and by-laws of the applicant union, minutes of its adoption or ratification, and the list of the members who participated in it.

ART. 281. Action on Application. — The Bureau shall act on all applications for registration within thirty (30) days from filing.

All requisite documents and papers shall be certified under oath by the secretary or the treasurer of the organization, as the case may be, and attested to by its president.

ART. 282, Denial of Registration; Appeal. — The decision of the Labor Relations Division in the regional office denying registration may be appealed by the applicant union to the Bureau within ten (10) days from receipt of notice thereof.

ART. 283. Additional Requirements for Federations or National Unions. Subject to Article 284, if the applicant for registration is a federation or a national union, it shall, in addition to the requirements of the preceding Articles, submit the following:

Proof of the affiliation of at least ten (10) locals or chapters, each of which must be a duly recognized collective bargaining agent in the establishment or industry in which it operates, supporting the registration of such applicant federation or national union;

The names and addresses of the companies where the locals or chapters operate and the list of all the members in each company involved.

ART. 284. Conditions for Registration of Federations or National Unions. — No federation or national union shall be registered to engage in any organizational activity in more than one industry in any area or region, and no federation or national union shall be registered to engage in any organizational activity in more than one industry all over the country.

The federation or national union which meets the requirements and conditions herein prescribed may organize and affiliate locals and chapters without registering such locals or chapters with the Bureau.

Locals or chapters shall have the same rights and privileges as if they were registered in the Bureau: Provided, That such federation or national union organizes such locals or chapters within its assigned organizational field of activity as may be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor.

The Bureau shall see to it that federations and national unions shall only organize locals and chapters within a specific industry or region.

ART. 285. Cancellation of Registration; Appeal. — The certificate of registration of any legitimate labor organization, whether national or local, shall be cancelled by the Bureau if it has reason to believe, after due hearing, that the said labor organization no longer meets one or more of the requirements herein prescribed.

The Bureau upon approval of this Code shall immediately institute cancellation proceedings and take such other steps as may be necessary to restructure all existing registered labor organizations in accordance with the objectives envisioned above.

ART. 286. Grounds for Cancellation of Union Registration. — The following shall constitute grounds for cancellation of union registration:

Misrepresentation, false statement or fraud in connection with the adoption or ratification of the constitution and by-laws or amendments thereto, the minutes of ratification, the list of members who took part in the ratification;

Failure to submit the documents mentioned in the preceding paragraph within thirty (30) days from adoption or ratification of the constitution and bylaws or amendments thereto;

Misrepresentation, false statement or fraud in connection with the election of officers, minutes of the election of officers, the list of voters, or failure to submit these documents together with the list of the newly elected/appointed officers and their postal addresses within thirty (30) days from election;

Failure to submit the annual financial report to the Bureau within thirty (30) days after the closing of every fiscal year and misrepresentation, false entries or fraud in the preparation of the financial report itself;

Acting as a labor contractor or engaging in the "cabo" system or otherwise engaging in any activity prohibited by law;

Entering into collective bargaining agreements which provide terms and conditions of employment below minimum standards established by law;

Asking for or accepting attorney's fees or negotiation fees from employers;

Checking off union dues, special assessments, or any other fees without duly signed individual authorizations of the members;

Failure to submit list of individual members to the Bureau once a year or whenever required by the Bureau; and

Failure to comply with requirements under Articles 283 and 284.

ART. 287. Equity of the Incumbent. — All existing federations and national unions which meet the qualifications of a legitimate labor organization and none of the grounds for cancellation shall continue to maintain their existing affiliates regardless of the nature of the industry and the location of the affiliates.

Incumbent affiliates of existing federations or national unions may disaffiliate only for the purpose of joining a federation or national union in the industry or region in which it properly belongs or for the purpose of operating as an independent labor group.

Chapter II

Rights and Conditions of Membership

ART. 288. Rights and Conditions of Membership in a Labor Organization. — The following are the rights and conditions of membership in a labor organization:

No arbitrary or excessive initiation fees shall be required of the members of a legitimate labor organization nor shall arbitrary, excessive or oppressive fine and forfeiture be imposed;

The members shall be entitled to full and detailed reports from their officers and representatives of all financial transactions as provided for in the constitution and bylaws of the organization; and

The members shall elect their officers by secret ballot at intervals of not more than three years. The secretary or any other responsible union officer shall furnish the Secretary of Labor with a list of the newly elected officers, together with the appointive officers or agents who are entrusted with the handling of funds within thirty (30) days after the election of officers or from the occurrence of any change in the list of officers of the labor organization;

The members shall determine by secret ballot, after due deliberation, any question of major policy affecting the entire membership of the organization, unless the nature of the organization or force majeure renders such secret balloting impractical, in which case the board of directors of the organization may make the decision in behalf of the general membership;

No labor organization shall knowingly admit as member or continue in membership any individual who belongs to a subversive organization or who is engaged directly or indirectly in any subversive activity;

No person who has been convicted of a crime involving moral turpitude shall be eligible for election as a union officer or for appointment to any position in the union;

No officer, agent or member of a labor organization shall collect any fees, dues, or other contributions in its behalf or make any disbursement of its moneys or funds unless he is duly authorized pursuant to its constitution and by-laws;

Every payment of fees, dues or other contributions by a member shall be evidenced by a receipt signed by the officer or agent making the collection and entered into the record of the organization to be kept and maintained for the for the purpose;

The funds of the organization shall not be applied for any purpose or object other than those expressly provided by its constitution and by-laws or those expressly of the members at a general meeting duly called for the authorized by written resolution adopted by the majority purpose;

Every expenditure of the funds of the organization shall be evidenced by a receipt from the person to whom the payment is made which shall state the date, place and purpose of such payment. Such receipts shall form part of the financial records of the organization.

The officers of any labor organization shall not be paid any compensation other that the salaries and expenses due to their positions as specifically provided for in its constitution and by-laws, or in a written resolution duly authorized by a majority of all the members at a general membership meeting duly called for the purpose. The minutes of the meeting and the list of participants and ballots cast shall be subject to inspection by the Secretary of Labor or his duly authorized representatives. Any irregularities in the approval of the resolutions shall be a ground for impeachment or expulsion from the organization.

The treasurer of any labor organization and every officer thereof who is responsible for the accounts of such organization or for the collection, management, disbursement, custody or control of the funds, moneys and other properties of the organization, shall render to the organization and to its members a true and correct account of all moneys received and paid by him since he assumed office or since the last date on which he rendered such account and of the balance remaining in his hands at the time of rendering such account, and of all bonds, securities, and other properties of the organization entrusted to his custody or under his control. The rendering of such account shall be made:

At least once a year within thirty (30) days after the close of its fiscal year.

At such other times as may be required by a resolution of the majority the members of the organization; and (3) Upon vacating his office.

The account shall be duly audited and verified by affidavit and copy thereof shall be furnished the Secretary of Labor.

The books of accounts and other records of the financial activities of any labor organization shall be opened to inspection by any officer or member thereof during office hours;

No special assessment or other extraordinary fees may be levied upon the members of a labor organization unless authorized by a written resolution of a majority of all the members at a general membership meeting duly called for the purpose. The secretary of the organization shall record the minutes of the meeting including the list of all members present, the votes cast, the purpose of the special assessment or fees and the recipient of such assessments or fees. The record shall lie attested to by the president;

No special assessments, attorney's fees, negotiation fees or any other extraordinary fees may be checked off from any amounts due to an employee without an individual written authorization duly signed by the employee. The authorization should specifically state the amount, purpose and beneficiary of the deduction; and

It shall be the duty of any labor organization and its officers to inform its members on the provisions of its constitution and bylaws, collective bargaining agreement, the prevailing labor relations system and all their rights and obligations under existing labor laws. For this purpose, registered labor organizations may assess reasonable dues to finance labor relations seminars and other labor education activities for the purpose.

Any violation of the above rights and conditions of membership shall be a ground for cancellation of union registration or expulsion of an officer from office, whichever is appropriate. At least 30 percent (30%) of all the members of a union or any member or members specifically concerned may report such violation to the Bureau. The Bureau shall have the power to hear and decide any reported violation and to mete the appropriate penalty. The decision of the Bureau shall be appealable only on question of law by certiorari to the Supreme Court.

Criminal and civil liabilities arising from violations of the above rights and conditions of membership shall continue to be under the jurisdiction of ordinary courts.

Chapter III

Rights of Legitimate Labor Organizations

ART. 289. Rights of Legitimate Labor Organizations. — A legitimate labor organization shall have the right:

To act or be certified to as the exclusive representative of all the employees in an appropriate collective bargaining unit for purposes of collective bargaining;

To own property, real and personal, for the use and benefit of the labor organization and its members;

To sue and be sued in its registered name; and

To undertake all other activities designed to benefit the organization and its members, including cooperative housing, welfare and other projects not contrary to law,

The incomes and properties of legitimate labor organizations shall be free from taxes, including gifts or donations they may receive from fraternal and similar organizations, local or foreign.

Title V

COVERAGE

ART. 290. Coverage and Employees' Right to Self-organization. — All persons employed in commercial, industrial, agricultural, religious, charitable, educational institutions, or enterprises, whether engaged for profit or not, shall have the right to self-organization and to form, join or assist labor organizations for purposes of collective bargaining.

ART. 291. Ineligibility of Security Personnel to Join Any Labor Organization. — Security guards and other personnel employed for the protection and security of the person, properties and premises of the employer shall not be eligible for membership in any labor organization.

ART. 292. Ineligibility of Managerial Officials to Join Any Labor Organization. — Managerial officials are not eligible to join, assist or form any labor organization

ART. 293. Non-abridgment of Right to Self organization on Religious Grounds. — Notwithstanding any provision of law to the contrary, the right to self-organization shall not be abridged on religious or any other similar grounds.

Title VI

UNFAIR LABOR PRACTICES

Chapter I

Unfair Labor Practices of Employers

ART. 294. Unfair Labor Practices of Employers. — It shall be unfair labor practice for an employer:

To interfere with, restrain or coerce employees in the exercise of their right to self-organization;

To require as a condition of employment that a person or an employee shall not join a labor organization or shall withdraw from one to which he belongs;

To contract out services or functions being performed by union members when such will interfere with, restrain or coerce employees in the exercise of their right to self-organization;

To initiate, dominate, assist or otherwise interfere with the formation or administration of any labor organization, including the giving of financial or other support to it;

To discriminate in regard to wages, hours of work, and other terms and conditions of employment in order to encourage or discourage membership in any labor organization. Nothing in this Code or in other laws shall stop the parties from requiring membership in a recognized collective bargaining agent as a condition for employment, except those employees who are already members of another union at the time of the signing of the collective bargaining agreement. Employees of an appropriate collective bargaining unit who are not members of the recognized collective bargaining agent may be assessed a reasonable fee equivalent to the dues and other fees paid by members of the recognized collective bargaining agent, except those employees who are already members of smother union at the time the collective bargaining agreement is signed;

To dismiss, discharge, or otherwise prejudice or discriminate against an employee for having given or being about to give testimony under this Code;

To violate the duty to bargain collectively as prescribed by this Code;

To pay negotiations or attorney's fees to the union or its officers or agents as part of the settlement of any issue in collective bargaining or any other dispute;

To violate or refuse to comply with voluntary arbitration awards or decisions relating to the implementation or interpretation of a collective bargaining agreement; and

Any violation of a collective bargaining agreement.

Chapter II

Unfair Labor Practices of Labor Organizations

ART. 295. Unfair Labor Practices of Labor Organizations. — It shall be unfair labor practice for a labor organization, its officers, agents or representatives:

To restrain or coerce employees in the exercise of their rights to self-organization. However, a labor organization shall have the right to prescribe its own rules with respect to the acquisition or retention of membership;

To cause or attempt to cause an employer to discriminate against an employee, including discrimination against an employee with respect to whom membership in such organization has been denied or to terminate an employee on any ground other than the usual terms and conditions under which membership or continuation of membership is made available to other members;

To violate the duty, or refuse, to bargain collectively with the employer, provided, it is the representative of the employees;

To cause or attempt to cause an employer to pay or deliver or agree to pay or deliver any money or oilier things of value, in the nature of an exaction for services which are not performed or not to be performed, including the demand for fee for union negotiations;

To ask for or accept negotiations or attorney's fees from employers as part of the settlement of any issue in collective bargaining or any other dispute;

To violate or refuse to comply with voluntary arbitration awards or decisions relating to the implementation or interpretation of a collective bargaining agreement; and

Violation of a collective bargaining agreement.

Chapter

III Concept

ART. 296. Concept of Unfair Labor Practice. — The concept of unfair labor practice is hereby modified. Henceforth it shall be considered merely as an administrative offense rather than a criminal offense. Unfair labor practice complaints shall, therefore, be processed like any ordinary labor disputes.

Title VII

COLLECTIVE BARGAINING AND ADMINISTRATION OF AGREEMENTS

ART. 297. Procedure of Collective Bargaining. —The following procedures shall be observed in collective bargaining:

When a party desires to negotiate an agreement, it shall serve a written notice upon the other with a statement of its proposals. The other party shall make a reply thereto not later than ten (10) days from receipt of such notice;

Should differences arise on the basis of such notice and reply, either party may request for a conference which shall begin not later than ten (10) days from the date of request;

If the dispute is not settled, the Bureau shall intervene upon request of either or both parties or at its own initiative and it shall be the duty of the parties to participate fully and promptly in the conciliation meetings the Bureau may call;

During the conciliation proceedings in the Bureau, the parties are prohibited from doing any act which may disrupt or impede the early settlement of the disputes;

The Bureau shall exert all efforts to settle disputes amicably and encourage the parties to submit their case to a voluntary arbitrator; and

If no amicable settlement is reached after exhausting all possibilities of conciliation, the Bureau shall certify the dispute to a Labor Arbiter for compulsory arbitration. The Labor Arbiter shall decide the case within forty-five (45) days from the first hearing.

ART. 298. Duty to Bargain Collectively in the Absence of Collective Bargaining Agreements. — In the absence of an agreement or other voluntary arrangement providing for a more expeditious manner of collective bargaining, it shall be the duty of the employer and the representatives of the employees to bargain collectively in accordance the provisions of this Code.

ART. 299. Meaning of Duty to Bargain Collectively. — The duty to bargain collectively means the performance of a mutual obligation to meet and convene promptly and expeditiously in good faith for the purpose of negotiating an agreement with respect to wages, hours of work and all other terms and conditions of employment including proposals for adjusting any grievances or questions arising under such agreement and executing a contract incorporating such agreements if requested by either party, but such duty does not compel any party to agree to a proposal or to make any concession.

ART. 300. Duty to Bargain Collectively When There Exists a Collective Bargaining Agreement. — When there exists a collective bargaining agreement, the duty to bargain collectively shall also mean that neither party shall terminate or modify such agreement during its lifetime. However, either party can serve a written notice to terminate or modify the agreement at least sixty (60) days prior to its expiration date. It shall be the duty of both parties to keep the status quo and to continue in full force and effect the terms and conditions of the existing agreement during the 60-day period and/or until a new agreement is reached by the parties.

ART. 301. Injunctions Prohibited. — No temporary or permanent injunction or restraining order in any case involving or growing out of labor disputes shall be issued by any court or other entity.

ART. 302. Appeal. — Decisions, awards, or orders of the Labor Arbiters or compulsory arbitrators are final and executory unless appealed to the Commission by any or both of the parties within ten (10) days from receipt of such awards, orders, or decisions. Such appeal may be entertained only on any of the following grounds:

If there is prima facie evidence of grave abuse of discretion on the part of the Labor Arbiter or compulsory arbitrator;

If the decision, order, or award was secured through fraud or coercion, including graft and corruption; and

If made purely on question of law.

To discourage frivolous or dilatory appeals, the Commission or the Labor Arbiters shall impose reasonable penalty, including fines or censure, upon the erring parties.

In all cases, the appellant shall furnish a copy of the memorandum of appeal to the other party who shall file an answer not later than ten (10) days from receipt thereof.

The Commission shall decide all cases within twenty (20) working days from receipt of the answer of the appellee; otherwise, the appealed decision or award shall be considered affirmed.

The decision of the Commission shall be final and unappealable, except in the following cases:

By certiorari to the Supreme Court on question of law; and

Where the case involves national interest, in which case it may be appealed to the President of the Philippines upon recommendation of the Secretary of Labor within 10 days from receipt of such decision by the appealing party.

ART. 303. Exclusive Bargaining Representative. — The labor organization designated or selected by the majority of the employees in an appropriate collective bargaining unit shall be the exclusive representative of the employees in such unit for the purpose of collective bargaining. However, an individual employee or group of employees shall have the right at any time to present grievances to their employer.

ART. 304. Procedure Governing Representation Issues. — When a question concerning the representation of employees is submitted to it, the Bureau shall hear and decide such controversy and certify to the parties in writing the name of the labor organization that has been designated or selected as the appropriate bargaining agent. In such cases, the Bureau shall provide for a speedy and appropriate hearing upon due notice and if there is any reasonable doubt as to whom the employees have chosen as their representative for the purpose of collective bargaining, the Bureau shall order a secret ballot election to be conducted by the Bureau to ascertain who is freely chosen representative of the employees concerned, under such rules and regulations as the Bureau may prescribe, at which balloting representatives of contending parties shall have the right to attend as inspectors.

No certification election issue shall be entertained by the Bureau in any collective bargaining unit if a certified collective bargaining agreement exists between the employer and a legitimate labor organization, except within sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of the life of such certified collective bargaining agreement. The organization receiving the majority of the votes cast in such election shall be certified by the Bureau as the exclusive bargaining representative of the employees concerned.

ART. 305. Requisites for Certification Election. — Any petition for certification election filed by any legitimate labor organization shall be supported by the written consent of at least 30% of all the employees in the bargaining unit. Upon receipt and verification of such petition, it shall be mandatory for the Bureau to conduct a certification election for the purpose of determining the representative of the employees in the appropriate bargaining unit and certify the winner as the exclusive collective bargaining representative of all the employees in the unit.

ART. 306. When an Employer May File a Petition. — When requested to bargain collectively, an employer may petition the Bureau for an election. If there is no existing certified collective bargaining agreement in the unit, the Bureau shall, after hearing, order a certification election.

All certification cases shall be decided within twenty (20) working days.

The Bureau shall conduct a certification election within twenty (20) days in accordance with the rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Labor.

ART. 307. Appeal on Certification Election Orders. - Any party to an election may appeal the order or results of the election to the Bureau on the ground that the rules and regulations or parts thereof established by the Secretary of Labor for the conduct of the election have been violated. Such appeal shall be decided within fifteen (15) working days. The decision of the Bureau shall be final and executory, except on question of law by certiorari to the Supreme Court.

ART. 308. Administration of Agreements. - The parties to a collective bargaining shall include in their agreement provisions to ensure mutual observance of the terms and conditions of the agreement and to establish a machinery for the adjustment of grievances.

ART. 309. Grievance Machinery. - All disputes, grievances or matters arising from the implementation or interpretation of a collective bargaining agreement shall be threshed out in accordance with the grievance procedure provided by such agreement.

ART. 310. Voluntary Arbitration. — Disputes, grievances or matters not settled through the grievance procedure shall be referred to and decided or settled through the prescribed voluntary arbitration procedure in the collective bargaining agreement.

Every collective bargaining agreement shall designate in advance an arbitrator or panel of arbitrators or include a provision making the selection of such arbitrator or panel of arbitrators definite and certain when the need arises. Such arbitrator or panel of arbitrators shall have exclusive and original jurisdiction to settle or decide all disputes, grievances or matters arising from the implementation or interpretation of a collective bargaining agreement after going through the grievance procedure. The Labor Arbiter or the Bureau shall not entertain such disputes, grievances or matters.

Voluntary arbitration awards or decisions shall be final, unappealable and executory.

Title VIII

SPECIAL PROVISIONS

ART. 311. Study of Labor-Management Relations. — The Secretary of Labor shall have the power and it shall be his duty to inquire into:

The existing relations between employers and employees in the Philippines;

The growth of associations of employees and the effect of such associations upon employer-employee relations;

The extent and results of the methods of collective bargaining in the determination of terms and conditions of employment;

The methods which have been tried by employers and associations of employees for maintaining mutually satisfactory relations;

Desirable industrial practices which have been developed through collective bargaining and other voluntary arrangements;

The possible ways of increasing the usefulness and efficiency of collective bargaining for settling differences;

The possibilities for the adoption of practical and effective methods of labor-management cooperation;

Any other aspects of employer-employee relations concerning the promotion of harmony and understanding between the parties; and

The relevance or labor laws and labor relations to national development.

The Secretary of Labor shall also inquire into the causes of industrial unrest and take all the necessary steps within his power as may be prescribed by law to alleviate the same, and shall from time to time recommend the enactment of such remedial legislation as in his judgment may be desirable for the maintenance and promotion of industrial peace.

ART. 312. Visitorial Power. — The Secretary of Labor or his duly authorized representative is hereby empowered to inquire, from time to time, into the financial activities of legitimate labor organizations and to examine their books of accounts and other records to determine compliance or non-compliance with the law and to prosecute any violations of the law and the union constitution and by-laws.

ART. 313. Tri-partite Conferences. — The Secretary of Labor may call from time to time a national tri-partite conference of representatives of employers, workers and government for the consideration and adoption of voluntary codes of principles designed to promote industrial peace based on social justice and to align labor-management relations with established priorities in economic and social development.

The Secretary of Labor is also authorized to call from time to time a conference of representatives of employers, labor organizations and government in any industry or region for the same purpose.

In calling a national or industrial or regional conference, the Secretary of Labor is directed to act in consultation with representatives of employers' and workers' organizations concerned.

ART. 314, Government Employees. — The terms and conditions of employment of all government employees, of government-owned and controlled-corporations, shall be governed by the Civil Service Law, rules and regulations. Their salaries shall be standardized by the National Assembly as provided for in the New Constitution. However, there shall be no reduction of existing wages, benefits and other terms and conditions of employment being enjoyed by them at the time of the adoption of this Code.

ART. 315. Miscellaneous Provisions. — (a) Pending the restoration of the right to strike and the right to lockout, all strike funds are hereby transformed into labor research and education funds. The collection of strike contributions is hereby prohibited. However, all unions are authorized to collect reasonable contributions for their labor education and research funds.

No employer may shutdown his establishment or dismiss or terminate the service of regular employees with at least one year of service without a previous written clearance from the Secretary of Labor.

Any employee whose length of service is more than six (6) months whether employed for a definite period or not, and regardless of whether the service is continuous or broken, shall be considered as a regular employee for the purpose of membership in any legitimate labor organization.

ART. 316. Enforcement of Decisions, Orders and Awards. — To ensure compliance with its decisions, orders and awards and those of compulsory or voluntary arbitrators, the Commission may take any measure under existing laws, decrees, and general orders as may be necessary, including the imposition of administrative fines which shall not be less than P500 nor more than P10,000.00

BOOK VI

POST EMPLOYMENT

Chapter I

Termination of Employment

ART. 317. Coverage. —The provisions of this Chapter shall apply to all establishments or undertakings, whether for profit or not, in cases of employment without a definite period.

ART. 318. Security of Tenure. — In cases of employment without a definite period the employer shall not terminate the services of an employee except for a just cause or when authorized by this Chapter. An employee who is unjustly dismissed from work shall be entitled to reinstatement without loss of seniority rights and to his back wages computed from the time his compensation was withheld from him up to the time of his reinstatement.

ART. 319. Employment Without a Fixed Period. — An employment shall be deemed to be without a definite period for purposes of this Chapter where the employee has been engaged to perform activities which are usually necessary or desirable in the usual business or trade of the employer, except where the employment has been fixed for a specific project or undertaking the completion or termination of which has been determined at the time of the engagement of the employee or where the work or service to be performed is seasonal in nature and the employment is for the duration of the season.

ART. 320. Probationary and Fixed-Period Employment. — The termination of employment of probationary employees and those employed with a fixed period shall be subject to such regulations as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe to prevent the circumvention of the right of the employees to be secured in their employment as provided herein.

ART. 321. Termination by Employer. — An employer may terminate an employment without a definite period for any of the following just causes:

The closing or cessation of operation of the establishment or enterprise, or where the employer has to reduce his work force by more than one-half due to serious business reverses, unless the closing is for the purpose of circumventing the provisions of this Chapter;

Serious misconduct or willful disobedience by the employee of the orders of his employer or representative in connection with his work;

Gross and habitual neglect by the employee of his duties;

Fraud or willful breach by the employee of the trust reposed in him by his employer or representative;

Commission of a crime or offense by the employee against the person of his employer or any immediate member of his family or representative; and

Other causes analogous to the foregoing.

ART. 322. Reduction of Personnel. - The termination of employment of any employee due to the installation of labor-saving devices, redundancy, retrenchment to prevent losses, and other similar causes, shall entitle the employee affected thereby to separation pay. In case of termination due to the installation of labor-saving devices or redundancy, the separation pay shall be equivalent to one (1) month pay or to at least one-half (1/2) month pay for every year of service, whichever is higher. In case of retrenchment to prevent losses and other similar causes, the separation pay shall be equivalent to one (1) month pay or at least one-half (1/2) month pay for every year of service, whichever is higher. A fraction of at least six (6) months shall be considered one (1) whole year.

ART. 323. Disease as Ground for Termination. —An employer may terminate the services of an employee who has been found to he suffering from any disease and whose continued employment is prohibited by law or is prejudicial to his health as well as the health of his co-employees: Provided, That he is paid separation pay equivalent at least to one (1) month salary or to one-half (1/2) month salary for every year of service, whichever is greater, a fraction of at least six (6) months being considered us-one (1) whole year.

ART. 324. Termination by Employee. — (a) An employee may terminate without just cause the employee-employer relationship by serving a written notice on the employer at least one (1) month in advance. The employer upon whom no such notice was served may hold the employee liable for damages.

An employee may put an end to the relationship without serving any notice on the employer for any of the following just causes:

Serious insult by the employer or his representative on the honor and person of the employee;

Inhuman and unbearable treatment accorded the employee by the employer or his representative;

Commission of a crime or offense by the employer or his representative against the person of the employee or any of the immediate members of his family; and

Other causes analogous to any of the foregoing.

ART. 325. When Employment Not Deemed Terminated. — The bona fide suspension of the operation of a business or undertaking for a period not exceeding six (6) months, or the fulfillment by the employee of a military or civic duty shall not terminate employment. In all such cases, the employer shall reinstate the employee to his former position without loss of seniority rights if he indicates his desire to resume his work not later than one (1) month from the resumption of operations of his employer or from his relief from the military or civic duty.

Chapter II

Retirement from the Service

ART. 326. Retirement. — Any employee may be retired upon reaching the retirement age established in the collective bargaining agreement or other applicable employment contract.

In case of retirement, the employee shall be entitled to receive such retirement benefits as he may have earned under existing laws and any collective bargaining or other agreement.

BOOK VII

PENAL PROVISIONS, PRESCRIPTIONS, TRANSITORY AND FINAL PROVISIONS

Chapter I

Penal Provisions and Liabilities

ART. 327. Penalties. — Any violation of the provisions of this Code or of the rules and regulations issued thereunder shall be punished with a fine of not less than P1,000 nor more than P10,000 and/or imprisonment for the duration of the violation or non-compliance or until such time that rectification of the violation has been made, at the direction of the appropriate authority.

ART. 328. Who are Liable When Committed by Other Than a Natural Person. — If the offense is committed by a corporation, trust, firm, partnership, association or any other entity, the manager or, in his default, the person acting as such when the offense was committed, shall be responsible.

Chapter II

Prescription of Offenses and Claims

ART. 329. Offenses. — Offenses penalized under this Code and the rules and regulations issued pursuant thereto shall prescribe in three (3) years.

All unfair labor practices arising from Book V shall be filed with the appropriate agency within one (1) year from accrual of such unfair labor practice; otherwise, they shall be forever barred.

ART. 330. Money Claims. — Civil actions involving nonpayment or underpayment of wages, overtime compensation, separation pay, maternity benefits, and other money claims and benefits arising from employer-employee relations, may be commenced within three (3) years from the time the cause of action accrued. Such actions shall be forever barred unless commenced within such period.

ART. 331. Institution of Civil Actions. — Civil actions involving claims specified in the immediately preceding Article may be brought before the appropriate court or entity independently of the criminal action that may be instituted in the proper courts.

Chapter III

Transitory and Final Provisions

ART. 332. Application of Law Enacted Prior to this Code. — All actions or claims accruing prior to the effectivity of this Code shall be determined in accordance with the laws, rules and regulations in force at the time of their accrual.

ART. 333. Secretary of Labor to Initiate Integration of Maternity Leave Benefits. — Within six (6) months after this Code takes effect, the Secretary of Labor shall initiate such measures as may be necessary for the integration of maternity leave benefits into the Social Security System in the case of private employment and the Government Service Insurance System in the case of public employment.

ART. 334. Funding of the Overseas Employment Development Board and the National Seamen Board. — The Overseas Employment Development Board and the National Seamen Board referred to in Articles 16 and 20, respectively, of this Code shall initially be funded out of the unprogrammed fund of the Department of Labor and the National Manpower and Youth Council.

ART. 335. Abolition of the Bureau of Workmen's Compensation. — The present Bureau of Workmen's Compensation, the Workmen's Compensation Commission, and the Workmen's Compensation Units in the Department of Labor arc hereby abolished and all officials and personnel thereof, as may be necessary and qualified, shall be transferred to and absorbed by the Commission, the GSIS and the SSS, subject to Presidential Decree No. G, Letters of Instruction Nos. 14 and 14-A and the Civil Service Law and rules.

ART. 336. Continuation of Insurance Policies and Indemnity Bonds. — All workmen's compensation insurance policies and indemnity bonds for self-insured employers existing upon the effectivity of this Code shall remain in force and effect until the expiration dates of such policies or the lapse of the period of such bonds, as the case may be, but in no case beyond December 31, 1974. Claims may be filed against the insurance carriers and/or self-insured employers for causes of action which accrued during the existence of said policies or authority to self-insure.

ART. 337. Abolition of the Court of Industrial Relations and the National Labor Relations Commission. — The Court of Industrial Relations and the National Labor Relations Commission established under Presidential Decree No. 21 are hereby abolished. All unexpended funds, properties, equipment and records of the Court of Industrial Relations, and such of its personnel as may be necessary, are hereby transferred to the Commission and to its regional branches. All unexpended funds, properties, and equipment of the National Labor Relations Commission established under Presidential Decree No. 21 are transferred to the Bureau of Labor Relations. Personnel not absorbed by or transferred to the Commission shall enjoy benefits granted under existing laws.

ART. 338. Transfer of Labor Relations Cases. — All cases pending before the Court of Industrial Relations and the National Labor Relations Commission established under Presidential Decree No. 21 at the time of the passage of this Code should be transferred to and processed by the National Labor Relations Commission created under this Code in accordance with the procedure laid down herein.

ART. 339. Personnel Whose Services are Terminated. — Personnel of agencies or any of their subordinate units whose services are terminated as a result of the implementation of this Code shall enjoy the rights and protection provided in Sections 5 and 6 of Republic Act Numbered Fifty-four Hundred Thirty-five and such other pertinent laws, rules and regulations. In any case, no layoff shall be effected until funds to cover the gratuity and/or retirement benefits of those laid off are duly certified as available.

ART. 340. Severability Provisions. — If any provision or part of this Code, or the application thereof to any person or circumstance, is held invalid, the remainder of this Code, or the application of such provision or part to other persons or circumstances, shall not be affected thereby.

ART. 341. Repealing Clause. — All provisions of existing laws, orders, decrees, rules and regulations inconsistent herewith are hereby repealed.

Done in the City of Manila, this 1st day of May, in the year of Our Lord, nineteen hundred and seventy-four.

      (Sgd.) FERDINAND E. MARCOS

  President

  Republic of the Philippines

        By the President:        

(Sgd.) ALEJANDRO MELCHOR

  Executive Secretary